JP7430336B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "slot machines").

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, a gaming machine is known in which a special game is played in which a large amount of prizes can be won when a person wins a prize.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball enters the starting slot. When a game ball enters the starting hole, a determination process is performed to determine whether the game is a hit or not. At this time, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time on a predetermined display. Then, when a predetermined variable time period has elapsed, the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that the player has won a prize, and the opening/closing member of the grand prize opening is operated, thereby giving the player a large amount of money. To provide a special game in which it is possible to win prizes.

JP 2017-006393 Publication

With such conventional gaming machines , there is a concern that interest in gaming may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Means 1 : Judgment means for making a judgment ;
a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained in the determination by the determining means ;
and a simulated image display means capable of displaying a simulated image of the operation target when acceptance of the operation by the player is permitted;
A gaming machine that, when an operation by a player is accepted, can display a post-acceptance display according to the acceptance,
The post-reception display can be displayed as any one of a plurality of post-reception displays including a first post-reception display and a second post-reception display,
When the post-reception display is displayed as the second post-reception display, if a specific condition is met while the second post- reception display is displayed, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the The second post-reception display may be hidden , but if the post-reception display is displayed as the first post-reception display, the second post-reception display may be hidden while the first post-reception display is displayed. Even if the condition is met, the first post-reception display will not be hidden when the specific condition is met,
If the first post-reception display is not turned into a hidden state when the specific condition is met, the production sound of the specific type will not be newly output when the specific condition is met. However, if the second post-acceptance display is hidden when the specific condition is met, the production sound of the specific type is newly output when the specific condition is met. There are cases where the production sound of the specific type is not newly output.
moreover,
In a state where acceptance of the operation regarding the second post-acceptance display is permitted, the sample image display can be displayed;
In a state in which acceptance of operations regarding the second post-acceptance display is permitted, operations regarding the second post-acceptance display are not accepted and the second post-acceptance display is not displayed. When the specific condition is met, the sample image display is set to a non-display state using the fulfillment of the specific condition as a trigger;
moreover,
The sample image display that can be displayed in a state in which acceptance of an operation regarding the second post-acceptance display is permitted is performed after the second acceptance when an operation regarding the second post-acceptance display is accepted. The display state can be maintained even after the display is displayed, and when the specific condition is satisfied while the sample image display and the second reception display are both in the display state, the display state is maintained even after the display is displayed. When a specific condition is met, both the sample image display and the second post-reception display are set to a hidden state,
moreover,
The sample image display may be hidden when the specific condition is satisfied, or may be hidden due to a condition different from the specific condition,
When the sample image display is turned into a non-display state triggered by the fulfillment of the specific condition, the production sound of the specific type is newly outputted, and the production sound of the specific type is newly output. Even if the output does not start, the disappearing effect display is not displayed when hiding the sample image display.
When the model image display is hidden due to a condition different from the specific condition, the case where the disappearance effect display is displayed when the sample image display is hidden, and the case where the disappearance effect display is There are both cases where the display is not displayed and cases where it is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this invention, a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted; (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a); be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the main body side upper hinge member. It is an explanatory view showing the action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. 20 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an explanatory view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). 34(a) is a sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 34(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit in FIG. 37; (a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows the part that is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, button frame, etc. by cutting out a part of the operation button. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion that is to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the production operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. It is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from behind. 57 is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to a connection terminal board for a game ball lending device, which relays electrical connections between the payout control board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board, which constitute the main board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control section. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control section. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. It is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection failure determination process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second starting port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbols and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). 12 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of performance patterns (fluctuation performance) that is referred to in the performance symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. 120 is a diagram showing the notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for ending notification (cancellation conditions) for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 119. FIG. It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit. It is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of performance patterns in a performance mode in which a sword drawing performance can be executed, (A) showing an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword drawing preparation transition performance according to the type of fluctuation pattern, and (B) ) An example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform battōhon effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword ornament when the aura member is provided on the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and shows (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathed state, and (C) the second unsheathed state. Indicates the unsheathed state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation|movement of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword unsheathing operation of the sword ornament when an aura member is provided in the sheath, and shows (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first sword unsheathed state, and (C) a second sword unsheathed state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation|movement of an aura member. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for a pseudo continuous performance. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board, and during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board. , is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board, and during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board. , is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach production, the pre-operation suggestion production of the second suggestion pattern is executed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a transition example. Even though the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration does not become operational, the operation button becomes operational, and then the sword decoration becomes operational. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion performance of a pattern. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated image. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying an integrated image from the start of the validity period until the end of the validity period. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying an integrated image from the start of the validity period until the end of the validity period. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance progress when the 2nd valid period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification regarding the performance progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of an effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation regarding an integrated image. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated image. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of presentation during a valid period in which an integrated image is displayed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of presentation during a valid period in which an integrated image is displayed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of presentation during a valid period in which an integrated image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the content of presentation when the second acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the performance content when the 1st acceptance permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation content when the 2nd reception permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of presentation when the 1st reception permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the performance content when the 4th acceptance permission state generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows an example of the performance content when the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the third reception period (third reception presentation) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st reception period (1st reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st reception period (1st reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (2nd reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd reception period (2nd reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th reception period (4th reception performance) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th reception period (4th reception performance) occurs. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. This is a modification example of the performance related to the reception period. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when reception period B (reception presentation B) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when a reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. This is a table showing an example of settings related to occurrence conditions of acceptance periods A to D. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which reception period A (reception performance A) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which reception period B (reception performance B) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the reception period C (reception performance C) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the reception period D (reception performance D) occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the fluctuation pattern in which the reception period E (reception performance E) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance within the reception period E. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1B reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3B reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd C reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd C reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2D reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd D reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd D reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st E acceptance period. It is a figure explaining reception period related periodicity display in the 1E reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd E acceptance period. It is a figure explaining reception period related periodicity display in the 2nd E reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd E acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th E acceptance period. It is a figure explaining reception period related periodicity display in the 4th E reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th E reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 5th E acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th E acceptance period. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification of special image display with periodic changes. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a modification of special image display with periodic changes. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a modification of special image display with periodic changes. It is a figure which shows the basic example of a performance when a multiple operation permissible period occurs. It is a figure which shows the basic example of a performance when a multiple operation permissible period occurs. It is a figure which shows the basic example of a performance when a multiple operation permissible period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1F reception period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 1F reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st F reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd F reception period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 2nd F acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd F reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 2nd F reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd F reception period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 3rd F acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 3rd F reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 3rd F reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 5th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 7th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 7th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 8th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 8th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 9th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 9th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 10th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 10th F reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 10th F reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 10th F reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 11th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 11th F reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 11th F reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 11th F reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 12th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 12th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 13th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 13th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 14th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 14th F reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 14th F reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 14th F reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 15th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 15th F reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 15th F reception period occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the 15th F reception period according to the first modification. It is a time chart showing an example of the 15th F reception period according to the first modification. It is a time chart showing an example of the 15th F reception period according to the first modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 15th F reception period occurs according to the first modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 15th F reception period occurs according to the first modification. It is a time chart showing an example of the 15th F reception period according to the second modification. It is a time chart showing an example of the 15th F reception period according to the second modification. It is a time chart showing an example of the 15th F reception period according to the second modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 15th F reception period occurs according to the second modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 15th F reception period occurs according to the second modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 16th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 16th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 16th F reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 16th F reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 16th F reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 17th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 17th F reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 17th F reception period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 17th F reception period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 17th F reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 12th F reception period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 12th F reception period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 13th F acceptance period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 13th F acceptance period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 16th F acceptance period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 16th F acceptance period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 16th F acceptance period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 17th F reception period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 17th F reception period concerning a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 17th F reception period concerning a modification. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the first G acceptance permission state. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the first G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 1st G acceptance permission state occurs. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example of a first G reception permission state according to a modification. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example of a first G reception permission state according to a modification. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example of a first G reception permission state according to a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 1st G reception permissible state occurs according to a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 1st G reception permissible state occurs according to a modification. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the second G acceptance permission state. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the second G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 2nd G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd G acceptance permission state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 3rd G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th G acceptance permission state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th G reception permission state occurs. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the 5th G acceptance permission state. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the 5th G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 5th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th G acceptance permission state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 6th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the 6th G acceptance permission state concerning a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 6th G acceptance permission state occurs according to a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 6th G acceptance permission state occurs according to a modification. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 7th G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 7th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 7th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 8th G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 8th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 8th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 9th G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 9th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 9th G acceptance permission state occurs. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the 10th G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 10th G reception permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 10th G reception permission state occurs. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the 11th G acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 11th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 11th G acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the 11th G acceptance permission state concerning a modification.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling it into the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. Figure 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below the handle unit 111 and can be operated by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 320 is attached to the lower front part of the tray unit 320, and a tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the bottom of the tray unit 320, and it is attached to the center of the tray unit 320. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory production, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. A door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a ball launcher 680 is attached to the right side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. 4, a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 along the upper side and left side in front view and that pays out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the rear lower part of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and also guides game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 according to the storage state of the game balls. The upper full bulb path unit 850 is configured to discharge from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full bulb discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full bulb path unit 850 is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guide path 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a game ball discharged from the full discharge port 850e is guided forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path 862 guiding to the bulb socket 274 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power board box 930 installed on the right side in front view at the rear side of the board unit base 910 and housing a power board inside, and a power board box 930 installed on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 that accommodates an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and interface control board box 940 and that controls the payout of game balls is housed inside. and a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 with game balls stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 fires the game balls with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of game balls, the game ball in the upper tray 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 16(a). It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces facing outward in the left and right direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are on the same surface. It is being

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper left end side upper part of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left of the left-right center; A flat right sliding member 82 is attached to a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 also has an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 to be described later is locked. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside this engagement notch 11, upper and lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this mounting step portion 12 .

[2-2. Bottom frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10. It is longer than the front and back width of the The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction, at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In this engagement notch 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is attached.

The lower frame member 20 also includes front end notches 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 have a constant cross-sectional shape and extend vertically, and are formed of extruded shapes of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on the outer sides in the left-right direction from a position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to near the rear end. It includes recessed portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recessed portions 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 and attached.

Furthermore, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These grooves make it easier for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 to island facilities such as game halls. The design of the exterior of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate components]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension part 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension part 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is cut out and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically and has a size that allows a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51. A standing wall portion 54 extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51, and a standing wall portion 54 bulges forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 with the front surface facing upward. It is provided with a return part 55 which is inclined so as to go toward the rear as it goes toward the front.

The curtain plate member 50 is arranged such that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 also includes a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. A section 57 is provided. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, this curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on its front surface. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Moreover, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing part 61 that is horizontally extended and has a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate-shaped upper fixing part 61 that extends forward from the front end of the upper fixing part 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the front extending part 62 toward the left and right center of the front extending part 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing part 61 in a plan view. A flat horizontal fixing part 64 extends downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing part extends downward from the end side of the front extension part 62 from the left end to the front end to the area where the bearing groove 63 opens. A flat hanging part 65 that is continuous with the part 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b) etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the upper fixing part 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step part 12 of the upper frame member 10, and is fixed with screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends further forward than the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

This outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to rotate the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66a that extends back and forth with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operating portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then diagonally to the left front, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 using attachment screws 67 .

The lock member 66 is attached through the attachment hole 66d at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is on the rear side of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. This locking member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the attachment hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a to accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

This lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic part 66c by operating the operating part 66b. By operating the operating portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retreated from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, and a portion extending upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 71. A rising flat plate-like rising part 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 71, and penetrating the horizontal part 71 vertically, allowing only one game ball to pass through. A discharge hole 74 of the same size is provided. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with the upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the curtain reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that pass through the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 using screws (not shown). This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is constructed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (ejected) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that falls between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 will fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the liquid rolls toward the rear where the gap is wide, and the liquid can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent them from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for game balls to stay in the lower hinge member 70 portion.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing part 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing part 86, and a horizontal fixing part 86. A flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing part 88 extends downward from the same side as the part from which the upper lateral fixing part 87 in 86 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing part 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing part 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing part 88 extends from both front and back sides of the upper lateral fixing part 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart from each other in the front and rear. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper-lateral fixing parts 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the ends of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are screwed into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing part 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing part 86, and further than the horizontal fixing part 86 of the upper horizontal fixing part 87. A lower horizontal fixing part 88 extends below the horizontal fixing part 86 from the lower end of the rearwardly projecting part. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that projects from the rear end of the upper horizontal securing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal securing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and lateral fixing parts 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces of the lower frame member 20 in the left and right direction, respectively. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the locking member 66 on the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Refer to and explain. FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member on the main body frame side of the main body frame is removed from the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65. Therefore, the lock body 66a partially closes the bent bearing groove 63, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a is The right side of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging part 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging part 65, and they are in contact with each other). In the normal pivoting state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in an oblique direction and are opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal pivoting state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Note that, since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. There is. In addition, in the illustration, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the attachment hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied with an acting force F in a direction in which it comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutting portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the circular arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed toward the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). , the moment that rotates the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is connected to the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the side surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal pivoting state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic part 66c of the lock member 66, and the elastic part 66c is integrally formed with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Note that even if the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right due to excessive force, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a will come into contact with the hanging portion 65 and the lock body 66a will not move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extending portion 62.

Note that even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc shape, the lock member 66 may be placed at a position where no rotational moment is generated due to the action of the component force F1 described above, or when the front end portion of the lock member 66 is directed toward the outside of the front extension portion 62. By locating the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated to rotate the locking member 66, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only comes into contact with the hanging portion 65, so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62.

When supporting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 in the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622. When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic part 66c. The locking member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a that had closed the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic part 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space in front of the front end of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from inside the bearing groove 63, operate the operating part 66b of the lock member 66, rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and then remove the elastic part. The lock body 66a is retreated from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of the lock body 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
A crime prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and ball chewing prevention for preventing game balls from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the lower outer frame hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to be placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the top surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

In addition, since the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a barbed portion 55 extending forward, if an unauthorized tool that has come into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 bends upward, the barred portion 55 will cause the tip of the unauthorized tool to bend. Since it is possible to fold back further forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and unauthorized acts can be carried out through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 is provided with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal part 71), the game ball on the horizontal part 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal part 71 due to the presence of the standing wall part 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50 include a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass, and a left discharge hole 52. , and the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal part 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 etc., and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between the balls.

Therefore, if the game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the area around the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not close normally and the outer frame 2 may It is possible to prevent a gap from being created between the main body frame 4 and the use of the gap to commit fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 19. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29, 30, etc., the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular frame-like external shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300 that is attached to the handle unit 300, the pan unit 320 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the production operation unit 400 that is attached to the center of the pan unit 320, and the door frame base unit that is attached to the upper side of the pan unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for sending the game balls to the ball firing device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball sending device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270 receives the game balls that are ejected and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower tray 322.

Although the details will be described later, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to move the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is possible to drive the ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a certain force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through hole 111, and the front side bulges forward, although the details will be described later. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 includes an upper tray 321 that stores game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 320 that is disposed below the upper tray 321 and stores game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and a ball lending machine within the range of cash or prepaid card balance inserted into the ball rental machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card minus the amount of game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball rental/return display section 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., a performance selection left button 331 and a performance selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting a performance, and a display section 330 in the lower tray 322 A lower tray ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the tray unit 320 is provided.

The production operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and presents a production image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details will be described later, this production operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side production that is arranged within the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a production image. A display device 460 is provided.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the tray unit 320, and It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. In the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is used to decorate the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart from each other on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. In the door frame top unit 570, the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 320 to which the production operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the front left outside of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 has a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating the front and back. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and supporting the main body frame 4. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 which are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160, which is attached to the left side of the view and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190, which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for use.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the front side of the door frame base 110 for attaching the handle unit 300, and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental and return display section 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 is provided with a through hole 111 that penetrates the door frame base 110 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and the handle mounting seat surface 112 and the through hole 111. A cylinder mounting part 113 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached to the cylinder mounting part 113 . The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted passes through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 from front to back on the left side when viewed from the front, so that the entry port 251a and the ball extraction port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 115 for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 110 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage hole 116 for the lower plate, which is inserted into the door frame base 110, and an upper hole that penetrates back and forth adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A plate passage opening 117 , a glass unit mounting part 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110 . It is provided with a speaker insertion opening 119 that penetrates back and forth at the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31, 33, and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a middle reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front; and a right reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front. It includes a metal plate 134 and a locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of an opening/closing cylinder unit 210, which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by an upper reinforcing metal sheet 131, a middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133, a right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by suitably bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a formed in the door frame base 110 at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 and penetrating back and forth.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, This location increases strength and rigidity, and prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wire and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of vertically spaced protruding pieces 141a, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 is attached at a position between the flange member 143 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. is inserted through the lock spring 144 and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and has a shape in side view that is open to the front. It is formed into a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes higher than the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts against the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and its upper end is in contact with the collar member 143, and its lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the collar member 143. .

In the door frame upper hinge member 140, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The entire upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 does not allow the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 to be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 or pulled out from below. I can do it. Thereby, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is , can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thereby, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can hingely rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protrudes downward from near the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in side view. is formed into a substantially L-shape. This door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is shaped like a truncated cone that narrows downward. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is a door that extends vertically from a height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. Frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decoration which extends vertically from the height of the lower side of door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of upper plate passage hole 117. A substrate 162 is provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are each equipped with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface that can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, when the door frame 3 is assembled. By emitting light as appropriate, the left unit decorative lens member of the left side unit 530 of the door frame can be decorated with light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting parts]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 31(b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably attach the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped base 171 that protrudes from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 172.

The glass unit attachment members 170 are each rotatably attached to a portion of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protrusion 172 is positioned further outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit attachment part 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding part 172 attaches to the glass. It comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190, restricting rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the glass unit attachment member 170 has a protrusion 172 protruding from a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located within the protrusion 172. . From this, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the protrusion 172 is stably protruded downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protrusion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire body will not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on rearward movement of the glass unit 190 will not be naturally released. do not have.

In addition, when removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, rotate the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protruding part 172 protrudes upward from the base part 171, and the protruding part 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181 from the rear end of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 , and a plurality of flange portions ( 182 ) that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 . In this example, the cylindrical portion 181 includes three projecting rims 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side within the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side within the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 180, the base 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical part 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange part 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the slanted handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical part The handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state, with the axis line of the handle unit 300 being tilted so as to extend toward the right front.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that it can be seen from the front to the rear. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner circumference of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 118, and a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and whose outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to the glass plate 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat plate form from a position below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that projects downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can come into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is assembled by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat main body part 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 201, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 are provided.

The main body part 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes further downward than the lower end of the glass unit 190 when it is attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body portion 201 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball fired by the ball firing device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is kept inside the game area 5a. It does not impede hitting the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear protruding piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening/closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends back and forth, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and that rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. 700, and a cylinder attachment plate 213 for attaching the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a.If the cylinder lock 211 is a corresponding key, it can be rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches 212a which are cut out. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape protruding forward in a plan view. To be more specific, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-like front plate part 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate parts 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate part 213a in a flat plate-shape. and a pair of attachment plate parts 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from each other from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 passes through the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a position approximately at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is such that the left side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the right side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder attachment sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate part 213a and a pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in the box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the production operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34(b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. Moreover, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 39(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and can also present an effect image to the player. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent center side excluding the outer periphery, and includes an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and a performance operation unit that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is a plate unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 that is attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 that is arranged behind the operation button 410 and can decorate the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light, and a frame. A base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has an operation button 410 and a decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer periphery is transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) so that the center side bulges forward, and a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) that bulges forward. It includes an attached annular button frame 412 and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a material that does not easily transmit light.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed into a smooth curved surface with no unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 is recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside), and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a is recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer circumferential side of the first button decoration part 411a, and extends on the axis toward the center, and is arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. A plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and one group on both left and right sides is one group on both upper and lower sides. It extends further towards the center.

The plurality of second button decoration parts 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration parts 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness with a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be clearly seen.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a that extends from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss parts 413c protrude rearward along the outer periphery of the main body part 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Detection pieces 413d protrude rearward in a band-like shape and are arranged in plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d that penetrates the flange part 413b back and forth outside the main body part 413a and extends along the outer periphery for a predetermined length. A plurality of base openings 413e (six) are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape, and the front end side is inward so as to follow the inner surface of the button lens 411. An inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward the center (center side) is provided.

The outer circumferential edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the main body portion 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a, two on the upper side and one on the lower side. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided, three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a portion of the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumferential side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which narrows inward, substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

This operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface) and is transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. The display screen can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by. The front side of the outer periphery of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, so that further forward movement is restricted. By pressing against this, the base unit 430 is moved rearward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440 indicates that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 has a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the center side when the production operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 allows the operation button to be closed. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that is visible from the rear is formed so as to narrow inward from the outer periphery. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner circumferential side of the decorative board unit 420 and is lower than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will protrude backwards. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is transmitted to the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and also to prevent leakage from the outside of the base unit 430, the left side of the operation button decorative board 433, the right side of the operation button decorative board 434, the upper side of the operation button decorative board 435, and the lower side of the operation button. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operating button left inner decorative board 433, the operating button right inner decorative board 434, the upper operating button inner decorative board 435, and the operating button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 from decorating parts other than those targeted for the light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to perform the light-emitting decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed to have an outer shape that matches the front end side of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and a frame body 416 that is attached to the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of frame side lenses 417 having light-transmitting properties that are attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side, and a frame top lens 418 having light-transmitting properties that is attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c cut out with a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with. The center opening 416a is formed to have approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylinder portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the notch 416c. When the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d is connected to the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 extends outward at the upper portions of the left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e that are attached to the production operation unit attachment portions 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (presentation operation unit 400) has a pair of mounting portions 416e and a cutout portion 416c on both sides thereof attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 has almost the entire surface made of metal, except for a portion with the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A shiny plating layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close off outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed three on each side of the frame main body 416, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front side. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concavities and convexities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420. At the same time, the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be decorated with light by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission, and also This allows vibration to be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The board base 421 has an inner circumferential side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer circumferential side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a. A plurality of second LEDs 422b are mounted along the side. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a. A plurality of second LEDs 423b are mounted along the side. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled into the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b, 423b. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits light and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410 using the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire performance operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the production operation unit 400 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the production operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45(a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, where a part of the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is an explanatory view showing a part, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a performance operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can display a performance image to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and also allows the player to operate the performance image. The player can be entertained by having the player participate in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The overall height of the production operation unit 400 is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the production operation unit 400 has a total width slightly larger than ⅓ of the total width of the door frame 3. The performance operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

In the performance operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the production operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, there is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. is formed. In other words, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320 only at the upper portion, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the front inner circumference of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed as follows. As a result, in the production operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is sloped so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the tray unit 320 (performance operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when a player looks down from the gaming area 5a to the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, etc. can be visually recognized in good condition.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state of the production operation unit 400 (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is pressed against the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

In the normal state, the production operation unit 400 has a button frame 412 of the operation button 410 whose center side (center axis CL side) protrudes forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is located in the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes approximately 4cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 which bulges forward in a curved shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for performance provided in conventional pachinko machines, so the area near the periphery away from the center of the button lens 411 is pressed. There is a high possibility that it will be done. To be more specific, the operation button for performance in a conventional pachinko machine is installed so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to a vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of this embodiment is installed so that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, so when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. This means pressing a portion of the operation button 410 that is away from the central axis CL.

By the way, the operation buttons for performance in conventional pachinko machines are formed on a flat surface for the player to press, so if the operation button is made larger while keeping the part pressed on the flat surface, If you press a part of the operation button that is off the center of the button, the pressing surface will tilt so that the pressed part retreats first, making it impossible for the operation button to move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a part (button lens 411) that is pressed and operated by the player in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. I can do it. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retreated without tilting. You can fully enjoy the effects you operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since it is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the part to which it is attached. , the entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. Furthermore, since the vibration motor 424 is placed directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the vibration motor 424 can It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, surprising the players and making them enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the leg section 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the frame remains until the lower surface of the leg section 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. can absorb the impact by bending downward. Furthermore, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the production operation unit 400 is restricted, and the production operation unit mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are mounted. It is possible to avoid applying excessive force to the portion 326a etc., and damage to the production operation unit 400 etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or tapped with strong force, such as when the player is presented with an effect in which the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decrease in player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

Note that, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed into a curved surface shape (partial shape of an approximately spherical surface) that protrudes forward, so it is formed into a flat plate shape. The button lens 411 has higher strength and rigidity than the button lens 411, and even if it is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 46, the effect operation unit 400 has a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button internal decoration member 432 made of transparent members. The decorations with unevenness such as the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button inner decoration part 432f, and the second button inner decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side). ) can be visually recognized. In addition, in areas where these uneven decorations are formed, light is refracted in a complicated manner due to changes in board thickness, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the production operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration part 411a This makes it difficult to see the rear at the outer periphery of the inner part of the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (back in the central axis CL direction), there is an inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a peripheral wall part of the operation button inner decoration member 432. 432a, and the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap allows the gap between the outer circumference of the inner operation button decoration member 432 to be closed from the front side (player side). It can be made difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and when the operation button 410 is viewed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button can be placed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

To be more specific, the production operation unit 400 has a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is A unit base 431, a decorative board unit 420, etc. located on the outer side and rear side (rear side) are formed so as not to be visible from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by the dashed line is hidden from the player's view. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, etc., the outside and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are made difficult to see and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration part 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration part 432g intersect, resulting in a geometrical Decorations can be shown to players.

Further, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a The second button interior decoration portion 432g allows the player to see a deep, three-dimensional geometric pattern, and enjoy the decorations including the interior of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front and back direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a changes. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration part 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the production operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player using the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of players, making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button An upper inner decorative board 435 and a lower operating button inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof, the inner operating button decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. It can be decorated. That is, the interior of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light by the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of these operation button left interior decoration board 433, operation button right interior decoration board 434, operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are as follows. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a, so that light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be well decorated with light.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a decorative board 422 on the left side of the operation button in the decorative board unit 420 behind the second button decoration part 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A first LED 422a and a first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by making these first LEDs 422a and 423a emit light, the six second button decoration parts 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light. I can do it. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are connected to the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body part 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder part 416d, making it easy to operate. Only the second button decoration part 411b of the button 410 can be well decorated with light.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by making these second LEDs 422b and 423b emit light, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder part 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light. .

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frame top lens decoration boards 437 are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437. By causing the LED to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light. A flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached to near the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47(a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 47(b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 47(c) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. FIG. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) above the dish unit 320. 100 is attached to the left front part on the left side of the through hole 111. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; A transparent band-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 is attached to the front surface, and a light-transmitting lens is placed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and has a polyhedral decoration on the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit upper part that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the front lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit A plurality of decorative members 537 are attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front side back and forth. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and square holes extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the left side upper decorative board 161 of the door frame and the lower left side decorative board 162) are connected to each other through the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed such that when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located approximately at the center in the vertical direction. This left unit base 531 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Furthermore, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In this left reflective standing wall portion 538, an inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. Note that this reflective surface can be provided not only by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall section 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, this left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square lens portion 532a that is square in front view that corresponds to the square opening 531a. A lens portion 532b is provided. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward in a point-like manner. The light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be decorated with light.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c conically recessed rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection section 532c), and an input lens section 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape at the rear surface, and an input lens section 532e that extends forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e as a whole on the outside of the input lens section 532e on the rear surface. The front reflecting portion 532f is tilted so as to move.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the cross-sectional shape of the front diffusing lens portion 532d when cut along the radial direction, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is recessed forward. It bulges out in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed into a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the lens portion in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a serrated cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with the peaks between the grooves being triangular and pointed rearward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the front reflecting portion 532f in the circumferential direction. This radially extending line dividing in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens section 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens section 532b from the input lens section 532e. Since this input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection part 532c is directed by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection part 532c in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame). The light is reflected so as to be diffused in a direction (direction), and travels inside the square lens portion 532b from the center toward the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection section 532c travels from the center to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection section 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting section 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting section 532c, the thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (See Figure 50). As a result, the light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens section 532b in the front and back direction at the central diffuse reflection section 532c is sequentially reflected forward by the front reflection section 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting section 532f passes through the front diffusing lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffusing lens part 532d has a wave-shaped cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflecting part 532f in various directions, and the square lens part 532b It is possible to irradiate light substantially uniformly forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the lens member.

In the front diffusing lens part 532d and the front reflecting part 532f, the rectangular lens part 532b has a plurality of concentric grooves divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing line as a border. is shifted in the radial direction so that the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the square lens part 532b has a concentric striped pattern of shading. It is possible to prevent the light from turning into light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with light with a more uniform density. Thereby, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and a circular decorative portion located in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. A multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short extension in the front and back. The polyhedral decoration part has multiple rows of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged vertically on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is shaped like a. The circular decorative part and the multifaceted decorative part are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative part 561a and the multifaceted decorative part 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the circular decorative portion is illuminated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is directed forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light irradiated onto each of them emits light and decorates them.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube shape extending longitudinally. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery that is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower part of the portion penetrates back and forth. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 has a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertical middle part bent backward, and a dogleg-shaped part where the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left A doglegged part whose upper part is bent backward along the front edge of the lower unit decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper doglegged part and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It consists of a straight part.

Both upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. This left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and allows the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of a non-transparent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51(b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 51(c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame. FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side in front view of the through hole 111, and a front side of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the door frame right side decorative board 552, and the door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the left side of the center in front view of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, and extends in the vertical direction and the front/rear direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. A right unit left cover 555 in the form of a transparent flat plate is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit 554 .

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the center in front view on the front side of the right unit base 551, and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens. A transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a decorated right unit is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. a right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a shallow front and right side opening extending in the vertical and front and rear directions. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light opaque member attached to the left side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a flat plate shape.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and the right side unit 550 has a translucent right side unit with a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561, the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating from front to back, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. 563 and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and connects the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape that is elongated vertically when viewed from the front, has a short rectangular tube shape in the front and back, and is formed into a box shape that is closed near the center in the front and back direction. has been done. This right unit base 551 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective standing wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the right reflective standing wall portion 568, the inner surface, which is flat and faces the through hole 111, is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. Note that this reflective surface is not only provided by providing the inner surface of the right reflective standing wall section 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by providing a reflective surface for the same inner surface, similar to the inner surface of the left reflective standing wall section 538. It is also possible to provide this by attaching a seal. As will be described later, the right reflective standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 has a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of right LEDs 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A plurality of medium LEDs 552c are provided. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is used to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 by emitting light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right decorative member 557 of the right unit by emitting light through the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit. The middle LED 552c is used to decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 has both front and rear surfaces formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a main body portion 553a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall portion 553b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view. A rectangular notch 553c is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed vertically at predetermined intervals, and a right unit left decorative member is formed on the left side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. 554, a housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so that the lens 554 can be accommodated, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and is provided in plurality in the vertical direction; A plurality of side reflection parts 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens part 553e is located in the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape so that it moves toward the In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a as a whole moves to the right in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body part 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward more than the front end of the left side unit 530 of the door frame.

When the rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its right end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a portion corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c cause the right unit decorative lens member 561 to emit light well. It can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 553a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately at the center in the vertical direction of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and is recessed forward in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 553a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 553f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side reflection portion 553f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit left diffuser lens member 553 allows the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. It is incident. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so that it spreads, and each input lens portion 553e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 553a from the input lens part 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body part 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body section 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body section 553a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflecting section 553f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection portion 553f, and is directed outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left side of the main body part 553a, there is light reflected leftward by the side reflection part 553f inside the main body part 553a, and light irradiated rightward from the side reflection part 553f and left by the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body 553a is irradiated to the left, it is possible to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, which prevents the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a from having concentric striped shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side of the main body part 553a in front view (the side where the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the left diffuser lens member 553 of the right unit is visible through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit is visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. To be more specific, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a main body part 556a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting in the shape of a flat plate from the rear side of the main body part 556a to the left in front view. 556b, a rectangular notch 556c that is cut out from the left end of the rear wall 556b to the right in a front view, and is formed in plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a front view of the main body 556a, and a plurality of input lens parts 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and are provided in the vertical direction. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided on the left side, which are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as that of the main body portion 553a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a as a whole moves to the left in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body part 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes further forward than the front end of the left side unit 530 of the door frame.

When the rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating back and forth. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well decorated with light by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery approximately matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 556a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately in the vertical center of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 556e includes a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and a spherically curved recess toward the front from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens parts 556e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where they are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 556a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 556f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit right diffuser lens member 556 allows the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens section 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so that it spreads, and each input lens section 556e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 556a from the input lens part 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body part 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflecting portion 556f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 556a from the input lens part 556e is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection part 556f, and is directed outward from the right side of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is a member, the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be irradiated to the right side through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body part 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflection part 556f inside the main body part 556a, and the light irradiated leftward from the side reflection part 556f and the right side on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming the concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from having concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in front view of the main body part 556a (the side where the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed into a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with respect to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or may be different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed into a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a main body portion 559a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, and a rear wall portion 559b. A rectangular notch 559c is cut out leftward from the right end side of the wall portion 559b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a cutout portion 559c extends rightward from the right side of the main body portion 559a and is cut out from the rear side. It includes a plurality of plate-shaped reinforcing parts 559d extending from the wall part 559b to the front end of the main body part 559a.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to be movable, and its outer shape is approximately the same as that of the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When the rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to the right of the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 comes into contact with the right end of this rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c cause the right unit decorative lens member 561 to emit light well. It can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets, each set being a pair of reinforcing portions 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction and having substantially the same height as the left and right width, and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view of a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a of the left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the vertical and front-back directions with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated with light.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-transparent members, and are irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are connected to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light-emitting decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

Furthermore, since the internal space is vertically divided into four parts by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged at the rear side of each divided space. The LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be , each can be decorated with light emission independently. That is, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction, and each region can be decorated with light emission independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed therein. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short length extending back and forth. The multifaceted decorative portion 561b includes a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a plurality of vertical rows on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is formed in a shape similar to the one shown below.

To be more specific, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative parts 561a and a multifaceted decorative part 561b in each space divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the top three parts located at the front, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowest part, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged in the top three parts. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is disposed.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light by an LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 disposed at the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed into a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed to be able to cover both left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and both left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. This right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and allows the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically in short lengths, and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a non-transparent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a plate-like manner more than the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes further forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 has a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end, respectively. It can be used as a luminescent decoration.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 will be separated from the adjacent pachinko machine on the right side. It can act as a partition between the two. As a result, players playing on the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. I can do it.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in a game hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island equipment This pachinko machine 1 can be seen even from the lateral direction along the , and the pachinko machine 1 can stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in rows. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, the book can be seen from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a malfunction such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides are removed. By decorating the member 561 etc. with light emitting in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the game hall attendants of the occurrence of a malfunction and make them aware of the occurrence, allowing them to quickly respond to the malfunction. Therefore, it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game by the player at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming irritated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. FIG. 59 is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a central base 571 attached to the center in the left and right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and attached to both left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surface of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend from side to side, and the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward. A pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped and open at the rear, penetrate front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to near the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three each on the left and right) extending and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front side of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal, which is arranged in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer periphery outer light emitting part 34 (left outer periphery outer light emitting part 34a, right outer periphery outer light emitting part 34b) is provided to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and It has a structure in which outer circumferential outer light detecting sections 35 (left outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35a, right outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35b) which detect light outside the outer circumference are provided.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, and a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame, and a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the front of the unit main body 271 to close the plurality of slits 574b, respectively, and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guiding members 578 (three each on the left and right ends) extend from the vicinity across the opening 574a to near both left and right ends of the unit body 271, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of the plurality of (three) light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration A top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front side of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a. A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both the left and right sides of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the parts facing the outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 in the left and right direction. A plurality of (three) slits 574b are formed through the door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, respectively, which are formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271. A pair of board bases 585 are respectively attached to the parts, and a door is mounted on the front side of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. A pair of light shielding members 588 are provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit cover 591 to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 is attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 has a rectangular shape extending from side to side when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of projections and depressions on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surfaces of each of the upper speakers 573 are attached diagonally so that the side closer to the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 has a shape when viewed from the front, such that the lower portions near both left and right ends of a rectangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 has a shape in a front view, in which a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a shape in a plan view of a rectangle extending left and right, and a base that is approximately 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward, and a rectangle that protrudes short forward and has the front end side of the trapezoid as its long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the forwardly protruding part at the center in the left-right direction on the front face are connected to the line connecting the left-right end of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end of the front end of the forward-protruding part. It is located further back (concave) than the

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a formed in the front surface from both ends in the left and right direction to positions outside of the portions projecting forward, which extend through the unit body 271 in the front and rear directions. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits extending horizontally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at an obliquely extending portion of the trapezoidally projecting portion on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of a portion extending diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to near the opening 574a. Moreover, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each, spaced apart vertically.

The unit main body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d cut out in the left-right direction from the rear end toward the front on the lower surface. , is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit main body 271 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape in a front view of a modified pentagon that is bent so that the center of the lower side of the approximately square is located downward, and extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed into a shape that is a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tips of the sides and the bottom ends of the left and right sides of a side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the pentagonal portion on the front side moves rearward as it goes downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is entirely formed into a three-dimensional shape and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the back of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state where the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward, so that the front surface is along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decorative board 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end of the forwardly protruding portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 on both the left and right sides. The side near both ends of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction is considered to be the end side, and the side near the center is the center side. 578a, and a circular arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the center end side of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 has a straight portion 578a whose depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than its height in the vertical direction, and a circular arc portion 578b whose depth in the front-rear direction is larger than its height in the vertical direction. Further, the light guiding member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller toward the center side at the arcuate portion 578b. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight part 578a is located just in front of the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the circular arc part 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guiding member 578 includes a diffuse reflection part 578c made of saw-shaped unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight part 578a, and a diffused input part 578d made of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear side of the arcuate part 578b. It is equipped with

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left and right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input section 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left and right direction, the light is transmitted to the straight part 578a. As the light travels toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light.

In addition, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input part 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc part 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guiding member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens parts 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire area on the right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light guiding members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from in front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top left side. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right side. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) of the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guiding members 578 attached to the front left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 illuminates the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has an LED 584a mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 illuminates the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. It can be decorated with luminous light.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to each other. The board base 585 has a substantially square side wall in side view having sides extending vertically and front to back, a quadrangular rear wall in front view extending outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and a side wall extending from the front end of the upper side of the side wall. The top wall of a right-angled triangle that connects the top sides of the side wall and rear wall with the line that connects the top half-way of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the bottom side of the side wall and rear wall that connects the bottom sides of the side wall and rear wall on the opposite side of the top wall. It has a right triangular lower wall, and is formed into a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 such that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. A door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to this board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear left side of the left-right center of the unit body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 586a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light guiding member 578. be able to.

The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guiding member 578. be able to.

The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of non-light-transmitting members and are substantially symmetrical to each other. The light shielding member 588 extends between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It's in charge. This light shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission while being independent from each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, and the front faces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved so as to be gouged rearward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 is protruding forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center. It is formed to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal at the rear of each of the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 has a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
The functions and effects of the door frame 3 will be explained. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through-holes 111 that penetrate the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines. , In accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, the vertical heights of the pan unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 are reduced, and the horizontal widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 are reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , it corresponds to the game board 5 with a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of a plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative part 326c) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 has a recessed shape so that it can be scooped out backwards (the plate unit 320 and the front ends of both left and right ends of the production operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized to the player. This makes it possible to draw strong attention to the performance operation unit 400.

In the door frame 3, the production operation unit 400, which is arranged on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through-hole 111, is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Therefore, when a player is seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state facing the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her gaze and presses the production operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, making the large, round operation button 410 clearly visible, and increasing expectations for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed within the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in good condition, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 that has a diameter that is approximately the same as the overall height of the pan unit 320 and bulges out in a round shape toward the front, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to operate the operation button 410 by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and "quick pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is installed in an inclined position, so it can not only be pressed from above like a conventional pachinko machine operation button, but also operated from the left or right side. The user can easily operate the button 410 from the front or from the front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the performance operation unit 400 mounted in a suspended state by the plate unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the performance operation unit 400, so that the game When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations depending on the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and causing the operation button to move. 410 can be enjoyed even more.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the tray unit 320, the upper tray 321 is larger than that of a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower tray 322 underneath becomes less noticeable, players who are used to conventional pachinko machines can easily recognize that it is clearly different, and this appeal strongly attracts players' attention. The pachinko machine 1 can have high power.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 goes around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower tray 322 or hooks his left fingers on the lower tray opening 326d, Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. The user can also tactually recognize that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322 .

Furthermore, the door frame 3 includes a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray for extracting the game balls from the lower tray 322 into a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front and back, and is also arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the production operation unit 400) in front view. In other words, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Because they are arranged at the rear of the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be made neat. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged below the front (directly in front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is in an open state. Then, the game balls released from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 enter the lower tray 322 and are immediately discharged from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of game balls from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 and discharged to the dollar box is also limited. I can't see it. This prevents the player from giving the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of hitting the game ball, the effect image, etc.). can.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a disposed in a position to the front left of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and a vertical position of the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are directly transferred to the lower tray ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower ball hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. As a result, while the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 are transferred to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the balls flowing in the lower tray 322 can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first area A1, the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 can be removed from the lower tray 322 without being visible to the player. The game balls can be ejected downward (to the dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, through which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (production operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player places his/her hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his/her hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e will not be blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be outputted forward in a good manner, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Furthermore, when the player puts his/her hand into or approaches the lower tray 322, the player can tactually feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 that is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, it is possible for players who play with this pachinko machine 1 to play in a private room. It is possible to create the illusion that the player is actually there, and it is possible to have players play games in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emitting light on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward. Even if you are not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 inside the building, you can make the presence of the pachinko machine 1 known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it a pachinko machine that is highly appealing to players. It can be set as machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, and the front face of the top middle decorative member 576 on both left and right sides. The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 has a concave shape that can be scooped out backwards (the top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude forward, making it possible to highlight and emphasize the top middle decorative member 576 to the player. The center decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, the upper part of the door frame of a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends are provided. In addition to the speaker 573, the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. This makes it possible to decorate the entire front upper part of the door frame 3, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 become less noticeable at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make the player aware at a glance that there is a pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.In addition, the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the production operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are arranged below and above the through-hole 111. , each protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, so that the imaginary line passing through the center in the left and right direction stands out, allowing the player to see a uniform decoration at the top and bottom, as well as giving the player a sophisticated decoration. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out from other pachinko machines and have high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 and the production operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the performance operation unit 400 is decorated with light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left and right direction, so that the player's line of sight is placed at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 etc. of the production operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a front view of the game board of FIG. 63. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind after being disassembled. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 that controls the game contents to be played. On the front side of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, and a front side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery formed to be slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the camera, and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. The second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by drawing, and the first special lottery draws by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is installed approximately at the center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the board side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the top of the vertical center. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 64, 65, and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front is used for games. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide section 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 that is recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 that protrudes toward the rear of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel board 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of attachment bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 into the attachment holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, they can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. The frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be held sufficiently even when obstacle nails are planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel plate 1110 also has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 formed of round holes arranged near the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 arranged near the outer periphery at the lower left side and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. , is equipped with. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the gaming area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel board 1110 is provided with step-shaped engaging step portions 1115 with a depressed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and, like the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114, are arranged outside the gaming area 5a. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step part 1121 which removably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step part 1121 which has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step part 1121 in the front and rear direction. A through hole 1122 penetrating through the.

The depth of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 from the front is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110, and the front surface of the panel board 1110 held within the holding step 1121 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110. It is approximately the same surface as the front. Further, the holding step portion 1121 has a front inner circumferential surface formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to a fitting hole 1113 and a long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel board 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the engagement claw 1124 is arranged at the upper part of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It protrudes toward the front and is adapted to be elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 is attached to the upper side ( It extends a predetermined amount toward the center (center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws 1124 and engaging pieces 1125, the panel plate 1110 is held detachably from the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the gaming area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path unit 860 passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1128 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 passing through in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided to the rear side outlet 1126 by the out guide section 1003, and are discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood with a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 has an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a notch 1152 that extends horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is opened downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and a notch 1152 on the upper side of the notch 1152 in the vertical direction. A rectangular insertion hole 1153 is provided, which extends through the hole 1153 and into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that pass through the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. Furthermore, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the attachment bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple attachment holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for attaching the table unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened at the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear side outlet 1151 by the out guide part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the outlet 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled on the game board 5, can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing the deterrent power against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042, including the main control board box 1320, are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually checked from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces that are inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since implementation areas are now provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This functional display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and four LEDs that display the normal lottery results drawn by passing the game ball through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal holding display 1408 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passing of game balls to the gate part 2003, and a drawing by receiving the game balls to the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result, and a first special holding consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot 2002. A number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that display the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004, A second special reservation number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and a special reservation number display 1406 that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening/closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side performance display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the game board side performance display device 1600 is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 that protrudes outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting part 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock it. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and has a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 and a rear end passing through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls shot into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept game balls according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

The plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is located directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It includes an upper part 2300, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to the approximate center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward with a size that can accept only one game ball at a time, and a big winning port 2005 that allows multiple game balls to be received at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are of an acceptable size and extend from side to side, and are formed to be openable and closable depending on the gaming state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that can accept game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the gaming area 5a at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game balls flowing down along the inner rail 1002 are directed toward the right side (playing area 5a). (center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the gaming area 5a above the starting port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in front view, and is located on the front side of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a frame shape, and allows the game board side effect display device 1600 placed behind the game panel 1100 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, excluding the lower side, protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball struck into the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 and can be released into the frame. It includes an open warp exit 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Furthermore, a game board side performance display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the direction and accommodates a performance drive board.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at an upper position from the center in the vertical direction. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the outside on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted. , a notch 3010d is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b when viewed from the rear, and a notch 3010d is provided to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit and the like.

The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back lower/rear movable presentation unit 3100, a back top/left movable presentation unit 3200, a back left movable presentation unit 3300, a back top/middle movable presentation unit 3400, a back/bottom/front movable presentation unit 3500, etc. , a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are released. , the game ball is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more clockwise the handle 302 is rotated, the more strongly the game ball can be hit. , game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is located directly above the first starting port 2002, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the large prize opening 2005 in the open state, and the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and will be moved to the general prize opening 2001 and the first prize slot in the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called hitting to the right), On the downstream side thereof, the water flows down a region where a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is held in the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, the second starting port 2004 remains open for a period of 0.3 to 10 seconds, allowing game balls to be received into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when game balls pass through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 between the time the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is finished. Further, the number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at the upper limit of four, and even if game balls pass through the gate section 2003, they are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot", "jackpot", " A special lottery result is drawn to generate a "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation win," "time reduction win," etc.). Then, the special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "Lose", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", " 15R jackpot," "probability variable (probability change) win," "time saving (time reduction) win," "probable variable time saving win," "probable variable no time saving win," and so on.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the special variable time has elapsed, the grand prize opening 2005 becomes ready to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is accepted into the big win hole 2005 while the big win hole 2005 is in an open state, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13) are delivered from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. is dispensed onto the upper tray 321. Therefore, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept game balls when the big winning hole 2005 is enabled to accept game balls, many game balls can be paid out and the players can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", after the big prize opening 2005 is open to accept game balls for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the grand prize opening 2005 became open to accept game balls, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game balls into a closed state where they cannot be accepted is met. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once a game ball is received in the second starting slot 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the special lottery result, so the start of suggesting the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Ru. The maximum number of reserved special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than 4, Even if game balls were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without retaining the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

This suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by varying each symbol row with three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols being displayed side by side in the left and right direction. The symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three stop-displayed symbol rows are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

In addition, there is a time period (LED blinking time (fluctuating time)) indicating a special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and a time period indicating a special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (when the symbol rows fluctuate). The time required for displaying the confirmed image is different from the time required for displaying the finalized image, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 displays a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result. The operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations on the center accessory 2500, various decorations on the back unit 3000, back lower and rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper and middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. The player can be entertained, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is a door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is a main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is a door unit of the present invention. The tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the window portion of the present embodiment, and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is attached to the bulge portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the interior decoration member of the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side are the second decoration body of the present invention. The second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration part of the present invention, respectively. .

Furthermore, each LED and the sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 in this embodiment The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in this embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 in this embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3 can be operated. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) The decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) overlap, the decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show players a highly decorative decoration with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players, and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the button lens 411 can be moved by the player operating (pressing) the button lens 411. When this happens, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will approach or separate. Due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second inner button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a It becomes possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the first button decoration part 411a and The player can change the decoration (intersection mode) with the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side from the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side), it is different from the first decoration body. Since a space is formed between the button lens 411 and the second button decoration member 432, when viewed from the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decoration part 411a and the second button of the operation button interior decoration member 432 The distance to the inner decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will be much different, and the button lens 411 may be moved by operating the button lens 411. Even when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the intersecting manner (overlapping degree) changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. Through this, the interior operation button decoration member 432 on the back side (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be clearly seen, and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a The decoration allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the center of the button lens 411, and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button (or the second performance display device 460A on the door frame side) and the door frame can be directed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's attention can be strongly focused on the side effect display device 460.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g It is possible to reliably bring out the sense of perspective in the decorations created by the buttons, and to make the decorations created by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g stand out, thereby making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can.

Moreover, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration part 432g The decoration can direct the player's line of sight and attention to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button internal decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 (or the sub-screen decoration board 477) When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or sub-screen decoration member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light-emitting decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) controls the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board. Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration part 432g, the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button top While the interior decoration board 435 and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436 are illuminated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with the second button interior decoration. The second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is decorated with a strong luminescence, whereas the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is decorated with a strong luminescence. Since the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with weak light, each LED of the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 When looking at the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) from the outside with the LED 477a emitting light, the sense of perspective is more emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing, strongly attracting the players' interest.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side decoration member 432) There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move around the outer circumference of the frame side second effect display device 460A), It is possible to expand the side second effect display device 460A) outward and make it as large as possible, and by increasing the size, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. Furthermore, as described above, since there is no need to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative, has a good appearance, and has a high appeal that strongly attracts the attention of players.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, if a player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Since the applied impact force is more easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411 than in the case of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the button lens 411 being damaged during a game, which may cause some players to become irritated and lose their interest, and also to prevent the button lens 411 from being damaged. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 disposed in the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, there is a space under the through hole 111. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. An operation button 410 with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm that can be moved (advance and retreat) by the player's operation, and an internal decoration that can be seen from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, it is different from the conventional one. In a pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 is visible in the position where the game ball storage tray is conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized as being different from conventional pachinko machines, and can have a high appeal. The frame unit 415 is provided with a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with first LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission. It includes an inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions from the decorative part 411b, and a main body part 413a and an inner extension part 413f of the button base 413 that partition the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LED 422b illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and button lens 411 due to the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extension portion 413f. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration part 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission independently. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b, various patterns of light emission can be produced. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that emits light to decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that emits light to decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. In preparation for the circuit board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), so that the second button decorative part Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a board, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be kept as far away from the second button decoration part 411b as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be sufficiently reflected. The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated with the light in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration part 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emitting light, the appearance of the second button decoration part 411b and the light emitting decoration of the frame side lenses 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the attention of players. In addition, it is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the players.

Furthermore, since the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operating button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operating button 410 moves back and forth. The wiring connected to the outer right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. To allow a player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the second button decoration part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be seen through the transparent button lens 411. (Second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) When looking at the inner decoration member 432 of the operation button and the outer edge of the door frame side effect display device 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side), the second button decoration part 411b is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) are transparent and visible. As described above, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be decorated with light emitting light in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effects, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by entertaining the effect images etc. on the effect display device 460A).

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410), which is provided with the second button decoration part 411b on the outer edge, can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of a player participation type performance. By allowing the player to operate the button 410, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player participatory effect), and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game. When performing a player participation type production, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light, thereby attracting the player's attention to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-transparent main body part 413a and the inner extension part 413f, which allow the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 to be decorated with light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 The area closer to the center than the button decoration part 411b is not illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, so that it is placed at the rear. It is possible to prevent the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light in a good condition, and the rear operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in good condition, and the decorations, light-emitting effects, etc. can be sufficiently enjoyed by the players, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 including the frame side lens 417, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are displayed on the rear side of the frame unit 415. 411b can be completely partitioned off by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is at the end (rear end) of the inner cylinder portion 416d closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the left outer decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the outer left decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative board 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decoration part 411b. There's nothing to do. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned off by the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the main body portion 413a closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, Since the first LEDs 422a and 423a also extend rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, completely blocking light from entering the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good condition by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made visible in a good condition, and the player can fully enjoy the decorations, light-emitting effects, etc., thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, a second button decoration is provided in front of the outer part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the part 411b is located, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the second door frame side decoration member 460A) can be seen from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side). The members on the outside and the rear side (rear side) of the effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration part 411b, and deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented. At this time, when the second button decoration part 411b is decorated with light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration part 411b is different from the brightness of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the second decoration on the door frame side). Since the outside and rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outside and rear side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Moreover, since the outer circumference of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration part 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, a light emitting effect in which light circles around the outer edge of the operation button 410 or a light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 can be produced. Since it is possible to show the player a display, a light-emitting display in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the various light-emitting displays, and to make the player have fun. This can prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 are driven into the game area 5a, and the upper tray 321 used for the game is opened. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is removably attached to the front side and lower part of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, and a portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the first region A1 of the lower plate is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and a remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls is attached by extending the portion of the lower tray main body 325 corresponding to the lower tray second region A2 inside, the lower tray 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made less noticeable, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively more noticeable. Therefore, when this pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper tray and lower tray are seen vertically side by side in conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make players realize that it is different from conventional pachinko machines at just a glance, and that can strongly attract the attention of players. can.

Further, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward from the upper end to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided to restrict the movement of the game balls, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). This prevents the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to interruption of the game due to damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and this pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to prevent the game ball from moving toward the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 bounce within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from intruding into the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can 326d) into the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips etc. from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the underside of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), etc., and to allow the player to play the game in a safe state. I can do it.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the impact and pressure caused by the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340, 340A. Even if the operation occurs, the information is not transmitted from the lower plate cover 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is ensured. It can be prevented.

In addition, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. In this state, the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can directly enter the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), and the game balls can be removed from the main body of the lower tray body 325. It can be made difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will be removed from the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), reduce interruptions in the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball facing the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is tilted. The ball will climb up the bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game balls that come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

In addition, since at least the lower plate covers 340, 340A are separate members, when the lower plate covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, and this pachinko machine 1 can reduce the burden on the game hall side where the game hall is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left and right direction expands most forwardly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 taken out is provided, and the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are removably attached to the part that bulges out most forwardly, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. The storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) is provided with a storage tray that can store game balls, and the storage tray (the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) is provided with an outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower plate first area A1 located therein and a lower plate second area A2 located in a space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage trays (the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is visible in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the player can see that the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized at a glance, and has a high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is smaller, the first part of the lower plate main body 325 has a second lower plate area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided, it is possible to store game balls even in a range that cannot be seen from the front of the lower tray 322 (lower tray second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured, allowing the player to concentrate on playing the game without having to worry about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322. This makes it possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part are attached to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body part 325A having the lower plate first area A1, and the lower plate cover 340, 340A having the lower plate second area A2. Since the lower plate 322 is constructed by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A of different sizes, a first extension part 325B, a second extension part 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, the size of the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be adjusted according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the installation space 326j in the tray unit cover 326. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. Since the width of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rear protrusion amounts can be used. The lower tray 322 can be made compatible with the performance operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 includes a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower tray 322 becomes a container-like shape concave downward, and the game ball can be stored reliably. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340, 340A have a cover standing wall part 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower plate main body 325, lower plate covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. Then, by combining (installing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A of a shape according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, etc., it can be adapted to various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the lower plate covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed in the area where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower tray main body 325, so even if many game balls are stored, there is no force that would cause the lower tray covers 340, 340A to be separated from the lower tray main body 325. There is no action, and the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which game balls are received into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. 321 and a lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower tray 322 including It is possible to create a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract people. In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game ball heading from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is difficult for the player to see the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted by making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) controls the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom of the lower plate 322 that guide the game balls from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since it is difficult to see the game balls guided by guiding means such as the ball guiding part 322c and the buffer part 322d between the ball extracting hole 322a and the ball extracting hole 322a, if the ball extracting hole 322a is left open. , the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. It is possible to create an illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the lower plate 322, including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, etc. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, etc. are located at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to go around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is smaller than that of the actual lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c are transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. This is because the balls can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a and discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) by the guide means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball extraction hole 322a and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. , it is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are immediately removed by the ball guide portion 322c etc. without the player noticing. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is being discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322, the lower tray is visible from the front. 322, the actual lower tray 322 is more than twice the visible size, so it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls, similar to the lower tray of a conventional pachinko machine.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward in the lower part of the game area 5a of the game board 5 when viewed from the front, where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. Installation of a production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 to the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. 326a, and a plate front lower decorative part 326c located below approximately the center in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting part 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be gouged rearward. Because of the shape, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a can appear to protrude significantly forward, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) This allows the operation unit 400A) to stand out. Therefore, the large performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized manner in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are visible side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see On the other hand, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from a conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the lower plate front decoration part 326c which is recessed rearward on both left and right outer sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game balls is routed to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 (capacity of the lower tray 322) can be secured. There is no need to play the game while worrying about the lower tray 322 being full of game balls, the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, his fingertips are in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the plate unit base 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, etc. This makes it possible for the player to recognize through the sense of touch that a sufficient amount of game balls is stored, and when the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Furthermore, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., it provides the player with a feeling similar to that of the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to reassure the players and prevent them from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is formed to become wider toward the back (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored even if the front side is small. In other words, since the front end side portion of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open (lower plate front decoration part 326c). This makes it possible to relatively make the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to increase the appeal to players and to It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the side and upper part of the lower tray 322 that goes around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower tray cover 340, the player cannot enter the lower tray 322. It is possible to prevent the player from getting injured by touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with the tip of a finger when inserting a hand. You can play games in a safe state. Further, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) cannot be operated from the player side. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more appealing, which can be made more conspicuous and strongly attract players' attention, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. This allows the player to enjoy the decorations and performances of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in player's interest.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, it is different from the conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines play games with this pachinko machine 1, they will not be confused about the function of the lower tray 322, and will be able to play the same way as before. The player can enjoy the game by allowing the player to concentrate on the game. In addition, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower plate ball removal hole 322a is not visible from the player's side, making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and good-looking, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine that can strongly attract the attention of players. It can be set as machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the tray unit 320 bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side performance display device 460 that can present a performance to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of At the same time, attach the inner operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) that decorates the outside of the operation button, and also An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 with a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging in a direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached, and the button lens 411 is attached to an outer peripheral edge thereof. A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412, and protrudes from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Since the first button decoration part 411a, the button base 413, etc. are provided, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side third It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge, the inner side (rear side), etc. of the screen unit 470 of the second performance display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the internal operation button decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Also, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 prevent the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from being removed. By increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the outer edge and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, so the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) 470), it can be well hidden by the first button decoration part 411a, etc., thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance, while also allowing the large operation button with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm to be easily concealed. 410 (button lens 411) can be realized without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made larger, this pachinko machine 1 can stand out, and the player's attention is strongly increased. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) is provided which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed diagonally, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the area near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410). Since the player is inclined with respect to the plane (orthogonal to the plane), light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 ) can make it difficult to see the outer edge, the back side, etc. of the interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) of the operation button, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 disposed inside the operation button 410 and the door frame A door frame side effect display device that allows the side effect display device 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) to be made larger or easier to move, and allows the player to be entertained by using the inside of the operation button 410. 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) can be easily provided, and a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players can be realized.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given design (decoration), so the operation button 410 in the pachinko machine 1 is made to stand out and attracts players' attention. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

Moreover, in the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, since the button frame 412 is made opaque, the button frame 412 has a button It is possible to reliably hide the rear side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation The appearance of the button 410 and the like can be improved by reducing deterioration in appearance.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer circumferential edge to the inside with a predetermined width, and cooperates with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b to Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer periphery has no directionality compared to a case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed and operated without any problem, and it is possible to reliably let the player enjoy the player participatory performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player participation type effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it easier to touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in a player participatory production using the operation button 410, thereby entertaining the player and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since a door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, player's interest can be controlled by presenting effect images according to the gaming state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. Not only can the effects be entertained, but also the effect images and light emitting effects provided by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can prompt the player to operate the operation button 410. By having the players actively participate in the player-participation type presentation and having fun, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Further, by executing the effect within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby increasing expectations for the game and suppressing a drop in interest. I can do it.

Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (part inside the first button decoration part 411a). As a result, players can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of this pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, which has high appeal to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and the player's expectations for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410 can be increased. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not limited to this, and the game machine can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as above can be achieved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the invention is not limited to this. , the button lens 411 may not have the first button decoration part 411a formed thereon.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the button frame 412 is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed all around the lens 411 at a portion corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) that protrudes cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second display on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a portion of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The button base 413 may have a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or may have a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a two-dimensional decoration by pasting a sticker or printing, or a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Further, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable to apply a light diffusion process such as a grain, a slit, a prism, etc. to at least one of the inner wall side or the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower plate 322 was recessed backward only from the left outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to, but is recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and connected to each other at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or it is recessed backward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You can make it so that there is.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape of the portion of the front surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward (the lower tray front decorative portion 326c) (the shape of the front end of the lower tray 322) is changed to a rearwardly curved surface. Although an example is shown in which the front surface is recessed in the shape of a polygonal column, the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal column or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) was attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, but the present invention is not limited to this. ``A device equipped with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface'', ``A device equipped with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device that moves the decorative body'', ``A game machine with a rotating body that has a decoration on its surface'' "Those with decorations that are three-dimensional reproductions of characters, items, logos, scenes (dioramas), etc. that are in line with the concept of the game machine"; It is also possible to attach a member such as a unit or a panel with decorations such as "", etc., applied by stickers, printing, etc.". Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is shown as having a production operation unit attachment part 326a that is open to the front for attaching the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). However, the present invention is not limited to, and may include a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover part) that does not have an opening (performance operation unit attachment part 326a) for attaching the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A configuration may be adopted in which a space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is formed behind the dish unit cover. Furthermore, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine may be applied to the front of such a dish unit cover by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322 is controlled by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) as a covering part. Although an example has been shown in which the covering is made difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this, and half or less of the storage area of game balls in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as having an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the production operation unit 400 is a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered at the center, The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an oval shape) centered at the center.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged on the rear side, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration including a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible when the following is satisfied. Here, the variable light transmitting means is ``something like a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the back side'', and ``something like a liquid crystal film that becomes transparent when the power is turned on/off.'' "It becomes invisible or opaque so that the rear side can be seen." Note that the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing at least one of the front member and the rear member with a variable light transmitting means, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are visible under normal conditions, Decorations of visible members can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, the rear part (the rear member or a member placed on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in the normal state becomes visible, and the front part becomes visible. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can display an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and also making it possible to entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

To be more specific, for example, if the front member is equipped with a variable light transmitting means such as a one-way mirror, under normal conditions, by darkening the rear side of the front member, only the decoration of the front member can be displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player. When the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened with light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear side of the rear member passes through the front member. The members become visible, and the decoration in which the decorations on the front member and the decoration on the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a one-way mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be The player can see the decorations on the surface of the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side becomes visible through the rear member, and the front member and the rear Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character, etc.) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, if both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a one-way mirror, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player under normal conditions, and the decoration of the front member and the When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member. Decorations made with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED). ) and the respective satisfaction conditions of the variable light transmission means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. can be shown to the player. As a result, by appropriately selecting the part to be brightened by the light from the light emitting part, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy a variety of decorations.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is like a one-way mirror, so when the rear side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, so there is no light on the surface of the front or rear member. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is explained as something like a one-way mirror, but even if it is something like a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be achieved. In addition, when using something like a liquid crystal film as a variable light transmitting means, it is possible to transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so it is possible to If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or decorated with light emitting light) by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show a wider variety of effects such as light emitting effects and decorative effects to the players. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls that relays the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram schematically showing the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control section.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control power supply generation processing (for example, +5V, etc.) and controls related to the game including the payout of prize balls. , and a second control section SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control section MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the The second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be explained.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs and various commands such as a main control program that is executed after the game is executed and that controls gaming operations, and a RAM that temporarily stores data. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c to output various signals to an external board, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to drive various solenoids. , and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a predetermined voltage power outage or instantaneous power outage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. A watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an) is built-in. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), The predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. Once this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted with detection signals from various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. has been entered. In addition, a gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 60, a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2005, and a back unit 3000 shown in A detection signal from the attached magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is sent to a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , outputs a drive signal to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (gaming information) regarding the game from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information related to games (gaming information) to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, A signal (power outage clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

Note that in this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, gate sensor 4003, and count sensor 4005; A contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 4020, 4020. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with long lifespans are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter the ball, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long life is used for the count sensor 4005 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning holes 2001 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also controls the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function by transmitting various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. Various commands are sent to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and inputs the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to its predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a main control output with a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port. , various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to a main control built-in RAM, a main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, etc., connect a bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae is for transmitting various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management section 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. Main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to serial management section 1310aec.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is generated by an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and with this as a trigger, it is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also serves various functions, as shown in FIG. and an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, detects the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output when operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payouts controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer to monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program transmits various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payouts from the main control board 1310 through the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial format as a main payout serial data reception signal. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Create a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) based on the signal (detection signal), and send these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands to the payer as serial data. The signal is output as serial data to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes the payout control program after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated with the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also executes the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, since the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals of the payout control input circuit 952b is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal connected to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function 952ca that has a reset function and is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function 952cb that is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit into which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A ball outage detection sensor 827 that detects out of game balls in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects game balls released from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that for the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch 619 that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the dispensing control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives operation signals (detected) from the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

The payout control MPU 952a also controls payout control without a reset function by transmitting various commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. A drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on the error LED display 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the supply path of the dispensing device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotating body to rotate. When the number “3” is displayed, it indicates a “dispensing detection sensor error” (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is made at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that the game ball is in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid)) (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out). The number of pitches has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The number of game balls actually put out is output from the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (constructed with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is connected to the game hall (hall) via these plurality of photocouplers. ) The number of game balls, etc., and various information (game information, error details regarding the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that an error has occurred) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and if an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, the hall computer This prevents the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, and from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 that advances the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payouts, etc. It is designed to prevent malfunctions or failures due to abnormal voltage being applied. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The game ball rental request signal from the ball rental button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining balance on the ball rental/return display section 330. The signal is output to the ball rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental and return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330 receives the voltage supplied from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. There is. This capacitor BC1 allows the payout control MPU 952a to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) during power cutoff processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal is sent to a predetermined input of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and using this as a trigger, the payout control MPU 952a clears the information from the payout control built-in RAM. It is now completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be explained based on FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays electrical connections between the boards of , the CR unit 6 and the connection terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls are electrically connected, the terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls etc. and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 869 is electrically connected. The terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the board, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). Further, AC 24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and outputs it together with the ground LG. , is supplied to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is supplied to the frequency display board 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. .

The frequency display board 365 has a ball rental button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball rental unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game player. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869.

The ball rental/return display section 330 has three segment displays arranged in a row, and uses a so-called dynamic lighting method in which each one of these three-digit segment displays is sequentially driven. The lighting of the digit segment display is controlled. Through such lighting control, the ball rental/return display section 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental and return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of 3 signals) for specifying a 1-digit segment display among the 3-digit segment display, and the specified 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of 7 signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting are connected from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the board 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially lights up according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment display The content of the light emitted from the device can be visually confirmed through the lending remaining display section 363.

Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to this CR unit lamp 365d via a game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball rental available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball rental button 328 and return button 329 are enabled and the ball rental is possible. controls the logic of the ball rental available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display section 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental/return display section 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device.

In the CR unit 6, when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 sends a single payout operation start request signal to payout a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. BRQ is outputted to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 and informing that the payout operation for paying out rented balls is possible or impossible, is sent to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. Note that, for example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, game balls worth 200 yen are paid out, one payout operation is performed. This is done twice in a row, and once 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is inputted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount after subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly explained. The power supply board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. , a firing control section 953 that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 682 of the ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

[7-3-1. Power supply control section]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various types of direct current for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. A power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source is provided.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control section 953, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255, mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launching strength) of firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching the button, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launching (launching) of a game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the handlebar relay terminal board 315 is inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal is input to the firing control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951. .

The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and outputting the adjusted drive current to the firing solenoid 682. Meanwhile, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, The game ball received by the ball sending member is controlled to be sent to the ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with an effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, a game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and calendar information specifying the year, month, day, and time. Rotate the knob to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. A volume adjustment volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operation is provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the process that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power is turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.) peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines A peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores peripheral control SRAM 1511d (information for managing production flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents long enough for the power to be immediately restored after an instantaneous power outage, and can only be stored in a state where the power is cut off for a long time (in the event of a long power outage) ), the contents are lost, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). This allows the stored contents to be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. It can no longer be held and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door side motor drive for transmitting a drive signal from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 Data is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, Peripheral control output of door side light emission data from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board in 3. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch provided in the production operation unit 400 for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation section 405 is transmitted. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for detecting the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the gaming board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control"), and uses the built-in peripheral control WDT and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e together to prevent its own system from going out of control. We are diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be explained. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (direct memory access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to and from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while also reading and writing various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read and written to and from peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Additionally, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading various data into the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I/O ports. DMA0 ~It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab storage device built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, and peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. While reading and writing to and from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and It reads from and writes to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac also includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and peripheral control various serial I/Os built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and input/output devices such as peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to transfer data independently, data is read and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. For input/output devices such as serial I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h, and controls the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control Various devices including storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak and other input/output devices. This is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between the two.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for a motor drive board, a serial I/O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. A serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining information on the production operation unit.

The watchdog timer with built-in peripheral control (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it resets the hardware. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to clear the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets the watchdog timer. It will take a while. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag not only output various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emitting latch signal, but also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a serial transmission circuit on the game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a confirmation lamp to notify that the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are directly electrically connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures regarding the lighting control of LEDs, which is important in terms of gaming. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and other LEDs other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. Music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) so that the volume is set at the board volume 0 to 6. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are used to notify the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, as well as content related to game production. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous game state.) The notification sound is also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and notification sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) using a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reproduced. Although the sound is low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player. In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, and there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce things that are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the RTC control section 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data that generates screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data that generates the light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sounds and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. has been done. The schedule data for generating a light emission mode is configured by chronologically arranging light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the output channel number of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A track number is defined for instructing which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Note that some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to the various control program copy area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on, etc. There are some that are read out and executed. Also, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are stored in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. There are some items that are copied and read out.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b contains, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. Includes brightness correction program. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 due to aging when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of an LED type. , acquires the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and uses the acquired brightness setting information based on the correction information. Correct it. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. It includes the set brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, and, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the power was first turned on to the game board side effect display device 1600, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness is set to 80% by adding 5%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the backlight is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the game board side effect display device When turning on the backlight of 1600, the game board is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup memory that specifically stores information to be backed up among various types of information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store copies of various information stored in this backup managed work area 1511ca, and peripheral control ROM 1511b. The various control program copy area 1511cd exclusively stores copies of the various control programs stored in the program, and the various data, control data, schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. A various control data copy area 1511ce that is exclusively stored, and a backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs but is not subject to backup. is provided.

Note that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. Regarding the managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the power-on status command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) starts the RAM clear effect. and the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the performance when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca contains performance information (1fr ) is stored exclusively as a backup target, and the effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored exclusively as a target. Here, to briefly explain the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a Since a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that it is ready to accept screen data from Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (direction information (1fr) and the performance described below). The same meaning is used for backup information (1fr). "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for presentation information (1 ms) and presentation backup information (1 ms), which will be described later).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa contains game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. is a storage area where is set, and the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side contains lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. This is a storage area where the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and stores the various received commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read out and set, while various schedule data are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are some that are set.

Bank0 (1ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf contains door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag contains data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai stores detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Various information obtained based on the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405 (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area in which information about the rotation (rotation direction) of the operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405 is set. When the control board 1510 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output the LOCKN signal to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained about the frequency of malfunctions and the state of occurrence of malfunctions during connection with the effect display driving board 4450 is set.

Note that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr), the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control section steady processing described later is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state processing is Every time the process is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing is proceeded based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. - When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Ru. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed and, for example, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, Processing is now performed based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side when the previous peripheral control unit steady process was executed. It has become.

When the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. - DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process was executed. It looks like this.

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store copies of production information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). , the production information (1ms) is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. is, as production backup information (1ms), sent by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, in the backup second area 1511cc, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is configured to have two pairs in total, including Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs: Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in the peripheral control unit every frame (1 frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time regular processing is executed, the content is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The performance information (1ms) is stored as the performance backup information (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, but the program for executing high-speed copying by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac is shared. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs; A first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc are provided to exclusively store copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when power is restored due to instantaneous power failure or power outage). is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-described point in which the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Furthermore, if the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. It is now possible to do so. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of jackpot game state) ), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect as well, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da stores performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot gaming states and information for managing special performance flags). It consists of Bank 0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information (information, etc.) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name Bank0 (SRAM), as mentioned above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is backed up. , and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) to be described later).

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store copies of production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and each pair as one page. The production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as production backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. Then, it is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair includes Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair includes Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair as one page, and the backup second area 1511db is an area for managing this pair as one page. 1511dc is an area where Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) form a pair, and this pair is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display control section]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawings of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As such, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is A VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source that performs control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the signal, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d; It is equipped with This liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b contains, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (ring-shaped display object), and sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data to be used for displaying at least one selected display object to be described later, tone adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, and volume adjustment icon data to be described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main body frame back image data used to display the main body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player's perspective, and the display of the service mode screen. Service mode screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display a suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the press operation section 405 (operation section) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting it from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, when a V blank signal, which will be described later, is input, the first screen data is copied according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, updates the screen data arranged in chronological order in the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output one by one to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Additionally, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The sound command data at the beginning of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the surroundings. After extracting the various control data from the copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the input of the V blank signal triggers the start of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the first sound command data is output one by one to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. Extract side character data and upper plate side character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for this purpose. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 to the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display that is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that it can be connected from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the route is much longer than that for channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d uses THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication method called "Registered Trademark", the system is not easily affected by noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side production transmitter IC4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals by the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen worth of screen data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen (1 of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1. Image data for the effect display device 460 is transmitted from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. This refers to the data to be generated above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also outputs image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) Then, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Furthermore, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the VDP with built-in sound source 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Furthermore, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as music and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects is incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and is used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values. Specifically, for the performance sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating a dial operation section 401 or a press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode to be described later.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound is In fact, it is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used among multiple tracks, and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is adjusted to the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and for the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, A maximum volume that is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is synthesized, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, we will briefly explain the control for playing a notification sound in order to notify the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or any fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To explain this, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set at the bottom. It is amplified to a master volume value that corresponds to the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is progressing according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period has elapsed, the sound that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the production schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. If the adjustment is made by shifting to the setting mode by operating the operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the sound is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It's flowing.

In this way, when the production sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when a notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound continues after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the notification sound started playing. The flow will start again from where it left off.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and for drawing on the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, it outputs the audio data on the right side as serial data using a differential method in which it becomes a plus signal and a minus signal, and sends it to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a relay around the frame. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also sent to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as serial data of a differential method that makes the left audio data a plus signal and a minus signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data between the boards ranging from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data using a differential method on both the left and right sides, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data consists of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , a green video signal, and a blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, 18 bits in total, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower two bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d sends three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The three synchronizing signals, the signal and the clock signal, are serialized into serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and can be transmitted using only one differential pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is Although the wiring length required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the Since the length of the wiring required for the second route is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. On the closed side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, etc., on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to run various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the dispensing device 830, the game balls put out by the dispensing device 830 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320. A full tank branching unit 770 is arranged which can branch and guide the put out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full.
Moreover, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is disposed, which is a unit made up of a power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 and the like that are supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc. In addition to the noise caused by the drive of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. is in an environment where it is subject to noise, etc.

Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a By adopting a differential communication system called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'', the system is not easily affected by noise. In this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects (described later) provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As mentioned above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1-pair cable consists of two wires. are not just parallel lines, but twisted pair cables. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case will be briefly described in which a parallel wire is used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects a transmitter and a receiver. For channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than that of channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, THine Electronics has developed a transmitter IC1512d for the door frame side performance provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Even if a differential communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Co., Ltd. is used to make it less susceptible to noise, this kind of hardware configuration alone is not enough to prevent electrostatic discharge from the game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise or noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a performance display is stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state. , the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered data different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is displayed as a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem in that a certain image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the side of the door frame provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is The production transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'' by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to this hardware configuration. Therefore, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) that noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and receiver. Adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls, noise intruding into the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control section 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 such that it is impossible to recognize the image at all. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the influence of noise.

In this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects (described later) provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not constructed integrally, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. This makes it possible to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings. However, if the defect that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, replace the defective door frame 3 with another door frame 3' to the main frame 4, and replace the door frame 3 with another door frame 3'. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various wirings provided on the door frame 3' side are connected electrically. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side presentation transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if serial data using the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the receiving side can cancel (remove) that noise. ) was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable to electrically connect the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 have, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed together. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. The route from the transmitter to the receiver traverses multiple relay terminal boards, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, so the video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. occurs. Therefore, in this embodiment, the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards are subjected to impedance matching.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay The terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and in the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d is sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. This forced switching circuit 1512f receives LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is input into a differential circuit 1512e after being differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. This differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period, a transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later, are installed. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit these two signals. The circuit is configured such that the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the conversion circuit 1512e. has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so the door frame side effect transmitter A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a startup screen on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and performs a demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 while waiting for a customer. During the period, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, the effect display drive board 4450 displays various serialized signals. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image to convey that fact and outputs it to the game board side performance display device 1600. The information is displayed on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notified.

Furthermore, when the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, is sent to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input to the tray unit of the door frame 3. On the other hand, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, ``A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff.") is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. ”) is outputted to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, thereby producing a notification sound from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as its center. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and maintain calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on this, the effects can be played out on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Examples of such effects include, for example, if it is December 25th, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or if it is New Year's Eve, a new year countdown will be displayed. For example, the screen to be executed may be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information if the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. There is. If the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. It includes the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Additionally, in addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second when it was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls ON/OFF or only ON of the backlight when cold cathode tube type backlights are installed in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is supposed to be done.

Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the manufacturing line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, input date and time information is inputted on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on. The manufacturing date and time are set as month, day, hour, minute and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, input date and time information, etc. , it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability).

Also, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information etc. stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time. , it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, the setting mode will be activated. The screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side production display device 1600 can be set as desired. You can adjust the brightness to The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In addition, in the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type, the game board side effect is adjusted. A decrease in brightness due to aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and calculates calendar information and time specifying the year, month, and day. The current date and time is determined by acquiring time information that specifies minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for the game board and the currently set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is acquired. This acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, In addition to acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% that is the correction information obtained for the brightness. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. , when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is the same.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or by using the peripheral information described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process The current date and time may be specified by acquiring the current time information set in the time information storage section and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a resistance value that can be varied by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak adjusts the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds to notify the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and game effects. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous gaming state.) etc.) is also played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and announcement sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and are muted. It is possible to adjust the volume from the maximum volume to the maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) using a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be performed. Although the sound becomes low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of the player.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music and sound effects, while the advertising sound In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 and By operating the press operation unit 405, the user can enter a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, the setting mode will be activated. The screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and applies the voltage to this converted value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. However, it is not reflected in the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the press operation section 405 There are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In this case, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is the clerk at the hall. However, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk may feel too low for the player, making it difficult to hear the music or sound effects, or may feel too loud for the player, making the music or sound effects too loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined period of time, the dial operation section 401 and the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 may be operated, or the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 may be performed while waiting for a customer. If you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 during the period in which the game is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if the player feels that the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is too low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, the player can use the production operation unit 400 You can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405. If you feel that the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too loud and the music or sound effects are too loud, you can use the production operation unit The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of 400.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in a state where no games are played for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted last time by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 while playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if a player who played the game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted volume is too low and has difficulty hearing the music and sound effects, the player who played the game while sitting in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time A player who plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400. If a player who has been playing the game while seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 feels that the adjusted volume is too loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who plays the game while seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 may adjust the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the press operation section 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be explained, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be explained. Note that the ground (GND) of the various boards and the ground (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

The power supply board 931 includes a power supply control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and performs launch control. The section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the batted ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied via the power supply board 931 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 volts of alternating current (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create +37V DC (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of the supplied +37V, smoothes the +37V, and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control unit 953 uses +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball to the game area 5a shown in FIG. Control is performed to adjust the driving current for launching (shooting) the ball to the firing solenoid 682, while outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls the ball sending member to send the received game ball to the batted ball firing device 650 side.

The power generation circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line, a power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power supply line, and a power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power supply line.

+5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951, as will be described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control on the payout control board 951, and It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. In other words, the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and also connects the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM in the forward direction through the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Current flows towards the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 receives +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is transferred to the payout control board 951 and then returned from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. Current is flowing towards it. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by the electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. It is now possible to do so. As a result, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V. When it runs out, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, so a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the stored contents are retained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltages supplied to each control board etc. will be explained, and then the voltages mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be explained.

Three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931, are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages, +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Furthermore, three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are also supplied to the peripheral area via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

Three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates 3.3V DC (+3.3V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, the three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V generation circuit 194a that generates +9V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components configuring the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and also to the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to a payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, this +5V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of this external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power line created by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as shown in FIG. The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. +12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of these +12V and +24V. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power outage notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b). At the same time, the signals are inputted to the door frame decoration board and the like via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to two power lines, a +12V power line and a +24V power line, thereby applying power to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line. Compared to the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp signs of a power outage such as a power outage or momentary power outage.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created on the main control board 1310. Various input/output signals to and communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control board 1310, which are shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0, as shown in FIG. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its No. 1 terminal applied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, its No. 2 terminal is grounded (GND), and the noise component is removed from its No. 3 terminal. +5V is being output. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed. smoothed.

The +5V output from the No. 3 terminal is electrically connected to the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By connecting it to , ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of this RAM with built-in main control is connected via the resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. If the circuit 1310g is unable to generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control, so that the stored contents are retained.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
+5V, whose noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (4.25V, for example), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripples are removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is output to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal, by applying +5V to each of these terminals A, B, C, and ST.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is connected to the ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency-divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b receives detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to signals, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit into which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit where the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the MPU 1310a, or operated to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after the period in which it functions as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). It has the ability to do this. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling an error that the payout control board 951 has, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control board 1310 It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing to clear the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic signal from the payout control board 951 is input to the main control board 1310. An operation signal in which the input signal becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed explanation of this point will be given later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on is a pull-up line whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR3 but also to the other end of a resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type circuit whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is configured as an open collector output type circuit whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND). The line is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input. When the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of resistors MR3, MR4, and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch 954 on. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge that.

Note that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The voltage +12V is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are set to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, general winning hole sensor 4020, and gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor, similar to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, +12V and +24V, from a power supply board 931 via a payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of +12V and +24V power outages or momentary power outages, and when it detects signs of power outages or momentary power outages, it sends a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a as well as to the payout control board. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will first be described, followed by the monitoring of +24V power failures or momentary power failures, the monitoring of +12V power failures or momentary power failures, and the output of a power failure notice signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set) which becomes a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC components) are removed and smoothed. Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 is equipped with two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. , is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the No. 2 terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is , ripples are removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR21, which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, which is grounded to the ground (GND); and the other end of the capacitor MC23, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 and MR22, and whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC23. . The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +24V, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24 which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 5 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR24, which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 and the other end of the resistor MR25 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 and MR25, and one end of the capacitor MC25 is grounded to the ground (GND). are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above, so one end is connected to the +5V power line and electricity. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is lower than the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, based on a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, it releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal that is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, a latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 inputs a logic HI signal to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latch state, the logic LOW signal enters the preset terminal PR terminal. When a signal is input, the state in which a signal with logic HI is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal is maintained. (maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, and a 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and is connected to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, receives a signal from the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, which monitors a +24V power outage or momentary power outage, and a +12V power outage, as described above. Alternatively, a signal from the No. 7 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors instantaneous power outages is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Note that the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the grounding terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a inputted to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal.At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. It is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, its logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input as a power outage warning signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal, and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the transistor MTR22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR27 but also to the other end of a resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of resistors MR27, MR28, and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. Electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR30 but also to the other end of a resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor MR33 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND), and the wiring It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a harness. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

The circuit composed of resistors MR30, MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is a switch circuit in the former stage, and the circuit composed of resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous stage transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. MTR21 turns OFF, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the latter stage is The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), and the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the previous stage transistor MTR21 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also to the other end of a resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit made up of resistors MR35, MR36, and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the output control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic is set to HI. The peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic is the same as that of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is sent to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs as a power outage warning signal has two transistors, one in the front stage and the other in the rear stage, and the logic of the outgoing power outage warning signal is the same as the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The logic is the inverse of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected to the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb has no reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to the main control board. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are installed in the main control board 1310 and the payout control board. 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, Power outage warning is performed by the logic of a power outage warning signal (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the delivery control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be explained with reference to FIG. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, output the serial data sent from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal and output the main control without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb sends the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 69 from the TXB terminal. The main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb sends the main control output circuit without a reset function as a serial serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to inputting the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal is input. A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input, etc.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a outputs, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to various displays, and various information related to games (gaming information). is outputted to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, and various information regarding the game (gaming information) is outputted from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Communication interface circuit between the main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. ing. The main circumferential serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is increased by transmitting using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed of:

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)). In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal No. 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, if power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 will be removed. +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. Since the charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a at least serially manages the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and transmission can be completed as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is increased by transmitting using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When the main cycle serial data is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI with +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main frequency serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via the transistor MTR50. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR51 but also to the other end of a resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

The circuit composed of resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is switched to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND), and the negative terminal is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is sent to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a as a main frequency serial data transmission signal. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, if +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae can be completely transmitted, and the main frequency serial data transmission signal, that is, the main frequency serial data in the middle of transmission, is interrupted. The peripheral control board 1510 is configured to reliably receive the data without missing or missing the data.

When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main circuit whose logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. This is the logic.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line, to which +12V, which is the communication voltage, is applied via the diode MD50. Measures have been taken in the event that a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h whose first auxiliary power supply is the electrolytic capacitor MC2, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that when a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs, the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being fragmented, and also to prevent the commands from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the commands being sent. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate commands from being missed immediately after a power outage occurs or at the time of a momentary power outage.

In addition, the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all converted into main serial data by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF so that transmission can be completed to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset allows the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to be converted into main cycle serial data and all function as an interface circuit. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and prevents them from being lost. You can receive the message without any problem.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control section, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the dispensing control filter circuit will be explained, and then the dispensing control section circuit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be explained.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. Terminal 1 of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which noise components have been removed.

The third terminal of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By electrically connecting them, ripples are further removed and smoothed from the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . In addition, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and the capacitor PC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in output control is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, when +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Since the current is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a current, the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the voltage VBB. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control unit circuit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as well as peripheral circuits such as a reset circuit, as shown in FIG. It mainly includes a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal, and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, we will first explain the dispensing control system reset, and then explain the dispensing control crystal oscillator, dispensing control input circuit, dispensing motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic outputs the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are activated. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VCC terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to its OE terminal, the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from its output terminal, ie, the OUT terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b receives the dispensing power outage warning signal from the door frame release switch 618 shown in FIG. 70, the main body frame release switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit includes the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, etc. . First, we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input, the circuit to which the power outage warning signal issued from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be explained. Note that the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches shown in FIG. 70, such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840, have open collector output type output terminals. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input]
The door frame release switch 618 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR21 but also to the other end of a resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR20, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as a door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21, and is also pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR24 but also to the other end of a resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and the No. 1 terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via a resistor PR26, ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR26 but also to the other end of a resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR22, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame release switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the door frame release switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

A circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame release switches. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Ru. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. The transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V side, and the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, and the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is turned on, and the door frame release signal whose logic is HI is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal inputted to PA0 and whose logic became HI is inputted to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic became HI is inputted to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the main frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR28, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR29 but also to the other end of a resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR23, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29, and also connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR31 but also to the other end of a resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, as shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

The circuit made up of resistors PR29 and PR30 and transistor PTR23 and the circuit made up of resistors PR31 and PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on and off by a detection signal from body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. The transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to an external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the main control board 1310. 1310.

In this manner, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame door open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the logic is The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, either one or both of the states in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are provided. Even in this case, the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, so the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and/or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not normally occur during gaming, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Therefore, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 may be opened. It can be determined that a situation that does not normally occur during gaming is occurring for the player who is playing the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, the door frame release switch 618 may be short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the main frame release switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, it is possible to output the main frame door release signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer edge The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

In addition, if the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (NO) switches (door frame release switch 618' and main body frame release switch 619'), , the door frame release switch 618' is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4. . The main body frame opening switch 619' is turned ON (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned OFF (disconnecting) when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame release switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 remains open from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if normally open switches are adopted as the door frame release switch 618' and the main body frame release switch 619', the main frame door release signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a disconnection. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit into which the power outage warning signal issued from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power outage warning signal issued from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR41 but also to the other end of a resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR40, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is inputted to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power outage warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a power outage warning signal issued from power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in main control board 1310.

As described above, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the two types of voltages +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage is detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage warning via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and as described above, meets the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951, either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is applied. When the conditions are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages. Sometimes, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V is When there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the power outage control board 951, so that the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage in the +12V and +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a due to the power outage notice are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. has been entered. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 has a circuit configuration as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line on the dispensing control board 951. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor through the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via a resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, whose one end is grounded (GND), and whose other end is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR41, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while when the storage space is full of stored game balls. , a signal in which the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side at the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns on the transistor PTR41 and turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a full signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and its logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns off the transistor PTR41 and turns off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and a full tank signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

Note that in this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit composed of a resistor PR45, a resistor PR46, and a transistor PTR41 via a three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that the signal is directly input to each switch circuit without any intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the out of ball detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls. When it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from paying out game balls. It is designed to be controlled. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a will control the payout motor 834 even though the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from dispensing game balls, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of stored game balls. When the above-mentioned prize ball passageway is filled with game balls upstream by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body to continue paying out game balls, the payout rotary body itself becomes unable to rotate and the payout motor 834 There may also be cases where an abnormal load is applied to the dispensing motor 834, resulting in overload and abnormal heat generation, resulting in failure, or a failure of the mechanism that transmits the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first changed to remove the noise component from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3(e). [Circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to a resistor PR49, and also to the other end of a resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 4 terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is not only electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, but also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR52 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the former stage and the latter stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage changes, and the signal is sent as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is input.

In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR44 via a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to a resistor PR55, and also to the other end of a resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to +12V in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the power supply line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR44, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as a RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts forming the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short period of time, causing a flapping phenomenon. The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 due to the operation switch 954.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, including resistors PR55, PR56, and transistor PTR44. The circuit consisting of is a switch circuit, and is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is configured to operate the RAM built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 (RAM with built-in payout control) and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and an error reset function after the power is turned on (after the period in which it functions as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). It has the following functions. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 serves as a RAM clear signal in a function that clears the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on; ), it serves as an error release signal in the error release function.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transferred to the previous stage transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42, turns on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and turns on the switch circuit in the previous stage. By pulling the voltage down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that this is not an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the transistor PTR44. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, which turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is input. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, this logic becomes LOW as shown in FIG. By inputting the RAM clear signal to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. The voltage applied to the base terminal of PTR42 turns off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF. When the voltage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that it is an instruction.

In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the 3rd and 4th terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and turning off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM whose logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period from power-on, this logic becomes HI as shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, this is an instruction to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied thereto, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is now possible to do so. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the dispensing motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is applied as the motor drive voltage to No. 3, which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60. It is supplied to the terminal and terminal No. 10, respectively, and also to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals, of the drive ICPIC 60 are grounded (GND), and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is connected to the ground (GND). A payout motor drive signal is input to certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 2, 4, 9, and 11, are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals No. 1, No. 5, No. 8, and No. 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, an excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the drive ICPIC 60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. These driving pulses are generated by switching excitation currents flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, and rotate the dispensing motor 834. Note that when the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected in front of the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, which are terminals 3 and 10. We adopted a circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, from the CR unit 6, as described above, via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal board 869. , is input, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for dispensing rental balls is possible or impossible. and outputs. As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via a resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and also to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is not only electrically connected to a resistor PR71, but also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR71 but also to the other end of a resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR70, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR72 but also to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line is connected to the power supply board 931. electrically connected to the other end of the By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70, and the switch circuit is also turned off. This will turn it on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Ru.

The circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71, and the switch circuit is also turned off. This will turn it ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via a resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via a resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72, and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a that informs that one payout operation has started or ended is outputted to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and outputs the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is applied. When the logic of the EXS signal outputted from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 through a terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC73, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is inputted to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

A PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is possible or impossible from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is applied. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC 74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is connected to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power outage warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to inputting signals such as signal 1, etc., for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is input via the payout control input circuit 952b. Detection signals from the ball outage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a outputs the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and outputs the EXS signal and PRDY signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payout control output circuit 952ca to output the payout control output circuit 952ca to send the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 transmits the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signals such as 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power outage warning signal, etc. related to the game are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The jackpot information of the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is outputted from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Outputs gaming information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor on the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784: the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number output signal from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, and starting opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a gaming hall (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. In addition, when outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hole computer outputs the number of jackpots in which there are 2 rounds (2-round jackpot information output signal). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots (number of occurrences of 15 round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or the 15-rand jackpot from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots that actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is higher. , it is not possible to determine whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Additionally, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of jackpot game states displayed on this data counter. Some do.

However, the number of jackpot game states displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of two-round jackpots, so even if the player starts playing, only two-round jackpots will occur. Sometimes it is difficult to hit the jackpot after 15 rounds. In this way, although the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, it may unnecessarily agitate the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by outputting the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal separately to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2 round jackpot, It is now possible to accurately grasp the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the highest number of jackpots actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot, and the data counter shows the 15-round jackpot. Since the number of jackpot occurrences and the number of 2-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to unnecessarily arouse the gambling spirit of players. do not have.

In this embodiment, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer during the period from when the 2nd round jackpot occurs until the end of the round, and the 15th round jackpot information output signal is also output when the 15th round jackpot occurs. The state is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2 round jackpot information output signal and the 15 round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2 round jackpot occurs, the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information are output to the hole computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period. Another method is to output the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be explained with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal, and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal does not occur during normal gaming when the player indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that indicates that a situation has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys the information, and the main prize ball number information output signal is the various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that a 15 round jackpot has occurred. The 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot has occurred, and the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot has occurred. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the special symbol is in the state of This is a signal that indicates that the fluctuating display has ended (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal indicates that the fluctuating display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The time-saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time-saving state is occurring, and the starting opening winning information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time-saving state is occurring. This is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

On the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row, as shown in FIG. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As mentioned above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to output 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls have been paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 can be determined by counting the number of game balls that have been put out.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, this signal is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. /Or it can be recognized that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal indicates that the variable display of the special symbol is finished (stopped) on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that conveys the status, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is sent from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at a time. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer displays the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and also to count the number of times and display the first special on the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols have been variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting slot winning information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , is output for 0.128 seconds every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting hole winning information output signal is input. It is possible to know that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and also to count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal has been input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered the ball.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that the 15 round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 15 round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is now output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the current state, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2nd round jackpot information output signal. As mentioned above, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2nd round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 2nd round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is now output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the current state, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As mentioned above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 ends (stops). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to know that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has ended (stopped), and by counting the number of times, the total number of fluctuating displays of the regular symbols can be counted on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can keep track of the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As mentioned above, the time saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is inputted, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that conveys that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input. Not only can it be grasped, but also the total number of times that a probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the probability variation information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have been pitched reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the pachinko machine 1 receives 10 balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is determined by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.256 (=0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the various signals output from the main control board 951 side. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, and by electrically connecting wires with connectors colored in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, it is possible to avoid accidentally connecting other wires with electricity. It is now possible to prevent unauthorized connections. Then, various signals output from the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output from the payout control board 951 side and various signals output from the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the left side of the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side can be connected. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect electrical connection of the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively connected to the hall from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. For example, in a state where game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 If a 15th round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when there are few remaining game balls, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (Furthermore, for example, if ball jamming or ball jamming occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this problem is resolved). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951 side indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10, as described above. Since it is a signal that conveys this fact every time, when it becomes impossible to pay out game balls, the payout control board 951 outputs a prize ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls the hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like may, for example, check the hose-like replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720, and identify the location of ball clogging (or, for example, By identifying the location of the ball jam or the location of the ball jam and resolving the problem, the game ball can be returned to a state where it can be paid out.

However, even if the hall clerk etc. are working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 round jackpot is completed, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk etc. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the unpaid game balls one after another, and even though the 15th round jackpot has ended and the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, the payout control board 951 Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize ball number information output signal that conveys this fact and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It happens. In this case, even though the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. A problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and is independent of whether or not the payout motor 834 is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is independent of the prize ball number information output signal outputted by the payout control board 951. As a signal, the main control board 1310 receives game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on this, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to notify the fact, and the payout control board 951 and external terminal board 784 are activated. We adopted a system in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (problems such as ball jamming in the supply nozzle, ball jamming or ball jamming in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be thrown out and the relationship can be accurately communicated to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the plate unit 320. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 outputs a positive signal and a negative signal. It is now possible to separate noise from negative signals. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator) and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, are restored (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). Note that the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal are, as described above, although the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal each output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are 8 bits. , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, so they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit as follows. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. is sent to the LCD module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f, when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame A serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is transmitted from the side production transmitter IC 1512d as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0, while the differential circuit 1512e When two differential signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, it is a request to output the LOCKN signal, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that, as described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to create a startup screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. During the period of displaying on the display device 1600 or during the period of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration using the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, it is a signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the company's differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)." Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the signal is not output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and an abnormality occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to force the output, the LOCKN signal output request data, which has a different data format from the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the information, it is possible to check whether the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND request paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the digital circuit, and the +3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. Removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminals and the GNDO terminal, which serves as the ground for this TTL output, and the voltage is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminals and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this LVDS input. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, which indicates normal operation, and when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power down. It is a terminal for transmitting information. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V power line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal uses a rising edge to transmit various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. This is a terminal for specifying either the case where the logic changes from LOW to HI or the falling edge (the logic changes from HI to LOW). The falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, by connecting the EDGE terminal to +3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal is used to instruct whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal), which will be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, no output will be possible.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and when both are grounded, the operation mode can be selected. The operation modes include normal mode and shakehand mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. In the normal operating mode, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a mode in which a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. For some reason, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, and the error occurs. If it is difficult to draw data on the door frame side effect display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510 to control the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of this fact. Output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d connects to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the performance display drive board 4450 for the door frame side effect. Send to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. Note that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door. A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to send a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2 of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from terminals D0 to D17, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D0 to D5 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D6 terminals to D11 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D12 to D17 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for these red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected and are connected to the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. First, we will explain the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout that is sent from the main control board to the payout control board, and then we will explain the various commands that are sent from the main control board to the peripheral control boards, and the commands that the main control board receives. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1) drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to dispense the upper tray 321 and lower tray 322, which are storage trays. If the machine that pays out game balls as rental balls is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), the main control board The prize ball commands sent from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H In command 1EH, 2 prize balls are specified, and in command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device that directly dispenses game balls as rental balls to storage trays such as an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322) are installed adjacent to the gaming hall (hall), and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball rental machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(b), the payout control board 951 is Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to the , command 20H specifies 1 prize ball, command 21H specifies 2 prize balls, ..., command 2EH specifies the prize ball. Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

Note that as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H specifies self-check. If the sending side does not receive an ACK signal from the receiving side for a predetermined period of time after sending a command, it can send command 30H and check whether an ACK signal is received. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands have a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, they have a status indicating the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), It consists of a mode that shows variations of effects and has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, special figure 2 synchronized performance related, jackpot related, power on, general pattern synchronized performance related, normal electric role performance related, notification display, and status. It is classified into Display, and Others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production related]
Special figure 1 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special symbol 1 synchronized performance start, special symbol 1 designation, special symbol 1 synchronized performance end, and state designation during fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronized performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronized performance, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. Note that the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state which is a low probability state and indicates a time saving state, a high probability time saving state which is a high probability state and indicating a time saving state, and a low probability time saving state which indicates a time saving state which is a high probability state. It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a state but not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal gaming state, low probability non-time-saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than that in the normal gaming state. By shortening the time for which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner compared to the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) and displaying them in a static manner in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery results, the normal lottery results in the regular lottery to be described later at a predetermined time can be changed. The number of stop displays is increased compared to the non-time saving state, and the period in which the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 are opened and closed is lengthened compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state). A state in which it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls into the second starting port 2004 shown (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state) , the second starting port 2004 is increased by making more decisions as to whether or not to open/close the pair of movable pieces, and when opening/closing the pair of movable pieces, lengthening the period of opening/closing of the pair of movable pieces. This is a state in which the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls is increased.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 variation starts, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts, and the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts. The performance end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production related]
Special figure 2 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This command is composed of commands named "Start special pattern 2 synchronized performance," Specify special pattern 2, and End special pattern 2 synchronized performance regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronized production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , Special figure 2 synchronized performance end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 synchronized performance.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 variation starts, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variable time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Figure 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display, jackpot 1 closing display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and small jack opening. It consists of commands named , small win release display, small win count display, and small win ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th opening jackpot opening command command starts during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting slot unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The big winning hole 1 closing display command is used to indicate when the big winning hole 2005 is opening or starting to open for the Nth round. The winning opening 2005 is closed between rounds or has started closing), and the grand winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (as shown in FIG. 69). The jackpot ending command is for instructing the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is for telling the jackpot number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening 2005, which is detected by the count sensor 4005. This is an instruction to display symbol information.

In addition, the small win opening command is for instructing the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is for instructing the opening of the small win. The small win count display command is used to instruct the small win medium/large prize opening winning presentation (when the count sensor 4005 detects a game ball that enters the large prize opening 2005 during the small win). The small win ending command instructs the start of the small win ending.

Regarding the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the jackpot 1 is opened (of the starting port unit 2100). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the grand prize opening 1 is closed (when the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 starts closing), The big winning hole 1 count display command is used when the big winning hole 1 is opened and when the count changes to the big winning hole 1 (when the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005) is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot opening is opened (when the jackpot opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). ) will be sent to.

In addition, the small win opening command is sent at the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is sent when the small win is opened (when the large win opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small winning), The small win count display command is sent when a small hit, medium or large prize opening is won (when the game ball that entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is sent. , sent when the small winning ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named "state at power-on" and "main control return destination at power-on." These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used to control the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, but also when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ), information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state mentioned above. , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is used to determine which work's copyright it corresponds to, and what kind of game specifications (for example, the probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specifications in which the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, there are also game specifications in which probability fluctuations occur with the number of changes in the special symbol being limited (for example, 30 or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine includes the series code to identify the machine type among the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, and the series code to identify the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications that when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes of special symbols) It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which this occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or recovered from a power outage or instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Futu synchronization related]
The normal pattern synchronization performance related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Regarding the device 1402, it is composed of commands named ``Start of ``Fuji pattern synchronization performance'', ``Family pattern designation'', ``Full pattern synchronization performance end'', and ``Change state designation''. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern synchronization performance start command instructs to start the general pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization performance end command is for instructing the end of the general figure synchronization performance, and the fluctuation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. As mentioned above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state which is a low probability state and indicates a time saving state, and a high probability time saving state which is a high probability state and indicating a time saving state. A low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the common symbol synchronization performance start command is sent at the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the common symbol designation command is sent immediately after the beginning of the common symbol synchronization performance, and the common symbol synchronization performance end command is sent. , is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric effect related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named winning opening, general power open display, and general power opening ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general power opening command is for instructing the start of normal power opening, and the general power open display command is for starting the normal power opening (when the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107). state, or when to expand), and the general ending command is for instructing the start of the ending per general drawing.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal power opening command is sent at the start of the normal power opening, and the normal power release display command is transmitted when the general power is released (a pair of movable pieces move left and right by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). (when expanding in the direction), and the normal map ending command is transmitted when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display classification includes commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 and the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 even though there is no jackpot (even though it is not a jackpot). When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification), the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical It instructs to start connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, sent to the main control board 1310, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. 4005, etc., to start displaying a disconnection/short circuit abnormality. This command instructs the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when this occurs.

Further, the door open command is executed when the door frame 3 is moved relative to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door is in an open state, the door open notification is instructed, and the door frame close command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. This command instructs the door open notification to end when the door is open. On the other hand, the main body frame release command is executed when the main body frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame release switch 619 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main body frame is in the open state, the main body frame open notification is instructed, and the main body frame close command causes the main body frame 4 to close to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when the main body frame is in the closed state.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during a jackpot (when the conditional device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the dispensing control board 951 when sending a command to The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door is detected to be open (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is sent when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body frame is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when body frame closure is detected (when the body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display classification consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed explanations of these will be described later. . In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. In addition to setting the status, the received command is also set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7*H" as additional information to these received commands. This formats the command into a command with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed, the error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , and when the frame status changes. Note that these formatted frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned "8*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). This is used to inspect various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is sent at times other than RAM clear when the main control board is powered on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the power is restored from a power outage or an instantaneous power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the power-on processing on the main control side, which will be described later, is performed. The test command is executed and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
Other classifications include, as shown in Figure 90, starting opening winning, variation reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-read effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting hole winning command instructs the start of the starting hole winning performance, and is the command to start the performance when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002. , and the start of the performance when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the shortening working state to the variable shortening non-working state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is, 0 to 4 special symbols 1 are reserved (game balls enter the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to convey the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls held), and the special symbol 2 memory command is to notify the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol memory command is for normal symbols 1 pending 0 to 4. This is to convey the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and which have not yet been used to display fluctuating normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 (pending number). Yes, the special symbol 1 memory pre-read production command pre-reads and makes the special symbol 1 pending before the special symbol 1 pending is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance command is used to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance that notifies a preview of the display result on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the function display unit 1400. This is to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance which pre-reads and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation before the special symbol is used for variable display on the device 1405.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting hole winning command is transmitted at the time of starting hole winning (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the outage stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is , in the case of "high probability N times", the special symbol 1 memory command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the failure stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times has been consumed, and the special symbol 1 memory command is used to change the number of balls on hold when special symbol 1 is activated. (When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used in the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first starting It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations is used to display a variable special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of reservations decreases. , the special symbol 2 memory command is executed when the number of reserved balls changes when the special symbol 2 is activated (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol). When there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. The normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls changes when the normal symbol 1 is activated (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal symbol on the function display unit 1400 is used for display). In a state where there is a pending number that has not yet been used for the normal symbol fluctuation display on the display 1402, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number, the normal symbol display 1402 The special symbol 1 memorization pre-reading production command is sent when the number of reserved balls decreases when the normal symbol is displayed fluctuatingly. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading production command is sent when the special symbol 2 activates and the number of reserved balls increases (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). sent when the number increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the starting hole winning command is used when a starting hole is won (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002), When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit audio to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are designed to not only provide audio notifications but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, some other pachinko machines have specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the starting opening winning command, but does not notify the player by sound from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 that the main control board 1310 receives will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 includes commands named frame status 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame status 2. The priority order is set in the order of frame state 2.

Frame status 1 commands (equivalent to error occurrence commands) include out of bulb, full tank, 50 or more in stock, connection error, and CR not connected, and if the bulb is out, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to the value 1, when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to the bit 1 (B1), when there are 50 or more in stock, the value 1 is set to the bit 2 (B2), and when there is a connection error, the value 1 is set to the bit 1 (B1). Bit 3 (B3) is set to a value of 1, and if CR is not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to a value of 1. In bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value of 1 is set for B5, a value of 0 is set for B6, and a value of 0 is set for B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) includes ball gumming, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. In ball gumming, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, and the payout detection sensor In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the "dispensing detection sensor error" indicates whether a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. A "retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been repeatedly performed due to retry operations. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command includes a ball being removed, and a value of 1 is set in bit 0 (B0) when the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed, the error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed. is sent when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be explained.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include random numbers for jackpot determination, which are used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, and random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state does not occur. Random numbers for reach determination to be used for determination and fluctuations for use in determining the fluctuation display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot symbol used to determine a jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a jackpot gaming state, and this jackpot symbol. The random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of the random number for the symbol, which is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the small win game state. Random numbers for small winning symbols used to determine small winning symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are prepared for use in determining initial values of the random numbers for small winning symbols. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a normal symbol hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8, and a random number used to determine the initial value of this normal symbol hit determination random number. A random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol hit determination, a random number for a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, etc. for use in determining a fluctuating display pattern of a normal symbol fluctuatingly displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Provided.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for jackpot determination are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at power-on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is set by the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. retrieves the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. The system is such that the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is set in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used if the ID code is stored in the memory, and the ID code is saved by executing initial value derivation processing when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above is taken to prevent the data from being analyzed.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous power outage occurs at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate part 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register (described as "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT1310af starts and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can operate normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clearing process (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. This power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltages between +24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltages between +12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage does not occur, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca with its logic set to LOW. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be canceled until the latched state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electricity clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done. The determination as to whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power outage warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, with its logic set to HI, and sent to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches a state in which the logic is LOW and is input to its preset terminal PR terminal, it outputs a power outage warning signal from its output terminal 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. Depends on whether or not. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it does not instruct to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program is capable of executing a RAM clearing process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. state (gaming control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to the value 1 when the game information is to be deleted, and to the value 0 when the game information is not to be deleted. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 is activated (boot I am waiting until In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. If it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal is input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the gaming information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the gaming information is not to be erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the gaming information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM for when the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device), and then returns to normal operation.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. will be changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) will be successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing gaming information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program erases all of the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. The main control MPU 1310a also performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM and erases gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. If the process has not ended normally, a fixed numerical value range of a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a and updates a random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Perform initial value derivation processing to always derive the same fixed value from , and set this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining normal symbol hit described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, at a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation settings for the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a is used to update, by hardware, a random number for jackpot determination, which is used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to the game. At the same time, the hardware random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a predetermined random number circuit is generated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and once all values within the predefined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predefined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and when this latch signal is input, the main control The random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hardware random number latch register built into the built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a jackpot determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program performs reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power restored) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out game information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this game information. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission settings (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program executes an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing has started. This will restrict the execution of the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the receipt (normal operation control means). As described above, based on the concept of time sharing, the main control program uses the detection signal inputted with the operation of the operation switch 954 as the error release navigation command for a predetermined period of time from the power-on as described above. The RAM clearing process is triggered by the input (gaming control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clearing process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( (game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for canceling error notification accompanying an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error cancellation section), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred regarding the payout operation, is used instead as a game storage section for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process to start initialization, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the game It can function as an operation section for canceling an error that occurs regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is as shown in FIG. , the drive signal being output to the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is used to charge the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The electric charge is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is restored. The main control side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing (described later) occurs and the pachinko island equipment is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Start counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts up (boots), and immediately before the waiting time reaches that waiting time. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, the electric charge charged in the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7ms, step S42 The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that even if the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may become impossible to complete the main control side power-off process in the power-on process. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage are compared in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall clerk, etc., and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication of the hall clerk's intention to clear the RAM. ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power outage warning signal is input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and to prevent variations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22), the power outage warning signal is input. (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off processing, which is composed of the processing from step S58 to step S68 and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value stored in the checksum calculation in step S64) match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM using the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while performing the power-on processing on the main control side at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Fig. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby processing in step S22 Immediately following step 24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating this determination, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. By not being able to start time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by preventing the control flow from proceeding to the control flow in which interrupt permission is set and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, which will be described later. This system was adopted. In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment, there is a part that is covered by software so that the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and a part that is covered by the main control side power supply. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information) are divided into two parts: a part covered by hardware to ensure that the timeout process is completed and the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. This makes it possible to reliably prevent game information) from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to transmit the message, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. There is. Here, first, if the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. A problem in the case where the command to be sent at power-on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not reserved in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 and a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker When the solenoid 2108 starts to be driven, the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 to the open state.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round of the jackpot game state it is in at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 sends a message to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107 when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot gaming state, for example. From the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, to start closing the big prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds). When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state by transmitting it to the board 1510, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and closes the jackpot 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107. The main control board 1310 sends a command to display the opening of the grand prize opening for the fifth time to instruct the state to transition from the state to the open state (that is, to start opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. becomes.

Also, for example, a screen may be displayed that informs the player that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded). When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that informs the player in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 updates the work area of the RAM with built-in main control in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the settings, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven. The movable piece transitions from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it expands in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and returned, the game state becomes such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen at all on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform that the player is present. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Despite this, when the power is restored, a screen instructing a game (that is, a screen instructing a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a result, there was a problem in that the player did not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2107. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (in other words, a screen indicating what round it is). ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but in a jackpot game state, when the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. A screen that conveys a message to the player (for example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the grand prize opening.'') It is possible to display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is placed into the big prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, while the game state is such that game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored. When the main control board 1310 returns, a screen informing you that the starting port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction (for example, a message saying "The movable pieces are expanded") is displayed. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 that tells the player, "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start opening." can be displayed to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. will be stored in the state. As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, first a power-on state command is transmitted, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the power-on state command is executed as shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operating switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in the figure is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, there is a power outage or momentary power outage that occurs and the power is (including when the power is restored), the state is restored in any of the above-mentioned low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state (probability and time saving state). It consists of information instructing whether to play the pachinko machine, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be explained when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of a pachinko machine is determined when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), and what kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a limited number of changes in special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) is such that a probability change occurs when the game is played 30 times or 70 times.

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist.
Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line. Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send the power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are sent. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine. As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the symbols and the ordinary electric accessory control process, the payout control board 951 also sends various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payer has been received normally is input, time management is performed such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects the detection signal from the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and the game ball that entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 is detected. A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 which detects fraudulent activity using a magnet shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. It is stored in the input information storage area as . In addition, a detection signal from a first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 classified into others is stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. , and the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning a prize hole sensor 4020,4020 which detects the game ball which entered the general winning a prize hole 2001,2201, and the count sensor 4005 which detects the game ball which entered the big winning a prize hole 2005 A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate section 2003 are read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ), each is read again a second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if the game ball did not enter.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program receives detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003. By performing two readings in total, one for comparing the first to third readings, and one for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to eliminate the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since false detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020, 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003 are Reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this win/loss random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot symbols and random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the jackpot symbol and the random number for the small prize symbol are random numbers related to the win/loss determination (jackpot determination), their respective counters count up only every time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol in step S56 in the power-on process on the main control side (main process on the main control side) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and the prize balls are paid out as prize balls. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and it is stored as output information in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is created. Since the number of balls has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951. Or, if the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A self-check command is created and sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as prize balls, the exceeding number of balls will be added to the number of balls that will be played next time. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is calculated. When the number of balls has reached that point, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program includes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program successfully receives these various commands as payer serial data, the main control program stores information to notify the payout control board 951 to that effect in the main control built-in RAM as output information. Store in area. In addition, the main control program formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands categorized by status display in Figure 90 (frame status 1 command, error clearing). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is being input when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the jackpot hole 2005), etc. , a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the built-in main control ROM. (to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), and to update the random number for jackpot symbols.The value of the counter is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination as to whether or not a probability variation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of hitting the jackpot changes to a high probability (when the probability changes) that is set higher than when it is normal (low probability). In this embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) is set to a value of 32,668 to 32,767 for low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas for high probability, the value is 31,768. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the When determining whether or not the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the ROM matches the jackpot judgment value, a random number for jackpot judgment (that is, a random number obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) is used. This is done depending on whether or not it is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so that the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, and is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. do. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified into jackpot related as shown in FIG. A closing display command, a jackpot opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a is set to light up the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15. In some cases, the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the status display 1401 is set to indicate whether or not a fluctuation has occurred in a predetermined color, and the output is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. to be memorized.

This gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It looks like this. For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is placed in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, if gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of gate information storage, respectively, and the second section of gate information storage and the third section of gate information storage become empty areas. Here, if gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is stored so that the total number of stored gate information is reserved and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and from this read gate information, the random number value for normal symbol hit determination is extracted and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece is to be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the pair of movable pieces expands in the left and right direction, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It's in a gaming state. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as the transmission information. In addition to storing it in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the above-mentioned output information is set. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role performance shown in FIG. is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and also sets the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable piece, and stores it in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit judgment taken out does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is performed based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. Decide on the display pattern, create various commands related to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control program successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 951 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information, the main control program sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951. When in the jackpot game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as time saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signal, etc., are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, this main control program reads transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands categorized as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, created in the main control side timer interrupt process that is this routine, and various commands categorized as related to special figure 2 synchronized production. Commands, various commands related to jackpots (for example, big winning based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected. 90 Various commands categorized as notification displays (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) and various commands categorized as status displays (frame status 1 command, error clear), as shown in Navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands, to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order as main serial data. As described above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is possible to transfer the data to the register 41aea and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data. When the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, in order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In this case, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , as main cycle serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes a status command at power-on, and then status, which constitutes a main control return destination command at power-on, The mode and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read out from the game backup information in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, and the game information is read out according to this game information. In some cases, various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (presentation control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. 89, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is now possible to output to. In other words, the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310 in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status commands and power-on main status commands classified as power-on in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, the power-on state command is generated as main cycle serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on. The effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage is restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the player from seeing this state and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on process. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command at power-on and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be created. Only the following information is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of this routine, the power-on status command is configured as main cycle serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control section power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the production control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the commands shown in FIGS. 89 and 90 from the main control board 1310. , it becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands related to control of game performance and commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ), and also compare the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and compare the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. The performance backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms), and the performance backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1ms), are compared, and the compared content is When they match, the production backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr), with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms), is copied back to Bank0 (1ms) to perform a hot start, but if the compared content does not match (i.e. , when there is a mismatch), a value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In addition, in the hot start/cold start determination process, regarding the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the performance backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is ) to perform a hot start, and if the compared contents do not match (in other words, they do not match), the value is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to zero-clear it. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and adjusts the brightness of the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. This includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. When lighting, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness is adjusted to the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on the light. In addition, in the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. This is no longer done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent this from happening.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is used for peripheral control, which will be described later, to be executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Furthermore, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK to send 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Start transmitting data one bit at a time.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port is The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port, the lamp drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and Transmission of 1 byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the panel side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Also here, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 1511cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and sends the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the first address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial number via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port's transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to transfer the data of the transmission buffer register written to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data 1 bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger every time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port occurs (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is sent one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and then transfers and writes to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for frame decoration driving amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfers the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and starts transmitting 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed using the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Based on the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It will be decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the changes.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. It is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. Output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects are produced from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the multiple LEDs and the multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the sound data output processing described later. The system is designed to prioritize the synchronization of music, sound effects, etc., and synchronization.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When this audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data on the right side is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data using a differential method that has a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with plus and minus signals. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and announcement sounds are also played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the first light emission data is selected for the light emission of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate the mode.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are specified. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which number of sound command data from the first one of the sound command data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used is to instruct other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the originally intended drive data.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the production control program uses information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analysis means). The production control program generates schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emitting mode generation, and sound based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the performance control program is configured such that the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, the number of pending normal symbols, etc. Normal symbol memory command to identify (0 to 4 pieces), symbol synchronization performance start command to instruct the start of symbol synchronization performance, symbol memory command output when the starting pending number changes, large winning opening 2005 The big winning hole 1 count display command (big winning hole count command) that is output every time a game ball is accepted, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, (command analysis means) and recognizes the current gaming state. In addition, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, this production control program executes a command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing such as a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , the production control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands include, as shown in Fig. 89, various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and various commands classified as power-on. various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , the door frame close command, the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error cancellation command), and the frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as other.

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified as the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 sends screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. that are set to the abnormality display mode for executing abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed from the highest priority registered in advance, and will automatically transition to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. I can do it.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, the production control program classifies the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side A visual warning is given to the outside using the effect display device 1600 (the effect device), a door frame side effect display device 460 (the effect device), and a lamp (the effect device), and an auditory warning is given to the outside using the speaker ( error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program stores it in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hours, minutes, and seconds, which are the time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and the calendar information, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, is updated based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating a light emission mode. Game board side light emitting data SL- for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side effect display device. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source to output the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated, and the volume adjustment volume is The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into 7 parts and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and board volume 0 to board volume The volume is set so that the volume increases toward volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound source is built into the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, sound effects, and other performance sounds will be low. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is cheating, a notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of the player. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music and sound effects, while the advertising sound In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program transfers the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Included in Bank0 (1fr) are a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac stores the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, as the performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to Bank0 (1fr). ), all of the content stored at the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is sequentially copied one byte at a time, starting from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1fr) in order from the first address.

In addition, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac transfers the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as the performance backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), all of the content stored at the end address of 1511 db is sequentially copied starting from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db, one byte at a time (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 1511dc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the second backup area 1511dc). Copy everything in order starting from the first address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the production control program sets the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. 95 is being executed; Each is set to a value of 0 when the execution of the process is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady state processing is forcibly canceled midway through and starts execution from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the steady state processing is canceled in step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the steady processing of the peripheral control unit is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the input processing (peripheral control steady state processing), the completion of the peripheral control steady state processing is indicated by the peripheral control V blank in this routine. By transmitting the signal to the signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the judgment in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not the process has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes approximately 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electrical drive source schedule data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is first read. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Transfers the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, starts transmitting 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and transfers the data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Continuous transmission is performed using the motor serial I/O port.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board. When this serial I/O port serial transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and solenoid is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 73 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it at the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the gaming board side. Start transmitting byte data one bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, interrupts the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port) whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port occurs. The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, Transmission of one byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of failures and the occurrence state of failures between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the door frame side effect display device 460 drawing status can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, which are included in Bank0 (1ms) that is the backup target. , and the effect information (1ms) stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as effect backup information (1ms) around Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ), all of the contents stored at the end address of the backup area 1511cb are sequentially copied one byte at a time starting from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1ms) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1ms) in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the main control board 1310 starts transmitting various commands as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. One byte (8 bits) of information is loaded into the reception buffer using the serial I/O port for the board, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral One byte of information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data, which is the mode. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. If the sum values are not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value of the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the sum value (sum value), and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to main circumference serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise. be able to.

In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216), and this routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the 1st byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main serial data are the received command storage area. 1511cac is stored in the peripheral control section reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used as if the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and it stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the status allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period has exceeded the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received. In some cases, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is continued as is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal is executed when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. Interrupt processing will be explained. When this peripheral control section power outage notice signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If it is determined that no power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input, this routine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1320 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input.If the power outage warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated, while the power outage warning signal is input. If a signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

If the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are turned off, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off, etc. in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for only a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) the received command is stored.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in a predetermined byte (e.g. , 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the request source of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify to copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in the received command storage area 1511cac to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) is contiguous by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Then, all the received command storage areas included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied in order from the first address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The received command storage area is sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a specified value. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially copied starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs clear signals to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again and it is determined whether the power outage warning signal is being input. In other words, it continues to be determined indefinitely whether or not a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input. By continuing to make the determination infinitely in this way, when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Note that when the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, if the determination in step S1312 is that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) continues in the infinite loop, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that peripheral control is performed immediately before the power outage occurs. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is now interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as part of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact.Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made because when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal data). This data is used to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the most significant bits B7←B6, B6← B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 1 (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal read out in step S1500 is Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is changed to the least significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. The bits are shifted one bit at a time from B7 to the most significant bit B7.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 It is determined whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that this is the case, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, and specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation judgment value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and then exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 151 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side presentation transmitter IC1512d prepared for the event and the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the presentation display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by the value 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it has been determined in step S1522 that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored. In some cases, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the value of the instant or immediately before the power outage.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative count of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times has reached the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is interrupted when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. This is a flag that indicates whether a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the current state is in the current state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored. At times, the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is restored to the value of the moment or immediately before a power outage.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a connection recovery process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, which is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether or not screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). This determination is used to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation in the scheduler update process. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so while it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the screen generation schedule When the performance has been completed in accordance with the data and all pointer updates have been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. Note that this determination includes the period during which the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a demonstration while waiting for a customer. It is possible to judge whether or not it is the current period based on the schedule data for screen generation, and display the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period when the player is waiting for a customer and a demonstration is being performed using the game board-side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. When the period is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration (when it is simply in a state of waiting for a customer), This routine ends immediately.

In step S1540, when the performance is progressing in accordance with the screen generation schedule data, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is immediately terminated, while in step S1540, the performance is progressing in accordance with the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed and all pointer updates have been completed, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to Counts up the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then the While the routine ends, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even 1. If so, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, and the transmitter This flag indicates whether or not there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.The value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby causing the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to The transmitter IC1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. This is to restore the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the communication error display process is performed. (step S1548), and this routine ends. In this communication error display process, in order to reliably notify that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs processing to draw on. For example, a message saying "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff." is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal. As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing the process of displaying on the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper pan-side liquid crystal display device.") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker etc. installed in the door frame 3. Perform flowing processing. At this time, a process may be performed in which all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are turned on.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be explained using the timing chart of FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. A variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by part steady processing, etc., and the main control side of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 is performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 through the main process or the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94, or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting hole 2004 becomes a "jackpot", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 will be from 1 round to 15 rounds. There will be a total of 15 rounds, and in each round, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and each time one game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is determined by the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that a left decorative pattern is displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a central decorative pattern is displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right side decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined period of time, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image is visible, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side of the area to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative symbols rotate from the upper center side of the display area to the lower center side of the display area, and the right side decorative symbols rotate from the upper right side of the display area to the lower right side of the display area. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a fluctuating manner as if they were floating, and the left side decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the stopped and displayed left side decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern. The left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to be displayed variably and then stops on the first special symbol display 1403 or second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern, which are started to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 selects a first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery results, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command to display the game board side shown in FIG. 8 as shown in FIG. 103. When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen of the screen data arranged in chronological order forming the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to instruct which screen data to output to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source.In other words, when the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, the screen data is updated in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation. Since the production is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is not started. Until the stop display is displayed, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in this connection recovery process causes the routine to be forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT is kept in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 from when the left side decorative symbols, the center decorative symbols, and the right side decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner until they are stopped and displayed. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (in other words, between the transmitter and Even if the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and receiver The process for recovering the connection between A problem has occurred with the side LCD display.Please call a store employee.'' message is not displayed, indicating that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display.

When the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative symbols, central decorative symbols, and right decorative symbols in a variable manner and stops displaying them (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. In the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the process advances to step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has been determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated and the communication check counter is When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S1546, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), In other words, if a problem definitely occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1548, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver If there is a problem with the connection to ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, even once, and if there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, so that between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred with the LCD display on the upper tray.Please call the store staff.'' The process is to display and notify the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped, and then the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner again. During the interval period until the start of the game, the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are activated. A state in which a problem has occurred at least once in the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be the same does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, thereby reducing the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while performing processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing communication error display processing, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Processing is performed to display and notify the user of the message "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff."

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left side decorative pattern and the center decorative pattern , and until the right side decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if the connection recovery process is repeated, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is disabled, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner, and then are stopped, and then the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed again. During the interval period until the start of the fluctuating display of symbols, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 is activated, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is disabled. This is because the combination result of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that is most interesting to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can judge whether or not a jackpot game state in which a jackpot is awarded will occur, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Then, until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is distorted due to the influence of noise and may not be correct. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, instead of interrupting the performance midway through and performing processing to restore the state to a state where it can be drawn correctly, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 displays the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and By stopping and displaying the right-side decorative pattern, the information most interesting to the player is completed.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the period during which the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on, and the period when the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in the customer waiting state. This is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period of execution, the information is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the switching circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is sent to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and sends the effect to the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a malfunction has occurred in the production display drive board 4450. A notification image (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the LCD display on the upper tray. Please call the store staff.") is displayed on the game board side performance display device by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and also outputs a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460. When no signal is input, it can be determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Then, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the hall clerk etc. of this by executing a notification process. Hall clerks and the like can very easily check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before a player plays a game, and this check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 can be discovered without much effort.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that fact. Specifically, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, so it is used for door frame side production. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. In order to notify that the rendered drawing data is abnormal data, a LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to the door indicating that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is to be started being transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can early discover a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the defect. It looks like this. Therefore, by discovering and resolving the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. If reception cannot be received normally, the production control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. The generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. It is now possible to display and notify users. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 of the malfunction to that effect. Since the player can notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc. who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko hall clerk, etc. will be able to notify the pachinko machine 1 of the occurrence of the malfunction. You can begin work to resolve the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and resolution of the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period). If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the side production receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the state is in a state of A connection confirmation signal is sent to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , it is possible to continue outputting repeatedly. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game is not progressing, communication problems can be resolved.

Then, during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period), the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450. If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is activated to enable the LOCKN signal and eliminate communication problems during image communication. The door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d sends a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 of the start of transmission, until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While the output continues to be repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to play the game. When the process starts again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d performs a predetermined process. It is possible to stop sending the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. It looks like this. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a problem-resolving signal, only during the period when the game starts and stops and is not progressing, it is possible to move in the direction of resolving the communication problem. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing and stops displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. While repeatedly outputting the connection confirmation signal only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the performance (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460, Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (every time the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period) begins), it is possible to move the game toward resolution.

According to the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 controls the first starting port 2002, which is a starting area provided in the gaming area 5a, and the second starting port 2002, which is a starting area provided in the gaming area 5a, when a game ball is fired by a ball launcher 650 toward a game area 5a defined on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are installed.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information regarding games even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information regarding payout even after the power is shut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the information regarding the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased The RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and if the operation is performed within the period from when the power is turned on to when the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed, the RAM clear signal with the built-in payout control is A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as a RAM clear signal for erasing stored payout information to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor, and a main control side power supply shown in FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. If the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process in step S16 in the power-on process is performed (or the period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on), the error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830 is canceled. This system also has an error release function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error release signal to the payout control microprocessor 952a without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a that is the game control microprocessor. .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information regarding is outputted to the main control MPU 1310a which is the gaming control microprocessor, and the payout control unit is operated within the period from power-on to the power-on processing of the payout control unit, A RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on) has elapsed, the dispensing device 830 An error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to cancel the generated error to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating one operation switch 954, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error release function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. This is a circuit into which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit into which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be explained. do.

Attempting to gain unfair profits by manipulating the flow of game balls as desired by, for example, bringing a magnet (e.g., a permanent magnet or electromagnet) close to a game ball that has been hit into the gaming area of a game machine. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming activities and suppress them by means of light emitting means, audio warnings, etc., magnetic detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and performance will be summarized below.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as patterns, various background images, text, characters, etc.) based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members that contribute to the performance (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control processing, first and second starting opening winning processing is performed. In this first and second starting hole winning processing, a judgment is made as to whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the starting hole, and when it is determined that a winning has been won, processing such as increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. It will be done.

When the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, if the processing flag is 0, a fluctuation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of pendings is 1 or more, the pending jackpot judgment is completed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (wins/losses, its type, etc.) is memorized, and then , updates the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing are completed, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern ( After determining and setting the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the process flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, the changing process is executed. In this process during fluctuation, a timer monitors the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process, and based on the timeout, the special symbol is displayed in fluctuation on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. to stop. After this, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is not a jackpot (loss). , update the processing selection flag to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, when the first and second starting opening winning processes are completed, if the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game aspect (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when a jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the conditional device, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the gaming status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as the variation patterns. The fluctuation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol, and also determines the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. This can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for jackpot variation, a variation pattern for losing reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The jackpot variation is a variation that is performed when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the production display device 1600, after the reach production, the variation display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the jackpot symbol is finally fixed and stopped. The performance to be performed is executed. The missed reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. A performance is performed in which the fluctuating display of the symbols is finally discontinued and the symbols are displayed as fixed and stopped. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is not determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. , an effect is performed in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the symbols are finally stopped and displayed as fixed. Further, the variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified whether the variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the result of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible to generate such a variation pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 causes a fluctuating pattern of decorative symbols to appear on the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, as well as changes effect displays related to expectations (backgrounds and pending images), Control is executed to change the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the rear-down movable production unit 3100.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114).

Now, if the main control program moves to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the above-mentioned process as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (YES in step S5231), a first jackpot determination random number is obtained from the random number counter. A first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring a second jackpot determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R definite variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the grand prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times. Control to 8R jackpot gaming state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to create a 16R jackpot game state,
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R guaranteed variable jackpot B", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) ) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times and controlled to an 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) The game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) in which the game is closed after opening is repeated twice.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed in a situation where the time-saving control is executed, and it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed in a situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In this respect, in the left-handed game, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol in response to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a maximum of 8 rounds. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 50% (allocation rate of the winning type). ), the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained when winning a jackpot, such as a 16-round long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained). , so that when the player is controlled to shift to the right-handed batting state, he can expect to win a larger amount of prize balls than when he is in the left-handed batting state.

In the jackpot control process, in order to start the opening control of the big winning hole 2005, processes such as starting the operation of the conditional device, resetting the variation counter described later, etc. are performed.

In the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot 2005 as described above, as shown in FIG. Executes flag and time saving flag setting processing.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on Probable Variable Jackpot, 8R Probable Variable Jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) shown in FIG. will be reset.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time saving control (high probability time saving state) is performed after the jackpot game state ends. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol after the variation counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is updated (for example, counting up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B). Reset when starting a jackpot gaming state based on.

In addition, if the jackpot execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as a process of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the control is in a small win gaming state is set. Determine whether As a result, if the small winning execution flag is set, a small winning control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, a process is performed in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the jackpot control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big winning hole 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, the time saving flag, etc. Each set process such as a number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the jackpot determination.

Further, if the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for second jackpot determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in a pending state is not lost (as long as the value of the second special pending number counter is not "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be held continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right-handed hit) in the time saving state (high probability time saving state). Only the lottery (judgment process) for the two random numbers for jackpot determination can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, it is limited to those where the special pattern game (symbol variation) using the second special pattern (second special pattern) is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (first special pattern). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which game balls enter (pass) the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, then as shown in FIG. In step S5241, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first inputs each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and sets the number of reservations of the first special symbol to its maximum value based on this counter value. (upper limit value) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (judgment process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure pre-reading process for executing the first special figure side pre-reading effect is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the first special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required on the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read effect and the content of the effect (information regarding wins and losses for pre-read judgment, information regarding symbol types for pre-read judgment) information, information regarding the variation pattern number for pre-read determination, etc.) and stores it in the corresponding storage area as information to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. In step S5251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first inputs each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, second random number for reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol). A random number (random number for second variable display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and sets the number of reservations of the second special symbol to its maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether the value is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, a second special figure pre-reading process for executing a pre-reading effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the second special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning/losing information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command is issued to instruct the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First pending number designation command 0 to 4) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). commands (second pending number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. This program module differs only in the random numbers and tables used for determination, so only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for jackpot determination corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read random number for jackpot determination, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. The first special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. It is executed in accordance with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern, and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed regarding the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process of step S5302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variable display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is Random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuating display of symbols is stopped (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first fluctuating display pattern random number) are first-in first-out. Shift operation is performed in the manner of (First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), Random numbers extracted according to occurrences are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol retention storage area a to second special symbol retention storage area d), and is responsive to the occurrence of a starting prize to the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers extracted are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Thereafter, as the process of step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot has been won, based on the read first jackpot determination random number. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non time saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the high probability state shown in FIG. Select a jackpot determination table (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and select The jackpot determination table is compared with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is determined for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) when the gaming state is low probability. (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high probability jackpot judgment table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a probability jackpot determination table. Then, in the low probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random numbers, 204 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The first jackpot judgment random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the first jackpot judgment random number of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating the loss (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the random number for jackpot determination (second random number for jackpot determination) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. In the referenced low-probability jackpot judgment table, 204 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65,332 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot judgment random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the failure judgment value indicating that the winning probability is low (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321").

In addition, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random number, 2040 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value, and 63496 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value. The first jackpot judgment random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss judgment value (jackpot probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the second jackpot judgment random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. , 2040 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. The second random numbers for determining a jackpot are associated with each other (probability of jackpot at high probability; approximately "1/32"). In addition, the jackpot judgment value (the jackpot judgment value The number of jackpot judgment values may be the same (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, the jackpot judgment value of at least one of the jackpot judgment table for low probability and the jackpot judgment table for high probability may be made different (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot judgment table with the random number for jackpot judgment read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and if it is judged as a jackpot (step S5315 ), sets a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination process.

In addition, if it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot judgment random number read above matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, based on the selected jackpot judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as mentioned above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) of this example, the random number for jackpot determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that the small win has not been won (it is determined that it is a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game loses in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state, and the reach determination table when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. A reach determination table in a high probability time saving state used in the case of , and a reach determination table in a low probability state used when the gaming state is in a low probability state (low probability non time saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating not reach. The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the speed of game progress when in the time saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this way, it may be possible to avoid a match with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state are used to determine reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 kinds of random numbers for reach determination indicate no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, there are five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random numbers as the reach determination table set in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state. The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are respectively associated so that the random number for reach determination matches the reach determination value indicating that reaching is possible, and the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that reaching is not possible. In this manner, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as in the low probability non-time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319), and if it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). , sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach, and ends the process (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the selected symbol determination table, a jackpot symbol is determined as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (a stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the first special symbol side symbol determination table contains random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 (Random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) are stored in a form that is associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110(C), the second special symbol side symbol determination table has a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot). Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in a manner that they are associated with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the obtained jackpot symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) for a variable jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and a regular jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is said to be the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol is greater than the expected value of the gaming balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

The specific game/performance contents for each type of jackpot are briefly summarized as follows.
1. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and performs a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, and in the high-probability time-saving state. 8R certain variable jackpot A controlled by the performance mode that is shown on the performance display device 1600 as being in a relatively advantageous state.

2. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state controls to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the special symbol is consumed 100 times (or wins the jackpot within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state. 8R normal jackpot in which a battle performance in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat performance) is performed, and the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively disadvantageous state is shown in a low probability time shortening state.

3. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 16R jackpot game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, a production (success production) is performed as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds). ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being controlled to a high probability time saving state, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively advantageous state is shown. 16R surefire jackpot

4. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, a performance (failure performance) regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds) is performed. ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being controlled to a high probability time saving state, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively advantageous state is shown. 8R surefire jackpot B

5. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that after the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or that 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected twice, the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, a special It is controlled to a low probability time saving state until the fluctuating display of symbols is used 100 times (or you win the jackpot within the period until it is used 100 times), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state, a specific character A 2R normal jackpot that is controlled to a performance mode in which a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which the player is defeated is performed, and a performance display device 1600 indicates that the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time shortening state.

In addition, in the left-handed hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except in the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol will occur. Similarly, no game ball enters the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 will not be displayed unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the variable display is executed, and jackpots related to the second special symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occur.

In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, only about 1000 game balls are paid out by repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the jackpot 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 8 times, In the jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening/closing pattern in which the jackpot 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times at maximum.

In addition, in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, if it is determined to be 8R definite variable jackpot A, the 8R definite variable jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be 8R normal jackpot, the jackpot symbol is set to 8R normal jackpot symbol. decide. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop pattern setting process, if the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. When the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small win flag is set as a process in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining the unique pattern stopping mode (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the losing symbol as the state when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S5336), and then moves to step S5337. do.

After the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 to select the lottery result (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, or out of reach). A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also instruct the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to be transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changing the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → The display is stopped in the order of the middle decorative symbols (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol and are synchronously displayed in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). For example, if the jackpot is won in a type other than the 2R normal jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as any other symbol) is determined. In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the winning pattern is determined and a miss is specified, a miss symbol without reach is determined (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different). The stop symbols thus determined are displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variable time specified from the variable pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes a winning performance display (special display mode) to appear before the jackpot game starts, and the jackpot game After the start of the game, an effect display during the jackpot game is displayed.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag is set. is set (step S5343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a reach is selected. (not shown) (step S5346), and if none of the jackpot flag, small hit flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if the result is a normal loss (a result without performing the reach effect), when the result is a loss. A variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of this, and variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process ends. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 for the variable time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will be carried out.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table of this example includes random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and jackpot symbol random numbers (first jackpot symbol random number, second jackpot symbol random number). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the determination result. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The random numbers for the first variable display pattern are stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The above-mentioned special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are compared with the random number for the fluctuating display pattern that has been read out, and the fluctuating time information associated with the random number for the fluctuating display pattern that has been read out is obtained from this table. determine the fluctuation pattern of As a result, a determination process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, there is no chance of winning a small hit, so the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, there is no small winning, but it may be possible to win a small winning.

In addition, in the variation pattern table during reach in this example, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute and the random number for the variation display pattern. has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects will be executed, and 59 The random number for the 18 types of variable display patterns is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a low expectation of a jackpot will be executed, and the random numbers for the 18 types of variable display patterns are set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a low expectation of a jackpot will be executed. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is to be executed.

In addition, super reach performance (SP performance) is a game in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of normal reach performance, and for players who desire the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, when the super reach performance is executed, the player who is in a jackpot gaming state Expectations are increasing. In other words, this kind of super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of jackpot, and even if a loss is displayed in the end, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state will decrease. You will be able to increase your However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise players' expectations for a jackpot gaming state, a highly anticipated preview performance that is a separate lottery from the fluctuating pattern appears during the period when the super reach performance is being executed. It is required to do (compound).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state A common variation time of 12 seconds is set for both. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and in the non-time-saving state, and when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time-saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is At the same time as prompting the player, time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol loses, each game ball that is hit into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) This prevents items from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing.

That is, the game ball hit right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate section 2003 while in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). This creates a situation in which the balls can be received one after another in the second starting port 2004 (a time-saving state in which almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received in the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be executed one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around 1 in 32. It becomes possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted into the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table when the second special symbol misses based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 has extremely low fluctuation times in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.). It is said that it can be set to a short value of 0.1 seconds. In other words, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is ended in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the firing interval of game balls (0.6 seconds), so it is 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls fired at intervals are received one after another into the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent these game balls from being ejected without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, the variable timer in which the variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S5282) is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process ends at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

In addition, even though the variable timer has been subtracted by 1 (step S5371), if the variable time timer has not reached 0, until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes in steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot gaming state (step S5387); A waiting time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (time for displaying, etc. that the jackpot gaming state is to be started) is set in an interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. At the time when the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation frequency counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the initial value, the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5235 that the jackpot execution flag is set, and the jackpot game will be executed in the jackpot control process (step S5240a) described above. The state will now be executed.

Note that the jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot command, 8R certain variable jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, a performance of a jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the process is in a low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). In other words, when the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is assumed that the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and the time saving state is The function is stopped and a transition is made to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time saving function is thus performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small winning flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small winning start command indicating to start the small winning game state is set (step S5394), and the small winning game is started. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small winning execution flag indicating that the small winning gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. When updated to (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small win control process (step S5240b) will be executed. A small winning game state is now executed. Incidentally, unlike when a jackpot is won, the gaming state is not changed when such a small winning gaming state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is considered a loss and the first special symbol process is performed without performing any processing related to the jackpot or small win. At the time when the flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that the jackpot execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game will be started according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) begins to be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and a game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes gate section passing processing such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and based on the read normal random number, a lottery process for the display mode of the normal symbol when the variation control is stopped is performed.
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The fluctuation display of the normal symbols is performed such that the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is in a mode that suggests a "normal symbol hit", the movable piece becomes open and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Normal electric accessories release processing (step S5407) that executes processing to enable control of

In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the above-mentioned normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate passage process (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value "4" or not.

In the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbols in a pending state. Processing will be carried out. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as processing in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control for the normal symbols in the pending state, then as a process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of symbols (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) is read out from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in response to the passing of the game ball to the gate section 2003 are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the time saving mode if the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426). Step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), selects the normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the non-time-saving state ( Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing are compared (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the gaming state is short time (high probability time short state), and the normal figure hit determination table is used when the gaming state is non-time short. (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the short-time normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that the normal pattern has been won. The above-mentioned normal random numbers are associated with each other so that the normal map indicating a loss does not coincide with the loss judgment value. In this way, in the time saving mode, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the winning pattern is guaranteed, and the movable piece becomes open and the game ball passes through the second starting port 2004. Acceptance is controlled. Rather than all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may be made to match the normal pattern winning determination value indicating that the winning pattern has been won.

In addition, in the non-time-saving normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that a winning pattern has been won. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the ordinary figure deviation judgment value indicating that the ordinary figure is not correct. In this way, in the non-time saving period, even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, there is no chance of winning a normal ticket, so the movable piece 2106 is in the open state and the second starting port is opened. There is no possibility of controlling the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as mentioned above, you may be able to win the normal symbol even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning probability. When the second starting port 2004 is opened, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, two seconds to allow the game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. It may also be possible to make it impossible to accept game balls into the second starting port 2004.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and when it is determined that the ordinary symbol has won (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern winning flag indicating that the fluctuation is winning per normal pattern (step S5430), the normal pattern winning as the state when the fluctuation control of the normal pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the normal pattern) The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is that the symbol is a loss, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol A normal symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (stop symbol of a normal symbol) (step S5432). After that, at the time when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) so as to proceed to the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is ended.

While such control is performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and it is possible to execute a performance according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a starting prize has occurred, and when such a situation exists, performs control regarding a hold display and a look-ahead effect in accordance with the starting winning. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production symbol fluctuation start processing, production symbol fluctuation processing, production symbol fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , a jackpot game process, or a jackpot end performance process.

Waiting process for reception of a fluctuation pattern designation command: Until a fluctuation pattern command related to a fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, a performance (demonstration performance, etc.) is performed when the symbols are not in a fluctuating state and control regarding jackpots is not being performed. While performing control, upon receiving a variation pattern command regarding a variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the production symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, preview production, etc.) during the pattern variation period are determined based on a variation pattern command, etc., and variation of decorative symbols is started based on the determined production contents. Control as follows. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during effect pattern variation. In addition, among the fluctuation patterns (production patterns), many of the "variation patterns (production patterns) that are stopped at jackpot symbols" are prepared in the form of pairs with "variation patterns (production patterns) that are stopped at loss symbols". By functioning as the same variation pattern (performance pattern), a performance is provided as to whether a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol will appear. Therefore, when explaining fluctuation patterns (performance patterns) below, when referring to "predetermined fluctuation patterns" or "specific fluctuation patterns," unless otherwise specified, "the pattern will stop at the jackpot symbol. It means both "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)" and "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) that stops at a losing symbol", and as a result of the production content progressing in the same manner. A turning point will be reached where either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol will appear.

Processing during production symbol fluctuation: Performs control to start various production contents determined in the production symbol variation start processing at respective timings during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends, changes the value of the process flag to the production symbol. Update to a value compatible with fluctuation stop processing.
Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design confirmation command) instructing to stop all patterns, control is performed to stop the fluctuation of decorative patterns and derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a loss pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command. Update to the corresponding value.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the performance (display performance that notifies the performance display device 1600 of the occurrence of a jackpot, etc.) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops at the jackpot pattern until the start of the jackpot game. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot in-game process.

Processing during the jackpot game: Controls various performances during the period when the jackpot game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end performance processing: In the performance display device 1600, the performance during the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the change permissible state (such as a display performance that notifies the player that the jackpot game state has ended) is controlled. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of performance patterns (fluctuation performance) that is referred to in the performance symbol variation start process in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command is associated with a production pattern (variation production). Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, it determines the production pattern (variation production) associated with the variation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and (Variation effect) Control is performed so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on the variation effect.

Note that the effect pattern (variable effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the above-mentioned variation pattern command. For example, multiple performance patterns (fluctuating effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by a fluctuation pattern command, and one of these performance patterns (fluctuating effects) is determined based on the performance lottery, gaming situation, etc. You may also do so. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also allows a plurality of effect patterns to be associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Also, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the performance pattern (variable performance) in this way, performs a preview lottery (determination process for the preview performance) based on the jackpot determination result, symbol type, and fluctuation pattern. , by performing control (processing during performance symbol fluctuation) to make the winning preview performance in the preview lottery appear at a predetermined timing while the performance pattern determined above (fluctuation performance) is performed, multiple performance contents can be displayed. As combinations are possible, the appearance of these symbols indicates the degree of expectation for the appearance of jackpot symbols.

Conventionally, among such complex effects, although they are the same specific preview effect (for example, timer effect), multiple effects may appear and be executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. It is hoped that this will help maintain interest in gaming. However, since the preview effect can only be combined when there is a high expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed naturally becomes low. , it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve gaming interest.

As will be described later, "timer performance" refers to a predetermined performance that appears during the execution of a performance pattern (variable performance), and a count display toward the timing when the predetermined performance is performed is set to a first predetermined value. (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (in preparation, etc.) before starting the count display. It is. In other words, in this case, when a count display (for example, countdown) is started from the first predetermined value as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, a performance (for example, a conversation preview or a cut-in A , B, etc.) is targeted for timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the case of a timer effect (particularly a timer effect on the preview side that is executed as a result of a preview lottery), the target effect of the effect is kept secret at least at the time the count display starts. It is desirable to do so. In addition, "timer performance target" refers to the timer performance that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value reaches a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"). That is, in the timer effect, a count is displayed toward the timing at which the effect target occurs.

In addition, in the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, but as long as it is executed as a count effect in which a count is displayed by counting up or down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice-side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning in the preview lottery, the above-mentioned effect pattern ( It is possible to execute a timer performance (variable timer performance) that is pre-installed as the performance content of the variable performance. In other words, in this case, if only the timer effect on the preview side executes the count effect display as ``the effect content of the preview effect that functions to increase the jackpot expectation level with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command''. First, by executing the performance pattern itself as "the production content determined based on the variation pattern command", the expectation level can be changed from the jackpot expectation level indicated by the performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. It becomes possible to make a count effect display (timer effect) appear without wasting the increase in expectations (increasing the level of expectation by satisfying the condition of ``winning in a preview lottery''). For example, if the jackpot expectation level when a specific performance pattern determined based on the variable pattern command appears is "20%", if the preview side timer performance is further executed, the jackpot expectation level will increase due to the function of the composite performance. For example, the frequency of appearance will be reduced to 40%, and the appearance frequency will have to be lowered accordingly.However, if a variable side timer effect is executed as the effect of the specific effect pattern itself, you can expect a jackpot. It is possible to execute a timer effect while keeping the frequency at "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

In addition, the jackpot expectation level when a production pattern (variable production) appears in the judgment table T1 differs depending on the variation number (and production pattern), and basically, the jackpot expectation increases as the variation number becomes larger. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the production patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), variable-side timer production is executed in which "conversation preview" is the production target in all of the production patterns. The appearance ratio is fluctuation number 5 (6) > fluctuation number 9 (10) > fluctuation number 17 (18), while the expectation of jackpot at the time of appearance is fluctuation number 5 (6) < fluctuation number 9 ( 10)<Fluctuation number 17 (18). For convenience of explanation, only the determination table that is referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail, but even in the determination table that is referred to in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the performance content of the performance pattern itself is This includes a performance pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable-side timer performance can be executed, and can appear with a different probability from that in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the determination table T1, variation numbers 3 to 6 are all the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 5 and 6 are variable-side timer effects that target conversation previews. This differs from variation numbers 3 and 4 in this point. Also, variation numbers 7 to 14 are all the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 9 and 10 are variable side timer effects that target conversation previews, and variation numbers 11 and 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. In 12, a variable side timer effect is executed with cut-in A as the effect target, and in variable numbers 13 and 14, the conversation preview and cut-in A are executed, and at the same time, a variable side timer effect is executed with these as the effect target. They differ in that they can be In addition, variation numbers 15 to 22 are all the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 17 and 18 are variable-side timer effects that target conversation previews, and variation numbers 19 and 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed. In 20, a variable side timer effect is executed with cut-in B as the effect, and in variable numbers 21 and 22, a conversation preview and cut-in B are executed, and a variable side timer effect is executed with them as the effect. They differ in that they can be In addition, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the variable side timer effect is executed with cut-ins A and B as the effect than when the variable side timer effect is executed with the conversation preview as the effect. is set so that the expectation of a jackpot tends to be higher when a variable-side timer effect is executed that targets both the conversation preview and cut-ins A and B.

Furthermore, "conversation preview" is a performance that can appear relatively early after the performance pattern (decorative pattern variation performance) is executed, and that often has a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (variation production of decorative symbols) is executed, and a relatively high level of expectation has been built up. This is a performance that often occurs (or a performance that always builds up a relatively high level of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation preview" is set so that its appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other productions with higher expectations (cut-ins A and B, character A actions, B, etc. described later). It has become something that will be done. Also, in character reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable production is executed to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the preview production, whereas in SP reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the preview production is This is executed to correspond to cut-in B rather than cut-in A that appears as the production content of the production.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the performance contents (performance pattern ) is assigned as the variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is of a "predetermined type (such as a shortening fluctuation or a normal reach performance with low expectations) (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6)", a count performance display as a timer performance on the preview side will be displayed. While ensuring that the performance is not won (by increasing the premium level) and suitably increasing the expectation level when the notice side timer performance appears, the fluctuation pattern is ``variation pattern that executes the fluctuation side timer performance ( If the pattern is a count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation number 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc., then the fluctuation pattern is of the predetermined type (for example, fluctuation The proportion corresponding to numbers 1 to 6, etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is executed, but 2 of them (0 Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) of the variation patterns (which may be set individually) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, and 16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is not executed, and among these, four fluctuation patterns (variation Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the performance content of the variable pattern is one that can perform a count effect display (variable side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is lower than when the variable pattern is a variable pattern that does not perform a variable side timer effect. The rate at which it is determined that the count performance display (notice side timer performance) cannot be executed as the performance content of the performance is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one performance pattern (variable performance) without unnecessarily building up expectations and lowering the appearance frequency.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the rate at which the notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned preview side timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the notification side timer effect is executed, the above-mentioned notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 are executed, the above-mentioned notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Note that even when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 15 to 22, which allow the above-mentioned notice-side timer performance to appear with a high lottery probability, are executed, in reality, it is more likely to be a jackpot than a loss. It is said that the above-mentioned preview side timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability with the winning effect pattern, and it is said that the variable number 22 can appear with an even higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display may be previewed depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The execution rate of the performance content (notice side timer performance) will be different. Therefore, among the above count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the proportion of multiple count displays appearing within one production pattern (variation production) is high, that type In some cases, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the performance pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the performance content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer performance is included as the performance content. In the production patterns (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer effect does not occur within the execution period of the production pattern, compared to production patterns (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) that do not include the variation-side timer production as the production content. The rate at which the effects appear (the rate at which it is decided to execute the preview-side timer effect in the preview lottery) is set to be high. In other words, in this case, two timer performances (variable side timer performance, preview side timer performance) will appear within one performance pattern by simply requiring a high jackpot expectation level for one preview side timer performance to be won in the preview lottery. In turn, it becomes possible to realize the double timer performance opportunity without unnecessary increase in the expectation of jackpot.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case of a variable side timer effect (fluctuating side count effect display) where "conversation notice" is the effect target and a variable side timer effect (fluctuating side count effect display) where "cut-in" is the effect target. The count display formats (forms and colors of count numbers, etc.) are different. In other words, in this case, even if a performance pattern (for example, fluctuation number 9, 11) whose performance content is the same reach performance is executed, the count display mode of the fluctuation side timer performance (variation side count performance display) is checked. By doing this, in combination with the fact that the rate at which the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count fluctuation pattern, it is recognized that the notice-side timer effect is likely to appear. You will be able to look forward to it.

Regarding the form of the count display that appears in the preview side timer effect (preview side count effect display), regardless of whether the target of the effect is the same (conversation preview, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (fluctuating side timer effect display) It may be different (or different from at least one of them) from the count display mode (conversation preview, cut-in) that appears in the count production display), or it may be the same as the count display mode (or at least one of them). .

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as a timer effect on the preview side (count effect display on the preview side) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the display. This is useful in improving expectations by making the player aware that a preview-side timer performance with a high frequency is appearing. In this sense, it is more desirable for the preview side timer effect to be different from any of the count display modes (conversation preview, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common aspects of the preview side timer effect (notice side count effect display), multiple modes with different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and any one of them is executed. You can do it like this.

In addition, in order to better recognize that the preview side timer effect is being executed, it is necessary to display a count display when the preview side timer effect is executed and a count display when the variable side timer effect is executed. It is desirable to have different counting speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect starts, even during the period when the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is watched closely, and the timer effect is compared to the variable side timer effect, which has relatively low expectations. This makes it possible to create interest in which of the highly anticipated advance notice side timer performances is being executed, and to suitably maintain game interest during the timer expiration period.

At this time, in the variable side timer performance, depending on the target of the performance (conversation preview, cut-in), the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the preview side timer performance ( If the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the timer effect on the preview side (conversation preview), it will be possible to check whether the timer effect on the preview side is being executed or not. It becomes possible to add interest by varying the difficulty of judgment. In addition, in the variable side timer effect (or the notice side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the advance notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is displayed continuously. The count may be displayed by displaying the information.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the preview side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that this will lead to an increase in interest in gaming.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count is displayed for the variation patterns (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) corresponding to the variation side timer performance. A plurality of performance patterns with different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required to complete all counts) are set as selectable performance patterns. When a variable pattern corresponding to the variable timer effect is obtained, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on the random number for the effect, and the count display of the variable timer effect and the preview side timer are displayed. By varying the ease with which the performance can be executed simultaneously with the count display (for example, the larger the total count is, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the preview side timer performance is being executed can be varied. I try to make it more interesting by

In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple performance patterns (target of timer performance and reach We decided to prepare multiple performance patterns (with the same production content), but with different start timings or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or time required to complete all counts) (however, if the content is the same as that of the timer production), The type of performance performed as the performance content of the variation pattern and the type of reach performance executed as the performance content of the variation pattern are the same for each performance pattern), but a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and made to correspond one-to-one.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total count) when appearing in the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect may be different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect may differ. If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different between the side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, it is possible to make it more interesting by varying the difficulty of determining whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed. .

Additionally, while the timer effect on the preview side is executed with a countdown display, if the timer effect on the variable side is executed with a countup display, it can be determined with certainty whether or not the timer effect on the preview side is being executed. It is expected that this will greatly improve gaming enjoyment. In addition, while the preview side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, the variable side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation preview) is executed in a count-up display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable side timer effect for (cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, the difficulty of determining whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed can be varied depending on the target of the effect, making it more interesting. It will be possible to grant.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases in which the same effect is targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, and cases in which different effects are targeted for effect. to control. When the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target the same performance (for example, a conversation preview), compared to when the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target different performances. In addition to setting it so that the rate at which the jackpot expectation level decreases is high, even if the same performance (for example, a conversation preview) is targeted for the variable side timer performance and the preview side timer performance, each count display The end timing is different.

In other words, in this case, even if the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target the same performance (e.g., a conversation preview), one of the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance performs the predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different performance is being performed (the timer performance is executed in a manner with relatively high expectations). It appears as if After this, the other count display that was continued will reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same performance (for example, a conversation preview) is the target of the performance. Even if it is revealed by the timer production on the finished side that a conversation preview with relatively low expectations is targeted for production, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for production ( It is expected that the player's interest in the game will be improved by maintaining the sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a relatively highly anticipated manner.

In addition, when the same effect (for example, a conversation preview) is targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the preview-side timer effect, the timing when the variable-side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the timing when the preview-side timer effect reaches the predetermined value. It is desirable that a separate display corresponding to the end of counting (for example, "Counting succeeded!", "Chance UP!", etc.) appears at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, a variable-side timer performance and a preview-side timer performance, each of which targets a "conversation preview" executed as a variation-side or preview-side performance, are made to appear within one performance pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable-side timer performance and the count display of the preview-side timer performance will be performed at the same time, but in the variable-side timer performance, the variable-side timer performance is While the count display progresses in accordance with the variable-side specific effects that occur (such as ``Count Success!'' and effects that match the appearance of conversation previews), the timer effects on the preview side are related to the ``conversation preview''. A count display is displayed in accordance with a specific performance on the preview side that occurs as a performance on the preview side (such as "Chance UP!" or a timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation preview (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the performance)). As the process progresses, separate displays corresponding to the end of counting will appear at different timings.

By the way, each of the conversation preview and cut-in performances is required to be executed whenever they are targeted for a variable-side timer performance (when a count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation previews and cut-ins are performances that can be executed in multiple ways with different expectations, so if they are targeted for a variable-side timer performance, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, Therefore, it is necessary to make it appear in a manner that is highly expected. Therefore, the performance that is the target of the variable-side timer performance is incorporated in advance as the performance content of the above-mentioned performance pattern (variable performance), and just by executing the performance pattern, the variable-side timer performance and its target are combined. It is desirable to allow each of the effects (modes with relatively high expectations) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect targeted for the effect (a mode with relatively high expectations) is always selected in the preview lottery. .

In addition, if the conversation preview and cut-in effects are not included in the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not they will appear as part of the preview side in the preview lottery described later. A determination is made as to what manner (relatively high or low expectation) the appearance should be made as part of the production content, and control regarding appearance is performed based on the result of this determination. .

The production pattern determination process using FIG. 118 will be summarized below.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, etc. from the main control MPU 1310a, it first determines the current game based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the production pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to create a bias (expectation level) in the probability change expectation when a specific production pattern appears, the number of rounds in a jackpot game state, etc. become.

Next, multiple performance patterns (such as multiple performance patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display that appears in the variable side timer performance, etc.) are available for selection as the performance patterns associated with the variable number. If so, one of a plurality of production patterns having different start timing or end timing of the count display is selected based on the jackpot determination. At this time, we will set a performance pattern so that the start timing or end timing of the count display will be delayed at a higher rate if the jackpot determination is won. It is made to have a tendency that the later the time is, the higher the possibility that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are acquired when a special performance condition is satisfied. Even in this case, a performance pattern set so that a variable side timer performance does not appear is selected from among a plurality of performance patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the production pattern that appears during symbol variation (the production from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of variation) is selected in this way, what kind of preview production should be performed within the execution period of the production pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in such a manner (preliminary lottery).

Figure 119 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel This figure shows an example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing a process of outputting only the sound. This sound definition table manages the definitions of playback priority, left/right pan initial values, vertical pan initial values, volume initial values, note number, seek point, playback type settings, and output type settings for each sound name. are doing. Note that here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and descriptions of the definitions of other notification sounds, performance sounds, etc. are omitted. Note that in addition to the definition based on the fixed channel method, it is also possible to use the definition based on the automatic channel method for each channel other than channel X to which the notification sound is assigned for the effect sound.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds should be assigned to channel X and output when each of the notification sounds satisfies the output conditions. A high notification sound will be assigned to channel X and output, regardless of the allocation status to channel X of a notification sound with a low priority value. As will be explained later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to channel X first will be given priority, and the notification sound assigned to channel It will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial sound image localization positions of the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the upper left speaker 573L, the lower left speaker 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", for example, the output is output from the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker. The difference in the volume of the individual outputs from the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the left and right speakers 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that the signal is output only from the right speakers (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of the sound from the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R), for example. Represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes output from the upper and lower speakers individually, making it possible to localize the sound image in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and if it is set to, for example, "0x80", it indicates the difference in volume that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers in combination. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that output is only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within a setting range of, for example, "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback that repeatedly plays the target sound (corresponding to "LOOP" shown in the diagram), or 1SHOT playback that plays the target sound once (corresponds to "1SHOT" shown in the diagram). It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 120 is a table showing, for each type of notification sound, the notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for ending the notification (cancellation condition) for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 119. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for each notification sound, but in order to effectively utilize the single channel This is a measure to maintain the status and refrain from outputting the notification sound thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 120, notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) indicates a state in which magnetism has been detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity using a magnet is being carried out). It informs you of something. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"). ) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time of detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected". However, the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps will continue to be executed until the cancellation condition of "returning the power" is met. It has become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration (there is a high possibility that cheating by cheating is occurring). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) notifies that the state is in the state), and count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the jackpot gaming state (big winning opening state). A notification sound that notifies you that a state has been detected (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out to forcibly open the closed grand prize opening and win a game ball) by the winning opening sensor). 3 (big prize abnormality) is considered to belong to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has been committed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be the same.

For example, for notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "booboo vibration has been detected", and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration has been detected") and various lamps (light emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are turned on, and the vibration sensor 2405 detects the notification as the notification time. The loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time when the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps. The lighting will continue until the cancellation condition of "returning the power supply" is met. In addition, regarding the notification sound 3 (big winning abnormality), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "booboo big winning abnormality has been detected", and a Display (for example, "Big winning abnormality detected") and lighting of various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are executed, and as a notification time, The loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time when the count sensor 4005 detects the notification sound. The display and lighting of various lamps will continue to be executed until the cancellation condition of "returning the power supply" is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group with respect to the display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Regarding the lighting of the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the lighting mode is the same for notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group (all of the various lamps are not necessarily turned on) (It doesn't have to be a specific aspect). In addition, regarding the notification sounds that are subject to loop processing, notification sounds such as "boo-boo" that play a role in notifying that something belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity) A combination of the alarm sound used in any of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that serves to notify individual identification of the content of the notification by sequential output is adopted. Alarm sounds consist of monotonous sounds to give a warning meaning in tense fraudulent situations, and message sounds consist of a variety of sounds to clearly distinguish them from other notification sounds. It is desirable that the

In other words, when reporting something that belongs to the first notification group (a situation in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been committed), it is more important for the hall to respond to the fraud than to specify which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial response. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the "boo-boo" notification sound and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices) are output, and only those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent acts) are output. It is expected that this will speed up the initial response on the part of the hall in response to fraudulent acts. Furthermore, following the notification sound of "boo-boo", a message sound is output to notify which notification type it is, and a message is displayed within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a result, it is expected that the hall side will be able to handle the initial response smoothly.

On the other hand, notification sound 4 (door open) is generated when the door frame release switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (possibility of fraudulent activity by opening the door). This is to notify that the door may have been opened due to abnormality response measures taken by the hall. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "The door is open. '') and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Door is open ping pong ping pong". ), whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are canceled when the release condition is ``door closing detection (door frame release switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to Detection of closing of door frame 3) is continued until the condition ``detection that door frame 3 is closed'' is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out by opening the main body frame, there is also a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to abnormal response measures by the hall side. , it is considered to belong to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraud has been committed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be the same.

For example, for notification sound 5 (frame open), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Frame is open ping pong ping pong", and a display ( For example, "The frame is open") and various lamps (light-emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are lit, and at the same time, the main body frame open switch is activated as a notification time. 619, the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times). The lighting of the various lamps continues until the release condition "frame closure detection (detection of the main body frame 4 being closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It happens.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Regarding the lighting of the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the lighting modes are the same for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group (all of the various lamps are not necessarily turned on) (It doesn't have to be a specific aspect). However, the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sounds that are subject to loop processing, there are message sounds (unique sounds) that play the role of announcing individual identification regarding the content of the notification, and those belonging to the second notification group (fraudulent activity). A combination of sequential output with an alarm sound used in both notification sounds 4 and 5, such as "ping pong ping pong", which plays the role of notifying that a state in which there is a moderate possibility that a There is.

In other words, when notifying players who belong to the second notification group (states where there is a moderate possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed), it is important to ensure that players who are playing the game properly do not feel disgusted. It is important that the hall side be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities fairly quickly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, first, as the notification sound, a message sound is output to notify which notification type it is, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who play the game properly will be less likely to feel disgusted by it. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing the game properly to feel disgust, the message tone is followed by an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong", although it is a different alarm sound than when belonging to the first notification group. In order to make it difficult for players who are playing the game properly to feel disgusted, the lighting mode is different from that when they belong to the first notification group, but it is output when they belong to the third notification group. By providing notification by lighting various lamps that do not occur, it is expected that the abnormality response measures on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed play guidance) indicates that the game ball hits the gate part 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though it is in a non-time saving state. The gate sensor 4003 detects that the gate has passed (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the game should be corrected to be played in a proper manner (left-handed)). This is to inform you that. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed hitting," and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed hitting." ”) are executed respectively. In addition, as for the notification time, both the loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" and the display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time when the gate sensor 4003 detects the detection.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed play guidance), the state in which the lower tray 322 is detected to be full with game balls by the full tank detection sensor 279 (lower tray 322 is in a state in which the ball should be removed), a notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is provided to provide game guidance for properly proceeding with the game, although the possibility of cheating is low. It is considered that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when the device is in the desired state, and the notification mode, notification time, and release condition for all notification sounds belonging to the third notification group should be set to be the same. It is said that

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray", and a Display (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") is executed, and a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" as a notification time, and a game board. The display within the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is configured to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time of detection by the full tank detection sensor 279. .

However, regarding notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), when they are terminated 20 seconds after detection by gate sensor 4003 and full tank detection sensor 279, those sensors 2401, When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more precisely, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, 5 seconds of silence is output. Data is assigned to channel It has become. Since notification sounds 6 and 7 both output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from the first notification group and the second notification group. The hall side can also properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group by simply checking the silent data part instead of the message sound part that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare it in advance as one piece of sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including the message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

By the way, there may be silent parts in the notification sounds used in the first notification group and the second notification group (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound), but these are very short periods to create a "pause". It is clear that this is a period of time and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

According to this configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong-ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent period in between. It becomes possible to provide information regarding game guidance without making the user feel disgusted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the priority order is set to be the same for notification sounds that belong to the same notification group, but the priority order is set to be different for notification sounds that belong to the same notification group. You can do it like this. In addition, as the playback type setting, loop playback in which the target sound is played repeatedly is adopted, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and 1-SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, "booboo", which is commonly used for notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "ping pong ping pong", which is commonly used for notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, are words that are related to message sounds. You may prepare sound data separately for each notification sound, or prepare sound data separate from the message sound, and create sound data that combines the message sound and alarm sound when outputting. You may also assign it to a channel after that.

[Game machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
Incidentally, in the above description, a gaming machine is described in which the tray unit 320 is equipped with a performance operation unit 400 that can be operated by the player by pressing and can also present a performance image to the player. With reference to FIGS. 121 to 143, a gaming machine that can further increase a player's desire to operate will be described. Note that the performance control of the performance operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 121 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit 5000. FIG. 122 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit 5000. Here, the sword performance operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, and the same components as described above will be given the same reference numerals, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword performance operation unit 5000 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword performance operation unit 5000 stores a sword part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a blade part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decoration body 5001 is constituted by a sheath part 5020 that can be used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath part 5020 is movable in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the direction of drawing the sword and the direction of shedding the sword. The sword portion 5010 is normally in a sheathed state with the blade portion 5011 stored in the sheath portion 5020, and in the sword drawing performance, the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player due to the sword drawing action. Then, the sword section 5010 in the unsheathed state can function as an operation means that receives a sheathing operation by the player and returns to the sheathed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, an explanation will be given of an opportunity to execute a sword drawing performance involving movement of the sword performance operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001). FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of performance patterns in a performance mode in which a sword drawing performance can be performed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform a sword drawing preparation transition performance according to the type of variation pattern. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a battohon effect.

The performance patterns described here include a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed after the battou preparation transition performance is performed, a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed without the battou preparation transition performance being performed in advance, and a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed without the battou preparation transition performance being performed in advance. However, there are patterns in which the battō main performance is not performed, patterns in which neither the battō preparation transition stage nor the battō main performance is performed, and furthermore, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the battō main performance is as follows: Two patterns are provided: one with an aura member and one without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 123(A), depending on the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, a lottery is made as to whether or not the drawing preparation transition effect is to be executed. Here, the multiple types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation when winning a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern for small hit fluctuation when winning a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for losing fluctuation when a loss occurs, and fluctuations that result in an advantageous result for the player. It is set such that the higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the drawing preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword preparation transition performance is executed with a 50% probability when the variation pattern is for a jackpot variation, with a 30% probability when it is a variation pattern for a small hit variation, and when it is a variation pattern for a loss variation. It will be executed with a 20% probability. In addition, the probability of the deviation variation time variation pattern may be changed depending on whether or not there is a reach effect so that the probability of the sword draw preparation transition effect being executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), depending on the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the drawing preparation transition effect, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to perform the drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed is set to be higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed. Further, it is set such that the probability that the battohon performance will be executed increases as the variation pattern yields an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword draw preparation transition effect is executed is higher than the probability that the sword draw main effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is executed with the fluctuation pattern for winning fluctuations, the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is executed is higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is not performed with the fluctuation pattern for small hit variation. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern for jackpot variation, the main drawing performance is always executed regardless of whether or not there is a drawing preparation transition performance.

In addition, when the battou main performance is executed, the battou preparation transition performance is executed in advance, and the more advantageous the result is for the player, the higher the probability that the battou main performance with the aura member will be executed. It is set so that In addition, here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the battohon performance with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition due to the unsheathing action of the sword decoration and the movement of the aura member)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the sword drawing motion of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing performance (sword preparation transition performance and sword drawing main performance) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself that can accept the sheathing operation by the player, and the sword part 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 124, 125), the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath part 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011), and the sword part 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (the aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of an integral decorative body (FIGS. 126 and 127).

FIG. 124 is a state transition diagram illustrating the unsheathing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself. The sword is drawn, and (C) the second sword is drawn. FIG. 125 is a longitudinal sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 125 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the blade portion 5011 taken out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

The sword decoration body 5001 in the normal state is in a sheathed state with the blade portion 5011 housed in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 124(A). In the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing preparation transition performance, only the part of the blade 5011a that is fitted in the hand of the blade part 5011 is pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and is visible to the player, as shown in FIG. 124(B). It becomes the state where the first sword is drawn. Then, as shown in FIG. 124(C), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the main sword drawing performance is a second drawn sword in which the blade part 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and most of it becomes visible to the player. state. Here, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state can function as an operation means capable of accepting a sword sheathing operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently apart from the unsheathing operation of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is attached to the sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sheathed state (FIG. 124(A)) to the first drawn state (FIG. 124(B)). The blade portion 5011 is deformed by operating the movable range inside the portion 5020 from the closed state (FIG. 125(A)) to the open state (FIG. 125(B)) as much as possible (maximum motion). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even during the transition process in which the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state (FIG. 124(C)). Note that, as will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is operated at its maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is enclosed in the blade portion 5011, as shown in FIG. 125(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into linear movement of the rack 5031a in the right direction and the rack 5032a in the left direction. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

Further, below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it becomes possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, the state changes from the closed state to the open state, and the operation of the aura member 5030 causes the blade portion 5011 to change from the closed state to the open state. Although an example has been shown in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword drawn state to the second sword drawn state after deforming the sword, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start its operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword drawn state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operating means (not limited to the mode in which the sword is fully moved, but also includes the mode in which the motion is stopped midway) ).

FIG. 126 is a state transition diagram illustrating the unsheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath 5020, (A) sheathed state, (B) first unsheathed state, (C) Shows the second sword drawn state. FIG. 127 is a longitudinal sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 127 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the blade portion 5011 taken out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 125 and 126 described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 126(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that accommodates the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) is While the aura member 5030 provided therein is movable in the horizontal direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. Moreover, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member attached, the aura member 5035 can change the state of the blade part 5011 (in the sheathed state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the sword blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state. ⇔ First sword drawn state ⇔ Second sword drawn state). This allows the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) to be combined with the frame side member (aura member 5035) to appear as an integrated decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 127(A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that its upper end is below the leaf 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully housed state, and includes a hollow cylindrical enclosing aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011, and an enclosing aura member 5036 It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow space, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is transferred to the right side of the rack. This is converted into an upward linear movement of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and stops at a position where the surrounding aura member 5036 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to form the second drawn state, as shown in FIG. 127(B). At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable to the upper limit of its range of motion (maximum movement).

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED board having a plurality of LEDs, so that the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade part is moved while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first sword drawn state ⇔ second sword drawn state). Although an example of combining with 5011 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start its operation (combining) after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword drawn state. The final state based on the production pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operation means (not limited to the complete appearance state with maximum movement, but also the intermediate appearance with stopping the movement midway) (including a form with an aura member attached). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sheathed state to the first sword drawn state.

(Other production pattern 1 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 128 to 130 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach performance. Here, the main differences from the sword decoration body 5001 described above are as follows. First, the sword decoration body 5001 in the sheathed state functions as an operation means and detects a sword draw operation by the player. Second, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbols form a ready-to-reach state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-reach state (FIG. 128 (A1)), and the princess reach start image is displayed (FIG. 128 (A1)). 128(A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is held still above the display area with a part of the blind visible to the player (initial state). There is. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sheathed state.

In the princess reach effect, after an image of the princess heading behind the blind is displayed (FIG. 128 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image that suggests an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 128 (B1)). Then, the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 is started and the valid operation period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, and the display area of the performance display device 1600 prompts the player to draw the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved vertically little by little from the time the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Good too. Then, when a sword drawing operation by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword drawing operation by the player is an operation in which the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sheathed sword ornament 5001, lifts the sword 5010 upward, and pulls out the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. When the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, the player's sword unsheathing operation is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification operation may be an operation that allows the player to feel a movement different from his/her own sword drawing operation through the handle 5012 held by the player, such as vertical movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012). Bye. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player takes his hand off the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, which reduces unnecessary contact with the sword ornament 5001 (grabbing it again to confirm the detection, etc.) and prevents malfunction or damage to the movable body. I can do it.

When the player performs a sword drawing operation here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the level of expectation, when the player performs a sword drawing operation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visible to the player. You can do it like this.

When the ending pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is placed in a stationary state (initial state) above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600. state), and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect using the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (FIG. 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a detached mode "767" (FIG. 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the stop result shown in FIG. You can do it like this.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the center of the front (lower part of the display area) that overlaps with the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is moved to fall to a state where only the hold display area is visible (full fall state) (FIG. 129 (D1)).Then, the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600.At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the second drawn state (FIG. 129 (D2)). Note that at this time, a plurality of patterns may be provided for displaying the princess's shadow in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For example, By varying the color and size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterward, it may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Hime Reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the gaming profit when winning, etc.) .

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second drawn state due to the sword drawing operation by the player, that is, after the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword drawn state changes. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 129 (D3)). When the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully fallen state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is An image of the princess who is surprised when the blinds are removed is displayed (FIG. 130 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword drawing operation was performed, and if the result of the current variable display is a win, the win will be announced with a smiling princess in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image is displayed (FIG. 130 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the princess of the loss is displayed along with a sad princess (FIG. 130 (F1) (F2)).

Note that when a sword drawing operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but a movable effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is used. If the player is unable to move due to the player holding the sword when executing the command, an announcement or display such as "Please let go of the sword" is made. The performance itself will proceed even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration body 5001, but the sword decoration body 5001 will be operated by the player at the timing of movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left and right direction (FIG. 129 (D3)). If it is held in the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movement performance in the left and right directions. However, regardless of whether or not the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left-right direction has been performed, the effect that is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the effect of the falling movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) have progressed. Since the game is configured to do so, the game progress will not be stagnant. Note that the sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to perform a movement effect in the left and right direction immediately when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured so as not to perform a movement effect. You can.

In this way, in the princess reach performance, the specific decorative member SDY that has suggested the operation performance (operation valid) of the sword decoration 5001 is moved to fall by the player's unsheathing operation (up and down direction movement) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself, which has been operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600, is moved in the forward direction of the effect display device 1600 (to the operating position) by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. It can be moved to the left (to the left). That is, based on the player's sword drawing operation, it becomes possible to move the sword decoration body 5001 itself to an operating position different from the operating position where the sword drawing operation was performed, increasing the value of the player's operation and increasing the player's motivation for the operation. It is possible to suppress the decline of In addition, one operating means is configured to be able to operate in stages that differ in accordance with the player's operations (in the vertical direction during operation, and in the left and right directions after operation), thereby providing an effect that uses multiple movable modes. The operating value of the operating means can be increased compared to conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Note that the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left and right direction is performed for the purpose of performing an integrated performance with the performance image performed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory). Although the operation position is displaced from the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, after performing a sword drawing operation with the sword decoration 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. You may also perform a movement effect in the left-right direction, in which the object is moved to the left (to the left end of the frame). Furthermore, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration 5001 in this example is a vertical movement (a sword drawing movement that pulls up the sword part 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration 5001 performed after the operation is based on the operation. As for the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 moves in a direction (such as the left-right direction in this example) that is different from the direction of movement (up-down direction here) during operation by the player.

Furthermore, when a sword draw operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the timing of the end of the operation. can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, unnecessary contact such as touching the operating section again to confirm the detection can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and the subsequent movement performance of the sword decoration body 5001 being delayed, or from damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the movable effect cannot be performed due to contact with the sword ornament 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to take his/her hand off, and the player is requested to perform the operation during the operation validity period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection and notification operation is completed, the operational value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other performance pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be explained. 131 to 133 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach performance including the operation performance of the multifaceted operation button 410. be. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A), (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation level suggestion effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the fluctuation in execution will be a jackpot, and an operation effect of the operation button 410 are shown. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed as a performance will be explained.

In the reach effect here, when the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 131(A)), first, the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The game is started, and an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 131(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when a press operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset performance pattern.

First, in a pattern in which an expectation level suggesting effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Afterwards (FIG. 131 (N1)), an image suggesting the jackpot expectation level is displayed (FIG. 132 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current variation display (big hit, miss) is announced ((N3) or (N4) in FIG. 132). Note that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation level suggestion effect for the fluctuating display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation level (FIG. 132 (N2)), a look-ahead effect may be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A character may appear that changes the pending display.

In addition, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. (FIG. 131 (M1)) in which an effect image is displayed that suggests that an operation performance that requests the sheathing of the sword ornament 5001 will be performed. Next, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, a start image for the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a message with the title "Chance to draw your sword" and the operation explanation "I want you to sheath your sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is in a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 133 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the second sword is drawn, and the effective period for operating the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically in small increments in the initial state, and the production is performed. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 133 (M3)). Then, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, an effect is performed based on the result of the current variable display.

If the result of this variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) will be moved to fall from its initial state to a fully fallen state ( Figure 133 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative design stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is incorrect, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) will only stop moving in small increments in its initial state. , In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") notifying the miss is displayed (FIG. 133 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the level of expectation and developing operation effects of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible, and the player presses the operation button 410. It is not possible to determine the subsequent development at the time of operation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in operating the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to operate and a decrease in interest in the game, which may occur due to the monotonous performance after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach performances, the first operation (pressing the operation button 410) and the second operation (sheathing the sword decoration 5001) are different in the operation mode (pressing operation and sheathing operation). This request is made to the player based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to unreliable and monotonous operations.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means for the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sheathing the sword ornament 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. The sheathing of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation as the first operation opportunity. In this case, the operating means that is effective for the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has relatively lower expectations than the sword decoration 5001 used for the first time. is desirable.

(Other performance pattern 3 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 138, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 134 to 138 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-reach performance. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that results in a jackpot when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and Even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) does not move based on the pressing operation and is displayed in a dislocated state, the symbol display is re-varied from the dislocated state and the player is given the opportunity to operate it again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given/R when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) I will explain about it.

In the reach effect here, when the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 134(A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , the message "You can move the movable body with a single button press" is displayed (FIG. 134(B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the press operation of the operation button 410 starts, and the press operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted. An operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the user (FIG. 134(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when a press operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset performance pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, in order to make it easier for the player to grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically in small increments in the initial state during the valid operation period of the operation button 410. You can do it like this. Further, if the sword decoration body 5001 becomes an operation target later, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state at this point.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves and a jackpot is achieved, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully fallen state. (FIG. 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to its initial state again, an image notifying the jackpot (a decorative pattern The stop mode "777" and the message "Good job" are displayed (FIG. 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is only stopped from moving in small increments and is allowed to fall. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in an off-center manner ("767") is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 136 (P1). Thereafter, depending on the effect pattern set, A pattern (FIG. 136 (P2)) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a dislocated manner ("767") or a revival pattern in which the ready-to-reach state is restored again is developed.

In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 changes from the oscillating display of the decorative pattern in the out-of-place mode shown in FIG. The samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 136 (P3)), and the decorative pattern becomes ready again and is displayed in a reduced size at the top right of the screen, and at the same time, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is pressed in the center of the screen. An operation-enabled suggestion image (the face of an ally samurai with his eyes closed) is displayed (FIG. 136 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically little by little in the initial state (FIG. 136 (P5)). This increases the player's expectations for the performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory). Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down while changing from the sheathed state to the first drawn state. Then, depending on the set performance pattern, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means, and the specific decoration member SDY is based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001. (bamboo blind yakumono) will be performed. Note that the pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set to have a lower level of expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as an operation means, an image of sweat on the forehead of a samurai (operation button confirmation image), which is an operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is displayed, and the operation button is pressed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) continues to move in small increments, and the operation button 410 is decorated with light, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, and an operation that prompts the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 137 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a necessary number of times, the light-emitting decoration is no longer displayed.

If the result of the variable display is a jackpot, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from the initial state to the full falling state. (Figure 137 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbols that had been displayed at the top right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed at the bottom right of the screen so that they can be viewed by the player. Note that, as in the case described above (FIG. 133 (M4)), it may be made so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbols at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned from the fully fallen state to the initial state again, and the screen An image notifying the jackpot (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed in the center (FIG. 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is off, when the press operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, a decorative pattern in an off-center manner ("767") is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 137 (R5)).

When the sword decoration 5001 is used as an operation means, the operation effectiveness suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is an image in which a samurai whose eyes are closed opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp (sword decoration (confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state with the aura member attached (FIG. 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 is valid; however, at this point, the player cannot determine whether the sword decoration 5001 has an aura member attached or not. This can be understood by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved little by little, the second sword drawn state is reached and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the operational validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the display on the production display device 1600 In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 138 (Q2)).

If the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that shown in FIGS. 137 (R3) and (R4) described above will be followed (FIG. 138 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the variable display result is negative, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same performance transition as in FIG. 137 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 138 (Q5)).

In this way, the level of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) that is executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, so the level of expectation is more powerful than the level of expectation suggested by an image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decline in interest in games can be suppressed. In addition, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operating means that provides an operating opportunity, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to unreliable and monotonous operation performances.

Although FIGS. 128 to 138 described above show three examples of reach performance patterns using the sword decoration body 5001, various performance modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of performances and further increase the interest in the game.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 139. Up until now, the sword decoration body 5001 has been provided with two types: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, but here, a form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle part 5012 is adopted. Two types are provided.

FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating the form of a sword ornament 5001 used for pseudo-coupling. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so that its form can be changed in two stages by deforming the handle part 5012, and is also provided inside the sheath part 5020 of the door frame 3, so that the player can see it from the left and right sides of the sheath part 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left and right direction similarly to the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 139A to 139D are diagrams showing the types (stage changes) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sheathed state, and sequentially show stage 0 form to stage 3 form. The sword decoration body 5001 takes one of the stages 0 form to 3 forms depending on the performance.

As shown in FIG. 139(A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. Indicates the form. As shown in FIG. 139(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath part 5012 due to the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 139(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle part 5012 expands and moves from the stage 1 form so as to be divided into two left and right parts from the center, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. show. As shown in FIG. 139(D), in the stage 3 form, the second decoration part 5012b is further moved upward from inside the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decoration part 5012a in the stage 2 form. Indicates the form. In the stage 1 form to stage 3 form here, it is possible to change the form without bringing the sword decoration body 5001 into the second drawn state. Furthermore, since the sword part 5010 that can accept operations by the player as the operating part of the operating means and the sheath part 5020 that does not operate work together to form an integrated decorative body, it is possible to provide a more powerful operating means. I can do it.

(Pre-operation suggestion performance using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143, a pre-operation suggestion performance that is executed before the operation validity period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational in the ready-to-reach performance will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion performance, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will be valid for operation among a plurality of operation means by the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). . Specifically, as a suggestion pattern based on a pre-operation suggestion performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory), the operation validity period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation valid period when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggested position. If the expectation of winning is set high and the operation becomes effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion performance of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) is such that the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) positioned at the initial position even during the operation validity period. If this is done, there is a 30% probability that the sword decoration 5001 will be enabled, and a 70% probability that the operation button 410 will be enabled. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 142 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is moved to the suggestion position, In this case, the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 30%. Below, examples of performance transitions according to the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the first suggestion pattern and second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance will be explained.

(First suggestion pattern)
140 and 141 show that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is pressed during the reach effect based on the variation effect (ready-to-reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310 by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the ready-to-reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 140(A)), an operation button is predetermined to be activated by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for either the operation means of the sword decoration body 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. As a specific presentation content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation presentation suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means becomes operational is displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 before the operation validity period is generated. is displayed (FIG. 140(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. Furthermore, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 remain unchanged.

Then, while maintaining the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) at the initial position, a valid operation period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is predetermined to be valid. let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as a pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, if the valid operation period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 will be valid at a higher rate than the sword decoration 5001. This can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 becomes valid, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the valid operation period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emitting light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the rate is lower than that for the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 140(D), the operational validity period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (form with an aura member), allowing the player to sheath the sword.

In the above-mentioned FIG. 140(C) or (D), when an operation on a valid operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) is detected, if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, The specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from the initial state to the fully fallen state (FIG. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative design stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) maintains its initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the failure. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 142 shows that when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is valid for operation during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is similar to the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the ready-to-win effect that is executed. In addition, in FIG. 143, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration 5001 does not become operational, the operation button 410 becomes operational, and then the sword decoration FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion presentation of a step-up pattern in which a body 5001 becomes operational.

As shown in FIG. 142 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is performed by selecting either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is predetermined to be valid for operation by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means is generated. As a specific presentation content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation presentation suggestion image (rotation of aura) indicating that the operation means becomes operational is displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 before the operation validity period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, in addition to displaying the operation effect suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is displayed. It operates from the initial position to a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the production display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves vertically between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small increments in the direction. At this time, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament remain unchanged.

Then, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) is moved to the suggested position, the operation validity period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is predetermined to be valid is determined. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as a pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, if the valid operation period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is at the suggested position, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be considered valid at a higher rate than the operation button 410. This can be suggested to the player.

When the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration 5001 is determined while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is operating at the suggested position. to occur. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state (form with an aura), allowing the player to sheath the sword. Furthermore, even when the operation button 410 is enabled, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 is activated. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In addition, in the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion performance, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) is moved from the state in which it is in the suggested position to the initial state. Alternatively, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) may be moved from the state of moving to the suggested position to the fully fallen state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

When an operation on a valid operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 142 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. Similarly, if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from its initial state to a fully fallen state (FIG. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative design stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial state and remains unmoved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the failure. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC3)). The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the first suggestion pattern.

Note that the movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to a pattern in which it is moved to the suggestion position, but may include a plurality of movement patterns. For example, if multiple types of movement patterns are provided so that the rate at which the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational is different, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the movement, so the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is used. It is possible to increase the interest of the used pre-operation suggestion performance and operation promotion performance.

(Step up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition from FIG. 142 (AA1) to (AA3) before the sword decoration 5001 becomes operational, the operation button 410 becomes operational, and then the sword decoration 5001 changes. A step-up pattern that becomes operational is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 143 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion performance of the step-up pattern is a valid operation period for the sword ornament 5001 that is predetermined to be valid by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. is executed, that is, before the operation promotion effect for the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of aura) as in FIG. 142 (AA1) described above is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small increments (FIG. 143 (BB1) ). Next, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) being moved to the suggested position, an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emitting light, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (Figure 143 (BB2)). Here, even if a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the valid operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. A suggested image (most of the blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the valid operation period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (form with aura), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows that the operational means to enable the operation are changed from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001. A switching notification image (messages such as ``Chance to draw your sword'' and ``I would like you to sheath your sword'') is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in a state of being moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operational validity period of the sword decoration 5001 is activated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) described above is performed. The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the second suggestion pattern described above (FIG. 141).

Note that in the case of FIG. 143 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect). It is only necessary that the player's attention be directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword decoration 5001 be operated. Furthermore, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when the step-up pattern becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggestion performance of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) is displayed before the valid operation period of one of the plurality of operation means is activated. ) can be changed, and the position indicates the operating means that can be operated effectively. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) in which the valid operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is valid for operation. The second suggestion pattern in which the operational validity period is generated in a state where the expectation level is high and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggested position (in FIG. 142 (AA1), the sword decoration 5001 There is a high degree of expectation that the operation will be effective.Therefore, in order to understand which operation means will be effective, the player focuses on the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament). It can enhance the interest of the performance.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion performance. Furthermore, since the movement performance (falling performance) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind screen accessory) is also used to notify the result after the operation of the operating means (Fig. 141), the falling performance is sequentially performed from the up and down small movement of the pre-operation suggestion performance. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game. In addition, in the above, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory), that is, the expectation that the operating means that is enabled by the movable body is operated, but this is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the level of expectation. Furthermore, when the operating means to be enabled is determined, not only is the operating button 410 turned on or the sword ornament 5001 is changed to the second drawn state, but the operating means to be enabled is moved by vibration or the like. You can also

In addition, the second suggestion pattern includes the operation button 410 once activated (or after it appears to be activated) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggested position. 2) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 becomes operationally effective. This makes the player interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes operational immediately after the pre-operation suggestion presentation, the user can expect that the sword ornament 5001 may become operational afterwards, which reduces the motivation to operate and the interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion presentation, an operation presentation suggestion image is displayed before the operation validity period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is valid. (FIG. 140 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is viewed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It may be arranged to operate in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part, and to move in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. Note that when the operation validity period is generated thereafter, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so the operation performance suggestion by the first suggestion pattern is given to the player. Even when an image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the sword ornament 5001 will be valid for operation. Then, since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory), which is operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image, is operated at the suggested position, the pre-operation suggestion It is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the performance determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a specific performance. Execute the performance based on the pattern. During a performance period in which a specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance acceptance period (validity period) can be generated in which a specific performance execution condition is established by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific performance acceptance period. Based on the establishment of specific performance execution conditions, a specific performance during operation (such as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits) can be executed. The degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits suggested as a result of a specific operation performance may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means for providing such an operation effect (such as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation regarding the granting of a privilege when operated), an operation is performed. In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include other operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.). In this regard, in a specific performance pattern, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the performance determination (when the specific performance execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), and There are cases in which an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) (a case in which a specific performance execution condition is satisfied when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.), even if no operation is performed at that operation opportunity, just because the pre-operation effect that gives the operation opportunity occurs, It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation regarding awarding of benefits (the degree of expectation of jackpot) is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. When an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.), the degree of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits suggested may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration 5001, etc.), the operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (sword decoration 5001, etc.) It is possible to improve the interest in a game when the performance is at a preliminary stage before being performed and an operation is about to be performed. In other words, in this case, the desired performance result (such as a performance result that suggests that there is a high level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits) will not appear in the operation performance corresponding to the operation on another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.). Even if you are unable to operate the operating means within the specified performance acceptance period (validity period), you can still improve your gaming enjoyment through such operation-related performances. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) having such dramatic properties. In this case, common operation-related effects (for example, see FIG. 142 (AA1)) can be performed when providing these operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least the performance mode that generates the valid period (performance reception period) in which the operation on the operation button 410 is validated (performance reception is possible) is performed.
・The "specific operation-related performance" that may appear even when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled (direction reception is possible) is started, and then the operation on the corresponding operation button 410 is enabled (direction reception is possible). ), a first production mode that generates a valid period (production reception period), and - The operation of the operation button 410 is enabled without the "specific operation-related production" starting to be produced (production can be accepted) A plurality of production modes are prepared, such as a second production mode that generates a valid period (production acceptance period), and by executing any of these production modes, the operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (production is activated). A valid period (direction reception period) during which the application can be accepted is generated.

According to such a configuration, there may occur a period in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted. In either case, if a period occurs during which an operation means other than the specified operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can accept production, a common (specific ) operation-related effects can now be executed, it becomes possible to add interest to whether a specific operation means or another operation means can accept effects, and such effects can be performed. By having the player perform the operations while the game is being performed, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related performance, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance was started, the function corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001). A production acceptance period will occur, but at least at the time the production is started, it is not clear which of these operating means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) the production reception period will occur. It is desirable to keep it confidential. In addition, for each operation-related production exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) before the production acceptance period occurs. It may also be possible to indicate whether or not the production result will be displayed (by displaying the production result display), or to display multiple operations within the relevant period after the production reception period has occurred, including at the same time as the production reception period occurs. It may be possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) the operation opportunity is given (by displaying a performance result display), and to which timing the operation-related performance is executed. Whether or not to do so can be changed as appropriate.

[Automatic button production state]
In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to an automatic button performance state (specific performance state) can be executed, and when controlled to this automatic button performance state, When a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the player Even if the performance is not accepted for the operation, it is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) for causing the same change in the performance as when the performance is accepted for the operation by the player within the performance acceptance period. According to such an automatic button performance state, a post-operation performance will be generated when the button is operated, even if the button is not operated, every time the performance reception period occurs, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to operate the button. You will be able to do this. Regarding the automatic production function, when the automatic production function is activated, the same production reception as when the operation is actually performed may be performed so that the processing corresponding to the production reception is performed, or the production reception may be performed. Instead, the same processing as when the presentation is received may be performed.

In the embodiment related to the "automatic performance function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, performances, settings, etc. may be used in combination or replaced as appropriate.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which symbol variation is not executed, the automatic button can be pressed by operating the operating means multiple times. It is possible to set the performance state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). ``Various settings'' is selected and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed, and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). When "Setting automatic button effect state" displayed in the screen is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on a different operation means may be operated multiple times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the automatic button production state can be set by operating the operation button 410 once, and by simplifying the operation, the automatic button production state can be set. It is possible to set an automatic button performance state while maintaining attention to the performance progress during symbol variation. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has expired, and from these players, it is difficult to operate the operation button 410. If the automatic button presentation state is set simply by operating the button, the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button production state while the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 must be maintained for a predetermined period of time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode that is maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, the automatic button production state will not be activated. This makes it possible to make it less likely that the settings will be set incorrectly. In addition, it is desirable that the setting to the automatic button production state is not made even if the operation is performed in a long press mode at least when the production reception period is occurring during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button presentation state is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed can also be used as a method for canceling the setting. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period when the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button production state can be canceled by operating the operating means multiple times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). ``Various settings'' is selected and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed, and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). When "cancellation of automatic button presentation state" displayed within is selected, the automatic button presentation state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button production state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 once, and by simplifying the operation, It is made possible to cancel the setting of an automatic button performance state while maintaining attention to the performance progress during symbol variation. However, unlike when setting to the automatic button presentation state, the operation button 410 can be moved to the operation state even if the operation state of the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined period of time (even if the operation mode is not a long press). The automatic button presentation state is set to be canceled just by detecting that the button has been pressed (by only being operated in a single operation mode). In other words, when some operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that there is a desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410. Therefore, when the operation is performed, automatic button production is performed. By canceling the setting of the state and quickly returning to the normal presentation state, it is expected that the game's interest will be suitably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured with a plurality of operating means including the operating button 410. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in the automatic button production state set by the operation on the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is different based on the result of jackpot determination. A production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) (more precisely, a predetermined production pattern in which a production reception period is set for the sword decoration 5001, etc.) occurs and the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted within the performance acceptance period, even if the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted within the performance acceptance period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change in the performance as when the performance is accepted. According to such a configuration, will there be a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted as a production, or will it be possible to perform the operation using another operation means (for example, , sword decoration body 5001)).When the above-mentioned performance (specific operation-related performance (see FIG. 164 (AA1), etc.)) is executed, the performance is As a result, even if either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled for production, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that you can enjoy such specific operation-related production with peace of mind. Become.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
- When a first side performance acceptance period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) , when no operation is performed on the first operation means within the first side performance acceptance period, automatic processing can be executed to cause the same change in the performance as when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic presentation means),
・When controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the second production reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is When this occurs, when no operation is performed on the second operation means within the second side performance reception period, an automatic process is executed to cause the same change in the performance as when the second operation means is operated. Possible (second automatic presentation means)
In addition, regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, the second production reception period will be executed when the same specific time has elapsed after the period. Automatic processing by the first automatic performance means or automatic processing by the second automatic performance means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), there is a first presentation reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and a second operation means is set as the operation target. Even if any of the second side production reception period set as 2nd side production reception period occurs within the execution period of symbol variation, the automatic production function can function when the same specific time has passed from the occurrence of those periods. As a result, you can enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

However, if a first-side production reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target, when a specific time has elapsed after the first-side production reception period occurs, The automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed, and when a time different from the specific time has passed after the occurrence of the first side presentation reception period. As the case may be, the presentation may progress within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means will be executed when a specific time has elapsed after the occurrence of the first-side performance reception period, but the timing differs from this. Since the production is accepted and the production automatically occurs after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

In addition, when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the operating means is given more operation opportunities within the symbol fluctuation period than when not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). The rate at which the performance acceptance period occurs may be increased. In other words, in this case, as the production reception period occurs more frequently, it can be assumed that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period will also increase, but even if you forget to operate the automatic production Since the post-operation performance is executed when the function functions, the performance acceptance period can be generated more frequently while suppressing a decline in game interest due to frequent forgetting of operations. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is desirable that the occurrence rate of both the presentation reception period for the first operation means and the presentation reception period for the second operation means be high. However, as for the degree to which the occurrence rate increases, it is more desirable to make the effect acceptance period for the first operating means different from the effect acceptance period for the second operating means.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
- If the performance acceptance condition is satisfied within the performance reception period, the post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means),
- Enables execution of processing for establishing performance acceptance conditions based on operations performed by the player within the performance acceptance period (player operation acceptance means);
- When no operation is performed by the player within the performance acceptance period, it is possible to execute processing to establish the performance acceptance condition without receiving any operation by the player at a specific timing within the performance acceptance period (automatic performance reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production acceptance period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has passed from the start of the production acceptance period. I am planning to do so. As a result, the player will be given enough time to operate the automatic production function until it functions, and the player will also have the option to accept the production by operation. , it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first presentation reception period has occurred, and the other case has been the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first presentation reception period has occurred. When the performance progresses within the symbol variation, such that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means may be executed when a different time has passed, the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" may be used. "A time different from that" is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side production reception period.

Here, if a production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button production state is controlled, and an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the production reception period, , processing for generating a post-operation performance in response to the reception of the performance will be executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating a post-operation performance in response to the reception of the performance, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state may also be performed.

Similarly, when the automatic button presentation state is controlled, a presentation reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410 (sword decoration 5001, etc.) occurs during the execution period of symbol variation, and the presentation reception period occurs. Even if an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received within a period, a process for generating a post-operation performance according to the reception of the performance and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state are executed, respectively. is desirable. In this case as well, regarding the "performance after operation according to production reception", the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when it is not controlled by the automatic button production state, and the sword decoration is not performed within the production reception period. The effect will be executed with the same content as the post-operation effect that would be executed when the operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

In other words, after being controlled to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the desire to return to the performance state (normal performance mode) in which the performance can progress depending on the player's own operations (the specific performance state). A desire to end the condition may occur. Such a desire often arises when a performance acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but there is a limited period of time from the start of the performance acceptance period until it ends. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific production state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity for operation may be lost. If so, interest in the game may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when a performance reception period regarding a specific performance occurs while being controlled to an automatic button performance state (specific performance state), an operation button to which an operation opportunity is given within the performance reception period occurs. 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (operated in a single operation mode), the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) is terminated and the presentation is changed. (Processing to execute the effect after the operation) is performed respectively, so the player's desire to terminate the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation is enhanced. Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the performance state.

However, regarding the setting changes related to the automatic button production state (changing the setting to the automatic button production state or canceling the setting of the automatic button production state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (state where symbol fluctuation is not executed) , settings can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword decoration body 5001. In other words, the sword decoration 5001 is given a lower frequency of operation opportunities than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given, the probability of a jackpot is higher than that of the operation button 410. It is something that is highly regarded. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed solely for the purpose of changing the settings related to the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), and as a result, the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is not granted. It would be more desirable to maintain interest in the game by increasing the sense of premium when playing the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operation means other than the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or other operation means) multiple times, the automatic button presentation state can be set or canceled.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of symbol variation when the automatic button presentation state is not controlled, the automatic button presentation state can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", the automatic button presentation state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button presentation state is necessary. No operation is allowed on the sword ornament 5001 for the purpose of this purpose.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the settings related to the automatic button presentation state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is the case where the settings related to the automatic button presentation state are changed when the pattern is controlled to be in the automatic button presentation state. This is limited to the case where a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted as a performance within the performance reception period, and a corresponding post-operation performance appears. . According to such a configuration, the setting can be changed to the automatic button presentation state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given. It becomes like this.

The plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment include an automatic button function that generates an effect upon operation even if no operation is performed within the effect acceptance period when in the automatic button effect state. In addition to operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be targeted by the "performance function", special operation means that are not targeted by the "automatic performance function that generates a performance upon operation without any operation within the performance reception period" It may further include. In other words, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, a performance acceptance period occurs in which an opportunity to operate the special operation means is given, and if the performance is accepted for operation on the special operation means within the performance reception period, the corresponding The degree of expectation for a jackpot will be suggested by the performance after the operation according to the reception of the performance. However, even if the automatic button effect is controlled, if no operation of the special operation means is accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the effect was accepted may appear. There isn't. However, in this case, although the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted does not appear, it may be made to appear if it is different from the performance when the performance was accepted.

In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button production state using the operation button 410 (operation in the form of a long press), the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only the time, but also the performance reception period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (the performance reception period in which the level of expectation is suggested when operating the sword ornament 5001, and the level of expectation is suggested when operating the special operation means) It is desirable to prevent this from being allowed even if there is a production reception period, etc.). In other words, if the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operating in a long-press mode) during the effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the performance reception period, the "automatic performance function that generates a performance upon operation without any operation within the performance reception period" is enabled, so that the original performance reception (operating an operation means different from the operation button 410) is enabled. This may occur without any operation (when the performance is accepted), and from the perspective of a player who is unfamiliar with such automatic button performance states, it is difficult to determine whether the performance reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred or whether the operation button 410 This is because the player may be confused as to whether or not there was a performance acceptance period for a different operation means, and there is a concern that this may reduce interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a precursor performance prior to the occurrence of the performance reception period, but it is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). A precursor effect that appears before the production acceptance period occurs when the performance is not activated, and a precursor effect that appears before the production acceptance period occurs when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may also be possible to perform the display in a different manner. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether or not the automatic performance function is in a performance state that can function within the specific performance reception period, and it becomes possible to enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the performance acceptance period. However, when the production acceptance period occurs, the specified image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image of lightning falling toward the specific area) may be displayed outside the area (premonitor effect). In other words, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, by checking the movement of the production image that is different from the specific image, the user can pay attention to the location where the hidden "specific image suggesting the remaining time" will appear from now on. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific performance reception period ends due to the player's operation not being completed in time, and furthermore, Even if the player's operation is not completed in time, the automatic performance function functions and the post-operation performance is executed, so it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to set or cancel the setting of the automatic button production state by the player's operation, but the results of the jackpot determination, including the following explanation examples, are The state may be set to the automatic button performance state or the setting of the automatic button performance state may be canceled in accordance with the progress of the game or performance. An example of how the state can be set or canceled depending on the progress of the game or performance is, for example, ``While the control is in the normal game state, it is controlled as the automatic button performance state, but when the state is controlled in the jackpot game state. There are control modes such as ``The automatic button presentation state is canceled when the state changes to a high probability time saving state,'' and ``The automatic button presentation state is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation in the execution state is terminated. There are control modes such as "generating a production pattern that is canceled when a predetermined time has passed from the occurrence of the button production pattern", and "generating an automatic button production state over a period in which multiple symbol changes are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as the following. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 1 may be always controlled to be in an automatic button presentation state, and in this case, the automatic button presentation state is not set and canceled, and the setting and cancellation of the "automatic button presentation state" are not canceled. This process itself will be eliminated.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions may be when the remaining time of the production reception period has expired, or at a predetermined timing after that, or when the remaining time of the production reception period remains. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). If the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when the remaining time of the performance reception period has expired or at a predetermined timing thereafter, the performance after the operation will be performed as if the performance had been accepted after the performance reception period ended. It will be executed. On the other hand, if the automatic performance function described above functions at a timing (specific timing) when there is still time left in the performance reception period, the automatic performance function described above will function as if there was an actual operation. At the point in time (specific timing), the performance reception period ends and the post-operation performance is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the effect will occur after the operation even if you do not operate it when the automatic button effect state is controlled, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends (the effect reception It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic performance function function at a specific timing within the period to start the corresponding post-operation performance. In other words, in this case, if the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function even though the specific timing within the performance acceptance period has arrived, the post-operation performance will be generated by the player's own operation after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to cause anxiety when being controlled to the automatic button presentation state (for example, ``I am mistakenly thinking that I am being controlled to the automatic button presentation state even though I am not controlled to the automatic button presentation state.'') ``The automatic presentation function may not function due to some kind of trouble, and it may become impossible to check the presentation after operation.'') You will be able to do this.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button presentation state. Below, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button presentation state will be explained in sequence, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, or each of the following characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above presentation examples. They may be used in combination as appropriate.

In addition, in explaining each of the following characteristic technologies, the premise is that in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), normally when the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) is not controlled, When a performance reception period occurs, which can occur, even if no operation is performed within the performance reception period, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is generated. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of jackpot determination) that can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific valid period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed is generated even if no operation is performed within the specific valid period. You can also do this. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation performance when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) (improvement of presentation performance by allowing the occurrence of a specific display presentation). Of course, even if a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) occurs, the automatic presentation function may not function during a different presentation reception period that is set when a specific display presentation is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific validity period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions, which saves you the trouble of operating it, allowing you to enjoy the VIP feeling. Therefore, it is expected to suitably increase interest in games. It should be noted that the automatic presentation function does not necessarily have to function in all other presentation reception periods that are set when a specific display presentation is not being performed, and the automatic presentation function does not necessarily function in at least some of the presentation reception periods. If the function is made incapable of functioning, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved when a specific effective period occurs while a specific display effect is being performed (when the effect acceptance period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. In addition, even if such a specific validity period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the arrival of a specific timing within the specific validity period, the above-mentioned automatic performance function will function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start a post-operation performance accordingly.

Further, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
- If the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect will be executed at the timing when the first predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first specific effective period occurred. While the function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect,
- When a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time period that is longer than the first predetermined time period after the second specific valid period occurs. At the timing when , the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions, ends the second specific validity period and generates a corresponding post-operation performance, and further,
・If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period will continue even though the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. Processes such as preventing the same post-operation effect from appearing if there is no operation until the end of the operation may be performed when in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if the production acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while the production is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the first production period starts from the occurrence of the production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions when a predetermined time period has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function until a second predetermined time period that is longer than the first predetermined time period has elapsed; Even after the performance acceptance period ends, the above-mentioned automatic performance function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if the display is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state), it is possible to check which type of specific display display was being performed when the display reception period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, The performance can be progressed with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic performance function will work or whether the automatic performance function described above will not work in the first place. Note that the first specific validity period, the second specific validity period, and the third specific validity period are all set when the operation means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410) enters the operation state (so-called When a single operation is performed), the effect is accepted and a post-operation effect is generated.

Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) can be displayed. In this case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that occur when the effect is accepted during the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different effect contents.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, at what timing within the performance reception period did the automatic performance function function? In order to make it possible to recognize whether there was enough time left, an automatic production function was activated for the bar display (a display that changes the image (in this case, area change) as time passes) indicating the remaining time in the production acceptance period. The post-operation effect may be generated while this is displayed instead of being hidden at the time. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed at the time when the automatic production function functions, the production acceptance period can be changed to the first specific valid period ( A period during which the automatic performance function functions when the first predetermined time has passed, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs) and a second specific effective period (a period in which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time period has passed, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs) When the second predetermined time period, which is a late stage, has elapsed, it becomes possible to recognize which period the automatic presentation function is functioning.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period in which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the production acceptance period occurs) occurs, and when the second specific effective period ( The expected level of jackpot is different depending on when the automatic production function functions when the second predetermined time has passed after the production acceptance period occurs (for example, the second specific validity period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, you can expect a jackpot when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. They function in different degrees (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Additionally, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the automatic performance function described above may be used. As in the case where the "bar display" functions, the post-operation effect may be generated while the "bar display" is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation performance does not have to be performed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be performed, for example, as light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or as an action by a movable decoration. Good too.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, the player does not have any involvement with the operating means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410), and the post-operation performance is generated. Since the performance is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operating means the automatically generated post-operation performance corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is activated to generate a post-operation performance, first, during the performance reception period, an operation target suggestion image (for example, a target operation In addition, even if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions, the post-operation presentation is generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed instead of hidden. It is desirable to In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target does not necessarily have to be the same. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one was even in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the above-mentioned automatic As in the case where the performance function functions, the post-operation performance may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. Whenever the automatic presentation function functions, such as when the automatic presentation function functions within the above-mentioned first specific validity period or when the automatic presentation function functions within the above-mentioned second specific validity period, The post-operation effect may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden.

In addition, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be generated. This makes it possible to simultaneously check the following information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the post-operation performance does not have to be performed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be performed as, for example, a light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decoration. There may be.

For example, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the above-mentioned automatic production function, the operation target suggestion image (such as a mock image of the operation means) may appear only when the jackpot expectation level (for example, a jackpot has been obtained). If multiple modes are prepared in which the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed (the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed) is different, and the operation is accepted by the player's operation, the operation target will be changed at the time when the post-operation effect starts to be executed based on the operation reception. If the suggestive image (such as a simulated image of the operation means) is left displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of post-operation presentation can be changed. It becomes possible to check both at the same time, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when generating a valid period (direction reception period) during which the sample image is displayed, the type of the valid period (direction reception period) (conditions for the generation of the valid period, post-operation effects that occur when the operation is accepted), etc. (e.g., the type of display), the display area is reduced over time (first effective period that occurs when the first condition is met), and the display area is reduced over time (first effective period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied). It is desirable that there be a case where the display is not performed (a second validity period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, during a valid period in which no display is displayed and the display area is reduced over time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left for accepting operations. You will be able to maintain a good sense of internal tension. Note that "not displaying a display area in which the display area of a specific image is reduced over time" means, for example, that normally (during the first effective period) the display area of a specific image is displayed in a manner that the display area is reduced over time. When displaying an image, this can be achieved by not displaying the gauge image itself during the second valid period, or by displaying the gauge image but by adopting a method in which the display area is not reduced over time. be.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the second validity period (in the case where the display area is not reduced over time), changes in response to the operation acceptance (display changes, lamp lighting, etc.) It is desirable that at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect starts to be executed, so that the simulated image is not hidden but is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to understand that the operation was accepted while the sample image was displayed (before the expiration date), making it possible to feel anxious about not being able to complete the operation in time. will be able to be removed.

In this case, the display mode of the sample image (for example, color or Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the sample image may be made difficult to see due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state where a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary at least at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the display state of the sample image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the operation was accepted, and that the sample image is not made difficult to view by other images. Therefore, if the sample image was displayed dynamically during the valid period in which operation reception is permitted, there must be at least one change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp lighting, etc.) ) is desirably continued to be dynamically displayed even when execution has started. On the other hand, if the player's operation causes a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) within the first validity period, the change occurs. The sample image may be hidden in a state where (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, or as in the case of the second validity period described above, the sample image may be displayed instead of being hidden. Changes (changes in display, lighting of lamps, etc.) may occur in response to operation reception in the state.

However, even during the effective period in which "the display area of a specific image is not displayed to be reduced over time," a mock image of the operating means to be operated will still be displayed. As for images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time at which operation reception is allowed depending on how far the moving image based on the sample image has progressed. This is possible, and it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes a first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) and a second operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) as operating means, and the first operating means There are cases in which a valid period (direction reception period) during which operations for the second operating means are permitted, and cases in which a valid period (direction reception period) during which operations are permitted for the second operation means are generated. Among these, during the validity period in which the acceptance of operations on the first operation means is permitted, a first image of the first operation means is displayed, and during the validity period in which the reception of operations on the second operation means is permitted, the second operation means is displayed. The second sampled image is displayed. In addition, the validity period in which the operation reception on the first operation means is allowed and the validity period in which the operation reception on the second operation means is allowed are different from each other. The rate at which modes that only appear when a jackpot is executed is made to differ. In addition to the valid period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted (direction reception period) and the validity period during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted (direction reception period), there are valid periods different from these. Furthermore, it may be something that can occur. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during a valid period with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a valid period in which accepting operations on the second operating means is permitted), changes in response to the operation acceptance (display changes, etc.) It is desirable that the simulated image (second simulated image) be in a displayed state, rather than being hidden, at the time when execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lighting of a lamp, etc., starts.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. However, if you accidentally operate the first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) and leave the first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) in the operating state (without performing the operation), Even if an operation is performed on the second operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) and the operation is accepted, the player is made to recognize that the effect has been properly accepted. You will be able to do this.

In this case, the display mode of the sample image (for example, color or Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and it is also possible for the sample image to be made difficult to see due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state where a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, it is necessary to It is desirable that the display state of the sample image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see due to other images. Therefore, if the sample image was dynamically displayed during the validity period during which operation reception was permitted, there would be at least one change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp lighting, etc.) ) is desirably continued to be dynamically displayed even when execution has started. In addition, in order to make the player aware that the performance has been properly accepted, it is necessary to make changes (such as display changes and lamp lighting) due to the player's operation within the first validity period. Even if such a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) in response to the operation reception is performed while the sample image (first sample image) is displayed without being hidden. , lamp emission, etc.).

According to such a configuration, "a determination means that performs a determination, a performance means that performs a performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and a performance device that performs a performance based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means." a special operation receiver disposed movably between a first position and a second position (an operation button 410 displaceable between a normal position and a pressed position); ), a first detection section capable of detecting a specific action (press operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving section to a second position, and a special operation receiving section different from the specific operation receiving section. (For example, a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (for example, a sheathing operation) by a player on the sword decoration 5001), A plurality of production reception periods including a first production reception period and a second production reception period are prepared as production reception periods (of different types), and in the first production reception period, a specific production reception period that imitates the specific operation receiving section is prepared. A simulated image is displayed, and the performance is accepted by detection by the first detection section, and in the second performance reception period, a special simulated image that simulates the special operation receiving section is displayed, and the performance is accepted by the detection by the first detection section. The performance is accepted by the detection by the second detection unit, and even though a special imitation image imitating the special operation receiving unit is displayed during the second performance reception period, the specific operation by the player is When the specific operation receiving section is displaced from the first position to the second position, even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving section at the second position, the second detection Based on the detection by the section, the performance is accepted, and the performance after the operation is made executable based on the performance reception.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving section at the second position, the performance is accepted by the detection by the second detection section, and the corresponding operation is accepted. At the time when the execution of the post-operation performance is started based on the reception of the performance, the special imitation image that simulates the special operation receiving part is kept displayed instead of hidden, so that it is not the side that operated by mistake. The player can be made aware that the post-operation performance is being executed as a proper operation.

In addition, when the special sample image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, the post-operation performance will start to be executed in the displayed mode. If the production is accepted without such an erroneous operation, the sample image may be left displayed instead of hidden at the time when the post-operation production starts, or the sample image may be left displayed after the operation. The simulated image may be hidden at the time when the performance is started.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving part is lower than that in the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving part. This is considered to be one of the causes of many operational errors. Therefore, when the second production reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving section, it is indicated that the production reception is allowed or will be in a state where production reception is allowed. It is desirable that a reception acceptance sound is output. This allows the player to recognize that the second performance acceptance period has occurred, and is expected to make it difficult for the player to make operational errors. The "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (valid period) will definitely occur while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned), or the reception This refers to a sound in which a permissible state (validity period) has already occurred. In other words, the output is started within the set time period in which presentation reception is permitted, indicating that the presentation reception is permitted, or before the set time period in which presentation reception is permitted begins. It is a sound that indicates that the output is started and the reception of the production is permitted, and is output as a production sound such as "Peekeen", for example.

However, even when the first production reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation receiving section, it is indicated that the production reception is allowed or will be in a state where production reception is allowed. A reception acceptance sound may be output. However, in this case, it is preferable that the mode (tone, etc.) of the acceptance permissible sound be made different depending on whether the first presentation acceptance period occurs or the second presentation acceptance period occurs. Alternatively, during the first performance reception period, even if a performance is accepted while the reception permissible sound is being output, the reception permissible sound that is in the output state will not be terminated and will continue, but during the second performance reception period. In this system, if a production is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is desirable that the reception permission sound being output is terminated midway through. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand whether the first performance reception period or the second performance reception period will occur, and whether the operation on the specific operation receiving section or the special operation reception period will occur. It becomes possible to properly grasp which operation has been accepted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a gauge image (small gauge image) with a relatively small display area is displayed, and then the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is displayed to become smaller as time passes. (For example, the display area will eventually be set to "0") to generate a small gauge validity period (performance reception period) that indicates the remaining time when operation reception is allowed. Displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image) and then decreasing the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) over time (for example, eventually reducing the display area to "0") In some cases, a large gauge valid period (performance reception period) indicating the remaining time in which operation reception is allowed is generated by displaying a display that indicates that the operation is accepted. The small gauge validity period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge validity period in which the large gauge image is displayed are based on the expectation level of jackpot that is suggested when the operation is accepted. The rate at which aspects that do not appear are executed) is different (for example, the expectation of a jackpot is higher during the large gauge validity period). In addition to the small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period, a validity period different from these may be generated. The small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period may provide an operation opportunity for the same operation object, or may provide an operation opportunity for different operation objects.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge validity period, the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the large gauge image remain displayed rather than hidden. Additionally, the large gauge image becomes smaller over time even when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the display continues without being terminated. As a result, while there was a sense of security as it appeared that there was a lot of time remaining due to the large gauge image being displayed, after the operation was accepted, there were questions about whether or not the operation was accepted properly. It becomes possible to make the patient feel a sense of anxiety, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode of the gauge image (for example, color or transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the gauge image may be made difficult to see due to other images. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, it is necessary to It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see due to other images. On the other hand, if a change (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs due to an operation by the player within the small gauge validity period, the change occurs. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden in a state where (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, or the gauge image (large gauge image ) may be displayed instead of hidden, and a change (display change, lamp lighting, etc.) may be generated in response to an operation reception.

In addition, when the large gauge validity period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception permission sound indicating that the production reception is now permitted or that the production reception is permitted. . This allows the player to recognize that the large gauge validity period has expired, making it possible to further emphasize the sense of security until the operation is accepted. The "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (valid period) will definitely occur while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned), or This is a sound in which a permissible state (validity period) has already occurred. In other words, the output is started within the set time during which presentation reception is permitted, indicating that the presentation reception is permitted, or before the set time when presentation reception is permitted begins. It is a sound that indicates that the output is started at , indicating that the reception of the production is permitted, and is output as a production sound such as "pikin", for example.

However, even when the small gauge validity period occurs, an acceptance permission sound may be output that indicates that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception is permitted. However, in this case, it is desirable that the mode (tone color, etc.) of the acceptance permissible sound be made different depending on whether a small gauge valid period occurs or a large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during the small gauge validity period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permissible sound is being output, the reception permissible sound that is in the output state will not end and will continue, but during the large gauge validity period, If the production is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output, it is desirable that the acceptance acceptance sound being output is terminated midway through. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand whether a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period occurs, and it is possible to accept operations during a small gauge valid period and a large gauge valid period. It becomes possible to properly grasp which operation was accepted during the period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may not only be different in size, but also have different shapes (such as images that are not similar).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or described later), during the period in which operation acceptance is permitted, the simulated image is dynamically displayed to depict the displacement of the operation receiving part. It is to be displayed. In this regard, the sample image is not hidden but remains displayed at the point when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. In this case, the dynamic display of the sample image may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the sample image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated sample image, which will be described later, in which they are integrated.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and the production examples described later, "operation reception" refers to detection by mechanical operation means such as buttons, as well as detection by touch sensor of contact with a specific operation receiving part. The operation may be accepted by detecting the movement of the player in a specific area in a non-contact manner.

In addition, when we refer to a performance that generates a performance reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) as an "operation-based performance," there is no relation to this operation-based performance. It may also be possible to perform it in parallel with another specific performance (for example, a movable body performance, a count performance, etc.) that does not have a specific effect. However, in this case, if the "operation-based production" is executed but "another specific production unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions is higher than when there is a performance situation in which "Specific Performance" is being performed concurrently. In other words, when there is a performance situation in which an "operation-based production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are concurrently performed, it is assumed that the production is not accepted for the "operation-related production" and the post-operation production is not executed. In contrast, a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed because ``another specific performance unrelated to this one'' is in the running state, whereas an ``operation-based performance'' is executed but ``another specific performance unrelated to this one'' is in progress. If you are in a production situation where "Specific Production" is not being executed, if the production is not accepted for "Operation Production" and the production is not executed after the operation, you will end up in a situation where no production will be executed. Therefore, a decline in interest in gaming is inevitable. Therefore, when an "operation-based production" is executed but "another specific production unrelated to this one" is not being executed, the "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this one" are executed. By making the rate at which the automatic performance function functions as described above higher than when there is a performance situation in which "performance" is performed concurrently, it is possible to suitably maintain the game's interest when an operation-based performance occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, foreshadowing performances that are performed before the production reception period occurs, and performances that operate the operation means that are the target of operation, are executed as "operation-based performances" or performances related to this. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, if the "another specific performance" is to be generated before the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably a precursory performance), it is suggested in advance that the rate at which the automatic performance function described above will function will be higher. You will be able to do it. In this case, it is desirable that the performance be executed as a performance that ends after the performance reception period (preferably, post-operation performance) ends. On the other hand, if "another specific performance" is to be executed as a performance that occurs after the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably a precursory performance) and ends before the end of the performance acceptance period, for example, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately beforehand whether there is a high probability that the automatic presentation function will function, and it becomes possible to provide presentations with a sense of tension. In this regard, if the "another specific performance" is to occur before the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably, the precursor performance), the "another specific performance" can be performed multiple times within one symbol change. If it is set to be performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the automatic production function is likely to function when "another specific production" is executed. It becomes possible to create a sense of tension as to whether or not the performance reception period will occur.

Also, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss fluctuations according to the result of the jackpot determination are sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss fluctuation is executed 999 times in a row, Until the 1000th loss variation is reached, a performance reception period may occur with a predetermined probability in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination. In addition, even if the performance acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, the above-mentioned automatic performance function may function or may not function. On the other hand, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot judgment is sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in a row). When the 1000th losing variation is reached, the symbol variation (performance pattern) that reaches the specific value will be given an operating opportunity to the operating means (any of multiple operating means) regardless of the result of jackpot determination. In addition to ensuring that there is a performance acceptance period in which a performance is granted, the above-mentioned automatic performance function will function even if there is no operation by the player within the performance reception period, and there will be an operation by the player within the performance reception period. Processing that always generates the same post-operation effect as before may be executed. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, "the player should perform an operation every time a performance acceptance period occurs while the loss variation is being executed continuously." As if feeling a sense of responsibility, the Pachinko machine 1 itself will always function automatically even if there is no operation by the player. Since the game is realized as a performance that makes the player feel excited, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. At this time, during the performance reception period that occurs when the losing fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing fluctuation), the losing fluctuations are sequentially digested and the execution is performed. A special display image (e.g., "Operate") that is different from the display image that appeared during the performance acceptance period until the number of times reaches a certain value (e.g., loss variation up to 999 times) (e.g., "Operate", etc.) It is desirable to display a message such as "If it is troublesome, I will handle the operation on your behalf." In addition, even after the symbol variation (performance pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is fulfilled, the symbol variation (Performance pattern), regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, a performance reception period is always generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means), and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf.''), and even if there is no operation by the player within the production acceptance period, the automatic production function described above will function and respond to the production reception. It is desirable to execute a process that always generates a post-operation effect.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot judgment is sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in a row, The remaining number of variations until reaching the 1000th losing variation may be displayed.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), until the loss variation according to the result of jackpot judgment is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value, during symbol variation, the first operation Both the production acceptance period for the means and the production acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the losing variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. Alternatively, the performance may be advanced so that only one of the performance reception period for the first operating means and the performance reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to prevent expectations from being raised regarding the occurrence of the production acceptance period itself. It becomes wet. However, this example shows that "despite the fact that we have been urging players to perform operations every time a production acceptance period occurs while losing fluctuations are being executed continuously, no results have been achieved. As if he felt a sense of responsibility, considering that the pachinko machine itself is realized as a performance that ensures that the automatic performance function functions even if there is no operation by the player, it is a transitional situation. In order to prevent such expectations from building up any further, a production reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) for which the level of expectation is relatively low at the time of occurrence, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable that the production acceptance period for the sword decoration object 5001) not occur.

In addition, for the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means, the control is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). This can occur both when not in use and when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). Regarding the second production acceptance period in which an opportunity to operate is given, this cannot occur unless the control is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), and the second production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given is not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may be possible to generate the event when the event occurs. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to enhance the performance when the control is in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and when the control is in the specific performance state (automatic button performance state). This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when generating the performance reception period based on the result of jackpot determination,
・Display a sample image of the operation means (operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation means to be operated) (sample image display means);
- After the performance acceptance period has occurred, if the player performs an operation while the sample image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means);
- After the performance acceptance period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without any operation by the player while the sample image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed without receiving any operation by the player ( automatic production reception means)
However, the sample image may be displayed in one of several modes that differ in the rate (expectation level) of the execution of the post-operation effect in "a mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do so. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in both the case where the post-operation performance is generated by the player operation reception means and the case where the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic performance reception means. It will be possible to generate effects after the operation.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, the player does not have any involvement with the operating means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410), and the post-operation performance is generated. Since the performance is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operating means the automatically generated post-operation performance corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is activated to generate a post-operation performance, first, a sample image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation means to be operated) is displayed within the performance reception period, and at the same time, Even if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions, it is desirable to generate the post-operation presentation while the simulated image is displayed instead of being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target does not necessarily have to be the same. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one was even in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the above-mentioned automatic As in the case where the performance function functions, the post-operation performance may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation performance may be performed using at least an area of the performance display device 1600 that is different from the area where the sample image is displayed, or may be performed using a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decoration. It may also be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the sample image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different expectations, even if the post-operation effect occurs, the expectation level (the sample image) that was suggested during the effect acceptance period will be display mode).

The simulated image that continues to be displayed in this way is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, when automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first-side performance reception period has occurred, and when the specific time has passed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred, In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when different times have elapsed, the time from when the post-operation presentation is executed until the simulated image is hidden is also different from each other. is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is no post-operation effect, you will be able to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the sample image is hidden. .

In addition, when a post-operation effect occurs due to automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect occurs due to automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has passed, there is a jackpot determination. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

In addition, if a performance reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs while being controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), two displays will be displayed during the performance reception period. Either of the display modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot or a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot) can appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) appears, even if no operation is performed within the production acceptance period, the production will be accepted (the automatic production function will always function) and the production will be executed after the operation according to the production reception, but the low expectations display When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, a production is accepted (the automatic production function functions) when no operation is performed within the production reception period, and a post-operation production according to the production reception is executed. The presentation may be advanced so that there are cases where the presentation is accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and there are cases where the presentation is not executed after the operation. In other words, if you forget to operate when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that you will lose interest in the game because you will not be able to confirm the performance after the operation. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game's interest will not decrease significantly even if the player forgets to perform an operation. If you sometimes forget to perform an operation, the automatic performance function must function within the performance acceptance period to avoid a decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to perform an operation. If you forget to operate when the image) appears, the automatic production function will not necessarily function during the production acceptance period to create a sense of tension in the game so that you will not forget to operate it. It is expected that this will increase the awareness of player participation. Note that when not controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) does not appear. It may be made so that it cannot appear. Furthermore, during the performance acceptance period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

[Further performance regarding sample image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of determining which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

Then, when such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) is performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, so that the effect is displayed according to the result of the jackpot judgment. A fluctuating performance using decorative patterns will be executed together with expected performances (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of movable bodies (actual object performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected presentation will be provided as a presentation with "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been won." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an operation reception performance (valid period) in which the performance reception is permitted. However, as will be described later, the acceptance permissible sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect occurs is made to have a different form depending on the result of the effect judgment, so that the post-operation effect is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation. It is designed to suggest the percentage of winnings and the percentage of jackpot symbols being stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination, Even if a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when the predetermined condition is met), It is possible to generate an operation reception performance (valid period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected and a special result is not obtained in the production judgment, the operation acceptance production (valid period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception performance (validity period) that occurs when the symbol performance based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the operation acceptance effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, there is a variation pattern other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern". It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, a variation pattern that generates an operation acceptance effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing is not included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined effect for the effect element that is the target of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). The operation only executes a post-operation performance that causes a change (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a performance operation by a movable decoration). The reception performance (validity period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception performance,
・During the execution period of the symbol production (production pattern) based on the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" according to the variation pattern (production pattern) is in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of a low-expectation non-suppression reception performance that provides operation opportunities while being output, or a symbol performance (performance pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is Is the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" suppressed or output without sound, or is in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which audible sound is recorded among the sound data has ended, or whether the channel assignment As mentioned above, various measures have been taken, such as making it possible at least to generate a high-expectation suppression reception performance that provides an opportunity to operate even when the system is closed (e.g., has been terminated).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further displays the simulated image displayed in the operation reception performance as an integrated simulated image that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the simulated image. This is intended to improve the game's interest when the operation acceptance performance (validity period) occurs. For such an integrated mock image, there is an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable to display this in both the reception performance (validity period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. In addition, for each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the illustrated sample images with one of the integrated sample images described below, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

Hereinafter, a case will be described in which a sample image is displayed as an "integrated sample image."
First, to explain the "sample image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception performance includes the "operation receiver" that is operated by the player, and the periphery of the operation receiver. A "peripheral decoration part" for decoration is provided. In this regard, the term "simulation image" refers to an image that simulates the "operation receiver" of such operation means. The "operation receiving part" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the player's manipulation, and the "peripheral decoration part" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the "operation receiving section" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "periphery decoration section" corresponds to the frame unit 415. This corresponds to . Furthermore, in the case of the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in FIGS. 124 and 139, the "operation receiving part" corresponds to the sword part 5010, and the "periphery decoration part" corresponds to the sheath part 5020. Become.

FIG. 144 shows an "integrated image" that is displayed when an operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs on an operation means provided with an "operation receiver" that receives a "press operation" by a player. It is a figure showing an example.

In this example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiver" on the upper surface of the handle 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. That is, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle part 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detected information is used to determine the effect (such as the trigger for executing the effect after the operation). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation unit includes a "handle button 5014" that can be operated (up and down) with respect to the handle 5012, and a "handle button 5014" that can be operated (up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving parts with a possible "handle part 5012" will be provided.

FIG. 144 describes the "integrated image" when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the examples described below including FIG. 144, the "integrated image" when giving an operation opportunity to the handle button 5014 is not operated on the handle button 5014 but on the operation button 410. It may be applied as an "integrated image" when an operation acceptance performance (validity period) for which an opportunity is given occurs. In other words, in this case, the "simulated image of the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-mentioned production examples can be replaced with the "integrated simulated image" described below, and in this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception that gives an operation opportunity to the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) When generating an effect (validity period), in the effect display device 1600, a button pattern image BMG that imitates the patterned button 5014 (or operation button 410) is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. They are displayed as integrated images IGa to IGd. In the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not prepared separately as image data, but are integrated into one image data (integrated image data). They are displayed only as morphological images IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated image IGa to IGd are displayed, operation prompts such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but for convenience of explanation, they are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-operation performance executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) is a "first performance mode with relatively low expectations" and a "relatively low expectation performance mode". A plurality of performance modes are prepared, including a "second performance mode with high expectations," and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment). . In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d),
・The mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa) appears in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
- The mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (integrated model image IGc) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears in a specific operation reception performance (valid period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
・The mode shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated model image IGd) is better than the mode shown in FIG. Based on the result of jackpot judgment (performance judgment), so that a relationship is established that when ``2nd production mode with relatively high expectation level'' appears as a post-operation production when . One of the morphological images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated image IGa to IGd. Just by preparing at least two aspects, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation performance within the effective period. Furthermore, it is possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated image IGa to IGd) and display any of the prepared modes.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
- An operation means (sword decoration body 5001, production operation unit 400),
- An integrated model image display unit that displays a model image of the operation receiving part as integrated model images IGa to IGd that are integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image;
- an operation reception execution means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving part due to an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed; The integrated model image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details of the "integrated model images" shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d) will be explained separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated pattern image IGa" shown in FIG. 144(a) is configured to include a normal button pattern image BMGa and a normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa that decorates its periphery. However, in the "integrated model image IGa", the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as "an image that simulates the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given". On the other hand, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is a peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) which is the object to which an operation opportunity is given. unit 415), but instead decorates the periphery of the normal button pattern image BMGa as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, first, even if a plurality of operating means are provided, it is determined which of the operating means is given the opportunity to operate based on the operating means to be operated ( It can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button pattern image BMGa that imitates a part of the button image BMGa. Moreover, the normal button pattern image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration part, but a luxurious and large image (integrated pattern image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable for improving decorativeness and performance. ), it is expected that the visual impact when the normal button sketch image BMGa is displayed will be greater, and that it will increase the interest in the game. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost or installation space required to make the existing peripheral decoration part luxurious, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible presentation that is not limited by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration part. become.

In the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 144(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button model image BMGa), and on its top surface, A predetermined decoration is applied to warn that the button is highly dangerous. As described above, these "pedestals" and "predetermined decorations" have shapes different from the actual peripheral decorations and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is decreased over time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG changes from the predetermined maximum display area to the predetermined minimum value (including "0") when no operation is accepted within the validity period. The display area decreases over time until it reaches the display area of . That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only has the function of indicating the operation means to be operated, but also indicates the remaining time until the state (validity period) in which operation reception is permitted ends. It also has the function of suggesting the remaining time.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 144(a), a partition image KG is provided that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. . The area surrounded by this divided image KG will function as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the partition image KG does not necessarily need to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 144(a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. , a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed so as to overlap with the display target area to which the predetermined decoration has been applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but becomes visible even in the part where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that the gauge image GG is displayed from a full state to It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game over the entire period until the game becomes empty.

Note that when realizing such a display mode within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area with the predetermined decoration. In addition to the display method, a method may be adopted in which the color of the display target area itself, which is decorated with a predetermined decoration, is changed in color between the part with the gauge and the part without the gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist alone as image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of the predetermined decoration within the display target area.

In the example shown in FIG. 144(a), the normal peripheral decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is Since it is arranged to extend over other areas within the image SSGa, it is possible to further enhance the integrated decorativeness of the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself. It is expected that the player's enjoyment of the game will be improved when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 144(a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern button to be operated is 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button pattern image BMGa in the "integrated pattern image IGa". In other words, as will be described later, the button drawing image BMG has a plurality of modes with different expectations, and the button drawing image BMGa is normally displayed as one of these modes. If this is adopted, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the handle button 5014 that is the operation target without visually recognizing the normal button pattern image BMGa.

The "button drawing image BMGa (FIG. 144(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact copy of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the object of operation; in short, the object of operation is It is sufficient if it is displayed with a level of reproduction (deformation, etc.) that allows one to recognize which operating means it is.

On the other hand, the "integrated mapped image IGb" shown in FIG. , and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated map image IGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", but the button map image BMG is displayed as the "button map image" described above. Instead of "BMGa," the button is displayed as "special button image BMGb," which has a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. The button pattern image BMGa (FIG. 144(a)) is displayed as an image having a different shape from the “button pattern image BMGa” (FIG. 144(a)) which is a pattern of the button pattern 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operation means is being operated.

However, as mentioned above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa", which is a model of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the operation target, is displayed integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Therefore, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has the function of indicating that the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object to be operated. In this regard, in the "integrated map image IGb", the "special button map image BMGb" is displayed integrated with such "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", so the "special button map image Even if "BMGb" does not properly simulate the operation target, the "integrated simulated image IGb" as a whole may suggest that the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the operation target. become able to. In order to suitably obtain such an effect (the function of suggesting the operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" must be operated by a different operation means than the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to display the handle part 5012 and the like when it is the object of operation.

According to this configuration, by displaying the button drawing image BMG, which imitates the operation receiving part, and the peripheral decoration image SSG, which decorates the periphery thereof, as an integrated image, it is possible to The button drawing image BMG, which is only a part of the fake image, can now be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily limited to the shape of the operating means to be operated, resulting in a more outstanding presentation. It is expected that the game will be made more interesting through its sexiness and decorativeness.

Note that the "special button drawing image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. The words "DANGER" are written on it. The appearance of such a "special button drawing image BMGb" that does not exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1 makes it easier for players to remember the premium feeling, and the "button drawing image BMGa" appears. People are now expected to instinctively sense that expectations are higher than they used to be.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which "integrated image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button pattern image BMGb in the "integrated pattern image IGb". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target.

On the other hand, the "integrated mapped image IGc" shown in FIG. It is configured as an integrated image with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated map image IGc", the button map image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button map image BMGa", but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal peripheral decoration image" described above. Instead of "image SSGa", the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape is displayed.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) that is actually provided around the periphery of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, and the effect display is The periphery of the button pattern image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display performance on the device 1600.
- A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))", when using "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" as a reference, it is possible to perform an operation on any operating means. It is possible to significantly change the overall shape of the "integrated map image IGc" (FIG. 144(c)) without causing a change in the shape of the "button map image BMG" that indicates whether an opportunity will be given. become able to. Thereby, it becomes possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a high degree of freedom by causing shape changes without sacrificing the suggesting function of the operation target.

Further, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144(c))" according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof is an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))". It is displayed as . Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted when "integrated image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" appears and when "integrated image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) is applied.

In particular, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144(c))" according to this embodiment, a separate member with special decoration is added to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))". The image is enlarged and displayed as an enlarged image in its entirety. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as a developed version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and the expectation level is higher than when the "button drawing image BMGa" appears. People are expected to be able to instinctively sense things that are expensive.

Furthermore, although the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144(c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))," the gauge image (predetermined image) No change is made to the display target area of GG itself.

In other words, when a part of such an integrated image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, are the display target area and the gauge image "merely part of the decoration" or "the rest?" It is difficult for the player to discern whether the part has a function of indicating time or not. In this respect, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144(c))" are gauges that have important functions such as "suggesting the remaining time." The shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, but the shape is changed in other parts, so it is possible to change the shape without sacrificing the remaining time suggestion function. This makes it possible to achieve decorativeness and performance with a high degree of freedom.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144(c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated image IGc" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button pattern image BMGa in the "integrated pattern image IGc". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG", and as a result, the button pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the object of operation. However, when the "integrated map image IGc" is displayed, the normal button map image BMGa is displayed in a different color (for example, "green") than when the "integrated map image IGa" is displayed. You can also do this. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated mapped image IGd" shown in FIG. It is configured as an integrated image with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated button drawing image IGd", the button drawing image BMG is not displayed as the above-mentioned "normal button drawing image BMGa" but as a "special button drawing image BMGb" which has a different shape. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a shape different from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa".

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 144(d))", the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" and the "integrated model image IGc" (FIG. 144(c))" is displayed as an integrated image with the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". According to such a configuration, the effect produced by the "special button map image BMGb" described above regarding the "integrated map image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" and the "integrated map image IGc (FIG. 144(b))" can be achieved. In addition to obtaining the effects achieved by the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" described above with respect to "c))", when using the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" as a reference, Since the aspects of both the button drawing image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that the user will instinctively feel that the level of expectation is high.

On the other hand, even though the aspects of both the button drawing image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are changed, the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the edge decoration image SSG. Identification for the same post-operation effect when "integrated image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" appears and when "integrated image IGd (Fig. 144(d))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that the operation reception effect (validity period) is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144(d), when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which an "integrated image IGd" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button pattern image BMGb in the "integrated pattern image IGd". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG", and as a result, the button pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the object of operation. However, the special button image BMGb when the "integrated image IGd" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") than when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit light in a rainbow color.

As shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol presentation based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, and a predetermined operation acceptance presentation (valid period) When this occurs, an integrated button image IG in which the button image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, but one side of the button image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG is displayed in one manner. The other side can be displayed in one of a number of ways. For example, when the button drawing image BMG is displayed as the "normal button drawing image BMGa", the peripheral decoration image SSG may be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" ( Figures 144(a), (c)). Furthermore, when the button drawing image BMG is displayed as the "special button drawing image BMGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" ( Figures 144(b), (d)). Furthermore, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", the button print image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button print image BMGa" or the "special button print image BMGb" ( Figures 144(a), (b)). Furthermore, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special border decoration image SSGb", the button print image BMG may be displayed as either the "normal button print image BMGa" or the "special button print image BMGb" ( Figures 144(a), (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, only one side thereof is displayed when the aspect changes. Therefore, if you look at one side whose appearance has not changed, you can easily recognize that the predetermined operation reception performance (validity period) is occurring, regardless of which form the other side is displayed on. Therefore, by looking at the other side whose aspect is changing, it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. Note that the aspect of one side of the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may not be changed, and only the aspect of the other side may be changed.

Furthermore, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated image IG is displayed in the operation reception effect (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases over time. It is considered possible. In other words, in this case, the "peripheral decoration image SSG" has the function of suggesting the remaining time until the state in which operation acceptance is allowed ends, and indicates which operating means is the object of operation. By being displayed as an integrated button image IG that is integrated with the ``button image BMG'' that performs the suggesting function, it is possible to understand the remaining time and the operation target, and also recognize which of multiple modes has appeared. It is expected that the player will be able to suitably maintain the game's interest when the operation acceptance performance (validity period) is occurring, such as by being able to do so.

In addition, in the integrated sample image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (There are both parts with a remaining time suggestion function and parts without a remaining time suggestion function). That is, the purpose of the peripheral decoration image SSG is not only to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), but also to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception effect (validity period). Since it is possible to proactively adopt display formats with the aim of "increasing the user experience," while indicating the remaining time, it is also possible to improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs. can be significantly improved. In order to obtain such effects, it is more desirable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG be displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. I can say that.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button pattern image BMG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, in reality, when the "handle part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part has one mode, the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) which is the operation receiving part has multiple modes (multiple luminescent colors). ). Therefore, when the button drawing image BMG changes, it can be confirmed simply by checking the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of copying.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), when the button pattern image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as a matter of fact, the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decorative portion does not change into any of the plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the button pattern image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the aspect of the "pattern part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part, and can perform a variety of depictions that are preferable for enlivening the performance. Note that the "handle part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part may be provided as something that cannot be changed into a plurality of modes, such as being non-emissive.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the aspect of both the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may change (FIG. 144(d)). However, as a matter of fact, it is desirable that when the "handle part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part is in one aspect, the aspects of both the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change.

Different aspects appear in the “handle portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration part, depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” or the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. You can do it like this. However, while the peripheral decoration image SSG at least changes in shape between the case where it is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the peripheral decoration In the "handle portion 5012", it is desirable to cause only a change in the aspect (for example, a change in the light emission manner) without a change in shape. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration part so that its shape cannot change in the first place, in order to highlight the virtual presentation function of the peripheral decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern images include a button pattern image BMG in which the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is patterned, as well as a pattern image in which the pattern portion 5012 is patterned. TMG is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made to vary depending on which of the simulated images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decoration images SSGa,b that decorate the periphery of the button pattern image BMG cannot be displayed when a pattern image different from the button pattern image BMG is displayed, so that the peripheral edge The decorative images SSGa, b themselves can also be expected to have a "function that suggests which operating means is the object of operation."

Note that if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the pattern image (button pattern image BMG, pattern pattern image TMG), the form (thickness) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image , length) are also preferably different. The operation reception effect in which the button drawing image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the button drawing image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (you can select which one occurs depending on the effect judgment) It may also be an effect that occurs in a different variation pattern or at a different timing. The periphery decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image BMG is not a periphery decoration part, and the periphery decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image TMG is a periphery decoration part is not an imitation of the periphery decoration part. It's okay. However, even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is desirable that the set time as the operation acceptance effect (validity period) may be the same.

In addition, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG include those areas. A predetermined decoration (in this case, a "striped pattern") is applied over the area, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner over a display target area that has been given a predetermined decoration. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but becomes visible even in the part where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that the gauge image GG is displayed from a full state to It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game over the entire period until the game becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration, and in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the predetermined decoration Since the number of predetermined decorations also decreases, players who dislike the reduction of the number of predetermined decorations are encouraged to perform operations at an early stage.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) provided on the machine is not imitated, and the image represents an intangible object as a gaming machine part. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize decorativeness and performance with a higher degree of freedom without being limited by the substance of the gaming machine parts.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), among the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. In other words, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG representing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button drawing image BMG, so which of the plurality of operation means is the operation target. It becomes possible to realize a display with higher performance and decoration by changing the shape of the integrated image IG while appropriately indicating whether the image is being displayed or not.

Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, when the button drawing image BMG is in one mode, the shape may not necessarily be changed, but only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is allowed because the edge decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object and because the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button drawing image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed to increase its size. As will be explained later, methods for changing the shape include increasing the number of objects represented as images (such as the number of decorations), or using multiple methods with different contour shapes (cuboids, spheres, etc.) It is possible to adopt methods such as widening the displayed range of a predetermined object expressed as an image. Also, as will be described later, regarding the change in the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a precursor effect, a stepwise change is performed from a form with low expectations to a form with high expectations, and then, finally, It may be possible to allow operation reception in the operation reception performance while the changed form is maintained.

Furthermore, in the integrated sample image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed, the gauge image ( The display target area of GG (predetermined image) is not changed (at least the shape) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to suitably maintain the function of suggesting how much time is left, and in this way, the important function can be maintained. While maintaining this, the degree of expectation can also be suggested by changes in shape in a region other than the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned effects is intended to be achieved, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an insubstantial object, and may be a peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiver. It may also be displayed as an image of a portion of the image.

Furthermore, the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period in which operation reception is permitted" such as a predetermined operation reception presentation. This prompts the player to perform operations.

However, in the integrated pattern image IG according to this embodiment, although the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are Only one side is displayed dynamically, and the other side is displayed statically. According to such a configuration, one side uses dynamic expressions to contribute to improving the performance when a button effect, which is an important effect, occurs, while the other side uses a dynamic expression to maintain the display in place. By doing so, when the integrated image IG is viewed as a whole, it will not be displayed moving, so visibility can be suitably ensured.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the button model image BMG is dynamically created so as to depict how the operation receiver to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range. The peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), and when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is decreased over time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side of the integrated image IG that has secured suitable visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG, which is the side that is not dynamically displayed). Therefore, although we are trying to improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs by dynamic display using the button drawing image BMG, it is difficult to understand how much remaining time is allowed for the reception of the performance. can be easily recognized.

In addition, in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, on the side of the integrated image IG that has ensured suitable visibility (the side that is not dynamically displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Predetermined image) Also includes an area where GG is not displayed. In other words, in this case, when performing an effect suggesting the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated image IG that has secured suitable visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from having an adverse effect.

A region of the peripheral decoration image SSG that is different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button pattern image BMG have multiple aspects with different expectations, and these Although one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), when the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an integrated pattern image IG that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, In addition, if the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern within the peripheral decoration image SSG? There is a concern that it will be difficult to grasp whether the time limit is 100%, or has a function that indicates the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced because it becomes difficult to grasp to what position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to the mixture with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG. .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( In the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed, it is possible to display an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is used as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area. Then, a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is also displayed to be displaced in the same way.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, the validity period ends, so even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) is just a decoration or indicates the remaining time, the position of the "specific image" By checking this, you will be able to recognize the remaining time. In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image", it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period during which operation reception is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 145, if timing A0 has now arrived at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which operation reception is permitted within the predetermined variation pattern starts, then in the effect display device 1600, , an integrated image IG, and operation promotion images such as "Push!" and "Downward Arrow" are displayed.

In this example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated simulated image IGa) is displayed as the integrated simulated image IG, but based on the result of the effect determination, FIGS. ) may be displayed in any of the modes shown in (). Regardless of the manner in which the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the relevant validity period, the display of a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" causes a change in the mode described below as time passes.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), first, in the integrated image IG at timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. It will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 145(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" "Specific image whose aspect has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displayed. By simply checking, it becomes possible to easily understand whether a predetermined period of time has already passed since the operation was accepted (a situation where the remaining crotch space is decreasing).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is first processed from timing A0 (start timing of the validity period). Until a predetermined time period (time required for the entire image of a specific image to appear) has elapsed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner such that the display area increases according to the elapsed time. is displayed in the display target area.

For example, in the integrated image IG at timing A1, which is a short time after timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period), as shown in FIG. A "specific image TG" as a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" appears to the point where about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is increasing as time passes.

In the integrated image IG at timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. The "specific image TG" as a "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has already appeared in its entirety, and the gauge image can be displayed without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that the image is displaced within the display target area of GG.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is the gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (image) is displayed at or near the end of the GG, and is displayed in such a way that the display position of the gauge image (predetermined image) is shifted (in a continuous manner) in accordance with the displacement of the end of the GG (predetermined image) It becomes.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed as an image with a star-shaped mark in a white square space at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become a thing. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, for example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a manner in which the end portion thereof is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually becomes thinner over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that indicates that the remaining time has run out when the display area reaches the minimum value (here "0"). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends), at least a part (or all of it may be) is not hidden and remains displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is set to "0", leaving about half the display area of the "specific image TG". If no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end of the validity period, so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left; You may also do so.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the validity period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display position of the "specific image TG" is adjusted (continuously) according to the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Since the image is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player's side, how much of the image is displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG? It becomes possible to make it ambiguous whether the predetermined image is GG or not.

In other words, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the validity period ends and most (more than half, or all) of the display area remains, the player does not When viewed, it appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (not displayed here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is longer than it actually is, so it is possible to make it appear that the validity period is longer than it actually is. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being performed.

On the other hand, when the validity period of the operation reception performance ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" remains and ends, so the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the discrepancy between the display timing and the end timing of the validity period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer that can absorb such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 145, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has partially changed." specific image" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is The image (predetermined image) may be displayed within the display target area of GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is used as a part of the gauge image GG. As a result, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the valid period is set to be longer than it appears, and to reduce the interest in playing when the valid period occurs. They will be expected to improve their skills.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the validity period during which operation reception is permitted.

Now, suppose that timing A0 has arrived at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which operation reception is permitted has started within the predetermined variation pattern, and in the example shown in FIG. 146, the effect display device 1600 , an integrated image IG, and operation promotion images such as "Push!" and "Downward Arrow" are displayed.

In this example as well, the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated simulated image IGa) is displayed as the integrated simulated image IG, but based on the result of the effect judgment, FIGS. 144(b) to ( It may be displayed in any of the modes shown in d). Regardless of the manner in which the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the relevant validity period, the display of a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" causes changes in the modes shown in FIGS. 146(a) to (d) over time. .

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 146(a), in the integrated image IG at timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG covers the entire area of the display target area. Instead, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed. At timing A0 (start timing of the valid period), only a portion of the "specific image TG" may be displayed, but here, the entirety is displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the "specific image TG" functions as a part of the "gauge image GG", so it seems that there is more time remaining than it appears. It is possible to

The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image expressing an “eraser”, and it does not fit within the area surrounded by the partition image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG), but is placed in another area (of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , an area whose appearance can change depending on the level of expectation, etc.). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the "specific image TG" more prominent than the "gauge image GG", and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to recognize how much time is left. Be expected.

In this example, when time passes from timing A0 to timings A2 and A3, and the "specific image TG" is displaced, as shown in FIGS. 146(b) and (c), the "specific image TG" The area through which the "" has passed changes to a "white area" as if it had been erased with an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expressions) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the amount of displacement of the "specific image TG". In some cases, the reduced area is expressed in only one color, so the contrast around the "specific image TG" becomes more prominent, suggesting how much time is left. This makes it possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction is about Note that it is desirable that the color appearing in the reduced area be a color that is not used in the "gauge image GG".

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the "specific image TG" is a gauge image (predetermined image) GG that indicates that the remaining time has run out when the display area reaches the minimum value (here, "0"). Since it does not originally function as a part, at least a part (or all of it may be) is not hidden and remains displayed even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends). Become.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(d), in the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0". , so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left. If no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, in this example as well, in the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, a part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden and a part remains. It may be displayed as follows.

Even in this example, since the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced (continuously) in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, When viewed from the player side, it is possible to make it ambiguous how much of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It becomes like this.

In other words, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the validity period ends and most (more than half, or all) of the display area remains, the player does not When viewed, it appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (not displayed here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is longer than it actually is, so it is possible to make it appear that the validity period is longer than it actually is. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being performed.

On the other hand, when the validity period of the operation reception performance ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" remains and ends, so the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be displayed to be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the discrepancy between the display timing and the end timing of the validity period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer that can absorb such a time lag.

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are different from those in the example shown in FIG. 145, but the same images may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 145, the same image as in the example shown in FIG. 146 may be used. Furthermore, the validity period during which the images of "gauge image GG" and "specific image TG" are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, and the image of "gauge image GG" and "specific image TG" It may be arranged so that the validity period during which the is displayed can occur under different conditions. In this case, the shape of the integrated image IG itself or at least the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG differs between the valid period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 145 appears and the valid period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 146 appears. It is desirable to make them different.

As mentioned above, the integrated image IG is dynamic during the validity period of the predetermined operation reception performance, as shown in FIGS. 145(a) to 145(e) and FIGS. This can be displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation. However, as mentioned above, while the button pattern image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range, the peripheral decoration image SSG is prevents this from being displayed dynamically. In the peripheral decoration image SSG, which is the side where such dynamic display is not performed, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( Since the predetermined image (predetermined image) GG is changed, it is easy to recognize how much time remains until the validity period ends even in the dynamically displayed integrated image IG. You will be able to do this.

The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" may be displayed as one image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configurations shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the "specific image TG" has a display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" within the display target area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is decreased, and whose display position is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" will be displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, it is made unclear to what extent the gauge image (predetermined image) GG out of the images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. You will be able to do this.

Furthermore, the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 145 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at its maximum value, and a predetermined time elapses after the operation is accepted. Until the time elapses (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is increased to compensate for the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". We are trying to increase this. According to such a configuration, initially from the start of the validity period until the predetermined time elapses, the remaining time suggested by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" appears as if it were not decreasing. Since the player can have a positive image, it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the integrated model image IG is displayed in one of multiple modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (e)) based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination). However, the display shape of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" should be the same regardless of whether they are displayed in any of these modes. It is desirable to Each aspect of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and "specific image TG" (pattern, color, etc.) may be changed according to expectations, but a function that indicates the remaining time may be changed. In order to maintain it preferably, even if one aspect of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" changes, it is desirable that the other aspect is not changed. For example, if the mark attached to the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. As the "Image) GG" gradually decreases, the expectation level (double circle) becomes visible, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game will improve.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, at least a portion (or all of the specific image TG) of the "specific image TG" remains non-existent even when the valid period ends without any operation by the player. The display status is maintained instead of being displayed. However, regarding the operation acceptance effects shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, if timing A4 arrives without any operation being performed by the player, the operation is accepted internally and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, It is desirable to have the system function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception performance" in which a sound is output in response to reception. In this case, timing A4 may be the timing at which the validity period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after this timing. In any case, timing A4 is after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (at the timing when it is hidden or a timing later than that), and when the "specific image TG" is It is desirable to set the timing to arrive when at least a portion of the screen is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after operation acceptance is no longer permitted, the " Since the "specific image TG" is now displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display and post-operation sound output have started in response to the player's operation being completed in time and the corresponding operation being accepted. become able to. The "specific image TG" may also be displayed at the time when the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starts (for example, it may be displayed after the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starts, and then fade out). (such as those that are gradually hidden from view).

When the validity period during which such automatic reception is performed is the first validity period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a second validity period that is different from the first condition. When the conditions are met, a second validity period during which automatic acceptance is not performed can be generated. Even during the second validity period, the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an integrated pattern image IG that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, and the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a gauge image (predetermined image ) GG display target area is included. However, within the second validity period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG" is no longer displayed. Other than the fact that the "specific image TG" is not displayed, the integrated model image IG displayed within the first validity period and the integrated model image IG displayed within the second validity period are displayed as the same image. It can be done.

That is, in the second validity period that occurs when the second condition is met, unlike the first validity period that occurs when the first condition is met, if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, The second valid period ends in a manner in which the automatic reception does not function and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output (or both) does not occur. Therefore, if the "specific image TG" remains displayed at the time when the reception of operations by the player is no longer permitted, the validity period ends even though the remaining time has not yet been used up. This may give rise to a misunderstanding as if the player is playing the game, and may even reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable that the "specific image TG" not be displayed during the entire period from the start to the end.

In this case, it is desirable that the lengths of the set times (the time from when operation reception is permitted until the end) are different between the first valid period and the second valid period. Further, it is desirable that the display changes (post-operation display) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when an operation is accepted are different from each other.

Furthermore, in addition to the first validity period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, a third validity period during which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, generated when the third condition is satisfied), In addition to the second validity period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth validity period during which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, generated when the fourth condition is satisfied). The point is that the valid period during which automatic reception is performed (valid periods with different occurrence conditions for each period) includes at least the first valid period during which display and sound processing is performed in the manner described above, and automatic reception is performed. It is sufficient that at least the second validity period in which the processing related to display and sound is performed in the manner described above is included in the validity period in which the display and sound are not performed (validity periods with different generation conditions).

Also, the "first validity period" here is
・It does not mean that only when set to a special performance state (automatic reception mode), the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the validity period.
・Represents something that outputs post-operation display and post-operation sound output regardless of the performance state and regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the validity period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to provide a "special performance state (automatic reception mode)" or "a plurality of performance states" as the performance state. In addition, if the "second validity period" occurs while the "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" is set, either method may be adopted as to whether automatic reception is enabled or not. (For example, "automatic reception may not always be enabled regardless of the performance state") is not related to the configuration related to the technical feature described here.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the validity period of the operation reception performance occurs, the integrated model image IG (periphery decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas forming the integrated model image IG (periphery decoration image SSG) is displayed. In the non-linear region of 1, a display is performed in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is decreased as time passes. According to such a configuration, the depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as time passes becomes decorative in itself, so that the remaining time as the valid period is used up. This makes it possible to suitably maintain interest in playing games.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a specific pattern applied to the display target area and has a predetermined transmittance. (Predetermined image) GG is displayed in a superimposed manner, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is given a specific pattern, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) changes over time. It becomes possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself which reduces the display area of GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) It becomes possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself which reduces the display area of GG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the non-linear specific shape display target area shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 is defined as a "first display target area". When, a second display target area has a shape different from the non-linear specific shape (non-similar shape) and has a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts decreasing the display area to when it ends. The operation acceptance effect (validity period) in which is displayed can occur under different conditions. The operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, and when the operation reception effect (valid period) is The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed is made so that there is at least a case where the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without any operation being performed. may be terminated when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, but when the second set time elapses without any operation by the player. I'm trying not to let it get terminated.

In this regard, the operation object to which the operation opportunity is given is determined by the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed. By making the (operation receivers) different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set time is the same when the operation targets are different. Coupled with this, it is possible to encourage the user to enjoy the operation reception performance with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (validity period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (validity period) in which the second display target area is displayed are based on different operation reception parts. The replica image will be displayed in a form that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image. Regarding the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations between the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (validity period) in which the second display target area is displayed. However, in either case, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will be provided in a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge images (predetermined images) GG may be displayed with different display shapes.

In addition, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects, there are two cases in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the “specific non-linear shape” and the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the “specific non-linear shape” and the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (first set time) is set, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output may indicate "Jackpot". It is desirable that the rate at which "aspects suggesting this" appear is different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed are for the same set time (first set time). Sometimes, it is desirable to provide an opportunity to accept operations regarding the same post-operation display or post-operation sound output. It is desirable to provide an opportunity to accept operations regarding different post-operation displays and post-operation sound outputs at different set times.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, by displaying an operation-related display such as "Press!" or "Down Arrow" over the integrated model image IG, When you look at these images, it will be more clearly expressed that you are in a situation where you need to perform an operation. However, here, operation-related displays such as "Press!" or "Down Arrow" will not be displayed overlapping the button sketch image BMG (at any timing of dynamic display) that suggests the target to be operated. In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG that indicate the remaining time are not displayed overlapping each other.

In such a configuration, operations such as "Press!" or "Down Arrow" can be performed while avoiding important information such as the button pattern image BMG, gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and specific image TG in the integrated pattern image IG. Since the related display is displayed superimposed on the integrated image IG, it becomes possible to appropriately convey important information to the player and strongly urge the player to perform the operation. Needless to say, this is because the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an integrated pattern image IG that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the post-operation display that is performed when the operation is accepted within the valid period in which the operation is accepted is the valid period in which the operation is accepted. There are multiple (types) of validity periods with different contents and sound output after operation. The conditions for generating these valid periods are different, and when any of the generating conditions is satisfied, a corresponding type of valid period is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, among the plurality of valid periods, the "specific image TG" is displayed within the valid period (first valid period). and a period in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed within the valid period (second valid period). Hereinafter, in this example, these "first validity period" and "second validity period" will be defined as the above-mentioned "first validity period" in which automatic reception is performed and the above-mentioned "second validity period" in which automatic reception is not performed. Although these terms will be explained as being the same as the term 'validity period,' they may be applied as a validity period different from these.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when performing a precursor effect (specific display) indicating that operation reception is permitted, the precursor effect (specific display) is may be executed before and after the occurrence timing of the permitted validity period. According to such a premonitory performance (specific display), since the validity period occurs while the flashy performance is being performed, it is possible to improve the game enjoyment when the validity period occurs. become able to.

However, when executing a precursor effect (specific display) in such a manner, the precursor effect (specific display) is displayed with priority over the integrated image IG, so when the validity period starts, the Even if the fake image IG is displayed (internal layer display), the portion that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (is not made visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the precursor effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated image IG that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) is made difficult to see. In any case, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will start to decrease under such conditions where visibility is difficult.

In other words, in this case, the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the part that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) disappears, and the entire integrated image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed) By the time the visibility of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, so from the player's perspective, the validity period (set time) You may get the impression that it has become substantially shorter.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player's side. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, among the plurality of valid periods, "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but In the second valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time the precursor effect (specific display) is ended, the second valid period is from the time the second valid period occurs until the end. The "specific image TG" is not displayed at all during this period. On the other hand, among the valid periods of multiple (types), by the time the indicator effect (specific display) occurs in the middle of execution and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easily visible), the gauge image (Predetermined image) In the first valid period in which the display area of GG is reduced, the specific image TG is displayed within the first valid period.

According to such a configuration, during the first valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the gauge image (predetermined image) Since the "specific image TG" is now displayed in the display target area of GG, the gauge image It becomes possible to make it appear that the display area of GG has not decreased much, and a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

On the other hand, if the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time when the omen effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second validity period during which the omen effect (specific display) is not performed. For example, in the case of the display mode shown in Fig. 145, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the validity period occurs, and the "specific image TG" is displayed when the validity period occurs. When observing how the "specific image TG" gradually appears over time, it is possible to find out that this does not function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease due to the exaggerated representation of the remaining time, so the "specific image TG" is displayed in such a second valid period. It is desirable to prevent this from occurring in order to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition to the second validity period, the validity period of multiple (types) includes "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed". ) may be prepared with different occurrence conditions, or a period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not decreased (fifth validity period) when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is completed. In addition, there is a phenomenon that occurs during the execution of a precursor effect (specific display), and by the time the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easy to see), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. The valid period (sixth valid period)" may be prepared with different occurrence conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned "specific image TG" is displayed at this time may be set as appropriate. good. In short, the plurality (types) of validity periods include at least the second validity period in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed and the first validity period in which the "specific image TG" is displayed. If so, at least when the validity period occurs, the above-mentioned effects will be achieved in relation to the precursor effect (specific display).

In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG may be replaced with the manner shown in FIG. It may also be executed.

FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of the performance when the first valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period.

FIG. 147(a) shows an effect display device 1600 in which in a normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is in a specific effect pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of jackpot determination. Shows the current performance status.

FIG. 147(b) shows a performance situation in which a precursory performance (specific display TH) is started on the performance display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 147(a) is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 147(b), it can be seen that at least in the effect display device 1600, the integrated pattern image IG has not yet appeared. However, from the time the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated image IG is displayed internally, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is prioritized and displayed. The entire sample image IG may be made invisible (or made difficult to see due to a predetermined transmittance). In other words, in this case, operation acceptance is permitted (validity period starts) from the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

FIG. 147(c) shows that as a result of the progress of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 147(b) and the reduction of the area in which the precursor effect (specific display TH) is displayed, This shows a situation in which a portion that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears and is displayed in a highly visible state.

That is, the integrated image IG is at a timing that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 147(b) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 147(b)), and at a timing shown in FIG. 147(c). At least internal processing (display on layer processing) is executed when the "specific timing (timing at which the validity period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that occurs before the situation that occurs. It becomes. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 147(c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are not visible (or are not visible) because they overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH) that is displayed with priority. However, the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH).

According to such a configuration, the foreshadowing performance (specific display TH) is performed over the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the validity period, and the foreshadowing performance is performed for a predetermined time after the validity period occurs. (Specific display TH) makes at least a part of the integrated image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the validity period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) and the operation target (aspect of the button drawing image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

In the example shown in FIG. 147(c), the button drawing image that imitates the operation target is difficult to visually recognize, but the periphery decoration image that decorates the periphery is in the "special periphery decoration image SSGb". It is in a state where it can be recognized that it is a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 147(c), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, the "specific image TG" is of the type that is displayed in the first place ( (see Figure 146), or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and appears gradually thereafter (see Figure 145). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 146, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, it can be said that executing the precursor performance in the manner described above is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

FIG. 147(d) shows that as a result of the further development of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 147(b), the portion that overlaps with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) has disappeared. (Here, the foreshadowing effect is hidden).

As shown in FIG. 147(d), when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a good visibility condition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). In other words, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. This makes it seem as if the display area has not decreased that much. Thereby, it can be expected to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor performance (specific display TH) ends.

In FIG. 147(e), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, "0"), and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (immediately before the execution) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 147(e), at least a portion (or all of the specific image TG) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even when the validity period ends. In this regard, in the first validity period, as described above, even if the player does not perform any operation within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation was performed are performed (Fig. 147 (see (f)).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception performance), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the validity period has ended (operation reception is no longer allowed), the post-operation display will be displayed. Since the "specific image TG" will be displayed even just before the post-operation sound output is performed, the post-operation display and operation will be displayed in response to the player's operation being completed in time and the corresponding operation reception occurring. It becomes possible to make it appear as if after-sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such a manner, by the time the entire image of the integrated sample image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is well visible, the gauge image (predetermined The display area of the image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started. In other words, in this case, there is a high possibility that the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the "specific image TG" will be displayed after the operation. It can be said that outputting sound after a game or operation is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Regarding the progress of the presentation in the manner shown in FIG. 147, there are two cases: when the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, and when the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 146. It may be applied to either.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 147, the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed in separate layers, and by displaying the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH) with priority, it appears in the figure 147. We decided to realize the progress of the production in various ways. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and, for example, the progress of the effect in the manner shown in FIG. 147 may be stored as one piece of moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. This method can also be applied to each example described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 147, the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated image IGa) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as mentioned above, the integrated mock image IG may be made to appear in one of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination). . When such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the precursor effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 148 to 150 in order to improve the game's interest.

FIGS. 148 to 150 are diagrams showing modified examples of the presentation progress when the first effective period occurs of the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

FIG. 148(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is in the first performance pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination by the performance display device. 1600 shows the production status being performed.

FIG. 148(b) shows an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 148(a). It shows the situation.

This first precursor performance (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first performance pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related performance will be performed. It functions as a performance.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor performance (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination), " Either the image shown in FIG. 149(c) or the image shown in FIG. It is designed to suggest which of the "button drawing images BMGb" is likely to appear.

Here, if the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "normal button drawing image BMGa" will be displayed as the button drawing image BMG (here, "100%"). This suggests that.

In the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)" according to this example, the "integrated image IGa" is in a different form (in this case, translucent) from the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 144(a)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGa'. However, this is not necessarily the case; for example, for the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)," the "integrated image IGa" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a). Alternatively, the "normal button pattern image BMGa" may be displayed as a standalone image without being integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Even if the "normal button drawing image BMGa" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 144(a)), or it may be displayed in the normal state (as shown in FIG. 144(a)). ) may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (in this case, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 149(c), the "normal button drawing image BMGa" shown in FIG. At least the image BMGa' having the (simulated) outline will be displayed. As a result, the validity period in which the "normal button pattern image BMGa" is displayed as the "integrated button image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" that is integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration image BMGa" is displayed. It is now possible to suggest that a valid period will occur, which is displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 144(a))" that is integrated with "image SSGb".

After the image IGa' (image BMGa') shown in FIG. 149(c) is displayed, the image IGa' (image BMGa') is not the "integrated image IGa" (FIG. 144(a)). , an effect suggesting (reminiscing) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 144(c))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 149(d), "the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed for the image IGa' expressing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' expressing the normal button model image BMGa)". It is depicted as an effect in which the image SSGb' is gradually brought closer. As a result of this kind of effect, "the image IGa' that expresses the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' that expresses the normal button model image BMGa)" is changed to "the image that expresses the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". When the images are integrated in such a way that "image SSGb'" is added, a valid period during which "integrated image IGc" (FIG. 144(c)) appears will occur. On the other hand, "image SSGb' expressing special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGa' expressing integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' expressing normal button model image BMGa')" If the images are not integrated, a valid period in which the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" appears will occur.

FIG. 149(e) shows a performance situation in which a second precursory performance (second specific display TH2) is started on the performance display device 1600 after the performance shown in FIG. 149(d) is performed. There is.

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) has progressed to the second timing, and suggests that operation acceptance is permitted. It is performed as a performance. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGa' representing the integrated map image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button map image BMGa)" It is to be started as the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is gradually approaching, and at the time it is started, "the image IGa' (representing the integrated pattern image IGa)" is to be started. Alternatively, it is unclear whether the "image BMGa') representing the normal button pattern image BMGa" and the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" have been integrated.

As the performance shown in FIG. 149(e) progresses, based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination), either the "image shown in FIG. 149(f)" or the "image shown in FIG. 149(h)" is selected. is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 149(f) and 149(h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situations and image contents shown in FIG. 147(c)," and the situations and image contents shown in FIG. 149(e) As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in FIG. , a portion that does not overlap with the premonitory effect (specific display) appears and indicates the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a highly visible state.

That is, the integrated image IG is a timing that occurs after the situation shown in FIG. 149(e) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the validity period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that occurs before the situation shown in 149(h), it is displayed at least internally (display on layer processing). ) is to be executed. Therefore, at the time point shown in FIG. 149(f) or FIG. 149(h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed as a second precursor effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed. Although it cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) due to the overlap, the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started ( progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) is performed over the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the validity period, and after the validity period occurs, For a predetermined period of time, at least a portion of the integrated image IG is made invisible or difficult to see due to the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). In other words, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the validity period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) and the operation target (aspect of the button drawing image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 149(f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated sample image IG is not the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" but the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 149(d) and (e), the "image IGa' representing the integrated map image IGa" (or the image IGa' representing the normal button map image BMGa) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the image BMGa') has failed to be associated with the image SSGb' expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) is displayed as shown in FIG. 149(g). The whole picture will be revealed. The progress of the performance thereafter is as described above with reference to FIGS. 147(d) to (f), so a description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the situation shown in FIG. 149(h) appears, it is possible to recognize that the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is a "special edge decoration image SSGb". As a result of the rendering shown in FIG. 149(d), the "image IGa' representing the integrated pattern image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button pattern image BMGa)" is changed to the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is possible to recognize that the image SSGb' expressing the image SSGb' was successfully connected. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 144(c)) is displayed as shown in FIG. 149(i). The whole picture will be revealed. The development of the effect after that is that the integrated simulated image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) is simply replaced by the integrated simulated image IGc (see FIG. 144(c)), and FIGS. 147(d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that "special button drawing image BMGb" will be displayed as the button drawing image BMG (here, "100%"). is suggested.

In the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)" according to this example, the "integrated image IGb" is in a different form (in this case, translucent) from the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 144(b)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGb'. However, this is not necessarily the case; for example, for the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)", the "integrated image IGb" may be displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(b). Alternatively, the "special button image BMGb" may be displayed as a standalone image without being integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa." Even when the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 144(b)), or it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 144(b)). ) may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (in this case, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 150(j), the "special button drawing image BMGb" shown in FIG. At least the image BMGb' having the (simulated) outline will be displayed. As a result, the validity period in which the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as the "integrated button image IGb (Fig. 144(b))" that is integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period will occur, which is displayed as the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 144(d))" that is integrated with the "image SSGb".

After the image IGb' (image BMGb') shown in FIG. 150(j) is displayed, the image IGb' (image BMGb') is not the "integrated image IGb" (FIG. 144(b)). , an effect suggesting (reminiscing) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGd (FIG. 144(d))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 149(k), for the "image IGb' expressing the integrated pattern image IGb (or the image BMGb' expressing the special button pattern image BMGb)", the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is expressed. It is depicted as an effect in which the image SSGb' is gradually brought closer. As a result of such an effect, "the image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)" is changed to "the image expressing the special border decoration image SSGb". When the images are integrated with the addition of "image SSGb'", a valid period during which "integrated image IGd" (FIG. 144(d)) appears will occur. In contrast, "image SSGb' expressing special border decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGb' expressing integrated model image IGb (or image BMGb' expressing special button model image BMGb)" If they are not integrated, a valid period in which the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" appears will occur.

FIG. 150(l) shows a performance situation in which a second precursory performance (second specific display TH2) is started on the performance display device 1600 after the performance shown in FIG. 150(k) is performed. There is. Instead of the second omen effect (second specific display TH2), it may be executed as a third omen effect (third specific display) different from this.

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation reception is permitted. It is executed as a performance that suggests that. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)" It is to be started as the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is gradually approaching, and at the time it is started, "the image IGb' (representing the integrated pattern image IGb)" is gradually approaching. Alternatively, it is unclear whether the "image BMGb') expressing the special button pattern image BMGb" and the "image SSGb' expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" have been integrated.

As the performance shown in FIG. 150(l) progresses, based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination), either "the image shown in FIG. 150(m)" or "the image shown in FIG. 150(o)" is displayed.

The situation and image content shown in FIG. 150(m) and FIG. 150(o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situation and image content shown in FIG. 147(c)", and the situation and image content shown in FIG. 150(l) As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in FIG. , a portion that does not overlap with the premonitory effect (specific display) appears and indicates the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a highly visible state.

That is, the integrated image IG is a timing that occurs after the situation shown in FIG. 150(l) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 150(l)), and is a timing that occurs after the situation shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the validity period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that occurs before the situation shown in 150(o) appears, it is displayed at least in internal processing (display on layer processing). ) is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 150(m) or FIG. 150(o), at least a portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed as a second precursor effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed. Although it cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) due to the overlap, the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started ( progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) is performed over the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the validity period, and after the validity period occurs, For a predetermined period of time, at least a portion of the integrated image IG is made invisible or difficult to see due to the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). In other words, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the validity period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) and the operation target (aspect of the button drawing image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

In this regard, if the situation shown in FIG. 150(m) appears, the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated sample image IG is not the "special edge decoration image SSGb" but the "normal edge decoration image SSGa". As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 150(k) and (l), the "image IGb' representing the integrated map image IGb" (or the image IGb' representing the special button map image BMGb) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the image BMGb') has failed to be associated with the image SSGb' expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 144(b)) is displayed as shown in FIG. 150(n). The whole picture will be revealed. The subsequent development of the effect is that the integrated simulated image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) is simply replaced by the integrated simulated image IGb (see FIG. 144(b)), and FIGS. 147(d) to 147(d) Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the situation shown in FIG. 150(o) appears, it is possible to recognize that the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is the "special edge decoration image SSGb". As a result of the rendering shown in FIG. 150(k), the "image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)" is changed to the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is possible to recognize that the image SSGb' expressing the image SSGb' was successfully connected. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 150(p), the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 144(d)) The whole picture will be revealed. The development of the effect after that is that the integrated simulated image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) is simply replaced by the integrated simulated image IGd (see FIG. 144(d)), and from FIG. 147(d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, when the image shown in FIG. 149(c) appears, the probability that "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG is set to 0%; The probability that the "special button drawing image BMGb" will appear may be set to be small. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 149(e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 149(f)→(g), (h)→(i), FIG. 150(m)→(n), ( There is also a possibility that the performance progresses in the form o)→(p).

According to such a configuration, at the time when FIGS. 149(f) and (h) and FIGS. 150(m) and (o) appear, it is not clear in which manner the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed. Although it is recognizable, it becomes impossible to recognize in which manner the button pattern image BMG is displayed. In other words, in this case, the level of expectation will be suggested in stages according to the situation regarding the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), and it will be possible to improve the game's interest. . In particular, if the button drawing image BMG can suggest one of multiple operating means with different operation targets depending on its display mode, the validity period has started and it also suggests the expectation level related to the operation. Since there will be a situation in which it is not possible to recognize which one is the operation target even though the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is in a situation where the user is unable to recognize which object is being manipulated, it becomes possible to significantly improve the degree of attention to the performance.

However, even in situations where FIGS. 149(f) and (h) and FIGS. 150(m) and (o) appear, the button on the operating means (operation receiver) that is the target of operation by the player is It is desirable to emit light in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the sample image BMG (for example, emit light from the time the validity period occurs). According to such a configuration, a person who is highly motivated to operate and tends to look directly at the operation means (operation receiver) can quickly recognize "the type displayed as the button drawing image BMG". This makes it possible to encourage the player's desire to operate the game.

Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 148(a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIG. 149(c) or FIG. 150(j).

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, even if the situation shown in FIG. 149(d) or FIG. 150(k) is changed to the situation shown in FIG. 149(g), (i) or FIG. 150(n), (p), good. That is, in this case, the effects shown in FIG. 149(d) and FIG. 150(k) will function as a precursor effect. At the time of migration, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may have already been reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have been reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be (Predetermined image) GG will start reducing its display area.

Furthermore, some of the effects shown in FIGS. 148 to 150 may be omitted depending on the form prepared as the integrated image IG. For example, if the forms shown in FIGS. 144(b) and 144(d) are not prepared as the integrated image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 150. In addition, at this time, FIG. 149(c) may also be omitted.

In addition, in the productions shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, before the operation reception is permitted (before the validity period occurs), the image BMG' (or even the button drawing image BMG itself) that represents the button drawing image BMG is displayed. (good) is displayed (FIGS. 149(d) and 150(k)), but in this situation (before the validity period occurs), the image BMG' (or button drawing image BMG) representing the button drawing image BMG is displayed. is not dynamically displayed to depict how it is displaced within the movable range of the operation receiver. According to such a configuration, even if the button drawing image BMG or the image BMG' expressing this is displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, it is possible to be in a situation where the valid period has not yet occurred. Since it becomes possible to suggest implicitly, the player can concentrate on the performance without worrying about the remaining time of the valid period. It should be noted that since presentation reception is allowed when the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, the second omen effect (second specific display TH2) makes it impossible to see or is difficult to see. The button drawing image BMG will be dynamically displayed.

FIGS. 151 to 155 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the performance when the second valid period occurs of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

That is, in FIGS. 147 to 150, a valid period (first valid period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced occurs at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. In this case, an example of the development of the performance has been explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 151 to 155, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is checked to see if the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. An example of the progress of the effect will be explained in the case where the valid period (second valid period) occurs without being delayed.

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment basically performs a predetermined precursor effect (premonitor display) upon the occurrence of a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has characteristics" within the validity period, and such When performing a performance, in order to make the feature stand out, when the validity period occurs, a predetermined precursor performance (warning display) itself is not performed, or even if a predetermined precursor performance (warning display) is performed, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and is at its maximum value at the time when the entire display target area is made visible.

Here, as the "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the valid period. When the effective period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "No operation is performed within the effective period, and no post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed." However, at the time the valid period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG has not reached the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has the predetermined display area. It is possible to cite the first display mode in which the According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it seems that there is a lot of time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can Since the user becomes aware of the possibility that the validity period may end suddenly, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension during the validity period.

Furthermore, as a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced every unit time within the validity period. However, it is possible to cite "a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the validity period". According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is only a short time remaining until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can The player becomes aware of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and a decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

That is, in the example described below, at least one of the "first display mode" and the "second display mode" is used to create a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG". A display example is shown when executing .

First, Fig. 151(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced using the second performance pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the performance status being performed on the display device 1600.

FIG. 151(b) shows that during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. This shows a performance situation in which the integrated image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 151(b), at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not been reduced yet. .

In addition, when executing the "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG" within the validity period, the time (setting time) set for the validity period (second validity period) is " The period of time (set time) is set longer than the period of time (first period of validity) in which the display mode in which the movement of gauge image GG is characterized is not executed. This means that if a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized within the validity period is to be executed, it will take time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, there is a first valid period during which the "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed, and a "movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed. Although the setting time until the validity period ends is different from the second validity period in which the "display mode with characteristics is given to" is executed, is the integrated image IG itself the same? They are displayed in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period in which the "display mode that gives the movement of the gauge image GG a characteristic" is not executed, and the "display mode that gives the movement of the gauge image GG a characteristic Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, when a situation occurs where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time period when the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is set. By adding , it becomes possible to estimate that the setting time is longer than it appears.

Note that when the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(b) occurs, a precursory performance that suggests the occurrence may be performed. However, at the time when the entire integrated model image IG (at least the "display target area of gauge image GG" included in the integrated model image IG) is displayed without overlapping with the precursor effect, the display area of gauge image GG is at its maximum value and is required to be in a situation where it has not yet been reduced.

In other words, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state (within the validity period) in which operation reception regarding the display after a predetermined operation and the sound output after a predetermined operation is permitted. When the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(c) appears after a predetermined time has elapsed from the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(b), the gauge image GG changes from the previous state. The display area is reduced by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time) and maintained, and a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" begins.

Such a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” continues for a predetermined time after the period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 151(c) and (d). It has become. However, even during the "period in which the display area of gauge image GG is not reduced," operation acceptance remains permissible, and if an operation is performed on an operation means that has been given an opportunity to operate, the valid period will expire. 151 (g)), the integrated image IG is hidden, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed.

According to such a configuration, "a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the validity period, compared to a case where the display area of the gauge image GG continues to be reduced at a constant speed. This makes it possible to indicate that there is plenty of time left before the validity period ends.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an acceptable state, so it is possible to create an image as if the validity period has been extended. , it is expected to improve gaming interest during the validity period.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 151(c) and (d), during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced," the decorative pattern SZ that had been displayed until then is hidden or difficult to see. This is to encourage attention to the "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG."

However, if a situation occurs in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the player may be misled into thinking that a so-called "freeze effect" has occurred, in which the image on the display screen suddenly becomes static. In other words, since "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined period of time and the state cannot be released, there is a misperception that operation acceptance is no longer allowed. There is a concern that this may cause players to lose their desire to operate the game, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game. In particular, in this example, since the decorative pattern SZ is hidden or difficult to see, this may also lead to a false recognition that operation acceptance is no longer permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated model image IG itself is not kept in a stationary state in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but the integrated model image The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept in a static state, while the button image BMG included in the integrated image IG is displayed dynamically (displacement within the movable range of the operation receiver is depicted). (display) continues.

According to such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button drawing image BMG continues, a state appears in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, so that operation reception is no longer permitted ( This makes it possible to suppress the possibility of erroneously recognizing that a freeze effect has occurred, and it is expected that the player's motivation for operation can be suitably maintained.

Here, the dynamic display using the button drawing image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined action (such as an action of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiver). In this regard, during the effective period (the first effective period shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, etc.) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the setting The predetermined action based on the button drawing image BMG is repeated n times until the time ends, but the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but is not displayed. During the valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG has not decreased (the second valid period shown in FIGS. 151 to 155, etc.) when the display area of the gauge image GG is It is desirable that the predetermined action using the button sketch image BMG be made repeatable m (>n) times even within the "period in which the button pattern image BMG is not displayed."

According to such a configuration, when a state occurs in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced for a time longer than the first valid period shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 etc. This means that even if you are surprised by the occurrence of the situation and take time to understand the situation, you will have enough time to take action. , it is expected that players will maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner. Note that the valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is a valid period different from the first valid period shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 etc. If a period (that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is prepared, the period of time set for each valid period (setting time) is longer than the longest one. It is desirable that the number of predetermined operations performed by the button drawing image BMG is greater during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" among the second valid periods shown in FIGS. 151 to 155, etc. .

As mentioned above, at the time when such a second validity period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a situation where its visibility is well ensured, and its display area is at the predetermined maximum value. It is now displayed (FIG. 151(b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 146, if the specific image TG is displayed in a well-visible state within the display target area of the gauge image GG, the specific image TG is displayed. However, the display area of the gauge image GG may appear to be reduced, and there is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 145, if the specific image TG appears in a good visibility state as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG It becomes obvious that the gauge image GG does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that interest in the game may be diminished due to exaggerating the length of the remaining validity period.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second valid period. Therefore, even if the display area of the gauge image GG starts to decrease from the situation shown in FIG. 151(b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is When is reduced to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs for a predetermined time (FIGS. 151(c) and (d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without an operation being accepted by the player, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easily visible. After this, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 151(e)), the time set for the second valid period (set time) times out. The second valid period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden (FIG. 151(f)). Note that here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is "0", that is, it is not displayed (FIG. 151(e)), the time set for the second valid period (setting time) is timed out. Then, the second valid period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden (FIG. 151(f)).

In this way, during the second validity period, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIG. 151(f)), the same operation as when the operation was accepted within the second validity period will be performed. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not performed (automatic reception presentation functions), and this point also differs from the first valid period. However, instead, during the second validity period, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a time longer than the time set for the first validity period, and operations are not accepted even during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, it can be said that a situation in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be completed in time is less likely to occur. .

In the example shown in FIG. 151, normally (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.) the gauge image GG is displayed in a predetermined manner as a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG". In the case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed, a case has been described in which "the second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the validity period" is applied. However, as mentioned above, as a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), if no operation is performed within the validity period, the gauge image GG is When the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the valid period ends, and if no operation is performed within the valid period, post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed. Despite the fact that the validity period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG has not reached the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has the predetermined display area. It is also possible to further apply the first display mode. When adopting such a method, it is recommended to execute it in either the manner shown in FIGS. 152 and 153 or in the manner shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. more desirable.

FIGS. 152 and 153 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the performance when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situations shown in FIGS. 152(a) to 152(d) are the same as the contents and other examples described above with reference to FIGS. 151(a) to 151(d). Therefore, in this example as well, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second validity period, and including this period, the second validity period When the operation is accepted, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed (see FIG. 153(g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without an operation being accepted by the player, gauge image GG will be able to reduce its display area again. It will never be displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues until the time (set time) set for the second valid period has elapsed. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains as it is (predetermined value), as shown in FIGS. 152(d) and 153(e). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easily visible.

In this way, in the second validity period according to this example, if the set time elapses without an operation being accepted (FIG. 153(e)), the operation is accepted within the second validity period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output (automatic reception performance) will no longer be performed. However, instead, in the second validity period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first validity period, and the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state, and also cannot be operated during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is now permitted.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second validity period ends with the display area remaining for the predetermined value. Since the second valid period ends, there is a possibility that the second valid period ends because the player is unable to operate even though he/she intended to do so, which reduces interest in the game. There are concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, certain conditions (for example, the symbol has stopped, or the period has not reached 10 seconds before the symbol stops, etc.) are met. While the operation is not performed, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the second validity period, and the operation opportunity for the operation means is When the operation is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period will occur from the point at which the second validity period occurs again. I can say that it is.

According to such a configuration, even if the second validity period ends as a result of a predetermined set time elapsed without any operation by the player, the operation by the player causes the ) It becomes possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in (). More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 153(e), when the player performs an operation on the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), the second The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 153(f)). After that, the contents described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 152(b) to 152(d) and FIGS. 153(e) and (g). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the second validity period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed (see Figure 153(g)). ).

Note that when an operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 153(e), the image shown in FIG. 153(f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 152(b)) appears as the post-operation display. That will happen. Such an image is different from the post-operation display that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation during the second validity period (FIGS. 152(b) to 152(d), FIG. 153(f), etc.). They are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is performed based on the operation being accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 153(e) is also performed during the second validity period (FIGS. 153(f) etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

FIGS. 154 and 155 are diagrams showing modified examples of the performance progress when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 154(a) is the same as the content and other examples described above with reference to FIG. 151(a) and FIG. 152(a). However, in this example, when the second valid period occurs and the integrated pattern image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. A ``period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced'' occurs for a predetermined period of time from the time when the integrated image IG is displayed (FIGS. 154(b) and 154(c)). In this example, at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value. It will remain as it is.

Note that operation reception is allowed even during periods when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and when the operation is accepted, the post-operation display and operation The configuration and progress during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", such as the execution of the after-sound output, are the same as the content and other examples described above with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. .

Also in this example, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced until the time set for the second validity period (set time) elapses. The period during which the Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains as it is (maximum value), as shown in FIGS. 154(c) and 155(d). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easily visible.

In this way, in the second validity period according to this example, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIG. 155(d)), the operation is accepted within the second validity period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output (automatic reception performance) will no longer be performed. However, instead, in the second validity period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first validity period, and the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state, and also cannot be operated during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is now permitted.

However, in this example as well, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second validity period remains with the display area for the maximum value remaining. As a result, on the player's side, there is a risk that the second validity period will end because the player is unable to operate the game even though he or she intended to do so, which reduces interest in the game. There are concerns that Therefore, in this example as well, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, certain conditions (for example, the symbol has stopped, the symbol has not stopped 10 seconds before the symbol is stopped, etc.) are met. The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the second validity period. When an operation for is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period occurs for re-occurring the second valid period.

According to such a configuration, even if the second validity period ends as a result of a predetermined set time elapsed without any operation by the player, the operation by the player causes the ) It becomes possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in (). More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 155(d), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), the second The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 155(e)). After that, the contents described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 154(b), (c), and FIGS. 155(d) and (f). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the second validity period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed (see FIG. 155(f)). ).

However, in this example, even if the second valid period reoccurs in this way, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" will occur from the point of reoccurrence, so as shown in FIG. 155(e) In the situation shown in , the decorative pattern SZ is hidden or made difficult to visually recognize.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 155(e)" that appears as the post-operation display when an operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 155(d) is the "image shown in FIG. 154(b)". is the same as Such an image is displayed in the post-operation display (Fig. 155 (f) )) has a different image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation during the special validity period shown in FIG. 155(d) is also performed during the second validity period (FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 155(f)) that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation in 155(d), etc.).

In this way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the entire period from the start to the end of the second validity period functions as a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced." Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any situation.

Note that in the situations shown in FIGS. 153(e) and 155(d) (special validity period), the integrated image IG may be displayed as in the second validity period. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that are generated according to the operation have different validity periods (second validity period, special validity period), the second validity period and special validity period are It is desirable that at least one of the display position and size of the integrated image IG be different from the valid period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second validity period, the integrated model image IG in the aspect corresponding to the second validity period is hidden, and the integrated model image IG in the aspect corresponding to the special validity period is new. will be displayed. When displaying the integrated image IG during the special validity period, a ``period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced'' may occur within the validity period, or a ``period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced.'' ” may be prevented from occurring.

The "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has characteristics" shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 can be executed when the integrated model image IGa of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed. Therefore, it is desirable that the process is not executed when the integrated model images IGb to IGd among the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed. That is, although the integrated model image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest expectation level, when the integrated model image IGa is displayed, the "movement of the gauge image GG" shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 Since there is a possibility that a "display mode with characteristics" may appear, a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, when the operation-related image (such as the integrated image IG) is displayed in a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of the gauge image GG", the player Even if a situation occurs in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of a predetermined setting period (second validity period) elapsed without any operation being performed, the operation reception occurs and the display changes (or , sound output after operation). More specifically, even if the predetermined setting period (second valid period) has ended, if you operate the operation receiver (operation means) that was previously prompted by the integrated image IG, It is possible to re-generate a predetermined setting period (second valid period), and operation reception is allowed during the re-generated predetermined setting period (second valid period) (Fig. 153(e), (f) and FIGS. 155(d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined setting period (second valid period) ends without understanding the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has characteristics" , since the predetermined set period (second valid period) can be re-generated, a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed.

On the other hand, during a predetermined setting period (first valid period) in which operation-related images (integrated image IG, etc.) are not displayed in a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of gauge image GG", operation reception is not possible. Even if you operate the operation receiver (operation means) that was previously prompted to operate by the integrated image IG after the predetermined setting period (first valid period) has ended without being (second validity period) will not be regenerated (FIGS. 147 to 150).

Please note that the predetermined setting period (second valid period) in which operation-related images (integrated image IG, etc.) are displayed in a "display mode that gives characteristics to the movement of gauge image GG" does not necessarily mean that symbol fluctuations will occur. It does not have to occur during the execution period. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol fluctuations, or it may be a period during which symbol fluctuations are not performed, such as during a jackpot game execution period or a period before a jackpot game starts. ” may occur.

Furthermore, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 147 to 155, the second validity period (FIGS. 151 to 155) is set longer than the first validity period (FIGS. 147 to 150). However, in the first validity period and the second validity period, the integrated image IG itself is displayed in the same manner or in a similar manner (in the above example, The simulated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When displaying the integrated image IG in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button image will be the same, so the set time (setting time) The expected length is to appear to be the same. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period in which the "display mode that gives the movement of the gauge image GG a characteristic" is not executed, and the "display mode that gives the movement of the gauge image GG a characteristic Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, when a situation occurs where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time period when the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is set. By adding , it becomes possible to estimate that the setting time is longer than it appears.

When displaying the integrated model image IG in a similar manner between the first valid period (FIGS. 147 to 150) and the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155), the "gauge image It is desirable that the integrated image IG smaller than that in the first validity period be displayed during the second validity period in which a "display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized" appears.

Furthermore, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 147 to 155, during the first validity period (FIGS. 147 to 150), if no operation is received, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) will be reduced to a specific value (here, " However, in the second validity period (FIGS. 151 to 155), if no operation is received, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It will be terminated in the state where it is. In other words, if the time set for the valid period (setting time) is long, the tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but if the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a certain value (here, " By providing the possibility that the validity period may end even if the period does not reach 0'', it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, when the integrated image IG is displayed such that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the omen effect is being performed (first effective period), and when the omen effect is being performed, When no performance is performed, or when a precursor performance is performed but the integrated image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursor performance is being performed (second effective The images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image GG are different depending on the period). In this case, the modes of the gauge images GG themselves may be different from each other. "Although the precursor performance is performed, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursor performance is performed" means that the gauge image GG is displayed for the entire validity period, as illustrated in FIGS. This includes the case where the display area of GG is not reduced.

In this regard, according to the example described above, during the first validity period (FIGS. 147 to 150), the specific image TG is displayed, and when the set time elapses without any operation being performed, the specific image TG is displayed. However, during the second validity period (FIGS. 152 to 155), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display (target area) is now displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first validity period, it is possible to make the validity period appear longer by the amount that the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the validity period, and in the second validity period, By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension by making it appear that the valid period ends earlier than expected by the player. In order to suitably obtain such effects, in the second validity period, most of the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) is left (at least an area larger than half of the maximum value) at the end of the validity period. It is desirable to do so.

Further, according to the above-described example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced every unit time during the first valid period (FIGS. 147 to 150) over the entire period. However, in the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155), a mode in which the display area is not reduced is displayed. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize the remaining time based only on the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the button drawing image BMG is dynamically displayed to depict the displacement of the operation receiving part in both the first valid period and the second valid period. However, while the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) during the first validity period, it is displayed in the first mode during the second validity period. It is displayed in a different second manner (a manner in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the above example, although the button drawing image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated drawing image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG), , when the button pattern image BMG of the integrated pattern image IG is dynamically displayed, the gauge image GG is in a decreasing state and the gauge image GG is in a non-decreasing state. I try to make sure that there is. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not decreasing, the dynamic display of the button pattern image BMG indicates that the integrated image IG is in a state where operation reception is permitted. Be able to make suggestions.

In addition, according to the above-described example, only when the normal button drawing image BMGa is displayed among the normal button drawing image BMGa and the special button drawing image BMGb, "Characteristics in the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed. It is possible to display the "display mode". In addition, when the normal button drawing image BMGa is displayed, a ``display mode with characteristics in the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG'' may be displayed, as well as a ``gauge image (predetermined image) ) is not displayed, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the manner (normal manner) that appears even when the special button drawing image BMGb is displayed. I made it so. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest when the normal button pattern image BMGa, which has a lower expectation than the special button pattern image BMGb, is displayed.

In particular, in the second validity period shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display aspect (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is However, only one aspect is displayed. That is, in this case, although the remaining time suggesting function and expectation level suggesting function by the gauge image GG itself are lost and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is The integrated model image IG in which the gauge image IG is formed is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is displayed statically (in a manner that its area does not change) within the integrated model image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second validity period is not an image suggesting remaining time or expectation level, but functions only as a mere decorative image within the integrated model image IG. Therefore, it is possible to make the function significantly different from the gauge image GG displayed within the first validity period, and the diversity of expression as the gauge image GG improves the enjoyment of the game. things come to be expected.

Note that the first valid period and the second valid period may have different occurrence conditions. For example, they may occur at different timings within one symbol variation period. In addition, the first valid period means a period during which operation reception regarding the display after the first operation and the sound output after the first operation is permitted, and the second valid period means the period during which the reception of operations regarding the display after the first operation and the sound output after the first operation is permitted, and the second valid period It means a period during which operation reception is permitted for a second post-operation display different from the post-operation display and a second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output, and within each of these periods. The reactions (display changes, sound output) that appear when an operation is accepted are different from each other.

Also, regarding the integrated image IG,
- After the precursor effect (specific display TH) starts to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG changes every unit time from when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. Aspects in which it is reduced (FIGS. 147 to 150),
- The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect starts to be displayed, at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. Aspects (Figures 151 to 155)
I made it so that there is. According to such a configuration, the display area may have already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured as a result of the performance of the precursor effect, and regardless of whether or not the precursor performance has been performed. The display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced at the time when the entirety of the gauge image GG is made visible, and the display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced. You will be able to do this.

In particular, when adopting a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is made visible regardless of whether or not a precursor effect has been performed (FIGS. 151 to 155), As far as possible, since a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even within the valid period can appear, it is possible to further increase attention to the gauge image GG.

Note that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect starts to be displayed, at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. In the case of adopting a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced (FIGS. 151 to 155), in addition to the case where a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears within the validity period (FIGS. 151 to 155), the display area of the gauge image GG is It may be configured such that a display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the second condition is the occurrence condition of the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155) in which a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, a display in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is set as the second condition. The condition for the occurrence of a specific validity period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, while the button drawing image BMG is being displayed, there are cases in which the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced depending on the passage of time, and cases in which this display is not performed. did. If this display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may be hidden within the validity period. Nevertheless, regarding the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first valid period in which the display area is displayed to be reduced as time passes, but also the second valid period in which the display area is not reduced in accordance with the passage of time. Since it is displayed even during the validity period, it is expected that it will suitably indicate that the presentation reception is permitted.

In the above example, the time set for the valid period (second valid period) has elapsed without the gauge image GG displaying to reduce the display area over time. When the valid period ends, the automatic reception function will not be activated. In other words, if the automatic reception function is activated, the tension due to the gauge image GG not indicating the remaining time may be completely lost. ), it is desirable that the automatic reception function is not enabled (regardless of the presentation mode). On the other hand, it is desirable that the automatic reception function be enabled for the above-mentioned first validity period (regardless of what production mode).

In addition, when a display method is adopted in which the button drawing image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and only the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is adopted, a method is adopted that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG. If this is the case, the user will feel very uncomfortable that the remaining time suggestion function is not performed even though the gauge image is GG. In this regard, in the above configuration, the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that includes the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, a pattern is made visible on the back side, and the gauge image GG itself has multiple colors. Since this itself becomes decorative in the integrated model image IG, it is expected to suppress the sense of discomfort when a situation arises in which the remaining time suggesting function by the gauge image GG is not performed. become.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, prior to the occurrence of the first validity period, a mode with a low expectation (normal button drawing image BMGa) and a mode with a high expectation are selected as the "button drawing image BMG". (Special button drawing image BMGb), and the aspect with low expectation (normal edge decoration image SSGa) and the aspect with high expectation (special edge decoration image) as "peripheral decoration image SSG". SSGb) and the presentation of which one will appear are made to appear in stages. However, such performance can also be achieved by the method described below.

FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation regarding the integrated image IG.

First, Fig. 156(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced using the first performance pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the performance status being performed on the display device 1600.

FIG. 156(b) shows that during execution of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. This shows a performance situation in which a button drawing image BMG is displayed.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b), the button drawing image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "edge decoration image SGG", but is only displayed as a standalone image. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(b), the button drawing image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation level (normal button drawing image BMGa) or a mode with a high expectation level (special button drawing image BMGb). The figure provides an example of the case where a highly anticipated mode (special button drawing image BMGb) appears. Which of these modes to display is selected based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination).

FIG. 156(c) shows a presentation situation in which the special button drawing image BMGb shown in FIG. 156(b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, the effect may not necessarily progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(c). For example, the button print image BMG (normal button print image BMGa, special button print image BMGb) shown in FIG. ), it becomes effective after the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) has progressed to the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) and the integrated image IG has been created. The validity period (first validity period) occurs, or the validity period (first validity period) occurs without the effect progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) and the integrated image IG does not occur. You will be able to provide some fun things to do. If the validity period (first validity period) occurs without becoming an integrated pattern image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as a separate image from the button pattern image BMG. ) The display area of the gauge image GG is depicted to be reduced within the divided area. In this case, it is desirable that the specific image TG is not displayed.

In addition, when the validity period occurs after the button drawing image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, the expectation that it will stop at the jackpot symbol is higher than when the validity period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable to increase the degree (ratio). Furthermore, when the special button drawing image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b), the case shown in FIG. ) It is desirable that the rate of integration with the peripheral decoration image SSG is increased. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(c), the button drawing image BMG is divided into a peripheral decoration image with a low expectation level (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image with a high expectation level (special peripheral decoration The image BMGb) is designed to provide an effect as to which image is integrated with the image BMGb), and the figure shows an example of a case where a highly expected aspect (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears. . Which of these modes to display is selected based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination).

For convenience of explanation, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) according to this example has a different image type from that shown in each of the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 144 to 156). Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same functions. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button pattern image BMG, and although the peripheral decoration image BMGa normally has a heart pattern (not shown). On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a checkered pattern is applied. Of the areas where these patterns are applied, "the area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 156(c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button pattern image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated, and in terms of presentation, the image shown in FIG. 144(d).

FIG. 156(d) shows a presentation situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 156(c).

However, the effect may not necessarily progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d). For example, if the first additional decoration HS1 is not added to the integrated simulated image IG (integrated simulated images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 156(c), the valid period (first valid period) If a mode is prepared in which this occurs, the effect will become effective after the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) has progressed to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) and the first additional decoration HS1 has been added. period (first validity period) occurs, or the performance progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is not added and the validity period (first validity period) occurs. It will be possible to provide some fun about what happens.

Note that if the validity period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated replica image IG, the validity period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated replica image IG. It is desirable that the expectation level (ratio) of being stopped at a jackpot symbol is higher than that in the case of a jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the special button drawing image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c), the image shown in FIG. 156(b) The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) compared to the case where the normal button pattern image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the first additional decoration HS1 is added. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(d), the first additional decoration HS1 is provided to provide an effect as to whether it is added in a manner with a low expectation level or a manner with a high expectation degree. You may also do so.

FIG. 156(e) shows a presentation situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 156(d).

However, the effect may not necessarily progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e). For example, if the second additional decoration HS2 is not added to the integrated simulated image IG (integrated simulated images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 156(d), the valid period (first valid period) If a mode is prepared in which this occurs, the effect will become effective after the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) has progressed to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) and the first additional decoration HS1 has been added. The validity period (first validity period) occurs, or the performance progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) and the second additional decoration HS2 is not added and the validity period (first validity period) occurs. It will be possible to provide some fun about what happens.

In addition, if the validity period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IG, the validity period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable that the expectation level (ratio) of being stopped at a jackpot symbol is higher than that in the case of a jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the special button drawing image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c), the image shown in FIG. 156(b) The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) compared to the case where the normal button pattern image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the second additional decoration HS2 is added. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(e), the second additional decoration HS2 is provided to provide an effect as to whether it is added in a manner with a low expectation level or a manner with a high expectation degree. You may also do so.

FIG. 156(f) shows a performance situation in which the valid period (first valid period) occurs while the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 156(e) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 156(f), when the validity period (first validity period) occurs, operation instruction images such as "press" and "down arrow" are displayed. In addition to this, the above-mentioned specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and operation acceptance is also permitted by confirming the specific image TG. be able to recognize that. Note that, for convenience of explanation, the specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from those shown in the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 144 to 156), but they are basically the same. Displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced in accordance with the "end part of the gauge image GG" which is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. I will do it.

Note that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed using the same method as the example shown in FIG. Alternatively, it may be displayed using a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 146 (a method in which the entirety is displayed at the time the validity period starts).

Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low-expectation mode (a snail character, which is not shown) or a high-expectation mode (a frog character). The figure provides an example of a highly anticipated situation. The specific image TG is displayed in a more expected manner when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c). The ratio is high, and the expectation level is higher when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in Figure 156(e) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in Figure 156(d). It is desirable that the specific image TG be displayed at a high rate. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a performance that shows how much the operation-related image can progress to a highly expected form before the validity period occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game interest in terms of operation even in a state where the validity period has not yet occurred. In addition, while the operation-related images (button drawing image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) indicate the level of expectation until the validity period occurs, after the validity period occurs, , Since the degree of expectation is further indicated by a different image (specific image TG), it is possible to suitably increase interest over the period from before the expiration date to after the expiration date. Become.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 156, the timing of whether or not the effect progresses from FIG. 156(b) to FIG. 156(c), and the timing of whether or not the effect progresses from FIG. 156(c) to FIG. At the timing of whether or not to proceed, and the timing of whether or not the effect will progress from FIG. 156(d) to FIG. It may be temporarily hidden. In other words, in this case, when the operation-related images (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) are displayed again, it is interesting to see whether the presentation has progressed or whether the validity period has expired. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 156, the button pattern image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the validity period before the validity period occurs, but this is different from this. It may also be displayed (blinking, semi-transparent, etc.).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 156, it is desirable that the time required to suggest the level of expectation step by step using operation-related images before the validity period occurs is longer than the set time for the validity period. .

By the way, the sword ornament 5001 according to this embodiment includes a "handle section 5012" that can move (move vertically) relative to the sheath section 5020, and a "handle section 5012" that can move (move vertically) relative to the handle section 5012. It was mentioned above that two operation receivers with the button 5014 are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a valid period (operation reception effect) is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the valid period (operation reception effect) is generated. In the reception presentation), both a "pattern pattern image TMG" that imitates the handle part 5012 and a "button pattern image BMG" that imitates the pattern button 5014 are displayed. During the valid period (operation acceptance performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, operation reception on the handle button 5014 is not allowed, and during the valid period (operation reception performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 ), operation reception on the handle portion 5012 is not permitted.

In such a configuration, when a valid period (operation reception performance) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, it is difficult to determine whether the operation reception on the handle 5012 is allowed or whether the operation reception on the handle button 5014 is allowed. This will make it difficult to recognize whether or not it is permissible. In other words, when an operation is accepted during a valid period in which an opportunity to operate is given to the handle 5012, the period after the operation is accepted is longer than when an operation is accepted during a valid period in which an opportunity to operate is given to the handle button 5014. The percentage of appearance of a mode that suggests that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a display (or a mode that suggests that the jackpot symbol is stopped as a sound output after operation) is increasing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, while it is difficult to recognize whether the operation reception on the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 is permitted, the operation reception on the handle 5012 is permitted. When the player comes to recognize this, he or she will operate the handle part 5012 in a sense of excitement, and the player's enjoyment of the game will be significantly improved.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception on the handle portion 5012 or the operation reception on the handle button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the valid period (operation acceptance effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle part 5012, the handle part 5012 (the light emitting part thereof) does not need to be made to emit light. , the handle button 5014 (the light emitting portion thereof) on the side to which no operation opportunity is given is made to emit light. In other words, in this case, during the valid period (operation reception performance) in which both the "pattern drawing image TMG" that imitates the handle part 5012 and the "button drawing image BMG" that imitates the handle button 5014 are displayed, the handle part 5012 Even if the handle part 5012 or the handle button 5014 is directly viewed, it remains difficult to recognize which of the handle part 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate. In such a situation, the player comes to realize that accepting operations on the handle 5012 is permitted, and as a result, the player performs operations on the handle 5012 in a sense of elation, which reduces the player's interest in the game. can be significantly improved.

In other words, during the valid period (operation acceptance performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, it is not possible to view the handle by directly looking at the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 or by briefly looking at the performance display device 1600. It is difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5012 or the handle button 5014. At least from the perspective of a person playing the Pachinko 1 for the first time (beginner) or a person who is unfamiliar with the complicated production specifications (elderly people, etc.), the opportunity to operate either the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 is given. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "validity period during which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle part 5012 and the handle button 5014 has been given the opportunity to operate" is generated, and then, Although it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate within its validity period, it can be recognized after a certain amount of time. The button drawing image BMG and the pattern drawing image TMG are respectively displayed.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the valid period (operation reception performance) in which the handle part 5012 is given an operation opportunity, a "pattern image TMG" imitating the handle part 5012 and a handle button 5014 are displayed. ``Button drawing image BMG'' which is a copy of ``Button drawing image BMG'' is displayed respectively, but among these drawing images, the ``Button drawing image TMG'' on the side where operation reception is allowed is dynamically displayed, but it is not possible to accept operation reception. ``Button drawing image BMG'' on the side where this is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. "Dynamic display" here means, for example, a display that depicts how the operation receiver moves within its movable range (in the case of the handle 5012, it depicts how it moves (up and down) relative to the sheath 5020. In the case of the handle button 5014, this corresponds to a display depicting the action (up and down movement) on the handle 5012).

Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given an opportunity to operate within its validity period. However, when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed that is long enough to be recognized as a dynamic display (video), the behavior at the time of operation appears in the pattern image TMG as a dynamic display, but the behavior at the time of operation appears in the button design image BMG. Since the user notices that the button is not displayed as a dynamic display, it becomes possible to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate. When the player comes to realize that the operation reception part (handle part 5012) on the side with higher expectations is allowed, the player performs the operation on the handle part 5012 in a feeling of elation. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be significantly improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "pattern drawing image TMG" and the "button drawing image BMG" are displayed during the valid period (operation reception performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle part 5012. Also, by displaying these simulated images as an "integrated simulated image" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the simulated images, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when an operation reception performance (validity period) occurs. I am trying to achieve this. The functions and modifications of such an integrated image are basically as described above. For example, even if the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144 to 156 is displayed so as to further display (include) the ``pattern pattern image TMG'' in addition to the ``button pattern image BMG''. good.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "button drawing image BMG" and the "pattern drawing image TMG" are displayed as a "composite drawing image HMG" that imitates at least a part of the sword ornament 5001. The "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery.

FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of the “integrated image IG” that is displayed when an operation acceptance effect (validity period) occurs for the handle portion 5012.

As shown in FIGS. 157(a) to 157(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (valid period) is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, the "pattern pattern image TMG" that is a copy of the handle part 5012 is made into a "composite pattern image HMG" that is integrated with the "button pattern image BMG", and then the "composite pattern image TMG" is The image "HMG" is displayed as integrated images IGe to IGh that are integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the image HMG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d), "pattern pattern image TMG", "button pattern image BMG", and "periphery decoration image SSG" are not prepared individually as image data, and they are The images are displayed as one integrated image data (integrated images IGe to IGh). Further, when the integrated image IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompts such as "push in" and "lower left arrow" are also displayed, but for convenience of explanation, they are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a "relatively Multiple presentation modes are available, including a first presentation mode with low expectations and a second presentation mode with relatively high expectations. It is assumed that one of the aspects will be executed. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d),
・The mode shown in FIG. 157(b) (integrated model image IGf) is better than the mode shown in FIG. When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
・The mode shown in FIG. 157(c) (integrated model image IGg) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 157(b) (integrated model image IGf) appears in a specific operation reception performance (valid period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
・The mode shown in FIG. 157(d) (integrated model image IGh) is better than the mode shown in FIG. Based on the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment), so that a relationship is established that when ``2nd production mode with relatively high expectation level'' appears as a post-operation production when . One of the morphological images IGe to IGf is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated image IGe to IGh. Just by preparing at least two aspects, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation performance within the effective period. Furthermore, it is possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated image IGe to IGh) and display any of the prepared modes.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
- An operation means (sword decoration body 5001) having an operation receiving part (handle part 5012) that is displaced by a player's operation, and a peripheral decoration part (scabbard part 5020, etc.) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving part (handle part 5012);
・Integration of displaying a simulated image (pattern image TMG) of the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) as integrated simulated images IGe to IGh that are integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the simulated image. A sample image display means;
・Operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation performance) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) due to an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed; The integrated model image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

Details of the "integrated model images" shown in FIGS. 157(a) to 157(d) will be explained separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

First, the "integrated pattern image IGe" shown in FIG. 157(a) includes a pattern pattern image TMGe, a button pattern image BMGe (composite pattern image HMGe), and a normal periphery decoration image SSGe that decorates its periphery. It is composed of However, in the "integrated model image IGe", the handle model image TMGe and the button model image BMGe (combined model image HMGe) are "an image that simulates the handle part 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given" and " ``An image that imitates the pattern button 5014 that is not an object to which an operation opportunity is given'' is displayed as an integrated image, whereas a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is ``an image that is a copy of the pattern button 5014 that is not an object to which an operation opportunity is given.'' The peripheral decoration part (such as the sheath part 5020) that is actually provided around the periphery of the handle part 5012 is not imitated.In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe according to this example, a part of the peripheral decoration part (such as the sheath part 5020) is imitated. Most of the image SSGe is used to decorate the periphery of the pattern image TMGe (composite pattern image HMGe) as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. There is.

In the “integrated pattern image IGe” shown in FIG. 157(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a treasure box containing several treasures including the pattern pattern image TMGe (composite pattern image HMGe). As mentioned above, these "treasures" and "treasure boxes" have shapes different from the actual peripheral decorations and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGe" according to this embodiment, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is decreased over time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG changes from the predetermined maximum display area to the predetermined minimum value (including "0") when no operation is accepted within the validity period. The display area decreases over time until it reaches the display area of .

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 157(a), a partition image KG is provided that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. . The area surrounded by this divided image KG will function as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as a section image KG, and a "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed within the necklace. However, the partition image KG does not necessarily need to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

In addition, as shown in FIG. 157(a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGe" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the handle to be operated is 5012 in the first mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the pattern image TMGe in the "integrated pattern image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 157(a)). Furthermore, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the fifth mode (for example, the same color as the button pattern image BMGe in the "integrated pattern image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 157(a)). ) to emit light). Although the colors are the same here, they may be different colors in the first aspect and the fifth aspect.

On the other hand, the "integrated map image IGf" shown in FIG. The composite image HMGf) and the peripheral decoration image SSG decorating the peripheral edge of the composite image HMGf are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated pattern image IGf", there is no change in shape of the pattern pattern image TMGf and the button pattern image BMGf (composite pattern image HMGf). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the treasure chest itself are displayed as the same thing, but the "first special peripheral It is displayed as a "decoration image SSGf". The quantity and types of treasures are increasing, and necklaces, swords, and cups are also displayed in the case of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and are common.

In addition, in the "integrated image IGf" shown in FIG. 157(b), as the amount and type of treasure increases, the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is The shape has changed, so that the display mode of the gauge image GG is different. According to such a configuration, the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG differs depending on which of the multiple modes with different expectations (not even similar shapes), so the display area is It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left as the time is being reduced, and it will be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 157(b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which "integrated image IGf" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is generated. The section 5012 is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the pattern image TMGf in the "integrated pattern image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 157(b)). Furthermore, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the sixth mode (for example, the same color as the button pattern image BMGf in the "integrated pattern image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 157(b)). ) to emit light). Although the colors are the same here, the second aspect and the sixth aspect may have different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated map image IGg" shown in FIG. The image HMGg) and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated pattern image IGg", there is no change in shape of the pattern pattern image TMGg and the button pattern image BMGg (composite pattern image HMGg). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the treasure itself are displayed as the same thing, but the treasure box (shape) that stores them is different. It is displayed as "Image SSGg".

However, the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" is also similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGf" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decoration part (sheath part 5020, etc.) that is actually provided on the periphery of the handle part 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, and the virtual decoration part on the display performance on the performance display device 1600 The periphery of the pattern sketch image TMGg (composite pattern image HMGg) is decorated as decoration.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 157(c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which "integrated image IGg" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated is generated. The section 5012 is made to emit light in the third mode (in FIG. 157(c), for example, it emits light in the same color (for example, "red") as the pattern image TMGg in the "integrated pattern image IGg"). Furthermore, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the seventh mode (for example, the same color as the button pattern image BMGg in the "integrated pattern image IGg" (for example, "red" in FIG. 157(c)) ) to emit light). Although the colors are the same here, the third and seventh aspects may have different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated map image IGh" shown in FIG. The image HMGh) and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated pattern image IGh", there is no change in shape of the pattern pattern image TMGh and the button pattern image BMGh (composite pattern image HMGh). However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, compared to the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe", the amount and type of treasures are increased, and the treasure box (shape of the treasure box) storing them is also different. It is displayed as a special peripheral decoration image SSGh.

In addition, in the "integrated image IGh" according to this example, the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes as the amount and type of treasure increases. Accordingly, the display mode of the gauge image GG is made different.

However, the "third special peripheral decoration image SSGh" is also similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" etc. in the following points.
・"The peripheral decoration part (sheath part 5020, etc.) that is actually provided on the periphery of the handle part 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, and the virtual The periphery of the pattern sketch image TMGh (composite pattern image HMGh) is decorated as decoration.

That is, in the "integrated image IGh (FIG. 157(d))", a part (treasure) of the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated image IGf (FIG. 157(b))" is ) and a part (treasure box) of the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated image IGg (FIG. 157(c))" are displayed as a combined image. There is.

On the other hand, since the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the case where the "integrated image IGe (Fig. 157(a))" appears and the case where the "integrated When the "sample image IGh (FIG. 157(d))" appears, it becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) that targets the same post-operation performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 157(d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGh" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated is 5012 in the fourth mode (e.g., emit light in the same color as the pattern image TMGh in the "integrated pattern image IGh" (for example, "rainbow color" in FIG. 157(d))). . Furthermore, the pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the eighth mode (for example, the same color as the button pattern image BMGh in the "integrated pattern image IGh" (in FIG. 157(d), for example, "rainbow color"). ”) to emit light). Although the colors are the same here, the fourth aspect and the eighth aspect may have different colors.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to 157(d), the pattern image TMG and the button pattern image BMG (composite pattern image HMG) are displayed in the same shape regardless of the mode. However, as the amount and type of treasure changes (Fig. 157 (b), (d)), or as the treasure chest changes (Fig. 157 (c), (d)), the pattern image changes. The TMG and the button drawing image BMG (composite drawing image HMG) may have different shapes.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d), in each aspect, the pattern drawing image TMG and the button drawing image BMG (composite drawing image HMG) are displayed in different colors, but the same color It may be displayed as .

When displaying a button drawing image BMG that imitates the patterned button 5014, in the examples shown in FIGS. I decided to do so. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d), the button pattern image BMG imitating the handle button 5014 is displayed, but the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b are not displayed. . In other words, since the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, it is different from the examples shown in FIGS. It is possible to display completely different images from those in the examples shown in a) to (d), thereby making it possible to provide a variety of effects.

In addition, among the configurations according to the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d), parts having the same functions as the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) are It goes without saying that the same effects as those described above with reference to d) are achieved. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d), the above-described modifications and examples of effects to the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) can be appropriately adopted.

Also, during the valid period in which the integrated map image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157, as well as the valid period in which the integrated map image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. ``Specific image TG'' is displayed.

However, in the validity period (multiple validity periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. Depending on the type (type, etc.), the "specific image TG" may be displayed or the "specific image TG" may not be displayed. In the validity period (multiple validity periods) in which IG is displayed, the "specific image TG" is It is always displayed.

That is, during the effective period (multiple effective periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157, the "state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 is set. It does not include the validity period that occurs as a performance. Therefore, it is desirable to display the "specific image TG" in order to clarify how much time is left. When displaying the "specific image TG", the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

When the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157, the "specific image TG" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, or in the manner shown in FIG. 146. You may also do so.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 157, an opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is provided while the handle 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, and thereby the handle 5012 is moved from the specific position to the original position. Manipulation (sword sheathing) is allowed. However, when providing an opportunity to operate the handle 5012, the handle 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from its original position to a specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle 5012 while the handle 5012 is in the original position, thereby allowing a movement operation (sword drawing operation) from the original position to a specific position.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of the effect (operation reception effect) when the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157.

FIG. 158(a) shows an effect display device 1600 in which in a normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols SZ (special symbols) is in a specific effect pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of jackpot determination. This shows a performance situation in which a display related to a precursory performance (specific display TH3) is started on the performance display device 1600 in a performance situation being performed. This effect pattern may be the same as the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, or may be different. When the performance pattern is the same, the valid period (operation reception performance) shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and the valid period shown in FIG. 158 occur at the first timing and second timing in the performance pattern, respectively. Alternatively, only one of these valid periods (operation acceptance performance) may be generated at a predetermined timing within the performance pattern based on the result of performance determination.

The precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed before and after the occurrence timing of the valid period in which operation reception is permitted, and at this point, the operation reception (specific display TH3) for the handle 5012 is executed. Direction reception) is not allowed and the validity period has not yet occurred.

In this regard, the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by displaying the integrated model image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid of the treasure chest). At the time shown in FIG. 148(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated pattern image IG is displayed in a "closed mode", and as a result, the pattern pattern image TMGe (composite pattern image HMGe) Some treasures, including , are not displayed as images (by the specific display TH3, which is the lid of the treasure chest), and are in a state where they cannot be seen (or are difficult to see).

Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 158(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is in a state with relatively low expectation as shown in FIGS. 157(a) and (b). 157(c) and 157(d), and the mode with relatively high expectations shown in FIG. 157(c) and (d). The case where the screen is displayed in a low mode (FIGS. 157(a) and 157(b)) is illustrated. Which of these modes to display is selected based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination). In addition, we will omit the explanation of the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with high expectations, but the production progresses from this point on in the same manner as ``When the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with low expectations'' explained below. will be held.

FIG. 158(b) shows that as the foreshadowing effect shown in FIG. 158(a) progresses, the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) is opened and the area overlapping with the "treasure" is displayed over time. In "treasure", the part that does not overlap with the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and the part is displayed in a good condition for visibility. It shows.

That is, as the precursor effect shown in FIG. 158(a) progresses, a specific timing comes and the validity period for the handle 5012 occurs. When the valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the handle 5012 that is the object of operation starts moving to the "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Furthermore, as described above, both the "handle portion 5012" that is the operation target and the "handle button 5014" that is not the operation target start emitting light in a predetermined manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission is started, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 158(a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the integrated model image IG shows that the lid portion of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) changes from "closed state (fully closed)" to "open state". It is in a state that depicts a change to "(full throttle)". Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 158(b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are "precursor effect (specific display TH3) that is depicted (expressed) as being in front of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" Although it cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) due to the ``gauge image (predetermined image) GG'', the reduction in the display area of the ``gauge image (predetermined image) GG'' has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the ``specific image TG'' has also already started (progressed). ). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the precursor effect (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

According to such a configuration, the foreshadowing effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed over the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the validity period, and the predetermined time after the occurrence of the validity period is , at least a part of the integrated image IG is made invisible or difficult to see due to the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH3). That is, in this case, the whole picture of the integrated pattern image IG (pattern pattern image TMG, button pattern image BMG (composite pattern image HMG), peripheral decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually revealed within the validity period. As a result, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated pattern image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the object of operation (the aspect of the pattern image) are interesting. It can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

In other words, at the timing shown in FIG. 158(b), the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure box is displayed in a manner with a small amount and type (a manner with relatively low expectations as shown in FIG. 157(a)). There are at least two cases in which the information is displayed in a manner with a large amount and variety (a manner with relatively high expectations as shown in FIG. 157(b)), and in any of these manners. It provides direction in terms of how it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 158(b), it is possible to recognize that the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure box is displayed in a manner with a large amount and type (a manner with a high degree of expectation). ing. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 158(b), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, the "specific image TG" is of the type that is displayed in the first place ( (see Figure 146), or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and appears gradually thereafter (see Figure 145). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 146, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, it can be said that executing the precursor performance in the manner described above is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in gaming interest. We will omit the explanation of the case where "treasure" is displayed in a manner with low expectations, but this will be done in the same manner as "When "treasure" is displayed in a manner with high expectations" explained below. Subsequent production progress will be made.

FIG. 158(c) shows that as a result of the further development of the precursor effect (the display related to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 158(b), it overlaps with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG). This shows a situation where a portion (a portion where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the “treasure”) has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, but remains displayed while the integrated image IG is displayed. It is now possible to provide the same level of performance from the beginning to the end of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 158(c), when the entire treasure of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a good visibility condition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of has already been reduced, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). In other words, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. This makes it seem as if the display area has not decreased that much. This suppresses a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor effect (the effect of opening the lid part which is the specific display TH) ends. You can expect that. The "specific image TG" according to this example is displayed as an image expressing "light" that is displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the pattern image TMG of the integrated pattern image IG is a dynamic display (a display depicting the movement of the pattern portion 5012 within its movable range). However, as described above, the button drawing image BMG is not dynamically displayed (display depicting the displacement of the handle button 5014 within its movable range).

In FIG. 158(d), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, "0"), and when the valid period (set time) ends (or An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (immediately before the validity period ends) is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 158(d) appears, it is assumed that the operation reception is barely permissible in terms of time; It may be made so that it is no longer allowed. However, in this case, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 are in a state where each light emission has already been completed at that point. In this case, images such as "Push in!" and "Lower left arrow" may be hidden. In any case, at least a portion (or all of the specific image TG) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even when the validity period ends.

When the validity period ends, both the light emission of the handle portion 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are terminated. In this regard, during the valid period during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, even if the player does not perform any operation within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation was performed will be displayed. (See FIG. 158(e)). This is the same as the automatic reception that functions within the first validity period described above (FIGS. 147(e), (f), etc.).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception performance), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the validity period has ended (operation reception is no longer allowed), the post-operation display will be displayed. Since the "specific image TG" will be displayed even just before the post-operation sound output is performed, the post-operation display and operation will be displayed in response to the player's operation being completed in time and the corresponding operation reception occurring. It becomes possible to make it appear as if after-sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such a manner, by the time the entire image of the integrated sample image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is well visible, the gauge image (predetermined The display area of the image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started. In other words, in this case, there is a high possibility that the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the "specific image TG" will be displayed after the operation. It can be said that outputting a sound after a game or an operation is effective in suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, in this example, the handle button 5014 on the side to which no operation opportunity is given is made to emit light when the validity period occurs, and the operation opportunity is given to either the handle part 5012 or the handle button 5014. I try to make it difficult to recognize what is happening. In other words, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the operation will not be completed in time within the validity period, it can be said that it is effective in suppressing a decline in gaming interest when the operation cannot be completed in time.

Regarding the progress of the presentation in the manner shown in FIG. 158, there are two cases: when the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, and when the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 146. It may be applied to either.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 158, the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed in separate layers, and by displaying the foreshadowing effect (specific display TH) with priority, it appears in 147 of the same figure. We decided to realize the progress of the production in various ways. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and, for example, the progress of the effect in the manner shown in FIG. 158 may be stored as one piece of moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, the mode shown in FIG. 157(b) (integrated image IGa) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mock image IG may be made to appear in one of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination). .

According to the example shown in FIG. 158, first, prior to the occurrence of the validity period, when a treasure chest that is a part of the integrated image IG is displayed, the treasure chest is marked as "Highly Expected Mode" and " The first effect is provided as to whether the content is displayed in a "low expectation mode". In addition, after the validity period has expired, the treasure chest in the integrated image IG is depicted gradually being opened, and the "treasure" is divided into "highly expected form" and "lowly expected form". A second effect is provided as to how the image is displayed. In other words, in this case, the validity period occurs because the level of expectation is suggested by the staged effects (first performance, second performance) that are carried out over the occurrence of the validity period. It is expected that interest in gaming will be suitably improved during the period from before to after the occurrence.

In addition, since we have decided to realize such a step-by-step effect by the depiction of the integrated image IG itself (the depiction of the lid of the treasure chest), we have decided to realize this step-by-step effect by using the depiction of the integrated image IG itself (the depiction of the lid of the treasure chest). The player will feel less stress than if the visibility of the integrated image IG is obstructed by interference (such as), and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. However, even in the example shown in FIG. 158, the omen effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 149. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 149, the omen effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 158.

In FIG. 158, when the first performance condition is met, a simulated image of the operation target is integrated with a "peripheral decorative image (first decorative image)" that includes the display target area of the gauge image. An example of the development of the presentation (first operation acceptance period) in the case of displaying the image as a sample image has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 159 and 160, when the second performance condition is satisfied, the simulated image of the operation target is referred to as the "peripheral decorative image (first decorative image) including the display target area of the gauge image". This section describes an example (second operation acceptance permissible period) of the progress of the presentation in the case where the image is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the image". The example shown in FIG. 158 and the examples shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 do not necessarily give operation opportunities to the same operation target, but they do give operation opportunities to the same operation target. If so, it is desirable that the simulated image of the operation target itself be displayed as the same image (including similar images).

Here, as a mode in which the simulated image that simulates the operation target is displayed as an "image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image", for example, the simulated image that simulates the operation target is displayed as "the peripheral decoration image that includes the display target area of the gauge image". In some cases, the image is displayed as a stand-alone image without being integrated with the decoration image, and in some cases, a sample image of the operation target is displayed as an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image. It is possible to adopt such a mode as described above. According to such a configuration, when the validity period occurs, there are cases where a gauge image is displayed within the image when a sample image of the operation target is displayed as one image, and a case where the gauge image is displayed within the image when the sample image of the operation target is displayed. Since there are cases where the gauge image is not displayed within the image when the sample image is displayed as one image, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension during the validity period.

In the example described below, a display example is shown in which a simulated image of the operation target is displayed as "an image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image".

First, Fig. 159(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed in a specific performance pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the performance situation being performed on the device 1600, a performance situation in which a display related to a precursory performance (specific display TH3) is started on the performance display device 1600 is shown. This presentation pattern may be the same as or different from the presentation patterns shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and FIG. 158. If they are the same performance pattern, they may be generated at the first timing and the second timing within the same performance pattern, or depending on the result of the performance judgment, which of the effective periods (operation reception performance) may be generated. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing within the performance pattern.

In this example, the situations shown in FIGS. 159(a) and 159(b) are basically the same as the situations shown in FIGS. 158(a) and 158(b), and a description of the same configurations will be omitted. However, the "treasure (second decorative image)" which is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 159(b) is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 158(b). The contents are different from the "treasure (first decorative image)" shown in the figure. That is, as mentioned above, the "sample image of the operation target" in this example is displayed as "an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image." Regarding the "edge decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image", there are parts that are displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "edge decoration image that includes the gauge image display target area" and parts that are displayed as a different image. It has become something.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the "treasure (second decorative image)" of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example includes the "holy grail" as shown in FIG. 158. This is similar to the "treasure (first decorative image)" shown in FIG. However, in the "treasure" of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the "gold bar" and "necklace (the display target area of the gauge image GG)" shown in FIG. 158 are not displayed, and instead An image of a box filled with gold coins is displayed. The treasure box shown in FIG. 159(c) is the same as the treasure box shown in FIG. 158(c), and the treasure box is also displayed in one of the multiple modes shown in FIG. 157.

According to such a configuration, even if the specific display TH3 is no longer depicted as being in front of the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" (FIG. 159(c)), The gauge image GG is no longer displayed within the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". In other words, in this case, while the "treasure (marginal decoration image SSG)" is gradually becoming more visible due to the specific display TH3, even if you try to find the gauge image GG, you cannot find it. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension about how much time is left.

In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the "necklace" that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the "necklace" that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. In this case, the same image (such as the holy grail) is intentionally displayed as in the case (FIG. 157(c)). In other words, in this case, it is possible to make it seem as if the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is also displayed somewhere, and thereby the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG can be made to appear. By the time you search for it and realize that it is not displayed anywhere, you will be in a situation where a certain amount of time has already passed since the validity period occurred, so you will feel nervous during the validity period. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 159(b) to 159(d), the pattern image TMG imitating the operation target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, and the gauge image Not only is the area to be displayed not provided, but also the area to be displayed for the gauge image is not displayed as a separate image from the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, since the gauge image is not displayed and it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left in the validity period, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension during the validity period. Note that the display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be hidden; for example, the gauge image may be displayed as a separate image from the integrated image IG, and its display area may be reduced over time. You can do it like this.

FIG. 159(d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has elapsed and the valid period is about to end. As mentioned above, no gauge image is displayed in this example. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159(d), there is no indication that the validity period is about to end, and even if the player visually views the image, it is not suggested that the validity period is about to end. I can't recognize something.

However, even during the validity period according to this example, in the handle pattern image TMG that is the operation target, a display depicting how the handle part 5012 reciprocates within its movable range (reciprocating movement from the original position to a specific position) (dynamic display) is being performed. In this regard, since the validity period in this example is designed to end when the above reciprocating motion is repeated N times (N does not need to be an integer) after the occurrence of the period, By continuing to watch the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much time (how many reciprocating movements) is left in the validity period.

Note that even during the validity period according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 159(c) and 159(d), in the button drawing image BMG, a display depicting the handle button 5014 reciprocating within its movable range (motion) is displayed. (indications) will not be made. In this regard, during the validity period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed, if the operation receiving part (here, the handle button 5014) corresponding to the sample image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated. Even if it is, a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output may be performed in response to the operation reception.

In other words, during the validity period according to this example, the player operates in a hurry because the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, and as a result, the operation receiving section on the side that is not dynamically displayed Since it is assumed that there is a higher possibility of operating the It is desirable to output the after-sound in order to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output may include, for example, a display or sound output such as "Push in the handle, not the handle button!". Therefore, even if the operation receiver on the side that is not displaying dynamically is operated and the corresponding post-operation display or post-operation sound is output, the valid period will end or the set time will expire. It is preferable that the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG is continued without being reset without being reset. When the handle portion 5012 is operated within the validity period continued in this manner, a corresponding post-operation display and post-operation sound output will be performed (see FIG. 160(h)). In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiver on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated (for example, "The handle button is not the handle button, but the handle button It goes without saying that the content is different from the content of "Push it in!"). However, "within the validity period, if the operation receiving part (handle button 5014) corresponding to the button drawing image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, Display and sound output after operation when the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) is operated (for example, "Congratulations!")" and "Button drawing images that are not displayed dynamically within the applicable validity period. After the operation receiver (handle button 5014) corresponding to the BMG is operated, the display after the operation when the operation receiver (handle 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated. In order to improve the game's interest, it is desirable that the post-operation sound output (for example, "I'm glad you made it in time, congratulations!") is executed with different contents.

FIG. 160(e) shows an example of an image that appears on the effect display device 1600 when the operation is not accepted within the time (set time) set for the validity period according to this example.

That is, in the validity period according to this example, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIGS. 159(d) and (e)), no operation is accepted for the handle 5012 within the validity period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation was performed will not be executed (the automatic reception performance will function).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed within the integrated image IG, and the gauge image GG is also not displayed as a separate image. There is a possibility that a situation may occur where the effective period ends because the user is unable to operate the game even though the user intended to operate the game, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in this example, after the validity period ends without any operation by the player, unless a specific condition (for example, the symbol has stopped or the period has not reached 10 seconds before the symbol stops, etc.) is met, , the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (in this case, the handle 5012) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the validity period, and when the operation on the operation means is accepted, Based on this, the above validity period can be re-occurred. In this sense, it can be said that when the valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for re-occurring the valid period starts from the point of expiration.

According to such a configuration, even if the validity period ends as a result of a predetermined set time elapsed without any operation by the player, the operation shown in FIG. It becomes possible to generate an operation reception for outputting a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e) (special validity period), when the player performs an operation on the handle 5012, the validity period begins based on the acceptance of the operation. Start from the state (FIGS. 160(f) and (g)). After that, the contents described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 159(b) to 159(d) and FIGS. 160(e) and (g). Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the validity period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed in the manner described above (see Fig. 160(h)). reference).

Note that when the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e) (special validity period), the images shown in FIGS. 160(f) and (g) (FIGS. 159(b), ( (same as the image shown in c)) will appear sequentially. Such an image is an image display that is executed based on an operation acceptance during the valid period (Fig. 159(b) to (d), Fig. 159(f), (g), etc.). are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output performed based on the acceptance of the operation in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e) (special validity period) also applies to the validity period (FIGS. 159(b) to 159(d) and 160 (f), (g), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

Since the specific image TG is not displayed during the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, it is not necessary to perform a precursory effect (dynamic display using the specific display TH3) in order to generate the valid period. Good too. For example, when a predetermined condition for allowing operation reception regarding a predetermined post-operation display (predetermined post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a predetermined timing arrives), the situation shown in FIG. 159(c) appears. , thereafter, the display may progress in the same manner as in the example described above.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the pattern drawing image TMG and the button drawing image BMG are displayed as one image (composite drawing image HMG), but these drawing images are each displayed as separate images. It may also be displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the "button drawing image BMG" and the "pattern drawing image TMG" are displayed as one image (composite drawing image HMG) that includes both of these drawing images. The ``composite image HMG'' is displayed as an ``integrated image IG'' that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, the "button print image BMG" and the "pattern print image TMG" are displayed as separate images, and at least one of the button print images is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates its periphery. It may also be displayed as an image. For example, if the "pattern image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and the "button pattern image BMG" is displayed as a separate image, the "pattern image TMG" can be displayed as a separate image. Although both "TMG" and "Button drawing image BMG" are displayed simultaneously, "Pattern drawing image TMG" can now stand out more, and operations corresponding to "Button drawing image TMG" can now be displayed. It becomes possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving part (handle part 5012) should be operated. In addition, at this time, the "pattern drawing image TMG" in the integrated drawing image IG is dynamically displayed, whereas the "button drawing image BMG" displayed as a single image is not displayed dynamically, and other points are noted. The same applies to configurations and other examples.

In addition, in the validity period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. Only the sample image TMG) may be displayed.

Further, it is desirable that the valid period (operation acceptance performance) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 be generated with a set time longer than the valid period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 158. In this case, the manner in which the pattern image (here, pattern pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed (reciprocating speed, etc.) within the validity period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. It is desirable that the dynamic display mode (reciprocating speed, etc.) of the pattern images (here, pattern image TMG) be the same within the indicated validity period (operation reception performance). According to such a configuration, even when the gauge image GG is not displayed, by checking "the state of dynamic display of the sample image" based on the case where the gauge image GG is displayed, it is possible to You will be encouraged to operate.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be a "treasure" image, and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, when the operation receiving part corresponding to the model image that is not dynamically displayed is the "first operation receiving part", in the example shown in FIGS. The operation receiving section corresponding to the image may be the "first operation receiving section." However, in this case, when the operation receiving part that is dynamically displayed in the example shown in FIG. 158 is the "second operation receiving part", in the example shown in FIGS. It is desirable that the operation receiving section corresponding to the "second operation receiving section" be a "third operation receiving section" that is different from the "second operation receiving section". According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate two types of operation reception effects in which the display relationship between the three operation targets (operation receivers) slides. , it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Further, the valid period (operation acceptance performance) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 does not necessarily have to occur during the execution period of symbol variation. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol fluctuations, or it may be a period during which symbol fluctuations are not being executed, such as during a jackpot game execution period or a period before a jackpot game is started. ” may occur.

In addition, during the valid period (operation reception performance) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, the decorative pattern SZ that had been displayed until then is hidden, as in the valid period in the examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 155. Alternatively, it may be made so that it is difficult to visually recognize, thereby making it easier to notice that the gauge image is in a special effect state where it is not displayed.

As the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 158(c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 158 does not need to occur during all of these valid periods, but it is sufficient that the display progress shown in FIG. 158 occurs during at least one valid period.

As the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 159(c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 does not have to occur in all of these valid periods, but it is sufficient that the display progress shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 occurs in at least one valid period.

In the valid period (operation reception performance) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, unlike the valid period shown in FIG. It may be possible to display the information only in the following manner.

The valid period during which the gauge image is not displayed (operation acceptance effect) can occur only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014, and the operation opportunity is not given to the other. A valid period (operation acceptance performance) may occur in which a gauge image is always displayed when the bonus is given.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced during the effective period during which the integrated image is displayed (the effective period shown in FIGS. 151 to 153), and the gauge image A valid period in which an integrated image is displayed for which no GG display area is provided in the first place (valid period shown in Figures 159 and 160) can occur as one of multiple types of valid periods. There is. In this regard, in these valid periods (FIGS. 151 to 153, FIG. 159, and FIG. 160), in order to maintain a good sense of tension, when the operation by the player is not accepted, and when the operation is accepted. 147 to 150, and 158). In order to maintain a good performance, it is desirable that when an operation by a player is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is performed (with an automatic button function).

In this respect, there is a valid period during which the integrated image is displayed in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not become small (valid period shown in FIGS. 151 to 153), and an integrated image in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not provided in the first place. When an operation is accepted for an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the validity period during which the sample image is displayed (the validity period shown in FIGS. 159 and 160), the change (display) corresponding to the operation reception is made. It is desirable that the integrated image is not hidden but remains displayed at the time when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a change or lamp emission, starts to be executed. It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated image is continued. As a result, it is expected that the feeling of tension will be better maintained by creating a feeling of anxiety as to whether or not the performance reception has been properly performed when the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image. Become so.

In this case, the display mode of the sample image (for example, color or Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and it is also possible for the sample image to be made difficult to see due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state where a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. On the other hand, during the validity period (FIGS. 147 to 150, FIG. 158) in which the gauge image GG is displayed to be smaller as time passes, changes (display changes and , when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lamp emission, etc.) occurs, the integrated sample image (both the sample image and the gauge image) in the state where the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs. ) may be hidden, or, as in the above case, changes in response to operation reception (display changes, lamp lighting, etc.) may be made while the integrated image is displayed instead of being hidden. It may be made to occur.

However, even during the effective period in which "the display area of a specific image is not displayed to be reduced over time," a mock image of the operating means to be operated will still be displayed. As for images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time when operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image based on the sample image has progressed. This is possible, and it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

[Integrated image, effect before validity period, image disappearing effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of determining which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (performance pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby determining the jackpot. A fluctuating performance using a decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessories performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). ), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) in which presentation acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview performance judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing are included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined state for the performance component that is the target of the performance, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (validity period). Since only a post-operation performance that causes a change (at least one of a display change on the performance display device 1600, a sound performance change on a speaker, a light emitting change due to a lamp, and a performance operation using a movable decoration) is executed, the reception The permissible state (valid period) itself has poor performance, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) in which an operation opportunity is given occurs, the operation receiving part, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is activated. By displaying the simulated image as an integrated simulated image (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the simulated image, the enjoyment of the game after the operation is performed until the performance is executed. We are trying to suppress the decline. For such an integrated mock image, there is an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the above predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable to display this in both the reception performance (validity period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. In addition, for each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the illustrated sample image with one of the integrated sample images described below, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

Note that the "integrated image" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image, A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated image," and the image is displayed in any one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance acceptance state occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation reception is allowed or that the operation acceptance is allowed is generated. This makes it difficult to forget to perform an operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, whether the reception permissible state (valid period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). , is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (valid period) has already occurred.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of acceptance acceptance states including a first acceptance acceptance state and a second acceptance acceptance state are prepared as acceptance acceptance states (validity periods). There is. Here, the first acceptance acceptance state can occur when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns), but the first acceptance state can occur when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns). A valid period that cannot occur under a predetermined fluctuation pattern (or under any of the low expected fluctuation patterns) (based on the first condition being satisfied in the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination) period). In addition, the second acceptance acceptance state is when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns), and when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns). The validity period that can occur (or at least in any of these fluctuation patterns) (the second condition different from the first condition in the production judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment) (validity period that is generated based on the establishment of the contract).

The "integrated image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first acceptance-permitting state and the second acceptance-permitting state. Here, it is assumed that the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state occur as reception permission states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410). The "integrated simulated image" displayed in the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state is an image that simulates the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated image", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first acceptable state of acceptance and the second acceptable state of acceptance. Among them, it is possible to display only in the first reception permissible state, and in the second reception permissible state, it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). ing. In the first reception acceptance state, it is determined which of multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) to display the "integrated image" including special modes based on the result of the jackpot determination. The "integrated image" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second reception acceptance state, there is a decision as to which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (c)) to display the "integrated image" based on the result of the jackpot determination, which does not include the special mode. A determination may be made, and the "integrated image" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

In such a configuration, in the first acceptance permission state, two types of acceptance permission sounds (first permission sound and second permission sound) are output, and in the second reception permission state, One type of acceptance permission sound (third acceptance permission sound) is output. Here, the first permissible sound and the third permissible sound are, for example, output as a sound effect such as "Pikin!", and may be output as the same sound or may be different from each other. It may also be output as sound. On the other hand, the second permissible sound is output as a message sound such as "Press!", for example. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and as long as it is a different sound from the first permissible sound and is output for a different output time, two types of permissible reception sounds can be used. It is possible for the player to suitably recognize that the sound (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) is being output.

Here, as mentioned above, in the first reception acceptance state, the "integrated image" can be displayed even in a mode different from the special mode (a mode with relatively low expectations). In this case, two types of acceptance permissible sounds (a first permissible sound and a second permissible sound) are output. In other words, in this case, when the acceptance permission state occurs (displaying the integrated model image), if only one type of acceptance permission sound is output, the special mode will not be displayed as the "integrated model image" and the special mode will not be displayed. Different modes will be displayed, but when two types of acceptance permissible sounds are output, there are cases where the special mode is displayed as an "integrated image" and cases where a mode different from the special mode is displayed. There comes to be.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated image" will be displayed in a special mode based on the mode in which the acceptance acceptance sound is output, and It becomes possible to improve the interest in the game when such a situation occurs.

In addition, when the "integrated model image" is displayed in the first reception acceptance state or the second reception acceptance state, a preliminary effect (precursor effect) is executed prior to this, and the integrated image is displayed. is displayed so that at least a portion thereof overlaps with the "image related to the pre-effect" (displayed in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize) while such a pre-effect is being executed. Then, in the integrated image, as the "image related to the pre-effect" is gradually reduced, the portion that overlaps with it is gradually reduced, or the transmittance of the "image related to the pre-effect" is gradually reduced. By increasing the height and finally being hidden, the aspect (the whole) is exposed (displayed in a state where it is easy to see) after the occurrence of the acceptance permission state. Such foreshadowing effects are, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 147(b) and (c) and FIGS. 149(c) to (f), and are executed in the same manner. You may also do so.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start outputting at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but starts outputting with a delay. ing. However, at the time when the first permissible sound starts outputting in advance, it is possible that ``the integrated image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize its form''. Of course, even at the time when the output of the second permissible sound is started after a delay, at least a part of the integrated image is in a state where the image related to the foreshadowing effect is displayed overlapping from the front side, This makes it difficult to see. Note that the reception permission state (validity period) occurs when or during the execution of the pre-effect (precursor effect), and at least when the output of the second permissible sound starts. Either it has already occurred, or it will occur in conjunction with the start of its output.

According to such a configuration, at least in a situation where "the first permissible sound is output and the second permissible sound is not output", two types of accepted permissible sounds (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are not output). Either the first reception permissible state in which the second permissible sound) is output occurs (or is occurring), or the second reception permissible state in which only one type of reception permissible sound (the first permissible sound) is output occurs ( It is difficult to recognize whether this is the case (or is occurring). However, if a situation such as "the second permissible sound starts outputting after the first permissible sound is output" occurs, two types of accepted permissible sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) will be output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptance permissive state has occurred, and that the integrated image may be displayed in a special manner.

In other words, in this case, in a state where it is difficult to recognize in which manner the integrated image is displayed (or whether it is being displayed),
・When transitioning from "a state in which only the first permissible sound among the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (first acceptance permissible state) and,
・When the state does not shift from "a state in which only the first permissible sound among the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (second acceptance permissible state) This makes it possible to suggest the possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special manner based on the manner of the "transition in the output of the acceptance acceptance sound." Therefore, while in the "state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output", before the image related to the foreshadowing effect is hidden, It becomes possible to make the player interested in whether or not the output of the second permissible sound starts, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game. As a result, if the second permissible sound is output while the image related to the foreshadowing effect is being displayed, an integrated image with a special aspect will be displayed (being displayed). It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation, and it becomes possible to provide a performance in which the integrated image is gradually revealed while there is a sense of expectation.

As described above, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a portion of the integrated simulated image is made difficult to see due to the "image related to the pre-effect". Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated model image may be displayed in a special manner, it is difficult to at least easily recognize in which mode the integrated model image is displayed. Needless to say. Furthermore, at the time when the output of the second permissible sound is started, the first permissible sound may maintain its output state, or the first permissible sound may end its output state. .

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a third condition (a third acceptance acceptance state) that is different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptance state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptance state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound or second acceptable sound), and the operation means (here, , the operation button 410), the display may change or an output sound may be generated after the operation, as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptance acceptance state or the second acceptance acceptance state. good. In this case, the contents of the display change and the output sound after the operation may be different depending on the type of acceptance acceptance state (first acceptance acceptance state, second acceptance acceptance state, third acceptance acceptance state).

In other words, by displaying the integrated image without outputting any acceptance permission sound, it is possible to make it difficult to understand when operation reception became permitted, and It becomes possible to improve the player's interest in playing games. Therefore, when adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated model image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image is displayed in one of the modes shown in FIGS. 151 to 155. It is desirable to do so. According to such a configuration, a "gauge stop period" occurs in which the gauge image GG is not reduced, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined value (0) and is left as it is when integrated. Since the image is now hidden, it is now possible to maintain a sense of tension when the reception acceptance state is occurring, and to better improve the enjoyment of the game related to the operation. You will be able to aim for it.

Alternatively, if the integrated model image is to be displayed without outputting any acceptance permission sound, the integrated model image is displayed in such a manner that the gauge image is not displayed and even its display target area is not provided. Good too. Such a display method is as described above with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160, although the operation target is different. For example, "The display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the display area of the gauge image GG is The display target area of the gauge image is not intentionally displayed as including the same image (peripheral decoration image) as when the target area is displayed, nor is the target area of the gauge image displayed as a separate image from the integrated image. The same technical ideas can be applied in the same way. Even with this configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to better improve the game's enjoyment related to operations. become able to.

In addition, in the acceptance permission state according to this example, there are two cases in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed manner, and a case in which the operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed manner. ) is output in a suppressed manner or is in a non-output state, and there are cases in which operation reception is permitted. In this example, "outputting a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) in a suppressed manner" includes the case where a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output at a volume of "0" (silent output). be. The term "non-output state" includes, for example, a case where no channel is even allocated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there is a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed manner, and There are multiple reception permission states in which operation reception is permitted while sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. "Permissible state" and "Third reception permissible state" are reception permissible states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. It is included as one of the states, and the above-mentioned "second reception permissible state" is a state in which operation reception is performed while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed manner. It is included as one of the permissible acceptance states.

According to such a configuration, when the BGM playback sound (specific type of performance sound) is suppressed or not output, it is not necessary to be aware of the possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special manner. This allows the user to concentrate more and enjoy the performance while the BGM playback sound is suppressed or not output, while avoiding situations where the performance is poor. You will be able to do it.

Note that the "acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state" refers to the state in which the operation is allowed to be accepted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode. The specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) that is being played may be output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state before the reception permission state is generated. A reception permission state is generated while BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed manner, and while the reception permission state is occurring (or at the same time), a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is suppressed. It may be output or non-output. In short, it is sufficient that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state.

Furthermore, even in the reception permission state according to this example, if no operation is detected within the set time period in which operation reception is permitted, the automatic reception mode is executed in which the same display change as when the operation is detected is performed. There are cases where the operation is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation was detected.

Here, among the reception permissible states, the reception permissible state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed is as described above,
・It does not mean that only when set to a special performance state (automatic reception mode), the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the validity period.
・Represents something that outputs post-operation display and post-operation sound regardless of the production status (state of production settings) and regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the validity period. In the first place, it is not necessary to provide a "special performance state (automatic reception mode)" or "a plurality of performance states" as the performance state. In addition, if the reception permission state in which "non-automatic reception mode" is executed among the reception permission states occurs when a special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is set, whether automatic reception will be enabled or not. Either option may be used as to whether or not to do so (for example, it may be set to ``Automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the performance status'' or ``When set to a special performance status (automatic reception mode) "Auto-reception may be enabled only in the following cases"), which is not relevant to the configuration of the technical features described here.

More specifically, if settings related to the game are possible during the demo screen (period when symbol fluctuations are not being executed), no matter which of those settings is selected, " In the reception permission state where the automatic reception mode is executed, automatic reception is always enabled. Among these settings, at least when certain setting conditions are met, the reception permissible state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the reception permission state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed are different occurrence conditions. It is now possible for this to occur. Settings related to games include settings such as volume, brightness, probability of appearance of effects, etc. in addition to special performance status (automatic reception mode), and settings related to special performance status (automatic reception mode) are not always included. It doesn't have to be something. If settings related to a special performance state (automatic reception mode) are installed, the special performance state (automatic reception mode) is not set in the "specific setting conditions".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, at least when certain setting conditions are met, the "automatic reception mode" is executed in an acceptance permission state, and the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed. There are multiple reception permissible states, but the above-mentioned "first reception permissible state" is included as one of the reception permissible states in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed. The above-mentioned "second reception permissible state" and "third reception permissible state" are included as one of the reception permissible states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed.

According to such a configuration, the first reception acceptance that there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (that is, there is a possibility that the game interest will be significantly reduced if you forget to operate it) In this state, the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate the integrated image when it is displayed in a highly anticipated special mode (a mode with a higher rate of stopping at the jackpot symbol than other modes), the effect will be displayed after the operation. (At least one of display changes in the effect display device 1600, effect sound changes in the speaker, light emission changes by the lamps, and effect operations by the movable decoration) can be generated, and a decrease in game interest can be suppressed. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state where there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (the possibility that the game interest will be significantly reduced if you forget to operate it), In the reception permission state, the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed, so this is suitable for suppressing the decline in gaming interest when the user forgets to perform an operation, and at the same time reducing the feeling of tension when the operation reception is permitted. will be able to maintain it.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period in which the reception permission sound is output overlaps with the reception permission state, and when the reception permission sound is in the output state, the operation is not accepted. When the operation is accepted, the output state of the acceptance permission sound can be ended midway (it can be made into an inaudible state) based on the acceptance of the operation.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the acceptance permission sound ends midway is the timing at which an operation by the player is detected (operation acceptance). You will be able to avoid feeling anxious about whether the operation has been accepted or whether the operation has not yet been accepted.

However, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period in which the reception permission sound is output overlaps with the reception permission state, but when the reception permission sound is in the output state Even if an operation is accepted, the output state of the acceptance permissible sound may be maintained without being terminated (making it inaudible) midway based on the acceptance of the operation. I have to. As will be described later, there are multiple reception permissible states in which the reception permissible sound ends midway, and multiple reception permissible states in which the reception permissible sound does not end midway, but the above-mentioned "first reception permissible state" is included as one of the reception permissible states in which the reception permissible sound is terminated midway, and the above-mentioned "second reception permissible state" is a reception permissible state in which the reception permissible sound is not terminated midway. It is included as one of the

According to such a configuration, the first reception acceptance that there is a possibility that the integrated simulated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (that is, there is a possibility that the game interest will be significantly reduced if the user forgets to operate it) In this state, if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the operation will be terminated midway. Therefore, when the integrated image is displayed in a special mode with high expectations (a mode with a higher rate of stopping at jackpot symbols than other modes), you may be asked whether the operation has been accepted or not yet. You can concentrate on the post-operation effects, such as the post-operation display, post-operation output sound, changes in light emitted by lamps, and production movements using movable decorations, without worrying about whether something is being done or not. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state where there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (possibility that the game's interest will be significantly reduced if you forget to operate it), the reception Even if an operation is accepted while the permissible sound is being output, it will not be terminated midway, so while suppressing the drop in interest in the game, this also reduces the feeling of tension when operating. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or if operation reception is permitted while the output is not output, When the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) and when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 144(a) to (c)). I try to make sure that there are times when I feel comfortable.

More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. In addition to the above-mentioned first reception permission state that occurs when the above-mentioned When the model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) and when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 144(a) to (c)) However, in the fourth acceptance state, the integrated image is not displayed in the special mode (see FIG. 144(d)), but is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 144(a) to ()). c)). In the first acceptance permission state, if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permission sound is terminated midway based on the acceptance of the operation (inaudible). On the other hand, in the fourth reception permission state, if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permission sound is changed midway based on the operation acceptance. I try not to terminate it (make it inaudible).

According to such a configuration, a reception permission state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or is not output, and the reception is permitted. When the integrated image is displayed in a special manner in the permissible state, the reception permissive sound is terminated midway based on the operation reception. On the other hand, if a reception permission state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or is not output, and in the reception permission state, When the fake image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there are cases in which the reception permissible sound is terminated midway based on the operation reception, and cases in which the reception permissible sound is maintained without being terminated midway. It becomes like this.

In other words, in this case, in a reception acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, the integrated mock image is in a special mode. is displayed in a different manner (a manner in which there is a low possibility that the game's interest will be significantly reduced if the user forgets to perform an operation). Since there are cases where the permissible sound is maintained without being terminated midway, it is possible that when the permissible sound is not terminated midway, the reason is that the operation has not been accepted. It is now possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the reason is that the fourth reception permissible state has occurred even though the game has been canceled, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained while suppressing a decline in interest in the game. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first reception permission state occurs, prior to this, a wide area When the execution of the pre-form display is started and the second reception permission state occurs, the pre-form display of a narrow area that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started before this. It is supposed to be done. Then, a simulated image of the operation receiving part (in this case, an integrated simulated image) is displayed both during the period when the wide-area front effect is being executed and during the period when the first reception permission state is occurring. are displayed in different manners during the period when the wide-area pre-effect is being executed and during the period when the first reception permission state is occurring.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated sample image (sample image) is displayed during the period when the wide-area pre-effect is being executed, and the integrated sample image (sample image) is displayed during the period when the first reception permission state is occurring. The integrated simulated images (simulated images) displayed are based on different image data, even though they simulate the same operation receiving part (operation button 410). As a result, not only the color scheme but also the outline shape itself is displayed as being different.

According to such a configuration, when performing a wide-area pre-production, it is possible to have a greater degree of freedom without being constrained by the form (image data) of the integrated sample image (sample image) displayed in the first reception permission state. Since it becomes possible to display an integrated sample image (sample image) with a high level of independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing pre-production over a wider area (wide-area pre-production). It becomes like this. It is clear that such effects cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on single image data.

In addition, in the reception permissible state in which a wide-area pre-effect is executed, compared to the reception-permissible state in which a narrow-area pre-effect is executed, as a post-operation effect, a jackpot effect that only appears when a jackpot has been obtained is more effective. The proportion of cases in which this aspect appears is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states corresponding to wide area type pre-effects (wide area type pre-effects are executed), and these acceptance acceptance states are A first acceptance permitting state and a third acceptance permitting state are respectively prepared. In addition, there are multiple reception acceptance states that correspond to the narrow-area pre-production (in which the narrow-area pre-production is executed), and one of these acceptance acceptance states is the second reception acceptance state. A state and a fourth acceptance permission state are prepared respectively.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception acceptance state, an operation is performed while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. As mentioned above, the second reception permission state is such that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is not suppressed. That's exactly what I did. In other words, when a narrow-area pre-production with relatively poor performance is performed, it is difficult to accept operations while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is not suppressed but is set to a non-suppression mode. (second reception permission state), it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to the failure of the wide-area pre-performance, which is relatively superior in performance. On the other hand, if an operation can be accepted while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state, a wide-area type with relatively superior performance is possible. Since the pre-production is being performed (first reception permissible state), the game is played due to the operation not being accepted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressing manner. A decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific setting condition (one production state) is in place, no operation is detected within the set time period in which operation reception is permitted in the first reception permission state. When the operation is detected, the operation is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception permission state, the operation is detected within the set time when the operation reception is permitted. As described above, when the operation is not detected, the operation is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. In other words, in the first reception acceptance state in which a wide-area pre-performance is performed, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease if someone forgets to operate it due to its high performance. Because of this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when a user forgets to perform an operation. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state where a narrow-area front performance is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the performance must be properly controlled. Only those who are paying attention and realize that the operation reception is allowed will be able to enjoy post-operation effects such as post-operation display and post-operation output sound, which will suitably create a sense of tension. be able to maintain it.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode, or is in a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted in a non-output state. is such that it includes at least the first acceptance permission state that occurs when the first condition is met, and the fourth acceptance permission state that occurs when the fourth condition is met. As mentioned above. In this regard, in the fourth reception permission state, an operation can be accepted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in the fourth suppression mode, but in the first reception permission state, In the state, it is possible to accept an operation while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. I have to. Further, when the fourth reception permission state occurs, a narrow-area pre-effect that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started in advance. In other words, when a narrow-range pre-production with relatively poor performance is performed, even if a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is suppressed, the degree of suppression is reduced. (Fourth acceptance acceptance state), it becomes possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to the wide-area pre-performance, which is relatively superior in performance, not being performed. On the other hand, an operation may be accepted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. In this case (first reception permissible state), a wide-area pre-production with relatively superior production performance was performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) was not low. A decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first acceptance permission state occurs and the player accepts an operation while the sample image (integrated image) is displayed, the operation acceptance is performed. The corresponding post-operation effect (at least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a effect movement by a movable decorative body) starts to be executed, and the simulated image (integrated image) When hiding an image), a wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing effect) using at least half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600, etc.) is executed. If the second acceptance permission state occurs and the player accepts an operation while the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed, a post-operation effect (effect display device) corresponding to the operation acceptance occurs. At least one of the display change in 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) starts to be executed, and when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is hidden. A narrow-area disappearing effect (narrow-area disappearing effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600, etc.) is executed.

Here, the disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance effect, narrow-area disappearance effect) is a form that makes part or the whole of the displayed image (integrated image) difficult to see or invisible. This refers to an "image other than the mapped image" or "display effect on the mapped image" that is displayed. Such a disappearance effect (disappearance effect) may be executed as an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed, for example. , display the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (disappearance effect) as one moving image prepared in advance, and display part or all of the simulated image (integrated simulated image) in the moving image (disappearance effect). It may be a method that expresses how the image becomes difficult to recognize due to an effect), or it may be performed by changing the display mode of the sample image (integrated image) itself (display effect). It may be. However, when hiding the replica image (integrated replica image), it is necessary to use such a disappearing effect to suggest the level of expectation or improve the enjoyment of the game. It goes without saying that it is more desirable to display it as a separate image.

Also, ``When hiding the sample image (integrated sample image)...the disappearance effect is executed'' means ``When hiding the sample image (integrated sample image)... ...The disappearing effect is executed.'' Or, as the model image (integrated image) becomes invisible, the transparency of the image (integrated image) itself is high. (e.g., the disappearing effect is executed), or it may be "the disappearing effect is executed after the sample image (integrated image) is hidden". , the meaning includes any of these aspects. In addition, the fact that the transmittance of the sample image (integrated sample image) increases in the process of hiding it is also known as ``when hiding the sample image (integrated sample image)''. . . . the disappearance effect is executed."

According to such a configuration, when the execution of the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the operation by the player is started and the simulated image is hidden, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there will be cases where the image disappears and cases where the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed, it becomes possible to improve the performance up to the time when the model image (integrated image) disappears.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when executing such a disappearance effect (image at the time of disappearance), in the narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type image at the time of disappearance), the narrow area type disappearance effect (narrow area type image at the time of disappearance) is executed. The background image that was displayed before the narrow-area disappearing effect (image when narrow-area disappearing) is displayed until the narrow-area disappearing effect (image when narrow-area disappearing) is hidden, or after the operation. (Post-operation display and post-operation output sound) are displayed (maintained) without being changed while they are being executed. On the other hand, the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed before the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed based on the operation reception by the player. The background image is changed to a different background until the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is hidden, or while the post-operation effect (post-operation display and post-operation output sound) is being performed. We are planning to change it into an image.

In other words, when a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearing image) is executed, not only the sample image (integrated image) but also at least a part of the background image are affected by the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image). image), so the background image should be changed (replaced) with a different background image at the timing when such a wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is executed. This makes it possible to achieve a smooth performance transition (transition to a new performance phase) using the button performance. For example, a wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is an image that is displayed on a separate layer that is in front of the layer where the model image (integrated image) is displayed and the layer where the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the model image (integrated model image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed as one video prepared in advance, and one of the model images (integrated model image) may be displayed in the video. It may be possible to express a state in which part or the whole of the background image becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the image (disappearance effect).

On the other hand, if a narrow-area disappearing effect (image when narrow-area disappearing) is executed, the narrow-area disappearing effect (image when narrow-area disappearing) is hidden, or after the operation. Since the background image is not changed while the performance (post-operation display and post-operation output sound) is being performed, the performance transition (transition to a new performance phase) will not be realized. Therefore, in addition to the post-operation effects, players are interested in whether a wide-area disappearance effect (a wide-area disappearing image) or a narrow-area disappearing effect (a narrow-area disappearing image) is displayed. As a result, the gaming interest associated with the simulated image (integrated simulated image) can be suitably maintained from when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed until it is hidden.

In addition, when a wide-area extinction effect (wide-area extinction image) is displayed, the jackpot will be obtained as a post-operation effect than when a narrow-area extinction effect (narrow-area extinction image) is displayed. There is a high probability that the appearance of the jackpot effect, which only appears when the game is in progress, will appear. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states (in which the wide area disappearance effect is executed) corresponding to the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image). As one of these acceptance acceptance states, a first acceptance acceptance state and a third acceptance acceptance state are prepared, respectively. In addition, there are multiple acceptance states that correspond to narrow-area disappearance effects (images at the time of narrow-area disappearance) (in which narrow-area disappearance effects are executed), and these acceptance acceptance states As one of these, a second acceptance permission state and a fourth acceptance permission state are prepared.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception acceptance state, a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner or is not output. The second reception permission state is such that the player can accept operations while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is set to a non-suppressing mode. What is happening is as described above. In other words, when a narrow-range extinction effect that is relatively poor in performance is performed, the player's response to a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is not suppressed but is set to a non-suppressing mode. Since the operation can be accepted (second acceptance acceptance state), it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to the failure of the wide-area extinction effect, which is relatively superior in performance. On the other hand, if a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed manner, or if an operation can be accepted by the player while it is in a non-output state, the performance is relatively affected. Since the superior wide-area extinction effect is performed (first reception permissible state), it is not possible for the player to accept operations while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed manner. A decrease in interest in games due to failure to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific setting condition (one presentation state) is met, an operation is detected within a set time period in which the player's operation reception is permitted in the first reception permission state. If the operation is not detected, the operation is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception permission state, the operation is executed within the set time when the player is allowed to accept the operation. As described above, when no operation is detected, the process is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. In other words, in the first reception acceptance state where the wide-area extinction effect is performed, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease if someone forgets to operate it due to its high performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when a user forgets to perform an operation. That is, in this case, even if the automatic reception functions without the player's operation being accepted, the wide-area extinction effect will be executed in the same manner as when the player's operation was accepted. On the other hand, in the second reception permissible state in which the narrow-area extinction effect is performed, it is executed in the non-automatic reception mode described above, so the set time elapses without any operation by the player (the second reception permissible state When the state is completed), the simulated image is displayed without any post-operation effects (at least one of the display change on the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change on the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decoration). It will be hidden. In this regard, in the second acceptance state, the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed even when the sample image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not executed, which may cause users to forget to perform the operation. As a result, a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed when the post-operation performance is no longer executed. At this time, the narrow-area extinction effect may be executed in the same manner (same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception acceptance state according to this example, there are two types of narrow-area disappearance effects that appear when an operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is executed, and a narrow-area disappearing effect that appears when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is not executed. The narrow-area vanishing effect that appears in this image appears in different modes (images) from each other.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a reception desk in which a player's operation is allowed while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state. The permissible state includes at least the first acceptance permissible state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptable state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. As mentioned above, there are In the fourth acceptance permission state, the player can accept an operation while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the acceptance acceptance state, a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is operated by the player while it is in a non-output state. As mentioned above, it is possible to receive the information. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an operation is accepted by a player in the fourth reception acceptance state, a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed instead of a wide-area disappearance effect. . In other words, when a narrow-range extinction effect with relatively poor performance is performed, a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is suppressed in advance, but the degree of suppression is set to be low. Therefore (fourth reception acceptance state), it becomes possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to not performing a wide-area extinction effect that is relatively superior in performance. On the other hand, an operation may be accepted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is being output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. In this case (first reception permissible state), a wide-area extinction effect with relatively superior performance is performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) was not low. A decline in interest in games can be suppressed.

FIG. 161 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second acceptance permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (performance settings). FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which the second acceptance permission state occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a , First, performance determination (advancement determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 163(a) ”), within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the “second variation pattern” selected above. It happens.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the process as shown in FIG. 161(b). , the above-mentioned second reception acceptance state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the second post-operation performance is permitted when timing tB3 has arrived, when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern SZ. (corresponds to "the situation shown in FIG. 163(d)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for the second reception acceptance state (validity period), - "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" according to the second variation pattern , for example, the "non-suppression acceptance permission state" (see FIGS. 161(a) and (b) )" and - If no operation is detected within the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) in which operation reception is permitted, a post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) corresponding to the second reception permissible state is performed. "Non-automatic reception mode (see Figure 161 (h))" that does not occur
It is made to occur as a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, the set time (valid period ) is suddenly set (non-suppressive reception effect), the player is caught off guard, and there is likely to be a delay in the start of the movement when trying to perform an operation. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tB3 to tB4), the set time ends without any post-operation effects (non-automatic reception). A sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making the user aware of the risk of missing an opportunity to generate a post-operation effect (here, a second post-operation effect).

However, in this "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance", the post-operation performance (here, the second post-operation performance) is performed in a manner that only appears when a jackpot occurs, rather than the "suppression/automatic reception performance" described later. Even though the percentage (it may be 0% or 100%) is low, if there are frequent occurrences where the post-operation effect does not occur against the player's will, the interest in the game may decrease. There are concerns. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161(b), (e), and (i), it is necessary to When the timing tB2 arrives a little earlier, the output of the "acceptance permissible sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(c)"), and the timing is within the set time. Even if an operation is accepted at tB3a, the output state is maintained across this. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that operation reception is permitted at timing tB2, which is a little earlier than timing tB3 at which the setting time (timings tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permission state is set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of "the game ends without the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) because the player notices that the reception has been accepted too late and is unable to perform the operation in time." become expected. However, the "acceptance permissible sound (here, the first permissible sound)" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) occurs; for example, the generation timing of the set time It may be generated in accordance with the generation timing of tB3.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Push!" and "Push!" are used as "acceptable sound". and a second permissible sound that is output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 161(f) and (j), in the second reception permissible state, the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. is output, and the output restriction on such "acceptance permission sound" also tends to cause a delay in the start of a movement when a player attempts to perform an operation.

By the way, in the second reception permission state, as a countermeasure against the setting time being suddenly set or being executed in a non-automatic reception mode, the operation means (here, the operation It is conceivable that some players may try not to miss an opportunity to generate a post-operation effect by repeatedly hitting the button 410). However, in this case, since the post-operation performance will start immediately after the operation reception is accepted, the started performance is "one that is being performed in response to the operation reception (post-operation performance)". This makes it difficult to recognize whether the game is a simple warning effect unrelated to the operation reception, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 161 (in particular, FIG. 161(e)), in the second acceptance permission state, the "acceptance permission sound (first permission sound)" is not activated after the set time (valid period) has elapsed. When the performance is accepted at timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself ends, but the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not ended prematurely, but is set as the first allowable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output ends (timing tB3c (FIG. 161(e), (i)), which is the same as when there was no operation. As a result, the started production is "in response to the operation reception". It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether the event is being performed (post-operation performance) or whether it is automatically generated as a performance unrelated to operation reception. It becomes like this.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 161, when the production is accepted within the set time of the second acceptance permission state (timing tB3a in the figure), the production display device At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 161(d) ). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker maintain the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (validity period), it will be hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tB4. In contrast, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be configured to maintain its output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing when the effect is accepted. However, even if the operation is accepted at any timing, if timing tB4 has not yet passed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) will not be output. It is required to maintain the status.

In the production example shown in FIG. 161, when timing tB2, which is earlier than timing tB3 at which the setting time of the second acceptance permission state is set, arrives, the production display device 1600 displays the operating means to be operated. A simulated image is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time ends is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163(c)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that operation reception is permitted at timing tB2, which is a little earlier than timing tB3 at which the setting time (timings tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permission state is set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of "the game ends without the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) because the player notices that the reception has been accepted too late and is unable to perform the operation in time." become expected. In this example, the timing at which the sample image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance acceptance sound (first acceptance sound) starts outputting, but the timing is not limited to this, and one of the two may start earlier. You can also do this. Alternatively, only one of the sample image and the acceptance acceptance sound (for example, only the sample image) may be started before timing tB3.

In addition, as mentioned above, the sample image displayed when the second reception permission state occurs (the image that simulates the operation receiving section to which the operation opportunity is given) is the periphery that decorates the periphery of the sample image. It is displayed as an integrated image IG that is integrated with the decoration image. This "integrated image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image (predetermined A display target area (section image KG) of image) GG is provided. Furthermore, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated image IG", and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated image" that are in the second acceptance permission state, special modes with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) are selected by lottery. ), and only modes that are different from the special mode (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 144(a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 163, the integrated model image IGa with the lowest expectation level is displayed as the integrated model image IG.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 161(c) to 161(f), it is assumed that timing tB3a arrives and an operation is accepted while such an integrated image is being displayed. When an operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs post-operation effects (display changes on the effect display device 1600, effect sound changes on the speaker, light emission changes from the lamps, and movable decorations). As at least one of the performance operations), output to the liquid crystal display and output to the performance sound are respectively started (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163(f)").

However, as shown in FIGS. 161(c), (d), and 163(f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated simulated image IG is not displayed at the time when the post-operation effect is started. The display state is maintained without being changed. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that point (timing tB3a), no change is caused in the integrated image IG (specific layer), and after a short period of time ( Until timing tB3b (predetermined time period) has elapsed, the "display on the integrated image IG" continues in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. The display area of the gauge image GG is also being reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in FIG. 163, a preview of the conversation by the princess character (this may be a chance) is displayed as the post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

Then, when timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in such a way as to make part or the whole of the integrated image in the display state difficult to view or invisible appears (see "Fig. 163 (corresponds to the situation indicated in (g)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image that is displayed on a separate layer before the integrated model image IG and the image (disappearance effect). ) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and in the moving image, a part or the whole of the integrated image IG becomes difficult to see due to the image KSE (disappearance effect). As mentioned above, it may be.

As shown in FIG. 161(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated simulated image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed. The display state is maintained without being changed. More specifically, even under the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated model image IG is displayed, no change due to it will occur in the integrated model image IG. First, the display area of the gauge image GG is also being reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on a layer earlier than that, the model image and the gauge image GG become difficult to view or become invisible.

In other words, in this case, the disappearing effect image KSE (the same applies to the wide-area disappearing effect image HSE described later) is used to make the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) difficult to view or invisible. Even though it is displayed on a predetermined layer, the sample image (integrated image IG) that is displayed on a specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) is itself The display remains as it was when operation reception was permitted, and no changes occur. Furthermore, the display of the gauge image GG, whose display area continues to be reduced, continues across the operation acceptance period. As a result, even in the process of making the sample image (integrated sample image IG) difficult to view or making it invisible, it is possible to visually confirm (at least part of) the state when operation reception was permitted. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to maintain the state shown in FIG. 163(f).

Then, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated image IG ends during the period (timings tB3b to tB3d) during which the image KSE of the disappearance effect is displayed (as shown in FIG. 163(i)). From this point on, when the integrated image IG is not displayed on the layer, the disappearance effect (here, a narrow-area disappearance effect that uses less than half of the predetermined display area) (effect) image KSE will be displayed. The image KSE with such a disappearing effect is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3d) after its display started (timing tB3b) (see FIG. 163). j)). In this regard, regarding the timing tB3d at which the display is hidden, regardless of when the operation is accepted, the change in display on the performance display device 1600 (in this case, the liquid crystal display) among the effects after the operation is It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period in which it is being executed. That is, as will be described later, the image KSE of the disappearance effect and the integrated image IG are displayed on a layer in front of the image related to the display change (conversation preview by the princess character) on the effect display device 1600, It is displayed in a way that overlaps with this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 163(g) to (i), while the disappearing effect image KSE is displayed, the image related to the display change (conversation preview by the princess character) on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized. It's becoming more difficult. The same applies to the wide-area extinction effect.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted, not only the post-operation presentation is started, but also the manner in which the integrated image IG was displayed at the time the operation was accepted is displayed. 144(a) to 144(d), how much time is left as suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.). 163(f)). After that, the display of the disappearing effect image KSE in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600" and the integrated image IG among the post-operation effects is started. (corresponds to "the situation shown in Figure 163(g)"). As mentioned above, there are two types of extinction effects: narrow-area disappearance effects with low performance and wide-area disappearance effects with low performance, and here they are executed as narrow-area disappearance effects. While the image KSE of such a disappearing effect is displayed, the integrated image IG becomes hidden (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 163(i)"), and then the disappearing effect When the image KSE is hidden, the "image related to the display change on the performance display device 1600 (conversation preview by the princess character)" of the post-operation performance finally becomes visible in a clear state (" (equivalent to the situation shown in FIG. 163(j)).

In other words, in this case, when the operation is accepted, the user can first enjoy what the integrated image IG looks like, and then enjoy how it will appear as a disappearing effect. Since you will be able to enjoy what kind of presentation will appear after the operation (in this case, which of several conversation preview modes with different expectations), when the operation is accepted with such a variety of presentations. It becomes possible to improve the player's interest in playing games.

In order to suitably obtain such effects, the timing at which the image related to the display change (post-operation effect) is started to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 should be set at timing tB3b instead of timing tB3a, or when the disappearing effect is started. It is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timings tB3b to tB3d). However, in this case as well, since the post-operation performance using sound and lamps starts to be executed at timing tB3a, the start timing of the post-operation performance itself remains at timing tB3a.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 161(g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptance permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As mentioned above, the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, so if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode. The sample image (here, the integrated sample image IGa) will be hidden.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 161(b) and 161(g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception permission state) ends, The sample image on the specific layer (here, the integrated sample image IGa) is not hidden, but maintains the display state that appeared when it was in the acceptance permission state. More specifically, even if operation reception is no longer permitted, at that point (timing tB4), no change is caused to the sample image (here, the integrated sample image IGa), and no change is caused thereto. Until timing tB4a arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "display of the sample image" continues in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. There is. Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area remaining even after the state in which operation acceptance is allowed (second acceptance acceptance state) ends, and the display area decreases after timing tB4. The display area is reduced so that it becomes "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the validity period (second reception acceptance state) ends without any operation, the sample image will be displayed in any mode (any of multiple modes with different expectations). It will now be possible to confirm whether the In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to ``0'' after the validity period ends, it can encourage you to feel ``too bad'' when you are unable to receive the operation in time at the last minute. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

In this example, the validity period (second reception acceptance state) ends without any operation reception, which is longer than the time from timing tB3a when the operation reception is made until the sample image is hidden (invisible). The time from timing tB4 until the sample image is hidden (invisible) is made shorter.

Furthermore, as described above, in the second reception acceptance state, if the set time elapses without any operation by the player being detected, the post-operation performance will not be executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 161(g), when the sample image (here, the integrated sample image IGa) is hidden, a narrow-area disappearing effect is executed. While the narrow-area vanishing effect is being executed, the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the narrow-area disappearing effect (FIG. 161(g)) when the after-operation effect is not performed is different from the narrow-area disappearing effect when the after-operation effect is executed. (FIG. 161(c)) is executed in a different manner (image).

According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation was accepted (whether or not it was done in time), it is possible to properly understand it by checking the mode of the narrow-range extinction effect. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to grasp whether or not a post-operation performance is being performed. In order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary to change the form of the narrow-area disappearing effect (Fig. 161(c)) when the post-operation effect is executed, to the aspect of the narrow-area disappearing effect (Fig. )) is desirable. However, for example, when the post-operation effect is executed, the narrow-area disappearing effect (FIG. 161(c)) can be changed to "A (for example, a change in the sample image itself)" and "B (for example, a change in the sample image itself)". If the two aspects of ``Displaying another image)'' are to be executed together, the narrow-area disappearing effect (Figure 161(g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed should be executed in ``A''. You can. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted when the mode "B" does not appear in the narrow-range disappearance effect, and it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted, and the situation where the post-operation effect is being performed. A decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to grasp whether the game is in progress or not is avoided.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, when timing tB1 comes before timing tB3 at which the second reception permission state occurs, a narrow-area front effect that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163(b)"). Then, during the period in which the image KTH related to such narrow-area pre-effect is displayed, first, a simulated image of the operation receiving part (here, the integrated simulated image IGa) is displayed, and the first tolerance is displayed. The sound output is started (timing tB2, corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163(c)"). At the time when the display of the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect. It's getting harder. In other words, as time passes, the area in which the image related to the narrow-area front effect is displayed is reduced, and its transmittance is increased, thereby creating a "simulation image (integrated image)". 163(b) to (d)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, while the narrow-area front performance is being executed and the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IGa) is being displayed, the second Timing tB3 when the acceptance permission state occurs has arrived, and operation acceptance is now permitted (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 163(d)"). In other words, in this case, since the operation reception becomes permitted at a stage when the visibility of the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is being increased, the operation acceptance as the sample image (integrated sample image IG) Check the appearance (expectation level) of the image (integrated image IG), whether to hide it by allowing the operation reception (post-operation performance) to be performed without checking the appearance (expectation level) It becomes possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether to hide the operation by accepting the operation (post-operation effect) after the operation has been completed.

Here, the image KTH used for such narrow-area front presentation is, for example, an image that is displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) is displayed. It is also possible to display the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (narrow area type front effect) as one moving image prepared in advance, and improve the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) in the moving image. It may also be designed to express a state in which the value is gradually increased.

Note that in the narrow-area pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the output of related effects may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the purpose is to maintain a sense of tension regarding operations, the narrow-area pre-production is It can be said that it is desirable to perform the image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to increase concentration on the effect.

Further, as a narrow-area pre-performance, a plurality of modes with different expectations may be prepared, and one of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment. . However, considering that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, and if the user forgets to perform the operation, the post-operation effect will not be executed, so regarding the narrow area type pre-effect, It is desirable to provide only one mode and to display only that one mode, in order to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten.

FIG. 162 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the first condition is satisfied and the first acceptance permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (performance settings). FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which the first reception permission state occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a , First, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 164(a) ”), within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the “first variation pattern” selected above. That will happen.

As mentioned above, in the performance related to the "first variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), the decorative pattern is The above-mentioned first reception in which operation reception regarding the first operation post-effect is permitted when timing tC4 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) has arrived at which a first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the SZ fluctuation effect. A permissible state (validity period) is generated (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164(g)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the first reception permission state (validity period),
・“Suppression acceptance permission state” (Fig. 162(a), (b))" and - Even if no operation is detected on the operating means targeted for operation within the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) during which operation acceptance is permitted, "Automatic reception mode" (see FIG. 162 (h)) in which the post-operation effect starts when timing tC4f within the set time arrives.
It is made to occur as a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also referred to as a "strong suppression mode."

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to accept operations while the "BGM playback sound" is being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state (suppression acceptance effect), so that the game From the user's point of view, it becomes easier to perform the operation immediately after the set time (validity period) occurs. In addition to this, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) will be performed at timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when the machine arrives (automatic reception mode), you can enjoy operating it with a sense of security that you will not miss the highly anticipated post-operation performance. . In other words, in such a "suppression/automatic reception performance", the percentage of post-operation performance that appears only when a jackpot is achieved (not 0% or 100%) is higher than in the above-mentioned "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance". As mentioned above, the value of

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even in the "suppression/automatic reception performance", similarly to the above-mentioned "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance", FIGS. 162(b), (e), (i) As shown in , when timing tC3 arrives, which is a little before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) at which production reception is permitted, the "acceptance permission sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is generated. The output is started and the output state is maintained across timing tC4 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM playback sound (specific type of performance sound)" is being output in a suppressed manner or is in a non-output state, the operation can be performed at timing tC3. It is now possible to recognize that a state in which acceptance is permitted will occur soon, and that ``actual acceptance is done by activating the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation, against the player's will.'' It is expected that it will be difficult to appear frequently. However, as mentioned above, the "acceptance permission sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) occurs; for example, it may be generated in accordance with the generation timing tC4 of the set time. You can do it like this.

In addition, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect (suppression reception performance) more favorably, it is necessary to change the "BGM playback sound" from "the state in which it is output in a non-suppression mode" to the "state in which it is output in a suppression mode or in a non-suppression mode". The timing tC2a at which the transition to the "output state" takes place is different from that shown in the figure, but the timing tC2a is changed so that the relationship "length of timings tC2a to tC3>length of timings tC3 to tC4" is established. It can be said that it is desirable to set it considerably before the output start timing tC4 of the above-mentioned acceptance permission sound which occurs in advance of the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may arrive before the wide-area pre-effect is started.

Furthermore, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 162(f) and (j), unlike the case of the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" described above, Not only the first permissible sound which is output as a sound effect such as "Push!" but also the second permissible sound which is a message sound such as "Push!" is output as the "acceptable sound". Furthermore, in this example, the second permissible sound is delayed by a predetermined time with respect to the timing tC3 at which the output of the first permissible sound starts, and the operation reception is already permitted (valid period). The output is started at timing tC4a, which arrives at tC4a.

In other words, in this case, in the second reception acceptance state (validity period) in which the integrated sample image IG (sample image) cannot be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is set during the set time (validity period). The second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first reception permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated sample image IG (sample image) can be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first permissible sound is The output of the second permissible sound is started immediately after the occurrence of the second permissible sound, and the output of the second permissible sound is started after the set time (validity period) has elapsed.

According to such a configuration, the output of the first permissible sound (sound effect) is started when the aspect of the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) is difficult to be recognized or is not visible due to the previous effect. Then, when the first acceptance permission state (validity period) is occurring, it is possible to shift to a state where both the first permission sound (sound effect) and the second permission sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) will be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output. You will be able to do this. In other words, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is in the output state, the integrated model image with a specific high expectation mode (special mode) is generated. You will be able to have a sense of anticipation for the IG (simulation image) to be displayed, and in this situation, the integrated image IG (simulation image) will be gradually revealed (clarified). sex will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. is displayed), the output of the second permissible sound is started.

As will be described later, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target" are determined based on the result of the preview performance determination. When the operation button 410 is selected, a message sound such as "Press!" is output as the second permissible sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Sheath your sword!" is output as the second permissible sound (message sound).

In addition, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 162(e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second permissible sound" is adopted as a production sound that is output for a relatively short period of time. Although the "first permissible sound" is employed as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long period of time, the length relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, as for the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound", as shown in FIGS. 162(e), (f), (i), and (j), the output state is maintained for different periods of time. In addition, the timing at which these output states are terminated (the timing at which they are made inaudible) is set to arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f when the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to do so. According to this configuration, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptance permissible sound" is in, it is possible to estimate how much time is left until the timing tc4f when the automatic button function is activated arrives. It is expected that this will make it less likely that ``a performance is accepted against the player's will by activating an automatic button function rather than by the player's own operation''.
- A first situation in which only the "first permissible sound" maintains its output state among the "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" - Both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" The second situation in which the "first permissible sound" maintains its output state is maintained, but the "second permissible sound" has ended its output state (it has been made inaudible). Third situation: 4th situation where both "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" have finished outputting (being rendered inaudible)

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" in the performance example shown in FIG. 161 and the "suppression/automatic reception performance" in the performance example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikin!") is outputted as the "first permissible sound". In other words, in this case, the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is output as a production sound that is not output in the "non-suppressing/non-automatic reception performance", but the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is Regarding the first permissible sound), since it can be output as a production sound even in "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception production", "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" is suppressed. This makes it possible to more easily recognize that the production reception is in a permissible state (the first permissible sound), while maintaining a suitable performance when the production is in a situation where the reception is permissible (second permissible sound). acceptable sound). However, in the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" in the production example shown in FIG. 161 and the "suppression/automatic reception performance" in the production example shown in FIG. 162, different reception permissible sounds are used as the first permissible sound. It may also be output.

Note that the time length between arbitrary timings shown in the above-mentioned figures and the figures to be described later may be the minimum time (for example, 1 frame) in the control (processing) unit, or may be 2 frames. The time may be longer than that. For example, if the reception permission sound (first permission sound) can be output even slightly in advance of the set time (validity period), the player will be in a state where operation reception is permitted (or Since it is possible to recognize the event earlier by the amount of time that preceded it, it is possible to recognize it earlier by the amount of time that preceded it. It is now expected to prevent users from forgetting to perform internal operations.

Furthermore, in the production example shown in FIG. 162, unlike the production example shown in FIG. When the operation is accepted, the output state is terminated midway based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. In other words, in this case, when the player performs an operation, the output of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) is interrupted at that point, and as a result, the state in which the operation is permissible ( This makes it possible to recognize that the validity period (validity period) has ended. As a result, it is difficult to misidentify that an operation has been accepted even though the operation has not been accepted, and it is possible to prevent the automatic reception function from being activated against the player's intention. become able to. In addition, if the operation is performed and the operation is accepted at a timing before the automatic button function activation timing tC4f within the set time (validity period), the operation will be executed at the time when the operation is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be activated even if timing tC4f arrives, since the state in which reception is permitted is now terminated.

Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 162(e) and 162(f), the first permissible sound starts outputting without delay when the set time (valid period) occurs, and the second permissible sound starts outputting after the set time (valid period). The output is started after the occurrence of the period). According to such a configuration, the output of the first permissible sound will start no matter how quickly the operation by the player is accepted, but the output of the second permissible sound will start depending on the timing at which the operation is accepted. (When the operation is accepted between timings tC3 and tC4a), the state in which the operation is accepted ends without starting output, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ends. ) will now be executed. Note that if the operation is performed between timings tC3 and tC4, the operation will not be accepted and the first permissible sound will not be terminated with this as an opportunity. Further, if the operation is accepted before timing tC4a arrives, output of the second permissible sound will not be started.

According to such a configuration, should the post-operation performance be started after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that the first reception permissible state is established), or after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that the first permissible sound is in the first reception permissible state), or 2. Whether to start the production after the operation without confirming that the permissible sound is output (without recognizing whether it is in the first reception permissible state or the second reception permissible state), the game Since the choice can be left to the player's discretion, the range of games available will be expanded, and it is expected that the player will be able to enjoy the game more.

Furthermore, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 162(c) and 162(f), within the period from timing tC3 to tC4a, at least one of the images related to the pre-effect (here, wide-area pre-effect) Some of them are not hidden and remain visible. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the second permissible sound has not yet been output (timings tC3 to tC4a), the state (expectation level) of the integrated simulated image (simulated image) cannot be clearly recognized due to the pre-production. This makes it possible to make the above-mentioned gameplay, which is ``left to the player's choice'', more interesting.

Also in this production example, as shown in FIG. 162(d), when an operation is accepted within the set time (validity period) (timing tC4b in the figure), the post-operation production according to the operation reception is performed. (Here, the first post-operation performance) includes a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member). (corresponds to "the situation shown in FIG. 164(i)"). Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 161, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not change the timing regardless of when the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period). In contrast, the output sound after the operation (direction sound) is set in advance from the timing when the operation is accepted, whereas it is hidden (invisible) at a specific timing (same timing) that comes after tC5. The output state is maintained for a certain period of time. In the example shown in FIG. 164, a background preview by the princess character is displayed as the post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 162, no matter when the operation is accepted within the set time (validity period), the output sound after the operation (direction sound) will be "BGM playback sound ( It is desirable to maintain the output state when the timing tC6 arrives when the specific type of performance sound) changes from the suppressed state (non-output state) to the non-suppressed mode.

On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display), the output state is ended at timing tC6 when the "BGM playback sound" becomes output in a non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at timing tC6, both the "BGM playback sound" is output in a non-suppressed manner and the content related to the display performance is switched, so the performance is greatly improved. It is expected that changes will be made to improve gaming interest. However, instead of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may also be maintained when timing tC6 arrives. Furthermore, the "background music reproduction sound" may be gradually restored by a technique such as a fade-in when returning to output in a non-suppressed mode.

Also, in the production example shown in FIG. 162, when the timing tC3, which is earlier than the timing tC4 at which the setting time of the first acceptance permission state is set, comes, the production display device 1600 displays the operation to be performed. A simulated image of the means is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time ends is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that operation reception is permitted at timing tC3, which is a little earlier than timing tC4 at which the setting time (timings tC4 to tC5) of the first reception permission state is set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of "the game ends without the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) because the player notices that the reception has been accepted too late and is unable to perform the operation in time." become expected. In this example, the timing at which the sample image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance acceptance sound (first acceptance sound) starts outputting, but the timing is not limited to this, and one of the two may start earlier. You may also do so. Alternatively, only one of the sample image and the reception acceptance sound (for example, only the sample image) may be started before timing tC4.

Furthermore, as described above, the sample image displayed when the first reception permission state occurs (the image that simulates the operation receiving section to which the operation opportunity is given) also has a periphery that decorates the periphery of the sample image. It is displayed as an integrated image IG that is integrated with the decoration image. This "integrated image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image GG ( A display target area (section area KG) of the predetermined image) GG is provided. Furthermore, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated image IG", and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, unlike the second acceptance acceptance state, in the first acceptance acceptance state, a special aspect with a high degree of expectation among the multiple aspects prepared as the "integrated image IG" (for example, As described above, the mode shown in (d) (integrated image IGd) is included as a lottery (selection) target and can be displayed.

By the way, in the first reception acceptance state (FIG. 162) executed in the automatic reception mode, the remaining time is displayed ( It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first reception acceptance state (FIG. 162) according to this embodiment, the remaining time is displayed ( Gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the end of the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

According to such a configuration, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left when the post-operation effect is started due to activation of the automatic button function. It is now possible to suggest that there is a risk of ``losing the opportunity to operate'' against the player's will, and as a result, regardless of the remaining amount of the gauge at the next set time (validity period) It will be possible to encourage users to perform operations at an early stage.

However, regarding the first reception acceptance state (Fig. 162) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation reception is received does not necessarily have to start within the set time; It may be started when or after the end of the process.

Furthermore, the integrated sample image IG (sample image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 162 does not necessarily have to be the same as the integrated sample image IG (sample image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 161. good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the operating means (operation receiver) to be operated is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 162, the operating means (operation receiver) to be operated is depicted. may be depicted realistically.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiver) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated image IG (simulation image) imitating it. In the example shown in FIG. 162, a handle 5012 (sword ornament 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiver) to be operated, and this is displayed as an integrated image IG (simulation image) (Fig. 157(a)-(d)). The "integrated image IGe to IGh" are as described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image is included in the peripheral decoration image. (Predetermined image) A display target area (section image KG) of GG is provided. Furthermore, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated image IG", and the same applies to the point that any one of these modes is selectively displayed.

As described above, in the operation acceptance performance that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 162, based on the result of the advance notice performance determination, there are two options: ``When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target'' and ``When the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target.'' ”. In other words, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operating means is the target of operation after the set time (validity period) during which presentation reception is allowed occurs, the set time may be set to 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tB3 in FIG. 161, there is no case where the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set the set time to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. In this case, regarding the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated, setting it later than the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed after the set time (validity period) occurs is not allowed if the player does not operate against his/her will. This is desirable in order to prevent the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

In addition, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 162, if the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target remains in the incorrect operation state. Even when the operating means is operated, it is desirable that the effect is accepted and the effect is executed after the operation. In other words, if a situation arises in which the performance is not accepted despite operating the operating means, the player may become confused. Since it is cruel to request further operation of the operating means on the side, even if the incorrect operating state is maintained, the performance will be accepted when the operating means on the side that is the target of operation is operated. It is desirable to do so.

As mentioned above, in the suppression operation reception performance, the specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state before the operation opportunity is given, so it is different from the non-suppression operation reception performance. There is a concern that the performance will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) that is output when a suppression operation reception performance is generated is not output when a non-suppression operation reception performance is generated. It is possible to output the sound as a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer period of time than the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple modes (for example, multiple modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are used as the first allowable sound. One of the plurality of modes is selectively outputted as the first permissible sound based on the result of the preview performance determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIG. It is something that exists. Further, it is desirable that the proportion (expectation level) of jackpot symbols appearing when symbol variation is stopped differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is outputted in.

Note that "which of the multiple modes should be output as the first permissible sound" and "which of the multiple operating means should be used as the operation target" are obtained as separate judgment results in the above preview performance judgment. Alternatively, it may be obtained as one determination result within the above-mentioned preview performance determination. However, for at least the above-mentioned first aspect among the plurality of aspects, regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target, the first tolerance is It is desirable to make it selectable as a sound. Furthermore, the second and third modes can also be selected in both cases where the "operation button 410" is the operation target and the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target. However, it is desirable to also provide a mode in which output is possible only when the "sword ornament 5001" is the operation target. Even if the first permissible sound is output in any of these modes, the output state will be maintained for a length longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG. 161.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 162(c) to (f), it is assumed that timing tC4 arrives and the operation is accepted while the integrated image IG (here, integrated image IGd) is being displayed. are doing. When an operation is accepted under such circumstances, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs post-operation effects (display changes on the effect display device 1600, effect sound changes on the speaker, light emission changes from the lamps, and movable decorations). As at least one of the performance operations), an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the production sound are respectively started.

However, as mentioned above, as shown in FIGS. 162(c) and (d), even in this example, the integrated image IG on the specific layer is not hidden when the post-operation effect is started. , maintains the display state from when it was in the acceptance permission state. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that point in time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(i)"), it is considered as the cause of the integrated image IG. No change is made, and until timing tC4c arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "integrated image IG The display area of the gauge image GG continues to be reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the display state difficult to see or cannot be seen appears ("disappearance effect"). 164(j)). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer (predetermined layer) before the specific layer on which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image that is displayed on a separate layer (predetermined layer) that The image (disappearance effect) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and in the moving image, a part or the whole of the integrated image becomes difficult to see due to the image (disappearance effect). As mentioned above, it may be the same.

As shown in FIG. 162(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the integrated simulated image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and the image HSE ( Even when the disappearance effect (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed, it is not hidden, and remains displayed as it was when it was in the acceptance permission state. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated map image IG is displayed, no change due to the disappearing effect occurs in the integrated map image IG. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on a predetermined layer in front of it, the model image and the gauge image GG become difficult to visually recognize or gradually become invisible.

Then, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated model image IG will be finished during the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) during which the disappearing effect image HSE is displayed, and from this point on, the integrated model image The image HSE of the disappearance effect (here, a wide-area disappearance effect that uses more than half of the predetermined display area) is displayed in a situation where IG is not displayed even on a specific layer. The disappearing effect image HSE is made to be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4g) after its display started (timing tC4c). In this regard, regarding the timing tC4g at which the display is hidden, regardless of when the operation is accepted, the change in display on the performance display device 1600 (in this case, the liquid crystal display) among the effects after the operation is It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period in which it is being executed. That is, as will be described later, the disappearing effect image HSE and the simulated image (integrated simulated image) are displayed in a predetermined layer in front of the image related to the display change (post-operation effect) on the effect display device 1600. and is displayed in a manner that overlaps with this. Therefore, while the disappearing effect image HSE is displayed (FIGS. 164(j) and (k)), the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 is made difficult to see. There is.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted, not only the post-operation presentation is started, but also the manner in which the integrated image IG was displayed at the time the operation was accepted. (Which of the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d) is present, how much time is left as suggested by the gauge image GG, etc.) can be maintained in a state where it is possible to know. After that, among the post-operation effects, the disappearing effect image HSE is created in such a way as to make it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background preview by the princess character)" and the integrated image IG. will start displaying. As mentioned above, there are two types of disappearance effects: narrow-area disappearance effects with low performance and wide-area disappearance effects with low performance, and here they are executed as wide-area disappearance effects. While the image HSE of such a disappearing effect is displayed, the integrated image IG will be hidden, and after that, when the image HSE of the disappearing effect is hidden, the after-operation effect will be The "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background preview by the princess character)" finally becomes visible in a clear state (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(l)").

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, the user can first enjoy what the integrated image IG looks like, and then enjoy how it will appear as a disappearing effect. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of mode will appear as a performance after an operation, it becomes possible to improve the game interest when the operation is accepted by such a variety of performances.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such effects, the timing at which the image related to the display change (post-operation effect) on the effect display device 1600 starts to be displayed is not at the timing tC4b but at the timing tC4c, or when the disappearance effect is set. It is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timings tC4c to tC4g). However, in this case as well, since the post-operation performance using sound and lamps starts to be executed at timing tC4b, the start timing of the post-operation performance itself remains at timing tC4b.

In contrast, in the examples shown in FIGS. 162(g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the first reception acceptance state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As mentioned above, since the first reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, even if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, the post-operation performance will not be performed. During this process, the model image (in this case, the integrated model image IG) is hidden.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 162(b) and 162(g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled, the operation by the player is the same as when the operation is accepted. , the sample image (here, the integrated sample image) is not hidden, but maintains its display state. More specifically, even if the automatic button function is enabled, at that point (timing tC4f), no change is caused to the sample image (here, the integrated sample image), and no changes are caused thereto. Until timing tC4fa arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "display of the sample image" continues in the same manner as when operation acceptance is permitted. There is. Furthermore, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area remaining even after the state in which operation acceptance is allowed (second acceptance acceptance state) ends, and the display area decreases after timing tC4f. The display area is reduced so that it becomes "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the post-operation effect is started by enabling the automatic button function, the sample image will not be displayed in any mode (any of multiple modes with different expectations). It will now be possible to confirm whether the

In addition, in this example, the time from timing tC4c when an operation is accepted until the sample image is hidden (not visible), and the time from timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated until the sample image is hidden (not visible). ) is made to be the same.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), the sample image (here, the integrated sample image IG) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 162(g). When this happens, a wide-area vanishing effect is executed, and while the wide-area vanishing effect is being executed, the replica image (in this case, the integrated replica image) is hidden. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the image affected by the wide-area disappearing effect (FIG. 162(c)) when the operation by the player is accepted, and the image when the automatic button function is enabled. The image related to the wide-area extinction effect (FIG. 162(g)) is executed in the same manner (both images are "image HSE"). This is different from the example shown in FIG. 161 (the narrow-area disappearing effect when the sample image is hidden in the non-automatic reception mode is different from that during operation).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not received in time at the last minute, the same appearance as when the operation reception is on time will appear, so that "the operation reception is completed in time and the post-operation performance It will be possible to encourage players to think that the execution has started, and it is expected to suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 162, when timing tC1, which is earlier than timing tC3 at which the first reception permission state occurs, a wide-area pre-effect using more than half of the predetermined display area is started. (corresponds to "the situation shown in FIG. 164(b)"). Then, during the period in which the wide-area pre-effect is being executed, the display of a simulated image of the operation receiving section (in this case, the integrated simulated image IG) and the output of the first permissible sound are started ( This is timing tC3 and corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). At the time when the display of the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IG) starts, part or all of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) becomes difficult to see due to the image related to the wide-area front effect. ing. In other words, as time passes, the area in which the image related to the wide-area front effect is displayed is reduced or the transmittance thereof is increased, thereby creating a "mock image (integrated model image)". 164 (f) to (h)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, while the wide-area front production is being executed and the sample image (here, the integrated sample image IG) is being displayed, the first reception Timing tC4, at which the permissible state occurs, has arrived and operation reception is permitted. In other words, in this case, since the operation reception becomes permitted at a stage when the visibility of the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is being increased, Check the appearance (expectation level) of the image (integrated image IG), whether to hide it by allowing the operation reception (post-operation performance) to be performed without checking the appearance (expectation level) It becomes possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether to hide the operation by accepting the operation (post-operation effect) after the operation has been completed.

Here, the image used for such wide-area front presentation may be, for example, an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is displayed. , the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (wide-area front presentation) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is gradually increased in the moving image. It may also be something that expresses how things are going.

Regarding the wide-area front presentation, considering that it suggests the occurrence of the first reception acceptance state, which has relatively high expectations, unlike the case of the second reception acceptance state, the performance display device 1600 It is desirable to output not only images but also related sound effects. Then, part of the effect sound related to such a wide area type pre-effect may be executed so as to function as the first permissible sound.

In addition, as a wide-area pre-performance, it is possible to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectations, and selectively display one of these modes based on the result of the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment. This is desirable in terms of improving gaming interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162(c), the wide-area pre-effect according to this example is started when the timing tC1 in the "first variation pattern" arrives, and the first reception permission state occurs. The process is executed over the timing tC4, and is completed within the set time of the first acceptance permission state. However, from the time such wide-area pre-performance is started until it is ended, the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance are sequentially executed as the wide-area pre-performance. It looks like this. These two wide-area pre-effects may be displayed as one moving image data, or may be displayed as mutually different moving image data.

Here, the first wide-area type front effect is one that starts displaying when timing tC1 arrives (corresponds to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(b)"), and the second wide-area type front effect is one that starts displaying when timing tC1 arrives When tC2 arrives, the display starts in place of the first wide-area pre-effect (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(e)"), but which of these pre-effects is displayed? Even if it is during the period, a "simulation image of the operating means to be operated" is displayed during the period in which the pre-effect is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 162(c), the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed when timing tC1a arrives during the period in which the first wide-area pre-effect is being executed. As a result, it is possible to recognize at a relatively early stage which of the plurality of operating means will be given an operating opportunity (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(c)"). In FIG. 164(c), it is depicted that the image HTH1 produced by the first wide-area pre-rendering creates an "image in which the entire sample image (here, the integrated sample image) is whitened out"; It is just a blank image, and it cannot be said to be an imitation of the production button that is the target of operation. After that, "Image A1 in which the whole of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is whitened out" is created by "image A1 in which at least the outline of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is made white by at least one of the decoration and the pattern." "shaped image A2" (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(d)"), which suggests that the operation target is the effect button. From this, it can be said that such "image A2" is a simulated image of the operating means to be operated. That is, the effect is executed to make such image A2 appear as if it were produced by "image HTH1 based on the first wide-area type front effect." The term "outline of the simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image)" means the outline of the operation receiving part (here, the outline of the operation receiving part and the outline of the peripheral decoration image).

However, when timing tC2 arrives, "Image A2 as a sample image (integrated sample image)" and "Image HTH1 related to the first wide area type front effect" that have been displayed until then are respectively hidden. The execution of the "second wide-area front presentation" is started in a manner that makes it difficult to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(e)"). Then, when timing tC3 arrives during the period in which the second wide-area pre-effect is being executed, the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is displayed again (in the "situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). (equivalent to the situation shown in FIG. 164(g)), timing tC4 is reached when the first acceptance state occurs in the displayed state (equivalent to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(g)"). In other words, the second simulated image (FIGS. 164(f) to (k)) is continuously displayed after the operation is accepted until at least it is no longer accepted. An operation is accepted while the image is being displayed, and a post-operation effect (here, a first post-operation effect) is started.

In other words, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first reception permission state, the pre-effects are executed twice, and in these pre-effects, ``before the operation acceptance is allowed, the display is hidden.'' 164(c), (d))” and “2nd simulated image (FIGS. 164(f) to (k)) that continues to be displayed even after operation acceptance is permitted”. are displayed separately. With this configuration, it is possible to have a higher degree of freedom without considering the form that should be displayed (such as the result of performance judgment) when the reception permission state occurs. Since it becomes possible to display a sample image (a sample image that is hidden before the operation is accepted (the first time)) based on the production design, the range of production can be expanded. In this sense, the "sample image that is hidden before the operation acceptance is allowed (first time)" cannot be displayed while the operation acceptance is allowed. It is desirable that the display be displayed in a mode (a mode different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 144).

Here, the sample image displayed while the second wide-area type pre-effect is being performed (second time) is similar to the sample image displayed while the narrow-area type pre-effect described above is being performed. Since the display state continues even after the state in which operation reception is permitted occurs, it will be displayed in one of the multiple modes shown in FIG. 144 (in the example shown in FIG. 162, , a special aspect of the integrated image IGd). On the other hand, the sample image displayed while the first wide-area pre-effect is being performed (the first time) has at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 144. It is desirable that the image be displayed as an image (here, image A2) with . For example, the shape of the operation means (operation receiver) that is the object of operation is deformed, such as giving rounded outlines of the image, or using curves less often and less straight lines. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying it as an image. In addition, in the above-mentioned narrow-area front presentation, an image having at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from that in the acceptance permission state does not appear.

In addition, if the operating means to be operated is a specific operating means, the sample image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area pre-effect is performed is Regardless of whether the image is displayed in any of the modes, the sample image that is displayed while the first wide-area pre-effect is being performed (the first time) can be displayed in one mode (the same mode). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide-area pre-presentation can be used exclusively for ``indicating which type of operation means will soon be given an operation opportunity.'' According to such a first wide-area pre-presentation, it is possible to make the player recognize the operation object without reducing the interest in the game, and thus to make the player recognize the operation object. From then on, the transition is made to the second wide-area pre-production that hints at the level of anticipation.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary to select the operating means (sword decoration) with higher expectations among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) for the first wide-area front effect. It can be said that it is more desirable that the process be executed only when the operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). In other words, in this case, either an acceptance permission state occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, or a reception permission state occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. However, for the first wide area type front presentation, there is no opportunity to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 of the sword decorations 5001. It will be executable only when it is granted. In this case, the first acceptance acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance acceptance state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword ornament 5001. On the other hand, the second wide-area front presentation is performed regardless of whether the operation button 410 is given the opportunity to operate or the sword ornament 5001 is given the opportunity to operate. It is considered possible. At this time, the second wide-area front effect is executed in the same manner when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. or may be executed in a different manner.

In addition, when the simulated image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type front effect is being performed is displayed as the integrated simulated image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. However, even in such a case, the display target area of the gauge image GG will be The image may be displayed as an image that does not include. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the sample image (integrated sample image) will be different. In this case, the sample image may be displayed as an integrated sample image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. It may also be displayed as .

According to the production example described above, in the second acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 161, the sample image (integrated image IG) is not displayed in a special manner, and the first acceptance sound is output as the acceptance acceptance sound. However, the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 162, the sample image (integrated image IG) can be displayed in a special manner, and the first acceptance sound and the second acceptance sound are respectively displayed as acceptance acceptance sounds. It is possible to output. However, in the first reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 162, even if a mode different from the special mode (a mode with low expectations used in FIG. 161) is displayed as a sample image (integrated sample image IG), As for the acceptance permissible sound, the processing described with reference to FIG. 162 will be performed, and it goes without saying that the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound can be respectively output as the acceptance permissible sound.

When the output of the second permissible sound (message sound) is started, the image related to the wide area type front effect remains, and the aspect of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) is difficult to visually recognize. The state in which only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output changes to the state in which the second permissible sound (message sound) is also output in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the aspect of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG). Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) will be displayed in a special manner by means of the acceptance acceptance sound. In other words, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, one can feel the expectation that a model image with a special aspect (integrated model image IGd) will be revealed, and such Inside, the replica image (integrated replica image IG) is gradually exposed.

The integrated model image IG includes the display target area (section image KG) of the gauge image GG, but it is difficult to determine whether the integrated model image IG is displayed in a low expectation mode (IGa) or a high expectation mode (IGd). Even if the display area of the gauge image GG (the target area where the gauge image GG is displayed and the area that increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize how much time is left regardless of the form of the simulated image.

As described above with reference to FIG. 144, not only the simulated image but also the form of the peripheral decoration image is made different between the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd). Furthermore, the operating means (effect buttons, etc.) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the simulated image, but the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

According to the production example described above, when in a predetermined gaming state, there is an acceptance acceptance state during suppression in which operation reception is allowed while a specific production sound is suppressed, and an acceptance permission state when the specific production sound is suppressed. There are multiple acceptance acceptance states during non-suppression, in which operation acceptance is allowed when operations are not suppressed, but in the first acceptance acceptance state among the acceptance acceptance states during suppression, the integrated image IG is in a special mode. On the other hand, in the second acceptance acceptance state among the acceptance acceptance states when not suppressed, the integrated image IG is not able to be displayed in a special mode (IGd) and is different from the special mode. It can now be displayed. In the second reception acceptance state, the integrated image IG is not displayed selectively from multiple modes (IGa to IGc) with different expectations except for the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). It may also be possible to display only the According to such a configuration, when a specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the effect is poor compared to when the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a third condition (a third acceptance acceptance state) that is different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptance state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptance state) is satisfied. In this case, after displaying the integrated model image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image is displayed in any one of the modes shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 154 and 155). ) is used for display as described above. However, when generating such a third reception permission state (a valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease), as in the first reception permission state, prior to this, "BGM playback sound (specific type The production sound) is changed from a non-suppressed state to a suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display ( It is desirable to perform post-operation effects) and post-operation output sounds. In other words, when the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed (or non-output state) when the reception permission state occurs, it is expected that a highly anticipated mode (special mode) will be displayed as the integrated image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, it becomes noticeable that the performance is inferior to when the "BGM playback sound" is output without suppression, and the game There are concerns that interest will decline. In this regard, in the third reception acceptance state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is allowed to appear, and a post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed. Even if the special aspect does not appear in the integrated image IG, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

However, regardless of whether it is in the first reception permissible state or the third reception permissible state, the "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" in the suppressed state (or non-output state) will be triggered by the operation reception. It is preferable to change the display and output sound after an operation while maintaining the suppressed state (or non-output state) without restarting the output in a non-suppressed state.

Furthermore, even if the reception permission state occurs after the "BGM playback sound (specific type of performance sound)" is suppressed (or non-output state), when the third reception permission state occurs, the Unlike the case of 1 acceptance permission state, it is possible to prevent the integrated image IG from being displayed in a special mode and to allow it to be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the "BGM playback sound (specific type of production sound)" is put into the suppressed state (or non-output state), which of the first reception permission state and the third reception permission state It becomes possible to add interest to what happens.

In addition, in the third reception acceptance state, the display area of the gauge image GG is assumed to be executed as a valid period in which it is not reduced. 160) may be executed as a valid period during which a model image (which may or may not be an integrated model image) is displayed. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that similar effects can be achieved. In this case, it goes without saying that the gauge image GG itself is no longer displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types with different occurrence conditions are prepared as the acceptance acceptance state, but if an acceptance acceptance state different from the first acceptance acceptance state occurs. However, if this is a specific type of acceptance state, it is desirable that the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, in the acceptance permission state where the integrated image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd), it is recommended to execute it in the automatic acceptance mode in order to prevent a decline in gaming interest when an operation is forgotten. desirable.

In the production example shown in Fig. 162, the automatic button function is activated at a predetermined timing within the set time (valid period), but the automatic button function is activated when the set time (valid period) ends or after the set time (valid period) The button function may be activated to start executing "the same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is accepted within the valid period." In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is activated is the same as the "processing from timing tC4f" shown in FIGS. 162(g) and (h).

Regarding the images affected by the disappearing effect shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, it is possible to set a predetermined transmittance on the image itself so that the image behind it can be visually recognized, although it is difficult. good.

According to the production examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, when the operation by the player is accepted or the automatic button function is enabled and the execution of the post-operation production is started, the sample image (integrated Both the form of the fake image IG) and the form of the gauge image GG are displayed in a highly visible state without being made difficult to see by the disappearance effect (FIG. 163(f), (See Figure 164(i)). As a result, you can enjoy the post-operation performance while knowing in which form the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is displayed and how much time is left. It becomes possible to improve the player's interest in playing games.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 163, even if an operation is accepted in the second acceptance permission state and a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed, the background image is changed before and after the after-operation effect is started. This is maintained without any switching. On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 164, when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance permission state and a post-operation production (first post-operation production) is executed, before and after the post-operation production is started, I am trying to cause a change in the background image (after the operation, it becomes a space background).

According to this configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and even if the user forgets to operate the function, the background image can be switched appropriately, which improves the performance. will be able to progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception acceptance state where the automatic reception function is not enabled, the background image does not change, so if you forget to perform an operation, the background image may not be switched or only the background image This makes it possible to avoid inconvenient events such as sudden changes.

Further, in the second reception acceptance state, after the operation is accepted (or the automatic button function is activated), a large part of the display area overlaps with the image HSE related to the wide-area disappearing effect and becomes invisible. However, as mentioned above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a small part that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide-area disappearance effect, you can check the image in that part and change the appearance after the operation. It becomes possible to recognize this, and it becomes possible to eliminate the disadvantages caused by the execution of a wide-area annihilation effect. In order to suitably obtain such effects, if the operation is accepted (or the automatic button function is activated) in the second acceptance acceptance state, the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing after the operation is relatively high. To make background images different when a post-operation performance is performed when the performance is performed and when the post-operation performance is performed in a manner in which the ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols is relatively low. is more desirable. These percentages may be 0% or 100%. In this case, when the post-operation effect is executed in a manner in which the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing is relatively high, the background image itself is changed; When executed, the background image may be maintained without changing.

In the example of production described above, when giving an operation opportunity, there are two cases: a case where a specific type of production sound is output in a non-suppressing mode (second acceptance permission state), and a state where a specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode. There are cases where the game is in a non-output state (first reception permissible state), and depending on the type, the rate (expectation level) at which the post-operation performance is executed in a manner that only appears when winning a jackpot is different. As a result, it is possible to improve performance when an operation opportunity is given. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the first reception acceptance state, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of performance sound is outputted in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state, so that when a post-operation performance occurs, In response to this, the production sound will be designed to make it stand out. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the reception permissible sound that is output when the first reception permissible state occurs, if a production is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, it is assumed that the production has been accepted. Since the output state is terminated based on the result, it is possible to highlight the performance sound according to the post-operation performance without being disturbed by the acceptance permission sound.

There are multiple types of acceptance acceptance states in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd), but in any of these acceptance acceptance states, operation acceptance is not performed when the acceptance acceptance sound is in the output state. It is desirable that the acceptance permission sound be terminated midway. On the other hand, there are multiple types of reception permissible states in which the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd), but these reception permissible states include: There is an acceptance permission state in which the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway when an operation is accepted, and an acceptance permission state in which the reception permission sound is not terminated in the middle if an operation reception is made while the reception permission sound is in the output state ( It is desirable to include both (such as the second acceptance permission state) (which can occur under different conditions).

As mentioned above, the acceptable sounds include sound effects and message sounds. In this respect, the message sound is always interrupted when the production is accepted while the integrated image is in the output state even if it is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), whereas the sound effect is , When the integrated image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), when the production is accepted in the output state, it will be interrupted (first acceptance acceptance state), and when it will not be interrupted. It is desirable that there be a time (second reception permissible state). As the acceptance acceptance state in which a message sound is output, it is desirable to provide a plurality of types of acceptance acceptance states including a first acceptance acceptance state.

The wide-area front performance shown in FIGS. 162 and 164 is realized by sequentially executing the first wide-area front performance and the second wide-area front performance. In this regard, in both the first wide-area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect, a simulated image (integrated simulated image) of the operating means (operation receiver) that is the operation target is displayed. However, the sample image A2 displayed within the execution period of the first wide-area pre-effect is the sample image (integrated sample image IG) displayed within the set time of the reception permission state (first reception permission state). It is different from the above image, and it does not gradually change to the image (integrated image IG).

That is, the sample image A2 (FIG. 164(d)) displayed in the first wide-area type pre-effect is not displayed when the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed, prior to the occurrence of the first reception permission state. Displayed (invisible). Then, after a predetermined period of time (Fig. 164(e)) in which no simulated image of the operation target is displayed (maintained in an invisible state), the simulated image within the execution period of the second wide-area pre-effect is displayed. , an image different from the sample image A2 displayed in the first wide-area pre-effect is displayed (FIG. 164(f)). This "sample image within the execution period of the second wide-area pre-production" is the exact replica image (integrated sample image IG) that is displayed within the set time of the reception permission state (first reception permission state). By displaying the image HSE related to the second wide-area front effect in a manner that straddles the occurrence of the acceptance permission state (the first reception permission state), the said sample image (integrated sample image IG) is displayed. It will now be possible to accept operations while the The simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) is also displayed when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect starts to be executed (FIG. 164(i)). It is displayed for a period from before the reception permissible state occurs to after it ends.

Here, if the sample image A2 is displayed in the wide-area pre-production (first wide-area pre-production), the sample image A2 will soon be displayed on the operating means (operation receiver) being simulated (other production (without intervening) will be given the opportunity to operate. In other words, whereas it would be sufficient to generate the acceptance permission state while maintaining the display state of the sample image A2, in the above-mentioned production example, the sample image A2 is made to be in a non-display state and the "operation target" is After creating a state in which no simulated image is displayed, the simulated image of the operation means (operation receiver) is changed to an image that is depicted differently from the first time (A2). It is displayed as an integrated image (IG).

According to such a configuration, operation acceptance is permitted even when a simulated image is displayed for a long time as a pre-effect to suggest that a highly anticipated acceptance acceptance state will occur. People will now be expected to prompt operations without delay. In other words, if a sample image is displayed for a long period of time as a pre-effect, and the acceptance permission state is generated while the sample image is being displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance is permitted will suddenly arrive. This may result in frequent operation delays even though the pre-effect is being executed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, before the first acceptance acceptance state occurs, a sample image having a depiction different from that displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptance state is preceded. In addition to displaying the image, after a period of time during which no image is displayed, the image that will be displayed within the set time of the reception permission state is displayed. In other words, it becomes possible to make the player aware that the first reception permission state can only occur within the period after the sample image displayed within the set time of the reception permission state. Therefore, it is possible to display the simulated image for a long time as a pre-effect while making it difficult for operation delays to occur.

In order to suitably obtain such effects, it is more important to consider the "time required for the first wide-area pre-effect" or the "time for which the sample image A2 is displayed" to be set after the second wide-area pre-effect is executed. It is better to set the "time until the first reception permissible state occurs" and "time from when the sample image (integrated image IG) is displayed until the first reception permissible state occurs" to be shorter. The desirability is clear. The sample image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide-area pre-effect.

In addition, in order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary to use the "motion in the movable area" function as the operating means (operation receiver) for the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) displayed in the second wide-area front presentation. '' and ``behavior when operated'' (see Figure 145, etc.), whereas the sample image A2 displayed in the first wide-area front presentation is displayed in this way. It is more desirable to display the information without dynamic display. Note that the sample image (integrated sample image IG) displayed in the second wide-area pre-presentation continues to be in its dynamic display state even after the first reception permission state occurs. In addition, the sample image (integrated sample image IG) displayed in the narrow-area front presentation is also a form that expresses the ``movement in the movable area'' and ``behavior when operated'' as the operation means (operation receiver). This is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display state continues even after the second acceptance permission state occurs.

The simulated image in the state shown in FIG. 164(f) (integrated simulated image IG) and the simulated image in the state shown in FIG. 164(g) (integrated simulated image IG) are Although they are the same, the transmittance may be different.

Regarding the image KTH related to the narrow-area front effect shown in FIG. 163, it is more desirable to display it as an image of a size that can cover the entire sample image (integrated sample image IG) from the front side. . Then, by reducing the display area of the image KTH or increasing its transmittance, the screen image (integrated image IG ) is desirably displayed in a manner that gradually becomes more exposed as time passes.

Among the images HTH1 and HTH2 related to the wide-area front effect shown in FIG. 164, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the sample image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the sample image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image of a size that can cover the entire simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) from the front side, like the image KTH related to the narrow-area front effect (see FIG. 164). e)) By reducing the display area or increasing the transmittance, the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is removed from the part where the image HTH2 was displayed. It is designed to gradually become exposed as time passes. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed to highlight the depiction of the sample image A2, there is a disadvantage of making the sample image difficult to view when giving an operation opportunity (whichever operation It becomes difficult to recognize whether an opportunity to operate a means is given or not, resulting in a delay in operation.

The wide-area front performance is performed by sequentially executing the first wide-area front performance and the second wide-area front performance, but the sound effects output in the wide-area front performance are combined into one sound data (1 It is desirable that the output be performed by playing back sound effects and music (sound effects and music).

In addition, in the narrow area type front effect shown in FIG. 163, the background image that has been displayed before is maintained without being changed in the narrow area type front effect, but in the wide area type shown in FIG. In the pre-effect, the background image that has been displayed before this is changed in the wide-area pre-effect (here, changed at the start of the wide-area pre-effect). With this configuration, the background change can be performed as part of the wide-area front effect, so it is possible to perform the background change as a part of the wide-area front effect, so it is possible to perform the background change as a part of the wide-area front effect. It will now be executed as a performance. Note that the background image that was displayed before the narrow-area front effect was performed (Fig. 163 (a)) and the background image that was displayed before the wide-area type front effect was performed (Fig. 164 ( The background image may be different from a)).

In the second wide-area front effect shown in FIG. 164(f), the integrated model image is integrated with the "peripheral decoration image decorated (depicted) with the partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG". Although it was decided to display a simulated image as IG, in the first wide-area front presentation shown in FIG. 164(d), it was decided to display a simulated image without such a division image KG decorated (depicted). Thereby, in the first wide-area pre-performance, at least the player can enjoy the pre-performance without worrying about the remaining time. Note that the sample image in which the partition image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be any image in which the partition image KG to be decorated (delineated) in the integrated pattern image IG is not displayed, and at least a part of the integrated pattern image IG. In addition to a mode in which the decoration (gauge area) is not displayed, a mode in which the shape itself is different from that of the integrated model image IG may be adopted.

As mentioned above, "a reception acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, and is executed in an automatic reception mode" A plurality of "acceptance acceptance states" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and a "first acceptance acceptance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance acceptance states. However, these reception permission states include the first wide-area front presentation in which the sample image is displayed and then hidden (Fig. 164(c) to (e)), and the timing at which the reception permission state occurs. In addition to "the first reception permissible state in which the second wide-area pre-production (FIGS. 164(e) to (g)) in which a sample image is displayed is performed," there is also a state in which a sample image is displayed and then hidden. Specific reception permission in which the first wide-area pre-effect is not performed and the second wide-area pre-effect (FIGS. 164(e) to (g)) in which a sample image is displayed across the timing of occurrence of the reception permission state is performed. It is desirable to include the state. In other words, in this case, in the first reception permissible state, the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a manner that only appears when a jackpot is achieved is higher than in the specific reception permissible state, so that the timing when the operation reception is permissible is higher. It becomes possible to increase the interest in the game from the time when the timing (the timing at which the first wide area type front performance appears) arrives significantly earlier. In this case, the content of the second wide-area pre-performance that is performed when the first reception permissible state occurs and the second wide-area pre-performance that is performed when the specific reception permissible state occurs does not necessarily have to be the same; It may also be executed as different performance contents (images). Moreover, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state.

As mentioned above, the "acceptance acceptance state in which operation acceptance is allowed while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressing mode and is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode" is defined by the occurrence conditions (fluctuations). A plurality of different acceptance states (patterns, etc.) are prepared, and a "second acceptance acceptance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance acceptance states.

The wide-area pre-production that is performed when the first reception is permitted is performed under the condition that "specific type of production sound (BGM playback)" is suppressed or not output. (BGM playback)" is executed for a longer period of time than the narrow-area pre-production (second reception permissible state) which is executed while output is not suppressed, so it is preferable to maintain the game interest. You will be able to do this. In particular, by making only the first wide-area pre-presentation of the wide-area pre-presentation run for a longer time than the narrow-area pre-presentation, it is possible to start playing games well before the reception acceptance state occurs. You will be able to increase your The timing at which the "specific type of production sound (BGM playback)" is suppressed or non-output may be made to arrive while the first wide-area pre-production is being executed, or may occur while the first wide-area pre-production is being executed. It may be arranged to arrive before the execution of the performance is started.

According to the above example of effect, when the wide-area front effect (FIG. 164) is performed when the first reception permission state occurs, a change in effect including the background image is caused, whereas when the second reception permission state occurs, When the narrow area type front effect (FIG. 163) is performed, the background image is not changed and the effect is changed while this is maintained. Furthermore, in the first reception acceptance state that occurs while such a wide-area pre-production is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation production (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether the operation is performed or not. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state that occurs while the narrow-area pre-effect is being performed, the background image is not changed by the post-operation effect and the effect progresses without changing it. There is. According to such a configuration, in the first acceptance acceptance state, the background image is changed twice before and after this occurs, so the effect is different compared to the second acceptance acceptance state. You will be able to significantly improve your performance, and you will be able to encourage more concentration on operations-related performances.

In the wide-area disappearance effect according to the above production example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 164(j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may be set to come after the timing at which the wide-area disappearing effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 164(i), the post-operation effect (background preview by the princess character) starts to be executed while the background image is not changed. Then, after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the wide-area disappearing effect first makes the background image that was displayed when the reception is allowed to be made difficult to see or becomes invisible (Fig. 164 (j)). (in the situation shown in FIG. 164(k), the background image remains unchanged), and then the background image is changed by displaying another background image (in the situation shown in FIG. 164(k), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 164(l)). Other background images may be displayed in a manner that is gradually revealed while the wide-area vanishing effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide-area vanishing effect ends. It's okay.

In the example shown in Fig. 164, as the post-operation effect, it was decided to first start executing a display change on the liquid crystal display (background preview by the princess character), but instead of this, light emission from the lamp and output sound after the operation were started. The execution may be started first as a post-operation effect, and the display change on the liquid crystal display may be started later (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As mentioned above, there are multiple acceptance acceptance states with different occurrence conditions (fluctuation patterns, etc.) in which the automatic acceptance mode is executed and the wide-area extinction effect is executed, and one of these acceptance acceptance states is As one example, a "first reception permissible state" is prepared. However, in addition to the ``first reception permission state'', these reception permission states include ``a post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) in the same manner as the first reception permission state, but a wide-area disappearing effect. It is desirable to include a special reception permission state in which images are executed as different images (the timing of display may be the same). In other words, in this case, even if the same post-operation performance is performed, the extinction effect will be different, so it is possible to improve the performance, and it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest. become. The special reception permission state may be the above-mentioned specific reception permission state. The specific reception permission state and the special reception permission state are executed in the same manner as the first reception permission state with respect to aspects such as the display timing of the sample image, the processing related to the output of the reception permission sound, and the processing related to the disappearance effect. .

As mentioned above, there are multiple acceptance acceptance states with different occurrence conditions (fluctuation patterns, etc.) that are executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and a narrow-area extinction effect is executed, and these acceptance acceptance states. A "second reception acceptance state" is prepared as one of the states. However, in addition to the ``second reception permission state'', these reception permission states include ``post-operation effects (third operation effects) of different types from the second reception permission state (for example, conversation previews and movable body movements, etc.). ), but it is desirable that the narrow-area disappearing effect include a special reception permission state in which it is executed as the same image (the timing of display may also be the same). In other words, in this case, even if a different post-operation effect is performed, the disappearance effect itself will be displayed as the same image, so it is easy to see that the operation has been accepted regardless of the type of post-operation effect. be able to recognize it. The special reception permission state is executed in the same manner as the second reception permission state with respect to aspects such as the display timing of the sample image, the processing related to the output of the reception permission sound, and the processing related to the disappearance effect.

In the case of a narrow-area disappearance effect, even when the sample image (integrated image IG) is hidden after the post-operation effect is started, the image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect is hidden. The display state is maintained without being displayed (see FIG. 163(i)). In this respect, the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation effect starts to be executed) until the sample image (integrated image IG) is hidden is ) is desirably set so that the time from when the image KSE associated with the narrow-range extinction effect is hidden is longer. According to such a configuration, even after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the display state of the sample image (integrated sample image IG) is maintained so that its state can be confirmed, and the post-operation effect is The reason why it is not clearly revealed is not due to the "sample image whose display state is maintained", but it appears to be due to the effect of the "image KSE affected by the narrow-range disappearing effect". As a result, a decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-area vanishing effect is performed not by a fade-out that ends relatively quickly, but by a dynamic display of an image other than the simulated image. Regarding such "dynamic display with another image" as a narrow-area disappearing effect, we have prepared multiple types with different expectations, and selectively appear according to the type of acceptance permission state with different occurrence conditions. It is more desirable to do so.

According to the wide-area disappearance effect according to the above-described production example, it is possible to expect a function that indicates that the first reception permission state has been executed in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state, operations are accepted only by operations by the player and post-operation effects are not executed, so it is easy to recognize that post-operation effects are executed without affecting the entire screen. However, it can be said that it is advantageous to perform the execution using a narrow-area type disappearance effect in which the image related to the disappearance effect is small, in that the post-operation effect can be immediately executed with good visibility. According to this configuration, in the case of a wide-area vanishing effect, it is required to change the background image to ensure its visibility, but in the case of a narrow-area vanishing effect, it is necessary to change the background image without changing it. It is now possible to ensure visibility simply by performing post-operation effects while maintaining the .

As mentioned above, in the second reception acceptance state, there are a plurality of modes (the first mode) in which the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the performance judgment corresponding to the result of the jackpot judgment. , including the second mode), the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed. In this regard, when the first mode (a mode with a relatively high proportion) appears as a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) and when the second mode (a mode with a relatively low proportion) appears, In both cases, the narrow-area extinction effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first reception acceptance state, there are a plurality of modes (third mode) in which the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the production judgment corresponding to the result of the jackpot judgment. , including the fourth mode), the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) is executed. In this regard, when the third mode (a mode with a relatively high proportion) appears as the post-operation effect (the first post-operation effect) and when the fourth mode (a mode with a relatively low proportion) appears, When the wide-area disappearing effect is executed in mutually different modes (images), or when the third mode (a mode with a relatively high proportion) appears, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed, and the fourth mode (relatively high rate mode) appears. It is desirable that a narrow-range extinction effect be executed when a mode with a low ratio) appears. The narrow-area extinction effect at this time may be the same as the narrow-area extinction effect performed in response to the second acceptance permission state, or may be different.

According to such a configuration, in the first acceptance acceptance state in which there is a possibility that a wide-area extinction effect may occur, out of the first acceptance acceptance state and the second reception acceptance state, expectations are set for the extinction effect itself. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the visibility of the post-operation performance being reduced by the wide-area disappearance effect. In addition, not only the first acceptance acceptance state and the second acceptance acceptance state, but also the fourth acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, which will be described later, apply to both the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot was unsuccessful and the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot was won. This is because the first fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern mentioned above, as well as the fourth fluctuation pattern and fifth fluctuation pattern described later, are "the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (at the time of winning)". Needless to say, these are prepared in pairs.

Furthermore, the second acceptance permission state may be made possible to occur not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptance permitting state is generated at a relatively early timing within the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance permitting state is generated at a relatively late timing.

The timing at which the display output (display on the layer) regarding the sample image (integrated sample image IG) ends within the period when the disappearing effect image is displayed (timing from when the operation is accepted until it becomes hidden) may be different between the first permissible acceptance state and the second permissible acceptance state.

If an operation is accepted in the "situation where the image KTH related to the narrow-area front effect is displayed" as shown in FIG. 163(d), the image KTH will not be hidden using this as an opportunity. , it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the image KTH continues to be displayed. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 163(f). After this, when the narrow-area type disappearance effect starts to be executed, the "image KSE related to the narrow-area type disappearance effect" makes the "image KTH related to the narrow-area type front effect" difficult to see or becomes invisible. It is desirable to advance the production so that it is possible to do so.

Furthermore, even if an operation is accepted in the "situation where image HTH2 related to wide-area front effect is displayed" as shown in FIG. 164(g), this should not be used as an opportunity to hide image HTH2. First, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the image HTH2 continues to be displayed. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 164(i). After that, when the wide area type disappearance effect starts to be executed, the ``image HSE related to the wide area type disappearance effect'' makes the ``image HTH2 related to the wide area type front effect'' difficult to see or becomes invisible. It is desirable to advance the performance.

In the example shown in FIG. 162, if the operation is allowed to be accepted while the "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is not output, then the "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is allowed to be accepted. "BGM playback)" does not necessarily have to be re-outputted until the symbol is stopped. For example, at timing tC6, there is a difference between the "specific type of production sound (BGM playback)" which has already been turned off, and the "production sound related to the post-operation production" which starts to be output when the operation is accepted. It is also possible to start outputting a new special effect sound that is different from the original sound. The output of the special effect sound is not started when an operation is accepted, but is started when a predetermined timing within the variation pattern arrives.

Images related to wide-area pre-effects and images related to narrow-area pre-effects are displayed until the set time for the acceptance permission state ends (or until the automatic acceptance button is activated). Good too. Furthermore, the output state of the first permissible sound may also be maintained until the set time for the reception permissible state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the simulated image of the operation receiving part is displayed in both the wide-area front display and the narrow-area front display, but in the wide-area front display (the first wide-area front display) , the image data is displayed in a different form (image data) from the form (image data) that appears during the period in which operation reception is permitted (first acceptance permission state). As a result, in the wide-area pre-presentation (first wide-area pre-presentation), even if a sample image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, it will be recognized that the operation reception is permitted. It is now possible to appeal to the fact that an operation reception performance (reception acceptance state) will occur while making it difficult for misrecognition to occur, and this makes it possible to perform large-scale preliminary performances that take a relatively long time. become. In addition, in the second wide-area type front presentation and narrow-area type front presentation, the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed as it appears (image data) during the period in which operation reception is permitted (acceptance permission state). As the previous effect is hidden (the display area is reduced), this becomes gradually exposed. That is, in this case, the sample image displayed on the specific layer when the reception permission state occurs will continue to be displayed in that state from before the reception permission state occurs to after the reception permission state occurs. This also applies to the fourth acceptance permission state, which will be described later.

Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 161 (FIG. 163) and the production example shown in FIG. Yes, and at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp lighting, etc.) is displayed without hiding the simulated image (gauge image) (furthermore, dynamic display). (See Figure 163(f), Figure 164(i), etc.). After that, execution of the extinction effect (narrow-area extinction effect or wide-area extinction effect) is started (see FIG. 163(g), FIG. 164(j), etc.). However, in a wide-area disappearance effect that is executed over a relatively large area, it becomes difficult to visually recognize most of the changes (post-operation effect) that have once appeared clearly, and there is a concern that the game's interest will be reduced. Therefore, when a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, prior to the execution of the narrow-area disappearance effect, changes in response to the operation reception (changes caused by post-operation effects such as display changes and lamp lighting) (at least one of the above) is started to be executed, and at this point, the sample image (gauge image) is not hidden and is not made difficult to see by the narrow-area disappearing effect, but is displayed. On the other hand, when a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, prior to the execution of the wide-area disappearance effect, changes are made in response to the operation reception (such as display changes, lamp lighting, etc.) at least one of the resulting changes) may not be initiated. In other words, in this case, at the time when the change corresponding to the reception of the operation (the post-operation effect, which is at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, the sample image (gauge image) is not hidden but is displayed, but the wide-area disappearance effect makes it difficult to see (FIG. 164(j)).

In other words, when a narrow-area extinction effect is executed, at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, the operation The display state of the sample image (gauge image) will be maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the reception was made. In this case, at the time when the post-operation effect starts to be executed, the simulated image (gauge image) will not be made difficult to see due to the narrow-area disappearing effect. On the other hand, when a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to make the screen shown in FIG. 162 (j) appear after going through the process shown in FIG. 162(j) may appear at the time when execution is started.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the reception permission state executed in the "suppression operation reception performance" in which a specific type of performance sound can be suppressed is a state where the degree of suppression is relatively high or there is no output. In addition to the first acceptance permission state executed in the "strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 162)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low, the "weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. 161)" As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance permission state executed in ")" are prepared. In this case, the specific type of performance sound to be suppressed may be a different performance sound, for example, a performance sound of BGM playback, etc., which is output as a performance sound that has the same function. Bye.

According to such a configuration, when the set time (validity period) for which operation reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to give a performance effect as to how much the performance sound of the specific type is suppressed. Become.

Here, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the expectation level (jackpot It is desirable that the proportions at which the patterns appear are different. Here, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" occurs, the percentage (expectation level) of "post-operation performance according to operation reception" being executed in a mode that only appears when winning the jackpot is , when the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" occurs, the "post-operation performance according to the operation reception" is executed in a mode that only appears when winning a jackpot, which is lower than the rate (expectation level). ing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)", there are productions according to high expectation fluctuation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background changes, etc.), and performances that do not even form a reach state (or reach The state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach).In contrast, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" is possible. '' may not occur in the low expected performance pattern, but may occur as a performance in accordance with the high expected variation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the expected jackpot when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" occurs. I can say that.

In addition, in order to obtain the above effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special performance state" that can be transitioned to based on the fulfillment of special performance conditions, and in this "special performance state", the player Each time an operation is accepted during the set time (valid period) during which an operation promotion image (sample image, gauge display, etc.) is displayed, a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is displayed. ) is suppressed, it is desirable to execute (start) a post-operation effect in response to the operation reception. According to such a "special performance state", each time the set time (valid period) during which operation reception is allowed occurs, how much a specific type of performance sound (for example, performance sound of BGM playback) is suppressed. (Which of multiple modes including a weak suppression mode or a strong suppression mode will appear) can now be provided, and apart from the expectation level suggested by the post-operation presentation, such performance Since the degree of expectation is also indicated by the degree of suppression (to what extent it is suppressed), it is expected that interest in the game will be further improved when the performance reception is permitted. In this case, the above-mentioned second reception permission state does not occur in the "special performance state", but can occur in a performance state different from this (normal performance state).

In addition, a variation pattern (for example, a high expectation variation pattern) in which "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" and "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" can be executed sequentially within the symbol variation. Among them, a performance corresponding to a specific variation pattern) may be prepared. In other words, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" occurs on the side with relatively low expectations, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" on the side with relatively high expectations occurs. )", it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of a specific type of sound effect is small (weak suppression mode). It becomes like this.

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the decline in gaming interest when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" is as follows:
・If a specific variation pattern is selected among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern judgment, the performance judgment will be made. No matter which result is obtained (e.g. advance notice judgment), it will occur when the performance of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. Regarding “Operation reception performance)”,
・Even if the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the production judgment (e.g. preview judgment), the effect will not occur even if the production of the specific variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. It is assumed that when a special result is obtained in performance determination (such as advance notice determination), this occurs when the performance of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" occurs in the performance according to a specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" occurs in the performance according to the specific fluctuation pattern. Compared to when it does not occur, the percentage of post-operation performances that are executed in a highly anticipated manner when the production is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" (a mode that only appears when a jackpot is achieved) It is desirable to have a high rate of execution.

In such a configuration, in the performance according to a specific variation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissible state)" always occurs. When this does not necessarily occur and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs, the highly anticipated post-operation performance is executed in the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)". Since the ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" becomes possible. )'' occurs, it is possible to improve the game's interest.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" does not necessarily have to occur in the same variation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)"; for example, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" may occur within the first fluctuation pattern, and "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permissive state)" may occur within the fourth fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 165 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (performance settings). FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which the fourth acceptance permission state occurs.

Now, for example, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in the "special performance state" and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a will: First, performance determination (advancement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) according to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the process as shown in FIG. 165(b). The above-mentioned fourth reception acceptance state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the fourth post-operation performance is permitted when timing tD3, which is a fourth predetermined time period after the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, has arrived. to occur. However, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptance permission state (validity period),
・Set the set time (valid period) during which operation reception is permitted while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner, but within the set time (valid period) When the operation is accepted, a conditional suppression reception performance (see figure 165(a), (b))" and - If no operation is detected within the set time (timings tD3 to tD4) in which operation acceptance is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth acceptance permission state “Non-automatic reception mode” (see Figure 165 (h)) that does not generate a post-effect (fourth post-operation effect)
It is made to occur as a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. Note that as a method for outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a weak suppression mode, the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned is set to a strong suppression mode (for example, , a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, a volume value (audible volume) of "10") having a lower degree of suppression than a volume value (audible volume of "0") can be adopted.

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (fourth reception permission state)", unless the operation is accepted by the player's operation, "specific type of performance sound (BGM Since there is no transition to the state in which the playback sound is output in a suppressed mode, it appears that the "non-suppressed reception performance (first reception permissible state)" shown in FIG. 161 is occurring. You will be able to do this. In other words, in this case, when the player operates the system, the player realizes for the first time that it is not a "suppression acceptance performance" because it changes to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppressed mode." Since the game becomes easier to play, it becomes possible to improve the game's interest through surprise performances.

In addition, in order to obtain such effects, the fourth variation that allows "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 165)" to occur depending on the result of performance judgment (advance judgment, etc.) As for the pattern, it is set so that it can only be selected when it is in a special performance state (for example, a look-ahead performance zone), and when it is in the special performance state, it is set to be selectable only when it is in a special performance state (for example, a look-ahead performance zone, etc.). 161)" can be selected depending on the result of production judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.) The rate at which jackpot symbols appear when symbol variation is stopped (expectation level) ) is desirable. According to this configuration, when the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect" appears, the level of expectation will be higher than when the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 161)" appears. This, combined with the above-mentioned surprise performance element, can improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permissible state)" can occur in both the "normal performance state" and the "special performance state". In the "normal performance state", the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 161 )" and "suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception performance (Fig. 162)" are made to occur sequentially, and in the "special performance state", one fluctuation pattern (the pair of ``conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)'' and ``suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception effect (Fig. 162)'' are performed in sequence according to the variation pattern of It is desirable to allow this to occur.

Moreover, in the case of "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance", when the set time (valid period) ends without any operation being accepted, "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound ) is output in a weakly suppressed manner. In other words, in this case, whether a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception performance" or a "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception performance" was occurring, or even a "normal performance state" or a "special performance state". Since it is difficult to recognize which situation the situation is in, and the subsequent production progresses, expectations are relatively low. Even if the "operation acceptance effect (valid period)" occurs, it is possible to more actively encourage the player to perform the operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are two cases in which "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 165)" occurs and a case in which "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 161)" occurs. ” occurs, the same effect sound is output as the above-mentioned reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) for the same period of time. (FIG. 165)" or "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 161)" is made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)", as in the case where "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" occurs,
a. Prior to the acceptance of operation, a narrow-area front performance is performed at timing tD1;
b. When the timing tD2 arrives, which is a little before the set time, the output of the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2. point,
c. The second permissible sound (e.g., message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (e.g., sound effect) is output.
d. When timing tD2 arrives, which is a little before the set time occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image (integrated model image) that simulates the operation means to be operated in the operation reception effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time until the set time has elapsed.
e. Even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output, the acceptance acceptance sound that is being output will not be terminated prematurely.
f. At the time when the operation is accepted, the sample image (integrated sample image) and the gauge image are not hidden, but continue to be displayed g. A narrow-area vanishing effect is executed while a sample image (integrated sample image) and a gauge image are displayed, and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed, but the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed in a different manner (image) than when the operation is accepted, etc. Each configuration is also adopted, and depending on this, either "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 165)" or "non-suppression/non-automatic acceptance effect (Figure 161)" occurs. I try to make it difficult to recognize what is happening. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the "specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weak suppression mode." Since it becomes necessary to hear whether or not the state has shifted to "a state in which a performance is performed", it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained each time a production is accepted.

Therefore, as a display method for a sample image, a gauge image, a narrow-area type front effect, and a narrow-area type disappearing effect, for example, as in the case where "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 161)" occurs, It is desirable to adopt the method shown above, and it is also desirable to adopt the same mode as the production example shown in FIG. 161 regarding the timing at which these images are hidden. However, the same aspect does not necessarily need to be adopted.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 165)", if an operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation is accepted. As the corresponding post-operation performance, at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) from the speaker (second performance member) are generated. It has become. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker maintain the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (validity period), it will be hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tD4. In contrast, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be configured to maintain its output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing at which the operation is accepted. However, even if the production is accepted at any timing, if the timing tD4 has not yet passed, both the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (production sound) will not be output. It is required that the settings be made to maintain the state.

In addition, regarding the acceptance permission sound, operation-related display, pre-effect, disappearing effect, and post-operation effect that appear in the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Figure 165)", there are differences with respect to the effect examples shown in Figures 161 and 163. It is possible to adopt examples and modifications as appropriate, and it is desirable to use the same method.

In addition, in this production example, the length of time (a certain predetermined period of time) in which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weak suppression mode is determined by "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception production (the first one)". Even if the operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 of the set time (valid period) of ``4 acceptance permissible state)'', the timing at which the weak suppression mode ends is the same as the end timing of the production sound applied to the post-operation production. It is set to arrive at the same time or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode regarding the "BGM playback sound" ends may be set to always be the same as the timing at which the performance sound of the post-operation performance ends. With either of these configurations, it becomes possible to highlight the post-operation performance when the performance is accepted.

By the way, when an operation acceptance effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM playback) occurs, the degree of suppression is either high (strong suppression mode or first acceptance permission state of no output) or low ( As mentioned above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the fourth reception acceptance state is a weak suppression mode or not. However, when a specific type of production sound (for example, production sound of BGM playback) is suppressed, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode, no output, or weak suppression mode). However, in reality, it is difficult to estimate without comparison whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or no output) or low (weak suppression mode). This is especially true if the volume value when suppressed is not made to have such a large difference between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this creates a sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs. This makes it possible to maintain a suitable performance and attract players to the performance.

However, in reality, if it is impossible to guess whether the mode is a strong or weak suppression mode, there is a fear that the game's interest will be diminished. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance elements useful for guessing whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode are set within the period from the start of the operation reception performance to the end. The following information will be prepared in a chronologically distributed manner.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound that is output when the fourth reception permissible state occurs, even if the performance is accepted while in the output state, the output is not output midway. The first permissible sound is output for a predetermined period of time without ending, whereas the first permissible sound that is output when the first permissible state occurs is accepted for production while in the output state. Then, based on the production reception, the output is ended midway. In such a configuration, since the first allowable sound itself has a function useful for guessing whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, it is difficult to play the game without being able to guess. This will help prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first acceptance permissible state occurs, the second permissible sound is also output in addition to the first permissible sound. By checking whether or not the sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily need to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first acceptance permissible state and the fourth acceptance permissible state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting operation) that appears within the set time (validity period) in which presentation reception is permitted, including special modes in the first reception permission state. 144 (a) to (d)), while in the fourth reception permission state, any of the multiple modes (Fig. 144 (a) to (c)) excluding the special mode is displayed. Since the display is displayed as follows, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptance permission sound and the operation-related display is finished. Also, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation performance, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. In other words, in the post-operation performance (fourth post-operation performance) that corresponds to the fourth reception permission state, both the ``liquid crystal display performance'' and the ``performance sound performance'' are ``constant from the time the performance reception is received.'' On the other hand, in the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) according to the first reception permission state, the "performance with sound effects" is "a performance that takes place for a certain period of time from the time the performance reception is received". However, the "performance using liquid crystal display" is "something that ends when a predetermined timing arrives." In other words, in this case, in the post-operation performance according to the first reception permission state, the time from the end of the "direction using the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "direction using the sound performance" depends on the timing of the operation acceptance. Since it is now considered to be variable and large deviations occur, by checking such deviations, it becomes possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the execution mode of the pre-production and disappearance effects for the reception acceptance state. It is now possible to do this as well. In other words, in the pre-effect and disappearance effect according to the fourth reception permission state, the image related to the pre-effect or the image related to the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively narrow area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, in the pre-effect or disappearance effect according to the first acceptance state, the image related to the pre-effect or the image related to the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively wide area, or the background image is changed at that time. We are planning to do so as well. By confirming such a mode, it becomes possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

However, even if the production elements useful for guessing are prepared in a chronologically scattered manner like this, some players may not notice them, and as a result, they may be in a strong or weak suppression mode. If it is not possible to guess, the player's interest in the game may eventually decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception acceptance state (weak suppression mode), the performance sound of BGM playback is controlled based on the reception of the performance within the set time (valid period). Set to weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the first reception permission state (strong suppression mode or no output), the effect sound of BGM playback is set to strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is set. A set time (validity period) occurs during the mode, and the production can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the timing at which a specific type of performance sound (for example, performance sound of BGM playback) is suppressed is determined between the fourth reception permission state (weak suppression mode) and the first reception permission state (strong suppression mode). Since the values become different, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

Furthermore, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the first acceptance acceptance state (strong suppression mode or no output), operation detection is not possible within the set time (validity period). If there is no post-operation effect, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 165(h)). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (validity period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) triggered by the reception of an operation for a specific type of performance sound (for example, performance sound for BGM playback) is also performed. Although this comes at the cost of not being able to confirm the performance after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode was weak rather than strong mode.

In addition, in the first reception acceptance state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process for setting the "BGM playback production sound" to the strong suppression mode is set to the end timing of the post-operation production. I try to set the timing to be the same as or earlier than that. Therefore, in the fourth reception acceptance state (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback production sound" to the weak suppression mode is completed may be set to be later than the end timing of the post-operation production. For example, by checking the timing at which the "effect sound of BGM playback" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it becomes possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Furthermore, as described above, in the fourth reception acceptance state according to the above production example, the operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) is not affected regardless of when the production reception is made within the set time (validity period). The length of the period during which the post-display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel remains unchanged. On the other hand, in the first reception permission state, the display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on when the effect is accepted within the set time (validity period). , the length of the period in which the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel varies.

According to such a configuration, the performance depends on "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", and it is possible to suitably maintain the game's interest until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

In addition, the weak suppression mode in which the "effect sound of BGM playback" is output at a lower suppression degree than the strong suppression mode can appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the fourth reception permission state does not occur). You can. That is, in this case, after the "effect sound of BGM playback" is put into the weak suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an opportunity to operate. Then, as the number of times that the weak suppression mode appears, including the fourth reception permission state, within the production according to the first variation pattern, the rate at which the degree of suppression is further increased until the symbol variation is stopped (the By increasing the rate at which the 1 reception permissible state is further executed, it is possible to further improve performance through the suppression of "performance sound of BGM playback."

Further, the strong suppression mode for "BGM playback effect sound" may also be configured to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the first acceptance permission state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "effect sound of BGM reproduction" is put into the strong suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without being given an opportunity to operate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide performance as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 165, when the fourth reception permission state occurs, the "production sound of BGM playback" is suppressed in a mode (weak) based on the operation reception being made within the set time (valid period). suppression mode). However, instead of this, even if the fourth reception permission state occurs, the "effect sound of BGM playback" will be suppressed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the first reception permission state occurs. mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (validity period) during which presentation reception is permitted while in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) may be generated. In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (e.g., preview judgment), the "BGM playback performance sound" may be suppressed (weak suppression mode) when the predetermined timing arrives, or Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) may not be applied, the range of effects can be expanded. In the fourth reception permission state, the timing at which the "production sound of BGM playback" returns from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as the timing at which the post-operation production ends, or comes later. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of production sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) that is lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. Therefore, the strong suppression mode is to make the "specific type of production sound" inaudible (either output with silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel assignment)). good.

Further, in the above-mentioned production examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is provided in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth reception permissible state", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first reception permissible state", as described above, the result of the preview performance judgment is Based on this, there are two types: ``a case where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)'' and a ``case where the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)''. Therefore, when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that the mode is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that when the production is accepted in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" The content after the corresponding operation is the same.

That is, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating means to be operated are:
- A first operation mode in which the operation receiver (the part that the player touches when operating) does not move when the set time (validity period) occurs, and - The operation receiver is moved by driving force when the set time (validity period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be provided in any of a plurality of modes including a second operation mode for moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. This assumes that the sword ornament 5001 is "something that can provide the player with an opportunity to operate the sword while being moved to a specific position." However, one operation means (one operation receiving part) may have a "first operation mode" and a "second operation mode", and an operation opportunity may be provided using either of these modes. Further, as described above, in the first reception acceptance state, the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 may always be given.

According to the above-mentioned production example, the reception permission state (suppression When the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 144(d)) in the reception presentation), the case where the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 144(d)) means that the reception permitting state is the "first reception permitting state (strong suppression mode)". This means that when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 144(a)), the reception acceptance state is "first reception acceptance state". (strong suppression mode or non-output mode)" or "fourth acceptance permission state (weak suppression mode)."

In other words, in this case, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 144(d)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is in the middle of being output, this will be terminated prematurely. (first reception permissible state). On the other hand, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is in the middle of being output, this may be terminated prematurely. There may be cases where the process is not terminated midway (first reception-allowed state, fourth reception-allowed state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain the game interest when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)).

Further, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 144(d)), the reception acceptance state is executed in the automatic reception mode (first reception acceptance state). On the other hand, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 144(a)), the reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode and the case in which it is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. This results in the following (first acceptance-permitting state, fourth acceptance-permitting state). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)).

In this regard, when the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)), the display differs between when the first reception permissible state occurs and when the fourth reception permissible state occurs. It is also possible to vary the magnitude of the difference. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway or whether it is executed in an automatic acceptance mode or a non-automatic acceptance mode.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned production example, by checking whether the pre-production is performed as a "wide-area pre-production" or a "narrow-area pre-production", it is possible to select a specific type of production sound (BGM playback). When a sound (sound) is suppressed, it becomes easier to confirm whether it is a "weak suppression mode" or a "strong suppression mode or no output". After that, when the operation is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is checked to see if it is terminated prematurely. It becomes possible to reconfirm whether the output mode or non-output (terminated midway) is being performed while the post-operation performance is being performed.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned production example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is set to the strong suppression mode or non-output, and the wide-area type When the weak suppression mode is adopted while the production is executed, the narrow-range pre-production is performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is not set to the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain performance when the narrow area type front performance is performed.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a mode that only appears when a jackpot is executed as a post-operation effect is executed at a higher rate in the first acceptance acceptance state than in the second acceptance acceptance state (the expectation level is As mentioned above, This ratio may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the first reception permissible state (special reception permissible state) occurs and the second reception permissible state (predetermined reception permissible state) occurs before the operation is accepted. Since different production contents (reception permissible sound, simulated image, pre-production, etc.) appear depending on when the second reception permissible state occurs (or , occurrence)), there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of the plurality of acceptance acceptance states, a fifth acceptance acceptance state (specific The fifth reception permissible state is made difficult to distinguish from the second reception permissible state until the operation is accepted. After that, by realizing the progress of the performance in such a way as to remind the user of the first reception acceptance state, it is made difficult for the player to lose interest in the game, at least until the operation is accepted. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, when the fifth acceptance acceptance state occurs, the first acceptance acceptance state is more important than when the second acceptance acceptance state occurs, until the symbol is stopped. It is desirable to set the settings so that the occurrence rate is high. Further, it is desirable to set the rate at which the jackpot symbols are stopped to be different between when the second reception permissible state occurs and when the fifth reception permissible state occurs. These percentages may be 0% or 100%.

While making it difficult to distinguish between the second reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state, after an operation is accepted in the fifth reception permissible state, the performance progresses so that it is reminiscent of the first reception permissible state. As a method to do this, for example, first, the same mode of reception permission sound is output when the second reception permission state occurs and when the fifth reception permission state occurs, but the same mode is output when the first reception permission state occurs. In this case, in a manner that cannot be outputted as an acceptable sound in either the second acceptable state or the fifth acceptable state (for example, in addition to different types of sounds as the first acceptable sound, in addition to changing the type of sound as the first acceptable sound, In addition, the mode of output, etc.) will be output. Then, when an operation is accepted in the second acceptance permission state, a post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed while continuously outputting the sound that was in the output state at the time the operation was accepted. In contrast, in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, when an operation is accepted, (all) of the sounds that were in the output state at the time the operation was accepted are output in a suppressed manner. state or non-output state, and a post-operation performance (first post-operation performance or fifth post-operation performance) is executed while in the state. In this regard, if the specific performance movable body is used as a target for causing a change in both the first post-operation performance and the fifth post-operation performance, it is possible to distinguish between the second reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state. Although this is made difficult, after an operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance acceptance state, it is possible to realize a progress of performance reminiscent of the first acceptance acceptance state. This will make people more aware of the possibility that the first reception permissible state has occurred (the possibility that they may have misheard the reception permissible sound), and is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest. .

That is, in this case, in the first reception permission state, at least a performance using the specific performance movable body will be executed as a post-operation performance (first post-operation performance), but such a performance may include, for example, Performing a movable effect (such as the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (C), (D), and FIGS. 141 (CC1) to (CC3)) that moves the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. is possible.

On the other hand, even in the fifth reception permission state, at least a performance using a specific performance movable body will be executed as a post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance), but as the performance, the first operation It is desirable that the content of the performance be greatly different from that of the post-effect. In other words, the fifth reception permissible state simply means that even if a situation occurs where the pre-production or reception permissible sound suggests the possibility of the occurrence of the second reception permissible state with low expectations, at least the operation reception is This is prepared for the purpose of "maintaining the interest in the game until the operation is completed," and it may give the erroneous impression that the first reception permissible state has occurred at the time the post-operation performance is executed. If you do this, you will inevitably lose interest in the game when you realize the misrecognition.

Therefore, it is desirable for such a post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) to be performed with a tendency that is more suppressed than in the case of the first post-operation performance.For example, when an operation is accepted, A performance change in which a specific performance movable object that was in a light emitting state at the time of the change is not operated (does not generate driving force), but its light emitting range is reduced or it is in a non-light emitting state. It is possible to perform it as a performance that causes Note that in the second post-operation performance, performance changes that tend to be suppressed, such as reducing the light emitting range of the specific performance movable body or setting it in a non-emission state, do not occur. In this case, the specific movable decoration will have a predetermined light emitting section.

According to such a configuration, by causing a performance change using the specific performance movable body, the first reception permissible state (the performance after the first operation) is recalled, and thereby the second reception permissible state (the second While trying to make them aware that it is not a post-operation production), as the content of the suppressed production is gradually revealed, they calmly judge that it is not in the first acceptance permissible state (post-operation production). It is expected that this will prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, in order to make the fifth post-operation performance more suitably executed as a performance with a more suppressed tendency than in the case of the first post-operation performance, in the first post-operation performance, it is necessary to When the operation is accepted, the operation means (operation receiving part such as a production button) is made to emit light (or the light emission changes), and the drive means (such as a motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means is activated. ) to cause a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, the user operates the operation means (operation receiver such as a performance button) that is the target of operation. When the reception is received, the light is turned off (the light may be turned off gradually), and the drive means (such as a motor) provided corresponding to the operation means is not driven and a predetermined movement is performed. It is desirable to avoid causing (vibration, etc.). In this way, while performing post-operation effects (first post-operation effect, fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative object in the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, By making a mode in which the contents of the presentation after the first operation and the presentation after the fifth operation appear completely opposite, the above-mentioned effects can be suitably produced.

FIG. 166 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth acceptance permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (performance settings). FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which the fifth acceptance permission state occurs. The variation pattern will be described as the fifth variation pattern, but as described above, it may be the first variation pattern.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "fifth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a will , First, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the fifth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) corresponding to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

As described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 166(b), when the timing tE3, at which the fifth predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, the fifth operation is performed. The fifth reception permission state (valid period) is generated in which operation reception regarding post-performance is permitted. However, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fifth acceptance permission state (validity period),
・“Non-suppression reception permission state” in which operation reception is permitted while the “BGM playback sound (specific type of performance sound)” according to the fifth variation pattern maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. (See FIGS. 166(a) and (b))" and - no operation is detected on the operating means targeted for operation within the set time (timings tE3 to tE4) during which operation reception is permitted. Even so, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation performance is started (see FIG. 166(i)).
It is made to occur as a "non-suppressed automatic reception effect" executed by. Timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, but may arrive when or after the set time ends.

According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second reception permission state has occurred until the execution of the post-operation performance is started, whereas the automatic reception mode causes the execution of the post-operation performance to start. If this is done, the progress of the performance will be realized as if it were reminiscent of the first reception acceptance state, so it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game until the performance starts after the operation. .

Also, in the fifth reception permission state, as in the second reception permission state, as shown in FIGS. 166(b), (e), and (j), the set time (timing tE3 to tE4 ) when the timing tE2 arrives, which is a little before the occurrence of the "acceptance permissible sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is outputted, and its output state is changed over the timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. I'm trying to maintain it. The length of time from when the output of the first permissible sound is started until the operation reception is permitted is also the same. Furthermore, not only the sound itself output as the first permissible sound is the same, but also the fact that the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output is similar to the second reception permissible state. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the same aspect of the acceptance acceptance sound appears in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, so it is possible to suitably maintain gaming interest. Be expected.

However, as mentioned above, in the second reception permissible state, the operation is performed at timing tB3a (Fig. 161(e)) when the "reception permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is in the output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred. When an acceptance is made, the set time itself ends, but the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is not ended prematurely, and the timing at which it finishes outputting as the first permissible sound (when no operation is performed) is set. The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (FIG. 161(e)) as when If an operation is accepted at timing tE3a (FIG. 166(e)) when the "acceptable sound)" is in the output state, not only the set time itself is terminated, but also the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is output. In other words, regarding the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)", this behavior (abrupt termination) occurs when an operation is accepted in the first reception permissible state. Therefore, even though the fifth reception permissible state is occurring, the production progresses as if reminiscent of the first reception permissible state (Fig. 162(e)). It is expected that players will maintain their interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the production example shown in FIG. 166, when an operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance permission state (timing tE3a in the figure), the production display device A display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation in the 1600 (first effect member) and an output sound (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (see FIG. 166(d)). reference). In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) remains in the execution state until timing tE5 regardless of when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) remains in the execution state for a predetermined time. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be performed.

Also, although not shown, in this production example, there is a post-operation production (fifth post-operation production) corresponding to the fifth acceptance permission state, and a post-operation production (first post-operation production) corresponding to the first reception permission state. In both cases (post-operation performance), at least a ``performance using a specific performance movable body'' is executed. The contents of each of the "performance using a specific performance movable body" corresponding to the first reception permissible state and the "performance using a specific performance movable body" corresponding to the fifth reception permissible state are as described above. It is. For example, as the first post-operation effect, a movable effect that moves the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 140 (C), (D), FIGS. 141 (CC1) to (CC3) )). In addition, as the fifth post-operation effect, a change in effect occurs, such as reducing the light emitting range of the specific effect movable body that was in a light emitting state at the time the operation was accepted, or changing it to a non-light emitting state. It can be performed as a performance.

According to such a configuration, by causing a performance change using the specific performance movable body, the first reception permissible state (the performance after the first operation) is recalled, and thereby the second reception permissible state (the second While trying to make them aware that it is not a post-operation production), as the content of the suppressed production is gradually revealed, they calmly judge that it is not in the first acceptance permissible state (post-operation production). It is expected that this will prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Also, in the presentation example (fifth reception permission state) shown in FIG. 166, similarly to the presentation example (second reception permission state) shown in FIG. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mock image of the operating means to be operated, and also displays a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time ends. are carried out respectively. Further, the display mode of these sample images and gauge images is the same as that in the second acceptance permission state, for example, they are displayed as an integrated sample image IG. Similarly, the special aspect shown in FIG. 144(d) is not displayed as the integrated image IG. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the same aspect of the sample image and the gauge image appears in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, so that the interest in the game is suitably maintained. It is expected.

In this example as well, the timing at which the sample image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the output of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) starts, but this is not a limitation; one of the two may start earlier. It is also possible to do so. Alternatively, only one of the sample image and the acceptance acceptance sound (for example, only the sample image) may be started before timing tE3. However, even when adopting these different examples or the other different examples mentioned above, the configuration until the operation is accepted must be the same between the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state. is desirable.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 166(c) to (f), when the timing tE3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated sample image (sample image, gauge image) is being displayed. is assumed. When an operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs the fifth post-operation effects (display change on the effect display device 1600, effect sound change on the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the performance after the fifth operation is started, the integrated pattern image (simulation image, gauge image) is not hidden and remains visible. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that point in time (timing tE3a), no change is caused in the integrated image (specific layer), and after a short period of time (at a predetermined time) Until timing tE3b arrives when the time period) has elapsed, the "display of the integrated sample image (sample image, gauge image)" continues in the same manner as when operation reception is permitted. The display area of the gauge image is also being reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) is displayed in such a way that a part or the whole of the integrated image (sample image, gauge image) in the display state is made difficult to see or cannot be seen. Make it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated sample image (sample image, gauge image) is not hidden even when such an image (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed. maintain the condition. More specifically, even under the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer where the integrated image (sample image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated image (sample image, gauge image) (image), no change is caused by this, and the display area of the gauge image continues to decrease in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on a layer earlier than that, the model image and the gauge image become difficult to view or become invisible.

In other words, in this case, even though the image with the disappearing effect is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making the sample image and the gauge image (integrated sample image) difficult to see or invisible, The sample image and gauge image (integrated sample image) displayed on a specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) remain as they were when operation reception was permitted. The display will be maintained and no changes will occur. Furthermore, the display of the gauge image whose display area continues to be reduced continues across the operation acceptance period. As a result, even in the process of making the sample image and gauge image (integrated sample image) difficult to see or in a state where they cannot be seen, the state (at least part of) of when operation acceptance was allowed will be changed. become visible.

In addition, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated image (sample image, gauge image) is finished during the period (timings tE3b to tE3e) during which the disappearing effect image is displayed, and from then on, the integrated image The disappearing effect image will be displayed in a situation where the sample image (sample image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer either.

Regarding the sample image and the gauge image, since the display method after the operation is accepted is the same in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, there is no possibility that this will reduce the interest in the game. There isn't.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 166, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. A narrow-area pre-effect that uses only the area starts to be executed. Then, during the period in which the image related to such narrow-area pre-effect is displayed, first, a simulated image of the operation receiving part (in this case, an integrated simulated image) is displayed, and the first allowable sound is displayed. The outputs are respectively started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the simulated image (in this case, the integrated simulated image) is started, part or all of the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is difficult to see due to the image related to the narrow area type front effect. There is. In other words, as time passes, the area in which the image related to the narrow-area front effect is displayed is reduced, and its transmittance increases, thereby creating a "simulation image (integrated image)". This will gradually increase the visibility of images). In this regard, even in the fifth reception permissible state, while the narrow-area front effect is being executed and the simulated image (in this case, the integrated simulated image) is being displayed, the fifth reception permissible state When the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permission state occurs, the operation reception is permitted, and the narrow-area front performance is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permission state occurs.

Here, the image used for such narrow-area front presentation may be, for example, an image displayed on a separate layer before the layer in which the sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed. Then, the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (narrow area type front effect) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) gradually increases in the moving image. It may also be designed to express the state of being elevated. However, it is desirable to use the same image as the narrow-area front effect corresponding to the second reception-permitting state as the image of the narrow-area front effect corresponding to the fifth reception-permitting state.

Note that in the narrow-area pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the output of related effects may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and the purpose is to maintain a sense of tension regarding operations, the narrow-area type pre-production is It can be said that it is desirable to perform the image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to increase concentration on the effect.

In this way, even with regard to the narrow-area pre-effect that occurs before operation acceptance is permitted, the same aspect appears in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, which increases the game's interest. It is expected that it will be maintained appropriately.

According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the performance progresses in the same manner as the performance contents shown in FIGS. 163(a) to (e), so that the performance is relatively Even if the player side is aware in advance that the highly anticipated first reception permissible state has not occurred, it is still interesting to see whether the second reception permissible state or the fifth reception permissible state will occur. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

However, as mentioned above, after an operation by the player is detected in the fifth reception permissible state and the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) is started, the state is not in the second reception permissible state but in the first reception permissible state. The performance will be developed in a manner reminiscent of.

In other words, in the production example shown in FIG. 166, when an operation by the player is detected (operation accepted) in the fifth acceptance acceptance state, the sound (which was in the output state in the non-suppressed mode at the time the operation was accepted) ) are brought to an output state in a strongly suppressed mode or to a non-output state, and are terminated prematurely. In the example shown in FIG. 162 (first acceptance permissible state), when the operation is accepted, the "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" which were in the output state in the non-suppressing mode are changed to the strong suppressing mode. However, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (fifth acceptance permission state), when an operation is accepted, the output is not suppressed. The "BGM playback sound" and the "first permissible sound" which were in the output state in the mode are brought into the output state in the strong suppression mode or in the non-output state, and are terminated prematurely. As a result, (all) sounds that were in the output state in a non-suppressing mode before the operation was accepted will be triggered by the operation in both the second reception allowed state and the fifth reception allowed state. As a result, the first acceptance permission state can be recalled at timing tE3a shown in FIG. It is now expected that players will maintain their interest in gaming.

In this case, it may be either the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state triggered by the operation reception, but the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state are different. It is desirable to perform the same processing in For example, if in the second reception permissible state, the sound that was previously output in a non-suppressing mode is set to non-output state when an operation is accepted, then also in the fifth reception permissible state, when the operation is accepted, the sound is set to non-output. The sound that had been output in a non-suppressed manner until then is now in a non-output state.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 166(g) to (k), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptance permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As mentioned above, since the fifth reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without any operation by the player, it is assumed that the operation reception has been performed. The same process will be executed.

Therefore, at timing tE3c, not only does the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) start to be executed, but also the sound that has been output in a non-suppressed manner (here, the sound of BGM playback) is strongly suppressed. In this case, they are brought to an output state or a non-output state, and are terminated prematurely. Even in the first reception permissible state (FIG. 162), a predetermined sound (for example, the first permissible sound) is output in a non-suppressing manner until the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated arrives, and the timing tC4f In this case, the output state may be set to a strongly suppressed mode, or the output state may be set to a non-output state, and this may be terminated prematurely.

Further, at timing tE3d, while the fifth post-operation effect is already in the execution state, the "wide-area extinction effect" is started to be executed as the above-mentioned extinction effect. Regarding the "wide-area disappearance effect," the image itself does not necessarily have to be the same as in the case of the first reception acceptance state, but the disappearance accompanied by a change from the background image that was displayed until the operation reception was made. It is desirable to run it as an effect. In other words, it goes without saying that in this case, at least half of the display area is used for execution. As a result, the disappearance effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed) is the same in both the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state (wide-area disappearance effect). Therefore, after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed), the first acceptance permissible state can be recalled, and it is possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. The manner in which such a disappearance effect is applied is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tE3c). The same applies to the first acceptance state.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 166, the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is output again in a non-suppressing mode in the fifth acceptance permission state is determined by the end of the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance). Although the timing tE5 is set as the timing tE5, it may be set as the timing tE5 when the after-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, or it may be set as the timing tE5 when the after-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed. The timing may come after the end of the process.

Also, in the first reception permission state, as in the fifth reception permission state, the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state is set when the operation reception is performed. Good too.

In the first reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state, the process of changing the sound that was previously output in the non-suppressing mode to "outputting in the suppressing mode" or "non-outputting state", and changing the output sound after the operation. The processes to be output do not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, as long as they are all started based on the acceptance of the operation.

In addition, as mentioned above, if an operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance permission state, this will be used as a trigger to turn off the specific effect movable body that has been in the light emitting state for a predetermined period of time (the fifth operation If an operation is accepted in the first reception permission state, use this as a trigger to apply driving force to the specific effect movable body so that a predetermined effect movement appears (after the first operation). Direction) is desirable. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, a driving force is generated for the drive means corresponding to the operation means that is the operation target, so that a predetermined movement (such as vibration) appears on the operation means. On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation performance, it is preferable not to perform such processing. In addition, in this case, in the first post-operation performance, the light emitting mode of the operating device that is the target of operation is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, the light emission of the operating device that is the target of operation is turned off. It is desirable to do so. It is desirable that these processes in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state be such that they can occur when the same result (for example, jackpot winning) is obtained as a result of jackpot determination.

In addition, when a movable performance is performed by a specific performance movable body in the first operation performance, it is desirable to be able to emit light in a manner that does not appear when the specific performance movable body is not in operation.

In addition, in the first post-operation performance, the production sound corresponding to the operation reception is outputted continuously after the output starts, whereas in the fifth post-operation production, the production sound corresponding to the operation reception is output continuously. is output for a predetermined period of time, it is desirable that a state in which no effect sound is output in a non-suppression mode (a state in which it is output in a strongly suppressed mode or a state in which it is not output) appears. According to such a configuration, in the fifth post-operation performance, although the performance sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is appropriately executed, the performance has a tendency to be suppressed compared to the case of the first post-operation performance. As a result, players are expected to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

Further, it is desirable that the acceptance acceptance sounds outputted when the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state occur are different. That is, as described above, in the first acceptance state, the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output, whereas in the fifth acceptability state, the second allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output. The permissible sound (message sound) is not output, but the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first allowable sound (sound effect) itself be output as a different sound.

Furthermore, as described above, the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state (second acceptance acceptance state) have the same aspect (shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) mode) can be displayed. However, even if the same aspect is displayed as a sample image (integrated sample image) in the first reception acceptance state and the fifth reception acceptance state (second reception acceptance state), the size of the display It is desirable to make them different (make them similar) and to display them in a smaller format in the fifth acceptance acceptance state (second acceptance acceptance state) than in the first acceptance acceptance state. However, the size will be displayed in the same manner in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state. Note that in the first reception acceptance state, a special aspect can be displayed as a sample image (integrated image), but in the fifth reception acceptance state (second acceptance acceptance state), a special aspect can be displayed as a sample image (integrated image). ) as described above, the special aspect is never displayed.

In addition, in the first post-operation performance corresponding to the first reception permissible state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the production sound not triggered by the operation reception (fluctuation pattern It is desirable to start outputting (effect sounds output at predetermined timing within) in a non-suppressed manner (for example, return of BGM). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation performance corresponding to the fifth acceptance permission state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the production sound that is not triggered by the operation reception ( It is desirable to prevent the production sound (which is output at a predetermined timing within the fluctuation pattern) from starting to be output in a non-suppressed manner. In other words, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is set to non-output state, the production sound that is not triggered by the operation reception (the production sound output at a predetermined timing within the fluctuation pattern) becomes non-output. Since output is started in a suppressed mode, interest in the game can be suitably maintained by adopting such a suppressed mode compared to the case of the first acceptance permission state.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the second reception permissible state can be generated in both a fluctuation pattern in which the first reception permissible state occurs and a fluctuation pattern in which the first reception permissible state does not occur. When the state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance state may occur within a period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. In addition, the fifth reception permissible state can also occur in both a variation pattern in which the first reception permissible state occurs and a variation pattern in which the first reception permissible state does not occur, so that the fifth reception permissible state occurs. When this occurs, the first acceptance permission state may occur within a period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, if the fifth acceptance acceptance state occurs, the rate of occurrence of the first acceptance acceptance state within the period until symbol fluctuation is stopped will be higher than when the second acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is desirable to set it to . This ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player realizes in advance that the first reception permissible state has not occurred before the operation is accepted, the fifth reception permissible state has occurred. Since the player can look forward to possibilities, a decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

According to the above-mentioned production example, as a result of an operation being accepted while the sample image (integrated image) is being displayed in a manner different from the special aspect (the manner shown in FIG. 144(d)), the operation is If the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated midway based on the acceptance, not only the acceptance acceptable sound but also other sounds that were output in the non-suppressing mode (such as "BGM playback sound") will be output in the non-suppressing mode. The output state will be maintained (see FIG. 161). On the other hand, as a result of an operation being accepted while the replica image (integrated image) is being displayed in a manner different from the special aspect (the aspect shown in FIG. 144(d)), based on the operation acceptance, If the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated midway, not only the acceptance acceptable sound but also other sounds that were output in the non-suppression mode (such as "BGM playback sound") will be output in the strong suppression mode or not output. (see FIG. 166).

According to the example of production described above, in a situation where a jackpot has been obtained in the jackpot judgment, an operation is accepted while a sample image (integrated sample image) is being displayed, and as a result, the operation is accepted based on the operation acceptance. When the permissible sound is terminated midway, based on the operation reception, "When the specific effect movable body is to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific effect action is to be generated (FIG. 162)" There is a case in which the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or the light is turned off, and no effect is performed (FIG. 166). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest in a situation where the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway. In addition, when ``a specific effect movable object is made to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific effect operation is generated (Fig. 162)'', it is possible to make the specific effect movable object emit no light by ``reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable object or turning it off''. It is desirable that the portions marked as such also emit light.

In each of the above-mentioned presentation examples and each presentation example to be described later, the integrated image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. Further, when displaying the sample image and the gauge image separately as separate images instead of as an integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and the examples described below, it was decided that the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are outputted so that there is a time when they overlap with each other, but after the first permissible sound has finished outputting. The output of the second permissible sound may be started.

In addition, in the acceptance permission state in each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the sample image is displayed as an integrated sample image IG including the gauge image GG, but it is not necessarily displayed as an image including the gauge image GG. You don't have to.

The acceptance acceptance state according to each of the above-mentioned examples and each example to be described later can occur in both the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot and the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss.

In each reception acceptance state described above and each reception acceptance state described later, when the post-operation effect is executed, the disappearance effect is executed as a separate image from the simulated image, but it was executed in a non-automatic reception mode. As a result, it is desirable to perform a disappearing effect by fading out the simulated image itself only when the post-operation effect is not performed, in order to prevent the user from recognizing the degree of expectation. In this case, a process is executed in which the pattern image itself displayed on the specific layer is changed from the state in which it is in the reception-permitting state.

In each acceptance acceptance state described above and each acceptance acceptance state described later, even if the acceptance acceptance state is the same, there will be times when you win the jackpot, when you lose the jackpot, or when you change the performance after the operation. The type of disappearance effect may be changed depending on the degree of expectation as such a mode.

The wide-area disappearance effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area disappearance effect is set to less than half of the display screen, but if "the display area of the wide-area disappearance effect > the display area of the narrow-area disappearance effect" is not necessarily the case. It does not have to satisfy more than half or less than half of the conditions. Similarly, regarding the front effect, the wide area type front effect was set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area type front effect was set to less than half of the display screen. ”, it does not necessarily have to satisfy more than half or less than half of the conditions.

The post-operation performance may be performed using only a liquid crystal display, sound output, or light emission from a lamp provided on the game board 5. The point is that any change in display, sound, light emission, etc. may be caused by the receipt of an operation.

Further, the "specific type of performance sound" may be a BGM playback sound that is output during normal fluctuations, or may be a BGM playback sound that is output across multiple fluctuations.

Further, the fourth reception permission state does not necessarily have to be executed in a non-automatic reception mode, but may be executed in an automatic reception mode.

In addition, there is a post-operation performance when an operation is accepted in the first reception permissible state (first post-operation performance), and a post-operation performance when an operation is accepted in the fourth reception permissible state (fourth post-operation performance). It is desirable that the contents of the performance be different between the two.

In each of the above examples and each example described later, when the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, processing to reduce the visibility of the integrated image IG (specific layer) itself (such as increasing the transmittance) You may also perform this at the same time.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and the examples described below, the image related to the disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance effect, narrow-area disappearance effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance, and in this case, Even if the image is displayed so as to overlap the whole of the model image (integrated model image), it is possible to confirm the aspect of the model image (integrated model image).

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and the production examples described below, "narrow-area front production" refers to "background change (the previously displayed background image is made invisible and a new background image is displayed)" It can also be referred to as ``a pre-performance that does not involve a production that causes the production to take place in a certain state.'' In this case, "wide-area front performance" refers to "background change (effect that makes the previously displayed background image invisible and performs the performance with a new background image displayed)" It means "a pre-stage performance accompanied by". The background image may be an all-black image, an all-white image, or the like.

In each of the above-mentioned presentation examples and each presentation example to be described later, the form shown in FIG. 144(d) may be omitted as the form of the integrated image. In this case, the "special aspect" refers to an aspect in which the shape of the operation means (a simulated image of the operation receiver) itself is the same, and the shape of the peripheral decoration image is different (the aspect shown in FIG. 144(c)). It will be used.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and the production examples described below, when a sample image (integrated sample image) is displayed, the sample image is used as an operation means (operation receiver) for "action in the movable area" and "operation". As mentioned above, this is dynamically displayed in a form that expresses the behavior when In this regard, it is desirable that such dynamic display continues on the specific layer even after the operation is accepted until it is hidden.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and each production example described below, the display method for the simulated images may be changed as appropriate to the content described in Figures 144 to 160, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and other examples. It is also possible to add additional information. In addition, regarding the sample image, gauge image, reception permissible sound, and post-operation effect when the first reception permissible state occurs, see Figures 232 to 160, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and the "BGM" You may make appropriate changes or additions to the explanatory text and the content applied to other examples regarding the "validity period that occurs when the playback sound is strongly suppressed." . In addition, regarding the sample image, gauge image, reception permissible sound, and post-operation effect when the second reception permissible state occurs, see Figures 232 to 160, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and the "BGM" You may make appropriate changes or additions to the explanatory text regarding the "validity period that occurs when the playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode" and the content applied to other examples. .

[More detailed effects on the image disappearance effect, etc.]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) that are prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a production judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.) regarding which of the expected productions (preliminary presentation etc.) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and the motion of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is rewarded with a jackpot game and a high reward. Transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these performances.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview performance judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing are included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period), the reception permission state (valid period) is applied to the performance component that is the target of the performance. A post-reception performance (post-operation performance) that causes a predetermined change (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a performance operation by a movable decoration) is executed. Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has poor performance, and there is a concern that interest in games related to the acceptance period may decrease.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, "operations by the player" to be detected refers to operations directly operated by the player, such as "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001." (Pushing motion or sword drawing motion), but also "contact motion by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "player's movement within a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes "actions caused by". In short, it must be equipped with one or more reception means (operation means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) for presentation. Bye.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special effects are provided, for example. It should be noted that each performance (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations, and for example, even if the game has at least one of the performance (any configuration). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest, or it may be possible to selectively provide some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it can be applied to other configurations. You may make it adopt the structure described as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a sample image display that is displayed using a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600) is based on the acceptance of a movement by the player. In this way, even after the production has proceeded based on the reception (after the production change based on the reception has started), the sample image display can be displayed even after the production has proceeded based on the reception. It is possible for the player to know in which mode (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)) the game was displayed within the period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are advanced when an acceptance is received (conversation preview as a performance after reception, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc.), and the preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance) A plurality of reception periods (validity periods) with different types () are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of a type depending on the result of the judgment (performance judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, if a movement by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period, a specific post-acceptance effect image is displayed on the ``effect display device 1600'' based on the acceptance. It is possible to display a specific mode separately from the specific post-reception performance image, and when the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which aspect has appeared in the sample image display, but also to check whether the specific aspect has appeared before the sample image display is hidden. By reducing its visibility, it is expected to encourage players to naturally shift their attention from the "sample image display" to the "specific post-reception performance image." .

However, since the sample image display is originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, if the sample image display is to be displayed even after the acceptance has been made, It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a specific post-reception effect image has already been displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Regarding this point, which will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the sample image display is hidden (invisible) while a specific mode is appearing, The images are displayed in a manner that shows a particular aspect. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, the display performance changes from the pre-reception display (sample image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception performance image) while the specific mode appears. Since the transition will be realized, you can simply check whether you are in the situation before the specific aspect appears or if the specific aspect has finished appearing, from the pre-reception display (sample image display). It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not the transition to the display performance to the post-reception display (specific post-reception performance image) has been completed.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, both the above-mentioned specific mode and the above-mentioned specific post-reception performance image appear based on the acceptance. It appears before the post-effect image is displayed, in a situation where the specific post-reception effect image has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation where a specific post-reception performance image has not yet been displayed, the sample image display will be made difficult to view due to the above-mentioned specific mode. After reception, the effect image is likely to appear soon, and it becomes possible to prompt the player in advance to prepare mentally to change the target of attention from the ``display of the simulated image that is difficult to see.'' .

[Configuration 2]
Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the first acceptance period (validity period) among the plurality of acceptance periods (validity periods), A mode in which a first post-reception performance image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and in addition to the first post-reception performance image, the simulated image display is difficult to visually recognize (first performance mode) can appear. In addition, if an action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods (valid periods), based on the acceptance, a second effect image different from the first post-acceptance effect image will be displayed. In addition to being able to display the second post-reception performance image, in addition to the second post-reception performance image, there is a mode different from that in the first reception period (the second production aspect) can appear. The above-mentioned "specific mode" may correspond to either the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, or may correspond to neither of them.

According to such a configuration, the sample image display can be visually recognized without checking which of the "first post-reception performance image" and the "second post-reception performance image" is displayed as the post-reception performance image. By simply checking the mode in which it becomes difficult, it becomes possible to infer the type of the post-reception performance image (first post-reception performance image, second post-reception performance image). In other words, the manner in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (the first effect mode, the second effect mode) means that at least a portion of the predetermined area in the "display screen of the effect display device 1600" in which the simulated image display is displayed is Is it realized as an image displayed in a specific area that overlaps (if it overlaps with the entire area from the start of appearance, a predetermined transmittance will be set)? It goes without saying that this is realized as a performance (for example, a movable body performance) using predetermined performance bodies located in overlapping positions. Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change his gaze from the simulated image display even after acceptance, the type of mode that appears (overlapping with the simulated image display) at his gaze point (first effect mode, second effect mode) ), and this makes it possible to infer the type of post-reception performance (first post-reception performance image, second post-reception performance image) without changing the gaze destination. Become

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the third acceptance period (validity period) among the plurality of acceptance periods (validity periods), Based on the acceptance, it is possible to display a third post-reception performance image that is different from either the first post-reception performance image or the second post-reception performance image, but the third post-reception performance image Separately, the first presentation mode corresponding to the first reception period can also appear as a presentation mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display.

According to such a configuration, when the first presentation mode appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception presentation images will appear, as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. As a mode for making it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display, when the second effect mode appears, it is possible to infer that the second post-reception effect image will appear. That is, in this case, for example, when the first presentation mode appears, it is possible to recognize that the possibility of outputting the second post-reception presentation image is denied, but the possibility of outputting the second post-reception presentation image is When a mode appears that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display because it is unclear which one will appear, and it is possible to make the player interested in which one will appear. It becomes possible to suitably encourage the shift of the gaze to the part where the presentation is being performed after the reception, while maintaining the presentation performance and tension.

Here, we have explained the "post-reception performance image" as an example of the post-reception performance, but for example, "lamp light emission" and "movable body movement" as the post-reception performance can be used during the first reception period and the second reception period. If it is executed in a different manner (or it is executed when there is an acceptance within one acceptance period, but not when there is an acceptance within the other acceptance period), the above-mentioned ``reception'' It is also possible to replace "post-effect image" with "lamp emission" or "movable body movement." In any case, in view of the above-mentioned effects such as "it becomes possible to infer the type of post-reception performance without changing the gaze point," a sample image display is displayed for the post-reception performance. This will be realized as being executed at a position that is offset from the position when viewed from the front and does not overlap (a position that cannot be confirmed unless the player changes his gaze from the position where the sample image display is displayed). In addition, if multiple post-reception effects such as "post-reception effect image," "lamp emission," and "movable body movement" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, at least one of the post-reception effects may be If it corresponds to "post-reception performance", it can be said that the above-mentioned effects are achieved.

When multiple post-reception effects (multiple post-reception modes) such as “post-reception effect image,” “lamp emission,” and “movable body movement” are performed in parallel based on the reception, these post-reception effects ( The fact that at least one of the post-reception mode) can be considered as a "post-reception performance" is applicable not only to the above-mentioned performance examples but also to the performance examples described below.

[Configuration 3]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the post-acceptance production ( During the execution period of the special performance mode, there are states in which the simulated image display is relatively easy to see and states in which the simulated image display is relatively difficult to recognize. I have to.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the special presentation mode (post-reception presentation) is started based on the reception, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a sample image display. . In addition, by making the sample image display relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the special presentation mode (post-reception presentation), we have changed the “sample image display” to “special presentation mode (post-reception presentation)”. It is expected that players will be encouraged to naturally shift their attention to the object of their attention.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned special presentation mode (post-reception presentation) does not affect the visibility of the sample image display that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before acceptance. The execution is started as follows. More specifically, the sample image display is displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the special effect mode (post-reception effect) is to display at least a part of the predetermined area. It is not an image display that is used to display images, nor is it an effect that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. As a result, during the execution period of the special performance mode (post-reception performance), the sample image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that from "sample image display" to "special production mode (post-reception production)" ), it is expected that players will be encouraged to naturally shift their attention to the subject.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an acceptance is made within a specific acceptance period, a state in which at least the special presentation mode and the predetermined presentation mode are performed in parallel appears based on the acceptance. It becomes. However, the predetermined performance mode starts to be executed after the special performance mode has started (behind the special performance mode) so as to have a negative impact on the visibility of the sample image display (make the sample image display difficult to see). It has become something that will be done. As a result, during the execution period of the special performance mode (post-reception performance), the sample image display is made relatively difficult to see, so that from "sample image display" to "special production mode (post-reception production)" ), it is expected that players will be encouraged to naturally shift their attention to the subject.

Note that the process of making the predetermined presentation mode appear is also started based on the acceptance. Therefore, a plurality of post-reception performances (a plurality of post-reception aspects) including at least a special performance mode and a predetermined performance mode are performed in parallel, and the predetermined performance mode is realized as one mode of the post-reception performance. You can do it like this. In any case, the predetermined presentation mode explained in this configuration example is an image display that is displayed using at least a part of a predetermined area in which a sample image display is displayed, or at least a part of the predetermined area. It will be realized as a performance performed using a performance body located at a position that overlaps with that when viewed from the front.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), while the sample image display is being displayed, A specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area, which is the display target area of the simulated image display, can be used to display a "specific disappearing effect display" that makes the simulated image difficult to visually recognize. After the specific disappearance effect display starts to be displayed, the image display is made to be hidden while the specific disappearance effect display is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode appeared in the sample image display even after the acceptance is made. In addition, the visibility of the sample image display is reduced by a specific disappearing effect display until the sample image display is hidden, and while the visibility is reduced, the sample image display is hidden. This can suggest that there is little time remaining until the display of the sample image is hidden, and a decline in gaming interest when the display of the sample image is hidden can be suppressed. It becomes wet.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned specific disappearing effect display can be displayed even after the simulated image display is hidden, and at least the specific disappearing effect display is displayed. The execution of the performance is started after the reception is received. The post-reception effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance effect display, or (at least part of) the specific disappearance effect display. This is realized by using a performance element located at a position that overlaps the part) when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, for a specific post-reception effect that is performed at a position that overlaps with a specific disappearance effect display in front view, the viewer can watch from the position where the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. It will be possible to recognize it without having to migrate the previous part. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there is no need to change the gaze destination in order to understand the form of the specific post-reception effect when the specific disappearing effect display is displayed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

[Configuration 5]
In addition, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the player's movement is accepted during the reception period (specific reception period) until the sample image display is hidden, the specific mode is not displayed. When the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the sample image display. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the precursor performance display is executed in a specific precursor mode based on the fact that the result of the win/loss determination is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability-variable jackpot, etc.) If the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the foreshadowing effect display, the above-mentioned specific mode shall be within the period from the time the acceptance is made until the above-mentioned simulated image display is turned off. It is possible to appear in.

In other words, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific precursor mode, it is possible to recognize that a specific mode appears and the sample image display becomes difficult to see before the sample image display is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to pay close attention to the manner in which the simulated image display appears until the player performs an action. Note that the "specific aspects" according to Configuration 5 and the "specific aspects" according to Configuration 1 may be the same aspect or different aspects, and may occur in response to different acceptance periods. It may be.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the fact that the winning/losing determination result is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability-variable jackpot, etc.), a portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the above-mentioned specific portent mode. If an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the display of a precursory effect (an acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the above-mentioned specific aspect is such that the sample image display is not displayed from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until it is released, and cases where it does not appear within that period.

According to such a configuration, when the portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific portent mode, the specific mode is executed from the time the reception is received until the sample image display is made invisible. Since it is now unknown whether or not the image will appear within the period, the performance from the time it is accepted until the image display is hidden will be improved. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

Note that configuration 5 above may be implemented by replacing it with the configuration below, or may be provided as a separate configuration (acceptance period) from configuration 5 above. In other words, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, after a movement by a player is accepted during an acceptance period (a specific acceptance period or an acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the simulated image display becomes hidden. During the period until the image is displayed, a specific aspect may appear, and when the specific aspect appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the sample image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the omen effect display is performed in a special omen mode (same as the specific omen mode) based on the fact that the result of the win/loss determination is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability-variable jackpot, etc.). ), and if an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect display, the above-mentioned specific aspect will cause the above-mentioned simulated image display to be hidden from the time when the action is accepted. It will not be possible to appear within the period until the In other words, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the special precursor mode, the specific mode does not appear until the sample image display is hidden, and the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that you will never be disappointed.

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the fact that the result of the win/loss determination is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a probability-variable jackpot, etc.), the omen effect display is executed in a manner different from the above-mentioned special omen mode. If a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the performance display (an acceptance period different from the acceptance period described above), the above specific aspect will cause the simulated image display to be hidden from the time the action is accepted. There will be times when the event will appear within the period up to the end of the period, and there will be times when it will not appear within the period. Even with such a configuration, if the portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the special portent mode, the sample image display will be hidden from the time the specific mode is accepted. Since it is now unknown whether or not the image will appear within the period, the performance from the time it is accepted until the sample image display is hidden will be improved. , it becomes possible to maintain a good sense of tension.

Regarding the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to apply each of the above-mentioned or later-described configurations applicable to the above-mentioned configuration 5 as appropriate.

[Configuration 6]
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment provides a plurality of types of precursory display effects that suggest that a reception period in which actions by players will be accepted will soon occur. Of the multiple types of precursor performance displays, a specific precursor performance display can be executed over the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and while the specific precursor performance display is being displayed. The system allows actions by the player to be accepted.

In other words, in this case, since the player's actions can be accepted while it is still possible to confirm which type (form) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (form) of the precursor effect display can be changed. A decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to check can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a movement by a player is accepted while a specific precursor performance display is being displayed, a post-reception performance (for example, a special post-reception performance) is performed in response to the reception. Although execution is started, the specific precursor effect display is not hidden but remains displayed even at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

In other words, in this case, the player's action is accepted while it is still possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, and furthermore, the execution of the effect after acceptance according to the acceptance is started. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type (form) of the precursor effect display.

[Configuration 7]
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance period (for example, a specific acceptance period, etc.) occurs, the acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted, or the acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the acceptance permission sound audible, which indicates that the game will (soon) be in a state where the game will be accepted, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the acceptance operation.

Reception permissible sound means that even if it is realized as something that can be heard before the corresponding reception period occurs (suggesting that the reception period will occur soon), it does not affect the timing of the reception period. It is made audible in a straddling manner, and can be made audible at least halfway through the acceptance period. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine 1 where the tone setting value can be set to "0", in the situation where the volume setting value is set to "0", the acceptance permissible sound will be output, but will not be audible. It will not be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, if an operation by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is set to audible (output state) during the acceptance period (for example, a specific acceptance period, etc.), the above-mentioned "sample image display" is The above-mentioned acceptance permission sound is played in a state where the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect display, etc.)" has not yet appeared before the "mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect display, etc.)" appears. Processing for making the sound inaudible is started.

In other words, in this case, even if the situation in which "the sample image display becomes difficult to see" has not yet appeared since the application was accepted, if the application period has already ended, the player will be notified of this. This will enable them to make suitable suggestions. This makes it possible to display the sample image in a manner that is easy to see, since it is less likely to cause any inconvenience even if the timing at which ``the pattern in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see'' appears is delayed after the acceptance. become

[Configuration 8]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of reception periods (a plurality of reception periods with different post-reception effects) including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, during the period from when a player's action is accepted while the simulated image display is being displayed until the simulated image display is hidden, there is a mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. It's starting to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted while the sample image display is being displayed during the first acceptance period, and when the sample image display is displayed during the second acceptance period. In either case, when a player's action is accepted while the game is in progress, a ``mode in which the screen image display becomes difficult to see'' appears before the screen image display is hidden. ing.

In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the reception period is the first reception period or the second reception period, after the reception period has ended, it is possible to check which mode appeared in the sample image display. It becomes possible to suggest that the state is Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to configuration 8 may be the same type of reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to configuration 2 above. However, the reception periods may be of different types.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, multiple modes including a first mode and a second mode are prepared as "modes in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and the first mode appears during the first reception period. Since the second aspect appears in the second acceptance period, it is possible to give the "aspect in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" a performance related to the type of acceptance period.

In addition, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 further provides a third mode as "a mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize", and during the first acceptance period, regardless of whether or not the acceptance is made within the period, The first aspect may appear first, but in the second acceptance period, the second aspect appears when the item is accepted within the period, and the third aspect appears when the item is not accepted within the period.

According to such a configuration, in the second acceptance period, it is determined whether or not the action by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period, based on the "mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize" that has appeared. However, during the first acceptance period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the player's action has been accepted within the acceptance period based on the ``mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to see'' that appears. As a result, it is expected that the interest in gaming will be improved through such performance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples or the production examples described below, "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" refers to a disappearing production display in a specific area that includes at least a part of the predetermined area in which the sample image display is displayed. In addition to the manner in which the image display is displayed, the manner in which the effect is performed using a presentation element located at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the predetermined area in which the image display is displayed when viewed from the front, the image display itself may be visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to display (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transmittance setting, etc.).

[Configuration 9]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the acceptance period (for example, a specific acceptance period, etc.) occurs, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted, or in a state in which acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the reception acceptance sound indicating that the game is coming (soon) audible, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the reception operation.

Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 provides a plurality of types of precursory display effects that suggest that a reception period in which actions by players are to be accepted will soon occur. Of the multiple types of precursor performance displays, a specific precursor performance display can be executed over the timing when the corresponding reception period occurs, and while the specific precursor performance display is being displayed. The system allows actions by the player to be accepted. In other words, in this case, the player's actions can be accepted while it is still possible to confirm which mode is being displayed as the precursory effect display, so there is no risk of the game being played by forgetting to check the mode of the precursory effect display. A decline in interest can be suppressed. Note that the "specific portent effect display" according to configuration 9 may be the same as the "specific portent effect display" according to configuration 6, or may be a different type (mode) of portent effect display. .

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display of a specific precursor effect is continued even after the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the player's movement (post-acceptance effect) is progressed. This allows the player to confirm which mode has appeared as a precursor performance display even after the acceptance is made.

However, since the precursor display performance is originally displayed in a state where reception is not permitted (before the reception period occurs), the player cannot perform any actions while the precursor display performance is displayed. Even if the action is performed, the player may feel uneasy as to whether the action has been accepted. Nevertheless, if a precursor effect display is simply displayed even after the acceptance has been made, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decrease as it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. Ru.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a movement by a player is accepted while a specific precursor performance display is being displayed, the specific precursor performance will continue to be performed after the acceptance. Although the display is displayed, a mode is created in which the specific portent performance display is difficult to visually recognize while the specific portent performance display is being displayed. Then, after the aspect appears, the specific precursor effect display is hidden under the condition that the specific precursor effect display is made difficult to visually recognize.

In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the precursor effect display, but the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the reception has already been made.

[Configuration 10]
Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600 ), a predetermined image display can be displayed, and the sample image display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. There is. Then, when a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, a mode appears that makes it difficult to see the simulated image display while the simulated image display is being displayed. The "mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize" is performed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display, which can be displayed even in symbol variations where no acceptance period occurs.

In other words, in this case, a specific disappearing effect display will be displayed so as not to affect the visibility of a predetermined image display that is unrelated to the reception period. It becomes possible to proceed with the game without adversely affecting performance.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) is used as an image display that has no relation to the reception period (current reception period). The second image display can be displayed respectively within the acceptance period, and the above-mentioned specific disappearance effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display ( The display shall be displayed in such a way as to affect the visibility of (reservations).

According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the visibility may be affected when "a manner in which the image display becomes difficult to view" appears depending on the type of image display. Therefore, when a player performs an action, it is necessary to check whether the image display is not directly related to the reception period. This makes it possible to provide a sense of performance.

However, in this case, the first image display shall be displayed as an image (suggestive) related to (expectation level) of the symbol fluctuation, and the second image display shall be displayed as an image (suggesting) regarding the winning or loss (expectation level) of the symbol fluctuation. By displaying a display that is not related to (does not suggest) winning or losing (expectation level), it is possible to avoid a decline in gaming interest when the visibility of the second image display is affected. The above can be said to be desirable.

In addition, when using a "specific disappearance effect display" displayed on the display screen (effect display device 1600) as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize," the operation by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period. When a sample image display is displayed, a specific area that includes at least a part of a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600) that is the display target area of the sample image display is used to identify the area. A disappearing effect display will be displayed.

[Configuration 11]
Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period does not occur. Also, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (effect display device 1600) A predetermined image display can be displayed within the game, and the sample image display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. . The "predetermined image display" in the configuration 11 may be the same as the "predetermined image display" in the configuration 10, or may be a different image display. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a mode in which, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display while the simulated image display is being displayed. A plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode are prepared as modes that can appear and make it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display.

In other words, in this case, any of the plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode will appear as "a mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", so that the gaming interest when the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is reduced. It is now expected that companies will improve their performance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "first mode" is executed as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "first mode" is a mode in which the simulated image display and the predetermined However, when the "second mode" is executed as the "mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to view", the "second mode" makes both the scale image display and the predetermined image display difficult. Among the image displays, only the sample image display is made difficult to visually recognize.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect as to which of the "first mode" and "second mode" appears as the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", so that the game People are expected to try to improve their interest.

In addition, the display of the sample image and the predetermined image display are performed in a state where either the acceptance period for the type corresponding to the above-mentioned "first aspect" or the acceptance period for the type corresponding to the above-mentioned "second aspect" is occurring. It is desirable to be able to display the following information in order to improve the game's interest.

[Configuration 12]
Also, as mentioned above, in pachinko machine 1,
- It is possible to generate a first reception period in which reception by the reception means (for example, the operation button 410) is allowed, and when an action by the player is accepted within the first reception period, it is determined that the reception has been made. based on the first reception performance execution means that can display the performance after the first reception in any of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (rates at which jackpot symbols are stopped); It is possible to generate a second reception period in which reception is allowed using the sword decoration object 5001 that is different from the operation button 410), and the operation by the player is allowed within the second reception period. When an acceptance is received, a second reception performance execution means is capable of executing a second reception performance display in one of a plurality of modes having different expectation levels (rates at which jackpot symbols are stopped) based on the reception. It is equipped with Note that the expectation level (rate at which jackpot symbols are stopped) may be 0% or 100%. Furthermore, the first post-reception effect display and the second post-reception effect display are executed as different types of preview effects. Furthermore, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to configuration 12 are the same type of reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to configurations 2 and 8 above. Alternatively, the reception period may be of different types.

Also, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, there are two cases: when the player's movement is accepted within the first acceptance period, and when the player's movement is accepted during the second acceptance period. Also, after the reception is made, it is possible for the pattern image display to appear in a manner in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize it while the pattern image display is being displayed.

That is, in this case, regardless of the type of reception period, it is possible to check which aspect has appeared as a sample image display even after the reception is made. In addition, since the visibility of the sample image display is reduced until the sample image display is hidden, it may be suggested that there is little time remaining until the sample image display is hidden. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest when the display of the simulated image is hidden.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, there are two cases in which the first mode is executed as the effect display after the first reception, and a case in which the first mode is executed as the effect display after the first reception. Regardless of whether the second mode, which is more expected than the first mode, is executed, the same mode appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize." On the other hand, in the second reception period, when the second mode with higher expectations than the first mode (or the first mode with lower expectations than the second mode) is executed as the performance display after the second reception , a specific mode appears as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", but when the first mode (or second mode) is executed as a production display after the second reception, "the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Either the specific mode does not appear as the "mode that makes it difficult to view" and a different mode from the specific mode appears, or the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" itself does not appear. As mentioned above, the expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols are stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, there are cases where it is possible to infer the degree of expectation for the post-reception production display simply by checking "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the performance display after reception. Since there will be cases where it is not possible to estimate the degree of play, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through the performance of this kind of ``mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.'' .

Furthermore, regarding the "specified manner" that may occur in response to the second reception period as the "manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponds to the first reception period. '' cannot appear, it becomes possible to infer the type of reception period based on ``the manner in which the image display becomes difficult to see,'' and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to do this. In order to obtain such effects, it is necessary to consider the "conditions in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" that may occur in response to the first reception period, and It is more desirable to prevent the display from becoming difficult to visually recognize.

However, as for the "manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize," the "manner" that may occur in response to the first reception period and the "manner" that may occur in response to the second reception period are the same. It may be possible to appear.

[Configuration 13]
Furthermore, in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of displaying a reception-related effect display (such as a sample image display or a gauge image) at least within the acceptance period. In connection with the occurrence, a reception-related performance sound (such as reception acceptance sound) can be output at least within the reception period. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance production based on the acceptance (this itself is an aspect of the post-acceptance production) ) can be output, and if a player's action is accepted while the above-mentioned reception-related production display is being displayed during the acceptance period, a to hide the reception-related effect display. Similarly, if a player's action is accepted during the acceptance period when the reception-related performance sound is set to an audible state, the reception-related performance sound is set to an inaudible state based on the reception. I try to do that.

In the above configuration, based on the acceptance of a player's action within the acceptance period, the post-reception performance sound related to the post-reception performance is output, the reception-related performance display is hidden, and the reception-related performance sound is hidden. Since it is set in an audible state, it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is in an accepted state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related performance display is not finished at the time when a specific post-reception performance is started in response to the reception. However, the reception-related performance sound is terminated and rendered inaudible at the time when a specific post-reception performance sound corresponding to the reception starts to be executed.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned reception-related production display that is displayed during the reception period will be displayed until after the execution of the specific post-reception production has started; The reception-related performance sound that is audible (output) is no longer audible at the time when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. As a result, even after the execution of a specific post-reception performance has started, it is possible to check the appearance of the reception-related performance display that was displayed during the reception period, but the reception-related performance sound is rendered inaudible. This makes it possible to suitably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the inaudible state may be a state in which the output process of the reception-related performance sound itself has been completed, or a state in which the output process of the reception-related performance sound itself has been completed. may continue, but be rendered inaudible by adjusting the volume to "0". In addition, a specific post-reception performance means that in each of the above examples and the examples described below, the post-reception performance in response to the reception is a composite performance using multiple performance elements (displays, light-emitting lamps, movable objects, etc.). When executed as a performance, it may correspond to "a performance using a specific performance" among these performance bodies.

[Configuration 14]
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a plurality of modes for displaying a premonition effect, and can display a specific premonitory effect display prior to the occurrence of the reception period, and can display reception-related effect sounds. It is possible to start an audible output (such as acceptance acceptance sound). The specific precursor performance display and the reception-related performance sound can be executed over the timing when the reception period occurs, and the specific precursor performance display is displayed and the reception-related performance sound is audible (output). The player's actions can be accepted within the game. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, if a movement by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed during the acceptance period, the specific Hide the precursor effect display. Furthermore, if a player's action is accepted while the reception-related performance sound is set to be audible during the reception period, the reception-related performance sound is set to be inaudible based on the reception. ing.

In the above configuration, based on the acceptance of a player's action within the acceptance period, a specific precursor effect display is hidden, and reception-related effect sounds are rendered inaudible. Therefore, even if a player's action is accepted while a specific precursor effect display and reception-related effect sound are being executed, which have been in execution since before the acceptance period, the acceptance period will not be accepted. This will make it easier to recognize that the person is in the same state. Note that the "specific portent effect display" according to configuration 14 may be the same as the "specific portent effect display" according to configurations 6 and 9, or may be a different type (mode) of portent effect display. Good too. Further, the "reception-related performance sound" according to configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the "reception-related performance sound" according to configuration 13.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned specific precursor effect display indicates that a specific post-reception effect is started to be executed in response to the reception being received within the corresponding acceptance period. It is not finished and is displayed at the time of the update. On the other hand, the reception-related performance sound is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the specific post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception starts.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned specific foreshadow effect display that is displayed before the reception period starts will be displayed after the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed; The reception-related performance sound that is audible (output) before the occurrence of the period is no longer audible at the time when the output sound starts to be executed after the reception. As a result, even after the execution of a specific post-reception effect has started, it is possible to check the appearance of the precursor effect displayed before the start of the reception period, and the reception-related effect that is output before the start of the reception period. By making the sound inaudible, it is possible to suitably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended. Note that the "specific post-reception performance" and "specific post-reception output sound" according to configuration 14 are the same as the "specific post-reception performance" and "specific post-reception output sound" according to configuration 13, respectively. There may be one, or they may be different.

[Configuration 15]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of acceptance periods are prepared in which "the performance content (type of performance after acceptance)" that is proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action is different. Further, the sample image display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period among a plurality of acceptance periods, multiple Any one of the effects is made to appear, but a specific mode can appear no matter which one of the effects appears.

In the above configuration, the types of performance modes that appear based on the acceptance of the player's actions (such as a "conversation preview" that indicates which conversation will appear, and a "movable object" that indicates whether or not the movable object will move) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods with different types of preview performances (such as "action previews"). In this regard, if a player's action is accepted within a specific acceptance period among multiple acceptance periods, one of the multiple effects will appear based on the acceptance; Even in cases where a specific aspect is used, it is possible for a specific aspect to appear. In other words, in this case, no matter which of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode will also appear, so it is considered that the specific mode is caused by the action being accepted by the player within the specific acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that this is a common production.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted within a special acceptance period that is different from the above-mentioned specific acceptance period among a plurality of acceptance periods, special conditions (such as jackpot winning conditions, probability change It is possible for any of multiple modes to appear, including special modes with different appearance rates (which may be 0% or 100%) depending on whether the entry conditions (such as entry conditions) are met, and the special mode is When it appears, the image display becomes difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, a special aspect indicating the degree of expectation appears before the simulated image display is hidden, and the special aspect makes the simulated image display difficult to see. , the player can now enjoy the performance that progresses from the sample image display to the post-reception performance (special mode) without having to change his gaze.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "specific mode" appears based on the acceptance of a movement by the player within the above-mentioned specific reception period, the sample image display is It is made difficult to see due to certain features. According to such a configuration, there is a case where the sample image display is made difficult to view due to the above-mentioned special mode that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the granting of a benefit (special reception period), and a case where the above-mentioned specific mode does not suggest the degree of expectation concerning the granting of the benefit. Since there are cases where the sample image display is made difficult to view (specific reception period), the ``modes that make the sample image display difficult to view (specific mode, special mode)'' will be given a performance effect. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that the "specific reception period" according to configuration 15 may be the same as the "specific reception period" according to configurations 1, 7, and 9, or may correspond to different reception periods.

[Configuration 16]
Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestion display that reduces the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) as time passes during the acceptance period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. Since the display area of the specific image can be reduced while the performance is in progress, it is difficult to recognize whether the reception has been accepted even after the reception has been made, creating a sense of tension. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific divided area is displayed within the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestion display, and a specific image is displayed within the specific divided area. (Gauge images, etc.) The display area is reduced. After the performance is progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, not only the specific image (eg, gauge image) but also the specific divided area continues to be displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action, the specific divided area is displayed, so the display area of the specific image (such as the gauge image) is reduced. This makes it easier to judge whether the number has decreased or not.

Note that ``the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced after the performance progresses based on the acceptance of the player's action'' means, for example, This also includes cases where a predetermined display area remains as a gauge image at the time the performance is performed based on this, but the display area is reduced to 0 (non-display) at a later point in time. be. However, in this case, it is required that the specific partitioned area is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area is required to have the display area of the gauge image set to 0. It will be hidden after the specified timing.

For example, in the configuration 16, when an action by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (a specific image, a specific divided area, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance; Prior to hiding the time suggestion display, regardless of how much display area remained for a specific image at the time of acceptance, the display area within a specific divided area must be set to a specific value (a predetermined value). ) is displayed, or only a specific partitioned area of a specific partitioned area and a specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). is possible.

In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the time when a motion by a player is accepted (when the progress of the performance according to the acceptance is started), the execution starts before the movement is accepted. The ``depiction in which the display area of a specific image is reduced'' does not end and continues. Then, when a predetermined timing arrives, either a specific image with a specific display area is displayed within a specific partitioned area, or only a specific partitioned area of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed. (the display area is reduced to 0).

In other words, in this case, at the timing when the progress of the production according to the reception starts, the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) will not be significantly reduced and the drawing up to that point will continue. It is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the reception has been accepted or not even after the reception has been completed. In addition, since the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is significantly reduced at a timing later than the timing when the progress of the production according to the reception starts, the reception is valid for a period of time ( It is possible to make it appear as if the game was completed just in time within the application period (reception period), and it is expected to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 17]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of precursor effects displayed as precursor effects indicating that the acceptance period will occur. This point will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific precursor effect is displayed among the plurality of precursor effects displays, the reception period occurs for the sample image display related to the reception target. It is displayed both within the precursor period and within the reception period. The sample image display that is displayed during the precursor period is different from the sample image display that is displayed during the acceptance period, and is hidden before the acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from a period before the reception period occurs.

Furthermore, as described above, if the pachinko machine 1 receives an application within the acceptance period, the pattern image display is hidden based on the acceptance; however, the pattern image display is hidden. It is possible for a ``specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display'' to appear until the image is displayed. However, as will be described later, regarding the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display," when the sample image display displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is hidden, This prevents it from appearing until the end of the process.

According to such a configuration, during the precursory period (specific precursory effect display), the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" that appears corresponding to the acceptance period does not appear, and the image representation is not displayed. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the sample image display is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), even if it is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player will not be aware of the situation. This will make it difficult for people to misunderstand that the reception period has ended.

In addition, if there are multiple "modes that make it difficult to see the sample image display" that can appear depending on the reception, including the above-mentioned "specific modes that make the sample image display difficult to see," then those In any of the aspects, it is desirable that the sample image display displayed within the precursory period is not displayed at the same time as it is hidden. However, if the mode differs from any of the multiple modes prepared as "modes that make the display of the sample image difficult to view" according to the reception, the display will be delayed until the display of the sample image is hidden within the premonitory period. It is also possible to cause a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" to appear. In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the sample image display" exclusive to the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes the sample image display difficult to see" appears during the precursor period. This makes it possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that the acceptance period has ended without their knowledge.

Note that the "specific precursor effect display" according to configuration 17 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to configurations 6, 9, and 14, or may correspond to a different precursor effect display. It's okay.

[Configuration 18]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, if the first production condition is met, the first reception period can be generated as a reception period during the execution period of symbol variation, and if the second production condition is met. , it is possible to generate a second acceptance period as an acceptance period during the execution period of symbol variation. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptance period can continue even after the symbol variation that occurred during the first acceptance period has ended and the next symbol variation has started. However, the second reception period does not continue until after the symbol fluctuation that caused the second reception period ends, and ends before the symbol fluctuation ends. It has become a thing. Furthermore, the sample image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and when the action by the player is accepted within the first reception period, and when the action by the player is accepted within the first reception period. In any case where an action by the player is accepted within the period, a disappearing performance mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is made to appear based on the acceptance.

In other words, in this case, effects such as ``even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared in the sample image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended.'' , it becomes possible to suitably obtain the information regardless of whether it is during the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearing effect mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is different when the application is accepted in the first acceptance period and when it is accepted in the second acceptance period. They are implemented in different ways. In other words, in this case, it will be possible to understand whether the acceptance period will end within a certain pattern change during execution based on the type of "disappearance effect mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Note that the "first reception period and second reception period" according to configuration 18 may be the same as the "first reception period and second reception period" according to configurations 2, 8, and 12, or may be different reception periods. It may correspond to a period.

[Configuration 19]
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (a first game state, and second gaming state), and the above-mentioned acceptance period can occur in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movement by a player is accepted within the acceptance period, based on the acceptance, the pachinko machine 1 displays a A mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance mode) is made possible to appear, and then the simulated image display is hidden.

In other words, in this case, the effect is that ``Even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode appeared in the sample image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended.'' , even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurs in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods is limited to the first game state among the first game state and the second game state. Among the plurality of acceptance periods, the second acceptance period can occur only in the second gaming state (jackpot game) among the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this regard, the sample image display related to the reception object is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first gaming state (if accepted in the first reception period), a specific "sample image display" that cannot appear in the second gaming state (if accepted in the second reception period) is visible. It is now possible for a mode in which it becomes difficult to perform (disappearance mode) to appear.

According to such a configuration, the first game can be started by simply checking which mode has appeared as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance mode)" without checking the effect after reception. It becomes possible to grasp which state is being controlled, the state and the second gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, even in the second gaming state (if accepted during the second reception period), there is a "mode in which the scale image display is difficult to visually recognize" that is different from a specific "mode in which the scale image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect mode)". It is also possible to make the mode (disappearance effect mode) appear.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptance state (reception period) occurs in which a reception opportunity is given, a sample image related to the reception target (such as a sample image of the operation receiving part) is displayed in the corresponding sample. By displaying the image as an integrated image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image, it is possible to prevent a decrease in game interest until the post-reception performance (post-operation performance) is executed. I'm trying to suppress it. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. . In addition, for each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the illustrated sample image with one of the integrated sample images described below, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

Note that the "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as described as another example or modification thereof. A display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the image is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible state (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception has become permissible or that the operation reception is permissible. A reception acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform the operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). This is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible state (reception period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. In other words, the acceptance acceptance state classified into the first type is a state that can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). This is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific condition (specific high expected fluctuation pattern selection) in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state refers to the valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice judgment) that can occur regardless of whether the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. period of validity, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first type and second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, the first type of reception permissible state (reception period) and the second type of reception permissible state (reception period) are both receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs as a permissible state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" displayed during these acceptance periods is an image imitating the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). In the second type of reception permissible state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). ing. In the first type of acceptance state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" is selected in any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) including the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the image, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (c)) not including the special mode is selected as the "integrated image". A determination may be made as to whether to display the image, and the "integrated image display" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the configurations 1 to 19 described above will be explained with reference to the drawings.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc. as a post-reception performance), and the type of preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). ) with different reception periods (reception performances), and it is possible to generate different types of reception periods (reception performances) according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, performance judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first reception period (reception performance) to a seventh reception period (reception performance) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception performance).

Here, the "conversation preview" as a post-reception performance indicates the level of expectation (such as the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing) depending on which conversation content will appear among multiple conversation contents, and as a post-reception performance. The "cut-in notice" indicates the level of expectation (such as the percentage of jackpot symbols appearing) depending on which cut-in image will appear among multiple cut-in images, and the "movable object" as a production after reception. The "notice" indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) depending on whether the movable object will move or not.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 167 to 178. It should be noted that each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. It may be implemented as any one of the seventh reception periods.

FIG. 167 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the first reception period (first reception performance) occurs. FIGS. 174 and 175 are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which a first reception period (first reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 174(a) ”), within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the “first variation pattern” selected above. Become. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 174(a), for convenience of explanation, the first performance display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE, which is depicted as a frog character, are respectively displayed at the start of symbol variation. These displays may be displayed not at the start of the fluctuation but during the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings. The second performance display FE itself may or may not indicate the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing when the decorative symbols SZ stop in the variable performance.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) corresponding to the first variation pattern (when the first condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs decoration as shown in FIG. 167(a). When the timing tF3 arrives when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the symbol SZ, the above-mentioned first reception period (validity period) in which "reception regarding the performance after the first reception" is allowed occurs. (“Situation shown in FIG. 174(d)”). As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the first acceptance period, the first post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production display device 1600 (first production device) has a reception period (validity period) in connection with the occurrence of such a first reception period. ) will occur soon, a simulated image display that suggests the reception target (operation receiver, etc.), a gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a disappearance that makes the simulated image difficult to see. A related display (a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize) and a post-acceptance performance display that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) are performed in response to acceptance. As mentioned above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated sample image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily the case. The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when timing tF1 arrives before the first reception period occurs, the display screen (effect display device In step 1600), execution of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started as the precursor effect display. The "first portent effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. Although the display is set to be hidden in accordance with the arrival of timing tF3, it may be made to be hidden before timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 174(d), during the first reception period according to this example, the "first portent effect display ZEH1" is displayed in a state where the reception of the player's action is permitted. It has never happened before.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 167(b) and 174(c), the timing tF2 before the first reception period occurs is When it arrives, "Integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while "First omen effect display ZEH1" is displayed, and "Integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. At least a part of the area where "display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where "first omen effect display ZEH1" is displayed. That is, in this case, during the period (timings tF2 to tF3) in which both the "integrated image display IG" and the "first portent effect display ZEH1" are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), " At least a part of the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to visually recognize by the "first portent effect display ZEH1". As a result, during the period (timings tF2 to tF3) before the occurrence of the first acceptance period, there is a strong interest in which objects (operation receiving units) the player's actions are allowed to perform. It is expected that this will make it difficult to forget to perform an operation or make a mistake in operation after the first reception period occurs.

In addition, during the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the "integrated image display IG" and the "first portent effect display ZEH1" are displayed, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is reduced. In order to improve the game's interest, it is more desirable to display the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" so that a tendency to gradually improve toward the occurrence of the acceptance period appears. For example, this can be achieved by gradually decreasing the display range of the "first omen effect display ZEH1" (the range that overlaps with the integrated image display IG), or by gradually increasing its transmittance. be.

That is, as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIGS. 174(c) and (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "integrated image display IG" is , are displayed so as to straddle the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the acceptance is made within the first acceptance period, or when the first acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. Note that the first acceptance period according to this example is configured to end when timing tF4 arrives if no action is accepted by the player (see FIG. 167(b)).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 167, the effect changes from FIG. In the evolving example, it is assumed that an action by the player is accepted at timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 167(a), based on the acceptance of the player's action at timing tF3a, the first acceptance period ends, and the period corresponding to the first acceptance period ends. The execution of the post-reception performance (first post-reception performance) will be started.

Note that the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A1 (FIGS. 175(e1) to (i1))" has relatively low expectations as a post-reception presentation corresponding to the first acceptance period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to a case where the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation level, is executed as a post-effect.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. At timing tF3a, which is the point in time when the presentation after the first reception is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. That's what I do.

That is, the first post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "first post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance display using a second performance device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable display device). This will be realized as a combination of at least a "specific performance after the first reception" using a third performance device (speaker, etc.) and an output sound after the first reception using a third performance device (speaker). However, among these production devices, the production display device 1600 (first production device) on which the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display) is displayed, 1. The timing at which the performance display starts to be executed after reception is delayed compared to other performance devices, thereby maintaining the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" even after the reception has been received. It becomes.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 175 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 144 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. become.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to easily recognize which of the multiple modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the ``time during which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible manner'' after the acceptance is made, to be long. However, even though the reception has been made and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) have already been executed, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner (as shown in FIGS. 175(e1) and (e2)), it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that ``there will be a delay in noticing the post-reception performance that is in the execution state.''

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 175(f1) or (f2), the first acceptance period ends when the player's action is accepted. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing tF3a (when timing tF3b arrives), the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first reception period) is The display according to the first aspect of the first extinction related display SK1 is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “first extinction related display SK1-” is displayed. 1" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "1st disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will automatically shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tF3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period. In addition, even after the first post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is started, the period until the integrated image display IG is made difficult to view (timings tF3a to tF3b) is Since it is possible to confirm the aspect of the integrated image display IG with good visibility, it is expected that interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the first reception period, the corresponding post-reception performances include modes with low expectations (FIG. 175 (e1) to (i1)) and modes with high expectations (FIG. 175 (e2) to (i2)). Regardless of which is executed, the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance related display SK1. Even in a situation where the first performance device (the third performance device 1600) is starting to execute, the expectation level can be maintained as a secret in the first performance device (the performance display device 1600).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. When timing tf3c arrives during the period during which the IG becomes difficult to visually recognize), the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action by the player within the first acceptance period. The execution of "first post-reception performance display UG1" as the post-reception performance is started. However, in this case, in an example where the performance progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A1 (FIGS. 175(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 175( g1), the first aspect (first post-reception performance display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception performance display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and from FIG. (Fig. 175 (e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception performance), as shown in Fig. 175 (g2), the first reception A second aspect (first post-reception performance display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception performance display UG1 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are displayed, the "first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or The first post-reception effect display UG1-2) will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after it is accepted within the first acceptance period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display) can be started without much delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in game interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect display starts after the first reception while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it is suggested that the first reception period has already ended. The point of view is automatically shifted from the "integrated image display IG" to the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first reception performance display UG1-2)". It becomes expected (after timing tF3c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 175(h1) or (h2), the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1)" -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK1-1", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. ” will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, “1st post-reception performance display UG1 (1st post-reception performance display UG1-1 or 1st post-reception performance display UG1-2)” will be hidden. ” will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "first post-reception performance display UG1" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or the first This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance displays UG1-2). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 167(b), the "first post-reception effect display UG1" is displayed after the "integrated image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden. Also, it will be executed for a relatively long time.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the first reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 167), and Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tF3c) of the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tF3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second performance device is prepared separately from the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and the operation by the player is performed within the first reception period. When the reception is received, as shown in FIG. Performance) is started to be executed prior to the first post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display) using the first performance device.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tF3a when the reception is received in the first reception period, but only a part of the first reception performance (the first reception performance display) is delayed, The first post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tF3a without delay.

Such a second presentation device may be, for example, provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is equipped with a presentation movable body capable of performing presentation operations. , it may be provided as a production lamp capable of producing production light emission. In any case, it will be provided so that it can perform performances (display performance, movable performance, light emission performance, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations.

Note that the presentation example shown in FIG. 175 assumes that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 174(d) to "A1 (Fig. 175(e1) to (i1))" (in a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 175(e1) As shown in FIG. As a first post-reception specific production UGT1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of production UGT1, a first post-reception production using the first production device (first post-reception production display UG1-1) is performed. It is now ready to start running. On the other hand, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 174(d) to "A2 (Fig. 175(e2) to (i2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 175( e2), the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) according to the above-mentioned post-first reception specific presentation UGT1 (first reception period) corresponding to the first reception period. As the first post-reception specific performance UGT1-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the post-reception specific performance UGT1, it precedes the first post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display UG1-1) using the first performance device. It will now start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 174, apart from the first omen production display ZEH1 in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also corresponds to the first reception period. 174 (b) to (d)). The first omen specific effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first omen effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs is It is executed even at the time when the timing tF3 arrives, and is executed in such a manner that it straddles the timing tF3.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first reception period occurs, at timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167(d), It is assumed that the output of the reception acceptance sound is started (corresponding to "the situation where the output of ♪ is started in FIG. 174(c)"). In other words, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the first acceptance period is audible output that straddles the timing tF3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 174(d)") when the first acceptance period occurs. The player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

Here, in the first acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 167(d), FIGS. 175(e1) to (g1), or FIGS. 175(e2) to (g2), the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. Even if an action is accepted by the player while the player is playing, the acceptance acceptance sound will not be terminated midway and will only be output for a predetermined period of time. In other words, as will be described later, during the plurality of acceptance periods, if an action is accepted by the player while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptance sound is changed based on the acceptance. This includes a reception period that ends prematurely. Therefore, if an acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is being audibly output within the first acceptance period, and a mode in which the audible output of the acceptance acceptable sound continues appears, it is difficult to determine whether the acceptance is in the accepted state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the situation, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

However, during the first reception period, even if the player accepts an action while the reception permissible sound is being audibly output, the reception permissible sound will be terminated midway (the audible output state will be terminated midway). However, when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the output sound after the first acceptance (corresponding to "♪♪" output in FIG. 175 (e1) or (e2)) is started based on this. It has become a thing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 167(d), there are two types of "acceptance permissible sound" which are sounds that are audibly output within the first acceptance period, and an audible sound that is audible as a result of acceptance within the first acceptance period. Since both the output sound "output sound after the first reception" can be output audibly, it is easier to recognize whether the reception period is within the reception period or the reception period has ended. This can make it even more difficult to recognize.

As shown in FIG. 167(d), such output sound after the first reception, as well as the "first reception effect display UG1", is the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK. -1" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time ("♪♪ is output in Figure 175 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1). situation). Regarding the output sound after the first reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 174(d) to “A2 (Fig. 175(e2) to (i2))” (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 167, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes that the action by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the first acceptance period occurs, the timing tF4 will arrive without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF4 (the point in time when the first acceptance period ends and acceptance of the player's action is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF3a (the first Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player's movement is accepted within the acceptance period, the integrated simulated image display IG is shown in FIG. Not only is the integrated image display IG not hidden, but the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the first reception period ends because the player's operation is not accepted in time, the integrated simulation will not be performed within the first reception period after the end of the first reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 175 (f3), the first disappearance related display SK1 is -2 (the second aspect of the first extinguishment related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “first extinction related display SK1-” is displayed. 2" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the first reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the first reception period has ended. Furthermore, even in a situation where the first reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the above-mentioned "first disappearance related display SK1-2" that appears when the player's action is not accepted within the first acceptance period is This is executed in a manner different from the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" that appears based on the acceptance of the player's action within the period. As a result, when the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" appears, it becomes possible to indicate that the player's action has not been accepted, and a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed. .

After this, as shown in FIG. 175 (g3), among the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK1-2", first disable the "integrated model image display IG". Display. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "first extinction related display SK-2" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 175 (h3).

FIG. 168 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception performance) occurs. FIGS. 176 and 177 are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which a second reception period (second reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 176(a) ”), within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the “second variation pattern” selected above. Become. Note that in the production examples shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the first production display TE is displayed, but the second production display FE is not displayed.

However, in the performance related to the "second variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), as shown in FIG. 168(a), the variation of the decorative pattern SZ The above-mentioned second reception period in which "reception regarding the performance after the second operation" is allowed when the timing tG3 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a second predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance was started. (validity period) ("situation shown in FIG. 176(d)"). As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period, the second post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, when the above-mentioned first reception period occurs (FIG. 167) Similarly, in connection with this, a premonitory display that suggests that the reception period (validity period) will occur soon, a mock image display that suggests the reception object (operation receiving part, etc.), and a suggestion of the remaining time of the reception period. A gauge image display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display, a disappearance-related display that makes the sample image display difficult to see, and a post-reception effect that indicates the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing) depending on the acceptance. Displays are made respectively. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". As mentioned above, the sample image display is displayed as an "integrated sample image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but it is not necessarily limited to this and can be displayed separately. It may be displayed. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in this example as well, when timing tG1 arrives before the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 168(b) and 176(b), the foreshadowing effect is As a display, "second portent effect display ZEH2" is started to be executed. Also, for the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)", the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) is similar to the example shown in FIG. 167. When the timing tG2 arrives before the occurrence, it is displayed while the above-mentioned "second omen effect display ZEH2" is being displayed (FIG. 168(b), FIG. 176(c) ). As shown in FIG. 176(c), at least a part of the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed, Regarding the point that the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second portent effect display ZEH2", in the case of the example shown in FIG. 174(c) (the portent effect display corresponding to the first reception period) It is similar to

Further, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 176(d)) at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs. The information will be hidden when the application is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period (in this case, the second acceptance period) or when the second acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. This is also the same as in the example shown in FIG. 167 (first reception period). Note that the second acceptance period according to this example is configured to end when timing tG4 arrives if no action is accepted by the player.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 168(b) (second reception period), "second omen effect display ZEH2" is in the example shown in FIG. 167(b) (first reception period). Not only is the aspect (image display) different from that of the "first omen effect display ZEH1", but also the timing at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs (second reception post-effect display) It is not hidden when tG3 (timing at which acceptance is permitted) arrives, but is displayed in a form that straddles the timing tG3.

In other words, in this case, during the second reception period, not only the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" but also the "second precursor" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "integrated image display IG" are displayed. Actions by the player can be accepted while the effect display ZEH2 is being displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period occurs, at least a part of the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second portent effect display ZEH2", and the reception period is It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension within the period.

Here, the "second omen effect display ZEH2" may be displayed until the timing tG4 when the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) ends, or it may be displayed until the reception period (Here, the second reception period) may be hidden at a predetermined timing. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, for the precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2), within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), the “integrated simulation” "Image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" so that the area that overlaps with "Image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" tends to be gradually reduced, the display range is displayed in a gradually reduced form. This is desirable in that the visibility of the image display IG is gradually improved within the acceptance period. Furthermore, the area in which the second precursor effect display is displayed and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated image display" is displayed do not necessarily overlap with each other during the entire period in which the second precursor effect display is displayed. For example, after a predetermined timing within the acceptance period of the entire period arrives, the second precursor effect display is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed. You may also do so.

Further, the second omen effect display ZEH2 according to this example is displayed when a reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) or when the reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period). If no action by the player is accepted until a predetermined timing within the period (period), the screen is hidden.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 168, the effect changes from FIG. In the progressing example, it is assumed that an action by the player is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 168(a), based on the acceptance of the player's action at timing tG3a, the second acceptance period ends, and the second acceptance period corresponds to the second acceptance period. The execution of the post-reception performance (second post-reception performance) will be started.

Note that the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIGS. 177(e1) to (i1))" is a relatively low-expectation post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation level, is executed as a post-effect. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

Also in the example shown in FIG. 168, at timing tG3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the second post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated image display IG" Not only is the integrated image display IG not hidden, but the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 168, not only the integrated image display IG but also the second omen effect display ZEH2 are displayed at the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the effect after the second reception is started). ) at timing tG3a, it is not hidden or made difficult to visually recognize.

That is, the second post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "second post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance display using the second performance display device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable This will be realized as a combination of at least the "second reception specific performance" using a third performance device (speaker, etc.) and the second reception output sound using a third performance device (speaker). However, among these production devices, the production display device 1600 (first production device) on which the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display) is displayed, 2.The timing at which the performance display starts to be executed after reception is delayed compared to other production devices, so that even after the reception is received, the "integrated image display IG" and "second omen performance display" ZEH2" visibility is maintained.

According to such a configuration, as in the case of the first reception period described above, even after the reception is made, as shown in FIG. Which of the plural modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) was the phantom image display IG displayed, and in which mode was the omen effect displayed (the first omen effect display ZEH1, the second omen effect)? Since the player will be able to easily recognize whether the game has been displayed in the display ZEH2, etc., it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be suitably suppressed.

Here, after the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG and the omen effect display ZEH were displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time during which the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily visible manner. However, even though the application has been accepted and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) have already been executed, the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are not displayed during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner as it was when it was displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that people may be late in noticing this.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 168(b) and FIG. 177(f1) or (f2), a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing tG3a at which the second acceptance period ended due to acceptance of the player's action. Then (when timing tG3b arrives), a display related to a "second disappearance-related display SK2" different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". I have to.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “second disappearance related display SK2” is displayed. " is displayed, and "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed in at least a part of the area where "second extinction related display SK2" is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will automatically shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tG3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Since it becomes possible to do this, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period. Furthermore, even after the second post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is started, until the second disappearance related display SK2 is displayed (timings tG3a to tG3b), The aspect of the second omen effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visibility, and the integrated image display IG will not be made difficult to see except by the second omen effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner. In addition, if the reception is made after the second omen effect display ZEH2 is hidden within the second reception period, the second omen effect display ZEH2 will be displayed until the second extinction related display SK2 is displayed. Needless to say, the aspect of the integrated image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility.

Furthermore, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “second extinction related display SK2” is displayed while the “foreshadow effect display (here, second omen effect display ZEH2)” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "second extinction related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, by making the second omen effect display ZEH2 difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to suggest that the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. It is expected that the player's gaze will automatically shift from the second precursor performance display ZEH2 to the post-acceptance performance (after timing tG3b). As a result, it is now possible to continue displaying the second omen effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the precursor effect display was displayed within the reception period. In addition, even after the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started, the precursor performance display is not displayed until it is made difficult to see (timings tG3a to tG3b). Since the mode (here, the second precursor effect display ZEH2) can be confirmed with good visibility, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the second reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 177 (e1) to (i1)) appear as corresponding post-reception effects, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 177 (e2) to (i1)) appear. (i2)) appears, different aspects (second extinction-related displays SK2-1, SK2-2) appear as the second extinction-related display SK2. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 177(f1) and (f2), the situation is such that "second reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is different from the first aspect (second disappearance related display SK2-1) and the second aspect (second disappearance related display SK2- 2, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "second reception effect display" will be executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 168(b) and FIG. 177(g1) or (g2), the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2 (integrated image display IG When timing tG3c arrives during the period in which the behavior (a mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) accepts the action in response to the movement by the player being accepted within the second acceptance period. The execution of "second reception performance display UG2" as a post-performance is started. However, here, in an example where the performance progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIGS. 177(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 177( g1), the first aspect (second post-reception performance display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception performance display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and from FIG. (Fig. 177 (e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception performance), as shown in Fig. 177 (g2), the second reception A second mode (second post-reception performance display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception performance display UG2 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "second extinction related display SK2 (second extinction related display SK2-1 or second extinction related display SK2-2)" While these are displayed, the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" starts to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after the application is accepted within the second acceptance period, the first effect device It is now possible to start the post-reception performance (second post-reception performance display UG2) in (performance display device 1600) without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. You will be able to do this. Furthermore, since the second post-reception effect display UG2 starts while the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to see, the second reception period has already ended. While suggesting that the player's gaze changes from "integrated image display IG" or "second omen effect display ZEH2" to "second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second It is expected that the process will automatically shift to ``Post-reception performance display UG2-2)'' (after timing tG3c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 168(b) and FIG. 177(h1) or (h2), the second post-reception performance display UG2 (second reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2) -2)" is displayed, first, among "Integrated image display IG", "Second omen effect display ZEH2", and "Second extinction related display SK2", "Integrated image display IG" and "Second omen effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and "second omen effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. 177(i1) or (i2), , the "second disappearance-related display SK2 (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" will be hidden, and as a result, even though visibility is good, the 2 post-reception performance display UG2 (second reception performance display UG2-1 or second reception performance display UG2-2)" will be displayed.

In this regard, the "second reception performance display UG2" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the second reception performance display UG2-1 or the second reception performance display UG2-1) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance displays UG2-2). Therefore, the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is used for comparison even after the "integrated image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "second extinction related display SK2" are hidden. It will run for a long time.

By the way, in the production example (FIGS. 174 and 175) corresponding to the first reception period described above, even if the reception is made within the first reception period and the "first reception post-production display UG1" is executed, The background image is maintained without being switched before and after the "first reception performance display UG1" is started. On the other hand, in the production example (FIGS. 176 and 177) corresponding to the second reception period, when the reception is made within the second reception period and the "second reception performance display UG2" is executed, The background image is switched before and after the "second reception effect display UG2" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the conditions shown in FIGS. 177(e) and 177(f) (timings tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 168) in which the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (time tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 168) Even if there is a change in performance in the first performance device), the "second reception performance display UG2" can indicate that the performance has not started yet.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 177, the post-reception effect is such that the background image can be switched to the same background image when a mode with a low level of expectation appears and when a mode with a high level of expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether an aspect with a low level of expectation appears or an aspect with a high degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the second reception period occurs, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) can display the information within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 168). Various displays are displayed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tG3c) of the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tG3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example as well, when an action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 168(b) and 168(c), based on the acceptance, , Start execution of a second post-reception performance (second post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the second post-reception performance (second reception performance display) using the first performance device. I try to let them do it.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tG3a when the reception is received in the second reception period, but only a part of the performance after the second reception (the display of the performance after the second reception) is delayed. The second post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tG3a without delay.

As described above, such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is capable of performing presentation operations. It may be provided as a performance movable body, a performance lamp capable of producing production light, or the like. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIGS. 177(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low for the post-reception performance), FIG. 177(e1) As shown in , the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the second post-reception specific presentation UGT 2 (second As a second post-reception specific production UGT2-1), which is a low-expected form of the post-reception specific production UGT2, a second post-reception production using the first production device (second post-reception production display UG2-1) is performed. Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B2 (FIGS. 177(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. e2), the manner in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the second post-reception specific presentation UGT 2 (corresponding to the second reception period). As the second post-reception specific production UGT2-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the second post-reception specific production UGT2, a second post-reception production using the first production device (second post-reception production display UG2-2) is performed. ) is started before execution.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 176, apart from the second omen production display ZEH2 in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also corresponds to the second reception period. A premonitory effect (second omen specific effect) is executed (FIGS. 176(b) to (d)). The second omen specific performance on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) is different from the second omen performance display ZEH2 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and the timing tG3 at which the second reception period occurs is It is executed even at the time when the timing tG3 is reached, and is executed over the timing tG3.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the second reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 168(d) At tG2, the reception acceptance sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 176(c) and 176(d)) is started to be output. In other words, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the second acceptance period is audible output that straddles the timing tG3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 176(d)") when the second acceptance period occurs. The player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

Here, in the second reception period, the acceptance permissible sounds include a long-time permissible sound that remains in an audible output state for a relatively long period of time, and a short-time permissible sound that remains in an audible output state for a relatively short period of time. are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 168(d), the long-term permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one of the long-time permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound may be started at timing tG3 when the second acceptance period occurs or after that time.

In the second acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-time permissible sound are being audibly output, the , the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-time permissible sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In addition, during the second reception period, if the player accepts an action while the reception permissible sound (long time permissible sound, short time permissible sound) is being audibly output, the reception permissible sound is terminated midway. In addition, when the acceptance is made, a second post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound (such as "♪♪ ”) starts an audible output. In other words, in this case, in the second reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance that is performed in response to the reception. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance (output sound after the second reception) performed accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 168(d), such a second post-reception output sound is similar to the "second post-reception effect display UG2", as shown in FIG. ” will continue to be executed for a relatively long time even after it is hidden (“Situation where ♪♪ is output in Figure 177 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)”) ). Regarding the output sound after the second reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 176(d) to "B2 (Fig. 177(e2) to (i2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, in the second reception period, the long-term permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound were respectively output as the reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, and the first permissible sound As in the acceptance period, only one acceptance permission sound may be output.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 168, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. This assumes that the action by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the second acceptance period occurs, the timing tG4 will arrive without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG4 (the point in time when the second acceptance period ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG3a (the second As shown in FIG. 177(e3), the integrated simulated image display IG is similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the player's movement is accepted within the acceptance period of In addition to not hiding the integrated image display IG, the integrated image display IG is also not made to be difficult to see. In this performance example, since the second precursor performance display ZEH2 is hidden at timing tG4, the second precursor performance display ZEH2 is not displayed after timing tG4.

According to such a configuration, even if the second reception period ends without the player's action being accepted in time, the integrated simulation will not be performed within the second reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 177 (f3), the second disappearance related display SK2 is displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". -1 or the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “second disappearance related display SK2-” is displayed. 1 or 2nd disappearance related display SK2-2'' is displayed, and at least a part of the area where ``second disappearance related display SK2'' is displayed is displayed as ``integrated image display IG (sample image display , gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the second reception period ends without any acceptance, the integrated model image display IG By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the second reception period has ended. Furthermore, even in a situation where the second reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2. The case means that if the player's action had been accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect would have progressed from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIG. 177(e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations is executed. On the other hand, the case where "second disappearance related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2 when the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period means that If the action by the player had been accepted within the above, the effect would have progressed from Fig. 176(d) to "B2 (Fig. 177(e2) to (i2))" This corresponds to the case where a high post-reception performance was executed).

In other words, in this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the second acceptance period ends. By simply checking the appearance of the "second disappearance related display SK2" (second disappearance related display SK2-1, second disappearance related display SK2-2), the second reception performance will be in a less expected manner. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether it has been executed in a highly expected manner, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 177 (g3), among the "integrated model image display IG" and "second extinction related display SK2", first, "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. do. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "second extinction related display SK2" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 177 (h3).

FIG. 169 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the third reception period (third reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "third variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the third variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the third variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the third variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) according to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "third variation pattern" itself.

However, in the production related to the "third variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (advance judgment), the third predetermined time period after the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ When the elapsed timing tH3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding the performance after the third operation" is allowed. The third acceptance period (validity period) is generated. As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the third acceptance period, the third post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the third reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception performance) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the third reception performance based on the reception of the player's action (in the first performance device) 167 (or FIG. 174, FIG. 175) The first post-reception performance (the "first reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "first reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "first reception performance display" in the third performance device) described above with reference to (rear output sound), but other than that, the configuration is basically the same.

For example, timing tH1 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 169(b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the "first omen effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the foreshadow effect display. Note that the "first portent effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. Permissible timing) It is hidden when tH3 arrives. However, the point that it may be hidden before timing tH3 is the same as in the case of the first reception period described above. In any case, in the first reception period according to this example, the "first precursor performance display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state where the reception of actions by the player is permitted.

Furthermore, timing tH2 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 174(c), while the "first portent effect display ZEH1" is being displayed, the "integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. " will be displayed, and at least a part of the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed will overlap with the area where "first omen effect display ZEH1" will be displayed. The configurations of the "integrated image display IG" and "first omen effect display ZEH1" that are displayed in connection with the third reception period, as well as other examples related to these, are shown in FIG. 167 and FIG. 174, as described above with reference to FIG. 175, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Furthermore, timing tH3 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 174(d), the third reception period is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. This will occur. Regarding the point that the "integrated image display IG" is hidden when an application is made within the third acceptance period, or when the third acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. The same is true. Note that the third acceptance period according to this example is configured to end when timing tH4 arrives if no action is accepted by the player.

Furthermore, timing tH3a shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third reception period ends based on the acceptance of the player's action, and the post-reception performance (after the third reception period) corresponding to the third reception period ends. performance) will begin to be executed. In addition, as for the third reception performance, at least a case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation level is executed and a case where a second mode with a relatively high expectation level is executed are prepared. The content of the performance (the content of the post-reception performance display, the post-reception specific performance, and the post-reception output sound) is different from the first post-reception performance above, but the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the multiple modes it is executed in. The points etc. are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception performance. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". In addition, at timing tH3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the third post-reception performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not hidden. The fact that the fake image display IG is not made difficult to view is also the same as in the case of the first post-reception presentation.

Furthermore, timing tH3b shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3b arrives, the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (the first extinction related display SK1-1 (commonly corresponding in the first reception period and the third reception period) is 1 extinction related display SK1) is started. The configuration of the "first extinguishment related display SK1" displayed in connection with the third acceptance period and other related examples are as described above with reference to FIG. 167 and FIG. 175. Since there is, I will omit it here.

According to the configuration of the first effect device (effect display device 1600) related to "the period from when the first omen effect display ZEH1 is displayed until the first extinction related display SK1 is displayed", the first It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the reception period of To improve the game's interest by encouraging the player to take an interest in the game, and by creating a strong interest in which aspect of the post-reception performance display (the first post-reception performance display, the third post-reception performance display) will appear. You will be able to do this.

Furthermore, even in the third reception period, regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception performance is executed in a mode with a low level of expectation or a mode with a high level of expectation, the first disappearance related display SK1 is Since the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) is made to appear, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) has started to be executed, the first presentation device In (effect display device 1600), the expectation level can be kept secret. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and different extinction-related displays may appear depending on the level of expectation. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

Furthermore, timing tH3c shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, the third presentation device (performance display device 1600) displays the “third reception performance display” as a post-reception performance in response to the reception of the player's action within the third reception period. (The type of preview performance is different from the first reception performance display)" will start to be executed. As for this "performance display after the third reception", multiple modes with different expectations are prepared, and a mode with a low expectation is executed as the third reception presentation, and a mode with a high expectation is executed. As mentioned above, different modes appear as the "third post-reception effect display" depending on the case.

That is, in this case, the execution of the "third post-reception effect display" is started while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are being displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to create a critical situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the third reception period has occurred, and it is possible to create a situation where the player's gaze becomes It is expected that there will be a natural transition from ``fake image display IG'' to ``post-reception performance display'' (after timing tH3c).

In this example as well, when the display related to the "third post-reception performance display" is started, regardless of the mode, while the "third post-reception performance display" is being displayed, first, Of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "first extinction related display SK-1" is hidden. A display related to "3rd Reception Effect Display" will now be displayed.

In this regard, as mentioned above, the "third post-acceptance performance display" is also displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the "third post-reception effect display" also applies after the "integrated image display IG" and "first extinction related display SK-1" are hidden. , will be executed for a relatively long time.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 169) and within a limited time. Various displays are performed on the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tH3c) of the third post-reception effect (third post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tH3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third acceptance period, the third acceptance period is A third post-reception performance (a third post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to a third post-reception performance (a third post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I have to. The content of the third post-reception specific performance is also different from the first post-reception specific performance, but it is basically performed in the same way as the first post-reception specific performance.

For example, as the specific production after the third reception, multiple modes with different expectations are prepared, and as the third reception production, a mode with a low expectation is executed and a mode with a high expectation is executed. Depending on the case, different modes appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) as the specific presentation after the third reception. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 169(b) and (c), the third post-reception specific production using the second production device is changed to the third post-reception production display using the first production device. The point that the execution is started in advance is also the same as in the case of the specific effect after the first reception described above.

In addition, when the third reception period occurs, similar to the first reception period, the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) displays a foreshadowing effect (common support for the first reception period and the third reception period). It is desirable that the first omen identification effect) be executed. Further, in this case, the omen specific effect (first omen specific effect) on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first omen effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the third omen specific effect It is executed even when the timing tH3 when the acceptance period occurs, and it is more desirable to execute it in a manner that straddles the timing tH3.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and even when the third reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 169(d) At tH2, output of the acceptance permission sound is started. That is, the reception permission sound corresponding to the third reception period is output audibly over the timing tH3 at which the third reception period occurs, and the reception permission sound is audibly output. Among them, actions by the player can be accepted. It is desirable that this acceptance permission sound be the same as the acceptance permission sound that is output when the first acceptance period occurs.

However, in the third acceptance period, if a player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is changed based on the acceptance. I'm trying to finish it.

In addition, during the third reception period, if a player accepts an action while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, not only will the reception permission sound be terminated midway, but also the Based on this, audible output of a third post-acceptance output sound that is different from the first post-acceptance output sound, the second post-acceptance output sound, etc. is started. In other words, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance that is performed in response to the reception. There will be no competition (overlapping) with the performance (output sound after the third reception) performed accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 169(d), the output sound after the third reception is similar to the "effect display after the third reception", and the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-". 1" will continue to be executed for a relatively long time even after it is hidden. In addition, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as the output sound after the third reception, and a mode with a low expectation is executed and a mode with a high expectation is executed as the performance after the third reception. It is desirable that different output sounds (modes) be output depending on the situation.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred during the reception period until the timing tH3c arrives just by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device or By checking the third performance device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tH3a arrives earlier than that. This makes it possible to encourage players who tend to concentrate only on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) to enjoy performances using more performance devices.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 169, even if the player's action is not accepted within the third acceptance period, basically the player's action is not accepted within the first acceptance period. It is the same as if it were not done.

That is, in this case, after the third acceptance period occurs, the timing tH4 will arrive without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH4 (the point in time when the third acceptance period ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH3a (the third Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period of It is also not made to make the fake image display IG difficult to see.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, the first disappearance related display SK1-2 (the first acceptance period and the third The display according to the second aspect of the first extinction related display SK1 that corresponds to the common reception period is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “first extinction related display SK1-” is displayed. 2" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, if an operation by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to recognize which type of operation occurred during the acceptance period, so the player is strongly urged to perform the operation. You will be able to do this. In addition, in the third acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period, when the action by the player is not accepted, different aspects will appear as "first extinction related display SK1" depending on the expectation level. However, a mode (first extinction related display SK1-2) different from the mode (first extinction related display SK1-1) that appears when the acceptance is made appears.

After this, among the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-2", the "integrated model image display IG" is first hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "first extinction related display SK-2" is hidden.

FIG. 170 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) occurs. FIG. 178 and FIG. 179 are diagrams showing examples of effects in a variable pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (pre-announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (situation shown in FIG. 178(a)). , Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 178(a), for convenience of explanation, the first production display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE, which is depicted as a frog character, are respectively displayed at the start of symbol variation. These displays may be displayed not at the start of the fluctuation but during the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings.

However, in the performance related to the "fourth variation pattern", as shown in FIG. When the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since timing tI3 (this may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state), the "fourth operation" is reached. The fourth reception period (validity period) in which "reception regarding post-production" is permitted is generated (situation shown in FIG. 178(d)). As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the fourth post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fourth reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fourth reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (in the first performance device) 167 (or FIG. 174, FIG. 175) The first post-reception performance (the "first reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "first reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "first reception performance display" in the third performance device) described above with reference to The output sound is different. In addition, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) according to this embodiment, a fourth disappearance that is different from the first disappearance related display SK1 is set as "an aspect in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". Although it differs from the case of the first reception period in that the related display SK4 appears, the other configurations are basically the same.

Below, we will explain the performances that are performed in connection with the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance), but here is an explanation of what is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception performance). I'll omit that. That is, regarding matters that are not particularly mentioned, the presentation will be performed as explained in the first reception period (first reception presentation), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tI1 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 170(b) or FIG. 178(b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), "first omen effect display ZEH1" is displayed as the foreshadow effect display. ” starts execution.

Furthermore, timing tI2 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 178(c), while "first portent effect display ZEH1" is being displayed, "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. " will be displayed, and at least a part of the area where "integrated image display IG" is displayed will overlap with the area where "first omen effect display ZEH1" will be displayed.

Furthermore, timing tI3 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 178(d), the fourth reception period is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. This will occur.

Further, timing tI3a shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 170, the effect progresses from FIG. In this example, it is assumed that an action by the player is accepted at timing tI3a within the fourth acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 170(a), based on the acceptance of the player's action at timing tI3a, the fourth acceptance period ends, and the period corresponding to the fourth acceptance period ends. The execution of the post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance) will be started.

Note that the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIG. 179(e1) to (i1))" is a relatively low-expectation post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period. Corresponding to the case where the first aspect is executed, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation level, is executed as a post-effect. However, it is not always necessary to prepare multiple modes with different expectations as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period, and whenever an acceptance is received, a specific mode (for example, C1 (Fig. (i1))) may also appear. In this case, even if it is a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the fourth reception period, multiple modes will not be prepared depending on the level of expectation, and when there is an acceptance, the same mode will always be the same. The aspect will be made to appear.

Similarly, during this fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 170(b), FIG. At timing tI3a, which is the point in time (when the presentation after reception is started), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made to be difficult to see. .

Furthermore, timing tI3b shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tI3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" will appear. However, as described above, when an acceptance is made in the fourth acceptance period, the display of the fourth extinction related display SK4, which is different from the first extinction related display SK1, is started (timing tI3b).

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “fourth extinction related display SK4” is displayed. " is displayed, and "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed in at least a part of the area where "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will automatically shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tI3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the fourth reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 179 (e1) to (i1)) appear as corresponding post-reception effects, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 179 (e2) to (i1)) appear. (i2)) appears, different aspects (fourth extinction related displays SK4-1, SK4-2) appear as the fourth extinction related display SK4. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 179(f1) and (f2), the "fourth post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the fourth disappearance related display SK4 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is different from the first mode (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) and the second mode (fourth disappearance related display SK4- 2), it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "fourth post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly anticipated manner.

Furthermore, timing tI3c shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tI3c arrives, while the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) is appearing, the player's action within the fourth acceptance period is In response to the reception, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) starts executing the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" as a post-reception performance. However, in this case, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 178(d) to "C1 (Fig. 179(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 179( g1), the first aspect (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception performance display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period, and from FIG. (Fig. 179 (e2) to (i2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high for the post-reception performance), as shown in Fig. 179 (g2), the fourth reception A second mode (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception performance display UG4 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth extinction-related display SK4 (fourth extinction-related display SK4-1 or fourth extinction-related display SK4-2)" are displayed, "the fourth extinction-related display SK4-2" is displayed. 4 after-reception performance display UG4 (fourth reception after-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth reception performance display UG4-2)" will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after it is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the after-reception performance (fourth after-reception performance display UG4) without much delay compared to other performance devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in game interest. In addition, since the fourth post-reception performance display UG4 starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it is suggested that the fourth reception period has already ended, and the player The gaze destination automatically shifts from the "integrated image display IG" to the "4th post-reception performance display UG4 (4th post-reception performance display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception performance display UG4-2)". becomes expected (after timing tI3c).

Then, also in the production related to the fourth reception period, the display related to "4th post-reception production display UG4 (4th post-reception production display UG4-1 or 4th post-reception production display UG4-2)" starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 170(b), FIG. First, hide the "integrated image display IG" of the "integrated image display IG" and the "second disappearance related display SK2" while the "effect display UG4-2)" is being displayed. . After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 170(b), FIG. 4 extinction-related display SK4-1 or 4th extinction-related display SK4-2)" will be hidden. As a result, even though visibility is good, "4th reception effect display UG4 (4th reception display SK4-2)" will be hidden. A display related to ``After Effect Display UG4-1 or 4th Post-Reception Effect Display UG4-2)'' is now performed.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred during the reception period until the timing tI3b arrives just by looking at the first performance device (performance display device 1600), but the second performance device and By checking the third performance device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tI3a arrives earlier than that. This makes it possible to encourage players who tend to concentrate only on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) to enjoy performances using more performance devices.

Further, even if the player only looks at the first performance device (performance display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth extinction-related display SK4, which is different from the first extinction-related display SK1 described above, is This appears as a condition in which the fake image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, by checking such a mode, it is possible to recognize at an earlier stage which type of reception period has occurred, before the "fourth reception effect display UG4" is performed. become able to.

In this regard, the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" refers to multiple modes (here, the fourth reception performance display UG4-1 or the fourth This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UG4-2). Therefore, the "4th post-reception effect display UG4" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "4th extinction related display SK4" are hidden. .

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even if the fourth reception period occurs, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) can display the information within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 170). Various displays are displayed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tI3a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, even when a player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 170(b) and 170(c), the second performance is A fourth post-reception performance (a fourth post-reception specific performance) using the device is started to be performed prior to a fourth post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. There is.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tI3a when the reception is received in the fourth reception period, but only a part of the performance after the fourth reception (the display of the performance after the fourth reception) is delayed, The fourth post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tI3a without delay.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 178(d) to "C1 (Fig. 179(e1) to (i1))" (in a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 179(e1) As shown in FIG. As the 4th post-reception specific performance UGT4-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific performance UGT4, the fourth post-reception performance (4th post-reception performance display UG4-1) using the above-mentioned first performance device Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C2 (FIGS. 179(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. e2), the manner in which “two swords” are displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from that in the fourth post-reception specific presentation UGT 4 (corresponding to the fourth reception period). As the 4th post-reception specific performance UGT4-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the 4th post-reception specific performance UGT4, the fourth post-reception performance (4th post-reception performance display UG4-2) using the above-mentioned first performance device is implemented. ) is started before execution.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 178, apart from the first omen production display ZEH1 in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also corresponds to the fourth reception period. The foreshadowing effect (fourth omen specific effect) is executed (FIGS. 178(b) to (d)). The fourth omen specific performance on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) is different from the first omen performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and the timing tI3 at which the first reception period occurs is It is executed even at the time when the timing tI3 is reached, and is executed across the timing tI3.

In this embodiment, the omen performance corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as a performance (fourth omen identification performance) different from the first omen identification performance shown in FIG. 174. It may be executed as the same effect as the first omen specific effect shown. In this case, even when checking the second presentation device, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period will occur.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the fourth reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 170(d) is At tI2, an acceptance acceptance sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 178(b) to 178(d)) is started to be output. In other words, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the fourth acceptance period is one that is audibly output across the timing tI3 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 178(d)") when the fourth acceptance period occurs. The player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, the reception permission sound is terminated midway (audible) based on the acceptance. (terminates the output state midway).

In addition, in the fourth acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, not only will the reception permission sound be terminated midway, but also the Based on this, the audible output of a fourth post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in FIG. 179 (e1) or (e2), etc.) that is different from the first post-acceptance output sound is started. It becomes. In other words, in this case, in the fourth reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (reception permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the effect that the reception has been made. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance (output sound after the fourth reception) performed accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 170(d), such a fourth post-reception output sound is similar to the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4", as shown in FIG. " will continue to be executed for a relatively long time even after it is hidden ("Situation where ♪♪ is output in Figure 179 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)") ). Regarding the output sound after the fourth reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 178(d) to "C2 (Fig. 179(e2) to (i2))" (a case in which expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

Regarding the acceptance permission sound that is output corresponding to the fourth acceptance period, in order to make it difficult to recognize whether it occurs during the first acceptance period or the fourth acceptance period, it is necessary to It is desirable that the sound is the same as the corresponding acceptance acceptance sound. However, they do not necessarily have to be the same.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 170, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes that the action by the person is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the fourth acceptance period has occurred, the timing tI4 will arrive without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI4 (the point in time when the fourth acceptance period ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI3a (the fourth Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player's movement is accepted within the acceptance period of In addition to not hiding the integrated image display IG, the integrated image display IG is also not made to be difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the fourth reception period ends because the player's action is not accepted in time, the integrated simulation will not be performed within the fourth reception period after the end of the fourth reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 179 (f3), the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". -1 or the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “fourth extinction related display SK4-” is displayed. 1 or 2nd disappearance related display SK4-2'' is displayed, and at least a part of the area where ``4th disappearance related display SK4'' is displayed is displayed as ``integrated image display IG (sample image display , gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the fourth acceptance period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the fourth acceptance period has ended. Furthermore, even in a situation where the fourth reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player's action is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4-1" is displayed as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. The case means that if the player's action had been accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the effect would have progressed from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIG. 179(e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations is executed. On the other hand, the case where "4th extinction related display SK4-2" is displayed as the fourth extinction related display SK4 when the player's action is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period means If the action by the player had been accepted in the above, the effect would have progressed from FIG. 178(d) to "C2 (FIG. 179(e2) to (i2))" This corresponds to the case where a high post-reception performance was executed).

In other words, in this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the fourth acceptance period ends. By simply checking the mode of "4th disappearance related display SK4" (4th disappearance related display SK4-1, 4th disappearance related display SK4-2) that appears, you can see that the performance after the 4th reception is in a low expected manner. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether it has been executed in a highly expected manner, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 179 (g3), among the "integrated model image display IG" and "fourth disappearance related display SK4", first, "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. do. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 179 (h3).

In addition, in the fourth reception period, similarly to the first reception period, the corresponding post-reception effects are modes with low expectations (Fig. 179 (e1) to (i1)) and modes with high expectation (Fig. 179 (e1) to (i1)). 179(e2) to (i2)), the same specific aspect may appear as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. However, in this case, even when the player's action is not accepted in the fourth acceptance period, the same specific aspect will appear as the fourth extinction related display SK4, unlike in the case of the first acceptance period described above. Become.

By the way, as mentioned above, in both the first reception period and the fourth reception period, the first effect display TE ( Here, a second effect display FE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect") and a second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed.

In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 174(b) and 174(c), in a situation where the "first portent effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the first effect display TE And the second effect display FE is made so that it is not made difficult to visually recognize by the "first omen effect display ZEH1". In addition, after the first reception period ends, as shown in FIGS. mode) and the first disappearance related display SK1-2 (the mode when the acceptance is not accepted), but the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first disappearance related display SK1 (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 or first disappearance-related display SK1-2) does not make it difficult to see.

On the other hand, even when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 178(b) and 178(c), the first effect display is The TE and the second effect display FE are not made difficult to visually recognize by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1." Furthermore, after the fourth reception period ends, as shown in FIGS. -1 or the fourth extinction-related display SK4-2), but the first effect display TE is not made difficult to recognize by the fourth extinction-related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to visually recognize by the fourth disappearance related display SK4.

According to such a configuration, even if it is not remembered which type of reception period the type of extinction-related display SK corresponds to, the second effect is displayed when the extinction-related display SK is displayed. By simply checking whether the display FE is made difficult to view, it becomes possible to infer which type of reception period has occurred. In addition, the first effect display TE is configured not to be made difficult to recognize by the disappearance related display SK, regardless of whether or not the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the disappearance related display SK. Therefore, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed, and then the "second reception effect display UG2" is displayed. During the period up to, the first effect display TE may be displayed among the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, but the second effect display FE is not displayed. .

In other words, in this case, the type of reception period can be inferred (at least the first Since it is now possible to guess that it is neither the reception period nor the fourth reception period, the second effect display FE itself does not imply the degree of expectation regarding the changing symbol effect. Even so, it becomes possible to provide an interesting performance using the second performance display FE.

In addition, even when the second reception period occurs, the first effect display TE will be difficult to visually recognize due to the foreshadowing effect display and disappearance-related display, as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception period and the above-mentioned fourth reception period. It is made so that it will not be affected.

FIG. 171 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception production) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "fifth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the fifth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) corresponding to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the performance related to the "fifth variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), the fifth predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ. When the elapsed timing tJ3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "reception regarding the performance after the fifth operation" is allowed. The fifth acceptance period (validity period) is generated. As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the fifth post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fifth reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the fifth reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (in the first performance device) "5th post-reception performance display", "5th post-reception specific performance" on the second performance device, and "5th post-reception output sound" on the third performance device) are displayed after each reception corresponding to other reception periods. This is different from the production (the "post-reception production display" in the first production device, the "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). Further, the "fifth omen effect display" corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is also different from each omen effect display corresponding to other reception periods. However, the methods for displaying the "Fifth post-reception effect display" and "Fifth omen effect display" (the start and end times of the display, and how it compares with other image displays until it is hidden) 167, 168, etc.) are explained in the display effects performed in connection with the first reception period, the display effects performed in connection with the second reception period, etc. 174 to 177), and the other configurations are basically the same.

Hereinafter, a description will be given of the performance performed in connection with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance). However, regarding the configuration that is the same as the first reception period (first reception performance) or the second reception period (second reception performance), we may mention that it is the same, but beyond that. We omit the explanation here. In other words, regarding matters not specifically mentioned, the performance will be performed as explained in the first reception period (first reception performance) or the second reception period (second reception performance), and there will be no exceptions or variations. The same applies to examples.

For example, timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG1 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when timing tJ1 arrives, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the "fifth omen effect display" is started to be executed as the above-mentioned omen effect display.

In this regard, the "fifth omen effect display" is of a type that is displayed across the timing tJ3 at which the fifth reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 171(b). That is, although the "fifth omen effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "second omen effect display ZEH2" that is displayed corresponding to the second reception period in terms of the effect content (display image), the "display start time and Regarding the end time and how it interacts with other image displays until it is hidden, etc., the "second omen effect display ZEH2" will be explained with reference to FIGS. 168, 176, and 177. The display will be performed using the same method as described above. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

Furthermore, timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG2 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed while the "fifth omen effect display" is being displayed, and the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed. At least a part of the area in which the ``sample image display IG'' is displayed overlaps with the area in which the ``fifth omen effect display'' is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3 shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when timing tJ3 arrives, the fifth reception period occurs while the "fifth omen effect display" and "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" are being displayed. It happens.

Furthermore, timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3a shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when the action by the player is accepted at timing tI3a, the fifth acceptance period ends, and the post-acceptance performance (fifth post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the fifth reception period starts to be executed. It happens. Note that, similarly to the first post-reception performance (Fig. 175) and the second post-reception performance (Fig. 177), the fifth post-reception performance also differs between the case where the first aspect with relatively low expectations is executed and the case where the relatively low expectation level is executed. There are cases where the second mode with high expectations is executed.

Furthermore, timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3b shown in FIG. 168. Therefore, when timing tJ3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" will appear.

In this regard, when an application is received during the fifth reception period, the above-mentioned "first extinction related display SK1" which corresponds to the first reception period in common with the first reception period is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". The display is set to start. 167 and 175 for "first disappearance related display SK1" and "start and end times of display, how to relate to other image displays until it is hidden", etc. As explained with reference to. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

However, regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the fifth reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, the performance after the fifth reception is "relatively expected Different modes may appear depending on when the "first mode with a low level of expectation" is executed and when the "second mode with a relatively high expectation level" is executed.

For example, when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the "first disappearance-related display SK1 (Here, the first extinction related display SK1-1 (FIG. 175) which is the first aspect) is displayed.On the other hand, as the performance after the fifth reception, the first extinction related display SK1-1 (FIG. 175) which is the first mode When the "mode" is executed, if a mode different from "first disappearance related display SK1-1" appears as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see", the first reception When the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed in accordance with the period, make the user aware of the possibility that "the second mode with relatively high expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception effect. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In this case, when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception production, the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the first post-reception production. It is desirable to set the expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) to be higher than the actual time. The percentage may be 100%.

In addition, when the "first aspect with relatively low expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the "first disappearance related display SK1- 1", a "first extinction related display SK1-2 which is a second aspect of the first extinction related display SK1" may appear as the different mode. In other words, in this case, when the first extinction related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first extinction related display SK1-2 appeared as a result of the acceptance in the fifth acceptance period, or whether the first extinction related indication SK1-2 appeared as a result of the acceptance in the fifth acceptance period, It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the first disappearance related display SK1-2 has appeared as a result of not being able to receive the application in time, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "second aspect with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. When the "1st disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "relative expectation" is set as a production after the fifth reception. In order to more appropriately make people aware of the possibility that the "second mode with a low degree of intensity" will be executed, the foreshadowing effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period should be used instead of the "fifth omen effect display". It is desirable that the "first omen effect display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period be executed.

In addition, even if an application is received in the fifth reception period, as shown in FIG. 171, the second The fifth post-reception performance (fifth post-reception specific performance) using the production device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is changed to the fifth post-reception production (fifth post-reception production display) using the first production device. Start execution in advance. Similarly, the fifth post-reception specific performance is executed in such a way that different aspects appear depending on the level of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, a precursor performance (fifth precursor specific performance) corresponding to the fifth reception period may be executed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) as well. Furthermore, the omen identification effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first omen identification effect shown in FIG. 174, rather than the fifth omen identification effect. Good too.

Also, when the fifth acceptance period occurs, output of the acceptance permission sound is started at timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 171(d), this acceptance permission sound is of a type that ends midway when acceptance is made. In the example shown in FIG. 171(d), similar to the reception permissible sound that is audibly output when the second reception period occurs, the "long-term permissible sound" and the "short-time permissible sound" are each audibly output as the reception permissible sound. 168, 176, and Figure 176 for details such as ``when to start and end the audible output, and how to interact with other productions until the audible output ends.'' The audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance permissible sound" with reference to No. 177. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

However, regarding the reception permission sound that is output when the fifth reception period occurs, just like the reception permission sound that is output when the third reception period and the fourth reception period occur, only one reception permission sound is output. may be output, and when it is accepted, it may be output as being terminated midway.

In any case, in the fifth acceptance period, if a player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated midway, but also the acceptance is made. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the fifth post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output corresponding to other acceptance periods, is started. In other words, in this case, in the fifth reception period, as in the case of the second reception period, the production performed within the reception period (reception acceptable sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (fifth reception There is no conflict (overlapping) with the output sound (rear output sound).

Note that, similarly to the output sound after the first reception and the output sound after the second reception, the fifth post-reception output sound also has a relatively The audible output is different from that when the second mode is executed, which is highly expected.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 171, if the player's action is not accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the player's action is not accepted after the fifth acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned timing tJ4 arrives without any delay.

In this regard, even in the fifth acceptance period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tJ4 (the point in time when the fifth acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer allowed) In addition to not hiding the integrated model image display IG, the integrated model image display IG is not made to be difficult to see.

After this, even if no action is accepted by the player, the display of the fifth disappearance related display SK5 will be started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize."

If the application is not accepted during the fifth acceptance period, regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see," as with the second acceptance period, the acceptance will be temporarily accepted during the fifth acceptance period. The mode that would have appeared if it had been (different modes depending on the level of expectation) now appears. However, similar to the first acceptance period, an aspect that cannot appear when the application is accepted in the fifth acceptance period may be made to appear.

FIG. 172 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception production) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "sixth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the sixth variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the sixth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the sixth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) corresponding to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "sixth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the production related to the "sixth variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (preliminary judgment), the sixth predetermined time period after the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ When the elapsed timing tK3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding production after the 6th operation" is allowed. The sixth acceptance period (validity period) is generated. As a result, if an action by the player is accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the sixth post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the sixth reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the sixth reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (in the first performance device) "6th post-reception performance display", "6th post-reception specific performance" on the second performance device, and "6th post-reception output sound" on the third performance device) are displayed after each reception corresponding to other reception periods. This is different from the production (the "post-reception production display" in the first production device, the "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). In addition, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance), the simulated image display (here In this case, the integrated image display) is hidden. However, the method of displaying "6th reception effect display" and "sample image display" (such as when the display starts and ends, and how it compares with other image displays until it is hidden) Regarding the display effects (such as whether it is involved or not), it is the same as that explained in the display effects (FIGS. 167, 174, and 175) performed in connection with the first reception period, and the other configurations are also as follows. This method is basically the same as any of the methods described above.

Hereinafter, a description will be given of the performance performed in connection with the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance). However, regarding the configurations that are the same as those in the first reception period (first reception performance), we may mention that they are the same, but further explanation will be omitted here. That is, regarding matters that are not particularly mentioned, the presentation will be performed as explained in the first reception period (first reception presentation), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tK1 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tK1 arrives, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the "first precursor effect display" is started to be executed as the foreshadow effect display.

Furthermore, timing tK2 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tK2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed while the "first portent effect display" is being displayed, and the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed. At least a part of the area in which "sample image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which "first omen effect display" is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tK3 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Furthermore, timing tK3a shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the action by the player is accepted at timing tK3a, the sixth acceptance period ends and the execution of the post-acceptance performance (sixth post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the sixth reception period is started. It happens. Note that the sixth post-reception performance is similar to the first post-reception performance (FIG. 175), in which the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed. There are cases where it is executed.

However, as shown in FIG. 172, there is no process related to the performance related to the sixth reception period that corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. Gauge image display) will not become difficult to visually recognize until it is hidden. This is true regardless of whether the ``low expectation mode'' or the ``high expectation mode'' appears as the performance after the sixth reception (timing tF3b does not exist). The same holds true when the sixth acceptance period ends without any action by the player being accepted during the sixth acceptance period (timing tF3b does not exist).

According to such a configuration, during other reception periods, the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" can be visually recognized until the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is hidden after the reception period ends. Despite the appearance of aspects that make it difficult to display, the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is hidden during the sixth acceptance period even if the acceptance period ends. Since the mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize this (disappearance-related display SK) does not appear during this period, it is possible that the sixth acceptance period has ended (a situation in which the player's actions have been discontinued). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether there is something in the situation, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even if the application is received during the sixth reception period, as shown in FIG. 172, based on the reception, the second production device (here, A sixth post-reception performance (sixth post-reception specific performance) using the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is started to be executed prior to a sixth post-reception performance (sixth post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. . Similarly, the sixth post-reception specific performance is executed in such a way that different aspects appear depending on the level of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, a precursor performance (sixth precursor specific performance) corresponding to the sixth reception period may be executed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) as well. Furthermore, the omen identification effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first omen identification effect shown in FIG. 174, rather than the sixth omen identification effect. Good too.

Also, when the sixth acceptance period occurs, output of the acceptance permission sound is started at timing tK2. As shown in FIG. 172(d), this acceptance permission sound is of a type that ends midway when acceptance is made. 170, FIG. 178, and FIG. The audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance acceptable sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period with reference to No. 179. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

However, regarding the reception permission sound that is output when the sixth reception period occurs, two reception permission sounds are output respectively in the same way as the reception permission sound that is output when the second reception period occurs. When the process is executed, the process may be outputted as being terminated prematurely.

In any case, in the sixth acceptance period, if a player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated midway, but also the acceptance is made. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the sixth post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output in response to other reception periods, is started. In other words, in this case, in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, there will be a performance performed within the reception period (reception acceptable sound) and a performance performed in response to the reception (sixth reception). There is no conflict (overlapping) with the output sound (rear output sound).

Note that the output sound after the sixth reception, as well as the output sound after the first reception and the output sound after the fourth reception, is different from the case where the after-reception effect is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectations. The audible output is different from that when the second mode is executed, which is highly expected.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 172, if the player's action is not accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the player's action is not accepted after the sixth acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned timing tK4 arrives without any delay.

In this regard, even in the sixth acceptance period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tK4 (the point in time when the sixth acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer allowed) In addition to not hiding the integrated model image display IG, the integrated model image display IG is not made to be difficult to see. However, as mentioned above, during the sixth acceptance period, after the above-mentioned timing tK4 arrives without receiving any action by the player, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" does not appear. .

FIG. 173 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "seventh variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the seventh variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the seventh variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation production, a notice is given. A performance (preliminary performance) according to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "seventh variation pattern" itself.

However, in the performance related to the "seventh variation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), the seventh predetermined time period has passed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ. When the elapsed timing tL3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance regarding production after the 7th operation" is allowed. The seventh acceptance period (validity period) is generated. As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the seventh post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the seventh reception period (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the seventh post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (in the first performance device) "7th post-reception performance display", "7th post-reception specific performance" on the second performance device, and "7th post-reception output sound" on the third performance device) are displayed after each reception corresponding to other reception periods. This is different from the production (the "post-reception production display" in the first production device, the "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). Further, the "seventh omen effect display" corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) is also different from each omen effect display corresponding to other reception periods. In addition, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to this embodiment, even if the "integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", each extinction-related display corresponding to the other reception period A different "7th extinction related display" appears. However, the methods for displaying the "7th post-reception effect display", "7th omen effect display", and "7th disappearance related display" (the start and end times of the display, and the time until it is hidden) (how it interacts with other image displays in between, etc.) is the same as that explained in any of the display effects performed in connection with each reception period mentioned above, and other configurations are basically the same.

Hereinafter, a description will be given of the performance performed in connection with the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance). However, regarding the configurations that are the same as in other reception periods (other reception performances), we will mention that they are the same, but will omit further explanation here. Further, regarding matters not specifically mentioned, the presentation will be performed as explained in the first reception period (first reception presentation), and the same can be applied to other examples and modifications.

For example, timing tL1 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tL1 arrives, the display of the foreshadow effect starts to be executed on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

However, as mentioned above, during the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance), the "seventh precursor performance display", which does not correspond to other reception periods, is displayed as a corresponding precursor performance display. There is. As shown in FIG. 173(b), the "seventh omen effect display" is of a type that is not displayed when the seventh reception period occurs and is hidden before this period. . In other words, although the "seventh omen effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "first omen effect display ZEH1" that is displayed corresponding to the first reception period in terms of the effect content (display image), the "seventh omen effect display" is different from the "display start time and Regarding the end time and how it interacts with other image displays until it is hidden, etc., please refer to FIG. 168 and FIG. The display is done using a method. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

Furthermore, timing tL2 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed while the "seventh portent effect display" is being displayed, and the "integrated image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" will be displayed. At least a part of the area in which the "sample image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "seventh omen effect display" is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tL3 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Furthermore, timing tL3a shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the action by the player is accepted at timing tL3a, the seventh acceptance period ends, and the execution of the post-acceptance performance (seventh post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the seventh acceptance period is started. It happens. Note that, similarly to the first post-reception performance (Fig. 175), in the seventh post-reception performance, there are cases in which the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and cases where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed. There are cases where it is executed.

Furthermore, timing tL3b shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when timing tL3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" will appear. However, as mentioned above, when an application is accepted during the seventh acceptance period, the "seventh disappearance related display" that does not correspond to other acceptance periods is displayed as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". The display will start (timing tL3b).

Here, although the "seventh extinction related display" differs in presentation content (display image) from the above-mentioned "first extinction related display SK1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period, "display start time 167, FIG. 168, FIG. The display is performed in the same manner as described for "Display SK1". The same applies to other examples and modifications. In addition, in both cases where the seventh post-reception production is executed as a mode with relatively low expectations and when it is executed as a mode with relatively high expectations, "display" is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception period in that it is displayed in the same manner.

However, regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (seventh disappearance related display)" corresponding to the seventh reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, the presentation after the seventh reception Different modes may appear depending on when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed and when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed.

Further, timing tL3c shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 167. Therefore, when the timing tL3c arrives, the player does not receive a request within the seventh acceptance period while the display related to the "seventh extinction related display" (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) is appearing. In response to the reception of the motion, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) starts executing the "seventh post-reception performance display" as a post-reception performance.

In addition, even if the application is received during the seventh reception period, as shown in FIG. 173, based on the reception, the second production device (here, A seventh post-reception performance (seventh post-reception specific performance) using the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is started to be executed prior to a seventh post-reception performance (seventh post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. . Similarly, the seventh post-reception specific performance is executed in such a way that different aspects appear depending on the level of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, a precursor performance (seventh precursor specific performance) corresponding to the seventh reception period may be executed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) as well. Further, the omen identification effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first omen identification effect shown in FIG. 174, rather than the seventh omen identification effect. Good too.

Also, when the seventh acceptance period occurs, output of the acceptance permission sound is started at timing tL2. As shown in FIG. 173(d), this acceptance permission sound is of a type that ends midway when acceptance is made. 170, FIG. 178, and FIG. The audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance acceptable sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period with reference to No. 179. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

However, regarding the reception permission sound that is output when the seventh reception period occurs, two reception permission sounds are output respectively in the same way as the reception permission sound that is output when the second reception period occurs. When the process is executed, the process may be outputted as being terminated prematurely.

In any case, in the seventh acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated midway, but also the acceptance is made. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the seventh post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output corresponding to other reception periods, is started. In other words, in this case, in the seventh reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, there will be a performance performed within the reception period (reception acceptable sound) and a performance performed in response to the reception (seventh reception). There is no conflict (overlapping) with the output sound (rear output sound).

Note that, similarly to the output sound after the first reception and the output sound after the fourth reception, the seventh post-reception output sound also has a relatively The audible output is different from that when the second mode is executed, which is highly expected.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 173, if the player's action is not accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the player's action is not accepted after the seventh acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned timing tL4 arrives without any delay.

In this regard, even in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tL4 (the point in time when the seventh acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer allowed) In addition to not hiding the integrated model image display IG, the integrated model image display IG is not made to be difficult to see.

After this, even if no action is accepted by the player, the seventh disappearance related display will be started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize."

Regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to view" when the application is not accepted during the seventh reception period, the same as the first reception period, the application is not accepted during the seventh reception period. At times, aspects that would otherwise never appear are beginning to appear. However, like the second reception period, the mode that would have appeared if the application had been accepted in the seventh reception period (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) may be made to appear.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, which is provided with such a first reception period to a seventh reception period, excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

That is, first of all, no matter which of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occurs, regarding the sample image display that is displayed using a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), The display can be displayed even after the performance is progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action (after the performance change based on the acceptance is started). As a result, even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance, the game player can check in which mode (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)) the sample image was displayed during the acceptance period. This makes it possible for people to understand.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are advanced when an acceptance is received (conversation preview as a performance after reception, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc.), and the preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance) ) We have prepared multiple reception periods (1st reception period to 7th reception period) with different types (types of), and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of the type according to the result of the judgment (direction judgment). It is said that

In this regard, during the first reception period to the seventh reception period, if a movement by the player is accepted, the post-reception performance display (from the first reception performance display to the seventh After reception, the effect display) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Of these, in the first to fifth acceptance periods and the seventh acceptance period, if a player's action is accepted, a post-acceptance performance display is displayed based on the acceptance. In addition, ``a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' is made to appear. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which mode appeared as the sample image display, but also to check whether the ``sample image'' is displayed before the sample image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility of the image display in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize it (disappearance-related display), the player's attention naturally shifts from the "sample image display" to the "post-reception performance display." It is now expected that people will be able to

However, since the sample image display is originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, if the sample image display is to be displayed even after the acceptance has been made, It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the performance display is already displayed after the reception, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, when an acceptance is made during any of the first to fifth acceptance periods, and the seventh acceptance period, the sample image display is changed to ``a mode in which the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display )" is hidden (invisible), while the post-reception effect display is displayed while "a mode in which the sample image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is appearing. I try to do that. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, the display changes from the pre-acceptance display (sample image display) to the post-acceptance display while "a manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" appears. The transition to the display performance (post-reception performance display) will be realized.

It should be noted that both the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-reception performance display" are common in that they are displayed based on reception. However, "the manner in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 175 (f1), FIG. 177 (f1), FIG. 179 (f1), etc. It appears in such a way that it is difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display when a display is being displayed. On the other hand, "post-reception presentation display" refers to a situation in which a sample image display is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 175 (g1), FIG. 177 (g1), and FIG. 179 (g1). Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it is displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. Furthermore, in each of the above examples, it was decided that the "post-reception performance display" would start displaying when the sample image display was being displayed; however, for the "post-reception production display", the sample image display The display does not necessarily have to be started when the image is being displayed, and the display may be started after the sample image display is hidden.

Regarding the "manner in which the scale image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance-related display)", the method of "appearing in a manner that makes the scale image display difficult to recognize" is to remove at least part of the area where the scale image display is displayed. In addition to methods that are achieved by preferentially displaying an image display that is different from the sample image display (displayed on the front layer), there is also a method that achieves this by displaying an image different from the sample image display as a priority (displaying it on the front layer). It is possible to adopt a method that achieves this by displaying an image (video) that is made to be visible (invisibly). Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a method of changing numerical values (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the sample image display itself, rather than displaying a separate image from the sample image display. On the other hand, regarding the "post-reception performance display", a method for "appearing in a manner that does not make the sample image display difficult to see" is to display the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area where the sample image display is displayed. However, in addition to a method that is realized by displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displayed on the rear layer) in a manner where the sample image display is prioritized, at least while the sample image display is being displayed. It is possible to adopt a method in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed only in an area other than the area where the sample image display is displayed.

In addition, as a mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display), a method of displaying an image display different from the simulated image display in at least a part of the area where the simulated image display is displayed, It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing numerical values (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself.

In addition, "a state in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" refers to a situation in which the "post-reception performance display" is not yet displayed, before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. It appears below. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" has not yet been displayed, the sample image display becomes difficult to see due to the above-mentioned "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". Therefore, even though the sample image display is made visible, the ``post-reception performance display'' may appear soon, and the player's attention is made to change from the ``display of the sample image that is difficult to see''. You will be able to prompt people in advance to prepare.

In addition, if the application is received during the first to fifth reception period, seventh reception period, etc., the ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' will be changed to ``post-reception presentation display.'' ” can be displayed even after the “post-reception effect display” is displayed, and is hidden while the “post-reception effect display” is displayed. As a result, during the period during which the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and the "post-reception effect display" is displayed in a wider range. Since it becomes possible to provide the effects related to the "post-reception effects display," it becomes possible to improve the game's interest by changing the effects during such a display period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, FIG. 175 (g1), (h1), FIG. As shown in 179 (g1) and (h1), regarding the "manner in which the display of a sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the sample image display is displayed, but also the area where the sample image display is displayed. is displayed even in areas where it is not displayed. In this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of the area, but due to the "mode in which the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. At least a part of the "display" is displayed in such a way that it is difficult to see (for example, displayed on a rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the ``mode in which the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' appears as one that makes not only the sample image display but also the ``post-reception effect display'' difficult to visually recognize. It is expected that this will improve both the performance until the sample image display is hidden, and the performance when the display of the "post-reception performance display" starts. Become.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the production examples described above regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. '' is not displayed, apart from the ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'', there is a specific presentation after reception that does not make the sample image display difficult to see (using the second presentation device). (After reception) can appear in a manner depending on the level of expectation. This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance in advance of this without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) Appears in a situation where the "state in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" occurs before the "state in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" appears. That's what I do. In addition, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) will continue until after the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" has ended. There is.

According to this configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance using the second performance device, which has a simpler performance. It is possible to improve the interest in gaming for various types of players.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, it is assumed that the precursory performance display is executed over the timing at which the sample image display is displayed. In addition, in some of the above-mentioned production examples, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, it is possible to receive an application while the precursor production display is displayed, and when the reception is made, The "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is such that both the sample image display and the precursor effect display are made difficult to visually recognize (such as the above-mentioned priority display).

However, on the other hand, at least at the time when the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" appears, neither the simulated image display nor the precursor effect display overlaps with the entirety of them. , allowing at least some unobstructed visibility. That is, by gradually deteriorating the visibility of the sample image display and the precursor effect display (increasing the overlapping area), "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is executed. There is.

Also, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the simulated image display is dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. becomes. In this case, the dynamic display of the sample image has not been terminated and will continue even though ``a manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' has appeared since the acceptance of the sample image display. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, "a mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is limited to the display of the sample image. In addition, we decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of production, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, based on the acceptance, after the first acceptance The effect display UG1 can be displayed, and a mode (first extinction related display SK1) in which the simulated image display is difficult to visually recognize can appear separately from the first post-reception effect display UG1. Furthermore, if a player's action is accepted within a second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, a second post-acceptance effect display UG1 different from the first post-acceptance performance display UG1 is displayed based on the acceptance. The post-reception performance display UG2 can be displayed, and in addition to the second post-reception performance display UG2, a mode different from that in the first reception period (second A disappearance related display SK2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, the sample image display can be performed without checking which of the "first post-reception performance display UG1" and the "second post-reception performance display UG2" is displayed as the post-reception performance display. It becomes possible to infer the type of post-acceptance performance display by simply checking what mode (first disappearance-related display SK1, second disappearance-related display SK2) was the mode that made it difficult to visually recognize.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the third acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, it is determined that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, it is possible to display a third post-reception performance display that is different from both the "first post-reception performance display UG1" and the "second post-reception performance display UG2," but it is possible to display a third post-reception performance display that is different from the third post-reception performance display UG1. Apart from this, the above-mentioned mode (first extinction related display SK1) corresponding to the above-mentioned first reception period can also appear as a production mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display.

According to such a configuration, when the first disappearance related display SK1 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception performance displays will appear, as a mode in which the simulated image display is made difficult to visually recognize. However, as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display, when the second disappearance related display SK2 appears, it is possible to infer that the second post-reception effect display will appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a "disappearance-related display" is used to display (prioritized display) a "mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" in an area that includes at least a part of the area where the scale image display is displayed. We decided to realize it as However, it is also possible to realize a performance using a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the simulated image display when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1) appears as the "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display", if the type of acceptance period is different, the jackpot symbol will be won due to the symbol change. It is desirable that the rate (expectation level) of stopping is different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the precursor performance display is the same (the first precursor performance display), but when the "first extinction related display SK1" appears as a "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" (the first (3rd reception period) and a mode different from the "1st extinction related display SK1" appears (4th reception period), or when this mode does not appear (6th reception period) ).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, although the foreshadowing performance displays (the first harbinger performance display, the fourth harbinger performance display) are different, the same aspect (the first disappearance related display SK1 ) may appear (first reception period, fifth reception period).

According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to guess the type of reception period until it is determined which type of performance is being executed after reception, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute a post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and the execution of the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is possible. During the period, the first performance device has a state in which the simulated image display is relatively easy to view and a state in which the simulated image display is relatively difficult to recognize.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started based on the reception, it is still necessary to check which mode has appeared as the sample image display. It is possible to confirm. In addition, during the execution period of the post-reception presentation (post-reception specific presentation) using the second presentation device, by making the sample image display relatively difficult to see, it is possible to It is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his gaze to the "second performance device."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is based on the visibility of the sample image display that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before the reception. Execution is started in such a way that it does not affect the More specifically, the sample image display is displayed in a predetermined area on the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is This is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it an effect that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance production display is started after the appearance timing of the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", but the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. The display may be started at the timing when "" appears.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "mode in which the display of the model image becomes difficult to visually recognize" is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area where the display of the model image is displayed." I decided to do so. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image in such a way that the area displayed in the "area where the sample image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the sample image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations. According to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode, including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., is maintained and continued even after acceptance. It is also possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image was displayed within the acceptance period.

However, in this case, if the period is immediately after the reception, the post-reception performance must be performed under such conditions (the display related to the sample image display is maintained). That is, the range of performance is narrow, and only a limited performance (post-reception performance using only a performance device different from the first performance device) can be performed. However, as time passes and "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the map image display (disappearance-related display)" appears, the post-reception performance will be performed under the condition that "the visibility of the map image display may be deteriorated." Since this becomes possible, it becomes possible to execute the "post-reception performance display in the first performance device" under such conditions. By performing these two post-operation effects with different characteristics (the specific effect after reception in the second effect device and the effect display after reception in the first effect device) in stages, it is possible to control the manner in which the sample image is displayed even after acceptance. While making it easy to confirm, it is also possible to suitably play a role as a post-operation effect.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, if the second precursor production display is displayed as a premonition production display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, "the pattern image display becomes difficult to see". "The second disappearance related display SK1 (FIG. 177) appears. In addition, if the 7th portent effect display is displayed as a harbinger effect display, if the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period, the 7th extinction related display will appear as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" It looks like this. On the other hand, if the "first omen effect display" that is different from the above-mentioned "second omen effect display" or the above-mentioned "seventh omen effect display" is displayed as the omen effect display, within the corresponding reception period. When acceptance is made, the first disappearance-related display appears (in the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period) and the fourth disappearance-related indication appears (as a manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize). There is a fourth reception period).

That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect display or the seventh precursor effect display is displayed as a precursor effect display, at that point, the system recognizes what mode appears as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". You will be able to do so.

Moreover, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "first portent performance display" which is different from the specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second portent performance display" or the above-mentioned "seventh portent performance display") is used as the portent performance display. is displayed, even if the application is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, there are cases in which the ``condition in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize'' does not appear (sixth acceptance period). There is.

According to such a configuration, the foreshadowing effect display is in a mode (here, the first omen effect display) that is different from the specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second omen effect display" or the above-mentioned "seventh omen effect display"). If executed, whether the above-mentioned "manner in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself appears within the period from the time when the acceptance is made until the display of the sample image is hidden. Since the image is now considered unknown, the performance from the time it is accepted until the sample image display is hidden has been improved, making it possible to maintain a good sense of tension. become able to.

In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples may be realized by being modified to the following configuration, or the following configuration (reception period) may be further provided as another reception period (another omen production display). Good too. In other words, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when a movement by a player is accepted during the acceptance period until when the simulated image display is hidden, "the simulated image display becomes difficult to see". ``aspects'' can appear. In this regard, in this modification, when a specific aspect (for example, the second omen effect display, the seventh omen effect display, or another omen effect display not mentioned above) is displayed as the omen effect display, Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the above-mentioned ``mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize'' itself is prevented from appearing. In other words, in this case, from the time when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner until the sample image display is hidden, the ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' does not appear and the ``sample image display'' is not displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the display of the sample image is not made difficult to recognize due to the relationship between the "mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize".

In this case, also in this modified example, if the precursor effect display is executed as the "first precursor effect display" and the reception is received within the corresponding reception period, the reception will not be accepted within the corresponding reception period. (1st reception period, 3rd reception period, 4th reception period) and 2. Cases where the ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' appears when ” may not appear (sixth reception period). Even with such a configuration, the foreshadowing effect display may be different from a specific aspect (for example, the second omen effect display, the seventh omen effect display, or another omen effect display not mentioned above) (here, , the first precursor effect display), it is unclear whether the above-mentioned ``mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' will appear. The performance until the image display is turned off is improved, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Regarding the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), each configuration applicable to the above configuration before modification can be applied as appropriate.

In addition, in each of the performance examples described above, if a specific mode (here, "second precursor performance display") is displayed as a precursor performance display, the player's action within the corresponding acceptance period is Even if the application is not accepted, the "form in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is made to appear in the same manner as it would have been if the reception had been accepted.

On the other hand, if a mode (here, "first portent effect display") different from the specific mode (here, "second portent effect display") is displayed as the portent effect display, the corresponding mode is displayed. When a different mode appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" depending on whether the action by the player is accepted or not within the acceptance period (such as during the first acceptance period); Even if the player's action is not accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, the ``mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' will appear in the same manner as it would have been if the acceptance had been accepted. There are cases (such as the fourth reception period).

According to such a configuration, by using a performance (precursive performance display) that is performed before the reception period occurs, the performance after the reception period ends or the performance when the reception is not accepted. etc. will be able to be improved.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, specific modes (here, the second disappearance-related display, the fourth disappearance-related display, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc.) appear as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". During the possible reception period, the audible output state of the reception permissible sound is terminated midway, but a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first extinction related display) is defined as a "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". During the acceptance period in which the acceptance permission sound can appear, there are cases in which the audible output state of the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway, and cases in which the audible output state of the reception permission sound is not terminated midway. According to such a configuration, by checking the output status of the acceptance permissible sound when an acceptance is received, a situation may arise in which it is easy to guess what kind of mode will appear as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Since situations that are difficult to predict will appear, it is possible to improve the game's interest.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the acceptance acceptance sound that can be used as such judgment material is terminated at a timing earlier than the timing at which the acceptance period ends (timing within the acceptance period). Since the audible output is made as a sound, is it possible to accept the acceptance while the acceptance acceptable sound is in the audible output state, or is the acceptance made after the acceptance acceptable sound is in the audible output state? You will be able to play the game by selecting whether you want to play the game.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, during the reception period in which the precursor production display is executed in a specific manner (for example, the second precursor production display), the sample image display may be performed in a plurality of formats (for example, from FIG. 144(a) to The four modes shown in (d)) are enabled to be displayed, and during the reception period in which the foreshadowing effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first omen effect display), the sample image It is desirable to have a mode that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) to 144(d) are not displayed, and only FIG. 144(a) is displayed). .

Furthermore, in each of the performance examples described above, in the reception period of a specific type, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display performance that suggests that the reception period in which actions by the player will be accepted will soon occur. Of the multiple types of precursor performance displays, specific precursor performance displays (second precursor performance display, fifth precursor performance display) can be executed over the timing at which the corresponding reception period occurs. , the player's actions can be accepted while the specific precursor performance display is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, since the player's actions can be accepted while it is still possible to confirm which type (form) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (form) of the precursor effect display can be changed. A decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to check can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a movement by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed, execution of a post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance is started; Even when the execution of the performance is started, the specific precursor performance display is not hidden but is displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's action is accepted while it is still possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, and furthermore, the execution of the effect after acceptance according to the acceptance is started. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type (form) of the precursor effect display.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, among the post-reception productions, for the post-reception production using the second production device (post-reception specific production), specific portent production displays (second portent production display, fifth portent production display) This shall be carried out in a manner that does not adversely affect the visibility of the foreshadowing effect display).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, among the post-reception productions, the post-reception production (post-reception production display) using the first production device also has a specific precursor production display (second precursor production display). Display, fifth omen effect display) shall be executed so as not to have a negative impact on the visibility of the display (e.g. displaying a specific omen effect display with priority over the post-reception effect display (displaying it in front of the layer), etc.) ).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the reception period in which the precursory performance display is executed in a specific manner (for example, the second precursory performance display, the fifth precursory performance display), while the precursory performance display is displayed. However, if the player's action is not accepted, the precursor effect display can be hidden before the corresponding acceptance period ends. ing. In other words, in this case, it is possible to play the game by selecting whether to start the post-reception performance with the precursor performance display displayed, or to start the post-reception performance with the precursor performance display hidden. become.

However, the execution state of a specific precursor effect display does not necessarily have to be terminated within the acceptance period, and the execution status is not terminated within the acceptance period and continues to be displayed until the acceptance period ends. It can also be used as a thing. In this case, the specific precursor effect display will be displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area where the sample image display is displayed until the middle of the corresponding reception period. In a period after the timing, it is desirable to display the sample image using only an area different from the area, rather than the area where the sample image is being displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the reception period occurs, a reception permission sound is made audible indicating that reception is in a state where reception is permitted or that reception will be (soon) in a state in which reception is permitted. Processing is considered executable. This prevents the player from forgetting to perform an action for acceptance.

Furthermore, among the above-mentioned production examples, in the examples shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 and FIG. If the above-mentioned "mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" appears, the "mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" still appears. Processing for making the above-mentioned acceptance permission sound inaudible is started in a state where the reception permission sound is not audible.

In other words, in this case, even if the "state in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared since the acceptance, the acceptance period has already ended. can be suitably suggested to the player. As a result, even if the timing at which the "disappearance-related display in which the sample image display becomes difficult to recognize" appears after the acceptance is delayed, inconveniences will be less likely to occur, so the sample image display will be displayed in a manner that is easily visible. be able to

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, even if a player's action is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is made audible, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated midway, and the reception permission sound is made audible. While this continues, there will be an additional reception period (such as a first reception period) during which the extinction effect display is displayed. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the reception has been accepted or the reception has not yet been made, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In this regard, there is a reception period (FIGS. 168, 170, and 173) in which when an action by a player is accepted while the reception permission sound is made audible, the reception permission sound is made inaudible. The reception period (Fig. 167) in which the reception permissible sound is made inaudible even if a player's action is accepted while the reception permissible sound is made audible is the "simulation" that occurs in response to these. Since the types of "states in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" are different, it is now possible to infer the subsequent progress of the production by checking the output status of the acceptance permissible sound. Become.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, a plurality of types of reception permissible sounds are prepared. In this regard, it is desirable that the same sound be output as the reception permissible sound during the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of these reception periods is occurring.

On the other hand, the reception permissible sound that is made audible corresponding to the first reception period is the same as the reception permission sound that is audible corresponding to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. The sound is audibly output as a sound different from the permissible sound. According to such a configuration, when the reception permission sound starts to be output, by checking the sound, it becomes possible to narrow down the candidates as to which type of reception period is occurring to some extent. In addition, when a reception is made while the reception permissible sound is set to be audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by checking whether the reception permissible sound is terminated midway. It becomes possible to provide an interesting performance using .

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the precursor performance display is executed in a specific manner (here, the second precursor performance display, the fifth precursor performance display, and the seventh precursor performance display), the reception permissible sound corresponding to this is also If an acceptance is made while is being output, the acceptance permission sound will be terminated midway, but if the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first precursor effect display), this If a reception is made while the reception permission sound corresponding to the reception permission sound is being output and the reception permission sound is terminated midway (third reception period, fourth reception period, sixth reception period), and There is now a case (first reception period) where the application is not completed. With such a configuration, it is also possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptance-permitted sound.

Furthermore, in each of the production examples described above, there is a reception period in which two sounds (a long-term permissible sound and a short-time permissible sound) are output as reception permissible sounds, and a reception period in which only one sound is output as a reception permissible sound. . During the reception period in which two sounds (long-term permissible sound and short-time permissible sound) are output as reception permissible sounds, if the reception is made while the reception permissible sound is audible, the reception period ends midway, but the reception permissible sound In the reception period in which only one sound is output, there are cases in which the reception period is terminated midway when the reception is made while the reception permissible sound is audible, and cases in which the reception period is not terminated midway. With such a configuration, it is also possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptance-permitted sound.

Regarding the reception period in which two sounds with different sound data (long-term permissible sound and short-time permissible sound) are output as reception permissible sounds, if the reception is made while the reception permissible sound is being output, two sounds with different sound data will be output. Only one of the acceptance permissible sounds (long time permissible sound and short time permissible sound) may be terminated midway, and the other may be continued without being terminated midway.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the same mode appears as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" when the acceptance is made and when the acceptance is not made within the acceptance period. The period of reception (second reception period, fourth reception period, fifth reception period, seventh reception period, etc.) and the times when the reception was made within the reception period and the times when the said reception was not made. Since there is a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which different aspects appear as ``a manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'', the reception It becomes possible to improve performance when the performance is not done.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when a reception is made during a specific reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.), "modes in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see" , it is realized as a disappearance-related display different from the image display, but if the acceptance is not made, the image display itself changes (the numerical value related to the display characteristics (transparency) It is desirable to achieve this by changing the rate). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether an acceptance has been made or a situation where no acceptance has been made when a "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. become able to.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which an acceptance period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600 ), the first effect display TE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect" here) and the second effect display FE, which have no relation to the reception period in terms of effect, can be displayed. It has become. Then, as shown in FIG. 175, if the player's action is accepted within the first acceptance period or the third acceptance period, the “sample image display” is displayed while the sample image display is being displayed. ``A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance related display SK1)'' appears, but this ``a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (first disappearance related display SK1)'' also occurs in symbol variations where the acceptance period does not occur. Does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE that may be displayed (whether the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE is prioritized or the first effect display TE (or, the extinction related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed).

In other words, in this case, the disappearing effect display should be displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display (the first effect display TE and the above-mentioned second effect display FE) unrelated to the reception period. Therefore, it becomes possible to proceed with the game without adversely affecting the performance that is not directly related to the reception period.

However, if the player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 4th extinction-related display SK4)" appears, but the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (4th extinction-related display SK4)" does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE. (does not make it difficult to see), but is displayed in such a way that it affects the visibility of the second effect display FE (makes it difficult to see).

According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the visibility may be affected when "a manner in which the image display becomes difficult to view" appears depending on the type of image display. Therefore, when a player performs an action, it is necessary to check whether the image display is not directly related to the reception period. This makes it possible to provide a sense of performance.

However, in this case, the first effect display TE shall be displayed as an image (suggestion) related to (suggesting) the winning or losing (expectation level) of the symbol change, and the second effect display FE shall be displayed as an image (suggestion) of the symbol change. If the display is displayed as a display that is not related to (does not suggest) the winning or losing (expectation level) of the fluctuation, the interest in the game will decrease when the visibility of the second effect display FE is affected. This can be said to be desirable in order to avoid.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the second reception period can occur while the first production display TE is being displayed, but it can occur while the second production display FE is being displayed. It never occurs, and only occurs when the second effect display FE is not displayed. In other words, the second effect display FE can be displayed only at a relatively early stage after the start of the symbol variation, and is then hidden. It is used to enhance. In this regard, by making the second reception period possible only at a relatively late stage after the start of symbol fluctuation, this It has become possible to create such relationships.

As shown in FIG. 179, even if the second effect display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth extinction related display SK4, it is displayed again in a state that is easy to see. . In other words, in this case, it will be hidden when a predetermined timing arrives thereafter. When the second effect display FE is hidden, unlike the case of displaying a sample image, no aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second effect display FE appears.

The first performance display TE displays a predetermined performance result (expectation level) at a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation, but if a disappearance related display is displayed during the execution period of the first performance display TE, The extinction related display is hidden before a predetermined timing arrives.

As shown in FIG. 179, the area where the fourth extinction related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the second effect display FE is displayed, and in this area, the second effect display FE is displayed. It is displayed in a manner with a higher display priority than the above. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set for the fourth extinction-related display SK4, so that the second effect display FE is made visible through the fourth extinction-related display SK4, although it is difficult to see. You can also do this.

As shown in FIG. 179, the area where the fourth extinction related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the first effect display TE is displayed, and in this area, the first effect display TE It is displayed in a manner with a lower display priority than that of the previous page. At this time, it is desirable to prevent the fourth extinction related display SK4 located behind the first effect display TE from becoming visible through the first effect display TE.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 175, the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed in such a way as not to affect the visibility of both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE. It has become something that

When the first disappearing effect display SK1 does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the acceptance permission sound is not ended midway and continues, and the fourth disappearing effect display affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the reception acceptance sound can be terminated midway. Thereby, it becomes possible to enhance the performance using the acceptance permissible sound.

Both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are dynamically displayed, and both dynamic displays are continued even under the situation where either disappearance effect display is displayed. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is possible to create a mode in which the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display) while the sample image display is being displayed. A plurality of modes will be prepared for the mode (disappearance-related display).

In other words, in this case, one of the plurality of modes will appear as "a mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", so that the game enjoyment can be improved when the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize. things come to be expected.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, if "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (fourth extinction related display SK4)" corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (FIG. 179), the fourth Disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the simulated image display and the second effect display FE. )" appears (FIG. 175), the first disappearance related display SK1 is executed in such a way as to make only the simulated image display difficult to view out of the simulated image display and the second effect display FE. There is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect as to which of the "first disappearance-related display SK1" and "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" appears as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Therefore, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

In this case, what are the "sample image display" and "predetermined image display" that are displayed in the first reception period, and the "sample image display" and "predetermined image display" that are displayed in the fourth reception period? , are preferably displayed in the same manner.

The sample image display is hidden while the disappearance related display is appearing, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance related display is appearing, and the disappearance related display ends. It is desirable that the display be hidden at a predetermined timing after the change (before the symbol fluctuation stops).

The fourth disappearance-related display SK4 may be an effect using an effect that is performed in front of the simulated image display and the second effect display FE when viewed from the front, instead of using an image. However, it is desirable that the first disappearance related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the second reception period can occur even when the second production display FE is in a non-display state. A special mode (second extinction related display SK2) that appears only during the reception period is prepared. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. SK2-2) and cases where it does not appear (second extinction related display SK2-1), and when the special mode appears, the expectation level (jackpot) is higher than when the fourth extinction related display SK4 is displayed in any manner. It is desirable to increase the rate of stopping at a symbol. The percentage may be 100%. Further, in this case, it is desirable that during the second reception period, a special aspect of the precursor performance (second precursor performance display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second performance display FE is in the display state can be executed.

In each production example described above, in the first reception period, when the first aspect (first post-reception production display UG1-1) is executed as the first post-reception production display UG1 (FIG. 175 (e1) ~(i1)) and the second mode (first reception performance display UG1-2), which is more expected than the first mode, is executed as the first reception performance display UG1 (FIG. 175(e2)) (i2)), the same mode (first extinction related display SK1-1) appears as "a mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize".

On the other hand, in the second reception period, the second mode (second reception performance display UG2), which has higher expectations than the first mode (second reception performance display UG2-1), When UG2-2) is executed, a specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears as a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see", but the first mode appears as the effect display UG after the second reception. When (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) is executed, the specific mode does not appear as a "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", but a mode different from the specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-1) is executed. 2) appears.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, there are cases where it is possible to infer the degree of expectation for the post-reception production display simply by checking "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the performance display after reception. Since there will be cases where it is not possible to estimate the degree of play, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through the performance of this kind of ``mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.'' .

Furthermore, as the "manner in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", there is a "specific manner (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" that may occur in response to the second reception period. This cannot occur as a "mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first reception period. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to infer the type of acceptance period based on "the manner in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize", and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

However, the same aspect may appear in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period as the “aspect in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.”

As shown in FIG. 175, in the first acceptance period, if no acceptance is made, a mode that cannot appear when an acceptance is made (first disappearance-related display SK-2) was decided to appear. However, if no reception is made during the first reception period, the "mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself may be prevented from appearing.

In the second acceptance period, any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations (the rate at which jackpot symbols are stopped) can be selectively output as an acceptance permissible sound, and in the first acceptance period, It is desirable that only one aspect of the acceptable sound can be audibly output. In addition, in this case, any of the acceptance acceptable sounds (a plurality of modes) that may be audibly output in response to the second acceptance period are different from the acceptance acceptable sound that may be audibly output in response to the first acceptance period. It is desirable to prepare.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, different fluctuation patterns are generated from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but the same fluctuation pattern is generated from the first reception period to the seventh reception period. The pattern may include reception periods that can occur sequentially within the pattern. That is, in this case, at least some of the acceptance periods from the first acceptance period to the seventh acceptance period can occur in a plurality of variation patterns.

For example, for a reception period (such as a second reception period or a fourth reception period) in which ``the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' changes depending on the level of expectation, ``the pattern of the sample image display It occurs within the same pattern change after a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which "is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" does not change depending on the expectation level (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) It is desirable to make it possible.

In addition, regarding the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which reception can be made while the foreshadowing effect display is displayed, the reception cannot be made while the foreshadowing effect display is displayed. It is desirable to make it possible to generate within the same symbol fluctuation after a non-existent reception period (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.) occurs.

During the reception period, "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the expectation level, "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the expectation level. It is possible to selectively output a plurality of reception permissible sounds, including a specific reception permissible sound that cannot be audibly output during an unchanging reception period, and when a specific reception permissible sound is audibly output, "the sample image display is difficult to visually recognize." It is desirable that a highly anticipated mode appear as the mode (disappearance-related display).

In addition, during reception periods (such as the second reception period and the fifth reception period) in which "the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the expectation level, the Although it is possible to display a precursor effect, a special preview effect can be performed at a stage even before the display of the precursor effect is executed, and when the special preview effect is executed, the above-mentioned When an acceptance is made during the acceptance period, it is desirable to ensure that ``a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' is always executed in a highly expected manner.

During the acceptance period, when the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the level of expectation, a jackpot can be obtained as "the mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". It is also possible to prepare an aspect (for example, a second extinction related display SK2-2) that can only appear when the information is displayed. Furthermore, a mode (for example, a second extinction related display SK2-1) that cannot appear when a jackpot has been obtained may be prepared.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is possible to display a reception-related production display (such as a sample image display or a gauge image) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period; It is possible to output reception-related effect sounds (reception acceptance sound, etc.) at least within the reception period. In addition, when a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, it is possible to output a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance production based on the acceptance, and the above-mentioned reception-related production is displayed within the acceptance period. If a player's action is accepted while a (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) ). Similarly, if a player's action is accepted while the reception-related performance sound (such as acceptance permission sound) is audible during the reception period, the reception-related production will be performed based on the reception. Sounds (such as reception acceptance sounds) may be rendered inaudible.

In such a configuration, based on the acceptance of a player's action within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance production is audibly output, and a reception-related production display (such as a sample image display or a gauge image) is output. ), and the reception-related performance sound is made inaudible (such as reception acceptance sound), making it easier to recognize that the reception has been accepted.

In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the reception-related production display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) is terminated at the time when the post-reception production corresponding to the reception starts. However, the reception-related production sound (reception permission sound, etc.) is terminated at the time the reception output sound corresponding to the reception starts, and may be rendered inaudible. I try to be that way.

According to such a configuration, the above-mentioned reception-related performance display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) that is displayed during the reception period can be displayed even after the reception performance starts to be executed. On the other hand, the above-mentioned reception-related performance sounds (reception permission sounds, etc.) that are audible (output) during the reception period will no longer be audible at the time when the output sound starts execution after reception. becomes. As a result, even after the post-reception performance has started, it is possible to check the appearance of the reception-related performance display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) that was displayed during the reception period, and the reception-related performance sound By making the acceptance acceptance sound etc. inaudible, it is possible to suitably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

As described above, the reception-related performance display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) is executed as a performance display that suggests the percentage (expectation level) of winning the jackpot. In this case, the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) also differs depending on the level of expectation (mode of reception-related performance display) suggested by the reception-related performance display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.). It is desirable to have one that outputs .

However, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, during the first reception period, the reception-related production sound (reception permissible sound) is made to continue without being terminated even when the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension by making it difficult for the user to recognize whether or not they are in a situation where they have been accepted.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, only one aspect can be displayed as the reception-related production display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) during the first reception period, and it is possible to display only one mode as the reception-related production display (sample image display, gauge image, etc.) It is not executed as a production display that suggests the percentage (expectation level). In addition, in the first reception period, only one mode of reception-related production sound (reception permissible sound) appears, so when a mode different from this mode appears in another reception period, It becomes possible to suitably improve gaming interest.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, multiple modes including a specific mode are prepared as a precursor effect display, and prior to the occurrence of a specific reception period (for example, the second reception period), It is possible to display an effect display (for example, a second precursor effect display: FIG. 168), and to start audible output of reception-related effect sounds (reception acceptance sound, etc.). Then, the premonitory effect display (for example, the second omen effect display: FIG. 168) and the reception-related effect sound (reception permission sound) of a specific mode can be executed over the timing at which the reception period occurs, and the The operation by the player can be accepted while the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is being displayed and the reception-related effect sound (acceptance permission sound) is in an audible state (output). ing. In this regard, if a movement by the player is accepted while a specific type of precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: Fig. 168) is displayed within the acceptance period, the to hide the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) of the specific mode. In addition, if a player's action is accepted while the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is audible during the reception period, the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is (sound) is made inaudible.

In the above configuration, based on the fact that the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is hidden, Since the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is made inaudible, a specific aspect of the precursor performance display (for example, the second precursor performance display: Even if the player's action is accepted while 168) and the reception-related performance sound are being executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the action has been accepted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 168 and the like, the foreshadowing effect display of the above-mentioned specific mode (for example, the second omen effect display: FIG. 168) is a post-reception effect in response to the acceptance within the corresponding acceptance period. is not finished and is displayed when execution starts. On the other hand, the reception-related performance sound (reception permission sound) is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception starts.

According to such a configuration, the foreshadowing effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second omen effect display: FIG. 168) that is displayed before the occurrence of the reception period is displayed after the execution of the post-reception effect is started. However, the above-mentioned reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound), which is audible (output) before the reception period occurs, is audible at the time the output sound starts to be executed after reception. It will be made so that it will no longer be. As a result, even after the execution of a specific post-reception effect has started, it is possible to check the appearance of the precursor effect displayed before the start of the reception period, and the reception-related effect that is output before the start of the reception period. By making the sound (acceptance acceptance sound) inaudible, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

Regarding the specific aspect of the portent effect display (second portent effect display ZEH2), it is displayed as a different display image depending on the degree of expectation, and is executed as a effect display that suggests the percentage of jackpots (the degree of expectation). It is desirable that the In this case, the reception-related production sound (reception permissible sound) shall also output different sounds depending on the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode of precursor production display (the mode of the specific mode of precursor production display). is desirable.

However, in each of the above performance examples, during the reception period in which the first precursor performance display is executed, the first precursor performance display can be executed only in one mode, and the percentage of jackpots (expected It is designed so that it will not be executed as a production display that suggests a degree).

In addition, in the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) where multiple reception permissible sounds (long-term permissible sound, short-time permissible sound) are output simultaneously, the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception The output sounds do not overlap, but in the reception period when only one reception permissible sound is output, when the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception production sound overlap (first reception period), and the output of the reception permissible sound There are cases (such as the third reception period, the fourth reception period, etc.) where the output sound after reception does not overlap.

The long-term permissible sound is, for example, a sound that is output as a sound effect, and the short-time permissible sound is, for example, a sound that is output as a message sound. The case where only one acceptance permission sound is output is, for example, the case where no message sound is output and only the sound effect is output. Note that the short-time permissible sound may be "sound output as a sound effect" and the long-time permissible sound may be "sound output as a message sound."

When one of the two acceptance permissible sounds is output as a "message sound", the message image ("press") corresponding to the message sound (for example, "press" sound) is output audibly while the message sound (for example, "press It is desirable to display a reception-related effect display such as ''. In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period in which the post-reception effect (post-reception output sound, etc.) is executed, but the message image (reception-related effect display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed. The period overlaps with the period in which the post-reception performance is executed.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the scale image display is displayed as an integrated scale image display including a gauge image within the peripheral decoration image. The integrated image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 144 and the like, and other configurations thereof may be adopted as appropriate. That is, in the past, the sample image display was displayed separately from the gauge image, so it was difficult to make both of them difficult to see by displaying an omen effect or displaying extinction related information. The gauge image may change depending on the manner in which the scale image is displayed, which indicates the degree of expectation, and if this can be visually recognized, the purpose of making the scale image difficult to visually recognize is lost. In this regard, by displaying them as an integrated model image display, it is easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the model image display and the gauge image.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is assumed to appear in such a way as to make it difficult to visually recognize the production display after reception. The display may be displayed in a manner that does not make it difficult to visually recognize the display (for example, priority display is given to the effect display after reception). In addition, among the multiple reception periods mentioned above, there is a reception period in which the post-reception performance display becomes difficult to see due to "modes in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and a reception period in which the post-reception effect display becomes difficult to see. A reception period in which the post-reception performance display is not made difficult to recognize may be included depending on the mode (disappearance related display).

Furthermore, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare all of the first to seventh acceptance periods, and only some of these acceptance periods may be prepared in an appropriate combination.

The first reception period may also be terminated midway when the reception is accepted while the reception permission sound is audibly output.

Regarding the "first omen effect display" and "seventh omen effect display," they do not necessarily have to be of the type that is not displayed at the time the reception period occurs and is hidden before this. For example, it may be displayed as "a type that is displayed across the timing of the reception period". That is, in this case, the "first omen effect display" and the "seventh omen effect display" are the same as the above-mentioned "second omen effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second reception period and the effect content (display image) Although they are different, please refer to Figures 168, 176, and 177 for details such as ``when the display starts and ends, and how it interacts with other image displays until it is hidden.'' The display will be performed in the same manner as described for the "second omen effect display ZEH2". The same applies to other examples and modifications.

It goes without saying that when the term "at least a part" is used in the above and below descriptions, it is intended to include "all".

Next, a modification of each of the above-mentioned production examples will be explained. That is, FIG. 180 is a modified example of "when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 176, and FIG. 181 is a modification of "when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 177. This is a modification example of "the production of". In addition, in this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are as described above in "Example of production related to the second reception period (FIGS. 168, 176, and 177)", and The same applies to other examples that can be applied to the "Example of Production".

As shown in FIG. 180, this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) as a fourth presentation device. For convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) was omitted from the explanation in each of the above-mentioned performance examples. things). That is, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) does not operate in connection with the occurrence of the reception period.

Now, if the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, then also in the modification for the second reception period, first, the performance determination (advancement determination) corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern is performed. etc.). After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 180(a) ”).

The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d) described above. That is, first, as shown in FIG. 180(b), "second portent effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Next, as shown in FIG. 180(c), "integrated image display IG" is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second portent effect display ZEH2" and "integrated image display IG" are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 180(d), the second reception period occurs. (timing tG3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second presentation device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted; however, in this modification as well, the second presentation device (sub liquid crystal 1610) The "back specific performance" and the "foreshadowing performance" are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177). In addition, the effects using the third effect device (speaker) (acceptable sound, output sound after second acceptance, etc.) are now executed in the same way as in the above example (Figs. 176 and 177). ing.

In addition, in this modification, even if the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, the action is When the second reception period ends, the execution of the post-reception performance (second post-reception performance) corresponding to the second reception period starts.

Note that the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 180(d) to "D1 (FIGS. 181(e1) to (i1))" is a relatively This corresponds to the case where the first mode with low expectations is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. This corresponds to a case where a second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, similarly to the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 176 and 177), when the player's action is accepted (in response to the acceptance, the second post-reception performance starts). At timing tG3a, which is the point in time when the integrated image display IG is displayed, the "integrated image display IG" is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Not only the integrated image display IG but also the second omen performance display ZEH2 are hidden at timing tG3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the performance is started after the second reception). The same thing as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIG. 176, FIG. 177) also applies to the point of not making it difficult to see or make it difficult to see.

In addition, if the first aspect with relatively low expectations is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIG. 181 (e1) to (i1)), from this point onwards, This is also the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177). That is, first, at timing tG3b, the display of the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize." Next, when timing tG3c arrives, a "second reception performance display" is displayed as a post-reception performance on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the reception of the player's action within the second reception period. UG2-1" starts execution.

After this, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177), as shown in FIG. 181 (h1), while the "second reception effect display UG2-1" is being displayed, First, among the "integrated image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "second extinction related display SK2-1", "integrated image display IG" and "second omen effect display ZEH2" ” will be hidden. After the “integrated image display IG” and the “second omen effect display ZEH2” are respectively hidden, the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is hidden, as shown in FIG. 181 (i1). As a result, the display according to the "second post-reception effect display UG2-1" is performed under conditions where visibility is considered to be good.

However, when the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIG. 181 (e2) to (i2)), the timing tG3b , as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", instead of displaying the disappearance related display on the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600), the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is started. let That is, as shown in FIG. 181 (f2), by positioning (operating) the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) so that it overlaps at least a portion of the integrated image display IG when viewed from the front, The integrated model image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, and this functions as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize."

According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the situation shown in FIG. 181 (f2) has higher expectations than the case shown in FIG. 181 (f1). , it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in gaming. In addition, since the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) itself indicates the degree of expectation, it can also serve as a post-reception performance. It becomes possible to make the fake image display IG difficult to visually recognize. In this sense, the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY) is used as a performance element that indicates the level of expectation even in a performance that is different from the post-reception performance (such as a preview performance that indicates the level of expectation). It is desirable that there be.

Next, as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is displayed in front view with at least a part of the integrated model image display IG. When the timing tG3c arrives during the execution in an overlapping manner, as a post-acceptance performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the reception of the movement by the player within the second reception period. ``Second post-reception effect display UG2-2'' is started.

That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second omen effect display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is "integrated image display IG". While being executed at a position overlapping at least a portion of the image display IG in front view, the execution of the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 is started. According to such a configuration, while the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to visually recognize by the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)," the second Since the post-reception effect display UG2-2 starts, it suggests that the second reception period has already ended. It is expected that the process will automatically transition from "effect display ZEH2" to "second reception effect display UG2-2)" (after timing tG3c).

Also, when the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIG. 181 (e2) to (i2)), the " When the display related to "Second Post-Reception Performance Display UG2-2" starts, as shown in FIG. 181 (h2), while the "Second Post-Reception Performance Display UG2-2" is being displayed, First, we will explain how the "integrated image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "integrated image display IG" are difficult to visually recognize (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) Among the "effects used)," the "integrated image display IG" and the "second omen effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden and the process is terminated. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and "second portent effect display ZEH2" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 181 (i2), the "integrated image display IG is visually recognized. ``Fourth performance device (performance using specific decorative member SDY)'' as ``a mode in which it becomes difficult'' is ended. That is, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to its original position so that the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" does not overlap with the integrated image display IG when viewed from the front. As a result, the display according to the "second reception effect display UG2-2)" is performed under conditions where visibility is considered to be good.

In addition, in the case where "a presentation using the fourth presentation device (specific decorative member SDY)" is performed as the "aspect where the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" (a relatively highly expected aspect (Fig. 181( e2) to (i2)) are cases in which "a presentation using the first presentation device (disappearance-related display)" is performed as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" (relative expectation level). It is desirable to lengthen the time from the appearance of the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" until the end of the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to recognize" than the low mode (FIGS. 181(e1) to (i1)). In this case, when executing the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see," It became possible to improve the game's interest through its own performance, and after that, the ``fourth performance device (performance using a specific decorative member SDY)'' became possible. Even after the game ends, it is expected that the "second reception performance display UG2-2", which had been difficult to see until then, will be exposed, thereby further improving the game's interest. On the other hand, in the first reception period and the third reception period, there are cases where a mode with a low expectation level is executed as a post-reception performance and a case where a mode with a high expectation level is executed as a post-reception production. "A mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (first extinction related display SK-1, etc.)" is executed for the same amount of time.

On the other hand, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 180(d) to "D3 (FIGS. 181(e3) to (h3))", the player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period according to the modified example. This assumes that there is no such situation.

As shown in FIG. 181 (e3) to (h3), in this modification, if the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period, in the case of the above example (FIG. 177 ( This is the same as e3) to (h3)). For example, if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. The mode that would have appeared if the operation had been accepted will appear.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 181 (e3) to (h3), the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed when the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period. The case means that if the player's action had been accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect would have progressed from FIG. 180(d) to "D1 (FIG. 181(e1) to (i1))". This corresponds to a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations is executed. On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, when the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the fourth performance device (specific 180 (d) to "D2 (Fig. 181 (e2) This corresponds to a case where the performance has progressed to ``~(i2))'' (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively high expectations has been executed).

After this, as shown in FIG. 181 (g3), the "integrated image display IG" and the "integrated image display IG" become difficult to visually recognize (the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the fourth First, the ``integrated image display IG'' is hidden from the ``production device (production using the specific decorative member SDY)''. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. -1 or the performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" will end.

As described above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" is performed as "display on the first production device (production display device 1600)". (FIGS. 181(e1) to (i1)), and cases where it is performed as "a presentation using the fourth presentation device (specific decorative member SDY)" (FIGS. 181(e2) to (i2)). In this regard, in the above-mentioned example, the timing at which the "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" starts to be executed, and the timing at which the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed The start timing is set to be the same as the start timing (timing tG3b), but for the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)", the "first performance device (performance display device 1600)" The execution may be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) that is earlier than the timing tG3b at which the "display at" is started.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of "a manner in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" and the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) suggested as a post-reception presentation, "integrated image display IG" may be displayed after acceptance. Since the time required for the appearance of the ``form in which the fake image display IG becomes difficult to see'' appears, it becomes more interesting and the game can be more enjoyable. In particular, the "performance using the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY)" also functions as a post-reception production, similar to the "specific production after reception using the second production device". Therefore, by executing this at an early timing, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

However, even if the “effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” is executed in “a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, even if As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least a portion of the integrated image display IG (image display) is visible.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, when the production progresses from FIG. 180(d) to "D2 (FIGS. 181(e2) to (i2))" If a high performance after reception is executed), the "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" will not be performed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", It was decided to perform "a performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)". However, in this case, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" includes the "display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and the "display related to the fourth effect (disappearance related display)" It is also possible to perform both "a presentation using a decorative member SDY".

According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the "display (disappearance related display) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and the "display on the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" are displayed. This makes the integrated image display IG difficult to see, and it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the reception has been accepted.

In this way, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" includes the "display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and the "display related to the fourth effect (disappearance related display)" When executing both "Production using parts SDY)", the disappearance-related display is displayed in such a way as to make at least a part of the integrated image display IG difficult to see (priority display, etc.), and "Fourth The effect using the effect device (specific decorative member SDY) is executed in such a way as to make at least a portion of the integrated image display IG and at least a portion of the disappearance related display difficult to see.

In this case as well, execution is started at timing tG3a for the ``effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)'' that functions as ``a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see''. The "display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" which functions as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" may be started at timing tG3b. .

In addition, as "modes in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", "display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) (disappearance related display)" and "display in the fourth effect device (specific decorative member 180 (d) to "D1 (Fig. 181 (e1) to (i1))" (relative). The image display will be different from the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display SK2-1)" that appears when a post-reception performance with low expectations is executed). It is desirable to do so.

Further, the fourth presentation device does not necessarily have to be provided as an operable movable body (specific decorative member SDY), and in short, at least a part of the integrated image display IG (image display) A flying object that can perform a predetermined effect at a position that overlaps with the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front (for example, a flying object that can perform a flying effect at the front side of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, or (e.g., a light guide plate provided by a light guide plate). In addition, regarding the production using the fourth production device, in addition to being executed based on the reception during the reception period, when different production conditions are satisfied (such as the arrival of a predetermined timing in a specific symbol fluctuation) It is also desirable to have this executed.

The production example regarding "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 is also applicable to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 180 and 181.

Furthermore, the production example related to "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to view" explained with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 is applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance) that is different from any of these reception periods.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, while the integrated model image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH) are displayed, the production display after reception is displayed. However, the performance display after the reception will be displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize by the integrated model image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH). (Fig. 175, Fig. 177, Fig. 179).

However, instead of this, execution of the effect display after reception is started while the integrated image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH) are displayed. However, the post-reception effect display is not made difficult to see by the integrated image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH) (priority display, etc.) ) may start the display.

Hereinafter, a case will be described in which such a configuration is applied to an example of presentation regarding the second reception period. Configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the above-mentioned examples (FIGS. 168, 176, and 177), and can be applied to other examples as appropriate.

Regarding the production content until the player's action (operation) is accepted within the second acceptance period according to this modification, the production content described above (FIGS. 176(a) to 176(d), FIG. 177(e)) ) is the same as For example, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 182(e2), at the timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second portent effect display ZEH2" are displayed. '' is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are not made difficult to see.

Also, in this modified example, there are cases where a post-reception performance with a relatively low level of expectation is executed and cases where a post-reception performance with a relatively high level of expectation is executed. The case where the post-acceptance effect with a low value is executed is the same as the above-mentioned effect ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 177), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modification, if a "post-reception performance with relatively high expectations" is executed as a post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, the above-mentioned performance content (see Fig. 177 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effects shown in FIG. 182 (f2) to (i2) appear.

First, at timing tG3b, in a situation where the "second reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started, as shown in FIG. 182 (f2), Then, the second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2). Next, when timing tG3c arrives during the period in which the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears, the player's action is not performed within the second reception period. "Second reception performance display UG2" as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the reception starts execution in the second mode (second reception performance display UG2-2) be done. It goes without saying that the post-acceptance performance display indicates the level of expectation (the rate at which the bonus will be given to the player). The percentage may be 100%.

However, as shown in FIG. 182 (g2), the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modification includes an integrated image display IG, a second omen effect display ZEH2, a second extinction related display SK2, etc. This will not make it difficult to see. More specifically, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modification overlaps with the areas in which the integrated image display IG, the second omen effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2 are displayed. The integrated image display IG, the second omen effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction related display SK2 are displayed in a manner that makes them difficult to visually recognize (priority display).

According to such a configuration, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 itself can function as "an aspect in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to aim for it. Note that even the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this example is not displayed with priority over the first effect display TE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect" here), and the first effect is The portion that overlaps with the display TE is made difficult to see.

After this, as shown in FIG. 182 (h2), first, the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are respectively hidden. Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (i2), the second extinction related display SK2 is hidden.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 182 as well, if the player's action is not accepted within the second acceptance period, it is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 177 (e3) to (h3)). . In other words, if the player's action is not accepted, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see" will occur if the player's action had been accepted within the second acceptance period. A new aspect will emerge.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, the second extinction related display SK2-2 and the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 are displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see". However, the second extinction related display SK2-2 may not be displayed, and only the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 may be displayed.

The effect example related to the "post-reception effect display" described with reference to FIG. 182 is also applicable to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progresses as shown in FIG. 182.

Furthermore, the production example related to the "post-reception production display" described with reference to FIG. 182 is not applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but is different from any of those reception periods. It may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance).

In the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, if a movement by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the image display (here, the integrated image display) IG) is displayed, a specific disappearing effect display (for example, A second extinction related display SK2-2)" can be displayed, and the sample image display can be performed after the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance related display SK2-2) starts to be displayed. (For example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is hidden while being displayed.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode appeared in the sample image display even after the acceptance is made. In addition, the visibility of the sample image display is reduced by a specific disappearing effect display until the sample image display is hidden, and while the visibility is reduced, the sample image display is hidden. This can suggest that there is little time remaining until the display of the sample image is hidden, and a decline in gaming interest when the display of the sample image is hidden can be suppressed. It becomes wet.

In addition, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the "specific disappearance effect display (for example, second disappearance related display SK2-2)" is a simulated image display (here, integrated It can be displayed even during a period after the sample image display IG) is hidden, and at least while the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is displayed, A post-reception performance (for example, a performance using the specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed. Regarding the post-reception effect, is it displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2)? (Example shown in FIG. 182), or a presentation object (such as the example shown in FIG. 181 or another example thereof) located in a position that overlaps (at least a part of) the specific disappearance effect display when viewed from the front. We are working to ensure that this is realized as something that can be achieved.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, for a specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position that overlaps a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) in front view, It becomes possible to recognize the disappearing effect display without shifting the gaze point from the position where it is displayed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there is no need to change the gaze destination in order to understand the form of the specific post-reception effect when the specific disappearing effect display is displayed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

When a specific post-reception performance according to the above modification (for example, a performance using a specific decorative member SDY, a second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) appears, the rate at which benefits are given to players increases. It may be set to 100%.

The specific post-reception effect according to the above modification (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) is executed before the sample image display is hidden. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, so it is possible to suitably indicate that the reception has been accepted even when the image display is being displayed. . However, regarding the specific post-reception effects related to the above modification (for example, the effects using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.), after the sample image display is hidden, It may also be one that starts execution.

Apart from the reception period in which the specific post-reception performance according to the above modification (for example, the production using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.), the specific post-reception performance After preparing a reception period in which a different post-reception effect can be generated, a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is a case where the different after-reception effect is executed. may also be displayed. The reception period during which different post-reception effects can be generated may be any one of the first reception period and the third reception period to the seventh reception period. However, during the reception period (first reception period) in which the reception permissible sound is not ended midway, it is desirable that the specific extinction effect display (for example, the second extinction related display SK2-2) is not displayed (another (The disappearance effect display may be displayed)

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, when the reception period occurs, the state is such that the reception of the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period is permitted, or A process is executed to make an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the acceptance will be (soon) in a state where the acceptance is allowed, and this causes the player to forget to take the action for acceptance. I'm trying to suppress it.

Furthermore, as described above, this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple types of precursor effect displays. If a player's action is accepted while the foreshadowing effect display ZEH2) is being displayed, the specific foreshadowing effect display (second omen effect display ZEH2) will be displayed even after the acceptance, but the specific To make a mode appear in which a specific precursor performance display (second precursor performance display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize while the precursor performance display (second precursor performance display ZEH2) is being displayed. Then, after the mode appears, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is hidden under the condition that it is made difficult to visually recognize.

In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the precursor effect display, but the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the reception has already been made.

In the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the manner in which the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) becomes difficult to visually recognize is due to the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is a different image display (for example, second extinction related display SK2-2 or post-reception effect display UG2-2), or it is on the front side of a specific omen effect display (second omen effect display ZEH2) It is designed to be a performance in a performance performed in a theater.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)" is a In addition to the foreshadowing effect display ZEH2), it is executed so as to straddle both a specific foreshadowing effect display and a sample image display when viewed from the front, making it difficult to visually recognize both of them. This aspect may be performed in a manner that makes it difficult to see the entire effect display device 1600, but in that case, a specific precursor effect display or sample image display may be visible through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, regarding the "aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2)", it is realized by a change in the display characteristics of the specific precursor effect display itself (such as a change in transmittance). may be

Also in the above-mentioned modifications (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is hidden within the acceptance period. Even if the reception is made in the hidden state, "modes in which the specific precursor effect display is difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2-2, post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) are now executed.

In addition, in the first acceptance period described above, when a movement by a player is accepted, multiple effects (the effects shown in FIGS. 175(e1) to (i1), Any of the effects shown in (e2) to (i2)) will appear, but regardless of whether any of these effects appear, the specific mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1 (first reception period The first aspect of the first extinction-related display SK1 corresponding to )) can appear. In other words, in this case, no matter which of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode will also appear, so it is considered that the specific mode is caused by the action being accepted by the player within the specific acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that this is a common production.

On the other hand, in the second acceptance period described above, the second acceptance period according to the modified example (FIGS. 180 to 182), or another example thereof, when the action by the player is accepted, special conditions (jackpot winning Special modes (for example, second extinction related display SK2-2, specific It is possible to appear in one of several modes, including a production using decorative member SDY, a production display after reception UG2-2, etc.), and when the special mode appears, the image display becomes difficult to see. . According to such a configuration, a special aspect indicating the degree of expectation appears before the simulated image display is hidden, and the special aspect makes the simulated image display difficult to see. , the player can now enjoy the performance that progresses from the sample image display to the post-reception performance (special mode) without having to change his gaze.

In this regard, even when the above-mentioned specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first mode of first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period)) appears, the sample image display is It is made difficult to visually recognize the image depending on the aspect of the image. According to such a configuration, there is a case where the sample image display is made difficult to view due to the above-mentioned special mode that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the granting of a benefit (special reception period), and a case where the above-mentioned specific mode does not suggest the degree of expectation concerning the granting of the benefit. Since there are cases where the sample image display is made difficult to view (specific reception period), the ``modes that make the sample image display difficult to view (specific mode, special mode)'' will be given a performance effect. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the reception period illustrated in each production example or modification example occurs, a sample image display indicating the objects (types of operation means, etc.) for which reception is permitted within the reception period will be displayed. It may be displayed both within the period in which the precursor effect display is executed before the reception period occurs, and within the reception period. However, in this case, the sample image display that will be displayed during the period in which the precursor effect display is executed will be different from the sample image display that will be displayed during the acceptance period, and before the acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to make it invisible.

Hereinafter, a modification example will be described in which the method of displaying a sample image in this manner is applied to the second reception period. That is, FIGS. 183(a) to 183(f) and FIGS. 184(g) and (h) are modified examples of the "effect when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. (i) to (l) are modified examples of the "effect when the second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 177. In addition, in this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are as described above in "Example of production related to the second reception period (FIGS. 168, 176, and 177)", and The same applies to other examples that can be applied to the "Example of Production".

Now, if the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, then also in the modification for the second reception period, first, the performance determination (notice preview) corresponding to the second variation pattern is selected. judgment, etc.). After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 183(a) ”).

However, in this modified example, when timing tG0, which is earlier than timing tG1 described above, arrives, the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" is executed, as shown in FIG. 183(b). There is. In the example shown in FIG. 183(b), as the "advance type precursor effect display SZE", another example of effect (a sample image display is executed within the period in which the precursor effect display is executed, and then this is temporarily hidden) Although the image display that is used also in the normal production example (in which no such thing is performed) is executed, the image display used in the "precedent-type precursor production display SZE" is different from other production examples (in which the precursor production display is executed It is desirable to display an image that cannot appear in a normal production example in which a sample image is displayed within a period and then temporarily hidden.

In this modification, while the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" is being displayed, a mock image display TMH (in this case, an integrated simulated image display) appears. That is, as shown in FIG. 183(c), at least a part of the sample image display TMH (here, integrated sample image display) according to this example is made difficult to see by the "preceding precursor effect display SZE". The display will start while the screen is in progress. In addition, although the sample image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated sample image display, it is an image ( It is to be displayed as a sample image display in a manner that cannot be displayed during the acceptance period.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 183(d), the sample image display TMH (in this case, the integrated sample image display) is displayed in a manner that does not make it difficult to see due to the "preceding precursor effect display SZE". Become so. In this example, the display related to the "advanced portent effect display SZE" has been finished, and the display is now decorated with another effect display (flame effect in the figure).

However, as shown in FIG. 183(c) and (d), the relevant simulated image display TMH (here, integrated simulated image display) that appears while the "precedent type precursor effect display SZE" is being displayed. is displayed in a manner different from any of the manners as a sample image display (FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)) that may be displayed within the acceptance period. This makes it possible to display the sample image display TMH for a relatively long time while indicating that the acceptance period has not yet occurred.

As will be described later, when the relevant sample image display TMH (in this case, integrated sample image display) appears, the above-mentioned multiple modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) are displayed within the corresponding acceptance period. Among these, the sample image is displayed in a highly anticipated manner (for example, FIG. 144(d)). This makes it possible to improve the game's interest when the "preceding precursor effect display SZE" is displayed. Note that the modes that can be displayed as a sample image display are not necessarily the above four modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)), and may be, for example, only two modes.

In this modification, when timing tG1 arrives, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" starts to be executed, and the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" causes the sample image to be displayed. A part of the TMH becomes difficult to view (for example, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 183(f), the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see the entire sample image display TMH, and thus the "normal type precursor effect display" While "TZE" is being displayed, the sample image display TMH is not displayed.

After that, when timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 184(g), the sample image display (here, integrated sample image display IG) is changed to the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)). ), the display starts with the highly anticipated mode. In this way, when the sample image display that can be displayed during the reception period (in this case, integrated sample image display IG) starts to be displayed, a part of it is made difficult to see due to the "normal type precursor effect display TZE". ing.

Then, while the "normal type portent effect display TZE" and the "sample image display (here, integrated replica image display IG)" are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 184(h), the second A reception period will occur (timing tG3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second presentation device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted; however, in this modification as well, the second presentation device (sub liquid crystal 1610) The "back specific performance" and the "foreshadowing performance" are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (FIGS. 176 and 177). In addition, the effects using the third effect device (speaker) (acceptable sound, output sound after second acceptance, etc.) are now executed in the same way as in the above example (Figs. 176 and 177). ing.

In addition, in this modification, even if the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, the action is When the second reception period ends, the execution of the post-reception performance (second post-reception performance) corresponding to the second reception period starts.

Also, in this modified example, there are cases where a post-reception performance with a relatively low level of expectation is executed and cases where a post-reception performance with a relatively high level of expectation is executed. The case where the post-acceptance effect with a low value is executed is the same as the above-mentioned effect ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 177), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modification, if a "post-reception performance with relatively high expectations" is executed as a post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, the above-mentioned performance content (see Fig. 177 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effects shown in FIGS. 184(i) to (l) appear.

First, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 184(i), at timing tG3a, which is the point in time when the player's action is accepted, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" and the "sample image display (here, , integrated model image display IG)" is not hidden, but also the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" and "simulation image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" are made difficult to see. Nor.

However, in this example, at the time of acceptance and after that, while the "sample image display (in this case, integrated replica image display IG)" is being displayed, the dynamic display as a replica image display will be performed. is expected to continue. Furthermore, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced over time.

At timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 184(j), while the "second reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started, The second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in a second mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2). However, no matter how much display area the gauge image GG has at the time of acceptance (FIG. 184(i)), when timing tG3b arrives, the display area will be "0". I'm trying to make it happen. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG whose display area has been reduced according to a certain law with the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is proportional to the passage of time) However, ignoring the previous rules, the display area was suddenly drastically reduced, and as a result, ``The remaining time was set to ``0'' due to a surprise attack, but luckily we were able to make it in time for the reception.'' It becomes possible to make the player think that the player is playing the game, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Then, when timing tG3c arrives within the period in which the display related to the second extinction related display SK2-2 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the player "Second reception performance display UG2" as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the reception of the operation is in the second mode (second reception performance display UG2-2) Execution starts with . It goes without saying that the post-acceptance performance display indicates the level of expectation (the rate at which the bonus will be given to the player). The percentage may be 100%.

Note that the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modification includes, as shown in FIG. 184(k), an integrated image display IG, a second omen effect display ZEH2, and a second disappearance related display SK2-. 2, etc., but it may be displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 182.

After this, first, the integrated image display IG and the second omen effect display ZEH2 are respectively hidden (FIG. 184(l)). Next, although not shown, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 is hidden, and as a result, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 is displayed with good visibility. It becomes like this.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of precursor effects displayed as precursor effects indicating that the acceptance period will occur. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 183 and 184), when a specific precursor performance display (FIGS. 183(b) to (f) and FIG. 184(g)) is performed among the plurality of precursor performance displays, A sample image related to the reception target is displayed both during a precursor period (sample image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and during the acceptance period (sample image display IG).

Particularly, in this modification, after the sample image display (the sample image display TMH) is displayed in the precursor period, it is hidden within the precursor period. As for the sample image display TMH that is displayed (and hidden) only during the premonitory period, it is different from the sample image display IG that can be displayed within the acceptance period. It is expected to improve performance related to operations from a period before this occurs.

Also in this modification, if an application is accepted within the acceptance period, the sample image display IG is hidden based on the acceptance (Fig. 184(l)). Until the sample image display IG is hidden, "a specific mode that makes the sample image display difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2-2)" can appear (Fig. 184 (j), ( k)). However, regarding the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (second disappearance related display SK2-2)", the sample image display TMH displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is not displayed. When it is hidden, it is prevented from appearing until it is hidden.

According to such a configuration, within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), the "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (second disappearance related display SK2-2)" that appears corresponding to the reception period '' does not appear and the sample image display TMH is hidden. Therefore, even if the sample image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period (display of a specific precursor effect), even if it is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player will not be informed. This makes it possible to make it less likely that a misunderstanding will occur that the reception period has ended before the application period has expired.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, the "aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the replica image display" that can appear in response to the reception is changed from the above-mentioned "specific aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the replica image display" (second disappearance). A number of related displays will be prepared, including ``Related Display SK2-2)''. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 183 and 184), none of these aspects is made to appear when the sample image display TMH displayed within the precursory period is hidden. It has become. In the above modification, a mode different from any of the multiple modes prepared as "a mode that makes the sample image display difficult to see" (normal type precursor effect display TZE) according to the reception is applied to the sample image display TMH within the precursor period. Until the image is hidden, it functions as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display. In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the sample image display" exclusive to the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes the sample image display difficult to see" appears during the precursor period. This makes it possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that the acceptance period has ended without their knowledge.

In addition, in the above modification, a "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed as a "mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the preview image display" until the preview image display TMH is hidden within the precursor period. If the application is received within the acceptance period, the "second extinction related display SK2-2" will be displayed as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the replica image display" until the replica image display IG is hidden. I decided to do so. In this regard, the period from when the "Normal portent effect display TZE" is displayed until it is hidden is the period from when the "second extinction related display SK2-2" is displayed until it is hidden. It is desirable to make the length longer than that in order to improve the interest in the game.

If the sample image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period, in the reception period that occurs correspondingly after the sample image display TMH is hidden, the reception target of the type suggested by the sample image display TMH will be Reception (reception regarding post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is allowed for (operation means), and the reception target (operation means) is different from the reception target (operation means) of the type suggested by the sample image display TMH. It is desirable that the reception (reception regarding the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is not allowed. That is, in the case of the above modification (FIGS. 183 and 184), the sample image display sample image display TMH displayed within the precursor period suggests the operation button 410 as the reception target, and therefore corresponds to this. During the reception period, reception (reception related to the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for a reception object (sword ornament 5001) that is different from the operation button 410.

Further, as described above, this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with an "operation button 410" and a "sword ornament 5001" as objects for reception regarding post-reception effects. In this regard, if the performance is executed in a manner such as "after displaying the sample image display, hide the sample image display within the premonitory period", among the "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001" , it is desirable that the side with a high rate of jackpot symbols appearing when it is selected as the receiving object be selected as the receiving object. In other words, in this case, among the "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001," the reception target with a lower rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol when it is accepted as a reception target will have a corresponding reception period. In advance, the effect is not executed in a manner such as ``after displaying the sample image display, the sample image display is hidden within the premonitory period''.

Among the modified examples described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, such "performance mode related to omen production" is limited to a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods or a separate period between them. It is also applicable to examples. In addition, regarding the "performance mode related to omen production", it is not applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but is applied to the eighth reception period (the eighth reception period) which is different from any of these reception periods. It may be prepared as a variation pattern (eighth post-reception performance).

Furthermore, among the modified examples described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, such "production mode related to portent effects" is not limited to the modified examples illustrated with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182, or other examples thereof. It is also applicable to

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestion display (display including section image KG, etc.) that reduces the display area of a specific image (gauge image GG) as time passes during the acceptance period. be. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 183 and 184), the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action. Since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced even while the performance is in progress, it is possible to recognize whether "the reception has been accepted" even after the reception has been made. It is now expected to make it difficult to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, a specific section area (section image KG) is displayed within the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestion display, and the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed as a remaining time suggestion display. The display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is depicted to be reduced within the divided area (divided image KG). After the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action, not only the specific image (gauge image GG) but also the specific section area (section image KG) will continue to be displayed. I have to. According to such a configuration, even after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the player's action, the specific divided area (divided image KG) is displayed, so that the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed. ) has decreased in display area.

Note that "the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the performance has proceeded based on the acceptance of the action by the player" means, for example, that the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is This also includes the case where a predetermined display area remains as the gauge image GG at the time the performance is performed based on this, but the display area is reduced to 0 (non-display) at a later point in time. (Figure 184(j)). However, in this case, it is required that the specific partitioned area (blocked image KG) is still displayed at the time when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area (blocked image KG) is , the gauge image GG will be hidden from view after the timing when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to zero.

Furthermore, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, when a movement by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (eg gauge image GG, section image KG, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. However, prior to hiding the remaining time suggestion display, regardless of how much display area of the gauge image GG was left at the time of acceptance, a specific section area (section image KG ), a specific image with a display area of a specific value (a predetermined value) is displayed, or a specific partitioned area (blocked image KG) and a specific partitioned area (blocked image KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). In other words, in this case, the gauge image GG, whose display area has been decreasing according to a certain law with the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is proportional to the passage of time), Ignoring this law, the display area was suddenly drastically reduced, making the user think that ``the remaining time was set to 0 due to a surprise attack, but luckily they were able to make it in time for the reception.'' This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, at the time when the player's action is accepted (when the progress of the performance according to the acceptance is started), the execution starts before the action is accepted. The "description in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" is not ended and continues. Thereafter, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) with a display area of a specific value is displayed within a specific partitioned area (blocked image KG), or Only a specific divided area (divided image KG) of the image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

In other words, in this case, at the timing (for example, timing tG3a) at which the progress of the production according to the reception starts, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Therefore, it is expected that even after the reception has been made, it will be difficult to recognize whether the reception has been made or not, thereby maintaining a good sense of tension. In addition, a depiction in which the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image GG) is significantly reduced at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) that is later than the timing at which the progress of the production according to the reception is started (for example, timing tG3a) Since this is done, it is possible to make it appear as if the reception was completed just in time within the validity period (reception period), and it is expected that the game will increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 184, the sample image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after the reception. . In this respect, when the timing tG3b arrives when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acceptance, no matter which dynamic position the sample image was at at the time of acceptance, it will be displayed at a specific dynamic position after the acceptance. The sample image display is displayed in a stationary manner (in the example shown in FIG. 184(j), when timing tG3b arrives, the button position is set to the highest position regardless of the previous button position. ). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 184(j), after timing tG3b, the sample image display is not dynamically displayed, but is stopped and displayed at the displayed position. Thereby, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained more suitably.

Among the modified examples described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, such "depiction of gauge image GG and division image KG after acceptance (FIGS. 184(i) to (k))" and " Dynamic display and static display related to displaying a sample image" can also be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods and other examples thereof. In addition, regarding the "depiction of gauge images GG and compartment images KG after acceptance (Figs. 184(i) to (k))", it applies to any of the first acceptance period to seventh acceptance period. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance) that is different from any of these reception periods.

In addition, "the depiction of the gauge image GG and the compartment image KG after the acceptance (Figs. 184(i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to the display of the sample image" will be sent to the first receptionist. When applying to one of the period to the seventh reception period (any reception period may be used), it is desirable not to apply it to a reception period different from the applied reception period. According to such a configuration, after an acceptance is made, there are cases where a depiction in which the gauge image GG decreases significantly appears (FIG. 184 (j)) and cases where the depiction does not appear, which reduces the interest in gaming. You will be able to improve your skills.

Even during the acceptance period when the "depiction of gauge images GG and compartment images KG after acceptance (Fig. 184 (i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to display of sample images" are not applied, After the acceptance is made, it is desirable to reduce the display area of the gauge image GG or perform dynamic display itself. That is, in this case, the only difference is that the display area of the gauge image GG is not depicted to be greatly reduced in disregard of the previous law, and the static display is not performed.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, other examples, and variations thereof, multiple reception periods (for example, the first reception period to the seventh reception period, etc.) that can occur under different conditions are prepared. There is. In this regard, for a predetermined acceptance period among multiple acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period, third acceptance period, fifth acceptance period, etc.), the symbol fluctuation that occurred during the predetermined acceptance period ends. and can be continued even after the next symbol variation has started (can occur across multiple variations), and can be continued during a specific acceptance period among multiple acceptance periods (for example, during the second acceptance period). period, 4th acceptance period, 7th acceptance period, etc.) will not continue until after the symbol variation that occurred during the specific acceptance period has ended, and will not continue until the symbol variation has ended. It may be configured such that it is terminated earlier. In other words, in this case, the sample image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the predetermined reception period and during the specific reception period, and when the player's action is accepted within the predetermined reception period, and when the In either case, when a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, the simulated image display is not hidden at the time the acceptance is made, and the simulated image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). etc.) will appear. As a result, effects such as ``even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared in the sample image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended'' can be achieved. It becomes possible to suitably obtain the information regardless of whether it is a predetermined reception period or a specific reception period.

Further, the "predetermined reception period" may be, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, or the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" may be, for example, the second reception period, the fourth reception period, etc. In the case of a reception period and a seventh reception period, the manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display) is when the reception is made in a "predetermined reception period" that can be maintained across multiple fluctuations, It will be executed in a different manner depending on when the reception is made in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations. In other words, in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the acceptance period will end within the pattern change that is being executed, based on the type of "manner in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display, etc.)" This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, a sample image of the reception target is displayed in both the "predetermined reception period" that can occur across multiple fluctuations, and the "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations. The sample image may be displayed in different manners (display size, position, etc.) between the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period." For example, in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple variations, when the sample image display is displayed in the manner described above (displayed only at a predetermined position), an occurrence that spans multiple variations may occur. During the possible "predetermined acceptance period," it is desirable to display the sample image so that its display position changes (move display). According to such a configuration, even if a "predetermined acceptance period" occurs across multiple fluctuations, it is possible to urge the player to accept the application quickly.

In addition, in the "reception period" that does not span multiple variations, there are cases where the operation button 410 is used as the reception target and cases where the sword decoration 5001 is used as the reception target, whereas the occurrence spans over multiple variations. In the possible "reception period", the operation button 410 may be used as a reception object, but it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 not be used as a reception object.

Even during a "reception period" that may occur over multiple fluctuations, it is desirable to enable display of a precursor effect before the "reception period" occurs. In other words, in this case, the symbol variation is terminated while the "foreshadowing effect display" is being executed, and the acceptance period corresponding to the "foreshadowing effect display" may occur after the symbol variation is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game after the symbol variation ends.

Even in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, after the reception is made, A mode that makes the image display difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.) appears. This ``mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)'' is executed after a predetermined time, but if the symbol fluctuation is stopped while this is being executed. However, it is desirable that the ``mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)'' is continued without being terminated midway.

``Precursive effects display'' that is executed in response to ``reception periods (for example, first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.)'' that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations; Regarding "modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the pattern image display (disappearance related display, etc.)", the time from when the symbol variation that was in the execution state stops to when the next symbol variation starts to execute (the time from when the symbol variation that was in the execution state starts) The execution period (the time from when the precursor effect display is displayed until it is hidden) is shorter than the time required from when the fluctuation stops until the hold is cleared, making the sample image display difficult to see. It is desirable that the time period from when the aspect appears until it is terminated be terminated.

As mentioned above, in the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, the corresponding "premonitory effect display" and “disappearance related display” may be displayed. In this regard, if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed before the symbol variation in which the "foreshadowing effect display" is displayed ends, the same area as the "foreshadowing effect display" (overlapping area) ), the "extinction-related display" is displayed by using at least a part of If the ``extinction-related display'' is displayed in the ``disappearance-related display'' (e.g., after the ``disappearance-related display'' is displayed), the ``extinction-related display'' may be displayed using only an area different from the area in which the ``precursor effect display'' is displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, while paying close attention to the post-reception performance, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the performance is performed over a plurality of variations.

In addition, as mentioned above, multiple modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) with different expectations are prepared for displaying the sample image, and a "reception period" (for example, a second reception period, 4th reception period, 7th reception period), the sample image display is displayed in one of these modes. However, in the "reception period (e.g., first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in the form of multiple fluctuations, certain aspects among the multiple aspects (for example, FIG. 144 It is desirable that only the simulated image shown in (a)) be displayed. However, there are "reception periods (e.g., second reception period, fourth reception period, seventh reception period)" that do not span multiple fluctuations, and "reception periods (e.g., reception periods that can occur across multiple fluctuations)" It is desirable that the dynamic display of the sample image is continued after the application is received, regardless of whether the application is accepted (first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.).

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of game states (the first game state and the second (playing state) can occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "acceptance period" during which the performance after acceptance can be executed when a movement by a player is accepted is limited to the first gaming state and the second playing state. This can occur in any gaming state. Furthermore, if a player's action is accepted within such a "reception period", the "reception period" shall be deemed to have occurred in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. After the application is accepted, "modes that make the sample image display difficult to view (disappearance related display, etc.)" appear while the sample image display is being displayed, and after that, "the sample image display becomes difficult to see." The model image display is hidden while the "mode (extinction related display, etc.)" is appearing.

In other words, in this case, the effect is that ``Even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode appeared in the sample image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended.'' , even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurs in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

In addition, the "first gaming state" corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state (low probability, non-time saving), and the "second gaming state" corresponds to the normal gaming state (low probability, non-time saving), and the "second gaming state" is the one that occurs based on the result of jackpot determination ( This corresponds to a "gaming state different from the normal gaming state" that can occur (state transition). Any gaming state may be used as long as it is different from the normal gaming state.

To further explain this point using the multiple reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period, etc.) exemplified in the above-mentioned production examples, other examples, and variations thereof, for example, multiple reception periods Predetermined types of reception periods within the period (for example, the first reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period, and the seventh reception period, etc., but do not necessarily include all of them. ) is set so that it can occur only in the first gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the third acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods is set so that it can occur only in the second gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Even with such a configuration, the display of the sample image related to the reception target is performed between the reception period of the predetermined type (first gaming state) and the third reception period (second gaming state). Displayed in both cases. However, in the first gaming state (if accepted in the first acceptance period), in the second gaming state (if accepted in the second acceptance period), "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" Specific modes (such as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 and the seventh disappearance-related display, but not all of them need to be included) that cannot appear can appear.

According to such a configuration, the first gaming state and the first gaming state can be determined by simply checking which mode has appeared as “a mode in which the simulated image display is difficult to visually recognize” without checking the type of performance after reception. It becomes possible to grasp which of the two gaming states the player is in, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the "mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 also appears only when the game is in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first acceptance period). It may also be set as a "mode in which the display of the sample image becomes difficult to recognize". That is, in this case, it is expected to suitably maintain the player's interest in gaming when he is in the most disadvantageous state (normal gaming state).

Further, according to the above configuration, in the second gaming state (when accepted in the third acceptance period), the first extinction-related display is executed as "a mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". However, the first disappearance related display can also appear in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first acceptance period). That is, in this case, since the possibility of being in a state controlled to the second gaming state is merely indicated, a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained. Furthermore, even if the player is being controlled to the first gaming state, when the first extinction related display appears, the player is made aware of the possibility that the player is being controlled to the second gaming state. As a result, the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, or may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, or It may be something that can only occur in the first game state between the state and the second game state.

Furthermore, as described above, during the acceptance period that occurs in the first gaming state, the mock image display is configured to be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)). In this regard, during the reception period that occurs in the second gaming state, it may be possible to display only a model image of a specific mode (for example, the mode with low expectations, FIG. 144(a)) among the multiple modes. desirable. According to such a configuration, even if a mode with a low expectation level (FIG. 144(a)) appears as a simulated image display, the possibility that the game is being controlled to the second gaming state is reduced. Since the player can be made aware of this, it is possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in playing the game.

In the first gaming state, if the player's action is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same mode as in the case where the image display is difficult to visually recognize appears (for example, 2 reception period, 4th reception period, 5th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.) and cases where a different aspect from the case of acceptance appears (for example, 1st reception period, etc.) However, in the second gaming state (third acceptance period), the same mode as in the case of acceptance should always appear as "a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", or It is desirable to make sure that a different aspect than when accepted appears. According to such a configuration, when a motion is not accepted in the first gaming state, depending on whether the same mode as when the motion is accepted appears as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", It becomes possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the second gaming state is occurring.

The acceptance period (third acceptance period) that occurs in the second gaming state is set as ``Even if the acceptance is not accepted within the period, it is the same as if the acceptance is made in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display.'' If the mode is generated as "something that always appears", for the acceptance period (third acceptance period), even if "the mode is not accepted" that occurs in the first gaming state, "the pattern image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". It is desirable that the valid time (set time) as the acceptance period is longer than any of the ``acceptance periods in which the same mode as in the case of acceptance always appears as the mode''.

In both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, a corresponding precursor effect display will be executed before the acceptance period occurs. In this regard, in the first game state, specific precursor performance displays (second precursor performance display, fifth precursor performance display, seventh precursor performance display, etc.) that cannot occur in the second game state are executed. It is desirable to do so.

[Special reception period]
As explained with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) that are prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a production judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.) regarding which of the expected productions (preliminary presentation etc.) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and the motion of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is rewarded with a jackpot game and a high reward. Transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is permitted.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed, and the actions (operations) by the player are accepted within the acceptance period. The display changes according to the type of acceptance period that has occurred. Furthermore, during the reception period, a mock image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image can be displayed.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview performance judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (valid period) at a predetermined timing are included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period), the acceptance of display changes on the effect display device 1600 is allowed. Since the post-operation display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect movement by the movable decorative body, etc. are only generated. The performance itself is poor, and there is concern that interest in the game will decline due to the application period.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, "operations by the player" to be detected refers to operations directly operated by the player, such as "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001." (Pushing motion or sword drawing motion), but also "contact motion by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "player's movement within a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes "actions caused by". In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operating means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special effects are provided, for example. Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to suppress the decline in The described configuration may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decline in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In both the case where the first reception period occurs and the case where the second reception period occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. , the same action by the player is displayed as different text information (for example, "Press!", "Please press", etc.) in the first reception period and the second reception period, even though the same action is accepted. I try to do that. The "first acceptance period (displayed after the first acceptance)" and "second acceptance period (displayed after the second acceptance)" regarding the configuration 1-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change that occurs as a result of the detection of the action (post-reception display) are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even if the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since they are made to differ depending on the type (type of post-reception display), operations (actions by the player) must be made with awareness of which type of display change may occur as a post-reception display. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

In addition, when requesting a different action (operation mode) from the player, even if the reception period is of the same type (generating the same post-reception display), the request will be made in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable for the character information displayed to be different from each other in order to suppress operational errors by the player. In the same sense, if a player is requested to perform a different action (operation mode), and the acceptance period is of a different type (a different post-acceptance display is generated), the acceptance period is It is desirable that the text information displayed in relation to what has occurred be different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first reception period is requested, and the same text information and sample image display as in the case of the first reception period are displayed. It is also possible to further prepare a reception period in which a different post-reception display is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely understand which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information or the sample image display. be expected to maintain it.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 1-A", text information will not be displayed during the first reception period until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) ends. However, during the second acceptance period, text information may be hidden during the acceptance period (valid status). It may be set as such. In other words, in this case, during the second acceptance period, the player is not required to perform any operation (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the period begins. It has become difficult to recognize the type of reception period in question, and it has become difficult to recognize the type of reception period in question. It is now expected to suitably avoid situations where the sense of tension is completely lost.

Although this will also be described later, in the case of adopting "Configuration 1-A", there will be a period in which text information is displayed and a period in which text information is hidden during the second reception period. , the same display change may occur regardless of whether the reception is made during any of these periods. In other words, in this case, even if the text information is hidden, as long as you confirm what kind of operation mode is requested while the text information is displayed, the operation can be performed properly. This is possible, and is expected to suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

[Configuration 2-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, only one mode of displaying the sample image is possible, and in the second reception period, it is possible to display the sample image in any one of a plurality of modes. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, effects that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs are provided, so that until an operation (movement) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to suitably improve the player's interest in playing games.

In addition, regarding the "multiple modes of display of the sample image" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is possible for the game to vary the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on which of the sample image displays is displayed. It is more desirable for improving interest. Further, any one of the "multiple modes of displaying the sample image" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable that the ``lowest expected mode'' of the ``multiple modes of displaying the simulated image'' be the same as the ``one mode'' that can be displayed during the first reception period.

Also, as will be described later, if the "Configuration 2-A" is adopted, a third reception period will be further provided, and only one aspect of the sample image display will be displayed in the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be possible to do so. In the "second reception period" in which the sample image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the sample image display is prevented from being hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which the sample image is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) of the "first reception period" has ended. However, in the "third reception period", the display of the sample image will not be hidden until the end of the valid state (reception period). During this process, the sample image display that had been displayed up to that point may be hidden. In other words, in this case, even in the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one aspect of the sample image display is displayed, it is not possible to decide whether or not the sample image display is hidden in the middle. Since the performance is provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest in the game until the operation (movement) by the player is detected. Note that the sample image display displayed in the first reception period and the sample image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same, so that they may not be displayed. It may also be possible to suggest the possibility that the

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting "Configuration 2-A", during the third reception period, either the period in which the sample image display is displayed or the period in which the sample image display is hidden. The same display change (post-reception display) may be made even if the reception is made in . In other words, in this case, even after the sample image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself continues without any change, so the performance using the "third reception period" ( In creating the display (hidden/displayed image display), it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Note that the "third acceptance period (display after third acceptance)" related to the configuration 2-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

[Configuration 3-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, after the sample image display is displayed when the first reception period occurs, the sample image display is not hidden until the first reception period ends. , it is possible to accept actions by the player while the simulated image display is being displayed, and in the second acceptance period, it is possible to accept actions by the player while the simulated image display is not being displayed; The above-mentioned "acceptance permission sound" is audibly output when the first acceptance period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 3-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, not only the "first reception period" in which reception is performed while the reception permission sound is audibly output and the sample image display is displayed, but also the reception period in which the reception permission sound is not audibly output and Since there is a "second reception period" in which applications are accepted while the sample image display is not displayed, players should be aware that the post-reception display may occur at various times that the player did not intend. It is now expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

Also, as will be described later, if the "Configuration 3-A" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and during the second reception period, the sample image is Although it is possible to accept actions by the player while the display is not displayed and the sample image display is not displayed, in the third reception period, the sample image display is only for a part of the third reception period. It may be possible to accept an action by the player both during a period in which the virtual image display is hidden and during a period in which the virtual image display is hidden. In other words, in this case, the third reception period has two aspects: the first reception period (reception while the sample image display is displayed) and the second reception period (reception while the sample image display is not displayed). By having both of these features, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, even after the sample image display is hidden, there is a possibility that the player's actions (operations) will continue to be accepted, so the player's actions (operations) will not be accepted. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed when the sample image display is hidden without being displayed.

Note that the "third acceptance period (displayed after third acceptance)" related to the "Configuration 3-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the Configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

Furthermore, the acceptance permission sound may be audibly output when the first acceptance period occurs, but may not be audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs or when the third acceptance period occurs. . That is, during the third reception period, there is a timing at which the sample image display is displayed. In this regard, according to the above configuration for the third reception period, the reception permission sound will not be output at the same time as the sample image display (or before or after). . As a result, in the third reception period, even at the timing when the reception period occurs, the side as the first reception period (a sample image display is displayed) and the side as the second reception period (the reception permission sound is output) Since the player has both the above-mentioned features (not played), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting "Configuration 3-A", during the third reception period, either the period in which the sample image display is displayed or the period in which the sample image display is hidden. The same display change (post-reception display) may be made even if the reception is made in . In other words, in this case, even after the sample image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself continues without any change, so the performance using the "third reception period" ( In creating the display (hidden/displayed image display), it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, if a movement by the player is detected within the period, the first reception display is displayed and the first reception sound is output, but if no movement by the player is detected within the period. Sometimes, the display after the first reception is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output, and during the second reception period, when a movement by the player is detected within the period, Displays the second reception display and outputs the second reception sound, and even if no movement by the player is detected within the period, the second reception sound is the same as when the movement by the player is detected within the period. Although the post-acceptance display is displayed, the second acceptance sound is not output. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 4-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, if a movement (operation) by a player is not accepted within the acceptance period, there may be a disadvantage in terms of performance, so it is preferable to reduce the tension when the acceptance period occurs. will be able to maintain it.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 4-A", a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, A third reception display is displayed and a third reception sound is output, and even if no movement by the player is detected within the period, the same third reception sound as when the movement by the player is detected within the period is displayed. The post-acceptance display may be displayed and the third acceptance sound may be output. In other words, in this case, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (post-acceptance change) as when the action was accepted is caused to occur so as to cause a disadvantage in terms of presentation. (Second reception period) and cases (Third reception period) in which it is generated so as not to cause any disadvantages in terms of performance.As a result, actions (operations) by players cannot be accepted in time within the reception period. The decline in interest in games that would otherwise occur can be suppressed.

Note that the "third acceptance period (displayed after the third acceptance)" for the "Configuration 4-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the Configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

[Configuration 5-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, during the first reception period, the first variation pattern starts to be executed regardless of the number of judgment information stored in the holding storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a pending state (number of pending)). This can occur when the first timing arrives when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the first variation pattern started, and the second reception period is a period in which the number of determination information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of determination information If the second variation pattern is started when the number of jackpot determinations in the state (pending number) is less than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern is However, if the execution of the second variation pattern is started when the number of judgment information stored in the pending storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, then the second variation pattern Even if the second timing arrives after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of execution, the second timing is prevented from occurring. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 5-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, when a game is about to be canceled and the number of pending games becomes small, a type of reception period (second reception period) that has not occurred before will occur. It becomes possible to expect that the game will be encouraged not to be canceled, or even if the game is canceled, it will be possible to have the impression that the game was interesting at the end.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 5-A", the second fluctuation pattern is Even if the execution is started, the number of determination information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of determination information stored in the suspension storage means When the number) increases (becomes a predetermined number or more), the second acceptance period may not occur when a second timing arrives at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern started. In other words, even if the symbol fluctuation (second fluctuation pattern) is started when the number of reservations is decreasing, if the number of reservations is increased within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation. , which suggests that the player is not about to stop playing. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started when the number of reservations is decreasing, within the execution period of the symbol variation. If the number of reservations is increased, the second reception period will not be generated when the second timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the execution of the second fluctuation pattern has started, so the second reception period will be changed. , it will be possible to function more appropriately as "a type of reception period that can only appear when you are about to cancel a game."

In addition, in order to obtain such effects more suitably, even if the second reception period occurs, the judgment information stored in the suspension storage means is It is more desirable to end the second acceptance period at that point when the number of requests (number of reservations) increases.

[Configuration 6-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. The first reception period occurs when the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner regardless of the production situation, and the second reception period occurs when the specific BGM is audibly output regardless of the production situation. Since it is generated after being suppressed or made inaudible, it is possible to use specific BGM to provide effects related to the type of reception period even before the reception period occurs. It becomes like this. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 6-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 6-A", multiple reception periods including a first reception period, a second reception period, and a third reception period will be prepared, and 3 Depending on the situation of the performance, the reception period may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. You can do it like this. According to such a configuration, there are cases where the acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and cases where the acceptance period occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. In either case, the acceptance period may be the "third acceptance period," so it is possible to maintain interest in the game until the player's action (operation) is accepted. become expected to do so.

Note that the "third acceptance period (displayed after the third acceptance)" regarding the "Configuration 6-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the Configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

[Configuration 7-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, in the first reception period, if a reception is made within the period, a first post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the first post-reception display is displayed on the production design. During this period, the display is given priority over the display after the first reception. On the other hand, in the second reception period, if a reception is made within the period, a second post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the second post-reception display is displayed for the production design. During this period, the second post-reception display is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see, or is hidden. In addition, the "aspect in which visibility is made difficult" according to the configuration 7-A means "at least a part of the performance design is made visible through the second reception display set to a predetermined transmittance in accordance with the transmittance." or a mode in which at least a part of the production design is made invisible by a second post-reception display that overlaps with this, or a mode in which at least a part of the production design is hidden, etc. ” means. In addition, the "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 7-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, the type of acceptance period can be recognized by checking whether the visibility of the performance symbols is affected by the post-acceptance display triggered by the player's operation. It becomes like this. It should be noted that the "design for presentation" refers to, for example, a pattern that forms a ready-to-reach state as a presentation in the presentation display device 1600, and also includes a presentation indicating whether or not to form a ready-to-reach state, a pseudo-continuous presentation, This is a pattern that is also used for full rotation performances.

However, it has been confirmed that some players feel aversion to the fact that the visibility of such performance symbols deteriorates due to the display of the second post-reception display. There is. Therefore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 7-A", when the second post-reception display corresponding to the reception within the second reception period is displayed, the reception period is different from the second reception period. (for example, generated in response to reception within the second reception period). Then, when an operation by the player is accepted within the different period, the performance symbols may be made easier to see by hiding the second post-acceptance display using the acceptance as an opportunity.

For example, if the second post-reception display in response to the reception within the second reception period is to be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display started, the display will be hidden until the predetermined time elapses. By simply performing a predetermined operation, the player can hide the second post-acceptance display at that point. Please note that the operations required of the player to display the second post-reception display within the second reception period and the reception period that is different from the second reception period (reception period that occurs in response to reception within the second reception period) ) The operations required of the player to hide the second post-reception display may be the same operation or different operations. For example, during a reception period that is different from the second reception period (a reception period that occurs in response to reception within the second reception period), the player may use multiple operation methods to hide the second reception display. Alternatively, the user may be required to perform an operation for each.

On the other hand, the display after the first reception may also be displayed for a predetermined time after the display starts (the predetermined time until the display after the second reception is hidden), or may be a different time. It is hidden when the period (good) has elapsed. However, the display after the first reception that does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance symbols will not be hidden even if the player performs any operations before the predetermined time period has elapsed. It is more desirable to do this in order to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against his/her intention.

[Configuration 8-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. The first acceptance period can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and if the acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, this period may occur. Taking this as a trigger, the specific BGM is made inaudible, and during the second acceptance period, acceptance is permitted after the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode is output audibly in a suppressed mode or is not audibly output. Even if the acceptance is made, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or a state in which it is not audibly output is maintained. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 8-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or a state in which it is not audibly output". You will be able to do this.

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 8-A", during the first reception period, all the sounds that were being output audibly at the time of acceptance will be made inaudible (only specific BGM will be output audibly). In the second acceptance period, when the acceptance is made, all the sounds that were being output audibly at that time are made inaudible (only one sound is being output audibly). In some cases, only the one sound may be made inaudible. In other words, in this case, in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period, the specific BGM may be put in a state where it is "audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output", or when the acceptance is made, it is not output audibly at that point. It is now possible to have a common presentation between the first reception period and the second reception period, such as making all the sounds made inaudible, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. become.

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 8-A", the specific BGM is made inaudible during the first acceptance period (in the middle of the validity period) while acceptance of operations by the player is permitted. Although a situation may occur in which no sound is output, it is desirable that the acceptance period continues even in such a situation. In other words, in this case, in the first reception period, even though the specific BGM is made inaudible upon receipt of the reception, no reception is made for a predetermined period of time after the first reception period occurs. If not, the specific BGM will be made inaudible even though the application has not yet been accepted, making it possible to make people think that the first application period has ended, and the game You will be able to strongly attract people's interest.

In addition, when an acceptance is made and the specific BGM is made inaudible using this as a trigger, a "display change according to the acceptance (display after the first acceptance)" will be generated, but if the acceptance is not yet made. When making the specific BGM inaudible when the user is not listening, it is desirable to avoid causing a "display change in response to the reception (display after the first reception)". In other words, in this case, the first reception period continues by confirming that although the specific BGM has been made inaudible, the "display change according to the reception (display after the first reception)" has not occurred yet. You will be able to make yourself aware of the possibility that you are doing something wrong. After the specific BGM has been made inaudible, if an operation by the player is accepted before the end of the first acceptance period, this will be used as an opportunity to display a change in display according to the acceptance (first acceptance period). This will eliminate the feeling of anxiety when specific BGM is made inaudible (concern that the validity period may have expired), and thereby improve the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to do this.

[Configuration 9-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the operation means includes a plurality of operations including a first operation means (first operation receiving part) and a second operation means (second operation receiving part). We have prepared multiple types of reception periods, including a specific reception period. In the specific acceptance period, both the acceptance of an operation on the first operation means and the acceptance of an operation on the second operation means are permitted as acceptance for causing a display change corresponding to the specific acceptance period. , when an operation on the first operation means is accepted, a specific display change can be generated, and when an operation on the second operation means is accepted, the specific display change is not generated, but the specific display change is made. Since it is possible to generate display changes different from the above, it is possible to make it more interesting to decide which operating means to operate. In addition, the "specific reception period (display after specific reception (specific display change)"), "first operation means", and "second operation means" according to the configuration 9-A are based on the technology of the configuration 9-A. It is just a name used to explain an idea. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as "reception period" and "operation means" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period or operation means different from those reception periods. .

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 9-A", when the first operating means is operated during the specific acceptance period, the specific acceptance period ends, but when the second operating means is operated, the specific acceptance period ends. The remaining time may be extended without ending the specific reception period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to create a reception period that uses multiple operating means and has an unprecedented effect, so it is possible to create various interesting reception periods based on this kind of effect. be able to provide

[Configuration 10-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, during the first reception period, a simulated image display that simulates the operation receiving section is displayed, and during the second reception period, a plurality of simulated image displays that simulate the operation receiving section are displayed, and the simulated image display is controlled by the player's operation. This makes it possible to perform a dynamic display that depicts the movement of the operation receiver when it is made movable. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 10-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, for example, even if a plurality of operation receivers with different required operations (e.g., pushing, pulling, etc.) are prepared, the player does not have to worry about what operation to perform. This makes it easier to recognize whether the information is valid or not, and makes it less likely that operations will not be completed in time within the validity period.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 10-A", the sample image display is executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the player's operation". There may be cases in which the display is executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving section is made movable by an operation by the player" and a case in which it is not executed. In other words, in this case, not only is it easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation to perform even though the simulated image display is being displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed by the player? Since there may be cases where it is difficult to recognize the player's actions, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained until the player's operation is accepted.

[Configuration 11-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation receivers) including a specific operation means (specific operation receiver) are prepared as operation means, As the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared. Then, during the first reception period, a sample image display imitating the specific operation means and a specific image corresponding to the sample image display are displayed, and ``the display area of the specific image is decreased over time to identify "Remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which acceptance of operations on the operating means is permitted" is performed, and in the second reception period, a mock image displaying a copy of the specific operating means is displayed; A specific image corresponding to the display is displayed, and a "remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which operation on the specific operation means is allowed to be accepted by reducing the display area of the specific image over time" is performed. I'm trying not to get hurt. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 11-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 11-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, even if a simulated image display imitating a specific operating means is displayed, "by reducing the display area of the specific image over time, acceptance of operations on the specific operating means is permitted." Since the "remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time" is not necessarily performed, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 11-A", during the second reception period, there will be a special simulated image display that simulates a specific operating means, and a special simulated image display that simulates a different special operating means. The above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" may not be performed even though this is performed.

In other words, in this case, in the second acceptance period, although both the acceptance of operations on the specific operation means and the acceptance of operations on different operation means are allowed, the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" is not performed. will be prevented from occurring. As a result, the second acceptance period can occur without the player feeling overwhelmed by the fact that both acceptance of operations on a specific operation means and acceptance of operations on a different operation means are allowed. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension when you are there.

[Configuration 12-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation means, a first operation receiving section that is displaced by a player's operation, and a first peripheral decoration section provided on the periphery thereof are provided. 1 operation means" and "a second operation means having a second operation receiving part that is displaced by the player's operation, and a second peripheral decoration part provided on the periphery thereof." When displaying a first image display that simulates the first operation means, a first image that simulates the first operation receiver and a first peripheral edge that decorates the periphery of the first image that simulates the first operation receiver. When displaying a second model image displaying a second operation means, a second receiver model image displaying a second operation receiver, and a second receiver model image displaying a second operation receiver. A second peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge can be displayed, and the first peripheral decoration image and the second peripheral decoration image are displayed as mutually different images. Note that the "first operation means" and "second operation means" according to the configuration 12-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and "second operating means" related to other configurations, or may mean operating means on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different operating means from these operating means.

According to such a configuration, even if the operating means themselves are similar, the appearance can be made to be significantly different when the first operating means is displayed and when the second operating means is displayed. As a result, it is expected that it will be easier to distinguish which operating means should be operated.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 12-A", the first peripheral decoration image is displayed as an image imitating the first peripheral decoration part, but the second peripheral decoration image is displayed as an image imitating the second peripheral decoration part. The image may be displayed as an image including at least a portion imitating a peripheral decoration portion different from the portion. In other words, in this case, when the "first imitation image display" having the first peripheral decoration image which is an image imitating the first peripheral decoration part is displayed, it is a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means. This makes it possible to suitably make the user aware of the situation. On the other hand, when the "second image display" having the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not simulate the second peripheral decoration part, is displayed, the second operation means is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to present a situation with a higher level of performance. In this case, the "second operation means corresponding to the second image display" has a larger operation receiver (first operation receiver) than the "first operation means corresponding to the first image display" Even if the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not imitate the second peripheral decoration part, is displayed, for example, by providing the second peripheral decoration part as a member, it may be difficult to recognize which operating means should be operated. It is desirable to avoid this.

In addition, in order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means as a "situation with higher performance," the second peripheral decoration image is a fictitious one that does not exist in the gaming machine. It is desirable that the image be displayed as a replica of the decorative part. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the second operation means is given an opportunity to operate, a part of the second peripheral decoration image includes a portion that imitates the second peripheral decoration part. It may be possible to do so.

[Configuration 13-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation receivers including a first operation receiver, a second operation receiver, and a third operation receiver are prepared as operation means. We have prepared multiple types of reception periods, including a specific reception period. During the specific reception period, a first image display imitating the first operation receiving part, a second image display imitating the second operation receiving part, and a third image display imitating the third operation receiving part are displayed. All of them are displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the first operation receiving section among the plurality of operation receiving sections, the reception is performed among the first sample image display, the second sample image display, and the third sample image display. At least the second image display and the third image display that simulate the operation receiving part that has not been performed are hidden. In addition, the "first operation receiving section", "second operation receiving section", "third operation receiving section", and "specific reception period" according to the configuration 13-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 13-A. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "operation receiving section" or "acceptance period" related to other configurations, or it may mean different things.

According to the above configuration, a simulated image display (second Since the sample image display, third sample image display) will be hidden, the operation receiving sections (second operation receiving section, third It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not further operation is required on the operation receiving section).

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 13-A", even though the first sample image display, second sample image display, and third sample image display are displayed during the specific reception period, the first sample image display, the second sample image display, and the third sample image display are displayed. Among the first operation receiving section, the second operation receiving section, and the third operation receiving section, the third operation receiving section may not be enabled (not allowed) to accept operations. That is, in this case, in the specific reception period, when an operation is accepted on the first operation receiving part, a first display change is generated, and when an operation is accepted on the second operation receiving part, a second display change is generated. However, since no operation will be accepted on the third operation receiving section and no display change will occur due to the operation, until the operation by the player is accepted during the specified reception period. It becomes possible to suitably maintain performance and tension.

[Configuration 14-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In both the case where the first reception period occurs and the case where the second reception period occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. , the same action by the player is displayed as different text information (for example, "Press!", "Please press", etc.) in the first reception period and the second reception period, even though the same action is accepted. I try to do that. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 14-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 14-A. It is just a name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change that occurs as a result of the detection of the action (post-reception display) are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even if the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since they are made to differ depending on the type (type of post-reception display), operations (actions by the player) must be made with awareness of which type of display change may occur as a post-reception display. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

In addition, when requesting a different action (operation mode) from the player, even if the reception period is of the same type (generating the same post-reception display), the request will be made in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable for the character information displayed to be different from each other in order to suppress operational errors by the player. In the same sense, if a player is requested to perform a different action (operation mode), and the acceptance period is of a different type (a different post-acceptance display is generated), the acceptance period is It is desirable that the text information displayed in relation to what has occurred be different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first reception period is requested, and the same text information and sample image display as in the case of the first reception period are displayed. It is also possible to further prepare a reception period in which a different post-reception display is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely understand which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information or the sample image display. be expected to maintain it.

Also, as will be described later, if "Configuration 14-A" is adopted, text information will not be displayed during the first reception period until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) ends. However, during the second acceptance period, text information may be hidden during the acceptance period (valid status). It is more desirable to have it as such. In other words, in this case, during the second acceptance period, the player is not required to perform any operation (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the period begins. It has become difficult to recognize the type of reception period in question, and it has become difficult to recognize the type of reception period in question. It is now expected to suitably avoid situations where the sense of tension is completely lost.

Although this will also be described later, when adopting "Configuration 14-A", the second reception period includes a period in which text information is displayed and a period in which text information is hidden. Different display changes may occur depending on when the reception is made within these periods. In other words, in this case, a display change is prepared that cannot be confirmed unless it becomes difficult to recognize what kind of operation mode is requested (text information is hidden). Through this kind of presentation, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, when the above-mentioned first reception period occurs, the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed until it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player, and the above-mentioned second reception period occurs. It is desirable that the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed to when it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player is different from each other.

[Configuration 15-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, only one mode of displaying the sample image is possible, and in the second reception period, it is possible to display the sample image in any one of a plurality of modes. The "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, effects that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs are provided, so that until an operation (movement) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to suitably improve the player's interest in playing games.

In addition, regarding the "multiple modes of display of the sample image" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is possible for the game to vary the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on which of the sample image displays is displayed. It is more desirable for improving interest. Further, any one of the "multiple modes of displaying the sample image" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period. In this case, it is desirable that the ``lowest expected mode'' of the ``multiple modes of displaying the simulated image'' be the same as the ``one mode'' that can be displayed during the first acceptance period.

Also, as will be described later, if the "Configuration 15-A" is adopted, a third reception period will be further provided, and only one aspect of the sample image display will be displayed in the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be possible to do so. In the "second reception period" in which the sample image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the sample image display is prevented from being hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which the sample image is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) of the "first reception period" has ended. However, in the "third reception period", the display of the sample image will not be hidden until the end of the valid state (reception period). During this process, the sample image display that had been displayed up to that point may be hidden. In other words, in this case, even in the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one aspect of the sample image display is displayed, it is not possible to decide whether or not the sample image display is hidden in the middle. Since the performance is provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest in the game until the operation (movement) by the player is detected. Note that the sample image display displayed in the first reception period and the sample image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same, so that they may not be displayed. It may also be possible to suggest the possibility that the

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 15-A", in the third reception period, there is a period in which the sample image display is displayed and a period in which the sample image display is not displayed. However, different display changes may occur depending on when within these periods the acceptance is made. In other words, in this case, a display change will be prepared that cannot be confirmed unless the user is made aware of the possibility that the acceptance period has ended (the sample image display is hidden). Through this kind of presentation, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Note that the "third acceptance period (display after third acceptance)" related to the configuration 15-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the third reception period for other configurations). 2 reception period, etc.).

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptance state (reception period) occurs in which a reception opportunity is given, a sample image related to the reception target (such as a sample image of the operation receiving part) is displayed in the corresponding sample. By displaying the image as an integrated image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image, a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed until the display after reception (display change) is executed. I try to do that. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. .

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the image is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible state (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception has become permissible or that the operation reception is permissible. A reception acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform the operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). This is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible state (reception period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. In other words, the acceptance acceptance state classified into the first type is a state that can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). This is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific condition (specific high expected fluctuation pattern selection) in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state refers to the valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice judgment) that can occur regardless of whether the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. period of validity, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first type and second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, the first type of reception permissible state (reception period) and the second type of reception permissible state (reception period) are both receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs as a permissible state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" displayed during these acceptance periods is an image imitating the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). In the second type of reception permissible state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). ing. In the first type of acceptance state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" is selected in any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) including the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the image, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (c)) not including the special mode is selected as the "integrated image". A determination may be made as to whether to display the image, and the "integrated image display" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the configurations 1 to 15 described above will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, with respect to each structure described in the specification described below, only the corresponding structure can be arbitrarily selected and adopted when it is desired to obtain further effects.

First, examples that embody the above configurations 2, 3, 5 to 8 will be explained. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception performance).

The characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 185 to 194. Note that each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 184 may be prepared as a separate reception period from reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D). Alternatively, it may be realized as any one of reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D).

FIG. 185 is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when condition A is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which reception period A (reception performance A) occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving) and "variation pattern A" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. , the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the variation pattern A. After that, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decoration pattern) SZ (performance depiction according to variation pattern A, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 191(a)"), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern A" itself. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 191(a), a landscape depicting a mountain is displayed as the background image HG1.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 185(a). When timing tM2 arrives after a predetermined time A has elapsed since then (when condition A is satisfied), the above-mentioned acceptance period A (validity period) is generated during which "acceptance regarding post-acceptance display A" is permitted ("Fig. 191(b)”). This reception period A occurs when the specific BGM is being output without being suppressed. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period A, the post-acceptance display A is performed based on the acceptance (the situation shown in FIG. 191(c)).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) does not display the reception target (operation receiving section, etc.) in connection with the occurrence of such reception period A. ), a gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the sample image display (a mode in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see), A display indicating the degree of expectation (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) is displayed after each reception. As mentioned above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated sample image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily the case. The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed separately. Further, when displaying a model image instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when timing tM1 arrives before the reception period A occurs, “ "Integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tM2 at which the acceptance period A occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period A, or when the acceptance period A ends without the acceptance being made. Note that the acceptance period A according to this example is configured to end when timing tM3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 185(h)). .

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 185(a) to (g) and the examples shown in FIGS. 191(b) and (c), the action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tM2a within the acceptance period A. It is assumed that In other words, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 185(a) to 185(g) and FIGS. 191(b) and (c), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tM2a, the acceptance period is A ends, and the post-reception display A (post-reception performance A) corresponding to the reception period A starts to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 191, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception period A. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period A, based on the acceptance, the first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, ``It's a chance!'') is executed, and the second aspect (for example, ``It's very hot''), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is sometimes executed as the post-acceptance display A.

However, although the details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period A shown in FIG. 185 is performed in the same manner as the "first reception period" shown in FIG. 167 etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 185(b), the time when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the audible output of acceptance sound A in response to the acceptance starts) At timing tM2a, not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the ``time during which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible manner'' after the acceptance is made, to be long. However, even though the reception has been made and the audible output of reception sound A has already started, the integrated image display IG is displayed in the same manner as it was during the reception period (shown in Figure 167). In the example, if the display continues as shown in Figures 175 (e1) and (e2), it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted. As a result, there is a concern that ``there will be a delay in noticing the post-reception performance (here, reception sound A) that is in the execution state.''

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tM2a at which the acceptance period A ends due to the acceptance of the movement (operation) by the player, (When timing tM2b arrives), a display related to the disappearance-related effect (disappearance-related display A corresponding to the acceptance period A) is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize." The "disappearance-related effect" here refers to an image (an image different from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden. When the display of the "disappearance-related effect" starts, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible, and while the "disappearance-related effect" is being displayed, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible. The image display IG will gradually become hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, among the "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" that is displayed, "extinction related display A (extinction EF in the figure)" is displayed. is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display A" is displayed overlaps with the area where "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It is supposed to be done.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception is made, the reception sound is made difficult to see by making the integrated model image display IG difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that A is already being executed. As a result, even in a situation where reception sound A is already being executed, it is now possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long period of time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed in A. Furthermore, even after the process for audibly outputting the reception sound A is started, the integrated image display IG is not displayed until the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see (timings tM2a to tM2b). Since the mode of the IG can be checked with good visibility, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the reception period A, regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception display A is a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, the same mode will appear as the extinction-related display A. That's what I do. Thereby, even in a situation where reception sound A has started to be executed, the effect display device 1600 can maintain the level of expectation as a secret.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 185(b) to 185(d), a display related to the disappearance related display A (an aspect in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears. When the timing tM2c within the period tM2c arrives, the execution of the "post-acceptance display A" corresponding to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period A is started. The post-reception display A may be a case where the first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, "It's a chance") is executed, or a second mode with relatively high expectations (for example, "It's super hot!") is executed. '') may be executed as described above.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display A" are being displayed, the "post-reception display A" is started. In addition, since the "post-reception display A" starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it is possible to indicate that the reception period A has already ended, while also It is now expected that the "integrated image display IG" will naturally transition to the "post-reception display A" (after timing tM2c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-reception display A" is started in this way, the "post-reception display A" is Among the displayed images, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display A", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. In this way, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "disappearance related display A" is hidden. ” will be displayed (in FIG. 191, illustrations of the progress of these effects are omitted).

In this regard, the "post-acceptance display A" is one that is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185(d), the "post-reception display A" continues for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and "extinction-related display A" are hidden. It will be executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period A occurs, the output of the reception permission sound is started at timing tM1 shown in FIG. 185(f). In other words, the reception permission sound corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output across the timing tM2 when the reception period A occurs, and the player cannot hear the reception permission sound while the reception permission sound is being audibly output. The operation (operation) can be accepted.

Here, in the acceptance period A, as shown in FIG. 185(f), even if an operation (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, the acceptance The permissible sound is not terminated midway and is output only for a predetermined time. In other words, as will be described later, during the plurality of acceptance periods, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptable sound is changed based on the acceptance. It includes an acceptance period during which the audible output state is prematurely terminated. Therefore, if an acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is being audibly output during the acceptance period A, and a mode in which the audible output of the acceptance acceptable sound continues, it is necessary to check whether or not the acceptance is in the accepted state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

As shown in FIGS. 185(d) and 191(c), the post-reception display A according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the integrated image display IG is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, but the display A after acceptance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ. First, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed with priority over the display A after reception. Then, the post-reception display A according to this example will be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display started, as shown in FIG. 185(d) and FIG. 191(d). .

On the other hand, FIGS. 185(h) to (n) and "an example where the production progresses from FIG. 191(b) to FIG. 191(d) without going through FIG. 191(c)" are within the reception period A. This assumes that the player's action is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period A has occurred, the timing tM3 will arrive without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (and the automatic button function will not be activated). In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (the point in time when the acceptance period A ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM2a (the point in time when the acceptance of the movement by the player within the acceptance period A is no longer allowed). Similar to the effect display device 1600 at the time of reception), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. (In the example of FIG. 167, the mode shown in FIG. 175(e3)).

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period A ends without the player's action being accepted in time, the integrated image display IG will not be displayed within the reception period A after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the game was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the reception period A, if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 185(j), a disappearance-related effect (reception The display related to extinguishment related display A) corresponding to period A is never started. At this time, any method of fading out the integrated image display IG itself may be used. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden.

FIG. 186 is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when condition B is satisfied as a result of the determination and reception period B (second reception presentation B) occurs. FIG. 192 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which reception period B (reception performance B) occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving) and "variation pattern B" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. , the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the variation pattern B. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to variation pattern B, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 192(a)"), and the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ is started. Within the execution period, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern B" itself. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 192(a), a landscape depicting a river is displayed as the background image HG2.

However, in the performance related to "variation pattern B", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), as shown in FIG. 186(a), the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ When the timing tN2 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of the process, the above-mentioned acceptance period B (validity period) during which "reception regarding post-reception display B" is permitted is set. (the situation shown in FIG. 192(b)). This acceptance period B occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible. As a result, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period B, a post-acceptance display will be performed based on the acceptance. In the example shown in FIG. 192(b), the acceptance period B occurs when the decorative symbol SZ is in a ready-to-reach state.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such reception period B occurs, this is similar to the case where reception period A described above occurs (FIG. 185). In connection with this, display of a sample image that suggests the reception target (operation receiver, etc.), display of a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the reception period, and display related to disappearance that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the sample image (the display of the sample image is difficult to visually recognize) In response to acceptance, a post-acceptance display indicating the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) is displayed. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". As mentioned above, the sample image display is displayed as an "integrated sample image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but it is not necessarily limited to this and can be displayed separately. It may be displayed. Further, when displaying a model image instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), when the timing tN1 arrives before the reception period B occurs, the IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tN2 at which the acceptance period B occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is displayed when an application is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period (in this case, acceptance period B), or when acceptance period B ends without the acceptance being made. The fact that it is hidden is also the same as in the example shown in FIG. 185 (acceptance period A). Note that the acceptance period B according to this example is configured to end when timing tN3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 186(h)).

Here, in the above-mentioned "reception period A (see FIG. 191(b))", when the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed, no text information corresponding to it is displayed. , "Reception period B (see FIG. 192(b))", when the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed, text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted (here, , "Press") is now displayed. That is, in both "reception period A" and "reception period B", the same mode of sample image display (integrated image display IG) (among the multiple modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)) is used. 144(a)) is used, when "acceptance period B" occurs, character information (here, "press") that does not appear when "acceptance period A" occurs is used. ) is now displayed, which suggests that the level of expectation that may be suggested by the post-reception display is different. In this example, the expectation level (ratio) of a jackpot symbol appearing when the symbols stop is higher when acceptance period B occurs than when acceptance period A occurs. Alternatively, in display B after reception according to reception period B, an aspect that suggests that the expectation level for the appearance of the jackpot symbol is 100% may appear, whereas after reception according to reception period A In the post-display A, an aspect may not appear that suggests that the expectation level for the appearance of the jackpot symbol is 100%.

In this regard, the examples shown in FIGS. 186(a) to 186(g) assume that an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tN2a within acceptance period B. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 186(a), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tN2a, acceptance period B is terminated, and the period corresponding to acceptance period B is terminated. Post-reception display B (post-reception performance B) will start to be executed.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 192, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception period B. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within acceptance period B, based on the acceptance, the first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, ``Defeat 10 enemies!'') is executed, or the second mode with relatively high expectations (for example, ``Defeat 100 enemies!'') is sometimes executed as display B after reception. There is.

Although details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period B shown in FIG. 186 is performed in the same manner as the "second reception period" shown in FIG. 168 etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted (the time when the audible output of acceptance sound B in response to the acceptance starts). At timing tN2a, not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to view.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the ``time during which the integrated image display IG is displayed in an easily visible manner'' after the acceptance is made, to be long. However, even though the reception has been made and the audible output of reception sound B has already started, the integrated image display IG is displayed in the same manner as it was during the reception period (shown in Figure 168). In the example, if the display continues as shown in Figures 177 (e1) and (e2), it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted. As a result, there is a concern that ``there will be a delay in noticing the post-reception performance (here, reception sound B) that is in the execution state.''

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tN2a at which the acceptance period B ended due to the acceptance of the movement (operation) by the player, (When timing tN2b arrives), a display related to "disappearance-related display B" different from the above-mentioned disappearance-related display A is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". The "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related effect)" here refers to an image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated image display IG is hidden (a separate image that is different from the integrated image display IG). It is about. When the display of the "disappearance-related effect" starts, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible, and while the "disappearance-related effect" is being displayed, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible. The image display IG will gradually become hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance related display B" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. At least a part of the area where the "extinction related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception is made, the reception sound is made difficult to see by making the integrated model image display IG difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that B is already running. This makes it possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time even in a situation where reception sound B is already being executed, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed in B. Furthermore, even after the process for audibly outputting reception sound B is started, the integrated image display IG is not displayed until it is made difficult to view (timings tN2a to tN2b). Since the mode of the IG can be checked with good visibility, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

Also, although not shown, in the reception period B, there are different modes as the extinction-related display B depending on whether a mode with a low level of expectation appears as the corresponding post-reception performance B or a mode with a high level of expectation. (Extinction related displays B1, B2) are displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the "post-reception display B" using the effect display device 1600 has not yet started, the extinction-related display B appearing on the effect display device 1600 is different from the first mode and the second mode. By checking in which mode it appears, it becomes possible to infer whether "post-reception display B" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 186(b) to 186(d), a display related to the disappearance related display B (an aspect in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears. When the timing tN2c within the period tN2c arrives, a "post-reception display B" corresponding to the reception of an action (operation) by the player within the reception period B is started. The post-reception display B may be a first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, "Defeat 10 enemies!") or a second mode with relatively high expectations (for example, "100 enemies!"). As mentioned above, there are cases where "Body Destruction!") is executed.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B (disappearance-related display B1 or extinction-related display B2)" are displayed, the "post-reception display B (first mode or first aspect)" is displayed. 2 mode)" will start to be executed. In addition, since the post-reception display B starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the reception period B has already ended, and that the player's gaze is It is expected that the display will automatically shift from "Integrated image display IG" to "Post-reception display B" (after timing tN2c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-reception display B" is started in this way, the "post-reception display B" is displayed as shown in FIGS. First, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display B", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. In this way, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden. ” will be displayed (in FIG. 192, illustrations of the progress of these effects are omitted). .

In this regard, the "post-acceptance display B" is one that is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186(d), the "post-reception display B" is displayed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display B" are hidden. It will be carried out over a period of time.

By the way, in the production example (FIG. 191) corresponding to the reception period A mentioned above, even if the reception is made within the reception period A and the "post-reception display A" is executed, the "post-reception display A" will not be started. The background image is maintained without switching before and after. In this regard, in the production example (FIG. 192) corresponding to the reception period B, when a reception is made within the reception period B and the "post-reception display B" is executed, the "post-reception display B" is started. The background images may be switched before and after.

According to such a configuration, even if there is any display change in the effect display device 1600 during a period in which the background image is not switched (timings tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 186), the "post-reception display B" ” can now indicate that the situation has not started yet.

In addition, in this case, the display B after reception may be switched to the same background image when a mode with a low expectation level appears and when a mode with a high expectation level appears, or a mode with a low expectation level may appear. The background image may be switched to a different background image depending on the case where a highly expected aspect appears. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period B occurs, the output of the reception permission sound is started at timing tN1 shown in FIG. 186(f). In other words, the reception permission sound corresponding to reception period B is audibly output across the timing tN2 at which reception period B occurs, and the player cannot hear the reception permission sound while the reception permission sound is being audibly output. The operation (operation) can be accepted.

Here, in reception period B, as reception permissible sounds, a long-time permissible sound that remains in an audible output state for a relatively long period of time and a short-time permissible sound that remains in an audible output state for a relatively short period of time are used. It is now output. In the example shown in FIG. 186(f), the long-term permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one of the long-term permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound may be started at timing tN2 when reception period B occurs or thereafter.

During acceptance period B, if the player accepts an action while the long-term permissible sound and/or short-time permissible sound are being audibly output, the long-term permissible sound is The time-permissible sound and/or the short-time permissible sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In addition, during the acceptance period B, as shown in FIG. 186(f), when the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) is being audibly output. , not only ends the reception acceptance sound midway, but also starts audible output of reception sound B based on this reception. In other words, in this case, during reception period B, unlike in the case of display changes, the production performed within the reception period (acceptance permission sound) and the production performed in response to the reception (second reception sound) are different. Conflicting (overlapping) periods will no longer occur.

Similar to the "post-reception display B", such a second reception sound is generated when the "integrated image display IG" and "extinction-related display B" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 186(g). From then on, the process continues for a relatively long time. Regarding the second reception sound, it is possible to output different output sounds (forms) depending on whether a highly expected mode appears as post-reception display B or a mode with a low expectation level. desirable. On the other hand, regarding the first reception sound, the same output sound (aspect) is output when a highly expected aspect appears as the post-acceptance display A and when a less expected aspect appears. This is desirable.

In addition, in reception period B, long-term permissible sound and short-time permissible sound were respectively output as reception permissible sounds, but it is not necessary to output these two permissible sounds, and it is the same as reception period A. Only one acceptance permissible sound may be output as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 186(d) and FIG. 192(d), the post-reception display B according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. In this example, the integrated image display IG is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-reception display B is also displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in FIG. 186(d) and FIG. 192(d), the post-reception display B according to this example is hidden when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display started. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved.

On the other hand, FIGS. 186(h) to 186(n) assume a case where no action by the player is accepted within acceptance period B.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period B has occurred, the timing tN3 will arrive without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, acceptance period B is different from acceptance period A, and is set as "an acceptance period during which the automatic button function described above is activated." Therefore, even if the above-mentioned timing tN3 arrives without receiving any action (operation) by the player during the reception period B, no action (operation) by the player will be accepted within the reception period B after this point. The same post-acceptance display B as before will be generated.

However, in the reception period B according to this embodiment, although the automatic button function described above is enabled, the effect display device 1600 at timing tN3 does not allow the player to As shown in FIG. 186(i), as shown in FIG. 186(i), the effect display device 1600 does not hide the integrated image display IG; The display IG is also not made to be difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period B ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integrated replica image will not be processed within the reception period B after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

After this, even if the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 186(i), when the timing tN3a, which is a predetermined period of time after the timing tN3 when the acceptance period B ends, arrives, The display related to the extinction related display B is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize."

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance related display B" is displayed while the "integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "extinction related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception period B ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG cannot be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to indicate that the acceptance period B has ended. Furthermore, even in a situation where the reception period B has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to visually recognize it. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period B.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the mode of the extinction-related display B that appears when the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period B is ) would appear if it were accepted.

In other words, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the reception period B, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the reception period B ends. By simply checking the appearance of "disappearance-related display B", it becomes possible to recognize whether post-reception display B was executed in a manner with low expectations or in a manner with high expectations. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Thereafter, when timing tN3b arrives, the "post-acceptance display B" starts to be executed in the manner that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted within the acceptance period B (Fig. 192(b) After the situation shown in ) appears, the situation shown in FIG. 192(c) appears regardless of whether or not there is an operation.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 186(i) to (k), among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display B", first, "integrated model image display IG" is disabled. Display. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "disappearance related display B" is hidden.

Note that the timing at which "disappearance related display B" appears and the timing at which "post-reception display B" starts execution does not have to be later than the timing tN3 at which reception period B ends, and reception period B ends. It may be the timing tN3 to do this, or it may be an earlier timing.

FIG. 187 is a time chart showing an example of presentation contents when condition C is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which a reception period C (reception performance C) occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving) and "fluctuation pattern C" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. , the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (pre-announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern C. After that, a variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the variation pattern C, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variable effect, according to the result of the preview effect judgment. The effect (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 193(a), a landscape depicting a desert is displayed as the background image HG3.

However, in the production related to "variation pattern C", no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (preliminary judgment), if the predetermined time C has elapsed since the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ was started. When timing tO2 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "reception regarding post-reception display C" is permitted. A reception period C (validity period) is generated. This reception period C occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, the post-acceptance display C is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the acceptance period C (validity period) may be generated as a result of the preview performance determination.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such an acceptance period C occurs, the expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) is indicated in response to acceptance. Although the post-reception display C is displayed, unlike the case where the above-mentioned reception periods A and B occur (Fig. 185, Fig. 186), in relation to this, there is a display indicating the reception object (operation receiving section, etc.). Image displays, gauge image displays that indicate the remaining time in the reception period, and disappearance-related displays that make it difficult to see the sample image display (forms that make the sample image display difficult to see) are not displayed. . The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 187(b), when reception period C occurs, a sample image display, a gauge image display, and text information prompting operation are etc. will not be performed. Therefore, it is not only difficult for the player to recognize when the acceptance period C starts and when the acceptance period C ends, but also it is difficult for the player to even recognize the existence of the acceptance period C itself. will be done. Note that the acceptance period C according to this example is configured to end when timing tO3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 187(h)).

In this regard, the examples shown in FIGS. 187(a) to 187(g) assume that an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tO2a within acceptance period C. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 187(a), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tO2a, the acceptance period C is ended, and the period corresponding to the acceptance period C is ended. The execution of the post-reception display C (post-reception performance C) will be started.

In the example shown in FIG. 193, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display C corresponding to the reception period C. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period C, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display C is displayed in a relatively low-expected first mode (for example, A mode in which the number of ghosts that appear as a ghost group is small) is executed, or a second mode with relatively high expectations as post-reception display C (for example, a mode in which a large number of ghosts appear as a ghost group) is executed. It is now possible that it will be executed.

As described above, in this acceptance period C, as shown in FIG. 187(c), when an action (operation) by a player is accepted, no extinction related display is performed. Furthermore, when the reception period C occurs, the reception permission sound is not output as shown in FIG. 187(f).

As shown in FIGS. 187(d) and 193(c), the post-reception display C according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-reception display C is not displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, but the decorative pattern SZ is displayed with priority over the post-reception display C. . The post-reception display C according to this example will be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display started, as shown in FIGS. 187(d) and 193(d). .

On the other hand, Figures 187(h) to (n) and "an example where the production progresses from Figure 193(b) to Figure 193(d) without going through Figure 193(c)" are within the reception period C. This assumes that the player's action is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period C has occurred, the timing tO3 will arrive without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (and without the automatic button function being activated). However, in the reception period C, since no display change occurs due to the end of the period C, at the timing tO3 (the reception period C ends and the player's action is Even when the point in time when reception is no longer permitted has arrived, only the background image HG3 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

FIGS. 188 and 189 are time charts showing an example of presentation contents when condition D is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which a reception period D (reception performance D) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, "fluctuation pattern D1 (Fig. 188)" and Assuming that "variation pattern D2 (FIG. 189)" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (advancement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fluctuation patterns D1 and D2. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decoration pattern) SZ (performance depiction according to the variation patterns D1 and D2, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 194(a)"). ), within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, the performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is added to the performance of the above-selected "variation pattern D1" or "variation pattern D2" itself. It will be executed. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 194(a), a landscape depicting mountains and a river is displayed as the background image HG4a.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 188(a) and 189(a). When timing tP2 arrives when a predetermined time D has elapsed since the start of the SZ fluctuation effect (when condition D is satisfied), the above-mentioned reception period D (valid period) occurs (“the situation shown in FIG. 194(b)”). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the post-acceptance display D is performed based on the acceptance (situation shown in FIG. 194(c)).

However, more precisely, when the variation pattern D1 that generates the reach effect is selected, the reception period D is a predetermined period after the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. This occurs when the timing tP2-D1 (timing that comes after the timing when the ready-to-reach state is formed) arrives (when the condition D1 is satisfied) after the time D1 has elapsed, but the ready-to-reach effect does not occur. When the variation pattern D2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 189(a), when the timing tP2-D2 arrives when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (condition D2 is (is established).

Moreover, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1, which is when the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D1 that generates the reach effect, is shown in FIG. 188(e). Before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, the specific BGM is output in an audible manner in a suppressed manner, or a state in which it is rendered inaudible is generated. In other words, in this case, the acceptance period D occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a suppressed manner or is being rendered inaudible.

On the other hand, in the case where the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 arrives when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 189(e) As shown in , the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner at the time when the timing tP2-D2 arrives. That is, in this case, the acceptance period D occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

In this way, does the acceptance period D occur when the timing tP2-D1 arrives when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable pattern D1 that causes the reach effect, or does it not cause the reach effect to occur? The appearance of the effect differs depending on whether it occurs when the timing tP2-D2 has elapsed after the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2.

First, FIG. 188 shows an example of a performance in which the acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D1), when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D1 that generates the reach performance, is reached. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 188(a) and 188(b), in the production display device 1600 (first production device), in connection with the occurrence of such a reception period D, the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) ), a gauge image display indicating the remaining time in the acceptance period, and a post-acceptance display indicating the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing) depending on acceptance. There is. As mentioned above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated sample image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily the case. The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed separately. Further, when displaying a model image instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 188(b), when timing tP1 arrives before the reception period D occurs, “ "Integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which the acceptance period D occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden (invisible) when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D, or when the acceptance period D ends without being accepted. Note that the reception period D according to this example ends when timing tP3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 188(h)). .

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 188(a) to 188(g) and the example that follows the production route of FIG. 194(b) → FIG. 194(e) → FIG. 194(f) → FIG. 194(c), the reception It is assumed that an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tPx within period D. That is, in this case, based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tPx, the acceptance period D is ended, and the post-acceptance display D (post-acceptance performance D) corresponding to the acceptance period D is Execution will begin.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 194(c), only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception period D. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period D, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display D is displayed in the first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, A cut-in by a princess character) may be executed, or a second mode (for example, a cut-in by a samurai character) which is relatively highly expected as the post-reception display D may be executed.

However, in the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 188(b), the integrated image display IG is hidden at the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (here, timing tPx). Of course, it does not make the integrated image display IG difficult to view.

In addition, during the acceptance period D, as shown in FIG. 188(c), even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tPx at which the acceptance period D ends due to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player, the disappearance-related effect is never displayed. That is, in the reception period D, the corresponding extinction-related display (an image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated model image display IG)) is not prepared, and the integrated image display IG is suddenly hidden.

Furthermore, even during the acceptance period D, as shown in FIGS. 188(b) to (d), when the timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated image display IG is being displayed, the player makes a request within the acceptance period D. Execution of "post-acceptance display D" in response to acceptance of the action (operation) is started.

However, during the reception period D, when the player's action (operation) is accepted, the "post-reception display D" is displayed on the integrated image display IG, as shown in FIG. 194(c). The display is started in such a manner that it overlaps with the entire area and is given priority to the integrated image display IG. “Post-reception display D” may be displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, when the "post-reception display D" starts to be displayed based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player, the integrated image display IG suddenly disappears (displays on a layer). (even if they remain), and it becomes possible to provide a different kind of presentation than in the case of other reception periods that use a disappearing effect or the like. Note that the post-reception display D according to this example is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started.

In addition, during reception period D, unlike in other reception periods, even if the display according to "post-reception display D" starts based on the reception, it will not be triggered by the reception. The processing related to the display of the "integrated image display IG" is not terminated. That is, during the reception period D, the processing related to the display of the "integrated image display IG" is continued until a predetermined specific condition is met (here, timing tP3), and the predetermined specific condition is I am trying to terminate it when it is satisfied. Note that if the player's actions (operations) are not accepted until the predetermined specific conditions are met and the acceptance period D continues, the "integrated image display IG" In addition to terminating the display-related processing, processing for terminating the acceptance period D will also be performed.

That is, in the reception period D, when the "post-reception display D" starts to be displayed based on the reception, even though the period D is to be ended based on the reception. The processing related to the display of the "integrated image display IG" itself is not terminated, but the display on the layer is continued. However, since the "Display after reception D" is prioritized for display over the "Integrated image display IG", the "Integrated image display IG" is As mentioned above, the period covered by diagonal lines is hidden (invisible) by "Display after reception D". (equivalent to the period during which the sample image display IG) is hidden (invisible).

In this case, the "integrated image display IG" may not be completely hidden, but may be made difficult to see through a predetermined transmittance set in the "post-reception display D."

Furthermore, during the acceptance period D, as shown in FIG. 188(b) and FIG. 194(b), (e), and (f), the state in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is continued continues. During the process, the "integrated image display IG" is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189), or the "integrated image display IG" is changed from the non-display state. The display state may be changed (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189). Of course, even if the "integrated image display IG" is in the non-display state, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) will be accepted, and the Based on this, the post-reception display D will be performed (see an example of tracing the production route from FIG. 194(e) to FIG. 194(c)).

In this example, if the action (operation) by the player was accepted within the acceptance period D, would it have been accepted before the "integrated image display IG" became non-displayed (Fig. 194 (b)→Fig. 194(c)), or was the reception made while the “integrated image display IG” was in the non-display state (Fig. 194(e)→Fig. 194(c))? Regardless of whether the reception was made after the ``fake image display IG'' was returned to the display state (FIG. 194(f) → FIG. 194(c)), the same mode as the ``post-reception display D'' (FIG. 194( c))).

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 194(e), even though the acceptance period D has occurred, the acceptance period C (FIG. 193( It is now possible to provide an atmosphere as if the game has been suddenly replaced with (see b) above, and it is possible to improve the game's interest through such a surprising performance. On the other hand, even if a player's action (operation) is accepted under a situation that seems to have suddenly changed from the acceptance period C (the integrated image display IG is not displayed), the acceptance period Since the same aspect (FIG. 194(c)) is displayed as the "post-reception display D" corresponding to D, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Moreover, in the reception period D according to this example, when the "integrated image display IG" changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the "integrated image display IG" changes to the non-display state, it will more appropriately create an atmosphere as if the reception period has suddenly been replaced with another reception period. become.

In particular, in this example, "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers is changed to "background image HG4b" depicting a desert, which is different from "background image HG3" (Figure 194 ( b)→Figure 194(e)). According to such a configuration, when the "integrated image display IG" changes to the non-display state, an atmosphere as if the reception period C that may occur when the desert background is suddenly replaced can be more suitably created. things come to be expected.

In this example, when the "integrated image display IG" is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image must also be changed from "background image HG4b" back to "background image HG4a". (Fig. 194(e) → Fig. 194(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere that returns to the original reception period D from other reception periods (particularly reception period C) can be more suitably created.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 194(c), the post-reception display D according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a portion overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ (displayed on the entire screen). It may be something)). In this example, the integrated image display IG is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-reception display D is also displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in FIG. 188(d) and FIG. 194(d), the post-reception display D according to this example is hidden when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved. Note that the situation shown in FIG. 194(d) shows a situation where the performance based on the ready-to-win state progresses and enters the SP ready-to-win performance.

However, if the post-reception display D is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, the effects (reach state, etc.) of the decorative pattern SZ cannot be viewed until the display time as the post-reception display D has elapsed. There is concern that interest in gaming will decline due to the inability to play.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed during the period when the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, and the acceptance is made. This is used as an opportunity to end the process related to displaying the "post-reception display D" (see an example of tracing the production route from FIG. 194(c) to FIG. 194(g)). In other words, in this case, depending on the player's operation, the timing at which the display of the "post-reception display D" is ended can be made to arrive earlier (before the display time as the post-reception display D has elapsed). (FIG. 194(g)), the decline in gaming interest due to the inability to see the effects (ready-to-reach state, etc.) by the decorative pattern SZ is suppressed by the "post-reception display D". .

In this example, in the reception period D, the operation details required to start displaying the "post-reception display D" (pressing operation on the operation button 410) and the period in which the "post-reception display D" is displayed. , the operation contents (press operation on the operation button 410) required to end the "post-reception display D" early are set as the same operation contents, but these operation contents are different from each other. You can. For example, the operation content required to start displaying the "post-reception display D" is "press operation on the operation button 410", whereas the operation content required to end the "post-reception display D" is It may be a "sword drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001", or a combination of "pressing operation on the operation button 410" and "sword drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001".

In any case, during the period in which "post-reception display D" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 194(c), what kind of operation is required to end the "post-reception display D" It is desirable to clearly indicate whether or not the information is correct by displaying ``text information (in the diagram, cancellation is possible)'' or ``display a sample image.'' In this case, it is desirable to display the "sample image display" with priority over the "post-reception display D" at a position that overlaps with the "post-reception display D" (in the figure, the "post-reception display The sample image display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with "D"). In addition, regarding "text information", it is not prepared as a separate image from "post-reception display D", but is displayed as a part of the "post-reception display D" itself (an image on the same layer). It may be done as follows.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period D occurs, the reception permission sound is not audibly output, as shown in FIG. It is designed to provide the same presentation as "Period C", and this also makes the user aware of "Reception Period C". Even when the "integrated image display IG" is hidden or returned to the display state, the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIGS. 188(h) to (n) and the examples following the production routes shown in FIGS. 194(b), (e), (f), (g), and (d) are within the reception period D. This assumes a case where the player's action (operation) is not accepted.

In other words, in this case, after the acceptance period D occurs, no action (operation) by the player is accepted (and the automatic button function is not activated), and the above-mentioned "predetermined specific conditions (here, "The arrival of timing tP3)" is established. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tP3 (the point in time when the acceptance period D ends and acceptance of the player's movement is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 at the timing tPx (the time when the acceptance of the movement by the player within the acceptance period D is no longer allowed). Similar to the effect display device 1600 at the time of reception), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. There is.

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period D ends without the player's action (operation) being accepted in time, the integrated replica image will not be processed within the reception period D after the end of the reception period D. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, during the acceptance period D, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 188(j), the disappearance-related Display of effects is never started. At this time, any method of fading out the integrated image display IG itself may be used. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden.

Next, an example of a performance in which the acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2), which is when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach effect, is shown in FIG. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 189 and FIG. 194. Note that FIG. 194 assumes that the acceptance period D occurs after the reach state is formed, and does not correspond to the occurrence of the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 189. Even in the reception period D, the difference between the presentation contents shown in FIG. 194 is that the reception period D occurs in a state where no reach state is formed, and that the SP reach effect does not start after the reception period D ends. 194 of the same figure for convenience of explanation.

When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) arrives when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach effect, the reception period D is also the same reception period as the above-mentioned reception period D. Therefore, the processing contents performed when an acceptance is made and the processing contents carried out when an acceptance is not made are the same as the processing contents described above, unless otherwise specified.

However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 arrives when the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D1 that generates the reach effect, ), before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, the specific BGM is output in an audible manner in a suppressed manner, or a state in which it is rendered inaudible is generated. On the other hand, in the case where the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 arrives when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 189(e) As shown in FIG. 2, before the timing tP2-D2 arrives, the specific BGM is output in audible manner in a suppressed manner, or a state in which it is made inaudible does not occur.

Therefore, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 arrives when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2 in which the reach effect is not generated, the reception period D is shown in FIG. 189(e). As such, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

However, if the reception period D is to be generated when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) has elapsed after the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach performance, the reception period D In a state in which this is occurring, the specific BGM, which had been audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, is made to be audibly output in a suppressed manner or to an inaudible state.

According to such a configuration, although it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 185) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the specific BGM is not suppressed after that. It is as if the acceptance period B (see FIG. 186) occurs, in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted in a state in which the output is audible in a suppressed mode or in a state in which the player is in an inaudible state. The atmosphere will change, and it will be possible to improve the game's interest.

In addition, in order to obtain such effects more preferably, when an application is made during acceptance period B, a high expectation level (for example, a jackpot symbol appears) that would not appear when an acceptance is made during acceptance period A is necessary. It is desirable that the post-acceptance display may be displayed in a manner that suggests that the percentage is 100%, etc.).

Further, in the reception period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a, which is a predetermined period of time after the reception period D occurs, arrives, the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden. As mentioned above, the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is hidden at the timing tPy when the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or rendered inaudible. The timing is set to arrive before the timing tP2a.

If such a configuration is further provided, the specific BGM may be output in audible mode in a suppressed manner while the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is being displayed, or in an inaudible condition. As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere will change more favorably to create the atmosphere as if the reception period B (see FIG. 186) is occurring.

On the other hand, the timing tP2a at which the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden is when the specific BGM is output audibly in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible. Therefore, at the timing tP2a, it is possible to more suitably provide an atmosphere as if the reception period C (see FIG. 187) had occurred.

In addition, during the reception period D according to this example, when timing tP2b arrives after a predetermined period of time has passed since the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is hidden, the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is hidden. IG) is displayed again as described above (see FIG. 194(f)). However, even after the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed again, the specific BGM continues to be ``audibly output in a suppressed mode, or in an inaudible state.'' .

FIGS. 189(a) to (g) show actions (operations) by the player when the specific BGM is "in audible output in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state" during the reception period D described above. This assumes that the application is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 189(a) to 189(g), in the reception period D, as in the reception period B, the specific BGM is Even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the player is in a state where the audible output is in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible mode, this triggers the specific BGM to start audible output in a non-suppressed mode. Instead, the system maintains ``audible output in a suppressed manner or an inaudible condition''. This also makes it possible to more appropriately provide an atmosphere as if reception period B (see FIG. 186) is occurring.

189(a') to (g') show timing tPy when the specific BGM is set to "audible output in suppressed mode or inaudible state" during the above-mentioned acceptance period D. In other words, it is assumed that an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

As shown in FIG. 189(a') to 189(g'), during the above-mentioned acceptance period D, an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. In such a case, the reception is used as a trigger to set the specific BGM to ``audible output in a suppressed mode or an inaudible condition''. In other words, in this case, when the reception is made while the specific BGM is in the "state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in the inaudible state", the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode using the acceptance as a trigger. However, if an acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressing mode, the acceptance will be used as a trigger to change the specific BGM to a state where the specific BGM is being output audibly in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state. ”. As a result, after the reception period D occurs, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an operation at an early stage when the action (operation) by the player can affect the specific BGM, and the reception period D occurs. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension when doing so.

As mentioned above, in the reception period D according to this example, upon acceptance, the "sample image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated replica image display IG shown in FIG. 194(b))" is displayed. The processing related to the display of is not terminated. In other words, by displaying the "post-reception display D" with priority over the relevant sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) whose display state is maintained on the layer, "the sample image display corresponding to the acceptance period D ( The integrated image display IG) is hidden (invisible).

In addition, in the "post-acceptance display D" according to this example, as described above, the player's actions (operations) are allowed to be accepted during the display period, and once the acceptance is done, this is used as an opportunity. The processing related to the display of the "post-reception display D" is ended early (see an example of tracing the effect route from FIG. 194(c) to FIG. 194(g)). At this time, once the acceptance is made, the "sample image display (integrated image display IG shown in Figure 194(c))" and text information (cancellable) corresponding to the post-reception display D will also be displayed. The process related to the display ends (see FIG. 194(g)).

In such a configuration, during the period in which the "post-reception display D" is displayed, depending on the timing at which an action (operation) by the player is accepted, the "sample image display (integrated image display) corresponding to the reception period D" may be displayed. In a situation where the processing related to the display of "Display IG)" continues, a situation may occur where the processing related to the display of "Post-reception display D" is terminated early. In other words, in this case, the display of the "post-reception display D" that had been prioritized over the "sample image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 194(b))" is terminated. As a result, the "sample image display corresponding to reception period D" will be displayed again, but at this time, "reception period D" itself may be generated again.

In this way, if the "reception period D" is caused to occur again after the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" is ended early, the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" is ended early. Even after this, if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted again within the "acceptance period D" that occurs again, the "post-acceptance display D" can be displayed again. It becomes like this. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the "post-acceptance display D" is accidentally ended early.

By the way, regarding the acceptance periods A to D shown in FIGS. 185 to 194, variation patterns A to C, D1, and D2 are selected as variation patterns, and a predetermined time period A to D has passed since the symbol variation started. The above-mentioned cases are described above as occurring at times. However, for acceptance periods A to D, it is not necessary to assume that they occur only when different fluctuation patterns are selected; for example, as described later, this can be triggered when one fluctuation pattern is selected. It may also be set so that all of the reception periods A to D occur.

Furthermore, as described above, the reception period D occurs as a reception period that has special characteristics compared to the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such acceptance period D may be set as an acceptance period that can only occur when the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number. In other words, in this case, when the number of reservations becomes less than a predetermined number as a result of the player's attempt to interrupt the game, the reception period D will occur, and it will appear as if the reception period changes to one of the reception periods A to C each time. As special effects such as You will finally be able to hold it.

FIGS. 190(a) and 190(b) are tables showing examples of settings related to the conditions for generating the acceptance periods A to D when these effects are realized.

First, FIG. 190(a) is a table that is referred to when the number of reservations is one of "2" to "4" when the reservation is completed. In other words, in this case, even if the symbols start to fluctuate in response to the pending expiration, the pending number will not be ``0'', but will be between ``1'' and ``3'', and there is no risk that the game will be stopped. Since the situation is low, the above acceptance period D will not occur no matter which of the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern" is executed as a fluctuation pattern. .

More specifically, when the number of reservations is between "2" and "4" and the reservation is exhausted and the first variation pattern is executed, 70% of At a rate of 30%, none of the reception periods A to D occur, and as a result of the performance judgment (advancement judgment), only the reception period A of the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate of 30%.

In addition, when the number of reservations is between "2" and "4" and the reservation is expired and the second variation pattern is executed, the reception period will be increased at a rate of 50% as a result of the production judgment (previous judgment). Of A to D, only reception period C occurs, and reception period A and reception period C occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the performance judgment (advance judgment).

In addition, when the number of reservations is between "2" and "4" and the reservation is expired and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period will be increased at a rate of 10% as a result of the production judgment (notice judgment). B and reception period C occur, and reception period A, reception period B, and reception period C occur at a rate of 90% as a result of the performance judgment (advance judgment).

Note that the reception period A is 5 days after the start of fluctuation, regardless of which of the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern" with different fluctuation times is selected. The reception period C is 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, regardless of whether "second fluctuation pattern" or "third fluctuation pattern" is selected. The acceptance period B can occur when 35 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation when the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected.

In addition, reception periods B and C are not subject to production judgment (notice judgment), and will always occur when the corresponding variation pattern is selected, but reception period A is It is subject to judgment (advance judgment), and can only occur if a special result is obtained in the performance judgment. However, the reception periods B and C may be subject to performance determination (advancement determination), or the reception period A may not be subject to performance determination (advancement determination).

Next, FIG. 190(b) is a table that is referred to when the number of reservations is "1" when extinguishing reservations. In other words, in this case, when the symbol variation according to the pending expiry starts, the number of pending will become "0", and if no new pending is added within the execution period of the symbol variation, there is a risk that the game will be stopped. , No matter which of all the fluctuation patterns selected as the fluctuation pattern, including the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern", is executed, the above acceptance period will not apply. It is designed to generate D.

More specifically, when the number of holds is "1" and the hold is exhausted and the first variation pattern is executed, the reception period A to D will be changed at a rate of 70% as a result of the performance judgment (advance judgment). Of these, only reception period D occurs, and reception period A and reception period D occur at a rate of 30% as a result of performance judgment (advance judgment).

In addition, when the number of reservations is "1" and the reservation is exhausted and the second variation pattern is executed, reception period C and reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the production judgment (preliminary judgment). However, as a result of the performance determination (advancement determination), reception period A, reception period C, and reception period D will occur at a rate of 50%.

In addition, when the number of reservations is "1" and the reservation is exhausted and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period B, reception period C, and Reception period D occurs, and reception period A, reception period B, reception period C, and reception period D occur at a rate of 90% as a result of the production judgment (advance judgment).

In this embodiment, the "first fluctuation pattern" is a fluctuation pattern that does not form a reach state, and the "second fluctuation pattern" and the "third fluctuation pattern" are set as fluctuation patterns that form a reach state. ing. Therefore, when the "first variation pattern" is selected, the acceptance period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. 189. On the other hand, when the "second variation pattern" or the "third variation pattern" is selected, the acceptance period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. 188.

In addition, during the reception period A, reception period B, and reception period C, the predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) after the symbol fluctuation starts, regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern or the number of reservations. On the other hand, during the acceptance period D, symbol fluctuations will occur depending on which of the first fluctuation pattern, second fluctuation pattern, and third fluctuation pattern is selected. The time from the start to the occurrence (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) is different.

In other words, in this case, since it is possible to generate the reception period D for each type of variation pattern at a timing that does not interfere with the performance content, the reception period D can be set in any of all variation patterns. can also be generated suitably.

In the above production example, there are multiple reception periods including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 2-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 2-A"). We have prepared a reception period for In this regard, during the reception period A, only one mode (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 144(a)) can be displayed as the image display (here, integrated image display IG). During reception period B, there are multiple modes of displaying the sample image (integrated image display IGa to IGd shown in FIGS. ``Aspects corresponding to the results of the judgment (advance judgment)'' are selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, during the reception period B, effects that cannot appear when the reception period A occurs are provided, so that the game until an operation (movement) by the player is detected is provided. It becomes possible to suitably improve one's interest.

Furthermore, regarding the "multiple modes of display of sample images" that can be displayed during reception period B, it is important for the enjoyment of the game that the degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot symbol differs depending on which of the sample image displays is displayed. This is more desirable in terms of improving performance. Further, any one of the "multiple modes of displaying the sample image" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the acceptance period A. In this case, it is desirable that the "lowest expected mode" among the "multiple modes of displaying the sample image" be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the reception period A.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 2-A") is further provided, and the reception period A and the reception period D only have one mode as a sample image display. can be displayed. In the "acceptance period B" in which the sample image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the sample image display is prevented from being hidden until its valid state is ended. On the other hand, among the "acceptance period A" and "acceptance period B" in which the sample image is displayed only in one mode, in "acceptance period A", the period until the valid state (acceptance period) ends. The sample image display will not be hidden in between, but in "acceptance period B", until the valid state (acceptance period) ends (while the valid state continues) In the middle of this process, the sample image display that had been displayed up to that point was hidden (see FIG. 194(e)). In other words, in this case, even in the "acceptance period A" and "acceptance period D" in which only one aspect of the sample image display is displayed, the effect of whether or not the sample image display is hidden in the middle of the period is determined. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be suitably improved until an operation (movement) by the player is detected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after the reception 194(b)→(c), and FIG. 194(e)→(c)). In other words, in this case, even after the sample image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change, so the presentation performance (reception period D) using the "reception period D" will continue. In creating a system (hidden/displayed image display), it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, during the acceptance period D, the sample image display is hidden in the middle of the reception period, and then the sample image display is displayed again. In other words, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the reception period D has ended even though the reception period D has not ended, the misunderstanding is resolved by subsequently displaying the sample image display again. You will be able to do so.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, only one aspect of the sample image display can be displayed in the “acceptance period A” and “acceptance period D”. The contents of the display changes that appear when the screen changes are different from each other. This makes it possible to make it more interesting to see what kind of display changes will occur when an acceptance is made.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "reception period D", the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is the object of reception is made to emit light during the period when the sample image display is displayed, This may prompt the player to perform an action (operation). In addition, in this case, even during the period when the sample image display is hidden during the "acceptance period D," the operation means (here Then, the operation button 410) may be made to emit light. In this regard, in "reception period C", if the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is the object of reception does not emit light, it is possible to tell which type of reception period is occurring. Be able to make suggestions.

In addition, in the production example described above, first, the reception period is reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 3-A") and reception period C (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 3-A"). We have prepared multiple reception periods, including (equivalent to the reception period). Then, in the reception period A or reception period B, after the sample image display (here, the integrated sample image display IG) is displayed when the reception period A or reception period B occurs, the reception period A or reception period B is displayed. The sample image display is not hidden until the sample image display is completed, and actions by the player can be accepted while the sample image display is being displayed (FIG. 185, FIG. 186, 191, FIG. 192, etc.), and during the acceptance period C, it is possible to accept actions (operations) by the player while the sample image display is not displayed (see FIG. 187, FIG. 193, etc.), and as described above. The "acceptance permission sound" is audibly output when acceptance period A or acceptance period B occurs, but is not audibly output when acceptance period C occurs.

According to such a configuration, the reception permission sound is audibly output and not only during the "reception period A or reception period B" in which reception is performed while the sample image display is being displayed, but also when the reception permission sound is audibly output. Since there is a "reception period C" in which the application is accepted while the sample image display is not displayed, it is possible that the post-reception display may occur at various times that the player did not intend. It is now possible to make the player aware of the game, and it is expected that the player will be able to suitably maintain his/her interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 3-A") is further provided, and in the reception period C (FIGS. 187 and 193), the reception period C occurs. The sample image display is not displayed from the time the sample image is displayed until the game ends, and it is possible to accept actions (operations) by the player while the sample image display is not displayed. , FIG. 194), the sample image display is hidden for only a part of the reception period D, and the period during which the sample image display is displayed and the period during which the sample image display is hidden are In either case, it may be possible to accept actions (operations) by the player. In other words, in this case, the reception period D has two aspects: reception period A and B (reception while the sample image display is displayed), and reception period C (reception while the sample image display is not displayed). Since it has both of the following functions (acceptance of the game), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, even after the sample image display is hidden, there is a possibility that the player's actions (operations) will continue to be accepted, so the player's actions (operations) will not be accepted. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed when the sample image display is hidden without being displayed.

Furthermore, the acceptance permission sound is audibly output when acceptance periods A and B occur, but is not audibly output when acceptance period C and acceptance period D occur. In other words, in this case, at the timing when the reception period D occurs, the reception period D has a side as reception periods A and B (a sample image display is displayed), and a side as reception period C (the reception permission sound is displayed). (not output), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after the reception display). In other words, in this case, even after the sample image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change, so the presentation performance (reception period D) using the "reception period D" will continue. In creating a system (hidden/displayed image display), it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the background image that appears when reception period A or reception period B occurs (Figs. 191 and 192), and the background image that appears when reception period C occurs ( Figure 193). This makes it possible to give the impression that the background image differs depending on the type of reception period.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, a change occurs in the background image within the reception period D, and in accordance with the timing at which the change occurs, the sample image display is turned off from the period in which the sample image display is displayed. Since the transition is made to the displayed period, it is possible to provide an effect that makes it appear as if the reception period D has shifted to a different reception period.

Furthermore, during the reception period D, the background image that has been changed is restored to its original state, and at the same time as the original image is restored, the pattern image display is changed from the period in which the pattern image display is hidden. Since the transition is made to the displayed period, it is possible to provide an effect within the reception period D as if the reception period was returned to before the transition.

Note that the background image changes within the acceptance period D when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period D without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. If an action (operation) by the player has been accepted previously, no change will occur in the background image even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period D. This makes it possible to avoid changing the background image to a different one while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D is being executed, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, during reception period A, B or reception period D, if a reception is made while the sample image display is being displayed, the sample image display is hidden. At that time, in reception period A and B, "disappearance EF" is displayed as an image different from the sample image display in conjunction with hiding the sample image display, but in reception period D, the sample image display is hidden. In addition to hiding the display, the "disappearance EF" is not displayed as an image different from the sample image display. In other words, in this case, if the "extinction EF" did not appear when the reception was made, it would be possible to recognize the possibility that the "reception period D" had occurred. Although the aspect of A and B is maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest in the game due to the inability to understand which reception period is occurring.

In addition, in the production example described above, first, the reception period is reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 5-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 5-A"). We have prepared multiple reception periods, including (equivalent to the reception period). Then, the acceptance period A or the acceptance period B is the same as the period shown in FIG. When the execution of the third variation pattern (corresponding to the first variation pattern of "Configuration 5-A") is started, the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the execution of the third variation pattern (in FIG. 190, the reception period A In case of , it can occur when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and in case of reception period B, it can occur when 35 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation. When the number of determination information (the number of jackpot determinations in a pending state (pending number)) stored in the pending storage means is less than "2" (i.e. "1"), this is digested and the pending number becomes " When the second variation pattern (corresponding to the second variation pattern of "Configuration 5-A") shown in FIG. This can occur when the elapsed timing (in FIG. 190(b), the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) arrives, but in a situation where the number of determination information stored by the hold storage means is "2" or more. When the execution of the second variation pattern is started at a certain time, the second variation pattern is prevented from occurring even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern has started (see FIG. 190(a)). reference).

According to such a configuration, if you are trying to cancel a game and as a result, the number of reservations runs out, a type of acceptance period (acceptance period D) that did not occur until then will occur, so the game will be canceled. The player can be expected to be encouraged not to play the game, or even if the game is canceled, the player can still have the impression that the game was interesting in the end.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the "number of determination information stored by the suspension storage means (number of reservations)" is less than "2" (i.e. "1"), this is digested and the number of reservations becomes " Even if the execution of the second variation pattern is started in the state of "0", the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of execution of the second variation pattern (in FIG. 190(b), 30 seconds from the start of the variation) When the "number of judgment information stored by the suspension storage means (number of reservations)" increases before the timing (time that has passed) has not arrived (when the number of reservations increases from "0" to "1" or more), The reception period D may not occur when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern started.

In other words, even if the pending number is ``1'' and it is used up and the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started in the state of ``0'', within the execution period of that symbol variation. If the pending number increases in , it suggests that you are not about to cancel the game. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started when the number of pending symbols is "0", the number of pending symbols is increased within the execution period of the symbol variation. In this case, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern started (in FIG. 190(b), 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation), the acceptance period D is not generated. Therefore, the acceptance period D can be made to function more appropriately as "a type of acceptance period that can appear only when the player is about to cancel the game."

In order to obtain such effects more preferably, even if the reception period D occurs, the number of judgment information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of determination information stored in the suspension storage means) is It is more desirable to end the acceptance period D (end the state in which acceptance is permitted) at that point when the number) increases.

Furthermore, even in a situation where a reception is made within the reception period D and a post-reception display corresponding to the reception is executed, before the display time elapses, "the data is stored in the hold storage means". When the number of pieces of judgment information (pending number) increases, the post-reception display may be ended (not displayed) at that point.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the acceptance period D is a predetermined period of time after the execution of the first variation pattern shown in FIG. 190 is started (in FIG. This event also occurs when the timing (timing 10 seconds after 10 seconds has elapsed) has arrived (on the condition that the number of reservations is 0). and,
- The timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern (the variation pattern forming the reach state) shown in FIG. If the reception period D occurs when the reception period D occurs, the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D occurs while the inaudible state is maintained. (See Figure 188)
- The timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution of the first variation pattern (the variation pattern that does not form a reach state) shown in FIG. If the corresponding reception period D occurs when the specified BGM is output in an audible state, the specified BGM is not made audible, but the reception period D occurs while the specified BGM is output audibly, and within the reception period D that has occurred. Make specific BGM inaudible (see Figure 189)
It is planned to have the following configuration.

According to such a configuration, when the reception period D occurs, it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 185) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. or the above-mentioned reception period B (see Figure 186), which occurs while the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible, appears to have occurred, which improves gaming interest. You will be able to aim for In addition, the reception period D, which appeared to have occurred during the reception period A (see FIG. 185), now appears to have changed to the reception period B within the reception period D. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, after the first variation pattern shown in FIG. If an acceptance is made while the BGM is being output, the audible output of the specific BGM is terminated using the acceptance as an opportunity (see FIG. 189). However, the audible output of the specific BGM may not be terminated upon this acceptance, but may continue to be audibly output from then on. For example, even in the example of FIG. 189(e'), instead of setting the specific BGM in a suppressed mode or inaudible state at the accepted timing tPx, The specific BGM may be suppressed or rendered inaudible based on the arrival of a predetermined timing. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM will be suppressed or made inaudible during the display period of the post-reception display D, making it possible to provide an interesting performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period is reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 6-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 6-A"). ) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including: And, the reception period A can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, regardless of the performance situation (such as the result of jackpot determination or performance determination). Reception period B is such that it can occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible, regardless of the performance situation (results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc.) By using specific BGM, it becomes possible to provide effects related to the type of acceptance period even before the acceptance period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 6-A") is further provided as a reception period, and the reception period D is divided into the performance situation (results of jackpot determination). Depending on the performance judgment result, etc.), it may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or it may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. I did it like that.

More specifically, a predetermined time (10 seconds in FIG. 190(b)) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation of the first variation pattern (see FIG. 190(b) etc.) that does not form a reach state. If the reception period D occurs at times, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner (see FIG. 189). On the other hand, for a predetermined period of time after the start of the symbol fluctuation of the second fluctuation pattern or the third fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 190(b) etc.) forming the reach state (in FIG. 190(b), the second fluctuation pattern If the reception period D occurs when the period of time (30 seconds for the pattern and 50 seconds for the third variation pattern) has elapsed, the reception period D occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible. (See FIG. 188).

According to such a configuration, there are cases where the acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and cases where the acceptance period occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. In any of the above cases, since there is a possibility that the acceptance period is "acceptance period D," the interest in the game is suitably maintained until the player's action (operation) is accepted. things come to be expected.

Note that even during reception period A, if an abnormal condition occurs and the notification sound is output, the reception period may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible. obtain. However, the above-mentioned "acceptance period A" is one that can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner, regardless of the performance situation (results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc.) " means "If reception period A occurs in a situation where no abnormality has been reported and the performance is proceeding properly, the specific BGM will always be audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. ``The corresponding acceptance period A will occur.''

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period is reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 7-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 7-A"). ) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including: In the reception period A, if a reception is made within the period, it is possible to execute the post-reception display A according to the reception, and at least the post-reception display A is displayed for the production design (decorative design SZ). 191(c)), it is displayed with priority over the post-reception display A. On the other hand, in the reception period D, if a reception is made within the period, it is possible to execute the post-reception display D according to the reception, and the production pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is such that at least the post-reception display D is executed. While it is being displayed, it is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize by the post-reception display D, or it is hidden (see FIG. 194(c)).

In addition, "the manner in which it is made difficult to see" here means "the manner in which at least a part of the production design (decorative design SZ) is made visible through the reception display D set to a predetermined transmittance according to the transmittance. or a mode in which at least a part of the production design (decorative design SZ) is made invisible due to the post-reception display D that overlaps this, or at least one of the production design (decoration design SZ) "The manner in which parts are hidden, etc."

According to such a configuration, by checking whether or not the visibility of the production design (decorative design SZ) is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the player's action (operation), the reception period can be determined. Be able to recognize the type of. Note that the "design for presentation (decorative pattern SZ)" is, for example, a pattern that forms a ready-to-reach state as a presentation in the presentation display device 1600, and also includes a presentation for forming a ready-to-reach state or not. , It is a pattern that is also used for pseudo continuous effects, full rotation effects, etc.

However, some players may feel disgusted by the deterioration in visibility of such performance symbols (decorative symbols SZ) due to the display of post-reception display D. has been confirmed. In this regard, in the production example described above, when the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is displayed, a reception period different from the reception period D is generated (for example, in response to the reception within the reception period D). When a player's operation is accepted within the different acceptance period, the acceptance is used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display D (processing related to displaying the post-acceptance display D). 194(c)→FIG. 194(g)).

According to such a configuration, if the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is "hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display started", the predetermined time is By simply performing a predetermined operation until the time elapses, the player can hide the post-acceptance display D at that point. Furthermore, the actions (operations) required of the player to display the post-reception display D within the reception period D and the reception period that is different from the reception period D (the reception period that occurs in response to the reception within the reception period D) The actions (operations) required of the player in order to hide the post-reception display D may be the same action (operation) or may be different actions (operations). Note that the above-mentioned "reception period different from reception period D" ends when the post-reception display D becomes hidden.

On the other hand, the post-reception display A may also be displayed for a predetermined period of time from the start of display (it may be the same time as the predetermined time until the post-reception display D is hidden, or may be a different time). It is hidden when the period has passed. However, regarding the post-reception display A that does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance symbols (decorative symbols SZ), the display will be hidden no matter what operation the player performs before the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to prevent this from happening in order to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against his/her intention.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period B is further provided as the reception period, and in the reception period B, if a reception is made within the period, a post-reception display B corresponding to the reception can be executed. , the production design (decorative design SZ) is displayed in a manner that is made difficult to see by the post-reception display B, or is hidden, at least while the post-reception display B is displayed. (See Figure 192(c)).

However, in the above-mentioned example of production, although the "post-reception display B" and "post-reception display D" are common in that they affect the visibility of the production design (decorative design SZ), First, the post-reception display B is "hidden when a predetermined period of time (which may be different from the time until the post-reception display D is hidden) has elapsed since the display started." If this is the case, no matter what operation the player performs until the predetermined time has elapsed, the post-acceptance display B will not be hidden due to this. Thereby, when the visibility of the presentation pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is affected by the post-acceptance display, it is possible to provide performance regarding whether or not this can be improved.

It is preferable that the reception period B is set as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is enabled, and the reception period D is set as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, the reception period is reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 8-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 8-A"). ) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including: The reception period D can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and if the reception is made while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. Taking this as an opportunity, the specific BGM is made inaudible (see Figure 189), and during reception period B, the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode becomes a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a state in which it is not audibly output. Even if the reception is allowed after that and the reception is made, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or in a state in which it is not audibly output is maintained (see FIG. 186).

According to such a configuration, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or a state in which it is not audibly output". You will be able to do it.

In addition, in the production example mentioned above, in the reception period D, when the reception is made, all the sounds that were previously output audible, including the production sounds different from the specific BGM, are made inaudible, and in the reception period B. When an acceptance is made, all sounds that were being output audibly at that time (such as acceptance acceptance sound) are made inaudible. In other words, in this case, in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period, the specific BGM may be put in a state where it is "audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output", or when the acceptance is made, it is not output audibly at that point. It becomes possible to provide a common presentation between reception period D and reception period B, such as making all the sounds made inaudible, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

Furthermore, as mentioned above, during the acceptance period D, while the acceptance of actions (operations) by players is allowed, a situation occurs (in the middle of the validity period) where the specific BGM is made inaudible and no sound is output. However, even in this situation, the acceptance period is continued (see FIG. 194(e)). In other words, in this case, in the reception period D, even though the specific BGM is made inaudible upon receipt of the reception, if no reception is made for a predetermined period of time after the reception period D occurs, , since the specific BGM becomes inaudible while the application has not yet been accepted, it becomes possible to make the player think that the application period D has ended, and the interest of the player is increased. You will be able to strongly attract

In particular, in the production example mentioned above, the background image was changed to coincide with the timing when the specific BGM was made inaudible while the reception was not yet completed, so a reception period different from reception period D occurred. This will provide a performance that makes it seem as if the user is actually playing the game.

In addition, in connection with the occurrence of the reception period D, when the specific BGM is made inaudible with the reception as a trigger (see Figure 189), a "display change according to the reception (post-reception display D)" is generated accordingly. However, when making the specific BGM inaudible while the reception has not yet been made (see Figure 189), a "display change according to the reception (post-reception display D)" should be generated accordingly. I tried to avoid it. In other words, in this case, the reception period D ends by confirming that the "display change in response to reception (display D after reception)" has not yet occurred when the specific BGM is made inaudible. You will be able to make yourself aware of the possibilities that you are not aware of. If an action (operation) by the player is accepted after the specific BGM has been made inaudible but before the end of the acceptance period D, this will be used as an opportunity to display "display changes in accordance with the acceptance (reception Since the "later display D)" will occur, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period B, a predetermined production sound (for example, reception permission sound) is audibly output until the timing tM3 when the period ends, and the predetermined When the performance sound is made inaudible, the player's actions (operations) are not accepted, so it is easy to determine whether or not acceptance period B continues. be able to recognize it. In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, reception period B is set as the reception period in which the automatic button function described above is activated, and the automatic button function is activated based on the arrival of timing tM3. It has become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the acceptance period B occurs when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the third variation pattern shown in FIG. 190, for example. is made inaudible before a predetermined time elapses after the start of the third variation pattern, but for reception period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible after the start of the third variation pattern. It is desirable to prevent this from occurring until then. According to such a configuration, in the third variation pattern, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, reception period B occurs first, and after that, the specific BGM is made inaudible. Since it becomes possible to expect that the acceptance period D will occur even more, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period D can occur only when the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number, and the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern shown in FIG. In both the fluctuation pattern and the third fluctuation pattern, it is assumed that it can occur when a specified time has elapsed from the start of the symbol fluctuation, but regardless of which fluctuation pattern It is desirable to set it to occur after the reception period (such as reception period A to C). In other words, in this case, the reception period D, which has a special effect, can be used as the last reception period that occurred for a player who is about to cancel the game, so that the game can be prevented from being canceled. The player will be able to expect prompting, or even if the game is canceled, the player will be able to leave the impression that the game was interesting at the end.

During the acceptance period D, when an acceptance is accepted, the post-acceptance display D appears for a specific time; however, when the specific time elapses and the post-acceptance display D is hidden, it is desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted. In this case, it is more desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted unless the next symbol variation is started.

Next, examples that embody the above configurations 1, 14, and 15 will be explained in order as modifications to the above-described production example.

In other words, in the above-mentioned production example, when the reception is made within the period D when the sample image display is displayed, and when the reception is made during the period when the sample image display is hidden. It was decided that the same post-reception display D would be generated. However, instead of this, within the reception period D, when the reception is made within the period when the sample image display is displayed, and when the reception is made during the period when the sample image display is hidden. A different post-reception display may be generated.

In other words, in this case, the acceptance period D is more precisely the "acceptance period D1" which is the period during which the sample image display is displayed, and the "acceptance period D2" which is the period during which the sample image display is hidden. It is composed of two types of reception periods, and when the reception is made during the reception period D1, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed, and when the reception is made during the reception period D2, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed. After receiving the information, the display D2 will be displayed.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example in which the above-described modification is added to the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 194 and the like.

The example of presentation shown in FIG. 195 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example of presentation shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 or FIG. 194 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the acceptance period D (acceptance periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 195 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and FIG. 194, and the same applies to other examples. It is possible to apply.

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 195, first, a reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 195(b)), and if a reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display according to the reception period D1 is displayed. D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 195(c)).

On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 195(b)), if a predetermined time elapses without any reception (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives) , the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 195(e)). Regarding the fact that the player's actions (operations) are allowed even under such a situation (when the sample image display is hidden), it is different from the case of the production example shown in FIG. 194 etc. It's the same. However, in this modified example, when the sample image display becomes hidden (see FIG. 195(e)), the above-mentioned "acceptance period D1" ends and a different "acceptance period D2" occurs. It is supposed to be done.

In other words, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the "acceptance period D2" in which the sample image display is hidden, the post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the "acceptance period D2" will be displayed. (See Figure 195(h)). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" which is different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise can be realized. It becomes possible to improve the game's interest through a sexual performance.

Moreover, during the acceptance periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the sample image display (integrated sample image display IG) changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the sample image display (integrated image display IG) changes to the non-display state, it will more appropriately create an atmosphere as if the period has suddenly been replaced with another reception period. will be done.

In particular, in this example, as in the production example shown in FIG. 194, from "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers to "background image HG4b" depicting a desert different from "background image HG3". (FIG. 195(b)→FIG. 195(e)). According to such a configuration, when the sample image display (integrated image display IG) changes to the non-display state, the atmosphere as if it were suddenly replaced with the reception period C that may occur when the desert background is created can be improved. It is now expected to produce favorable results.

Furthermore, the "post-reception display D2" according to this example has different content from the "group notice" of the "post-reception display C" shown in FIG. 193(c), but it uses a ghost character. The content is reminiscent of "post-reception display C", such as the fact that it is common to "post-reception display C", and this also makes it more suitable for the atmosphere that seems to be suddenly replaced with the reception period C that can occur when the background is a desert. will be expected to produce.

In addition, in this example, when an acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1. , a post-reception display D2 corresponding to the reception is displayed. As a result, instead of a post-reception display that has nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, a post-reception display according to the reception period C), a post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs) It is possible to suggest that a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception period D2 (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives) It becomes like this.

Note that if a predetermined period of time elapses after the acceptance period D2 occurs without any movement (operation) by the player being accepted (when timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives), the process shown in FIG. ), the acceptance period D1 occurs again and the state is returned to displaying the sample image display (integrated image display IG). At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" back to "background image HG4a" (FIG. 195(e)→FIG. 195(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D1 from other reception periods can be more suitably created.

When a reception is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 195(f)) that has occurred again in this way, the reception period D1 A post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to the above will be displayed (see FIG. 195(c)).

It goes without saying that such acceptance period D (acceptance period D1, D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 195, the acceptance period D (corresponding to the third acceptance period of "Configuration 15-A") includes a period in which the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed; There are periods during which the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is not displayed, but these periods will function as "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2", and these "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2", different display changes are made depending on whether the acceptance is made. In other words, in this case, there is a change in the display that cannot be confirmed unless the user is made aware of the possibility that the reception period D has ended (the sample image display is hidden). Since the display changes (changes in the display when

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, the acceptance period D includes a "period in which the model image display is displayed" and a "period in which the model image display is hidden." However, instead of this, in the reception period D, there is a period during which text information related to the fact that reception is allowed is displayed, and a period in which text information related to the fact that reception is allowed is hidden. It may also be possible to include a period in which the

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing an example in which the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 194 etc. is modified as described above.

The example of presentation shown in FIG. 196 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example of presentation shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 or FIG. 194 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the reception period D shown in FIG. 196 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and FIG. 194, and can be similarly applied to other examples. .

However, in the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 196 (see FIG. 196(b)), as in the case of acceptance period B (see FIG. 192(b)), although the contents are different, acceptance is not permitted. Text information (in this case, "Please press") related to what is being done is displayed.

In other words, as mentioned above, text information related to acceptance being allowed cannot be displayed during acceptance period A (see FIG. 191(b)), where expectations are relatively low. It is displayed during the reception period B (see FIG. 192(b)), where expectations are relatively high. Therefore, by displaying such text information (here, "Please press") during the reception period D, it is expected that interest in the game will be improved.

However, in the acceptance period D according to this modification, as shown in FIGS. 196(b), (e), and (f), the state in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is continued. In the process, text information related to the fact that reception is permitted (here, "Please press") is changed from a display state to a non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189), or the text information is may change from a non-display state to a display state (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189). Of course, even if the text information (here, "Please press") is hidden, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) will be accepted. Based on the reception, the post-reception display D will be performed (see the example of tracing the production route from FIG. 196(e) to FIG. 196(c)).

In this example, if the player's action (operation) is accepted within the acceptance period D, the text information (here, "Please press") related to the acceptance of the action is hidden. (Figure 196(b) → Figure 196(c)), or was the acceptance made while the text information (here, "Please press") was hidden? (Figure 196(e) → Figure 196(c)), or was the acceptance made after the text information (here, "Please press") was returned to the display state (Figure 196(f) → Figure 196(f) → Figure 196(f) → Figure 196(f) → Figure 196(f)). 196(c)), the same aspect (FIG. 196(c)) is made to appear as the "post-reception display D".

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 196(e), although the acceptance period D has occurred, the acceptance period A is such that text information related to acceptance is not displayed. (See FIG. 191(b)) It is now possible to provide an atmosphere as if the game has been suddenly replaced, and through such a surprising performance, it is possible to improve the game's interest. On the other hand, even if a player's action (operation) is accepted under a situation that appears to have suddenly changed from the acceptance period A (text information is not displayed), the operation will still correspond to the acceptance period D. Since the same mode (FIG. 196(c)) is displayed as the "post-reception display D", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Moreover, in the acceptance period D according to this example, when the text information related to acceptance of acceptance changes from a display state to a non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when text information related to acceptance of reception changes to a hidden state, it is possible to better create an atmosphere as if the period has suddenly been replaced with another reception period. become expected.

In particular, in this example, "background image HG4a" depicting a mountain and a river is changed to "background image HG4c" depicting a mountain different from "background image HG1" (Fig. 196 ( b)→Figure 196(e)). According to such a configuration, when the text information related to acceptance of acceptance changes to a hidden state, it creates an atmosphere as if the acceptance period A has suddenly been replaced with the acceptance period A that may occur when the mountain background is displayed. It is expected to produce better results.

In addition, in this example, when the text information related to acceptance is allowed is returned from the hidden state to the displayed state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" to "background image HG4a". (FIG. 196(e)→FIG. 196(f)). As a result, it is expected that an atmosphere that returns to the original reception period D from other reception periods (particularly reception period A) can be more suitably created.

It goes without saying that such acceptance period D is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 196, first, the reception periods are reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 1-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 1-A"). We have prepared multiple reception periods, including (corresponding to the period). In both cases, the reception period B occurs and the reception period D occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Although the same action by the player (pressing the operation button 410) is accepted in period B and reception period D, different character information ("press" in reception period B, "press" in reception period D) is accepted. "Please press").

That is, in reception period B and reception period D, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change that occurs as a result of the detection of the action (post-reception display B, D ) are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even if the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since these are made to differ depending on the type (type of post-reception display), it is recognized which type of display change (post-reception display B, D) may occur as a post-reception display. It is now possible to perform operations (movements by the player), and it is expected that this will suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of reception period B is requested, and the same text information and sample image display as in the case of reception period B are displayed, but when the reception is made, the reception is different from that in the case of reception period B. It is also possible to further prepare a reception period during which the post-display occurs. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely understand which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information or the sample image display. be expected to maintain it.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned modification, in the reception period B, the text information is not hidden until the state in which the reception is allowed (valid state) ends; During the reception period D, the text information can be hidden during the period while the reception continues to be permitted (valid state). In other words, in this case, during the acceptance period D, the player is required to perform any operation (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the corresponding period occurs. As it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period, it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period. It is now expected to suitably avoid the situation where the information disappears completely.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, the acceptance period D includes a period in which text information is displayed (see FIG. 196(b)) and a period in which text information is hidden (see FIG. 196(e)). ), but the same display change (see FIG. 196(c)) occurs no matter when the reception is made within these periods. In other words, in this case, even if the text information is hidden, as long as you confirm what kind of operation mode is requested while the text information is displayed, the operation can be performed properly. This is possible, and is expected to suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification, the text information is hidden during the acceptance period D, and then is displayed again. In other words, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the "reception period D" has suddenly changed to the "reception period A" in which no text information is displayed, the misunderstanding can be corrected by the text information being displayed again. It will be possible to resolve it.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, a change occurs in the background image during the reception period D, and at the same time as the change occurs, the text information is removed from the period in which text information is displayed. I am trying to make the transition to the displayed period. This makes it possible to suitably give the impression that the reception period D has shifted to a different reception period.

In the production example described with reference to FIG. 196, there are cases in which a reception is made during a period in which text information related to acceptance is permitted within the reception period D, and a case in which the reception is permitted. The same post-reception display D is generated when the reception is made within the period in which text information related to the presence of the user is hidden. However, instead of this, when the reception is made within the period during which the text information related to the reception is allowed is displayed within the reception period D, and when the text information related to the reception is allowed is displayed. A different post-acceptance display may be generated depending on when the acceptance is made within a period in which text information is hidden.

In other words, in this case, the acceptance period D is, more precisely, the "acceptance period D1", which is the period in which text information related to the acceptance of acceptance is displayed, and the acceptance period D1, which is the period in which text information related to the acceptance of acceptance is displayed It consists of two types of acceptance periods, such as "acceptance period D2", which is a period in which the text information obtained is hidden, and when an acceptance is made during acceptance period D1, a corresponding post-acceptance display D1 is displayed. If a reception is made during the reception period D2, a corresponding post-reception display D2 will be displayed.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example in which the above-described modification is added to the reception period D shown in FIG. 196 and the like.

The example of presentation shown in FIG. 197 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example of presentation shown in FIGS. 188 to 190, FIG. 194, and FIG. 196 which is a modification thereof will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the acceptance period D (acceptance periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 197 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 196, and the same can be applied to other examples as well. .

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 197, first, a reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 197(b)), and if a reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed. D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 197(c)).

On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 197(b)), if a predetermined time elapses without any reception (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives) , text information (here, "Please press") related to acceptance being permitted is hidden (see FIG. 197(e)). Regarding the fact that the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed even under such a situation (a situation where the text information related to the fact that acceptance is allowed is hidden), see Figure 196. This is the same as in the production example shown in . However, in this modified example, when the text information related to acceptance is allowed is hidden (see FIG. 197(e)), the above-mentioned "acceptance period D1" ends and this is no longer the case. A different "acceptance period D2" occurs.

In other words, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the "acceptance period D2" in which character information related to acceptance is hidden, the text information related to acceptance is hidden. Display D2 will be displayed (see FIG. 197(h)). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" which is different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise can be realized. It becomes possible to improve the game's interest through a sexual performance.

Moreover, in the acceptance periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the character information related to acceptance of acceptance changes from a display state to a non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the character information related to acceptance is allowed changes to the hidden state, the character information is suddenly replaced with the reception period A in which the character information is hidden. It is expected to create a more suitable atmosphere.

In particular, in this example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 196, from "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers to "background image HG4c" depicting mountains different from "background image HG1". (FIG. 197(b)→FIG. 197(e)). With this configuration, when the text information (in this case, "Please press") changes to a hidden state, the atmosphere of the reception period A, which can occur when the mountain is in the background, is suddenly replaced. It is now expected to produce favorable results.

Furthermore, the "post-reception display D2" according to this example has different content from the "conversation preview" of the "post-reception display A" shown in FIG. 191(c), except that it uses a princess character. The content is reminiscent of "Post-Reception Display A", such as the commonality of ``Reception Period A'', and this also makes it more suitable for creating an atmosphere that seems to have been suddenly replaced with Reception Period A in which text information is hidden. It is expected that this will be produced in the future.

In addition, in this example, when an acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1. , a post-reception display D2 corresponding to the reception is displayed. As a result, instead of a post-reception display that has nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, a post-reception display according to the reception period C), a post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs) It is possible to suggest that a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception period D2 (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives) It becomes like this.

Note that if a predetermined time period elapses without any movement (operation) by the player being accepted after the reception period D2 occurs (when timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives), the process shown in FIG. ), the acceptance period D1 occurs again and the state is returned to displaying "text information related to acceptance being permitted." At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" back to "background image HG4a" (FIG. 197(e)→FIG. 197(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D1 from other reception periods can be more suitably created.

When a reception is received within the reception period D1 (FIG. 197(f)) that has occurred again in this way, the reception period D1 A post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to the above will be displayed (see FIG. 197(c)).

It goes without saying that such acceptance period D (acceptance period D1, D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 190.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 197, in the acceptance period D (corresponding to the second acceptance period of "Configuration 14-A"), "text information related to acceptance being allowed" is displayed. There is a period in which "textual information related to acceptance is permitted" is hidden, but these periods will function as "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2", It was decided that different display changes would occur depending on which of the "reception period D1" and "reception period D2" the reception was made. In other words, in this case, when the "text information related to acceptance of acceptance" is hidden, the acceptance period does not end, but a different acceptance period from the previous acceptance period begins. Since this occurs, it becomes possible to suitably maintain performance even when actions (operations) by the player are not readily accepted.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the "post-reception display" is started to be displayed when the sample image display is being displayed, but regarding the "post-reception display", The display does not necessarily have to be started when the sample image display is being displayed, and the display may be started after the sample image display is hidden.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the sample images are displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception period occurs, but when the timing at which the reception period occurs, Alternatively, it may be displayed later.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the simulated image display is dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. In this case, it is preferable that the dynamic display of the sample image is not terminated and continues even though the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" has appeared since it was accepted.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the "extinction effect (disappearance related display)" is not only used to display a sample image, but also to a gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. We decided to make this difficult to visually recognize. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, in the reception period D, even if the reception is made within the period, this will be used as an opportunity to terminate the display processing for displaying the sample image (in the modified example, text information). I tried not to let it happen. In other words, by displaying the post-reception display D preferentially over the sample image display (text information in the modified example) whose display state is maintained on the layer, the sample image display (text information in the modified example) is now hidden (invisible). However, even when an acceptance is made during the acceptance period D, this may be used as an opportunity to terminate the display process for displaying the sample image (in a modified example, text information).

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) that simulates the operation receiving part to be operated is displayed within the reception period. The sample image display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be realized by replacing it with, for example, an arrow notation that prompts an operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 189, if an acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner during the acceptance period D, the specific BGM will be audibly output in a suppressed manner using this acceptance as a trigger. However, the specific BGM may be made inaudible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not it has been accepted. In other words, in this case, there is a possibility that the post-acceptance display is rendered inaudible during the execution period, and it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the background images HG1 to HG4a (HG4b, HG4c) are assumed to be displayed before each reception period occurs; It may also be displayed in accordance with the timing of occurrence. Further, depending on the type of reception period, the display may be displayed before the reception period occurs, or may be displayed in accordance with the timing at which the reception period occurs. In short, as long as the reception can be made while each of the background images are displayed, the above-described effects related to the background images will be achieved.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, it is assumed that the reception period C occurs while the specific BGM is output audibly in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible. , may occur when the specific BGM is output in a non-suppressed manner.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 185 to 197, the acceptance period D includes a period during which a sample image display (in a modified example, text information related to acceptance of acceptance) is displayed; However, these periods include periods in which the player performs operations after confirming that the image display (or text information) is hidden. Even if you start the game, the time is set to be sufficient for the reception to be accepted in the non-display state, and the game will be started after confirming that the image display (or text information) is returned to the display state. This is set as a time sufficient for acceptance to be made in the display state even if the person starts an action (operation), and has no technical significance except for display methods using so-called "flashing displays." It is clear that it has.

For example, during reception period D, the time period during which a sample image display (or text information) is kept in a "hidden state" after it is turned into a "hidden state" is set as reception period A or reception period B. It is desirable to set the time value to be half or more (1.5 seconds or more) of the current time (for example, 3 seconds). Also, after the sample image display (or text information) is returned to the display state, the time to maintain the display state is half of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as the reception period A or reception period B. It is desirable to set a time value of 1.5 seconds or more (1.5 seconds or more). It is desirable to set the time value to be more than half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as A or acceptance period B.

Or, the time from when the sample image display (or text information) is displayed to when it is hidden, or from when the sample image display (or text information) is set to the "hidden state" to the "non-display state". The time to maintain the "display state" and the time to maintain the display state after the sample image display (or text information) is returned to the display state are the shortest period of time for symbol fluctuations (required for shortened fluctuations). It may also be set as a time value greater than or equal to (time). This is because such a time value is set as a time value that is sufficient for the player to confirm the symbol variation, and yet allows the symbol variation to be ended early.

Next, examples that embody the above configurations 4, 9 to 13 will be explained. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D), a reception period E is further prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception performances). It is said that

The characteristics of the reception period E will be explained with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. It should be noted that each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. E) may also be realized.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in a variation pattern in which a reception period E (reception performance E) occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving) and "fluctuation pattern E" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. , the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (pre-announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E. After that, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decoration pattern) SZ (performance depiction according to the variation pattern E, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 198(a)"), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern E" itself. Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 198(a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 194(a) is displayed.

Here, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the timing when a predetermined time E has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ has arrived. (when condition E is satisfied), the above-mentioned acceptance period E (validity period) is generated during which ``acceptance regarding post-acceptance display E'' is permitted (``situation shown in FIG. 198(e)'').

In this regard, when the reception period E occurs, a sign corresponding to the reception period E is displayed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 198(b), a "kunoichi" character KI is introduced. Next, as shown in FIG. 198(c), the character KI throws a smoke bomb to generate smoke. Next, as shown in FIG. 198(d), the character KI is displayed saying a line such as "Press the button to call that person." At this time, the expansion of the "smoke" is depicted and a "sample image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and "sample image display" are difficult to see because the character KI and dialogue are prioritized. It is being done. Then, when the reception period E occurs after such a precursor display (FIGS. 198(b) to (d)) is performed, the character KI and the lines are hidden, and the "sample image display" is clearly displayed. will be done.

In this example, "character KI" and "smoke" are displayed with priority over the background image HG4a and the decoration image SZ. Further, "smoke" may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), thereby changing the background image from "background image HG4a" to "smoke". In other words, in this case, the "smoke" will function as the "background image" to be changed. "Smoke" does not necessarily have to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the acceptance period E (it does not have to be displayed as a precursor display).

Here, as shown in FIG. 198(e), in the reception period E according to this example, the "integrated model image display IG" in which the operation button 410 is modeled and the sword ornament 5001 are modeled as the model image display. A "sword decoration image SYG" and a "special imitation image TM" imitating the special operation means (button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed, respectively. Note that in this example, a plurality of each of the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one. .

That is, in this case, during the acceptance period E, the player is prompted to operate the "operation button 410," the "sword ornament 5001," and the "special operation means 1410." Thereby, the player determines which of the "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001", and "special operation means 1410" should be operated.

In this regard, if an operation is accepted for the "operation button 410" within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. E1 is audibly output, and the display changes to display an "image suggesting that the integrated image display IG is correct" and a "samurai character" (post-reception display E1), and a display depicting a cityscape. Background changes to ``background image HG5'' occur. Note that after the "post-reception display E1" is displayed in this way, the performance progresses while the "background image HG5" is being displayed.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 198(g), no acceptance sound is generated and no There is no display change, and the acceptance period E is not ended (same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). That is, in the reception period E, even though the "special operation means 1410" is not set as an object for reception, a "special imitation image TM" imitating the "special operation means 1410" is displayed. . According to such a configuration, during the reception period E, a sample image display (integrated sample image display IG, sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation means set as the object of acceptance during the reception period E, and the corresponding Since the display of sample images (special sample images TM) of operation means that are not set for acceptance during reception period E is mixed, there is a feeling of tension as it is difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated. It will be possible to give the opportunity to operate in the middle of the day. Note that while the "special operation means 1410" is within the reception period E, operations on the "special operation means 1410" are accepted, but no reception sound is generated using this as an opportunity. In addition, even if it is arranged so that no display change occurs and the reception period E is not ended (same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). good.

On the other hand, if an operation for the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 198(i), based on the acceptance, an acceptance sound E2 such as "Boo" Along with the audible output, a display change (post-acceptance display E2) is generated that depicts the character KI speaking the line, ``I'll rearrange the partition!''. Note that at this time, no change occurs in the background image.

In other words, after "post-reception display E2" is displayed, the performance does not progress, but the set time (remaining time) as reception period E is reset, and as a result, the remaining time as reception period E is returned to the state immediately after the reception period E occurred (it can also be said that "the reception period E occurs again"). According to such a configuration, even if the operation for making the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) appear is not performed and as a result, the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) cannot be displayed, the remaining time Since it becomes possible to restart the "acceptance period E" from the initial state where the period has not yet been completed, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

Note that the condition for returning to the state immediately after the reception period E occurs is not ``the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted once'', but ``the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted a predetermined number of times''. It may also be possible to accept only the amount of time required.

Incidentally, it goes without saying that if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" within the reception period E, the remaining time of the reception period E will not be reset.

Then, as a result of the operation performed on the "sword ornament 5001" within the reception period E, the remaining time of the reception period E was returned to the state immediately after the reception period E occurred (the reception period E re-occurred). ), the same procedure as described above will occur depending on which of the operations on the “operation button 410”, the operation on the “sword ornament 5001”, and the operation on the “special operation means 1410” is accepted within the acceptance period E. A phenomenon will occur (FIGS. 198(f), (g), (i)).

However, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period E during which the set time (remaining time) has not been reset, the manner in which the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance is displayed and the set time When an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the (remaining time) is reset, the mode displayed as the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance is made to differ from each other (after acceptance). display D1, D2, etc.). According to such a configuration, since there is a dramatic value in displaying the post-reception display D without resetting, it is preferable to reduce the feeling of tension when the reception period E is occurring. will be able to maintain it.

On the other hand, in the "example that progresses from FIG. 198(e) or FIG. 198(g) to FIG. 198(h)", the "operation on the operation button 410" and "operation on the sword ornament 5001" are performed within the acceptance period E. This is based on the assumption that neither application is accepted.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period E has occurred, the remaining time is completely used up without any action (operation) by the player being accepted, and the acceptance period E is ended. In this regard, the reception period E is set as "the reception period during which the automatic button function described above is activated." Therefore, in the reception period E, even if the remaining time is exhausted without accepting either the "operation on the operation button 410" or the "operation on the sword ornament 5001", the process shown in FIG. 198(h) As shown in , the same post-acceptance display E as when there is an action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period E is generated.

However, if neither the "operation on the operation button 410" nor the "operation on the sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the "operation on the operation button 410" will not be accepted within the acceptance period E. Although the same post-acceptance display E as when received is generated, the same acceptance sound E (ping pong) as when the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E is no longer audible. There is.

According to such a configuration, while displaying the same post-acceptance display E as when the "operation on the operation button 410" was accepted within the acceptance period E, the result of a successful selective operation by the player is displayed. It is expected that this will encourage more active operations when reception period E occurs again. Become so.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period E, it is made difficult to recognize how much time is left in the acceptance period E, or the post-acceptance display E1 is displayed. The process provides a hint as to which operation mode (operation type) is required for the purpose.

FIGS. 199(a) to 199(d) are enlarged views of a part of the display screen shown in FIG. 198(e), showing the display contents over time while the acceptance period E continues. It is a figure showing a change.

As mentioned above, during the reception period E, the "integrated model image display IG" that imitates the operation button 410, the "sword decoration image SYG" that imitates the sword decoration body 5001, and the special operation means ("PUSH" in the figure) are displayed. A "special imitation image TM" imitating the described button) 1410 is displayed.

That is, in the reception period E, although multiple types of sample image displays are displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to suggest the remaining time is one of the multiple types of sample image displays. This means that it will only be associated with one (integrated image display IG). This makes it possible to imply that the operating means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated image display IG" among the plurality of types of image display is in a state in which the operation means (operation button 410) should be operated.

Furthermore, as time passes during the acceptance period E, the "integrated image display IG" displays "movements when the player receives operations" as shown in FIGS. 199(a) to (d). A portion of the operation button 410 that simulates the "operation receiving section" (button design image BMG) is dynamically displayed as if the user were performing the following steps. This dynamic display is the same as that described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, and is also the same when "integrated image display IG" is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 197.

However, in this production example, among the multiple types of simulated image displays, the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special simulated image TM" are the part that simulates the "operation receiver" of the sword decoration 5001, and the special A portion of the operation means 1410 that imitates the "operation receiver" is not displayed dynamically, but is displayed statically. Note that for the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special print image TM", the light emission mode may be changed such as blinking light emission.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple types of image display, only the "integrated image display IG" expresses the "movement when the player receives an operation". It becomes possible to imply that the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to "integrated image display IG" among the types of image display types is in a state where the operation means (operation button 410) should be operated.

Furthermore, as described above, during the reception period E, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to suggest the remaining time is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, such a gauge image GG normally depicts a display area that gradually decreases as time passes after the acceptance period occurs. , which is used to indicate how much time is left in the reception period. The manner in which the gauge image GG is used in this manner is the same when the "gauge image GG (here, the integrated image display IG)" is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 197. be.

However, during the reception period E, as shown in FIGS. 199(a) to (d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, the message ``Time elapsed since the reception period occurred'' is displayed. There is no "description in which the display area gradually decreases." That is, in the acceptance period E according to this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is maintained at the maximum value and displayed from the time the period occurs until the end of the period. There is. According to this configuration, during the reception period E, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in the reception period E, and it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. become expected.

In particular, in the reception period E according to this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time of the reception period E by performing an operation on the special operation means 1410, but even if such processing is performed, Since there is no depiction that would increase the display area of the gauge image GG, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize that the remaining time for the reception period E has been reset, and a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. will be done.

The "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" shown in FIGS. 199(a) to 199(d) is repeated until the acceptance period E ends. Therefore, if an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the ``dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG'' is terminated with this acceptance as a trigger. However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 within the acceptance period E, the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" will not be terminated due to this. Furthermore, even if an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the process of generating the post-acceptance display D2 will be performed, but the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" will be terminated. There is no need to change the settings or start over from the beginning, but the ``dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG'' that has been performed up to that point is simply continued.

According to the production example described above, first, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 4-A") and reception period E (the second reception period of "Configuration 4-A") are set as the reception period. We have multiple reception periods including: In the acceptance period A (FIGS. 185 and 191), when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-acceptance display A is displayed and the acceptance sound A is output. When no movement (operation) by the player is detected, the post-acceptance display A is not displayed and the acceptance sound A is not output. When an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display E1 is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output, and even if no action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display E1 is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output. The same post-acceptance display E1 as when an action (operation) by the player is detected within is displayed, but the acceptance sound E1 is not output.

According to such a configuration, if an action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period E, there may be a disadvantage in terms of performance, so that the tension when the acceptance period E occurs is reduced. will be able to maintain it properly.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 4-A") is further provided, and in the reception period B (FIGS. 186 and 192), no game is played within the period. When an action (operation) by the player is detected, the reception display B is displayed and the reception sound B is output, and even if no action by the player is detected within the period, the player's action is not detected within the period. The same post-acceptance display B as when (operation) is detected is displayed and the acceptance sound B is output. In other words, in this case, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (post-acceptance change) as when the action was accepted is caused to occur so as to cause a disadvantage in terms of presentation. (Reception period E) and when the reception period occurs without causing any disadvantages (Reception period B), so while maintaining the tension when the reception period occurs, It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game when the player's action (operation) is not accepted in time within the period.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, text information related to the fact that reception is allowed is not displayed in reception period A (Fig. 191), and in reception period B (Fig. 192) and reception period E (Fig. 198). ) displays text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted. In this respect, the text information displayed during the reception period B and the text information displayed during the reception period E are made to be different from each other. According to such a configuration, first, when the reception period occurs, the presence or absence of "textual information related to acceptance of reception" is checked, and the reception for which the automatic button function is activated is confirmed. It becomes possible to recognize whether it is a period or not. In addition, if "text information related to acceptance is allowed" is displayed when the reception period occurs, by checking the type of the text information, you can check the It becomes possible to recognize the type of

Furthermore, as described above, in the acceptance period B, when the automatic button function is enabled, the "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" appears (see FIG. 186(j)). In this regard, in the production example mentioned above, in the reception period E (Fig. 198), when the automatic button function is activated (such as when progressing from Fig. 198 (e) to (h)), the "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" should not appear. According to such a configuration, the type of reception period can be recognized based on whether or not a "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" appears when the automatic button function is enabled. .

In addition, during the reception period E (FIG. 198), even when an action (operation) by the player is accepted and the sample image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden from display, " It is also possible to prevent the "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" from appearing.

As described above, during the reception period B, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144). On the other hand, during the acceptance period A and the acceptance period E, it is desirable that the sample image be displayed in only one manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the acceptance period A, the background image is not changed based on the acceptance of the operation by the player (see FIG. 191), and during the acceptance period B and E, the background image is not changed based on the acceptance of the operation by the player. The background image is changed based on the acceptance of the operation. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the automatic button function has been activated and the post-acceptance display has been displayed, making it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

However, during the acceptance period E, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted, if this is due to an operation on the "sword ornament 5001", the post-acceptance display E2 is displayed. The background image will no longer be changed to a different background image. According to such a configuration, although the post-reception display E2 corresponding to the reception is displayed, the player can confirm that the background image that should have been changed has not been changed yet. It becomes possible to recognize that period E has not yet ended.

During the reception period E, there are a plurality of objects (operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001, but the special operation means 1410 may also be included) as objects (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player. is set, and differs depending on whether the player's action (operation) on the operation button 410 among the plurality of objects is accepted or the case where the player's action (operation) on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted. The reception sound is now output. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that different performances will occur depending on which of the plurality of objects is manipulated.

In addition, in reception period B, there is a case where "reception sound A" corresponding to reception period A is audibly output based on the result of performance judgment (jackpot determination), and "reception sound A" corresponding to reception period A is A different "acceptance sound B" may be audibly output in some cases.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period E, the player is given multiple options (here, by operating the operation button 410, operating the sword decoration 5001, or operating the special operation means 1410). A different display (post-acceptance display E1, E2) appears as a post-acceptance display depending on which of these options is selected by the player's action (operation). If none of the multiple options above are selected within the period (in this case, no movement (operation) by the player is detected), a specific option from the multiple options above will be displayed after acceptance. A display (post-acceptance display E1) is made to appear when is selected (here, when the operation button 410 is operated).

According to such a configuration, if no operation is performed within the acceptance period E, only the same post-acceptance display is always displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to perform selective operations within the acceptance period E. be able to encourage

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the operation button 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving part) of "Configuration 9-A") and the sword ornament 5001 (corresponding to "Configuration 9-A") are used as operation means. We have prepared multiple operation means including the second operation means (corresponding to the second operation receiving part), and we have prepared multiple operation means including the reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period of "Configuration 9-A") as the reception period. We have prepared a reception period for each type. In the acceptance period E, both the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of an operation on the sword ornament 5001 are accepted as acceptance for causing a display change corresponding to the acceptance period E, When an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, a post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated, and when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, a post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated. Since it is possible to generate a display change (post-reception display E2) that is different from the post-reception display E1 (specific display change) without causing the display to occur, it is possible to make it interesting to see which operating means to operate. You will be able to do this.

In addition, during the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, the reception period E is terminated, but when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, the reception period E is not terminated. The remaining time was extended instead. More specifically, when the operation button 410 is operated during the reception period E, this is used as an opportunity to set the state in which the remaining time of the reception period E1 has not been used up. In other words, in this case, since it becomes possible to create an unprecedented performance during the reception period E using multiple operating means, it is possible to create various interesting performances based on this kind of performance. be able to provide

However, in the reception period E according to the above-mentioned production example, the remaining time of the reception period E can be extended by simply performing an operation on the sword ornament 5001, so that a sense of tension is suitably maintained. There are concerns that it may not be possible. Therefore, we have decided to further provide a reception period F that is different from the reception period E, and in this reception period F, as well as the reception period E, there is an "integrated image display IG" that imitates the operation button 410, and a sword decoration 5001. ``sword decoration image SYG'' which is a copy of the ``sword decoration image SYG'' and a ``special copy image TM'' which is a copy of the special operation means (button labeled ``PUSH'' in the figure) 1410 are displayed. Even if the application is received within the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E described above (see FIG. 198),
- When an operation for the "operation button 410" is accepted, based on the acceptance, an acceptance sound F1 is audibly output and a post-acceptance display F1 is displayed;
- When an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410", no reception sound is generated, no display change is made, and the reception period E is not terminated. (same as the state where no reaction occurs and no operation is performed),
- When an operation for the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, the acceptance sound F2 is audibly output based on the acceptance, and a display change different from the above-mentioned post-acceptance display F1 (post-acceptance display F2) will be displayed. Furthermore, in the reception period F, even if an operation is accepted for "sword ornament 5001", the remaining time of the reception period F is not reset (not extended), and the reception period F The remaining time may continue to be used as is. In other words, in this case, if an operation for the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period F, this will be used as an opportunity to display the post-acceptance display F2, but the acceptance period F may be ended or the acceptance period F The remaining time will not be reset, and the acceptance period F will continue thereafter (of course, acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 is also allowed).

According to such a configuration, the player is presented with the following options: "Do you want to operate the operation button 410?", "Do you want to operate the sword ornament 5001?" and "Do you want to operate the special operation means 1410?" Even if a reception period occurs, the remaining time of the reception period will not necessarily be reset (not extended) when an operation for "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, so it is preferable to create a sense of tension. will be expected to be maintained.

Further, it is preferable that the reception period F is set as a target for which the automatic button function described above is activated, similarly to the reception period E. Then, when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period F, as well as when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period F. It is desirable to display the "post-reception display F1" that appears in . However, in this case, if the automatic button function is enabled for reception period F, unlike in the case of reception period E (reception sound E1 is not output audibly), reception sound F1 should be output audibly. is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the acceptance period ends without any acceptance, it is possible to indicate whether the acceptance period was in the acceptance period E or the acceptance period F. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In this case, even during the reception period F, the "integrated model image display IG" will be displayed as a model image display that simulates the operation button 410, and the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image display IG is as follows. It is desirable to prevent the display area from decreasing over time.

Also, in the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, although multiple types of sample image displays are displayed, there are multiple gauge images (predetermined images) GG used to indicate the remaining time. It is desirable that the image be associated with only one of the types of image display (integrated image display IG).

Also, during the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, as time passes during the reception period F, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed as shown in FIGS. 199(a) to (d). In addition, a portion of the operation button 410 that simulates the “operation receiving portion” (button sketch image BMG) is dynamically displayed as if it were performing “the movement when receiving the operation by the player,” In the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special imitation image TM", the part of the sword decoration 5001 that imitates the "operation receiving part" and the part of the special operation means 1410 that imitates the "operation receiving part" are dynamic. It is preferable that it is not displayed and is displayed statically.

In addition, during the acceptance period E and the acceptance period F, it is not necessary to display a simulated image display (special simulated image TM) that simulates the special operation means 1410, and the pachinko machine 1 may include the special operation means 1410 itself. You may choose not to have one.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception periods include "Reception period A or Reception period B or Reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 10-A")" and "Reception period E ("Reception period E (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 10-A")" We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including ``A'' (corresponding to the second acceptance period of ``A''). Then, during the reception period A (or reception period B, D), a specific image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is displayed as the image display that simulates the operation receiving part, and during the reception period E, A plurality of sample image displays (here, an integrated sample image display IG, a sword decoration image SYG, and a special sample image TM) are displayed as sample image displays imitating the operation receiving part, and the sample image display can be changed by the player's operation. It is designed to be able to be executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable.

In this regard, in the example of production described above, when the sample image display is executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the operation by the player" (for example, during the reception period A, B, E), and cases (for example, acceptance period E) in which the dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the player's operation are not executed. In other words, in this case, not only is it easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation to perform even though the simulated image display is being displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed by the player? Since there may be cases where it is difficult to recognize the player, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained until the player's operation is accepted.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, a plurality of operation receiving parts including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are prepared, and in reception period A (or reception periods B and D), a replica of the sword decoration 5001 is prepared. The image display (sword decoration image SYG) is not performed, and a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) that simulates the operation button 410 is performed, and at this time, the simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 is not operated by the player. This is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement of the operation button 410 when it is made movable.

On the other hand, in the reception period E, at least both the simulated image display imitating the operation button 410 (integrated simulated image display IG) and the simulated image display imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) are displayed. , one of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the integrated model image display IG) depicts the movement when one of the operation receiving parts is made movable by the player's operation. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the operation receiving part of the other of the integrated image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the sword decoration image SYG) is movable by the player's operation. This prevents it from being executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when a sample image is displayed, there are cases in which it is executed as a dynamic display and cases in which it is not executed as such a dynamic display, so that it is possible to achieve various effects. It has become possible to realize this, and it is expected that it will improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, during the reception period E, no operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the sample image display on which the dynamic display is performed (here, the integrated sample image display IG). When this is accepted, the first display change (post-reception display E1) can be generated using this as a trigger, and corresponds to the replica image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed. When an operation is performed on the operation receiving part (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation is accepted, this can be used as an opportunity to generate a second display change (post-acceptance display E2). In other words, in this case, regardless of whether or not dynamic display is being performed, a post-reception display corresponding to the type of side where the reception was made will appear, so the sample image of the side where dynamic display is not performed will be displayed. It becomes possible to give "implications in terms of production" to the display. For example, even if an operation is performed on the operation receiving part (here, the sword decoration object 5001) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed, , it is now possible to create surprises when a display change occurs due to this.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, a plurality of operation receiving parts including the operation button 410 and the special operation means 1410 are prepared, and in the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), the special operation means 1410 is imitated. The image display (special image TM) is not performed, but a simulated image display (integrated image display IG) that simulates the operation button 410 is performed, and at this time, the simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 is not operated by the player. This is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement of the operation button 410 when it is made movable.

On the other hand, during the reception period E, at least both the simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 (integrated simulated image display IG) and the simulated image display that simulates the special operation means 1410 (special simulated image TM) are displayed. , one of the integrated model image display IG and the special model image TM (in this case, the integrated model image display IG) depicts the movement when one of the operation receiving parts is made movable by the player's operation. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the operation receiving part of the other of the integrated sample image display IG and the special sample image TM (here, the special sample image TM) is movable by the player's operation. This prevents it from being executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when a sample image is displayed, there are cases in which it is executed as a dynamic display and cases in which it is not executed as such a dynamic display, so that it is possible to achieve various effects. It has become possible to realize this, and it is expected that it will improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, during the reception period E, no operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the sample image display on which the dynamic display is performed (here, the integrated sample image display IG). When this occurs, the first display change (post-reception display E1) can be generated, and the operation receiving part (here, the special sample image TM) corresponding to the sample image display on the side where dynamic display is not performed Here, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410), no display change (post-acceptance display) is caused by this operation. In other words, in this case, even if a sample image display (here, a special sample image TM) is displayed within the acceptance period, it will not necessarily be accepted when the corresponding operation receiving section (special operation means 1410) is operated. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained during the reception period.

In this case, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 during the reception period A (or reception period B, D) in which the special sample image TM is not displayed, the display change (display after reception) is triggered by this operation. This will not occur. However, during the reception period A (or reception period B, D) in which the special sample image TM is not displayed, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410, a display change (post-reception display) occurs due to this operation. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, the effectiveness of the operation cannot be determined only by the presence or absence of the sample image display, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special model image TM are displayed as still images. However, regarding the sword decoration image SYG and the special sketch image TM, the operation receiving part (in the case of the sword decoration image SYG, it is the sword decoration body 5001, and in the case of the special sketch image TM, the special operation means 1410) is activated by the player's operation. It is sufficient that it is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiver is made movable; for example, it may be a movement (such as rotation) that is different from the movement when the operation receiver is made movable by the player's operation. For example, it may be executed as a dynamic display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation receivers) including the operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation means (specific operation receiver) of "Configuration 11-A") are prepared. The reception period includes reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 11-A"), and reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 11-A"). We have multiple reception periods available. Then, during the reception period A (or reception period B), a map image display (button map image BMG) imitating the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button map image BMG are displayed. , ``remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which acceptance of operations on the operation button 41 is permitted'' is performed by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG over time.

On the other hand, during the reception period E, a button drawing image BMG (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed, but the button drawing image BMG (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed. The remaining time specifying display indicating the remaining time for which operation on the button 41 is permitted is not performed.

According to such a configuration, even if the button pattern image BMG (integrated image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is displayed, the operation button 410 is displayed by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG over time. Since the "remaining time specific display" indicating the remaining time during which the reception of operations on the button 41 is allowed is not necessarily performed, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs. become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, a button drawing image BMG (integrated drawing image display IG) which imitates the operation button 410 and a different operation means (sword ornament 5001) are imitated. Even though the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the remaining time display (the above-mentioned remaining time specific display) that suggests (describes) how much time is left for the reception period E is not displayed. ing. That is, in this case, in the acceptance period E, although both the acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of operations on a different operation means (sword ornament 5001) are allowed, the above-mentioned " This means that the "remaining time specific display" will not be performed. As a result, the player is not worried about the fact that both the acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of operations on the sword ornament 5001 are allowed, and when the acceptance period E is occurring. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even in a situation where the remaining time display that suggests (describes) how much time is left for the reception period E (remaining time specific display mentioned above), the remaining time for the reception period E is not displayed. Needless to say, it is decreasing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period E, the button drawing image BMG that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that partitions the display area of the gauge image GG. It is said that However, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a way that its display area is maintained without decreasing its display area over time. In other words, in this case, even though the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at all, the remaining time as the acceptance period E is reduced, so there is a situation where a large amount of the display area of the gauge image GG remains. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of tension when they are in a situation. The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until the remaining time of the acceptance period E reaches "0" and the gauge image GG is no longer displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the reception period E, only the button drawing image BMG, which imitates the operation button 410, and the sword decoration image SYG, which imitates the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed. It is displayed as an image integrated with a specific image (gauge image GG) used for time display. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the gauge image GG also corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and whether or not the operation reception for the sword decoration object 5001 is enabled or not). This allows you to maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, even during the above-mentioned acceptance period F, only the button drawing image BMG of the button drawing image BMG that imitates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that imitates the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed as the remaining time. It is desirable to display the image as an integrated image with the specific image (gauge image GG) used.

In addition, a reception period G related to the post-reception display G can be generated, and during the reception period G, the sword decoration image SYG replicating the sword decoration object 5001 is not displayed, and the button design image BMG replicating the operation button 410 is integrated as described above. Make it displayed as a sample image display IG. However, during reception period G, unlike reception period A and reception period B, the gauge image GG in the integrated image display IG does not reduce its display area over time and maintains its display area. Make it visible in the form. According to such a configuration, even if a reception period occurs in which only the button drawing image BMG (integrated drawing image display IG) is displayed as a drawing image display, the gauge image GG does not necessarily occupy its display area. Since this prevents the number from decreasing, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension during the reception period.

In the above-mentioned production example, during reception periods E, F, and G, the integrated simulated image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as a simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410, and the gauge By not reducing the display area of the image GG, it is made difficult to recognize the remaining time of the acceptance periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, in the reception periods E, F, and G, unlike in the case of reception period A, reception period B, etc. (integrated image display IG), the image display that simulates the operation button 410 is displayed as a "gauge". The remaining time may not be displayed by displaying the image as "an image that does not include image GG". That is, in this case, the gauge image GG is not displayed at any position within the display area during the acceptance periods E, F, and G.

Note that when displaying a simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 as an "image that does not include a gauge image GG," the "image that does not include a gauge image GG" is a "button simulated display that is included in the integrated simulated image display IG." It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image including at least "image BMG". That is, in this case, when the button drawing image BMG is displayed, there are both cases where it is displayed as an image integrated with the gauge image GG and cases where it is displayed as an image that is not integrated with the gauge image GG. , it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

Further, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least the following operation means are prepared as operation means.
- A handle part 5012 that is displaced when operated by the player (corresponding to the first operation receiving part of "Configuration 12-A"), and a handle part 5012 that is provided around the periphery and does not displace even when operated by the player. A sword decoration body 5001 (corresponding to the first operating means of “Configuration 12-A”) having a sheath portion 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration portion of “Configuration 12-A”) (see FIG. 124 etc.), and An operation button 410 that is displaced when operated by a player (corresponding to the second operation receiving part of "Configuration 12-A"), and a frame provided around the periphery that does not displace even when the operation button 410 is operated. A production operation unit 400 (corresponding to the second operation means of "Configuration 12-A") having a unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decoration part of "Configuration 12-A") (see FIG. 44, etc.).

When displaying the sword decoration image SYG that is a replica of the sword decoration body 5001, a hilt replica image that is a replica of the hilt 5012 (corresponding to the first receiving part replica image of "Configuration 12-A") and the hilt A handle peripheral decoration image (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration image of "Configuration 12-A") that decorates the periphery of the simulated image can be displayed (see FIG. 199, etc.), and the simulated effect operation unit 400 can be displayed. When displaying an image display (here, integrated model image display IG), a button model image BMG (corresponding to the second receiver part model image of "Configuration 12-A") which is a model of the operation button 410, and the button model image A peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the image BMG can be displayed (see FIG. 199, etc.), and the handle peripheral decoration image and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as different images.

According to such a configuration, since the peripheral decoration images are different from each other, even if the appearance of the operation means itself is similar, it is different when displaying the sword decoration image SYG and when displaying the integrated image display IG. It is now possible to make the appearance significantly different depending on the display, and it is expected that it will be easier to distinguish which operating means should be operated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the handle peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG does not include a part that imitates a decoration part that does not exist in the pachinko machine 1, and is used as an image display that imitates the sheath part 5020. However, the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed as an image that includes at least a portion that simulates a decorative part that does not exist in the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this case, when the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed, it becomes possible to suitably make the user recognize that the situation where the opportunity to operate the sword decoration object 5001 is given is given. On the other hand, when the "integrated image display IG" is displayed, a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the performance operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is provided as a situation with higher performance. You will be able to do this. In this case, the "performance operation unit 400" is provided as a member having a larger operation receiving part (operation button 410) than the "sword decoration body 5001", and other decorative parts that do not exist in the pachinko machine 1 are used. It is desirable to prevent it from becoming difficult to recognize which operating means to operate even if the peripheral decoration image SSG including at least a portion imitating the above is displayed.

In this way, in order to provide a situation where an operation opportunity is given to the performance operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a "situation with higher performance", the peripheral decoration image SSG is It is desirable that the image be displayed as an imitation of a fictitious decorative part that does not exist in the machine 1. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is given an opportunity to operate, a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG should include a portion that imitates the frame unit 415. may be included.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the remaining time is displayed only in the periphery decoration image SSG of the hilt peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG and the periphery decoration image SSG in the integrated model image display IG. As described above, the display area is divided into sections, and the remaining time can be displayed using the display area.

Note that the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an image display in which a hilt replica image that imitates the hilt part 5012 and a hilt peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the hilt replica image are integrated. ``Integrated image display IG'' is an image display in which a button image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button image BMG are displayed as an integrated image display. . In this respect, the "sword decoration image SYG" does not have separate "handle pattern image" and "handle peripheral decoration image" as its image data, but as one integrated image data. It will be provided. Similarly, the image data of the "integrated map image display IG" does not have the "button map image BMG" and "peripheral decoration image SSG" separately, but is prepared as one integrated image data. It has become something that will be done.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation reception part of "Configuration 13-A"), the handle part 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 (" A plurality of operation receivers are prepared, including an operation receiver of the special operation means 1410 (corresponding to the second operation receiver of "Configuration 13-A") and an operation receiver of the special operation means 1410 (corresponding to the third operation receiver of "Configuration 13-A"). We have prepared multiple types of acceptance periods, including acceptance period E (corresponding to the specific acceptance period of "Configuration 13-A"). Then, during the reception period E (FIG. 198), the "integrated model image display IG (inner button model image BMG)" that simulates the operation button 410, and the "sword decoration image SYG (inner hilt Both the "peripheral decoration image)" and the "special imitation image TM" imitating the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410 are displayed, and when an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation receiving parts is accepted, Among the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM", the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" imitate the operation receiving part that is not accepted. (See FIG. 198).

According to the above configuration, a simulated image display (sword decoration image SYG, special model image TM) will be hidden, so the operation receiving part (hilt 5012 of sword decoration 5001, special operation) where the model image display is displayed but does not accept operations. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not further operation is required for the operation receiving portion of the means 1410.

In addition, during the reception period E, although the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, the special operation Among the means 1410, the special operation means 1410 is configured so that acceptance of operation (acceptance regarding display after acceptance) is not enabled (not permitted). That is, as described above, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is generated, and when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the second display is generated. Although a change (post-acceptance display E2) is generated, no operation is accepted on the special operation means 1410, and no display change occurs in response to the operation. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably maintain performance and tension until the operation by the player is accepted during the reception period E.

In addition, during the reception period E, when an operation on the sword decoration object 5001 is accepted, a second display change (post-reception display E2) is generated. Neither the "decoration image SYG" nor the "special copy image TM" are hidden, and their display state continues (FIG. 198(i)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a display change that is significantly different from that when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In particular, in the reception period E, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted, this is used as an opportunity to increase the remaining time of the reception period E (Fig. 198 (i) → ( Progressing to (e)), in realizing performance that requires further operations, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest due to insufficient remaining time.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, a first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is generated; In the state where E1) is occurring, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" are both hidden (Fig. 198 ( f)). As a result, even after an operation is accepted while a plurality of sample images are being displayed, it is recognized that the post-acceptance display E1 is generated due to acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410. You will be able to do this.

In addition, at this time, since the "integrated image display IG" is displayed in a different position from the position displayed during the reception period E (Fig. 198(f)), the "integrated image display IG" is displayed in a different position from the position displayed during the reception period E (Fig. You will be able to suggest that you are in a certain state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, when the remaining time runs out during the reception period E, the automatic button function described above is enabled, and if an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period E. The same display screen as (see FIG. 198(h)) appears. In this case as well, while the first display change (post-reception display E1) is occurring, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" are displayed. Since both are hidden, it becomes possible to recognize that the reception display E1 corresponds to the operation button 410.

In addition, in the reception period D shown in FIG. 196, when hiding the text information (please press), the display state of the sample image display was maintained (FIG. 196(e)); may also be hidden at the same time as the text information is hidden. In this case, when the text information (please press) is returned to the display state, the sample image display is also returned to the display state (FIG. 196(f)).

[Operation reception performance characterized by the state of the image display]
As explained using FIG. 118 as an example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) that are prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a production judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.) regarding which of the expected productions (preliminary presentation etc.) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and the motion of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is rewarded with a jackpot game and a high reward. Transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these performances.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), a reception permission state (validity period) in which production reception is permitted can occur.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). ), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) in which presentation acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is performed as a performance (post-reception performance).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed, and the actions (operations) by the player are accepted within the acceptance period. Then, a display change (post-reception effect) is caused depending on the type of reception period that has occurred.

Furthermore, during the acceptance period, an action target display indicating which "target of the player's action" is to be displayed can be displayed. Such an action object display can be displayed, for example, as a model image display in which an object (operating means) that is the object of an action by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this performance example is displayed as a "simulation image display" that imitates the object of the player's action and has a plurality of aspects with different expectations.

Furthermore, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which actions (operations) by the player are allowed to be accepted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be performed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this production example, multiple aspects (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image decreases, the level of expectation, and the type of operation means) are used as aspects of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. It is intended to be implemented in one of these ways.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. Regardless of which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) at a predetermined timing are not included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). However, it is desirable (though not necessarily required) to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate).

By the way, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period), the acceptance of display changes on the effect display device 1600 is allowed. Since the post-operation display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect movement by the movable decorative body, etc. are only generated. The performance itself is poor, and there is concern that interest in the game will decline due to the application period.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the "operation (movement) by the player" to be detected refers to the "operation (movement) by the player" such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword ornament 5001". It is not limited to things that are directly manipulated (pressing motions or sword drawing motions), but also "touch motions by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "in a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes ``actions by the player in the game''. In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operating means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effect is provided regarding the state of the sample image display when giving the player an operation opportunity (movement opportunity). I have to. Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to suppress the decrease in It is also possible to adopt the configurations described as "preferred applications" as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decline in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an action object display (for example, a simulated image display that imitates the object of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed. We have decided to provide multiple acceptance periods, including a specific acceptance period in which "determination of acceptance validity in which a player's action is considered a valid action" is permitted. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to the configuration 1-B is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good. However, during such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize when a valid reception judgment is allowed, or even whether a reception validity judgment is already allowed. There are concerns that only players who are sensitive to presentation can enjoy the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a specific acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the acceptance validity determination is in an acceptable state or that the acceptance validity determination is in an acceptable state is emitted. Since it is possible to output the motion target display (for example, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's motion and has multiple aspects with different expectations), Although there are still situations in which it is not possible to fully recognize the object of the player's action, there are situations in which the player is required to make some kind of action (a situation where the player is given an opportunity to perform an action). It is now possible to recognize certain things, and as a result, many players are expected to enjoy the performance.

Note that the acceptance permissible sound is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may be one that occurs before the specific acceptance period and ends before the specific acceptance period, or may be generated at the timing of occurrence of the specific acceptance period. It may be output so as to straddle the specific acceptance period, or it may be generated after the specific acceptance period and ended within the specific acceptance period. The acceptance permission sound may be any sound that, when output, always gives (or has been given) some action opportunity to the player. Furthermore, the "state in which the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 1-B, but also applies to other configurations in which the "action target display (sample image display)" is not displayed. It suffices as long as it is not visible on the screen. For example, the meaning includes a state where an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the acceptance permission sound that is output when the specific acceptance period occurs is also a sound that is output (as the admission permission sound) when other reception periods occur. For example, if the reception permission sound is output even when a reception period occurs in which the same operation opportunity (operation opportunity) as the specific reception period occurs, the operation target display (for example, a sample image display) is displayed. It is now possible to suitably suggest which operation opportunities (operation opportunities) are (are being) given to the player, even if they are not. For example, if the reception permission sound is output even when a reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) that is different from the specific reception period occurs, the operation target display (for example, a sample image display) ) is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given. It becomes possible to suggest that the person is in a state of

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 1-B", when the specific reception period occurs, first the operation target display (for example, the sample image display) is hidden (not displayed) in the first display. Allow the state to appear. After that, while the specific reception period continues, a second display state in which an operation target display (for example, a sample image display) is displayed may appear. That is, in this case, during the specific acceptance period, the button will initially appear as a so-called "hidden button", and only players who are sensitive to such effects can enjoy it. However, the operation target display (for example, a sample image display) must be displayed while the specific reception period continues (before the set time (valid time) has expired). Therefore, many players will be able to notice this (specific reception period) and enjoy the performance even if they are not sensitive to the performance. In addition, through this kind of performance, it is expected that children will develop the ability to see when so-called ``hidden buttons'' are occurring.

Further, in this case, it is desirable that the action target display can be displayed at one of a plurality of different expectation levels in the second display state. That is, on the player's side, if an action is accepted in the second display state even though the action was not accepted in the first display state, the action target display (for example, a sample image display) is displayed. It is feared that players will find out that they were not aware that the specific reception period had occurred until the end of the game, and that their insensitivity to such effects will be exposed, leading to a decline in interest in the game. In this regard, in the second display state, if the action target display is displayed at one of a plurality of different expectation levels, the player side will be able to accept the action in the second display state. I was aware that I was in a state where action acceptance was allowed from the time I was in the display state, but I wanted to see the level of expectation suggested by the action object display (for example, a sample image display), so in the first display state I It is now possible to make it appear as if the player did not intentionally accept the action, and it is expected that this will suitably suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, due to its nature as a so-called "hidden button," it is difficult for players to accurately recognize when a specific reception period has occurred during which "determination of acceptance validity in which the player's action is considered a valid action" has occurred. It is difficult. In this case, if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the specific reception period occurs, the "reception validity judgment" will not be made, and the message "I thought the specified reception period had occurred, but I was mistaken. There is a concern that the player may misunderstand that the player has received a request, and that the specific acceptance period may end without any action (operation) being performed by the player. Therefore, when adopting "Configuration 1-B", even if there is an action (operation) by the player before the specified reception period, the action (operation) will be judged as "valid reception" at that point. However, after the start of a specific acceptance period, a ``reception validity determination'' that targets (based on) actions (operations) by a player performed before the specified acceptance period. It is desirable to be able to do so. According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the specific acceptance period, it will be possible to accept it after the occurrence of the specific acceptance period. In turn, it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance using this as an opportunity. However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player depends on whether or not a reception period has occurred during which "determination of reception validity in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed. Therefore, it is necessary to ensure that it is carried out regardless of the situation.

In addition, in this case, for an action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the specific reception period, that action (operation) is displayed in the first display state instead of in the second display state after the occurrence of the specific reception period. It is desirable to enable reception (reception validity determination) in the status. According to such a configuration, the timing when a little time has passed since the player performed an action (operation) (for example, the timing when the first display state (specific acceptance period) occurs), and the action target display (For example, a sample image display) is determined to be valid for reception, and as a result, execution of the post-reception performance is started. As a result, the state in which the player's action is properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" that occurs when there is no action (operation) even though the action target display (for example, a sample image display) is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that there is something in the game, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

[Configuration 2-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first reception period, regardless of when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, the action object is displayed (here, the action object is displayed in imitation of the player's action). In the second reception period, the action target display (here, a sample image display having multiple aspects with different expectations) is always displayed, regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. A simulated image display that imitates the object of the player's action and has a plurality of aspects with different expectations is always prevented from being displayed. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of reception periods with completely different effects, it is possible to give variety to the process of requesting actions from players (providing operation opportunities). It is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 2-B", a third reception period will be further provided, and during the third reception period, actions (operations) by the player will be considered valid actions (valid operations). Depending on the timing at which the acceptance validity determination is made, the operation object display (sample image display) may be displayed or the operation object display (sample image display) may not be displayed. Note that the "third acceptance period" related to the configuration 2-B is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different reception period, or a reception period different from those reception periods. It may also mean.

According to such a configuration, it appears as if the "first reception period" in which the operation target display (sample image display) is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. It is now possible to make it appear as if there is a "second reception period" in which the operation target display (sample image display) is not always displayed, regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. By creating such a sense of uncertainty, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

[Configuration 3-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, one of the multiple modes with different expectations 1. It is possible to execute the production after reception, and if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the second reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. The second reception performance can be performed in any of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 3-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, whether the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period or the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, the reception validity determination is performed, at least one of the display target areas (specific areas) of the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations). Since the extinguishing EF effect can be performed by using the EF function, it is easy to recognize that the acceptance validity judgment has been made properly (the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). You will be able to do this.

Note that the extinction EF effect is displayed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the action target display (sample image display); It does not necessarily have to be displayed. In addition, the disappearing EF effect includes, for example, the above-mentioned "aspect in which the sample image display becomes difficult to see," and in this case, at least a part of the specific area where the action target display (the sample image display) is displayed. A mode in which a disappearing effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including , and an effect using a display element located at a position that overlaps in front view with at least a part of a specific area in which an action target display (mock image display) is displayed is performed. In addition to the mode in which the operation target display (sample image display) itself is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to visually recognize (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transmittance setting, etc.) It may be an aspect.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting "Configuration 3-B", at what timing in the first reception period is a determination that the reception is valid for determining that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation)? Depending on the operation target display (sample image display), there may be cases where the action object display (sample image display) is displayed, and there may be cases where the action object display (sample image display) is not displayed.

In this case, first, when the reception is determined to be valid while the action target display (sample image display) is being displayed, this will be used as a trigger for the specific area where the action target display (sample image display) will be displayed. The extinction EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the area. On the other hand, even if reception is determined to be valid under a situation where the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to perform the extinction EF effect under the above-mentioned situation (action target display). It is desirable to execute the process in the same manner as when the reception is determined to be valid (in a situation where is displayed). According to such a configuration, even in a situation where the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception validity determination is secretly made. . In addition, if the reception is determined to be valid in a situation where the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the action target display being displayed, and the disappearing EF effect is executed using at least a part of the area in which the operation target display was scheduled to be displayed.

At this time, during the second reception period, the operation object display (sample image display) is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity judgment is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). It is desirable to make it visible. By preparing such a "second reception period in which the action target display (sample image display) is always displayed" separately from the first reception period described above, it is possible to create a configuration in which the extinction EF effect is executed. In combination, it becomes possible to provide a performance that gives a sense of security, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), the operation target display (here, the operation by the player) A model image display that imitates a target and has multiple aspects with different expectations) can be displayed using at least a specific area, and the player's actions can be performed effectively while the model image display is being displayed. When the "reception validity determination" is made, it is possible to hide the operation object display (sample image display) based on the reception validity determination. In addition, if "reception validity judgment" is made while the operation target display (sample image display) is being displayed during the reception period, the operation target display (sample image display) will be hidden until the operation target display (sample image display) is displayed. An extinction EF effect can be executed using at least a part of the specific area.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. During the specific acceptance period, games played in a state where the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) are not displayed. It is possible to make a "reception validity determination" in which a motion by a user is considered a valid motion, and when the reception validity determination is made, the disappearing EF effect is not executed. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to Configuration 4-B is only a name used to explain the technical idea of Configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). It is now expected that the tension created during the specific reception period, in which players are secretly asked to perform actions (and secretly provided with operation opportunities), will be maintained even after the reception has been determined to be valid. Become.

Note that even if the extinction EF effect is displayed, the action target display (sample image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed at that time. In addition, the term "disappearance EF effect" includes, for example, the above-mentioned "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to see"; in this case, at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (the model image display) is displayed. A mode in which a disappearing effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including a ``disappearance effect display'', and an effect using a display element located at a position overlapping in front view with at least a part of a specific area in which an action target display (mock image display) is displayed is performed. In addition to the mode in which the operation target display (sample image display) itself is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to visually recognize (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transmittance setting, etc.) It may be an aspect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 4-B" is adopted, the "specific reception period" may be set as the first reception period. Then, as the reception period, we prepare a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period. It may also be possible to determine whether the reception is valid or not, in which an operation performed by the player in a state where the image display (image display) is not displayed is considered to be a valid operation. Then, during the first reception period, if it is determined that the reception is valid and that an action performed by the player while the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed is made as a valid action, the above-mentioned extinction EF effect will not be executed. First, in the second reception period, if the reception is determined to be valid in that an action performed by the player in a state where the action target display is not displayed is made as a valid action, even if the above-mentioned extinction EF effect is executed. good. In this case, the "first acceptance period" and the "second acceptance period" are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period are valid until the player performs an operation in a state where the operation target display (sample image display) is not displayed. It is difficult to recognize which one has occurred, but after the reception was determined to be valid with this as a valid operation, it is difficult to recognize which one has occurred: the first reception period (specific reception period) or the second reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize this, it becomes possible to prompt the player to make a move.

[Configuration 5-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 5-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

Then, if a "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the first reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is made. At the time when execution starts, the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not hidden but is displayed. In some cases, if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the second reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) ) is started, the action object display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the object of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not hidden but is displayed. I try not to let it happen.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the action object display (here, multiple forms that imitate the object of the player's action and have different expectations) (a model image display having a pattern) is visible, and an action target display (here, a model image display having multiple aspects that imitate the object of the player's movement and have different expectations) is visible. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 5-B", within the first reception period, depending on when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, If the operation target display (sample image display) is not hidden but is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is started; It is desirable that the operation object display (sample image display) is sometimes in a hidden state.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the sample image is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can certainly be said that it is preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception effect has started, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when the sample image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. If this message continues to be displayed even after the game is played, a decline in interest in the game is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), within its validity period (first reception period), the sample image display is "first mode with low expectations" and "first mode with low expectations". No matter which one of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (or even a possibility that it will be executed in a less expected mode). Then, when the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game interest by this alone, in this case If the sample image display continues to be displayed in the ``first mode with low expectations'', it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so it is desirable to hide the sample image display. I can say that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the sample image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" at this time. If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suppress the decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations, so it is possible to hide the display of the simulated image. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without having to do so.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that when the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations," It seems that there are some people who would like to keep the sample image display in a state where it is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance production is started as an excuse. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players feel "frustrated" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "second mode with low expectations." In order to suppress this, some people may wish to hide the image display so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can check whether the sample image is displayed through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It will be possible to practically select whether to start executing the post-reception performance while it is displayed, or to start executing the post-reception performance when the sample image display is hidden and cannot be seen. Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming.

[Configuration 6-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 6-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

Then, if a "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the first reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is made. At the time when execution starts, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes, and the expected (with multiple modes with different degrees) may not be hidden but may remain displayed, and the "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the second reception period. In this case, at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) based on the reception validity determination starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, the display of the gauge image displayed within the frame image) A depiction in which the area decreases over time, and at least one of the frame image and gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations) is not hidden but is displayed. I try not to let that happen.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" starts, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is decreased as time passes). In some cases, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the remaining time is displayed in the frame image). A depiction in which the display area of the displayed gauge image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared for at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) are not made visible. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 6-B", within the first reception period, depending on when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, At the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not hidden but is displayed. It is desirable that the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) be hidden in some cases and in other cases in which the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden.

That is, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance (first It is certainly preferable to continue displaying the post-reception performance (corresponding to the reception period) even after the start of execution, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the performance (performance) has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is "first mode with low expectation" and " Even if it is displayed in the "second mode with low expectations", there is a possibility that it will be executed in the mode with high expectations (and even more, there is a possibility that it will be executed in the mode with low expectations). It has become. Then, when the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game interest by this alone, in this case If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so the frame image and the gauge image are It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the frame image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations". If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations." A person who wants to keep the frame image and gauge image in a state where they are not hidden and continue to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production is started, as an "excuse" in case of a problem. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may think that the presentation after reception is the "second mode with low expectations." In order to reduce frustration when it is executed with ``, I would like to hide the frame image and gauge image so that they cannot be seen at the time when the execution after reception starts. It seems that there are people.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can use the frame image and gauge You can essentially choose whether to start executing the post-reception performance while the image is displayed, or to start executing the post-reception performance when the frame image and gauge image are hidden and cannot be seen. Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 7-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, one of the multiple modes with different expectations 1. It is possible to execute the production after reception, and if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the second reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. The second reception performance can be performed in any of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period, the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts. At the time when the player is playing, the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the player's action target and has multiple aspects with different expectations) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. be. On the other hand, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) starts to be executed. , so that the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed and is not in a hidden state. There is.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the action target display (sample image display) is visible, and the action target display (sample image display) is visible. ) may not be visible, so it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Also, as will be described later, in the case where "Configuration 7-B" is adopted, "a reception validity determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. , the operation target display (sample image display) is hidden and is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. However, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" after the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives, the action target display (sample image display) is displayed. It is desirable that the execution of the performance after reception is started while the application is in progress.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the sample image is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can certainly be said that it is preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception effect has started, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when the sample image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. If this message continues to be displayed even after the game is played, a decline in interest in the game is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception presentation (the post-reception presentation corresponding to the first reception period), within its validity period (first reception period), the sample image display is “low expectations first mode” and “low expectations first mode”. No matter which one of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (or even a possibility that it will be executed in a less expected mode). Then, when the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though it is possible to improve the game interest with this alone, in this case, If the simulated image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so it is desirable to hide the simulated image display. I can say that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, the sample image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suppress the drop in gaming interest due to the post-reception performance being performed in a manner with low expectations, so it is possible to hide the display of the simulated image. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without having to do so.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that when the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations," It seems that there are some people who would like to keep the sample image display in a state where it is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance production is started as an excuse. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players feel "frustrated" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "second mode with low expectations." In order to suppress this, some people may wish to hide the image display so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can "enable the player's operation" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If the "reception validity determination for operation" is made, it is possible to start execution of the post-reception performance in a state where the sample image display is hidden and cannot be seen, and the predetermined reception period within the first reception period can be started. If the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made until the timing arrives, at that point, the post-reception performance will start to be executed while the sample image display is not being displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the user will be manipulated, anyone who seeks such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

[Configuration 8-B]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the first reception period, based on the reception validity determination, one of the multiple modes with different expectations 1. It is possible to execute the production after reception, and if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the second reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. The second reception performance can be performed in any of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" concerning the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, if a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. At the time when the remaining time is displayed (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is (for which multiple different modes are available) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. On the other hand, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) starts to be executed. , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations) (prepared items) are not displayed and are not in a hidden state.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible. images and gauge images) may not be made visible, so it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension after the reception performance starts.

Also, as will be described later, in the case where "Configuration 8-B" is adopted, "a reception validity determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. , the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden and displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. However, if "the reception is determined to be valid and the player's action is a valid action" after the predetermined timing within the first reception period has arrived, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) It is desirable that execution of the post-reception effect be started while the screen is in the displayed state.

That is, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance (first It is certainly preferable to continue displaying the post-reception performance (corresponding to the reception period) even after the start of execution, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the performance (performance) has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is "first mode with low expectation" and " Even if it is displayed in the "second mode with low expectations", there is a possibility that it will be executed in the mode with high expectations (and even more, there is a possibility that it will be executed in the mode with low expectations). It has become. Then, when the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game interest by this alone, in this case If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so the frame image and the gauge image are It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the frame image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations". If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations." A person who wants to keep the frame image and gauge image in a state where they are not hidden and continue to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production starts as an "excuse" in case of a problem. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may think that the presentation after reception is the "second mode with low expectations." In order to reduce frustration when it is executed with ``, I would like to hide the frame image and gauge image so that they cannot be seen at the time when the execution after reception starts. It seems that there are people.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can "enable the player's operation" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If the "reception validity determination for operation" is made, it is possible to start execution of the post-reception performance while the frame image and gauge image are hidden and cannot be seen, and within the first reception period. If the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made until the predetermined timing arrives, at that point, if the frame image and gauge image are not displayed, Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the performance will start, anyone who seeks such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

[Configuration 9-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), the operation target display (here, the operation by the player) It is possible to use at least a specific area to display a mock image display that imitates a target and has a plurality of modes with different expectations. During the reception period, if a "reception validity determination" is made that determines the player's action as a valid action, based on the reception validity determination, it is possible to execute a post-reception performance according to the type of the reception period. be done. Further, even at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance performance is started, the action target display (sample image display) may remain displayed without being hidden.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period. In both cases where the "determination of validity of reception" is made within the first reception period and the case where the "determination of validity of reception" is made within the second reception period, the "determination of validity of reception" has been made. Based on this, it is possible to perform the extinction EF effect using at least a part of the specific area. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 9-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, a state in which the acceptance validity determination has been properly made under the action acceptance conditions suggested by the sample image display (a state in which the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the player's action) is reached. You will be able to easily recognize what has happened.

Note that the disappearing EF effect includes, for example, the above-mentioned "mode in which the action target display (sample image display) becomes difficult to visually recognize", and in this case, the specific A manner in which a disappearing effect display is displayed in a predetermined area that includes at least a part of the area, or a display element that is located at a position that overlaps in front view with at least a part of a specific area in which an action target display (mock image display) is displayed is used. In addition to the manner in which the displayed effect is executed, the display of the operation target (sample image display) itself may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to recognize (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transmittance setting, etc.) ) may be displayed.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 9-B", during the first reception period, depending on when the "reception validity determination" is made, which determines that the player's action is a valid action, the first reception period If the action target display (sample image display) is not hidden but is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance corresponding to one reception period starts, or if the action target display (sample image display) is not displayed. It may be arranged such that there are times when the object is not visible (a state where it cannot be visually recognized).

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the sample image is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can certainly be said that it is preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception effect has started, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when the sample image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. If this message continues to be displayed even after the game is played, a decline in interest in the game is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period), within its validity period (first reception period), the sample image display is "first mode with low expectations" and "first mode with low expectations". No matter which one of the two modes is displayed, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (or even a possibility that it will be executed in a less expected mode). Then, when the post-reception performance (the post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a manner with high expectations, even though it is possible to improve the game interest by this alone, in this case If the sample image display continues to be displayed in the ``first mode with low expectations'', it is clear that the interest in the game will decrease, so it is desirable to hide the sample image display. I can say that. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, the sample image will be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" at this time. If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suppress the decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations, so it is possible to hide the display of the simulated image. It can be said that it is desirable to continue this without having to do so.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may think that when the post-reception performance is executed in the "first mode with low expectations," It seems that there are some people who would like to keep the sample image display in a state where it is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance production is started as an excuse. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players feel "frustrated" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "second mode with low expectations." In order to suppress this, some people may wish to hide the image display so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can check whether the sample image is displayed through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It will be possible to practically select whether to start executing the post-reception performance while it is displayed, or to start executing the post-reception performance when the sample image display is hidden and cannot be seen. Therefore, it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 9-B", during the second reception period, regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made, which determines that the player's action is a valid action, The action target display (sample image display) may be always displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period is started.

According to such a configuration, it is not always possible to select whether or not to display the action target display (sample image display) at the time when the execution of the production is started after reception. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension within the period.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptance state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a sample image display related to the reception target (such as a sample image of the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display, the interest in the game is reduced until the display (display change) after reception is executed. I'm trying to suppress it. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. .

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the image is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible state (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception has become permissible or that the operation reception is permissible. A reception acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform the operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). This is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible state (reception period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. In other words, the acceptance acceptance state classified into the first type is a state that can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). This is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific condition (specific high expected fluctuation pattern selection) in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state refers to the valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice judgment) that can occur regardless of whether the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. period of validity, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first type and second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, the first type of reception permissible state (reception period) and the second type of reception permissible state (reception period) are both receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs as a permissible state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" displayed during these acceptance periods is an image imitating the same operating means (operation button 410).

Note that among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). In the second type of reception permissible state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). (This configuration is not required). In this case, in the first type acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether the "display" should be displayed, and the "integrated image display" will be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (c)) not including the special mode is selected as the "integrated image". A determination may be made as to whether to display the image, and the "integrated image display" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do.

First, concrete examples of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 4-B" will be described. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). Here, the multiple reception periods (reception performances) include at least the 1B reception period (1B post-reception performance), the 2B reception period (2B post-reception performance), and the 3B reception period (3B post-reception performance). We have it ready.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 200 to 215. Regarding each reception period described above with reference to FIG. It may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1B reception period (performance after 1B reception), 2B reception period (performance after 2B reception), and 3B reception period (performance after 2B reception). (3B Post-reception performance). Furthermore, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 199. You may choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 200 to 202 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 1B is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 1B reception period (1B reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 209 and 210 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1st B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 1B variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1B variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1B variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 209(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "1st B fluctuation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 200(a), when the timing tQ2 arrives at which the 1B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 1B is satisfied) , generates the above-mentioned 1B reception period (valid period) in which "reception regarding production after 1B reception" is permitted ("situation shown in FIGS. 209(b) and 209(c)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 1B reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 1B post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception validity determination). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has the ability to control the reception target (operation receiving section) in connection with the occurrence of such a 1B reception period. Display of operation target (sample image display) suggesting the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period, etc.), Remaining time display (reducing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes) (description), extinction-related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display (extinction EF effect), 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the level of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) are being carried out respectively. As described above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that includes a remaining time display (a depiction of decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). Although the images are displayed as an "integrated image display", they are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the first B reception period occurs at timing tQ2, as shown in FIG. 200(b) and FIGS. 1 performance device), "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated map image display IG. The integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) may appear at the timing tQ2, or may appear before the timing tQ2 and straddle the timing tQ2. It may be displayed in In addition, the integrated image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted (determined as valid for reception) within the 1B reception period, or when the acceptance (determined as valid for reception) is made. It will be hidden when the 1B reception period ends without any notice. The 1B reception period according to this example ends when timing tQ3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 200(a)).

Furthermore, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is in one of multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) and 144(d)). Figure 209(b) shows the case where the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(a). 209(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(d). In addition, even during the 1B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and 144(c). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 200 assumes that when the relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B reception period arrives, "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation". There is. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 200(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tQ2a (the reception was determined to be valid), the 1B reception period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started.

In addition, the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1) to FIG. 210(h1))" is a post-reception performance (first B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2) to FIG. 210(h2)" This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period. Regarding the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing), It may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. Not only is the "sample image display IG" not hidden, but also the integrated replica image display IG is not made difficult to view.

That is, the 1B post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "1B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance display using a second performance device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable This will be realized as a combination of at least the "1st B post-reception specific production" using the 3rd production device (speaker) and the 1B post-reception production sound using the 3rd production device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three performance devices), but among these performance devices, there is a performance in which an integrated model image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing at which the "first post-reception effect display" as the 1B post-reception effect is started is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the ``integrated image display IG'' will be maintained even after the application is accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 210 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 144 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. It becomes like this.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that the

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 200(b) and FIG. 210(e1) or (e2), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tQ2a at which the 1B reception period ended due to the acceptance of the player's action, (When timing tQ2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tQ2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. Since it becomes possible to do this, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 210 (d1) to (h1)) appear as the corresponding post-reception performances (1B post-reception performances), and modes with high expectations (Fig. 210 (d1) to (h1)). 210 (d2) to (h2)) appear, different modes of extinction-related display (first extinction-related display SKB1, second extinction-related display SKB2) appear. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 210(e1) and (e2), the situation is such that "1B effect display after reception" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the extinction-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is “first extinction-related display SKB1” or “second extinction-related display SKB2”, check whether it is displayed as “first extinction-related display SKB1” or “second extinction-related display SKB2”. This makes it possible to estimate whether the "1B post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly anticipated manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 200(b), FIG. When the timing tQ2c arrives during the period during which the mode in which the behavior of The execution of "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, in this case, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 209(b) to "E1 (Fig. 210(d1) to (h1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 210( f1), the first aspect (here, the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character) is the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. In the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2) to (h2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high for the post-reception effect), FIG. 210(f2) ), the second mode (here, the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2 as a cut-in performance by a samurai character) is displayed as the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 ( "1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1" or "1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 1B reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-performance (1B post-reception performance display UGB1) without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.Also, Since the effect display UGB1 starts after the 1B reception while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 1B reception period has already ended, and the target of the player's attention is It is expected that the "integrated image display IG" will automatically transition to "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)". (after timing tQ2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "Integrated image display IG" and The "integrated image display IG" is displayed preferentially over the "post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)". As a result, even if the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated sample image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 200(b), FIG. 210(g1) or (g2), the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1) -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 200(b), FIG. "Display SKB1 or 2nd disappearance related display SKB2" will be hidden, and as a result, even though visibility is considered good, "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B Post-Reception Production Display UGB1-2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or the 1B post-reception performance display UGB1) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UGB1-2). Therefore, the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production examples (FIGS. 209 and 210) corresponding to the 1B reception period, when the reception is made within the 1B reception period and the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" is executed, the "1B The background image is switched before and after the "post-reception performance display UGB1" is started.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 210(d) and 210(e) where the background image is not switched (timings tQ2a to tQ2b shown in FIG. 200), the effect display device 1600 (the second Even if there is a change in performance in the 1st performance device), the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" can indicate that the situation has not started yet.

In addition, in this production example, the "1B post-reception production display UGB1" and "background change" are changed to the timing when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed ( Although it was decided to start displaying at a later time (timing tQ2c) than timing tQ2b), the timing when "extinction related display (first extinction related display SKB1, second extinction related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed (timing tQ2b) The display may be started at the same time as (timing tQ2b).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 210, as a post-reception effect, the same background image can be switched when a mode with a low level of expectation appears and when a mode with a high level of expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether an aspect with a low level of expectation appears or an aspect with a high degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 200), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tQ2c) of the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tQ2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when an action by a player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 200(b) and 200(c), Start execution of the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tQ2a when the reception is received in the 1B reception period, but only a part of the 1B post-reception performance (the 1B post-reception performance display) is delayed. The 1B post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tQ2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1) to (h1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 210(d1) As shown in , the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1 (first reception As the 1B post-reception specific performance UTB1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific performance UTB1), it precedes the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1) using the first performance device. It will now start running. On the other hand, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. d2), the manner in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1 (second presentation device) corresponding to the 1B reception period. As the 1B post-reception specific production UTB1-2), which is a highly anticipated form of the 1B post-reception specific production UTB1), the 1B post-reception production using the above-mentioned first production device (1B post-reception production display UGB1-2) Execution is started prior to.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 209, apart from the "integrated image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the 1B reception period is also applied to the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device). A presentation within the reception period that suggests that the situation has occurred is executed (FIGS. 209(b) and 209(c)). The presentation within the acceptance period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is performed in a manner in which the “integrated image display IG” on the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has low expectations (see FIG. 209(b)). ) and in a highly anticipated manner (see FIG. 209(c)) are displayed in the same manner.

That is, in this case, when it is within the 1B acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and The same aspect will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1B reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the "integrated image display IG ” continues to be displayed (while the level of expectation as a performance after reception is not yet indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested by which of "Specific production after reception UTB1-1" and "Specific production after reception UTB1-2" appears as the specific production UTB1 after reception of 1B. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1. For example, the 1B post-reception specific performance UTB1 is provided with only "1B post-reception specific performance UTB1-2", and the expectation level (jackpot It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of results obtained. In other words, in this case, when the "1st B post-reception specific performance UTB1-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when the "1st B post-reception specific performance UTB1-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the 1B reception period occurs, the timing tQ1 shown in FIG. 200(d) In this step, the output of an acceptance permission sound is started. In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 1B reception period is audibly output across the timing tQ2 (corresponding to "situations shown in FIGS. 209(b) and (c)") when the 1B reception period occurs. The player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

Here, in the 1B reception period, the acceptance permissible sounds include a first long permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively long time, and a first short permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively short time. and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 200(d), the output of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started at timing tQ2 when the first B acceptance period occurs or after that time.

In the 1B reception period, if the player accepts an action while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the Thus, the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In this regard, when the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations, as shown in Fig. 200(d) (Fig. 209(b) )) and a case where the execution (audible output) is performed in a highly expected manner (the case shown in FIG. 209(c)). In other words, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are Once the application is confirmed as valid (judgment of validity), it will no longer be possible to confirm it, so there is tension over when to make the acceptance (judgment of validity of reception) within the acceptance period. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of well-being.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance permissible sound (first long permissible sound, first short permissible sound) is audibly output, the permissible permissible sound will be terminated midway. Not only that, but also, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 1B post-acceptance effect sound is started. The 1B post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, it is executed in a manner with a low degree of expectation (audible output), and it is performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation (audible output). output). In other words, in this case, during the 1B reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance in response to the reception. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance to be performed (the 1B post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1," such 1B post-reception performance sound includes "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display (extinction EF Even after the "effect" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 1B post-reception production sound, an example where the production progresses from Fig. 209(b) to "E1 (Fig. 210(d1) to (h1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 209(b) to "E2 (Fig. 210(d2) to (h2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound were respectively output as the permissible reception sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output. Only acceptable sounds may be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 1B reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third production device allows you to hear not only the 1B reception post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 209 (b) to "E2 (Fig. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the level of expectation) even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1B reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize what is in the program, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after receiving the reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 201 assumes a case where a "reception validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when the relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period arrives. are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 201(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tQ2A (the acceptance was determined to be valid), the 1B acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started.

In this regard, in the 1B reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at a relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period (even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is one), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (reception validity determination) was made at a relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B reception period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201(a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIG. 210(d1) to (h1))" (relatively 209 (b) to "E2 (Fig. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance). Basically, the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device perform the performance as described with reference to FIG. 200 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, in the situation shown in FIG. 210(d) etc., the gauge image is This means that the display area is further reduced. Furthermore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, as shown in FIG. 201(d), the reception (acceptance validity determination) is made while the first short permissible sound has already finished audible output. Therefore, the first short permissible sound will not be prematurely terminated (the audible output state will be prematurely terminated) due to the acceptance (acceptance validity determination).

In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, the time for displaying the "1B post-reception effect display" based on the reception (reception validity determination) is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. 200. This will result in a loss of performance. In other words, the "1B post-reception specific performance" and the "1B post-reception performance sound" are executed for a predetermined period of time (a certain amount of time) from the time the reception is received (reception validity determination). On the other hand, the "1B post-reception effect display" ends (is not displayed) when the predetermined timing tQ4 in the fluctuation pattern arrives, regardless of when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It has become something that According to such a configuration, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension regarding the timing within the acceptance period at which the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is to be made.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 202 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 202, after the first B reception period occurs, the timing tQ3 arrives without any movement (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tQ3 (the point in time when the first B acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer allowed), timing tQ2a and The effect display device 1600 (the first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 210(d3), not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the 1B reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integration will be performed within the 1B reception period after the end of the 1B reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Extinction EF effect) is now started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF effect)” is displayed. )" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1B reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the 1B reception period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 1B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "first extinction related display SKB1" is displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect). We are planning to do so. In other words, in this case, if the player's action (operation) had been accepted during the 1B reception period, it is expected that the player would sense the possibility that the performance after the 1B reception would have suggested that the level of expectation was low. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage people to feel glad that they did not perform the action (operation) during the 1B reception period, and the interest in the game decreases when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B reception period. It is expected that the government will suppress the

However, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, "Second extinction related display SKB2" may be displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), or " You may make it appear in an aspect different from both of the ``first extinction related display SKB1'' and the ``second extinction related display SKB2''.

Furthermore, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) will be displayed even if the action (operation) had been accepted. It may be executed in any manner in which it may appear. In other words, in this case, the case where "first extinction related display SKB1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 209 (b) to "E1 (Fig. 210 (d1) to (h1))" (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations was executed) becomes. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 210(e3), the case where "second disappearance related display SKB2" appears means that if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B reception period, then the situation shown in FIG. This means a case where the performance has progressed from b) to "E2 (Fig. 210 (d2) to (h2))" (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively high expectations has been executed). . In other words, in this case, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1B reception period, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the 1B reception period ends. Just by checking the mode of "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears, you can determine whether the 1B post-reception effect was executed in a manner with low expectations or in a manner with high expectations. Since it becomes possible to recognize this, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 210 (f3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the first disappearance related display SKB1)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 210 (g3), the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKB1 in the figure)" is hidden. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 144(a) (see FIG. 209(b)). (see FIG. 209(c)), and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(d) (see FIG. 209(c)), as described above. When the situation shown in FIG. 209(c) appears, it is different from the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is in the aspect as "Image)", but otherwise the production will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the effect progresses from Fig. 209(c) to "E1'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 209(b) to "E1 (Fig. 210(d1) to (h1))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 209(c) to "E2'", the contents and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 209(b) to "E2 (Fig. 210(d2) to (h2))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 209(c) to "E3'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 209(b) to "E3 (Fig. 210(d3) to (g3))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only.

FIGS. 203 to 205 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 2B is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 2B reception period (2B reception performance) occurs. . FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a fluctuating pattern in which a 2B reception period (2B reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable variable and non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the second B fluctuation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2B variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2B variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 211(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "2nd B fluctuation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 203(a), when the timing tR2 arrives at which the 2B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 2B is satisfied) , generates the 2nd B reception period (validity period) during which "reception regarding performance after 2B reception" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 2B reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 2B post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

However, in the 2B reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the 1B reception period occurs, the reception target (operation reception unit, etc.) is suggested in connection with the occurrence of the 2B reception period. The display of the operation target (sample image display), the remaining time display that indicates the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period) (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes), , No disappearance-related display (extinction EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is displayed.

More specifically, in the second B variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 203(b) and FIG. Timing tR2 arrives while the performance situation in which the gauge image)'') is not displayed is maintained, and the second B reception period occurs. Then, the second B acceptance period ends when timing tR3 arrives if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 203(a)).

This kind of 2B reception period is what is called a "hidden button", and from what timing is it possible to "determine whether the reception is valid in that the player's action is a valid action" (2B reception period)? 2B reception period has occurred), whether the "reception validity determination" is in an acceptable state (is the 2B reception period occurring? No operation-related information is provided, such as whether the ``reception validity determination'' will be disallowed (whether the 2B reception period has ended), etc. Therefore, it can be said that the second B reception period can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such effects.

FIG. 203 assumes that during such a 2B reception period, when a relatively early timing tR2a arrives, "a reception validity determination is made in which the player's action (operation) is a valid action". are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 203(a), the second B reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tR2a. At the same time, the execution of the post-reception performance (second B post-reception performance) corresponding to the second B reception period is started.

Note that the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second modes with relatively high expectations are executed, such as "Specific performance after reception of 2B," "performance sound after reception of 2B," etc.). As the 2B post-reception performance (“2B post-reception performance display”, “2B post-reception specific performance”, “2B post-reception performance sound”, etc.), the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, respectively. In this case, the illustration is omitted, and in reality, the production progresses from FIG. There are now cases where this happens. However, for such a 2B reception period, when the ``reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation'' is made, the 2B post-reception performance (``2B post-reception performance display'' or ``2B post-reception performance display'') 211(b) and (c)) are executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 211(b) and (c). It may also be realized as a type in which low-expectation modes such as post-performance display, 1B post-reception specific production, 1B post-reception production sound) are not prepared. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

Here, even in this production example (2nd B reception period), as shown in FIGS. At timing tR2a, which is the point in time when the post-reception performance was started, the "2B post-reception performance display UGB2 (group preview performance)" of the 2B post-reception performance is not executed, and the "2B post-reception specific performance" is not executed. ``UTB2-2'' and ``2nd B Post-Reception Performance Sound (Highly Expected Mode)'' are executed. According to such a configuration, the performance progresses in the same manner as in the case of the 1B post-reception performance, so that the above-mentioned effects can be obtained in the same manner.

However, in this production example (2nd B reception period), as shown in FIGS. 203 and 211(b), no matter which timing within the 2B reception period the reception is made (reception validity determination), The above-mentioned extinction related display (extinction EF effect) is never executed. In other words, in this case, in the 2B reception period, even if the player's action (operation) is accepted, it will be significantly delayed to notice this just by looking at the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). becomes. In this case, combined with the fact that the integrated sample image display IG ("sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed, the situation is such that the relevant 2B reception period has not occurred. This makes it appear as if the player is performing an action (operation) at the bottom, and in this respect, it can be said that the performance is realized with a high degree of difficulty in playing the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 203(b) and FIG. 211(c), when the timing tR2c, which is later than the timing tR2a, arrives, the player does not perform any action within the 2B acceptance period. In response to the reception, the first production device (production display device 1600) displays a "2B post-reception production display UGB2 (in the figure, a group preview production with ghost characters, which is a highly anticipated mode)" as a post-reception production on the first production device (production display device 1600). After receiving the second B, the performance display UGB2-2) is started. Then, the "2nd B post-reception effect display UGB2" started in this way is displayed for a predetermined period of time from the time the reception is made (reception validity determination), as shown in FIG. 203(b) and FIG. 211(d). It will be closed (hidden) after a certain period of time has passed.

Note that in the production example (FIG. 211) corresponding to the 2B reception period, unlike the case of the 1B reception period, the background image is switched when the "2B post reception production display UGB2" is executed. This also makes it difficult to recognize that the application was accepted.

Additionally, when a player's action is accepted within the 2B acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 203(b), (c) and 211(b), (c), the acceptance is Based on this, the 2B post-reception performance (2B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device precedes the 2B post-reception performance (2B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. and start execution.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. In the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 211(a) to FIG. 211(b) (when expectations are relatively high for the performance after reception), as shown in FIG. 211(b), the sub-liquid crystal The manner in which "ghost" is displayed in 1610 (second performance device) is a highly anticipated manner of the above-mentioned 2B post-reception specific performance UTB2 (2nd B post-reception specific performance UTB2) corresponding to the 2B reception period. As the 2B post-reception specific performance UTB2-2), execution is started prior to the 2B post-reception performance using the first performance device (2B post-reception performance display UGB2-2). As mentioned above, we will omit the explanation of the case where a mode with low expectations is executed as the 2B post-reception production, but "2B post-reception production display" and "2B post-reception specific production UTB2" are low expectation modes. This is basically the same as when it is executed in a high expectation mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 211(a), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) also does not execute the presentation within the reception period that indicates that the second B reception period has occurred.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker). However, when the 2B reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 211(d), the reception permission sound is not output, and this makes it difficult to determine when the 2B reception period will occur. I try to make it difficult to recognize.

Further, in the 1B acceptance period, when an acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 2B post-acceptance performance sound is started. The 2B post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the level of expectation. For example, it may be executed in a manner with a low level of expectation (audible output), and it may be executed in a manner with a high level of expectation (audible output). output).

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 2B reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third production device allows you to hear not only the 2B post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is something that is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2B post-reception performance is executed in a highly anticipated manner or in a less expected manner.

On the other hand, FIG. 204 assumes a case where a "reception validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when the relatively late timing tR2A within the 2B reception period arrives. are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 204(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tR2A (the acceptance was determined to be valid), the 2B acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (second B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2B reception period is started.

In this regard, in the 2B reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tR2A within the 2B reception period (reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is one), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (reception validity determination) was made at a relatively early timing tR2a within the second B reception period. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 204(a), when the performance progresses from FIG. ), and cases where illustrations are omitted (when expectations are relatively low for the performance after reception). Basically, in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device, The effect will be executed with the same content as described with reference to FIG. 203 and the like.

In particular, during the 2B reception period, unlike the 1B reception period, the "2B post-reception performance display" is similar to the "2B post-reception performance display" and "2B post-reception performance sound", etc. Since it is to be executed for a predetermined time (certain time) from the time when the reception is valid (judgment of reception validity), the aspect of the post-reception performance is also based on the timing when the reception is made (judgment of reception validity). It's the same regardless.

Note that "2B post-reception performance display", "2B post-reception specific performance", and "2B post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and are mutually exclusive. They do not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 205 and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 211(a) to FIG. This is based on the assumption that a valid judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 205, after the second B acceptance period occurs, the timing tR3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 2B reception period, as shown in 205 in the same figure, no performance related to the occurrence or termination will be executed.

According to such a configuration, since the player does not know that the 2B reception period has occurred or that he/she was unable to perform an action (operation), A decrease in interest in games is suppressed.

FIGS. 206 to 208 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 3B is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 3B reception period (3B reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 212 and 213 are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which a 3B reception period (3B reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "3rd B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as advance notice performance determination) corresponding to the 3B variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 3B variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3B variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 212(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "3rd B fluctuation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 206(a), when the timing tS2 arrives at which the 3B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 3B is satisfied) , generates the 3rd B reception period (validity period) during which "reception regarding performance after 3B reception" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 3B reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 3B post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception validity determination). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has the ability to control the reception target (operation receiving section) in connection with the occurrence of such a 3B reception period. Display of operation target (sample image display) suggesting the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period, etc.), Remaining time display (reducing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes) (description), extinction-related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display (extinction EF effect), 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the level of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) are being carried out respectively. As described above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that includes a remaining time display (a depiction of decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). Although the images are displayed as an "integrated image display", they are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

However, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)" This is a special production that combines both.

More specifically, during the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 208(b) and FIG. This occurs in a situation (timing tS2) in which the "and gauge image)") are not yet displayed. In other words, in this case, the player is secretly provided with an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), and a so-called "hidden button performance" is provided.

In this respect, the performance as the "hidden button performance" continues only until timing X when a predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 208(b) and the like. That is, when timing X within the 3B reception period arrives, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example displays "sample image display" and "remaining time display" as the integrated simulated image display IG. (Frame image and gauge image)" is displayed, and the player is given an opportunity to operate (opportunity to operate) while the integrated image display IG is being displayed. This will lead to a transition to . In addition, the integrated sample image display IG displayed in this way (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the 3B reception period, or when the reception (reception validity determination) ) is hidden when the 3B reception period ends without being done. The 3B reception period according to this example ends when timing tS3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 208(a), etc.).

According to such a 3B reception period, from the occurrence of the 3B reception period to the arrival of timing X, the integrated image display IG is in the "first display state" in which it is not displayed. The "performance as a so-called hidden button" that allows the reception of actions (operations) by the player is now provided, and from the above timing X until the end of the 3B reception period, the integrated simulation While in the "second display state" in which the image display IG is displayed, "performance as a so-called normal button" is provided in which actions (operations) by the player are allowed. As a result, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the effects of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)". It has come to be realized as a special performance that combines both sex and sex, and it is expected that this will improve the interest in gaming.

In addition, in the "second display state" of the 3B reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIG. 144(a) ), (c)), and in Fig. 212(b), the integrated image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed as shown in Fig. 144(a). 212(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c). This corresponds to the case where In addition, even during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (d). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 206 shows that during the 3B reception period, when the "first display state (for example, see FIG. 212(a))" appears (timing tS2a in the figure), "Game This assumes a case where a reception validity determination is made in which an action (operation) by a user is considered a valid action. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the 3B reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tS2a. At the same time, the execution of the post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started.

In addition, in the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F1 (FIGS. 213(d1) to 213(h1))", the above-mentioned "first display state" appears during the 3B reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed as the "3B post-reception performance" as a result of the "reception validity determination", and from FIG. 212(a) to "F2 (FIG. 213 (d2) to FIG. 213 (h2))" is an example where the "reception validity determination" is made while the "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period, and as a result, " This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as "3B post-reception performance". The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

Here, in this performance example, as shown in FIG. 206, at timing tS2a, which is the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the 3B post-reception performance is started in response to the reception), The ``integrated image display IG'', which had been hidden until then, can now be displayed.

In other words, if the player performs an action (operation) while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period (if a "reception validity determination" is made), the player An operation (operation) is performed without recognizing which form will appear as the simulated image display IG (the simulated image display, the frame image, or the gauge image). In this regard, by making it possible for the "integrated image display IG" that had been hidden until then to be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, the player can If the above-mentioned "second display state" is assumed to occur during the period, it becomes possible to recognize which mode has appeared as the "integrated image display IG".

That is, the 3B post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "3B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance display using a second performance device (for example, a sub-liquid crystal, a movable display device). This will be realized as a combination of at least the "Specific performance after reception of 3B" using the 3rd B reception performance (body, performance lamp, etc.) and the sound performance after reception of 3B using the 3rd performance device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three performance devices), but among these performance devices, there is a performance in which an integrated model image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing at which the "3rd reception effect display" as the 3B post-reception effect starts is delayed compared to other effect devices, and this The visibility of the ``integrated image display IG'' will be maintained even after the application is accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 213 (d1) or (d2), even after the reception is made in the above-mentioned "first display state" during the 3B reception period, the end of the reception period ends. 144 (a) to (d)) in which the integrated image display IG was scheduled to be displayed. , it is expected to suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, even though the reception has been made and the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) has already been executed, the integrated image display IG remains in the “second display state”. If it continues to be displayed in the same way as it was at a certain time, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation is such that an acceptance has been made. There are concerns that the

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 206(b) and FIG. 213(e1) or (e2), a predetermined period of time starts from the timing tS2a when the 3B reception period ends due to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player. When time has elapsed (timing tS2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is displayed after the reception is made in the above-mentioned "first display state" during the 3B reception period, the corresponding By making the integrated image display IG difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed.

In addition, if the reception is made during the ``first display state'' that provides the performance as a ``so-called hidden button'' during the 3B reception period, either the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period Although it is difficult to recognize whether the application was accepted during the 3B reception period, the appearance of the "disappearance-related display (extinction EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2B reception period indicates that the reception was made during the 3B reception period. You will be able to recognize what is there.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 213 (d1) to (h1)) appear as effects after reception of 3B, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 213 (d2) to (h2)) appear. The extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is executed in the same manner regardless of the case in which the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1B reception period (where the mode of extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) differs depending on the level of expectation), after the reception is made within the 3B reception period, "extinction EF effect" is displayed. Since it is less important to pay close attention to the related display (disappearance EF effect), it is accepted during the above-mentioned ``first display state'' that provides the effect of a ``so-called hidden button'' during the 3B acceptance period. Even if the user accepts the request, the integrated image display IG can be watched properly after the request is accepted.

In addition, in the 3B reception period according to this production example, a post-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period is expected as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when a reception is made. ``Second disappearance related display SKB2'' that is displayed when executed in a highly sophisticated manner is used. In other words, in this case, during the 3B reception period, it becomes possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a manner with high expectations as long as the reception is completed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to aim for it.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period does not necessarily have to be "second extinction-related display SKB2." For example, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period is displayed when the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if you use the "first disappearance related display SKB1" that is displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the reception was made in the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period. It can be made difficult to recognize.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 206(b) and FIG. 213(f1) or (f2), the display related to the extinction related display (integrated image display IG is difficult to see When the timing tS2c arrives during the period during which the mode (a mode in which the behavior of The execution of "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (conversation preview)" as a performance is started. However, in this case, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 212(a) to "F1 (Fig. 213(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 213( f1), the first mode (here, the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1, which is a "silent" conversation preview) is displayed as the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 212(a) to "F2 (Fig. 213(d2) to (h2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 213(f2) As shown in , the second aspect (here, the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2, which is a conversation preview that mentions "chance") is displayed as the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. It is now possible to do so.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, "3B post-reception performance display UGB3" ("3B post-reception performance display "UGB3-1" or "3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 3B reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-performance (3B post-reception performance display UGB3) without a significant delay compared to other production devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.Also, Since the effect display UGB3 starts after the 3B reception while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 3B reception period has already ended, and the player's attention target is It is expected that the ``integrated image display IG'' will naturally transition to the ``3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)''. (after timing tS2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed When displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the The ``integrated image display IG'' is preferentially displayed over the ``post-reception performance display UGB3 (3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)''. As a result, even if the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated sample image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 206(b), FIG. 213(g1) or (g2), the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3) -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 206(b), FIG. Display SKB2)" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3)" will be hidden. -2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the reception of the action (operation) by the player (here, the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1). or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2). Therefore, the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production example (FIGS. 212 and 213) corresponding to the 3B reception period, even if the reception is made within the 3B reception period and the "3B post-reception production display UGB3" is executed, the "3B reception post-reception performance display UGB3" The background image is not switched before and after "3B reception effect display UGB3" is started. According to such a configuration, when compared with the above-mentioned 1B reception period, even if the reception is made in the above-mentioned "second display state", the 3B which also has the effect of acting as a "so-called hidden button" It becomes possible to indicate that the application has been accepted during the acceptance period. Also, when compared with the 2B reception period above, it appears that even though the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3 is being executed, the performance is progressing as a result of acceptance using the ``so-called hidden button.'' It is possible to show.

In this production example, the "3rd B post-reception production display UGB3" starts to be displayed at a later time (timing tS2c) than the timing (timing tS2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tS2b) as the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKB2)" (timing tS2b).

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 3B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 206), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tS2c) of the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tS2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when a player's action is accepted within the 3B acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 206(b) and 206(c), Start executing the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tS2a when the reception is received in the 3B reception period, but only a part of the 3B post-reception performance (the 3B post-reception performance display) is delayed. The 3B post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tS2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a movable effect body that can perform effect operations, or a It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 212(a) to "F1 (Fig. 213(d1) to (h1))" (in a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 213(d1) As shown in FIG. As the 3B post-reception specific performance UTB 3-1), which is a low-expected aspect of UTB 3, it is executed prior to the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display UGB 3-1) using the first performance device. It is about to start. On the other hand, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 212(a) to "F2 (Fig. 213(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 213( d2), the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) according to the above-mentioned 3B after-reception specific production UTB3 (after 3B reception) corresponding to the 3B reception period. As the 3B post-reception specific performance UTB3-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the specific performance UTB3, the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2) using the first performance device is preceded. The program will now start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 213, in the above-mentioned "first display state" during the 3B reception period, it is suggested that the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is also in a state where the 3B reception period has occurred. The effect within the reception period is not executed, and the above-mentioned "second display state" during the 3B reception period indicates that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is also in a state where the 3B reception period has occurred. The presentation within the reception period is now executed (FIGS. 212(b) and 212(c)). The presentation within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is performed in a manner in which the “integrated image display IG” on the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has low expectations (see FIG. 212(b)). ) and in a highly expected manner (see FIG. 212(c)) are displayed in the same manner.

In other words, in this case, when the player is in the "second display state" during the 3B acceptance period in which an action opportunity (operation opportunity) is given, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) Different modes will appear accordingly, and the same mode will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if a "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made during the above-mentioned "second display state" during the 3B reception period, the effect display device 1600 (the first While the display related to the "integrated image display IG" continues on the production device (while the display does not yet indicate the degree of expectation as a production after reception), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) Different aspects will appear depending on the level of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested by which of "3B specific production after reception UTB3-1" and "3B specific production after reception UTB3-2" appears as the 3B post-reception specific production UTB3. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the third B post-reception specific performance UTB3. For example, as the 3B post-reception specific performance UTB3, only "3B post-reception specific performance UTB3-2" is provided, and the expectation level (jackpot It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of results obtained. In other words, in this case, when the "3rd B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when the "3rd B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the third B reception period occurs, the timing tS1 shown in FIG. 206(d) In this step, the output of an acceptance permission sound is started. The reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3B reception period is in a form that straddles both the timing tS2 when the 3B reception period occurs and the timing X when the above-mentioned "first display state" shifts to the "second display state". The player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. However, the acceptance permissible sound may be audible as long as it is audibly output across timing X, and may not necessarily be audibly output as straddles timing tS2.

Here, in the 3B reception period, a third permissible sound that is different from both the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It becomes possible to suggest that a 3B reception period will occur (or is occurring), which has the effect of acting as a "so-called hidden button" instead of a period. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3B reception period may be executed using either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

During the 3B reception period, if the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the 3rd permissible sound) is audibly output, it is recognized that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the reception permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway), and as a result, it is not the 1B reception period mentioned above, but the 3B reception period that also has the effect of being a "so-called hidden button". It becomes possible to suggest that a period occurs (or is occurring). However, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 3B acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on acceptance.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 206(d), the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3B reception period (here, the third permissible sound) is executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations. It is desirable to have two cases: (the case shown in FIG. 212(b)) and a case where the execution (audible output) is performed in a highly expected manner (the case shown in FIG. 212(c)). In other words, in this case, although the acceptance acceptance sound indicates the level of expectation within the acceptance period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", it is confirmed once acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made. It is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained as to when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) will be made within the acceptance period. It becomes like this.

Also, during the 3B reception period, if a player accepts an action while the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output, not only will the acceptance permissible sound be terminated midway, but also the acceptance will be confirmed. Based on this, the audible output of the effect sound is started after receiving the third B. The 3B post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the level of expectation. For example, it may be executed in a manner with a low level of expectation (audible output), and it may be executed in a manner with a high level of expectation (audible output). output). In other words, in this case, during the 3B reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance in response to the reception. There will be no competition (overlapping) with the performance to be performed (3B post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3," such 3B post-reception performance sound includes "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display (extinction EF Even after the "effect" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 3B post-reception production sound, an example where the production progresses from Fig. 212(a) to "F1 (Fig. 213(d1) to (h1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 212(a) to "F2 (Fig. 213(d2) to (h2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 3B reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third production device allows you to hear not only the 3B post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 212(a) to "F1 (Fig. 213(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 212(a) to "F2 (Fig. 213(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such "reception sound" is accepted (determined as valid) in a reception period different from the 3B reception period (for example, the 1B reception period or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). (regardless of expectations), it will be output audibly. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize the content of the presentation, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after reception.

On the other hand, in FIG. 207, during the 3B acceptance period, the above-mentioned "second display state (for example, see FIGS. 212(b) and 212(c))" appears (in the figure, , timing tS2A), it is assumed that a "reception validity determination that an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 207(a), the 3B reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tS2A. At the same time, the execution of the post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started.

In this regard, in the 3B reception period, the reception (reception validity determination ) even if the above-mentioned "first display state (for example, see FIG. 212(a))" appears during the 3B reception period after the reception is made. The performance will proceed in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 207(a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 212(b) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1) to (h1))" (relatively 212 (b) to "F2 (Fig. 213 (d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance). Basically, the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device perform the performance as explained with reference to FIG. 206 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 207, in the situation shown in FIG. 213(d) etc., the gauge image is This means that the display area of is reduced.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the "3B post-reception performance display" is similar to the "3B post-reception specific performance" and "3B post-reception performance sound" from the time the reception is accepted (reception is determined to be valid). Since it is executed for a predetermined time (certain time), the aspect of the post-reception performance is also the same regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made.

Note that "3B post-reception performance display", "3B post-reception specific performance", and "3B post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and are mutually exclusive. They do not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 208 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 208, after the third B reception period occurs, the timing tS3 arrives without any movement (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tS3 (the point in time when the third B acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tS2a and The effect display device 1600 (the first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 213(d3), not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the 3rd B reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not accepted in time, the integration will be performed within the 3B reception period after the end of the 3B reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 213 (e3), the extinction-related display is (Extinction EF effect) is now started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF effect)” is displayed. )" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3B reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the third B acceptance period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 3B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B reception period, "Third extinction related display SKB3" is displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect). We are planning to do so.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKB3" not be displayed in connection with the 1B reception period. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 3B reception period, the performance during the 1B reception period (so-called normal button performance) during the 3B reception period This makes it possible to suggest that it was a combination of both the above-mentioned ``2nd B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)'' and the performance.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third disappearance related display SKB3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the 3B reception period has ended without any reception.

After this, as shown in FIG. 213 (f3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the third disappearance related display SKB3)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 213 (g3), the "disappearance related display (third disappearance related display SKB3 in the figure)" is hidden. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 3B reception period according to this example, when the above-mentioned "second display state" is reached, the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is shown in FIG. 144(a). As described above, the display may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c) (see FIG. 212(c)) instead of in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c) (see FIG. 212(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 212(c) appears, it is different from the case where the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is in the aspect as "Image)", but otherwise the production will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the effect progresses from Fig. 212(c) to "F1'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 212(b) to "F1 (Fig. 213(d1) to (h1))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 212(c) to "F2'", the contents and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 212(b) to "F2 (Fig. 213(d2) to (h2))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 213(c) to "F3'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 212(b) to "F3 (Fig. 210(d3) to (g3))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, which is provided with such a 1B reception period to a 3B reception period, excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are performed when an acceptance is received (a cut-in notice, a group notice, a conversation notice, etc. as a post-reception performance), and a notice performance (expectation level suggesting performance) We have prepared multiple reception periods (1B reception period to 3B reception period) with different types (types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of the type depending on the result of the judgment (direction judgment). It becomes.

In this regard, during the 1B reception period to 3B reception period, if a player's action is accepted, the performance display after reception will be displayed based on the acceptance (1B performance display after reception ~ 3B after reception). effect display) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Of these, during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, when a player's action is accepted, not only a post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also a ``disappearance related display''. We are trying to make more "extinction EF effects)" appear. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which mode appeared as the sample image display, but also to check whether the ``sample image'' is displayed before the sample image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility of the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in a manner that makes it difficult to see (disappearance-related display), the change from "sample image display" to "post-reception performance display" It is now expected that the player's gaze will shift naturally. Note that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" means that the same aspect can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which the content of the effect that is performed upon acceptance is different (Fig. 210 ( e2) and FIG. 213(e2), etc.).

However, since the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, the sample image display will continue even after acceptance has been made. If the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception performance display according to the reception is already displayed, and there is a concern that the game's interest will decrease. be. In this regard, when an application is received during either the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be changed to "sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Gauge image) is hidden (invisible) in a manner that makes it difficult to see (disappearance related display), while the post-reception performance display is ``display of sample image and remaining time display (frame image)''. , gauge image) is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, there is a situation in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). The transition from the pre-display (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception performance display) will be realized.

In addition, both the "mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on the reception. They have one thing in common. However, "a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is, for example, as shown in FIG. 210 (e1) and FIG. 210 (e2). , when a sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the screen appears to make it difficult to see the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is something that will be done. On the other hand, "post-reception performance display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 210 (f1) and FIG. 210 (f2), a sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in a situation where the time limit is displayed, it is displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, it was decided to start displaying the "post-reception effect display" when the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is being displayed. Regarding the "post-effect display", it does not necessarily have to start displaying when the sample image display is being displayed, but should start displaying after the sample image display is hidden. Good too.

In addition, regarding ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'', it should be noted that ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to visually recognize'' As a method for displaying the sample image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area where the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, In addition to the method of displaying a different image with priority (displaying on the front layer), there is also a method of displaying a sample image or remaining time by displaying an image different from the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method of displaying an image (video) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, instead of displaying a separate image from the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the On the other hand, regarding the ``post-reception presentation display'', there are methods to ``appear so as not to make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in such a way that the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method achieved by displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displayed on the rear layer), there is also a method that allows the sample image to be displayed at least while the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in areas other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed is referred to as a mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). A method of displaying an image display different from the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) on at least a part of the image display and the display of the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) themselves. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing numerical values related to characteristics (transmittance, etc.).

In addition, "a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" refers to the "reception-related display" that occurs before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in situations where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not displayed yet, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). '' could appear soon, and players should be mentally prepared in advance to change their focus from ``the hard-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. You will be able to encourage

In addition, if the application is accepted during the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period, the ``mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)'' will be changed to ``after reception. It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, "aspects in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" will be hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display" in a wider range, so we will aim to improve gaming interest by changing the performance during such a display period. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 210 and FIG. Regarding the mode (disappearance related display), not only the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the ``post-reception performance display'' is displayed at least in part of the area, but ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see'' (disappearance related display)", at least a part of the "post-reception effect display" is displayed so as to be difficult to visually recognize (for example, displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) makes it difficult to see not only the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the performance until the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" starts to be displayed. It is now expected to improve both gender and gender.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed after the reception is made and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. In addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), we also provide a specific effect after reception that does not make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in situations where they are not displayed (using the second effect effect). It is possible to appear after the reception. This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance in advance of this without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more effective than the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). The display is made to appear in a situation where the previous extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) continues until after the extinction related display (extinction EF performance) is ended.

According to such a configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance using the second performance device, which has a simpler performance. It is possible to improve the interest in gaming for various types of players.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the simulated image display will be dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. . In this case, it is preferable that the dynamic display of the simulated image is not terminated and continues even though the disappearance related display (extinction EF effect) has appeared since the acceptance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the extinction-related display (extinction EF production) is not only a display of a sample image, but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the images. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, based on the acceptance, the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3", but apart from the 3B post-reception performance display UGB3, the above-mentioned aspect (second extinction Related display SKB2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance related display SKB2 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third B post-reception effect displays will appear, but when the first disappearance related display SKB1 appears, It becomes possible to infer that the effect display UGB1 will appear after receiving the first B.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is displayed (priority display ). However, the performance using a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen must be performed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize this by

In addition, even if the same mode (second extinction related display SKB2) appears as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), if the type of acceptance period is different, the jackpot symbol will be stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable to have different proportions (expectations).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute a post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and the execution of the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is possible. During the period, on the first performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see. It is made so that it is difficult to visually recognize it.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started based on the reception, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared. Also, during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be made relatively difficult to see. By doing so, it is expected that the player's gaze will be naturally shifted from the "first presentation device" to the "second presentation device."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is the display of the sample image that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before the reception and the remaining time. Execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but when the second effect display device is used. The post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it a performance that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is something.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance production display was decided to start displaying after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). It may be started.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". We decided to realize this as an image display. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image in such a way that the area displayed in the "area where the sample image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Furthermore, as described above, the "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used in multiple modes (integrated image Display IGa to IGd). According to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode, including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., is maintained and continued even after acceptance. It is also possible to recognize how the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period.

However, in this case, if it is immediately after acceptance, the post-acceptance performance must be performed under these conditions (maintaining the display of the sample image and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). You won't get any more. That is, the range of performance is narrow, and only a limited performance (post-reception performance using only a performance device different from the first performance device) can be executed. However, if the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears after time has passed, after receiving the item under the condition that ``the visibility of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) may be deteriorated'', Since it is now possible to perform a performance, it becomes possible to execute the "post-reception performance display in the first performance device" under such conditions. By performing these two post-operation presentations with different characteristics (the post-reception specific presentation in the second presentation device and the post-reception presentation display on the first presentation device) in stages, it is possible to control the manner in which the sample image is displayed even after acceptance. While making it easy to confirm, it is also possible to suitably play a role as a post-operation effect.

As mentioned above, "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately. Only one of the gauge images) may be displayed.

Further, in the 1B acceptance period, the 2B acceptance period, and the 3B acceptance period, the target of the movement (operation) by the player does not necessarily have to be the same, and may require different movements from each other. However, if a different action is required, the action target display (sample image display) will also be displayed as a different display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "first method" allows "acceptance validity determination in which the player's action is a valid action" without displaying the sample image display (or remaining time display). We have decided to prepare a plurality of acceptance periods, including the 3B acceptance period (FIGS. 206 to 208) that has a "display state". In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3B reception period (first display state) occurs, it means that the reception validity determination is allowed, or that the reception validity determination is allowed. By making it possible to output an acceptance acceptance sound that suggests that a player is moving, a situation where the player cannot fully recognize the object of the action is caused by the fact that the sample image display is not displayed. However, it has become possible for players to recognize that they are in a situation where they are required to perform some action (a situation in which they are given an opportunity to perform an action), and as a result, many players are People are expected to enjoy the performance. As a result, even though it is a reception period in which a simulated image display is not displayed and "reception validity judgment in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed, unlike the case of the 2B reception period, the so-called hidden button Even players who are insensitive to presentation can enjoy the game. However, the acceptance permission sound may not be output when the third B acceptance period occurs. In addition, "a state in which the sample image display (or remaining time display) is not displayed" means a state in which the sample image display (or remaining time display) is not visible on the display screen. good. For example, the meaning includes a state where an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer. Furthermore, "sample image display (or remaining time display)" here means an image that is displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d). are doing. Therefore, as long as it is not possible to determine which of these modes is being displayed, it can be said that the sample image display (or remaining time display) is not being displayed (or vice versa). For example, if it is possible to determine in which of these modes the image is being displayed, even if it is not displayed in a manner that is easy to see, it can be determined that the "sample image display (or remaining time display) is being displayed." ).

In addition, the acceptance permissible sound that is output when the 3B reception period occurs is realized as the "3rd permissible sound", but it is also output (as the reception permissible sound) when other reception periods occur. It is desirable that the sound be For example, if the acceptance permission sound is also output when an acceptance period occurs in which the same operation opportunity (for example, pressing operation on the operation button 410) as in the 3B acceptance period occurs, the sample image display is displayed. It is now possible to suitably suggest which operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is (has been) given to the player, even if it is not. Further, for example, if the reception permission sound is output when a reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity (for example, sheathing the sword ornament 5001) that is different from the 3B reception period occurs, While the sample image display is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given. It becomes possible to suggest that the person is in a state of

Furthermore, in the 3B reception period according to the above production example, as shown in FIG. 208 and the like, a "first display state" in which the simulated image display is not displayed first appears. Thereafter, while the third B acceptance period continues, a "second display state" in which a sample image display is displayed appears. That is, in this case, during the 3B reception period, the button will initially appear as a so-called "hidden button", and only players who are sensitive to such effects can enjoy it. However, since the sample image display is displayed while the 3B reception period continues (before the set time (valid time) has expired), it is difficult to be sensitive to the effects. Even without this, many players will be able to notice this (3rd B reception period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, through this kind of performance, it is expected that children will develop the ability to see when so-called ``hidden buttons'' are occurring.

At this time, in the "second display state", as shown in FIGS. 212(b) and 212(c), the sample image can be displayed in one of a plurality of different expectation levels (modes). This is desirable. In other words, on the player's side, if an action is accepted in the "second display state" even though the action was not accepted in the "first display state", the time until the sample image display is displayed is It is feared that the player's failure to recognize that the 3B reception period had occurred will become known to those around him, and that his insensitivity to such effects will be exposed, leading to a decline in interest in the game. In this regard, if the sample image is displayed in one of a plurality of different expectation levels (aspects) in the "second display state", the player can operate in the "second display state". Even if the reception is accepted, "I was aware that the acceptance of the operation was allowed from the time I was in the first display state, but I wanted to see the level of expectation suggested by the sample image display, so in the first display state It is now possible to make it appear as if the player did not intentionally accept the action, and it is expected that this will suitably suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the 3B reception period (first display state), due to its nature as a so-called "hidden button", the 3B reception is allowed to "determine whether the player's action is valid for reception" at any time. It is difficult for the player to accurately recognize whether the period has occurred. In this case, if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the "reception validity determination" will not be made and the result will be "I thought the 3B reception period had occurred. There is a concern that the player may misunderstand that it was a misunderstanding, and that the 3B reception period may end without any action (operation) being performed by the player.

Therefore, in the 3B reception period, an action (operation) by the player is made before timing tS2 at which a state (3B reception period) in which "determination of reception validity in which the action by the player is a valid action" is allowed occurs (3B reception period). Even if there is, the action (operation) will not be considered as a "reception valid determination" at that time, but the 3B reception period will be determined at the start of the 3B reception period (or after that). It is desirable to be able to make the "reception validity determination" target (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the period.

However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not the corresponding 3B reception period has occurred, in which "determination of reception validity as a valid action by the player" is permitted. It will be necessary to implement it regardless of whether or not it occurs.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 206, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tS2, this will be detected. However, at the time when the player's action (operation) is detected, the 3B reception period has not yet occurred, so based on this detection, the "Reception that the player's action is a valid action" No "validity determination" is made. However, the existence of this detection information will be kept as a memory (history), and after the 3B reception period occurs, the detection information kept as the memory (history) during the 3B reception period will be updated. Based on this, a "determination as to whether the action by the player is valid for acceptance" is made. Then, the 3B post-reception effect is executed based on the thus obtained "reception validity determination."

According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it can be accepted within the 3B reception period, In turn, it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) using this as an opportunity. This makes it possible to reduce the level of difficulty in accepting operations even though the performance of a so-called "hidden button" (first display state) is achieved.

However, if it is operated (operated) significantly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period (more than a predetermined time), it may be possible to prevent the 3B post-reception performance from being executed using this as a trigger. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

Note that the configuration when operated (operated) slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period may or may not be applied in the same manner during the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period. You can do it like this.

In addition, at this time, for actions (operations) performed before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the actions (operations) are not changed to the above-mentioned "second display state" after the occurrence of the 3B reception period. It is desirable to enable reception (acceptance validity determination) in the above-mentioned "first display state" as a validity determination. According to such a configuration, the timing when a little time has passed since the action (operation) by the player is performed (for example, the timing when the first display state (third B reception period) occurs), and the sample image It is determined that the reception is valid even though the display is not displayed, and as a result, the execution of the post-reception performance is started. This suggests that the player's actions have been properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic reception function," which occurs when there is no action (operation) despite displaying a sample image display. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production examples (Fig. 206, Fig. 212, Fig. 213, etc.), there are two cases in which the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, and a case in which the reception in the 3B reception It was decided that the same mode would appear as the 3B post-reception effect corresponding to the reception in the case where the reception (reception validity determination) was made while in the "second display state" within the period (Figs. 212 and 212). 213, etc.). However, if the reception (reception valid determination) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, and if the reception (reception valid determination) is made while in the "second display state" within the 3B reception period. It is more desirable to make the presentation content different depending on the case where the judgment (determination) is made, in order to improve the presentation performance as a reception period that has a "first display state" and a "second display state". .

For example, in the above-mentioned production example (FIG. 206, FIG. 212, FIG. 213, etc.), even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, Same as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the "second display state" within the 3B reception period, after the reception (reception validity determination) is made, the (previously not displayed) ) The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is now displayed (from Fig. 212 (a) to "F1 (Fig. 213 (d1) to Fig. 213 ( h1)), or from FIG. 212(a) to F2 (FIG. 213(d2) to FIG. 213(h2)), etc.). However, instead of this, if a reception is made (judgment that reception is valid) while in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, this will be used as an opportunity after the reception (judgment that reception is valid) is made. It is desirable to prevent the integrated image display IG (image image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) from being displayed.

According to such a configuration, from the player's perspective, the game is accepted in the ``first display state,'' which is relatively difficult to accept due to the presentation of the ``so-called hidden button.'' It is now possible to show the people around you that you are in a successful situation (by progressing the production while the sample image display is not displayed) after the reception (reception validity judgment) is made, and the game You will be able to improve your interest.

However, in this case, regarding the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), even if the acceptance (acceptance valid judgment) is made during the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, the integrated replica image It is desirable that the display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) be displayed so that it can be visually recognized even when it is not displayed (while it cannot be visually recognized). In other words, if the reception (reception validity determination) is made while the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (while it cannot be seen), If the integrated image display IG is not displayed even after the reception is made, it is possible to determine whether the reception period occurred as the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period (first display state). This makes it difficult to distinguish whether or not the problem occurred as a result. In this regard, even if the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) is By making it appear in the same way as when it was accepted in "2 display state", the reception period in question occurred as the 3B reception period (first display state), not the 2B reception period. Be able to suggest things.

In an example employing these configurations, if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state (see FIG. 212(a))" within the 3B reception period, ) to (h1) or Figure 213 (d2) to (h2), etc., are displayed on the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). It will be carried out in the absence of In other words, if reception is determined to be valid in the first display state, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) remains not displayed in any of the multiple modes. If the execution of the post-reception effect is started and reception is determined to be valid in the second display state, multiple integrated sample image display IGs (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed. The execution of the post-reception performance will start in a state where the screen is displayed in any of the modes.

Or, in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period,
・Even if the reception is accepted (determined that the reception is valid), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed and the 3B reception will be completed. A first period (first state, first timing) in which the post-effect is executed;
・When the reception is accepted (determined that the reception is valid), after the reception is accepted (after the timing of the reception), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge) image)) is displayed, and a second period (second state, second timing) is further included in which the display of the integrated image display IG and the execution of the 3B post-reception effect are performed in parallel. You can also do this. For example, in the first display state, it is desirable that the first period (first state, first timing) occur first, and then the second period (second state, second timing) occur. According to such a configuration, since the presentation content differs depending on the timing in which the reception is made in the first display state, it is possible to improve the presentation performance as a reception period having the "first display state". People will now be expected to do more.

In addition, in the "first display state" of the 3B reception period, only at least one of the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing) is displayed. It may be included.

In the 3B reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, if the set time elapses without the player's action being accepted (FIG. 208(f)), it is the same as when the action is accepted within the 3B reception period. Prevented the post-reception effect from being executed (automatic reception effect functions). However, the 3B reception period may be generated as a target for automatic reception performance. In this case, automatic reception will not be performed in the first display state, but will be performed in the second display state. Further, the first reception period may be generated as a target for the automatic reception performance to function.

Further, in the 3B reception period, the timing at which automatic reception is performed may vary depending on the state of the performance (state that can be set by the player). However, regardless of when the automatic reception is performed, the same post-reception effect as when the automatic reception is performed in the above-mentioned "second display state" and the reception is performed within the relevant 3B reception period. It is desirable to start execution.

In addition, if the above-mentioned "second display state" occurs during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception period itself has already occurred before this, but the gauge image The display (the above-mentioned depiction of reducing the area) may be started from a state where the display area has reached its maximum value within the frame (it may also be started from a state where the area has already been reduced). According to such a configuration, even if the remaining time as the reception period is actually already decreasing, the area of the gauge image starts to be displayed from the maximum value, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. The decline will be suppressed. Further, it is also possible to make the reception period appear to be the above-mentioned 1B reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a 1B acceptance period and a 2B acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, during the 1B reception period, regardless of when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, the integrated model image display IG (remote image display, remaining time display (frame) images, gauge images)) are always displayed (see Figure 200, Figure 201, etc.), and during the 2B reception period, the integrated model image is displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always prevented from being displayed (see FIGS. 203, 204, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of reception periods with completely different effects, it becomes possible to give variety to the process of requesting actions from players (providing operation opportunities). It is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a 3B reception period, in which a reception validity determination is made in which a movement (operation) by a player is considered to be a valid movement (valid operation). Depending on when it is done, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may be displayed, or the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or , remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made. integrated sample image display IG (display of sample image, display of remaining time) It is now possible to make it appear as if the "2nd B reception period" is occurring, in which (frame image, gauge image)) is not always displayed, and through the production of such uncertainty, the reception period is It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when the situation occurs.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, as shown in FIGS. 209 and 212, the integrated image display IG (reference image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge It is desirable that images)) can be displayed. That is, in the 1B reception period according to the production example described above, the special aspect (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144(d) may be displayed, but this special aspect does not appear in the 3B reception period. It has become something that cannot be obtained. According to such a configuration, the integrated model image display IG (the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is in the form shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa). When displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period is occurring, and the integrated image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) )) is displayed in the special mode (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144(d), it can indicate that the 1B reception period is occurring.

In addition, during the 2B reception period, the acceptance permission sound is not output, and during the 3B reception period, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. It is desirable that the reception acceptance sound be outputted even if the reception is made without notice and the performance is executed after the reception. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest that the relevant acceptance period occurred as the third B acceptance period (first display state) rather than the second B acceptance period.

In addition, regarding the "reception sound" that is output in the same manner regardless of the manner (expectation level) of the post-reception performance, it is output during the 1B reception period and 3B reception period, and is not output during the 2B reception period. Good too. It is desirable that the same format be output as the "reception sound" in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period. However, such "reception sound" does not necessarily have to be output during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period.

Further, in the 1B acceptance period, it is desirable that an extinction EF effect (for example, the first extinction related display SKB1) that cannot appear in the 3B reception period can be displayed. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest that the 1B reception period is occurring instead of the 3B reception period through the type of extinction EF effect.

Further, in the 1B reception period, it is desirable that an extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction related display SKB2) that may appear in the 3B reception period can be displayed. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period has occurred.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the objects to which the operation opportunity is given (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be the same or may be different. Good too. However, if the object to which the action opportunity is given is different, the action object display (sample image display) will be displayed differently.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including a 1B reception period and a 3B reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid motion" is made within the 1B reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, one of the multiple modes with different expectations It is possible to execute the production after the 1B reception, and if a "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the 3B reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. The 3B post-reception performance can be performed in any of a plurality of different modes.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, in both cases where the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1B reception period and the case where the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3B reception period, the reception validity determination is Based on the fact that Since it is made executable, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the reception validity determination has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the reception of the operation by the player).

Also, as mentioned above, in the 3B reception period, at what timing (first display state, second display state, etc.) is a reception validity determination made that a player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation)? Depending on the case, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, and the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image) , gauge image)) may not be displayed in some cases. In this case, first of all, if the reception is determined to be valid under the situation where the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, use this as an opportunity to The extinction EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area in which the integrated image display IG (reference image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. On the other hand, even if the reception is determined to be valid in a situation where the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, this will be used as a trigger. Therefore, it is desirable to execute the extinction EF effect in the same manner as when the acceptance validity determination is made under the situation where the integrated image display IG is displayed. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where the integrated image display IG is not displayed, it is possible to suitably suggest that the acceptance validity determination has been made secretly. In addition, if the reception is determined to be valid in a situation where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the integrated model image display IG being displayed, and the extinguishment EF The effect will be performed using at least a part of the area where the integrated image display IG was scheduled to be displayed.

At this time, during the 1B reception period, the integrated image display IG is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity judgment is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). It is desirable that the By preparing the 1B reception period in which such an integrated image display IG is always displayed separately from the 3B reception period described above, in combination with the configuration in which the extinction EF effect is executed, peace of mind can be achieved. It becomes possible to provide a visually appealing performance, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the 1B reception period, if the corresponding post-reception performance is executed in a high expectation mode (FIG. 210 (f2) to (h2)), the specific mode (FIG. 210 (e2) to (g2)) appear, but when different from the high expectation mode, the specific mode (Fig. 210 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as an extinction EF effect and a mode different from this (Fig. 210 ( It is desirable that e1) to (g1)) appear or disappear EF effect itself does not appear. According to such a configuration, when the extinction EF effect is executed corresponding to the 3B reception period, it is possible to create an image as if a highly anticipated effect is being executed, thereby reducing the interest in the game. will be able to suppress.

In the 1B reception period, the acceptance permission sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the 3B reception period, the reception permission sound may be output in only "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the acceptance permission sound having the "first aspect" is output, the user is aware of the possibility that the 3B acceptance period, which has the effect of being a "so-called hidden button", is occurring. Since it becomes possible to make the user feel nervous, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the 1B reception period occurs. Further, in this case, it is desirable that the "first aspect" be output as the aspect with the lowest expectation level. In this case, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even in a situation where the acceptance acceptance sound is output in a manner with the lowest level of expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period may occur sequentially within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the 1B reception period occurs after the 3B reception period occurs. Further, in this case, a 1B reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the 2B reception period can occur between the occurrence of the 3B reception period and the occurrence of the 1B reception period.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the foreshadowing performance that is output when the 1B reception period occurs and the foreshadowing performance that is output when the 3B reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period will occur by the foreshadowing effect.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, as an extinction EF effect, a specific mode (for example, the second extinction related display SKB2) will appear if there is a reception, and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the third disappearance related display SKB2) will appear. It is desirable that the related display SKB3) appears or that no aspect appears at all. On the other hand, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when there is a reception appears as an extinction EF effect. That is, in the 3B reception period, which has both the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)", It can be said that forgetting to operate (the reception period ends without receiving any reception) is more likely to occur than in the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button presentation)". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 3B reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction related display SKB2) when the reception is made will not appear. It is now possible to appeal to players that they are in a situation where they have forgotten to perform an operation, and from now on, it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become. On the other hand, there are no elements that are likely to be forgotten during the 1B reception period. Despite this, if the action is not accepted, there is a possibility that the player intentionally made a gaming choice not to make the action. If you "advertise the fact that you are in a situation where you have forgotten to operate", the interest in the game may actually decrease. Therefore, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when there is reception appears as an extinction EF effect.

In particular, in the 1B reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the mode of the extinction EF production differs depending on the mode (expectation level) of the production after the 1B reception (see FIG. 210). Therefore, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, if the same appearance as when there was a reception is made to appear as the disappearing EF effect, after the 1B reception that appeared when there was a reception. It becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) related to the performance, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

In addition, during the second B reception period according to this embodiment, a player who plays while the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. It is possible to make a "reception validity determination" in which the operation is a valid operation, and when the reception validity determination is made, the disappearing EF effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). As a result, it is expected that the tension felt during the 2B reception period, in which players are secretly asked to perform actions (and secretly provided with operation opportunities), will be maintained even after the reception is determined to be valid. become.

In addition, in the above production example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in either the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period. It is possible to determine whether the reception is valid or not, in which an action performed by the player in the current state is considered to be a valid action. Then, during the 2B reception period, if it is determined that the reception is valid, and the operation performed by the player while the integrated image display IG) is not displayed is determined to be a valid operation, the extinction EF effect will not be executed. , during the 3B reception period, if the reception is determined to be valid, with an action performed by the player while the integrated image display IG is not being displayed as a valid action, the above-mentioned extinction EF effect will be executed. did.

According to such a configuration, until the player performs an action while the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, It is difficult to recognize whether the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period is occurring, but after the reception is determined to be valid with this as the valid operation, the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period are Since it becomes possible to recognize which one has occurred, it becomes possible to urge the player to take action.

Moreover, when the 4th B condition is satisfied, the 4th B reception period may be made possible to occur further. Even during this 4B reception period, actions performed by the player in a state where the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) are not displayed are considered valid actions. It is possible to determine whether reception is valid. During the 4th B reception period, the reception is valid for actions performed by the player when the integrated image display IG (reference image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. If the determination is made, the extinction EF effect is executed as in the case of the third B reception period. However, in the 4B reception period, the extinction EF effect is executed in different manners depending on the manner (expectation level) of the corresponding 4B post-reception effect. According to such a configuration, until the player performs an action while the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, It is difficult to recognize which of the 2B reception period, 3B reception period, and 4B reception period is occurring, but after the reception is determined to be valid, the 2B reception period and the 4B reception period are In addition to being able to recognize whether the 3B reception period or the 4th reception period occurred, it will also be possible to suggest the degree of expectation in the case of the 4th reception period. .

During the 1B reception period and 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed on the operation receiving section when the player's action is accepted. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display be executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the area reduction of the gauge image continue.

The above-mentioned production examples and other examples may be realized by transforming them into the following configurations, or the following configuration (reception period) may be changed to another reception period (another reception period) in which the type of production after reception is different. It may be further provided as an omen effect display). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period are at least the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period. We are prepared. Of these, during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the extinguishing EF effect can be executed based on the reception of the player's action (operation) (reception validity determination), and during the 2B reception period, As described above, even if the player's action (operation) is accepted (determined to be valid), the disappearing EF effect is not executed.

In this regard, if a player's action (operation) is accepted during the 1B reception period (reception valid determination), the 1B post-reception performance will be adjusted based on the reception (reception validity determination). The extinction EF effect can be executed in the same manner as when it is executed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) and when the 1B post-reception effect is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). You may also do so. When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 210, any of the modes (the modes shown in FIG. 210 (d1) to (h1), and the modes shown in FIG. 210 (d2) to ( Regardless of whether the mode shown in h2) appears, and whether or not the reception is made within the 1B reception period (the mode shown in FIG. 210 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF One predetermined aspect will always appear as a performance. In other words, the 1B reception period means that no matter when the reception is received (determined as valid reception) at any time within the period (and even if the reception is not received), the integrated The image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) continues to be displayed. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "In which form the integrated image display IG (image image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if even different information is provided by the extinction EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will become too complicated. In this regard, in such a 1B reception period, any mode (aspects shown in FIGS. 210(d1) to (h1), modes shown in FIGS. 210(d2) to (h2)) can be used as the 1B post-reception performance. Regardless of whether or not it appears, and whether or not it is accepted within the 1B reception period (aspects shown in FIGS. 210(d3) to (g3)), the disappearance EF effect is determined in advance. If one aspect always appears, the above-mentioned concerns can be resolved.

In addition, if a player's action (operation) is accepted during the 3B reception period (reception valid determination), the 3B post-reception performance will be adjusted based on the reception (reception valid determination). The extinguishing EF effect can be executed in different ways depending on whether it is executed in a manner with a low rate of appearance (proportion of jackpot symbols appearing) or in a manner where the 3B post-reception performance is executed with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). You can do it like this. The 3B reception period has the effect of using ``so-called hidden buttons'', and it can be said that it is positioned as a ``reception period with a high level of difficulty'', so even after the reception is completed, It is possible to obtain mutually different performance information from both the form of the fake image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the form of the extinction EF effect. It is desirable to provide a stimulus to the audience in terms of performance.

Note that when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 213, the disappearing EF effect that appears when no reception is made is the same as the disappearing EF effect that can appear when an acceptance is made. It is desirable to make it different from any of the plurality of aspects. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the reception has not been made, and the reception period is different from the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period". This makes it possible to suggest that it was a combination of both the production and performance of the period (so-called hidden button production).

In addition, as mentioned above, in another example for the 3B reception period, if the reception is made during the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (sample image display) is The image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed. In other words, in this case, information such as "In what form was the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) displayed" after the acceptance was made is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information based on the disappearing EF performance (expectation level information regarding the performance after reception) in order to improve the game's interest.

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 1B acceptance period (acceptance validity determination), the extinction EF effect will be executed in a different manner from the manner that appears when the acceptance is made. , or no aspect may appear. This makes it possible to recognize that the application was not received, and if the aspect cannot appear in the 3B reception period, the reception period is changed to the above-mentioned "1B reception period ( This makes it possible to suggest that the program did not have both the performance of the "so-called normal button performance" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2nd B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)".

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 3B acceptance period (determined as valid acceptance), the extinction EF effect will be executed in the same manner as it appears when the acceptance is accepted. You can. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made, so that it is possible to improve the performance as a "so-called hidden button".

Regarding these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of the configurations to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one configuration (modified example) may be applied to the above-mentioned presentation example or another example thereof.

Next, a case will be described in which some of the above-mentioned modifications are applied to the above-mentioned production example. That is, FIG. 214 is a modified example of "the effect that appears when an acceptance is made or not accepted in the 1B acceptance period" shown in FIG. 210, and FIG. 215 is a modification example of the effect shown in FIG. 213. This is a modified example of "effects that appear when an application is accepted or when an application is not accepted during the 3B reception period." In this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are "examples of effects related to the 1B reception period (Figs. 200 to 202, Fig. 209, and 210)" and ``examples of effects related to the 3B reception period (Figs. 206 to 206). 208, FIG. 212, FIG. 213)", and regarding each of the above-mentioned separate examples applicable to the "example of presentation related to the 1st B reception period" and the "example of presentation related to the 3rd B reception period". is similarly applicable.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 214, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted (reception valid determination) during the 1B reception period, the 1B post-reception performance is expected based on the reception (reception validity determination). When the performance is performed in a manner with a low degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 214 (d1) to (h1)), and in a manner with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 214 (d1) to (h1)), The extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner as when executed in FIGS. 214(d2) to (h2)). Here, the second extinction related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 214, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) during the 1B acceptance period (see FIG. 214 (d3) to (g3)), As the extinguishing EF performance, a mode that does not appear when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) is made to appear during the 1B acceptance period. Here, the third extinction related display SKB3 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 215, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted (reception valid determination) during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception is based on the reception (reception validity determination). When the post performance is executed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 215 (d1) to (h1)), and when the performance after 3B reception is executed with low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) The extinction EF effect is executed in a different manner depending on the case where it is executed in a manner with a high level of success (see FIG. 215 (d2 to (h2)).Here, the expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) When it is executed in a manner with a low level (see FIG. 215 (d1) to (h1)), the first extinction related display SKB1 is executed as an extinction EF effect, and it is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). (see FIG. 215 (d2 to (h2)), the second extinction related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

Furthermore, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period (see FIG. 215 (d3) to (g3)), As the extinction EF performance, the mode that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period appears. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 215(d3) to (g3), since the first extinction related display SKB1 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 3B reception period ( 215), it will be possible to recognize that the production progress shown in FIGS. 215(d1) to (h1) has occurred. On the other hand, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (determined as valid reception) during the 3B reception period, and the second extinction related display SKB2 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the 3B reception period Assuming that an action (operation) by the player is accepted (determined as valid acceptance) in , it becomes possible to recognize that the production progress shown in FIGS. 215 (d2) to (h2) has occurred. .

In the 1B reception period according to such a modification, as the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) that appears when the reception is made, the post-reception display (after 3B reception) corresponding to the 3B reception period according to the modification ``Second disappearance related display SKB2'' that is displayed when the performance) is executed in a highly anticipated manner is used. That is, in this case, in the 1B reception period according to the modified example, it is possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner as long as the reception is completed, and the game You will be able to improve your interest.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be "second extinction-related display SKB2." For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period according to the modified example, the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if the "first extinction related display SKB1" that is displayed when the modification is used, is the application received during the 1B reception period according to the modification, or is the 3B reception period according to the modification It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the reception is in a state during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modification, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "3rd extinction related display SKB3" is displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect). It is intended to be displayed.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKB3" not be displayed in connection with the third B reception period according to the modification. In other words, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the reception period is the same as the effect due to the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)". It can be suggested that it did not have both the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)" effect.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKB3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B reception period according to the modification. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the 1B reception period has ended without any reception.

By the way, for the 3B reception period according to this modification, if the reception is made while in the "first display state", "integrated image display IG (reference image display, remaining time display (frame image, If a configuration according to the above-mentioned other example such as "The post-reception performance is executed without displaying the gauge image)" is applied, the configuration shown in FIGS. 215(d1) to (h1) or FIG. 215(d2) to (h2), etc. The progress of the performance shown in is performed in a state where the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. In other words, if reception is determined to be valid in the first display state, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) remains not displayed in any of the multiple modes. If the execution of the post-reception effect is started and reception is determined to be valid in the second display state, multiple integrated image display IGs (simulation image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed. The execution of the post-reception performance will start in a state where the screen is displayed in any of the modes.

Note that even in the 3B reception period according to this modification, the player must be notified before the timing tS2 when a state (3B reception period) in which "determination of reception validity in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed occurs (3B reception period). Even if there is an action (operation), the action (operation) will not be judged as "valid reception" at that time, but it will be determined at the time when the relevant 3B reception period starts (or after that). ), a configuration according to the above-mentioned separate example, which makes it possible to make a "reception validity determination" targeting (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the 3B reception period. It is also possible to apply the configuration related to the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the 3B reception period according to the above modification, if a low expectation mode appears as the 3B post-reception performance (FIG. 215 (d1) to (h1)), the first extinction related display SKB1 is executed as the extinction EF performance. However, the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1B reception period according to the above modification, a specific mode appears as a disappearing EF effect when there is a reception (Fig. 214 (d1) to (h1) and Fig. 214 (d2) to (h2)). Although, when there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode appears (FIG. 214 (d3) to (g3)), the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear when there is no reception.

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to the above modification, when there is a reception, the second extinction related display SKB2 is executed as a specific mode (extinction EF effect), but this is different from the second extinction related display SKB2. It may also be executed in various ways. For example, even if it is executed in the first disappearance related display SKB1, it is difficult to determine whether the reception was made in the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period. It can be made difficult to recognize.

Next, concrete examples of the above-mentioned "Configuration 5-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be explained. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has a performance that is performed when an acceptance is received (for example, a conversation preview, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as a performance after reception), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). Here, the multiple reception periods (reception performances) include at least the 1C reception period (the 1C post-reception performance), the 2C reception period (the 2C post-reception performance), and the 3C reception period (the 3C post-reception performance). I have it ready.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 216 to 230. In addition, regarding each reception period mentioned above with reference to FIG. It may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1st C reception period (performance after 1C reception), 2C reception period (performance after 2C reception), 3C reception period (performance after 2C reception). 3C (post-reception performance)). Furthermore, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 215. You may choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 216 to 218 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 1C is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 1C reception period (1C reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 225 and 226 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the first C variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1C variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1C variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 225(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "1st C variation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 216(a), when the timing tT2 arrives at which the 1C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 1C is satisfied) , generates the above-mentioned 1C reception period (validity period) in which ``reception regarding production after 1C reception'' is permitted (``situation shown in FIGS. 209(b) and 209(c)''). As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the 1C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the 1C post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is configured to control the reception target (operation receiving section) in connection with the occurrence of such a 1C reception period. Display of operation target (sample image display) suggesting the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period, etc.), Remaining time display (reducing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes) (description), extinction-related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display (extinction EF effect), 1C post-reception effect display that suggests the level of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) are being carried out respectively. As described above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that includes a remaining time display (a depiction of decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). Although the images are displayed as an "integrated image display", they are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the first C reception period occurs at timing tT2, as shown in FIG. 216(b) and FIGS. 1 performance device), "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated map image display IG. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at the timing tT2, or may appear before the timing tT2 and straddle the timing tT2. It may be displayed in In addition, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted either when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the 1C reception period or when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It will be hidden when the 1st C reception period ends without any notice. The 1C reception period according to this example ends when timing tT3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 216(a)).

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is in one of multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) and 144(d)). Figure 225(b) shows the case where the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(a). 225(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(d). In addition, even during the 1C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and 144(c). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 216 assumes that when the relatively early timing tT2a within the 1C reception period arrives, "a reception validity determination is made in which the player's action (operation) is a valid action". There is. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 216(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tT2a (the acceptance was determined to be valid), the 1C acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period will be started.

In addition, the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1) to FIG. 226(h1))" is as a post-reception performance (first C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2) to FIG. 226(h2)") This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period. Regarding the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing), It may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, during the 1C reception period, as shown in FIG. Not only does the integrated image display IG not be hidden, but the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to view.

That is, the 1C post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a "1C post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable This will be realized as a combination of at least the ``1C post-reception specific production'' using the 3rd production device (speaker) and the 1C post-reception production sound using the 3rd production device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three performance devices), but among these performance devices, there is a performance in which an integrated model image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed. In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing at which the "first post-reception effect display" as the 1C post-reception effect starts is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the "Integrated Image Display IG" will be maintained even after the application is accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 144 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. It becomes like this.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, even though the reception has been made and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) have already been executed, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that the

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 216(b) and FIG. 226(e1) or (e2), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tT2a at which the first C reception period ended due to the acceptance of the player's action, (When timing tT2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tT2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, during the 1C reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 226 (d1) to (h1)) appear as the corresponding post-reception performances (1C post-reception performances), and modes with high expectations (Fig. 226 (d1) to (h1)). 226(d2) to (h2)) appear, different modes of extinction-related display (first extinction-related display SKC1, second extinction-related display SKC2) appear. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 226(e1) and (e2), the situation is such that the "1C post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if the extinction-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is “first extinction-related display SKC1” or “second extinction-related display SKC2”, check whether it is appearing as “first extinction-related display SKC1” or “second extinction-related display SKC2”. This makes it possible to estimate whether the "1C post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly anticipated manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 216(b), FIG. When the timing tT2c arrives within the period during which the mode) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the player's action within the 1C reception period as a post-acceptance performance. Execution of "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, in this case, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 225(b) to "G1 (Fig. 226(d1) to (h1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 226( f1), the first aspect (here, the 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character) is the 1C post-reception performance display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. 226 (f2 ), the second mode (here, the 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2 as a cut-in performance by a samurai character) is displayed as the 1C post-reception performance display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. It is supposed to be done.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" are displayed, "1C reception effect display UGC1 ( "1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1" or "1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 1C reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-effect (1C post-reception effect display UGC1) without a significant delay compared to other effect devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.Also, Since the effect display UGC1 starts after the 1st C reception while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 1C reception period has already ended, and the target of the player's attention is It is expected that the "integrated image display IG" will automatically transition to "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)". (after timing tT2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "Integrated image display IG" and The "integrated image display IG" is displayed preferentially over the "post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)". As a result, even if the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 216(b), FIG. 226(g1) or (g2), the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception performance display UGC1)" -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and the "extinction related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 216(b), FIG. "Display SKC1 or second disappearance related display SKC2" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, "1st C reception performance display UGC1 (1C reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1C reception effect display UGC 1-2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "effect display UGC1 after receiving the 1C" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the effect display UGC1-1 after receiving the 1C or the effect display UGC1 after receiving the 1C) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UGC1-2). Therefore, the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production example (FIGS. 225 and 226) corresponding to the 1C reception period, when the reception is made within the 1C reception period and the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1" is executed, the "1C reception period" is executed. The background image is switched before and after the "post-reception performance display UGC1" is started.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 226(d) and (e) where the background image is not switched (timings tT2a to tT2b shown in FIG. 216), the effect display device 1600 (the second Even if there is a change in performance in 1st performance device), the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1" can indicate that the situation has not started yet.

In addition, in this production example, the "1st C post-reception production display UGC1" and "background change" are changed to the timing when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed ( Although it was decided to start displaying at a later time (timing tT2c) than timing tT2b), the timing at which "extinction related display (first extinction related display SKC1, second extinction related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed (timing tT2b) The display may be started at the same time as (timing tT2b).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 226, as a post-reception effect, the background image can be switched to the same one when a mode with a low level of expectation appears and when a mode with a high level of expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether an aspect with a low level of expectation appears or an aspect with a high degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1C reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 216), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tT2c) of the 1C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set to be earlier than the received timing tT2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when a player's action is accepted within the 1C acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 216(b) and 216(c), Start execution of the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, the start of execution is delayed from the timing tT2a when the reception is received in the 1C reception period, but only a part of the 1C post-reception performance (the 1C post-reception performance display) is delayed, and the The 1C post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tT2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a movable effect body that can perform effect operations, or a It may be provided as a performance lamp or the like that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low for the post-reception performance), FIG. 226(d1) As shown in , the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the specific presentation after the 1C reception UTC1 (the 1C reception) corresponding to the 1C reception period. As the 1C post-reception specific performance UTB1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-specific performance UTC1, it is preceded by the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-1) using the first performance device. It will now start running. On the other hand, in an example where the performance progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. 226( d2), the manner in which “men's kimono” is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1C post-reception specific presentation UTC1 (second presentation device) corresponding to the 1C reception period. As the 1C post-reception specific performance UTC1-2), which is a highly anticipated form of 1C post-reception specific performance UTC1, there is a 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2) using the above-mentioned first performance device. Execution is started prior to.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 225, apart from the "integrated image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the 1C reception period is also applied to the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device). A presentation within the reception period that suggests that the situation has occurred is executed (FIGS. 225(b) and 225(c)). The presentation within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is performed in a manner in which the “integrated image display IG” on the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has low expectations (see FIG. 225(b)). ) and in a highly expected manner (see FIG. 225(c)) are displayed in the same manner.

That is, in this case, when it is within the 1C reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and The same aspect will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1C reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the "integrated image display IG '' continues to be displayed (while the level of expectation as a performance after reception is not yet indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested by which of "Specific production after 1C reception UTC1-1" and "Specific production after 1C reception UTC1-2" appears as the specific production after 1C reception UTC1. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific performance UTC1 after receiving the first C. For example, the 1st C post-reception specific performance UTC1 is provided with only "1st C post-reception specific performance UTC1-2", and depending on whether or not the 1C post-reception specific performance UTC1 appears, the expectation level (whether a jackpot is obtained or not) is provided. It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of In other words, in this case, when "Specific performance after 1C reception UTC1-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when "Specific performance after 1C reception UTC1-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third presentation device (speaker) is further provided, and when the 1C reception period occurs, the timing tT1 shown in FIG. 216(d) In this step, the output of an acceptance permission sound is started. In other words, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the 1C acceptance period is audibly output across the timing tT2 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIGS. 225(b) and 225(c)") when the 1C acceptance period occurs. The player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

Here, in the 1C reception period, the acceptance permissible sounds are a first long permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively long time, and a first short permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively short time. and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 216(d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started at timing tT2 when the first C acceptance period occurs or thereafter.

In the 1C reception period, if the player accepts an action while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the Thus, the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In this regard, when the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectation as shown in Fig. 216(d) (Fig. 225(b) )) and a case where the execution (audible output) is performed in a highly expected manner (the case shown in FIG. 225(c)). In other words, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are Once the application is confirmed as valid (judgment of validity), it will no longer be possible to confirm it, so there is tension over when to make the acceptance (judgment of validity of reception) within the acceptance period. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of well-being.

In addition, during the 1C reception period, if the player accepts an action while the reception permissible sound (first long permissible sound, first short permissible sound) is being audibly output, the permissible permissible sound will be terminated midway. Not only that, but also, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 1C post-acceptance effect sound is started. The 1C post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the level of expectation. For example, it may be executed in a manner with a low level of expectation (audible output), and it may be executed in a manner with a high level of expectation (audible output). output). In other words, in this case, during the 1C reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance in response to the reception. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance to be performed (the performance sound after receiving the first C).

Similar to the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1," such 1C post-reception performance sound includes "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display (extinction EF Even after the "effect" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 1C post-reception production sound, an example where the production progresses from Fig. 225(b) to "G1 (Fig. 226(d1) to (h1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 225(b) to “G2 (Fig. 226(d2) to (h2))” (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, in the 1C reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound were respectively output as the permissible reception sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output; Only acceptable sounds may be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 1C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), in the third production device, not only the 1C post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation can be heard. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 225(b) to "G2 (Fig. 226(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the level of expectation) even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1C reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize the content of the presentation, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 217 assumes a case where "a reception validity determination is made in which the player's action (operation) is a valid action" when the relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C reception period arrives. are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 217(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tT2A (the acceptance was determined to be valid), the 1C acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period will be started.

In this respect, during the 1C reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at a relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C reception period (even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Basically, the performance will proceed in the same manner as if the reception (reception validity determination) was made at a relatively early timing tT2a within the first C reception period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217(a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIG. 226(d1) to (h1))" (relatively 225 (b) to "G2 (Fig. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance). Basically, the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device perform the performance as explained with reference to FIG. 216 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217, in the situation shown in FIG. 226(d) etc., the gauge image is This means that the display area is further reduced. In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, as shown in FIG. 226(d), the reception (reception validity determination) is made while the first short permissible sound has already finished audible output. Therefore, the first short permissible sound will not be prematurely terminated (the audible output state will be prematurely terminated) due to the acceptance (acceptance validity determination).

In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217, the time for displaying the "1C post-reception effect display" based on the reception (reception validity determination) is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. 216. This will result in a loss of performance. In other words, the "1C post-reception specific performance" and the "1C post-reception performance sound" are executed for a predetermined period of time (a certain amount of time) from the time the reception is received (reception validity determination). On the other hand, the "1C post-reception effect display" ends (is not displayed) when the predetermined timing tT4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It has become something that According to such a configuration, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension regarding the timing within the acceptance period when the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is to be made.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 218 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 218, after the first C reception period occurs, the timing tT3 arrives without any movement (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tT3 (the point in time when the first C reception period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tT2a and The effect display device 1600 (the first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 226(d3), not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the 1C reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integration will be performed within the 1C reception period after the end of the 1C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Extinction EF effect) is now started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF effect)” is displayed. )" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1C reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the first C acceptance period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 1C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the "first disappearance related display SKC1" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to do so. In other words, in this case, if the player's action (operation) had been accepted within the 1C reception period, it is expected that the player would sense the possibility that the performance after the 1C reception would have suggested that the level of expectation was low. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage people to feel glad that they did not perform the action (operation) during the 1C reception period, and the interest in the game decreases when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C reception period. It is expected that the government will suppress the

However, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, "Second extinction related display SKC2" may be displayed as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), or " You may make it appear in an aspect different from both of the ``first extinction related display SKC1'' and the ``second extinction related display SKC2''.

Furthermore, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) will be displayed even if the action (operation) had been accepted. It may be executed in any manner in which it may appear. In other words, in this case, the case where "first disappearance related display SKC1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 225 (b) to "G1 (Fig. 226 (d1) to (h1))" (a case where a post-reception performance with relatively low expectations was executed) becomes. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 226(e3), the case where the "second extinction related display SKC2" appears means that if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first C reception period, the situation shown in FIG. This means a case where the production has progressed from b) to "G2 (Fig. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (a case where a post-reception production with relatively high expectations has been executed). . In other words, in this case, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1C reception period, the integrated image display IG will be hidden after the 1C reception period ends. Just by checking the mode of "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears, you can determine whether the 1C post-reception effect was executed in a manner with low expectations or in a manner with high expectations. Since it becomes possible to recognize this, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 226 (f3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the first disappearance related display SKC1)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 226 (g3), the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKC1 in the figure)" is hidden. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 1C reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 144(a) (see FIG. 225(b)). (see FIG. 209(c)), and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(d) (see FIG. 209(c)), as described above. When the situation shown in FIG. 225(c) appears, it is different from the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is in the aspect as "Image)", but otherwise the production will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the effect progresses from Fig. 225(c) to "G1'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 225(b) to "G1 (Fig. 226(d1) to (h1))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only. In addition, when the production progresses from Fig. 225(c) to "G2'", the content and basics of the production progressing from Fig. 225(b) to "G2 (Fig. 226(d2) to (h2))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only. In addition, when the production progresses from Fig. 225(c) to "G3'", the content and basics of the production progressing from Fig. 225(b) to "G3 (Fig. 226(d3) to (g3))" are the same, and the mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGd”. Only.

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this production example, for the convenience of explanation, the 1C post reception production (1C post reception production display UGC, 1C post reception specific production UTC, 1C post reception production sound) is as described above. It was decided to perform the same performance content (type) as the 1B post-reception performance corresponding to the 1B reception period. However, regarding the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance, and post-reception performance sound), it is desirable that the performance contents (types) be different between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the disappearance related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same in the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

FIGS. 219 to 221 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 2C is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 2C reception period (2C reception performance) occurs. . FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in a variable pattern in which a 2nd C reception period (2nd C reception performance) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the second C variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2nd C variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2nd C variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in Fig. 227 (a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "2nd C variation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 219(a), when the timing tU2 arrives at which the 2C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 2C is satisfied) , generates the second C reception period (validity period) during which "reception regarding production after reception of the second C" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the relevant 2C reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 2C post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

However, in the 2nd C reception period according to this embodiment, unlike when the above 1C reception period occurs, the time when the operation by the player is accepted (determined as valid reception) (or the performance after the reception starts to be executed) At this point in time), the integrated sample image display IG (“sample image display” and “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is not displayed.

More specifically, in the second C variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 219(b) and 227(b), when timing tU2 arrives, the second C reception period occurs, and the integrated image display IG ( ``Study image display'' and ``Remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)'') will be displayed. The 2C acceptance period ends when timing tU3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 219(a)).

FIG. 219 assumes that during such a 2C reception period, when a relatively early timing tU2a arrives, "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action". are doing. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 219(a), the second C reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tU2a. At the same time, the execution of the post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance) corresponding to the second C reception period is started.

Note that the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 227(b) to FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed, respectively. As the 2nd C post-reception performance (such as "2nd C post-reception performance display", "2nd C post-reception specific performance", "2nd C post-reception performance sound", etc.), the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, respectively. The case is omitted from illustration, and in reality, the production progresses from FIG. 227(b) to a situation where the production after receiving the 2C is executed in the omitted mode (the first mode with low expectations). There are now cases where this happens. However, for such a 2nd C reception period, when the ``reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action'' is made, the 2nd C post-reception performance (``2C post-reception performance display'' or ``2C post-reception performance display'') 227(c)) will be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 227(c). It may also be realized as a type in which a low-expectation mode is not prepared as a specific production after receiving the 1C, a production sound after receiving the 1C). The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

In this regard, in this production example (2nd C reception period), as described above, as shown in FIG. 219(b) and FIG. At timing tU2a, which is the point in time when the performance after receiving the second C was started according to There is never one. Note that, more precisely, FIG. 227(c) shows the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tU2c shown in FIG. 219(c). That is, at timing tU2a, "2nd C post-reception performance display UGC2 (group preview performance)" among the 2C post-reception performances is not executed, and "2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2-2" and "2nd C reception performance display UGC2" are not executed. After-performance sound (highly anticipated mode)'' is executed. According to such a configuration, the performance progresses in the same manner as in the case of the 1C post-reception performance, so that the above-mentioned effects can be obtained in the same manner.

Therefore, in this production example (2nd C reception period), as shown in FIGS. 219 and 227(b), no matter which timing within the 2C reception period the reception (reception validity determination) The above-mentioned extinction related display (extinction EF effect) is never executed. This is because at a certain timing when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (at the time when the 2nd C post-reception performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated sample image display IG ("display sample image" and "remaining image display") This is because the time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed and there is no need to make it difficult to visually recognize it.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 219(b) and FIG. 227(c), when the timing tU2c, which is later than the timing tU2a, arrives, the player's operation is not allowed within the second C acceptance period. In response to the reception, the first production device (production display device 1600) displays a "2C post-reception production display UGC2" as a post-reception production (in the figure, a group preview production with ghost characters, which is a highly anticipated mode). After receiving the second C, the performance display UGC 2-2) is started. Then, the "2nd C post-reception effect display UGC2" started in this way is displayed for a predetermined period of time from the time the reception is received (reception validity determination), as shown in FIG. 219(b) and FIG. 227(d). It will be closed (hidden) after a certain period of time has passed.

Note that in the production example (FIG. 227) corresponding to the 2C reception period, unlike the case of the 1C reception period, the background image is switched when the "2C post reception production display UGC2" is executed. Never.

Additionally, when a player's action is accepted within the 2C acceptance period, the second effect device is used based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 219(b) and 219(c). The execution of the 2nd C post-reception performance (2nd C post-reception specific performance) is started prior to the 2C post-reception performance (2nd C post-reception performance display) using the first performance device.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. In the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 227(b) to FIG. 227(c) (when expectations are relatively high for the performance after reception), "Ghost" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device). The manner in which is displayed is as the above-mentioned 2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2 corresponding to the 2nd C reception period (2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2-2, which is a highly anticipated form of the 2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2). , execution is started prior to the second C post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance display UGC2-2) using the first performance device. As mentioned above, we will omit the explanation of the case where a low-expected mode is executed as the 2nd C post-reception performance, but "2nd C post-reception performance display" and "2nd C post-reception specific performance UTC2" are low-expected modes. This is basically the same as when it is executed in a high expectation mode.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker). However, when the second C reception period occurs, the reception permission sound is not output, as shown in FIG. 219(d).

Furthermore, in the 1C acceptance period, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 2C post-acceptance performance sound is started. The 2C post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the level of expectation. For example, it may be executed in a manner with a low level of expectation (audible output), and it may be executed in a manner with a high level of expectation (audible output). output).

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 2C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third production device allows you to hear not only the 2C post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is something that is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the second C post-reception performance is executed in a highly anticipated manner or in a less expected manner.

On the other hand, in the example that progresses from FIG. 220 and FIGS. 227(b) and (e) to FIG. 227(c), when the relatively late timing tU2A within the second C reception period arrives, " It is assumed that a "reception validity determination" is made in which an action (operation) by the player is considered a valid action. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 220(a), based on the fact that the player's action was accepted at timing tU2A (the reception was determined to be valid), the 2C reception period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2nd C reception period will be started.

In this regard, in the 2C reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at a relatively late timing tU2A within the 2C reception period (reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is one), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (reception validity determination) was made at a relatively early timing tU2a within the second C reception period. Therefore, at the time when the player's operation is accepted (determined to be valid) (or when the performance starts to be executed after acceptance), the integrated sample image display IG ("sample image display" or "remaining time display") frame images and gauge images) are never displayed. In addition, in the case of the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 220(a) and Figs. 227(b) and (e) to Fig. 227(c), there are cases in which expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production, and There is a case where the following is omitted (when expectations are relatively low as a performance after reception), and for the first performance device, second performance device, and third performance device, basically refer to Fig. 219 etc. The performance will be performed according to the content explained.

In particular, during the 2nd C reception period, unlike the 1st C reception period, the "2nd C post-reception performance display" is similar to the "2nd C post-reception specific performance" and "2C post-reception performance sound", etc. Since it is to be executed for a predetermined time (certain time) from the time when the reception is valid (judgment of reception validity), the aspect of the post-reception performance is also based on the timing when the reception is made (judgment of reception validity). It's the same regardless.

In addition, the "2nd C post-reception performance display", the "2nd C post-reception specific performance", and the "2nd C post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and are mutually exclusive. They do not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 221 and the example in which the performance progresses from FIGS. 227(b) and 227(e) to FIG. This is based on the assumption that the application is not accepted (determined as valid).

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 221, after the second C acceptance period occurs, the timing tU3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the second C reception period, as shown in 221 in the same figure, no performance related to the end will be executed.

In addition, in the second C reception period, only one mode (in FIG. 227, integrated model image display IGb (see FIG. 144(b))) is displayed as the model image display. The integrated image display IGb is a mode that is not displayed during the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period. However, the 2C reception period refers to the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made (or the time when the post-reception production starts to be executed), regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made. ) is characterized by the fact that no scale image display (gauge image) is displayed. Therefore, during the second C reception period, the sample image may be displayed in any mode, or may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Further, during the second C reception period, the sample image display may not be displayed, but the gauge image may be displayed. Furthermore, during the second C reception period, the gauge image may not be displayed, but a sample image display may be displayed. Further, during the second C reception period, neither the sample image display nor the gauge image may be displayed.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned features related to the 2C reception period, after the reception is made, it is possible to concentrate only on the aspect of the post-reception performance without worrying about the aspect of the sample image display (gauge image). become. In this case, even if the 1st C reception period and 3rd C reception period are subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function, the 2C reception period should not be subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function. is desirable. As a result, the occurrence of a post-reception performance is limited to the case where the player himself operated the performance after confirming the performance during the 2C reception period, so the 2C reception period has ended. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the sample image or the gauge image is not displayed at that point or thereafter.

FIGS. 222 to 224 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 3C is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 3C reception period (3C reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 228 to 230 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a variable pattern in which the 3rd C reception period (3rd C reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "3rd C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the third C variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 3rd C variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3C variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 228 (a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "3rd C variation pattern" selected above. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 222(a), when the timing tV2 arrives at which the 3C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (when the condition 3C is satisfied) , generates the 3rd C reception period (validity period) in which "reception regarding production after 3C reception" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted within the relevant 3C reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 3C post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception (reception is determined to be valid). become.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production display device 1600 (first production device) displays the reception target (operation receiving section, etc.) in connection with the occurrence of such a 3C reception period. A suggested action target display (sample image display), a remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the acceptance period (validity period) (a depiction of decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes), An extinction-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display, and a 1C post-reception effect display that indicates the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance (reception validity determination). It is becoming more and more popular. As described above, the sample image display according to this embodiment is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that includes a remaining time display (a depiction of decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). Although the images are displayed as an "integrated image display", they are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

In this respect, the 3C reception period according to this embodiment is limited to the above-mentioned "1C reception period performance (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the performance after reception starts to be executed)") The effect of displaying the image) and the effect of the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" (the display of the sample image and the gauge image at the time of acceptance (or the time of execution of the effect after acceptance)) It has been realized as a special production that combines both the performance and performance that have not been done before.

More specifically, when the 3C reception period occurs during which the reception of operations by the player is allowed, first, as shown in FIGS. 222(b) and 228(b), the integrated image display IG (“sample image display” and “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is displayed (timing tV2). However, during the 3C reception period, depending on when within the 3C reception period the player's operation was accepted (reception valid determination), the time at which the reception (reception validity determination) was made (or the reception There are cases where the sample image display and the gauge image are displayed and cases where the sample image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-effect is started.

As will be described later, in this production example, as shown in FIG. When the operation is accepted (determined to be valid), the sample image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the acceptance (determined as valid reception) is made (or at the time when the performance after reception starts to be executed). If a player's operation is accepted (reception valid determination) within the period from timing Y until the end of the 3C reception period (second period), the reception The sample image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the validity determination (validity determination) is made (or at the time when the performance is started after acceptance). However, such an aspect is only an example, and the point is that when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the first timing within the 3C reception period, the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made (or the reception The sample image display and the gauge image are hidden (not displayed) at the time when the post-production starts execution), and the reception is accepted at a second timing different from the above first timing within the 3C reception period. If the reception (validity determination) is made, the sample image display or the gauge image may be displayed at the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made (or at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started).

According to such a 3C reception period, from the time the 3C reception period occurs to the arrival of timing Y, even if the reception is made, the 3C post-reception performance will not be integrated. The image display IG will start execution in a hidden state (invisible state), and from timing Y until the arrival of timing tV3 when the 3rd C reception period ends, it will not be accepted that the image display IG has been accepted. After receiving the corresponding 3C, the performance will start in a state where the integrated model image display IG is displayed (at least a part of the integrated model image display IG should be visible). . As a result, the 3C reception period according to this embodiment is limited to the above-mentioned ``1C reception period performance (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance starts), the display of the sample image and the gauge The effect of displaying the image) and the effect of the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" (the display of the sample image and the gauge image at the time of acceptance (or the time of execution of the effect after acceptance)) It has come to be realized as a special performance that combines both the performance and performance that has not been previously used, and it has come to be expected that this will improve the interest in the game.

In other words, in this case, by adjusting the operation timing with respect to the 3C reception period, the player can visually confirm the aspect of the integrated image display IG (sample image display and gauge image) that was displayed during the 3C reception period. As stated above, should we start executing the 3rd C post-reception performance while the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and gauge image) is still being displayed, or should we concentrate on the 3C post-reception presentation? It is now possible to virtually choose whether to hide the integrated image display IG (image image display and gauge image) and start execution of the performance after receiving the 3rd C, which will improve the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to improve your skills.

In order to better achieve this kind of performance, during the 3C reception period, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) should be configured in one of several modes with different expectations. (for example, Fig. 144(a) or (c)), and Fig. 228(b) , gauge image) are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a), and FIG. 228(d) shows that the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c)). In addition, even during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (d). It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 222 shows that during the above-mentioned "first period (first state) (for example, see FIG. 228(b))" in the third C reception period (timing tV2a in the figure), It is assumed that a "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 222(a), the 3C reception period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid) at timing tV2a. At the same time, execution of the post-reception performance (3rd C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3rd C reception period begins.

Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIGS. 229(d1) to 229(h1))" is the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed as the "3C post-reception performance" as a result of the "reception validity determination" in the "H2 ( An example in which the performance progresses from ``Fig. 229 (d2) to 229 (h2))'' is when the ``reception validity determination'' is made during the above-mentioned ``first period (first state)'' of the 3C reception period. As a result, this corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the "3C post-reception performance". The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, if the "reception validity determination" is made during the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, the process shown in FIG. 222(b), FIG. 229(d1), or ( As shown in d2), at timing tV2a, which is the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the 3C post-reception performance is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated image display IG" is hidden and not displayed (made invisible).

According to such a configuration, if the player performs an action (operation) during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period ("reception validity determination" is made) ), the player may perform the post-reception performance (here, after the 3rd C reception) with the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) not displayed (made invisible). You will be able to enjoy the specific performance UTC3).

In this regard, in the 3C reception period according to this production example, even if the player performs an action (operation) during the "first period (first state)", the reception is When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing tV2a (when timing tV2b arrives), as shown in FIG. 229 (e1) or (e2), a display related to extinction (extinction EF effect) is started. .

In other words, in the 3C reception period according to this example, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)", when timing tV2b arrives, Even though the "disappearance image display IG (display image, gauge image display)" is already not displayed (invisible state), the "extinction related display (disappearance EF effect)" will start to be displayed. , and at least part of the area where the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It is supposed to be done.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the post-acceptance performance is being executed in response to the proper acceptance of the player's motion.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned ``2C reception period'' (the sample image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time the reception is received (or at the time the performance starts to be executed after reception)) If the reception is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" that provides a performance that does not have a performance effect, then whether the reception is made during the 2nd C reception period or the 3C reception period. Although it is difficult to recognize, it is possible to recognize that the application was accepted during the 3C reception period by the appearance of the "disappearance related display (extinction EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2C reception period. It becomes like this.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, modes with low expectations (Figure 229 (d1) to (h1)) appear as effects after 3C reception, and modes with high expectation (Figure 229 (d2) to (h2)) appear. The extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is executed in the same manner regardless of the case in which the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1C reception period (where the mode of extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) differs depending on the level of expectation), after the reception is made within the 3C reception period, "extinction EF effect" is displayed. Since the importance of paying close attention to "related display (disappearance EF effect)" is lowered, coupled with the fact that the sample image display (gauge image) is not displayed, the focus is on what kind of appearance will appear as the effect display UGC after receiving the 3C. You will be able to do so.

In addition, during the 3rd C reception period according to this production example, a post-reception production (1C post-reception production) corresponding to the above 1C reception period is expected as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when a reception is made. The "second extinction related display SKC2" that is displayed when the process is executed in a highly sophisticated manner is used. In other words, in this case, during the 3C reception period, it becomes possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a manner with high expectations as long as the reception is completed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to aim for it.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period does not necessarily have to be the "second extinction-related display SKC2." For example, an extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3rd C reception period is displayed when the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. The "first extinction related display SKC1" may be used, or an aspect that does not correspond to the 1C reception period may be used as the extinction related display.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 222(b) and FIG. 229(f1) or (f2), the display related to the extinction-related display (integrated image display IG) is difficult to see When the timing tV2c arrives during the period during which the mode (in which the mode becomes) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the third C acceptance period. The execution of "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (conversation preview)" as a performance is started. However, here, in an example where the performance progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1) to (h1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 229( f1), the first aspect (here, 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1, which is a "silent" conversation preview) is displayed as the 3C post-reception performance display UGC3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 228(a) to "H2 (Fig. 229(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 229(f2) As shown in , the second aspect (here, 3C post-reception performance display UGC 3-2, which is a conversation preview that mentions "chance") is displayed as 3C post-reception performance display UGC 3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. It is now possible to do so.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed and the "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKC2)" is displayed, the "3rd C reception effect display UGC3" ("3rd C Execution of ``post-reception performance display UGC 3-1'' or ``3rd C post-reception performance display UGC 3-2'' will be started.

In this regard, "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3" ("3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1" or "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-2") is "disappearance-related display (second extinction-related display SKC2)" " is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the display area (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" The "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKC2)" is displayed preferentially. In this way, by making the object of attention by the player (3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3) difficult to visually recognize, further concentration can be encouraged.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 222(b) and FIG. 229(g1), (h1) or (g2), (h2), the "3rd C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3rd C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C reception effect display UGC 3-2) is displayed, the ``extinction related display (second annihilation related display SKC2)'' will be hidden, which improves visibility. Accordingly, a display related to "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is performed.

In this regard, the "3C post-reception performance display UGC3" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the reception of the action (operation) by the player (here, the 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1). or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2). Therefore, the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "extinction related display" are hidden.

In this production example, the "3rd C reception effect display UGC3" starts to be displayed at a later time (timing tV2c) than the timing (timing tV2b) when the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tV2b) as the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKC2)" (timing tV2b).

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 222(b) and 222(c), Start executing the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, even if the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs the 3C post-reception performance display after performing the disappearance related display, the 3C post-reception performance is As for itself, execution can be started from the same timing tV2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1) to (h1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 229(d1) As shown in FIG. As the 3rd C post-reception specific performance UTC 3-1), which is a low-expected aspect of UTC 3, it is executed prior to the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance display UGC 3-1) using the first performance device. It is about to start. On the other hand, in an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 228(a) to "H2 (Fig. 229(d2) to (h2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 229( d2), the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 3rd C reception specific effect UTC3 (after 3rd reception reception) corresponding to the 3rd C reception period. As the 3rd C reception specific performance UTC 3-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the specific performance UTC 3, a 3C post reception performance using the above-mentioned first performance device (3C post reception performance display UGC 3-2) is preceded. The program will now start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 229, when it is in the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period (FIG. 229(b)), and when it is in the "second period" (FIG. 229(b)), period (second state)" (FIG. 229(c)), there is a reception period that suggests that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is in a state where the 3C reception period has occurred. The internal performance is now executed. The presentation within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is performed in a manner in which the “integrated image display IG” on the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has low expectations (see FIG. 228(b)). ) and in a highly anticipated manner (see FIG. 228(d)).

That is, in this case, during the 3C acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), different aspects appear on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and the sub The same aspect will appear on the liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, during the 3C reception period, if it is determined that the reception is valid in that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the integrated simulated image. "Display IG" is hidden (while not yet indicating the level of expectation as a performance after reception), and different modes appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of "Specific production after reception of 3C UTC3-1" and "Specific production after reception of 3C UTC3-2" appears as the specific production after reception of 3C UTC3. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the third C post-reception specific effect UTC3. For example, the 3rd C post-reception specific performance UTC3 is provided with only "3rd C post-reception specific performance UTBC-2", and depending on whether or not the 3rd C post-reception specific performance UTC3-2 appears, the expectation level It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of results obtained. In other words, in this case, when "Specific performance UTBC-2 after receiving 3rd C" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when "Specific performance UTBC-2 after accepting 3rd C" does not appear. Become.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the third C reception period occurs, the timing tV1 shown in FIG. 222(d) In this step, the output of an acceptance permission sound is started. The acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 3rd C acceptance period is audible in a form that spans both the timing tV2 when the 3rd C acceptance period occurs and the timing Y when the above-mentioned "first period" shifts to the "second period". The player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. However, the acceptance permissible sound may be audibly output as long as it straddles timing Y, and may not necessarily be audibly output as straddles timing tV2.

Here, in the 3rd C reception period, a third permissible sound that is different from both the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound is audibly outputted as the permissible sound for the 1C reception. It becomes possible to suggest that a third C reception period, which has multiple effects, will occur (or is occurring) instead of a period. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 3C reception period may be executed using either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

During the 3C reception period, if the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the 3rd permissible sound) is audibly output, it is recognized that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway), and as a result, the 3C reception period, which has multiple effects, occurs instead of the 1C reception period described above. (or what is happening). However, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 3C acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on acceptance.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 222(d), the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the 3C reception period (in this case, the third permissible sound) is executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations. It is desirable that there be two cases: (the case shown in FIG. 228(b)) and a case (the case shown in FIG. 228(d)) where it is executed (audible output) in a highly expected manner.

The 3rd C post-reception effect sound is similar to the 3rd C post-reception effect display UGC3, as shown in FIG. It will continue to run for a relatively long time even after it is hidden. Regarding the 3C post-reception performance sound, an example where the performance progresses from Fig. 228(a) to "H1 (Fig. 229(d1) to (h1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception performance) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 228(a) to "H2 (Fig. 229(d2) to (h2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production) are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 3C reception period (reception is determined to be valid), the third performance device allows you to hear not only the 3C post-reception performance sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H1 (FIG. 229(d1) to (h1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 228(b) to "H2 (Fig. 229(d2) to (h2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is accepted (determined as valid) in a reception period different from the 3C reception period (for example, the 1C reception period or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). (regardless of expectations), it will be output audibly. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize what is in the program, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after receiving the reception.

On the other hand, the effect changes from FIG. 223 and FIGS. 228(b) and (c) to "H3 (FIG. 230(d3) to (h3))" or "H4 (FIG. 230(d4) to (h4))". An example of progress is that during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (timing tV2A in the diagram), "the action (operation) by the player is This assumes that the reception is valid. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 223(a), FIGS. 230(d3) to (h3), or FIGS. 230(d4) to (h4), an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tV2A. Based on the fact that (the reception is determined to be valid), the 3C reception period ends, and the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period starts to be executed.

In this regard, in the 3C reception period, if the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (as shown in Figure 228(c)). Even if the application is received in a state in which the application is accepted, basically, after the application is made, the application shall be made within the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" within the relevant 3B reception period. The production will proceed in the same manner as in the case where the reception (reception validity determination) is made (the case where the reception is made in the state shown in FIG. 228(b)). Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 223(a), when the performance progresses in a manner with relatively low expectations as the post-reception performance from FIG. 228(c) ("H3 (Fig. 230(d3) ~ (h3))", and when the performance progresses from FIG. 228(c) in a relatively highly anticipated manner as a post-reception performance ("H4(FIG. 230(d4) to (h4))", and in the first, second, and third performance devices, basically, while referring to FIG. 222, etc. The performance will be performed according to the content as explained.

However, as mentioned above, the 3rd C reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned "1C reception period performance (a performance in which a sample image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance starts)". As a special production that has both the above-mentioned "2C reception period" performance (performance in which the sample image display and gauge image are not displayed at the time when the performance starts after reception). If the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the above-mentioned “second period (second state)” within the relevant 3C acceptance period (as shown in Figure 228(c)). (If the reception is made in a state where the application is accepted), the performance according to the above-mentioned "1C reception period" (the performance in which the sample image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the performance starts after reception) will appear. It has become a thing.

Therefore, it is clear when comparing "Fig. 230 (d3) to (h3) or (d4) to (h4)" with "Fig. 229 (d1) to (h1) or (d2) to (h2)". As shown in Figure 228(c), if the reception is made during the "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (reception is determined to be valid) If this is the case, the integrated image display IG will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed at the time when the performance after receiving the third C is started.

In addition, such an integrated image display IG is displayed at the time when the execution of "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (conversation preview)" starts (see FIG. 223 and FIG. 230 (f3) or (f4)). is not hidden and continues to be displayed. The integrated image display IG is not prioritized and displayed behind "Second disappearance related display SKC2", but it is displayed behind "Second extinction related display SKC2", but for "3rd C reception performance display UGC3 (conversation preview)" It is arranged to be displayed with priority, thereby making it easier to recognize in which mode it was displayed within the reception period.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period, 223(b), FIG. 230(g3) or (g4) As shown in , while the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is being displayed, first, "integration" is displayed. Of the "Make Image Display IG" and "Disappearance Related Display," the "Integrated Image Display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 223(b), FIG. "Display SKC2" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, "3C Post-Reception Production Display UGC3 (3C Post-Reception Production Display UGC3-1 or 3C Post-Reception Production Display UGC3-") will be hidden. 2)" will now be displayed.

Other production aspects when the reception is made in the second period (second state) within the 3C reception period (for example, specific production after reception, disappearance related display, display production after reception, permissible sound, production after reception, etc.) The reception sound, etc.) are as described with reference to FIG. 229 (or the same as the production example shown in FIG. 213), so their explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, in the production examples (FIGS. 228 to 230) corresponding to the 3C reception period, even if the reception is made within the 3C reception period and the "3C post-reception production display UGC3" is executed, the "3C post-reception production display UGC3" is executed. The background image is not switched before and after the 3C reception effect display UGC3 is started. According to this configuration, the integrated image display IG is displayed when the application is received during the 1st C reception period and when the application is received during the 2nd period within the 3C reception period. However, by checking whether the background image changes in response to the reception, it is possible to change the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period. This makes it possible to recognize which of these has occurred. On the other hand, in cases where the application is received during the 2nd C reception period and in the case where the application is received during the 1st period within the 3C reception period, the reception is received while the integrated image display IG is not displayed. The same point is that the post-production starts to be executed, but by checking whether the "disappearance related display" is executed in response to the reception, the above 2C reception period and the 3C reception period can be changed. This makes it possible to recognize which of these has occurred.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the ``3C post-reception performance display'', like the ``3C post-reception specific performance'' and ``3C post-reception performance sound'', starts from the time the reception is accepted (determined to be valid). Since it is executed for a predetermined time (certain time), the aspect of the post-reception performance is also the same regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made.

In addition, "3C post-reception performance display", "3C post-reception specific performance", and "3C post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a certain period of time set for each, and are mutually exclusive. They do not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 224 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 224, after the third C reception period occurs, the timing tV3 arrives without any movement (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tV3 (the point in time when the 3C acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer allowed), timing tV2A, etc. Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time (when the action (operation) by the player is accepted in the second period within the 3C reception period), the effect is shown in FIG. 230 (d5). As such, not only is the integrated model image display IG not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to view.

According to such a configuration, even if the 3rd C reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integration will be performed within the 3C reception period after the end of the 3C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the simulated image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 230 (e5), the disappearance-related display is (Extinction EF effect) is now started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF effect)” is displayed. )" is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3C reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the third C acceptance period has ended. In addition, even in situations where the 3C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 3C acceptance period, a "third disappearance related display SKC3" is displayed as a disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to do so.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKC3" not be displayed in connection with the first C reception period. In other words, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C reception period, the reception period is still the same as the above-mentioned ``1C reception period performance (at the time the reception is made)'' Or, the performance in which a sample image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the performance starts execution after reception), and the performance by the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" (at the time when the reception is received (or at the time when the reception It becomes possible to suggest that the post-effect was a combination of both the simulative image display and the effect in which the gauge image was not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-effect was started.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKC3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the third C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the third C reception period has ended without any reception.

After this, as shown in FIG. 230 (f5), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the third disappearance related display SKC3)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 230 (g5), the "disappearance related display (third disappearance related display SKB3 in the figure)" is hidden. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 3C reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 144(a) (see FIG. 228(b), (c)), and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c) (see FIGS. 228(d) and (e)), as described above. When the situation shown in FIGS. 228(d) and 228(e) appears, it is different from when the situation shown in FIGS. 228(b) and 228(c) described above appears, The only difference is in the aspect of "sample image display, frame image, gauge image", and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the effect progresses from Fig. 228(d) to "H1'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 228(b) to "H1 (Fig. 229(d1) to (h1))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 228(d) to "H2'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 228(b) to "H2 (Fig. 229(d2) to (h2))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 228(e) to "H3'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 228(c) to "H3 (Fig. 230(d3) to (h3))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 228(e) to "H4'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 228(c) to "H4 (Fig. 229(d4) to (h4))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only. In addition, when the effect progresses from Fig. 228(e) to "H5'", the content and basics of the effect progressing from Fig. 228(c) to "H5 (Fig. 230 (d5) to (g5))" The mode of “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has been changed from “integrated image display IGa” to “integrated image display IGc”. Only.

In addition, in the 3rd C reception period according to this production example, for the convenience of explanation, the 3C post reception production (3C post reception production display UGC, 3C post reception specific production UTC, 3C post reception production sound) is as described above. It was decided to execute the same performance content (type) as the 3B post-reception performance corresponding to the 3B reception period. However, regarding the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance, and post-reception performance sound), it is desirable that the performance content (type) be different between the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

Further, in the 3rd C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the extinction related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the extinction related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned 3B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same in the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, which is provided with such a 1B reception period to a 3B reception period, excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are performed when an acceptance is received (a cut-in notice, a group notice, a conversation notice, etc. as a post-reception performance), and a notice performance (expectation level suggesting performance) We have prepared multiple reception periods (1C reception period to 3C reception period) with different types (types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of the type depending on the result of the judgment (direction judgment). It becomes.

In this regard, during the 1C reception period to the 3C reception period, if a player's action is accepted, the performance display after reception will be displayed based on the acceptance (1C performance display after reception ~ 3C after reception). effect display) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Of these, during the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, when a player's action is accepted, not only a post-acceptance performance display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also a ``disappearance related display''. We are trying to make more "extinction EF effects)" appear. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which aspect has appeared as a sample image display (or gauge image), but also to confirm which aspect has appeared as a sample image display (or gauge image). By reducing the visibility of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) by making it difficult to see (disappearance-related display) until it is hidden, It is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "sample image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-reception performance display." Note that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" means that the same mode can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which the content of the effect that is performed upon acceptance is different (Fig. 226 ( e2) and FIG. 229(e2), etc.).

However, since the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, the sample image display will continue even after acceptance has been made. If the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception performance display according to the reception is already displayed, and there is a concern that the game's interest will decrease. be. In this regard, when an application is received during either the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period (second period), the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) While the display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden (invisible) in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display), the post-reception performance display is The time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed in a manner in which it is difficult to visually recognize it (disappearance-related display). In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, there is a situation in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display). The transition from the pre-display (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception performance display) will be realized.

In addition, both the "mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on the reception. They have one thing in common. However, "a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is, for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (e1) or FIG. 230 (e3). , when a sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the screen appears to make it difficult to see the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is something that will be done. On the other hand, "post-reception effect display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (f1) or FIG. 230 (f3), a sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. Even if it is displayed in a situation where the time limit is displayed, it is displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image).

In this regard, in the above-mentioned example, if the acceptance is made in the first period of the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance related display and the post-acceptance effect display are changed to the sample image display as shown in FIG. 229(e1) etc. Since the display is started while the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is already hidden, the player concentrates on ``what kind of appearance will appear as the effect display after reception''. You will be able to do this. In addition, by adjusting whether operations will be accepted during the first period or the second period within the 3C reception period, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be displayed. Either start the execution of the post-reception effect display while the state continues, or hide the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) before executing the post-reception effect display. It becomes possible to select whether or not to start the game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, regarding ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'', it should be noted that ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to visually recognize'' As a method for displaying the sample image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area where the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, In addition to the method of displaying a different image with priority (displaying on the front layer), there is also a method of displaying a sample image or remaining time by displaying an image different from the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method of displaying an image (video) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, instead of displaying a separate image from the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the On the other hand, regarding the ``post-reception presentation display'', there are methods to ``appear so as not to make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in such a way that the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method achieved by displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displayed on the rear layer), there is also a method that allows the sample image to be displayed at least while the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in areas other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed is referred to as ``mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)''. A method of displaying an image display different from the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) on at least a part of the screen, and displaying the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) themselves. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing numerical values related to characteristics (transmittance, etc.).

In addition, "a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" refers to the "reception-related display" that occurs before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in situations where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not displayed yet, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). '' could appear soon, and players should be mentally prepared in advance to change their focus from ``the hard-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. You will be able to encourage

In addition, if the application is received during the 1st C reception period or 3C reception period (2nd period), etc., "a manner in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" can be displayed even after the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, "aspects in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" will be hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display" in a wider range, so we will aim to improve gaming interest by changing the performance during such a display period. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, as shown in FIGS. Regarding the mode (disappearance related display), not only the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of the area, but "a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see" (disappearance related display)", at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is displayed so as to be difficult to visually recognize (for example, displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) makes it difficult to see not only the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the performance until the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" starts to be displayed. It is now expected to improve both gender and gender.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the "post-reception performance display" after the reception is made and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. In addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), we also provide a specific effect after reception that does not make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in situations where they are not displayed (using the second effect effect). It is possible to appear after the reception. This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance in advance of this without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more effective than the disappearance-related display (extinction EF production). The display is made to appear in a situation where the previous extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) continues until after the extinction related display (extinction EF performance) is ended.

According to this configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance using the second performance device, which has a simpler performance. It is possible to improve the interest in gaming for various types of players.

Also, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the sample image display will be dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. . In this case, the dynamic display of the sample image is not terminated and continues (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (extinction EF effect) has appeared since the acceptance. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the extinction-related display (extinction EF production) is not only a display of a sample image, but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the images. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3", but apart from the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3, the above-mentioned mode (second extinction Related display SKC2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second extinction related display SKC2 appears, it is unclear which of the 1C and 3rd C reception effect display will appear, but when the first disappearance related display SKC1 appears, It becomes possible to infer that the effect display UGC1 will appear after receiving the first C.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the extinction-related display (disappearance EF production) is displayed (priority display ). However, the performance using a performance device (movable body, etc.) located in front of the display screen must be performed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize this by

In addition, even if the same mode (second extinction related display SKC2) appears as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), if the type of acceptance period is different, the jackpot symbol will be stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable to have different proportions (expectations).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute a post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and the execution of the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is possible. During the period, on the first performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see. It is made so that it is difficult to visually recognize it.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started based on the reception, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared. Also, during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be made relatively difficult to see. By doing so, it is expected that the player's gaze will be naturally shifted from the "first presentation device" to the "second presentation device."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is the display of the sample image that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before the reception and the remaining time. Execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but when the second effect display device is used. The post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it a performance that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is something.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance production display was decided to start displaying after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). It may be started.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". We decided to realize this as an image display. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image in such a way that the area displayed in the "area where the sample image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Furthermore, as described above, the "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used in multiple modes (integrated image Displays IGa to IGd). According to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode, including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance. Even after this is done, it is possible to recognize in what manner the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period.

As mentioned above, "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately. Only one of the gauge images) may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the case where the "sample image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are in a hidden state may be a state where they are not visible from the player's side. For example, this includes cases where "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are displayed on a layer but cannot be viewed due to priority display of other images. It is the meaning. However, if at least part of the "sample image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player's side, then the "sample image display" or "remaining time display" (frame image, gauge image)" is made visible, so "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are not hidden. It can be said that the display continues.

Furthermore, in each of the production examples described above, the specific production after reception may be realized by being performed in the first production device (inside the display screen of the production display device 1600) instead of the second production device.

Further, in the 1st C acceptance period, the 2nd C acceptance period, and the 3rd C acceptance period, the object of the movement (operation) by the player does not necessarily have to be the same, and may require different movements from each other. However, if a different action is required, the action object display (sample image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will also be displayed as different displays.

By the way, if you want the reception (reception validity determination) to be made in the first period (first state) of the 3C reception period, the reception validity determination for the player will be made until timing Y arrives. This will require that the following be done. However, if the 3C acceptance period is set as a "valid period lasting 3 seconds", the first period (first state) can only last about 1 second. becomes. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that the player may act (operate) a little before the occurrence of the 3C reception period due to impatience due to having to act (operate) within such a short time. Ru. In this case, even if the player attempts to redo the action, if timing Y has already arrived by then, there is a concern that the player may lose interest in the game because he or she will not be able to play the game as desired.

Therefore, in the 3C reception period, the player's action (operation) is executed before the timing tV2 when a state (3C reception period) in which "reception validity determination in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed occurs (3C reception period). Even if there is, the action (operation) will not be considered as a "reception valid judgment" at that time, but the 3C reception period will start (or after that). It is desirable to be able to make the "reception validity determination" target (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the period.

However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not the relevant 3C reception period has occurred, in which "determination of acceptance validity as a valid action by the player" is allowed. It will be necessary to implement it regardless of whether or not it occurs.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 216, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tV2, this will be detected. However, at the time when the player's action (operation) is detected, the 3C reception period has not yet occurred, so based on this detection, the "Reception that the player's action is a valid action" No "validity determination" is made. However, the existence of this detection information will be kept as a memory (history), and after the 3C reception period occurs, the detection information kept as the memory (history) during the 3C reception period will be updated. Based on this, a "determination as to whether the action by the player is valid for acceptance" is made. Then, the third C post-reception effect is executed based on the thus obtained "reception validity determination."

According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, it can be accepted within the 3C reception period, In turn, it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) using this as an opportunity. Thereby, even though the above-mentioned performance (first period) is achieved, it is possible to reduce the level of difficulty in accepting motions.

However, if the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3rd C reception period (more than a predetermined time), it may be possible to prevent the 3C post-reception performance from being executed using this as a trigger. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

Note that the configuration when operated (operated) a little before the occurrence of the 3rd C acceptance period may or may not be applied in the same way during the 1st C acceptance period and the 2nd C acceptance period. You can do it like this.

In addition, at this time, for actions (operations) performed before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, those actions (operations) will be transferred to the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" after the occurrence of the 3C reception period. It is desirable to allow acceptance as a validity determination (acceptance validity determination) in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" instead of "." According to such a configuration, acceptance is determined to be valid at a timing when a little time has elapsed after an action (operation) is performed by the player, and as a result, execution of the post-acceptance performance is started. As a result, it is not a so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no action (operation) despite the reception period, but it is possible to suggest that the player's action has been properly accepted. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there are a plurality of reception periods including the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, during which reception of actions (operations) by players (reception validity determination) is allowed. A reception period is available. Then, if a "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (the 1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) ) starts to be executed, an action object display (here, a model image display (FIG. 144(a) to ( (d))) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see Figure 230), and within the 2C reception period, the "reception validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" ” is performed, at the time when the execution of the above-mentioned post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance corresponding to the 2C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the action target display (here, the action by the player ( A sample image display (see FIGS. 144(a) to (d))) that imitates the object of the operation (see FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) and has multiple aspects with different expectations is not hidden and may not be in the displayed state. (Refer to FIG. 227) (Refer to FIG. 227) (Refer to FIG. 227).

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the action object display (here, multiple modes imitating the object of the player's action and having different expectations) (see FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d))) is visible, and an action target display (here, a model image display that simulates the target of the player's action and has a high expectation level) is visible. Since there are cases where the sample image display (see FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) having multiple different aspects may not be visible, the tension after the reception performance starts is increased. It is now expected to maintain a suitable level of performance.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception period is determined according to the timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) when the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made. At the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the validity determination (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is started, the action target display ((see FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d))) is not displayed. (See FIG. 230) and when the operation target display ((See FIGS. 144(a) to (d))) is hidden (See FIG. 229). ).

That is, from the player's perspective, the sample image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))" among the multiple modes (see FIGS. 144(a) to (d)). When the reception is valid, it is possible to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (the 1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" has started, which will improve the game's interest. It can certainly be said that it is preferable for the purpose of achieving this goal. However, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see Figure 228(b))" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (in the 3C reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the corresponding 3rd C post-acceptance performance has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that during its validity period (3C reception period), the sample image display is "the first mode with low expectations (Fig. 228(b))". 228(d))" or "second mode with low expectations (see Figure 228(d))," there is a possibility that it will be executed in the highly expected mode (furthermore, the expected There is a possibility that it will be executed in a low-level manner). When the post-reception performance (the 3rd C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though this alone is sufficient to improve gaming interest, At this time, if the sample image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the sample image display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, the second mode with high expectations (the 228(d))", if the sample image display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. Therefore, it is desirable to continue displaying the sample image without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", some players may think that the presentation after reception is in the "first mode with low expectations". As an "excuse" when it is executed, I want to make sure that the sample image display is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution after reception starts. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode (see Figure 228(d))", some players may think that the post-reception effect is In order to reduce frustration when the performance is executed in a manner with low expectations, the sample image display is hidden so that it cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. I think there are people who want to do it.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3rd C reception period occurs, the player can play the game through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period (see FIGS. 222 and 223). Whether to start execution of the post-reception performance while the image display is displayed (see Figure 230) or to start execution of the post-reception performance when the sample image display is hidden and cannot be viewed (see Figure 229). (see), it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

In addition, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is displayed in a manner that can be displayed in the third C reception period (the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) and FIG. 228(d) (In the example shown in FIG. 227, the integrated model image display IGb) is not displayed in any of the integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. Even so, the operation target display is not displayed and is always in a hidden state at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance) based on the reception validity determination is started. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 2nd C acceptance period or the 3rd C acceptance period has occurred since the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, regarding the 3rd C reception period, even if no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) will be performed as when the action (operation) was performed. (The above-mentioned automatic reception function may be enabled). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, the operation target display (sample image) is displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance is executed. It is desirable to ensure that the display (display) is always displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the automatic reception function starts executing the 3rd C post-reception performance without the player's knowledge, the operation target display (sample image display) may be displayed in any form within the 3rd C reception period. You can easily recognize what is being displayed.

Further, when the "3rd C reception period" is targeted by the above-mentioned automatic reception function, a plurality of different timings may be prepared as the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled depending on the production mode and the like. However, regardless of when the automatic reception function is activated, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the corresponding It is desirable that the action target display (sample image display) be always displayed at the time when the effect is executed after receiving the 3C.

However, for the 2nd C reception period, when no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed is performed. It is desirable to prevent this from happening (the automatic reception function described above should not be enabled).

In addition, during the 3rd C reception period according to this embodiment, there are cases in which the execution of the 3C post-reception effect is started while the action target display (sample image display) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230), and the action Even if the execution of the 3C post-reception performance is started while the target display (sample image display) is hidden (see Figure 229), the 3C post-reception performance (3C (Specific effect after reception UTC3, 3rd C post-reception effect display UGC3, 3rd C post-reception effect sound, etc.) The aspects themselves are the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the performance mode from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the 3C post-reception performance and play the game.

Furthermore, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, there are cases where the performance after reception of the 3C starts while the operation target display (sample image display) is being displayed (see FIG. 230), and the operation target display (sample image display). Regardless of whether the execution of the 3C post-reception effect is started while the target display (sample image display) is hidden (see Fig. 229), the same mode (second A disappearance related display SKC2) is displayed. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that the reception has been properly completed during the third C reception period, regardless of the manner in which the performance is progressed.

In the above production example, apart from the 2nd C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, a 1C reception period is further prepared, and in the 1C reception period, the reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action is made at any time. Even if the action is performed at the timing of , the action object display is not hidden but always continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. In other words, in this case, the 3rd C reception period combines both the effects of the 1C reception period and the effects of the 2C reception period, making it possible to improve gaming interest. .

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is displayed in a form that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) and the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(d) (In the example shown in FIG. 225C, integrated model image display IGd) can be displayed in a manner different from any of the integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 1st C acceptance period or the 3rd C acceptance period has occurred since the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

On the other hand, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is also displayed in a manner that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b)). It has become something that can be done. In other words, in this case, when the integrated image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period is occurring. A sense of tension within the period can be suitably maintained.

Note that during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(d) is not displayed as the operation target display, and the integrated model image display IGa( (aspect 1) may be always displayed.

Further, prior to the occurrence of the third C acceptance period, a specific precursor effect display indicating that the player will be given an operation opportunity may be displayed. However, in this case, if the action target display (sample image display) is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution of the 3C post-reception performance is started, the execution of the 3C post-reception performance will not start. It is desirable that there are cases where a specific precursory effect display is displayed and cases where the specific precursory effect display is not displayed at a certain point in time. On the other hand, if the action target display (sample image display) is in a hidden state at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts to be executed, a specific precursor will appear at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts to be executed. It is desirable to ensure that the performance display is always displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there are a plurality of reception periods including the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, during which reception of actions (operations) by players (reception validity determination) is allowed. A reception period is available. Then, if a "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (the 1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) ) starts execution, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes, and as an aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) , for which multiple modes with different expectations are prepared) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see Figure 230). If a reception validity determination is made with ``Reception Validity Judgment'' is made, the remaining time display ( For example, it is a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared as modes for at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. ) are not hidden and may not be displayed (no matter which timing the reception is made, the frame image and gauge image will be hidden at the time when the production starts after the reception) (See Figure 227). The remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and its modes include multiple modes shown in FIGS. (Multiple modes) are available as a frame image to form the frame image.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" starts, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is decreased as time passes). 144 (a) to (d)), in which multiple modes with different expectations are prepared for at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. Since there will be cases where the remaining time display is not visible, it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception period is determined depending on at which timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made. At the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the validity determination (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is started, the remaining time display ((see FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d))) is not displayed. (see Figure 230) and the remaining time display ((see Figures 144(a) to (d))) is hidden (see Figure 229). ).

In other words, from the player's perspective, the remaining time is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))" among the multiple modes (see FIGS. 144(a) to (d)). When the reception is valid, it is possible to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" has started, which will improve the game's interest. It can certainly be said that it is preferable for the purpose of achieving this goal. However, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see Figure 228(b))" among the multiple modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (in the 3C reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the corresponding 3rd C post-acceptance performance has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period), within its validity period (3C reception period), the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) Regardless of whether the execution mode is displayed in the "second mode (see FIG. 228(b))" or the "second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(d))," it will be executed in the mode with high expectations. There is now a possibility (and even more, a possibility that it will be executed in a manner with low expectations). When the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the game's interest, At this time, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", the interest in the game will decrease. Since this is clear, it is desirable to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image). On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, "the second mode with high expectations (Fig. 228(d))", if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed, it is possible to reduce the interest in the game due to the post-reception performance being executed in a manner with low expectations. Since it is possible to appropriately suppress the remaining time display, it is desirable to continue displaying the remaining time (gauge image, frame image) without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", some players may not be able to see the performance after the reception. As an "excuse" when it is executed in a "low expected manner", the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden at the time the post-reception production starts execution. It seems that there are some people who would like to keep this display state, and the remaining time is displayed (gauge image, frame Even if a post-reception effect (image) is displayed, some players do not want the post-reception effect to be executed in order to reduce their ``frustration'' when the post-reception effect is executed in a ``low-expected manner.'' It seems that some people would like the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) to be hidden so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time the game starts.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3rd C reception period occurs, the player can use the remaining Either start execution of the post-reception effect while the time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed (see Figure 230), or the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and cannot be seen. Since it becomes possible to virtually select whether to start execution of the performance after acceptance in the current state (see FIG. 229), it is expected that interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the 2C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in a form that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b)). , and integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. 228(d) (in the example shown in FIG. 227, integrated model image display IGb), and at any timing " Even if "reception validity determination" is made, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance) based on the reception validity determination is started. Make sure it is always hidden. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 2nd C acceptance period or the 3rd C acceptance period has occurred since the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, regarding the 3rd C reception period, even if no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) will be performed as when the action (operation) was performed. (The above-mentioned automatic reception function may be enabled). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, the remaining time will be displayed (the gauge image , frame image) are always displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the automatic reception function starts execution of the 3C post-reception performance without the player's knowledge, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) will not be displayed during the 3C reception period. This makes it easier to recognize whether the image is being displayed in the same way as the image.

Further, when the "3rd C reception period" is targeted by the above-mentioned automatic reception function, a plurality of different timings may be prepared as the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled depending on the production mode and the like. However, regardless of when the automatic reception function is activated, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the corresponding It is desirable that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) be always displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception effect is executed.

However, for the 2nd C reception period, when no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed is performed. It is desirable to prevent this from happening (the automatic reception function described above should not be enabled).

Also, in the 3rd C reception period according to this embodiment, when the 3C post reception effect starts to be executed while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230). , or when the performance after receiving the 3rd C is started while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see Figure 229). The aspects of the effects (such as the specific effect UTC3 after receiving the 3rd C, the effect display UGC3 after receiving the 3rd C, and the effect sound after receiving the 3rd C) are the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the performance mode from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the 3C post-reception performance and play the game.

Furthermore, in the 3rd C reception period according to this embodiment, there is a case where execution of the 3C post-reception effect is started while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230). , or when the 3rd C reception effect starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see Figure 229), the display related to disappearance is the same. The mode (second extinction related display SKC2) is displayed. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that the reception has been properly completed during the third C reception period, regardless of the manner in which the performance is progressed.

In the above production example, apart from the 2nd C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, a 1C reception period is further prepared, and in the 1C reception period, the reception validity judgment that determines the action by the player as a valid action is made at any time. Even if it is done at the timing of , the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) will not be hidden and will always continue to be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment starts. I try to be that way. In other words, in this case, the 3rd C reception period combines both the effects of the 1C reception period and the effects of the 2C reception period, making it possible to improve gaming interest. .

Further, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in a manner that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b)). , and the integrated model image display IGc) shown in FIG. 228(d) (in the example shown in FIG. 225(c), the integrated model image display IGd) can be displayed. . In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 1st C acceptance period or the 3rd C acceptance period has occurred since the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

On the other hand, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in a manner that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model shown in FIG. 228(b)). It can also be displayed using the image display IGa). In other words, in this case, when the integrated image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1st C reception period or the 3rd C reception period is occurring. A sense of tension within the period can be suitably maintained.

Note that during the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(d) is not displayed as the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image), and the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 228(b) is not displayed. The integrated image display IGa (first aspect) may be always displayed.

Further, prior to the occurrence of the third C acceptance period, a specific precursor effect display indicating that the player will be given an operation opportunity may be displayed. However, in this case, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the 3rd C post-reception performance starts, the 3C post-reception performance will be executed. It is desirable that there are cases where a specific precursor effect display is displayed at the time of starting, and cases where the specific precursor effect display is not displayed. On the other hand, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the execution of the 3rd C post-reception performance starts, the specified time will be specified at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts. It is desirable that the foreshadowing effect display is always displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a 1C acceptance period and a 3C acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, based on the reception validity determination being made, there are multiple modes with different expectations (see Figure 3). 229 (d1) to (h1), or high expectation mode shown in FIG. 229 (d2) to (h2)), it is possible to execute the performance after the 3rd C reception, and during the 1C reception period. 226 (d1) to (226(d1) to (226)). The performance after the 1C reception can be executed in either the low expectation mode shown in h1) or the high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 226(d2) to (h2).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is At the time when execution starts, the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed and is in a hidden state. There are cases. On the other hand, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) starts to be executed. , so that the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple aspects with different expectations) is not displayed and is not in a hidden state. There is. The sample image display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated sample image display IG, and a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d) are prepared as its mode.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the action target display (sample image display) is visible, and the action target display (sample image display) is visible. ) may not be visible, so it is expected to suitably maintain the tension after the reception performance starts.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" before the arrival of timing Y within the 3C reception period (see FIG. 222), the action target display (sample image display) is set to a hidden state at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. Although not displayed, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" after timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (see Figure 223), the action target The execution of the 3rd C post-reception effect is started while the display (sample image display) is being displayed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the sample image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))" among the multiple modes, after the reception based on the "valid reception determination" It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying the performance (the 3rd C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) even after the performance starts, in order to improve the game's interest. However, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see Figure 228(b))" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (in the 3C reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the corresponding 3rd C post-acceptance performance has started, a decline in game interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period), within its validity period (3C reception period), the sample image display is “low expectation first aspect (Fig. 228(b)). 228(d))" or "second mode with low expectations (see Figure 228(d))," there is a possibility that it will be executed in the highly expected mode (furthermore, the expected There is a possibility that it will be executed in a low-level manner). When the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the game's interest, At this time, if the sample image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the sample image display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, "the second mode with high expectations (Fig. 228(d))", if the sample image display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest due to the execution of the post-reception performance in a manner with low expectations. Therefore, it is desirable to continue displaying the sample image without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", some players may think that the presentation after reception is in the "first mode with low expectations". As an "excuse" when it is executed, I want to make sure that the sample image display is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution after reception starts. Even if the sample image display is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode (see Figure 228(d))", some players may think that the post-reception effect is In order to reduce frustration when the performance is executed in a manner with low expectations, the sample image display is hidden so that it cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. I think there are people who want to do it.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (3rd C reception period) occurs, the player can "enable the player's operation" until timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives. If the "reception validity determination for operation" is made, it is possible to start execution of the post-reception performance while the sample image display is hidden and cannot be seen, and the timing is within the 3C reception period. If the "reception validity determination that makes the player's action a valid action" is not made until the arrival of Y, at that point, the post-reception performance starts to be executed while the sample image display is not being displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the user will be manipulated, anyone who seeks such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

According to such a configuration, during the 3C reception period, the player is given the "right to choose whether or not to start the production after reception while the sample image display remains displayed", and the 1C During the reception period, players are not given the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the sample image display remains displayed, and the post-reception performance is always performed with the sample image display always displayed. It will function as a starting point.

In this regard, in the 3C reception period that grants such selection rights, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 3C reception period (if there is no reception validity determination), the reception validity determination will be made. During the 1C reception period in which the same post-reception performance as before is not executed (the automatic performance function is not enabled) and such selection rights are not granted, actions (operations) by the player will not be accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (if there is no reception validity determination), it is desirable that the same post-reception performance as when the reception validity determination was made is executed (the automatic performance function is enabled). According to such a configuration, when the third C acceptance period occurs, in exchange for granting the above-mentioned selection right, relief when an operation is forgotten will not be provided. As a result, when the 3rd C reception period occurs, the post-reception performance itself will not be performed unless a decision is made within a limited time about which one to select, thereby suitably imparting a sense of tension. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned selection right will not be granted, but even if the reception is not completed in time during the 1C reception period, the post-reception performance will be executed properly. Because of this, it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming. In this case, if the post-reception performance when an operation is forgotten during the 1C reception period is also started while the sample image display continues to be displayed, it will be possible to perform the post-reception performance even when an operation is forgotten during the 1C reception period. Therefore, it is possible to not grant the above-mentioned selection right.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a 1C acceptance period and a 3C acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, based on the reception validity determination being made, there are multiple modes with different expectations (see Figure 3). 229 (d1) to (h1), or high expectation mode shown in FIG. 229 (d2) to (h2)), it is possible to execute the performance after the 3rd C reception, and during the 1C reception period. 226 (d1) to (226(d1) to (226)). The performance after the 1C reception can be executed in either the low expectation mode shown in h1) or the high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 226(d2) to (h2).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is At the time when execution starts, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time elapses, and as an aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, the expected (For which multiple modes with different degrees are prepared) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. On the other hand, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) starts to be executed. , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations) (prepared items) are not displayed and are not in a hidden state. Note that the remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and a plurality of modes shown in FIGS.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible. images and gauge images) may not be made visible, so it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension after the reception performance starts.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" before the arrival of timing Y within the 3C reception period (see FIG. 222), the remaining time is displayed (the frame image and the gauge image are hidden) at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) starts to be executed. Although it is not displayed, if "a reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action" after timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (see Figure 223), the remaining While the time display (frame image and gauge image) is being displayed, the execution of the 3rd C reception effect is started.

That is, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" among the plurality of modes, "reception validity determination" is made. It is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on ``3C reception period'' has started, in order to improve gaming enjoyment. . However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))" among the multiple modes, the post-reception performance based on the "reception validity determination" ( If this continues to be displayed even after the execution of the 3rd C post-reception performance (corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) has started, a decline in gaming interest is inevitable.

For example, in the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period), within its validity period (3C reception period), the remaining time display is "1st aspect with low expectations (Fig. 228(b) 228(d))" or "second mode with low expectations (see Figure 228(d))," there is a possibility that it will be executed in the highly expected mode (furthermore, the expected There is a possibility that it will be executed in a low-level manner). When the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a highly anticipated manner, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the game's interest, At this time, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the remaining time display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, at this time, "the second mode with high expectations (Fig. 228(d))", if the remaining time display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest due to the post-reception performance being executed in a manner with low expectations. Therefore, it is desirable to continue displaying the remaining time without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))", some players may think that the presentation after reception is in the "first mode with low expectations". As an "excuse" when it is executed, I want to make sure that the remaining time display is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the execution after reception starts. Even if the remaining time is displayed in the "highly anticipated second mode (see Figure 228(d))", some players may think that the post-reception performance is In order to reduce frustration when the performance is executed in a manner with low expectations, the remaining time display is hidden so that it cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. I think there are people who want to do it.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (3rd C reception period) occurs, the player can "enable the player's operation" until timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives. If the "reception validity determination for operation" is made, it is possible to start execution of the post-reception performance while the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be seen, and the timing is within the 3C reception period. If the "reception validity determination that makes the player's action a valid action" is not made until the arrival of Y, at that point, the post-reception performance starts to be executed even though the remaining time display is not displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the user will be manipulated, anyone who seeks such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

According to such a configuration, during the 3C reception period, the player is given the "right to choose whether or not to start the production after reception while the remaining time display remains displayed", and the 1C During the reception period, the player is not given the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception performance with the remaining time displayed, and the post-reception performance is always performed with the remaining time displayed. It will function as a starting point.

In this regard, during the 3C reception period that grants such selection rights, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 3C reception period (if there is no reception validity determination), the reception validity determination will be made. During the 1C reception period in which the same post-reception performance as when the 1C reception period is not executed (the automatic performance function is not activated) and such selection rights are not granted, actions (operations) by the player are not accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (if there is no reception validity determination), it is desirable that the same post-reception performance as when the reception validity determination was made is executed (the automatic performance function is enabled). According to such a configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, in exchange for granting the above-mentioned selection right, relief when an operation is forgotten will not be provided. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the post-reception performance itself will not be performed unless a decision such as "which one to select" is made within a limited time, and a sense of tension is suitably imparted. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned selection right will not be granted, but even if the reception is not completed in time during the 1C reception period, the post-reception performance will be executed properly. Because of this, it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming. In this case, if you start the post-reception performance when you forget to perform an operation during the 1C reception period while the remaining time display continues to be displayed, you can also perform the post-reception performance even when you forget to perform an operation during the 1C reception period. Therefore, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned selection right.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including a 1C reception period and a 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed using at least a specific area. Then, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid motion" is made within the 1C reception period, based on the determination that the reception is valid, one of the multiple modes with different expectations It is possible to execute the performance after receiving the 1C, and if a "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, the expectation level will be increased based on the reception validity determination. It is possible to perform the performance after receiving the third C in any of a plurality of different modes. Also, at the time when the execution of the 1st C post-reception performance and the 3rd C post-reception performance is started, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) ) may be displayed instead of hidden.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, in both cases where the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period and the case where the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the reception validity determination is Based on the fact that Since it is made executable, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the reception validity determination has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the reception of the operation by the player).

In addition, as mentioned above, during the 3C reception period, depending on at which timing (first period, second period, etc.) the "reception validity determination" that determines the player's action as a valid action is made, the 3C reception period When the execution of the 3rd C post-reception effect corresponding to 3C is started, there are cases where the integrated image display IG is not hidden but is displayed, and cases where the integrated image display IG is not displayed (visible). In some cases, the patient may be unable to do so. On the other hand, during the 1C reception period, the integrated image display IG is always displayed, regardless of when the reception validity determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). It has become so. By preparing the 1st C reception period in which such an integrated image display IG is always displayed separately from the above-mentioned 3C reception period, combined with the configuration in which the extinction EF effect is executed, a sense of security can be achieved. It becomes possible to provide a certain level of performance, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

During the 1C reception period, if the corresponding post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) is executed in a high expectation mode (FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2)), the extinction EF performance (extinction related display) A specific mode (Fig. 226 (e2) to (g2)) that is also used during the 3C reception period appears, but if it is different from the high expectation mode, the specific mode (Fig. 226 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear, but a mode different from this (Fig. 226 (e1) to (g1)) appears, or it is desirable that the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) itself does not appear. According to this configuration, when the extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed corresponding to the 3C reception period, it becomes possible to create an image as if a highly anticipated effect is being executed, and the game It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the 1C reception period, the acceptance permission sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the 3C reception period, the reception permission sound may be output in only "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the acceptance acceptance sound having the "one aspect" is output, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the 3C acceptance period having the above-mentioned two effects is occurring. By being able to do this, you will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the first C reception period occurs. Further, in this case, it is desirable that the "first aspect" be output as the aspect with the lowest expectation level. In this case, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even in a situation where the acceptance acceptance sound is output in a manner with the lowest level of expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the 1st C acceptance period and the 3rd C acceptance period may occur sequentially within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the first C reception period occurs after the third C reception period occurs. Further, in this case, the first C reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable to allow the second C reception period to occur between the occurrence of the third C reception period and the occurrence of the first C reception period.

Further, it is preferable that the foreshadowing performance that is output when the first C reception period occurs and the foreshadowing performance that is output when the third C reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 1st C acceptance period and the 3rd C acceptance period will occur using the foreshadowing effect.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, as the extinction EF effect (disappearance related display), a specific mode (for example, second extinction related display SKC2) will appear if there is a reception, and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode ( For example, it is desirable that the third disappearance related display SKC3) appears or that no aspect appears at all. On the other hand, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when there is a reception appears as an extinction EF effect (extinction related display). In other words, the performance based on the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" (the performance in which the sample image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the performance starts after reception) and the performance based on the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" During the 3C reception period, it may be difficult to select the performance type. Therefore, it can be said that failure to operate (end of reception period without reception) is more likely to occur than in the above-mentioned "1C reception period". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if an operation is forgotten during the 3rd C reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction related display SKC2) when the reception is made will not appear. It is now possible to appeal to players that they are in a situation where they have forgotten to perform an operation, and from now on, it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become. On the other hand, there are no elements that are likely to be forgotten during the 1C reception period. Despite this, if the action is not accepted, there is a possibility that the player intentionally made a gaming choice not to make the action. If you "advertise the fact that you are in a situation where you have forgotten to operate", the interest in the game may actually decrease. Therefore, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same aspect as when there is a reception appears as an extinction EF effect (extinction related display).

In particular, in the 1C reception period for the above-mentioned production example, the mode of extinction EF production (disappearance related display) differs depending on the mode (expectation level) of production after reception of 1C (see Figure 226). reference). Therefore, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, if the same appearance as when there was a reception is made to appear as the extinction EF effect (extinction related display), then it will be the same as when there was a reception. It becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) related to the performance after receiving the first C, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

During the 1C reception period and 3C reception period, the integrated image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed on the operation receiving section when the player's action is accepted. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display be executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the area reduction of the gauge image continue.

In addition, each of the above-mentioned production examples and other examples may be realized by transforming them into the following configurations, or the following configuration (reception period) may be further modified as another reception period for different types of post-reception productions. You may prepare it. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period are at least the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period. We are prepared. Of these, during the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is made executable based on the reception of the player's action (operation) (acceptance validity determination). As mentioned above, during the 2C reception period, even if the player's action (operation) is accepted (acceptance validity determination), the extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is not executed.

In this regard, if a player's action (operation) is accepted during the 1C reception period (reception valid determination), the 1C post-reception performance will be adjusted based on the reception (reception validity determination). The extinction EF performance (disappearance related display) is the same in the case where the 1C post-reception performance is performed in a manner with a high expectation level (the rate at which jackpot symbols appear). may be made executable. Furthermore, when applying such a configuration to the example shown in FIG. 226, any mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 226(d1) to (h1), the mode shown in FIG. 226(d2) Regardless of whether the modes shown in ~(h2)) appear, and regardless of whether or not the reception was made within the 1C reception period (the modes shown in FIGS. 226(d3) to (g3)), It is desirable that one predetermined mode always appear as the extinction EF effect. In other words, the 1C reception period means that no matter when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the period (and even if the reception is not received), the period ends. After the completion, the display of the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) continues. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "In which form the integrated image display IG (image image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if further different information is provided by the extinction EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will become too complicated. In this regard, according to such a 1C reception period, any form (aspects shown in FIGS. 226(d1) to (h1), 226(d2) to (h2) 226 (d3) to (g3)), regardless of whether the mode) appears, and whether or not it is accepted within the 1C reception period (modes shown in FIGS. 226(d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF effect is determined in advance. The above-mentioned concerns can be resolved because the one aspect that is specified will always appear.

In addition, if a player's action (operation) is accepted during the 3C acceptance period (reception valid determination), the 3C post-reception performance will be adjusted based on the acceptance (reception valid determination). The extinguishing EF effect can be executed in different ways depending on whether it is executed in a manner with a low rate of appearance (proportion of appearance) and in a manner where the 3C post-reception performance is executed with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). You can do it like this. The 3C reception period has the above-mentioned two effects, and it can be said that it is positioned as a ``reception period with a high degree of difficulty'', so even after the reception has been completed, the integrated simulation will be continued. It is important for the player to be able to obtain different performance information from both the image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the disappearing EF effect. It is desirable to provide a stimulating effect on the performance.

Note that when such a configuration is applied to the examples shown in FIGS. 229 and 230, the disappearing EF effect that appears when no reception is made is the same as the disappearing EF effect that may appear when an acceptance is made. It is desirable that the EF performance be different from any of the multiple modes. This makes it possible to recognize that the reception has not been made, and the reception period is different from the effect of the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2C reception period". It becomes possible to suggest that it was a combination of both.

In addition, as mentioned above, in another example for the 3C reception period, if the reception is made during the "first period (first state)" within the 3C reception period, the integrated model image will be processed after the reception is made. The display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed. In other words, in this case, information such as "In what form was the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) displayed" after the acceptance was made is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information based on the disappearing EF performance (expectation level information regarding the performance after reception) in order to improve the game's interest.

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 1C acceptance period (determined as valid acceptance), the extinction EF effect will be executed in a manner different from the manner in which it appears when the acceptance is made. You may also do so. This makes it possible to recognize that the application has not been received, and if the aspect cannot occur during the 3C reception period, the reception period is the "1C reception period" mentioned above. This makes it possible to suggest that the product did not have both the effect of the above-mentioned presentation and the effect of the above-mentioned "Second C reception period."

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 3C acceptance period (acceptance valid determination), the extinction EF effect will be executed in the same manner as it appears when the acceptance is accepted. You can.

Regarding these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of the configurations to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one configuration (modified example) may be applied to the above-mentioned presentation example or another example thereof.

Next, a case will be described in which some of the above-mentioned modifications are applied to the above-mentioned presentation examples. That is, FIG. 231 is a modified example of "the effect that appears when an acceptance is made or not accepted in the 1C acceptance period" shown in FIG. 226, and FIGS. (Acceptance in the 1st period) and Fig. 230 (Acceptance in the 2nd period) This is a modified example of “the effect that appears when an acceptance is made or not accepted in the 3C acceptance period”. be. In this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are "Examples of effects related to the 1st C reception period (Figs. 216 to 218, Figs. 225, 226)" and ``Examples of effects related to the 3rd C reception period (Figs. 222 to 226)''. 224, Figures 228 to 230), and regarding each of the above-mentioned separate examples that can be applied to the ``Example of presentation related to the 1st C reception period'' and ``Example of presentation related to the 3rd C reception period.'' is similarly applicable.

In the modification shown in FIG. 231, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted (reception valid determination) during the 1C reception period, the 1C post-reception performance is expected based on the reception (reception validity determination). When the performance is performed in a manner with a low degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 231 (d1) to (h1)), and in a manner with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 231 (d1) to (h1)), The extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed in the same manner as when executed in FIGS. 231(d2) to (h2)). Here, the second extinction related display SKC2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 231, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) during the 1C acceptance period (see FIG. 231 (d3) to (g3)), As the extinguishing EF effect, a mode that does not appear when the player's action (operation) is accepted (reception validity determination) is made to appear during the 1C acceptance period. Here, the third extinction related display SKC3 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modified example shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception valid determination) during the 3C reception period, based on the acceptance (reception valid determination), When the 3C post-reception performance is executed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figures 232 (d1) to (h1) and Figures 233 (d3) to (h3)), Different modes depending on when the 3C post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figures 232 (d2) to (h2) and Figures 233 (d4) to (h4)). The extinction EF effect is now executed. Here, when executed in a manner with low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 232 (d1) to (h1) and Fig. 233 (d3) to (h3)), the extinguishing EF effect is 1 disappearance related display SKC1 is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figures 232 (d2) to (h2) and Figures 233 (d4) to (h4)) A second disappearance related display SKC2 is executed as a disappearance EF effect. As mentioned above, Figures 232 (d1) to (h1) and Figures 232 (d2) to (h2) show the effects that appear when the application is accepted in the first period of the 3C reception period according to the modification. The details of the progress are shown in Figures 233 (d3) to (h3) and Figures 233 (d4) to (h4) when the application is accepted in the second period within the 3C acceptance period for the modification. This shows the progress of the production that appears in the scene.

In addition, in the modified example shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period (see FIGS. 233 (d5) to (g5)) ) appears as an extinction EF effect that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period. That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233(d5) to (g5), since the first extinction related display SKC1 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 3C reception period ( 233 (d3) to (h3) (if the reception was accepted in the first period, the performance progress shown in FIG. 232 (d1) to (h1)). be able to recognize that it has occurred. On the other hand, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (determined as valid reception) during the 3C reception period, and the second extinction related display SKC2 is displayed as the extinction EF effect, the 3C reception period If the player's action (operation) is accepted (determined as valid acceptance) in , the performance progresses as shown in FIG. 233 (d4) to (h4) (if it is accepted in the first period, then ) to (h2)) can be recognized as occurring.

In the 1C reception period according to such a modification, as the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) that appears when the reception is made, the post-reception performance (after 3C reception) corresponding to the above 3C reception period according to the modification ``Second disappearance related display SKC2'' that is displayed when the performance) is executed in a highly anticipated manner is used. That is, in this case, in the 1C reception period according to the modified example, it is possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner as long as the reception is completed, and the game You will be able to improve your interest.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the third C reception period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be the "second extinction-related display SKC2." For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period according to the modified example, the after-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKC1" that is displayed when It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not an application has been accepted during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modification, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the "third disappearance related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). It is intended to be displayed.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKC3" not be displayed in connection with the third C reception period according to the modification. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the reception period is limited to the above-mentioned "1C reception period" and the above-mentioned "1C reception period." It becomes possible to suggest that it was not a combination of both the performance and the performance of the ``2C reception period''.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKC3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first C acceptance period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the 1C acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

Note that even in the 3C reception period according to this modification, the player must receive the request before the timing tV2 when a state (3C reception period) in which "determination of reception validity in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed occurs (3C reception period). Even if there is an action (operation), the action (operation) will not be judged as "valid reception" at that time, but it will be determined at the start of the relevant 3C reception period (or after that). ), a configuration according to the above-mentioned separate example, which makes it possible to make a "reception validity determination" targeting (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the 3C reception period. It is possible to apply the following.

In the 3rd C reception period according to the above modification, if a low expectation mode appears as a performance after the 3rd C reception (see Fig. 232 (d1) to (h1) or Fig. 233 (d3) to (h3)), it disappears. Although the first extinction related display SKC1 is executed as the EF effect, the extinction EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1C reception period according to the above modification, a specific mode appears as a disappearing EF effect when there is a reception (Fig. 231 (d1) to (h1) and Fig. 231 (d2) to (h2)). When there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode appears (FIG. 231 (d3) to (g3)), but the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear when there is no reception.

In addition, in the first C reception period according to the above modification, when there is a reception, the second extinction related display SKC2 is executed as a specific mode (extinction EF effect), but this is different from the second extinction related display SKC2. It may also be executed in a different manner. For example, even if it is executed in the first disappearance related display SKC1, it is difficult to determine whether the reception was made in the 1st C reception period or the 3C reception period. It can be made difficult to recognize.

[Omen stock performance]
As explained using FIG. 118 as an example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) that are prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a production judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.) regarding which of the expected productions (preliminary presentation etc.) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, so that the jackpot judgment can be performed. A fluctuating performance using a decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessories performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating performance using the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is rewarded with a jackpot game and a high reward. Transition to the stochastic gaming state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is permitted.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even if a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). ), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) in which presentation acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is performed as a performance (post-reception performance).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed, and the actions (operations) by the player are accepted within the acceptance period. Then, a display change (post-reception effect) is caused depending on the type of reception period that occurred. More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 includes a "motion detection means (such as a sensor) that detects a motion (operation) by a player" and a "detection information storage means (peripheral control) that stores information detected by the motion detection means". (RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.)" and "acceptance period can be generated, and a reception validity determination is made to determine whether a player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means. If it is done within the reception period, the reception-related performance execution means (peripheral control MPU 1511a, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.) that can execute the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period. There is.

Furthermore, during the acceptance period, an action target display indicating which "target of the player's action" is to be displayed can be displayed. Such an action object display can be displayed, for example, as a model image display in which an object (operating means) that is the object of an action by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this performance example is displayed as a "simulation image display" that imitates the object of the player's action and has a plurality of aspects with different expectations.

Furthermore, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which actions (operations) by the player are allowed to be accepted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this production example, multiple aspects (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image decreases, the level of expectation, and the type of operation means) are used as aspects of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. It is intended to be implemented in one of these ways. Different expectations (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may be suggested depending on which mode the game is executed.

In addition, in the event that a reception period occurs, a precursor effect that suggests that the player will be given an opportunity to perform an action (suggesting that the reception period will occur) can be performed before this period. There is. The foreshadowing performance is, for example, performed by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 or outputting a corresponding sound.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. Regardless of which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance state (validity period) at a predetermined timing are not included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). However, it is desirable (though not necessarily required) to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate).

By the way, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc. means that as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period), the acceptance of display changes on the effect display device 1600 is allowed. Since the post-operation display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect movement by the movable decorative body, etc. are only generated. The performance itself is poor, and there is concern that interest in the game will decline due to the application period.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the "operation (movement) by the player" to be detected refers to the "operation (movement) by the player" such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword ornament 5001". It is not limited to things that are directly operated by the player (pressing motion or sword drawing motion), but also "touch motions by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by touch sensors, and "game movements within a specific space" that can be detected by non-contact sensors. The meaning also includes ``actions by the player in the game''. In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operating means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effects are provided regarding acceptance of "operations (movements) by players". Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to suppress the decrease in It is also possible to adopt the configurations described as "preferred applications" as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decline in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1-C]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods, and a specific effect display can be displayed as a precursor effect. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to the configuration 1-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good. Further, the "specific effect display" according to the configuration 1-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" in other configurations, or it may mean a different effect display from the "specific effect display" in other configurations. It's okay.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if a player performs a movement while a specific performance display is being displayed, the movement is detected by the movement detection means (sensor, etc.), and the movement is detected. The information is stored by the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.), and based on the stored detection information, the reception validity determination that determines that the player's action is a valid action is made as specified above. We make sure that it may be done within the acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much momentum while the premonitory performance (specific performance display) is being executed, the post-acceptance performance can be started using this as an opportunity. It has become possible to maintain the interest in gaming through such flexible performances.

As will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 1-C", the player performs an action before the specific reception period occurs and when a specific effect display is being displayed. Even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. Then, within the specific acceptance period, the game is played based on the detected information stored by the detected information storage means before the specific acceptance period occurs and when the specific effect display is displayed. In some cases, a reception validity determination is made that makes the action by the person a valid operation (stock reception performance), and if the reception validity determination is made, at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started, A specific effect display may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action "within the execution period of the precursor effect" before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the detection of the action is performed appropriately. , the detection information may be stored and retained until the specific acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" may be made within the specified reception period based on detection information obtained before the specified reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the specified reception period occurs, the player may not perform the action again after the specified reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance. In addition, at this time, when the specific reception period has not yet occurred (the specific production display is being displayed) and the performance starts to be executed after reception due to an excessive movement (operation), Since the performance display is not hidden but is displayed, the relevant post-reception performance can be detected by the action performed by the player while the specific performance display is being displayed. This makes it possible to suitably recognize that the execution has started based on the information).

[Configuration 2-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a first sign corresponding to the first reception period is prepared. In the performance, the first performance display is displayed, and in the second precursor performance corresponding to the second reception period, the second performance display can be displayed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations. Further, the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" according to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it means the same effect display as the "first effect display (or the opposite second effect display)" and the "second effect display (or the reverse first effect display)" in other configurations. It may mean a different effect display (for example, a specific effect display, etc.) from the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" according to other configurations. Good too.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action (operation) while either the first effect display or the second effect display is being displayed, the action will not be performed as described above. Detected by the detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and based on the stored detection information, the acceptance validity determination that the player's action is a valid action is made during the first reception period or the second reception period. Since the action may be made within the acceptance period, even if the player moves with too much force while the precursor effect (first effect display or second effect display) is being executed, Taking this as an opportunity, it has become possible to start performances after reception, and it has become possible to maintain interest in the game suitably through such flexible performances.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. In other words, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, if the player performs an action before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. In both the first reception period and the second reception period, the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed. To make it possible to determine whether an action by a player is a valid action based on information (stock reception performance). Then, a game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the first reception period, before the first reception period occurs, and when the precursor effect is being executed. If a reception validity determination is made in which the action by the person is a valid action, at least a portion of the above-mentioned simulated image display is always displayed at the time when execution of the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. do it like this. On the other hand, based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second reception period, before the second reception period occurs, and when the precursor effect is being executed. If it is determined that the reception is valid and that the action by the player is a valid operation, at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started, even a part of the sample image display will not be displayed. do. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether the first reception period or the second reception period Therefore, the player may act (operate) with too much force before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs. Even in the case where the reception period ends, the user can enjoy the post-reception performance without redoing the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, in the event that an action (operation) is performed with excessive force before the first reception period occurs, at least a portion of the above-mentioned sample image display will be Although it is always displayed, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the second reception period occurs, the above sample image Since even a part of the display is not displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the post-reception performance is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before either reception period occurs). This makes it possible to suitably suggest whether the player made a certain move or not.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. In other words, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, if the player performs an action before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. In both the first reception period and the second reception period, the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed. To make it possible to determine whether acceptance is valid and determines that a movement by a player is a valid movement based on information. Then, a game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the first reception period, before the first reception period occurs, and when the precursor effect is being executed. If a reception validity determination is made in which the action by the person is a valid operation, at least a portion of the remaining time display is always displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. do it like this. On the other hand, based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second reception period, before the second reception period occurs, and when the precursor effect is being executed. If it is determined that the reception is valid and that the action by the player is a valid operation, the remaining time display will not be displayed even in part at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started. do. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether the first reception period or the second reception period Therefore, the player may act (operate) with too much force before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs. Even in the case where the reception period ends, the user can enjoy the post-reception performance without redoing the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, if you perform an action (operation) with too much momentum before the first reception period occurs, at least a part of the remaining time display will be Although it is always displayed, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the second reception period occurs, the remaining time will be displayed at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception effect based on this starts to be executed. Since even a part of the display is not displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the post-reception performance is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before either reception period occurs). This makes it possible to suitably suggest whether the player made a certain move or not.

Note that "the sample image display and the remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 2-C, but also refers to a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen in other configurations. That's fine. For example, the meaning includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

[Configuration 3-C]
Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to Configuration 3-C is only a name used to explain the technical concept of Configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if no movement by the player is detected during the specified acceptance period, even if the above-mentioned reception is determined to be valid and the reception corresponding to the specified acceptance period is Since performances are sometimes executed, it is expected that the game's interest can be suitably maintained through such flexible performances.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. In other words, a specific effect display is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and when the specific effect display is displayed before the specific reception period occurs, Even when a movement is performed by the player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, within the specific reception period, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the specific reception period and when the specific effect display is being displayed is used. (stock reception performance), and when the reception is determined to be valid, the sample image display is displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination starts Make sure it's not done. On the other hand, if the reception validity determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the specific reception period", at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination starts execution. , so that a sample image display may be displayed. When these configurations are adopted, if a "valid reception determination that a player's action is a valid action" is made within the specified reception period based on detection information obtained before the specified reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the specified reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the specified reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after reception without any hassle. Moreover, depending on whether or not the sample image display is being displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production starts, it is possible to determine whether or not it is before the specific reception period occurs and the specific production display is being displayed. At times, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the reception validity determination has been made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means.

Note that the "specific effect display" according to the configuration 3-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" in other configurations, or it may mean a different effect display from the "specific effect display" in other configurations. You can.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-C" is adopted, each of the following configurations may be adopted. In other words, a specific effect display is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and when the specific effect display is displayed before the specific reception period occurs, Even when a movement is performed by the player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, within the specific reception period, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the specific reception period and when the specific effect display is being displayed is used. (stock reception effect), and if the reception is judged to be valid, the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity judgment starts. Make sure it's not done. On the other hand, if the reception validity determination is made based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the specific reception period", at the time when the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination starts execution. , the remaining time may be displayed. When these configurations are adopted, if a "valid reception determination that a player's action is a valid action" is made within the specified reception period based on detection information obtained before the specified reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the specified reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the specified reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after reception without any hassle. Furthermore, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production starts, it is possible to determine whether or not it is before the specific reception period occurs and the specific production display is being displayed. At times, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the reception validity determination has been made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means.

Note that "the sample image display and the remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 3-C, but also refers to a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen in other configurations. That's fine. For example, the meaning includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

[Configuration 4-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the first reception period occurs, the corresponding Even if no movement by the player is detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period, it is possible to execute the first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period, and when the second reception period occurs, the corresponding Even if no movement by the player is detected by the movement detecting means within the second reception period, the second post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period can be executed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to configuration 4-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the performance after the first reception starts without the movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period. As a result, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the said "Configuration 4-C", the timing at which the execution of the performance after the first reception starts without the movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period. Therefore, at least a first timing and a second timing are prepared, and at the first timing, the above reception is valid based on the movement (detection information) by the player detected before the first reception period occurs. When the judgment is made within the first reception period, the execution of the first reception performance is started (stock reception performance), and at the second timing, the player The execution of the first post-reception effect may be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing) without detecting any operation by the user.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 4-C", in the second reception period, "the above-mentioned It is possible to make the execution of the second post-reception effect start when the reception validity determination is made within the second reception period (stock reception effect), but it is also possible to Also, it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the execution of the second post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detecting any action by the player.

If both of these configurations are provided, in both the first reception period and the second reception period, the reception period is determined based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the reception period occurs. The above-mentioned reception validity determination can be made within the process (stock reception performance), and thereby it becomes possible to start executing the post-reception performance. Moreover, during the first reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, a post-reception performance will be executed as a relief based on the arrival of a predetermined timing. From now on, you will be able to take on the challenge of ``stock reception production'' with confidence. On the other hand, in the second reception period, if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance will not be executed as a relief, so a sense of tension is suitably imparted. You will be able to do it.

[Configuration 5-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period, and when a specific acceptance period occurs, a player cannot enter the game within the specific acceptance period. The specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance even if the motion is not detected by the motion detection means. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to Configuration 5-C is only a name used to explain the technical concept of Configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first timing and the second timing are the timings at which the execution of the performance after the specific reception is started without the movement of the player being detected by the motion detection means within the specific reception period. As a result, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 5-C", when the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started at the first timing, the above-mentioned sample image display is Although not displayed, if the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started at the second timing, the above-mentioned sample image display may be displayed at the time when the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 5-C", when the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started at the first timing, the remaining time display is Although not displayed, when the specific post-reception performance is started at the second timing, the remaining time display may be displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance is started. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 5-C", a specific effect display is displayed as a precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and the execution of the specific post-reception effect is started at the first timing. In this case, the specific effect display is displayed at the time when the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed, but when the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed at the second timing, the specific post-reception effect does not start to be executed. The specific effect display may not be displayed at the time of the display. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started.

Note that "the sample image display, the remaining time display, and the specific effect display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 5-C, but also includes the sample image display, remaining time display, and specific effect display in other configurations. It is sufficient if the effect display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen. For example, the meaning includes a state where an image is displayed on a layer but is rendered invisible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

Further, the "specific effect display" related to the configuration 5-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" in other configurations, or it may mean a different effect display from the "specific effect display" in other configurations. You can.

[Configuration 6-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period, and when a specific acceptance period occurs, a player cannot enter the game within the specific acceptance period. A specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance even if the motion is not detected by the motion detection means. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to Configuration 6-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of Configuration 6-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the timings at which the performance after the specific reception is started without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detection means within the specific reception period are at least the first timing and the second timing. I try to make sure that there is. Furthermore, if the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect is started at a second timing without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detecting means within the specific acceptance period, an extinguished EF display can be displayed, and the extinguished EF display can be displayed. When the display is displayed, the operation promotion display is made difficult to visually recognize, thereby making it possible to appropriately recognize that the specific acceptance period has ended.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 6-C", the execution of the above-mentioned post-specific reception performance is started at the first timing without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the specified reception period. Although the extinguished EF display can be displayed even when the extinguished EF display is displayed, a display different from the operation promotion display may be made difficult to visually recognize when the extinguished EF display is displayed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started at the first timing or the second timing after the execution of the specific after-reception effect is started.

In this case, the extinction EF display is the same whether it appears when the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed at the first timing or when it appears when the specific post-reception effect starts to be executed at the second timing. It may also be displayed as an image display. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the execution is being executed at the first timing or the second timing just by looking at the disappearing EF display. It is now expected that players will be able to focus their attention on the object that is being ignored.

[Configuration 7-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "specific acceptance period" according to Configuration 7-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of Configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a specific acceptance period occurs, the specific post-acceptance performance corresponding to the specific acceptance period is performed without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the specific acceptance period. There are cases in which the performance is executed, and there are cases in which the performance after specific reception is not executed when the specific reception period ends without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detection means within the specified reception period. This makes it possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the specific reception period occurs.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 7-C", it is possible to generate a predetermined reception period that is different from the specific reception period, and if the predetermined reception period occurs, the player can It is desirable that the corresponding predetermined post-reception effect is always executed even if the movement is not detected by the movement detecting means. Note that the "predetermined acceptance period" according to the configuration 7-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "acceptance period" according to other configurations.

In other words, in this case, when the specific reception period occurs, a sense of tension is suitably imparted, such as ``If the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the reception period, the post-reception performance may not occur.'' However, when a predetermined reception period occurs, a corresponding post-reception performance will always occur, so it is expected to improve gaming interest.

[Configuration 8-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the first reception period occurs, the corresponding It is possible to perform the first precursor performance before the first reception period occurs, and if the second reception period occurs, the second precursor performance can be executed before the second reception period occurs. I decided to do so. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations. Further, the "first omen effect" and the "second omen effect" according to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same foreshadowing performance as the "first omen performance (or the opposite second omen performance)" and the "second omen performance (or the opposite first omen performance)" for other configurations. Alternatively, the "first omen effect" and the "second omen effect" according to other configurations may mean a different omen effect (for example, a specific omen effect).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period in which the first effect display (first precursor effect) is displayed, when a movement is performed by a player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means. A first period in which the information detected by the motion detection means is used for determining the validity of the reception within the first reception period, and even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means when the player performs a motion. A second period is included in which the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the first reception period. This makes it possible to provide a sense of tension.

Also, as will be described later, after the motion detection means detects the motion within the second period of the period during which the first effect display is displayed, the first reception is performed without any new detection by the motion detection means. Even when the period ends, the first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period can be executed as the above-mentioned post-reception performance. In other words, in this case, even if the movement by the player is detected during the second period instead of the first period during which the first precursor effect (first effect display) is being performed, the player's Since it becomes possible to generate a performance after reception without newly detecting a motion, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 8-C", the first period and the second period during which the first effect display is displayed are both longer than the first reception period occurs. It may be set to be the previous period. In other words, in this case, a "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" may be made within the first reception period based on detection information obtained before the first reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the first reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the first reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after reception without any hassle. Moreover, even if the player's action is detected during the second period instead of the first period, as a result of the player's action (operation) being carried out with excessive force before the first reception period occurs, the player's Since it becomes possible to generate a performance after reception without newly detecting a motion, it is expected that a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

[Configuration 9-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a specific performance display is displayed in a precursory performance corresponding to the specific reception period. I'm trying to make it possible. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to the configuration 9-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good. Further, the "specific effect display" related to the configuration 9-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" in other configurations, or it may mean a different effect display from the "specific effect display" in other configurations. It's okay.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during a period in which a specific effect display is displayed, when a movement is performed by a player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means, and the detection information by the movement detection means is The first period during which the reception is determined to be valid within the specific reception period, and even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the player performs a movement, the information detected by the movement detection means is Since the second period, which is not subjected to the reception validity determination, is included within the specific reception period, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 9-C", the first period and the second period are periods before the specific reception period, and a specific effect display is not displayed. It may also be possible to include both periods. In other words, in this case, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the specific reception period occurs, the player will be able to accept the action without redoing the action after the specified reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the aftereffects. However, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the specific reception period occurs, the post-reception effect will not necessarily be executed (second period), which will reduce the feeling of tension. It will be possible to maintain it properly.

[Configuration 10-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a first sign corresponding to the first reception period is prepared. In the performance, the first performance display is displayed, and in the second precursor performance corresponding to the second reception period, the second performance display can be displayed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations. Further, the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" according to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it means the same effect display as the "first effect display (or the opposite second effect display)" and the "second effect display (or the reverse first effect display)" in other configurations. It may mean a different effect display (for example, a specific effect display, etc.) from the "first effect display" and the "second effect display" according to other configurations. Good too.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, in both the period in which the first performance display (first precursor performance) is executed and the period in which the second performance display (second precursor performance) is executed, the “player ``Pre-operation permissible period during which when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detecting means and the information detected by the motion detecting means is used for determining the validity of the above-mentioned reception within the reception period.'' "Pre-action non-permissible period during which, even if the action is detected by the action detection means when the action is performed, the information detected by the action detection means is not used for determining the validity of the reception within the acceptance period." Since this is included, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

As will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 10-C", the "pre-operation permissible period" and "pre-operation non-permissible period" both occur during the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period). It may be set to be a period earlier than the timing to do so. In other words, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period), the ``reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action'' is determined during the acceptance period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the reception period occurs, the player may not be able to perform the operation after the reception period occurs. It becomes possible to enjoy the performance after reception without having to redo the action. However, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the reception period (first reception period or second reception period) occurs, the post-reception performance will not necessarily be executed. (pre-motion non-permissible period), it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

[Configuration 11-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a specific acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period, and when a specific acceptance period occurs, a player cannot enter the game within the specific acceptance period. The specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance even if the motion is not detected by the motion detection means. Note that the "specific acceptance period" related to the configuration 11-C is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean a different acceptance period from the "specific acceptance period" for other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the specific reception period. Therefore, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 11-C", the timing at which the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the specific reception period is At least a first timing and a second timing are prepared, and at the first timing, the reception validity determination is made based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the specific reception period occurs. The execution of the specific post-reception performance is started when it is performed within the specific reception period (stock reception performance), and at the second timing, any action by the player is detected, including before the occurrence of the specific reception period. Instead, execution of the specific post-reception performance may be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing). In other words, in this case, ``the above reception validity judgment can be made within the reception period based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the reception period occurs (stock reception effect)'', and this It becomes possible to start executing the performance after a specific reception. Moreover, during the specific reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, a specific post-reception performance will be performed as a relief based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing). Because of this, you will be able to take on the challenge of "stock reception production" with confidence.

[Configuration 12-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the first reception period occurs, the corresponding Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detecting means within the first reception period, the corresponding first reception performance can be executed, and if the second reception period occurs, the second reception period concerned Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detecting means, the corresponding second post-reception performance can be executed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 12-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-C. Therefore, it does not mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period (or the opposite second acceptance period)" and the "second acceptance period (or the opposite first acceptance period)" in other configurations. Alternatively, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" may refer to a different reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) according to other configurations.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the first post-reception performance is performed when the player's movement is executed without being detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period, and when the player's movement is performed within the first reception period without being detected by the movement detection means. Since the execution time is the same regardless of whether the motion is executed based on what has been detected by the motion detecting means, it is possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 12-C", the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) acquired before the occurrence of the first reception period is within the first reception period. By being subjected to the above reception validity determination in , the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period and the performance after the first reception can be executed, and the second reception period By using the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) obtained before the occurrence of the above-described reception validity determination within the second reception period, the player's movement within the second reception period is The second post-reception performance may be made executable without being detected by the motion detection means. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs, the player will not be able to perform the first reception period or the second reception period. After the second reception period occurs, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-reception performance without having to repeat the operation.

[Configuration 13-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in a precursor performance suggesting that a player will be given an opportunity to perform an action, there are cases in which a precursor performance sound corresponding to the precursor performance is output, and a case in which a precursor performance sound corresponding to the precursor performance is output. It is arranged so that there may be cases where a precursor effect sound corresponding to the precursor effect is not output. As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when giving the player an opportunity to perform a movement.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 13-C", if a specific precursor effect sound is output before the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to perform an action, the reception While there are at least a first timing and a second timing as timings at which the execution of the post-reception performance corresponding to the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the period, there are at least a first timing and a second timing. In contrast, when no foreshadowing effect sound is output before the acceptance period during which a movement opportunity is granted occurs, the player's movement within the reception period is handled without being detected by the movement detection means. There may be a case where there is at least a first timing and a second timing as the timing at which the execution of the post-reception performance is started, and a case where there is no second timing and there is at least the first timing. That is, in this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be more suitably enhanced when the precursor performance sound corresponding to the precursor performance is not output.

[Other configurations]
Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has an acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) in which it is permitted to make an acceptance validity determination that determines that a player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means. If this occurs, an integrated model image display (Fig. 144 ), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game until the display after acceptance (display change) is executed. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. .

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the image is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible state (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception has become permissible or that the operation reception is permissible. A reception acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform the operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (acceptance period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). This is a sound in which the acceptance permission state (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible state (reception period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. In other words, the acceptance acceptance state classified into the first type is a state that can occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). This is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period that occurs based on the fulfillment of a specific condition (specific high expected fluctuation pattern selection) in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment). In addition, the second type of acceptance acceptance state refers to the valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice judgment) that can occur regardless of whether the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. period of validity, etc.).

The "integrated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either of the first type and second type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period). Here, the first type of reception permissible state (reception period) and the second type of reception permissible state (reception period) are both receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs as a permissible state (acceptance period), the "integrated image display" displayed during these acceptance periods is an image imitating the same operating means (operation button 410).

Note that among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). In the second type of reception permissible state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). You may also do so. In this case, in the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, in which of multiple modes including special modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) A determination is made as to whether to display the "display", and the "integrated image display" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance state (acceptance period), based on the result of the jackpot determination, which of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (c)) not including the special mode is selected as the "integrated image". A determination may be made as to whether to display the image, and the "integrated image display" may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do. As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 has the following performance contents (for example, a conversation preview as a performance after reception, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc.), and a preview performance (expectation level suggesting performance). A plurality of reception periods (reception presentations) with different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate reception periods (reception presentations) of different types depending on the results of judgments (jackpot judgment, presentation judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception performances), at least a 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) and a 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance) are prepared.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 234 to 246. Note that each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 233 is prepared as a separate reception period from the 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) and the 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance). It may be implemented as either the 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) or the 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance). Furthermore, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 233. You may choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 234 to 236 are time charts showing an example of performance contents when condition 1D is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and the 1D reception period (1D reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 240 to 243 are diagrams showing examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the 1D reception period (1D reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1D variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 1D variation pattern. After that, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1D variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1D variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 240(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the "1st D fluctuation pattern" selected above. Become.

However, in the performance related to the "1st D fluctuation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), as shown in FIG. 234(a), the variation of the decorative pattern SZ When the timing tW2 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) when the 1D time has elapsed after the start of the production has arrived, the above-mentioned 1D reception period (valid period) occurs (“the situation shown in FIG. 241(d)”). As a result, if a player's action is accepted within the 1D acceptance period, the 1D post-acceptance performance will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a 1D acceptance period occurs, in relation to this, an acceptance period (validity period) will occur soon. A precursory effect display suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), an operation object display (simulation image display), a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, an operation object display (simulation image display) and the remaining time. An extinguishment-related display (extinction EF display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the time display, etc., and a post-reception performance display that indicates the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". As mentioned above, the operation target display (sample image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated replica image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. , are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, when timing tW1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. 234(b) and FIGS. Execution of "1D portent effect display ZEC" is started. As will be described later, the "1D portent effect display ZEC" in this example is the "1D portent effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240(b))" and the "1D portent effect display ZEC-1". This is executed by sequentially displaying "1D precursor effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240(c))" which makes it difficult to visually recognize ". However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided. In this example, as shown in FIG. 234(d), when the "1D omen effect display ZEC" is executed, the effect sound (omen effect sound) corresponding to the "1D omen effect display ZEC" is output. be done.

Furthermore, the "1D omen effect display ZEC" according to this example is hidden at the timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs, but is displayed so as to straddle the timing tW2. There may be.

As will be described later, in the 1D reception period according to this embodiment, the player performs an action (for example, presses a button) on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) before the 1D reception period occurs. Even if an operation) is performed, the operation (operation) is detected by the operation detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detection information is stored in the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c or the corresponding Processing steps, etc.) may be stored in memory even when the 1st D reception period occurs, and may be used for the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period (when stock reception performance is executed). It has become.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. It is assumed that a 1D reception period occurs, that is, a case in which detection information obtained before the 1D reception period is not used for the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period.

More specifically, when the 1D reception period occurs at timing tW2 without stock reception performance, the performance display according to this example is as shown in FIGS. 234(b) and 241(d). In the device 1600 (first presentation device), "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated map image display IG. Even if the integrated model image display IG (the model image display, the frame image, the gauge image) can appear at the timing tW2 when the corresponding reception period (here, the 1D reception period) occurs, Alternatively, it may appear before the timing tW2 and be displayed so as to straddle the timing tW2. In addition, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed only when the reception (reception valid determination) is made within the 1D reception period, or when the reception (reception valid judgment) It is hidden when the 1D reception period ends without any determination (determination) being made. The 1D reception period according to this example ends when timing tW3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 234(a)).

In addition, in the 1D reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a), (d) )). 241 to 243 correspond to the case where the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in "the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)". ing. When the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "form shown in FIG. 144(a)", the integrated model image shown in FIGS. 241 to 243 The display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is simply changed from "the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)" to "the mode shown in FIG. 144(a)"; I will omit it here. In addition, even during the 1D reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (c). It is also possible to do so.

Then, in FIG. 234, a movement by the player is detected within such a 1D reception period, and based on the detection information, at timing tW2a, ``determination of validity of reception as valid movement (operation) by the player'' is performed. This assumes that this is the case. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 234(a), based on the fact that the player's action is accepted at timing tW2a (the acceptance is determined to be valid), the 1D acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period will be started.

In addition, the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIGS. 242(e1) to 242(i1))" is as a post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIGS. 242(e2) to 242(i2)") is This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period. Regarding the expectation level (rate of jackpot symbols appearing), It may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, in the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. Not only does the integrated image display IG not be hidden, but the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to view.

That is, the 1D post-reception performance according to this embodiment includes a ``1D post-reception performance display'' using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a ``1D post-reception performance display'' using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a second performance device (for example, a sub-LCD, a movable This will be realized as a combination of at least the ``1D post-reception specific production'' using the 3rd production device (speaker) and the 1D post-reception production sound using the 3rd production device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three production devices), but among these production devices, integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) where is displayed, the timing at which the "first effect display after reception" as the 1D post-reception effect starts is delayed compared to other effect devices. As a result, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the application is accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 242 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 144 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. It becomes like this.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that the

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 234(b) and FIG. 242(f1) or (f2), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tW2a at which the first D reception period ended due to the acceptance of the player's action, (When timing tW2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, remaining time display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, remaining time display)". It overlaps with the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will automatically shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tW2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 242 (e1) to (i1)) appear as the corresponding post-reception performances (1D post-reception performances), and modes with high expectations (Fig. 242 (e1) to (i1)). Different forms of extinction-related display (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2) appear depending on the cases in which (e2) to (i2) in FIG. 242 appear. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 242(f1) and (f2), the situation is such that "1D effect display after reception" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the extinction-related display appearing on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is appearing as “first extinction-related display SKD1” or “second extinction-related display SKD2”. This makes it possible to estimate whether the "1D post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly anticipated manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 234(b), FIG. When the timing tW2c arrives during the period during which the mode (in which mode) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) responds to the reception of the action by the player within the 1D reception period as a performance after reception. The execution of "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" is started. However, in this case, in an example where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIGS. 242(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. g1), the first mode (here, the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character) is the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1 corresponding to the 1D reception period. In the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIG. 242(e2) to (i2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high for the post-reception performance), FIG. 242(f2) ), the second mode (here, the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2 as a cut-in performance by a samurai character) is displayed as the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1 corresponding to the 1D reception period. It has become so.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" are displayed, the "first D reception effect display UGD1 ( "1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1" or "1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 1D reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1) without a significant delay compared to other production devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.Also, Since the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1 starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 1D reception period has already ended, and the player's attention target is It is expected that the ``integrated image display IG'' will automatically transition to the ``1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)''. (after timing tW2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and The "integrated image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)". As a result, even if the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 234(b) and FIG. 242(h1) or (h2), the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1) -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 234(b), FIG. "Display SKD1 or Second Disappearance Related Display SKD2" will be hidden, and as a result, even though visibility is good, "1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1 (1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1-1 or 1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1-1 or 1D reception performance display UGD1-2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or the 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UGD1-2). Therefore, the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production example (FIG. 242) corresponding to the 1D reception period, when a reception is made within the 1D reception period and the "1D post-reception production display UGD1" is executed, the "1D post-reception production display UGD1" is executed. The background image is switched before and after "Display UGD1" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the situation shown in FIGS. 242(e) and 242(f) (timings tW2a to tW2b shown in FIG. 234) in which the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (the second Even if there is a change in performance in (1) performance device), the "1D post-reception performance display UGC1" can indicate that the situation has not started yet.

In addition, in this production example, the "1st D post-reception production display UGD1" and "background change" are changed to the timing when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed ( It was decided to start displaying at a later time (timing tW2c) than timing tW2b), but when the "extinction-related display (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed (timing tW2b). The display may be started at the same time as (timing tW2b).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 242, as a post-reception effect, the background image can be switched to the same background image when a mode with a low level of expectation appears and when a mode with a high level of expectation appears. It may be possible to switch to different background images depending on whether an aspect with a low level of expectation appears or an aspect with a high degree of expectation. Furthermore, when a highly expected aspect appears, the background image is switched, but when a low expected aspect appears, the background image may not be switched.

In this way, in the production display device 1600 (first production device) according to this example, when the 1D reception period occurs, the display screen (production display device) is displayed within a limited time and on a limited display screen (production display device). Various displays are displayed within the display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tW2c) of the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect display) in response to the reception is set later than the received timing tW2a. The reality is that we have no choice but to delay.

Therefore, in this example, when an action by a player is accepted within the 1D acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 234(b) and 234(c), Start execution of the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, the start of execution is delayed from the timing tW2a when the reception is received in the 1D reception period, but only a part of the 1D post-reception performance (the 1D post-reception performance display) is delayed. The 1D post-reception performance itself can be started from the same timing tW2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may also be provided as a performance lamp that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. Then, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIGS. 242(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), FIG. 242(e1) As shown in , the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the manner in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) according to the above-mentioned 1D post-reception specific presentation UTD1 (1D reception As the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific performance UTD1, it is preceded by the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) using the above-mentioned first performance device. It will now start running. On the other hand, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIGS. 242(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. e2), the manner in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the above-mentioned 1D post-reception specific presentation UTD1 (second presentation device) corresponding to the 1D reception period. As the 1D post-reception specific production (UTD1-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1, there is a 1D post-reception production (1D post-reception production display UGD1-2) using the above-mentioned first production device. Execution is started prior to .

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 241(d), in addition to the "integrated image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also displays the first D. A reception period effect (display of a samurai character and a princess character) indicating that the reception period has occurred is executed. Regarding the performance within the acceptance period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device), the "integrated image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectations (not shown). 241(d)) and the highly anticipated mode (see FIG. 241(d)).

That is, in this case, when it is within the 1D reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to perform an action (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and The same aspect will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1D reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the "integrated image display IG ” continues to be displayed (while the level of expectation as a performance after reception is not yet indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the production within the reception period (display of samurai characters and princess characters) on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is performed continuously from before the 1D reception period occurs. This also functions as a foreshadowing effect that suggests that the first D reception period will occur. However, the reception period presentation on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) and the omen presentation on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) may be executed as different presentations.

In addition, in this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of "1D post-reception specific production UTD1-1" and "1D post-reception specific production UTD1-2" appears as the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the first D post-reception specific performance UTD1. For example, the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1 is provided with only "1D post-reception specific production UTD1-2", and the expectation level (whether a jackpot is obtained or not) is determined depending on whether or not the 1D post-reception specific production UTD1 appears. It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of In other words, in this case, when the "1st D post-reception specific performance UTD1-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when the "1st D post-reception specific performance UTD1-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the first D reception period occurs, the timing tW2 shown in FIG. 234(d) The output of the acceptance permission sound is started at a timing slightly earlier than the above. In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 1D reception period is audibly output across the timing tW2 at which the 1D reception period occurs, and while the reception permissible sound is audibly output. Actions (operations) by the player can be accepted.

Here, in the 1D reception period, the acceptance permissible sounds include a first long permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively long time, and a first short permissible sound that is output in an audible state for a relatively short time. and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 216(d), the output of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, output of one (or both) of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started at timing tW2 when the first D acceptance period occurs or after that time.

Then, during the 1D reception period, if the player accepts an action (reception is valid) while the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are being audibly output, the acceptance is Based on what has been done, the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are ended midway (the audible output state ends midway).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 234(d), the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations (not shown). It is desirable to have a case where the process is executed (audible output) in a manner with a high degree of expectation (the case shown in FIG. 241(d)). In other words, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated image display IG", the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are Once the application is confirmed (validity determination), it will no longer be possible to confirm it, so there is tension over when the acceptance (reception validity determination) should be made within the acceptance period. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of well-being.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, if the player accepts an action while the reception permissible sound (first long permissible sound, first short permissible sound) is audibly output, the reception permissible sound will be terminated midway. Not only that, but also, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the first D post-acceptance effect sound is started. The 1D post-reception performance sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, it is executed in a manner with a low degree of expectation (audible output), and it is performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation (audible output). output). In other words, in this case, during the 1D reception period, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, the performance (acceptance permissible sound) performed within the reception period and the performance in response to the reception. There will be no competition (duplication) between the performance to be performed (the 1D post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1," such 1D post-reception performance sound includes "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display (extinction EF Even after the "effect" is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 1D post-reception performance sound, an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 241(d) to “I2 (Fig. 242(e2) to (i2))” (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

Note that during the 1D reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound were output as the permissible reception sounds, but these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output, and one reception permissible sound Only acceptable sounds may be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 1D reception period (reception is determined to be valid), in the third production device, not only the 1D post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation can be heard. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I1 (FIG. 242(e1) to (i1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 241(d) to "I2 (Fig. 242(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high for the post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1D reception period (regardless of the level of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize what is in the program, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after receiving the reception.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 235, "i1 (FIG. 242 (e3) to (i3))" from FIG. The example in which the performance progresses to ``i4))'' is based on the assumption that no movement (operation) is performed by the player within the 1D acceptance period and acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 235, after the 1D acceptance period occurs, the above-mentioned timing tW3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (acceptance validity determination). However, in the 1D reception period according to this example, even if no action (operation) is performed by the player and reception (reception validity determination) is not made within the 1D reception period, the above-mentioned timing tW3 arrives. Based on this, the same post-reception performance (here, 1D post-reception performance) as when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period is generated.

For example, the case where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "i1 (FIG. 242(e3) to (i3))" is if the reception validity determination was tentatively made within the 1D reception period. ) to "I1 (Figure 242 (e1) to (i1))" (low expectations), but in reality, the reception was not determined to be valid within the 1D reception period. This corresponds to the case where the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. In other words, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as "remaining time display" in the integrated image display IG is "0", so that "I1 (Fig. 242 (e1) to (i1))" is However, other than that, as shown in Figures 242 (e3) to (i3), the performance is basically the same as in the case of "I1 (Figure 242 (e1) to (i1))". progress will be made.

Furthermore, the case where the performance progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "i2 (FIGS. 242(e4) to (i4))" means that if the reception is validly determined within the 1D reception period, ) to "I2 (Fig. 242 (e2) to (i2))" (high expectations), but in reality, the reception was not determined to be valid within the 1D reception period. This corresponds to the case where the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. In other words, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as "remaining time display" in the integrated image display IG is "0", so that "I2 (Fig. 242 (e2) to (i2))" is However, other than that, as shown in Figures 242 (e4) to (i4), the performance is basically the same as in the case of "I2 (Figure 242 (e2) to (i2))". progress will be made.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are two cases in which the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity determination being made within the 1D reception period, and a case in which the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period. In the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without being performed, the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) The execution time for each is set to be different from each other. In this example, if the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without a reception validity determination being made within the 1D reception period, it is assumed that the reception validity determination has been made within the 1D reception period. The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is set to be shorter than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the 1D reception period. The system encourages players to do the following: However, if the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without a valid reception determination being made within the 1D reception period, it will be based on the fact that the reception validity determination has been made within the 1D reception period. The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance may be made longer than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed.

On the other hand, FIG. 236 shows that as a result of the player performing an operation (for example, pressing operation) on the operation means (for example, operation button 410) before the 1D reception period occurs, the operation (operation) is detected by the motion detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detected information is stored and retained in the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) until the corresponding 1D reception period occurs. It is assumed that the above-mentioned reception validity determination is performed within the 1D reception period (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A precursor effect display (here, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC) indicating that an opportunity will be given is made executable. In this regard, during the period in which the 1D portent effect display ZEC is executed,
- A first period (stock period) and
- Even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the player performs a movement, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used for the "reception validity determination" within the 1D reception period. A second period (non-stock period) is now included.

In addition, the "1D portent effect display ZEC" according to this example is the "1D portent effect display ZEC" corresponding to the "1st period (stock period)" as shown in FIG. 236 and FIGS. 240(b) and (c). "1D portent effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240(b))" and "1D portent effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240(c))" corresponding to the "2nd period (non-stock period)" ” are displayed one after another. That is, in this case, the operation by the player is performed within the period in which the "1D portent effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240(b))" is executed out of the period in which the "1D portent effect display ZEC" is executed. When detected, this will be used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the 1D reception period, but within the period in which "1D precursor effect display ZEC-2 (see Fig. 240(c))" is executed. When a movement by the player is detected, this will not be used for the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 236, an action is performed by the player in the "first period (stock period)" of the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, and this is detected by the action detection means. This is based on the assumption that it has been detected.

However, the "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is permitted only within the 1D reception period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, at that point (the time when the 1D reception period has not yet occurred) ``Reception validity determination'' is never made. That is, the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) obtained in the "first period (stock period)" is stored and held even at timing tW2 when the 1D acceptance period occurs. Then, at timing tW2 (more precisely, determination timing tW2A that arrives immediately (several milliseconds) after timing tW2 occurs), the "reception validity determination" is made based on the stored detection information. It will be determined whether the situation is such that it should be done, and as a result of this determination (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained in the "first period (stock period)") " A "valid reception judgment" will be made (stock reception performance). Furthermore, based on the determination that the reception is valid, the 1D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception performance (the 1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period is terminated. ) will start executing.

Therefore, even if the player performs an action within the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, at the time of the detection, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is The program will not be terminated midway, nor will the corresponding precursor sound effect be interrupted. Furthermore, even if the player performs an action in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, the effect display device 1600 ( No reaction is caused in the first production device), and the acceptance permission sound does not stop being output after the detection. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until the timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs, the player performs a movement in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the above-mentioned movement detection. The performance is developed in the same manner whether the motion is detected by the motion detection means or not detected by the motion detection means.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, if the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs (when the stock reception performance is executed), Also, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 243, basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. Become.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), the effect changes from FIG. (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance) and when the production progresses from Fig. 240(c) to "J2 (Fig. 243 (e6) to (i6)") 234 and 242 (e1) to () in the first presentation device, second presentation device, and third presentation device. The effect will be executed as described with reference to i1) or FIGS. 242(e2) to (i2).

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), as well as the case shown in FIG. At timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the point in time when the production started after the 1D reception, the "integrated model image display IG" is in the display state, and the integrated model image display IG is visually recognized. I won't make it difficult either.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), as shown in FIGS. 243 (e5) and (e6), the operation by the player is not accepted. At timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the time when the 1D post-reception effect was started (the time when the 1D post-reception effect was started in response to the reception), the "1D omen effect display ZEC" was not hidden. I keep it in the displayed state. That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, which is before the occurrence of the 1D acceptance period ( It becomes possible to suggest that the situation is such that the reception has been determined to be valid.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 236(b) and FIG. 243(f5) or (f6), the timing tW2 (more precisely, When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing tW2A) (when timing tW2B arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated image display IG (image image display) is started. As the 1D post-reception performance, modes with low expectations (Fig. 243 (e5) to (i5)) appear and modes with high expectation (Fig. 243 (e6) to (i6)) appear, and disappear. It is also similar to the cases shown in FIGS. 234 and 242 that different modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) appear as related displays.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), as shown in FIG. The display SKD1 or the second extinction-related display SKD2) is displayed in such a way that not only the integrated model image display IG (the model image display) but also the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" are difficult to see.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed), while the ``1D precursor effect display ZEC'' is being displayed, the ``extinction related display (extinction EF effect)'' is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "extinction related display (extinction EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the "1D portent effect display ZEC" is to continue to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the "1D portent effect display ZEC" is made difficult to visually recognize. This makes it possible to suggest that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed), when timing tW2C arrives within the period in which the disappearance related display appears, as shown in FIG. 243 (g5) or (g6), , "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of a movement by the player within the 1D reception period. starts running. An example in which the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" progresses from FIG. 240 (c) to "J2 (Fig. 243 (e6) to (i6))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance) ) are executed in mutually different modes (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1, 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2), which is similar to the case shown in FIGS. 234 and 242.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), when the timing tW2C arrives, the "1D precursor performance display ZEC" is hidden. ing.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), "1D post reception performance display UGD1 (1D post reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post reception performance display UGD1-1)" After the display related to "Effect display UGD1-2)" is started, as shown in FIG. 236(b) and FIG. 243 (h5) or (h6), 1D reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D reception performance display UGD1-2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated image display IG" and "extinction related display", "integration "Small image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 236(b), FIG. "Display SKD1 or Second Disappearance Related Display SKD2" will be hidden, and as a result, even though visibility is good, "1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1 (1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1-1 or 1D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD1-1 or 1D reception performance display UGD1-2)" will now be displayed.

Note that also in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (examples in which the stock reception performance is executed), the second performance device is activated based on the fact that the movement by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid). The 1D post-reception performance (specific performance after 1D reception) and the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance sound) using the 3rd performance device were created using the 1D post-reception performance using the above-mentioned first performance device. The execution may be started prior to the production (production display after 1D reception), or the player's action may be accepted (reception enabled) while the first long permissible sound and/or first short permissible sound are being audibly output. Based on the determination (judgment), the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are ended midway (the audible output state is ended midway).

However, regarding the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound, one (or both) of them may be made to start outputting at timing tW2 when the first D acceptance period occurs or thereafter. is as described above. When such a configuration is adopted, the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (examples where the stock reception performance is executed) are different from the examples shown in FIGS. 234 and 242 (examples accepted within the reception period). Unlike the above case, output of the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound may not be started.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the cases shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (in the case where the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period) and the cases shown in FIGS. In the example case (in the case of an example in which the reception is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the 1D reception period), the 1D reception is executed based on the reception being determined to be valid within the 1D reception period. The execution times of the post effects (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) are made to be different from each other. In this example, if the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (see FIGS. 236 and 243), within the 1D reception period, The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is made shorter than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the obtained detection information (see FIGS. 234 and 242). The player is encouraged to play the game so that the player's operation is detected within the 1D acceptance period. However, if the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (see Figures 236 and 243), the information obtained within the 1D reception period is The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance may be made longer than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the detected information (see FIGS. 234 and 242).

In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 and FIG. 243 (in the case of the example in which the stock reception effect was executed during the 1D reception period), in the case of the example shown in FIG. ), the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) will be made to differ from each other.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (examples where the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), the timing at which the "1D portent performance display ZEC" is hidden is determined by the 1D post-reception performance. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing tW2C at which the display UGD1 starts execution, the timing does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, for "1D portent effect display ZEC", the same timing as "integrated sample image display IG (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image))" (timing after timing tW2C) It may also be hidden.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (examples in which the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), "reception is valid" is based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs. If the "judgment" is made, at timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A) when the "reception validity judgment" is made, the 1D portent effect display SKC-2 (second period ) is displayed, but instead of this, the 1D precursor effect display SKC-1 that appeared when the detection information was obtained may be displayed. . That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest at which timing the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detected information.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the period during which the 1D portent effect display ZEC is executed is
- A first period (stock period) and
- Even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the player performs a movement, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used for the "reception validity determination" within the 1D reception period. The second period (non-stock period) was made to occur sequentially, but instead of this, the second period (non-stock period) is generated first, and then the first period (stock period) is generated. It's okay.

Furthermore, in the above example, the content of the production as the 1D omen production display ZEC was made to be different between the first period (stock period) and the second period (non-stock period), but the content of the production is the same. (continued over two periods). Further, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included within the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed.

By the way, in the 1D reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 144(d), but in the form shown in FIG. 144(a). As mentioned above, it may be displayed in the manner shown. It was predetermined (predetermined in advance based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) would be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a). Nevertheless, if a "valid reception determination" is made within the 1D reception period based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs, the situation shown in FIG. 243 described above will occur. The only difference is the aspect of the ``integrated image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image)'' than when the ``integrated image display IG'' appears, and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner. In other words, when the situation shown in FIG. 243 described above appears, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(d). This corresponds to the case where has been predetermined (predetermined based on the result of jackpot determination).

According to such a configuration, even if the above-described stock reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display IG) It becomes possible to suitably suggest which mode was planned to appear (image display, frame image, gauge image).

FIGS. 237 to 239 are time charts showing examples of performance contents when condition 2D is satisfied as a result of determination (jackpot determination or performance determination) and a 2D reception period (2D reception performance) occurs. . FIGS. 244 to 247 are diagrams showing examples of effects in a variable pattern in which a 2D reception period (2D reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the second D fluctuation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2D variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2D variation pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 244(a) ''), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the ``2nd D fluctuation pattern'' selected above. Become.

In addition, in the performance related to the "2nd D fluctuation pattern", no matter which result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment), as shown in FIG. 237(a), the variation of the decorative pattern SZ When the timing tX2 (for example, the timing in the non-reach state) arrives when the 2D time has elapsed since the production started (when the condition 2D is satisfied), the "reception regarding the production after the 2D reception" is The permissible second D reception period (validity period) may be generated ("situation shown in FIG. 245(d)"), or if a predetermined result is obtained as a performance judgment (advance judgment). The above-mentioned 2D reception period (valid period) may be generated. In any case, if the action by the player is accepted within the 2D reception period (if the reception is determined to be valid), the 2D post-reception performance will be performed based on the reception.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a 2D acceptance period occurs, in relation to this, an acceptance period (validity period) will occur soon. A precursory effect display suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), an operation object display (simulation image display), a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, an operation object display (simulation image display) and the remaining time. An extinguishment-related display (extinction EF display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the time display, etc., and a post-reception performance display that indicates the degree of expectation (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) in response to acceptance. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%". As mentioned above, the operation target display (sample image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated replica image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. , are not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, when timing tX1 arrives before the occurrence of the second D reception period, as shown in FIG. 237(b) and FIG. Execution of "2nd D portent effect display ZED" is started. The "2D omen effect display ZED" according to this example is hidden at timing tX2 when the 2D reception period occurs, but is displayed so as to straddle the timing tX2. Good too. In this example, as shown in FIG. 237(d), when the "2nd D portent effect display ZED" is executed, unlike the case where the above-mentioned "1D portent effect display ZED" is executed, the corresponding The effect sound (precursor effect sound) corresponding to "2D omen effect display ZED" is not output.

Also, as will be described later, in the 2D reception period according to this embodiment, as well as the above-mentioned 1D reception period, the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is pressed before the 2D reception period occurs. Even if the player performs an action (for example, a pressing operation), the action (operation) is detected by the action detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detected information is stored in the detected information storage means (peripheral). When the 2D reception period occurs in the control RAM 1511c, the corresponding processing step in the program, etc.), it is stored in memory even when the 2D reception period occurs, and is used for the reception validity determination within the 2D reception period (stock reception performance is executed). However, if a "reception validity determination" is made within the 2D reception period based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs, then the above-mentioned "1D reception period will occur" In contrast to the case where "reception validity determination" is made within the relevant 1D reception period based on previously obtained detection information, the integrated image display IG (reference image display, remaining time display (frame image) , gauge image)) is never displayed (made visible) before the execution of the post-reception performance (here, the 2D post-reception performance) is started. Note that the object (type of operation means) to which the operation opportunity is given in the 1D reception period and the object (type of operation means) to which the operation opportunity is given in the 2D reception period may be the same. , may be different.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. It is assumed that a 2D reception period occurs, that is, a case in which detection information obtained before the 2D reception period is not used for the reception validity determination within the 2D reception period.

More specifically, when the 2D reception period occurs at timing tX2 without stock reception performance, the performance display according to this example is as shown in FIGS. 237(b) and 245(d). In the device 1600 (first presentation device), "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated map image display IG. Even if the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the frame image, the gauge image) can appear at the timing tX2 when the corresponding acceptance period (here, the 2D acceptance period) occurs, Alternatively, it may appear before the timing tX2 and be displayed so as to straddle the timing tX2. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed only when the reception (reception valid determination) is made within the 2D reception period, or when the reception (reception valid judgment) It is hidden when the 2D acceptance period ends without any determination (determination) being made. The 2D reception period according to this example ends when timing tX3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 237(a)).

In addition, in the 2D reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a) and 144(c) )). 245 and 246 correspond to the case where the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in "the mode shown in FIG. 144(c)". ing. When the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "form shown in FIG. 144(a)", the integrated model image shown in FIGS. 245 and 246 Since the display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is simply changed from "the mode shown in FIG. 144(c)" to "the mode shown in FIG. 144(a)", the illustration is I will omit it here. In addition, even during the 2D reception period, the integrated model image display IG (reference image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed in any of multiple modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (d). It is also possible to do so.

Then, in FIG. 237, a movement by the player is detected within such a 2D reception period, and based on the detection information, at timing tX2a, "determination of validity of acceptance that the movement (operation) by the player is a valid movement" is performed. This assumes that this is the case. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 237(a), based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted at timing tX2a (the acceptance is determined to be valid), the 2D acceptance period ends, and the corresponding The execution of the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2D reception period is started.

Here, an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to K1 (FIGS. 246(e1) to 246(i1)) is a post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2D reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed, and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIG. 246(e2) to FIG. 246(i2)") is This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as a post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2D reception period.As for the expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) , "0%" and "100%".

In this regard, even during the 2D acceptance period, as shown in FIG. Not only does the integrated model image display IG not be hidden, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to view.

That is, the 2D post-reception performance according to this embodiment also includes a "2D post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and a 2D post-reception performance display using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), This will be realized as a combination of at least the "2D post-reception specific performance" using a 2D post-reception production sound (such as a 2D presentation device, performance lamp, etc.) and the 2D post-reception production sound using a 3rd production device (speaker). (It does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three production devices), but among these production devices, integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) on which is displayed, the timing at which the "second reception effect display" as the 2D post-reception effect starts to be executed is delayed compared to other effect devices. As a result, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" can be maintained even after the application has been accepted.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 246 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG can be displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 144 ( Since players will be able to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) is being displayed, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. It becomes like this.

After the acceptance period ends, in order to facilitate recognition of the manner in which the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer period of time for the IG to be displayed in an easily visible manner. However, if the integrated image display IG is during the acceptance period even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not an acceptance has been made. There is a concern that the

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 237(b) and FIG. 246(f1) or (f2), when a predetermined period of time elapses from the timing tX2a at which the second D acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action, (When timing tX2b arrives), a display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated image display IG (image image display, remaining time display)” is displayed, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "integrated image display IG (simulation image display, remaining time display)". It overlaps with the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that It becomes possible to suggest that the performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) (after timing tX2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception presentation (second presentation device, third presentation device) is already being executed, the integrated image display IG can continue to be displayed for a relatively long time, although it may be difficult to visually recognize it. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not being able to recognize in which manner the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

However, unlike the case of the 1D reception period described above, in the 2D reception period, the corresponding post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is a mode with low expectations (Fig. 246 (e1) to (i1) ) appears and when highly expected modes (FIG. 246 (e2) to (i2)) appear, the same mode (here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears as the disappearance-related display. There is. In other words, in this case, while the disappearance related display is appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), it is possible to make it difficult to recognize in what manner the "second D post-reception effect display" is executed. become.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 237(b), FIG. When the timing tX2c arrives during the period during which the mode (in which mode) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the player's action within the 2D reception period as a post-acceptance performance. The execution of "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" is started. However, in this case, in an example where the production progresses from Fig. 245(d) to "K1 (Fig. 246(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production), Fig. 246( g1), the first mode (here, the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, which is a "silent" conversation preview) is displayed as the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2 corresponding to the 2D reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from Fig. 245(d) to "K2 (Fig. 246(e2) to (i2))" (in a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), Fig. 246(f2) As shown in , the second aspect (here, the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2, which is a conversation preview that mentions "chance") is displayed as the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2 corresponding to the 2D reception period. It is now possible to do so.

That is, in this case, the execution of the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2 will start in one of multiple modes (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) with different expectations. However, no matter which of these modes starts to be executed, one mode (second extinction related display SKD2) is displayed (priority is given) so as to overlap with the second D reception effect display UGD2. Since it functions to make it difficult to visually recognize the display), it is possible to make it difficult to recognize in what manner the "second D post-reception effect display" is being executed.

In addition, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKD2)" are displayed, "2D post-reception performance display UGD2" ("2D post-reception performance display "UGD2-1" or "2nd D post-reception effect display UGD2-2") will start to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after the reception is received within the 2D reception period, the reception at the first presentation device (the presentation display device 1600) It becomes possible to start the post-performance (2D post-reception performance display UGD2) without a significant delay compared to other production devices, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.Also, Since the 2D post-reception effect display UGD1 starts while the integrated image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 2D reception period has already ended, and the player's attention target is It is expected that the ``integrated image display IG'' will automatically transition to the ``2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)''. (after timing tX2c).

On the other hand, regarding the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)", the area where the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (It does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and The "integrated image display IG" is displayed preferentially over the "post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)". As a result, even if the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" starts to be executed, the integrated image display will be performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 237(b) and FIG. 246(h1) or (h2), the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2)" -2)" is displayed, first, among the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 237(b), FIG. "Display SKD2" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition of good visibility, "2D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD2 (2D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD2-1 or 2D Post-Reception Performance Display UGD2-") will be hidden. 2)" will now be displayed.

In this regard, the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2" refers to multiple modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the player's action (here, the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) This is displayed in one of the post-reception performance display UGD2-2). Therefore, the "2D post-reception effect display UGD2" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In this production example, the "2D post-reception production display UGD2" starts to be displayed at a later time (timing tX2c) than the timing (timing tX2b) when the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tX2b) as the "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKD2)" (timing tX2b).

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period, based on the acceptance, as shown in FIGS. 227(b) and 227(c), Start execution of a 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device prior to the 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. That's what I do.

According to such a configuration, even if the 2D post-reception performance display is performed after the extinction related display is performed in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the 2D post-reception performance display is As for itself, execution can be started from the same timing tX2a without delay.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a device that is provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be a display movable body that can perform effects, or a display device that can perform effects. It may be provided as a performance lamp or the like that can emit light. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform effects (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) in multiple modes with different expectations. The expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may include "0%" and "100%".

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second presentation device. In an example where the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K1 (FIGS. 246(e1) to (i1))" (a case where expectations are relatively low for the post-reception performance), FIG. 246(d1) As shown in FIG. As the 2D post-reception specific performance UTD2-1), which is a low expectation aspect of UTD2, is executed prior to the 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) using the first performance device. It is about to start. On the other hand, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIGS. 246(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance), FIG. 246( e2), the manner in which "Lucky" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) is different from the manner in which "Good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) according to the above-mentioned 2D reception specific presentation UTD2 (after 2D reception) corresponding to the 2D reception period. As the 2D post-reception specific production UTD2-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the specific production UTD2, the 2D post-reception production using the above-mentioned first production device (2D post-reception production display UGD2-2) is preceded by The program will now start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 245(d), in addition to the "integrated image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also displays the second D A presentation within the reception period (display of fortune slips) is executed to indicate that the reception period has occurred. Regarding the performance within the acceptance period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device), the "integrated image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectations (not shown). The display is made in the same manner in both the case and the highly anticipated mode (see FIG. 245(d)).

That is, in this case, when it is within the 2D acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the level of expectation, and The same aspect will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) regardless of the level of expectation. However, after this, if the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 2D reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display the "integrated image display IG ” continues to be displayed (while the level of expectation as a performance after reception is not yet indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second performance device) depending on the level of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on an appropriate performance device depending on the time, rather than when only focusing on the performance using a single performance device. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

In addition, in this production example, the production within the reception period (display of fortunes) on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is continuously executed before the 2D reception period occurs. , it also functions as a precursor effect suggesting that the second D reception period will occur. However, the reception period presentation on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) and the precursor presentation on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second presentation device) may be executed as different presentations.

In addition, in this production example, the level of expectation is suggested depending on which of "2D post-reception specific production UTD2-1" and "2D post-reception specific production UTD2-2" appears as the 2D post-reception specific production UTD2. However, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the second D post-reception specific performance UTD2. For example, the 2D post-reception specific performance UTD2 is provided with only "2D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2", and the expectation level (whether a jackpot is obtained or not) is determined depending on whether or not the 2D post-reception specific performance UTD2 appears. It may also be possible to suggest the percentage of In other words, in this case, when the "2nd D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2" appears, it is suggested that the level of expectation is higher than when the "2nd D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third performance device (speaker) is further provided, and when the second D reception period occurs, the timing tX2 shown in FIG. 237(d) The output of the acceptance permission sound is started at a timing slightly earlier than the above. In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 2D reception period is audibly output across the timing tX2 when the 2D reception period occurs, and while the reception permissible sound is audibly output. Actions (operations) by the player can be accepted.

Here, in the second D reception period, the first long permissible sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, is not output as the reception permissible sound, and the first long permissible sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, is not output. A short permissible sound is now output. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the second D reception period may be output as a sound different from both the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound.

In the 2D reception period, if the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the first short permissible sound) is being audibly output, it is determined that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway), and as a result, the 2D reception period occurs instead of the 1D reception period (or the 2D reception period does not occur). It is intended to suggest that However, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the second D acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on the acceptance.

In this regard, the acceptance permissible sound (here, the first short permissible sound) corresponding to the 2D reception period is executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectations, as shown in FIG. 237(d). It is desirable that there be two cases (not shown) and a case (case shown in FIG. 245(d)) in which it is executed (audible output) in a manner with a high degree of expectation.

Furthermore, when an acceptance is made during the 2D acceptance period (acceptance validity determination), based on this, the audible output of the 2D post-acceptance performance sound is started. The 2D post-reception performance sound is the same as the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2, as shown in FIG. It will continue to run for a relatively long time even after it is hidden. Regarding the 2D post-reception production sound, an example where the production progresses from Fig. 245(d) to "K1 (Fig. 246(e1) to (i1))" (relatively low expectations as a post-reception production) case) and an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 245(d) to "K2 (Fig. 246(e2) to (i2))" (a case where expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production), which are different from each other. It is desirable that the output sound (mode) be output.

In addition, if the reception is accepted during the 2D reception period (reception is determined to be valid), in the third production device, not only the 2D post-reception production sound that indicates the level of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not indicate the level of expectation can be heard. It is intended to be output. In other words, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from Fig. 245(d) to "K1 (Fig. 246(e1) to (i1))" (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception production) and an audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from Fig. 245(d) to "K2 (Fig. 246(e2) to (i2))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception production). It is something that will be done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 2D reception period (regardless of the level of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance is, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, it is determined that the reception (reception validity determination) has been properly performed. Since the user will be able to appropriately recognize what is in the program, it will be possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the content of the performance after receiving the reception.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 238 and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "k" (FIG. 246(e3) to (h3)) are This assumes a case where no action (operation) is performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 238, after the second D reception period occurs, the timing tX3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (acceptance validity determination). In the 2D reception period according to this example, unlike the case of the 1D reception period described above, if the player does not perform any action (operation) during the 2D reception period and the reception (reception validity determination) is not made. The same post-reception performance (here, 2D post-reception performance) that occurs when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period does not occur.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tX3 (the point in time when the second D reception period ends and the reception of the player's action (operation) is no longer allowed), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted within the 2D acceptance period (or the time when the effect starts to be executed after acceptance), the figure As shown in 246(e3), not only the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to view.

According to such a configuration, even if the 2D reception period ends because the player's action (operation) is not received in time, the integration will be performed within the 2D reception period after the end of the 2D reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the sample image display IG was displayed, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 246 (f3), the extinction-related display is (Extinction EF effect) starts. In other words, while the "integrated image display IG (reference image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed, and the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed. At least a part of the area in which "Integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which "Integrated image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 2D acceptance period ends without being accepted, the integrated model image display IG will not be visible. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the second D acceptance period has ended. Furthermore, even in situations where the 2D reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it will be difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 2D acceptance period, a "third disappearance related display SKD3" is displayed as a disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to do so.

It is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKD3" not be displayed in connection with the first D acceptance period. That is, in this case, it can be suggested that the 1D reception period has not occurred. Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKD3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the 2D acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

Regarding "3rd extinction related display SKD3", if the reception validity judgment had been made within the 2D reception period, regardless of whether or not a highly expected aspect would have appeared as "2D post-reception production". , it is desirable to always display it in one manner.

After this, as shown in FIG. 246 (g3), among the "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (in the figure, the third disappearance related display SKD3)", "integrated Hide "Small image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance related display (third disappearance related display SKD3 in the figure)" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 246 (h5). It will be displayed.

In addition, in the 2D reception period according to this example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 144(c) but in the form shown in FIG. 144(a). As mentioned above, it may be displayed in the manner shown. However, if such a situation occurs, the presentation will proceed in the same manner except for the aspect of "integrated image display IG (sample image display, frame image, gauge image)". Therefore, I will omit the explanation.

On the other hand, FIG. 239 shows that as a result of the player performing an operation (for example, pressing operation) on the operation means (for example, operation button 410) before the occurrence of the second D acceptance period, the operation (operation) is detected by the motion detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detected information is stored and retained in the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing step in the program, etc.) until the corresponding 2D reception period occurs. It is assumed that the above-mentioned reception validity determination is performed within the 2D reception period (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A precursor effect display (here, the 2D precursor effect display ZED) indicating that an opportunity will be given can be executed. In this regard, during the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed,
- A first period (stock period) and
- Even if the movement is detected by the movement detection means when the player performs a movement, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used for "determination of acceptance validity" within the 2D reception period. A second period (non-stock period) is now included.

In addition, the "2D portent effect display ZED" according to this example is, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 244(b) and (c), the "first period (stock period)" and the "second period" (Non-Stock Period)” are displayed in the same manner. Therefore, even if the mode of "2D portent effect display ZED" is confirmed, it is difficult to know which of the "first period (stock period)" and "second period (non-stock period)" is occurring. It is now impossible to recognize. However, regarding the "2nd D portent effect display ZED", different aspects will appear when it is in the above-mentioned "1st period (stock period)" and when it is in the above-mentioned "2nd period (non-stock period)". You can.

Further, in the "2D portent effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)" according to this example, the portent effect display is executed in comparison with the case of the above-mentioned "1D portent effect display ZEC (see FIG. 236)." The ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the period from when the application is received until the reception period occurs is increased. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 236, the ratio of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period from timing tW1 to tW2" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. The ratio of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period from timing tX1 to tX2" is about 70%. In other words, in this case, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)", when a movement by the player is detected within the period from the start of the precursor effect display until the occurrence of the acceptance period, this is displayed as " The expected value performed within the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "1D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 236)".

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 239, an action is performed by the player in the "first period (stock period)" of the period during which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is executed, and this is detected by the above-mentioned action detection means. This is based on the assumption that it has been detected.

However, the "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is considered a valid action" is permitted only within the 2D reception period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, at that point (the point at which the 2D acceptance period has not yet occurred) ``Reception validity determination'' is never made. That is, the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) obtained in the "first period (stock period)" is stored and held even at timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs. Then, at timing tX2 (more precisely, determination timing tX2A that arrives immediately (several milliseconds) after timing tX2 occurs), the "reception validity determination" is made based on the stored detection information. It will be determined whether the situation is such that it should be done, and as a result of this determination (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained in the "first period (stock period)") " A "valid reception judgment" will be made (stock reception performance). Furthermore, based on the determination that the reception is valid, the 2D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 2D reception period is terminated. ) will start executing.

Therefore, even if the player performs an action within the "first period (stock period)" and this action is detected by the action detection means, at the time of the detection, the 2D precursor effect display ZED is It will not be terminated prematurely. Furthermore, even if the player performs an action in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, the effect display device 1600 ( No reaction is caused in the first production device), and the acceptance permission sound does not stop being output after the detection. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs, the player performs a movement in the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the above-mentioned movement detection. The performance is developed in the same manner whether the motion is detected by the motion detection means or not detected by the motion detection means.

In addition, during the 2D reception period, if the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs (when the stock reception performance is executed), Also, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 247, basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period. Become.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the effect changes from FIG. (when expectations are relatively low as a post-reception performance), and when the production progresses from FIG. 237 and 246 (e1) to () in the first presentation device, second presentation device, and third presentation device. The effect will be executed as described with reference to i1) or FIGS. 246(e2) to (i2).

However, as mentioned above, in the 2D reception period, if "reception validity determination" is made based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs (when stock reception performance is executed) , the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is never displayed (visible) and the post-reception performance (here, after the 2D reception) (direction) is now started to be executed.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period), unlike the case shown in FIG. At timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the point in time when the 2D post-reception performance is started, the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed (visible).

Moreover, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), as shown in FIGS. 247 (e4) and (e5), the operation by the player is not accepted. At timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the time when the 2D post-reception performance is started (the time when the 2D post-reception performance is started in response to the reception), the "2D omen performance display ZED" is not hidden. I keep it in the displayed state. That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the period in which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is executed, which is before the occurrence of the 2D acceptance period ( It becomes possible to suggest that the situation is such that the reception has been determined to be valid.

In this regard, also in the example shown in FIG. 239(b) and FIG. 247(f4) or (f5), the timing tX2 (more precisely, , timing tX2A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (when timing tX2B arrives), a display related to extinction (extinction EF effect) is started. As the 2D post-reception performance, modes with low expectations (Fig. 247 (e4) to (i4)) appear and modes with high expectation (Fig. 247 (e5) to (i5)) appear, and disappear. Similar to the cases shown in FIGS. 237 and 246, the same aspect (second extinction related display SKD2) appears as the related display.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), as shown in FIGS. The display SKD2) is displayed in such a way that it is difficult to visually recognize the "2D precursor effect display ZED" instead of the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display).

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example where the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period), while the "2D precursor performance display ZED" is displayed, the "extinction related display (extinction EF performance)" is displayed. is now displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "extinction related display (extinction EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "2D omen effect display ZED" is displayed. There is. According to such a configuration, even if the "2D omen effect display ZED" continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the "2D omen effect display ZED" is made difficult to visually recognize. This makes it possible to suggest that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), when timing tX2C arrives within the period in which the extinction related display appears, (g4) or (g5 ), the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 ( Conversation Preview Performance)" starts to be executed. An example where the "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" progresses from FIG. 244(c) to "L1 (FIGS. 247(e4) to (i4))" 244 (c) to "L2 (Fig. 247 (e5) to (i5))" (when expectations are relatively high as a post-reception performance) ) are executed in mutually different modes (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2), which is similar to the cases shown in FIGS. 237 and 246.

In the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example in which the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period), "2D reception performance display UGD2 (2D reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D reception performance display UGD2-1 or 239(b), and FIG. 247 (h4) or (h5), after the display related to the ``2D reception effect display UGD2 (2D While "2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is displayed, first, "2D omen performance display ZED" and "extinction related display (second extinction related display SKD2)" are displayed. ”, “2D portent effect display ZED” is hidden. Then, after the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 239(b), FIG. Display SKD2)" will be hidden, and as a result, under the condition that visibility is good, "2D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception performance display UGD2)" will be hidden. -2)" will now be displayed.

Note that also in the examples shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (examples where the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period), based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted (the reception is determined to be valid), The 2D post-reception performance using the second production device (2D post-reception specific production) and the 2D post-reception production using the third production device (2D post-reception production sound) are performed using the first production device. The execution is started prior to the 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance display).

However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (examples where the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period), the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 described above (the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period) Unlike the case in which the first short permissible sound was audibly output, the first short permissible sound is output midway based on the fact that the player has accepted the action (determined that the reception is valid). It does not terminate (terminate midway through the audible output state).

Further, as described above, the output of the first short permissible sound may be started at timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs or after that time. Even if such a configuration is adopted, in the examples shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (examples where the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 ( Unlike the case in which the request was accepted within the acceptance period, it is desirable that the first short allowable sound be always output.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 or FIG. In the case of the example (in the case of an example in which the reception is accepted based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period), the 2D is executed based on the reception validity determination being made within the 2D reception period The execution times of the post-reception effects (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) are made to be the same.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the timing at which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is hidden is determined by the 2D post-reception effect. Although the display UGD2 is set later than the timing tX2C when execution is started, it may be hidden at the same timing tX2C.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the period during which the 2D portent effect display ZED is executed is
- A first period (stock period) and
- Even if a movement is performed by a player and the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used for "reception validity determination" within the 2D reception period. The second period (non-stock period) was made to occur sequentially, but instead of this, the second period (non-stock period) is generated first, and then the first period (stock period) is generated. It's okay.

Further, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included within the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed.

In addition, in the 2D reception period according to this production example, it was decided to use the "2D precursor performance display ZED" which can also appear when the reception is made in the 1D reception period, as the extinction-related display SKD. However, the disappearance related display may be executed in a manner that it cannot appear related in the 1D reception period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, which is provided with such a 1D reception period and a 2D reception period, excellent effects listed below can be achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance contents that are performed when an acceptance is received (a cut-in notice, a group notice, a conversation notice, etc. as a post-reception performance), and a notice performance (expectation level suggesting performance) We have prepared multiple reception periods (1D reception period and 2D reception period) with different types (types), and it is possible to generate a reception period (validity period) of the type depending on the result of the judgment (direction judgment). It becomes.

In this regard, during the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, if a player's action is accepted, the performance display after reception is displayed (1D performance display after reception, 2D performance display after reception) based on the acceptance. effect display) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. Of these, during the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, when a player's action is accepted, not only a post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also a ``disappearance related display''. We are trying to make more "extinction EF effects)" appear. In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is not only possible to check which aspect has appeared as a sample image display (or gauge image), but also to confirm which aspect has appeared as a sample image display (or gauge image). By reducing the visibility of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) by making it difficult to see (disappearance-related display) until it is hidden, It is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "sample image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-reception performance display." In addition, "extinction related display (extinction EF effect)" refers to multiple reception periods (reception periods different from the 1D reception period and 2D reception period (up to Figure 233 The same aspect can be commonly used for the acceptance period (which may be the acceptance period described above with reference to the drawings).

However, since the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when no acceptance has been made, the sample image display will continue even after acceptance has been made. If the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception performance display according to the reception is already displayed, and there is a concern that the game's interest will decrease. be. In this regard, when an acceptance is made during either the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be changed to ``sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, Gauge image) is hidden (invisible) in a manner that makes it difficult to see (disappearance related display), while the post-acceptance performance display is ``display of sample image and remaining time display (frame image)''. , gauge image) is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display). In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, there is a situation in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display). The transition from the pre-display (sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-reception display (post-reception performance display) will be realized.

In addition, both the "mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on the reception. They have one thing in common. However, "the manner in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" basically refers to Fig. 242(f), Fig. 246(f), etc. As shown in , when a sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). This is how it appears. On the other hand, "post-reception effect display" means, for example, as shown in FIG. 242(g) or FIG. 246(g), a sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. Even if it is displayed in a situation where the time limit is displayed, it is displayed so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image).

In addition, regarding ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'', it should be noted that ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to visually recognize'' As a method for displaying the sample image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area where the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, In addition to the method of displaying a different image with priority (displaying on the front layer), there is also a method of displaying a sample image or remaining time by displaying an image different from the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). It is possible to adopt a method of displaying an image (video) made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, instead of displaying a separate image from the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the On the other hand, regarding the ``post-reception presentation display'', there are methods to ``appear so as not to make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in such a way that the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are given priority display. In addition to the method achieved by displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displayed on the rear layer), there is also a method that allows the sample image to be displayed at least while the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in areas other than the displayed area.

In addition, the area where the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed is referred to as ``mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)''. A method of displaying an image display different from the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) on at least a part of the screen, and displaying the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) themselves. It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing numerical values related to characteristics (transmittance, etc.).

In addition, "a state in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" refers to the "reception-related display" that occurs before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears in situations where the "post-effect display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not displayed yet, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display). '' could appear soon, and players should be mentally prepared in advance to change their focus from ``the hard-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)''. You will be able to encourage

In addition, if the application is accepted during the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, the ``mode in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' will be changed to ``after reception. It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, during the period when the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, "aspects in which the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" will be hidden. In the subsequent period, it will be possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display" in a wider range, so we will aim to improve gaming interest by changing the performance during this display period. You will be able to do this.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, as shown in FIGS. 242 and 246, "the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to visually recognize Regarding the mode (disappearance related display), not only the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the ``post-reception performance display'' is displayed at least in part of the area, but ``a mode in which the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see'' (disappearance related display)", at least a part of the "post-reception effect display" is displayed so as to be difficult to visually recognize (for example, displayed on the rear layer).

According to such a configuration, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) makes it difficult to see not only the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display". Since it will appear, the performance until the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" starts to be displayed. It is now expected to improve both gender and gender.

Furthermore, the "disappearance related display" according to the example shown in FIG. 247 is such that the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed in a situation where the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. It is displayed not only in the area where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is, but also in the area where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is not displayed. In this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of the area, but at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is made difficult to see due to the "extinction-related display". (for example, displayed on the rear layer). In other words, in this case, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is not the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the "2D precursor effect display ZED" and the "post-reception effect display" that are difficult to visually recognize. Since it appears as something that does something, it becomes possible to provide a performance that is different from the performance described above.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the "post-reception performance display" after the reception is made and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed. In addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), we also provide a specific effect after reception that does not make it difficult to see the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in situations where they are not displayed (using the second effect effect). It is possible to appear after the reception. This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance in advance of this without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more effective than the disappearance-related display (extinction EF production). The display is made to appear in a situation where the previous extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) has not yet appeared. Further, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) continues until after the extinction related display (extinction EF performance) is ended.

According to such a configuration, those who dislike the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance using the second performance device, which has a simpler performance. It is possible to improve the interest in gaming for various types of players.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the sample image display will be dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. . In this case, the dynamic display of the sample image is not terminated and continues (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (extinction EF effect) has appeared since the acceptance. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the extinction-related display (extinction EF production) is not only a sample image display, but also a gauge indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. We also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the images. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance that there is still time left.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2", but apart from the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2, the above-mentioned aspect (second extinction Related display SKD2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKD2 appears, it is unclear which of the 1D and 2D post-reception performance displays will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKD1 appears, It becomes possible to infer that the effect display UGD1 will appear after receiving the first D.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is displayed (priority display ). However, the performance using a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen must be performed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the sample image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize this by

In addition, even if the same mode (second extinction related display SKD2) appears as the extinction related display (extinction EF effect), if the type of acceptance period is different, the jackpot symbol will be stopped due to the symbol change. It is desirable to have different proportions (expectations).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to execute a post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and the execution of the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is possible. During the period, on the first performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see. It is made so that it is difficult to visually recognize it.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started based on the reception, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared. Also, during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will be made relatively difficult to see. By doing so, it is expected that the player's gaze will be naturally shifted from the "first presentation device" to the "second presentation device."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is the display of the sample image that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before the reception and the remaining time. Execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the sample image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but when the second effect display device is used. The post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is it a performance that is performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is something.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance production display was decided to start displaying after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). It may be started.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) uses at least a part of the "area where the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". We decided to realize this as an image display. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image in such a way that the area displayed in the "area where the sample image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Furthermore, as described above, the "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used in multiple modes (integrated image Display IGa to IGd). According to each of the above-mentioned production examples, the display mode, including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance. Even after this is done, it is possible to recognize in what manner the sample image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period.

As mentioned above, "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or "sample image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately. Only one of the gauge images) may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, if the "predetermined image display" such as the "sample image display" or the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a hidden state (not displayed) For example, although it is displayed on a layer, by giving priority to displaying other images, you can display "sample image display" or "remaining time display (frame image)" as long as it is not visible to the player. , gauge image)," etc., is rendered invisible. However, if at least a part of the "predetermined image display" such as "sample image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player side, then this Therefore, it can be said that the "predetermined image display" is not hidden but continues to be displayed. The "predetermined image display" may be an image (for example, an omen effect display, etc.) different from the "sample image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)".

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the specific production after reception may be realized by being performed in the first production device (within the display screen of the production display device 1600) instead of the second production device.

Further, in the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the object of the action (operation) by the player does not necessarily have to be the same, and may require different actions from each other. However, if a different action is required, the action object display (sample image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will also be displayed as different displays.

In the example of the above-mentioned performance, when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period (see FIG. 243), when the reception is determined to be valid within the 1D reception period (the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started). At this point in time), the 1D precursor effect display ZEC and the integrated simulated image display IG were respectively displayed. In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the 1D precursor production display ZEC was displayed behind the integrated model image display IG, but instead of this, the integrated model image display IG was It may be displayed behind the 1D portent effect display ZEC. However, in this case, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed so as to overlap only a part of the integrated model image display IG, and (at least a part of the integrated model image display IG) is displayed. It is required that the vehicle be kept in a visible state (visible state).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, as the disappearance-related display SKD that can appear when the reception is determined to be valid within the 2D reception period, " 2D portent effect display ZED" is used, but instead of this, a mode that cannot appear when reception is determined to be valid within the 1D reception period may be used.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and in the harbinger production, the ``2D harbinger'' shown in FIGS. The effect display ZED (specific effect display) can now be displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 239, 244, and 247, even if the player performs an action while the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is displayed, , the motion is detected by the motion detection means (sensor, etc.), the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.), and the stored detection information is If the reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action is made within the above-mentioned 2D reception period based on (if obtained) (stock reception performance). According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force while the precursor effect (2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed, this will be used as an opportunity to display the 2D post-reception effect. It has become possible to start a game, and it has become possible to maintain interest in the game through such flexible performance. Regarding the configuration and effects, the same can be said not only when the stock reception performance is performed during the 2D reception period, but also when the stock reception performance is performed during the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, there is a case where the player performs the action before the 2D acceptance period occurs and while the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is being displayed. Even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. Then, within the 2D reception period, the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means before the 2D reception period occurs and when the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is displayed. In the case where it is determined that the reception is valid based on the detection information and the movement by the player is a valid movement (if the detection information is obtained in the first period (stock period) of the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed) ), and if the reception is determined to be valid, the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed at the time when the execution of the 2D post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started, as shown in FIG. I made it seem like it was. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action "within the execution period of the 2D precursor effect display ZED" before the occurrence of the 2D acceptance period, the detection of the action is not performed. is performed properly, and the detection information may be stored and held until timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, a "reception validity determination that determines that the player's action is a valid action" may be made within the 2D reception period based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much momentum before the 2D reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the 2D reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after reception without any hassle. In addition, at this time, the 2D reception period is not yet generated (the state where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed), and the 2D At the time when the execution of the post-reception performance starts, the 2D precursor performance display ZED is not hidden but is displayed, so that the 2D post-reception performance is the 2D precursor Based on the action (detection information) performed by the player while the effect display ZED is being displayed, it is possible to suitably recognize that the execution has started. Regarding the configuration and effects, the same can be said not only when the stock reception performance is performed during the 2D reception period, but also when the stock reception performance is performed during the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, at a specific timing within the 2D reception period (timing tX2a in FIG. 239), based on the detection information (detection information of the player's movement) obtained within the 2D reception period, If a reception validity determination is made in which the player's action is a valid operation, at the time when the execution of the 2D post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started, the 2D precursor performance display ZED (specific performance display) I made it so it wasn't displayed. According to such a configuration, if the reception is determined to be valid within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs, and when the reception is determined to be valid within the 2D reception period, The performance mode in the performance display device 1600 at the time when the performance after the 2D reception starts is different depending on whether the reception is determined to be valid within the 2D reception period based on the detected information received, This makes it possible to suggest whether or not the acceptance validity determination has been made based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D acceptance period. The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the reception is valid within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained during the 2D reception period, a precursor effect will be displayed at the time when the corresponding 2D post-reception effect starts to be executed. (Here, the 2D omen effect display ZED) may be displayed and may not be displayed. In other words, in this case, although it is suggested whether or not the reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D reception period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the reception is in this situation. It becomes possible to make the recognition difficult, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. This other example is similarly applicable to the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period, and the 2D reception is performed based on the reception validity determination being made. If the precursor effect display (in this case, the 2D precursor effect display ZED) is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-effect is started, the integrated simulated image display IG ( (sample image display and remaining time display) are now displayed. According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 246(e1) and (e2), the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display and the remaining time display) indicates that the performance after the 2D reception has started. Since the display state is maintained thereafter without being made difficult to view by other image displays, it is possible to suitably suggest in which mode the display was displayed within the 2D acceptance period. The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, if the "precursor effect display (here, 2D precursor effect display ZED)" is displayed at the time when the execution of the 2D post-reception effect is started, as shown in FIG. 247(f). In order to do so, the "precursor effect display (here, the 2D omen effect display ZED)" is made difficult to visually recognize by the extinction-related display (here, the second extinction-related display SKD2). According to such a configuration, while indicating that the stock reception effect is being executed, the display of the "precursive effect display (here, 2D omen effect display ZED)" This makes it possible to prevent suspicions such as ``the reception validity determination has not yet been made.'' The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period, the extinction-related display (Fig. 247) and the detection information obtained within the 2D acceptance period, making it difficult to see the "integrated image display IG (image image display and remaining time display)" when the reception is determined to be valid. The disappearance related display (see FIG. 246) for the purpose of the present invention is made to be displayed in the same manner (second disappearance related display SKD2). This makes it possible to more appropriately indicate that the 2D acceptance period has ended.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, when the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period (see FIG. 247), the integrated model image display is displayed at the time when the corresponding 2D post-reception performance starts to be executed. (Small image display and remaining time display) are not displayed (visible), but the "precursor effect display (here, 2D omen effect display ZED)" is displayed, and the stock reception effect is displayed during the 1D reception period. is executed (see FIG. 243), the integrated image display (image image display and remaining time display) is displayed (visible) at the time when the corresponding 1D post-reception effect starts to be executed. I made it seem like it was. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, and immediately after the reception period occurs. It is expected that the decline in interest in games due to games being terminated will be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including a 1D reception period and a 2D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a precursory performance corresponding to the 1D reception period (see FIG. 240) In this case, the 1D omen effect display ZEC (first effect display) is displayed, and in the omen effect corresponding to the 2D reception period (see FIG. 244), the 2D omen effect display ZED (second effect display) is displayed. I tried to make it wet.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an operation (operation) while either the 1D precursor effect display ZEC or the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the operation will not be performed. The motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and based on the stored detection information, the reception validity determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion is made within the first D reception period or within the first D reception period. Since the above-mentioned 2D precursor effect display may be performed within the above-mentioned 2D acceptance period, the player may move too vigorously while the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC or 2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed. Even in the case of a game, it has become possible to use this as an opportunity to start a performance after acceptance, and it has become possible to maintain interest in the game suitably through such flexible performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the following configurations were adopted. That is, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, if the player performs an action before the reception period occurs and while the precursor performance is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. Then, both within the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the detected information is stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed. Based on the detected information, there is a case where a reception validity determination is made that a movement by a player is a valid movement (stock reception performance). Then, during the 1D reception period, before the 1D reception period occurs, and when the precursor performance (1D precursor performance display ZEC) is being executed, the detected information storage means stores the information. If a reception validity determination is made based on the detection information that determines that the player's action is a valid motion, at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination is started, the above-mentioned sample image display will be at least as effective as possible. Some of them are always displayed. On the other hand, when the 2D reception period is before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and the precursor performance (2D precursor performance display ZED) is being executed, the detected information storage means If it is determined that the player's action is valid based on the detected information stored in I made it so that not even a part of it was displayed. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether it is the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, the player's actions are determined to be valid actions based on the detection information obtained before the relevant reception period occurs. Therefore, the player may act (operate) with too much force before the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period occurs. Even in the case where the reception period ends, the user can enjoy the post-reception performance without redoing the operation after the reception period has occurred. In addition, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the 1D reception period occurs, at least a portion of the above-mentioned sample image display will be Although it is always displayed, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the above sample image will be displayed at the time when the above post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed Since even a part of the display is not displayed, it is difficult to determine whether the post-reception performance is based on the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period (before either reception period occurs). This makes it possible to suitably suggest whether the player made a certain move.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the following configurations were adopted. That is, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, if the player performs an action before the reception period occurs and while the precursor performance is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detected information is stored by the detected information storage means. Then, both within the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the detected information is stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs and when the precursor effect is being executed. Based on the detected information, there is a case where a reception validity determination is made that a movement by a player is a valid movement (stock reception performance). Then, during the 1D reception period, before the 1D reception period occurs, and when the precursor performance (1D precursor performance display ZEC) is being executed, the detected information storage means stores the information. If a valid reception judgment is made based on the detection information that indicates that the player's action is a valid movement, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge images) so that at least a part of them is always displayed. On the other hand, when the 2D reception period is before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and the precursor performance (2D precursor performance display ZED) is being executed, the detected information storage means If a reception validity determination is made based on the detection information stored by the player, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) so that not even a part of them is displayed. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether it is the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period, the player's actions are determined to be valid actions based on the detection information obtained before the relevant reception period occurs. Therefore, the player may act (operate) with too much force before the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period occurs. Even in the case where the reception period ends, the user can enjoy the post-reception performance without redoing the operation after the reception period has occurred. Moreover, if you perform an action (operation) with too much momentum before the 1D reception period occurs, the remaining time will be displayed (frame image and gauge image ) is always displayed, at least a part of it is always displayed, but if you act (operate) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the above post-reception effect based on this will start to be executed. At the time when the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not even partially displayed, the post-reception performance is based on either the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period. (Which acceptance period did the player act before?) can be suitably suggested.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, the same operation means is given an operation opportunity during the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period. In this regard, in the first reception period, an aspect that cannot appear in the second reception period (integrated pattern image display IGd shown in FIG. 144(d)) can be displayed as a pattern image display or remaining time display. According to such a configuration, even if the stock reception performance is not performed, it is possible to suggest which of the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period is occurring.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 2D reception period according to this embodiment, the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D reception period. is performed within the 2D reception period (when the stock reception performance is performed), even a part of the sample image display or remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance is started. However, even in this case, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 247, the extinction-related display (here Now, we decided to display the second extinction related display SKD2). According to such a configuration, even if no sample image display or remaining time display prompting the player to perform an action appears, the system will respond to the acceptance of the action by the player within the acceptance period. It is now possible to indicate that a "post-reception performance" is being performed.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, modes with low expectations (Figure 243 (e5) to (i5)) appear as effects after the 1D reception, and modes with high expectation (Figure 243 (e6) to (i6)) appear. The extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is executed in different manners (first extinction-related display SKD1, second extinction-related display SKD2) depending on the case where the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) appears. On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, modes with low expectations (Fig. 247 (e4) to (i4)) appear as effects after the 2D reception, and modes with high expectation (Fig. 247 (e5) to (i5)) appear. )) appears, the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) is executed in the same manner. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1D reception period (where the mode of extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) differs depending on the level of expectation), after the reception is made within the 2D reception period, "extinction EF effect" is displayed. Since the importance of paying close attention to "related display (extinguishing EF effect)" is reduced, coupled with the fact that the sample image display or remaining time display is not displayed, the focus is on what form will appear as the effect display UGD2C after 2D reception. You will be able to do so.

In addition, during the 2D reception period according to this production example, a post-reception production (1D post-reception production) corresponding to the 1D reception period is expected as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when a reception is made. The "second extinction related display SKD2" that is displayed when the process is executed in a highly sophisticated manner is used. In other words, in this case, during the 2D reception period, it becomes possible to create an image as if the post-reception performance will be executed in a manner with high expectations as long as the reception is completed, thereby increasing the interest in the game. You will be able to aim for it.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the second D reception period does not necessarily have to be "second extinction-related display SKD2." For example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 2D reception period is displayed when the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. The "first extinction related display SKD1" may be used, or an aspect that does not correspond to the 1D reception period may be used as the extinction related display.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the 2D reception period, as the disappearance EF production (disappearance related display), when there is a reception, a specific mode (for example, the second extinction related display SKD2) appears, and when there is no reception It is desirable that a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the third extinction related display SKD3) or no mode appear at all. According to such a configuration, if an operation is forgotten during the second D reception period, the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction related display SKD2) when the reception is made will not appear, so that the game It will now be possible to appeal to those who have forgotten to perform an action, and from now on, it will be possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when a reception period occurs. .

In addition, in the 1D reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the sample image display or the remaining time display (at least part of it) is displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception production starts based on the stock reception production being performed. The 1D post-reception performance is displayed when the reception is determined to be valid (stock reception performance) based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, and when the 1D post-reception performance is displayed. The process is executed for a different time depending on whether the reception is valid or not based on the detection information obtained within the reception period (see FIGS. 234 and 236). On the other hand, in the 2D reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the sample image display or remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the 2D post-reception production starts based on the stock reception production being performed. The 2D post-reception performance is performed when the reception is determined to be valid (stock reception performance) based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period, and when the 2D post-reception performance is performed within the 2D reception period. It is configured to be executed for the same amount of time as when the acceptance validity determination is made based on the obtained detection information (see FIGS. 237 and 239). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide completely different performances during the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the detection by the motion detection means when a player performs a motion and the storage of the detected information by the detection information storage means are not limited to the reception period or the execution period of the precursor performance, but are performed at all times. You may also do so. However, in this case, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means will not be stored until the reception period occurs, or even if it is stored, it will not be used to determine the validity of reception within the reception period.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared as reception periods. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if no movement by the player is detected during the 2D reception period, the above reception is determined to be valid and the corresponding 2D reception period is handled. Since the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is sometimes executed, it is expected that the game interest can be suitably maintained through such flexible performance.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, the 2D precursor performance display ZED (specific performance display) is displayed as a precursor performance corresponding to the 2D reception period, and is before the occurrence of the 2D reception period. Even if the player performs an action while the second D precursor effect display ZED is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detected information is stored in the detected information storage means. It was made to be remembered by. Then, within the 2D reception period, "the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and when the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed" information" (stock reception performance), and when the reception is determined to be valid, at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination starts, The image display is no longer displayed. On the other hand, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period," the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (the 2D post-reception performance) ) is now started, a sample image may be displayed. When these configurations are adopted, the "determination of validity of acceptance that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the 2D acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the 2D acceptance period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the player may not be able to do so after the 2D reception period occurs. It becomes possible to enjoy the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) without having to redo the action. Furthermore, depending on whether or not the sample image display is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is started, it is determined whether the 2D precursor performance is before the relevant 2D reception period occurs and Suggests whether or not the reception is determined to be valid (the stock reception performance is performed) based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the display ZED is displayed. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, the 2D precursor performance display ZED (specific performance display) is displayed as a precursor performance corresponding to the 2D reception period, and is before the occurrence of the 2D reception period. Even if the player performs an action while the second D precursor effect display ZED is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detected information is stored in the detected information storage means. It was made to be remembered by. Then, within the 2D reception period, "the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and when the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed" information" (stock reception performance), and if the reception is determined to be valid, the remaining The time display is no longer displayed. On the other hand, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period," the post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (the 2D post-reception performance) ) so that the remaining time may be displayed at the time the execution starts. When these configurations are adopted, the "determination of validity of acceptance that the player's action is a valid action" is made within the 2D acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the 2D acceptance period occurs. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the player may not be able to do so after the 2D reception period occurs. It becomes possible to enjoy the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) without having to repeat the action again. Moreover, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) starts, it is determined whether the 2D precursor performance is before the relevant 2D reception period occurs and Suggests whether or not the reception is determined to be valid (the stock reception performance is performed) based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the display ZED is displayed. You will be able to do this.

In addition, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period", the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) based on the reception validity determination is At the time when the execution is started, there may be a case where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, and a case where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the execution of the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is started based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period". or whether the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is starting to be executed based on the “detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period” is made difficult to recognize. This makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension.

Further, in at least one of the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, when the execution of the post-reception performance is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs" You may also prepare a special performance mode that cannot appear. In other words, the special performance mode may appear if the execution of the post-reception performance is not started based on the "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs." It becomes. It is desirable to suggest a high rate of appearance of highly anticipated modes as post-reception effects depending on whether or not the special presentation mode appears.

In addition, in the production example described above, first, multiple reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, within the 1D reception period. Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means, it is possible to execute the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period, and if the 2D reception period occurs, within the 2D reception period. Even if the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means, the 2D post-reception performance corresponding to the 2D reception period can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period. As a result, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

By the way, the player intended to perform the action (operation) within the "period from timing tW1 to W" before the first D reception period occurred, but in reality, the action was performed during the "period from timing W to tW2". If the player performs an action (operation) within the "1D acceptance period", it is difficult for the player to realize that the action should be re-done after the 1D reception period occurs, and as a result, It can be said that there is a high possibility of forgetting to perform the operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, the timing at which the execution of the performance after the 1D reception is started without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period is shown in FIG. 236. At least the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 235 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. ), the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started (stock reception performance) when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on the player's movement (detection information) detected in , at timing tW3, ``the 1D post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any movement by the player, including before the occurrence of the 1D reception period. ” According to such a configuration, the player may mistakenly believe that the action (operation) was performed within the "period from timing tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, and as a result, the player may not be able to perform the action. Even if you forget to do so, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance will start based on the arrival of timing tW3, so it is expected that the decline in gaming interest will be suitably suppressed. become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the 2D reception period, "the reception validity determination is determined based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the 2D reception period occurs. It is possible to make the execution of the 2D post-reception performance start by performing it within the reception period (stock reception performance), but it is possible to This prevents a situation in which the execution of the 2D post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without any detection of the above. In other words, in this case, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the above reception validity determination is made within the reception period based on the player's movement (detection information) detected before the reception period occurs. (Stock reception performance)", thereby making it possible to start executing the post-reception performance. Moreover, during the 1D reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) will provide relief based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3). Since it is executed in a consistent manner, you will be able to take on the challenge of ``stock reception production'' with confidence. On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) will not be executed as a remedy. , it becomes possible to suitably impart a sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the portent effects corresponding to the 1D reception period (1D portent performance display ZEC, etc.) and the portent effects corresponding to the 2D reception period (2D portent performance display ZED, etc.) are different from each other. Although these foreshadowing effects are executed in the same effect mode (for example, in both cases, the 2D omen effect display ZED) may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not a reception period (1D reception period) with relief (timing tW3) occurs when the stock reception performance based on the operation when the precursor performance is performed fails. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

In addition, during the 1D reception period according to the example of the above-mentioned performance, if the 1D post-reception performance is to be generated based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (by the stock reception performance), the The same process as when generating a performance after the 1D reception based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period (detection by the same motion detection means → storage by the same detection information storage means → same reception valid within the 1D reception period) By performing the judgment), the 1D post-reception effect is generated. On the other hand, when generating the 1D post-reception effect based on the arrival of timing tW3 after the 1D reception period has occurred, the 1D reception period is based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. The 1D post-reception performance is generated by performing processing different from the case of generating the post-effect (determination that there is no detection by the same motion detection means, no storage by the same detection information storage means, and timing tW3 has arrived). We are planning to do so. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide various effects to the player in automatically generating effects after acceptance without requiring any action by the player within the acceptance period, and thereby making it possible to provide various effects to the player. People are expected to try to improve their interest.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, there is a case where the 1D post-reception effect is generated based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (by the stock reception effect), and a case where the 1D post-reception effect is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3. Since the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is made different depending on when the 1D post-reception performance is generated, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the execution time of the 1D post-reception production when the reception is determined to be valid at a specific timing (timing tW2a) within the 1D reception period is obtained before the 1D reception period. This is because it is different from both the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated based on the detected information (by the stock reception performance) and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3. , it becomes possible to further improve gaming interest.

On the other hand, in the 2D reception period where there is no relief (automatic reception) in case the stock reception performance fails, the 2D reception is performed based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period (through the stock reception performance). Execution of the 2D post-reception performance when the post-reception performance is generated, and when the 2D post-reception performance is generated based on the reception validity determination being made at a specific timing (timing tX2a) within the 2D reception period. Since the times are made to be the same, even if the stock reception performance fails, you can enjoy the same performance by redoing the operation within the 2D reception period, and there is no remedy. It is expected that this will suppress the decline in interest in games caused by this.

In addition, during the execution period of the precursor performance (1D precursor performance display ZEC) before the 1D reception period, even if there is a movement by the player, the detection information obtained regarding the movement is No notification is made to indicate whether or not the reception will be submitted for validation within the reception period. Further, at least in the effect display device 1600, it may be arranged that no indication that a movement by the player has been detected is provided. By having such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained even during the 1D reception period, where relief (timing tW3) is set when the stock reception performance fails. Become.

Furthermore, if there is a movement by the player during the execution period of the precursor effect (2D precursor effect display ZED) that is earlier than the 2D reception period, the detection information obtained regarding the movement will be displayed within the 2D reception period. It is also possible not to provide any notification indicating whether or not the application will be used for determining whether or not the reception is valid. Further, at least in the effect display device 1600, it may be arranged that no indication that a movement by the player has been detected is provided.

In addition, in the harbinger effect corresponding to the 1D reception period, the 1D harbinger effect display ZEC and the related harbinger effect sound are respectively executed. On the other hand, in the harbinger effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, the 2D harbinger effect display ZED is executed, but the harbinger effect sound related to the 2D harbinger effect display ZED is not executed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not there is a remedy when the stock reception performance fails, through whether or not the precursor performance sound is output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the player performs actions within the 1D reception period. The 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed even if the motion detection means does not detect the motion detection means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the timing at which the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period is at least the timing shown in FIG. 236. Since there is a timing tW2 (tW2A) and a timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the 1D precursor production display ZEC is displayed as a precursor production corresponding to the 1D reception period, and the 1D post-reception production is executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the 1D post-reception performance is started, the 1D precursor performance display ZEC is displayed, but when the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed at timing tW3 shown in FIG. , the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is not displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started. That is, in this case, when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started without detection information being obtained within the 1D reception period, this is the difference between the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. It becomes possible to indicate when the execution is started.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, even if the 1D post-reception production is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the 1D precursor production display ZEC is displayed, The "first extinction related display SKD1" or "second extinction related display SKD2" is made to appear as the extinction related display (see FIG. 243). In this case, the extinction-related display (extinction EF display) is displayed as either the "first extinction-related display SKD1" or the "second extinction-related display SKD2", but the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is It is desirable to execute this in a manner that overlaps this so that it is difficult to visually recognize it.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, and the first post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. In either case, the above-mentioned simulated image display is displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 248, if the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. Similar to the case where the execution of the 2D post-reception performance is started, the above-mentioned sample image display may not be displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started. In other words, in this case, even when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period, the sample image display (here, the integrated sample image display IG) is never displayed, just like when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period. The execution of the post-reception performance (here, the 1D post-reception performance) is started without being displayed (in a visible state).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, and the first post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. In either case, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 248, if the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. As in the case where the 2D post-reception performance is started, the remaining time display may not be displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance is started. In other words, in this case, even when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period, the remaining time display (here, the integrated image display IG) is never displayed, just as when the stock reception performance is executed during the 2D reception period. The execution of the post-reception performance (here, the 1D post-reception performance) is started without being displayed (in a visible state).

According to the configuration according to these other examples, when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, (See FIG. 248), while the sample image display and remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the performance after the 1D reception starts, the 1D reception is performed at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. When the execution of the post-effect is started, the sample image display and the remaining time display will be displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started (see "i1" and "i2" in Fig. 242). reference). In other words, in this case, if the 1D post-reception performance is started without any movement by the player being detected within the 1D reception period, this is the first timing (timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236) and the second timing. It is now possible to indicate which of the two timings (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235) the execution has started.

Furthermore, even if these other examples are adopted, when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, the effects shown in FIGS. 248 (f5) and (f6) As such, it is desirable that the "first extinction related display SKD1" or "second extinction related display SKD2" appear as the extinction related display. In other words, in this case, the "disappearance-related display" will appear while the sample image display and remaining time display are not displayed, and the "disappearance-related display" is similar to the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" and the "1D Post-reception performance display UGD1" etc. will be displayed in such a way that it will be difficult to visually recognize them.

Note that the reception period according to these other examples (see FIG. 248) is provided as a modification of the 1D reception period shown in FIGS. 234 to 236 and 240 to 243. However, instead of this, it may be provided as a 3D reception period (occurred according to condition 3D) that is different from both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period. In this case, when the post-reception performance (3D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3D reception period is executed, regardless of whether the post-reception performance is performed in any of the multiple modes with different expectations, "disappearance" One aspect (for example, the second extinction related display SKD2) may appear as the "related display".

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the timing at which the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started without any movement by the player being detected by the motion detection means within the 1D reception period is at least the timing shown in FIG. 236. tW2 (tW2A) and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235. Then, if the above-mentioned 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period, the extinction-related display (extinction EF display), and when the disappearance-related display (extinction EF display) is displayed, the integrated image display IG (image image display, remaining time display) is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to appropriately recognize that the 1D acceptance period has ended.

Furthermore, in the example of the performance described above, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period. It is also possible to display an extinction-related display (extinction EF display) when the extinction-related display (extinction EF display) is displayed, but when the extinction-related display (extinction EF display) is displayed, the above-mentioned integrated image display IG (extinction image display, remaining time display) The different displays may be made difficult to visually recognize. In other words, in this case, after the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started, the situation in which the 1D post-reception performance is started at either timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 or timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 It will be possible to suggest what is there.

For example, if a configuration according to another example regarding the 1D reception period is adopted, the 1D reception period is set at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the execution of the post-effect is started, the sample image display and the remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started. That is, in this case, when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period, the effect disappears. When the related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, displays (such as the 1D precursor effect display ZEC) that are different from the integrated sample image display IG (the sample image display, the remaining time display) are made difficult to recognize. Alternatively, if the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, and if the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. An image display that cannot be obtained may be displayed, and the extinction-related display (extinction EF display) may be made to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display.

Furthermore, regarding the extinction related display (extinction EF display), there are cases where it appears when the execution of the above-mentioned 1D post-reception effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. The same image display is made when the 1D post-reception effect appears when execution is started. That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize whether the execution is being executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 or timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 just by looking at the extinction-related display (extinction EF display). It is now expected that the disappearing EF display will encourage the player's attention to "the object that is difficult to see."

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the 2D reception period occurs, the movement of the player during the 2D reception period is not detected by the movement detection means, and the 2D reception period corresponding to the 2D reception period occurs. If the post-reception performance is executed (see FIG. 239), the 2D reception period ends and the 2D reception ends without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period. There is a case where the post-effect is not executed (see FIG. 238). This makes it possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the second D reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the example of production described above, it is possible to further generate a 1st D reception period that is different from the 2D reception period, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the above-described actions by the player are made within the 1D reception period. Even if the motion is not detected by the motion detection means, the corresponding 1D post-reception performance is always executed. In other words, in this case, when the 2D reception period occurs, "when the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the reception period, the post-reception performance may or may not occur." While trying to suitably impart a sense of tension, when the 1D reception period occurs, "a post-reception effect will always occur even if no movement by the player is detected by the movement detection means within the reception period." As a result, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of executing performance settings (at least one of volume, brightness, performance mode, etc.) that causes a change in the performance mode based on operations by the player. have the means. In this regard, there are cases where the performance after the 2D reception is performed without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period, and cases where the player's movement within the 2D reception period is the above-mentioned movement. A case where the second reception period ends without being detected by the detection means and the 2D post-reception performance is not performed can occur under the same performance settings. In other words, the case where the 2D post-reception performance is executed without the player's movement being detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period means that the 2D reception period is executed with the automatic button performance state set. It doesn't mean what happens. For example, even in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set (under the same effect setting), during the 2D reception period, the movement by the player is not detected by the movement detecting means during the 2D reception period. When the 2D post-reception performance is executed, and when the second reception period ends without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 2D reception period, the 2D post-reception performance is not executed. There may be cases.

In addition, in the production example described above, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and in the harbinger performance corresponding to the 2D reception period, the 2D harbinger performance display ZED is displayed. I tried to make it wet. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 239, during the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, when a movement is performed by the player, the movement is detected by the movement detection means. A stock period (first period) in which the information detected by the motion detection means is used to determine the validity of the reception within the second D reception period, and a stock period (first period) in which the information detected by the motion detection means is used to determine the validity of the reception within the second D reception period, and when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means. Since the non-stock period (second period) includes a non-stock period (second period) in which the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the second D reception period even if detected by the motion detection means, You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D acceptance period (2D omen effect display ZED) but also in the 1D acceptance period (1D omen effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 236).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) are performed before the occurrence of the 2D reception period, as shown in FIG. 239. Both periods are included in the period in which the 2D portent effect display ZED is displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the player must restart the action after the 2D reception period occurs. You will be able to enjoy the performance after receiving the 2D reception. In addition, if you perform an action (operation) with too much force before the 2D reception period occurs, the 2D post-reception performance will not necessarily be executed (non-stock period). You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. The same can be said about the configuration and effects not only in the 2D acceptance period (2D omen effect display ZED) but also in the 1D acceptance period (1D omen effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 236).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the ratio of the stock period (first period) to the period in which the precursor production is displayed is different between when the 1D reception period occurs and when the 2D reception period occurs. Made them different from each other. In the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, at least one of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) is set as a different time.

More specifically, in the example of the effect described above, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the 1D reception period occurs), during the execution period of the 1D precursor effect display ZEC (period from timing tW1 to tW2). In contrast, the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. The ratio of the "first period (stock period)" to (the period from timing tX1 to tX2) is about 70%. In other words, in this case, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)", when a movement by the player is detected within the period from the start of the precursor effect display until the occurrence of the reception period, this is displayed as " The expected value performed within the ``first period (stock period)'' can be made higher than in the case of the ``1D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 236)''.

In addition, in the "2nd D portent effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)" according to this example, the portent effect display is executed in comparison with the case of the above-mentioned "1D portent effect display ZEC (see FIG. 236)". Although the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the period from the time the application starts until the reception period occurs is made larger, it is also possible to make the ratio smaller instead. good.

Furthermore, in the above-described performance example, at least in the performance display device 1600, when a movement by the player is detected within the stock period and when a movement by the player is detected within the non-stock period, In either case, no reaction was shown in response to the detection. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is such that it can be executed as a stock reception performance, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and the 1D precursor performance is displayed in the precursor performance corresponding to the 1D reception period. ZEC is displayed, and the 2D omen effect display ZED can be displayed in the 2nd omen effect corresponding to the 2D reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 236 and FIG. "A stock period (previous movement permissible period) in which when a movement is performed by a person, the movement is detected by the movement detection means and the information detected by the movement detection means is used for determining the validity of the reception within the reception period." , "A non-stock item in which, even if a movement is performed by a player and the movement is detected by the movement detection means, the information detected by the movement detection means will not be used to determine the validity of the reception within the reception period. period (pre-motion non-permissible period)", it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension in a suitable manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the stock period (pre-motion permissible period) and non-stock period (pre-movement non-permissible period) are both set at a timing earlier than the timing when the reception period (first D reception period or second D reception period) occurs. It was set to be the previous period. In other words, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period (1D acceptance period or 2D acceptance period), the ``reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action'' is made during the acceptance period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action (operation) with too much force before the reception period occurs, the player may not be able to perform the operation after the reception period occurs. It becomes possible to enjoy the performance after reception without having to redo the action. Moreover, if the user performs an action (operation) with too much force before the reception period (1D reception period or 2D reception period) occurs, the post-reception performance is not necessarily executed. (non-stock period (pre-motion non-permissible period)), it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

By the way, in the example of the effect mentioned above, there is a stock period (pre-operation permissible period) within the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed, and a stock period (pre-operation allowable period) within the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed. During both periods, no message is displayed to prompt the player to take any action.

However, instead of this, a message is displayed urging the player to perform an action during at least the stock period (pre-operation permissible period) of the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed, and the 2D During the stock period (pre-operation permissible period) within the period in which the precursor effect display ZED is executed, a message display urging the player to perform an operation may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the first D reception period occurs, it is possible to prompt the player's actions to be obtained as detection information before the first D reception period occurs, Furthermore, it becomes possible to more actively provide a performance (stock reception performance) in which reception validity is determined within the first D reception period based on the detection information obtained in this way. On the other hand, when the 2D reception period occurs, the fact that such stock reception performances are allowed is kept secret, which makes it possible to add interest to the performance and increase the enjoyment of the game. will be able to improve their performance.

In this case, the message display that is displayed during the stock period (previous motion permissible period) during the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed will also be displayed during at least part of the non-stock period (previous motion non-permissible period). It may be in a display state. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action while the message display is in the display state, this will not necessarily be used to determine whether the reception is valid within the 1D reception period. will be able to maintain it. During the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed, no message display is displayed in either the stock period (pre-motion permissible period) or the non-stock period (pre-movement non-permissible period).

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, as shown in FIGS. 244 and 247, when the stock reception performance is performed during the 2D reception period, no message display is displayed after the 2D precursor performance display ZED starts to be displayed. The execution of the performance after receiving the 2D reception was started without any delay. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned modification regarding message display, when the stock reception effect is performed during the 1D reception period, the 1D reception period occurs even if detection information is obtained during the stock period (pre-operation permissible period). It is desirable not to hide the message display within a period before the detection information is detected, but to maintain the display state as in the case when no detection information was obtained. Furthermore, when the stock reception performance is performed during the 1D reception period, it is desirable that the message display remain in the display state even when the 1D post-reception performance is started in response to this. According to such a configuration, both when the 1D reception period occurs and when the 2D reception period occurs, there is a situation where the stock reception performance has been performed (a situation where the stock reception performance has been successful). By making it difficult to recognize whether the situation is true or not, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the player performs actions within the 1D reception period. The 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance even if the movement is not detected by the motion detection means. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings (Fig. 236 Since the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 235 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are provided, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, the timing tW2 ( shown in FIG. At least the timing tW2A) and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are prepared, and at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the reception validity determination is made within the relevant 1D reception period based on the detection information), the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started (stock reception performance), and at timing tW3 shown in FIG. The execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any movement by the player, including before the occurrence of the 1D reception period.

In other words, in this case, "the above reception validity determination can be made within the 1D reception period based on the movement (detection information) by the player detected before the occurrence of the 1D reception period (stock reception performance)". As a result, it becomes possible to start executing the performance after receiving the first D. Moreover, during the 1D reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the 1D post-reception performance is performed as a relief based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3). Because of this, you will be able to take on the challenge of ``stock reception production'' with confidence.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, in the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the stock reception performance being performed within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 236), and when the player In the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without any movement being detected (see FIG. 235), the execution time required for the 1D post-reception performance is different from each other. did. That is, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed without any movement by the player being detected within the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on any timing. You will be able to suggest something. Note that at this time, either execution time may be set longer.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the detection information at timing tW2a within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 234), it means that the stock reception performance was performed within the 1D reception period. (see FIG. 236), and the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on timing tW3 having arrived without any movement by the player being detected within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 236). Since the performance after the 1D reception is executed for a different time than when the 1D reception period is executed (see FIG. 235), the player's actions performed within the 1D reception period are not properly accepted. You will be able to suggest that you are in a certain situation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a specific reception period that is different from both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, and even in the specific reception period, it is possible to generate a specific reception period that is earlier than the specific reception period (within the execution period of the precursor performance) ) is executed based on the detection information obtained in The post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) may be executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without any movement by the player being detected within the reception period. There are two cases in which a post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) is executed based on the stock acceptance effect being performed within a specific acceptance period, and a case in which a predetermined timing is executed without a movement by the player being detected within the specific acceptance period. The execution time required for the post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) may be made to be the same in the case where the post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the arrival. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize at what timing the post-reception performance was executed just by looking at the execution time of the post-reception performance, and a sense of tension is suitably maintained. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, the 2D post-reception performance is performed when the player's movement is not detected by the movement detection means (stock reception performance) within the 2D reception period, and when the 2D post-reception performance is Since the execution time is the same regardless of whether the motion by the player is executed based on the motion detected by the motion detecting means within the acceptance period, it is possible to suitably maintain interest in the game. become able to

On the other hand, the 1D post-reception performance is performed when the player's movement is executed without being detected by the movement detection means during the 1D reception period (stock reception performance), and when the player's movement is executed within the 1D reception period without being detected by the movement detection means Since the execution time is different depending on when the action is executed based on the action detected by the action detection means, it is possible to provide different effects depending on the type of reception period. become.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned performance, in a precursor performance that suggests that the player is given an opportunity to act, a precursor performance sound corresponding to the precursor performance is output (see FIG. 234); There are cases in which the precursor performance sound corresponding to the relevant precursor performance is not output (see FIG. 237). As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when giving the player an opportunity to perform an action.

Furthermore, when a specific precursor performance sound (performance sound corresponding to the 1D precursor performance display ZEC) is output before the acceptance period in which an action opportunity is given to the player occurs, As shown in FIG. 236, the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. ) and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are made to exist at least. On the other hand, if no foreshadowing sound is output before the acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act, as shown in FIGS. There is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 as the timing at which the execution of the post-reception performance corresponding to the movement of the user is started without being detected by the movement detecting means, and there is no timing corresponding to the timing tW2 shown in FIG. 236. At least there is a timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to (tW2A). According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect sound is being output, even if the stock reception effect fails as a result of an action performed by the player (the movement is detected within a non-stock period), even if the stock reception effect fails (the movement is detected within a non-stock period) Since the performance is always performed, it becomes possible for the child to try out the stock reception performance with a sense of security. In addition, in a situation where no precursor effect sound is output, if the stock reception effect fails, the player will need to perform the operation again within the acceptance period in order to generate the post-reception effect. From there, you will be able to challenge yourself to create a stock reception performance in a tense atmosphere.

Furthermore, if no precursor effect sound is output before the acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to perform an action, as shown in FIGS. 237 to 239, the There is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 as the timing at which the execution of the post-reception effect corresponding to the movement is started without being detected by the movement detection means, and there is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. ) when there is at least a timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to (2D reception period), the corresponding post-reception performance starts to be executed without any movement by the player being detected by the movement detection means within the reception period. When there is at least a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 and a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 as the timing to be received (another reception period) It may be made so that there is. According to such a configuration, in a situation where no precursor sound is being output, it is possible to challenge the stock reception performance while maintaining a sense of tension and suitably providing a sense of security. It becomes like this.

In addition, in the example of the performance described above, the situation is such that the precursor performance sound corresponding to the 1D precursor performance display ZEC is being output, and the player performs an action within the stock period (first period) and this is detected. Even if this happens, the 1D precursor performance display ZEC and the corresponding precursor performance sound are not interrupted before the 1D reception period occurs. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the detection of the player's action was performed during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period).

Note that, as described above, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC may be performed in a manner that straddles the timing at which the 1D reception period occurs. At this time, the precursor effect sound corresponding to the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is also output in a manner that spans the timing at which the 1D acceptance period occurs. In this case, when the 1D reception period has occurred and the player performs an action while the harbinger effect sound corresponding to the 1D harbinger effect display ZEC is being output, and this is detected. This may be used as an opportunity to interrupt the 1D omen effect display ZEC and the omen effect sound corresponding thereto within the 1D reception period. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the stock reception performance is performed or the reception is performed within the 1D reception period. On the other hand, when the stock reception effect is performed, the precursor effect sound is interrupted at timing tX2 (tX2A).

By the way, as mentioned above, the "stock reception performance" in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. If the player performs an action within the "execution period" and this is obtained as detection information, the detected information is stored, and the stored detection information is used as "reception valid" during the reception period that occurs thereafter. It means to be used for "judgment". Therefore, "the fact that the player performs an action within the execution period of the precursor effect and this is obtained as detection information" is not the same as "the fact that the operation to set the above-mentioned automatic button effect state was performed". This is completely different.

For example, in the "stock reception performance", by checking the detection information obtained during the "precursor performance execution period" as is during the reception period, it is determined that the reception is valid even if no movement by the player is detected within the reception period. It was designed so that On the other hand, when an operation is performed to set the automatic button presentation state as described above, detection information corresponding to the operation is obtained, but the detection information must be retained until the acceptance period occurs. There isn't. That is, at the time when detection information corresponding to the operation for setting the automatic button effect state described above is obtained, the state of the effect state flag is changed to "automatic button effect state" based on the obtained detection information. ” to a specific state corresponding to ”. After that, each time a reception period occurs, the state of the performance status flag is checked when a predetermined timing within the reception period arrives, so that the player does not perform any action (operation) during the reception period. It is possible to perform the performance after receiving the application.

Therefore, in order to realize the "stock reception performance" in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 and its other example (modified example), it is necessary to use a gaming machine that does not have a setting function related to the automatic button production state. Alternatively, it may be a gaming machine that is always controlled to be in an automatic button presentation state. Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 or another example (modification example) thereof, when the automatic button production state is set by the player's operation, the 1D reception Assuming that a period has occurred, in the first D reception period, apart from the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. Based on this, execution of the 1D post-reception performance will begin. That is, in this case, the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started based on the fact that the predetermined timing has arrived while no movement by the player is detected (reception validity determination is not made). On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is not set, the predetermined timing does not function, so the timing tW3 is reached without any movement by the player being detected (no reception validity determination is made). After the 1D reception, the performance will start to be executed. Note that if the 2D reception period occurs when the automatic button production state is set by the player's operation, in the 2D reception period, the specified button after the timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in FIG. Based on the arrival of the timing, the execution of the 2D post-reception performance is started.

In addition, in the performance examples described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 and other examples (modifications) thereof, the actions (operations) required of the player in order to succeed in the above-mentioned "stock reception performance" are as follows. , it goes without saying that the actions (operations) required of the player during the corresponding acceptance period are the same.

Furthermore, in the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247, and other examples (modifications) thereof, it is assumed that the player performs an action more than a predetermined time before the reception period occurs. (In the embodiment, only detection information within the execution period of the corresponding precursor effect is provided for the “reception validity determination”.) ). In other words, it is necessary to make such a "stock reception performance" possible only when the player is in a situation where the player is aware of the reception period during which the action (operation) is to be performed. It can be said that this is important in order to have the player perform an action (operation) with an awareness of causing this.

Furthermore, as described above, in the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 and other examples (modifications) thereof, even if the detection information is obtained within the stock period, the detection information is not obtained. No notification regarding this is made within the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, when the automatic button presentation state is set, it is obvious that it is necessary to notify the person who made the setting whether or not the setting has been completed.

Furthermore, as described above, in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 and another example (modified example) thereof, if detection information is obtained within the stock period, the detection information is It will always be used for the "reception validity determination" within the process, and the post-reception performance will always occur based on this. On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is set, it is obvious that this can be canceled before the predetermined timing arrives.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example (1D reception period, 2D reception period, etc.), within the period in which the precursor production is executed, the stock period (first period) occurs first, and the non-stock period (second period) period) will occur after this, and the reception period will occur in a way that connects to this. However, instead of this, within the period in which the precursor performance is executed, a non-stock period (second period) occurs first, and a stock period (first period) occurs after this, leading to this. A reception period may occur. In this case, it is assumed that the player's actions may be detected across the stock period (first period) and the reception period, but even in such a case, It is desirable that the acceptance validity determination be made within the acceptance period based on the detection information obtained during the stock period (first period) without using detection information. Alternatively, if a movement by a player is detected across the stock period (first period) and reception period, the detection information obtained during the stock period (first period) and the detection information obtained within the reception period The reception validity determination may be made within the reception period based on both of the above. Even in such a case, the effects may be advanced in the manner shown in FIGS. 243 and 247.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production examples and other examples (modifications) thereof, unless there is a specific description that the automatic button production state is set, the automatic button production state may not be set. It is described as a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a function related to an automatic button presentation state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples and other examples (modifications) thereof, during the period in which the 2D precursor performance display ZED is displayed, the player performs an action as shown in FIGS. 237 to 239. a stock period (first period) in which the motion is detected by the motion detecting means and the information detected by the motion detecting means is used for determining the validity of the reception within the second D reception period; and the motion by the player. is performed, and even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the second D reception period (non-stock period). 2 periods). Then, after the motion detecting means detects the motion within the non-stock period (second period) of the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the motion detecting means detects the motion without any new detection. When the 2D reception period ends, the above-mentioned 2D post-reception effect is not executed (see FIG. 238).

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned production examples and other examples (modifications) thereof, even during the period in which the 1D precursor production display ZEC is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, the player's actions are a stock period (first period) in which the movement is detected by the movement detection means and the information detected by the movement detection means is used for determining the validity of the reception within the 1D reception period; a non-stock period in which, even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means when a motion is performed, the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the first D reception period; (second period). Despite this, there is no new detection by the motion detection means after the motion detection means detects it within the non-stock period (second period) during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed. Even if the 1D reception period ends as it is, the 1D post-reception effect is executed (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235). In other words, in this case, even if the movement by the player is detected within the non-stock period (second period) rather than the stock period (first period) within the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is performed. Since it becomes possible to generate the performance after receiving the first D without newly detecting a movement by the player, it is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), it is still within the above 1D reception period. In the progress of the performance where the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining detection information, the mode related to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1- 1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2), different modes (first disappearance related display SKD1 or second disappearance related display SKD2) are made to appear. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 246 and 247, when detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), As long as the performance progresses on the side where the 2D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining detection information within the above-mentioned 2D reception period, the aspect related to the 2D post-reception performance (the The same mode (second extinction related display SKD2) is made to appear regardless of the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or the 2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2).

In other words, the 1D post-reception performance is such that even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information is obtained within the 1D reception period. Since this can be executed without any new acquisition, there is a concern that players will not be able to maintain their sense of tension. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 1D post-reception effect is executed, the disappearance-related display itself has a effect to suggest the level of expectation, so that a sense of tension is suitably maintained. things come to be expected. On the other hand, the 2D post-reception performance is limited to cases where detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). Since this can be executed without newly obtaining detection information within the second D acceptance period, it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained due to its own performance. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 2D post-reception effect is executed, the extinction-related display itself does not have any effect to suggest the level of expectation, so the reception based on the stock reception effect is effective. Once the judgment is successful, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to concentrate on the performance after receiving the first D. In addition, when the 2D post-reception performance is executed, the "second extinction-related display SKD2" corresponding to the highly anticipated aspect of the 1D post-reception performance is always displayed as the extinction-related display, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 243, even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information is obtained within the 1D reception period. In the development of the performance where the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining The image display and remaining time display are now displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247, only when detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) In the development of the performance where the 2D post-reception performance can be performed without newly obtaining detection information within the 2D reception period, if the reception is determined to be valid based on the stock reception performance, the 2D post-reception performance will be executed. The sample image display and remaining time display are not displayed (invisible) at the time the execution starts.

In other words, the 1D post-reception performance is such that even if the detection information is obtained in either the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information is obtained within the 1D reception period. Since this can be executed without any new acquisition, there is a concern that players will not be able to maintain their sense of tension. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started, the "reception validity determination" has not yet been made because the sample image display and remaining time display are still being displayed. It is expected that students will be made aware of the possibilities and maintain a good sense of tension. On the other hand, the 2D post-reception performance is limited to cases where detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). Since this can be executed without newly obtaining detection information within the second D acceptance period, it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained due to its own performance. In this regard, according to the above configuration, since the sample image display and the remaining time display are not displayed (invisible) at the time when the execution of the 2D post-reception performance is started, the "reception validity determination" is It is expected that it will be easier to recognize that the situation has been properly performed, and that it will encourage concentration on the performance after the first D reception.

The 1D reception period and the 2D reception period according to each production example and modification example (another example) described above may be realized by modifying the configuration below, or the configuration according to the modification example below ( A 1D reception period and a 2D reception period) may be further provided as reception periods separate from the above-mentioned 1D reception period and 2D reception period.

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes at least a 1D acceptance period and a 2D acceptance period as acceptance periods in which actions (operations) by players are allowed.

In this regard, when the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed, as shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the 1D post-reception performance is expected (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) and a case where the 1D post-reception performance is performed in a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2). ) The extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed in a different manner depending on when it is executed. However, instead of this, there is a case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols), and a case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols). It disappears in a predetermined manner (the same manner) regardless of whether it is executed in a manner with a high (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2) or An EF effect (disappearance related display) may be executed.

In addition, when the 2D post-reception performance corresponding to the 2D reception period is executed, as shown in FIGS. A case in which the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a low mode (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) and a mode in which the 2D post-reception performance has a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) The extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed in one predetermined manner (the same manner) regardless of whether the extinction EF effect is executed or not. However, instead of this, there are cases where the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a manner (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) with a low expectation level (proportion of jackpot symbols appearing), and a case where the 2D post-reception performance is performed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) The extinction EF performance (extinction related display) may be executed in a different manner depending on when it is executed in a manner with a high (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (2D post-reception performance display UGD2-2).

Next, a case will be described in which the above modification is applied to the above example of effect. In other words, FIG. 249 shows "When the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period, or when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period" shown in FIG. 242. FIG. 250 is a modified example of the effect that appears when the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without being executed, and FIG. This is a modified example of the effect that appears when the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained. In addition, FIG. 251 shows "When the 2D post-reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period, or when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period" shown in FIG. 246. FIG. 252 is a modified example of the effect that appears when the timing tX3 arrives without being executed, and FIG. 252 is a modification of the effect that appears when the timing t This is a modified example of the effect that appears when the effect is executed. In this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are "Examples of effects related to the 1st D reception period (Figs. 234 to 236, Figs. 240 to 243)" and ``Examples of effects related to the 2D reception period (Figs. 237 to 243)''. 239, Figures 244 to 247)", and regarding each of the above-mentioned separate examples applicable to the "Example of presentation related to the 1st D reception period" and the "Example of presentation related to the 2D reception period". is similarly applicable.

In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, first, the 1D post-reception performance is performed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. (see Fig. 249 (e1) to (i1)), and the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 249 (e2) to (i2)). The extinction EF effect (extinction related display) is executed in the same manner as when the event occurs. In addition, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on the arrival of timing tW3 (see FIG. 249 (e3) to (i3)), Even if the 1D post-reception performance is performed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see FIG. 249 (e4) to (i4)), the extinction EF performance (extinction related display) is performed in the same manner. It is now possible to do so. In addition, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (Fig. 250 (e5) to (i5) )), and even if the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figure 250 (e6) to (i6)), the extinction EF performance will be performed in the same manner. (Disappearance related display) is now executed. Here, the second extinction related display SKD2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, the performance after the 2D reception is performed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period. (see Fig. 251 (e1) to (i1)), and when the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (Fig. 251 (e2) to (i2)). )), the extinction EF effects are executed in different ways. In addition, when the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period (Fig. 252 (e4) to (i4) )) and when the 2D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 252 (e5) to (i5)), the extinction EF performance is performed in a different manner. is now executed. Here, when executed in a manner with low expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Fig. 251 (e1) to (i1) and Fig. 252 (e4) to (i4)), the extinction EF effect is 1 extinction related display SKD1 is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) (see Figures 251 (e2) to (i2) and Figures 252 (e5) to (i5)) A second extinction related display SKD2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 251, if timing tX3 arrives without a reception validity determination being made within the 2D reception period, a third extinction related display SKD3 is displayed as the extinction EF effect. However, instead of this, as an extinction EF effect, the mode that would have appeared if the reception validity determination had been made within the 2D reception period (first extinction related display SKD1 or second extinction related display SKD2) appears. You can do it like this. According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the reception is valid within the 2D reception period, it is possible to check the mode of the disappearing EF effect displayed based on the arrival of timing tX3. , it becomes possible to recognize in which mode (low expectation mode or high expectation mode) the 2D post-reception performance would have been executed if the reception validity determination had been made within the 2D reception period.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 238 and 246 and the modified example shown in FIG. 251, if timing tX3 arrives without reception validation being determined within the 2D reception period, the 2D post-reception performance is executed. I tried to prevent it from happening. However, instead of this, the production examples shown in FIGS. 238 and 246, the modification example shown in FIG. 251, the production examples shown in FIGS. 235 and 242, the modification example shown in FIG. 249, etc. Similarly, the 2D post-reception performance may be executed based on the arrival of timing tX3 without reception validity determination being made within the 2D reception period. That is, in this case, the only difference is the remaining time shown by the remaining time display (the display area of the gauge image is "0"), and the other differences are as shown in FIGS. 246 (e1) to (i1) or 246 (e2) to ( The presentation will proceed in the manner shown in i2), or in the manner shown in FIGS. 251(e1) to (i1) or FIGS. 251(e2) to (i2).

[Performance of reception acceptance period that can be operated multiple times]
As explained using FIG. 118 as an example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) that are prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a production judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.) regarding which of the expected productions (preliminary presentation etc.) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the player receives a special benefit. It becomes possible to perform a jackpot game or transition to a high probability game state.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), a reception permissible period (validity period) during which production reception is permitted can occur.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), a reception permissible period (validity period) during which production reception is permitted can occur. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected and a special result is not obtained in the production judgment, the acceptance acceptance period (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptable acceptance period (validity period) that occurs with a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance period (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is performed as a performance (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an acceptance period can be generated in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed, and within the acceptance period, the When an action (operation) is accepted, a display change (post-acceptance display) is caused depending on the type of acceptance period that occurred. More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 includes a "motion detection means (such as a sensor) that detects a motion (operation) by a player" and a "detected information storage means (peripheral control) that stores information detected by the motion detection means". (RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.)" and "A reception period can be generated, and a reception validity determination that determines that a player's action is a valid action is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means. If it is done within the reception period, it is equipped with reception-related effect execution means (peripheral control MPU 1511a, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.) that can execute a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period. There is.

Furthermore, during the acceptance period, an action target display indicating which "target of the player's action" is to be displayed can be displayed. Such an action object display may be displayed, for example, as a model image display in which an object (operating means) that is the object of an action by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this performance example is displayed as a "simulation image display" that imitates the object of the player's action and has a plurality of modes with different expectations.

Furthermore, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which actions (operations) by the player are allowed to be accepted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be performed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this production example, multiple aspects (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image decreases, the level of expectation, and the type of operation means) are used as aspects of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. It is intended to be implemented in one of these ways. Different expectations (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may be suggested depending on which mode the game is executed.

In addition, in the event that a reception period occurs, a precursor effect that suggests that the player will be given an opportunity to perform an action (suggesting that the reception period will occur) can be performed before this period. There is. The foreshadowing performance is, for example, performed by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 or outputting a corresponding sound.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permissible period (validity period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. Regardless of which result is obtained as a preview performance judgment, fluctuation patterns that generate an acceptance acceptance period (validity period) at a predetermined timing are not included in low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). However, it is desirable (though not necessarily necessary) to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate).

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and each example described below, the "operation (movement) by the player" to be detected refers to the "operation (movement) by the player" such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword ornament 5001". It is not limited to things that are directly operated by the player (pressing motion or sword drawing motion), but also "touch motions by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by touch sensors, and "game movements within a specific space" that can be detected by non-contact sensors. The meaning also includes ``actions by the player in the game''. In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operating means) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

By the way, the acceptance acceptance period (validity period) according to this embodiment may be such that the types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound are different, the audible output status of BGM is different, or the acceptance acceptance period (validity period) is different. Various types of acceptance acceptance periods (valid periods) are available, such as the number of times operations are allowed within the period (period), and whether or not the auto-repeat function is enabled. There is.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special performance is provided between a plurality of reception permissible periods, so that the performance when the reception permissible period occurs is enhanced. In addition, the tension will be suitably maintained when the acceptance period occurs. Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to suppress the decline in It is also possible to adopt the configurations described as "preferred applications" as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decline in gaming interest related to the acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1-D]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display that is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" and "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. It is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the sample image display), and when an operation is accepted during the said sample image display acceptance period, Acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation, and being in a state where operation acceptance is permitted when the sample image display acceptance period occurs. , or a permissible sound output means capable of audibly outputting an acceptance permissible sound indicating that the operation is permitted to be accepted. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units as the sample image display acceptance period; At least a "long period display acceptance period" is provided, which is not displayed in units of a predetermined time, but can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 1-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition to the sample image display reception period in which the sample image display is displayed, there will be an additional acceptance period in which the sample image display is not displayed, and the performance will be different depending on whether or not the sample image display is displayed. It may be suggested.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 1-D", the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output during the "short period display acceptance period", and the reception permissible sound is not audibly output during the "long period display acceptance period". It may be possible to do so in some cases. According to such a configuration, in the "long cycle display acceptance period", the player is given an operation opportunity compared to the "short cycle display acceptance period" in which the acceptance permission sound is output audibly. Since it becomes difficult to recognize this, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension caused by the increased possibility of forgetting to perform an operation.

In this case, the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output during the "short period display acceptance period", and the acceptance permissible sound is sometimes output audibly and sometimes not audibly during the "long period display acceptance period". Good too. According to such a configuration, it is not enough to recognize whether a "short-cycle display acceptance period" or a "long-cycle display acceptance period" is occurring by simply confirming that the acceptance permission sound has been audibly output. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension not only when the reception permission sound is not audibly output, but also when the reception permission sound is audibly output.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 1-D", in the "long cycle display acceptance period", mode sounds that cannot appear in the "short cycle display acceptance period" can be output as acceptance permissible sounds. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize whether a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period" is occurring by simply checking whether or not the acceptance permission sound has been audibly output. Although it is difficult to do so, if you also check the type (modal sound), you may be able to easily recognize that a "long period display acceptance period" has occurred. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the reception permission sound is audibly output.

In this case, the same mode sound may be output as the acceptance permission sound in the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period". According to such a configuration, even if the type (modal sound) is confirmed when the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output, the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period" ” Since it is not always easy to recognize which one is occurring, it is expected that a sense of tension can be maintained more appropriately.

[Configuration 2-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the said sample image display), and the operation reception is not performed during the said sample image display acceptance period. Then, an acceptance period execution means is provided which can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units as the sample image display acceptance period; At least a "long period display acceptance period" is provided, which is not displayed in units of a predetermined time, but can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. It is assumed that both the "short-cycle display acceptance period" and the "long-cycle display acceptance period" can occur while some kind of performance sound is being audibly output. Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 2-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so that a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition to the sample image display acceptance period during which the sample image display is displayed, there will be an additional acceptance period during which the sample image display is not displayed, and the performance will vary depending on whether or not the sample image display is displayed. It may be suggested.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 2-D", during the "short period display acceptance period", all of the performance sounds that were audible at the time of occurrence until the end of the acceptance period ) will not be made inaudible, but during the "long-cycle display acceptance period", (all) of the performance sounds that were audible at the time of occurrence will be made inaudible until the end of the acceptance period. It may be possible to do so.

In other words, the sample image display acceptance period includes a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units. Even if a "long-period display reception period" is provided, which can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time without being displayed, in reality, periodic changes in the sample image display will not be displayed in the predetermined time. It is difficult to accurately judge whether it appears in units of time or in units of time longer than a predetermined time. In this regard, during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the production sound that was audible at the time of occurrence will not end until the end of the relevant acceptance period, but in the "long cycle display acceptance period" If it is possible that the sound effect that was audible at the time of occurrence may be terminated before the end of the reception period, will the sound effect that was audible at the time of generation be terminated? By confirming whether or not the period has occurred, it becomes possible to more accurately recognize which of the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period" is occurring.

In this case, during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the performance sound that was audible at the time of occurrence will not end until the end of the acceptance period, but during the "long cycle display acceptance period" Then, it may be arranged such that the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence may not be terminated or may be terminated until the reception period ends. According to such a configuration, even if the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not terminated until the end of the relevant reception period, the "short period display reception period" and the "long period display reception period" It is difficult to recognize which period is occurring. Therefore, the amount of time remaining in the reception period is reduced by the delay of the operation by the player in order to confirm whether or not the production sound that was audible at the time of occurrence will be ended. People are now expected to maintain a good sense of internal tension.

[Configuration 3-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display that is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the said sample image display), and the operation reception is not made during the said sample image display acceptance period. Then, an acceptance period execution means is provided which can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the sample image display acceptance period occurs when a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output, and when it occurs after a specific type of performance sound is rendered inaudible. There are both. The sample image display acceptance period includes a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units. At least a ``long period display acceptance period'' is provided, which can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time without being displayed. Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 3-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations. Further, the "specific type of effect sound" according to the configuration 3-D is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-D. Therefore, it may mean the same sound performance as the "specific type of sound performance" for other configurations, or it may mean a sound performance that is different from the "specific type of sound performance" for other configurations. It may be.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so that a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition to the sample image display acceptance period during which the sample image display is displayed, there will be an additional acceptance period during which the sample image display is not displayed, and the performance will vary depending on whether or not the sample image display is displayed. It may be suggested.

In addition, in the above configuration, the sample image display acceptance period occurs when a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output, and when it occurs after the specific type of performance sound is made inaudible. Since both exist, it is expected to improve the performance when the relevant sample image display acceptance period occurs.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 3-D", the "Short Cycle Display Acceptance Period" is based on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "Short Cycle Display Acceptance Period" occurs. Accordingly, the specific type of performance sound will not be made inaudible or inaudible before the relevant "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, but in the "long cycle display acceptance period" , Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs, a specific type of performance sound may be inaudible before the "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs. It may be arranged such that there are cases in which the signal is set to the inaudible state and cases in which the signal is not set to the inaudible state. According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when an operation opportunity is given, it will be determined whether it is a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period". Since it becomes easier to recognize whether the player is playing the game or not, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is provided.

Regarding the "short cycle display acceptance period", the appearance of the performance sound of a specific type will not change depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the short cycle display acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to do so. For example, the "short-cycle display acceptance period" may be such that a specific type of performance sound is always made inaudible before the "short-cycle display acceptance period" occurs, or the "short-cycle display acceptance period" A specific type of performance sound may always be made audible at the time when the "display acceptance period" occurs. Alternatively, the "short-cycle display acceptance period" may be used to display a specific type of display before the "short-cycle display acceptance period" occurs, depending on the type of post-operation display or post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted. There are cases (type) in which the effect sound is rendered inaudible, and cases (type) in which the effect sound of a specific type is made audible at the time the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs. Good too.

Regarding the "long cycle display acceptance period", for example, as a type of the "long cycle display acceptance period" in which the post-operation display and post-operation output sound are different when the operation is accepted, at least the "first long cycle display acceptance period" is specified. ” and “Second long-term display acceptance period”, and for the “First long-term display acceptance period”, the previous fluctuation that has ended at the time the first long-term display acceptance period occurs. The mode of the production sound does not change depending on the type of pattern (the reception period occurs (or does not occur) while the production sound of a specific type is audibly output), and the "second long period" In the "display acceptance period", the appearance of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the second long-cycle display acceptance period occurs (a state in which the effect sound of a specific type is inaudible) (There are cases where the reception period occurs in a non-audible state when the sound is output, and there are cases where the reception period occurs while a specific type of performance sound is being output audibly.) According to such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to judge whether a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period" is occurring. will be done.

[Configuration 4-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the said sample image display), and the operation reception is not performed during the said sample image display acceptance period. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, an acceptance period execution means is provided that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the sample image display acceptance period, when an operation is accepted, the pachinko machine 1 may display a post-acceptance display in such a manner that it appears to overlap from the front side with respect to the production design (decorative design, etc.). Then, as the sample image display acceptance period, there is a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in a predetermined time unit, and a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in a predetermined time unit. At least a ``long period display acceptance period'' is provided, which can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time without being displayed. Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 4-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Furthermore, in the above configuration, when an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display may be displayed in such a manner that it overlaps the production design from the front side, so it is necessary to emphasize the post-acceptance display. It has become possible to do this, and it is expected to improve the performance when an operation is accepted.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 4-D", during the short-cycle display acceptance period, there is no case where the display after acceptance is performed in a manner that overlaps the production design from the front side, and the reception is accepted on the back side. A post-reception display is performed, but during the long-cycle display acceptance period, there are cases in which the post-reception display is performed in such a manner that it appears to overlap from the front side with respect to the production design, and there are cases in which the post-reception display is performed on the back side of the production design. You can do it like this. According to such a configuration, when a short-cycle display acceptance period occurs, the display after acceptance is not emphasized against the production symbols, and the player is not given an opportunity to operate under a feeling of tension. will be able to be granted. When a long-cycle display acceptance period occurs, the display after acceptance may or may not be highlighted, so it is possible to optimally create a sense of tension when the player is given an opportunity to operate. It will be possible to provide a certain level of security while maintaining this.

In this case, based on the reception being made during the long-cycle display reception period, when displaying after reception in such a manner that it appears to overlap from the front side with respect to the production design, the reception will be It may be possible to shorten the period until the rear display is hidden and the performance symbols become easily visible. According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the post-acceptance display is emphasized, the decrease in gaming interest due to the decrease in the visibility of the performance symbols will be suitably suppressed.

[Configuration 5-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the said sample image display), and the operation reception is not performed during the said sample image display acceptance period. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, an acceptance period execution means is provided that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, there are two cases in which a disappearing EF display is executed in a predetermined manner in which the sample image display becomes difficult to visually recognize, and a case in which the disappearing EF display is executed in a predetermined manner. It may or may not be performed in a different manner. As the sample image display acceptance period, at least a ``first sample image display acceptance period'', a ``second sample image display acceptance period'', and a ``third sample image display acceptance period'' are prepared, and a ``first sample image display acceptance period'' is prepared. In the "image display acceptance period", periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units (short cycle display acceptance period), and in the "second sample image display acceptance period" and "third sample image display" "Reception period", periodic changes in the sample image display are not displayed in predetermined time units, but can be displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time (long period display). (Reception period). Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 5-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations. In addition, the “first image display acceptance period”, “second image display acceptance period”, and “third image display acceptance period” related to the configuration 5-D are based on the technical concept of the configuration 5-D. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period (validity period) as the "acceptance period (validity period)" of other configurations, or it may be different from the "acceptance period (validity period)" of other configurations. It may also mean the acceptance period (validity period).

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition, in the above configuration, when an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, there are two cases in which the disappearing EF display is executed in a predetermined manner, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display, and a case in which the disappearing EF display is executed in a predetermined manner. Since the EF is executed in a different manner or may not be executed in some cases, it is possible to add effects even with such disappearing EF display.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 5-D", if the operation is accepted during the "first sample image display acceptance period (short cycle display acceptance period)", a predetermined result (jackpot) will be obtained. It is assumed that the post-reception display can be executed in one of multiple modes with different expectations, and the extinguishing EF display is such that "When the post-reception display is executed in a mode with a high expectation among the multiple modes, the first mode is displayed." However, if the post-reception display is executed in a mode different from the highly expected mode among the plurality of modes, it will be executed in a mode different from the first mode, or it will not be executed. If the operation is accepted during the "second image display acceptance period (long period display acceptance period)", the acceptance will be accepted in one of several ways with different expectations that the predetermined result (jackpot) has been obtained. The post-reception display is made executable, and the extinguishing EF display is "When the post-reception display is executed in a highly expected manner among the plurality of modes, it is executed in the second mode; If it is executed in a mode different from the highly expected mode, it will be executed in a mode different from the above-mentioned second mode, or it will not be executed.'' If the operation is accepted during the ``Long Period Display Acceptance Period'', even if the post-acceptance display is possible in any of the multiple modes with different expectations in which a predetermined result (jackpot) has been obtained, the disappearing EF The display may be configured such that "regardless of which of the plurality of modes above the post-reception display is executed, the display is executed in the third mode." According to such a configuration, during the short period display acceptance period in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in predetermined time units, the degree of expectation is also suggested by the mode of the disappearing EF display when the operation is accepted. (First sample image display acceptance period) It becomes possible to provide an opportunity for operation so that the user does not feel anxious and have difficulty recognizing the level of expectation even though the user has performed the operation. On the other hand, in a long-period display acceptance period in which periodic changes in the sample image display are not displayed in units of a predetermined time but appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the periodic changes in the image display disappear when the operation is accepted. Depending on the mode of EF display, there are cases where the expectation level is suggested and cases where the expectation level is not suggested (second sample image display acceptance period, third sample image display acceptance period), so even though the operation is performed, Operation opportunities are provided so that the user does not feel uneasy because it is difficult to recognize the level of expectation, and it is also possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when providing the operation opportunities.

In this case, the "first aspect", "second aspect", "third aspect", "aspect different from the first aspect", and "aspect different from the second aspect" as extinction EF display are Some of the aspects may be the same (in an appropriate combination), or all of them may be different. However, the "first aspect" and the "aspect different from the first aspect" are different from each other, and the "second aspect" and the "aspect different from the second aspect" are different from each other.

[Configuration 6-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the said sample image display), and the operation reception is not performed during the said sample image display acceptance period. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, an acceptance period execution means is provided that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first operation means and a second operation means are prepared as operation means, and periodic changes in the sample image display are performed in predetermined time units as the sample image display acceptance period. ``Short cycle display acceptance period'' that can be displayed so that it appears, and a periodic change in the sample image display that can be displayed not so that it appears in a predetermined time unit, but in a time unit that is longer than the predetermined time. Prepare at least a long period display acceptance period. In at least one of the "short-cycle display acceptance period" and the "long-cycle display acceptance period," operation acceptance for the first operation means and operation acceptance for the second operation means are respectively permitted. I made it so that it was in the state. Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 6-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations. Further, the "first operating means" and "second operating means" according to the configuration 6-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-D. Therefore, the "first operating means" and "second operating means" according to other configurations may mean the same operating means, respectively, or the "first operating means" and the "second operating means" according to other configurations may mean the same operating means, respectively. "Two operating means" may mean different operating means.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Furthermore, in the above configuration, during at least one of the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period", the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are respectively performed. Since the state is set to be permissible, it is possible to add effects using a plurality of operating means.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 6-D", the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period" both include operation acceptance for the first operation means and operation reception for the second operation means. It may also be possible to allow each of the operation means to accept operations.

In this case, during the "short cycle display acceptance period", only a simulated image display imitating the first operation means among the operation means is displayed, and during the "long cycle display acceptance period", the first operation among the operation means is displayed. There are cases in which only a simulated image display imitating the means is displayed, and cases in which a simulated image display imitating the first operating means and a simulated image display imitating the second operating means are respectively displayed. It's okay. In other words, in this case, basically, during the "short period display acceptance period", it is kept secret that not only the first operating means but also the second operating means are given the opportunity to operate. During the "long-cycle display acceptance period," it may be possible to recognize that both the first operating means and the second operating means are given an opportunity to operate. However, if the player is able to discern that the time required for one periodic change in the sample image display is a predetermined time (the relevant reception period is the "short period display reception period"), the first operation Since it becomes possible to recognize that the operation opportunity is secretly given not only to the means but also to the second operation means, the performance when the operation opportunity is given is improved. It is now expected that

[Configuration 7-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display that is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword decoration body 5001", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the said sample image display), and the operation reception is not made during the said sample image display acceptance period. Then, an acceptance period execution means is provided which can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units as the sample image display acceptance period, and a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in a predetermined time unit. At least a "long period display acceptance period" is provided, which is not displayed in units of a predetermined time but can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In addition, during at least one of the "short-cycle display acceptance period" and the "long-cycle display acceptance period," operation acceptance can be allowed multiple times. Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 7-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition, in the above configuration, since the operation reception is allowed multiple times during at least one of the "short cycle display acceptance period" and the "long cycle display acceptance period", the operation reception is allowed multiple times. This makes it possible to add performance.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 7-D", during the "short period display acceptance period", the player's actions (operations) may be accepted (operation acceptance) multiple times regardless of the type of the acceptance period. The permissible type (for example, continuous press type) will be set, but in the case of "long cycle display acceptance period", the acceptance period will be changed depending on the type of acceptance period (type of display after acceptance, output sound after acceptance, etc.) (validity period) is of a type (for example, a single push type) that allows only one operation (operation reception) to be accepted by the player until the (validity period) ends (while it is occurring). , a type in which the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player (operation acceptance) is allowed multiple times until the acceptance permission period (validity period) ends (while it is occurring) ). According to such a configuration, when the "short period display acceptance period" occurs, it is suggested that operation acceptance is allowed multiple times (for example, it is a continuous press type). In addition, when the "long-cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it is now possible to hide whether or not operation acceptance is allowed multiple times (for example, whether it is a continuous press type or not). , you will be given the opportunity to operate in a tense environment.

In this case, even if the reception period (validity period) is for a type (e.g., continuous press type) that allows the reception of actions (operations) by the player multiple times, the lottery (judgment) related to the performance will not be accepted. Depending on the result, etc., the acceptance period (validity period) may end with just one operation acceptance. In short, any type of acceptance period (validity period) that can be accepted multiple times (pattern) is sufficient.

[Configuration 8-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the said sample image display), and the operation reception is not performed during the said sample image display acceptance period. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, an acceptance period execution means is provided that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units as the sample image display acceptance period, and a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in a predetermined time unit. At least a "long period display acceptance period" is provided, which is not displayed in units of a predetermined time but can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Then, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the sample image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period," the periodic changes that had been appearing in the sample image display until then are hidden from display. Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 8-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition, in the above configuration, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the sample image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that had appeared in the sample image display until then are hidden. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the image display, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when accepting an operation.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 8-D", in the "short period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the sample image display is The periodic changes that had appeared until then are hidden, but during the "long period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden, but when the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden. There may be cases in which the periodic changes that had appeared until then are hidden, and cases in which the periodic changes that had appeared until then in the sample image display are not hidden and are continued. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had been appearing in the sample image display continues without being hidden when an operation is accepted, a "long period display acceptance period" occurs. Be able to suggest things. In addition, if the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display are hidden when the operation is accepted, either the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" has occurred. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference.

In this case, "periodic changes are hidden" may mean that they are hidden by "hiding the sample image display," or the sample image display may continue to be displayed. The periodic changes that have appeared up to that point may be temporarily terminated and become a static display, the same periodic changes may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started.

[Configuration 9-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a "sample image display acceptance period" during which operation acceptance is permitted (for the operation means that is the object of being simulated as the said sample image display), and the operation reception is not performed during the said sample image display acceptance period. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, an acceptance period execution means is provided that can execute at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in predetermined time units as the sample image display acceptance period, and a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in a predetermined time unit. At least a "long period display acceptance period" is provided, which is not displayed in units of a predetermined time but can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Then, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the sample image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period," the periodic changes that have been appearing in the sample image display until then are not hidden but continue. I made it. Note that the "predetermined time" according to the configuration 9-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time from the "predetermined time" in other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the sample image display, so a sample image display acceptance period occurs. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition, in the above configuration, even if an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the sample image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that had appeared in the sample image display until then are not displayed. It is expected that it will be possible to check the time required for one periodic change in the sample image display even after the operation is accepted.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 9-D", in the "short period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the sample image display is The periodic changes that had appeared until then are not hidden and continue to be displayed, but in the "long period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the sample image display There may be cases in which the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point are hidden, and there are cases in which the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point in the sample image display are not hidden and are continued. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had previously appeared on the sample image display is hidden when an operation is accepted, it is suggested that a "long period display acceptance period" has occurred. You will be able to do this. In addition, if the periodic changes that had been appearing in the sample image display are not hidden and continue when the operation is accepted, either the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" This will make it difficult to recognize that it has occurred.

In this case, "periodic changes are hidden" may mean that they are hidden by "hiding the sample image display," or the sample image display may continue to be displayed. The periodic changes that have appeared up to that point may be temporarily terminated and become a static display, the same periodic changes may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started.

[Configuration 10-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there is a reception acceptance period during which operation reception on the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") is permitted. an acceptance period execution means capable of generating at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation when the operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period; and a permissible sound output means capable of audibly outputting an acceptance permissive sound indicating that the operation acceptance is in a permissible state or that the operation reception is permissible when the permissible period occurs. Furthermore, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance acceptance period" is prepared in which the operation acceptance is allowed multiple times until the acceptance acceptance period ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple-times permissible period" is defined as "operation reception is allowed multiple times." At least a maintenance operation permissible period is prepared, and an acceptance permissible sound is audibly output during the maintenance operation permissible period when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs.

According to such a configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowable period), if the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, By audibly outputting the reception permission sound, it becomes easy to start the operation immediately after the maintenance operation permission period occurs, and it is possible to perform the operation multiple times while there is plenty of time remaining. It is expected that this will reduce the decline in interest in gaming, as it will enable users to "receive multiple operations just by keeping the operating means in the operated state." become.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 10-D", the "multiple-times permissible period" is such that "operating means for which operation reception is permitted for multiple times" among the plurality of operating means is at least displayed as a sample image. There is a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which operations are accepted multiple times by simply keeping the operation means corresponding to the image displayed in an operated state, and a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which operations are accepted multiple times among multiple operation means. A "maintenance operation non-permissible period" in which an allowable operation means is displayed at least as a sample image display, but operation acceptance cannot be made multiple times simply by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the sample image display. You may also prepare one. In the "maintenance operation permissible period," the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs, but the acceptance permissible sound may not be audibly output during the maintenance operation nonpermissible period. According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the reception permission sound is audibly output, the "auto continuous hit function" is enabled, which allows operation reception to be performed multiple times simply by keeping the operation means in an operated state. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not.

[Configuration 11-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the acceptance acceptance period during which operation acceptance is allowed for the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. There is. In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance acceptance period" is prepared in which at least a mock image display of an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple play permissible period" may cause the performance sound that is audible at the time of occurrence to become inaudible until the "multiple play permissible period" ends. be. Further, as the "multiple times permissible period", there is at least a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operating means corresponding to the image display in an operated state.

According to such a configuration, if the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence becomes inaudible while an operation opportunity is given, the operation reception is allowed multiple times. It becomes possible to indicate that a tolerance period is occurring. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowed period), it is possible to do so by simply continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the sample image display. It is expected that this will prevent a decline in interest in gaming, since the operation will be accepted multiple times.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 11-D", the "multiple times permissible period" is such that the operation means for which operation acceptance is permitted for multiple times among the plurality of operation means is at least displayed as a sample image display. There is also a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which operations can be accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in an operated state, and a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which operations can be accepted multiple times among multiple operation means. A ``maintenance operation non-permissible period'' is provided in which the operation means that can be used is displayed at least as a sample image display, but the operation reception is not accepted multiple times simply by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the sample image display. You may also do so. In the "maintenance operation permissible period", the performance sound that is in an audible state at the time of occurrence will not be rendered inaudible until the "maintenance operation permissible period" ends; however, during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" In this case, the performance sound that is in an audible state at the time of generation may be rendered inaudible until the maintenance operation non-permissible period ends. According to such a configuration, when a "multiple times permissible period" occurs, the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence becomes inaudible until the "multiple times permissible period" ends. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the "auto continuous hit function" in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operating means in an operated state is enabled or not.

In this case, the "maintaining operation permissible period" and the "maintaining operation not permissible period" may occur while the audible output of the performance sound is being reduced (suppressed) in volume. That is, it is sufficient if the performance sound is audible at the time when the "multiple times permissible period" occurs.

[Configuration 12-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the acceptance acceptance period during which operation acceptance is allowed for the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. There is. In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance acceptance period" is prepared in which at least a mock image display of an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple times permissible period" occurs when a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output, and when it occurs after a specific type of performance sound is made inaudible. There are cases. In addition, as the multiple-times permissible period, at least a ``maintenance operation permissible period in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operating means corresponding to the display of the sample image in an operated state'' is prepared. Note that the "specific type of performance sound" according to the configuration 12-D is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-D. Therefore, it may mean the same sound performance as the "specific type of sound performance" for other configurations, or it may mean a sound performance that is different from the "specific type of sound performance" for other configurations. It may be.

According to such a configuration, the "multiple times permissible period" occurs when a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output, and when it occurs after a specific type of performance sound is rendered inaudible. Since there are both cases, it is possible to improve the performance. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowed period), it is possible to do so by simply continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the sample image display. It is expected that this will prevent a decline in interest in gaming, since the operation will be accepted multiple times.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 12-D", the "multiple times permissible period" that may occur while a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output is determined by the operation reception among the multiple operation means. A "maintenance operation permissible period" in which an operation means that is permissible for multiple times is displayed at least as a sample image display, and the operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the sample image display. ", among the plurality of operation means, the operation means for which the operation can be accepted multiple times is displayed at least as a sample image display. However, if the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is kept in the operated state, the operation cannot be performed. A "maintenance operation non-permissible period" may be provided during which multiple receptions are not accepted. In the "maintenance operation permissible period", a specific type of performance sound is generated before the relevant maintenance operation permissible period occurs according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the relevant maintenance operation permissible period occurs. However, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs If the performance sound of a specific type is made inaudible before the relevant "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs depending on the type of There may be a case in which the period occurs) and a case in which the state is not rendered inaudible (a case in which a maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs in a state where a specific type of performance sound is audibly output). According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple times permissible period" occurs, this can be used as the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintain operation non-permissible period". Since it becomes easier to recognize which one it is, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is given.

Regarding the "maintenance operation permissible period", the aspect of the performance sound of the specific type should not change depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. is desirable. For example, the "maintenance operation permissible period" may be such that a specific type of production sound is always made inaudible before the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs, or the "maintenance operation permissible period" '' may be made such that a specific type of performance sound is always in an audible state at the time when this occurs. Alternatively, the "maintenance operation permissible period" may be such that, depending on the type of post-operation display or post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted, a specific type of performance sound may be generated before the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs. may be made inaudible (type), and there may be cases (type) in which a specific type of performance sound is made audible at the time when the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs.

Regarding the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", for example, as a type of the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" in which the post-operation display and post-operation output sound are different when the operation is accepted, at least the "first maintenance operation non-permissible period" is specified. ” and a “second maintenance operation non-permissible period”, and for the “first maintenance operation non-permission period”, the previous fluctuation that has ended at the time the first maintenance operation non-permission period occurs. The mode of the production sound does not change depending on the type of pattern (the reception period occurs (or does not occur) while the production sound of a specific type is audibly output), and the "second maintenance operation" In the "non-permissible period", the appearance of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the second maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs (a state in which the specific type of effect sound is inaudible) (There are cases where the reception period occurs in a non-audible state when the sound is output, and there are cases where the reception period occurs while a specific type of performance sound is being output audibly.) According to such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to judge whether the "maintenance operation permissible period" or the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" is occurring. Become so.

[Configuration 13-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there is a reception acceptance period during which operation reception on the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") is permitted. and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. There is. In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance acceptance period" is provided in which at least a mock image display of an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first operating means and a second operating means are prepared as operating means, and during the acceptance acceptance period, operations are accepted for the first operating means and operations are accepted for the second operating means. In some cases, all types of operation reception are allowed. In addition, as the "multiple times permissible period", at least a "maintenance operation permissible period" is provided in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operating means corresponding to the display of the sample image in an operated state. Note that the "first operation means" and "second operation means" according to the configuration 13-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-D. Therefore, the "first operating means" and "second operating means" according to other configurations may mean the same operating means, or the "first operating means" and "second operating means" according to other configurations may mean the same operating means. "Operating means" may mean different operating means.

According to such a configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowed period), it is possible to It is expected that this will prevent a decrease in interest in gaming, as the operation will be accepted multiple times just by continuing to maintain the state. In addition, during the reception permissible period, operation reception for the first operation means and operation reception for the second operation means are both permitted, so multiple operation means can be used. It becomes possible to add a certain level of performance.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 13-D", the "multiple times permissible period" is such that the operation means for which the operation reception is permitted for multiple times among the plurality of operation means is at least displayed as a sample image display. There is also a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which operations can be accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the image display in an operated state, and a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which operations can be accepted multiple times among multiple operation means. A ``maintenance operation non-permissible period'' is provided in which the operation means that can be used is displayed at least as a sample image display, but the operation reception is not accepted multiple times simply by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the sample image display. You may also do so. In the "maintenance operation permissible period", both operation reception on the first operation means and operation reception on the second operation means are permitted, but the Both the image display and the simulated image display imitating the second operating means are not displayed, and only one of the simulated image displays can be displayed. Both operation acceptance for the first operating means and operation acceptance for the second operating means are allowed, and a simulated image display imitating the first operating means and a simulated image display imitating the second operating means are allowed. There may be at least some cases in which both the image display and the image display are displayed. In other words, in this case, basically, during the "maintenance operation permissible period", the operation opportunity is granted to the first operation means and the second operation means on which the corresponding sample image display is not displayed. It may be kept secret, and it may be possible to recognize that the operation opportunity is given to both the first operation means and the second operation means during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period". Become. As a result, when it is confirmed that the "maintenance operation permissible period" has occurred as the "multiple times permissible period", the user is prompted to perform the operation on the operation means on the side where the sample image display is not displayed. As a result, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In this case, if both the operation reception on the first operation means and the operation reception on the second operation means are permitted during the "maintenance operation non-permission period", the first operation means is simulated. It may be arranged so that only one of the simulated image display and the simulated image display imitating the second operating means is displayed, and both of them may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, if both the operation reception on the first operation means and the operation reception on the second operation means are permitted in the "maintenance operation non-permission period" (for example, after reception display or after reception Depending on the type of output sound, etc.), only one of the model image display imitating the first operating means and the model image display imitating the second operating means is displayed, and the case where the model image display imitating the first operating means is displayed. Both the second operation means and a simulated image display may be displayed respectively.

In this case, if both the operation reception on the first operation means and the operation reception on the second operation means are permitted during the "maintenance operation permissible period", the operation reception on the first operation means is permitted. Both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are allowed multiple times, and the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are made so that both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are allowed multiple times. If both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted, one of the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means is permitted multiple times, but the other may be allowed only once. Furthermore, in this case, during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", the operation means (for example, the second operation means) that is hidden without being displayed as a sample image display is permitted multiple times during the "maintenance operation permissible period". By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the automatic repeated hitting function not functioning when operating the operating means (for example, the second operating means) corresponding to the display of the sample image.

[Configuration 14-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there is a reception acceptance period during which operation reception on the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") is permitted. and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. There is. In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple acceptance acceptance period" is provided in which at least a mock image display of an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple times permissible period" includes at least a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operating means corresponding to the sample image display in an operated state. During the "maintenance operation permissible period," when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as a sample image display that has been displayed up to that point is changed.

According to such a configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowed period), it is possible to It is expected that this will prevent a decrease in interest in gaming, as the operation will be accepted multiple times just by continuing to maintain the state. In addition, when an operation is accepted, the display mode as a sample image display that has been displayed up to that point changes, so even if the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is kept in the operated state, the operation can be accepted. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the process is being carried out appropriately.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 14-D", the "multiple-times permissible period" is such that at least the operating means for which operation reception is allowed for multiple times is displayed as a sample image display, and the sample image At least a "maintenance operation permissible period" in which the operation can be accepted multiple times by simply keeping the operating means corresponding to the display in an operated state, and an operating means for which the operation can be accepted multiple times are displayed at least as a sample image display. However, a ``maintenance operation non-permissible period'' may be provided in which the operation is not accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operating means corresponding to the display of the sample image in an operated state. In the "maintenance operation permissible period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as a sample image display that has appeared until then changes, but in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", when the operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) is changed. Even if this is done, the display mode (visibility) as a sample image display that has been displayed up to that point may not be changed. According to such a configuration, during the "maintenance operation permissible period", it is suitably suggested that the operation reception is properly performed just by maintaining the operation state, so that the auto continuous hit function is enabled. Coupled with this, it is expected that the interest in gaming will increase. On the other hand, during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", even if an operation is accepted, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the operation has been accepted properly or not. Users are now expected to encourage themselves to perform operations more actively and repeatedly.

[Configuration 15-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a sample image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound are generated based on the operation acceptance. acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs; and acceptance acceptance that indicates that operation acceptance is in a state where operation acceptance is allowed or will be in a state where operation acceptance is allowed when the sample image display acceptance period occurs. and permissible sound output means capable of outputting sound audibly. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the sample image display acceptance period, only the image display that simulates the operation means that is allowed to be operated once is displayed as the sample image display. "Reception period for displaying a sample image" and "Reception period for displaying a special type of image display" in which at least an image display that simulates an operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is displayed as a sample image display. During the "specified type of sample image display acceptance period," the operation means that is set as an operation target for which one operation reception is allowed and that is to be displayed as a sample image display. When the operation is accepted and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the above-mentioned sample image display corresponding to the operation means are hidden, and the ``special type'' During the ``sample image display acceptance period'', if the operation is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept multiple operations and the operation means that is targeted to be displayed as a sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the corresponding operation will be accepted. The periodic changes that had appeared up to that point in the above-mentioned sample image display corresponding to the operating means can be continued. Furthermore, the "specific type of sample image display acceptance period" and the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" related to the configuration 15-D are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 15-D. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same sample image display acceptance period as the ``specific type of sample image display acceptance period'' and the ``special type of sample image display acceptance period'' in other configurations, or The "specific type of sample image display acceptance period" and the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" may mean a different sample image display acceptance period.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted, depending on whether or not the periodic changes that had previously appeared in the sample image display are hidden, the period of acceptance of a specific type of sample image display (operation It is now possible to suggest which of the following is occurring: ``1 reception allowed)'' or ``special type of sample image display reception period (multiple operation reception allowed)''.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 15-D", when the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" occurs, there will be cases where the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output and cases where the acceptance permissible sound is not audibly output. It may be made so that there is. If the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, the operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times during the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" is operated and operation acceptance is performed. , the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display will be hidden, but if the reception permission sound is not audibly output, the operation reception will be repeated multiple times during the "special type sample image display acceptance period". When the operation means set as a permissible operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have been appearing in the sample image display may be continued without being hidden. According to such a configuration, when the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" occurs, depending on whether or not the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, if the operation is accepted, the sample image display will not appear until then. It is now possible to suggest whether or not periodic changes that have been hidden will be hidden.

[Configuration 16-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a sample image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound are generated based on the operation acceptance. It is provided with acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the sample image display acceptance period, only the image display that simulates the operation means that is allowed to be operated once is displayed as the sample image display. "Reception period for displaying a sample image" and "Reception period for displaying a special type of image display" in which at least an image display that simulates an operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is displayed as a sample image display. During the "specified type of sample image display acceptance period," the operation means that is set as an operation target for which one operation reception is allowed and that is to be displayed as a sample image display. When the operation is accepted and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the above-mentioned sample image display corresponding to the operation means are hidden, and the ``special type'' During the ``sample image display acceptance period'', if the operation is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept multiple operations and the operation means that is targeted to be displayed as a sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the corresponding operation will be accepted. It is possible to continue the periodic changes that have been appearing in the above-mentioned sample image display corresponding to the operating means. Both of the "specific type of sample image display acceptance period" and the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" can occur while the performance sound is audibly output. Furthermore, the "specific type of sample image display acceptance period" and the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" related to the configuration 16-D are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 16-D. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same sample image display acceptance period as the ``specific type of sample image display acceptance period'' and the ``special type of sample image display acceptance period'' in other configurations, or The "specific type of sample image display acceptance period" and the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" may mean a different sample image display acceptance period.

In such a configuration, the performance sound is set for both the "Specific type of sample image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed once)" and the "Special type sample image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed multiple times)". Since the sound can be generated while being audibly output, it is possible to provide a performance using the performance sound.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 16-D", the "Special type of sample image display acceptance period" shall be extended until the said "Special type of sample image display acceptance period" ends. There may be cases in which the effect sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is not rendered inaudible, and cases in which the effect sound that was in the audible state at the time of occurrence is made inaudible. Then, while a "special type of sample image display reception period" is occurring and the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of the occurrence is being output audibly, the operation is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times. When the operating means is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared up to that time are hidden in the image display corresponding to the operating means, and the image corresponding to the operating means is It may also be possible to allow periodic changes that have appeared on the display up to that point to continue without being hidden. On the other hand, while a "special type of sample image display acceptance period" has occurred and the performance sound that was audible at the time of occurrence has been made inaudible, operation acceptance is allowed multiple times. When the operation means set as the operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have been appearing until then on the image display corresponding to the operation means are continued without being hidden. Good too. According to such a configuration, when a "special type of sample image display acceptance period" occurs, the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence within the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" becomes inaudible. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic changes that had been appearing in the sample image display until then will be hidden when the operation is accepted, depending on whether the state is set or not.

[Configuration 17-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a sample image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound are generated based on the operation acceptance. It is provided with acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the period for accepting sample image display is divided into two types: ``period for accepting sample image displays of types that may occur while specific BGM is audibly output'' and ``period for accepting sample images that may occur while specific BGM is being output audibly.'' "Reception period for displaying a sample image of a type that cannot occur" and "Reception period for displaying a sample image of a type that may occur while specific BGM is being output audibly" is a period in which one operation is allowed. ``Specific type of sample image display acceptance period'' in which only the image display that simulates the operation means that is set as the operation target is displayed as the above-mentioned sample image display, and the ``specific type of sample image display acceptance period'' that is set as the operation target that allows multiple operation acceptance. It can be further classified into a "special type of simulated image display reception period" in which an image display that simulates the operation means that is used is displayed at least as the simulated image display. During the "specified type of sample image display acceptance period," the operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept one operation and that is to be displayed as a sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted. is performed, based on the acceptance of the operation, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display corresponding to the operation means are hidden, and the ``special type sample image display acceptance period'' '', when an operation is accepted by operating an operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept an operation multiple times and is displayed as a sample image display, the operation corresponding to the operation means is operated. The periodic changes that had previously appeared in the above-mentioned sample image display were made to be able to continue.

According to such a configuration, when the operation acceptance is given while the specific BGM is audibly output, the "specific type sample image display acceptance period (one operation acceptance is allowed)" and the "special type While maintaining a good sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize which one of the sample image display acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance is allowed) is occurring, the sample image display is changed accordingly when an operation is accepted. Depending on whether or not the periodic changes that had appeared up until now have been hidden, "Specific type of sample image display acceptance period (operation reception allowed once)" and "Special type sample image display acceptance period (operation reception allowed)" It will be possible to suggest which of the following is occurring:

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 17-D", the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" is the period when the operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is operated. When the operation is accepted, there is a "first special type of sample image display acceptance period" that hides the periodic changes that had appeared in the sample image display corresponding to the operation means, and a period corresponding to the operation means. It can be further classified into a "second special type of sample image display acceptance period" in which periodic changes that had previously appeared in the sample image display continue without being hidden, and a "first special type of sample image display acceptance period". ``period'' occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern, which has ended at the time the ``first special type sample image display acceptance period'' occurs. , the "second special type sample image display acceptance period" is such that the specific BGM is It may be arranged such that there are cases in which this occurs while the specific BGM is being output audibly, and cases in which it occurs while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when a "multiple permissible period" occurs while specific BGM is audibly output, this can be "responsive to operation reception". This can be used as a basis for determining whether or not the periodic changes that had previously appeared are hidden, allowing the user to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunities are provided. be able to encourage

[Configuration 18-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display is displayed, which is a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001"). At the same time, it is possible to generate a sample image display acceptance period during which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound are generated based on the operation acceptance. It is provided with acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first operating means and a second operating means are prepared as operating means, and during the sample image display acceptance period, an operation is accepted for the first operating means and an operation is accepted for the second operating means. There are cases where each operation reception is allowed. The sample image display acceptance period is the ``specified type of sample image display acceptance period'' during which only an image display that simulates an operation means that is allowed to be operated once is displayed as the sample image display. ” and a “special type of simulated image display acceptance period” in which at least an image display that simulates the operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed as the simulated image display. Yes, and during the "specified type of sample image display acceptance period," the operation is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept one operation, and the operation means that is set as the target to be displayed as a sample image display is operated and the operation is not accepted. is performed, based on the acceptance of the operation, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display corresponding to the operation means are hidden, and the ``special type sample image display acceptance period'' '', when an operation is accepted by operating an operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept an operation multiple times and is displayed as a sample image display, the operation corresponding to the operation means is operated. It was made possible to continue the periodic changes that had previously appeared in the image display.

According to such a configuration, depending on whether the "specific type of sample image display acceptance period" or the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" is occurring, when the operation is accepted, the sample image is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic changes that were previously appearing will be hidden. Furthermore, in the above configuration, since the state is such that the reception of operations for the first operation means and the reception of operations for the second operation means are respectively permitted, it is possible to use a plurality of operation means. It becomes possible to add performance.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 18-D", the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" is the period when the operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is operated. When the operation is accepted, a "first special type of sample image display acceptance period" for terminating the periodic changes that have appeared in the sample image display corresponding to the operation means, and a sample image corresponding to the operation means are activated. It can be further classified into a "second special type of sample image display acceptance period" that continues without ending the periodic changes that had appeared in the display up to that point, and a "first special type of sample image display acceptance period". , both acceptance of operations on the first operation means and acceptance of operations on the second operation means are permitted; However, in the "second special type of sample image display acceptance period", the first operating means Both operation reception for the first operation means and operation reception for the second operation means are allowed, and a sample image display imitating the first operation means and a sample image display imitating the second operation means are allowed. Both may be displayed at least in some cases. In other words, in this case, basically, during the "first special type of sample image display acceptance period", the operation opportunity is granted to the side of the first operating means and the second operating means in which the "corresponding sample image display" is not displayed. In the "second special type sample image display acceptance period", the state where the operation opportunity is given to both the first operation means and the second operation means is kept secret. There are cases in which certain things are recognized as recognizable. As a result, when it is confirmed that the "first special type of sample image display acceptance period" has occurred, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation means on the side where the sample image display is not displayed. As a result, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In this case, if both the operation reception on the first operation means and the operation reception on the second operation means are permitted in the "second special type of sample image display reception period", the first It may be arranged so that only one of the simulated image display imitating the operating means and the simulated image display imitating the second operating means is displayed, and both of them may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, if both the operation reception on the first operation means and the operation reception on the second operation means are permitted in the "second special type of sample image display reception period" (for example, the reception (depending on the type of post-response display or post-acceptance output sound, etc.) only one of the sample image display imitating the first operation means and the sample image display imitating the second operation means is displayed; Both the simulated image display and the simulated image display simulated the second operating means may be respectively displayed.

[Configuration 19-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the acceptance acceptance period during which operation acceptance is allowed for the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") an acceptance period executing means capable of generating at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation when the operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period; and a permissible sound output means capable of audibly outputting a reception permissive sound indicating that the operation reception is in a permissible state or that the operation reception is permissible when the permissible period occurs. In addition, during the reception permissible period, it is possible to display a "reception period related periodicity display" which is an image display that can show periodic changes, and during the reception permissible period, it is possible to display "multiple times" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times. At least a "tolerable period" shall be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple play permissible period" is a "specific multiple play permissible period" in which the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are at least prepared as a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display". In the "specific multiple-times permissible period," each time an operation that is permitted multiple times is accepted, the periodic change that had previously appeared in the first periodicity display is hidden. In addition, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple permissible period", according to the configuration 19-D, and "special multiple use permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 19-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple allowable period", and " "Special multiple-time permissible period" may mean the same means, respectively, or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations , "fourth periodicity display," "specific multiple-time permissible period," and "special multiple-time permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, in the "specific multiple times permissible period", the operation is accepted by checking the number of times the periodic change appearing in the "first periodicity display" is hidden. You will be able to check the number of times.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 19-D", in the "specific multiple times permissible period", when the reception permissible sound occurs, the reception permissible sound is audibly output, and the operation reception that is permissible multiple times is performed. Each time a periodic change is made, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point is hidden in the "first periodicity display," but the periodic change that has appeared up to that point continues in the "second periodicity display." You can do it like this. In addition, in the "special multiple permissible period", the reception permissible sound is not audibly output when the period occurs, and each time a multiple permissible operation is accepted, the "third periodicity display" and the "fourth periodicity display" and "fourth periodicity display" are displayed. In either case, the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point may be continued. In other words, in this case, it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly based on the aspect of the 'acceptance period related periodicity display' when the operation is accepted, through the presence or absence of an audible output of the acceptance permission sound. ” will be able to suggest. Furthermore, even if the reception permission sound is audibly output (indicating that it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed), the "second periodicity display" is not the "first periodicity display". A person who mistakenly looks at the "periodic display" will have difficulty recognizing whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, and is therefore expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 20-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there is a reception acceptance period during which operation reception on the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") is permitted. and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, during the reception permissible period, it is possible to display a "reception period related periodicity display" which is an image display that may show periodic changes, and during the reception permissible period, a "multiple-time display" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times can be displayed. At least a "tolerable period" shall be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple play permissible period" is a "specific multiple play permissible period" in which the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". , the third periodicity display, and the fourth periodicity display are at least provided as a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display" is displayed. In addition, both the "specific multiple times permissible period" and the "special multiple times permissible period" can occur while the performance sound is audibly output. In addition, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple permissible period", according to the configuration 20-D, "Special multiple use permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 20-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple allowable period", and " "Special multiple permissible period" may mean the same means, respectively, or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations , "fourth periodicity display," "specific multiple-time permissible period," and "special multiple-time permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, since both the "specific multiple permissible period" and the "special multiple permissible period" can occur while the production sound is audibly output, the production It becomes possible to provide effects using sounds and "reception period related periodic display".

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 20-D", each time an operation is accepted that is allowed multiple times during the "specific multiple allowable period", the "first periodicity display" Although the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point are hidden, the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point may be continued in the "second periodic display." In addition, in the "special multiple permissible period", each time an operation that is permitted multiple times is accepted, the information that previously appeared in both the "3rd periodicity display" and the "4th periodicity display" will be displayed. The periodic change may be continued. The "specific multiple use permissible period" means that the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not rendered inaudible until the "specific multiple use permissible period" ends, and the "special The effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence may be made inaudible until the "specific multiple times allowed period" ends. In other words, in this case, whether or not the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is made inaudible until the end of the reception period (validity period) Based on the aspect of the period-related periodicity display, it becomes possible to suggest whether it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed. In addition, even if the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not made inaudible, it is also possible to mistakenly focus on the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display". It is difficult for a person who has lost control to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, so he or she is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 21-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there is a reception acceptance period during which operation reception on the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") is permitted. and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, during the reception permissible period, it is possible to display a "reception period related periodicity display" which is an image display that may show periodic changes, and during the reception permissible period, a "multiple-time display" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times can be displayed. At least a "tolerable period" shall be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple times permissible period" occurs when a specific type of performance sound is being audibly output, and when it occurs after a specific type of performance sound is made inaudible. There are cases. Then, as the "multiple times permissible period", a "specific multiple times permissible period" in which the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display", and the third periodicity At least a "special multiple permissible period" in which the display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display" is prepared. In addition, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of performance sound", " "Specific multiple-time allowable period" and "special multiple-use allowable period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of performance sound", "specific "Multi-time permissible period" and "special multiple-time permissible period" may mean the same means, respectively, or "first periodicity display" and "second periodicity display" according to other configurations , "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of performance sound", "specific multiple times permissible period", and "special multiple times permissible period" mean different means. It may be something.

According to such a configuration, when a "multiple times permissible period" occurs, the multiple times permissible period can be confirmed by checking the output status of a specific type of performance sound, the form of the "acceptance period related periodicity display", etc. It becomes possible to suggest the type of permissible period.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 21-D", each time an operation is accepted that is allowed multiple times during the "specific multiple allowable period", the "first periodicity display" Although the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point are hidden, the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point may be continued in the "second periodic display." Then, the "specific multiple times permissible period" occurs when a specific type of performance sound is audibly output, but the "special multiple times permissible period" occurs when a specific type of performance sound is audibly output. There may be cases where the sound is generated while the specific type of performance sound is being output, and cases where the sound is generated when the specific type of performance sound is not audibly output. In other words, in this case, when the "multiple use permissible period" occurs while the specific type of performance sound is not audibly output, this is a "special multiple use permissible period", that is, when the operation is accepted, " It is now suggested that the aspect of "reception period related periodicity display" will not change. On the other hand, when a "multiple use permissible period" occurs while a specific type of production sound is audibly output, it is necessary to determine whether this is a "specific multiple use permissible period" or a "special multiple use permissible period". Since it becomes difficult to recognize, it is possible to urge users to pay close attention to whether the aspect of the "acceptance period related periodicity display" changes when an operation is accepted. Additionally, if a person mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display," a "special multiple permissible period" will occur instead of a "specific multiple permissible period." Since there is a risk of misperception that a person is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is not in a position to do so, he or she is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 22-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there is a reception acceptance period during which operation reception on the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") is permitted. and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, during the reception permissible period, it is possible to display a "reception period related periodicity display" which is an image display that may show periodic changes, and during the reception permissible period, a "multiple-time display" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times can be displayed. At least a "tolerable period" shall be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple play permissible period" is a "specific multiple play permissible period" in which the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are at least prepared as a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". When the "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed are set to be different from each other. In addition, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple permissible period", according to the configuration 22-D, and "special multiple-time permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 22-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple allowable period", and " "Special multiple permissible period" may mean the same means, respectively, or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations , "fourth periodicity display," "specific multiple-time permissible period," and "special multiple-time permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when a "multiple times permissible period" occurs, the type of the "multiple times permissible period" can be indicated by checking the mode of periodicity display related to the acceptance period. become. In addition, it is expected to improve the presentation performance when a "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 22-D", if a "specific multiple permissible period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the second periodicity display are displayed. However, if a "special multiple permissible period" occurs, the timing at which the third periodicity display is displayed and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display is displayed are the same. . In other words, in this case, depending on whether or not there is a difference in the timing of the two types of periodicity displays, it is possible to determine whether a "specific multiple times permissible period" or a "special multiple times permissible period" occurs. You will be able to suggest what to do.

[Configuration 23-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there is a reception acceptance period during which operation reception on the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") is permitted. and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, during the reception permissible period, it is possible to display a "reception period related periodicity display" which is an image display that may show periodic changes, and during the reception permissible period, a "multiple-time display" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times can be displayed. At least a "tolerable period" shall be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple play permissible period" is a "specific multiple play permissible period" in which the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are at least prepared as a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". When a "specific multiple-permissible period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts, and the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts The timings at which these events occur are made to differ. In addition, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple permissible period", according to the configuration 23-D, and "special multiple-time permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple allowable period", and " "Special multiple permissible period" may mean the same means, respectively, or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations , "fourth periodicity display," "specific multiple-time permissible period," and "special multiple-time permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when a "multiple times permissible period" occurs, the type of the "multiple times permissible period" can be indicated by checking the aspect of the "acceptance period related periodicity display". become able to. In addition, it is expected to improve the presentation performance when a "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 23-D", if a "specific multiple permissible period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the periodic change starts. , the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts is different from each other, but if a "special multiple allowable period" occurs, the third periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change starts. The timing at which the periodic change starts and the timing at which the fourth periodic display is displayed and the periodic change starts may be the same. In other words, in this case, as the acceptance period in which two types of periodicity displays appear, it is determined whether or not there is a difference in the timing at which these periodic changes start. period” will occur.

[Configuration 24-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, there is a reception acceptance period during which operation reception on the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001, etc.") is permitted. and, when an operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period, an acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, during the reception permissible period, it is possible to display a "reception period related periodicity display" which is an image display that may show periodic changes, and during the reception permissible period, a "multiple-time display" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times can be displayed. At least a "tolerable period" shall be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple play permissible period" is a "specific multiple play permissible period" in which the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are at least displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are at least prepared as a "special multiple-time permissible period" in which at least the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". When the first periodicity display is displayed when the "specific multiple permissible period" occurs, a specific display other than the first periodicity display is displayed, and the display is displayed behind the specific display. The display is started in such a manner that the first periodic display appears. In addition, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple permissible period", according to the configuration 24-D, and "special multiple-time permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 24-D. Therefore, the "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple allowable period", and " "Special multiple-time permissible period" may mean the same means, respectively, or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations , "fourth periodicity display," "specific multiple-time permissible period," and "special multiple-time permissible period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when a "multiple use permissible period" occurs, the type of the "multiple use permissible period" can be suggested by checking the aspect of the "acceptance period related periodicity display". become able to. Furthermore, in this case, by influencing the visibility of the first periodic display, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 24-D", when the first periodicity display is displayed when the "specific multiple permissible period" occurs, a specific display other than this is displayed. Among them, the display starts with the first periodic display appearing behind the specific display, but the second periodic display is not displayed behind the specific display, and is displayed as a "special plural display". When the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed upon occurrence of the "permissible period", both the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are located behind another display at the time the display starts. It may be configured so that it is never displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether a "specific multiple times permissible period" or a "special multiple times permissible period" is occurring at a relatively early point in time when the periodicity display starts to be displayed. become able to. Moreover, even if a "specific multiple permissible period" occurs, a person who mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display" may If the precursor effect display corresponding to "periodic display" is not displayed, there is a possibility that it may be mistakenly recognized as if a "special multiple permissible period" has occurred, so it is important to maintain a sense of tension appropriately. become expected.

[Configuration 25-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes with different expectations, and in any one of the plurality of display modes. Even when displayed, periodic changes are made to appear as the "special image display".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "special image display" is displayed in the first display mode among the plurality of display modes described above, it can be changed to a display mode different from the first display mode. If the second display mode is displayed among the plurality of display modes, the display mode can be changed to a display mode different from the second display mode. Then, when the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a display mode different from the first display mode, a change occurs in the time required for one periodic change as the "special image display". There is. Note that the "special image display", "first display mode", and "second display mode" related to the configuration 25-D are only names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-D. . Therefore, "special image display", "first display mode", and "second display mode" related to other configurations may mean the same means, respectively, and "special image display" related to other configurations may mean the same means, respectively. ", "first display mode", and "second display mode" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a different display mode, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" also changes. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that a change has occurred in the display mode of the "special image display".

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 25-D", if the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a display mode different from the first display mode, the "special image display" There is a change in the time required for periodic changes for one batch, but when the "special image display" changes from the second display mode to a display mode different from the second display mode, the time required for one cycle of periodic changes changes. It may be arranged so that there are cases where this does not occur. According to such a configuration, the "special image display" requires recognition of whether the display mode has changed depending on whether the display mode changes from the first display mode or when the display mode changes from the second display mode. Since the ease of use will vary, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

[Configuration 26-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes with different expectations, and in any one of the plurality of display modes. Even when displayed, periodic changes are made to appear as the "special image display."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" is divided into two cases: the time required for one periodic change is displayed as a predetermined time, and the time required for one periodic change is displayed as the predetermined time. may be displayed at different specific times, and when "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is a specific time, the time required for one periodic change is The display mode of the "special image display" can be changed while maintaining the time at a specific time. Note that "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" according to the configuration 26-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 26-D. Therefore, "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" in other configurations may mean the same means, and "special image display" and "predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same means, respectively. "time" and "specific time" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" is displayed such that the time required for one periodic change becomes a specific time, it is determined whether the display mode of the "special image display" has changed or not. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the situation, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 26-D", if the "special image display" is displayed such that the time required for one periodic change is the above-mentioned specific time, the "special image display" is displayed. ” can be changed, and when the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change may change as the “special image display”, and the time required for one periodic change may change. When the "special image display" is displayed so that the required time is the predetermined time, the display mode of the special image display may not change. According to such a configuration, the "special image display" suggests whether the display mode changes depending on whether the time required for one periodic change is displayed at the specific time or the predetermined time. You will be able to do it. Furthermore, when the display is performed at the specific time, if the display mode changes, the time required for the periodic change may also change, making it easier to recognize the change.

[Configuration 27-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes with different expectations, and in any one of the plurality of display modes. Even when displayed, periodic changes are made to appear as the "special image display".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" is divided into two cases: the time required for one periodic change is displayed as a predetermined time, and the time required for one periodic change is displayed as the predetermined time. may be displayed at different specific times, and when the display mode of the special image display changes, the periodic changes that had appeared until then are hidden, and then the periodic changes of the special image display change. I made it appear. Note that "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" according to the configuration 27-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 27-D. Therefore, "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" in other configurations may mean the same means, and "special image display" and "predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same means, respectively. "time" and "specific time" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the special image display changes, the periodic changes that had appeared until then are hidden, and then the periodic changes of the special image display start to appear. When the display mode of the special image display changes, it is expected to attract interest as to whether or not there is a change in the time required for the periodic change.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, the acceptance permissible period (acceptance period ) occurs, a model image display (such as a model image of the operation receiver) related to the reception target is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display ( (see FIG. 144), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game until the display after acceptance (display change) is executed. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. .

The "integrated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the image is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible period (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception is allowed or will be in the state where the operation reception is allowed. An acceptance permission sound may be output audibly, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform an operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible period (reception period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). , a sound in which the acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible period (reception period) is being performed.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-D" to "Configuration 26-D" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-D" to "Configuration 26-D" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, the types of post-acceptance displays and post-acceptance output sounds that appear when an acceptance is accepted (for example, conversation previews as post-acceptance performances, cut-in notices, movable object notices, etc.) that suggest expectations. We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different types of performances. Occurrence conditions are determined for each reception period (for example, a predetermined result is obtained in judgments such as jackpot judgment or performance judgment), and when any one of these conditions is met, the corresponding occurrence condition is established. It is possible to generate different types of reception periods (reception effects) depending on the generation conditions.

First, with reference to FIGS. 253 to 269, among these multiple reception periods (reception performances), the 1st E reception period (1E post-reception performance), the 2nd E reception period (2nd E post-reception performance) ), the 3rd E reception period (performance after 3E reception), and the 4th E reception period (performance after 4E reception) will be explained. Regarding each reception period described above with reference to FIG. It may be prepared as a separate reception period from the 4th E reception period (direction after 1E reception), and the 4th E reception period (performance after 1E reception), or the 1E reception period (performance after 1E reception), and the 2nd E reception period. (2nd E post-reception presentation), 3rd E reception period (3rd E post-reception presentation), and 4th E reception period (4th E post-reception presentation). Furthermore, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 252. You may choose not to prepare.

FIG. 253 is a time chart illustrating an example of the production content when the first E reception period (first E reception production) occurs when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the generation condition. FIGS. 255 to 257 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the first E reception period (first E reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable variable and non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1st E variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the first E variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1E variation pattern, sound output according to the 1E variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.), etc.) is started ( "The situation shown in FIG. 255(a)"), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, the performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is performed using the "1st E fluctuation pattern" itself selected above. This will be executed additionally.

As shown in FIG. 253(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "1st E variation pattern", timing ta2 has arrived when the 1E time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 1E"), the above-mentioned 1E reception period (validity period) during which "reception regarding display after 1E reception (sound output after 1E reception)" is permitted. This is assumed to be possible (the situation shown in FIG. 255(c)).

Here, the 1st E reception period according to this embodiment is the period until the 1E reception period ends (until operation reception regarding the display after 1E reception (sound output after 1E reception) is no longer permitted. (duration) functions as a "multiple-times permissible period" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times.

In other words, as will be described later, during the 1E reception period, each time an operation is accepted, a display change (for example, a depiction of the 1st meter rising) will occur in the background image etc. as a "display after 1E reception". If the special conditions are met as a result of multiple operation acceptances, the 1st E acceptance period will end and a display change that is different from the previous display change of the background image (display that does not suggest the level of expectation) will occur. (a display that suggests the degree of expectation), that is, a special mode (for example, a depiction of the first meter being full and the first character being revived) as a "display after receiving the first E" can be displayed. ing. On the other hand, if the special conditions are not met within the 1st E reception period, based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition (for example, based on the fact that the remaining time of the 1E reception period has become "0") (the 1st E reception period has ended)), a predetermined aspect as the "display after 1E reception" (for example, a depiction of the 1st character falling down because the 1st meter is not full) is displayed. It becomes. When the predetermined mode is displayed, it is suggested that the expectation level (rate) of winning the jackpot is lower than when the special mode is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when such a first E acceptance period is generated, an acceptance period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, is displayed in relation to this. It is possible, and "first periodicity display SH1" and "second periodicity display SH2" are displayed as the periodicity display related to the acceptance period.

Here, the "first periodic display SH1" according to this embodiment means "After the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(A), the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(B). When a moving image "displayed" is defined as one periodic change, it means a display in which the periodic change can repeatedly appear in a form that requires a predetermined period C time. Further, the "second periodic display SH2" according to this embodiment means "after the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(a), the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. When a moving image such as "Sequentially displayed in each mode of It refers to a display that can appear repeatedly over a long period of time.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an acceptance period related periodicity display (the first A periodicity display SH1 and a second periodicity display SH2) are displayed. However, the reception period related periodicity display (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize the type of reception period that has occurred, it is desirable not to display these.

For example, when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed when the first E reception period occurs, the first periodicity display SH1 appears behind the specific display while the specific display is being displayed. Although the display is started, the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed behind the specific display. In other words, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the occurrence of the acceptance period can be determined through the visibility of the acceptance period-related periodicity display at the time when the acceptance period-related periodicity display starts to be displayed. It is designed to suggest the type of

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 255(b) to 255(d), the specific display indicates that the player will be given an operation opportunity (the first E reception period will occur). It is decided to use an omen effect display. Note that the specific display does not necessarily have to be an omen effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when timing ta1 arrives before the first E reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 253(c) and 255(b), As the foreshadowing effect display, the "1st E omen effect display ZED" is started to be executed. As shown in FIG. 253(c) and FIG. 255(c), (d), this "1st E precursor effect display ZED" is displayed on the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display), reception desk The period-related periodicity display (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2) is displayed so as to span before and after the display timing.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 255(c), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 are "1E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)". '' is being displayed, and the display starts in a form that appears behind the ``1st E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)''. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 255(d), the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed behind the "1st E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)" and is not displayed here. Then, the display starts with the "1st E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)" facing backwards.

In addition, in this production example, at timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, it is decided to start displaying the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1. Not limited to. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 may be started to be displayed before or after the timing ta2 at which the first E reception period occurs; The simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed at mutually different timings.

In this pachinko machine 1, the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed at different timings. In this production example, the first periodicity display SH1 is started to be displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, and while the first periodicity display SH1 is being displayed, the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed. It is now ready to start displaying. In addition, since the first periodic display SH1 according to this production example starts its periodic change immediately after the display starts, the timing at which the periodic change starts is also 2 The timing is set before the periodic change of the periodic display SH2 starts.

However, for the first periodic display SH1, for example, the display is started before the timing ta2 when the first E acceptance period occurs, and the periodic change is not started at the time when the display starts. Good too. That is, in this case, the first periodicity display SH1 will be displayed while maintaining the mode shown in FIG. 254(A). Then, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 may be started based on the arrival of the timing ta2 at which the first E reception period occurs. In this regard, regarding the second periodicity display SH1, for example, if the display including the periodic change is started based on the arrival of timing ta2, the second periodicity display SH1 and the first periodicity display SH1 can be displayed. Although the timing at which display starts is different between the two periodic displays SH1, the timing at which periodic changes start is the same.

Conversely, the display of the second periodicity display SH2 may be started before the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed or the timing at which the first E acceptance period occurs. In this case, regarding the timing at which the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2 starts, the timing at which the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 starts and the timing ta2 at which the first E acceptance period occurs. It is preferable to do this before. In other words, as will be described later, even if an operation is accepted within the first E acceptance period, the second periodicity display SH2 will take this as an opportunity to periodically change (Fig. 254(a)) while the first E acceptance period continues. ) to (d)) are not hidden (cancelled), and can be used as a comparison standard to determine whether periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1 have been hidden (cancelled) or not. It has become a thing. Therefore, by starting such "periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2" before the first periodic display SH1, the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1 can be This makes it easier to determine whether or not the display has been hidden (cancelled).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. In the 1st E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is modeled in the integrated model image display IG. A moving image in which a portion (button drawing image BMG) is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254 (α) and then displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254 (β)" is defined as one periodic change. At this time, the periodic change is repeated in a manner that requires a predetermined period A time. As a result, in the first E reception period, the integrated image display IG depicts how the "operation receiver" moves up and down its movable range. In this example, the period A time and the period C time are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times.

In addition, in this production example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) is started to be displayed at timing ta2 when the first E reception period occurs, but before timing ta2. The display may be started, or the display may be started after the timing ta2. However, if the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) is started to be displayed before the timing ta2 at which the 1E reception period occurs, the periodic change will cause the 1E reception period to occur. It is desirable to start the process after waiting for the timing ta2. That is, in this case, the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(α) until timing ta2 arrives.

As shown in FIG. 255(c), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) according to this production example also includes the "1E portent production display" similar to the first periodicity display SH1. While the "ZED (specific display)" is being displayed, the display starts appearing behind the "1st E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)" and its periodic change begins.

The display range of the 1E harbinger effect display ZED is reduced over time, and even though the 1E harbinger effect display ZED is displayed in this manner, the integrated simulated image display IG and the first The periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2, which is started to be displayed after the periodic display SH1, develop their respective periodic changes in the above-mentioned manners.

As a result of the display range of the 1E precursor effect display ZED being reduced in this way, when the 1E precursor effect display ZED is hidden, the second periodicity is displayed as shown in FIG. 255(e). The visibility of not only the display SH2 but also the integrated image display IG and the first periodic display SH1 is improved. After this, unless an operation is accepted by the player, as shown in FIGS. 255(f) to (h1), the integrated image display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display The display SH2 continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period A time, period C time, period D time).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 1E reception period. I am assuming that. That is, as described above, the first E acceptance period according to this embodiment functions as a "multiple acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times. 1E display after reception", a display change will occur in the background image etc. (for example, a depiction of the first meter rising), and if special conditions are met as a result of multiple operation receptions, A display change that is different from the background image display change (a display that does not suggest an expectation level) after the end of the 1E reception period (a display that suggests an expectation level), that is, a special display as a "display after the 1E reception" A mode (for example, a depiction of the first meter being full and the first character being revived, etc.) can be displayed.

When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 1E reception period, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, First, the modes shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) appear sequentially.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, an EF display (production effect display) is performed in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the first E reception period. EKH is displayed. In this production example, the first mode EKH1 and the second mode EKH2 are sequentially displayed as the EF display (production effect display) EKH, but either the first mode EKH1 or the second mode EKH2 It is also possible to display only the

Although not shown in FIG. 256 for convenience of explanation, as shown in FIG. 253(f), the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed during the 1E reception period. The “1st E post-reception display” corresponding to the above will be displayed. The "1st E post-reception display" is as described above, and is displayed, for example, as a depiction (background image) of the first meter rising. This "1st E post-reception display" is not displayed in front of the integrated image display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display SH2, and is not displayed in the overlapping position. Even if they are displayed, they are displayed behind them. Although not shown, when the 1E post-reception display is displayed, the corresponding 1E post-reception sound output is also audibly output.

Furthermore, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(e), when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the Periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 are hidden. In this example, although the first periodicity display SH1 itself continues to be displayed, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is stopped and prevented from progressing, thereby hiding the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1. It is said that Therefore, in this example, the first periodicity display SH1 shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) is in the same manner as the first periodicity display SH1 shown in FIG. The periodic change is not progressed from the first periodic display SH1 shown in FIG. 255(f).

In this regard, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, the second periodicity display SH2 is not accepted for the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), as shown in FIG. 253(e). ), the periodic change (cycle D time) is not hidden and continues. Therefore, in this example, the second periodicity display SH2 shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2) is the same as that shown in FIG. 255 (g1) when there is no first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). , (h1), its periodic changes are developed. According to such a configuration, when there is a first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the first E reception period, the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed. When only one periodic display SH1 receives an operation, its periodic changes are hidden.

Furthermore, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(b), when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the In the integrated simulated image display IG, periodic changes in the portion (button simulated image BMG) where the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is simulated are hidden. In this example, although the integrated model image display IG continues to display itself, the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are stopped and prevented from progressing. changes are hidden. Therefore, in this example, the portion (button drawing image BMG) of the integrated drawing image display IG shown in FIGS. It is displayed in the same manner as the portion of the integrated simulated image display IG shown in FIG. The development of periodic changes has not occurred from the aspect described above.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2), the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second mode EKH2) includes a first periodicity display SH1 in which periodic changes are hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) and an integrated image display IG (button For the sample image BMG), they are displayed in an overlapping manner from the front, making them difficult to see, whereas periodic changes occur depending on the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). The second periodic display SH2 that is not hidden is not displayed in an overlapping manner from the front. In this example, the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second periodicity indication SH2, and the second aspect EKH2 of the EF display EKH is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the second periodicity indication SH2. Although it is displayed at a position overlapping with the display SH2, it is displayed behind the second periodic display SH2.

The EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) changes as shown in FIG. 253(d) and FIG. 256(i2) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation was accepted. It will be hidden. Although not shown in the figure, the operation is accepted again while the EF display EKH (first aspect EKH1, second aspect EKH2) is being displayed while the acceptance period (first E acceptance period) continues. In such a case, it is desirable to redisplay the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) that is in the middle of execution from the initial mode. That is, in this case, if an operation is accepted while the first mode EKH1 of the EF display EKH is being displayed (see FIG. 256 (g2)), the EF display EKH progresses to the second mode EKH2. Instead, the screen is displayed again from the first mode EKH1.

Further, regarding the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the periodic change was hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). Then, the process will be executed again as shown in FIG. 253(e) and FIG. 256(i2). As shown in FIG. 256(i2), the first periodicity display SH1 according to this example re-executes the periodic change in the form shown in FIG. 254(A). That will happen. Although illustration is omitted, while the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the corresponding reception period (first E When an operation is accepted again that does not end the acceptance period), a periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is detected when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when the operation was accepted again. It is desirable to run it again. That is, in this case, the time required from when the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is hidden until it is executed again is substantially extended.

Furthermore, regarding periodic changes in the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG), the periodic changes are hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), and then the periodic changes are hidden in advance. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the process will be executed again as shown in FIG. 253(e) and FIG. 256(i2). As shown in FIG. 256 (i2), the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) according to this example restarts the periodic change from the first mode (the mode shown in FIG. 254 (α)). In other words, this periodic change will be repeated. Although not shown, periodic changes in the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) are hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). When an operation is accepted again that does not end the acceptance period (1st E acceptance period), the integrated image is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the operation was accepted again. It is desirable to perform periodic changes in the IG (button drawing image BMG) again. That is, in this case, the time required from when the periodic change in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) is hidden until it is executed again is substantially extended.

Although not shown in FIG. 256 for convenience of explanation, regarding the "1st E post-reception display" in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), when the operation reception is When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time when this was done, it will be hidden as shown in FIG. 253(f). The "first E sound output after reception" is also rendered inaudible after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation was accepted.

In addition, the time until the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) is hidden, the time until the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is re-executed, and the integration model The time until the periodic change in the image display IG (button drawing image BMG) is re-executed, and the display after the 1st E reception in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) '' may be different times or may be the same time until they are hidden.

In addition, even during the period in which periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) are hidden in response to operation reception while the 1E reception period continues, the gauge image GG changes over time. It is also possible to continue displaying the depiction that decreases depending on the number of characters instead of hiding it.

As shown in FIG. 256 (i2), while the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 continue, the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1 and the integrated pattern image display IG (button Once the periodic changes in the simulated image BMG) are restarted, from then on, unless an operation is accepted by the player, the integrated simulated image changes as shown in FIGS. 256 (j2) to (m2). The display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display SH2 continue to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period A time, period C time, and period D time).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 1E reception period. I am assuming that.

When the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 1E reception period, the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. In the effect display device 1600 according to this example, first, the modes shown in FIGS. 257 (l3) and (m3) appear sequentially, as in the case where the operation reception) is performed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, an EF display (production effect display) is performed in response to the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the first E reception period. EKH is displayed. The first mode EKH1 and the second mode EKH2 are displayed sequentially as the EF display (direction effect display) EKH, since the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made. It is the same as when

Although not shown in FIG. 257 for convenience of explanation, as shown in FIG. 253(f), a second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made during the 1E reception period. The “1st E post-reception display” corresponding to the above will be displayed. The "display after the 1st E reception" is generally the same as when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, and for example, a depiction (background image) of the 1st meter rising further. Is displayed.

Furthermore, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(e), even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) Similar to when an operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period), the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden based on this. Similarly, for the second periodicity display SH2, as shown in FIG. 253(e), even if the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) The change (period D time) is not hidden and is continued. Similarly, for the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG), as shown in FIG. 253(b), the second operation reception (operation reception without ending the reception period) is performed. Based on this, periodic changes in the portion of the operation button 410 that simulates the "operation receiving section" (button design image BMG) are hidden.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 257 (l3) and (m3), the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) in response to the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) also Similar to the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the first periodicity display SH1 and the periodic change are hidden. In contrast to the integrated image display IG (button image BMG), which is displayed in an overlapping manner from the front, making it difficult to see, the second periodic display does not hide periodic changes. For SH2, it is arranged so that it is not displayed in an overlapping manner from the front.

From then on, the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) is hidden, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 is executed again, and the integrated image display The periodic changes in the IG (button drawing image BMG) will be executed again, and other examples of these will also be explained in the case of the above-mentioned example in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). The same is true.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (n3), while the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 continues, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1 and the integrated pattern image display IG (button Once the periodic changes in the pattern image BMG) are restarted, from then on, unless the player accepts an operation, the integrated pattern image BMG) will change as shown in FIGS. 257(n3) and (o3). The display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display SH2 continue to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period A time, period C time, and period D time).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 253 assumes that the third operation is accepted at timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 256 (o3)) within the 1E acceptance period.

Here, the 1E reception period is originally, as shown in FIG. 253(a), when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period), it continues until timing ta3 arrives; It will be terminated based on what has been done. However, in this production example, the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made at timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 256 (o3)) within the 1E reception period, and based on this, the It is assumed that the 1E reception period ends before timing ta3 arrives.

In the 1st E reception period according to this embodiment, when the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "special conditions" are met, and the 1E reception period is terminated. A display change that is different from the display change of the background image that has been completed until then (a mode as a "display after receiving the 1st E" that does not suggest the level of expectation) (a mode as a "display after receiving the 1st E" that suggests a level of expectation) can be displayed. At this time, the "first E post-reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the level of expectation.

More specifically, when the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made at timing ta2C within the 1E reception period (see FIG. 257 (o3)), the "1E after reception display" ”, the aspect UH1-1 (FIG. 257 (p3) to (s3)) appears with a relatively low expectation level, and the aspect UH1-2 ( 257 (p4) to (s4)) may appear. Note that the aspect UH1-1 (FIG. 257 (p3) to (s3)) corresponds to the predetermined aspect as the above-mentioned "Display after 1st E reception", and the aspect UH1-2 (FIG. 257 (p4) to (s4) ) corresponds to the special aspect as the above-mentioned "Display after 1st E reception".

In this respect, when the aspect UH1-1 with relatively low expectation appears as the "display after receiving the 1st E", as shown in FIGS. 257 (p3) to (r3), The EF display EKH is displayed in a manner (low expectation manner) different from that in which the aspect UH1-2 with high expectations appears.

That is, when the aspect UH1-1 with a relatively low expectation level appears as the "display after receiving the first E", the first aspect EKH1 (see FIG. 257 (p3)) is first displayed as the EF display EKH. From this point on, the third mode EKH3 (see FIGS. 257 (q3) and (r3)) will be displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" (corresponding to "first disappearing EF" in FIG. 253) based on the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) in the first E reception period )" will be executed as a series of modes (FIG. 257 (p3) to (r3)) such as "the first mode EKH1 and the third mode EKH3 are displayed sequentially." It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH1-1 with a relatively low expectation level will appear as "Display".

On the other hand, when the aspect UH1-2 with relatively high expectations appears as the "display after receiving the 1st E", as shown in FIGS. 257 (p4) to (r4), The EF display EKH is displayed in a different manner (high expectation aspect) from when the aspect UH1-1 with relatively low expectation appears.

That is, when the aspect UH1-2 with relatively high expectations appears as the "first E post-reception display", the first aspect EKH1 (see FIG. 257 (p4)) is first displayed as the EF display EKH. From this point on, the fourth mode EKH4 (see FIGS. 257 (q4) and (r4)) will be displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the high expectation mode of the EF display EKH (corresponding to the 4th disappearing EF in FIG. )" will be executed as a series of modes (FIG. 257 (p4) to (r4)) such as "the first mode EKH1 and the fourth mode EKH4 are displayed sequentially." It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH1-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as "Display".

In addition, in the "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" and "high expectation mode of EF display EKH" according to this production example, the period in which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (FIG. 257 (p3), 257 (p4)), when the EF display EKH is displayed in response to the first or second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the 1E reception period (see Figure 256 (g2) or , see FIG. 257 (l3)), and it is difficult to determine whether the first E reception period ends or whether the EF display EKH indicates the level of expectation. I try to make it difficult to recognize. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and the first or second operation in the 1st E reception period during the display period of "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" or "high expectation mode of EF display EKH" The same mode as the case where the EF display EKH is displayed in response to reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) may not appear.

In addition, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(e), even when the third operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) to hide the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1. However, here, unlike when the first and second operation receptions are received, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the first periodic display SH1 itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed), (Fig. 257 (p3) to (q3) or Fig. 257 (p4) to ( q4)), the first periodicity display SH1 is not hidden, and the state shown in FIG. 257 (o3) remains behind the EF display EKH (a state in which no periodic change progresses). The first periodicity display SH1 is displayed at , and then the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden (based on the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period)). However, this may be hidden from immediately after the operation is accepted.

Furthermore, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, the second periodicity display SH2 is different from when the first and second operation receptions are made, as shown in FIG. 253(e). When the third operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, the periodic change is hidden based on this. Here, by hiding the second periodic display SH2 itself, its periodic changes are hidden. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed), (Fig. 257 (p3) to (q3) or Fig. 257 (p4) to ( q4)), the second periodicity display SH2 is not hidden, and the state shown in FIG. 257 (o3) remains in front of the EF display EKH (a state in which no periodic change progresses). The second periodicity display SH2 is displayed at , and then the second periodicity display SH2 is hidden (based on the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period)). However, this may be hidden from immediately after the operation is accepted.

Furthermore, in the first E reception period according to this embodiment, for the integrated image display IG, as shown in FIG. 253(b), the third operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) Based on this, the periodic changes are also hidden when the change occurs. However, unlike when the first and second operation receptions are made, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding the integrated image display IG itself. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first aspect EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed), (Fig. 257 (p3) to (q3) or Fig. 257 (p4) to ( q4)), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the state shown in FIG. 257 (o3) remains behind the EF display EKH (the state in which no periodic changes have progressed). The integrated model image display IG will be displayed at , and after that, the integrated model image display IG will be hidden (based on the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period)). However, this may be hidden from immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "first E display after reception" is displayed behind the first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2, integrated image display IG, and EF display EKH. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the "first E post-reception display" immediately after it is displayed. However, as shown in FIGS. 257 (p3) to (r3) and FIG. 257 (p4) to (r4), the first periodicity display SH1, the second periodicity display SH2, the integrated image display IG, EF As the display EKH and the like are hidden, the visibility of the "1st E post-reception display" will gradually become better. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when the EF display EKH is displayed, it is possible to distinguish between the mode UH1-1 with low expectations and the mode UH1-2 with high expectations. This makes it easy to recognize which one is displayed.

In addition, in the first E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253, when it occurs, a "first permissible sound" may be audibly output as the reception permissible sound. In this regard, during the 1E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253, a situation may occur in which an operation is accepted while the "first permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. (timing ta2A), the audible output of the "first permissible sound" is continued without being interrupted based on the operation acceptance.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 253, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before the timing ta2 at which the first E reception period occurs, but this is not necessarily the case. The audible output may be started at the timing ta2, or the audible output may be started after the timing ta2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 253, the first E reception period can occur while specific BGM is being audibly output. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM is being audibly output, there is a possibility that the first E acceptance period will occur, so it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest. Note that the "specific BGM" may be the sound of BGM playback that is normally output during fluctuations, or the sound of BGM playback that is output across multiple symbol fluctuations (multiple fluctuation patterns). Good too. Further, as such "specific BGM", a plurality of types of BGM may be prepared.

In addition, during the 1st E reception period, the operation can be accepted simply by keeping the operating means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) operated (pressed). It is designed to be performed multiple times (operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (auto continuous tap function). According to such a configuration, the player can accept the operation multiple times without repeatedly operating (pressing) the operation button 410, so that it is possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game. become expected.

Here, during the 1st E reception period, if an operation is performed using such an "auto continuous hit function", while the "first mode EKH1" is displayed as the EF display EKH (Fig. 256 (g2 ), see FIG. 257 (l3), etc.), the next operation is accepted. In this case, if an operation is accepted while "first mode EKH1" is displayed as EF display EKH, "second mode EKH2" is not displayed and "first mode EKH1" is displayed as EF display EKH. ' will be displayed again.

For example, when an operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256(g2), the situation shown in FIG. 257(l3) appears based on the operation acceptance, and the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 257(l3). If the operation is accepted, the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p3) or the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p4) will appear based on the operation reception, and from then on, the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p3) and FIG. 257 (p4) will appear. Depending on which one appears, the performance progress shown in FIGS. 257(q3) to (t3) or the performance progress shown in FIGS. 257(q4) to (t4) will be performed. However, in this case, periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 and the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) are not displayed (interrupted) after the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2). ) will be maintained as follows. Furthermore, the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 continue even after the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (g2), but if the operation is performed without using the "auto continuous hit function" Similarly, the screen is hidden based on the reception of an operation that causes the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p3) or the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p4) to appear.

FIG. 258 is a time chart illustrating an example of the production content when the second E reception period (second E reception production) occurs when "Condition 2E" is satisfied as the generation condition. FIGS. 260 to 262 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the second E reception period (second E reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the second E variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2nd E variation pattern, sound output according to the 2nd E variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.), etc.) is started ( "The situation shown in FIG. 260(a)"), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, the performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is performed using the "2nd E fluctuation pattern" itself selected above. This will be executed additionally.

As shown in FIG. 260(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "2nd E variation pattern", timing tb2 has arrived when the 2nd E time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 2E"), the above-mentioned 2nd E acceptance period (validity period) during which "reception regarding display after 2nd E acceptance (sound output after 2nd E acceptance)" is permitted. This is assumed to be possible (the situation shown in FIG. 260(c)).

Here, the 2nd E reception period according to this embodiment is also similar to the above-mentioned 1E reception period, until the 2nd E reception period ends (display after 2E reception (sound output after 2E reception)) This function functions as a "multiple-acceptance period" during which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times (until acceptance of operation is no longer allowed).

In other words, as will be described later, during the 2nd E reception period, each time an operation is accepted, a display change (for example, a depiction of the 2nd meter rising) will occur in the background image etc. as a "display after 2nd E reception". If the special conditions are met as a result of multiple operation acceptances, the second E acceptance period will end and a display change that is different from the previous background image display change (display that does not suggest expectations) will occur. (a display that suggests the degree of expectation), that is, a special mode (for example, a depiction of the second meter being full and the second character being revived) as a "display after receiving the second E" can be displayed. ing. On the other hand, if the special conditions are not met within the 2nd E reception period, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (for example, based on the fact that the remaining time of the 2E reception period has become "0") (The 2nd E reception period has ended)), a predetermined aspect as "display after 2nd E reception" (for example, a depiction of the character falling down because the 2nd meter is not full) will be displayed. ing. When the predetermined mode is displayed, it is suggested that the expectation level (rate) of winning the jackpot is lower than when the special mode is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a second E acceptance period is generated, in connection with this, an acceptance period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, is displayed. "Third periodicity display SH3" and "fourth periodicity display SH4" are displayed as the reception period related periodicity display.

Here, the "third periodic display SH3" according to this embodiment means "After the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259(A), When a moving image such as "Sequentially displayed in each mode shown" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change requires a predetermined period E time (a time longer than the above-mentioned "period C time") It means a display that can appear repeatedly in a form. Further, the "fourth periodic display SH4" according to this embodiment means "after the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259(a), the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. When a moving image such as "Sequentially displayed in each mode that It refers to a display that can appear repeatedly.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an acceptance period related periodicity display (third A periodicity display SH3 and a fourth periodicity display SH4) are displayed. However, the reception period related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize the type of reception period that has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. Further, the third periodicity display SH3 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1. It may be displayed as a different character from the "cat character" used in the second periodic display SH2.

By the way, when the third periodic display SH3 is displayed when the second E acceptance period occurs, the third periodic display SH3 does not start to be displayed behind other images. Further, even when the fourth periodic display SH4 is displayed, the fourth periodic display SH4 does not start to be displayed behind other images. In other words, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance period that has occurred can be determined through the visibility of the acceptance period related periodicity display at the time when the acceptance period related periodicity display starts to be displayed. It is designed to suggest the type of

In other words, in this production example as well, as shown in FIGS. 260(b) and (c), there is a precursor production that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the second E reception period will occur). Display is executed.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when timing tb1 arrives before the second E reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 258(c) and 260(b), As the foreshadowing effect display, "2nd E omen effect display ZED" is started to be executed. As shown in FIG. 258(c) and FIG. 260(b) to (d), this "2nd E precursor effect display ZED" is displayed on the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display), reception desk The period-related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4) is displayed so as to span before and after the display timing. In addition, in this production example, the "2nd E portent performance display ZED" is executed as the same production display as the above-mentioned "1st E portent performance display ZED (see FIGS. 255(b) to (d))". However, it may be executed as a different effect display from the "1st E precursor effect display ZED".

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 260(c), the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) that appears in connection with the occurrence of the second E reception period, the third periodicity display SH3, the fourth All of the periodic displays SH4 are designed to start displaying with the "2nd E omen effect display ZED" placed behind them while the "2nd E omen effect display ZED" is being displayed. The display will not start in such a way that it appears behind the image.

However, the "integrated image display IG (button image BMG)", "third periodicity display SH3", and "fourth periodicity display SH2" that are displayed in connection with the occurrence of the second E reception period It is sufficient that the display does not start appearing behind other images; for example, it does not necessarily start displaying with the "2nd E omen effect display ZED" behind it. You don't have to. In this sense, the "2nd E precursor effect display ZED" is the same as the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)", the "3rd periodicity display SH3", and the "4th periodicity display SH2". It may be hidden before the timing when the second E reception period occurs, or the "second E precursor effect display ZED" itself may not be executed when the second E reception period occurs.

Furthermore, at the timing tb2 when the second E reception period occurs, display of the integrated image display IG (image image display, remaining time display) and the third periodicity display SH3 is started, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the third periodic display SH3 may be configured to start displaying before or after the timing tb2 when the 3rd E reception period occurs, or may be The simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the third periodic display SH3 may be displayed at mutually different timings.

In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed at the same timing. In addition, since both the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 according to this production example start their periodic changes immediately after the display starts, their periodic changes The timings at which these are started are also made to be the same.

In other words, as will be described later, during the second E reception period, both the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 will not be triggered by the operation reception even if an operation is accepted while the second E reception period continues. The periodic changes (FIGS. 259(A) to 259(C), FIGS. 259(a) to 259(e)) are not hidden (discontinued). Therefore, by displaying the "third periodicity display SH3" and "fourth periodicity display SH4" having the same characteristics at the same timing, their periodic changes can be hidden (interrupted) from each other. This will make it easier to judge whether the situation has changed or not.

Also, during the second E acceptance period according to this production example, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) is displayed as an image display in which periodic changes may appear. During the 2nd E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is modeled in the integrated model image display IG. A video image in which a portion (button drawing image BMG) is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259 (α), and then sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. 259 (β) to (δ)" When one periodic change is made, the periodic change is repeated in a manner that requires a predetermined period B time. As a result, in the second E acceptance period, the integrated image display IG depicts how the "operation receiver" moves up and down its movable range. However, the "cycle B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 2nd E reception period is longer than the "cycle A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 1st E reception period. Because of this setting, in the second E acceptance period, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the first E acceptance period.

As shown in FIG. 260(d), the display range of the 2E precursor effect display ZED is reduced as time passes, and in this manner, the 2E precursor effect display ZED is displayed. Among them, the integrated image display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 each develop their periodic changes in the above-mentioned manners. After this, as shown in FIGS. 260(e) to (g1), the integrated image display IG, the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed according to the periodic changes described above. (Period B time, Period E time, Period F time) will continue to progress.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 258, the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing tb2A (timing shown in FIG. 260(e)) within the second E reception period. I am assuming that. That is, as described above, the second E acceptance period according to this embodiment functions as a "multiple acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times, and each time an operation is accepted, the "second E acceptance period" is activated. 2E display after reception", a display change will occur in the background image etc. (for example, a depiction of the second meter rising), and if special conditions are met as a result of multiple operation receptions, A display change that is different from the background image display change (a display that does not suggest an expectation level) after the end of the 2nd E reception period (a display that suggests an expectation level), that is, a special display as a "display after the 2nd E reception". A mode (for example, a depiction of the second meter being full and the character being revived) can be displayed.

When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing tb2A (timing shown in FIG. 260(e)) within the second E reception period, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, First, the mode shown in FIG. 261 (f2) will appear.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 258, in the second E reception period, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, this will be used as an opportunity to update the integrated model image. Making a display change that affects the visibility of the display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 (displaying another image in front of any of these displays) is prohibited. There is no such thing. Therefore, in the second E reception period, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, the EF display (production effect display) EKH as shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2) is never displayed.

However, although not shown in FIG. 261 for convenience of explanation, the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed even during the second E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258(f). When this happens, a corresponding "2nd E post-reception display" is displayed. The "2nd E post-reception display" is as described above, and is displayed, for example, as a depiction (background image) of the second meter rising. This "2nd E post-reception display" is not displayed in front of the integrated image display IG, the 3rd periodicity display SH3, and the 4th periodicity display SH4, and is not displayed in the overlapping position. Even if they are displayed, they are displayed behind them. Although not shown, when the second E post-reception display is displayed, the corresponding second E post-reception sound output is also audibly output.

Although not shown in FIG. 261 for convenience of explanation, regarding the "2nd E post-reception display" in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the operation reception is When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time when this was done, it will be hidden as shown in FIG. 258(f). The "second E sound output after reception" is also rendered inaudible after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation was accepted.

Furthermore, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258(e), even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) Therefore, the periodic change in the third periodicity display SH3 is not hidden. Therefore, in this example, the third periodicity display SH3 shown in FIG. 261(f2) is an advanced form of the third periodicity display SH3 shown in FIG. 260(e), and the third periodicity display SH3 shown in FIG. It has the same aspect as the third periodicity display SH3 shown in f1).

Similarly, regarding the fourth periodicity display SH4, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258(e), the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) ) is made, the periodic change in the fourth periodicity display SH4 is not hidden based on this. Therefore, in this example, the fourth periodicity display SH4 shown in FIG. 261(f2) is an advanced form of the fourth periodicity display SH4 shown in FIG. 260(e), and the fourth periodicity display SH4 shown in FIG. It has the same aspect as the fourth periodicity display SH4 shown in f1). According to such a configuration, in the second E reception period, unlike the case of the first E reception period described above, when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the third periodicity display The periodic changes of neither SH3 nor the fourth periodic display SH4 will be hidden.

Furthermore, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258(b), even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) Therefore, periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) are not hidden. Therefore, in this example, the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) shown in FIG. 261(f2) is the form of the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) shown in FIG. 260(e). This is a form that has evolved from the previous one, and is the same form as the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) shown in FIG. 260(f1).

In addition, even during the 2nd E acceptance period, the depiction of the gauge image GG decreasing over time will continue to be displayed as long as the 2nd E acceptance period continues, regardless of whether or not there is an operation acceptance. It has become.

That is, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed during the first operation reception (reception). There is no change in the display mode before and after the operation (operation acceptance that does not end the period) is performed, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are , as shown in FIGS. 261(f2) to (j2), each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time) continues to progress.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 258 assumes that the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing tb2B (timing shown in FIG. 261 (h2)) within the 2E reception period. I am assuming that.

When the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing tb2B (timing shown in FIG. 261 (j2)) within the second E reception period, the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. In the effect display device 1600 according to this example, first, the mode shown in FIG. 262 (i3) appears, almost the same as when the operation reception) is performed.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 258, during the second E reception period, when a second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, this is also used as an opportunity to display the integrated model image. Making a display change that affects the visibility of the display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 (displaying another image in front of any of these displays) is prohibited. do not have. Therefore, in the 2nd E reception period, even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, the EF display (production effect display) EKH as shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2) is never displayed.

However, for convenience of explanation, the illustration is omitted in FIG. 262, but as shown in FIG. 258(f), when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made in the 2nd E reception period. The "2nd E post-reception display" corresponding to this is also displayed. The "2nd E post-reception display" is generally the same as the case where the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, and for example, a depiction (background image) of the second meter rising further, etc. Is displayed.

Although not shown in FIG. 262 for convenience of explanation, the "2nd E post-reception display" in response to the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) also indicates that the operation reception has been performed. When a predetermined time has elapsed since then, the screen will be hidden as shown in FIG. 258(f).

In addition, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258(e), even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) Similarly to when an operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period), based on this, the periodic change (cycle E time) in the third periodicity display SH3 is not hidden but is continued. Similarly, regarding the fourth periodicity display SH4, even if the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, as shown in FIG. 258(e), the periodicity The change (period F time) is not hidden and is continued. Similarly, for the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG), as shown in FIG. 258(b), the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) However, the periodic change (period B time) is not hidden and continues.

That is, in the second E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed during the second operation reception (reception). There is no change in the display mode before and after the operation (operation acceptance that does not end the period) is performed, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are , as shown in FIGS. 262 (i3) to (13), each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time) continues to progress.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 262 assumes that the third operation is accepted at timing tb2C (timing shown in FIG. 262 (j3)) within the second E acceptance period.

Here, the 2nd E acceptance period is originally, as shown in FIG. 258(a), when there is no operation acceptance (which ends the acceptance period), it continues until timing tb3 arrives; It will be terminated based on what has been done. However, in this production example, the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made at timing tb2C (timing shown in FIG. 262 (j3)) within the 2nd E reception period, and based on this, the corresponding It is assumed that the 2E acceptance period ends before timing tb3 arrives.

In the second E reception period according to this embodiment, when the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "special conditions" are met, and the second E reception period is terminated. A display change that is different from the display change of the background image after the termination (a mode as a “display after receiving the 2nd E” that does not suggest the level of expectation) (a mode as a “display after receiving the second E” that suggests the level of expectation) can be displayed. At this time, the "second E post-reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the level of expectation.

More specifically, at timing tb2C within the 2nd E reception period (see FIG. 262 (j3)), when the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made, the "2nd E reception post display" 262 (k4) to ( m4)) may appear. Note that the aspect UH2-1 (not shown) corresponds to the predetermined aspect as the above-mentioned "Display after 2nd E reception", and the aspect UH2-2 (Fig. 262 (k4) to (m4)) corresponds to the above-mentioned "2nd E display after reception". This corresponds to the special aspect of ``2E display after reception''.

In this regard, when displaying the "Display after 2nd E reception" based on the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) in the 2E reception period, regardless of the mode, 2E reception display", as shown in FIG. 262 (k4), all of the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed on the back side. It is intended to be displayed on the front side of them so that it looks like this.

Furthermore, when displaying the "2nd E post-reception display" based on the third operation acceptance in the 2E reception period, the "2nd E post-reception display" is displayed with a decorative pattern. SZ is also displayed on the front side so as to be on the back side. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to display the "second E post-reception display" more emphatically, and it is expected to improve gaming interest.

According to such a configuration, the "2nd E post-reception display" itself is independent of the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, the fourth periodicity display SH4, etc. Therefore, when the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made in the second E reception period, the EF display EKH will also be changed based on this. It will never be displayed.

In addition, in this production example, when the "2nd E post-reception display" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) starts to be displayed (see FIG. 262 (k4)), the integrated The sample image display IG (button sample image BMG), the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 continue without hiding their periodic changes. After this, the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are respectively hidden (see FIG. 262 (l4)). reference). However, regarding the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4, " At the time when the "2nd E post-reception display" starts to be displayed (see FIG. 262 (k4)), these displays themselves and their periodic changes may be hidden.

By the way, in this production example, the "2nd E post-reception display" in response to the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is displayed for a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. 258(f). It is designed to be hidden when the period has passed. However, as mentioned above, the "2nd E post-reception display" in response to the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is the integrated image display IG (button image BMG) and the third periodic display. This is because not only SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 but also the decorative pattern SZ are displayed in front of them so that they are on the back side, making the decorative pattern SZ difficult to see. There is concern that interest in gaming will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "second E after reception display" is displayed in response to the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period), the "second E after reception display" is displayed. The player is given an operation opportunity to end the "display" display state, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest due to the decorative design SZ being difficult to see. .

In this production example, in the situations shown in FIGS. 262(k4) and (l4), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is displayed at a different position from the position where it was displayed up until then. I have to. That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted by a predetermined operation while the "2nd E display after reception" and the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are being displayed, the screen shown in FIG. 262 As shown in (m4), the "2nd E reception display" in the display state is hidden.

In addition, during the second E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258, the reception permission sound is not audibly output when the second E reception period occurs. As a result, if a reception period occurs during which a player is allowed to receive multiple operations, by checking whether or not the reception permission sound has been audibly output, the type (1st E It becomes possible to estimate the acceptance period, 2nd E acceptance period, etc.).

However, like the 1st E reception period, the 2nd E reception period can also occur while specific BGM is being audibly output, as shown in FIG. In the first place, it is difficult to predict which of the 2E acceptance periods will occur, and when specific BGM is audibly output, there are multiple production sounds, so it is difficult to predict whether the acceptance acceptable sound has been audibly output. We also make it difficult to confirm, thereby maintaining a good sense of tension.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 258(h), the specific BGM that is being audibly output during the second E reception period is activated when a predetermined condition is met within the second E reception period (at a predetermined timing). ), it ends its audible output and becomes inaudible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 253(h), the audible output of the specific BGM that is being output during the first E reception period is not terminated within the first E reception period. It is expected that this will continue. Through the situation regarding the audible output of such specific BGM, it becomes possible to suggest the type of the reception period.

In addition, in the second E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258(h), the screen corresponding to the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) displayed as an object for which multiple operation receptions are permitted. The audible output does not end when the operating means (here, the "operating button 410") is operated. As a result, the player hesitates when using the operation means (in this case, the "operation button 410") that prompts the player to accept multiple operations without worrying about the effect on the audible output of the specific BGM. It will now be possible to operate without

Also, in the 2nd E reception period, unlike the case of the 1E reception period described above, the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) is operated (pressed). ), this will prevent the operation reception from being made multiple times (the operation reception will be automatically repeated every predetermined time) (the auto continuous tap function will not be enabled). ing. According to such a configuration, when multiple operation receptions are allowed, the player can guess the type of reception period by checking whether the above-mentioned automatic continuous play function is enabled. becomes possible. In this case, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the operating means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) within the second E reception period. Needless to say, it won't happen.

FIG. 263 is a time chart illustrating an example of the performance contents when the 3rd E reception period (3rd E reception performance) occurs when "Condition 3E" is satisfied as the generation condition. FIGS. 264 and 265 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a fluctuating pattern in which the 3rd E reception period (3rd E reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "3rd E variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the third E variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 3rd E variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the 3E variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.), etc.) is started ( "Situation shown in Figure 264 (a)"), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, the performance (notice performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is performed using the "3rd E fluctuation pattern" itself selected above. This will be executed additionally.

As shown in FIG. 263(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "3rd E variation pattern", timing tc2 has arrived when the 3E time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 3E"), the above-mentioned 3rd E reception period (validity period) during which "reception regarding display after 3E reception (sound output after 3E reception)" is permitted. This is assumed to be possible (the situation shown in FIG. 260(c)).

Here, the 3rd E reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 1E reception period and 2nd E reception period, and is the period until the 3E reception period ends (3E post-reception display (display after 3E reception)). This function functions as a "one-time permissible period" in which only one operation is permitted during the period (after receiving the 3E (after the sound output) is no longer permitted).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a 3E reception period is generated, the reception period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, is also displayed. The "fifth periodicity display SH5" is displayed as the periodicity display related to the acceptance period.

More specifically, the "fifth periodic display SH5" according to this embodiment means "After the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259(A), When a moving image such as "Sequentially displayed in each mode shown in C)" is one periodic change, the periodic change is a period E time (longer than the above-mentioned "Period C time"). ) refers to a display that can appear repeatedly in a form that requires That is, the "fifth periodicity display SH5" displayed in the third E reception period has the same periodic E time as the "third periodicity display SH3" displayed in the second E reception period, the time required for its periodic change. It is set as . In this production example, the "fifth periodicity display SH5" is displayed as the same image display as the "third periodicity display SH3." However, the "fifth periodic display SH5" does not necessarily have to be the same as the "third periodic display SH3"; for example, the sizes may be different from each other, or only one of the dogs may have bent ears. They may be different as long as they are slightly different, such as.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an acceptance period related periodicity display (fifth A periodicity display SH5) is displayed. However, the reception period related periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize the type of reception period that has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. Further, the fifth periodicity display SH5 may be displayed as a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1 and the third periodicity display SH3.

In this regard, when the fifth periodicity display SH5 is displayed at the occurrence of the 3E acceptance period, the fifth periodicity display SH5 is displayed in the same manner as the other display while another display is being displayed. The display is designed to start appearing in the background. In other words, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance period that has occurred can be determined through the visibility of the acceptance period related periodicity display at the time when the acceptance period related periodicity display starts to be displayed. It is designed to suggest the type of

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 264(b) and 264(c), the above-mentioned other display suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity (the 3rd E reception period will occur). We are planning to use a warning display to show that this is the case. Note that the other display does not necessarily have to be an omen effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when timing tc1 arrives before the occurrence of the 3E reception period, as shown in FIGS. 263(c) and 264(b), As the foreshadowing effect display, the "3rd E omen effect display ZED" is started to be executed. As shown in FIG. 263(c) and FIG. 264(b) to (d), this "3rd E omen effect display ZED" is displayed on the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display), reception desk The period-related periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) is displayed so as to span before and after the display timing. In this production example, the "3rd E portent effect display ZED" is replaced by the above-mentioned "1E portent effect display ZED (see FIGS. 255(b) to (d))" and "2nd E portent effect display ZED (see FIG. 260 (b) to (d))", but it is executed as a different effect display from the "1st E omen effect display ZED" and the "2nd E omen effect display ZED". You can do it like this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 264(c), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 display the "3rd E precursor effect display ZED". During this period, the display starts appearing behind the "3rd E portent effect display ZED".

In addition, in this production example, at timing tc2 when the 3rd E reception period occurs, it is decided to start displaying the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5. Not limited to. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 may be configured to start displaying before or after the timing tc2 at which the 3E reception period occurs, or may be The simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 may be displayed at mutually different timings.

Furthermore, in the third E acceptance period, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes may appear. In the 3rd E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means for which one operation reception is allowed, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is modeled in the integrated model image display IG. A video image in which a part (button drawing image BMG) is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259 (α), and then sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. 259 (β) to (δ)" is created in one video image. When it is a periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a manner that requires a predetermined period B time. In other words, the “integrated image display IG (button image BMG)” displayed in the 3rd E reception period is different from the “integrated image display IG” displayed in the 2nd E reception period, the time required for its periodic change. (Button drawing image BMG)" is set as the same period B time. Moreover, in this production example, the "integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG)" displayed in the 3rd E reception period is the "integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG)" displayed in the 2nd E reception period. BMG)" is displayed as the same image display. However, the "integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG)" displayed in the 3rd E reception period is not necessarily the same as the "integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG)" displayed in the 2nd E reception period. They do not have to be the same; for example, they may have different sizes (similar shapes, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even during the third E acceptance period, the integrated image display IG depicts how the "operation receiver" moves up and down its movable range. In addition, the "cycle B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 3rd E reception period is longer than the "cycle A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 1st E reception period. Because of this setting, in the 3rd E acceptance period, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the 1st E acceptance period. Note that the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 3rd E reception period is the same as the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 2nd E reception period. In the 3rd E reception period, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range at the same speed as in the 2nd E reception period.

As shown in FIG. 264(d), the display range of the 3E omen effect display ZED is reduced over time, and in this manner, the 3E omen effect display ZED is displayed. Among them, the integrated image display IG and the fifth periodic display SH5 develop their respective periodic changes in the above-mentioned manners. After this, as shown in FIGS. 264(e) to (g1), the integrated image display IG and the fifth periodicity display SH5 display the above-mentioned periodic changes (period B time, period E time). ) will continue to develop.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 264 assumes that the first operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made at timing tc2A (timing shown in FIG. 264(e)) within the 3E reception period. I am assuming that. That is, as described above, the third E acceptance period according to this embodiment functions as a "one-time acceptance period" in which only one operation acceptance is allowed. Therefore, when the first operation is accepted during the 3E acceptance period, the 3E acceptance period ends based on the operation acceptance, and the 3E post-reception display corresponding to the operation acceptance is '', the aspect UH3-1 (FIG. 265 (f2) to (i2)) appears with a relatively low expectation level, and the aspect UH3-2 (see Figure 265 (f2) to (i2)), which has a higher expectation level as ``display after reception of 3rd E'' appears. 265 (f3) to (i3)) may appear. Although not shown, when the 3rd E post-reception display is displayed, the corresponding 3E post-reception sound output is also audibly output. The "3rd E post-reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the level of expectation.

In this regard, there are two cases: when the aspect UH3-1 with a relatively low expectation level appears as the "display after receiving the 3rd E", and when the aspect UH3-2 with a relatively high expectation level appears as the "display after the 3rd E reception". Here, the EF display EKH is displayed in the same manner as shown in FIGS. 265 (f2) to (h2) and FIG. 265 (f3) to (h3).

That is, regardless of whether the aspect UH3-1 with relatively low expectations appears as the "3rd E post-reception display" or the aspect UH3-2 with relatively high expectations appears, First, the first mode EKH1 (see FIGS. 265 (f2) and (f3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. Next, the fifth aspect EKH5 (see FIG. 265 (g2) to (h2) or FIG. 265 (g3) to (h3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, when the first operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made in the 3E reception period, regardless of the modes UH3-1 and UH3-2 as "Display after reception of 3E", " EF display EKH is executed in a series of modes (FIG. 265 (f2) to (h2) or FIG. 265 (f3) to (h3)) in which the first mode EKH1 and the fifth mode EKH5 are displayed sequentially. (corresponds to "third extinction EF" in the figure). As a result, even if the EF display EKH is confirmed, it becomes difficult to recognize the degree of expectation for the "3rd E display after reception".

In addition, in the period in which the first aspect EKH1 is displayed (FIG. 265 (f2), (f3)) of the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 3rd E reception period of this production example, the 1E reception period The same aspect as when an operation is accepted (see FIG. 256 (g2), etc.) appears, and this makes it difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period the operation was accepted. There is. However, it is not necessary to have this configuration, and it is necessary to ensure that the same aspect as when the operation is accepted during the 1st E acceptance period does not appear within the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 3rd E acceptance period. You can.

Also, in the third E acceptance period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 265 (f2) and (f3), when an operation is accepted, the fifth periodicity display SH5 is Hide periodic changes. Here, by hiding the fifth periodicity display SH5 itself, its periodic changes are hidden. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first aspect EKH1 and the fifth aspect EKH5 of the EF display EKH are displayed) (FIGS. 265 (f2) to (h2) or FIG. 265 (f3) to (h3)), the fifth periodic display SH5 is not hidden, and the state shown in FIG. After that, the fifth periodicity display SH5 is displayed as it is (a mode in which there is no mode), and then the fifth periodicity display SH5 is displayed (based on the first operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period)). However, it may be hidden immediately after the operation is accepted.

Furthermore, during the 3E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) also receives the first operation (reception period), as shown in FIG. 263(b). The periodic change is hidden based on the fact that an operation (accepting an operation to end the process) has been performed. Here, by hiding the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) itself, its periodic changes are hidden. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first aspect EKH1 and the fifth aspect EKH5 of the EF display EKH are displayed) (FIGS. 265 (f2) to (h2) or FIG. 265 (f2) to (h2)), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is not hidden, and the mode shown in FIG. 264(e) (periodic The integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) is displayed in the same state (in which no progress has occurred), and then the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) is displayed (for the first time). (Based on the operation acceptance (operation acceptance that ends the acceptance period)), but it will be hidden from the situation immediately after the operation acceptance is done. Good too.

Here, the "3rd E post-reception display" is displayed behind the fifth periodic display SH5, the integrated image display IG, and the EF display EKH. Immediately after the "3E Post-Reception Display" is displayed, it is difficult to see. However, as the 5th periodic display SH5, integrated image display IG, EF display EKH, etc. are hidden, the visibility of the "3rd E post-reception display" will gradually become better. Become. However, as mentioned above, even if you check the mode of the EF display EKH while the EF display EKH is displayed, the "display after 3rd E reception" is the mode UH3-1 with low expectations and the mode UH3 with high expectations. It is difficult to recognize whether it is displayed as -2 or -2.

Additionally, in the third E reception period, as shown in FIG. 263, when the third E reception period occurs, the "first permissible sound" may be audibly output as the reception permissible sound, similar to the first E reception period. In this regard, in the 3E reception period, as shown in FIG. 263, a situation may occur in which an operation is accepted while the "first permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. (timing tc2A), the audible output of the "first permissible sound" is continued without being interrupted based on the operation acceptance.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 263, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before the timing tc2 when the 3E reception period occurs, but this is not necessarily the case. The audible output may be started at timing tc2, or the audible output may be started after timing tc2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263, the third E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM is being audibly output, there is a possibility that the third E reception period will occur, so it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest. As described above, the "specific BGM" can also be audibly output when the first E reception period (see FIG. 253) or the second E reception period (see FIG. 258) occurs. However, in the 3rd E reception period, unlike the case of the 2nd E reception period, the "specific BGM" will not be terminated midway within the 3E reception period.

FIG. 268 is a time chart illustrating an example of the performance contents when the 4th E reception period (4th E reception performance) occurs when "Condition 4E" is satisfied as the generation condition. FIGS. 268 and 269 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects in a variable pattern in which the 4th E reception period (4th E reception effect) occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "4th E variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the fourth E variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 4th E variation pattern, sound output according to the 4E variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.), etc.) is started ( "Situation shown in Figure 268 (a)"), within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, the performance (notice performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is performed using the "4th E fluctuation pattern" itself selected above. This will be executed additionally.

As shown in FIG. 266(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "4th E variation pattern", timing td2 has arrived when the 4E time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 4E"), the above-mentioned 4th E reception period (validity period) during which "reception regarding display after 4E reception (sound output after 4E reception)" is permitted. This is assumed to be possible (situation shown in FIG. 268(c)).

Here, the 4th E reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 1E reception period and 2nd E reception period, and is the period until the 4E reception period ends (4E post-reception display (display after 4E reception)). This function functions as a "one-time permissible period" in which only one operation is permitted during the period (after the 4E reception and until the operation reception regarding the sound output) is no longer permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a 4th E acceptance period is generated, in connection with this, an acceptance period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes may appear, is displayed. "Sixth periodicity display SH6" and "Seventh periodicity display SH7" are displayed as periodicity display related to the reception period.

More specifically, the "sixth periodic display SH6" according to this embodiment means "After the dog character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259(A), When a moving image such as "Sequentially displayed in each mode shown in C)" is one periodic change, the periodic change is a period E time (longer than the above-mentioned "Period C time"). ) refers to a display that can appear repeatedly in a form that requires In other words, the "sixth periodicity display SH6" displayed in the 4th E reception period is different from the "third periodicity display SH3" displayed in the 2nd E reception period or the 3rd E reception period in which the periodic change takes time. It is set as the same period E time as the "fifth periodicity display SH5" displayed as a period. In this production example, the "sixth periodicity display SH6" is displayed as the same image display as the "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fifth periodicity display SH5." However, the "sixth periodicity display SH6" does not necessarily have to be the same as the "third periodicity display SH3" or the "fifth periodicity display SH5"; for example, the sizes may be different from each other, or either Dogs may be slightly different, such as having folded ears.

Further, the "seventh periodic display SH7" according to this embodiment means "after the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 267(a), the cat character is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. When a moving image such as "Sequentially displayed in various modes" is one periodic change, the periodic change has a predetermined period G time (a time different from period D time, period E time, and period F time) It means an indication that can appear repeatedly in a form that requires .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an acceptance period related periodicity display (6th A periodicity display SH6 and a seventh periodicity display SH7) are displayed. However, the reception period related periodicity display (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize the type of reception period that has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. Furthermore, the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed as a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1, third periodicity display SH3, fifth periodicity display SH5, etc. The seventh periodicity display SH7 may be displayed as a character different from the "cat character" used in the second periodicity display SH2, the fourth periodicity display SH4, etc. good.

For example, when the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed when the 4E acceptance period occurs, the sixth periodicity display SH6 appears behind the other display while another display is being displayed. However, the seventh periodic display SH7 is not displayed behind another display. In other words, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the occurrence of the acceptance period can be determined through the visibility of the acceptance period-related periodicity display at the time when the acceptance period-related periodicity display starts to be displayed. It is designed to suggest the type of

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 268(b) to 268(d), the other display suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity (the 4th E reception period will occur). We are planning to use a warning display to show that this is the case. Note that the other display does not necessarily have to be an omen effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when timing td1 arrives before the 4E reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 266(c) and 268(b), As the foreshadowing effect display, "4th E omen effect display ZED" is started to be executed. As shown in FIG. 266(c) and FIG. 268(c), (d), this "4th E omen effect display ZED" is displayed on the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display), reception desk The period-related periodicity display (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7) is displayed so as to span before and after the display timing. In this production example, the "4th E omen effect display ZED" is replaced with the above-mentioned "1E omen effect display ZED (see FIGS. 260(b) to (d))" and the "3rd E portent effect display ZED (see FIG. 268(b) to (d))". It may be executed as a different effect display from the ``effect display ZED'', ``2nd E omen effect display ZED'', and ``3E omen effect display ZED''.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 268(c), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 display "4th E precursor effect display ZED". The display starts appearing behind the "4th E portent effect display ZED" while the display is in progress. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268(d), the seventh periodic display SH7 is not displayed behind the "4th E precursor effect display ZED", and here, the "4th E portent effect display ZED" is not displayed. The display starts with the ``foreshadowing effect display ZED'' facing backwards.

In addition, in this production example, at timing td2 when the 4th E reception period occurs, it is decided to start displaying the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6. Not limited to. The integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be made to start displaying before or after the timing td2 when the 4th E acceptance period occurs, or may be The simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodic display SH6 may be displayed at mutually different timings.

In this pachinko machine 1, the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are displayed at different timings. In this production example, the sixth periodicity display SH6 starts to be displayed before the seventh periodicity display SH7, and while the sixth periodicity display SH6 is being displayed, the seventh periodicity display SH7 is displayed. It is now ready to start displaying. In addition, since the sixth periodic display SH6 according to this production example starts its periodic change immediately after the display starts, the timing at which the periodic change starts is also 7 The timing is set before the periodic change of the periodicity display SH7 starts.

However, for the sixth periodic display SH6, for example, the display is made to start before the timing td2 when the 4th E acceptance period occurs, and the periodic change is not started at the time when the display starts. Good too. That is, in this case, the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed while maintaining the mode shown in FIG. 259(A). Then, the periodic change in the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be started based on the arrival of the timing td2 at which the fourth E acceptance period occurs. In this regard, regarding the seventh periodicity display SH7, for example, if the display including the periodic change is started based on the arrival of timing td2, the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the periodicity display SH7 can be started. Although the timing at which the display starts is different between the periodic display SH7 and the periodic display SH7, the timing at which the periodic change starts is the same.

Conversely, the display of the seventh periodicity display SH7 may be started before the timing at which the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed or the timing at which the fourth E acceptance period occurs. In this case, the timing at which the periodic change of the seventh periodicity display SH7 starts is also different from the timing at which the periodic change of the sixth periodicity display SH6 starts or the timing at which the 4th E acceptance period occurs. It is also desirable to do this beforehand.

Regarding the relationship of the seventh periodicity display SH7 to the sixth periodicity display SH6, any of the above-mentioned configurations may be adopted, but the relationship of the seventh periodicity display SH7 to the sixth periodicity display SH6 It is desirable that they be the same.

Furthermore, in the third E acceptance period, the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes may appear. In the 4th E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means for which one operation reception is allowed, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is modeled in the integrated model image display IG. A video image in which a part (button drawing image BMG) is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 259 (α), and then sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. 259 (β) to (δ)" is created in one video image. When it is a periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a manner that requires a predetermined period B time. In other words, the "integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG)" displayed in the 4th E reception period is different from the "integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG)" displayed in the 2nd E reception period and the 3rd E reception period. The period B time is set to be the same as that of "Integrated image display IG (button image BMG)". Moreover, in this production example, the "integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG)" displayed in the 4th E reception period is the "integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG)" displayed in the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period. IG (button drawing image BMG)" is displayed as the same image display. However, the "Integrated image display IG (Button image BMG)" displayed during the 4th E reception period is the same as the "Integrated image display IG (Button image BMG)" displayed during the 2E reception period and 3E BMG)" and may not necessarily be the same, for example, the sizes may be different from each other (similar shapes, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even during the 4th E acceptance period, the integrated image display IG depicts how the "operation receiver" moves up and down its movable range. In addition, the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 4th E reception period is longer than the "period A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 1st E reception period. Because of this setting, in the 4th E acceptance period, the "operation receiving part" is depicted moving up and down its movable range more slowly than in the 1st E acceptance period. The "Period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the 4th E reception period is the "Period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed in the above 2E reception period and the above 3E reception period. '', therefore, in the 4th E acceptance period, the ``operation receiving part'' is depicted moving up and down its movable range at the same speed as in the 2nd E acceptance period and the 3rd E acceptance period.

As shown in FIG. 268(c), the integrated sample image display IG (sample image display, remaining time display) according to this production example also includes the "4E portent production display" similar to the sixth periodicity display SH6. While "ZED" is being displayed, the display starts appearing behind the "4th E precursor effect display ZED" and its periodic change begins.

As shown in FIGS. 268(b) to 268(d), the display range of the 4E omen effect display ZED is reduced over time, and in this manner, the 4E omen effect display ZED is displayed. Among them, the integrated image display IG and the sixth periodic display SH6, as well as the seventh periodic display SH7, which started displaying later, are based on the periodic changes in each of the above-mentioned aspects. We will advance each of these.

As a result of the display range of the 4E omen effect display ZED being reduced in this way, when the 4E omen effect display ZED is hidden, the seventh periodicity is displayed as shown in FIG. 268(e). The visibility of not only the display SH7 but also the integrated image display IG and the sixth periodic display SH6 is improved. After this, unless the player accepts the operation, as shown in FIGS. 268(f) to (h1), the integrated image display IG, the sixth periodicity display SH6, and the seventh periodicity display The display SH7 continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period G time).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, the first operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is performed at timing td2A (timing shown in FIG. 268(f)) within the 4E reception period. I am assuming that. That is, as described above, the 4E acceptance period according to this embodiment functions as a "one-time acceptance period" in which only one operation acceptance is allowed. Therefore, when the first operation is accepted during the 4E acceptance period, the 4E acceptance period ends based on the operation acceptance, and the 4E post-reception display corresponding to the operation acceptance is '', the aspect UH4-1 (FIG. 269 (g2) to (j2)) with a relatively low expectation appears, and the aspect UH4-2 (4E display after reception) with a higher expectation than the aspect appears. 269 (g3) to (j3)) may appear. Although not shown, when the 4E post-reception display is displayed, the corresponding 4E post-reception sound output is also audibly output. The "4th E post-reception sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the level of expectation.

In this regard, when the aspect UH4-1 with relatively low expectation appears as the "4th E post-reception display", as shown in FIGS. 269 (g2) to (i2), The EF display EKH is displayed in a manner (low expectation manner) different from that in which the aspect UH4-2 with high expectations appears.

That is, when the aspect UH4-1 with a relatively low expectation level appears as the "4th E post-reception display", the first aspect EKH1 (see FIG. 269 (g2)) is first displayed as the EF display EKH. Next, the sixth mode EKH6 (see FIGS. 269 (h2) and (i2)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "low expectation mode of the EF display EKH" (corresponding to the "4th disappearing EF" in FIG. )" will be executed as a series of modes (FIG. 269 (g2) to (i2)) such as "the first mode EKH1 and the sixth mode EKH6 are displayed in sequence", and as a result, "After the 4th E reception It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH4-1 with relatively low expectations will appear as "display". In this production example, the sixth mode EKH6 (see FIG. 269 (h2), (i2)) is executed as the same mode as the third mode EKH3 (see FIG. 257 (q3), (r3)) described above. However, it may be implemented in a different manner.

On the other hand, when aspect UH4-2 with relatively high expectations appears as the "4th E post-reception display", as shown in FIGS. 269 (g3) to (j3), the "4th E post-reception display" The EF display EKH is displayed in a different manner (high expectation aspect) from when the aspect UH4-1 with relatively low expectations appears.

That is, when the aspect UH4-2 with relatively high expectations appears as the "4th E post-reception display", the first aspect EKH1 (see FIG. 269 (g3)) is first displayed as the EF display EKH. Next, the seventh mode EKH7 (see FIGS. 269 (h3) and (i3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the high expectation mode of the EF display EKH (corresponding to the 5th disappearing EF in FIG. )" will be executed as a series of modes (FIG. 269 (g3) to (i3)) such as "the first mode EKH1 and the seventh mode EKH7 are displayed sequentially." It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH4-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as "display". In this production example, the seventh aspect EKH7 (see FIGS. 269(h3) and (i3)) is replaced with the fifth aspect EKH5 (see FIGS. 265(g2) to (h2) and FIGS. 265(g3) to (h3)). )), but it may be executed in a different manner.

In addition, in the period in which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (FIG. 269 (g2), (g3)) of the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 4th E reception period of this production example, the 1E reception period The same aspect as when an operation is accepted (see FIG. 256 (g2), etc.) appears, and this makes it difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period the operation was accepted. There is. However, it is not necessary to have this configuration, and it is necessary to ensure that the same aspect as when the operation is accepted during the 1st E acceptance period does not appear within the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 4th E acceptance period. You can.

In addition, in the 4E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 269 (g2) and (g3), the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh period are displayed based on the operation reception. Hide periodic changes in gender display SH7. Here, by hiding the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 themselves, the periodic changes thereof are hidden. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (a situation where the first aspect EKH1 and the sixth aspect EKH6 (or the seventh aspect EKH7) of the EF display EKH are displayed) (Fig. 269 (g2 ) to (h2) or Fig. 269 (g3) to (h3)), the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are not hidden, and the display shown in Fig. 268 ( The sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are displayed in the manner shown in f) (the manner in which no periodic change progresses), and thereafter, the sixth periodicity display SH6 is and the seventh periodicity display SH7 is to be hidden (based on the first operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period)), but the situation is immediately after the operation reception is performed. You may choose to hide this from time to time.

Further, in the 4th E acceptance period according to this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is also displayed based on the operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 266(b). to hide its periodic changes. Here, by hiding the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) itself, its periodic changes are hidden. In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (a situation where the first aspect EKH1 and the sixth aspect EKH6 (or seventh aspect EKH7) of the EF display EKH are displayed) (Fig. 269 (g2 ) to (h2) or Fig. 269 (g3) to (h3)), the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) is not hidden, and the image shown in Fig. 268 (f) is displayed behind the EF display EKH. ) (a mode in which no progress of periodic changes has occurred) is to display the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), and then the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) The sample image BMG) is to be hidden (based on the first operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period)), but from the moment the operation is accepted immediately after may be hidden.

Here, the "4th E post-reception display" is displayed behind the 6th periodicity display SH6, the 7th periodicity display SH7, the integrated image display IG, and the EF display EKH. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the "4th E post-reception display" immediately after it is displayed. However, as the 6th periodicity display SH6, the 7th periodicity display SH7, the integrated image display IG, the EF display EKH, etc. are hidden, the visibility of the "4th E post-reception display" gradually decreases. It will be considered to be in good condition. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when the EF display EKH is displayed, the "4th E display after reception" can be differentiated between the mode UH4-1 with low expectations and the mode UH4-2 with high expectations. This makes it easy to recognize which one is displayed.

In addition, in the 4E reception period, as shown in FIG. 266, when the reception permissible sound occurs, either the "first permissible sound" or the "second permissible sound" may be audibly output (selectively) as the reception permissible sound. . For example, when the 4th E reception period occurs, when the "second permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound, the jackpot can be obtained more than when the "first permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It is desirable to set the setting so that it suggests that the level of expectation (ratio) is high. In this regard, in the 4E reception period, as shown in FIG. 266, the operation reception is performed while either the "first permissible sound" or the "second permissible sound" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. Although the situation is likely to occur (timing td2A), the audible output of the "first permissible sound" or the "second permissible sound" is interrupted based on the acceptance of the operation.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 266, the "first permissible sound" as the reception permissible sound is audibly output before the timing td2 when the 4E reception period occurs, but this is not necessarily the case. The audible output may be started at the timing td2, or the audible output may be started after the timing td2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 266, the 4E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is inaudible. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM becomes inaudible, there is a possibility that the 4th E acceptance period will occur, so it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest. As mentioned above, the "specific BGM" can also be heard when the 1st E reception period (see Figure 253), 2nd E reception period (see Figure 258), or 3E reception period (see Figure 263) occurs. It can be output.

Here, the first E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257), the second E reception period (see FIGS. 258 to 262), the third E reception period (see FIGS. 263 to 265), and the third E reception period (see FIGS. 263 to 265). Of the 4E reception periods (see Figures 266 to 269), the 1E reception period (see Figures 253 to 257) will be replaced by the 5E reception period (see Figure 270) described below. Alternatively, it may be generated during the 6th E reception period (see FIG. 270). In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily provided for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 269. You may choose not to prepare.

FIG. 270 is a time chart illustrating an example of the presentation contents when the 5th E reception period (5th E reception presentation) occurs when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the generation condition. Note that the production example in the variable pattern in which the 5th E reception period (5th E reception performance) occurs overlaps with the above-mentioned case where the 1E reception period (1st E reception performance) occurs (see Figures 255 to 257). Since there are many parts to be changed, only the differences (changed points) will be explained and illustrations will be omitted.

In other words, as mentioned above, the 1E reception period can occur as a reception period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted, and an integrated model image display IG that simulates the operation means in which multiple operation receptions are permitted. (Button drawing image BMG) and reception period-related periodicity displays (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2), which are image displays in which periodic changes may appear, are respectively displayed. Then, during the first E reception period, the operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) is operated and the operation reception is performed (without ending the reception period). Based on the operation reception, the periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 are respectively hidden, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH1 are hidden. As mentioned above, the periodic changes in the display SH2 are not hidden and continue.

In this regard, in the fifth E reception period, which is a modification of the first E reception period, as shown in FIGS. 270(b) and (e), the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) Even if the corresponding operation means (here, the "operation button 410") is operated and an operation is accepted (without ending the acceptance period), the integrated sample image display IG (button sample image BMG) is displayed based on the operation acceptance. The periodic changes in , the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are not hidden, and these periodic changes are continued. It has become. Note that when an operation is accepted to end the acceptance period at timing ta2C, based on this, periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 are performed. The point that both the change and the periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2 are hidden is the same as in the case of the first E reception period.

In other words, in this case, based on the arrival of timing ta2 when the first E time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 1E"), "after the 5th E reception" The above-mentioned 5E reception period (validity period) in which "reception regarding the display (in this example, the same as the display after the 1E reception)" is allowed occurs (situation shown in FIG. 255(c)), and the 5E reception Even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the period (validity period), the integrated image display IG (button image display The periodic changes in the image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are not hidden; This will continue. Therefore, in this modified example, when the situations shown in FIGS. 256(g2) to (m2)... appear, it is the same as when the situations shown in FIGS. 255(g1), (h1)... appear. In other words, the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 continue to progress (continue) their periodic changes in the same manner as the second periodic display SH2.

Similarly, even if the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 5E reception period (validity period), The periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 are all hidden. Therefore, these periodic changes will continue. Therefore, when the situations shown in FIGS. 257(l3) to (o3) appear in this modification, it is the same as when the situations shown in FIGS. 256(l2), (m2), etc. appear, that is, The integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 will continue to progress (continue) their periodic changes, similarly to the second periodic display SH2.

Note that when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 5E reception period (validity period), or at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)), when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) is set based on the operation reception. Regarding the points that are displayed and the display changes that occur in the background image etc. (for example, the depiction of the first meter rising) as "display after the 5th E reception (in this example, the same as the display after the 1st E reception)" , is the same as the case of the first E acceptance period (validity period) described above. In addition, when the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made at timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 257 (o3)) within the 5E reception period (validity period), based on the operation reception Then, all the periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 are hidden, The point of executing the "5th E post-reception display (in this example, the same as the 1st E post-reception display)" (Fig. 257 (p3) to (s3), Fig. 257 (p4) to (s4)) is also explained above. This is the same as in the case of the 1st E reception period (validity period).

FIG. 271 is a time chart illustrating an example of the presentation contents when the 6th E reception period (6th E reception presentation) occurs when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the generation condition. Note that the production example in the variable pattern in which the 6th E reception period (6th E reception performance) occurs overlaps with the above-mentioned case where the 1E reception period (1st E reception performance) occurs (see Figures 255 to 257). Since there are many parts to be changed, only the differences (changed points) will be explained and illustrations will be omitted.

In other words, as mentioned above, the 1E reception period can occur as a reception period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted, and an integrated model image display IG that simulates the operation means in which multiple operation receptions are permitted. (Button drawing image BMG) and reception period-related periodicity displays (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2), which are image displays in which periodic changes may appear, are respectively displayed. Then, during the first E reception period, the operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) is operated and the operation reception is performed (without ending the reception period). Based on the operation reception, the periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 are respectively hidden, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH1 are hidden. As mentioned above, the periodic changes in the display SH2 are not hidden and continue.

In this regard, in the 6th E reception period, which is a modification of the 1E reception period, as shown in FIGS. 271(b) and (e), the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) When the corresponding operation means (in this case, the "operation button 410") is operated and an operation is accepted (without ending the acceptance period), the integrated map image display IG (button map image BMG) is displayed based on the operation reception. The periodic change, the periodic change in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic change in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden. As a method for hiding these periodic changes, for example, a method for hiding the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and the first periodicity display SH1 during the first E reception period described above. (See FIGS. 256(g2), (h2), FIGS. 257(l3), (m3), etc.). That is, in this case, the second periodicity display SH2 according to this modification is similar to the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the first periodicity display SH1, etc., and the second periodicity display SH2 itself. The display (display of the character) continues, but by not continuing the periodic changes that have been made up to that point, the periodic changes are hidden.

In other words, in this case, based on the arrival of the timing ta2 when the first E time has elapsed since the start of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (based on the fulfillment of the "condition 1E"), the "after the 6th E reception" The above-mentioned 6E reception period (validity period) in which "reception regarding the display (in this example, the same as the display after the 1E reception)" is allowed occurs (situation shown in FIG. 255(c)), and the 6E reception When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the period (validity period), the integrated model is executed based on the operation reception. The periodic changes in the image display IG (button drawing image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden. Therefore, when the situation shown in FIGS. 256 (g2) and (h2) appears in this modification, not only the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and the first periodicity display SH1 but also the second Regarding the periodicity display SH2, the periodic changes are also hidden. More specifically, the second periodicity display SH2, in the situations shown in FIGS. Similarly, it will be displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 255(f), and when the situation shown in FIG. 256(i2) is reached, the periodic change will start again. In this example, the process will start again from the mode shown in FIG. 254(a).

Similarly, when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 6E reception period (validity period), Based on the operation reception, periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1, and periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 are determined. will also be hidden. Therefore, when the situation shown in FIGS. 257(l3) and (m3) appears in this modification, not only the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and the first periodicity display SH1 but also the second Regarding the periodicity display SH2, the periodic changes are also hidden. More specifically, in the situations shown in FIGS. 257 (l3) and (m3), the second periodicity display SH2 is different from the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) and the first periodicity display SH1. Similarly, it will be displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 256 (k2), and when the situation shown in FIG. 257 (n3) is reached, the periodic change will start again. In this example, the process will start again from the mode shown in FIG. 254(a).

Note that when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 6E reception period (validity period), or at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)), when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) is set based on the operation reception. Regarding the points that are displayed and the display changes that occur in the background image etc. (for example, the depiction of the first meter rising) as "display after the 6th E reception (in this example, the same as the display after the 1st E reception)" , is the same as the case of the first E acceptance period (validity period) described above. In addition, when the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is made at timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 257 (o3)) within the 6E reception period (validity period), based on the operation reception Then, all the periodic changes in the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 are hidden, The point of executing the "6th E post-reception display (in this example, the same as the 1E post-reception display)" (Fig. 257 (p3) to (s3), Fig. 257 (p4) to (s4)) is also explained above. This is the same as the case of the 1st E reception period (validity period).

Regarding the above-mentioned 5E reception period (see Figure 270) or 6E reception period (see Figure 270), the 1E reception period (see Figures 253 to 257) and the 2E reception period (see Figures 258 to 262) ), the 3rd E reception period (see FIGS. 263 to 265), and the 4th E reception period (see FIGS. 266 to 269) may be generated as a separate reception period; in this case, The 5th E reception period (see Figure 270) will occur based on the fulfillment of "Condition 5E" as the above occurrence condition, and the 6E reception period (see Figure 270) will occur based on the above occurrence condition "Condition 5E" is satisfied. This occurs based on the fact that "Condition 6E" is satisfied. That is, for the 1st E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257), the 5E reception period (see FIG. 270), and the 6E reception period (see FIG. 270), the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment , only one of these acceptance periods may be allowed to occur, or only any two of these acceptance periods may be allowed to occur in response to mutually different occurrence conditions. Alternatively, all of these acceptance periods may be made possible to occur in accordance with mutually different generation conditions.

Each reception period (or a partial reception period) for the above-mentioned production example or its modification example indicates that the player will soon be given an opportunity to operate in connection with the occurrence of the reception period. Premonitory effect display ZED, action object display (integrated image display IG) that suggests the reception target (operation receiver, etc.), remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and image display that can show periodic changes. Certain acceptance period related periodicity displays (first periodicity display SH1 to seventh periodicity display SH7, etc.) can be displayed. However, as described above, each of these configurations does not necessarily need to be provided, and only appropriate configurations among these configurations may be provided. Also, as mentioned above, the operation target display (sample image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated replica image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. However, the display is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods. In addition, if a configuration for displaying the integrated image display IG is not provided, the game It is desirable to suggest the object of operation by the person.

In addition, periodic changes are hidden based on the fact that an operation is accepted (without ending the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or a partial acceptance period) for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations. The method is not limited to the above-mentioned configurations, but for example, periodic changes such as periodic display on the layer (reception period related periodic display) and integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) continue. By displaying another image (for example, EF display EKH, etc.) in front of this, a method is adopted in which the periodic display and the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) are no longer visible. Alternatively, the periodicity display or integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) may be changed to a periodic change that is different from the periodic change that has continued until then and displayed (for example, by changing the period time, etc.) ) to hide the periodic changes that have continued up to that point, or display the periodicity display (reception period related periodicity display) or the integrated pattern image display IG (button pattern image BMG) itself. The display may be terminated.

In addition, the periodic changes were hidden based on the operation acceptance (without ending the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or partial acceptance period) for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations. Afterwards, as a method for restarting the periodic change, it is not necessarily necessary to restart the periodic change from the beginning, but it may be restarted from the middle of the periodic change.

In addition, regarding the configuration in which the EF display EKH is displayed based on the operation acceptance (without ending the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or a partial acceptance period) for the above-mentioned production example or its modification example. does not necessarily have to be prepared. Although it is not an essential configuration, even if the EF display EKH is not executed (displayed) when an operation is accepted, periodicity display (reception period related periodicity display) and integrated sample image It is possible to make periodic changes in the display IG (button image BMG) invisible.

In each reception period (or a partial reception period (for example, the 2nd E reception period, etc.)) for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, the precursor production display ZED is displayed in the second periodicity display SH2 and the third periodicity display SH2. It may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the periodicity display SH3, the fourth periodicity display SH4, the seventh periodicity display SH7, etc. It is sufficient that it is not displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, the third periodicity display SH3, the fourth periodicity display SH4, the seventh periodicity display SH7, etc. During the 2nd E reception period, the omen effect display ZED does not have any effect in relation to the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4, so the configuration related to the omen effect display ZED is not essential. This itself may not be executed (displayed).

Among the reception periods for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, there is a "multiple-acceptance period" (or a partial multiple-acceptance period (for example, the 2nd E reception period, etc.) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times. )", the acceptance period does not end based on the fact that the operation has been accepted until a specific number of operations (the third) have been accepted, and Based on this, we have decided to end the application period. However, it will be decided whether or not to end the acceptance period based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, and the acceptance period will be ended based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the judgment. You can.

In addition, among the reception periods for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, the "multiple-acceptance period" (or a partial multiple-acceptance period (for example, the 2E reception period) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times) etc.)), the predetermined conditions (e.g. number of operations, judgment, etc.) are met by the operation reception, regardless of whether the "low expectation mode" or "high expectation mode" is executed as the display after reception. Based on this, we decided to end the acceptance period and display a post-acceptance message. However, the possibility that a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations, judgment, etc.) will be satisfied when an operation is accepted is limited to the case where the "high expectation mode" is executed as the post-acceptance display. Good too. In other words, in this case, when the "low expectation mode" is executed as the post-acceptance display, the condition for ending the acceptance period based on this is established, no matter how many operations are accepted during the acceptance period. Alternatively, the "low expectation mode" may be executed as a post-acceptance display based on the arrival of the timing at which the acceptance period ends. Alternatively, only when the "specific mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the reception period is ended based on the operation reception, and when the "specific mode" is not executed as the post-reception display, the reception period is terminated based on the operation reception. The reception period may not be terminated. That is, in this case, when the timing for the end of the acceptance period arrives, no post-acceptance display will be performed.

In addition, among the reception periods for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, the "multiple-acceptance period" (or a partial multiple-acceptance period (for example, the 2E reception period) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times) etc.)) does not necessarily have to include a configuration that ends the acceptance period based on the operation acceptance. In other words, in this case, the operation may be accepted multiple times until the end of the acceptance period, but the acceptance period will not be terminated based on this, but based on the arrival of a predetermined timing. Only then will the acceptance period end.

In addition, among the reception periods for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, the "multiple-acceptance period" (or a partial multiple-acceptance period (for example, the 2E reception period) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times) etc.)), each time an operation is accepted, a different display change may appear as a post-acceptance display.

Moreover, each reception period according to the above-described production example or its modification example may be any combination and may occur sequentially within one variation pattern.

Further, the display after acceptance does not necessarily have to indicate the degree of expectation that a jackpot will be obtained, and may not indicate the degree of expectation.

In addition, in each reception period for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, when the reception period ends based on the operation reception, a common aspect (first aspect) as EF display (production effect display) EKH is applied. EKH1) is first displayed (for example, Fig. 257 (p3), (p4), Fig. 265 (f2), (f3), Fig. 269 (g2), (g3), etc.), and then in the form that follows. Although another aspect is displayed (for example, Fig. 257 (q3) to (r3), (q4) to (r4), and Fig. 265 (g2) to (h2), (g3) to (h3) 269 (h2) to (i2), (h3 to (i3), etc.), EF display (direction effect display) EKH is sufficient, and for the common mode (first mode EKH1), this You may omit it.

Furthermore, during the reception period for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, the display mode of the "special image display" that periodically changes may be changed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition. . For example, if an operation is accepted while the integrated model image display IG (reference image display) is being displayed, the display mode of the integrated model image display IG may change. In this regard, when changing the display mode of the integrated image display IG, do you want to maintain the same periodic change or change the periodic change as well? By making the game more visually appealing, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. In this example, the integrated model image display IG is changed as a "special image display," but the "special image display" is not limited to the integrated model image display IG, but can also be an image that changes periodically. Any display (for example, periodicity display related to reception period, etc.) may be used.

FIG. 272 shows a modification example in which the display mode of the integrated image display IG is changed (or not changed) based on the acceptance of an operation during the 1E acceptance period (see FIGS. 253 to 257). It is a diagram. Note that 272 in the same figure is for explaining the display mode of the sample image display and what kind of change occurs in the time required for the periodic change based on the operation acceptance. For the sake of convenience, illustrations of other components that have already been explained (decorative patterns, display after reception, etc.) are omitted. Further, only the configurations that are different from the first E reception period according to the above-mentioned production example will be explained, and the same configurations will not be particularly mentioned.

In the first E reception period according to the above-described production example, the integrated image display IG is displayed to change periodically at "period A time" (see FIGS. 253 and 254). In this respect, in the 1st E reception period according to this modification, the case where the integrated image display IG is displayed to perform periodic changes in the "period A1 time" is different from the "period A1 time". In some cases, the display is displayed such that the periodic change occurs at the time "Period A2 hours".

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272(a), now, in the 1E reception period, the integrated model image display IG changes to the display mode (integrated model image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a). and is in a state where it is displayed so as to periodically change at "Period A time", an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the integrated image display IG (the first E acceptance period is If an operation (not terminating operation) is accepted, a post-acceptance display (not shown) or the like will be displayed based on the operation acceptance.

However, if an operation is accepted during the 1st E acceptance period according to this modification (operation acceptance that does not end the 1E acceptance period), in addition to these display changes, the display mode of the integrated image display IG will change. This is subject to change. That is, in the first E acceptance period according to this modification, if it is not determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, then the process shown in FIG. 272(b), If the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in (d) and (e).

Here, if the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. , as shown in FIG. 272(b), executes a predetermined EF display EKH, thereby making the periodic display that had appeared up to that point hidden (so that it cannot be visually recognized) on the integrated image display IG. After that, as shown in FIG. 272(c), the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), thereby making the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG This makes it possible to generate interest in whether or not the time required has changed. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 272(c), it is assumed that there will be no change in the "display mode" or "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated model image display IG, so the integrated model image The display IG will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 272(a) (the display manner shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated image display IGa)) and with the "period A1 time".

On the other hand, also in the case where the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 272(d), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed to hide (make invisible) the periodic display that had appeared until then on the integrated image display IG. After this, as shown in FIG. 272(e), the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), and thereby the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG is made to be visible again. This makes it possible to generate interest in whether or not the time required has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 272(e), it is assumed that both the "display mode" and "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated image display IG change, that is, the integrated image display IG changes. The image display IG has the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated image display IGd)" and is displayed at a "period A2 hours". As explained with reference to FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the integrated model image display IGd (FIG. 272(e)) offers a better chance of winning than the integrated model image display IGc (FIG. 272(c)). This suggests that the level of expectation (ratio) of

According to such a configuration, during the first E reception period (a period in which multiple operation receptions are allowed), when a predetermined condition is satisfied by accepting an operation, this is used as an opportunity to display the integrated image display IG. The mode (display mode, periodic time required for one periodic change) of (sample image display) can now be changed, and from then on, operations can be accepted in the changed mode. In other words, in this case, when the aspect of the integrated image display IG (image image display) changes (display aspect, periodic time required for one periodic change), it is suggested that the expectation level (high) of a jackpot is achieved. It is expected that this will improve the interest in gaming.

FIGS. 273 and 274 are diagrams illustrating a modification example in which the display mode of the integrated image display IG (image image display) is changed (or not changed) based on operation acceptance during the second E reception period. It is. In addition, FIGS. 273 and 274 show how the mode (display mode and periodic time required for its periodic change) of the integrated image display IG (image display) is changed based on the acceptance of the operation. This is to explain what changes will occur, and for the sake of convenience, illustrations of other already explained configurations (decorative patterns, display after reception, etc.) are omitted. Further, only the configurations that are different from the second E reception period according to the above-mentioned production example will be explained, and the same configurations will not be particularly mentioned.

In the second E reception period according to the above-described production example, the integrated image display IG is displayed to change periodically at "period B time" (see FIGS. 258 and 259). In this regard, in the 2nd E reception period according to this modification, the case where the integrated image display IG is displayed to perform periodic changes in the "period B1 time" is different from the "period B1 time". When the periodic change is displayed at "Period B2 time" which is a time, and when the periodic change is displayed at "Period B3 time" which is a time different from both "Period B1 time" and "Period B2 time". There are times when the text is displayed to indicate that a specific change has been made. In this example, "period A1 time", "period A2 time", "period B1 time", "period B2 time", and "period B3 time" are all set as different times.

More specifically, in the second E reception period according to this modification, first, the integrated model image display IG is in the display mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa), and There are cases in which it is displayed with "period B1 hours" and cases where it is displayed in the "display mode shown in Figure 144(b) (integrated image display IGb)" and "period B2 hours". It has become.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 273(a), currently, in the second E reception period, the integrated model image display IG is set to "the display mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa)". and is in a state where it is displayed so as to make periodic changes at "period B1 time", and in this state, an operation reception (the second E reception) is performed for the operation means corresponding to the integrated image display IG. If an operation that does not end the period is accepted, a post-acceptance display (not shown) will be displayed based on the operation.

However, if an operation is accepted during the 2nd E acceptance period according to this modification (operation acceptance that does not end the 2nd E acceptance period), in addition to these display changes, the display mode of the integrated image display IG will change. This is subject to change. That is, in the second E acceptance period according to this modification, if it is not determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, then the process shown in FIG. 273(b), If the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in (c) and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, the image is displayed based on the result of the determination. The integrated image display IG is displayed in either the manner shown in FIGS. 273(d) and 273(e), or in the manner shown in FIGS. 273(f) and 273(g).

That is, in the second E reception period according to this modification, there are cases where the first condition is satisfied as "conditions predetermined when the operation is accepted" and a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the first condition is satisfied as "the predetermined condition when the operation is accepted", then the ), and if it is determined that the second condition is satisfied as "the predetermined condition when the operation is accepted", the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in Based on the results, the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 273(f) and 273(g).

Here, if the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. , as shown in FIG. 273(b), executes a predetermined EF display EKH, thereby making the periodic display that had appeared up to that point invisible (so that it cannot be visually recognized) on the integrated image display IG. After that, as shown in FIG. 273(c), the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), thereby causing the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG to be displayed again (visible again). This makes it possible to generate interest in whether or not the time required has changed. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 273(c), it is assumed that there will be no change in the "display mode" or "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated model image display IG, so the integrated model image The display IG will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 273(a) (the display manner shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated image display IGa)) and with the "period B1 time".

On the other hand, in the case where the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 273(d) and (e) based on the operation being accepted during the second E acceptance period according to this modification, First, as shown in FIG. 273(d), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed to hide (make visible) the periodic display that had appeared up until then on the integrated image display IG. After this, as shown in FIG. 273(e), the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), thereby making the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG This makes it possible to generate interest in whether or not the time required has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273(e), it is assumed that only the "display mode" of the "display mode" and "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated image display IG changes. That is, the integrated model image display IG has the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (integrated model image display IGc)" and is displayed at "period B1 time".

Also, in the case where the integrated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 273(f) and (g) based on the operation being accepted during the second E acceptance period according to this modification, first, As shown in FIG. 273(f), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed to hide (make visible) the periodic display that had appeared up to that point on the integrated image display IG. After this, as shown in FIG. 273(g), the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG is displayed (visible again), and thereby the periodicity display on the integrated image display IG is displayed (visible again). This makes it possible to generate interest in whether or not the time required has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273(g), it is assumed that both the "display mode" and "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated image display IG change, that is, the integrated image display IG The image display IG has the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated image display IGd)" and is displayed at "period B3 hours".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 274(a), now, in the second E reception period, the integrated model image display IG (simulation image display) is displayed as "Display mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image display)" display IGb)" and is displayed to change periodically at "period B2 hours", and in this state, the operation reception ( Even when an operation is accepted that does not end the second E acceptance period, a post-acceptance display (not shown) is displayed based on the operation.

However, in the 2nd E reception period according to this modification, the integrated model image display IG is in the display mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image display IGb) and is In a state where a change is displayed, even if an operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the corresponding 2nd E acceptance period), this will be used as an opportunity to change the condition (here, the first condition or the second condition) is never satisfied. Furthermore, the integrated model image display IG is in the display mode shown in FIG. In this state, even if an operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the 2nd E acceptance period), this will be used as an opportunity to hide the periodicity display that had previously appeared on the integrated image display IG (so that it cannot be seen). ).

Therefore, in the second E reception period according to this modification, the integrated model image display IG is in the "display mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image display IGb)" and is periodically In the state where the image is displayed in such a way as to make a change (FIG. 274(a)), the integrated image display IG changes in the manner shown in FIG. 274(a), regardless of whether or not an operation is accepted. The display mode and period B2 hours) will continue to be displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the second E reception period (a period in which multiple operation receptions are allowed), the integrated image display IG displays the display mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated image display IGb)" and is displayed so as to change periodically at "period B2 hours" (FIG. 274(a)), there is no possibility that the aspect of the integrated image display IG will change. This makes it possible to encourage the user to concentrate on other effects such as the post-reception display. On the other hand, the integrated model image display IG is in the display mode shown in FIG. When the integrated image display IG is in this state, it is suggested that the aspect of the integrated image display IG may change. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by accepting the operation, this is used as an opportunity to change the mode of the integrated image display IG (image display) (display mode, periodic time required for one periodic change, etc.) can change, and from then on, operations can be accepted in the changed form. In other words, in this case, when the aspect of the integrated image display IG (image image display) changes (display aspect, periodic time required for one periodic change), it is suggested that the expectation level (high) of a jackpot is achieved. It is expected that this will improve the interest in gaming.

In particular, during the 2nd E reception period (a period in which multiple operation receptions are allowed), the display mode ” may change, and there are cases where both the “display mode” and “periodic time required for one periodic change” change, and different expectations are suggested between them. , it is now possible to prompt the user to pay close attention to whether or not the "period time" has changed.

Note that in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 272 to 274, a predetermined EF display EKH is executed in order to hide periodic changes in the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG). However, the predetermined EF display EKH does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, by hiding the display itself of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG), the periodic changes may be hidden, or the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) may be hidden. Although the display itself (integrated image display IG) is displayed, it can be displayed statically, or it can be displayed with a periodic change that is different from before and after the change, so that a special image display can be created. (In this case, the integrated image display IG) may be configured such that periodic changes (before and after the change) are not displayed.

In particular, when periodic changes (before mode change, after mode change) of the special image display (here, integrated image display IG) are not yet displayed, the display itself is preceded by the display mode after the change. By making it visible (making it visible), a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the modified example shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, if the aspect of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) does not change, the period of the modified example shown in FIG. 272(b), 273(b), etc. may be omitted)

In addition, in FIGS. 272(a) and 273(a), as a special image display (here, integrated model image display IG), the display mode is the same (integrated model image display IGa), but the periodic time ( Although the period A1 time and the period B1 time are displayed in different manners, not only the period time but also the display manner may be displayed differently. Conversely, in FIGS. 272(a) and 273(a), the special image display (here, integrated image display IG) is displayed in different display modes but with the same cycle time. You may also do so. In short, it is sufficient if they are displayed in mutually different manners.

In addition, in FIGS. 272(e) and 273(g), the periodic times of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) are set to be different, but the periodic times are the same (period A2 hours, The period B may be set as 3 hours). That is, in this case, the special image displays shown in FIGS. 272(e) and 273(g) (in this case, integrated image display IG) have the same display mode and are displayed at the same cycle time. Become.

Alternatively, in FIGS. 272(e) and 273(g), the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is the same, but the display modes may be different from each other. . That is, in this case, the special image displays shown in FIGS. 272(e) and 273(g) (in this case, integrated image display IG) have different display modes and are displayed at different cycle times. Become. In this case, the special image display (here, integrated image display IG) shown in FIG. 272(e) may be displayed in the same display mode as FIG. 273(e). When using the same display mode, it is desirable to set the period A2 time and the period B1 time as the same time.

In FIG. 274(a), both the display mode and period time of the special image display (here, integrated image display IG) are set as unique modes different from any other modes. For example, if the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) is unique, it is possible to obtain the same effect even if the period time is the same as any of the other modes. be. Further, the aspect shown in FIG. 274(a) may suggest that the degree of expectation is higher than any other aspect.

Note that "the display formats differ" here does not necessarily mean that the formats of the special image displays (here, the integrated image display IG) are different; for example, even if the formats are the same, the colors may differ. should be different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, it is possible to realize the performance in the 1st E reception period (a period in which multiple operation receptions are allowed) and the 2nd E reception period (a period in which multiple operation receptions are allowed). However, it does not have to be a performance that appears in multiple reception periods. For example, the effects (configurations) realized in FIGS. 272 to 274 include the first E reception period (a period in which multiple operation receptions are allowed) and the second E reception period (a period in which multiple operation receptions are allowed). It may also be possible to make it appear only in either of the following.

Furthermore, the mode shown in FIG. 272 (if the display mode changes while the special image display is displayed in the first mode, both the display mode and the cycle time always change), the mode shown in FIG. The mode shown in FIG. The mode shown (when the special image display is displayed in the third mode, neither the display mode nor the cycle time changes) does not necessarily have to be realized when the operation is accepted. good. For example, a predetermined condition (a first condition, a second condition, etc.) may be satisfied at a predetermined timing during the reception period or the execution period of the precursor effect, and the predetermined condition is met. If the special image display (in this case, the integrated image display IG) does not change the display mode or cycle time (FIG. 272(c), FIG. 273(c), FIG. 274(b), etc.), the predetermined When the conditions are met, the display mode and cycle time of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) are changed according to the content (Fig. 272(e), Fig. 273(e), (g)). etc.).

Furthermore, the mode shown in FIG. 272 (if the display mode changes while the special image display is displayed in the first mode, both the display mode and the cycle time always change), and the mode shown in FIG. 274 (when the display mode changes while the special image display is displayed in the second mode, there are cases where the period time does not change and cases where the period time changes), and the mode shown in FIG. The mode shown in (when the special image display is displayed in the third mode, neither the display mode nor the cycle time changes) etc. is realized as a production (configuration) that is necessarily related to the operation. It doesn't have to be something you do. In short, if multiple modes with different expectations are prepared for the "special image display" that is displayed in a periodic manner, the above-mentioned effect (the mode shown in FIG. If the display mode changes while the is displayed in the first mode, both the display mode and the cycle time will necessarily change), and the mode shown in FIG. 273 (when the special image display is displayed in the second mode) When the display mode changes when the display mode is displayed, there are both cases where the period time does not change and cases where the period time changes), and the mode shown in FIG. 274 (the special image display is displayed in the third mode). It is possible to achieve this (when the display mode and cycle time do not change).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to each of the production examples described above, a simulated image display (in this case, a button simulated image BMG) that is an image display that simulates the operation target (operation button 410) is displayed (as the button simulated image BMG). It is possible to generate a "simulation image display reception period" during which operation reception is permitted for the operation button 410 that is the object of the simulation. When an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to each production example described above, first, as a sample image display acceptance period,
・“Short period display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (Fig. 253, etc.)) that can be displayed so that periodic changes in the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) appear in predetermined time units (every cycle A time) , 5th E reception period (Fig. 270 etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)”
・Periodic changes in the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) are not displayed in such a manner that they appear in the predetermined time unit (every period A time), and the period is longer than the predetermined time period (period A time). ``Long period display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258 etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266 etc.) that can be displayed in units (every period B time) ))" should be prepared at least.

Then, in the "short cycle display acceptance period", the acceptance permissible sound is always audibly output, whereas in the "long cycle display acceptance period", if the acceptance permissible sound is output audibly (3E acceptance period) , 4th E reception period) and cases in which no audible output is produced (2nd E reception period). According to such a configuration, during the "short cycle display acceptance period", periodic changes ( For example, it is expected that the player's sense of expectation will increase and the enjoyment of the game will be improved because the button's up and down movement is depicted (depicting the up and down movement of the button) and the acceptance acceptance sound is always audible. It becomes like this. On the other hand, in the "long cycle display acceptance period", it becomes difficult to recognize that the player is given an operation opportunity compared to the "short cycle display acceptance period". It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension due to the increased possibility of forgetting to perform an operation.

However, in this case, if a "long period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3rd E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4th E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" occurs, a "short period display reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)" occurs. Compared to the display acceptance period (the 1st E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), the 5th E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), the 6th E acceptance period (Figure 271 etc.)), the player is not strongly encouraged to perform operations. There is a concern that interest in gaming may decline due to the lack of play. Therefore, in the "long-cycle display acceptance period" according to the above-mentioned production example, a mode sound (second allowable sound) that cannot appear in the "short-cycle display acceptance period" may be output as an acceptance allowable sound. (see FIG. 263), it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

In addition, "Long cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258 etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266 etc.))" and "Short cycle display acceptance period (Figure 266 etc.)" The 1E reception period (Figure 253, etc.), the 5E reception period (Figure 270, etc.), and the 6E reception period (Figure 271, etc.) do not occur at the same time; It is not possible to compare and see whether the period (cycle time) is long or short. Therefore, as a player, it may be difficult to recognize which of the "long cycle display acceptance period" and the "short cycle display acceptance period" is occurring. In this regard, in the above configuration, by checking whether or not the reception permissible sound has been audibly output and its type (modal sound), it can be confirmed that the "long period display reception period" has occurred. Since there is a possibility that the reception permission sound can be easily recognized, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

In particular, in the "long cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263, etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, Permissible sounds include sounds that cannot appear in the short-cycle display acceptance period (1E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 5E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), 6E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.)). When the (second permissible sound) is audibly output, the expectation level is that a jackpot is obtained more than when the modal sound (first permissible sound) that appears even during the "short period display acceptance period" is audibly output. Since the (ratio) is set high, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) according to the above-mentioned production example is a depiction of a movement that may appear on the operation target (operation receiver) (here, a depiction of repeating reciprocating motion when a pressing operation is performed). ) is displayed as a moving image that is repeated repeatedly, so it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform operations in a natural manner. However, the periodic change in the sketch image display (here, the button sketch image BMG) is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a blinking light-emitting display.

In addition, the "long period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258 etc.), 3rd E reception period (Fig. 263 etc.), 4th E reception period (Fig. 266 etc.))" and "short period display reception period (Fig. 266 etc.)" related to the above-mentioned example of production. In the periodic display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 5th E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), 6th E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.)), an image display imitating the operation means (here, The "periodic changes" appearing in the button drawing image (BMG) were all made to have the same content (a depiction of repeated reciprocating movements when pressed), and only the time required for the periodic changes was made to differ. Alternatively, not only the time required for the periodic change but also the content of the "periodic change" may be different. For example, in the short cycle display acceptance period, compared to the long cycle display acceptance period, the movement amount (stroke) of the operation receiving part that appears when pressed is displayed as a short representation (in this case, a button sketch image). BMG) may be displayed. Alternatively, the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) during the short-cycle display acceptance period is displayed as a moving image that repeatedly depicts movements that may appear on the operation receiver, but during the long-cycle display acceptance period, The sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) is displayed as an image display that repeatedly depicts the movement that may appear on the operation receiver, and when it is displayed as an image display that repeatedly depicts the movement that may appear on the operation receiver (blinking). The display may be displayed as an image display that repeatedly performs a light emitting display, etc.).

In addition, during short period display acceptance periods (1E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 5E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), 6E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.)), a sample image display (here, a button sample) is displayed. Two types of periodic changes in the image BMG) are prepared, one of which is ``periodic changes in the pattern image display (here, the button pattern image BMG) in a predetermined time unit (period A time)''. Another aspect is "a mode in which periodic changes in the pattern image display (here, the button pattern image BMG) appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time (period A time)". The two modes may appear within one short-cycle display acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if a short cycle display acceptance period occurs, the periodic change in the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) is longer than the predetermined time (cycle A time). Since it may appear in long time units, the short cycle display acceptance period and long cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258 etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.), 4th E acceptance period) This makes it difficult to recognize which period (such as in FIG. 266) is occurring. If a periodic change in the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) appears in a time unit longer than a predetermined time (period A time) within the short cycle display acceptance period, the long time is ”.

In addition, during the short-cycle display acceptance period (1E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 5E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), 6E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.)), a sample image display (here, a button sample) is displayed. When preparing two types of modes with different periodic times as periodic changes in the image BMG), it is recommended to ``Aspect displayed in the sample image display'' appears when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) is maintained in the operating state, and the mode displayed in the sample image display ( Here, when the operating means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button drawing image BMG) is not operated, a predetermined period of time (period A time) is assumed as a "periodic change in the button drawing image display (here, the button drawing image BMG)". It may also be possible to cause periodic changes to appear at a later time than the above. According to such a configuration, the short-cycle display acceptance period, the long-cycle display acceptance period (the 2nd E acceptance period (such as FIG. 258), the 3rd E acceptance period (see FIG. 258, etc.), and the 3rd E acceptance period (see FIG. 263, etc.) or the 4th E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)). After the operation is accepted, it will be easier to recognize it. become. Regarding "periodic changes in time later than a predetermined time (period A time)", an image different from the sample image display is displayed in front of the sample image display at a position overlapping with the sample image display, and By displaying it as a periodic change, a periodic change at a time later than a predetermined time (period A time) may be made to appear as a "periodic change in the pattern image display (here, the button pattern image BMG)". good. Furthermore, the "periodic changes" themselves may be different, such as one being a movement period and the other being a flashing period.

In addition, in the "long period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3rd E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4th E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, For the acceptance period of the type, the time required for periodic changes in the pattern image display (here, the button pattern image BMG) was set to the same time (period B time), but multiple times were set as the time required for ``periodic changes.'' It is also possible to use a time period of . However, in this case, any time is the predetermined period in the "short period display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)"). It will be set as a time longer than the time (period A time). According to such a configuration, it becomes even more difficult to recognize which of the short period display acceptance period and the long period display acceptance period is occurring. In this case, the reception permission sound will not be output when the periodic change time is a specific time during the long period display reception period, and the periodic change period during the long period display reception period will be When the time is not a specific time, the acceptance permission sound may be output in some cases and not in other cases.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in all reception periods, but the operation opportunity is given to different operation means depending on the type of reception period. An opportunity may be provided. For example, in the first E acceptance period (such as FIG. 253), at least a mock image display (button sketch image BMG) that simulates the operation button 410 is displayed, and multiple operation acceptances for the operation button 410 are allowed. In the second E reception period (such as FIG. 258), at least a replica image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 may be displayed to allow multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410. . Similarly, for the 3rd E reception period to the 6th E reception period, targets to which operation opportunities are given may be set depending on the type.

In addition, during the short cycle display acceptance period (the 1st E acceptance period (such as FIG. 253), the 5th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 270), and the 6th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 271)), specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is displayed as a sample image display (here, button sample image BMG), but the long period display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258 etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.) In the reception period (e.g., FIG. 266), when a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is displayed as a sketch image display (here, the button sketch image BMG) (for example, in the 3rd E reception period, the 4th E reception period) There may be a period in which the other operation means (for example, the sword decoration object 5001) is displayed as a replica image display (sword decoration image SYG) (for example, during the second E reception period). Alternatively, in the long-cycle display acceptance period, when a simulated image display (here, a button sketch image BMG) imitating a specific operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is displayed (for example, in the 3rd E acceptance period, the 4th E reception period), a sample image display (here, a button sample image BMG) that simulates a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and a sample image that simulates other operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) (sword decoration image SYG) may be displayed (for example, during the second E reception period). If both a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) and other operation means (for example, sword ornament 5001) are displayed, both of them should use the same periodic time as a periodic change. This is desirable. In addition, a model image display (here, a button model image BMG) that simulates a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) and a model image display that simulates other operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) are also displayed. When both decorative images SYG) are displayed, the periodic changes in the display of the simulated images have different content (for example, one is a periodic change due to a flashing light-emitting display, and the other is a periodic change due to the operation receiver reciprocating within its movable range). (e.g., a depiction of Note that if both a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) and other operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) are displayed during the long-cycle display acceptance period, the specific operating means (for example, the When the operation button 410) or other operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is operated, a predetermined condition can be satisfied, and based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, (Triggered by the acceptance of the operation) The acceptance period will end. In other words, in this case, if the predetermined condition is not met, the acceptance period will continue without being terminated with the acceptance of the operation (establishment of the condition); The appropriate message will be displayed after acceptance.

Furthermore, in the above example of production, the 1st E reception period, 2nd E reception period, 5th E reception period, and 6th E reception period do not necessarily have to occur as reception periods in which multiple operation receptions are allowed. , it may occur as an acceptance period in which operation acceptance is allowed only once.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, "short period display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (such as FIG. 253), 5th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 270), 6th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 271)) )" and "Long-cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263, etc.))'', the performance sound (here, specific BGM) is audibly output. (See Figure 253, Figure 258, Figure 263, Figure 271, Figure 271, etc.). In this regard, in the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the production sound (here, specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence ends (becomes inaudible) until the end of the corresponding acceptance period. However, during the "long period display acceptance period", there may be cases where the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence ends (2nd E acceptance period) until the end of the acceptance period. I made it.

In other words, as the sample image display acceptance period, a "short cycle display acceptance period (1st E periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in a predetermined time unit. ``Long period display reception period (2nd E reception period (such as Figure 258), 3rd E reception period (such as Figure 263)) that can be displayed in units of time (period B time) longer than the predetermined time without any problem. )", in reality, does the periodic change in the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) appear in a predetermined time unit, or does it appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time? It is difficult to accurately determine whether there are any. In this regard, in the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the production sound (here, specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence will not end until the end of the acceptance period. ``Long-cycle display acceptance period'', if the production sound (in this case, specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence may be terminated until the end of the reception period, the reception period By checking whether the production sound that was audible at the time of occurrence ends, it is possible to more accurately determine whether the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" is occurring. be able to recognize it.

In particular, in the "short cycle display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (such as Figure 253), 5th E acceptance period (such as Figure 270), 6th E acceptance period (such as Figure 271))" related to the above-mentioned production example, Until the end of the reception period, the production sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence will not be terminated, but during the "long period display reception period (2nd E reception period (Figure 258 etc.)" , 3rd E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)), if the production sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not terminated until the end of the relevant reception period (3rd E reception period) There is a case where the application is terminated (2nd E reception period). According to such a configuration, even if the player pays attention to whether or not the production sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of the occurrence of the reception period is terminated, the sound will not be heard until the reception period ends. If the production sound (in this case, specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not ended during the period, either the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the In other words, in this case, the remaining time of the reception period is reduced by the amount that the player delays the operation in order to confirm whether or not the production sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of the reception period is ended. Coupled with this, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, the "short period display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (such as FIG. 253), 5th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 270), 6th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 271))" )" and "Long-cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263, etc.))'' (depending on the type of display after acceptance, etc.) , specific BGM) may occur while the audible output is fading out. In short, any effect sound may be made audible even slightly at the time the player is given the opportunity to operate it.

In addition, during the "long period display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (such as Figure 258), 3rd E acceptance period (such as Figure 263))" related to the above-mentioned production example, until the corresponding acceptance period ends. During the special type reception period (2nd E reception period) in which the production sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence may be terminated, during the reception period (2nd E reception period), Even if you operate a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) corresponding to the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) that is being displayed (as an image display), this will trigger the operation to become audible at the time of occurrence. The output of the existing production sound (specific BGM) will not be terminated (for example, it will be removed from the channel assignment for outputting the specific BGM) (which has nothing to do with the operation). Based on a predetermined condition being met (for example, a predetermined time has passed or a predetermined timing has arrived), the output of the performance sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence is terminated. I decided to let him do it. According to such a configuration, no matter how many operations the player performs, the output status of the performance sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence of the reception period is not affected. This makes it possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of reception period is occurring.

As mentioned above, the time of occurrence of the long period display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263, etc.)) until the end of the corresponding acceptance period. In the special type reception period (2nd E reception period) in which the production sound (specific BGM) that was in the audible state can be terminated, a simulated image display (here, It is also possible to display both a button pattern image BMG) and a pattern image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating other operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001), but any of these operation means can be displayed. Even if the operation is performed, it is desirable that the effect sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not terminated due to this operation. However, when one of these operating means is operated, the production sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence will not be terminated, but when the other is operated, this will be used as a trigger for the production sound (specific BGM) to be terminated. The production sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time may be terminated, and in this case, the type of reception period may be suggested depending on the operated object. , it is expected that players will be encouraged to perform a variety of operations.

Here, "the performance sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time the reception period occurs is not made inaudible until the end of the reception period" means When there are multiple types of effect sounds, it is sufficient that at least one of the effect sounds is not made inaudible until the end of the reception period. In addition, "the performance sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time the reception period occurs will be made inaudible until the end of the reception period" means that the performance sound (such as BGM) that is audible at the time of occurrence is When there are multiple types of effect sounds, this means that all of the effect sounds are rendered inaudible, that is, rendered silent, until the end of the acceptance period. However, the effect sound that starts to be output after the timing at which the acceptance period occurs may be made to be in an audible state.

In addition, in the production example described above, the same production sound (specific BGM) was made to be audible at the time of occurrence in the "short cycle display reception period" and the "long cycle display reception period". The performance sounds that are audible at the time of generation may be different from each other.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, there are short period display acceptance periods (1E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270 etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.)) and long period display reception periods (Fig. 253 etc.). The same aspect is displayed as a model image display of the operation target during the reception period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4th E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)) However, they do not necessarily have to display the same aspect. For example, during the long period display acceptance period, different modes may be displayed as a simulated image display of the operation target depending on the type. Furthermore, during the long cycle display acceptance period, the sample image display may be displayed in a special mode that cannot appear during the short cycle display acceptance period, and in this case, the sample image display may be displayed in the special mode. When this happens, it becomes possible to suggest that a long period display acceptance period will occur. When the sample image display is displayed in the special mode, the expectation level (rate) of winning a jackpot is higher than when the common mode is displayed in the short-cycle display acceptance period and the long-cycle display acceptance period. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, the above-mentioned sample image display acceptance period for the above-mentioned production example may occur while a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is being audibly output, or when a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is inaudible. It is assumed that there are both cases in which the problem occurs after the state is reached (4th E acceptance period (FIG. 266, etc.)). As a result, it is expected that the performance will be improved when the sample image display acceptance period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the 4th E reception period (such as FIG. 266) occurs during the sample image display reception period, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is generated before the 4E reception period occurs. ) is always inaudible, and as a result, during the corresponding 4E reception period (Figure 266, etc.), only when a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is inaudible. We decided to make it function as something that could occur. However, instead of (or in addition to) this, short cycle display acceptance periods (1E acceptance period (Figure 253 etc.), 5E acceptance period (Figure 270 etc.), 6E acceptance period (Figure 271 etc.) ), depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the short-cycle display acceptance period occurs, "a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is generated before the short-cycle display acceptance period occurs." However, during the long period display reception period (2nd E reception period (such as Figure 258), 3rd E reception period (such as Figure 263), 4E acceptance period (Figure 266, etc.)), the "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs. There may be cases in which a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible beforehand, and cases in which it is not made inaudible. According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when an operation opportunity is given, it will be determined whether it is a "short cycle display acceptance period" or a "long cycle display acceptance period". Since it becomes easier to recognize whether the player is playing the game or not, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is provided. As mentioned above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of jackpot determination, and symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (type of variation pattern).

When adopting such a configuration, for the "long period display acceptance period", for example, the 2nd E acceptance period (such as FIG. 258) is set to the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the 2nd E acceptance period occurs. Depending on the type, ``a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may be rendered inaudible or not rendered inaudible before the relevant 2nd E reception period occurs.'' The 3rd E reception period (Figure 258, etc.) and the 4th E reception period (Figure 266, etc.) It may be arranged that the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is not made inaudible or not made inaudible before the fourth E reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, during the 3E reception period, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is being audibly output, regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the 3E reception period occurs. This will occur, and during the 4E reception period, the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) will be rendered inaudible regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the 4E reception period occurs. It will occur in the middle of the day. It goes without saying that in the second E acceptance period, even if the aspect of the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, the aspect that appears as the post-acceptance display remains the same.

In this regard, regarding the "short-cycle display acceptance period (1E reception period (Figure 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Figure 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Figure 271, etc.))", the short-cycle display reception period concerned is It is important to ensure that the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) does not change depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the period occurs. In this sense, regarding the "short cycle display acceptance period", as in the production example mentioned above, a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is always audible at the time the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs. Alternatively, a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the "short cycle display acceptance period" occurs, and the specific type of production sound may be made inaudible. The sound (specific BGM) may be generated only when the sound is inaudible. Alternatively, regarding the "short cycle display acceptance period", there is a reception period for a type that can only occur while a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is made audible, and a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is It may also include a type of acceptance period that can only occur in a non-audible state. Even with such a configuration, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is not made inaudible or remains audible depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, during the sample image display acceptance period according to the production example described above, when an operation is accepted, the display after acceptance may be performed in a manner that appears to overlap from the front side with respect to the production design (decorative design SZ, etc.) ( For example, see FIG. 262(k4), etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to emphasize the display after acceptance, and it is expected to improve the performance when an operation is accepted.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, the "short period display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" is a decoration. There is no case where the post-acceptance display is performed in such a manner that it overlaps the symbol SZ from the front side, and the post-acceptance display is performed behind it (see Figure 257 etc.). 258, etc.), the 3rd E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), and the 4th E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)). period) and cases where the display is performed after reception on the back side of the decorative pattern SZ (3rd E reception period, 4th E reception period) (Fig. 262 (k4), (l4), Fig. 265, Fig. 269, etc.). According to such a configuration, when a short-cycle display acceptance period occurs, the display after acceptance is not emphasized against the decorative pattern SZ, and the player is not given an opportunity to operate under a feeling of tension. will be able to be granted. When a long-cycle display acceptance period occurs, the display after acceptance may or may not be highlighted, so that the feeling of tension when the player is given an opportunity to operate is appropriately reduced. It will be possible to provide a certain level of security while maintaining this.

In addition, in the second E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.) according to the above-mentioned production example, when the operation reception to end the reception period is received, this is used as a trigger to receive the reception in a manner that overlaps the decorative pattern SZ from the front side. Although the post-reception display is performed, even when an operation reception that does not end the reception period is made, the post-reception display may also be performed in a manner that overlaps the decorative pattern SZ from the front side using this as an opportunity. .

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the post-acceptance display is performed in a manner that overlaps the decorative pattern SZ from the front side based on the acceptance in the 2nd E acceptance period (such as FIG. 258), the player By performing a predetermined operation, etc., it is possible to shorten the period until the display after the reception is hidden and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easier to see (see FIGS. 262 (k4) and (l4)). reference). According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the post-acceptance display is emphasized, a decrease in gaming interest due to a decrease in the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ can be suitably suppressed.

Even if it is a "short period display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 5th E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), 6th E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.))", the decorative pattern SZ The post-reception display may be displayed in such a manner that they overlap from the front side, but in this case, the period until the post-reception display is hidden and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easier to see can be shortened. It is desirable to make it impossible.

In addition, in the "long cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Fig. 258 etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Fig. 263 etc.), 4th E reception period (Fig. 266 etc.))", the front side with respect to the decorative pattern SZ Even if the post-reception display is performed in a manner that overlaps the display, it is possible to shorten the period until the post-reception display is hidden and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easier to see (for example, , 2nd E acceptance period) and cases where it is impossible (for example, 3rd E acceptance period or 4th E acceptance period).

In addition, during the sample image display acceptance period according to the above-mentioned production example, when the operation is accepted, the disappearance EF display that makes the sample image display (decorative pattern SZ) difficult to visually recognize is executed in a predetermined manner (for example, 269 (g2) to (i2), etc.), and the case where the disappearance EF display is executed in a manner different from the predetermined manner (for example, FIG. 269 (g3) to (i3), etc.) or is not executed. There is. Thereby, it becomes possible to add effects even by displaying the extinguished EF.

In addition, as sample image display acceptance periods, at least the 1st E acceptance period (Figure 253 etc.), the 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.), and the 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266 etc.) will be prepared, and the 1E acceptance period In this case, it is possible to display periodic changes in the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) in units of a predetermined time (cycle A time) (short period display acceptance period), and the 3E acceptance period and the 4E During the reception period, periodic changes in the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) are not displayed in units of a predetermined time (period A time), and periodic changes are not displayed for a period longer than the predetermined time (period B time). ) units can now be displayed (long period display acceptance period). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the pattern image display (here, the button pattern image BMG). , it is expected to suitably maintain the tension when the sample image display acceptance period occurs.

In addition, when an operation is accepted during the 1st E acceptance period (such as FIG. 253), one of multiple modes (aspect UH1-1, aspect UH1-2) with different expectations in which a predetermined result (jackpot) is obtained. 257 (p4) to (r4). ), but when the post-reception display is executed in a mode (aspect UH1-1) that is different from the highly expected mode among the plurality of modes, the display is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 257 (p3 ) to (r3) (or may not be executed). Note that this also applies to the 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.) and the 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.). On the other hand, when an operation is accepted during the 4th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 266), multiple modes (Aspect UH4-1, Aspect UH4-2) with different expectations for a predetermined result (jackpot) are accepted. It is determined that the post-reception display can be executed in any of the above modes, and the extinguishing EF display is "When the post-reception display is executed in the mode (aspect UH4-2) with a high degree of expectation among the above-mentioned multiple modes," (i3), but when the post-reception display is executed in a mode (aspect UH4-1) different from the highly expected mode among the plurality of modes, the mode differs from the above mode. It is executed (or may not be executed) in the manner shown in (g2) to (i2). In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the 3E acceptance period (such as FIG. 263), one of multiple modes (Aspect UH3-1, Aspect UH3-2) with different expectations in which a predetermined result (jackpot) has been obtained Even if the post-reception display is made executable in this way, the extinguished EF display will be executed in one mode (FIG. 269 (f2) to (h2) ), Figure 269 (f3) to (h3), etc.). According to such a configuration, during the short period display reception period in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of a predetermined time (period A time), the degree of expectation is also affected by the mode of the extinguished EF display when the operation is accepted. Based on this suggestion, it becomes possible to provide an opportunity for operation so that the user does not feel anxious because it is difficult to recognize the level of expectation even though the user has performed the operation. In contrast, periodic changes in the sample image display are not displayed in units of a predetermined time (period A time), but appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time (period B time) during the long period display acceptance period. Now, depending on the manner in which the extinguished EF is displayed when an operation is accepted, there are cases in which the degree of expectation is suggested and cases in which the degree of expectation is not suggested, so that a sense of tension is suitably maintained when an operation opportunity is given. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the 1E post-reception display appears when the 1E post-reception display is executed in the "low expectation mode UH1-1" based on the operation reception being performed during the 1E reception period (such as FIG. 253). Based on the EF display (direction effect display) EKH mode and the fact that the operation was accepted during the 4E reception period (Figure 266, etc.), the display after the 4E reception is executed in the "low expectation mode UH4-1". The mode of EF display (production effect display) EKH that appears when ) and FIGS. 269(g2) to (i2)). In other words, in this case, as a result of the operation being accepted by pressing a random button repeatedly, if the post-acceptance display is executed in a manner with low expectations, does this mean that the operation has been accepted by multiple operations? Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether a single operation has been accepted or not, coupled with the fact that the user is in a situation where expectations are low, the user is encouraged to stop repeatedly hitting buttons at random. becomes expected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the mode of the EF display (production effect display) EKH that appears regardless of the mode of the display after the reception of the 3E based on the operation reception being made during the reception period of the 3E (such as FIG. 263); EF display (production effect display) EKH that appears when the 4E post-reception display is executed in "high expectation mode UH4-1" based on the operation reception being made during the 4E reception period (Figure 266, etc.) (See FIGS. 265(f2) to (h2), FIGS. 265(f3) to (h3), and FIGS. 269(g3) to (i3)). In other words, in this case, even if the 3E post-reception display is executed in the low expectation mode UH3-1 based on the operation reception being performed during the 3E reception period (such as FIG. 263), the EF display ( Effect display) Since the manner of EKH can give the illusion of high expectations, it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in the sample image display acceptance period according to the above-mentioned production example, there is a "short-cycle display acceptance period (1E acceptance period (Fig. 253 etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270 etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.) etc.)" and "Long period display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258 etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266 etc.))'' Allows multiple receptions.

In particular, the "short cycle display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 5th E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), 6th E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example is Regardless of the type of acceptance period, the acceptance of an action (operation) by a player (operation acceptance) is allowed to occur multiple times (for example, a continuous press type). On the other hand, the "long cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263, etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266, etc.))" is the acceptance period. Depending on the type (type of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.), the reception of actions (operations) by players (operation reception) until the corresponding reception period ends (while it is occurring). When a type that is allowed only once (for example, a single push type) occurs (3rd E reception period, 4th E reception period), and until the end of the relevant reception period (while it occurs), the player There is a case (second E acceptance period) in which the acceptance of an operation (operation) by (operation acceptance) occurs as a type that is allowed multiple times (for example, a continuous press type). According to such a configuration, when the "short period display acceptance period" occurs, it is suggested that operation acceptance is allowed multiple times (for example, it is a continuous press type). In addition, when the "long-cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it is now possible to hide whether or not operation acceptance is allowed multiple times (for example, whether it is a continuous press type or not). , you will be given the opportunity to operate in a tense environment.

In this case, even if the reception period (validity period) is for a type (e.g., continuous press type) that allows the reception of actions (operations) by the player multiple times, the lottery (judgment) related to the performance will not be accepted. Depending on the result, etc., the reception period (validity period) may end after only one operation reception (possibility). In short, any type of acceptance period (validity period) that can be accepted multiple times (pattern) is sufficient.

In addition, among the "long period display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263, etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266, etc.))", the applicable acceptance period ends. During the period (2nd E acceptance period) in which the operation means for which operation reception is allowed multiple times is displayed as a sample image display (here, button sample image BMG), the operation means that can be accepted multiple times is displayed as a sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG). Periods (3rd E acceptance period, 4th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 266) in which the operation means for which operation reception is allowed multiple times until the end of the period is not displayed as a sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) )) may be displayed as an image display (aspect) that is not displayed. In other words, in this case, when the long period display acceptance period occurs, it is possible to suggest whether or not this is a type that is allowed multiple times (for example, a continuous press type).

Furthermore, actions by the player during the "long cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (such as Figure 258), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266 etc.))" During the reception period (3rd E reception period, 4th E reception period) in which only the operation means for which one (operation) reception (operation reception) is allowed is displayed as a sample image display (here, button sample image BMG), the applicable The sample image display is the same as the sample image display that is displayed during the short-cycle display acceptance period (1E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 5E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), 6E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.)). Displayed as a sample image display corresponding to the same operation means, the operation means corresponding to the sample image display can be operated only once, and multiple actions (operations) can be accepted (operation reception) by the player. During the reception period (2nd E reception period) in which the operation means that are allowed at least once are displayed as a sample image display, the sample image display that is not displayed during the short-cycle display acceptance period is displayed, and the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is displayed. may be made to be operable multiple times.

In addition, during the short-cycle display acceptance period (1E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 5E acceptance period (Figure 270, etc.), 6E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.)) related to the above-mentioned production example, the sample image display Although the automatic continuous press function is enabled for the operation means that can be operated multiple times corresponding to etc.), during the 4th E acceptance period (FIG. 266, etc.)), the auto-repeating function was not enabled for the operation means that can be operated multiple times corresponding to the display of the sample image. According to such a configuration, it is made difficult to recognize whether the short-cycle display acceptance period or the long-cycle display acceptance period is occurring until the player starts an operation, and When the operation state is continued, it is possible to indicate whether a short-cycle display acceptance period or a long-cycle display acceptance period is occurring, depending on whether the auto-repeat function is enabled or not. .

In addition, a sample image (here, a button sample image BMG) is displayed in the "short cycle display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 6th E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example. When an operation is accepted for the operation means (in this case, "operation button 410") corresponding to the image, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the image display are hidden (Fig. 253(b) ) etc.). In other words, in this case, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the sample image display during the "short periodic display acceptance period," the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display are hidden. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the screen image display, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when accepting an operation. Note that in order to obtain such effects, the 5E reception period (such as FIG. 270) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

Particularly in this case, in the "short cycle display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (such as FIG. 253), 6th E acceptance period (such as FIG. 271))" according to the above-mentioned production example, the sample image display (here, the button sample When the operation means (in this case, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the image BMG is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display are hidden (Fig. 253(b), etc.), "Long period display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258 etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263 etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266 etc.))" When the operation means (here, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display are is hidden (see Figures 263(b) and 266(b), etc.), and when the periodic changes that had previously appeared in the sample image display are not hidden but continue (see Figure 263(b), Figure 266(b), etc.). 258(b)). According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had been appearing in the sample image display continues without being hidden when an operation is accepted, a "long period display acceptance period" occurs. Be able to suggest things. In addition, if the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display are hidden when the operation is accepted, either the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" has occurred. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize what is happening.

Alternatively, the operation means (here, the "operation button") corresponding to the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) in the "short cycle display acceptance period (5th E acceptance period (FIG. 270, etc.))" according to the above-mentioned production example. 410''), the periodic changes that had been appearing in the image display until then are not hidden but continue (see FIG. 270(b), etc.). In other words, in this case, even if an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the sample image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period," the periodic changes that had previously appeared in the sample image display will not be hidden. Since this continues, it is expected that it will be possible to check the time required for one periodic change in the sample image display even after the operation is accepted. Note that in order to obtain such effects, the first E acceptance period (such as FIG. 253) or the sixth E acceptance period (such as FIG. 271) is not generated as the "short cycle display acceptance period".

Particularly in this case, in the "short cycle display reception period (5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.)" in the above-mentioned production example, the operation means (here, When the "operation button 410") is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had been appearing in the sample image display until then are not hidden but continue (see FIG. 270(b) etc.). In the "Long-cycle display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.), 3rd E acceptance period (Figure 263, etc.), 4th E acceptance period (Figure 266, etc.))", a sample image display (here, a button sample) When the operation means (in this case, the "operation button 410") corresponding to the image BMG) is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display are hidden (Fig. 263(b), FIG. 266(b), etc.) and the case where the periodic changes that had appeared until then in the sample image display are not hidden but continue (see FIG. 258(b)). I made it so. According to such a configuration, when the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display are hidden when an operation is accepted, it is suggested that a "long-period display acceptance period" has occurred. You will be able to do this. In addition, if the periodic changes that had been appearing in the sample image display are not hidden and continue when the operation is accepted, either the "short cycle display acceptance period" or the "long cycle display acceptance period" It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize that it has occurred.

Note that the above-mentioned "periodic changes are hidden" may be hidden by "hiding the sample image display", or the sample image display may continue to be displayed, but The periodic changes that have appeared up to this point may be temporarily terminated and become a static display, or the same periodic changes may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started. , it may be sufficient as long as it makes the periodic changes (progress of) that had appeared up to that point invisible to the player.

Furthermore, a plurality of operating means may be provided, and different operating means may be used when terminating the periodic change when an operation is received and when the periodic change is continued, or the same operating means may be used. You can do it like this.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, first, it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance period during which operation acceptance on the operation means (here, the operation button 410) is allowed, and the operation acceptance is not allowed during the acceptance acceptance period. When the operation is accepted, at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output can be performed based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, a ``multiple acceptance acceptance period (1E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.) , the 5th E reception period (such as FIG. 270), the 6th E reception period (such as FIG. 271), or the 2nd E reception period (such as FIG. 258)).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, such a "multiple times permissible period" is defined as "the period when the operation is accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operation means corresponding to the sample image display in an operated state." At least a maintenance operation permissible period (first E reception period (such as FIG. 253), fifth E reception period (such as FIG. 270), or sixth E reception period (such as FIG. 271)) is prepared.

According to such a configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowed period), the "sample image display (here, button diagram image BMG)" ), it is expected that the decrease in interest in gaming will be suppressed. It becomes like this.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, the "operation means for which operation reception is permitted for multiple times" among the plurality of operation means is displayed as a sample image (here, a button sample is During the "maintenance operation permissible period" (image BMG) during which the operation is accepted multiple times simply by keeping the operating means (in this case, the operation button 410) corresponding to the image displayed in an operated state. 1E reception period (e.g., Figure 253), 5E reception period (e.g., Figure 270), or 6E reception period (e.g., Figure 271)), and among multiple operation means, operation means for which operation reception is allowed multiple times. is displayed at least as a sample image display (here, a button sample image BMG), but if the operation means corresponding to the sample image display (here, the operation button 410) is kept in an operated state, multiple operations will be accepted. Since we have decided to provide a "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)") during which no maintenance operations are performed, it is expected to maintain a moderate sense of tension and suppress a decline in gaming interest. will be done.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, the occurrence We decided to output an audible acceptance sound at the time of the reception. According to such a configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowable period), if the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, By audibly outputting the reception permission sound, it becomes easier to start the operation immediately after the maintenance operation permissible period occurs, and it is possible to perform the operation multiple times while there is plenty of time remaining. Furthermore, it becomes possible to "receive the operation multiple times just by keeping the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) in the operated state", which reduces the decrease in interest in the game. There will be an expectation of restraint.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the automatic continuous hit function is activated during the maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (such as FIG. 253), 5th E reception period (such as FIG. 270), or 6th E reception period (such as FIG. 270)). In the "acceptance period (e.g., Figure 271)", an acceptance permissible sound is audibly output when it occurs, but in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2nd E reception period (e.g., Fig. 258))" in which the auto-repeat function is not activated, Since the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output when the reception permission sound is generated, the operation reception can be performed multiple times simply by keeping the operating means in the operated state, depending on whether the reception permission sound is audibly output. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the "auto continuous hit function" is enabled.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, "maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.), 5th E reception period (Fig. 270 etc.), or 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" and "maintenance operation permissible period (Fig. 253 etc.)" In the operation non-permissible period (second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.)), at least the "operation means for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times" is displayed as a sample image display (here, a button sample image BMG). Although the targets are the same, they may be different.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" related to the above-mentioned production example, operation reception is not possible, including when the operation state is maintained. Each time an operation is accepted, the display mode changes (the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point are hidden) on the simulated image display that simulates the operation means that allow multiple operation receptions. In the operation non-permissible period (2nd E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.)), even if an operation is accepted, the display mode does not change (the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point continue). In other words, in this case, the "maintenance operation permissible period" can suitably indicate that the operation is being accepted properly even if the operation is performed using the "auto continuous hit function". This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game. However, if there are cases where multiple operation opportunities are provided solely due to such presentation, there is no sense of tension even though multiple operation opportunities are provided within a limited time. There is a concern that this may result in a decline in interest in gaming. In this regard, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" according to the above-mentioned production example, the display format does not change even if the operation is accepted, so it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation is accepted properly. It is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained when multiple operation opportunities are provided within a limited time. Note that in order to obtain such effects, the 5E reception period (such as in FIG. 270) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the "multiple times permissible period" in which at least a simulated image display of an operation means set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is displayed. , it can occur while some kind of production sound (BGM) is being audibly output, but the production sound (BGM) will be rendered inaudible until the end of the "multiple use permissible period". (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)) and cases where it is not made inaudible (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.) )).

According to such a configuration, if the production sound (BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence of the relevant reception period becomes inaudible while an operation opportunity is given, multiple operation receptions are performed. It becomes possible to suggest that a situation is occurring where a "multiple-time tolerance period" is occurring. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowed period), it is possible to do so by simply continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the sample image display. Since there are cases where "operations are accepted multiple times", it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the automatic continuous play function is activated during the maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (such as FIG. 253), 5th E reception period (such as FIG. 270), 6th E reception period (such as FIG. 270), period (Fig. 271, etc.)), the production sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of occurrence is not made inaudible until the end of the maintenance operation permissible period, but the automatic During the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" (2nd E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.)) when the continuous hit function is not activated, the performance sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of occurrence is It is now inaudible until the end of the process. According to such a configuration, when a "multiple times permissible period" occurs, the performance sound (such as BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence becomes inactive until the "multiple times permissible period" ends. Depending on whether or not it is made audible, it is possible to indicate whether or not the "auto continuous tap function", which allows multiple operation receptions by simply keeping the operating means in the operated state, will be enabled or not. become.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2nd E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.))" according to the above-mentioned production example, during the reception period (as an image display imitating the operation means that can accept multiple operations) Even if you operate a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) corresponding to the displayed sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG), this will trigger the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of generation. The output related to (specific BGM) is not terminated (for example, removed from the channel allocation for outputting specific BGM). That is, it was in an audible state at the time of occurrence based on a predetermined condition (unrelated to the operation) being satisfied (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed or a predetermined timing has arrived). This will end the output of the performance sound (specific BGM). According to such a configuration, no matter how many operations the player performs, the output status of the performance sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence of the reception period is not affected. This makes it possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of reception period is occurring.

Here, "the production sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of the occurrence of the multiple-time permissible period is not rendered inaudible until the end of the multiple-time permissible period" means that at the time of occurrence When there are multiple types of effect sounds that are in an audible state, it is sufficient that at least one of these effect sounds is not rendered inaudible until the plurality of permissible periods end. In addition, "the production sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of the occurrence of the multiple-time permissible period is made inaudible until the end of the multiple-time permissible period" means that at the time of occurrence When there are multiple types of sound effects that are audible, this means that all of those sound effects are made inaudible until the end of the permissible multiple use period, that is, they are rendered silent. do. However, the effect sound that starts to be output after the timing at which the acceptance period occurs may be made to be in an audible state.

In this case, the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" may occur while the audible output of the performance sound (BGM) is reduced (suppressed) in volume. That is, it is sufficient if there is a performance sound (such as BGM) that is audible at the time when the "multiple performance permissible period" occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the automatic continuous hit function is activated during the maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.) ))" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))" during which the auto continuous hit function is not activated, and the same performance sound (specific BGM) is audible at the time of their occurrence. However, the performance sounds that are audible at the time of their occurrence may be different from each other.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, the "multiple times permissible period" occurs when a specific type of production sound (here, specific BGM) is being audibly output, and when the production sound of a specific type occurs. There are cases where the sound (here, specific BGM) is generated after being rendered inaudible. More specifically, as a "multiple times permissible period" that may occur while a specific type of performance sound (here, specific BGM) is being audibly output, the operation reception period among multiple operation means is allowed to occur multiple times. The operation means (here, the operation button 410) that can be operated is displayed at least as a sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG), and the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is maintained in an operated state. "Maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.), 5th E reception period (Fig. 270 etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" where operation reception is made multiple times, and multiple operation means Of these, the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that can be accepted for operation multiple times is displayed at least as a sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG), but the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is displayed at least. A "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2nd E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)") is provided in which the operation is not accepted multiple times just by continuing to maintain the operated state.

In this regard, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", a specific type of performance may be performed before the relevant maintenance operation permissible period occurs, depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the relevant maintenance operation permissible period occurs. Although the sound (here, specific BGM) is not rendered inaudible or inaudible, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", at the time when the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs, When a specific type of production sound (here, specific BGM) is made inaudible before the relevant "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended ( (When the maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs while the specific type of production sound is inaudible) and when the maintenance operation is not allowed (the maintenance operation non-permission period occurs when the specific type of production sound is output in an audible state). (if it occurs). According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple times permissible period" occurs, this can be used as the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintain operation non-permissible period". Since it becomes easier to recognize which one it is, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. As mentioned above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of jackpot determination, and symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (type of variation pattern).

When adopting such a configuration, the "maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5th E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" It is important to prevent the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) from changing depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. In this sense, regarding the "maintenance operation permissible period", as in the production example mentioned above, it is necessary to ensure that a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is always audible at the time when the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs. Alternatively, the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs, and the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may be BGM) may be generated only when the background music is inaudible. Alternatively, regarding the "maintenance operation permissible period", there is a reception period for a type that can only occur while a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is made audible, and a period for accepting a type of performance sound (specific BGM) that can only be heard. It may also include a type of reception period that can only occur while the audio is in the audible state. Even with such a configuration, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is not made inaudible or remains audible depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2nd E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.)"), a specific type of sound effect is generated according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. It goes without saying that no matter what form the specific BGM (in this case, specific BGM) takes, the same form is displayed after acceptance.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, the "multiple times permissible period" is a state in which the operating means (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) is operated. We have prepared at least a "maintenance operation permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" in which the operation can be accepted multiple times just by continuing to maintain the In the "maintenance operation permissible period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as a sample image display that has been displayed up to that point is changed (see Figure 253 (b) and Figure 271 (b)). reference).

According to such a configuration, even if a player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowed period), he or she may not be able to perform multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation allowed period). It is expected that this will prevent a decrease in interest in gaming, as the operation will be accepted multiple times just by continuing to maintain the state. In addition, when an operation is accepted, the display mode as a sample image display that has been displayed changes, so even if the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is kept in the operated state, the operation is accepted. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the process is being carried out appropriately.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of performance described above, during the "maintenance operation permissible period" of the "multiple times permissible period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visible However, during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", even if an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as a sample image display that has been displayed up to that point is not changed. According to such a configuration, during the "maintenance operation permissible period", it is suitably suggested that the operation reception is properly performed just by maintaining the operation state, so that the auto continuous hit function is enabled. In conjunction with this, it is expected that the interest in gaming will increase. On the other hand, during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", even if an operation is accepted, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the operation has been accepted properly or not. It is expected that users will be encouraged to repeat the operation more actively.

In this case, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", if the operation is accepted by enabling the auto-repeat function, the period will be longer than when the operation is not accepted. , it is desirable that the time required for periodic changes in the image display be different.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the production example described above, first, a simulated image display (here, a button sketch image BMG) that is a simulated image display of the operation means (here, the operation button 410) is displayed, and an operation reception is performed. A permissible sample image display acceptance period can be generated, and when an operation is accepted during the sample image display acceptance period, at least one of the post-acceptance display and the post-acceptance sound output is generated based on the operation acceptance. It is considered executable. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear as an image display that simulates the operation means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, during the sample image display acceptance period, only the image display that simulates the operation means that is set as the operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed once is the above-mentioned sample image. "Specific type of sample image display acceptance period (3rd E acceptance period (e.g., Figure 263), 4th E acceptance period (e.g., Figure 266))" displayed as a display, and operation targets for which multiple operation acceptance is allowed. ``Special type simulated image display acceptance period (1st E acceptance period (Figure 253 etc.), 2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258 etc.) , the 5th E acceptance period (such as Figure 270), and the 6th E acceptance period (such as Figure 271)), and one operation acceptance is allowed during the ``specific type of sample image display acceptance period.'' When the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is set as an operation target and is displayed as a sample image display is operated and the operation is accepted, based on the operation reception, , the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display (here, the button sample image BMG) corresponding to the operation means are hidden, and during the "special type sample image display acceptance period", the operation is not accepted. is set as an operation target that is allowed multiple times, and when the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is the object to be displayed as a sample image is operated and the operation is accepted, the operation means is It is possible to continue the periodic changes that have been appearing in the corresponding map image display (here, the button map image BMG).

According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted, depending on whether or not the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point in the sample image display are hidden, the ``specific type of sample image display acceptance period (operation It is now possible to suggest which of the following is occurring: ``1 reception allowed)'' or ``special type of sample image display reception period (multiple operation reception allowed)''.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the "special type of sample image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, the reception permission sound is audibly output (1E reception period (Fig. 253)). etc.), the 6th E reception period (see FIG. 271, etc.)) and the case where the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output (the 2nd E reception period (see FIG. 258, etc.)). Then, when the reception permissible sound is audibly output (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)), the special type of sample image display reception period (multiple times) When an operation means that is set as an operation target is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display are hidden. (See Figures 253(b) and 271(b)), if the reception permissible sound is not audibly output (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258 etc.)), during the special type of sample image display reception period (multiple When the operation means that is set as the operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had been appearing in the sample image display will continue without being hidden. (See FIG. 258(b)). According to such a configuration, when the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, the sample image is displayed when the operation is accepted depending on whether or not the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the display will be hidden (whether or not the situation in which an operation has been accepted will be appropriately notified). In other words, in this case, when the reception acceptance sound is not output when the "special type of sample image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, it is difficult to recognize that the operation is being accepted. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform an operation multiple times, and it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of tension. Note that in order to obtain such effects, the 5E reception period (such as FIG. 270) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

Note that the operating means that is set as an operation target that is allowed multiple times may be the same when the periodic change ends and when the periodic change is continued, or may be different. good.

In addition, only the operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed only once during the "specific type of sample image display acceptance period (one time operation)" displays the sample image (here, button sample image BMG) , the acceptance permission sound may be output audibly and may not be output audibly. However, only the operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed only once during the period of acceptance of a specific type of sample image display (one-time operation) is used as the sample image display (here, button sample image BMG). When displayed, the reception permission sound may always be audibly output. In this case, when the reception permission sound is not audibly output, it will be possible to recognize that multiple operations are permitted; When the permissible sound is audibly output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether multiple operations or one operation is permitted.

Alternatively, the 5th E reception period (such as Fig. 270) is generated as a "special type sample image display reception period (multiple operations)", and the 1E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.) or the 6E reception period (Fig. 271) is generated. etc.) may not occur. That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the production example described above, when the "special type of sample image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, the reception permission sound is audibly output (5E reception period (5E reception period)). There are cases in which the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output (such as in the second E acceptance period (see in FIG. 258)). However, regardless of whether the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output (5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.)) or the reception permission sound is not audibly output (2E reception period (Fig. 258 etc.)), , when the operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times during the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is operated and operation acceptance is made, based on this. The periodic changes appearing in the sample image display are not hidden, and the periodic changes appearing in the sample image display are determined whether or not an operation is accepted (in a manner that does not end the acceptance period). Regardless, it will continue as is. In this regard, if the reception permission sound is audibly output when the "special type of sample image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs (5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.)), it means that the operation has been accepted. (See Figure 270(d)).However, if the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output (2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.)), the EF display is displayed even if the operation is accepted. The display (see FIG. 258(d)) is not displayed. According to such a configuration, when the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, depending on whether or not the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, if the operation is accepted, this will be determined. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the corresponding EF display will be executed (whether or not it will appropriately notify that the operation has been accepted). Note that the "EF display" in this example is a display area that overlaps with the display area of the sample image display, which continues to change periodically regardless of whether or not an operation is accepted. ) Refers to the image display displayed on the front side. Therefore, when the "EF display" is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the sample image display that continues to change periodically, and it is possible to suitably suggest that the operation reception is being performed appropriately. Become. In other words, in this case, when the reception acceptance sound is not output when the "special type of sample image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, it is difficult to recognize that the operation is being accepted. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform an operation multiple times, and it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of tension.

In addition, the above-mentioned "Special type sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" related to the above-mentioned production example will be completed until the said "Special type sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" ends. When the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not made inaudible (1st E reception period (see Figure 253 (h)), 6th E reception period (see Figure 271 (h))) and its occurrence There is a case where the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time is made in an inaudible state (second E reception period (see FIG. 258(h))).

Then, while the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is being audibly output, operation acceptance is allowed multiple times. When the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is set as the operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had been appearing up to that point are hidden in the sample image display corresponding to the operation means. (1st E reception period (see Figure 253 (h)), 6th E reception period (see Figure 271 (h))) and the period that had appeared in the sample image display corresponding to the operation means. There is a case in which a change in information continues without being hidden (second E reception period (see FIG. 258(h))). Note that "the case in which the periodic changes that have appeared in the sample image display corresponding to the operation means are continued without being hidden" refers to the second E reception period (see Figure 258 (h)). This assumes that an operation is accepted while the production sound is in the audible output state, before the performance sound, which was in the audible state at the time of occurrence, is made inaudible.

In addition, while the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the performance sound that was audible at the time of occurrence has been made inaudible, multiple operations have been accepted. When an operation means that is set as a permissible operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have been appearing up to that point on the image display corresponding to the operation means are continued without being hidden. I did it like that.

According to such a configuration, when a "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, a device that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence within the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" occurs. When the performance sound is made inaudible, it is suggested that the periodic changes that had been appearing in the sample image display until then will not be hidden but will continue when the operation is accepted. If an operation is accepted while the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is still audible during the period of acceptance for displaying a sample image, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the sample image display will no longer be displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the

Alternatively, the 5th E reception period (such as Fig. 270) is generated as a "special type sample image display reception period (multiple operations)", and the 1E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.) or the 6E reception period (Fig. 271) is generated. etc.) may not occur. In other words, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the "special type sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" ends when the "special type sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" ends. If the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is not made inaudible until the time of occurrence (5E reception period (Figure 270 etc.)), the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence becomes inaudible. (2nd E acceptance period (see FIG. 258(h))). In this case, regardless of whether or not the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of the occurrence of the "special type sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is made inaudible, When the operation means that is set as the operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the operation acceptance period (multiple operations) is allowed to be accepted multiple times. The periodic changes appearing in the sample image display will not be hidden, and the periodic changes appearing in the sample image display will continue as they are regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted (in a manner that does not end the acceptance period). I will do it. In this regard, if the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is being audibly output, operation acceptance is allowed multiple times. When the operation means (here, the operation button 410) set as the operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, the EF display may be displayed based on the acceptance of the operation (FIG. 270). (See FIG. 258(d)), and there may be cases where the EF display is not displayed even if the operation is accepted (see FIG. 258(d)). In this case, "the case in which the EF display is not displayed even if the operation is accepted" means that during the 2nd E acceptance period (see Figure 258 (h)), the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is This assumes that an operation is accepted while the output is in the audible output state, before the output is in the inaudible state. In addition, while the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the performance sound that was audible at the time of occurrence has been made inaudible, multiple operations have been accepted. When the operation means set as a permissible operation target is operated and the operation is accepted, this will not be used as an opportunity to display the EF display (see Figure 258(d)). reference).

According to such a configuration, when a "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, the user who was in an audible state at the time of occurrence within the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" occurs. When the production sound is made inaudible, it is suggested that the "EF display" will not be displayed when the operation is accepted, but at the time of occurrence within the "special type of sample image display acceptance period". If an operation is accepted while the performance sound that was in the audible state is still being audibly output, check whether the "EF display" is displayed when the operation is accepted (if the operation is accepted). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the information is properly notified or not. Therefore, when the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence becomes inaudible during the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (multiple operations)", the operation is being accepted. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform operations multiple times in situations where it is difficult to recognize, and it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of tension.

Note that in the above-mentioned production example, the production sounds audibly output during each acceptance period are the same (specific BGM), but different production sounds may be audibly output.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the sample image display acceptance period is ``the sample image display acceptance period of the type that may occur while the specific BGM is audibly output (for example, the 1E acceptance period (Fig. 253 etc.), 2nd E reception period (Fig. 258 etc.), 3rd E reception period (Fig. 263 etc.)), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))" It can be classified into ``reception periods for displaying simulated images of impossible types (for example, the 4th E acceptance period (Fig. 266, etc.))'', and ``reception periods for displaying simulated images of types that can occur while specific BGM is audibly output''. ``Reception period'' is the ``Specific type of sample image display acceptance period (3rd E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)" and "Special type of simulated image display reception" in which at least an image display that simulates the operation means that is set as the operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed as the simulated image display. It can be further classified into periods (for example, the 1st E reception period (such as FIG. 253), the 2nd E reception period (such as FIG. 258), and the 6th E reception period (such as FIG. 271)). In the "specific type of sample image display acceptance period (1E acceptance period (Figure 253, etc.), 3E acceptance period (Figure 263, etc.), 6E acceptance period (Figure 271, etc.))", operation acceptance is 1 When an operation means that is set as a permissible operation target and is displayed as a sample image display is operated and an operation is accepted, based on the operation acceptance, the operation means The periodic changes that had previously appeared in the sample image display corresponding to During the sample image display acceptance period (for example, the 2nd E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.)), operations that are set as operation targets that are allowed to be accepted multiple times and that are targeted for display as sample image displays. When a means is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have been appearing in the above-mentioned image display corresponding to the operating means can be continued (for example, see FIGS. 258 to 262).

According to such a configuration, when the operation acceptance is given while the specific BGM is audibly output, the "specific type sample image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed once)" and the "special type While maintaining a good sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize which one of the sample image display acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance is allowed), the sample image display is changed accordingly when an operation is accepted. Depending on whether or not the periodic changes that had appeared up until now have been hidden, the "Specific type of sample image display acceptance period (operation reception allowed once)" and the "Special type sample image display acceptance period (operation reception allowed)" It becomes possible to suggest which of the following is occurring (allowing multiple occurrences).

In addition, during the "special type of sample image display acceptance period" according to the above-mentioned production example, when an operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is operated and operation acceptance is made, the operation is accepted. ``The first special type of sample image display reception period (for example, the 1E reception period (such as FIG. 253), the 6E reception period (such as FIG. 253), and the 6E reception period (such as FIG. 271, etc.)" and "2nd special type of sample image display acceptance period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))" and "1st special type sample image display acceptance period (for example, 1E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))'' This occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern, which has ended at the time the "first special type of sample image display acceptance period" occurs. The second special type of sample image display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))” is the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the “second special type of sample image display acceptance period” occurs. Depending on the type of BGM, it may occur when the specific BGM is being output audibly, or when the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when a "multiple permissible period" occurs while specific BGM is audibly output, this can be "responsive to operation reception". This can be used as a basis for determining whether or not the periodic changes that had previously appeared are hidden, allowing the user to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunities are provided. be able to encourage As mentioned above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of jackpot determination, and symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (type of variation pattern).

When adopting such a configuration, when an operation is accepted, periodic changes that have appeared in the sample image display until then are hidden. period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)) according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the sample image display reception period of the first special type occurs. It is important to ensure that the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) does not change.

In addition, in the "second special type sample image display acceptance period (second E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))", the previous variation that has ended at the time when the second special type sample image display acceptance period occurs. It goes without saying that no matter what form the specific type of performance sound (here, specific BGM) takes depending on the type of pattern, the same form is displayed after acceptance.

Alternatively, the 1st E reception period (such as FIG. 253) and the 6th E reception period (such as FIG. 271) may be caused to occur as a type of simulated image display reception period that cannot occur while specific BGM is audibly output. You can. That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the sample image display acceptance period is "the sample image display acceptance period of the type that may occur while the specific BGM is audibly output (for example, the 2nd E acceptance period)" (Fig. 258, etc.), 3rd E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 4th E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.), and the 6th E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)). ``Display acceptance period'' is a period during which ``Specific type of simulated image display acceptance period (3rd E. "Reception period (such as Figure 263)" and "Special type of simulated image display" in which at least an image display that simulates the operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is displayed as the simulated image display. The reception period (for example, the 2nd E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.))" can be further classified. In the "particular type of sample image display acceptance period (3E acceptance period (Fig. 263, etc.)"), the operation object is set as an operation object for which one operation reception is allowed, and the object to be displayed as a sample image display is When the operating means that is currently being operated is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had previously appeared in the sample image display corresponding to the operating means are hidden based on the acceptance of the operation. (see, for example, FIG. 263(b)), and in the "special type sample image display acceptance period (for example, 2nd E acceptance period (such as FIG. 258))", operation objects for which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times When the operation means that is set as , and which is the target of display as a sample image display, is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that had been appearing in the sample image display corresponding to the operation means will be changed. (See, for example, FIGS. 258-262).

Even with such a configuration, when the operation reception is granted while the specific BGM is audibly output, the "Specific type of sample image display reception period (one operation reception is allowed)" and the "Special type The sample image display acceptance period (multiple operation acceptance is allowed)'' is made difficult to recognize and maintains a good sense of tension. Depending on whether or not the periodic changes that had appeared up to that time have been hidden, the "specific type of sample image display acceptance period (operation reception allowed once)" and the "special type of sample image display acceptance period (operation acceptance period)" It will be possible to suggest which of the following is occurring (allowing multiple receptions)

Also in this case, the "special type sample image display acceptance period (2nd E acceptance period (Fig. 258 etc.)" Depending on the type of the variation pattern, the variation pattern may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output, or may occur while the specific BGM is being rendered inaudible. "Reception period for displaying a sample image of a type that cannot occur while specific BGM is audibly output (for example, 1E reception period (Fig. 253 etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266 etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 266 etc.) period (Fig. 271, etc.))" is made to occur while the specific BGM is made inaudible, regardless of the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the relevant acceptance period occurs. Good too. According to such a configuration, even if the "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific BGM is made inaudible, the player only has to remember the type of the previous variation pattern. Since it will be possible to infer what type of period the "multiple play allowed period" is, it will be possible to encourage concentration on the game even when no operation opportunities are given. .

Alternatively, the 2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and the 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.) are generated as "special type sample image display reception period (multiple operations)", and the 1E reception period (Fig. 270 etc.) is generated. 253, etc.) and the 6th E reception period (see FIG. 271, etc.) may not occur. In this regard, the above-mentioned 2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) of the "special type sample image display reception period (multiple operations)" has ended at the time the 2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, the occurrence may occur while the specific BGM is being output audibly, or may occur while the specific BGM is being rendered inaudible. , the fifth E reception period (see FIG. 270, etc.) of the "Special type sample image display reception period (multiple operations)" may be configured with either of the following configurations a and b.
a. Regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the reception period occurs, it occurs only when the specific BGM is in an audible state.
b. This occurs only when the specific BGM is rendered inaudible, regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the acceptance period occurs.

Regardless of whether the above configurations a or b are adopted, when the "multiple times permissible period" occurs, "the periodic changes that had appeared until then in response to the operation reception will be hidden." This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly even when multiple operations have been performed. However, when an operation is accepted during the 5E reception period (such as FIG. 270), an EF display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, unlike the case during the 2E reception period (such as FIG. 270). Therefore, regardless of which of the above configurations a and b is adopted, by remembering the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the player can check whether the EF display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. It is now possible to recognize in advance whether or not the operation has been accepted properly (whether notification is given as to whether or not the operation has been accepted properly), and the game can be played with a sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, first, it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance period during which operation acceptance on the operation means (here, the operation button 410) is allowed, and the operation acceptance is not allowed during the acceptance acceptance period. When the operation is accepted, at least one of a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound output can be performed based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, during the reception permissible period, it is possible to display a "reception period related periodicity display" which is an image display that may show periodic changes, and during the reception permissible period, a "multiple-time display" in which operation reception is permitted multiple times can be displayed. At least a "tolerable period" shall be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the production example described above, at least the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display" as the "multiple times permissible period". "Specific multiple-time permissible period (first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.))", and the third periodicity display SH3 and fourth periodicity display SH4 are at least displayed as the "acceptance period related periodicity display". At least a special multiple-time permissible period (second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.)) is prepared. In the "specific multiple-time permissible period," each time an operation that is permitted multiple times is accepted, the periodic change that had previously appeared in the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden.

According to such a configuration, in the "specific multiple times permissible period", the operation is accepted by checking the number of times the periodic change appearing in the "first periodicity display SH1" has been hidden. You can now check the number of times you have

In addition, in the above-mentioned "specific multiple-time permissible period (1st E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.)" according to the above-mentioned example of production, the reception permissible sound is audibly output when it occurs, and multiple times are permitted. Every time an operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the acceptance period), the periodic changes that had appeared up until then are hidden in the "first periodicity display SH1," but the periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden in the "second periodicity display SH2." In this case, the periodic changes that had appeared until then were continued (see FIG. 256 (g2), FIG. 257 (l3), etc.). In addition, in the "special multiple-times permissible period (2nd E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)"), the reception permissible sound is not audibly output when it occurs, and the operation reception that is allowed multiple times (the reception period does not end) Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, the periodic changes that have been appearing up to that point are continued in both the "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fourth periodicity display SH4" (Fig. 261 (f2 ), see Figure 262(i3), etc.). In other words, in this case, through the presence or absence of an audible output of the acceptance permission sound, it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation was accepted properly by checking the periodicity display related to the acceptance period when the operation was accepted. ” will be able to suggest. Furthermore, even if an audible reception acceptance sound is output (indicating that it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed), the "first periodicity display SH1" is not displayed. Those who mistakenly gaze at the "second periodicity display SH2" will have difficulty recognizing whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, so they are expected to maintain a good sense of tension. become.

However, regarding the "specific multiple times permissible period" in which the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed at least as the "acceptance period related periodicity display" as the "multiple times permissible period", It may occur during the 6th E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.) instead of the 1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.). In other words, in this case, each time an operation reception that is allowed multiple times (an operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the period that has appeared up to that point is displayed in both the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2. This makes it possible to easily recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly. However, in this case, it is desirable that the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 start being displayed at the same timing (see FIG. 271(e)). Further, it is desirable that the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1 and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are performed at the same periodic time.

In addition, in a "specific multiple-time permissible period (1st E reception period (such as FIG. 253) or 6th E reception period (such as FIG. 271))", when the first operation means (for example, operation button 410) is operated, the operation is performed. Once the reception is received, periodic changes in the "reception period-related periodicity display" are hidden, and "during the special multiple-permission period (2nd E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the first operation means When a second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) different from the above is operated, the operation is accepted, but this should not be used as an opportunity to change the periodic change in the "acceptance period related periodicity display". You can.

In addition, when generating the 6E acceptance period (such as in FIG. 271) as a "specific multiple-time permissible period", the time required for one periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 is become the same as each other. On the other hand, in the special multiple-permissible period (the 2nd E acceptance period (Figure 258, etc.)), the times required for one periodic change of the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are different from each other. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest the type of reception period that is occurring through the relationship of the time required for periodic changes in the "reception period related periodicity display". Note that the time required for one periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 may also be made to be the same in the first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.).

Furthermore, when the 1E reception period (see FIG. 253, etc.) is generated as a "specific multiple-time permissible period", the timings at which the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed are made different from each other. On the other hand, in the special multiple-time permissible period (2nd E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.)), the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed at the same timing. , it becomes possible to suggest the type of reception period that is occurring through the relationship of the display timing of the "reception period related periodicity display". Note that the timings at which the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed may also be made to differ during the 6E acceptance period (FIG. 271, etc.).

In addition, when the 1st E reception period (such as in FIG. 253) is generated as a "specific multiple-permissible period", a precursor effect display ZED is performed at the time of occurrence, but the precursor effect display ZED is Of the SH1 and the second periodic display SH2, only the first periodic display SH1 is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize. More specifically, the precursor effect display ZED is displayed in a manner that overlaps in front of the first periodic display SH1, but is displayed in a manner that overlaps in front of the second periodic display SH2. It is arranged so that it is not displayed (it is not displayed in a position overlapping with the second periodicity display SH2, or it is displayed behind the second periodicity display SH2). According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not it is made difficult to see in relation to the precursor effect display ZED, the operation can be properly accepted by gazing at either the first periodicity display SH1 or the second periodicity display SH2. It becomes possible to suggest whether it is easier to recognize whether or not the

Furthermore, even when the 6E reception period (such as FIG. 271) is generated as a "specific multiple-time permissible period", a precursor effect display ZED is performed at the time of occurrence, but the precursor effect display ZED is not the same as the first periodic display. It is desirable that both SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 be displayed in a manner that makes them difficult to visually recognize. That is, in this case, the precursor effect display ZED is displayed in a manner overlapping in front of both the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH1.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "specific multiple permissible period (1st E reception period (such as FIG. 253), 6th E reception period (such as FIG. 271))" related to the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception that is permitted multiple times ( Each time an operation (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic changes that had appeared until then are hidden in the "first periodicity display SH1", but they are hidden in the "second periodicity display SH2". The periodic changes that had appeared until then were continued (see FIG. 253(e)). In addition, even if an operation that is allowed multiple times (operation reception that does not end the acceptance period) is made in the "special multiple-times permissible period (2nd E reception period (Figure 258, etc.))", the "3rd periodicity In both "Display SH3" and "Fourth Periodic Display SH4," the periodic changes that had appeared up to that point are not hidden and continue to be displayed (see Figure 258(e)). reference). The "specific multiple use permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" is until the end of the "specific multiple use permissible period". The production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not made inaudible (see Figure 253 (h)), and the "special multiple permissible period (2nd E reception period)" The performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is rendered inaudible until the end of the "permissible period" (see FIG. 258(h)). In other words, in this case, whether or not the performance sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is made inaudible until the end of the reception period (validity period) It becomes possible to suggest whether it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed by checking the mode of the period-related periodicity display. In particular, if the "specific multiple allowable period" is made to occur as the 1E reception period (such as Figure 253) instead of the 6E reception period (such as Figure 271), the period that is audible at the time of occurrence is Even if the produced sound is not made inaudible, a person who mistakenly focuses on the "second periodicity display SH2" instead of the "first periodicity display SH1" will be unable to receive the operation. Since it is difficult to recognize whether something has been done properly or not, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, the "specific multiple permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" in the above-mentioned example of production is a specific type of production sound (here, a specific However, during the "Special Multiple Allowance Period (2nd E Reception Period)", the event occurs while a specific type of performance sound (in this case, specific BGM) is being audibly output. There may be cases in which the sound is generated while the specific type of performance sound (in this case, specific BGM) is not being audibly output. In other words, in this case, when the "multiple use permissible period" occurs while the specific type of performance sound (here, specific BGM) is not audibly output, this is the "special multiple use permissible period (2nd E reception period)". It is now suggested that the mode of the "acceptance period related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4") does not change when an operation is accepted. On the other hand, when a "multiple use permissible period" occurs while a specific type of performance sound (here, specific BGM) is audibly output, this is a "specific multiple use permissible period" and a "special multiple use permissible period". Since it becomes difficult to recognize which of the following is the case, it is possible to urge people to pay close attention to whether the aspect of the "acceptance period related periodicity display" changes when an operation is accepted.

In this regard, in the case of a "specific multiple use permissible period (1E reception period (Figure 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Figure 271, etc.))", the period ends when the specific multiple use permissible period occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, a specific type of production sound (here, specific BGM) may be made inaudible or not made inaudible before the specific multiple permissible period occurs. However, in the "special multiple tolerance period (2nd E reception period (Figure 258, etc.)"), the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "special multiple tolerance period" occurs If a specific type of performance sound (in this case, specific BGM) is made inaudible before the "special multiple permissible period" occurs depending on the type (a specific type of performance sound is made inaudible) (a special multiple permissible period occurs in the state) and a case in which the special multiple permissible period occurs in a state where the performance sound of a specific type is audibly output (when the special multiple permissible period occurs). It may be set as such.

According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when a "multiple times permissible period" occurs, this can be changed to a "specific multiple times permissible period" and a "special multiple times permissible period". Since it becomes easier to recognize which period the player is in, it becomes possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. As mentioned above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of jackpot determination, and symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (type of variation pattern).

When adopting such a configuration, regarding the "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))", the specific multiple times permissible period is It is important to prevent the specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) from changing depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time of generation. In this sense, regarding the "specific multiple use permissible period", as in the production example mentioned above, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is always audible at the time when the "specific multiple use permissible period" occurs. Alternatively, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible before the "specific multiple permissible period" occurs, and a specific It may also be possible to make it possible for the type of performance sound (specific BGM) to be generated only when it is in an inaudible state. Alternatively, regarding the "specific multiple use permissible period", there is a period of acceptance for a type that can only occur while a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is made audible, and a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) It may also include a type of acceptance period that can only occur while the user is in an inaudible state. Even with such a configuration, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is not made inaudible or remains audible depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the "special multiple permissible period (2nd E reception period (Figure 258, etc.)"), the specific type is set according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the special multiple permissible period occurs. It goes without saying that no matter what form the production sound (here, specific BGM) takes, the same form will be displayed after acceptance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, when a "specific multiple-play permissible period (first E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.))" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed is Although the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed is different from each other (see FIG. 253(e)), if a "special multiple times permissible period (second E reception period (such as FIG. 258))" occurs, , the timing at which the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed are made to be the same (see FIG. 258(e)). In other words, in this case, depending on whether or not there is a difference in the timing of the two types of periodicity displays, it is possible to determine whether a "specific multiple times permissible period" or a "special multiple times permissible period" occurs. You will be able to suggest what to do.

Furthermore, in the 6E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) according to the above-mentioned production example, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed are made the same, The timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed may be made to differ from each other. Then, the 6th E reception period may be generated as the "specific multiple times permissible period" instead of the 1st E reception period (such as in FIG. 253). Even with such a configuration, the acceptance period in which the two types of periodicity displays appear is determined by whether or not there is a difference in their display timing. ” will be able to suggest which one will occur.

Further, the first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed after the second periodicity display SH2, or may be displayed before the second periodicity display SH2. . When the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, the periodic change is not started at the time when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed, and the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed or before The periodic change may be started thereafter. When the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed before the first periodicity display SH1, the periodic change is not started at the time when the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed, but at the timing when the first periodicity display is displayed or before the first periodicity display SH1. Periodic changes may be started thereafter. Note that the timing at which the periodic display is displayed means the timing at which at least part of the periodic display is displayed.

However, when the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed before the first periodicity display SH1, the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH2 starts before the first periodicity display is displayed. It is desirable that the first periodic display SH1 is displayed while the second periodic display SH2 is being changed periodically to start its periodic change. That is, in this case, in the first E reception period, while the second periodic display SH2 on the side where the periodic change is continued is being periodically changed, the first periodic display SH2 on the side where the periodic change is hidden is being changed. Since the periodicity display SH1 starts to be displayed, the second periodicity display SH2 can be used as a criterion for determining whether the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 has become non-displayed (interrupted). You will be able to do this.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, the reception period (3E reception period (such as FIG. 263), 4E reception period, (Figure 266, etc.)), there are cases where there is only one periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) and cases where two periodicity displays are displayed (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7). That is, in this case, when there is only one periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5), it is suggested that only one operation reception is allowed. On the other hand, when two periodicity displays are displayed (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7), it is necessary to recognize whether the operation reception is allowed only once or multiple times. This makes it possible to provide opportunities to operate under a tense atmosphere.

In particular, in the production example described above, the time required for one periodic change in the sixth periodicity display (period E time) and the time required for one periodic change in the third periodicity display (period E time) Since these are set at the same time, it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the operation reception is allowed only once or multiple times.

However, during the 4th E reception period (such as FIG. 266), the 6th periodicity display SH6 of the 6th periodicity display SH6 and the 7th periodicity display SH7 is also displayed during the 1E reception period (such as FIG. 253). A periodic change is performed with a period E time that can appear, but for the seventh periodicity display SH7, a periodic change is performed with a period G time that does not appear within the first E reception period (such as FIG. 253).

In addition, in the example of production mentioned above, the periodic time of the fifth periodicity display SH5 and the sixth periodicity display SH6 is the same as the periodic time of the third periodicity display SH3 (period E time), but the periodicity of the first periodicity display SH The cycle time of is set to be shorter than that. The periodic time of this first periodicity display SH is set to be earlier than the periodicity displays SH4 and SH7, so that it can be suggested that multiple operation receptions are allowed. I have to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, when a "specific multiple allowable period (first E acceptance period (FIG. 253, etc.))" occurs, the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the period Although the timing at which the periodic change starts and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed and the periodic change starts are different from each other, there is a “special multiple tolerance period (second E acceptance period (such as in Figure 258)”). ))" occurs, the timing at which the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed and its periodic change is started, and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed and its periodic change is started. were made to be the same. In other words, in this case, as the acceptance period in which two types of periodicity displays appear, it is determined whether or not there is a difference in the timing at which these periodic changes start. period” will occur.

In addition, in the 6E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) according to the above-mentioned production example, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and its periodic change starts, and the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed. The timings at which the periodic changes start are made the same, but the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the periodic changes are started, and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed and the periodic changes are started are the same. The timing at which the target change starts may be made different from each other. Then, the 6th E acceptance period may be generated as the "specific multiple times permissible period" instead of the 1st E acceptance period (such as in FIG. 253). Even with such a configuration, the "specific multiple allowable period" and " It becomes possible to indicate which of the special multiple-tolerance periods will occur.

Further, even if the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed after the second periodicity display SH2 and its periodic change is started after the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH1, Alternatively, it may be displayed before the second periodic display SH2 and its periodic change may be started before the periodic change of the second periodic display SH1.

In addition, although the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, the periodic change does not start at the time when the second periodicity display SH1 is displayed, and the second periodicity display is displayed and its periodicity changes. The periodic change may be started at or after the timing of starting the periodic change. In other words, in this case, in the first E reception period, while the second periodic display SH2 on which the periodic change is continued is being periodically changed, the first periodic display SH2 on which the periodic change is to be hidden is Since the periodic change of the periodicity display SH1 starts, the second periodicity display SH2 is set as the criterion for determining whether the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden (interrupted). It can now be used as Note that the timing at which the periodic display is displayed means the timing at which at least part of the periodic display is displayed.

However, there is a difference between the timing when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed or the periodic change is started, and the timing when the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed or the periodic change is started. There is no essential configuration, and it may be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of performance described above, the first periodicity display is displayed when a "specific multiple times permissible period (1st E reception period (e.g., FIG. 253), 6th E reception period (e.g., FIG. 271))" occurs. When SH1 is displayed, a different display (in this case, the omen effect display ZED) is displayed, and a first periodicity is displayed behind the other display (here, the omen effect display ZED). The display starts with the display SH1 appearing, but the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed behind the other display (in this case, the precursor effect display ZED), and is When the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed upon occurrence of the period (2nd E reception period (such as FIG. 258)), the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are Also, when the display starts, it will not be displayed behind any other display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether a "specific multiple times permissible period" or a "special multiple times permissible period" is occurring at a relatively early point in time when the periodicity display starts to be displayed. become able to. Moreover, even if a "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs, a person who mistakenly gazes at the "second periodicity display SH2" instead of the "first periodicity display SH1" will It seems as if a "special multiple permissible period" has occurred because the "second periodic display SH2" is not displayed behind any other display at the time it starts displaying. Since there is a possibility of erroneous recognition, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned effect, when a "specific multiple allowable period (1st E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6th E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" occurs, the first periodicity display SH1 is In this case, the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed while another display (in this case, the omen effect display ZED) that can be displayed so as to overlap with the front side is displayed, but the second periodicity display SH2 is It is displayed in a manner that does not make it difficult to see due to the other display (in this case, the omen effect display ZED). However, the mode in which the second periodic display SH2 is not made difficult to recognize by another display means that the second periodic display SH2 is not displayed behind any other display; for example, the display position is different from that of another display. They may be displayed so that they do not overlap.

Note that the second periodic display SH2 changes periodically even in a situation where the precursor effect display ZED is displayed. The second periodic display SH2 may start displaying before the precursor effect display ZED, or may start its periodic change before the precursor effect display ZED is displayed. You can.

In the above-described production example, the first E reception period, the second E reception period, the third E reception period, and the fourth E reception period may occur sequentially within one variation pattern. It is sufficient that the occurrence conditions (occurrence timing) and the display after reception are different from each other.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (FIGS. 272 to 274) according to the above-described modification, the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes with different expectations. It is possible to display the image, and periodic changes are made to appear as the "special image display" regardless of which of the plurality of display modes is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" is the first display mode (here, shown in FIG. 272(a)) among the plurality of display modes. If the display mode is displayed in a mode shown in FIG. 272(e), it can be changed to a display mode different from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. When displayed in a mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a)), the display mode is different from the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIGS. 272(e) and (g)). It is possible to change to Then, the "special image display" is changed from a first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) to a display mode different from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(e)). ), the time required for one periodic change as the "special image display" changes (see Fig. 272), but the "special image display" changes to the second display mode (here, Fig. 273 (see Fig. 272)). When changing from the mode shown in a) to a display mode different from the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIGS. 273(e) and (g)), the time required for one periodic change changes. A case where no change occurs (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(e)) and a case where a change occurs in the time required for one periodic change (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(g)). I made it so that there is. According to such a configuration, the "special image display" requires recognition of whether the display mode has changed depending on whether the display mode changes from the first display mode or when the display mode changes from the second display mode. Since the ease of use will vary, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In addition, the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" is the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) and the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a)). )), if the display mode changes, it is suggested that there is a high expectation that a jackpot has been won. You will be able to improve your interest.

In particular, according to the above-mentioned modification (FIGS. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" is displayed in the second display mode (here, shown in FIG. 273(a)). If the display mode changes when the display mode is displayed in the mode), the time required for one periodic change does not change (in this case, the mode shown in FIG. 273(e)), and the periodic change for one period changes. There are cases where a change occurs in the time required for a periodic change (here, the mode shown in Figure 273(g)), but the expectation level is higher when a change also occurs in the time required for one periodic change. It was made to suggest that the price would be higher. That is, in this case, the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" appears in the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) among the plurality of display modes. In this case (see FIG. 272(a)), if the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change will necessarily change, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game. become expected.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned modification example (FIGS. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" is displayed in the first display mode (here, shown in FIG. 272(a)). mode) or the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a)), the display mode does not change (here, the display mode shown in FIG. 272(c) or FIG. 273). (c)), it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. Note that in this case, the special image display will then be hidden from display with the display mode unchanged when a predetermined timing arrives.

In addition, if there is a change in the time required for periodic changes, the display mode will change in such a way that the external shape (form) as a "special image display" changes, and the time required for periodic changes will change. If there is no special image display, the display mode may be changed without causing any change in the external shape (form) of the special image display.

It is desirable that the special image display is an image display that suggests the degree of expectation of the symbol change in the execution state.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modifications (FIGS. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" takes the time required for one periodic change. The second time (here, cycle B2 time) is displayed, and the time required for one periodic change is displayed at a first time (here, cycle B1 time), which is different from the second time. In some cases, when the "special image display" is displayed such that the time required for one periodic change is the first time, the display mode of the "special image display" can be changed, and the display When the aspect changes, there are cases where the time required for one periodic change as the "special image display" changes and cases where the time does not change (see Figure 273). When the "special image display" is displayed, the display mode of the special image display is not changed so that the time required for the periodic change is the second time (see FIG. 274). According to such a configuration, the time required for one periodic change in the "special image display" is the first time (here, period B1 time) and the second time (here, period B2 time). It becomes possible to suggest whether or not there is a possibility that the display mode may change depending on which of the following is displayed. In addition, when displaying at the first time (here, period B1 time), there are cases where the time required for one periodic change changes when the display mode changes, and there are cases where the time required for one periodic change also changes. By making it so that there are cases where it does not occur and the level of expectations differing between them, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Note that the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) in "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" and the mode shown in FIG. 274(a) in "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" Regarding the mode shown in a), the display mode may be the same as long as the time required for one periodic change is different from each other.

Also, when the time required for one periodic change is the first time (period B1 time shown in FIG. 273(a)), the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" When the display mode changes and the time required for one periodic change changes (the mode shown in FIG. 273(g)), the changed time is changed to the second period (shown in FIG. 274(a)). The period B2 hours) may be sufficient. Further, at this time, the display mode may be the same as the display mode shown in FIG. 274(a).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described modification example (FIGS. 272 to 274), the time required for one periodic change is "special image" at the first time (period B1 time shown in FIG. 273(a)). display (in this case, the integrated image display IG) is displayed and the display mode changes, if there is no change in the time required for one periodic change (as shown in Fig. 273(e)). There is a case where a change occurs in the time (as shown in FIG. 273(g)), and in either case, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. In this regard, in the example described above, the expected increase is greater when there is a further change in the time required for one periodic change, so the "special image display" It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the aspect changes.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modifications (FIGS. 272 to 274), the "special image display (here, integrated image display IG)" takes the time required for one periodic change. The first time (here, cycle B1 time) is displayed, and the time required for one periodic change is displayed at a third time (here, cycle B3 time), which is different from the first time. In some cases, when the display mode of the special image display changes (see, for example, FIGS. 273(e) and (g)), the periodic changes that had appeared until then are hidden (for example, as shown in FIG. 273). 273(d)), and then a periodic change in the special image display appears (for example, see FIGS. 273(e) and 273(g)).

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated image display IG) changes, the periodic changes that had appeared up to that time are hidden, and then the special image display Since periodic changes will appear, it is expected that when the display mode of the special image display changes, it will attract interest in whether there is also a change in the time required for the periodic change. become.

In particular, in the modified example shown in FIG. 273, when the display mode of the "special image display" changes, the time required for one periodic change as the "special image display" changes (for example, in FIG. (e)) and cases in which no change occurs at that time (for example, see Figure 273(g)). It is expected that interest in the game can be suitably maintained by being hidden (once).

For example, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) changes to the mode shown in FIG. 273(e), or the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) changes to the mode shown in FIG. 273(g). In some cases, multiple non-display times (the first non-display time, second non-display time). Even if the periodic change that had appeared until then is hidden over either the first non-display time or the second non-display time, the mode shown in FIG. 273(e) may appear. It is desirable that there is a possibility that the mode shown in FIG. 273(g) will appear. In this regard, the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is different depending on whether the periodic changes are hidden for the first non-display time or when the periodic changes are hidden for the second non-display time. It is more desirable to do so. In other words, in this case, if the non-display time is on the side with a higher expectation level, when the non-display time ends, the mode on the side with a higher expectation level (the mode shown in FIG. 273(g)) can be expected to appear. Therefore, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, even if there is no change from the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) (or FIG. 272(a)), if the periodic changes that have appeared until then are temporarily hidden (see FIG. 273(b) (or see FIG. 272(b))), the display mode of the "special image display" changes depending on the length of time that the periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden. It is now possible to suggest whether or not the player is playing the game, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game.

As mentioned above, "hiding periodic changes" may mean hiding this by "hiding special image display", or hiding another image by "hiding special image display". The special image display may be displayed so that it overlaps from the front side of the "display" so that it cannot be seen, or the special image display may continue to be displayed, but the periodic changes that had been appearing until then may be stopped and the display may be statically displayed. It is possible to achieve this.

In addition, as a method for "restarting periodic changes", it is possible to restart periodic changes at the same time as displaying the "special image display" in a visible state again; '' may be displayed in a visible state again, and then the periodic change may be restarted after a delay, or the periodic change may be restarted using a ``special image display'' that interrupts (ends) the periodic change. The change may be started again. In this regard, even if the mode changes from one mode (for example, from FIG. 273(a) to (e) or from FIG. 273(a) to (g), etc.), the "special image display" is disabled. If the periodic change takes longer to appear again than the time from the time the special image display is displayed (the periodic change may reappear with a delay in the redisplay of the special image display) If the time from when the "special image display" is hidden until the "special image display" is displayed is the same as the time until the periodic change reappears (the "special image display" starts) It is desirable that the redisplay of `` and the resumption of periodic changes occur at the same timing.'' According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" changes, there are cases where the display mode after the change and the periodic change can be recognized at the same time, and cases where the display mode after the change can be recognized, but the periodic change Since there are cases where it is not possible to recognize whether or not the target has changed, it is possible to suitably improve performance even when changes occur in the same manner.

In the production examples described above (FIGS. 253 to 274), the timing at which each reception period occurs may be within a period in which a ready-to-reach state is not formed, or within a period in which a ready-to-reach state is formed. Good too.

[Permissible reception period with special performance]
As explained using FIG. 118 as an example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the player receives a special benefit. It becomes possible to perform a jackpot game or transition to a high probability game state.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these performances.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), a reception permissible period (validity period) during which production reception is permitted can occur.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), a reception permissible period (validity period) during which production reception is permitted can occur. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected and a special result is not obtained in the production judgment, the acceptance acceptance period (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptable acceptance period (validity period) that occurs with a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance period (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is performed as a performance (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance period in which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and within the acceptance acceptance period. When an action (operation) by a player is accepted in the game, changes after the acceptance (change in display, acceptance output sound, effect light emission, etc.) can occur depending on the type of acceptance permissible period that occurred. .

In addition, in the reception permissible period, it can only appear when the state in which the operation reception on the operation unit is permitted (reception permissible period) or when the operation reception is permitted (reception permissible period) Operation-related displays can be displayed. Such operation-related displays are often, for example, displayed as a mock image display in which an object (operating means) that is the target of an action (operation) by a player is expressed as an image, but is not limited to this. , any image display that, when displayed, always provides the player with an opportunity to operate, may be used. The "operation-related display (sample image display)" has a plurality of modes with different expectations, and any one of these modes may be selectively displayed.

Furthermore, "operation-related display" refers to a state in which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted (acceptance permissible period), or when the operation is in a state in which the operation reception is permitted (acceptance permissible period). Therefore, at least when the "operation related display" is displayed, the acceptance permissible period must occur or the permissible state may be present at the time of display. Therefore, while the "operation-related display" is being displayed, the acceptance permission period may end before it is hidden.

Further, in the acceptance permission period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which actions (operations) by the player are allowed to be accepted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be performed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. As the aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of aspects (for example, the speed of decrease in the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.) are prepared, and these aspects are prepared. It may be configured to be executed by either of the following. In this case, different expectations (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may be suggested depending on which mode the game is executed.

In addition, if the acceptance period occurs, a precursor effect indicating that the player will be given an opportunity to operate (suggesting that the acceptance period will occur) may be executed before this. has been done. The foreshadowing performance is, for example, performed by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 or outputting a corresponding sound.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permissible period (validity period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. Furthermore, no matter which result is obtained as a preview performance determination, a variation pattern may be provided in which an acceptance permissible period (validity period) occurs at a predetermined timing before SP reach.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and the examples described below, the "operation (movement) by the player" to be detected refers to the operation (movement) by the player such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword ornament 5001." It is not limited to things that are directly manipulated (pressing motions or sword drawing motions), but also "touch motions by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "in a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes ``actions by the player in the game''. In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operation unit) that accepts actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

By the way, the acceptable reception period (validity period) according to this embodiment may vary depending on the type of post-reception display or post-reception output sound, the presence or absence of output, the audible output status of BGM, or the reception period. Various types of acceptance periods, such as the number of times operations are allowed to be accepted within the acceptance period (validity period), and whether or not the automatic repeated press function or automatic button function is enabled or not. (validity period) is provided.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special performance is provided between a plurality of reception permissible periods, so that the performance when the reception permissible period occurs is enhanced. In addition, the tension will be suitably maintained when the acceptance period occurs. Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to suppress the decline in It is also possible to adopt the configurations described as "preferred applications" as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest related to the acceptance acceptance period may be used.

[Configuration 1-E]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if no operation is performed by the player, the same change after acceptance as when the operation is performed by the player can occur. (automatic button function). Based on this, it is possible to generate a multiple operation permissible period in which both the operation reception on the first operation part (for example, the operation button 410) and the operation reception on the second operation part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) are permissible. , if either an operation on the first operation section or an operation on the second operation section is performed during the multiple operation permissible period, a change after reception may occur depending on the type of the side on which the operation was performed. . Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated image of the object to be operated by the player.

In this regard, in the multiple operation permissible period, even though reception of an operation is permitted, a display imitating the operation target may not be displayed. Note that the "first operation section" and "second operation section" according to the configuration 1-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-E. Therefore, the "first operating section" and the "second operating section" according to other configurations may mean the same operating section, or may mean different operating sections. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" as a different name operation section in other configurations.

According to such a configuration, even if the player does not perform an operation, the same post-acceptance change as when the player performs the operation may occur, and the first It is possible to generate a multiple operation permissible period in which both the operation reception on the operation unit and the operation reception on the second operation unit are permissible, and in the multiple operation permissible period, even though the operation reception is permitted, the operation target Fixed a problem where the display imitating the above may not be displayed. In other words, in this case, it is expected that even if there is a person who cannot understand the complicated effects and cannot operate the game properly, the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 1-E", at least a first multiple operation tolerance period and a second multiple operation tolerance period are prepared as the multiple operation tolerance period, and the first multiple operation tolerance period is During the operation permissible period, both a first sample image display imitating the first operation section and a second sample image display imitating the second operation section are displayed as sample image displays, and during the second multiple operation permission period, the first sample image display imitating the second operation section are displayed. The first image display may be displayed and the second image display may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation permissible period, one of the two operation sections (the first operation section, the second operation section) in a state where operation acceptance is permitted (the second operation section ), it is possible to provide a novel performance in which the fact that only the player (2) is in the reception permissible state is kept secret, and it is expected to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "second multiple operation permissible period" pertaining to the configuration 1-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-E. . Therefore, the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "second multiple operation permissible period" of other configurations may each mean the same permissible period, or may mean different permissible periods. It may be. Moreover, it may mean the same "permissible period" as the permissible period of other names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "second multiple operation permissible period", the first operation section on the side to be displayed as a sample image and the second operation section on the side not to be displayed as a sample image Of these, the automatic reception function (automatic button function) is enabled only for the operation section that is the target of the sample image display, but in the "first multiple operation permission period", the first operation section and the Even though both of the two operation sections are targeted for displaying the sample image, the automatic reception function (automatic button function) may not be enabled for any of these operation sections. According to such a configuration, in the "second multiple operation permissible period", the automatic reception function (automatic button function) can be enabled only for the operation unit that is the target of displaying the sample image. This can be expected to make it even more difficult to recognize that the second operation unit is in a state where it is hidden while being able to accept operations. On the other hand, in the "first multiple operation permissible period", even though both the first operation section and the second operation section are subject to the display of the sample image, automatic reception is not accepted for any of these operation sections. Since the function (automatic button function) is not activated, the difficulty of the game is increased even when the first operation section and the second operation section are both subject to the display of the simulated image, which reduces the sense of tension. It can be expected to maintain it well.

In addition, in the "second multiple operation permissible period", "the second multiple operation permissible period occurs" depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the second multiple operation permissible period occurs. However, in the first multiple operation permissible period, Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the first multiple operation permissible period occurs, the specific type of production sound may be suppressed or inaudible before the first multiple operation permissible period occurs. may be in a suppressed or inaudible state. According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous variation pattern, the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "second multiple operation permissible period" will be displayed when an operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easier to recognize which of the above is the case, it becomes possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is provided.

Regarding the "second multiple operation permissible period", the aspect of the performance sound of the specific type will change depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the second multiple operation permissible period occurs. It is desirable to avoid this. For example, the "second multiple operation permissible period" may be such that the specific type of performance sound is always made inaudible before the "second multiple operation permissible period" occurs, A specific type of performance sound may be made audible without fail at the time when the "second multiple operation permissible period" occurs.

In addition, in order to make it easier to recognize whether it is the "first multiple operation permissible period" or the "second multiple operation permissible period" when an operation opportunity is given, the "first multiple operation permissible period" '', it is desirable that no matter how the specific type of performance sound is changed according to the type of the previous variation pattern, when an operation is accepted, the same change will occur as a post-acceptance change.

In addition, in the "first multiple operation permissible period", the post-reception display (post-reception change In contrast, in the "second multiple operation permissible period", when you operate the second operation section on the side that is not the target of the simulated image display, an image that overlaps the direction in front of the production pattern is displayed. A post-reception display (one of the post-reception changes) is displayed so that it looks like this, and when the first operation section on the side that is the target of the simulated image display is operated, it appears to overlap behind the production pattern. A post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) may be displayed as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, the display after reception in response to the operation of the first operation unit on the side that is the target of the simulated image display in the “second multiple operation permissible period” is displayed behind the production pattern. The fact that the display appears to overlap the side of the screen can be expected to suggest the possibility that there may be an operation section that is hidden and ready for operation.

In addition, operations that conceal the fact that only one of the two operating units (the first operating unit, the second operating unit) is in the accepting acceptance state (the second operating unit) are in the acceptance accepting state. As the permissible period, a third multiple-operation permissible period may be allowed to occur (under another generation condition) separately from the second multiple-operation permissible period. In the second multiple operation permissible period, the specific type of performance sound is always suppressed or made inaudible before it occurs, whereas in the third multiple operation permissible period, the specific type of performance sound is always suppressed or made inaudible. The effect may be generated while the effect sound of the type is being output in a non-suppressing manner.

In this case, the "third multiple operation permissible period" is also similar to the "second multiple operation permissible period" when the effect pattern is A post-reception display (one of the post-reception changes) is displayed so that it overlaps the front side, and when the first operation section on the side that is the target of the simulated image display is operated, the A post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) may be displayed so as to overlap with the background.

In addition, regarding the "first multiple operation permissible period", "second multiple operation permissible period", and "third multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 1-E, the first operation part and the second operation part It is desirable that a different post-acceptance display be displayed depending on which of the sections is operated.

In addition, for the "second multiple operation permissible period" and the "third multiple operation permissible period", compared to the "first multiple operation permissible period", the state in which operations can be accepted is maintained. It is desirable that the time be set short. In other words, in this case, the player needs to find out within a limited time (within the valid time) that an operation section different from the first operation section (in this case, the second operation section) is in a hidden state. It can be expected that the feeling of tension will be maintained appropriately. On the other hand, because we are so preoccupied with whether or not an operation section different from the first operation section (in this case, the second operation section) is in a hidden state, we are unable to operate it within its effective time. Even if the player is unable to do so, the automatic button function is enabled and the same change occurs after the reception as when the first operation unit is operated, which effectively suppresses a decline in gaming interest. can be expected. Also, regarding the "first multiple operation permissible period", a relatively long period of time will be set as its validity period, but in exchange, the automatic button function will not be activated, which will create a sense of tension. can be expected to maintain a suitable level.

[Configuration 2-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the operation reception on the first operation part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception on the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are different. It is possible to generate a multiple operation permissible period in which multiple operations are permitted, and when either an operation on the first operation part or an operation on the second operation part is performed during the multiple operation permissible period, the type of the side where the operation was accepted is changed. It is possible to display the appropriate post-reception display. Further, it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the object to be operated by the player, and at least a predetermined multiple operation allowable period is prepared as the type of multiple operation allowable period.

In this regard, in a predetermined multiple operation tolerance period, only one operation reception may be allowed for the first operation section, and multiple operation receptions may be allowed for the second operation section. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the second operation unit that may be allowed to accept multiple operations within a predetermined multiple operation permissible period, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. , even while the post-acceptance display is displayed, operation acceptance on the first operation unit is permitted. Then, if an operation is performed on the first operation part while the reception display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation part is displayed during the predetermined multiple operation permissible period, the operation is performed on the first operation part. The post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display that was previously displayed (the post-acceptance display in response to the operation performed on the second operation unit) that was displayed until then is hidden due to the operation. I'm trying to be like that. Note that the "first operation section," "second operation section," and "predetermined multiple operation permissible period" according to Configuration 2-E are used to explain the technical concept of Configuration 2-E. It's just a name. Therefore, the "first operation part", "second operation part", and "predetermined multiple operation permissible period" in other configurations may mean the same operation part or the same operation permissible period, respectively. They may also mean different operation units or operation permissible periods. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

According to such a configuration, during the predetermined multiple operation permissible period in which both operation reception on the first operation section and operation reception on the second operation section are allowed, no operation is performed on the second operation section. If an operation is performed on the first operation unit while the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is being displayed, this will be used as a trigger to display the post-reception display corresponding to the operation, and the display that was previously displayed will be The post-reception display (the post-reception display in response to an operation performed on the second operation section) that was previously displayed will now be hidden. It becomes easier to recognize whether the display is after acceptance, and it can be expected to improve the game's interest.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 2-E", the types of multiple operation permissible periods are the first multiple operation permissible period (corresponding to the above-mentioned "predetermined multiple operation permissible period") and the second multiple operation permissible period. At least a multiple operation permissible period is prepared, and in both the first multiple operation permissible period and the second multiple operation permissible period, an operation is not performed on the second operation part that may be allowed to accept multiple operations. When the operation is performed, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but the operation reception on the first operation unit may be permitted even while the post-acceptance display is displayed. In this case, the operation is performed on the first operation part while the reception display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation part is displayed during the "first multiple operation permissible period". When the operation is performed, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display that was displayed up to that time (the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation section) is displayed. display) is hidden, and while the reception display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation part during the "second multiple operation permissible period" is displayed, the first operation part is not displayed. When an operation is performed, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and this operation triggers the post-reception display (response to the operation performed on the second operation section) to be displayed. (displayed after reception) may not be hidden.

According to such a configuration, when the gaming strategy is changed from "operating the second operating section multiple times" to "operating the first operating section", the previously displayed When the post-reception display (the post-reception display in response to an operation performed on the second operation part) is hidden (first multiple operation permissible period) and when it is not hidden (second Since there will be a multiple operation permissible period), it can be expected to enhance the performance when changing the game strategy and maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "second multiple operation permissible period" pertaining to the configuration 2-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-E. . Therefore, the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "second multiple operation permissible period" related to other configurations may each mean the same operation permissible period, or may mean different operation permissible periods. It may be something that does. Further, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

[Configuration 3-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception on the first operation part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception on the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are allowed. A first operation that can generate a multiple operation permissible period during which multiple operations can be performed, and that can only occur when the first operation unit is in a state where operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. A second operation-related display that can display a related display and that can only appear when the second operation unit is in a state where operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted is displayed. It is possible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first multiple operation tolerance period and a second multiple operation tolerance period are prepared as multiple operation tolerance periods. Since both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display can be displayed during the period, it can be expected that interest in the game can be suitably maintained. In addition, the "first operation section", "second operation section", "first multiple operation permissible period" and "second multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 3-E are the same as those of the configuration 3-E. It is simply a name used to explain a technical idea. Therefore, the same operation parts and operation permissible periods as the "first operation part", "second operation part", "first multiple operation permissible period", and "second multiple operation permissible period" related to other configurations, respectively. , or may mean different operation units or operation permissible periods. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 3-E", in the "first multiple operation permissible period", the first operation related display and the second operation related display are both displayed. The state is such that the operation reception on the operation unit is allowed and the operation reception on the second operation unit is allowed. On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation permissible period", operation reception on the first operation unit is permitted while only the first operation related display among the first operation related display and the second operation related display is displayed. However, if an operation is accepted for the second operation part under this situation, the information related to the first operation will be changed. While both the display and the second operation-related display are being displayed, the state is such that the operation reception on the first operation section is allowed and the operation reception on the second operation section is allowed. You can.

According to such a configuration, only one of the two operating units (first operating unit, second operating unit) in a state where operation acceptance is allowed (the second operating unit) is in the accepting accepting state. Even if there is a permissible period for the operation to be kept secret, if you try operating the operation part on the side to be kept secret, the concealed state will be resolved, so you can maintain your interest in the game. become expected to do so. Note that the "operation-related display" is often displayed as a mock image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the action (operation) by the player is expressed as an image, but is not limited to this. As mentioned above, it is sufficient to use an image display that, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate the image.

[Configuration 4-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception on the first operation part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception on the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are allowed. A first operation that can generate a multiple operation permissible period during which multiple operations can be performed, and that can only occur when the first operation unit is in a state where operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. A second operation-related display that can display a related display and that can only appear when the second operation unit is in a state where operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted is displayed. It is possible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific multiple operation tolerance period is prepared as the multiple operation tolerance period, and in the specific multiple operation tolerance period, when an operation is performed on the first operation part, the corresponding operation As one of the post-acceptance changes in response to this, a post-acceptance overlapping display is performed in which both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are difficult to visually recognize. As a result, the specific multiple operation permissible period in which both the operation reception on the first operation section and the operation reception on the second operation section are allowed ends when only the operation on the first operation section is performed. This makes it possible to suitably suggest this to the player. Note that the "first operation section," "second operation section," and "specific multiple operation permissible period" according to configuration 4-E are names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-E. It's nothing more than that. Therefore, the "first operation section", "second operation section", and "specific multiple operation permissible period" in other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation permissible period, respectively, or each may mean the same operation section or operation permissible period. It may also mean different operating units or allowable operating periods. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 4-E", a special multiple operation permissible period will be provided as a type of multiple operation permissible period, apart from a specific multiple operation permissible period, and a special multiple operation permissible period will be prepared. When an operation is accepted for the first operation part during the multiple operation permissible period, a special post-acceptance performance display that suggests the degree of expectation that a predetermined result has been obtained is displayed as a post-acceptance change, and the first operation A post-acceptance duplicate display is executed in which only the first operation-related display among the related display and the second operation-related display is difficult to see, and the post-acceptance duplicate display corresponding to a specific multiple operation permissible period is always executed in the same display mode. However, the post-reception overlapping display corresponding to the special multiple operation permissible period may be displayed in different display forms depending on the form (expectation level) of the special post-reception performance display.

According to such a configuration, during the special multiple operation permissible period, the image display is different from the special post-reception performance display that indicates the degree of expectation that a predetermined result has been obtained, and the operation-related display is visually recognized. Regarding the "duplicate display after reception" that is displayed to make it difficult to see, the "first operation-related display" of the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display may be displayed in such a way that it is difficult to see. Since the "second operation-related display" is not displayed in a way that makes it difficult to see, the special post-reception effect display is displayed on the "first operation section" on the side where the "operation-related display" is made difficult to see. It is now possible to suitably suggest that the phenomenon appeared due to an operation on . Based on this, the post-reception duplicate display corresponding to a specific multiple operation permissible period is always executed in the same display mode, but the post-reception duplicate display corresponding to a special multiple operation permissible period is performed using a special post-reception effect. Since it is displayed in different display modes depending on the display mode (expectation level), just looking at the "duplicate display after reception" to confirm which operation caused the jackpot expectation level can be adjusted to suit. be able to recognize it. Note that the "special multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 4-E is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "special multiple operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

[Configuration 5-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. Then, a display is made that simulates the operation targets for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, during the operation permissible period for this pachinko machine 1, there are cases where the operation is accepted only once and cases where the operation is accepted multiple times when the operation section is kept in the operated state. Therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through such a variety of effects.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 5-E", at least a specific operation permissible period shall be prepared as the type of operation permissible period, and multiple operations are permitted to be accepted during the specified operation permissible period. At least a specific period first operating section and a specific period second operating section may be set as the operating sections that can be used. If the first operating section is kept in an operated state for a specific period, the operation will be accepted multiple times, but even if the second operating section is kept in an operated state for a specific period, the operation will not be accepted multiple times. You may choose not to do so.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation unit is capable of accepting multiple operations, the so-called automatic continuous press function may not be activated, so it is difficult to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. can be expected. In addition, the "specific period first operation section", "specific period second operation section", and "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 5-E are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-E. It's just a name. Therefore, the "first operation section for a specific period", the "second operation section for a specific period", and the "permitted specific operation period" in other configurations may each mean the same operation section or allowable operation period. However, they may also mean different operation units and operation permissible periods. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

In addition, in this case, as a type of operation permissible period, a special operation permissible period is additionally provided in addition to the specific operation permissible period, and during the special operation permissible period, the operation part that can accept multiple operations is , at least a special period first operation section and a special period second operation section may be set. Further, even if either the special period first operation section or the special period second operation section is maintained in an operated state, the operation reception may not be performed multiple times.

According to such a configuration, even if there are multiple operation units that can accept multiple operations, the so-called auto-repeat function is effective for any of these operation units depending on the type of operation permissible period. This can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Note that the "special operation permissible period" related to the configuration 5-E is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "special operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

In addition, when adopting the said "Configuration 5-E", the "special period first operation section" and the "special period second operation section" are replaced by the "specific period first operation section" and "specific period second operation section". It may be provided as the same operation unit as any of the above. For example, one of the special period first operation section and the special period second operation section may be the same as the specific period second operation section. Further, the other of the special period first operating section and the special period second operating section may be one that is allowed to accept operations even during the specific operation permission period.

[Configuration 6-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which operation acceptance on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, the operation is accepted. Can cause subsequent changes. In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted so that periodic changes appear.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as a type of operation permissible period, and in the specific operation permissible period, an operation part that can accept multiple operations is set. Then, when an operation is performed on the operation section, one of the changes after acceptance is that the above-mentioned periodic change that had been appearing until then is hidden in the image display that simulates the operation section, or Since it is made difficult to see by displaying a different image, it is preferable to display the simulated image display even after the operation has been performed, but to notify the player that the operation has been accepted. You will be able to make suggestions. Note that the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 6-E is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 6-E", at least a specific operation permissible period and a special operation permissible period should be prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and in the "specific operation permissible period", multiple operations can be performed. An operation unit is set that allows the operation to be accepted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, one of the changes after acceptance is that the operation unit that has been displayed up to that point will be displayed in a simulated image display. The periodic change that was previously displayed is hidden, or the sample image display is hidden, and in the "special operation permissible period", the operation section is set to allow multiple operation receptions. Then, when an operation is performed on the operation section, the periodic changes that have been appearing up to that point on the image display that imitates the operation section are not hidden, but the periodic changes are continued. Good too.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is performed on an operation unit that is allowed to accept multiple operations, the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the display of the simulated operation unit are hidden. In some cases, the image display is hidden, and in other cases, the periodic change is not hidden and continues, so the operation reception is properly performed. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the person is in the same position, and it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Note that the "special operation permissible period" related to the configuration 6-E is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "special operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

[Configuration 7-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation on the operation unit is performed during the operation permissible period, a change is made after acceptance. can be caused. It is also possible to display a simulated image of the operation section.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to display a sample image so that periodic changes appear, but there are two cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in a predetermined time unit, and a case in which the periodic changes are displayed in a predetermined time unit. Since the game is sometimes displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved through a variety of effects.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 7-E", at least a specific operation permissible period and a special operation permissible period shall be prepared as the operation permissible period, and the "specific operation permissible period" may include multiple operation permissible periods. It is considered that at least the operation reception on the first operation part for a specific period in which it is permissible to accept the operation for the specified period and the operation reception on the second operation part for a specific period different from the first operation part for the specific period are allowed, In the "operation permissible period", operation reception for a special period first operation section for which multiple operation reception is permissible and operation reception for a special period second operation section different from the special period first operation section are performed. It may be made at least acceptable. Then, during the "specific operation permissible period", a simulated image display of the first operation part is displayed for a specific period so that periodic changes appear in predetermined time units, and during the "special operation permissible period" Alternatively, a simulated image display of the first operation section during the special period may be displayed such that periodic changes thereof appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time.

According to such a configuration, the time required for periodic changes will differ depending on the type of operation permissible period and the type of operation target, so it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through various effects. be done. In addition, regarding the configuration 7-E, "specific period first operating section", "specific period second operating section", "special period first operating section", "special period second operating section", "specific operation permissible period" ” and “special operation permissible period” are merely names used to explain the technical idea of configuration 7-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operating section", "specific period second operating section", "special period first operating section", "special period second operating section", "specific operation permissible period" and The term "special operation permissible period" may refer to the same operation unit or operation permissible period, or may mean a different operation unit or operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation part" or "operation permissible period" as a different name of the operation part or the permissible operation period.

Further, the specific period first operating section in the "specific operation permissible period" may be the same operating section as the special period second operating section in the "special operation permissible period". However, in this case, even though the specific period first operation section and the special period second operation section are the same operation section, during the "specific operation permissible period" The periodic change is displayed in a predetermined time unit, and in the "special operation permissible period", a simulated image display that imitates the second operation part during the special period is displayed in a time unit in which the periodic change appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. (The periodicity may be the same as that of the simulated image display of the first operation section during the special period.) According to such a configuration, even if the operation target (operation part) is the same, the time required for periodic changes will differ depending on the type of "operation permissible period" that has occurred. It is now possible to greatly vary the effect of the permissible period depending on the type of play, and this can be expected to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 8-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulation image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as types of operation permissible periods. There are some operation parts that are subject to this and are allowed to accept multiple operations. Since a different sound can be output as the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after acceptance, depending on when an operation is performed on the player, it is expected to improve the interest in the game. Note that the "predetermined operation permissible period" and "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 8-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or may mean different operation permissible periods. Further, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 8-E", the operation section that is displayed by the simulated image display means and that is allowed to receive multiple operations during the "predetermined operation permissible period" When an operation is performed on , an output sound is output after the operation as one of the changes after acceptance, whereas during the "specific operation permissible period", the sound is displayed by the sample image display means and is displayed multiple times. When an operation is performed on an operation unit for which operation acceptance is allowed, one of the changes after acceptance is that there are cases where an output sound is output after the operation, and cases where an output sound is not output after the operation. good.

According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period", even if an operation is performed on the operation part that is displayed by the image display means and is allowed to accept multiple operations, , Since there are cases where the output sound is output after the operation and cases where the output sound is not output after the operation, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed, and a sense of tension is suitably maintained. can be expected.

[Configuration 9-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. In addition, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as a type of operation permissible period, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared, and in the specific operation permissible period, the operation is allowed to be accepted multiple times and only the state in which the operation is maintained is continued. If there is an operation part for which operation reception can be made multiple times, and if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after reception, is output at predetermined intervals, When a plurality of operations are performed on an operation part, a post-operation output sound can be output each time the operation is performed. As a result, it is expected that even if the operation unit is kept in the operated state, it will be possible to suggest that the operation is being accepted properly, just as when the operation is performed multiple times. will be done. Note that the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 9-E is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 9-E", at least "Specific operation permissible period" and "Special operation permissible period" shall be prepared as types of operation permissible period, and "Specific operation permissible period" In this case, there is an operation part that allows operation acceptance multiple times and can be accepted multiple times just by keeping it in the operated state, and if the operation part is kept in the operated state, The post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes, is output at predetermined time intervals, and if the operation unit is operated multiple times (for example, at intervals later than the predetermined time), the operation is It may be possible to enable output sound after the operation each time the operation is performed. On the other hand, during the special operation permissible period, there are some operation parts that are allowed to be operated multiple times, but the operation is not accepted multiple times even if the operation is maintained in the operated state. Even if it continues to be maintained, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, will not be output at predetermined intervals, and the operation unit will not be output multiple times (for example, at intervals later than the predetermined time). Even when the above operation is performed, the post-operation output sound may be output in some cases and not in other cases when the operation is performed.

According to such a configuration, during the special operation permissible period, there is an operation section in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, and furthermore, even if the operation section is operated, the output sound after the operation is not activated. is output sometimes and sometimes not, so it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the operation is being properly accepted. Note that the "special operation permissible period" related to the configuration 9-E is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "special operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

[Configuration 10-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted, so that periodic changes appear.

In this regard, the permissible operation period for the pachinko machine 1 is divided into cases where periodic changes in the image display are displayed in predetermined time units, and cases where periodic changes in the image display are displayed for a period longer than the predetermined time. It is now sometimes displayed in units. Then, in the operation permissible period, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in a predetermined time unit, and in the operation permissible period, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In either case, when an operation is performed on the operation section corresponding to the relevant sample image display among the multiple operation sections, the after-operation output, which is one of the changes after reception, is displayed. Since the sound can be output, it can be expected that it will suitably indicate that the operation has been accepted properly.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 10-E", at least a specific operation permissible period and a special operation permissible period are prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and in the "specific operation permissible period", the sample image It may be arranged such that periodic changes in the display are displayed in predetermined time units, and when the operation unit corresponding to the image display is operated, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may be output. . On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, and when the operation section corresponding to the sample image display is operated, the change after acceptance There may be a case where the post-operation output sound is output, and a case where the post-operation output sound is not output.

According to such a configuration, when a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output. Since there are cases where the output sound is not output after the operation, it can be expected to suitably give a sense of tension as to whether the operation reception has been properly accepted. Note that the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 10-E are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

[Configuration 11-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. In addition, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted. Further, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permissible period, the process that causes the same post-reception change as when the operation is performed can be executed (automatic reception execution means).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 provides at least a specific operation permission period and a special operation permission period as types of operation permission periods. In the "specific operation permissible period", there is an operation part that is subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means (a target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception is permitted multiple times, and the operation part is On the other hand, when the player performs an operation, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output as a specific sound. On the other hand, during the special operation permissible period, there is an operation part that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means (target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception is permitted multiple times. On the other hand, when the player performs an operation, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, can be output as a special sound different from the above-mentioned specific sound. Since it becomes possible to suggest whether or not the player is to be processed by the automatic reception execution means through the form of the output sound after the operation, it can be expected that the player's interest in the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to the configuration 11-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 11-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 11-E", at least a specific operation permissible period and a special operation permissible period shall be prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and in the "specific operation permissible period", automatic reception When a player performs an operation on an operation unit that is a target of processing by the execution means (a target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception can be accepted multiple times, one of the changes after reception is performed. A post-operation output sound may be output as a specific sound. On the other hand, during the "special operation permissible period," a player is not required to process an operation by the automatic reception execution means (a target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception is permitted multiple times. When an operation is performed, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may be output as a special sound different from the specific sound, or the post-operation output sound itself may not be output. You can. According to such a configuration, since the conditions under which the post-operation output sound is output are different between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In this case, in the specific operation permissible period, ``the operation part that is subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and whose operation reception can be accepted multiple times'' and the ``operation unit that is subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means'' in the special operation permission period. The "operation unit that is not required and that allows operation reception to be accepted multiple times" may be the same operation unit or may be different operation units.

Furthermore, for example, an "operation unit that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times" in the special operation permission period is set as an operation unit that can be operated even during the specific operation permission period. It may be something that is done. However, the "operation unit that is not subject to processing by the automatic operation acceptance execution means and for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times" during the special operation permission period is set as the operation unit that is subject to operation even during the specific operation permission period. If the operation is performed, make sure that the after-operation output sound is output when the operation is performed, or make sure that the after-operation output sound is not even output when the operation is performed. is desirable (but not a required configuration). No matter which configuration is adopted (for example, even if the output sound after the operation is not output when the operation is performed), the output sound after the operation is output. Since the conditions are different between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 12-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. Furthermore, when the operation acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance is in a state where the operation acceptance is allowed or will be in a state where the operation acceptance is allowed may be audibly output. Further, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as a type of operation permissible period, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared, and in the specific operation permissible period, an operation is accepted for the first operation part for a specific period, and an operation for the second operation part for a specific period is accepted. The operation acceptance is at least allowed to be accepted. Then, if an operation is performed on either the first operating section for the specific period or the second operating section for the specific period while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output during the specific operation acceptable period, this will trigger the corresponding The reception permissible sound is rendered inaudible. This makes it possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been properly accepted, regardless of whether the first operation section or the second operation section is operated during the specific period.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 12-E", at least a specific operation permissible period and a special operation permissible period shall be prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and the "specific operation permissible period" is defined as a specific operation permissible period. Operation reception on the first operation section and operation reception on the second operation section for a specific period can be at least allowed, and while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output during the specific operation permission period, the operation reception on the second operation section is allowed. When either an operation is accepted on the first operation section or an operation is accepted on the second operation section for a specific period, the acceptance permission sound may be made inaudible using this as a trigger. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", it is possible to allow at least the operation reception on the special period first operation part and the operation reception on the special period second operation part, and the special operation permissible period If an operation is accepted for the second operation part during the special period while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the reception permission sound will not be made inaudible due to this, and the special operation permission will not be made inaudible. When an operation is accepted on the first operation unit during the special period while the reception permission sound is audibly output during the period, the reception permission sound may be made inaudible using this as a trigger.

According to such a configuration, the conditions under which the reception permissible sound is rendered inaudible are different between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, so it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. sell. In addition, regarding the configuration 12-E, "specific period first operating section", "specific period second operating section", "special period first operating section", "special period second operating section", "specific operation permissible period" ” and “special operation permissible period” are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operating section", "specific period second operating section", "special period first operating section", "special period second operating section", "specific operation permissible period", etc. according to other configurations, and "special operation permissible period" may mean the same operation unit or operation permissible period, or may mean a different operation unit or operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible period" as the other names of the operating part and the permissible operation period.

In this case, the "specific period first operating section" of the specific operation permissible period may be the same as the "special period first operating section" or "special period second operating section" of the special operation permissible period, or It may be different from either.

Further, the "second operating section for specific period" of the specific operation permissible period may be the same as the "first operating section for special period" or "second operating section for special period" of the allowable special operation period, or both may be the same. They may be different.

Further, the special period first operation section (or the special period second operation section) may be one that can accept operations even during the specific operation permission period.

[Configuration 13-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. Furthermore, when the operation acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance is in a state where the operation acceptance is allowed or will be in a state where the operation acceptance is allowed may be audibly output. Further, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the types of operation permissible periods, at least a specific operation permissible period and a predetermined operation permissible period are prepared. At least acceptance of an operation on the second operation part for a period can be allowed, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", reception of an operation on the first operation part for a predetermined period and reception of an operation on the second operation part for a predetermined period are allowed. Since this can be made at least permissible, the performance can be developed in a similar manner even though the types are different between the specific operation permissible period and the predetermined operation permissible period. In addition, regarding the configuration 13-E, the "first operating section for a specific period", the "second operating section for a specific period", the "first operating section for a predetermined period", the "second operating section for a predetermined period", and the "specific operation permissible period" ” and “predetermined operation permissible period” are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operation section", "specific period second operation section", "predetermined period first operation section", "predetermined period second operation section", "specific operation permissible period", etc. according to other configurations, and "predetermined operation permissible period" may mean the same operation unit or operation permissible period, or may mean a different operation unit or operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible period" as the other names of the operating part and the permissible operation period.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 13-E", in the "predetermined operation permissible period", at least the operation reception on the first operation part for a predetermined period and the operation reception on the second operation part for a predetermined period are permissible. During the predetermined operation permissible period, while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, either an operation is accepted for the first operation part for a predetermined period or an operation is accepted for the second operation part for a predetermined period. However, the acceptance permission sound may not be made inaudible due to this. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", it is possible to allow at least the operation reception on the first operation part during the specific period and the operation reception on the second operation part during the specific period, and the specific operation permissible period If an operation is accepted on the first operation unit for a specific period while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, this will not trigger the acceptance permission sound to become inaudible. When an operation is accepted for the second operation unit, the acceptance acceptance sound may be made inaudible using this as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, the conditions under which the reception permissible sound is made inaudible are different between the predetermined operation permissible period and the specific operation permissible period, so it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. sell.

In this case, the "first operating part for a specific period" of the specific operation permissible period may be the same as the "first operating part for a predetermined period" or the "second operating part for a predetermined period" of the predetermined operation permissible period, It may be different from either.

Further, the "second operating section for a specific period" in the specific operation permissible period may be the same as the "first operating section for a predetermined period" or the "second operating section for a predetermined period" in the permissible predetermined operation period, or both may be the same. They may be different.

Further, the first predetermined period operation section (or the second predetermined period operation section) may be one that can accept operations even during the specific operation permissible period.

[Configuration 14-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. display. Further, when the operation acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance is allowed can be audibly output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player performs an operation on an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted during the operation permissible period, a post-reception display is displayed so as to overlap in front of the production pattern. Because the post-reception display is displayed in some cases, and in other cases the post-reception display is displayed so that it overlaps behind the production pattern, the post-reception display is designed to have a production effect between it and the production pattern. It can be expected that this will improve people's interest in gaming.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 14-E", at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as the type of operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, the first Both the operation reception on the operation part and the operation reception on the second operation part are allowed, and when the player performs an operation on the first operation part, the effect appears to be overlapped in front of the production pattern. The post-acceptance display may be displayed on the second operating unit, and when the player performs an operation on the second operation unit, the post-acceptance display may be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the performance symbols. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which one of the performance symbols or the post-reception display you want to see with priority depending on whether you operate the first operation section or the second operation section. Therefore, it can be expected to suitably maintain interest in gaming. Note that the "first operation section", "second operation section", and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 14-E are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 14-E. Not too much. Therefore, the "first operation part", "second operation part", and "specific operation permissible period" in other configurations may mean the same operation part or operation permissible period, or may mean different operation parts. It may also mean an operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible period" as the other names of the operating part and the permissible operation period.

[Configuration 15-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. In addition, it is possible to display a warning effect indicating that the operation permissible period will occur. Further, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as a type of operation permissible period, and in the specific operation permissible period, an operation is accepted for the first operation part for a specific period, and an operation is accepted for the second operation part for a specific period. It is possible to at least allow the reception of operations for , and the precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which a specific operation permissible period occurs, and the precursor effect display is displayed during the specific operation permissible period. When an operation is performed on either the first operation section for a specific period or the second operation section for a specific period while the display is in progress, the foreshadow effect display is made to be in a non-display state using this as an opportunity. In other words, in this case, even if an operation is performed on either the specific period first operation section or the specific period second operation section while the precursor effect display is being displayed, the operation will not be accepted properly. You will be able to suitably suggest that you are in a certain situation.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 15-E", at least the specific operation permissible period and special operation permissible period shall be prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and the "specific operation permissible period" is defined as the specific operation permissible period. Operation reception on the first operation unit and operation reception on the second operation unit during a specific period can be at least allowed, and the precursor effect display is displayed so as to span the timing at which the specific operation permissible period occurs. and when either an operation is accepted on the first operation part for the specific period or an operation is accepted on the second operation part for the specific period while the corresponding portent effect display is being displayed during the specific operation permissible period, this will be used as a trigger. The foreshadow effect display may be hidden. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", the operation reception on the special period first operation part and the operation reception on the special period second operation part are at least permissible, and the precursor effect display is This is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the special operation permissible period occurs, but if an operation is accepted for the special period first operation part while the relevant precursor effect display is being audibly output during the special operation permissible period, this is displayed. The foreshadowing effect display will not be hidden due to this, and when an operation is accepted for the second operation section during the special period while the foreshadowing effect display is being displayed during the special operation permissible period. This may be used as an opportunity for the precursor effect display to be hidden.

According to such a configuration, the conditions under which the precursor effect display is hidden are different between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, so it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. sell. In addition, regarding the configuration 15-E, "specific period first operating section", "specific period second operating section", "special period first operating section", "special period second operating section", "specific operation section" "Permissible period" and "Special operation permissible period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operating section", "specific period second operating section", "special period first operating section", "special period second operating section", "specific operation permissible period", etc. according to other configurations, and "special operation permissible period" may mean the same operation unit or operation permissible period, or may mean a different operation unit or operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible period" as the other names of the operating part and the permissible operation period.

In this case, the "specific period first operating part" of the specific operation permissible period may be the same as the "special period first operating part" or "special period second operating part" of the special operation permissible period, It may be different from either.

Further, the "second operating section for specific period" of the specific operation permissible period may be the same as the "first operating section for special period" or "second operating section for special period" of the allowable special operation period, or both may be the same. They may be different.

Further, the special period first operation section (or the special period second operation section) may be one that can accept operations even during the specific operation permission period.

[Configuration 16-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform variable display of performance symbols. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which reception of an operation on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permissible period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a warning effect indicating that the operation permissible period will occur. Further, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the precursor effect display can be executed across the timing at which the operation permissible period occurs, and the game is displayed on the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted during the operation permissible period. When an operator performs an operation, a post-acceptance display is displayed so that it appears to overlap in front of the production design, and a post-reception display is displayed so that it appears to overlap on the back side of the production design. Since there may be cases, it can be expected that the post-acceptance display will have a performance effect with the performance symbols to improve the game's interest.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 16-E", at least a specific operation allowable period shall be prepared as the type of operation allowable period, and in the specific operation allowable period, the first operation of the plurality of operation parts Both the operation reception on the part and the operation reception on the second operation part are allowed, and when the player performs an operation on the first operation part, the effect appears to be overlapped in front of the production pattern. The post-acceptance display may be displayed, and when the player performs an operation on the second operation section, the post-acceptance display may be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the performance symbols. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which one of the performance symbols or the post-reception display you want to see with priority depending on whether you operate the first operation section or the second operation section. Therefore, it can be expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained. Note that the "first operation section", "second operation section", and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 16-E are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 16-E. Not too much. Therefore, the "first operation part", "second operation part", and "specific operation permissible period" in other configurations may mean the same operation part or operation permissible period, or may mean different operation parts. It may also mean an operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible period" as the other names of the operating part and the permissible operation period.

[Configuration 17-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. may cause an indication. In addition, it is possible to display a warning effect indicating that the operation permissible period will occur. It is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation acceptance is acceptable.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as a type of operation permissible period, and in the specific operation permissible period, no operation is performed on the operation part during the specified operation permissible period. Also, when a specific period of time has elapsed after the specified operation permissible period occurred, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation on the operation unit was performed is performed (the automatic button function is activated), The precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the specific operation permissible period occurs, but is hidden at a timing before the above-mentioned specific time has elapsed after the specific operation permissible period occurs. I made it. This lets the player know that while the warning effect display is displayed, there is no possibility that the automatic button function will be activated, that is, the player is in a situation where they can operate the button calmly. You will be able to make suggestions.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 17-E", at least a specific operation permissible period and a special operation permissible period shall be prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and the "specific operation permissible period" Even if no operation is performed on the operation panel during the operation permissible period, if a specific time elapses after the specific operation permissible period occurs, the same post-reception display as when the operation on the operation panel was performed will be displayed. (the automatic button function is enabled), and the precursor effect display is executed across the timing when the specific operation permissible period occurs, but after the specific operation permissible period occurs, the above-mentioned The display may be hidden at a timing before a specific time elapses. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", even if no operation is performed on the operation part during the special operation permissible period, when the special time elapses after the special operation permissible period occurs, the operation part The same display after acceptance as when the operation is performed is performed (the automatic button function is enabled), and the precursor effect display is executed so as to cross the timing when the special operation permissible period occurs. , and is displayed even when a special time has elapsed after the occurrence of the special operation permissible period, and if the special time elapses without any operation by the player after the special operation permissible period occurs, a warning sign will be displayed. The same post-acceptance display as when the operation on the operation unit is performed may be started while the effect display is not hidden but is displayed.

According to such a configuration, whether or not the precursor effect display is hidden is different between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period in relation to the timing at which the automatic button function is activated. Therefore, it can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the operation permissible period in which the automatic button function is activated occurs. Note that the "specific operation permissible period" and "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 17-E. Therefore, it may mean the same operation permissible period as the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation permissible period. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation permissible period" as the other name "operable permissible period".

Note that in this case, the specific time and the special time may be the same time or may be different times.

[Configuration 18-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which operation acceptance on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit during the operation permissible period, changes occur after acceptance. cause Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated operation section (simulated image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as types of operation permissible periods, and in the predetermined operation permissible period, multiple operation receptions are allowed, and It is assumed that there is an operation section to be displayed by the image display means. During the specific operation permissible period, multiple operation acceptance is allowed, but there are some operation parts that are not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, and the operation can be performed simply by keeping the operation part in the operated state. Since acceptance can be made multiple times (so-called auto-repeat function), it is expected that this will alleviate the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation part being hidden and suppress the decline in gaming interest. sell.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 18-E", the operation unit is allowed to accept multiple operations during the "predetermined operation permissible period" and is subject to display by the above-mentioned simulated image display means. Therefore, even if the operating unit is kept in an operated state, the operation may not be accepted multiple times. With such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained not only when the operation section to be operated is hidden, but also when the operation section to be operated is not hidden. It can be done.

In addition, when adopting the said "Configuration 18-E", in the "predetermined operation permissible period", there is only one operation unit that can accept multiple operations and is subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means. Alternatively, there may be a plurality of units, and even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, the operation reception may not be performed multiple times. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", multiple operation acceptance is permitted, but there are at least a first operation section and a second operation section as operation sections that are not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means. However, for the first operation part, the operation can be accepted multiple times just by keeping it in the operated state, whereas for the second operation part, even if you keep it in the operated state, the operation reception can be done multiple times. may be set so that it is not performed multiple times.

According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period", multiple operation receptions are allowed, but even if the operation section is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, the so-called automatic repeated press function may not be activated, so it can be expected that a sense of tension can be maintained more favorably. Note that the "first operation section", "second operation section", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 18-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 18-E. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, the "first operation part", "second operation part", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" refer to the same operation parts and operation permissible periods in other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation unit or a different operation permissible period. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

In this case, at least one of the first operation section and the second operation section (e.g., the second operation section) is configured to be capable of accepting multiple operations during a predetermined operation permission period, and displaying on the sample image display means. It may be set as an operation unit that is targeted for.

[Configuration 19-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which operation acceptance on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit during the operation permissible period, changes occur after acceptance. cause Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated operation section (simulated image display means). Further, when an operation is accepted on the operation unit during the operation permissible period, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance can be outputted as one of the post-acceptance changes.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as types of operation permissible periods, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", operation reception is permitted and the above-mentioned sample image There is an operation section that is displayed by the display means, and when the operation section is operated, an output sound can be output after acceptance according to the operation. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", there are operation parts for which operation acceptance is permitted and not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, but even if the operation part is operated, Since the output sound can be output after the operation is accepted, the operation can be performed properly even if the operation part is hidden. Be able to hint at the situation.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 19-E", there are operation sections for which operation acceptance is permitted during the "specific operation permissible period" and are not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means. When the operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation may be outputted, and a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation may not be output. That is, in this case, since it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted when operating the operation unit in the hidden state, it can be expected that a sense of tension will be more suitably imparted.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 19-E", there is only one operation section for which operation reception is permitted and is subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means during the "predetermined operation permissible period". Alternatively, there may be a plurality of units, and when the operation unit is operated, an output sound may be output after acceptance. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", there are at least a first operation section and a second operation section as operation sections for which operation acceptance is permitted but not subject to display by the image display means, and the first operation section When an operation is performed on the second operating section, the post-acceptance output sound may be output, but when an operation is performed on the second operating section, the post-acceptance output sound may not be output. In other words, in this case, during the "specific operation permissible period", if an operation unit that is not in the hidden state is operated, an output sound may be output after acceptance, whereas in the "predetermined operation permissible period", the first operation that is in the hidden state is Since the output sound is output only when the first operation part is operated among the first operation part and the second operation part, the output sound is output only when the first operation part is operated. It is now possible to further conceal the fact that operations are allowed to be accepted. In addition, the "first operation part", "second operation part", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 19-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 19-E. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, the "first operation section", "second operation section", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" refer to the same operation section or operation permissible period in other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation unit or a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

In this case, the post-acceptance output sound may be output in different ways depending on at least one of the type of operation permissible period and the type of the operation unit operated by the player.

Further, at least one of the first operation section and the second operation section (for example, the second operation section) is allowed to accept operations during a predetermined operation permission period, and is subject to display by the above-mentioned simulated image display means. It may be set as an operation section.

[Configuration 20-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform variable display of performance symbols. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which an operation on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation on the operation unit is accepted during the operation permissible period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Further, it is possible to display a display that simulates the operation section (simulation image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", operation reception is permitted and the above-mentioned sample image There is an operation section that is subject to display by the display means, and when the operation section is operated, a display after acceptance according to the operation can be displayed. Although there is an operation section for which reception is permitted and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, even if the operation section is operated, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation may be displayed. As a result, even if the operation is performed while the operation unit to be operated is kept secret, it can be suggested that the operation was performed properly.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 20-E", there is an operation section for which operation acceptance is permitted during the specific operation permissible period and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned simulated image display means. When is operated, the after-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed in such a way that it overlaps in front of the production pattern, and the after-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so that it overlaps with the production pattern. The image may be displayed so that it appears to overlap with the background. According to such a configuration, during the specific operation permissible period, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by providing a presentation effect with the presentation pattern regarding the display after acceptance when the hidden operation section is operated. can be expected.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 20-E", the first operating section is an operating section that is permitted to accept operations during the specific operation permissible period, but is not subject to display by the above-mentioned simulated image display means. There is at least a second operation section, and when an operation is performed on the first operation section, a reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap behind the production pattern, and the second operation section is operated. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to overlap with the production pattern in front of it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which one of the performance symbols or the post-reception display you want to see with priority depending on whether you operate the first operation section or the second operation section. Therefore, it can be expected to suitably maintain interest in gaming.

[Configuration 21-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a multiple operation permissible period in which both operation reception on the first operation part and operation reception on the second operation part are permissible, and the plurality of operations can be performed. When either an operation on the first operation section or an operation on the second operation section is performed during the permissible period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed according to the type of the side on which the operation was accepted. In addition, although it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operation target by the player (the simulated image display means), the display that simulates the operation target is displayed even though the operation reception is permitted. This may not be done depending on the circumstances.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first multiple operation permissible period and a second multiple operation permissible period are prepared as the types of multiple operation permissible periods, and in the first multiple operation permissible period (multiple operation permissible periods) When an operation is performed on the "first operation section" (which may be considered acceptable), a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but even while the post-acceptance display is displayed, Acceptance of operations on the "second operation section" is permitted. Then, during the first multiple operation permissible period, an operation is performed on the "second operation section" while the post-reception display corresponding to the operation performed on the "first operation section" is displayed. When the reception screen is displayed, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-reception display (post-reception display on the first operation unit side) that has been displayed until then can be hidden using the operation as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suggest that the production has progressed not by the operation on the first operation part side which was interrupted midway, but by the newly performed operation on the second operation part side. Become.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 21-E", both the display imitating the first operation section and the display imitating the second operation section will not be displayed during the "first multiple operation permissible period". In this case, both the operation reception on the first operation section and the operation reception on the second operation section are allowed, and at least the first operation section among the first operation section and the second operation section It may be possible to allow multiple operation receptions. In addition, in the "second multiple operation permissible period", while neither the display imitating the first operation part nor the display imitating the second operation part is displayed, the operation reception for the first operation part and the second operation part are not displayed. Operation reception for any of the operation units is permitted, and at least the first operation unit among the first operation unit and the second operation unit is configured to allow multiple operation receptions. Good too. Then, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit that may be allowed to accept multiple operations during the "first multiple operation permissible period," a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. Even while the post-reception display is displayed, operation reception on the second operation unit is allowed, and if an operation is performed on the second operation unit while the post-reception display is displayed, The post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed, and the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance display on the first operation unit side) that has been appearing up to that point may be hidden when the operation is triggered. On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the first operation unit for which acceptance of multiple operations is permitted during the "second multiple operation permissible period", a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. However, even while the post-reception display is displayed, operation reception on the second operation unit is allowed, and operations are performed on the second operation unit while the post-reception display is displayed. , the post-reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but the post-reception display (the post-reception display on the first operation unit side) that had appeared until then may not be hidden in response to the operation. . According to such a configuration, if an operation is performed on the second operation section while the reception display corresponding to the operation on the first operation section is displayed, this will be used as a trigger to respond to the operation on the first operation section. Since there are cases where the above-mentioned post-reception display is hidden, and cases where the above-mentioned post-reception display according to an operation on the first operation section is not hidden, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. can be expected.

Note that the "first operation section", "second operation section", "first multiple operation permissible period", and "second multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 21-E are the same as those of the configuration 21-E. It is simply a name used to explain the technical philosophy of. Therefore, the same operation parts and operation permissible periods as the "first operation part", "second operation part", "first multiple operation permissible period", and "second multiple operation permissible period" related to other configurations may be used. It may also mean different operation units or operation permissible periods. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

[Configuration 22-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a multiple operation permissible period in which both the operation reception on the first operation part and the operation reception on the second operation part are permissible. Further, it is possible to display a first operation-related display that can only appear when the first operation unit is in a state in which reception of an operation is permitted or in a state in which reception of the operation is permitted. Further, it is possible to display a second operation-related display that can only appear when the second operation unit is in a state in which reception of an operation is permitted or in a state in which reception of the operation is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first multiple operation tolerance period and a second multiple operation tolerance period are prepared as the multiple operation tolerance period, and in the "first multiple operation tolerance period", the first multiple operation tolerance period is Since both the related display and the second operation related display can be displayed, operations by the player can be smoothly encouraged even if operation reception is allowed for multiple operation units. can be expected.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 22-E", in the "first multiple operation permissible period", the first operation related display and the second operation related display are both displayed. It may also be possible to accept an operation on the operating unit or to accept an operation on the second operating unit. On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation permissible period", when neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed, an operation is accepted on the first operation section or an operation is accepted on the second operation section. However, if an operation is accepted on the second operation section under the above situation, a second operation-related display is displayed, and while the second operation-related display is displayed, the first operation cannot be performed. An arrangement may be made in which operations can be accepted for the unit or the second operation unit. According to such a configuration, the confidentiality regarding the "state in which operation reception is permitted" on the second operation section is resolved by an operation on the second operation section, and the second operation related display is displayed. Since it becomes possible to accept operations on the first operation section or on the second operation section while the game is being held, it can be expected to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 22-E", in the "second multiple operation permissible period", even if an operation is accepted for the first operation section, the operation reception for the first operation section is not allowed. The first operation-related display, which can only appear when the user is in a state in which the operation is accepted or in a state in which acceptance of the operation is permitted, may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, the performance when an operation is accepted is different between the first operation part and the second operation part, which are in a hidden state, thereby improving the interest in the game. can be expected.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 22-E", in the "second multiple operation permissible period", the second operation-related display is displayed while neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed. The second operation-related display displayed based on the reception of an operation on the operation unit may have a different display form from the second operation-related display that appears when the "first multiple operation permissible period" occurs. .

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 22-E", in the "second multiple operation permissible period", an operation is accepted for the second operation section while the second operation-related display is not displayed. In this case, the second operation-related display may be displayed, but the display suggesting the level of expectation may not be displayed. That is, in this case, while the second operation related display is being displayed, it is possible to prompt the user to perform a further operation on the second operation section.

Note that the "first operation section", "second operation section", "first multiple operation permissible period", and "second multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 22-E are the same as those of the configuration 22-E. It is simply a name used to explain the technical philosophy of. Therefore, the same operation parts and operation permissible periods as the "first operation part", "second operation part", "first multiple operation permissible period", and "second multiple operation permissible period" related to other configurations may be used. It may also mean different operation units or operation permissible periods. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

[Configuration 23-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulation image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and both the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" can be used multiple times. There are some operation parts that are allowed to accept operations, but if the operation is performed on the operation part during the "specified operation permissible period", and when the operation is performed on the said operation part during the "specific operation permissible period". By making it possible for different sounds to be output as the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, depending on the case where the operation is performed, it is possible to suggest which type of operation permissible period has occurred. You will be able to do this.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 23-E", the "predetermined operation permissible period" is subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, and multiple operation receptions are permitted. When there is one or more operation units and an operation is performed on the operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the changes after acceptance. If there is one or more operation sections that are not displayed on the display means and for which multiple operation receptions are allowed, and an operation is performed on the operation section, one of the changes after reception is performed. There may be a case where the output sound is output after reception and a case where the output sound is not output after reception. According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period", when a hidden operation unit is operated, there are cases where the output sound after acceptance is output and cases where the output sound after acceptance is not output. Therefore, it can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension as to whether or not the operation has been properly accepted.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 23-E", the "specific operation permissible period" is such that it is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means and multiple operation receptions are permissible. There are at least a first operation section and a second operation section as operation sections, and when an operation is performed on the first operation section, an output sound after the operation is output as one of the changes after acceptance, but the second operation section When an operation is performed on the object, the post-operation output sound may not be outputted as one of the changes after acceptance. According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period", it becomes possible to further enhance the confidentiality regarding the "state in which operation reception is permitted" on the second operation section, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. It can be expected that

In this case, in the "specific operation permissible period", there may be no operation unit that is displayed by the sample image display means and whose operation is allowed to be accepted (multiple times).

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", there is at least the second operation section as an operation section that is displayed by the sample image display means and is allowed to accept multiple operations, and the second operation section is When an operation is performed on the unit, a post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes.

Further, at least one of the first operating section and the second operating section (for example, the second operating section) is subject to display by the above-mentioned simulated image display means during the "predetermined operation permissible period" and is operated multiple times. It may also be used as an operation unit that allows acceptance.

Further, when the first operation unit is operated during the specific operation permissible period, a change may occur after acceptance, and a change may not occur after acceptance. According to such a configuration, it can be expected that during the "specific operation permissible period", the feeling of tension when operating the hidden first operating section can be suitably maintained.

Note that the "first operation section", "second operation section", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 23-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 23-E. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, the same operation parts and operation permissible periods as the "first operation part", "second operation part", "first multiple operation permissible period", and "second multiple operation permissible period" related to other configurations may be used. It may also mean different operation units or operation permissible periods. In addition, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

[Configuration 24-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. Further, it is possible to display a simulated operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulation image display means).

In this regard, during the operation permissible period of the pachinko machine 1, there are cases where it is permitted to accept multiple operations on an operation part that is not displayed by the above-mentioned sample image display means. Since the operation can be accepted multiple times if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation part being hidden is alleviated, and the decline in gaming interest is suppressed. can be expected.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 24-E", during the operation permissible period, it is possible to accept multiple operations on the operation unit that is not displayed by the above-mentioned sample image display means. When the operation unit is kept in an operated state, the operation may be accepted a plurality of times, or the operation may not be accepted a plurality of times. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably impart a sense of tension while alleviating the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation part being hidden.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 24-E", at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as the operation permissible period, and in the "specific operation permissible period", the above-mentioned sample image display means There are at least a first operation section and a second operation section as operation sections that are not subject to display but are allowed to accept multiple operations, and if the first operation section is kept in the operated state, the operation is not performed. If the operation is not accepted multiple times and the second operation unit continues to be operated, the operation acceptance may be accepted multiple times. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to increase the confidentiality of whether multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for the first operation part during a specific operation permission period, and to appropriately reduce the feeling of tension. can be expected to be granted.

Note that the "first operation section," "second operation section," and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 24-E are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 24-E. Not too much. Therefore, the "first operation part", "second operation part", and "specific operation permissible period" in other configurations may mean the same operation part or operation permissible period, or different operation parts. It may also mean an operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

[Configuration 25-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform variable display of performance symbols. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which an operation on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation on the operation unit is accepted during the operation permissible period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. It is also possible to display a display that mimics the operation section.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", operation reception is permitted and the above-mentioned sample image There is an operation section that is not subject to display by the display means, and when the operation section is operated, a reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the production pattern, and a "specific operation permission" is displayed. In the "period", there is an operation part for which operation reception is allowed and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, and when the operation part is operated, the display after reception according to the operation will be different from the production pattern. It can now be displayed so that it appears to overlap with the front side. As a result, even if the operation part to be operated is hidden, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been performed properly, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 25-E", the "predetermined operation permissible period" is such that the operation part is allowed to accept operations and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means. There is at least a first operating section and a second operating section for a predetermined period, and when the first operating section is operated for a predetermined period, a display after reception corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the production pattern, and a predetermined period of time is displayed. When the second operating section is operated during the period, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to be visible in front of the production pattern. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", there are at least a first operation section for a specific period and a second operation section for a specific period as operation sections for which operation reception is allowed and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means. , When the first operating section is operated during a specific period, the reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the production pattern, and when the second operating section is operated during the specific period, the reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the production pattern. The corresponding post-acceptance display may be displayed so as to be visible behind the production pattern. According to such a configuration, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", even if either of the hidden predetermined period first operation section and predetermined period second operation section is operated, the display after reception will not correspond to the production pattern. ``Specific operation permissible period'' is displayed in front of it, which can suitably suggest that the operation has been accepted properly.However, in ``Specific operation permissible period'', the first operation during the specified period that is kept secret is displayed. If you operate the second operation part for a specific period among the part and the second operation part for a specific period, the after-reception display will be displayed behind the production pattern, so the after-reception display will not be displayed. This makes it difficult for the user to recognize that the operation has been accepted properly, and it is possible to suitably create a sense of tension as to whether or not the operation has been accepted properly.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 25-E", during the "predetermined operation permissible period", the operation section for which operation acceptance is permitted and is subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, and the operation section There is an operation section for which reception is allowed and is not displayed by the sample image display means, and the operation section for which operation reception is allowed and display by the sample image display means is operated. Then, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible behind the production pattern, and the operation unit that is permitted to accept the operation and is not subject to display by the simulated image display means is displayed. When operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to be visible in front of the effect pattern. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period," there is no operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and is subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means; There are at least a specific period first operating section and a specific period second operating section as operating sections that are not subject to display by the means, and when the specific period first operating section is operated, the display after reception corresponding to the operation is a production pattern. When the second operation section is operated for a specific period, the display after receiving the operation is displayed so as to be visible behind the production pattern. You can. According to such a configuration, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", when the operation part (the first operation part for the predetermined period) to be displayed by the simulated image display means is operated, the visibility of the effect pattern is reduced. While the display after reception is displayed in a way that makes it difficult to see without deteriorating the display, if the hidden operation part (second operation part for a predetermined period) is operated, even if the visibility of the production pattern is deteriorated, The post-reception display is displayed in a conspicuous manner, thereby making it easier to recognize that the operation reception has been properly performed, instead of being kept secret until then. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", even if the hidden operation parts (the first operation part for the specific period, the second operation part for the specific period) are operated, the first operation part for the specific period If you operate it, the display after reception is displayed in a way that makes it difficult to see without deteriorating the visibility of the production design, so whether or not operation reception is allowed will not be kept secret. Of course, by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, the "specific period first operation section", "specific period second operation section", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 25-E are based on the technology of the configuration 25-E. It is just a name used to explain an idea. Therefore, it means the same operation parts and operation permissible periods as "specific period first operation part", "specific period second operation part", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" in other configurations. It may also mean a different operation section or a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

[Configuration 26-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform variable display of performance symbols. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation on the operation unit is accepted during the operation permission period, a change occurs after the reception. It is also possible to display a display that mimics the operation section.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", operation reception is permitted and the above-mentioned sample image There is an operation part that is not subject to display by the display means, and when the operation part is operated, the output sound after reception is not output as one of the changes after reception, and during the "specific operation permissible period", operation reception is permitted. There is an operation section that is enabled and is not displayed by the simulated image display means, and when the operation section is operated, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. In other words, in this case, when an operation unit for which operation acceptance is allowed and is not displayed by the sample image display means is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes (specific operation permissible). Since there will be periods when the output is not output (predetermined operation permissible periods) and periods when it is not output (predetermined operation permissible periods), it can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 26-E", the "predetermined operation permissible period" is such that the operation part is permitted to accept operations and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means. There is at least a first operation section and a second operation section for a predetermined period, and when either the first operation section for a predetermined period or the second operation section for a predetermined period is operated, a change after reception occurs, but it is accepted as one of the changes after reception. The post-output sound may not be output. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", there are at least a first operation section for a specific period and a second operation section for a specific period as operation sections for which operation reception is allowed and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means. , When the first operation part is operated during a specific period, a post-acceptance change occurs, but one of them is that the post-acceptance output sound is not output, but when the second operation part is operated during a specific period, a post-acceptance change occurs. As one example, an output sound may be output after acceptance. According to such a configuration, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", even if either of the hidden predetermined period first operation part or predetermined period second operation part is operated, a change will occur after acceptance; One of the changes is that the output sound is not output after acceptance, but in the "specific operation permissible period", the specified period of the first operation part and the second operation part of the specified period that are kept secret. The post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes only when the second operation unit is operated. In other words, in this case, even if the operation section is kept secret, the player will be able to recognize that when an operation is accepted, an output sound will be output after the operation is accepted. When the first operation section is operated during a specific period or when an operation is performed within a "predetermined operation permissible period", it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, thereby creating a feeling of tension. It can now be expected to be maintained properly.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 26-E", during the "predetermined operation permissible period", the operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and is subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, and the operation There is an operation unit for which reception is allowed and is not displayed by the sample image display means, and an operation unit for which operation reception is allowed and displayed by the sample image display unit is operated. As one of the post-acceptance changes, a post-acceptance output sound is output, and the post-acceptance change occurs when an operation unit that is deemed to be acceptable for operation acceptance and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means is operated. It may be arranged so that no output sound is output after reception. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period," there is no operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and is subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means; There are at least a specific period first operating section and a specific period second operating section as operating sections that are not subject to display by means, and when the specified period first operating section is operated, a change occurs after acceptance, but acceptance is one of them. The post-acceptance output sound may not be output, and the post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes when the second operation section is operated during the specific period. According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permissible period", if the hidden operation unit is operated, changes will occur after reception, but one of them is that the output sound will not be output after reception. , it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted, thereby making it difficult to recognize that an operation opportunity has been given to the operation section. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", when operating the hidden operation part, the output sound after reception is output as one of the changes after reception (second operation part for a specific period), and after reception One of the changes is that the output sound is not output after acceptance (first operation section for a specific period). Therefore, even if multiple operation units are hidden, if an output sound is output after acceptance (second operation unit for a specific period), it is a good indication that an operation opportunity was secretly provided. This can be expected to avoid a situation in which none of the players notice that a hidden button has occurred. On the other hand, the confidentiality of the first operating section for a specific period of the "first operating section for a specific period" and the "second operating section for a specific period" can be further increased, and the game enjoyment can be improved. It can be expected that this will lead to improved performance.

Further, the first operating section for the specific period is used as "an operating section for which operation reception is permitted and is not subject to display by the above-mentioned simulated image display means" during the predetermined operation permissible period, and the second operating section for the specific period is If it is used as the "operation unit for which operation acceptance is permitted and is subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means" during the predetermined operation permissible period, any operation unit will be hidden during the "specific operation permissible period". In order to determine whether or not a certain operation is being performed, it is possible to use the effect during the "predetermined operation permissible period" as a hint.

Note that the "first operation section for a specific period", "second operation section for a specific period", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 26-E are based on the technology of the configuration 26-E. It is just a name used to explain an idea. Therefore, it means the same operation parts and operation permissible periods as "specific period first operation part", "specific period second operation part", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" in other configurations. It may also mean a different operation section or a different operation permissible period. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

[Configuration 27-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulation image display means).

In this regard, during the operation permissible period of the pachinko machine 1, there are cases where it is permitted to accept multiple operations on an operation part that is not displayed by the above-mentioned sample image display means. By continuing to maintain the operated state, the operation reception can be performed multiple times, which alleviates the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation part being hidden, and suppresses a decline in gaming interest. can be expected to.

Furthermore, as will be described later, during the operation permissible period, there are cases where it is permissible to accept multiple operations for an operation unit that is not displayed by the above-mentioned sample image display means. Just by continuing to maintain the state, the operation may be accepted multiple times, or the operation may not be accepted multiple times. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when operating an operation section that is not displayed by the image display means.

Furthermore, as will be described later, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as the operation permissible period, and during the specific operation permissible period, multiple operations can be accepted even though they are not displayed by the sample image display means. There are at least a first operating section and a second operating section as the operating sections, and when the first operating section is kept in the operated state, the operation reception is not made multiple times, and the second operating section is in the operated state. If the maintenance is continued, the operation reception may be made multiple times. Then, the number of times that an operation can be accepted when only the first operation part is continuously and repeatedly operated in a specific operation permissible period is the same as the number of times that operation can be accepted when only the second operation part is continuously and repeatedly operated during a specific operation permissible period. The number of times the operation can be accepted may be smaller than the number of times that the operation can be accepted. In other words, in this case, during a specific operation permissible period, the first operation section on the side where the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated is required more than the second operation section on the side where the so-called auto-repeat function is activated. Since the number of consecutive hits (the number of consecutive operations) required is reduced, it can be expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game. Here, "operation acceptance" means, for example, when this is used as an opportunity to cause visual changes after acceptance (changes in display, output of output sound after acceptance, changes in lamp light emission, etc.). are doing. Therefore, if an operation is detected internally but does not cause any visible change after reception (even if some internal processing is performed (for example, extending the time that the display is maintained after reception)) , it cannot be said that "the operation is accepted."

The "specific operation permissible period", "first operation section", and "second operation section" related to the configuration 27-E are names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 27-E. It's nothing more than that. Therefore, the "specific operation permissible period", "first operation part", and "second operation part" in other configurations may mean the same operation part or operation permissible period, or may mean different operations. It may also mean a period of time or an allowable period of operation. Further, it may mean the same "operation unit" or "operation tolerance period" as the operation unit or operation tolerance period with different names.

[Configuration 28-E]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period in which reception of an operation on the operation part is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation part during the operation permissible period, after the reception is accepted. can cause change. Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulation image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permissible period and a specific operation permissible period are prepared as the types of operation permissible periods, and in the "predetermined operation permissible period", multiple operation receptions are permissible. There is an operation section that is displayed by the above-mentioned sample image display means, and when an operation is performed on the operation section, the predetermined operation permissible period can be terminated by the operation. In the "specific operation permissible period", multiple operation acceptance is allowed, but there is an operation part that is not subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means, and when an operation is performed on the operation part, , the specific operation permissible period is not terminated due to the operation. According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to an operation unit that is not displayed by the sample image display means, no changes are made after the acceptance until the player is convinced that the operation acceptance has been properly accepted. Even though it is a hidden button, it reduces the feeling of anxiety such as whether or not an operation opportunity has been given or whether or not the operation has been accepted properly. things can now be expected.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", there is one or more operation sections for which multiple operations can be accepted and are subject to display by the above-mentioned sample image display means. When an operation is performed, the specified operation permissible period can be terminated by that operation.In the "specific operation permissible period", multiple operation receptions are permissible, but the above-mentioned There are at least a first operating section and a second operating section as operating sections that are not subject to display by the image display means, but even if either of the first operating section or the second operating section is operated, the The specific operation permissible period may never end. According to such a configuration, unlike a situation in which there is an operation section to be displayed by the sample image display means (predetermined operation permission period), a situation in which there are multiple hidden buttons (specific operation permission period) In this case, when investigating which operation parts are secretly enabled, the player may use various operation parts without considering the risk of the specific operation permissible period being terminated unintentionally. You will be able to operate with peace of mind.

Also, as will be explained later, in the "prescribed operation permissible period", there are both operation parts whose predetermined operation permissible period ends when an operation is performed, and operation parts whose predetermined operation permissible period does not end when an operation is performed. You can also do this.

Also, as will be described later, in the "specific operation permissible period", when the first operation unit is operated, a change after the first side specific operation according to the operation can be caused as one of a plurality of first side aspects. However, if the first operation part is operated again while the "special first side mode" is occurring among the plurality of first side modes, the "special first side mode" is changed as a change after the first side specific operation. A first side aspect that is different from "Aspect" does not newly occur, and when the second operation section is operated, the change after the second side specific operation according to the operation is changed to any one of the plurality of second side aspects. However, if the second operation part is operated again while the "special second side mode" is occurring among the plurality of second side modes, " A new second side aspect different from the "special second side aspect" may not be created. According to such a configuration, when the first operation section is being operated, when the "special first side mode" appears, the user can understand that there is no need to operate the first operation section any further. It becomes possible to safely shift from the "state of operating the first operating section" to the "state of operating the second operating section". In addition, when the second operation section is being operated, when the "special second side mode" appears, it is possible to understand that there is no need to operate the second operation section any further. It becomes possible to safely shift from the state of "operating" to the "state of operating the first operating section."

Also, as will be described later, in the "specific operation permissible period", when the first operation unit is operated, a change after the first side specific operation according to the operation can be caused as one of a plurality of first side aspects. However, if the first operation unit is operated again while the "special first side mode" is occurring among the plurality of first side modes, the "special first side mode" that was in the execution state until then is ”, and the “special first side mode” is restarted as a change after the first side specific operation, and when the second operation section is operated, the first side mode corresponding to the operation is started again. The change after the second side specific operation can be caused as any of a plurality of second side modes, but if the second operation part is generated while the "special second side mode" is occurring among the plurality of second side modes. When the operation is performed again, the "special second side mode" which was in the execution state until then may be configured not to change at least visually. According to such a configuration, it is possible to repeatedly check the "special first side mode" when operating the first operating section, whereas it is possible to repeatedly check the "special first side mode" when operating the second operating section. Since it is no longer possible to repeatedly check the side mode, it is desirable to provide the above-mentioned effect of providing a sense of security, while also providing a sense of tension when operating the second operating section. be expected to do so.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, if a reception acceptance period (reception period) occurs in which an opportunity to operate the operation unit is given based on the judgment result (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.), the A related operation-related display (for example, a simulated image display of the operation receiver, etc.) is displayed, but regarding the operation-related display (for example, a simulated image display of the operation receiver, etc.), the periphery of the simulated image display It may be displayed as an integrated image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the image. Regarding such integrated image display, there is an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of a preview judgment. It is desirable to display this in both the operation reception performance (reception period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. .

The "integrated image display" is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details are omitted, but for example, the peripheral decoration A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the image. Furthermore, multiple modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared for the "integrated image display", and the image is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permissible period (reception period) occurs, it is indicated that the operation reception is allowed or will be in the state where the operation reception is allowed. An acceptance permission sound may be output audibly, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform an operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible period (reception period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). , a sound in which the acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that will not be output under a situation where a performance that has nothing to do with the reception permissible period (reception period) is being performed.

By the way, as mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, the types (for example, conversation preview, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc.) as changes after acceptance (for example, display after acceptance, output sound after acceptance, etc.) that appear when an acceptance is accepted. We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception presentations) with different reception periods (e.g.). Generation conditions are determined for each reception period, and when any one of these generation conditions is satisfied, a reception period of the type corresponding to the satisfied generation condition can be generated.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes a plurality of operation sections (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) as operation sections that are operated by the player. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, it is possible to generate a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) in which not only one operation section but several (multiple) operation sections are allowed to accept operations. It is said that

First, with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277, a basic example of performance when such a multiple operation permissible period occurs will be described. However, the configurations described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277 are conceptual to facilitate understanding of the technical features of the present application, and are not essential configurations.

FIG. 275 shows the acceptance period (multiple operation 276 is a time chart illustrating an example of the performance content when an operation is performed on the "operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the acceptance period after the acceptance period (acceptable period) occurs, and FIG. is a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) in which "operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" are allowed to accept operations as operation parts. ) is generated and an operation is performed on "operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the corresponding reception period. It is a presentation diagram showing an example of presentation contents when a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) occurs.

Now, as shown in FIG. 275(c) and FIG. 276(c), for example, if a predetermined condition is satisfied at timing T1 within symbol variation, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a reception period ("Fig. 277(a)”). As a result, when an action (operation) is performed by the player within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance change will occur in accordance with the operation (operation acceptance).

However, this acceptance period is the acceptance period during which both "operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" are allowed to be in a state where operations can be accepted. The effect display device 1600 displays an operation-related display A that prompts an operation on the operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), and an operation-related display A that prompts an operation on the operation section B (here, the operation section 5001). Buttons 410) are displayed with operation-related displays B (see FIGS. 275(d) and (e), FIGS. 276(d) and (e), and FIG. 277(a), etc.). ).

Moreover, during the reception period, operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to accept only one operation, whereas operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations. It is now acceptable to accept multiple operations.

Therefore, for example, if an operation is performed on the operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) at timing T2 (see FIG. 275) within the reception period, the After the reception, a change is caused (see FIG. 275(f) and FIG. 277(b11a), (b11b)), (b12a), (b12b))), and processing is performed to end the reception period itself. Become. In this example, one of the post-reception changes is the post-reception display C (which corresponds to FIGS. 277 (b11a) and (b12a) and has low expectations) and the post-reception display D ( This corresponds to FIG. 277 (b11b) and (b12b), and either one (high expectation level) is displayed.

On the other hand, for example, if an operation is performed on the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) at timing T3 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, the 276 (f) and FIG. 277 (b11a), (b11b)), (b12a), (b12b)). At this time, in this example, the post-acceptance display A1 (first aspect) is displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes (see FIG. 277 (b21)). However, since the operation part B (here, the operation button 410) "allows multiple operations to be accepted within the applicable acceptance period," the acceptance period will end based on the first operation. It never happens.

Next, for example, if a second operation is performed on the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) at timing T4 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception) A corresponding change is made after acceptance (see FIG. 276(f) and FIG. 277(b22)). At this time, in this example, the post-acceptance display A2 (second aspect) is displayed as one of the post-acceptance changes (see FIG. 277 (b22)). However, in this example, even when the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is operated for the second time, the acceptance period is not terminated based on this.

Then, for example, if the third operation is performed on the operation section B (here, the operation button 410) at timing T5 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception ) (see FIG. 276(f) and FIG. 277(b23a), (b23b), (b24a), (b24b)), and performs processing to end the corresponding acceptance period itself. That will happen. In this example, one of the post-reception changes is the post-reception display C (which corresponds to FIGS. 277 (b23a) and (b24a) and has a low expectation level) and the post-reception display D ( This corresponds to FIG. 277 (b23b) and (b24b), and one of the high expectation levels is displayed.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIG. 277, if you want to defeat the enemy character with just one operation, you only need to operate the operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001), and the enemy character If you want to aim to defeat the enemy by multiple operations, you can simply operate the operation part B (in this case, the operation button 410).

Note that here, the effect is the same (success or failure of defeat) for the operation on operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation on operation part B (here, the operation button 410). However, for example, when operating the operating part A (here, the sword decoration 5001), "the effect result regarding the success or failure of defeating the enemy character" appears, and when operating the operating part B (here, the operating button 410), the "enemy character" appears. Different display results may be displayed, such as displaying a "representation result regarding the success or failure of leaving (escape) from the battle scene with the character." Furthermore, in this example, the "sword decoration body 5001" is used as the operation part A, and the "operation button 410" is used as the operation part B, but it may be realized by adopting the opposite operation parts. .

By the way, during such a multiple operation permissible period, for example, a user may start an operation on operation part B (in this case, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, but feel anxious because the final result does not appear. In the middle of the multiple operation permissible period, switch from "operation on operation part B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)". It is assumed that there will be a case where an attempt is made to advance the performance, and in this case, there is a problem as to what kind of processing should be performed. In addition, even if all of the multiple operation units are prepared as “operation units that can accept only one operation” during the multiple operation permissible period, for example, the game cannot be played within the multiple operation permissible period. If there is no operation by a person, there is the issue of which operation part to activate the above-mentioned "automatic button function", and in addition, there is the issue of the so-called automatic button function to improve the enjoyment of the game. There are a variety of issues, including whether to enable the system.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-E" to "Configuration 27-E" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, in order to realize these inventions, it is only necessary to appropriately provide only necessary components among the respective components described below, and it is not necessary to provide all of them. For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (intended effect), there may not necessarily be an acceptance period (multiple operation permissible period) during which some (plural) operation units can be operated. It may be something that does not occur (an acceptance period in which only one operation unit is allowed to accept operations), or it may be something that does not have an operation unit that can accept multiple operations. , it may not be equipped with an operation section that allows only one operation reception, or it may not be equipped with an automatic button function or an automatic repeated press function. Further, each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 274 may not necessarily be provided, or may be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-E" to "Configuration 27-E" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do.

First, with reference to FIGS. 278 to 295, of the plurality of reception periods, the 1F reception period, 2F reception period, 3F reception period, 4F reception period, and 5F reception period will be explained. shall be. Note that each reception period mentioned above with reference to Figure 277 is prepared as a separate reception period from the 1F reception period, 2F reception period, 3F reception period, 4F reception period, and 5F reception period. It may be realized as one of the 1F reception period, 2F reception period, 3F reception period, 4F reception period, and 5F reception period. good. Furthermore, in order to realize each of the inventions described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 277. You may choose not to prepare.

FIG. 278 is a time chart illustrating an example of the content of the performance when the ``condition 1F'' is satisfied as the generation condition, the 1F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 279 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the 1F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the 1F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1st F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the first F variation pattern. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1st F variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1F variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "1st F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 278(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "1st F variation pattern", timing te2 has arrived when the 1F time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. Based on (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 1F"), "reception regarding changes after 1F reception (display UA, UB after 1F reception, sound output after 1F reception, etc.)" is permitted. The above-mentioned 1F acceptance period (validity period) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 281(b)).

Here, during the 1F reception period according to this embodiment, the 1F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated only once until the 1F reception period ends. Only the reception is allowed, and the 1F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept the operation multiple times until the 1F reception period ends. (multiple operation permissible period).

That is, as described above, in such a 1F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), for example, although an operation is started on the 1F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) which is allowed to be operated multiple times, The player feels anxious because the final result display does not appear, and in the middle of the 1F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), the player decides to perform an operation on the 1F operation section B (here, operation button 410). '' to ``operation on the first F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' to advance the performance.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when generating such a 1F reception period, first, a precursor effect display indicating that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 1F reception period will occur) is displayed. is executable.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when timing te1 arrives before the first F reception period occurs, the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. 278(d), FIG. 279(d), and FIG. 281(a) ), the execution of the "1st F portent effect display ZFD" is started as the foreshadow effect display. As shown in FIGS. 278(d), 279(d), and 281(a), (b), this "1st F portent effect display ZFD" displays 1st F operation related displays A and B. It is displayed so that it straddles before and after the timing.

That is, in this production example, when the 1F reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 278, 279, and 281(b), (c), The "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can only appear when the operation acceptance for the decoration object 5001) is allowed or when the operation acceptance is allowed. , "1F operation-related information" that can only appear when the operation reception on the 1F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. Display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. In addition, in this production example, the timing at which the 1st F reception period occurs, "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing of For example, "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 1st F omen effect display ZFD is displayed, and The display may be started before the timing at which the 1F reception period occurs, so that the display straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may be started with a delay from the timing when the 1st F reception period occurs. You can.

In this example, "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are "1st F operation part A (here, sword decoration object)". 5001) (reference image display)" and "display imitation 1F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410) (reference image display)". The displayed content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 281(b), "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are different from "1st F omen effect". While the "display ZFD" is being displayed, the display starts so as to overlap with the back side of the "1st F omen effect display ZFD".

In addition, "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . That is, as mentioned above, during the 1F reception period, the 1F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001 )" and a "1st F operating section B (here, operating button 410)" which is capable of accepting multiple operations are provided.

Regarding the "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the "portion (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the 1st F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is shown in the figure. 280(A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in FIGS. 280(B) to 280(D)" as one periodic change. Changes appear repeatedly in a manner that requires a predetermined period of 1F time A.

Regarding the "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "the part (button drawing image BMG) in which the operation receiving part of the 1st F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is imitated is shown in FIG. 280. 280(a) and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in FIGS. 280(b) to (d)" is one periodic change. appears repeatedly in a manner that requires a predetermined period of 1F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 1F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 280 and 281, "1F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" and "1F operation part B (here, the operation button 410), etc., appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the cycle 1F time A and the cycle 1F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since the time is set to be longer than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the 3F reception period described below, the "operation reception section" is It will depict how it moves slowly up and down its range of motion.

In addition, when "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing te2 when the 1st F reception period occurs. , it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for the timing te2 when the first F reception period occurs. That is, in this case, "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are as shown in FIG. 280(A) until timing te2 arrives. , (a) are maintained.

In this example, the “1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and the “1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” The display starts in a form that appears behind the "1st F portent effect display ZFD" while the "1st F portent effect display ZFD" is being displayed, and its periodic change begins. Note that the display range of the first F omen effect display ZED is designed to be reduced as time passes, as shown in FIGS. 281(a) and 281(b). Therefore, "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed while the 1st F omen effect display ZFD is being displayed in this manner. will be started.

Then, as a result of the display range of the 1F precursor effect display ZFD being reduced in this way, when the 1F precursor effect display ZFD is hidden, as shown in FIG. 281(c), "1F operation The visibility of the related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG) is improved. The situation shown in Figure 281(c) functions as an explanation screen regarding the operation effect (defeat 100 enemies), and when this is completed, the effect shown in Figure 281(d) will appear. become. Note that the "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are not displayed in FIGS. 279(e) and (279) unless the player accepts the operation. As shown in f), each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (period 1F time A, period 1F time B) continues to progress.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 278 and 281, at timing te2A (timing shown in FIG. 281(e)) within the 1F reception period, "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made for the first operation. Note that in this example, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the invention is not limited to this, and ``operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal'' may be realized using other methods. You can.

That is, in the 1st F reception period according to this embodiment, whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low can be suggested by "whether or not you can defeat 100 enemies", and the operation reception is If an operation is performed on "1st F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" which is allowed multiple times, the number of remaining enemies may decrease each time the operation is performed. This shows that the production can progress.

In this example, at timing te2A (timing shown in FIG. 281(e)) within the 1F reception period, the first operation reception is made for "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 278(i), (k), and 281(e), "75 bodies remaining" is displayed as the 1F post-reception display UB1, and the 1F post-reception output sound B is displayed. is output audibly. However, such "change B after 1F reception" is different from these performance changes (display after 1F reception, output sound after 1F reception), including the second and subsequent operations described below. It is also possible to further perform a performance change (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting mode of a performance lamp, etc.). Alternatively, such "Change B after 1F reception" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple production elements, but with any one of the production elements described above (for example, a production that changes the lighting mode of the production lamp). It may be realized only by (change).

In addition, among the "1st F post-reception change B" in response to the first operation reception on the "1st F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)", the execution time of the 1F post-reception output sound B is the corresponding The execution time of the 1F post-reception display UB1 is set longer than the time set as the reception period, whereas the time period is shorter than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation reception on the "1st F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is the same as the previous operation on the "1st F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be done while the corresponding 1F post-reception display UB is being displayed.

In this example, at timing te2B (timing shown in FIG. 281(f)) within the 1F reception period, the second operation is performed on "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". This assumes the case where When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 278(i), (k), and 281(f), "65 bodies remaining" is displayed as the 1F post-reception display UB2, and the After reception on the 1st floor, output sound B is audibly output. Note that here, the first operation is performed on the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" and the case when the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated for the first time. Although the same sound is output as the 1F post-acceptance output sound B when the second and subsequent operations are performed, different sounds may be output.

In this example, at timing te2C (timing shown in FIG. 281(g)) within the 1F reception period, the third operation is performed on "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". This assumes the case where However, when the third operation is performed, a new display (aspect) appears as the 1F post-reception display UB, as shown in FIGS. 278(i), (k), and 281(g). , after receiving the first F, no new sound is audibly output as the output sound B.

In this example, if the "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) within the 1F reception period, We have made it so that "a new display does not appear as the display UB after the 1F reception, or some new sound is newly output as the output sound B after the 1F reception", but instead of this, the 1F reception A determination will be made when an operation is performed on the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the period, and based on the result of this determination, a new UB will be displayed as the 1F post-reception display UB. It may also be arranged such that no display is performed, or no sound is audibly output as the output sound B after the first F reception. The point is that such an event (despite operating the "1st F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 1F reception period, a new display is displayed as the display UB after the 1F reception) It is only necessary that the sound is generated only when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as mentioned above, even though an operation is performed on "1st F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 1F reception period, the post-reception display or reception according to the operation If there is a situation where the output sound does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should leave the "1st F operation section B (here, operation button 410) as it is." I wonder if it'll be okay if I just keep operating the system?'' This can leave you feeling anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time of the first F reception period decreases.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 278 and 281, the "initial game strategy (timing te2A to te2C )", the player can advance the performance by operating the "1st F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" side, which allows the final performance result to appear with just one operation. This assumes the case where you switch to a "new gaming strategy" that you are aiming for.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 278(a), (h), and (i), the 1F post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" While UB (in this case, "65 bodies remaining") is displayed, at timing te2D (timing shown in FIG. 281(h)) within the 1F reception period, "1F operation section A (here") is displayed. Here, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the sword decoration object 5001).

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "1st F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing te2D (timing shown in FIG. 281(h)) within the 1F reception period, , change A occurs after the first F reception. For example, as one of the changes A after the 1F reception, first, the 1F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 278(a) and 278(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 278(h), (k), and FIG. 281(h), the ``1st F reception output "Sound A" is audibly output, and "Sound A" is output audibly, and a "Sound A" is output that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "1st F operation part A (here, the sword decoration object 5001)". 1F effect display EF” is displayed.

Here, regarding the "1st F reception output sound A" when an operation is performed on the "1F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the above-mentioned "1F reception output sound A" is This sound is audibly output as a sound different from "sound B". In addition, if an operation is performed on the "1st F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 1F reception period, the 1F effect display EF will always be displayed in the same manner (such as bonuses such as jackpots). (see FIG. 281(h)) is displayed, which does not indicate the expectation level to be assigned.

In this regard, the 1st F effect display EF according to this production example includes "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "1F operation related display B (button The display will start in a situation where the "Study image BMG)" and the 1F post-reception display UB are not in a hidden state, and the "1F operation section A" on the operated side (here, sword decoration 5001)" is not only displayed so that it appears to overlap from the front, but also the side that is not being operated. The "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" corresponding to the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is also displayed so that it appears to overlap from the front. It has become.

That is, in this case, both "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are "1st F operation part A (here, sword decoration The first F effect display EF corresponding to the operation of the body 5001) makes it difficult to see. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 1F reception period, the "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is displayed based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to see is not displayed. In addition, during the 1F reception period, the "1F post-reception display UB" corresponding to the operation on the "1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is also shown in FIGS. 281(e) to (g). Therefore, it is not displayed overlapping the front side of "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" or "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)".

Therefore, during the 1F reception period, when the ``1F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' is operated, the ``1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and the ``1F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' are displayed. All of the "operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are made difficult to see by other images (first F effect display EF), but when the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated. In some cases, this may not cause ``1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' to become difficult to see or ``1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)'' to be difficult to see. It has become. In this example, the "first F effect display EF" changes its form so that the display range becomes smaller over time.

After this, as shown in FIG. 278(h) and FIG. 281(i), while the "1st F effect display EF" is displayed, the "1st F operation section A (here, the sword decoration The 1F post-reception display UA is displayed in response to the operation on the body 5001). In this example, the display UA after the reception on the 1st floor shows "a mode in which three decorative patterns are arranged in a row", but it may also be displayed in a "state in which three decorative patterns are not arranged in a row". You can. The 1st F post-reception display UA is displayed behind the "1st F effect display EF", and when the "1st F effect display EF" is hidden, visibility is reduced. You will start to improve.

In this example, the "1st F post-reception display UA" is set to start displaying while the "1st F effect display EF" is being displayed, so that the "1st F effect display EF" is changed to the "1st F effect display EF". It was decided that the display would span over the period in which "Post-reception display UB" is displayed and the period in which "1F Post-reception display UA" is displayed. This, together with the fact that no effect is displayed when the aspect of the "1st F post-reception display UB" changes (FIGS. 281(e) and (f)), results in poor performance due to operations on different operating sections. It can be expected that this will suitably indicate that the

The "1st F post-reception display UA" may be displayed at the same timing as the "1st F effect display EF". However, in this case as well, the "1st F post-reception display UA" will be displayed so as to overlap behind the "1st F effect display EF", and the "1st F effect display EF" will be hidden. When displayed, visibility improves.

In addition, during the 1st F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Sometimes, based on this, periodic changes that had previously appeared in "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" (see Figure 280) It continues without being hidden (ending, interrupting, switching cycles, etc.). That is, during the 1F reception period, periodic changes in "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are different from "1F operation section B ( Here, the display mode does not change before and after an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (operation that does not end the acceptance period), and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted for the ``1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period), the 1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and The "1F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (cycle 1F time A, cycle 1F time B).

On the other hand, during the 1F reception period, as shown in FIG. 278 and FIGS. Based on this, periodic changes in "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are hidden. Here, by hiding "1st F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1st F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, we will hide their periodic changes. We are planning to do so.

Further, in this example, while the first F reception period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease over time, but this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, during the 1F reception period, the 1F operation section B (here, Even if you continue to operate (press) the ``operation button 410'', the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the operation will be automatically accepted at predetermined intervals) (auto continuous press). The function is not activated (see FIG. 278(b)). In this case, within the 1F reception period, multiple operations are performed on the ``1F operation section B (here, operation button 410)'' corresponding to the ``1F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)''. Needless to say, if the player wishes to accept the request, he or she must repeatedly operate (press) the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 278(c), the 1F reception period originally continues until timing te3 arrives when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period). It will be terminated based on this. In this respect, the 1F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 279, if an operation to end the reception period is not received during the 1F reception period until timing te3 arrives, the 1F reception period is only terminated, and the change A after the 1st F reception that appears when an operation is performed on the ``1st F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' and the ``1st F operation part B ( Here, neither the 1F post-reception change B that appears when the operation button 410) is operated is executed.

In addition, when the 1F reception period occurs, "permission sound C" is audibly output as the 1F reception permission sound that indicates that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted. (See FIGS. 278 and 279). During the 1F reception period, while the "acceptable sound C" is audibly output, the "1F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated and the "1F operation section B (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated. , operation button 410)", the "permissible sound C" will not be interrupted. However, when the 1F acceptance period occurs, the acceptance permission sound may not necessarily be audibly output. Further, the first F omen effect display ZFD may not necessarily be executed. Also, when an operation is accepted within the 1st floor reception period, it is sufficient that some kind of change occurs after the reception, and for example, these are not necessarily performed for the display after the 1st floor reception or the output sound after the 1st floor reception. You can do it like this.

Incidentally, the "acceptance acceptance sound" is different from the sound that is output in response to the precursor effect display (the precursor effect sound). Since the "harbinger effect sound" is output in response to the foretelling effect display, it is normally outputted in advance of the acceptance permission sound. Therefore, the mode of the output sound of the "harbinger effect sound" changes depending on the mode of the foreshadowing effect display, but the "acceptance permissible sound" is the same as specified (1) regardless of the mode of the omen effect display. It can be output in various formats.

FIG. 282 is a time chart illustrating an example of the performance content when the above generation condition "Condition 2F" is satisfied, the 2nd F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 283 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the second F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIGS. 285 and 286 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the second F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the second F fluctuation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2nd F variation pattern, sound output according to the 2nd F variation pattern (normal BGM playback during non-reach), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "2nd F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 282(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "2nd F variation pattern", timing tf2 has arrived when the 2nd F time has passed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 2F"), "reception regarding changes after 2F reception (display UA, UB after 2F reception, sound output after 2F reception, etc.)" is permitted. The second F acceptance period (validity period) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 285(b)).

Here, also in the second F reception period according to this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the second F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is Only one operation reception is allowed until the corresponding 2F reception period ends, and the 2F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not operated until the corresponding 2F reception period ends. During this period, multiple operations are allowed (multiple operations allowed period). In this example, the "1st F operation part A" used in the 1F reception period and the "2nd F operation part A" used in the 2F reception period are the same operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001). However, different operation units may be used. In addition, the "1st F operation part B" used in the 1F reception period and the "2nd F operation part B" used in the 2F reception period are also the same operation part (here, the operation button 410), but they are different from each other. It may be a different operation section.

That is, the 2nd F reception period (multiple operation permissible period) is similar to the above-mentioned 1F reception period. Although the game has started, the player feels uneasy because the final results are not displayed, and in the middle of the 2nd F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button It is assumed that there will be a case where the user attempts to advance the performance by switching from the "operation on the second F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" to the "operation on the second F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 2nd F reception period is to be generated, first, a foreshadowing display is performed to indicate that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 2nd F reception period will occur). It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when timing tf1 arrives before the second F reception period occurs, the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. 282(d), FIG. ), the execution of the "2nd F portent effect display ZFD" is started as the foreshadow effect display. This "2nd F portent effect display ZFD" displays 2nd F operation related displays A and B, as shown in FIGS. 282(d), 283(d), and 285(a), (b). It is displayed so that it straddles the timing before and after the timing.

That is, in this production example, even when the second F reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 282, 283, and 285 (b) and (c), the second ``Second F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' that can only appear when the operation reception for the decoration object 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. , "Second-F operation-related information" that can only appear when the operation reception on the second-F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. Display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. In addition, in this production example, the timing at which the 2nd F reception period occurs, "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing of For example, "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 2nd F omen effect display ZFD is displayed, and The display may be started before the timing at which the second F reception period occurs, and the display may be performed in a manner that straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may be started with a delay from the timing when the 2nd F reception period occurs. You can.

In this example, "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are "2nd F operation part A (here, sword decoration object)". 5001) (simulated image display)” and “display imitated 2F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410) (simulated image display)”. The displayed content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 285(b), "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are "2nd F omen effect Display ZFD" is being displayed, and the display starts so as to overlap with the rear side of the "2nd F precursor effect display ZFD".

In addition, "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . That is, as mentioned above, during the 2nd F reception period, the 2nd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001 )" and a "second F operating section B (here, operating button 410)" which is capable of accepting multiple operations are provided.

Regarding the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the "portion (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the 2nd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is shown in the figure. 284(A), and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in FIGS. 284(B) to (D). Changes appear repeatedly in a manner that requires a predetermined period of 2F time A.

Regarding the "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", the "portion (button drawing image BMG) in which the operation receiving part of the 2nd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is imitated is shown in FIG. 284(a) and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in FIGS. 284(b) to (d). appears repeatedly in a manner that requires a predetermined period of 2F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 2nd F reception period, as shown in FIGS. (here, the operation button 410), etc., appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the cycle 2F time A and the cycle 2F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since it is set as a longer time than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the 3F reception period described below, the 2F reception period is similar to the 3F reception period as well as the 1F reception period described above. In comparison, the "operation receiver" is depicted moving slowly up and down its movable range. The period 2F time A and the period 2F time B may be set to be the same as the period 1F time A and the period 1F time B, respectively.

In addition, when the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing tf2 when the 2nd F reception period occurs. , it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for the timing tf2 when the second F acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are as shown in FIG. 284 (A) until timing tf2 arrives. , (a) are maintained.

In this example, the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are the The display starts appearing behind the "2nd F portent effect display ZFD" while the "2nd F portent effect display ZFD" is being displayed, and its periodic change begins. Note that the display range of the second F precursor effect display ZED is designed to be reduced as time passes, as shown in FIGS. 285(a) to 285(d).

In addition, the "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" according to this example is related to the "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)". It is executed by both "Aspect ZFD-1" which is displayed so as to overlap on the front side, and "Aspect ZFD-2" which is displayed so as to overlap on the rear side thereof. . Therefore, "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are "mode ZFD-1" of "2nd F omen effect display ZFD". In relation to this, it is displayed behind it, but in relation to "Aspect ZFD-2" of the "2nd F omen effect display ZFD", it is displayed in front of it. Note that embodiment ZFD-2 may not necessarily be provided.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 282 to 286, the "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" according to this example starts displaying before the timing tf2 when the 2nd F reception period occurs, and Even when the timing tf3 at which the set time set for the reception period has elapsed (the timing tf3 at which the second floor reception period ends without any operation by the player), it remains hidden. This allows the display to continue.

However, since the display of "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" has started, the reduction rate of the display area of "Aspect ZFD-1" is set to be greater than that of "Aspect ZFD-2". . As a result, even when the "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" is displayed (continuously), "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button The visibility of the "sample image BMG)" will gradually become better. Note that the display area reduction rate of “Aspect ZFD-1” may be “100%”, and the display area reduction rate of “Aspect ZFD-2” may be “0%”.

By the way, in the second F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, "Hero YS" and "Magician MT" facing the BOSS character are respectively displayed on the effect display device 1600. "Hero YS" is used as a character that moves according to the operation on "2nd F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)", and "Magician MT" is used as a character that moves in response to the operation on "2nd F operation part B". (Here, the operation button 410) is used as a character that moves in response to an operation.

More specifically, if an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 2nd F reception period, "the hero YS will be notified by the BOSS based on the one-time operation reception. The system provides effects such as "whether you can defeat the character or not", and depending on the result, whether the expectation level of jackpot is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%"). may be suggested.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 2nd F reception period, an effect such as "Is it possible to escape (escape) from the BOSS battle?" sex is now provided. That is, when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 2nd F reception period, the magic value ("magic" decoration display) displayed at the lower right of the display screen is The painted area) can be increased, and when the magical power value is full, the wizard MT casts a spell and successfully escapes from the BOSS battle. Then, when the player succeeds in leaving (escape) in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation level of the jackpot is higher (even "100%") than when the player is not successful.

In the 2nd F reception period related to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "2nd F operation related display A", "2nd F operation related display B", "Hero YS", "Wizard MT", "BOSS character" Most of them are covered by the fog expressed by the ``2nd F omen effect display ZFD'', and the situation is said to be such that the entire picture cannot be recognized (a situation close to secrecy). As mentioned above, the fog expressed by such "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" continues to be displayed even at timing tf3 when the set time as the 2nd F reception period has elapsed. It is.

However, as mentioned above, the fog expressed by the "2nd F portent effect display ZFD" is designed to reduce its display area as time passes, so the "2nd F operation related display A" The visibility of "2nd F operation related display B", "Hero YS", "Magician MT", "BOSS character", etc. will be gradually improved.

In particular, in this production example, the fog expressed by the "2nd F omen production display ZFD" includes the fog expressed by the above-mentioned "aspect ZFD-1" and the fog expressed by the above-mentioned "aspect ZFD-2". There is fog. In this regard, since we decided to make the reduction rate of the fog display area expressed by "Aspect ZFD-1" larger than the reduction rate of the fog display area expressed by "Aspect ZFD-2," During the 2F reception period, while ensuring that the fog expressed by the ``2nd F portent effect display ZFD'' remains for a long time, we also made improvements to the visibility of ``2nd F operation related display A'' and ``2nd F operation related display B.'' This can be suitably improved.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 282 and 285, at timing tf2A (timing shown in FIG. 285(c)) within the 2nd F reception period, "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made for the first operation. In this example as well, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal; however, the invention is not limited to this, and ``operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal'' may be realized using other methods. You can.

In this example, at timing tf2A (timing shown in FIG. 285(c)) within the second F reception period, the first operation is accepted for "second F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 282(i), (k) and FIG. 285(c), as one of the changes B after receiving the second ``A depiction of the area) increasing (the magic value changes from ``0'' to ``1'')'' and ``A depiction of a wizard MT saving MP'' are now available (after the reception on the 2nd floor). Display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 2nd F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound will be output audibly. (See FIG. 282(k)). In other words, in this case, the "magician MT" will be depicted secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such operations multiple times, Because the response (performance) is low, it can arouse feelings of anxiety such as ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "2nd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is too low during the 2nd F reception period, the interest in the game may be reduced. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, the 2nd F reception display UB ("magic power value (" "Drawing where the area filled in against the decorative display increases" and "Drawing where the wizard MT is saving MP", etc. It is set so that it is not displayed, and when it overlaps, it is displayed in front of it. In addition, in this production example, there are "Aspect ZFD-1" and "Aspect ZFD-2" as the "2nd F omen production display ZFD", but for both of them, the 2nd F omen effect display ZFD is displayed so that it appears to overlap on the front side. The 2F display UB is displayed after reception. According to such a configuration, although the output sound is not audible after reception, which arouses a feeling of anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue this kind of operation?", the operation reception itself is performed properly. You will be able to appropriately suggest the situation.

In addition, regarding such "2nd F post-reception change B", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described below, a production change that is different from the 2F post-reception display UB (for example, changing the lighting mode of the production lamp) (e.g., a change in effect to make the scene appear) may also be performed. Alternatively, such "Change B after 2nd F reception" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple performance elements, but with any one of the above-mentioned performance elements (for example, a performance that changes the lighting mode of the performance lamp) change).

In addition, the execution time of the "2nd F post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is set longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation reception on the "2nd F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" will be the same as the previous operation on the "2nd F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be done while the corresponding 2nd F reception display UB is being displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 282, at timing tf2B (timing shown in FIG. 285(d)) within the 2nd F reception period, "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. This assumes that the second operation is performed for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 282(i), (k) and FIG. 285(d), as one of the changes B after receiving the second F, the "magic value ("magic" decoration" ``The area filled in with respect to the display'' increases (the magic value changes from ``1'' to ``2''),'' and ``The wizard MT is accumulating more MP.'' (Display UB2 after reception on 2nd floor). However, at this time, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 282(k)).

In this example, at timing tf2C (timing shown in FIG. 286(e)) within the 2nd F reception period, the third operation is performed on "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". This assumes the case where However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 282(i), (k), and 286(e), the post-acceptance output sound is not audible, and the post-acceptance sound is not audible. No new display (aspect) appears as the display UB.

In this example, if the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) within the second F reception period, We have made it so that "a new display will not appear as the display UB after receiving the 2nd F", but instead, within the 2nd F receiving period, "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" A determination may be made when an operation is performed, and a new display may not be performed as the second F post-reception display UB based on the result of the determination. The point is that such an event (despite operating the "2nd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" within the 2nd F reception period, a new display is displayed as the 2F post-reception display UB) (does not appear) need only occur when a predetermined condition is met.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 2nd F reception period, even though the "2nd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time of the second F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 2F reception period, if an operation is performed on "2F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the 2F reception display UB may be displayed, but the reception This feeling of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 282, 285, and 286, the initial game strategy (timing tf2A to tf2C)'', and by operating the ``2nd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'' side, which allows the final performance result to appear with just one operation. This is based on the assumption that the player has switched to a "new gaming strategy" that aims to advance the performance.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 282(a), (h), and (i), the 2nd F post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In a situation where UB2 (here, a depiction where the magic power value is set to "2", a depiction where the wizard MT is accumulating more MP, etc.) is being displayed, at the timing tf2D during the 2nd F reception period. , it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tf2D within the second F reception period, the second F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the second F reception, first, the second F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 282(a) and 282(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 282(h), (k) and FIGS. 286(f), (i), the "second F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is "2F reception output sound A" is audibly output, and "2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "2F operation section A (here, sword decoration object 5001)" is visually recognized. A "2nd F effect display EF" that makes it difficult is displayed, and furthermore a 2nd F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In this regard, the 2nd F effect display EF according to this production example is, as shown in FIGS. 286(f) and (i), "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" Display B (button drawing image BMG)" and "2nd F portent effect display ZFD" are to be displayed in a situation where they are not hidden, and the operator's It is now displayed so that it appears to overlap from the front with "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "2nd F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)". ing.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 2nd F reception period, the "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to do so is not displayed.

In addition, the relative expectation level (jackpot The case where the mode UA-1 (FIG. 286(f) to (h)) with a high probability (rate of winnings) appears, and the mode UA-2 (with a lower expectation level (rate of winnings)) than the mode 286(i) to (k)) may appear. In addition, as mentioned above, when the 2nd F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "2nd F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output, but expectations regarding the "2nd F post-reception output sound A" are also expected. The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In this regard, when the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "2nd F post-reception display UA", as shown in FIG. 286(f), The ``second F effect display EF-1'' is displayed which is different from the appearance of the aspect UA-2 with a low level of expectation.

That is, when the aspect UA-1 with relatively high expectations appears as the "2nd F post-reception display UA", the first aspect EF-1 (see FIG. 286(f)) is displayed as the 2nd F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-1 with relatively high expectations will appear as the "Display UA after 2nd F reception".

On the other hand, when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "2nd F post-reception display UA", as shown in FIGS. 286(i) to (k), the "2nd F post-reception display UA" '', the second F effect display EF is displayed in a manner different from that in which the relatively highly expected aspect UA-1 appears.

That is, when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "2nd F post-reception display UA", the second aspect EF-2 (see FIG. 286(i)) is displayed as the 2nd F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations will appear as the "Display UA after 2nd F reception".

In addition, during the 2nd F reception period according to this embodiment, "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed in FIGS. As shown in 286, the periodic change is hidden based on the operation on the "second F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves. It happens.

In addition, during the 2nd F reception period according to this embodiment, the "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" is also changed to "2nd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" as shown in FIGS. 282 and 286. ” will be hidden based on the operation. However, the "2nd F precursor effect display ZFD" is not made to be hidden when the "2nd F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is operated.

In this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the 2nd F effect display EF is displayed) (see FIGS. 286(f) and (i)), the ``2nd F operation related display A'' (sword decoration image SYG),” “2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG),” and “2nd F omen effect display ZFD” are not hidden, and “2nd F operation related display A (Sword Decoration Image SYG)” is displayed so as to overlap with the rear side of the second F effect display EF. After that, these "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" are changed to "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" 286 (g) and (j)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "2nd F post-reception display UA" includes such "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "2nd F effect display". EF" and "Decorative pattern SZ", and this makes it difficult to see immediately after the "2nd F reception display UA" is displayed (Fig. 286(f), (i)). However, as "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "2nd F effect display EF" etc. are hidden, The visibility of the "2nd F post-reception display UA" will gradually become better. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the state of the 2nd F effect display EF while it is being displayed, it is possible to determine whether the "2nd F reception display UA" is a highly expected state UA-1 and a low expected state UA-1. It is made easy to recognize which one is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 286(h) and 286(k), the "2nd F post-reception display UA" according to this production example has its display contents according to the expectation levels UA-1 and UA-2. We will continue to develop this.

In addition, in the 2nd F reception period, as shown in FIG. 282, when the 2F reception permissible sound occurs, either the "first permissible sound A1" or the "second permissible sound A2" is (selectively) Can be output audibly. For example, when the 2nd F reception period occurs, when the "first permissible sound A1" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound, the jackpot is more likely to be hit than when the "second permissible sound A2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the level of expectation (rate) that has been achieved is high.

In this regard, in the 2nd F reception period, as shown in FIG. Although a situation may occur where an operation is accepted, when an operation is accepted for the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", this is used as an opportunity to trigger the "first allowable sound". The audible output of "A1" or "second permissible sound A2" is not interrupted (timings tf2A, tf2B, tf2C). However, while either the "first permissible sound A1" or the "second permissible sound A2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound, the operation on the "second F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" When the acceptance is made, the audible output of the "first permissible sound A1" or "second permissible sound A2" is interrupted (timing tf2D).

In addition, during the 2F reception period, based on the operation performed on the 2F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001), the 2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. ” and “2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” will be hidden, or the 2nd F reception period will be ended. However, when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)", no matter how many times the said operation is performed, this will trigger the "2nd F operation related display A (sword 410)". Decorative image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may not be hidden or the 2nd F reception period may not end.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "2nd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 2nd F reception period, the magical power value (the area filled out with respect to the "magic" decoration display) When the amount has accumulated to the point of increase, it may be arranged to wait until the timing tf3 when the second F reception period ends, and then perform a magic effect to perform withdrawal based on the arrival of the timing tf3. In this case, even if the magic value (the area filled in with respect to the "magic" decoration display) has accumulated to the point where it increases, until the timing tf3 arrives, the "second F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is also allowed, you can choose whether or not to make a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of magic and withdrawal has been confirmed. By being able to do this, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. However, in this case, if an operation is performed on the "second F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the effect of applying magic and leaving will not be performed regardless of the effect result.

Alternatively, before the 2nd F reception period occurs, a production judgment is performed, and if a special judgment result is not obtained as a result of the production judgment, the 2F operation section B ( Here, no matter how many times you operate the "operation button 410)", the magic value (the area filled out against the "magic" decoration display) will not accumulate until it increases (the reception period will not end). may be executed as a predetermined effect. In this case, when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "2nd F post-reception display UA" is displayed as a mode UA-2 with relatively low expectations. may always appear, or it may be arranged that there is a possibility that aspect UA-1 with a relatively high expectation level will appear. In this regard, if the mode UA-1 with a relatively high expectation level may appear when an operation is performed on the "second F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the magic value cannot be accumulated to an increase no matter how many times the "second F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated. can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, for the 2F post-reception display UB (description of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.), not only the "2F omen production display ZFD" but also the " 2F Post-Reception Display UA", it is not displayed behind it, but is displayed so as to overlap in front of it (see FIGS. 286(f), (g), etc.). In this example, when the aspect UA-1 is displayed as the "Display UA after reception on the 2nd floor", the aspect UA-1 is displayed in the display UB on the 2nd floor after reception (such as a depiction of an increase in magical power, a magician MT's MP However, when aspect UA-2 is displayed as "Display UA after reception on the 2nd floor", the aspect UA -2 may be displayed so as to overlap behind the 2nd F post-reception display UB (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.).

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) appears to overlap with the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. (See FIG. 285(d), FIG. 286, etc.) However, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed so as to overlap behind it.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the display UB after the reception on the 2nd F (description of the magic value increasing, depiction of the wizard MT saving MP, etc.), during the reception period of the 2nd F, the display UB after the reception on the 2nd , Sword Decoration 5001)" is prevented from being hidden based on this operation. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 282(i) and FIG. 285, the display UB after receiving the 2nd F. When the "2nd F reception display UA" and the "2nd F effect display EF" are started to be displayed in response to an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the display continues. Of course, even when "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "2nd F effect display EF" are hidden, This means that the display can continue.

However, in this case, the 2F post-reception display UA (depictions of increasing magical power, depictions of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) will not be displayed during the period when the "2F post-reception display UA" is displayed. Although it is not necessary to display the information, it is desirable. As a result, while promoting the fact that it is possible to advance the production by accepting an operation (magic performed by a wizard) on the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "2nd F. It becomes possible to suitably indicate that the production is in a state of progress by accepting an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In addition, in the second F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, periodic changes (see Figure 284) that had previously appeared in "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are removed. It continues without any indication (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.). That is, during the 2nd F reception period, periodic changes in "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are different from "2nd F operation related display B ( Here, the display mode does not change before and after an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (operation that does not end the acceptance period), and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted for the ``2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period), the ``2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and The "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (cycle 2F time A, cycle 2F time B).

On the other hand, in the 2nd F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 282 and 286, when the 2nd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated, the 2F operation related The periodic changes in "Display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are hidden. Here, by hiding "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, we will hide their periodic changes. We are planning to do so.

Further, in this example, while the second F acceptance period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease over time, but this may not necessarily be done.

In addition, during the 2nd F reception period, the 2nd F operation section B (here, Even if you continue to operate (press) the ``operation button 410'', the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the operation will be automatically accepted at predetermined intervals) (auto continuous press). The function is not activated (see FIG. 282(b)). In this case, within the 2nd F reception period, multiple operations are performed on the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "2nd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)". Needless to say, if the player wishes to accept the request, he or she must repeatedly operate (press) the "second F operation section B (here, operation button 410)".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 282(c), the 2nd F reception period originally continues until timing tf3 arrives when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period), and when timing tf3 arrives. It will be terminated based on this. In this regard, the second F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, if an operation to end the 2F reception period is not received until timing tf3 arrives during the 2F reception period, the 2F operation is not performed within the 2F reception period. The same post-reception change A that occurs when an operation is performed on "part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" can occur based on the arrival of timing tf3. In other words, in this case, for the production corresponding to "2nd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" where multiple operations are required within the 2nd F reception period and the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, the game Since the player cannot enjoy the game unless he or she operates it, it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even if the "2nd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 2nd F reception period, the corresponding 2F reception period does not end and timing tf3 arrives. The same post-reception change A that occurs when an operation is performed on the "second F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the reception period occurs based on the arrival of timing tf3. . In other words, in this case, while the 2F post-reception display UB (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) is displayed, the automatic button function mentioned above is activated and the post-reception display is displayed. Change A will occur.

FIG. 287 is a time chart illustrating an example of the performance content when the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 3F" is satisfied, the 3rd F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 288 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the third F acceptance period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIGS. 290 and 291 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the third F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "3rd F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 3rd F variation pattern. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 3rd F fluctuation pattern, sound output according to the 3rd F fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3rd F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 287(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "3rd F variation pattern", timing tg2 has arrived when the 3rd F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. Based on (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 3F"), "reception regarding changes after 3F reception (display UA, UB after 3F reception, sound output after 3F reception, etc.)" is permitted. The above-mentioned 3F acceptance period (validity period) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 291(b)).

Here, the third floor reception period according to this embodiment is different from the first floor reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) and the second floor reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) described above. Both the 3F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 3F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) are operated multiple times until the 3F reception period ends. Reception is considered acceptable (multiple operation permissible period). In this example, the "3rd F operation part A" used in the 3F reception period is replaced with the "1F operation part A" used in the 1F reception period and the "2nd F operation part A" used in the 2F reception period. ", etc. (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is used as the same operation part, but the operation parts may be different from each other. In addition, the "3rd F operation section B" used in the 3F reception period may be replaced with the "1st F operation section B" used during the 1F reception period, the "2nd F operation section B" used during the 2F reception period, etc. Although the same operating section (here, the operating button 410) is used, different operating sections may be used.

Even during this 3rd floor reception period (multiple operations allowed period), for example, the 3rd floor operation section, which allows multiple operations, is similar to the above-mentioned 1st floor reception period and 2nd floor reception period. Although the player started the operation on B (here, the operation button 410), the player felt uneasy because the final result did not appear, and in the middle of the 3rd F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), There may be a case where an attempt is made to advance the production by switching from "operation on the 3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" to "operation on the 3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" This is expected.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 3rd floor reception period is to occur, it first displays a foreshadowing effect that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 3rd floor reception period will occur). It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when timing tg1 arrives before the occurrence of the 3rd F reception period, the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. 287(d), FIG. ), the execution of the "3rd F portent effect display ZFD" is started as the foreshadow effect display. This "3rd F portent effect display ZFD" displays 3rd F operation related displays A and B, as shown in FIGS. 287(d), 288(d), and 290(a), (b). It is displayed so that it straddles the timing before and after the timing.

That is, in this production example, even when the 3rd F reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 287, 288, and 290(b), (c), the 3rd The "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can only appear when the operation acceptance for the decoration object 5001) is allowed or when the operation acceptance is allowed. , "3F operation related information" that can only appear when the operation reception on the 3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. Display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. In addition, in this production example, the timing when the 3rd F reception period occurs, and the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as that of the 1st page, it does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 3rd F omen effect display ZFD is displayed, and The display may be started before the timing when the third F acceptance period occurs, so that the display may be displayed in a manner that straddles the timing. Alternatively, the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may be started to be displayed later than the timing when the 3rd F reception period occurs. You can.

In this example, "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are "3rd F operation part A (here, sword decoration object)". 5001) (reference image display)" and "display imitation 3F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410) (reference image display)". The displayed content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 290(b), "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are "3rd F omen effect While the "display ZFD" is being displayed, the display starts so as to appear superimposed on the back side of the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD".

In addition, "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . In other words, as described above, during the 3rd F reception period, the 3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001), which allows multiple operation receptions, is used as an operation unit that can accept operations by the player. ” and a “third F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” that is capable of accepting multiple operations are provided.

Regarding the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the "portion (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the 3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is shown in the figure. 289(A) and then sequentially displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 289(B). It appears repeatedly in a form that requires a period of 3F and time A.

Regarding the "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", the "part (button drawing image BMG) in which the operation receiving part of the 3rd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is imitated is shown in FIG. 289. 289 (a) and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in FIGS. 289(b) to (d). appears repeatedly in a manner that requires a predetermined period of 3F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 3F reception period, as shown in FIGS. (here, the operation button 410), etc., appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, "cycle 3F time A (see Figures 289 (A) and (B))" is replaced with "cycle 1F time A" and "cycle 1F time B" in the above-mentioned 1F reception period, and "cycle 1F time A" in the above-mentioned 2F reception period. The time is set to be shorter than the "period 2F time A", "period 2F time B", "period 3F time B (see FIGS. 289(a) to (d))", etc. in the reception period. Therefore, the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" during the 3rd F reception period shows that the "operation receiving part" moves up and down its movable range faster than in the 1st F reception period and the 2nd F reception period described above. The movement will be depicted. In this case, regarding the "3rd F operation section A" corresponding to the "3rd F operation related display A" in the 3F reception period, the "1st F operation section A" corresponding to the "1F operation related display A" in the 1F reception period ``Part A'' and the ``2nd F operation part A'' corresponding to the ``2nd F operation related display A'' during the 2nd F reception period are provided as the same operation part (here, the sword decoration body 5001). It is desirable that the time required for periodic changes be made to differ from each other even though the simulated images are displayed for the same operation unit.

In addition, when "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing tg2 when the 3rd F reception period occurs. , it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for the timing tg2 when the third F acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are as shown in FIG. 289(A) until timing tg2 arrives. , (a) are maintained.

In this example, "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are as shown in FIG. 290(b). The display starts in a form that appears behind the "3rd F portent effect display ZFD" while the "3rd F portent effect display ZFD" is being displayed, and its periodic change begins. In this example, the display range of the 3F precursor effect display ZED is reduced as time passes, as shown in FIGS. 290(a) to 290(e).

In addition, "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" according to this example is different from "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)". It consists only of "aspects" that are displayed so that they overlap on the front side, and "aspects" that are displayed so that they appear to overlap on the rear side are not executed. As shown in FIGS. 287 to 291, the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" according to this example starts displaying before the timing tg2 when the 3rd F reception period occurs, and is displayed during the 3F reception period. The display is hidden before the timing tg3 when the set time set for elapses (timing tg3 when the third floor reception period ends without any operation by the player). .

By the way, in the 3rd F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, "Hero YS" and "Magician MT" facing the BOSS character are respectively displayed on the effect display device 1600. "Hero YS" is used as a character that moves according to the operation on "3rd F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)", and "Magician MT" is used as a character that moves in response to the operation on "3rd F operation part B". (Here, the operation button 410) is used as a character that moves in response to an operation.

More specifically, if an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the 3F reception period, "the hero YS will change the BOSS character based on multiple operation receptions. The system provides performance information such as "Can you beat it or not?", and depending on the result, it is suggested whether the expectation of jackpot is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%"). It can be done.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on "3rd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" during the 3rd F reception period, an effect such as "Is it possible to escape (escape) from the BOSS battle?" sex is now provided. In other words, when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period, the magic value ("magic" decoration display) displayed at the bottom right of the display screen is The painted area) can be increased, and when the magical power value is full, the wizard MT casts a spell and successfully escapes from the BOSS battle. Then, when the player succeeds in leaving (escape) in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation level of the jackpot is higher (even "100%") than when the player is not successful.

In the 3rd floor reception period for this production example, at the time of occurrence, "3rd floor operation related display A", "3rd floor operation related display B", "Hero YS", "Wizard MT", "BOSS character" Most of them are covered by the lightning that is expressed by the "3rd F portent effect display ZFD", and it is said that it is impossible to recognize the whole picture. However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "2nd F omen effect display ZFD", the thunder expressed by the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" according to this example of effect is different from the case of the above-mentioned "2nd F omen effect display ZFD", and the thunder that is expressed by the ``3rd F omen effect display ZFD'' is different from the case of the above-mentioned ``2nd F omen effect display ZFD'', and the thunder that is expressed by the ``3rd F omen effect display ZFD'' is different from the case of the above-mentioned ``2nd F omen effect display ZFD''. It is assumed that the non-display state is set before timing tg3. In addition, the display area of the lightning expressed by the "3rd F portent effect display ZFD" also decreases as time passes, so the "3rd F operation related display A", "3rd F operation related display ZFD" The visibility of "Display B", "Hero YS", "Magician MT", "BOSS character", etc. will gradually improve from the stage before the "3rd F omen production display ZFD" is hidden. This will continue to be the case.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 287 and 290, at timing tg2A (timing shown in FIG. 290(c)) within the 3rd F reception period, "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made for the first operation. In this example as well, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal; however, the invention is not limited to this, and ``operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal'' may be realized using other methods. You can.

In this example, at timing tg2A (timing shown in FIG. 290(c)) within the 3rd F acceptance period, the first operation is accepted for "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 287(i), (k) and FIG. 290(c), as one of the changes B after receiving the third ``A depiction of the area) increasing (the magic value changes from 0 to 1)'' and ``A depiction of a wizard MT saving MP'' are now available (after the reception on the 3rd floor). Display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 3rd F reception period, the corresponding reception will be performed as in the case of the 2F reception period. The post-output sound is not output audibly (see FIG. 287(k)). In other words, in this case, the "magician MT" will be depicted secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such operations multiple times, Because the response (performance) is low, it can arouse feelings of anxiety such as ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period is too low, the enjoyment of the game may be affected. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, when an operation is performed on "3rd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" within the 3rd F reception period, the display UB after 3F reception ("Magic value increases ``Depiction'' and ``Description of wizard MT saving MP'') should not be displayed behind the above-mentioned ``3rd F omen effect display ZFD'', and if they overlap, they should be displayed in front of it. It will be displayed on the website.

In addition, regarding such "change B after reception on the 3rd floor", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described below, a production change different from the display UB after reception on the 3F (for example, changing the lighting mode of the production lamp) (e.g., a change in effect to make the scene appear) may also be performed. Alternatively, such "Change B after 3rd F Reception" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple production elements, but with any one of the production elements described above (for example, a production that changes the lighting mode of the production lamp). It may be realized only by (change).

In addition, the execution time of the "3rd F post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is set longer than the time set as the corresponding reception period. There is. Therefore, the reception of the second and subsequent operations on the "3rd F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is the same as the previous operation on the "3rd F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be done while the corresponding 3F post-reception display UB is being displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 287, at timing tg2B (timing shown in FIG. 290(d)) within the 3rd F reception period, "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. This assumes that the second operation is performed for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 287(i), (k) and FIG. 290(d), as one of the changes B after receiving the third The area filled in with respect to the display increases (the magic value changes from "1" to "2")" and the wizard MT is now accumulating more MP." (Display UB2 after reception on 3rd floor). However, at this time, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 287(k)).

In this example, at timing tg2C (timing shown in FIG. 290(e)) within the 3rd F reception period, the third operation is performed on "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". This assumes the case where However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 287(i), (k), and 290(e), the post-acceptance output sound is not audible and No new display (aspect) appears as the display UB.

In this example, if the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) within the 3F reception period, We have made it so that "a new display will not appear as the display UB after receiving the 3rd floor", but instead, within the 3rd floor receiving period, "3rd floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" The determination may be made when an operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, no new display may be performed as the 3F post-reception display UB. The point is that such an event (despite operating the "3rd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" within the 3F reception period, a new display is displayed as the 3F post-reception display UB) (does not appear) need only occur when a predetermined condition is met.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 3rd floor reception period, even though the 3rd floor operation section B (in this case, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety will gradually become stronger as the remaining time of the third F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 3F reception period, if an operation is performed on "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the 3F reception display UB may be displayed, but the reception This feeling of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 287, 290, and 291, the initial game strategy (timing tg2A to tg2C)'' and switches to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by multiple operations on the ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'' side. It is as expected.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 287(a), (h), and (i), the 3rd F post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In a situation where UB2 (here, a depiction where the magic value is set to "2", a depiction where the magician MT is accumulating more MP, etc.) is displayed, the timing tg2D (during the 3rd floor reception period) is displayed. It is assumed that at the timing shown in FIG. 291(f), the first operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, the first operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tg2D (timing shown in FIG. 291(f)) within the 3rd F acceptance period. If this is done, as shown in FIGS. 287 and 291(f), change A may occur after receiving the third F.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 287(g) to 287(k) and FIG. 291(f), such a change A after receiving the 3rd F is ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) ” is audibly outputted as “3rd F reception output sound A1” corresponding to the first operation, and “3rd F operation related display” corresponding to “3rd F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)” is output. A "3rd F effect display EF1" that makes it difficult to visually recognize "A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, and furthermore, a 3rd F post-reception display UA1 is displayed. Here, as the 3rd F post-reception display UA1, "a depiction of the hero YS attacking and the BOSS character's HP decreasing to about 75%" is performed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 287(i) and (j), when the first operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "audible output state" Regarding the ``3F reception permission sound that was in the display state'' and the ``3F reception display UB that was displayed'', the first operation on the ``3F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' When a reception is received, the system does not become inaudible or hidden, but continues in its execution state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 287(e), when the first operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," Regarding the 3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was in Periodic changes are hidden. At this time, although it has been made difficult to see by the "3rd F effect display EF1," the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues to be displayed, as it had been done up until then. Only periodic changes are terminated once. Note that the periodic change once ended in this way is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 291(f), the "3rd F effect display EF1" in response to the first operation reception on the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is It is displayed while both "Operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation-related display B (Button drawing image BMG)" are being displayed, and " The third F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the third F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed so as to overlap from the front thereof.

Furthermore, when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period, the "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to display is never displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 287(a), (h), and (i), after the reception of the previous operation for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" In a situation where change A is occurring in various places, and in response to the operation reception on the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the 3rd F reception display UB2 (here, the magic value is "2") 291 (g), (h) during the 3rd F reception period. ), it is assumed that the second and third operation receptions for the "3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" are respectively made.

In this pachinko machine 1, at timings tg2E and tg2F (each timing shown in FIGS. 291(g) and (h)) within the 3rd F reception period, the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" 287 and 291 in the same manner as when the first operation is accepted for "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". As shown in (g) and (h), change A can be caused after receiving the third F.

In particular, regarding "3rd F reception output sound A1" and "3rd F effect display EF1", the same behavior appears when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. It's getting wet. Furthermore, the periodic changes in the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated when the previous operation was accepted will remain in its completed state when the second or third operation is accepted. However, when the second or third operation is accepted, the periodic change end state will occur again. It happens. That is, in this case, the periodic change once ended will be restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second or third operation is accepted.

In this regard, regarding the "3rd F post-reception display UA", the basics are as follows: When the first operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" (3rd F post-reception display UA1) It's basically the same. However, when the second operation is accepted, "The hero YS attacks and the BOSS character's HP decreases to about 50% remaining (display UA2 on the 3rd floor after acceptance)" is performed (Figure 291 (g) ), and when the third operation is accepted, a depiction of the hero YS attacking and the BOSS character's HP decreasing to about 25% remaining (display UA3 after receiving the command on the 3rd floor) will be displayed. (see FIG. 291(h)), and progress as a performance can be seen.

In addition, during the 3rd floor reception period according to this example, each time an operation is performed on the 3rd floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), the production as the 3rd floor reception display UA1 (BOSS character (HP decrease) progresses. However, if the display is advanced at a predetermined probability based on the result of the determination, the display may be It may be arranged so that there are cases in which the process progresses and cases in which it does not progress. However, if an operation is performed on "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 3F reception period, it will be changed to "3rd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)". Unlike when an operation is performed, even if the display does not progress, the "3rd F reception output sound A1" is audibly output, the "3rd F effect display EF1" is displayed, and the "3rd F The periodic changes in the "operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" are terminated.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 287(a), (h), and (i), the reception in response to the third operation reception for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is shown in FIGS. The post-reception display UB2 (in this case, when the magic value is 2 '', the wizard MT is accumulating more MP, etc.) are still being displayed, and at timing tg2G (see Figure 291(i)) during the 3F reception period, , it is assumed that the fourth operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, when the fourth operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at timing tg2G within the 3rd F acceptance period, the 3rd F post-acceptance change A can cause For example, as one of the changes A after 3F reception, first, the 3F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 287(a) and 287(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 287(h), (k) and FIGS. 291(f), (l), the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" 3F reception output sound A2" is audibly output, and the 3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is visually recognized. A "3rd F effect display EF2" that makes it difficult is displayed, and a 3rd F post-acceptance display UA4 is also displayed.

In this regard, the 3rd F effect display EF2 according to this production example includes "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button The screen starts to be displayed in a situation where none of the "sample image BMG)" is in a hidden state, and the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" on the operated side )" corresponding to "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front.

Furthermore, when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3F reception period, the "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to display is never displayed.

Also, the relatively expected level of ``3F post-reception display UA4'' in response to the 4th operation reception for ``3F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)'' within the 3F reception period. A case where an aspect UA4-1 (FIG. 291(i) to (k)) with a high (rate of winning a jackpot) appears, and an aspect UA4 with a lower expectation level (rate of getting a jackpot) than that aspect. -2 (Fig. 291(l) to (n)) may appear. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the 3rd F post-reception display UA4 is displayed, the corresponding "3rd F post-reception output sound A2" is also audibly output, but expectations regarding the "3rd F post-reception output sound A2" are also The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In this regard, when the aspect UA4-1 with a relatively high expectation appears as "3rd F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 291(i), A "third F effect display EF2-1" is displayed, which is a different mode from when the mode UA4-2 with a low expectation level appears.

That is, when the aspect UA4-1 with relatively high expectations appears as the "display UA after reception on the 3rd floor", the first aspect EF2-1 (see FIG. 291(i)) is displayed as the 3rd floor effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UA4-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4".

On the other hand, when the aspect UA4-2 with relatively low expectation appears as "3rd F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 291(l), ``Third F effect display EF2-2'', which is a different aspect from when the aspect UA4-1 with a high expectation level appears, is displayed.

That is, when the aspect UA4-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4", the second aspect EF2-2 (see FIG. 291(l)) is displayed as the 3rd F effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UA-2 with a relatively low level of expectation will appear as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4." Note that the third F effect display EF2 is displayed as an image display different from the third F effect display EF1 in both the first mode EF2-1 and the second mode EF2-2.

In addition, during the 3rd F reception period according to this embodiment, "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed in FIGS. As shown in 291, the periodic change is hidden based on the fourth operation reception for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Here, by hiding the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, the periodic changes are hidden. That will happen.

In this example, when there is a situation immediately after an operation is accepted (a situation where the 3rd F effect display EF2 is displayed) (see FIGS. 291(i) and (l)), the "3rd F operation related display A" (sword decoration image SYG)” and “3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” are not hidden, and “3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is It is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the third F effect display EF2. After that, these "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are changed to "3rd F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001 291 (j) and (m)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "3rd F post-reception display UA4" includes such "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "3rd F effect display". EF2", and this makes it difficult to see immediately after the "3rd F reception display UA4" is displayed (Figure 291(i), ( (see l)). However, as "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "3rd F effect display EF2" etc. are hidden, The visibility of the "third post-reception display UA4" will gradually become better. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when "3rd F effect display EF2" is displayed, "3rd F reception display UA4" is the mode with high expectation level UA4-1 and the mode with low expectation level. This makes it easy to recognize whether it is displayed in UA4-2 or in UA4-2.

As shown in FIGS. 291(k) and 291(n), the "3rd F post-reception display UA4" according to this production example has its display contents depending on the expectation levels UA4-1 and UA4-2. We will continue to develop this.

In addition, during the 3rd F reception period, as shown in FIG. 287, when the 3F reception permissible sound occurs, either the "first permissible sound B1" or the "second permissible sound B2" is (selectively) Can be output audibly. For example, when the 3rd F reception period occurs, when the "first permissible sound B1" is audibly output as the 3F reception permissible sound, it is more audible than when the "second permissible sound B2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the expectation level (rate) of hitting the jackpot is high. Note that the first permissible sound B1 may be the same as or different from the "first permissible sound A1" described above. Further, the second permissible sound B2 may be the same as or different from the above-described "second permissible sound A2". In addition, the 3rd F reception acceptable sound does not necessarily have to be output in one of multiple modes (multiple acceptable sounds), but may be output only in one mode (one acceptable sound). There may be.

In this regard, in the 3rd F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 287(j), a situation may occur where an operation is accepted while the 3rd F acceptance permission sound is audibly output. When an operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the audible output of the 3rd F acceptance permission sound is not interrupted (timings tg2A, tg2B, tg2C). ).

In this regard, if an operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 3rd F acceptance permission sound is audibly output, the 3F reception permission sound The audible output of may be interrupted (timing tg2G). However, during the 3rd F acceptance period, even if an operation is accepted for the ``3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' while the 3rd F acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, Since there are both cases where the audible output of the 3rd F reception acceptable sound is interrupted (timing tg2G) and cases where the audible output of the 3rd F acceptance acceptable sound is not interrupted (timings tg2D, tg2E, tg2F), It can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 3F reception period.

In addition, during the 3F reception period, based on the operation performed on the 3F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), the 3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. ” and “3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” will be hidden, and the 3rd floor reception period will be ended. However, when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)", no matter how many times the said operation is performed, this will trigger the "3rd F operation related display A (sword 410)". Decorative image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may not be hidden or the 3rd floor reception period may not end.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 3F reception period, the magic value (the area filled out with respect to the "magic" decoration display) When the amount has accumulated to the point of increase, it may be arranged to wait until the timing tg3 when the third F reception period ends, and perform a magic effect to perform withdrawal based on the arrival of the timing tg3. In this case, even if the magical power value has accumulated to the maximum, until timing tg3 arrives, operation reception on the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is also allowed. By doing so, it is possible to challenge the BOSS character to attack multiple times while the effect of applying magic and leaving is confirmed, thereby improving the interest in the game. You will be able to do this. However, when the 3rd floor post-reception display UA4 is displayed as a result of multiple attacks (when the 3rd floor reception period ends), the effect of magically leaving the enemy will no longer be performed.

Alternatively, before the 3rd F reception period occurs, a production judgment is performed, and if a special judgment result is not obtained as a result of the production judgment, the 3F operation section B ( Here, no matter how many times you operate the operation button 410), the magic value will not accumulate to the maximum (the reception period will not end). Good too. In this case, when the fourth operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "3rd F post-reception display UA4" is displayed, indicating a relatively low expectation level. It may be arranged that UA4-2 always appears, or it may be arranged that UA4-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, may appear. In this regard, if the mode UA4-1 with a relatively high expectation level may appear when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the magic value cannot be accumulated to an increase no matter how many times the operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)". can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, for the 3F post-reception display UB (such as depictions of magical power increasing and wizard MT saving MP), not only the "3F omen production display ZFD" but also the "3F omen production display ZFD" 3F Post-Reception Display UA", it is not displayed behind it, but is displayed so as to overlap in front of it (see FIGS. 291(f) to (n), etc.). In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 3rd floor (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) appears to overlap with the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. (See FIG. 290, FIG. 291, etc.) However, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed so as to overlap behind it.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 3F post-reception display UB (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.), during the 3F reception period, the 3F operation section A (here , sword ornament 5001)" is prevented from being hidden based on this operation. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 287(i) and FIG. 291, the display UB after receiving the 3rd F (description of the magic value increasing, depiction of the wizard MT saving MP, etc.) is "3rd F. Once the "3rd F reception display UA4" and the "3rd F effect display EF" have started to be displayed in response to an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the display continues. Of course, even when "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "3rd F effect display EF" are hidden, This means that the display can continue.

However, in this case, the 3F post-reception display UB (such as depictions of magical power increasing and wizard MT saving MP) will not be displayed during the period when "3rd F post-reception display UA4" is displayed. Although it is not necessary to display the information, it is desirable. As a result, while promoting the fact that it is possible to advance the production by accepting operations (magic performed by a wizard) on the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "3rd F. It becomes possible to suitably indicate that the production is in a state of progress by accepting an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

Furthermore, in the 3rd F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, periodic changes (see Figure 289) that had previously appeared in "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are removed. It continues without any indication (end, interruption, cycle change, etc.). That is, during the 3F reception period, periodic changes in "3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are different from "3F operation related display B ( Here, the display mode does not change before and after an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (operation that does not end the acceptance period), and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted for the ``3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' (operation reception that does not end the acceptance period), the ``3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and The "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (cycle 3F time A, cycle 3F time B).

On the other hand, during the 3F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 287 and 291, when the 3F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated, the Periodic changes in "Display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are hidden. Here, in the first to third operation receptions for the "3rd F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)", "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" does not hide itself but hides (ends) those periodic changes, but the fourth time for "3rd F operation part A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" At the operation reception, by hiding "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", periodic changes in them can be hidden. It is planned to be displayed.

Further, in this example, while the third F acceptance period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease over time, but this may not necessarily be done.

In addition, during the 3F reception period, the 3F operation section B (here, Even if you continue to operate (press) the ``operation button 410'', the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the operation will be automatically accepted at predetermined intervals) (auto continuous press). The function is not activated (see FIG. 287(b)). In this case, within the 3F reception period, multiple operations are performed on the ``3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' corresponding to the ``3F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)''. Needless to say, if the player wishes to accept the request, he or she must repeatedly operate (press) "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)".

However, during the 3F reception period, the 3F operation section A (here, When the "sword ornament 5001)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation is accepted multiple times (the automatic repeated hit function is enabled and the operation is automatically accepted repeatedly at a predetermined time interval). (See Figure 287(a)). In this production example, it is assumed that the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state from timing tg2D (the situation shown in FIG. 291(f)). As a result, operations are accepted at predetermined time intervals (timings tg2E, tg2F, tg2G).

Additionally, as shown in FIG. 287(c), the 3F reception period originally continues until timing tg3 arrives when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period). It will be terminated based on this. In this regard, the 3rd F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. If the fourth operation reception for the body 5001) is not performed, the operation reception to end the reception period by operating the 3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) within the reception period. (Here, the same post-reception change A as when the fourth operation reception for "3rd F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is performed) may occur based on the arrival of timing tg3. It looks like this. In other words, in this case, for the production corresponding to the "3rd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" which requires multiple operations within the 3F reception period and in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, the game Since the player cannot enjoy the game unless he or she operates it, it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, even if the 3rd F reception period does not end even though the 3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410) is operated during the 3F reception period, the timing tg3 arrives. The same post-reception change A that occurs when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the reception period will occur based on the arrival of timing tg3. . In other words, in this case, while the 3F post-reception display UB (description of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and the post-reception display UB is displayed. Change A will occur.

In the 3rd F reception period according to this example, when a predetermined number of operations (here, the 4th time) are performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The 3F post-reception display UA4 is displayed when the ``operation reception to end the corresponding reception period'' is made, but instead of this, the ``3F operation section A (here, the sword A determination is made when an operation is performed on the "decoration object 5001)", and based on the result of the determination, an "operation acceptance to end the acceptance period" is made and the 3F post-reception display UA4 is displayed. Alternatively, an "operation reception that does not end the corresponding reception period" may be performed and any of the 3F post-reception displays UA1 to UA3 may be displayed. The point is that when such an event (when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 3rd F reception period, this triggers the "operation reception to end the reception period") '' is performed) should just occur when a predetermined condition is met.

Moreover, the "3rd F precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is set to be in a non-display state before timing tg3 arrives. In this regard, the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" according to this example is set to "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" while the "3F omen effect display ZFD" is displayed. Even if an operation is performed on the screen, this will not cause the screen to be hidden. However, regarding the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD", while the "3F omen effect display ZFD" is displayed, the operation on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is not performed. If this happens, there are both cases in which the item is hidden and cases in which the item is not displayed. For example, while the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" is being displayed, an operation is accepted to end the 3rd F acceptance period by operating the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". If this occurs, the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" will be hidden, but the corresponding 3rd F reception period will not end due to the operation on the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". When the operation is accepted, the "3rd F precursor effect display ZFD" may not be hidden using this as an opportunity.

FIGS. 292 and 293 are time charts showing an example of the performance contents when the "condition 4F" is satisfied as the generation condition, the 4th F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "4th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 4th F fluctuation pattern. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 4th F variation pattern, sound output according to the 4F variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 292(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "4th F variation pattern", timing th2 has arrived when the 4th F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. Based on (based on "Condition 4F" being met), "reception regarding changes after 4F reception (display UA, UB after 4F reception, sound output after 4F reception, etc.)" is permitted. The above-mentioned 4F acceptance period (validity period) can occur.

Here, the 4th F reception period according to this embodiment includes the above-mentioned 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), and the 3F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286). (See FIGS. 287 to 291), both the 4th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 4th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410) are Only one operation reception is allowed until the 4F reception period ends (multiple operation permission period). In this example, the "4th F operation section A" used in the 4th F reception period is replaced with the "1st F operation section A" used in the 1F reception period and the "2nd F operation section A" used in the 2F reception period. ” and the “3rd F operating unit A” used in the 3rd F reception period (here, the sword ornament 5001), but the operating units may be different from each other. In addition, the "4th F operation part B" used in the 4th F reception period can be replaced with the "1st F operation part B" used in the 1F reception period, the "2nd F operation part B" used in the 2F reception period, Although the same operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is used as the “3rd F operation unit B” used in the 3F reception period, different operation units may be used.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 4th floor reception period is to be generated, first, a foreshadowing effect is displayed indicating that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 4th floor reception period will occur). It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when timing th1 arrives before the 4th F reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 292(d) and 293(d), As the foreshadowing effect display, the "4th F omen effect display" is started to be executed. As shown in FIGS. 292(d) and 292(d), this "4th F precursor effect display" is displayed before and after the timing when the 4th F operation related displays A and B are displayed. . Although illustrations are omitted, the "4th F omen performance display" is executed in a manner different from the "1F omen performance display" and the "2nd F omen performance display", and is executed in a manner different from the "3F omen performance display". It is desirable to carry out the same manner. However, the "4th F omen effect display" may be executed in a manner different from the "3F omen effect display".

That is, in this production example, even when the 4th F reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, operation reception on the 4F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed. "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can only appear when the operation is in the state or when the operation reception is permitted, and the 4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) The "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" that can only appear when the operation reception for the button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. They are displayed respectively. In addition, in this production example, the timing when the 4th F reception period occurs, and the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing of For example, "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 4th F omen effect display ZFD is displayed, and The display may be started before the timing at which the 4th F reception period occurs, so that the display straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may be started with a delay from the timing when the 4th F reception period occurs. You can.

In this example, "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are "4th F operation part A (here, sword decoration object)". 5001) (reference image display)" and "display imitation 4F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410) (reference image display)". The displayed content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F omen effect display ZFD" that are displayed. The display starts so that it appears superimposed on the back side of the "4th F omen effect display ZFD".

In addition, "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . In other words, as mentioned above, during the 4F reception period, the 4F operation part A (herein, the sword ornament 5001 )" and a "4th F operating section B (here, operating button 410)" which is allowed to accept only one operation are provided.

Regarding the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "the part (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the 4th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" When a moving image that is displayed in one mode and then sequentially displayed in several other modes is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change requires a predetermined period of 4F time A. It seems to appear repeatedly.

In addition, regarding the "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "the part (button drawing image BMG) where the operation receiving part of the 4th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is imitated is displayed in the second When a periodic change is a moving image that is displayed in one mode and then sequentially displayed in several other modes, the periodic change is repeated in a manner that requires a predetermined period of 4F time B. It's starting to appear.

According to these configurations, during the 4F reception period, each "4F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", "4F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)", etc. The "operation receiver" appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, "period 4F time A" and "period 4F time B" are set as times longer than "period 3F time A" in the above-mentioned 3F reception period. Therefore, the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" during the 4th F reception period shows that the "operation receiving part" moves slowly up and down its movable range compared to the above-mentioned 3F reception period. It will be depicted. In this case, regarding the "4th F operation section A" corresponding to the "4th F operation related display A" during the 4F reception period, the "3F operation section A" corresponding to the "3F operation related display A" during the 3F reception period Part A" is provided as the same operation part (here, the sword decoration body 5001), so that even though the image display is for the same operation part, the time required for periodic changes is different from each other. It is desirable that the The period 4F time A may be set as the same time as the period 1F time A and the period 2F time A.

In addition, when the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing th2 when the 4th F reception period occurs. , it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for the timing th2 when the 4th F reception period occurs. That is, in this case, the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are the above-mentioned "1st It will be displayed in a form that maintains the "Aspect" and "Second Aspect" respectively.

In this example, "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed while "4th F omen effect display ZFD" is being displayed. Then, the display starts appearing behind the "4th F portent effect display" and its periodic change starts. In this example, the display range of the 4th F omen effect display ZED is reduced as time passes.

In addition, the "4th F omen effect display" according to this example is different from the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" in front of them. It consists only of "aspects" that are displayed so as to overlap on the sides, and "aspects" that are displayed so as to overlap on the rear side thereof are not executed. As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the "4th F omen effect display" according to this example starts displaying before the timing th2 when the 4th F reception period occurs, and is displayed during the 4F reception period. The display is hidden before the timing th3 when the set time set for the game elapses (timing th3 when the 4th F reception period ends without any operation by the player).

Although illustration is omitted, for example, if an operation is performed on the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 4th F reception period, the hero will The system provides effects such as "whether you can defeat the character or not", and depending on the result, whether the expectation level of jackpot is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%"). may be suggested. However, it is desirable that the content of the presentation be different from that of other acceptance periods (for example, the type of BOSS character is different).

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on "4th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" during the 4th F reception period, "you will be withdrawn from the BOSS battle by a wizard's magic based on only one operation reception". Depending on the result, the expectation level of the jackpot is high or low (it can be ``100%'' or ``0%''). ) may be suggested.

In the 4th floor reception period for this production example, at the time of occurrence, "4th floor operation related display A", "4th floor operation related display B", "hero", "wizard", "BOSS character", etc. , most of them are covered by the ``4th F omen effect display,'' making it impossible to recognize the entire picture. However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "2nd F omen effect display ZFD", the "4th F omen effect display" according to this effect example occurs before the timing th3 at which the set time as the 4F reception period has elapsed. It is assumed that it will be kept hidden. In addition, since the display area of the "4th F portent effect display" is also reduced as time passes, "4th F operation related display A", "4th F operation related display B", and "4th F operation related display B" The visibility of "hero", "magician", "BOSS character", etc. will be gradually improved from the stage before the "4th F omen effect display" is hidden.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 292, it is assumed that an operation is accepted for "4th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing th2A within the 4F acceptance period. . In this example as well, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal; however, the invention is not limited to this, and ``operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal'' may be realized using other methods. You can.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the "4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated at timing th2A within the 4F reception period, the 4F post-reception change B occurs. For example, as one of the changes B after the 4th F reception, first, the 4F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 292(b) and 292(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 292(i) and (k), the "4th F reception output sound B" corresponding to the operation on the "4th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is audibly output. At the same time, the "4th F effect display EF" is displayed, and furthermore, the "4th F post-reception display UB" is displayed.

In this regard, the 4th F effect display EF according to this production example includes "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button The display is started in a situation where neither the "sample image BMG)" nor the "4th F omen effect display" are in a hidden state. Moreover, in this example, in front of the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" on the side that is not being operated. The "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear to overlap, making it difficult to visually recognize the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)".

In addition, the "4th floor post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "4th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 4th floor reception period is based on the relative expectation level (big hit). There are two cases in which an aspect UB-1 appears with a high expectation level (percentage of winning jackpots) and a case where an aspect UB-2 (see FIG. 292(i)) appears with a lower expectation level (percentage of jackpots) than that aspect. There is now. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the 4th F post-reception display UB is displayed, the corresponding "4th F post-reception output sound B" is also audibly output, but expectations are also high for the "4th F post-reception output sound B". The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In this regard, when the aspect UB-1 with relatively high expectations appears as the "Display UB after reception on the 4th floor", when the aspect UB-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "Display UB after reception on the 4th floor" The ``4th F effect display EF-1'' is displayed in a manner different from that of the 4th F effect display EF-1.

That is, when the aspect UB-1 with relatively high expectations appears as the "4F post-reception display UB", the first aspect EF-1 (see FIG. 292(g)) is displayed as the 4F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UB-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as the "4th F post-reception display UB".

On the other hand, when aspect UB-2 with a relatively low expectation level appears as the "Display UB after reception on the 4th floor", aspect UB-1 with a relatively high expectation level appears as the "display UB on the fourth floor after reception". The 4th F effect display EF is displayed in a different manner than usual.

That is, when the aspect UB-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "4F post-reception display UB", the second aspect EF-2 (see FIG. 292(g)) is displayed as the 4F effect display EF. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the mode UB-2, which has a relatively low level of expectation, will appear as the "4th F post-reception display UB".

In addition, during the 4th F reception period according to this embodiment, "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are as shown in FIG. The periodic changes are hidden based on the operation on the "4th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" so that the periodic changes can be made invisible. Here, by hiding the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, the periodic changes are hidden. That will happen.

In addition, during the 4th F reception period according to this embodiment, the "4th F omen effect display" is also based on the operation on the "4th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 292. and hidden.

In this example, when the situation is immediately after an operation has been accepted for the "4th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" (the state where the 4th F effect display EF is displayed), the "4th F operation section B" (here, the operation button 410) is "Related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "4th F omen effect display" are not hidden, and "4th F operation related display" Display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to overlap with the rear side of the fourth F effect display EF. After that, these "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "4th F omen effect display" are changed to "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is set to a non-display state based on the operation. However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, "4F post-reception display UB" includes such "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "4F effect display". This makes it difficult to visually recognize the "4th F post-reception display UB" immediately after it is displayed. However, as "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "4th F effect display EF" etc. are hidden, The visibility of the "4F post-reception display UB" will gradually become better. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when the 4F effect display EF is displayed, it is possible to determine whether the "4F display after reception UB" is a highly expected mode UB-1 and a low-expected mode UB-. It is made easy to recognize which one is displayed.

Then, the "4th F post-reception display UB" according to this production example will advance its display content in accordance with the expectation levels UB-1 and UB-2.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 293, it is assumed that an operation is accepted for "4th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing th2B within the 4th F acceptance period. ing. In this example as well, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal; however, the invention is not limited to this, and ``operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal'' may be realized using other methods. You can.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "4th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at timing th2B within the 4th F acceptance period, the 4th F post-acceptance change A occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the 4F reception, first, the 4F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 293(a) and 293(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 293(h) and (k), the "4th F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audible. At the same time, the ``4th F effect display EF'' that makes it difficult to visually recognize the ``4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' corresponding to the ``4th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'' is displayed. Furthermore, the 4th F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 293(g), the 4th F effect display EF according to this production example includes "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button The display is started in a situation where neither the "sample image BMG)" nor the "4th F omen effect display" are in a hidden state.

In addition, the relative expectation level (jackpot A case where an aspect UA-1 with a high probability (rate of winnings) appears, and a case where an aspect UA-2 (see FIG. 293(h)) appears with a lower expectation level (rate of winnings) than that aspect. It seems that there is. In addition, as mentioned above, when the 4th F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "4th F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output, but expectations regarding the "4th F post-reception output sound A" are also expected. The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In this regard, when the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "4F post-reception display UA", when the aspect UA-2 with a relatively low expectation appears as the "4F post-reception display UA" The ``4th F effect display EF-1'' is displayed in a manner different from that of the 4th F effect display EF-1.

That is, when the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high expectation level appears as the "4F post-reception display UA", the first aspect EF-1 (see FIG. 293(g)) is displayed as the 4F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as the "4F post-reception display UA".

On the other hand, when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "Display UA after reception on the 4th floor", the aspect UA-1 with relatively high expectations appears as the "Display UA on the 4th F after reception". The 4th F effect display EF is displayed in a different manner than usual.

That is, when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "4th-F post-reception display UA", the second aspect EF-2 (see FIG. 293(g)) is displayed as the 4th-F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 with relatively low expectations will appear as the "4th F post-reception display UA".

According to such a 4th F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 292(g) and 293(g), an operation is not performed on the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". The same mode (Aspect UA-1, Aspect UA- 2) will appear, but this can be said to have a different configuration from any of the above-mentioned 1F to 3F reception periods.

Furthermore, during the 4F reception period according to this embodiment, the "4F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are as shown in FIG. The periodic changes are hidden based on the operation on the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" so that the periodic changes are made. Here, by hiding the "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, the periodic changes are hidden. That will happen.

In addition, during the 4th F reception period according to this embodiment, the ``4th F omen effect display'' also corresponds to the operation on the ``4th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'', as shown in FIG. 293. Hidden status based on.

In addition, in this example, when the situation is immediately after an operation is accepted for the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" (the state where the 4th F effect display EF is displayed), the "4th F effect display EF" is displayed. "Operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "4th F omen effect display EF" are not hidden, and "4th F "Operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to overlap with the rear side of the fourth F effect display EF. After this, these "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "4th F omen effect display EF" are changed to "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" The display is set to a hidden state based on an operation on "Part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "4F post-reception display UA" includes such "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "4F effect display". This makes it difficult to visually recognize the "4th F post-reception display UA" immediately after it is displayed. However, as "4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "4th F effect display EF" etc. are hidden, The visibility of the "4F post-reception display UA" will gradually become better. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when the 4F effect display EF is displayed, it is possible to determine whether the "4F post-reception display UA" is a highly expected mode UA-1 and a low-expected mode UA- It is made easy to recognize which one is displayed.

Then, the "4th F post-reception display UA" according to this production example will advance its display content in accordance with the expectation levels UA-1 and UA-2.

In addition, during the 4F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, when the 4F reception permissible sound occurs, either "first permissible sound C1" or "second permissible sound C2" (selected) ) can be output audibly. For example, when the 4F reception period occurs, when the "first permissible sound C1" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound, the jackpot is more likely to be hit than when the "second permissible sound C2" is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the level of expectation (rate) that has been achieved is high.

Note that the "first permissible sound C1" as the 4th F reception permissible sound is preferably a sound that will not be audibly output as the 2F reception permissible sound or the 3rd F reception permissible sound. On the other hand, the "second permissible sound C2" as the fourth F acceptance permissible sound may be output as the same sound as the "first permissible sound A2" of the second F reception permissible sound. Further, the "second permissible sound C2" as the 4th F reception permissible sound may be output as the same sound as the "second permissible sound B2" of the 3rd F reception permissible sound.

In this regard, during the 4F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 292(j) and 293(j), either "first permissible sound C1" or "second permissible sound C2" is audible as the permissible sound. Although a situation may occur where an operation is accepted while the output is being output, "4th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "4th F operating section B (here, Even if an operation is accepted for any of the "operation buttons 410)", this will be used as a trigger to interrupt the audible output of the 4F acceptance permission sound (first permission sound A1, second permission sound A2). (timing th2A, th2B).

In addition, during the 4F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, "4F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "4F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" Regardless of whether the operation is accepted for any of the above, this will be used as an opportunity to display the 4th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 4th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG). , or end the corresponding 4F reception period.

Additionally, as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the 4F reception period originally continues until timing th3 arrives when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period). It will be terminated based on this. In this regard, the 4th F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. More specifically, if the operation to end the 4F reception period is not received until timing th3 arrives, the 4F operation section A (here, sword decoration The same post-reception change A as when the operation is performed on the body 5001) can occur based on the arrival of timing th3.

FIG. 294 is a time chart illustrating an example of the content of the performance when the ``condition 5F'' is satisfied as the generation condition, the 5th F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "5th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the fifth F variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 5th F variation pattern, sound output according to the 5F variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (notice performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "5th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 294, within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "5th F variation pattern", based on the arrival of timing ti2 when the 5th F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 5F"), "Acceptance regarding changes after 5F reception (display UA, UB after 5F reception, sound output after 5F reception, etc.)" is permitted. The 5F reception period (validity period) is allowed to occur.

Here, the 5th F reception period according to this embodiment has basically the same configuration as the above-mentioned 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286). Therefore, during the 5F reception period, the 5F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) can accept only one operation until the 5F reception period ends. The 5F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is configured to allow multiple operation receptions until the 5F reception period ends (multiple operation permission). period). The "5th F operating section A" and "5th F operating section B" used during the 5th F reception period are also the same as the "2nd F operating section A" and "2nd F operating section B" used during the 2nd F receiving period, respectively. It is desirable to use it as an operating section. However, this is not necessary.

That is, the 5th F reception period (multiple operation permissible period) is similar to the above-mentioned 2F reception period, and for example, an operation on the 5F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) that is permitted to be operated multiple times is not allowed. Although the game has started, the player feels uneasy because the final result display does not appear, and in the middle of the 5th F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), the 5th F operation section B (here, operation button It is assumed that there will be a case where the user attempts to advance the performance by switching from "operation on 5F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" to "operation on 5F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 5th floor reception period is to occur, first, a foreshadowing effect is displayed indicating that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 5th floor reception period will occur). It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when timing ti1 arrives before the occurrence of the 5th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 294(a), the foreshadowing performance display “ 5F portent effect display” is started. As shown in FIG. 294(d), this "5th F precursor effect display" is displayed so as to span before and after the timing at which the 5th F operation related displays A and B are displayed. The "5th F omen effect display" is executed in a different manner (type) from the "1F omen effect display", the "2nd F omen effect display", and the like. Furthermore, it may be executed in the same manner as the "3rd F portent effect display", "4th F portent effect display", etc. However, the "5th F omen performance display" may be executed in the same manner as the "2nd F omen performance display", or may be executed in a manner different from the "3F omen performance display".

That is, in this production example, even when the 5th F reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. Or, the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted, and the 5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) ``5F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)'' that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. It has become a thing. In addition, in this production example, the timing when the 5th F reception period occurs, and the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing of For example, the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 5th F omen effect display is displayed and at the same time. The display may be started before the 5F reception period occurs, so that the display straddles the timing. Alternatively, the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may be started to be displayed after the timing when the 5th F reception period occurs. You can.

In this example, "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are "5th F operation part A (here, sword decoration object)". 5001) (reference image display)" and "display imitating the 5th F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410) (reference image display)". The displayed content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" The display starts so that it appears superimposed on the back side of the 5F portent effect display.

In addition, "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . In other words, as mentioned above, during the 5F reception period, the 5F operation part A (herein, the sword ornament 5001 )" and a "fifth F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" which can accept multiple operations are provided.

Regarding the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "the part (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the 5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is a predetermined When a moving image is defined as one periodic change, such as ``the image is displayed in one mode and then displayed in several modes sequentially,'' the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 5F time A. It has become.

In addition, regarding the "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "the part (button drawing image BMG) where the operation receiving part of the 5th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is imitated is displayed in a specific manner. , and then displayed sequentially in several ways as one periodic change, such that the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined period of 5F time B. It has become.

According to these configurations, during the 5F reception period, each "5F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", "5F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", etc. The "operation receiver" appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the period 5F time A and the period 5F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be made to be different times. However, since it is set as a longer time than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 3F reception period, the 5F reception period is similar to the 3F reception period as well as the 2F reception period described above. In comparison, the "operation receiver" is depicted moving slowly up and down its movable range. It is desirable to set the period 5F time A and the period 5F time B as the same time as the period 2F time A and the period 2F time B, respectively.

In addition, when the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing ti2 when the 5th F reception period occurs. , it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for the timing ti2 when the 5th F acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are in the above-described predetermined manner and until timing ti2 arrives. They will be displayed in a way that maintains each specific aspect.

In this example as well, "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed while "5th F omen effect display" is being displayed. The display starts appearing behind the "5th F portent effect display" and its periodic change begins. It should be noted that the display range of the 5th F omen effect display is reduced as time passes.

However, the "5th F portent effect display" according to this example is different from the "2nd F portent effect display", and is different from the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation related display B (button drawing)". It consists only of "aspects" that appear to overlap on the front side of "Image BMG)", and "aspects" that appear to overlap on the back side of these images are not executed. It has become. As shown in FIG. 294, etc., the "5th F omen effect display" according to this example starts displaying before the timing ti2 when the 5th F reception period occurs, and is set for the 5F reception period. The display is hidden before the timing ti3 when the set time has elapsed (the timing ti3 when the fifth F reception period ends without any operation by the player).

By the way, in the 5th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as in the 2nd floor reception period described above, the "hero" and the "magician" who confront the BOSS character are respectively displayed on the effect display device 1600. The "hero" is used as a character that moves according to the operation on the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", and the "magician" is used as a character that moves according to the operation on the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 5001)". 410)" is used as a character that moves in response to operations. However, it is desirable that the presentation content is different from other reception periods (for example, the type of BOSS character is different), including the second F reception period.

More specifically, if an operation is performed on the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 5th F reception period, "the hero becomes the BOSS character based on the one-time operation reception". "Can you defeat the player?", and depending on the result, the expectation level of the jackpot is high or low (it can be "100%" or "0%"). It can be suggested.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on "5th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" during the 5th F reception period, an effect such as "Is it possible to escape (escape) from the BOSS battle?" sex is now provided. That is, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5th F reception period, the magical power value ("magic" decoration display) displayed at the bottom right of the display screen is When the magical power value becomes full, the wizard casts a spell and successfully escapes from the BOSS battle. Then, when the player succeeds in leaving (escape) in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation level of the jackpot is higher (even "100%") than when the player is not successful.

In the 5th floor reception period according to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "5th floor operation related display A", "5th floor operation related display B", "hero", "wizard", "BOSS character", etc. , most of them are covered by the ``5th F portent display,'' making it impossible to recognize the entire picture.

However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "2nd F portent effect display", the "5th F omen effect display" according to this example is not performed before the timing ti3 at which the set time as the 5F reception period has elapsed. It is supposed to be in the display state. In addition, since the display area of the "5th F omen effect display" is also reduced as time passes, "5th F operation related display A", "5th F operation related display B", " The visibility of "Hero", "Wizard", "BOSS character", etc. will be gradually improved from the stage before the "5th F omen effect display" is hidden.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 294, at timing ti2A within the 5F reception period, the first operation is accepted for "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (the reception period is not ended). This assumes a case where an operation (operation reception) is performed. In this example as well, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal; however, the invention is not limited to this, and ``operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal'' may be realized using other methods. You can.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing ti2A within the 5th F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 294(i), ( As shown in k), one of the changes B after receiving the 5th F is that the magic value (the area filled in against the "magic" decoration display) increases (the magic value changes from "0" to "1"). ``Drawing of the wizard MT saving MP'' are shown (display UB1 after reception on the 5th floor). Note that the 5th F post-reception display UB1 may be executed in the same manner (same effect image) as the above-mentioned "2nd F post-reception display UB1".

In this example, if an operation is performed on "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 5th F reception period, a corresponding post-reception output sound is output audibly. (See FIG. 294(k)). In other words, in this case, a "magician" will be depicted secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such operations multiple times, Because the response (performance) is low, it can arouse feelings of anxiety such as ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5th F reception period is too low, the game enjoyment may be affected. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th F reception period, the display UB after the 5th F reception ("The magic value increases ``Depiction'' and ``Depiction of a wizard MT saving MP'') should not be displayed behind the ``5th F omen effect display'' mentioned above, and when they overlap, they should be displayed in front of it. It will be displayed. According to such a configuration, although the output sound is not audible after reception, which arouses a feeling of anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue this kind of operation?", the operation reception itself is performed properly. You will be able to appropriately suggest the situation.

In addition, regarding such "change B after reception on the 5th floor", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described below, a production change that is different from the display UB after reception on the 5F (for example, changing the lighting mode of the production lamp) (e.g., a change in effect to make the scene appear) may also be performed. Alternatively, such "change B after reception on the 5th floor" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple production elements, but with any one of the production elements described above (for example, a production that changes the lighting mode of the production lamp). It may be realized only by (change).

In addition, the execution time of the "5th floor post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "5th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is set longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation reception on the "5th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is the same as the previous operation on the "5th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be done while the corresponding 5th F post-reception display UB is being displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 294, when a second operation is performed on "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing ti2B within the 5th F reception period is assumed. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 294(i) and 294(k), as one of the changes B after receiving the 5th F, the "magic power value (the "magic" decoration display is filled out)" ``Drawing of the magic power value changing from 1 to 2'' and ``Drawing of the wizard MT accumulating more MP'' are now shown respectively (Reception on the 5th floor). Rear display UB2). Note that the 5th F post-reception display UB2 may also be executed in the same manner (same effect image) as the above-mentioned "2nd F post-reception display UB2". However, at this time, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 294(k)).

In this example, it is assumed that at timing ti2C within the 5th F reception period, the third operation is performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 294(i) and (k), not only the post-acceptance output sound is not output audibly, but also a new display is displayed as the 5F post-acceptance display UB. (mode) does not appear.

In this example, if the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) within the 5th F reception period, We have made it so that "a new display will not appear as the display UB after the 5th floor reception", but instead, within the 5th floor reception period, the "5th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" A determination may be made when an operation is performed, and a new display may not be performed as the 5F post-reception display UB based on the result of the determination. The point is that such an event (despite operating the "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 5th F reception period, a new display is displayed as the 5F post-reception display UB) (does not appear) need only occur when a predetermined condition is met.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 5th floor reception period, even though the 5th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time of the 5th F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 5F reception period, if an operation is performed on "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the 5F reception display UB may be displayed, but the reception This feeling of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 294, the "initial game strategy (timings ti2A to ti2C)" that aims to advance the production by multiple operations on the "5th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is used. If the player has given up, it is possible to make the final performance result appear with just one operation. This assumes the case where you switch to a "game strategy".

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIG. 294, the display UB2 after the reception of the 5F (here, the magic value is "2") in response to the reception of the operation on the "5F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" At timing ti2D during the 5th F reception period, the 5th F operation section It is assumed that the operation is performed on the sword decoration object 5001).

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing ti2D within the 5th F acceptance period, the 5th F post-acceptance change A occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the 5th F reception, first, the 5F reception period is ended based on the operation. In addition, the "5th F reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "5th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output, and the "5th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is output audibly. The "5th F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to see the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "decoration body 5001)" is displayed, and furthermore, the 5th F post-reception display UA is displayed. .

In this regard, the 5th F effect display EF according to this production example includes "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" will start to be displayed in a situation where none of them are in a hidden state, and the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" on the operated side It is displayed so that it appears to overlap from the front with "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)".

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5th F reception period, the "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to display is never displayed.

In addition, the relative expectation level (jackpot There are cases where an aspect UA-1 appears with a high rate of winnings, and there are cases where an aspect UA-2 appears where the expectation level (rate of winnings) is lower than that aspect ( (See Figure 294(h)). Note that it is desirable that the 5th F post-reception display UA is not executed in the same manner (same effect image) as the above-mentioned "5th F post-reception display UA". Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the 5th F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "5th F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output; The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In this respect, when the aspect UA-1 with relatively high expectations appears as the "display UA after reception on the 5th floor", and the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "display UA after reception on the 5th floor". In both cases, the same mode is displayed as the "5th F effect display EF". That is, in this case, even if the mode of "5th F effect display EF" is confirmed, the mode of "5th F post-reception display UA" cannot be recognized.

In this case, such "5th F effect display EF" is the same mode as the mode EF-2, which is the one with lower expectation among the modes EF-1 and EF-2 of the "2nd F effect display EF". It may be displayed as . In addition, such a "5th F effect display EF" is displayed in the same manner as the mode EF-2, which is the one with the lower expectation among the modes EF-1 and EF-2 of the "3rd F effect display EF". Alternatively, the effect may be displayed in the same manner as the aspect EF-2, which is the one with the lower expectation among the aspects EF-1 and EF-2 of the "4th F effect display EF". good.

In addition, during the 5th F reception period according to this embodiment, "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are shown in FIG. 294. The periodic changes are hidden based on the operation on the "fifth F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" so that the periodic changes are made. Here, by hiding "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, the periodic changes are hidden. That will happen.

In addition, during the 5th F reception period according to this embodiment, the "5th F portent effect display" is also displayed, although illustration is omitted, while the "5th F portent effect display" is being displayed, the "5th F operation section A (Here, the sword ornament 5001)" is made to be hidden based on this operation. However, the "fifth-F portent effect display" is not made to be hidden when the "fifth-F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated.

In this example, if an operation is performed on the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the "5th F omen effect display" is displayed (not shown), the operation reception is When the situation is immediately after the action has been made (the situation where the 5th F effect display EF is displayed), "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" ", and the "5th F omen effect display" are not hidden, and the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" appears to overlap behind the 5th F effect display EF. It is displayed as follows. After that, these "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "5th F omen effect display" are changed to "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is turned into a hidden state based on the operation. However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "5th F post-reception display UA" includes such "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "5th F effect display". This makes it difficult to visually recognize the "5th F post-reception display UA" immediately after it is displayed. However, as "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "5th F effect display EF" etc. are hidden, The visibility of the "5F post-reception display UA" will gradually become better. However, as mentioned above, even if you check the mode while the 5th F effect display EF is being displayed, the "5th F reception display UA" will be the highly anticipated mode UA-1 and the low expected mode UA- It is not possible to recognize which one is being displayed.

In addition, during the 5th F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 294, when the 5th F acceptance period occurs, the 5th F acceptance permission sound may be audibly output. However, when the 5th floor acceptance period occurs, only one mode can be audibly output as the 5th floor acceptance sound, and the expectation level (proportion) of winning the jackpot is not suggested. It is like that.

In this regard, during the 5th F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 294(j), a situation may occur in which an operation is accepted while the 5th F acceptance permission sound is audibly output. When an operation is accepted for the "5F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the audible output of the 5F reception acceptance sound is not interrupted (timings ti2A, ti2B, ti2C). Furthermore, during the 5th F reception period, even if an operation is accepted for the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 5th F reception period is being audibly output, this will also be used as a trigger for the 5th F reception period. The audible output of the 5F acceptance permission sound is not interrupted (timing ti2D).

In addition, during the 5F reception period, based on the operation performed on the 5F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), the 5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. ” and “5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” will be hidden, and the 5th F reception period will be ended. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the "5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", no matter how many times the operation is performed, this triggers the "5F operation related display A". (sword decoration image SYG)” and “5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” may not be hidden or the 5th F reception period may not end.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th F reception period, the magical power value (the area filled out with respect to the "magic" decoration display) When the amount has accumulated to an increase, it may be arranged to wait until the timing ti3 at which the fifth F acceptance period ends, and perform a magic effect to perform withdrawal based on the arrival of the timing ti3. In this case, even if the magic value has been accumulated to the maximum, until timing ti3 arrives, operation reception on the "5th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is also allowed. If you do this, you will be able to choose whether or not to make a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of applying magic and leaving is confirmed, which will increase the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to improve your skills. However, in this case, if an operation is performed on the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the effect of applying magic and leaving will not be performed regardless of the effect result.

Alternatively, before the 5F reception period occurs, a performance judgment is performed, and if a special judgment result is not obtained as a result of the performance judgment, the 5F operation section B ( Here, no matter how many times you operate the operation button 410), the magic value will not accumulate to the maximum (the reception period will not end). Good too. In this case, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "5th F post-reception display UA" is displayed as a mode UA-2 with relatively low expectations. may always appear, or it may be arranged that there is a possibility that aspect UA-1 with a relatively high expectation level will appear. In this regard, if the mode UA-1 with a relatively high expectation level may appear when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the magic value cannot be accumulated to an increase no matter how many times the "5th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated. can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor (such as depictions of increasing magical power, depictions of wizards accumulating MP, etc.) is not only the "5th floor omen production display" but also the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor. Even in relation to the rear display UA, it is not displayed behind it, but is displayed so as to overlap in front of it. In this example, when the aspect UA-1 is displayed as the "Display UA after reception on the 5th floor", the aspect UA-1 is displayed in the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (a depiction of the magic value increasing, a magician increasing MP, etc.). We decided to display it so that it appears to overlap behind the stored depictions, etc.), but even when the aspect UA-2 is displayed as the "Display UA after reception on the 5th floor", the aspect UA-2 2 may be displayed so as to overlap behind the 5th F post-reception display UB (depicts of increasing magical power values, depictions of wizards accumulating MP, etc.).

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of a wizard saving MP, etc.) is made to overlap with the front side in relation to the decorative pattern. However, in relation to the decorative pattern, it may be displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of a wizard saving MP, etc.), the display UB after the reception on the 5th floor will be displayed in the 5th floor operation section A (here, When an operation is performed on "sword decoration object 5001)", it is no longer hidden from view based on this operation. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 294(i) etc., the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (description of increasing magical power, depiction of the wizard accumulating MP, etc.) is changed to "5th floor operation section A ( Here, in addition to continuing to display the ``5th F post-reception display UA'' and the ``5th F effect display EF'' corresponding to the operation for the ``sword ornament 5001),'' Even when the 5F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG), 5F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG), and 5F effect display EF are hidden, they continue to be displayed. It will be done.

However, in this case, the 5th F post-reception display UA (depictions of magical power increasing, depictions of wizards saving MP, etc.) will not be displayed during the period when the "5th F post-reception display UA" is displayed. It is desirable, but not essential, to be in this state. As a result, while promoting the fact that it is possible to advance the production by accepting an operation (magic performed by a wizard) on the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "5th F. It becomes possible to suitably indicate that the production is in a state of progress by accepting an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In addition, in the 5th F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. To hide the periodic changes that had previously appeared in the ``operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and the ``5th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)'' (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.) It is something that will continue. That is, during the 5F reception period, periodic changes in the 5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 5F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are different from the 5F operation section B ( Here, the display mode does not change before and after an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (operation that does not end the acceptance period), and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after an operation is accepted for the ``5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period), the 5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and The "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (cycle 5F time A, cycle 5F time B).

On the other hand, during the 5th F reception period, as shown in FIG. Periodic changes in the sword decoration image SYG) and the 5th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are hidden. Here, by hiding "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, we will hide their periodic changes. We are planning to do so.

Further, in this example, while the 5th F acceptance period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease over time, but this may not necessarily be done.

In addition, during the 5F reception period, the 5F operation section B (here, Even if you continue to operate (press) the ``operation button 410'', the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the operation will be automatically accepted at predetermined intervals) (auto continuous press). The function is not activated (see FIG. 294(b)). In this case, within the 5th floor reception period, multiple operations on the 5th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the 5th floor operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are performed. Needless to say, if the player wishes to accept the request, he or she must repeatedly operate (press) the "fifth F operation section B (here, operation button 410)".

In addition, the 5F reception period originally continues until timing ti3 arrives when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period), as shown in FIG. 294(c). It will be terminated based on this. In this respect, the 5th F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, if an operation to end the reception period is not accepted until timing ti3 arrives during the 5F reception period, even if timing ti3 arrives, the 5F operation section A (here , sword ornament 5001)" or "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is not performed the same effect as when the operation is performed.

By the way, in both of the above-mentioned 1F reception period to 5F reception period, operation opportunities are given (operation reception is allowed) to two types of operation sections, and the effect display device 1600 Displays (mock image displays) related to the operation units of each type are displayed. However, during the 1st-F reception period to the 5th-F reception period, it is sufficient that operation opportunities are given (operation reception is allowed) for at least two types of operation parts, and three or more types of operation parts are allowed. An operation opportunity may be given (operation reception is permitted) to each of the operation units.

In addition, the types of such "acceptance periods during which operation opportunities are given (operation acceptance is permitted) for at least two types of operation units" are as follows:
- While the relevant acceptance period is occurring, the display (sample image display) related to the operation unit to which the operation opportunity is granted (operation acceptance is permitted) is not displayed, and the operation opportunity is granted. It is also possible to further provide a confidentiality acceptance period that has the effect of concealing the current state.

When such a confidentiality acceptance period is provided, for example, in addition to the 1F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) (or in place of the 1F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)), A reception period may be provided in which neither the "1st F operation-related display A" nor the "1st F operation-related display B" is displayed during the 1F reception period, and the other configurations are the same. . However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the performance contents (post-reception display, foreshadowing display, reception permission sound, etc.) as post-reception performances may be executed as different types from each other.

In addition, apart from the 2F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286) (or in place of the 2F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286)), during the 2F reception period, "2F operation related Display A" and "2nd F operation related display B" may be configured such that they are not displayed, and the other configurations are the same. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the performance contents (post-reception display, foreshadowing display, reception permission sound, etc.) as post-reception performances may be executed as different types from each other.

In addition, apart from the 3F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) (or in place of the 3F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291)), during the 3F reception period, 3F operation related Display A" and "3rd F operation related display B" may be configured such that they are not displayed, and the other configurations are the same. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the performance contents (post-reception display, foreshadowing display, reception permission sound, etc.) as post-reception performances may be executed as different types from each other.

In addition, apart from the 4F reception period (see Figures 292 and 293) (or in place of the 4F reception period (see Figures 292 and 293)), during the 4F reception period, ``4F operation related Display A" and "4th F operation related display B" may be configured such that they are not displayed, and the other configurations are the same. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the performance contents (post-reception display, foreshadowing display, reception permission sound, etc.) as post-reception performances may be executed as different types from each other.

In addition, apart from the 5F reception period (see Figure 294) (or in place of the 5F reception period (see Figure 294)), the 5F operation related display A and the 5F operation related display B" may not be displayed, and other configurations may be the same. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the performance contents (post-reception display, foreshadowing display, reception permission sound, etc.) as post-reception performances may be executed as different types from each other.

This "acceptance period during which an operation opportunity can be granted (operation acceptance is allowed) for at least two types of operation parts" is determined by each display related to those two types of operation parts (for example, two types of operation parts are allowed to operate). (e.g., displaying a sample image of In this case, this may be generated, for example, during the 10th reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306) or the 11th reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310), which will be described below.

In addition, in order to realize each invention (confidentiality reception period) described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and each reception described above with reference to FIG. Regarding the periods, these may not necessarily be provided, or only necessary types of these reception periods may be provided.

FIG. 303 is a time chart illustrating an example of the content of performance when the ``Condition 10F'' is satisfied as the generation condition, the 10F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the 10F acceptance period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIGS. 305 and 306 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 10F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "10th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 10th F variation pattern. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 10th F variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 10F variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "10F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 303(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "10th F variation pattern", timing tj2 has arrived when the 10F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ. Based on (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 10F"), "reception regarding changes after 10F reception (display UA, UB after 10F reception, sound output after 10F reception, etc.)" is permitted. The above-mentioned 10th F acceptance period (validity period) can occur.

Here, the 10F reception period according to this embodiment is similar to the 3F reception period described above (see FIGS. 287 to 291). Operation unit B (in this case, operation button 410) is configured such that multiple operations can be accepted until the corresponding 10F reception period ends (multiple operations allowed). period). In this example, the "10th F operation section A" used in the 10th F reception period is replaced with the "1st F operation section A" used in the 1F reception period and the "2nd F operation section A" used in the 2F reception period. ” and the “3rd F operating unit A” used in the 3rd F reception period (here, the sword ornament 5001), but the operating units may be different from each other. In addition, the "10th F operation section B" used in the 10th F reception period can be replaced with the "1st F operation section B" used in the 1F reception period, the "2nd F operation section B" used in the 2nd F reception period, Although the same operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is used as the “3rd F operation unit B” used in the 3F reception period, different operation units may be used. In addition, during the 10F reception period, operation reception for an operation unit different from either the 10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 10F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) may be further permitted. You can do it like this.

However, in the "10th F reception period", as shown in FIGS. 303(e) and (f) and FIG. 305(a), when the "10th F reception period" occurs, the Operation related display (here, "operation related display" corresponding to the 10th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), "operation related display" corresponding to the 10th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410) This period is different from the above-mentioned "3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" in that none of the "related display") is displayed. In other words, in this case, the fact that the plurality of operation units (10F operation unit A, 10F operation unit B) that are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted is kept secret. As a result, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when an opportunity for operation is given.

In this regard, in the "10th F reception period" according to this production example, the final result display appears as a result of the operation on the 10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410), which allows multiple operations. In this case, the effect is such that the player can feel as if there is another operation section (operation section A on the 10th floor) that is secretly given an opportunity to operate it. That is, in this case, the operation target is switched from "operation on the 10th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" to "operation on the 10th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" to advance the production. This makes it more likely that the user will try to do so.

For example, in the "10th F reception period" according to this production example, no matter how many times you operate either the 10th F operating section A or the 10th F operating section B, which allows multiple operations, this will trigger the 10th F. The reception period is not set to end, and will only be ended based on the arrival of timing tj3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the 10th F reception period. There is. As a result, the player can see that the 10th floor reception period does not end no matter how many times the player operates it, and is aware of the possibility that there are other operation sections that are secretly given operation opportunities. You will be able to feel it.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, in order to generate the "10th floor reception period", as shown in FIGS. 303(d) and 304(d), the 10th floor reception period is A precursor effect display suggesting this period is not executed at a timing before the period occurs. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 303(d), 304(d), and 305(a), even after the 10th F reception period occurs, basically the 10th F operation section A (here, , the "operation-related display" corresponding to the sword ornament 5001) is not displayed, and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. is also as described above.

However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period, this will be used as an opportunity to display the 10F post-reception display UB. Then, the "10th F operation related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 303(f)). Note that at this time, the output sound after acceptance is not audibly output.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 303, it is assumed that the "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated for the first time at timing tj2A. The "10F operation related display B" is not displayed until the arrival of the "10F operation related display B" (in the situation shown in FIG. 305(a), the "10F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when the first operation is performed on the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tj2A, this will be the trigger for the above-mentioned 10F post-reception display UB to be displayed. In addition, the "10th F operation related display B" is displayed (in the situations shown from FIG. 305(b) onward, the "10th F operation related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 305(a), operation reception for the "10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "10F operation section B (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is performed. The fact that all operations for the "operation buttons 410)" are in a permissible state may be kept secret at the time of occurrence of the "10F acceptance period." However, as shown in FIG. 305(b), if an operation is accepted for the "10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" even once during the "10F reception period", the concealed state is changed. Since the confidentiality of only the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" side is released, it can be expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained while improving the game's interest. It becomes like this.

In this example, the "10th F operation related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" and is displayed as a different display image. It is said that Therefore, during the 10F reception period, a display imitating "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" does not appear. Further, regarding the "10th F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. Further, when the "10th F operation related display B" is hidden, it is desirable that the disappearing EF display is not displayed. However, none of these are essential configurations. For example, even if an operation is accepted for the "10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "10F reception period," this will be used as a trigger for "10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410). In addition to not displaying a display imitating the button 410), it is also possible to not display the 10th F operation-related display B. That is, in this case, the "10th F operation related display B" will not appear during the 10th F reception period.

Furthermore, during the 10F reception period, when an operation is performed on the ``10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', the change will be made as one of the ``10F post-reception changes A'' corresponding to the operation. , ``Which type of equipment will the hero YS appear wearing?'' will appear (displayed in UA after the 10th floor reception), and depending on the result, the expectation level of the jackpot will be high or low ( ``100%'' or ``0%'' may be suggested. In this production example, the display UA after the reception on the 10th floor is the "first production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear, and the "second production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. It is designed to be displayed in either "Production mode UA2" or "Third production mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears wearing iron armor. It is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the "first performance mode UA1", and the "third performance mode UA3" is higher than the "second performance mode UA2".

On the other hand, during the 10th floor reception period, when an operation is performed on the 10th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410), one of the 10th floor post-reception changes B corresponding to the operation As a result, effects such as ``Which type of equipment will the wizard MT appear wearing?'' (displayed in UB after the reception on the 10th floor) will appear, and depending on the result, the expectation level of jackpot will be high or low. (which may also be "100%" or "0%") may be suggested. In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 10th floor is divided into "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick, and "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. , the wizard MT appears equipped with a cane, which is displayed in either "Third performance mode UB3", and "Second production mode UB2" is more likely to be a jackpot than "First production mode UB1". The level of expectation is high, and the "third performance mode UB3" suggests that the level of expectation for a jackpot is higher than the "second performance mode UB2".

In this production example, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "10th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the 10th F reception display UB is displayed. There may also be a case where the "10F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated while the post-reception display UA is being displayed. In this case, normally, the 10th F post-reception display UB starts to be executed in one of the plurality of modes described above based on the operation reception for the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and is already The 10F post-reception display UA that is in the execution state does not take this as an opportunity to cause any changes or to be terminated. However, at this time, if the final mode (third presentation mode UB3) as the 10th floor post-reception display UB is displayed, the operation on the "10th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed. When this happens, no change in appearance (display change) occurs.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 305(b) and 305(c), the first operation is performed on "10th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 10th F reception period. In this case, the 10th floor post-reception display UB, which is one of the 10th floor post-reception changes B, will be executed as the 1st production mode UB1 in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick. There is.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, if an operation is performed on "10th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" within the 10th F reception period, the corresponding output sound after reception is Since there is no audible output (see Figure 303(k)), even if a new wizard MT appears equipped with one of the three types mentioned above, due to its secrecy, etc. It becomes possible to arouse feelings of anxiety such as, ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period is too low, the game may become less interesting. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after the reception on the 10th floor (Which type does the wizard MT 305 (b) and (c), it should not be displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, and when it overlaps, It is intended to be displayed so that it can be seen on the front side.

In addition, regarding the "10F post-reception change B" that corresponds to the operation on the "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 10F reception period, it also applies to the second and subsequent operations described below. In addition, a production change that is different from the display UB after the reception on the 10th floor (for example, a production change that changes the lighting mode of a production lamp, etc.) may be further performed. Alternatively, the "10th F post-reception change B" does not necessarily need to be executed with multiple performance elements, but only with one of the above-mentioned performance elements (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting mode of a production lamp). It may also be realized that similar effects can be obtained by.

In addition, the execution time of the "10th floor post-reception display UB" and "10th floor operation-related display B" in response to the operation reception on the "10th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is set as the corresponding reception period. (Not a required configuration) Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "10th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" are based on the previous operations on the "10th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be performed while the "10th F post-reception display UB" and "10th F operation related display B" are being displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 305(c) is appearing). In this example, the timing at which the "10F post-reception display UB" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "10F operation-related display B" is hidden.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303, at timing tj2B within the 10th F reception period (a situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 305(c) appears), "10th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time.

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in (d) to (f), the 10F post-reception display UB as one of the 10F post-reception changes B is changed to "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. It is set to be executed. In this example, the wizard MT (first production mode UB1), who had been equipped with a walking stick, is depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 305(d)), and then equipped with a rod. However, this method is limited to the method for causing the display change as the display UB after the reception on the 10th floor (see Fig. 305(e)). I can't do it. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, regarding the "10F operation related display B" that is displayed in response to the first operation on the "10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the "10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" When the button 410) is operated for the second time, the display mode or state does not change accordingly, and the previous display continues.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303, at timing tj2C within the 10th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 305(f) appears), "10th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the third time.

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in (g) to (i), the 10th floor post-reception display UB as one of the 10th floor post-reception changes B is changed to "3rd performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a cane. It is set to be executed. In this example, the wizard MT (second production mode UB2), who was previously equipped with a rod, is depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 305 (g)), and then equipped with a staff. However, this is the only method for causing the display change as the display UB after the reception on the 10th floor (see Figure 305 (h)). I can't do it. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 303(k)). Furthermore, regarding the "10F operation related display B" that is displayed in response to the first operation on the "10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the "10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is When the button 410) is operated for the third time, the display mode or state does not change in response, and the previous display continues.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303, at timing tj2D within the 10th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 305(i) appears), "10th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the fourth time.

However, in this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. 303(i), (k), As shown in FIGS. 305(j) and 306(k), not only is the output sound after reception not audible, but also there is no visible change ( aspect) does not appear. In other words, in this case, there is no apparent change after reception between before and after the fourth operation is performed on "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 10F reception period. This does not occur, and the performance will continue as it was before the fourth operation was performed. Further, at this time, the output sound after acceptance is not audibly output, and the "10th F operation related display B" continues to be displayed up to that point.

In this example, depending on how many times the 10th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is operated within the 10th floor reception period, the 10th floor post-reception display UB is displayed as a However, instead of this, within the 10th floor reception period, the 10th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific mode, or a new mode may not appear. You may also do something like this. In short, it is sufficient that such display changes occur when predetermined conditions are met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UB2" appears as the display UB after the reception on the 10th floor, after that, only the "10th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" continues to be operated. Even so, the "first production mode UB1" will not appear when the operation is accepted within the 10th floor reception period, and the "third production mode UB3" will be displayed as the display UB after the 10th floor reception. appears, even if you continue to operate only the "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the "1st The "presentation mode UB1" and the "second production mode UB2" never appear. Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 10F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this production example, even if the "10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated after the "third production mode UB3" is displayed, the "4th production mode UB3" described above is The same situation will occur as in the case of ``operation''.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 10th floor reception period, even though the 10th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the ``10F operation section B (here, operation button 410).'' I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety becomes gradually stronger as the remaining time of the 10F reception period decreases (as the elapsed time from the occurrence becomes longer). In particular, during the 10th floor reception period, if an operation is performed on the 10th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410), the 10th floor reception display UB may be displayed; This sense of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 303, 305, and 306, the initial game strategy (timing tj2A to tj2D)'' and switches to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by multiple operations on the ``10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' side. It is as expected.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 303(a), (h), and (i), the 10th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "10th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (the condition shown in FIG. 306(k)), at timing tj2E within the 10th F reception period, a request is made to "10th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)". This assumes that the first operation is performed.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the first operation reception is made for the "10F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tj2E within the 10F reception period, the change after the 10F reception is A.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 303(h), (k), and 306(l), such a change A after receiving the 10th F is "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". "The 10th F post-reception output sound A" corresponding to the first operation is audibly outputted, and the 10th F post-reception display UA is displayed. Here, the "first performance mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear appears as the display UA after the reception on the 10th floor. However, as shown in FIGS. 306(l) and (m), "Display UA after reception on the 10th floor (which type of equipment the hero YS appears wearing)" 10F Post-Reception Display UB", it is displayed so that it can be seen behind the decorative pattern SZ.

Note that the "output sound A after reception on the 10th floor" is output as a sound that will not be output even if an operation is accepted for any operation unit during the reception period on the 1st floor mentioned above. The plan is to ensure that

In addition, regarding the "10F post-reception change A" that corresponds to the operation on the "10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 10F reception period, in the case of the second or later operation described below. In addition, it may be possible to further perform a performance change that is different from the display UA after the reception on the 10th floor (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting mode of a performance lamp, etc.). Alternatively, the "10th F post-reception change A" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple performance elements, but only one of the above-mentioned performance elements (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting mode of a production lamp). It may also be realized that similar effects can be obtained by.

Furthermore, if an operation is performed on the "10th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 10th F reception period, the "10th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is operated. Unlike when an operation is performed, the "10F operation related display A" is not displayed when the operation is performed (see FIG. 303(e)).

In addition, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 303(i) and FIGS. 306(l) and (m), while the "10th F post-reception display UB" is being displayed, the "10th F operation section The first operation will be performed on "A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". However, the "10F post-reception display UB" becomes hidden when the first operation is accepted for the "10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

Here, the "10F post-reception change A (10F post-reception display UA)" in response to the operation reception for the "10F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is the "10F post-reception change B". (Display UB after reception on the 10th floor)", the execution state is ended in a short time within the reception period, and the application is placed in a non-execution (non-display) state.

Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "10th F operating section A (here, the operating button 410)" are based on the previous operations on the "10th F operating section A (here, the operating button 410)". This may be performed while the "10F post-reception display UA" has already been set to non-execution (hidden), and in this case, the "10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" '', the 10th floor post-reception display UA is not displayed. ``Will you appear wearing one?'' will begin execution.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), at timing tj2F within the 10th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 306(m) appears), "10th F operation section A ( Here, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001). In addition, in this production example, for each subsequent operation on the "10th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "10th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the previous operation is displayed. It is assumed that the test will be carried out in the middle of the day.

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 306(n) to (p), the display UA after the 10th floor reception as one of the changes A after the 10th floor reception is the "second production mode" in which the hero YS appears equipped with cloth clothes. UA2". In this example, the hero YS (first performance mode UA1), who had been equipped with only underwear up until then, is depicted moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 306(n)), and then is shown wearing cloth. Although it was decided that the character would be depicted reappearing with clothes equipped (second production mode UA2) (see Figure 306(o)), the method of causing the display change as the display UA after receiving the reception on the 10th floor is It is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, the "10F post-reception display UB" is also hidden when the second operation is accepted for the "10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), at timing tj2G within the 10th F reception period (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 306(p) appears), "10th F operation section A ( Here, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 306(q) to (s), the display UA after the reception on the 10th floor as one of the changes A after the reception on the 10th floor is the "third production mode" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. It is designed to be executed as "UA3". In this example, the hero YS (second production mode UA2), who had been equipped with cloth clothes up until then, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see Figure 306 (q)), and then It was decided that the character would reappear with the armor equipped (third production mode UA3) (see Figure 306(r)), but as a method to cause the display change as a display UA after the reception on the 10th floor. is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, the "10F post-reception display UB" is also hidden when the third operation is accepted for the "10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), at timing tj2H within the 10th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 306(s) appears), "10th F operation section A ( Here, it is assumed that the fourth operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 306(t) to (v), the display UA after the reception on the 10th floor as one of the changes A after the reception on the 10th floor is the "third production mode" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. It is designed to be executed as "UA3". In this example, the hero YS (third production mode UA3), who was previously equipped with iron armor, is depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 306(t)), and then It was decided that the character would reappear with the armor equipped (third production mode UA3) (see Figure 306(u)), but as a method to cause a display change as the display UA after receiving the 10th floor. is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, the "10F post-reception display UB" is also hidden when the fourth operation is accepted for the "10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

In other words, in this case, during the 10th floor reception period, when the fourth operation is performed on the "10th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the 10th floor post-reception display that was in the execution state until then is A performance will appear in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the UA is interrupted and the "third performance mode UA3" as the display UA starts again after the 10F reception.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), at timing tj2I within the 10th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 306(v) appears), "10th F operation section A ( Here, it is assumed that the fifth operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the fifth operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the 10th F reception period, As shown in 306(w) to (y), the display UA after the reception on the 10th floor as one of the changes A after the reception on the 10th floor is the "third production mode" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. It is designed to be executed as "UA3". In this example, the hero YS (third production mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see Figure 306(w)), and then It was decided that the character would reappear with the armor equipped (third production mode UA3) (see Figure 306(x)), but as a method to cause a display change as a display UA after receiving the reception on the 10th floor. is not limited to this. In this case, as described above, the output sound is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, the "10F post-reception display UB" is also hidden when the fifth operation is accepted for the "10F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

In other words, in this case, during the 10th F reception period, when the 5th operation is performed on the 10th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), the same as when the 4th operation is performed, A performance in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the 10F post-reception display UA, which had been in execution until then, is interrupted, and the "third production mode UA3" as the 10F post-reception display UA starts to be executed again. will appear.

In this example, depending on how many times the operation was performed on the "10th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 10th F reception period, "10F post-reception display UA" is displayed. However, instead of this, within the 10th floor reception period, the 10th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", and based on the result of the determination, the display is changed to a specific mode or the same mode appears again. You may also In short, it is sufficient that such display changes occur when each predetermined condition is met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UA2" appears as the display UA after the reception on the 10th floor, then the "first production mode UA1" will be displayed when the operation is accepted within the reception period on the 10th floor. " will no longer appear, and if "Third production mode UA3" appears as the display UA after receiving the 10th floor, then " ``First performance mode UA1'' and ``Second performance mode UA2'' never appear. Therefore, the "third performance mode UA3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 10F post-reception display UA. Therefore, in this production example, even if an operation is performed on the "10F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" after the "third production mode UA3" is displayed, the above-mentioned "4 The same situation as "the 5th operation" or "the 5th operation" will appear.

Further, regarding the "output sound after reception on the 10th floor", the same aspect can appear regardless of the number of times the operation is accepted. However, the audible output may be made in a different manner depending on the aspect of "change A after 10F reception (display UA after 10F reception)".

In addition, in this production example, in response to the operation performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 10th F reception period, "Change A after the 10th F reception (change A ``10F Post-Reception Display UA)'' appears and the ``10F Post-Reception Change'' is displayed in response to an operation being performed on the ``10F Operation Section B (here, operation button 410)'' within the 10F reception period. B (10F post-reception display UB)" appears, regardless of the timing of these operations, the execution state of "10F post-reception change B (10F post-reception display UB)" is terminated. Then, the execution state of "10th F post-reception change A (10th F post-reception display UA)" is terminated.

In addition, in the 10F reception period, as shown in FIG. 303, when the reception permission sound is generated, the reception permission sound is not audibly output, nor is a display indicating the remaining time displayed.

In addition, in this production example, the 10F post-reception display UA is not displayed so as to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ, but is displayed behind it (Fig. 306 (See (l) to (y), etc.). On the other hand, the 10F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to the decorative pattern SZ.

In addition, during the 10th floor reception period, even if the 10th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (for a predetermined period of time). (The auto-repeat function is not enabled) (see FIG. 303(b)). In this case, if the player wishes to accept multiple operations for the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F acceptance period, the player must Needless to say, it is necessary to repeatedly operate (press) the 10F operation section B (here, the operation button 410).

However, during the 10F reception period, if you continue to operate (press) the 10F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001), the operation reception will be performed multiple times (auto continuous press). The function is enabled and operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals (see FIG. 303(a)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 303(c), the 10F reception period continues until timing tj3 arrives, and ends only on the arrival of timing tj3. In this respect, the 10th F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 304, if no operation is performed within the reception period on the 10th floor, no change in display or sound output related to the reception period is performed, and the 10th floor remains unchanged. The reception period will end.

FIG. 307 is a time chart illustrating an example of the production contents when the ``condition 11F'' is satisfied as the generation condition, the 11th F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the 11th F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIGS. 309 and 310 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 11th F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "11th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 11th F fluctuation pattern. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 11th F variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 11F variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "11th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 307(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "11th F variation pattern", timing tk2 has arrived when the 11F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 11F"), the above-mentioned 11F reception period (valid period) can occur.

Here, the 11th F reception period according to this embodiment is the same as the above-mentioned 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306). Operation unit B (in this case, operation button 410) is configured such that multiple operations can be accepted until the end of the 11th floor reception period (multiple operations allowed). period). In this example, the "11th F operation section A" used in the 11th F reception period is replaced with the "1st F operation section A" used in the 1F reception period and the "2nd F operation section A" used in the 2F reception period. ”, the “3rd F operating unit A” used in the 3rd F reception period, and the “10th F operating unit A” used in the 10th F acceptance period (in this case, the sword ornament 5001). , may be different operation units. In addition, the "11th F operation section B" used in the 11th F reception period can be replaced with the "1st F operation section B" used in the 1F reception period, the "2nd F operation section B" used in the 2nd F reception period, Although the same operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is used as the “3rd F operation unit B” used in the 3F reception period and the “10F operation unit B” used in the 10F reception period, the operations are different from each other. It may be a department. In addition, during the 11F reception period, operation reception for an operation unit different from either the 11F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) or the 11F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) may be further permitted. You can do it like this.

Similarly, in the "11th F reception period", as shown in FIGS. 307(e), (f) and 309(a), when the "11th F reception period" occurs, the operation panel (Here, "operation-related display" corresponding to the above-mentioned 11F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), corresponding to the above-mentioned 11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) ("Operation related display") are no longer displayed. In other words, in this case, the fact that the plurality of operating units (11th F operating unit A, 11th F operating unit B) that are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted is kept secret. As a result, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when an opportunity for operation is given.

Also, in the "11th floor reception period" according to this production example, the final result display appears as a result of operating the 11th floor operating section B (here, the operating button 410), which allows multiple operations. In this case, the performance is such that it makes the user feel as if there is another operation section (operation section A on the 11th floor) that is secretly given an opportunity to operate it. In other words, in this case, the operation target is switched from "operation on the 11th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" to "operation on the 11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" to advance the production. This makes it more likely that the user will try to do so.

For example, in the "11th F reception period" according to this production example, no matter how many times you operate either the 11th F operating section A or the 11th F operating section B, which allows multiple operations, this will trigger the 11th F. The reception period is not set to end, and will only be ended based on the arrival of timing tk3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the 11th F reception period. There is. As a result, the player can see that the 11th floor reception period does not end no matter how many times the player operates it, and is aware of the possibility that there are other operation sections that are secretly given operation opportunities. You will be able to feel it.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, first, in generating the "11th F reception period", as shown in FIG. A precursor effect display suggesting this is not executed at the previous timing. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 307(d) and FIG. 309(a), even after the 11th F reception period occurs, basically the 11th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) As mentioned above, the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. .

However, in this production example, as well as in the case of the 10th floor reception period described above, if an operation is performed on the "11th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11th floor reception period, this will be used as a trigger. In addition to displaying the 11th F post-reception display UB, the "11th F operation related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 307(f)). Note that at this time, the output sound after acceptance is not audibly output.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tk2A. The "11th F operation related display B" is not displayed until the arrival of the "11th F operation related display B" (in the situation shown in FIG. 309(a), the "11th F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tk2A, this will be the trigger for the above-mentioned 11F post-reception display UB to be displayed. In addition, "11th F operation related display B" is displayed (in the situation shown from FIG. 309(b) onward, "11th F operation related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 309(a), operation reception for the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "11th F operating section B (here, the The fact that the operation reception for the "operation button 410)" is in a permissible state can be kept secret at the time of occurrence of the "11th F reception period." However, as shown in FIG. 309(b), if an operation is accepted for the "11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" even once during the "11th F reception period", the concealed state will be changed. Since the confidentiality of only the "11th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" side will be released, it can be expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained while improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes like this.

In this example, the "11th floor operation related display B" is not displayed as a copy of the "11th floor operating section B (here, the operation button 410)" and is displayed as a different display image. It is said that Therefore, during the 11th F reception period, a display imitating "11th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" will not appear. Further, regarding the "11th F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. Further, when the "11th F operation related display B" is hidden, it is desirable that the disappearing EF display is not displayed. However, none of these are essential configurations. For example, even if an operation is accepted for the "11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "11th F reception period", this will be used as an opportunity to "11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" In addition to not displaying the display imitating the button 410), the 11th F operation related display B may also not be displayed. That is, in this case, the "11th F operation related display B" will not appear during the 11th F reception period.

In addition, during the 11th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', it will be changed as one of the ``11F post-reception changes A'' corresponding to the operation. , ``Which type of equipment will the hero YS appear wearing?'' will appear (displayed in UA after the 11th floor reception), and depending on the result, the expectation level of the jackpot will be high or low ( ``100%'' or ``0%'' may be suggested. In this production example, the display UA after the reception on the 11th floor is the "first production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear, and the "second production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. It is designed to be displayed in either "Production mode UA2" or "Third production mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears wearing iron armor. It is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the "first performance mode UA1", and the "third performance mode UA3" is higher than the "second performance mode UA2". Note that, as is clear from FIGS. 305 and 309, the 10th F post-reception display UA and the 11th F post-reception display UA are executed as different performance contents (image displays).

On the other hand, during the 11th floor reception period, when an operation is performed on the 11th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410), one of the 11th floor post-reception changes B corresponding to the operation As a result, effects such as ``Which type of equipment will the wizard MT appear wearing?'' (displayed in UB after reception on the 11th floor) will appear, and depending on the result, the expectation level of jackpot will be high or low. (which may also be "100%" or "0%") may be suggested. In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 11th floor is divided into "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick, and "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. , the wizard MT appears equipped with a cane, which is displayed in either "Third performance mode UB3", and "Second production mode UB2" is more likely to be a jackpot than "First production mode UB1". The level of expectation is high, and the "third performance mode UB3" suggests that the level of expectation for a jackpot is higher than the "second performance mode UB2". Note that, as is clear from FIGS. 306 and 310, the 10th F post-reception display UB and the 11th F post-reception display UB are executed as different performance contents (image displays).

In this production example, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the 11th F post-reception display UB is displayed. There may be a case where an operation is performed on the "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" while the post-reception display UA is being displayed. In this case, normally, the 11th F post-reception display UB starts to be executed in one of the plurality of modes described above based on the operation reception on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and is already The 11th F post-reception display UA, which is in the execution state, does not take this as an opportunity to cause any changes or to be terminated. However, at this time, if the final mode (third production mode UB3) as the 11th-F post-reception display UB is displayed, the operation on the "11th-F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed. When this happens, no change in appearance (display change) occurs.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 309(b) and 309(c), the first operation is performed on "11th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 11th F reception period. In this case, the 11th floor post-reception display UB, which is one of the "11th floor post-reception changes B", will be executed as the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick. There is.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, if an operation is performed on "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 11F reception period, the corresponding output sound after reception is Since there is no audible output (see Figure 307(k)), even if a new wizard MT appears equipped with one of the above three types, due to its secrecy, etc. It becomes possible to arouse feelings of anxiety such as, ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 11th F reception period is too low, the game may become less interesting. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after the reception on the 11th floor (Which type does the wizard MT 309), as shown in Figure 309(b) and (c), it should not be displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, and when it overlaps, It is intended to be displayed so that it can be seen on the front side.

In addition, regarding the "11th F post-reception change B" that corresponds to the operation on the "11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 11th F reception period, it also applies to the second and subsequent operations described below. In addition, a production change that is different from the display UB after the reception on the 11th floor (for example, a production change that changes the lighting mode of a production lamp, etc.) may be further performed. Alternatively, "Change B after 11th F reception" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple performance elements, but only one of the above-mentioned performance elements (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting mode of a production lamp) It may also be realized that similar effects can be obtained by.

In addition, the execution time of the "11th floor post-reception display UB" and "11th floor operation-related display B" in response to the operation reception on the "11th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is set as the corresponding reception period. (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "11th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" are based on the previous operations on the "11th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be performed while the "11th F post-reception display UB" and "11th F operation related display B" are being displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 309(c) is appearing). In this example, the timing at which the "11th F post-reception display UB" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "11th F operation related display B" is hidden.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2B within the 11th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 309(c) appears), "11th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time.

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 11F reception period, As shown in (d) to (f), the 11th floor post-reception display UB as one of the 11th floor post-reception changes B is changed to the "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. It is set to be executed. In this example, the wizard MT (first production mode UB1), who had been equipped with a stick, is depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 309(d)), and then equipped with a rod. However, this is the only way to create a display change as the display UB after the reception on the 11th floor (see Figure 309(e)). I can't do it. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 307(k)). In addition, regarding the "11F operation related display B" that is displayed in response to the first operation on the "11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the "11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" When the button 410) is operated for the second time, the display mode or state does not change accordingly, and the previous display continues.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2C within the 11th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 309(f) appears), "11th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the third time.

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 11F reception period, As shown in (g) to (i), the 11th floor post-reception display UB as one of the 11th floor post-reception changes B is changed to the "third production mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a cane. It is set to be executed. In this example, the wizard MT (second production mode UB2), who was previously equipped with a rod, is depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 309 (g)), and then equipped with a staff. However, this is the only method for causing the display change as the display UB after the reception on the 11th floor (see Figure 309 (h)). I can't do it. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 307(k)). In addition, regarding the "11F operation related display B" that is displayed in response to the first operation on the "11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the "11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is When the button 410) is operated for the third time, the display mode or state does not change in response, and the previous display continues.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2D within the 11th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 309(i) appears), "11th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the fourth time.

However, in this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on "11th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 11th F reception period, FIGS. 307(i), (k), As shown in FIG. 309(j) and FIG. 310(k), not only the output sound after reception is not outputted audibly, but also there is no visible change ( aspect) does not appear. In other words, in this case, there is no apparent change after reception between before and after the fourth operation is performed on "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11F reception period. This does not occur, and the performance will continue as it was before the fourth operation was performed. Further, at this time, the output sound after acceptance is not audibly output, and the "11th F operation related display B" continues to be displayed up to that point.

In this example, depending on how many times the 11th F operation unit B (in this case, operation button 410) is operated within the 11th F reception period, the 11F post-reception display UB is displayed as ``Specific However, instead of this, within the 11th floor reception period, the 11th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific mode, or a new mode may not appear. You can also do something like this. In short, it is sufficient that such display changes occur when predetermined conditions are met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UB2" appears as the display UB after the reception on the 11th floor, after that, only the "11th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" continues to be operated. However, the "first production mode UB1" will not appear after the operation is accepted within the 11th floor reception period, and the "third production mode UB3" will be displayed as the display UB after the 11th floor reception. appears, even if you continue to operate only the "11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the "1st The "presentation mode UB1" and the "second production mode UB2" never appear. Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 11F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this production example, even if the "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated after the "third production mode UB3" is displayed, the "4th production mode UB3" described above is The same situation as ``operation'' will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 11th floor reception period, even though the 11th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the ``11th F operation section B (here, operation button 410).'' I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the time remaining in the 11th F reception period decreases (as the time elapses from the occurrence of the problem increases). In particular, during the 11th floor reception period, if an operation is performed on the 11th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410), the 11th floor reception display UB may be displayed; This sense of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 307, 309, and 310, the initial game strategy (timing tk2A to tk2D)'' and switches to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by multiple operations on the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' side. It is as expected.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 307(a), (h), and (i), the 11th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "11th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" While UB3 is being displayed (conditions shown in FIG. 310(k)), at timing tk2E within the 11th F reception period, a request is made to the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". This assumes that the first operation is performed.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the first operation reception is made for "11F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2E within the 11F reception period, the change after the 11F reception It can give rise to A.

In this production example, when the first operation is performed on "11th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the 11th F reception period, As shown in 310(l), the 11th floor post-reception display UA, which is one of the 11th floor post-reception changes A, is executed as the "first production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear. It is now possible to do so.

However, when an operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 11th F reception period, in addition to displaying the 11F post-reception display UA, 11F operation related display A" is displayed (see FIG. 307(e)). In addition, at this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance, that is, the same as when the operation is performed on "11th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". The performance is starting to show.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "11F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2E. Until tk2E arrives, the "11th F operation related display A" is not displayed (in the situations shown in FIGS. 309(a) to 310(k), the "11th F operation related display A" is not displayed). (not). In this regard, when the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2E, the above-mentioned 11th F post-reception display UA will be displayed using this as a trigger. In addition, "11th F operation related display A" is displayed (in the situation shown from FIG. 310(k) onwards, "11th F operation related display A" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 309(a), operation reception for the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "11th F operating section B (here, the The fact that the operation reception for the "operation button 410)" is in a permissible state can be kept secret at the time of occurrence of the "11th F reception period." However, as shown in FIG. 309(b), if an operation is accepted for the "11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" even once during the "11th F reception period", the concealed state will be changed. Confidentiality on the "11th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" side is now released, and furthermore, the operation reception for the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is now possible. However, if this is done, the confidentiality of the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" side will also be released, which will improve the enjoyment of the game while maintaining a good sense of tension. things can now be expected. The order of these confidentiality cancellations changes depending on the order in which the operation sections are operated. For example, the operation reception for "11F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is performed first. In this case, the confidentiality of the "11th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" side is canceled, and then, in response to the operation reception on the "11th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" The confidentiality of the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" side is further released.

The "11th F operation related display A" is not displayed as a display imitating the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and is displayed as a different display image. Further, regarding the "11th F operation related display A", periodic changes were prevented from appearing in the display. Further, when the "11th F operation related display A" is hidden, it is desirable that the disappearing EF display is not displayed. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the ``11th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'' during the ``11th F reception period'', this will be used as an opportunity. The "11th F operation related display A" may not be displayed.

However, when displaying the "11th F operation related display A", it will be displayed as a different display image from the "11th F operation related display B". Thereby, it is possible to suggest which of the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the "11th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" corresponds to the operation-related display. You will be able to do this.

As mentioned above, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 310(l) and 310(m), one When the second operation is performed, the 11th floor post-reception display UA, which is one of the "11th floor post-reception changes A", changes to the "first production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear. It is set to be executed.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even if an operation is performed on "11th F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the 11th F reception period, the corresponding reception will be processed. Since the rear output sound is not output audibly (see Figure 307(k)), even if a depiction of the hero YS newly appearing equipped with any of the above three types is made, its secrecy will be compromised. Combined with this, it is possible to arouse feelings of anxiety such as, ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11th F reception period is too low, the game There is a concern that interest will decline. Therefore, in this production example, when an operation is performed on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the 11th F reception period, the display UA after the 11th F reception (when the hero YS is Regarding whether the character appears wearing the equipment of the type, as shown in Figures 310 (l) and (m), the decoration pattern SZ is not displayed behind it, and the decoration pattern SZ is not overlapped with the decoration pattern SZ. Sometimes it is displayed so that it can be seen in front of it.

In addition, regarding the "11th F post-reception change A" that corresponds to the operation on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 11th F reception period, the second and subsequent operations described below will also apply. Including this, it may be possible to further perform a performance change that is different from the display UA after the reception on the 11th floor (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting mode of a performance lamp, etc.). Alternatively, "change A after reception on the 11th floor" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple performance elements, but only with one of the above-mentioned performance elements (for example, a performance change that changes the lighting mode of a production lamp). It may also be realized that similar effects can be obtained by.

In addition, the execution time of the "11th floor post-reception display UA" and "11th floor operation-related display A" in response to the operation reception on the "11th floor operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is also determined as the reception period. It is longer than the configured time (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" are the same as the operations performed on the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" that were previously performed. "11F post-reception display UA" and "11F operation-related display A" corresponding to "11F post-reception display UA" and "11F post-reception display UB" corresponding to the operation on "11F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" This will be performed while "11F operation related display B" is being displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 310(m) is appearing). In this example, the timing at which the "11th F post-reception display UA" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "11th F operation-related display A" is hidden.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2F within the 11th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 310(m) appears), "11th F operation section A (here, It is assumed that the second operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 11th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 310(n) to (p), the display UA after the 11th floor reception, which is one of the changes A after the 11th floor reception, is the "second performance" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. The program is executed as "mode UA2". In this example, the hero YS (first production mode UA1), who had been equipped with only underwear up until then, is depicted moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 310(n)), and then is shown wearing cloth. Although it was decided that the character would be depicted reappearing with clothes equipped (second production mode UA2) (see Figure 310(o)), the method of causing the display change as the display UA after receiving the 11th floor is It is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 307(k)). Furthermore, regarding the "11th F operation related display A" that is displayed in response to the first operation on the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" When the second operation is performed on the sword decoration object 5001), the display mode or state thereof does not change accordingly, and the previous display continues.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2G within the 11th F reception period (in which the effect display shown in FIG. 310(p) appears), "11th F operation section A (here, It is assumed that the third operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on "11th F operation part A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" within the 11th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 309(q) to (s), the display UA after the 11th floor reception, which is one of the changes A after the 11th floor reception, is the "3rd production" in which the hero YS appears wearing iron armor. The program is executed as "mode UA3". In this example, the hero YS (second performance mode UA2), who had been equipped with cloth clothes up until then, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see Figure 310 (q)), and then (See Figure 310(r)), but as a method to cause a display change as a display UA after receiving the reception on the 11th floor. is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 307(k)). Furthermore, regarding the "11th F operation related display A" that is displayed in response to the first operation on the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "11th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is When the third operation is performed on the sword decoration object 5001), the display mode or state does not change in response, and the previous display continues.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2H within the 11th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 310(s) appears), "11th F operation section A (here, It is assumed that the fourth operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

However, in this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on "11th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the 11th F reception period, , as shown in FIGS. 310(s) and 310(t), not only is the output sound after reception not audible, but also there is no change in appearance as the 11F post-reception display UA (change A after 11F reception). (mode) does not appear. In other words, in this case, there is a change in appearance after the reception before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "11F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 11F reception period. has not occurred, and the performance will continue as it was before the fourth operation. Further, at this time, the output sound after reception is not audibly output, and the "11th F operation related display A" continues to be displayed as before.

In this example, depending on how many operations have been performed on the "11th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 11th F reception period, "11F post-reception display UA" is displayed. However, instead of this, within the 11th floor reception period, the 11th floor operation section A (here, the sword A determination is made when an operation is performed on the decorative object 5001), and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific aspect, or a new aspect may appear. You can also set it to "no". In short, such display changes only need to occur when predetermined conditions are met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UA2" appears as the display UA after receiving the reception on the 11th floor, then continue to operate only the "11th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Even if the operation is accepted within the 11th floor reception period, the "first production mode UA1" will not appear, and the "third production mode UA3" will not appear as the display UA after the reception on the 11th floor. " appears, even if you continue to operate only the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the " ``First performance mode UA1'' and ``Second performance mode UA2'' never appear. Therefore, the "third effect mode UA3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 11F post-reception display UA. Therefore, in this production example, even if an operation is performed on the "11F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" after the "third production mode UA3" is displayed, the above-mentioned "4 The same situation as the "second operation" will appear.

In addition, during the 11th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 307, when the reception permission sound occurs, no reception permission sound is audibly output, and no display indicating the remaining time is displayed.

In addition, during the 11th floor reception period, the state in which either "11th floor operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or "11th floor operating section B (here, operating button 410)" is operated (pressed) Even if it continues to be maintained, this prevents the operation from being accepted multiple times (the operation is automatically repeated at predetermined intervals) (the auto-repeating function is not enabled) (Figure 307(a), (b)). In this case, during the 11th floor reception period, multiple operations on the 11th floor operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 11th floor operating section B (here, the operating button 410) are performed. If the player wants the reception to be accepted, the player must repeatedly operate the "11th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the "11th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)." It goes without saying that we must (press).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 307(c), the 11th F reception period continues until timing tk3 arrives, and ends only on the arrival of timing tk3. In this respect, the 11th F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 308, when no operation is performed within the reception period on the 11th floor, no changes in display or sound output related to the reception period are performed on the 11th floor. The reception period will end.

In addition, during the 11th floor reception period, it was decided to use the "sword ornament 5001" as the "11th floor operating section A" and the "operating button 410" as the "11th floor operating section B," but instead of this, The "operation button 410" may be used as the "11th F operating section A", and the "sword ornament 5001" may be used as the "11th F operating section B".

Furthermore, when such a confidentiality acceptance period is provided, the method is not limited to making both the two types of operation units confidential.
For example, for the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) described below is a modified example of the 2F reception period. It may be generated as follows. In addition, for the above-mentioned 3F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), instead of this, the 7F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298) described below is a modification of the 3F reception period. It may be generated as follows. In addition, for the above-mentioned 4F reception period (see Figures 292 and 293), instead of this, the 8F reception period (see Figures 299 and 300) described below is a modification of the 4F reception period. It may be generated as follows. Furthermore, in place of the 5th floor reception period (see Figure 294), the 9th floor reception period (see Figure 301) described below is generated as a modification of the 5th floor reception period. Good too.

In addition, in order to realize each invention (confidentiality acceptance period) described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and the drawings up to FIG. 294 and FIGS. The respective reception periods described above with reference to the drawings may not necessarily be provided, or only the necessary types of reception periods may be provided.

FIGS. 295 and 296 are time charts showing an example of the production content when the "condition 2F" is satisfied as the generation condition and the "6th F reception period" occurs as a modification of the 2F reception period. . Note that the illustration of the production example in the variation pattern in which the "6th F reception period" occurs is omitted because there are many parts that overlap with the above-mentioned case in which the 2F reception period occurs (see FIGS. 285 and 286). In addition, basically, only the differences (changed points) from the "2nd F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "6th F reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "2nd F reception period" occurs.

That is, during the 6F reception period, as well as the 2F reception period described above, the 2F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot be operated once until the 6F reception period ends. Only the reception is allowed, and the second floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept the operation multiple times until the end of the sixth floor reception period. (multiple operation permissible period). Furthermore, other examples regarding these "2nd F operating section A" and "2nd F operating section B" can be applied as appropriate, as in the case of the above-mentioned 2nd F reception period.

However, in the "6th F reception period", when the "6th F reception period" occurs, the "2nd F operation related display A" corresponding to the 2nd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is However, as shown in FIGS. 295(f) and 296(f), the "2nd F operation related display B" corresponding to the 2nd F operating section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. This differs from the above-mentioned "2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)" in that it is not performed. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of operating units (2nd F operating unit A, 2nd F operating unit B) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted, only some of the operating units are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted. ” will now be kept secret, and it can be expected that this will prevent a decline in gaming interest due to secrecy and maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the 6th F reception period differs from the above-mentioned 2F reception period in that the "2nd F operation related display A" is displayed and the "2nd F operation related display B" is not displayed, but the other configurations The content and performance are the same as the 2nd F reception period described above. Therefore, even when the 6th F reception period occurs, the presentation will basically proceed as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286.

In other words, the production example when the "6th F reception period" occurs is the "2F operation related display B (button drawing)" when compared with the production example (2nd F reception period) shown in FIGS. The only difference is that "Image BMG)" is not displayed, but the other contents are basically the same.Another example that can be applied to the configuration for the 2nd F reception period is the 6th F reception period. It is similarly applicable to such a configuration (a configuration other than the second F operation-related display B).

Therefore, when the "6th F reception period" occurs, the "2nd F precursor effect display ZFD" is first displayed at the timing when the 2nd F operation related display A is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 295. It is displayed so that it straddles the front and back.

In addition, it is noted that the "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" is executed by both "mode ZFD-1" and "mode ZFD-2", and that "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" ” is displayed, under what conditions is it hidden, and “2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is displayed with periodic changes. This point is also as described above in the 2nd F reception period.

In addition, in this production example, when the first operation on the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 6th F reception period, the same as in the case of the 2F reception period described above (Fig. 285(c)), and this triggers the display of the second F post-reception display UB1. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance. However, in this production example, when an operation is performed on "2nd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" within the 6th F reception period, in addition to displaying the 2F post-reception display UB1, When the operation is performed, "2nd F operation related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 295(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that the "second F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated at timing tf2A, but when the timing tf2A arrives Until then, the "2nd F operation related display B" is not displayed (in the situations shown in FIGS. 285(a) and (b), the "2nd F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tf2A, this triggers the display of the "2nd F operation related display B". (In the situation shown from FIG. 285(c) onwards, "2nd F operation related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, the fact that the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is in a state where operation acceptance is permitted is kept secret at the time of occurrence of the "6th F acceptance period". sell. However, the concealed state will be canceled once an operation is accepted for the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "6th F reception period", so there is a sense of tension. It can be expected to improve the game's interest while maintaining a favorable condition.

Here, such "2nd F operation related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 also in the "6th F reception period". However, the condition is that the display format that should normally be displayed when the reception period occurs (the format shown in Figures 284 to 286, etc.) is in the middle of the "6F reception period" and that an operation reception has been made. If something like this occurs, there is a concern that players will remember the negative feelings of having been ``intentionally hidden'' and their interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the "6th F reception period" according to this production example, "2nd F operation related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 284 to 286, but "2nd F operation related display B ” will be displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. 284 to 286. For example, the "2nd F operation related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", but is displayed as a different display image. Good too. Further, regarding the "2nd F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "6th F reception period", this will trigger the " 2F operation related display B" may not be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2B within the 6F reception period. There is. In this case, in the 6F reception period, as well as in the case of the 2F reception period described above (see FIG. 285(d)), the 2F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the second operation. is displayed (see FIG. 295(i)). At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 295(k)).

In this regard, during the 6th F reception period for this production example, the display mode of "2nd F operation related display B" does not change based on the second operation, and until then The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 295(e)).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2C within the 6th F reception period. There is. In this case, in the 6th F reception period, as well as in the 2nd F reception period described above (see FIG. 286(e)), when the third operation is performed, FIGS. As shown in 295(i) and (k), not only the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, but also a new display (mode) does not appear as the 2F post-reception display UB. In this example as well, despite such an event (despite the operation being performed on "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 6th F reception period, a new The display does not appear), as long as it occurs when a predetermined condition is met.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 295(a), (h), and (i), the ``2nd F reception In a situation where "back display UB2" and "2nd F operation related display B" are being displayed, at timing tf2D within the 6th F reception period, "2nd F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is displayed. ” is assumed to be operated on.

Also in the 6th F acceptance period, when an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tf2D, the 2nd F post-acceptance change A occurs. That is, as one of the changes A after the 2nd F reception, first, the 6th F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 295(a) and 295(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 286(f), (i) and FIGS. 295(h), (k), the "second F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is "2F reception output sound A" is audibly output, and "2F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "2F operation section A (here, sword decoration object 5001)" is visually recognized. A "2nd F effect display EF" that makes it difficult is displayed, and furthermore a 2nd F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In addition, even in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted during the 6th F acceptance period (the situation where the 2nd F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in FIG. 286(f), (i) and FIG. 295, , "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation related display B", and "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" are not hidden, and "2nd F operation related display "Display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to overlap with the rear side of the second F effect display EF. After that, these "2nd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2nd F operation related display B", and "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" are changed to "2nd F operation part A (here, 286 (g) and (j)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "2nd F reception period", the "2nd F operation related display B" that appears on the condition that the operation is accepted during the "6th F reception period" is It may be made to be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the 2F post-reception display UB2. That is, in this case, the 2F post-reception display UA will be hidden within the period in which it is displayed.

In addition, regarding the "2nd F operation related display B" that appears under the condition that the "6th F reception period" is in the middle and an operation has been accepted, unlike the case of the "2nd F reception period" mentioned above, other In relation to the display image, it may be displayed in the same manner as the second F post-reception display UB. In other words, in this case, the 2nd F operation related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "2nd F omen effect display ZFD" or "2nd F effect display EF", but when they overlap, it is displayed in front of them. It will be displayed. Further, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed on the front side thereof. When adopting such a configuration, the 2nd F operation related display B is different from the 2nd F operation related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "2nd F portent effect display ZFD" and "2nd F effect display EF." It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the ``2nd F reception permissible sound'', ``whether or not the automatic repeated press function is enabled'', and ``whether or not the automatic button function is enabled'' related to the 6th F reception period, please refer to the above 2F reception period. The same is true for . However, during the 6F reception period, if there is no operation on "2F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", as shown in FIG. Needless to say, "operation related display B" is never displayed.

In addition, even if an operation is accepted for the "2nd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 6th F reception period, the "2nd F operation related display B" will not be displayed using this as an opportunity. In this case, in FIGS. 284 to 286 and FIG. 295(f), the "2nd F operation related display B" always remains hidden, and the other configurations are the same as the above-mentioned 2 F. The production will proceed in the same manner as during the reception period.

FIGS. 297 and 298 are time charts showing an example of the production contents when the "condition 3F" is satisfied as the generation condition and the "7th F reception period" occurs as a modification of the 3F reception period. . Note that the example of the production in the variation pattern in which the "7th F reception period" occurs is omitted because there are many parts that overlap with the above-mentioned case in which the 3F reception period occurs (see Figures 290 and 291). At the same time, we will basically only explain the differences (changed points) from the "3rd F reception period". Therefore, among the configurations related to the "7th F reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "3rd F reception period" occurs.

That is, during the 7F reception period, as well as the 3F reception period described above, both the 3F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410), Multiple operations are allowed to be accepted until the 7th F acceptance period ends (multiple operations allowed period). Furthermore, other examples regarding these "3rd F operating section A" and "3rd F operating section B" can be applied as appropriate, as in the case of the above-mentioned 3rd F reception period.

However, in the "7th F reception period", when the "7th F reception period" occurs, the "3rd F operation related display A" corresponding to the 3F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is However, as shown in FIGS. 297(f) and 298(f), the "3rd F operation related display B" corresponding to the 3rd F operating section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. It is different from the above-mentioned "3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 290 and 291)" in that it is not performed. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of operating units (3rd F operating unit A, 3rd F operating unit B) that are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted, only some of the operating units are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted. ” will now be kept secret, and it can be expected that this will prevent a decline in gaming interest due to secrecy and maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the 7F reception period is different from the 3F reception period described above in that the "3F operation-related display A" is displayed and the "3F operation-related display B" is not displayed, but other than that, the 7F reception period is different. The details and production contents are the same as the 3rd F reception period mentioned above. Therefore, even when the 7th F reception period occurs, the presentation will basically proceed as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291.

In other words, the production example when the "7th F reception period" occurs is the "3F operation related display B (button drawing)" when compared with the production example (3F reception period) shown in FIGS. 290 and 291. The only difference is that "Image BMG)" is not displayed, but other than that, the contents are basically the same.Another example that can be applied to the configuration for the 3rd floor reception period is the configuration for the 7th floor reception period. It is similarly applicable to such a configuration (a configuration other than the 3rd F operation related display B).

Therefore, when the "7th F reception period" occurs, the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" is first displayed at the timing when the 3rd F operation related display A is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291. It is displayed so that it straddles the front and back.

Also, how will the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" be displayed in relation to the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and under what conditions will it be hidden? The periodic changes in which the "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, etc. are also as described above in the 3rd F reception period.

In addition, in this production example, when the first operation on the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed within the 7th F reception period, as in the case of the 3F reception period described above (Fig. 290(c)), the 3rd F post-reception display UB1 is displayed using this as an opportunity. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance. However, in this production example, when an operation is performed on "3rd F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" within the 7th F reception period, in addition to displaying the 3F post-reception display UB1, When the operation is performed, the "3rd F operation related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 297(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that the "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated at timing tg2A, but when timing tg2A arrives Until then, the "3rd F operation related display B" is not displayed (in the situations shown in FIGS. 290(a) and (b), the "3rd F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tg2A, this triggers the display of the "3rd F operation related display B". (In the situation shown from FIG. 290(c) onward, "3rd F operation related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, the fact that the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is in a state where operation acceptance is allowed is kept secret at the time of occurrence of the "7th F acceptance period". sell. However, the concealed state will be canceled if an operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" even once during the "7th F reception period", so there is a sense of tension. It can be expected to improve the game's interest while maintaining a favorable condition.

Here, such "3rd F operation related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 289 to 291 also in the "7th F reception period". However, the condition is that the display format that should normally be displayed when the reception period occurs (the format shown in Figures 289 to 291, etc.) is in the middle of the "7th F reception period" and that an operation reception has been made. If something like this occurs, there is a concern that players will remember the negative feelings of having been ``intentionally hidden'' and their interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the "7th F reception period" according to this production example, "3rd F operation related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, etc., but "3rd F operation related display B ” will be displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. 289 to 291 and the like. For example, the "3rd F operation related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", but is displayed as a different display image. Good too. Further, regarding the "3rd F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "7th F reception period", this will trigger the " 3F operation related display B" may not be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2B within the 7F reception period. There is. In this case, in the 7F reception period, as well as in the 3F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(d)), based on the second operation, the 3F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (see FIG. 297(i)). At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 297(k)).

In this regard, during the 7th floor reception period for this production example, the display mode of "3rd floor operation related display B" does not change based on the second operation, and until then The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 297(e)).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tg2C within the 7F reception period. There is. In this case, when the third operation is performed during the 7F reception period, as in the case of the 3F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(e)), As shown in 297(i) and (k), not only the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, but also a new display (aspect) does not appear as the 3F post-reception display UB. In this example as well, despite such an event (despite the operation being performed on "3rd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 7th F reception period, a new display UB after 3F reception is displayed) The display does not appear), as long as it occurs when a predetermined condition is met.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 297(a), (h), and (i), in response to the operation reception for the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)," In a situation where "back display UB2" and "3rd F operation related display B" are being displayed, at timing tg2D within the 7th F reception period, "3rd F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is displayed. ” is assumed to be operated on.

Even in the 7th F acceptance period, when the first operation acceptance is made to the "3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tg2D, the 3rd F post-acceptance change A can occur. That is, as the change A after receiving the third F, for example, as shown in FIGS. 297 (g) to (k) and FIG. The "3rd F reception output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation is audibly output, and the "3rd F operation related display A" corresponding to the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is output. (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed. "3rd F effect display EF1" that makes it difficult to visually recognize "3rd F effect display EF1" is displayed, and furthermore, 3rd F post-reception display UA1 is displayed.

In addition, when the first operation is performed, the "3rd floor acceptance permission sound that was in the state of audible output", "the 3rd floor reception display UB that was in the displayed state", and the "periodic change" The same applies to the 3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), the 3F effect display EF1, etc., which were in the state of performing the 3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), and the 3F effect display EF1.

In addition, during the 7th floor reception period for this production example, for the 3rd floor operation related display B, the first operation reception for the 3rd floor operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001) has been made. The display mode does not change based on this, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point is continued (see FIG. 297(e)).

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 297(a), (h), and (i), the reception in response to the previous operation reception for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The user is in a situation where post-changes A are occurring in various places, and the 3rd-F post-reception display UB2 is still being displayed in response to the operation reception on the "3rd-F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)." Among them, at timings tg2E and tg2F (each timing shown in FIGS. 291(g) and (h)) within the 7th F reception period, the second operation for "3rd F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" It is assumed that the third operation is accepted and the third operation is accepted.

2nd and 3rd times for "3rd F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timings tg2E and tg2F (each timing shown in FIGS. 291 (g) and (h)) during the 7th F reception period 291(g), (h) and FIG. 297. As shown in , change A can be caused after receiving the third F.

In particular, regarding "3rd F reception output sound A1" and "3rd F effect display EF1", the same behavior appears when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. It's getting wet. Furthermore, the periodic changes in the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once terminated when the previous operation was accepted will remain in its completed state when the second or third operation is accepted. However, when the second or third operation is accepted, the periodic change end state will occur again. That will happen. That is, in this case, the periodic change once ended will be restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second or third operation is accepted.

In this regard, regarding the "3rd F post-reception display UA", the basic situation is that when the first operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" (3rd F post-reception display UA1), It's basically the same. However, even during the reception period on the 7th floor in this example, when the second operation is accepted, "Description of the hero YS attacking and the BOSS character's HP decreasing to about 50%" (displayed after the reception on the 3rd floor) UA2)" is performed (see Figure 291(g)), and when the third operation is accepted, "Depiction of the hero YS attacking and the BOSS character's HP decreasing to about 25% (3rd F. Progress has been made in terms of performance, such as the "post-reception display UA3)" (see FIG. 291(h)). In other words, the presentation as the "Display UA after 3rd F reception" is the same as in the case of the 3rd F reception period described above, and other examples thereof can be applied as appropriate.

In addition, when the second and third operations are performed, the "3rd F reception permission sound that was in the audible output state", "3rd F reception display UB that was in the displayed state", and "period" The same applies to the 3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), the 3F effect display EF1, and the like, which were in a state where the target was changing.

In addition, during the 7th floor reception period according to this production example, for the 3rd floor operation related display B, the 2nd and 3rd operation receptions for the 3rd floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) are accepted. The display mode does not change based on this, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point is continued (see FIG. 297(e)).

In this example as well, as shown in FIGS. 297(a), (h), and (i), the reception in response to the third operation reception for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The user is in a situation where post-changes A are occurring in various places, and the 3rd-F post-reception display UB2 is still being displayed in response to the operation reception on the "3rd-F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)." In this case, it is assumed that the fourth operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tg2G (see FIG. 291(i)) within the 7th F acceptance period. are doing.

When the fourth operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tg2G within the 7th F acceptance period, the 3rd F post-acceptance change A can occur. That is, as one of the changes A after receiving the 3rd F, first, the 7th F receiving period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 297(a) and 297(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 291(i), (l) and FIGS. 297(h), (k), the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" 3F reception output sound A' is audibly output, and the 3rd floor operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration object 5001) is visually recognized. A "3rd F effect display EF" that makes it difficult is displayed, and a 3rd F post-acceptance display UA is also displayed.

Also, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted during the 7th F acceptance period (the situation where the 3rd F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in FIGS. 291(i), (l) and FIG. 297, , "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd F operation related display B", and "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" are not hidden, and "3rd F operation related display Display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to overlap with the rear side of the third F effect display EF. After that, these "3rd F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3rd F operation related display B", and "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" are changed to "3rd F operation part A (here, 291 (l) and (m)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike in the case of the above-mentioned "3rd F reception period", the "3rd F operation related display B" that appears on the condition that the operation is accepted during the "7th F reception period" is in the middle of the "7F reception period". It may be made to be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the 3F post-reception display UB2. That is, in this case, the 3F post-reception display UA4 will be hidden within the period in which it is displayed.

In addition, regarding the "3rd F operation related display B" that appears under the condition that it is in the middle of the "7th F reception period" and there is an operation reception, unlike in the case of the "3rd F reception period" mentioned above, other In relation to the display image, it may be displayed in the same manner as the 3rd F post-reception display UB. In other words, in this case, the 3rd F operation related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "3rd F omen effect display ZFD" or "3rd F effect display EF", but when they overlap, it is displayed in front of them. It will be displayed. Further, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed on the front side thereof. When adopting such a configuration, the 3rd F operation related display B is different from the 3rd F operation related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "3rd F portent effect display ZFD" and "3rd F effect display EF." It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the ``3rd floor reception permissible sound'', ``whether or not the automatic repeated press function is enabled'', and ``whether or not the automatic button function is enabled'', etc., regarding the 7th floor reception period, please refer to the 3rd floor reception period mentioned above. The same is true for . However, during the 7F reception period, if there is no operation on "3F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", as shown in FIG. Needless to say, "operation related display B" is never displayed.

In addition, even if an operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 7th F reception period, the "3rd F operation related display B" will not be displayed using this as an opportunity. In this case, in FIGS. 289 to 291 and 297(f), "3rd F operation related display B" always remains hidden, and the other configurations are the same as those in the 3rd F above. The production will proceed in the same manner as during the reception period.

FIGS. 299 and 300 are time charts showing examples of production contents when the "condition 4F" is satisfied as the generation condition and the "8th F reception period" occurs as a modification of the 4F reception period. . In addition, regarding the production example in the variable pattern where the "8th F reception period" occurs, there are many parts that overlap with the case where the 4th F reception period described above occurs (see Figures 292 and 293), so basically , only the differences (changed points) from the "4th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "8th F reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "4th F reception period" occurs.

That is, during the 8th F reception period, as well as the above-mentioned 4F reception period, both the 4F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 4F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are Only one operation reception is permitted until the end of the 8th F reception period (multiple operation permission period). Furthermore, other examples regarding these "4th F operating section A" and "4th F operating section B" can be applied as appropriate, as in the case of the above-mentioned 4th F reception period.

However, in the "8th F reception period", when the "8th F reception period" occurs, the "4th F operation related display A" corresponding to the 4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is However, as shown in FIGS. 299(f) and 300(f), the "4th F operation related display B" corresponding to the 4th F operating section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. It is different from the above-mentioned "4th F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)" in that it is not performed. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of operating units (4th F operating unit A, 4th F operating unit B) that are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted, only some of the operating units are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted. ” will now be kept secret, and it can be expected that this will prevent a decline in gaming interest due to secrecy and maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the 8th F reception period differs from the 4th F reception period described above in that the ``4th F operation related display A'' is displayed and the ``4th F operation related display B'' is not displayed, but the other configurations The contents of the performance are the same as those for the 4th F reception period described above. Therefore, even when the 8th F reception period occurs, the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as described above when the 4th F reception period occurs.

In other words, the production example when the "8th F reception period" occurs is the "4F operation related display B (button drawing)" when compared with the production example (4F reception period) shown in FIGS. The only difference is that "Image BMG)" is not displayed, but the other contents are basically the same.Another example that can be applied to the configuration for the 4th floor reception period is the configuration for the 8th floor reception period. It is similarly applicable to such a configuration (a configuration other than the 4th F operation-related display B).

However, unlike the above-mentioned 6th and 7th floor reception periods, during the 8th floor reception period, even if an operation is performed on the 4th floor operation section B during the 8th floor reception period, this will be used as a 4F operation related display B" is never displayed.

In addition, the "4th F reception permissible sound" and "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled" related to the 8th F reception period are the same as in the case of the 4th F reception period described above.

FIGS. 301 and 302 are time charts showing an example of the production content when the "condition 5F" is satisfied as the generation condition and the "9th F reception period" occurs as a modification of the 5F reception period. . In addition, regarding the production example in the variation pattern in which the "9th F reception period" occurs, there are many parts that overlap with the case where the 5th F reception period described above occurs (see Figure 294), so basically, We will only explain the differences (changed points) from ``5F Reception Period''. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "9th F reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as when the "5th F reception period" occurs.

That is, during the 9th F reception period, as well as the above-mentioned 5F reception period, the 5F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot be operated once until the 9th F reception period ends. Only the reception is allowed, and the operation of the 5th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to be operated multiple times until the end of the 9th floor reception period. (multiple operation permissible period). Further, other examples regarding these "5th F operating section A" and "5th F operating section B" can be applied as appropriate, as in the case of the above-mentioned 5th F reception period.

However, in the "9th F reception period", when the "9th F reception period" occurs, the "5F operation related display A" corresponding to the 5F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is However, as shown in FIGS. 301(f) and 302(f), the "5th F operation related display B" corresponding to the 5th F operating section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. This differs from the above-mentioned "5th F reception period (see FIG. 294)" in that it is not performed. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of operation units (5F operation unit A, 5F operation unit B) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted, only some of the operation units are in a state in which operation reception is permitted. ” will now be kept secret, and it can be expected that this will prevent a decline in gaming interest due to secrecy and maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the 9th F reception period differs from the 5th F reception period described above in that the "5th F operation related display A" is displayed and the "5th F operation related display B" is not displayed, but the other configurations The contents of the performance are the same as those of the 5th F reception period mentioned above. Therefore, even when the 9th F reception period occurs, the presentation will basically proceed as described above with reference to FIG. 294 (5th F reception period).

In other words, the production example when the "9th F reception period" occurs is the "5F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" when compared with the production example (5F reception period) shown in FIG. 294. ” is not displayed, the other contents are basically the same. Another example that can be applied to the configuration for the 5th F reception period is the configuration for the 9th F reception period ( It is similarly applicable to configurations other than the 5th F operation-related display B).

Therefore, when the "9th F reception period" occurs, the "5th F omen effect display ZFD" is displayed before and after the timing when the 2nd F operation related display A is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 301 and 302. It is displayed as if straddling the .

Also, how will the "5th F omen effect display ZFD" be displayed in relation to the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and under what conditions will it be hidden? Kaya, the point that the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes is also as described above in the 5th F reception period.

In addition, in this production example, when the first operation on "5th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" is performed within the 9th F reception period, as in the case of the 5F reception period described above, this Taking this as a trigger, the 5th F post-reception display UB1 is displayed. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance. However, in this production example, when an operation is performed on "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 9th F reception period, in addition to displaying the 5F post-reception display UB1, When the operation is performed, the "5th F operation related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 301(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated at timing ti2A, but when the timing ti2A arrives Until then, the "5th F operation related display B" is not displayed. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing ti2A, the "5th F operation related display B" is displayed using this as a trigger. There is.

According to such a configuration, the fact that the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is in a state where operation acceptance is permitted is kept secret at the time of occurrence of the "9th F acceptance period". sell. However, the concealed state will be canceled if an operation is accepted for the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" even once during the "9th F reception period", so there is a sense of tension. It can be expected to improve the game's interest while maintaining a favorable condition.

Here, such "5th F operation related display B" may be displayed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned "5th F reception period" also in the "9th F reception period". However, if the display mode that should normally be displayed at the time of the reception period appears on the condition that the 9th F reception period is in the middle and the operation reception has been received, then There is a concern that players may feel a negative feeling that the information was ``intentionally hidden'' and their interest in the game may decrease.

Therefore, in the "9th F reception period" according to this production example, "5th F operation related display A" is displayed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned "5th F reception period", but "5th F operation related display B" are displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. 284 to 286. For example, it may not be displayed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned "5th F reception period", but may be displayed as a different display image. Further, regarding the "5th F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "9th F reception period", this will trigger the " The 5th F operation related display B" may not be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that a second operation is performed on "2nd F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing ti2B within the 9th F reception period. There is. In this case, also in the 9th F reception period, the 5F post reception display UB2 is displayed based on the fact that the second operation has been performed, as in the case of the 5F reception period described above. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance.

In this regard, during the 9th F reception period for this production example, the display mode of "5th F operation related display B" does not change based on the second operation, and until then The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 301(f)).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing ti2C within the 9th F reception period. There is. In this case, in the 9th F reception period, as in the case of the 5th F reception period described above, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 301(i) and (k), after the reception Not only is no output sound audible, but no new display (aspect) appears as the display UB after reception on the 5th floor. In this example as well, despite such an event (despite the operation being performed on the "5th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 9th F reception period, a new The display does not appear), as long as it occurs when a predetermined condition is met.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 301(a), (h), and (i), the "5th F reception In a situation where "rear display UB2" and "5th F operation related display B" are being displayed, at timing ti2D within the 9th F reception period, "5th F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is displayed. ” is assumed to be operated on.

Also in the 9th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "5F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing ti2D, the 5F post reception change A occurs. That is, as one of the 5th F post-reception changes A, first, the 9th F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 301(a) and 301(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 301(h) and (k), the "5th F reception output sound A" corresponding to the operation on the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audible. At the same time, the "5th F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed. Furthermore, the 5th F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In addition, even in a situation immediately after an operation is accepted during the 9th F reception period (a situation where the 5th F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in FIG. Decorative image SYG), 5th F operation related display B, and 5th F omen effect display ZFD are not hidden, and 5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is not hidden. , is displayed so as to overlap with the rear side of the fifth F effect display EF. After that, these "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th F operation related display B", and "5th F omen effect display ZFD" are changed to "5th F operation part A (here, The display is set to a hidden state based on the operation on the "sword decoration object 5001)". However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "5th F reception period", the "5th F operation related display B" that appears on the condition that the operation is accepted during the "9th F reception period" is in the middle of the "9th F reception period". It may be made to be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the 5F post-reception display UB2. That is, in this case, the 5F post-reception display UA will be hidden within the period in which it is displayed.

In addition, regarding the "5th F operation related display B" that appears under the condition that the "9th F reception period" is in the middle and there is an operation reception, unlike the case of the "5F reception period" mentioned above, other In relation to the display image, it may be displayed in the same manner as the 5F post-reception display UB. In other words, in this case, the 5th F operation related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "5th F omen effect display ZFD" or "5th F effect display EF", but when they overlap, it is displayed in front of them. It will be displayed. Further, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed on the front side thereof. When adopting such a configuration, the 5th F operation related display B is different from the 5th F operation related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "5th F omen effect display ZFD" and "5th F effect display EF". It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the "5th floor reception permissible sound", "whether or not the automatic continuous press function is enabled", and "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled", etc., regarding the 9th floor reception period, please refer to the 5th floor reception period mentioned above. The same is true for . However, during the 9F reception period, if there is no operation on the 5F operation section B (here, operation button 410), as shown in FIG. Needless to say, "operation related display B" is never displayed. Note that the example shown in FIG. 302 is described as an example where the automatic button function is not enabled.

As shown in FIG. 301, during the 9th F reception period, as well as the 5F reception period described above, during the output period of the 5F reception permission sound, the 5F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001 )" and "5th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)", the output of the "5th F acceptance permission sound" will not be interrupted by this operation. .

During each reception period for the above-mentioned production example and its variations, in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, there is a precursor production display that suggests that the player will soon be given an operation opportunity, and a reception target (operation target). There is a reception period in which an operation-related display (sample image display) suggesting the reception area, etc.) and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the reception period may be displayed. However, as mentioned above, each of these configurations does not necessarily have to be provided, and it is also possible to provide only appropriate configurations among these configurations, or to implement such configurations only during a part of the acceptance period. You may prepare it. In addition, the operation-related display (sample image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated replica image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display, but this is not necessarily the case. The display is not limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other reception periods.

In addition, as a method of hiding periodic changes based on the acceptance of operation within the acceptance period (or partial acceptance period) for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations, there are For example, the periodic changes in the operation-related display on the layer continue, but the periodic change in the operation-related display is not limited to the configuration. It is also possible to adopt a method that makes the operation-related display invisible, or change the operation-related display to a periodic change that is different from the periodic change that has continued until then (for example, by changing the periodic time). The periodic changes that have continued until then may be hidden, or the display of the operation-related display itself may be terminated.

In addition, periodic changes in the 3rd F operation related display A are hidden based on the operation being accepted within the acceptance period (3rd F acceptance period, 7th F acceptance period) for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations. After that, as a method for restarting the periodic change (timings tg2D, tg2E, tg2F, tg2G), it is not necessarily necessary to restart the periodic change from the beginning, but it is also possible to restart the periodic change from the middle of the periodic change. good.

During the 3rd floor reception period and the 7th floor reception period, operations are accepted until a specific number of operations (3rd time) are received for the 5th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001). Based on this, it was decided not to end the acceptance period, but to end the acceptance period based on the fact that a specific number of operations (the third time) have been accepted. However, it will be decided whether or not to end the acceptance period based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, and the acceptance period will be ended based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the judgment. You can.

In addition, during the 3rd F reception period and the 7th F reception period, regardless of whether the "low expectation mode" or "high expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the "5F operation section A (here, Based on the fact that a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations, determination, etc.) is satisfied by accepting an operation for the sword decoration object 5001), the acceptance period is ended and a post-acceptance display is displayed. However, when an operation is accepted for the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", there is a possibility that a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations, judgment, etc.) will be satisfied. The post-display may be limited to the case where the "high expectation mode" is executed. In other words, in this case, when the "low expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, how many operations are performed on the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the reception period? Even if an acceptance is made, the conditions for ending the acceptance period will not be met based on this, and based on the timing for the acceptance period to end, a "low expectation mode" will be displayed after acceptance. may be executed. Alternatively, only when the "specific mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the reception period is ended based on the operation reception for the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", When the "specific mode" is not executed as the post-acceptance display, the acceptance period may not be terminated based on the acceptance of the operation on the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". That is, in this case, when the timing for the end of the acceptance period arrives, no post-acceptance display will be performed.

Moreover, each reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example or its modification example may be any combination and may occur sequentially within one variation pattern.

In addition, the "post-reception change (post-reception display)" that corresponds to the reception of operation during each reception period for the production example and its variations described above does not necessarily indicate the degree of expectation that a jackpot will be obtained. You can. For example, it may be generated as a reception period for determining whether or not the probability fluctuation function will be enabled within the execution period of a jackpot game, and may be executed as a display after the reception, and the expectation level suggestion regarding the game may be It may also be made to occur as a reception period within a simple mini-game with no relation whatsoever, and to be executed as a display after the reception. Therefore, the reception period according to the above-described production example or its modification example does not necessarily have to occur within the period in which the symbol variation is being executed.

Furthermore, all of the reception periods for the above-mentioned presentation examples and their variations do not need to be provided. Of the reception periods according to the above-mentioned presentation examples and their variations, two or more reception periods may be provided in an appropriate combination, or only one reception period may be provided.

During the 4th F reception period and the 8th F reception period, when the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated, and when the "4th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated. The same post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display, etc.) may occur when is operated.

The 4th F reception period and the 8th F reception period may be generated as reception periods in which the automatic button function described above is not activated.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods, first, multiple operations in which both the operation reception on the first operation part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception on the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are allowed are performed. A permissible period can be generated, and when either an operation on the first operation part or an operation on the second operation part is performed during the multiple operation permissible period, a post-acceptance display according to the type of the side where the operation was accepted is displayed. It can be displayed. Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operation target by the player, and at least a 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) is prepared as a type of multiple operation permissible period.

In this regard, during the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), only one operation reception is allowed for the first operation part (1F operation part A, for example, the sword decoration 5001). In addition, multiple operations can be accepted for the second operation unit (first F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410), and multiple operations can be accepted during the first F reception period. When an operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) for which it is possible to accept a second operation, a 1F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed. Even while the post-reception display UB is displayed, operation reception on the 1F operation section A is permitted. Then, a 1F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to an operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, operation button 410) during the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281). If an operation is performed on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) during that time (timing te2D), the 1F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation will be displayed, and the operation will trigger the The 1F post-reception display UB (the post-reception display in response to an operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410)) that had been displayed until now is now hidden ( (See FIGS. 278(h), (i), FIGS. 279(g), (h), etc.).

According to such a configuration, the first F reception period (for example, the first operation part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are allowed during the first operation reception period (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) (see FIGS. 278 to 281), while the first F reception display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation section (for example, operation button 410) is displayed, the first operation section (For example, when an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001), this will be used as a trigger to display the 1F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation, and the 1F post-reception display that was displayed until then. Since the UB is hidden, it becomes easier to recognize which of the above-mentioned operation units the post-acceptance display was displayed in response to, and it can be expected to improve the game's interest.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the type of multiple operation permissible period is the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 2-E. and the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) according to the above configuration 2-E. ", and in both the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "second multiple operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 2-E, it is possible to accept multiple operations. When an operation is performed on the second operation unit (1F operation unit B, 2ndF operation unit B, etc., for example, the operation button 410 in both cases), a post-reception display corresponding to the operation (1F post-reception display) Display UB, 2nd F post-reception display UB, etc.) are displayed (see Figures 281(e), (f), and 285(c), (d), etc.), but the post-reception display is not displayed. It is permissible to accept an operation on the first operation part (1F operation part A, 2F operation part A, etc., for example, sword ornament 5001 in both cases), for which it is permissible to accept one operation even while has been done.

In this case, in the "first multiple operation permissible period" according to configuration 2-E, an operation is performed on the second operation section (first F operation section B, for example, operation button 410). If an operation is performed on the first operation part (first F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) while the corresponding 1F reception display UB is displayed, the first operation part corresponding to the operation will be displayed. The 1F post-reception display UA is displayed, and the 1F post-reception display UB, which had been displayed until then, is made to be hidden due to this operation (see Figure 278 (i) and Figure 281 (h)). reference).

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the second operation part (second F operation part B, for example, operation button 410) during the "second multiple operation permissible period" according to configuration 2-E, If an operation is performed on the first operation section (second F operation section A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) while the corresponding 2F reception display UB is displayed, the first operation section corresponding to the operation will be displayed. The 2F post-reception display UA is displayed, and the 2F post-reception display UB, which had been displayed until then, is not hidden due to this operation (Figure 282 (i) and Figure 286 (f)) (see ~(k)).

According to such a configuration, the state in which the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is operated multiple times, and the state in which the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is operated '', the post-acceptance display that was displayed until then (the post-acceptance display in response to an operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410)) is hidden. There will be times when it will be hidden (1st F-A multiple operation permissible period) and times when it will not be hidden (1st F-B multiple operation permissible period), improving the performance when changing the gaming strategy. It can be expected that this will help maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 2-E and the "second "Permissible period for multiple operations (for example, 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" means that the second operation section (1F operation For example, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410), the same display after reception (1F after reception display UB, 2F after reception display UB) is displayed. It is desirable to display a display (such as an increase in magical power value). In other words, in this case, the game strategy changes from a state in which multiple operations are performed on the second operation section (for example, the operation button 410) to an operation on the first operation section (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display (second operation section (for example, operation button 410) that was displayed until then will be hidden when changing the It can be expected to maintain it well.

In addition, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) according to the above configuration 2-E" ”, the “second multiple operation permissible period” will occur depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, which has ended at the time the “second multiple operation permissible period” related to configuration 2-E occurs. A specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) has never been made inaudible (or suppressed) or has not been made inaudible (or suppressed) before (for example, a specific type of performance sound has been made inaudible (or suppressed)). However, in the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 2-E, , the "first multiple operation permissible period" pertaining to the relevant configuration 2-E is determined according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "first multiple operation permissible period" regarding the relevant configuration 2-E occurs. '' occurs before a specific type of production sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed), and when it is not made inaudible (or suppressed) (a specific type of production sound is audible) (if the reception period occurs during the period). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when an operation opportunity is given, the "first multiple operation permissible period" and " Since it becomes easier to recognize which of the "second multiple operation permissible periods" the player is in, it becomes possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunities are given. In this case, even if the form of the effect sound changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance remains the same.

In addition, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) according to the above configuration 2-E" ”, the 2nd F post-reception display UA and the 2nd F effect display EF are the post-reception display when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (such as the 2nd F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410). (2nd F post-reception display UB), it was decided to display it behind it. In other words, in this case, it is now possible to make the 2nd F post-reception display UA difficult to see until the 2F post-reception display UB is hidden, and this makes it possible to change the gaming strategy midway. You will be able to have disadvantages at times.

Note that the reception period for the above production example includes the reception period in which the automatic button function is enabled, but during the reception period in which the automatic button function is activated, the second operation section (second floor While the reception display corresponding to the operation on any of the operating section B, 3rd F operating section B, 4th F operating section B, and 5th F operating section B is displayed, the 1st operating section (2nd F operating section B) is displayed. If the automatic button function is enabled for any of A, 3rd F operating section A, 4th F operating section A, and 5th F operating section A), this will be used as an opportunity to It is desirable that the display after acceptance in response to an operation on any one of the section B, the 3rd F operating section B, the 4th F operating section B, and the 5th F operating section B is not hidden.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the multiple operation permissible period is set such that both the operation reception on the first operation part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception on the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are allowed. operation-related displays that can occur only when the first operation unit is in a state in which operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and operation-related displays for the second operation unit. It is possible to display operation-related displays that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the production example described above, the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 3-E is used as the multiple operation permissible period. , "Second multiple operation permissible period (for example, 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" according to the above configuration 3-E. are prepared at least, and in the "first multiple operation permissible period" and "second multiple operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 3-E, the 1F operation related displays A, B and the 2nd F operation related display A , B can be displayed, it can be expected to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 3-E, the first operation section (1F operation section A) , for example, the 1F operation-related display A corresponding to the sword ornament 5001) and the 1F operation-related display B corresponding to the 2nd operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410). is displayed, it is permitted to accept operations on the first operation section (for example, the sword ornament 5001), and it is also permitted to accept operations on the second operation section (for example, the operation button 410). Make sure that you are in the same state as you are.
On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" according to the above configuration 3-E, the first operation section (the second F operation section A For example, the 2nd F operation-related display A corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, but the operation-related display corresponding to the 2nd F operation unit (2nd F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is displayed. Although the display is not displayed, it is permitted to accept operations on the first operation section (for example, the sword ornament 5001), and it is also permitted to accept operations on the second operation section (for example, the operation button 410). I made it so that it was in the same state as before. However, if an operation is accepted for the second operation section (for example, operation button 410) under the above situation, this will be used as an opportunity to display the second F operation related display B corresponding to the second operation section (for example, operation button 410). I decided to display it. That is, in this case, while both the 2F operation-related displays A and B are displayed, it is permitted to accept an operation on the first operation section (for example, the sword ornament 5001), and the second operation section (for example, , operation button 410) is allowed to be accepted.

According to such a configuration, only one of the two operating units (first operating unit, second operating unit) in a state where operation acceptance is allowed (the second operating unit) is in the accepting accepting state. Even if the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" according to the above configuration 3-E in which the information is kept secret occurs, the side to be kept secret If the user tries to operate the second operation section (for example, operation button 410) of the player, the concealed state will be cleared, and it is expected that the user's interest in the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the "operation-related display" is often displayed as a mock image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the action (operation) by the player is expressed as an image, but is not limited to this. As mentioned above, it is sufficient to use an image display that, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate the image.

In this case, the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to configuration 3-E, and the "second "multiple operation permissible period (e.g., 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" refers to the operation-related display (1F operation-related display) corresponding to the second operation section (e.g., operation button 410). B, the same image display may be displayed as the second F operation-related display B).

Furthermore, if the 2nd F operation related display B is displayed within the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" according to the above configuration 3-E, It is desirable that the second F operation related display B is not hidden until the "second multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 3-E ends.

In addition, if the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, 6F reception period (see FIG. 295 and FIG. 296), etc.)" according to the above configuration 3-E occurs, " Even if an operation is received on the second operation unit (for example, operation button 410) before (a little) the second multiple operation permissible period occurs, this will be used as an opportunity to display the 2F operation-related display. B may be displayed. In other words, in this case, in the "second multiple operation permissible period" according to configuration 3-E, the first operation starts from the time when the valid period occurs, similar to the "first multiple operation permissible period" according to configuration 3-E. While both the operation-related display corresponding to the part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation-related display corresponding to the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are displayed, the first operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is displayed. , sword ornament 5001) or the second operation unit (eg, operation button 410).

In addition, the second operation unit may be activated (slightly) before the timing at which the “second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)” according to configuration 3-E occurs. (for example, the operation button 410), in the "second multiple operation permissible period" according to configuration 3-E, the second operation related displays A and B are displayed until the period ends. It is desirable that both are displayed.

In addition, the second operation unit (for example, operation button 410) may be When an operation is performed, there are cases in which the second operation-related display B is displayed as a result of the operation (see FIG. 295(f)) and cases in which the second operation-related display B is not displayed. You can. According to such a configuration, a feeling of tension is suitably maintained when the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within the "second multiple operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 3-E. can be expected to.

Note that the second operation unit (for example, operation button 410) is A case where the second operation related display B is not displayed after an operation has been performed means, for example, that the second operation can be performed by not accepting the operation itself on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410). The related display B may not be displayed, or the second operation related display B may be displayed if a predetermined condition is not met, although the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is accepted. You may choose not to do so.

In addition, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) according to the above configuration 3-E" ”, the “second multiple operation permissible period” related to the configuration 3-E is executed according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the “second multiple operation permissible period” related to the configuration 3-E occurs. A specific type of production sound (specific BGM) will not be made inaudible (or suppressed) or not made inaudible (or suppressed) before the occurrence of the ``permissible period'' (for example, The reception period occurs after the specific type of performance sound is made inaudible) is changed from the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (Figs. 278 to 281) etc.)", the "first multiple operation permissible period" related to the configuration 3-E will be changed according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "first multiple operation permissible period" occurs. There are cases where a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed) before the “first multiple operation permissible period” occurs, and cases where it is not made inaudible (or suppressed) (specific There may also be a case where the reception period occurs while the performance sound of the type is audible. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, the "first multiple operation permissible period" and the "first multiple operation permissible period" and "first multiple operation permissible period" related to the configuration 3-E are provided when the player is given an operation opportunity. Since it becomes easier to recognize which of the 2 multiple operation permissible periods is in effect, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunities are provided. In this case, even if the form of the effect sound changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance remains the same.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the multiple operation permissible period is set in which both the operation reception on the first operation part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception on the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are allowed. operation-related displays that can occur only when the first operation unit is in a state in which operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, and operation-related displays for the second operation unit. It is possible to display operation-related displays that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the "specific multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 4-E, and the At least such a "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296))" is prepared. Then, in the "special multiple operation permissible period (2nd F reception period, 6th F reception period)" according to the above configuration 4-E, the first operation part (second F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) is When the operation is accepted, as a change after acceptance, the 2nd F post-acceptance display UA that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot is displayed, and the 2nd F effect display that makes it difficult to see the 2nd F operation related display A. EF is executed. In this regard, the 1st F effect display corresponding to the "specific multiple operation permissible period (1st F reception period)" according to the above configuration 4-E is always executed in the same display mode, but according to the above configuration 4-E. The 2nd F effect display EF corresponding to the "special multiple operation permissible period (2nd F reception period, 6th F reception period)" is displayed in different display modes depending on the mode (aspect UA1, UA2) of the 2F post-reception display UA. I made it so that it would be done.

According to such "2nd F effect display EF", the "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th F reception period) related to the above configuration 4-E. (See Figures 295 and 296)", it is preferable to suggest that the problem appeared due to the operation on the "first operation section" on the side that made the "operation-related display" difficult to see. become able to. Moreover, the expectation level of a jackpot can be suitably recognized by simply looking at the state of the "second F effect display EF" in order to confirm which operation caused the occurrence.

Furthermore, in the "specific multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 4-E, the first operation section (the 1F operation section A, For example, when an operation is performed on the sword decoration object 5001), one of the changes after receiving the operation in response to the operation is that the 1F operation-related displays A and B become difficult to see. ” was executed. As a result, operation reception on the first operation section (first F operation section A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) and operation reception on the second operation section (second F operation section B, for example, the operation button 410) can be performed. The "specific multiple operation permissible period" according to configuration 4-E in which all of It is now possible to suitably indicate to the player that the game has ended (a situation in which no operation reception on the second operation unit is permitted).

In addition, if the "special multiple operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 4-E is the "2nd F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286)", the "2nd F effect display EF" is the 2nd F operation. Of the related displays A and B, it is desirable that only the second F operation related display A be displayed so as to be difficult to visually recognize. Also, if the "special multiple operation permissible period" according to configuration 4-E is the "6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)", the second operation section (second F operation section, e.g. , operation button 410), the second F operation-related display B is displayed. In this regard, even if the "2nd F effect display EF" is displayed when the 2nd F operation related display B is displayed, the 2nd F operation related display A , B, it is desirable that only the second F operation-related display A is displayed so as to be difficult to visually recognize.

In addition, "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" according to configuration 4-E above. The "2nd F effect display EF" corresponding to the 2nd F operation related display A may be displayed in front of the 2nd F operation related display A at a position that overlaps with the 2nd F operation related display A, and may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the 2nd F operation related display B. However, it may overlap with the second F operation-related display B, but may be displayed behind it.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the "specific multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 4-E, and the Apart from the "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)", the above configuration 4-E A predetermined multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294) or the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302)) is provided. Then, in the "predetermined multiple operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 4-E, as in the "special multiple operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 4-E, the first operation part (5F operation part A) For example, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001), the 5F post-acceptance display UA indicating the level of expectation is displayed as a change after acceptance, and the 5F operation-related display A becomes difficult to see. 5F effect display EF is displayed.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the "predetermined multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294) or the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302) ), etc.)" is always executed in the same display format, and the display format is the "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period)" according to configuration 4-E above. (see Figures 282 to 286), or the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), etc.). I have to.

For example, if the aspect EF-2 that appears when expectations are low is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF", even if the aspect EF-2 appears as the "2nd F effect display EF", this It is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that it is displayed as the "5th F effect display EF" and furthermore that the highly anticipated mode UA2 appears as the 5th F post-reception display UA. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest when aspect EF-2 appears as the "second F effect display EF."

Alternatively, if the aspect EF-1 that appears when high expectations are made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF", the aspect EF-1 should always appear when the "5th F effect display EF" is displayed. Since it becomes possible to do so, it can be expected that the interest in gaming will be improved.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Then, a display is made that simulates the operation targets for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, during the reception period for the production example mentioned above, there are cases where the operation is accepted only once when the operation section is kept in the operated state (when the so-called auto continuous press is not enabled), and cases where the operation is accepted multiple times. Since the game is designed so that there are cases where the player is repeatedly played twice (so-called automatic consecutive hits are enabled), it can be expected that the interest in the game will be improved through such a variety of effects.

More specifically, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 to 291)" according to the above configuration 5-E) (see Figure 298), etc.). In the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 5-E, the first operation section (3F operation section A, for example, sword decoration The operation reception on the body 5001) and the operation reception on the second operation unit (third F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period are in a permissible state. In the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 5-E, as shown in FIGS. 287(a) and (b) and FIGS. 297(a) and (b), This is the 3F operation section A. For example, if the sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operated state, the operation will be accepted multiple times (although the auto continuous hit function will be enabled), but the second operation section will not be activated for a specific period. Even if the user continues to maintain the operated state of (the third F operating unit B, for example, the operating button 410), the operation is not accepted multiple times (the automatic repeated press function is not activated).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation unit is capable of accepting multiple operations, the so-called auto-sequence function may not be enabled, so it is difficult to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. can be expected.

In addition, although not explained in the above-mentioned example of production, the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see FIG. 297) related to the configuration 5-E) 298), etc.)," a "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 5-E may be further provided.

For example, during the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), not only the 1F operation part B (for example, the operation button 410) but also the 1F operation part A (for example, the sword ornament 5001) In addition, the modified 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) is provided as an "operation unit that can accept multiple operations", and the "special operation unit" according to the above-mentioned configuration 5-E is It may be made to occur as a "tolerable period". That is, in this case, in the "special operation permissible period (modified 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 5-E, the special operation section 1 (1F operation section A) is Yes, for example, the operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001) and the operation acceptance for the special period second operation part (1F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410) are in a state where it is permissible to accept the operation multiple times. It becomes like this. Then, in the "special operation permissible period (modified 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to configuration 5-E, the special period first operation section (1F operation section A For example, even if you continue to operate either the sword decoration body 5001) or the special period second operation section (first F operation section B, for example, operation button 410), multiple operations will be accepted. This will prevent the automatic repeated hit function from being activated.

According to such a configuration, even if there are multiple operation units that can accept multiple operations, the so-called auto-repeat function is effective for any of these operation units depending on the type of operation permissible period. This can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 7F reception period (see Figures 297 to 298), etc.)" according to the above configuration 5-E and the "special operation permissible period (transformed 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), etc.), the operation section (3F There are operation-related displays A and 1F operation-related displays A and B), but the reason why the operation is accepted multiple times when the operation section is kept in the operated state is because of the configuration 5-E above. Only during the special operation permissible period (for example, the 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 to 298), etc.), the special operation permissible period (modified 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 278)) according to the above configuration 5-E (see FIG. 281), etc.), it will not be performed.

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 7F reception period (see Figures 297 to 298), etc.)" according to the above configuration 5-E, the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 5-E occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time of execution, the specific type of performance sound may be suppressed or inaudible before the ``specific operation permissible period'' related to configuration 5-E occurs. (For example, the acceptance period occurs after a specific type of production sound is made inaudible.) In the "special operation permissible period (transformed 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), etc.)", the previous "special operation permissible period" that has ended at the time of occurrence of the "special operation permissible period" related to configuration 5-E, etc. Depending on the type of variation pattern, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible (or suppressed) before the "special operation permissible period" related to configuration 5-E occurs. There may also be a case where the sound is not rendered inaudible (or suppressed) (a case where the reception period occurs while a specific type of performance sound is in the audible state). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the player is given an operation opportunity, the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 5-E can be used. ”, it becomes easier to recognize which one is, so it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. In this case, even if the form of the effect sound changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance remains the same.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image of an operation target for which operation reception is allowed so that periodic changes appear.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the type of reception period is the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)," etc. (see FIGS. 297 and 298). In the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 6-E, an operation part (3F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) that can accept multiple operations is set. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the operation section, as one of the changes after acceptance, the above-mentioned periodic change that was previously appearing on the display that imitates the operation section (3rd F operation related display A) is hidden. or made it difficult to see by displaying another image. Therefore, even after an operation has been performed, a display that imitates the target (3rd F operation related display A) is displayed, while suitably indicating to the player that the operation has been accepted. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the example of production described above, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the 7th floor reception period (see FIG. 297 and 298), etc.) and the ``special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281), etc.)'' according to the above configuration 6-E. There is. In the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 6-E, there is an operation part (3F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) for which multiple operations can be accepted, and the corresponding When an operation is performed on the operation unit, as one of the changes after acceptance, the periodic changes that had been appearing until then on the display that imitates the operation unit (3rd F operation related display A) are hidden. , or the sample image display is hidden, and in the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 6-E, the operation part (1F operation part B, for example) that can accept multiple operations is , operation button 410) is set, and when an operation is performed on the operation section, the periodic changes that had appeared until then on the display that imitates the operation section (1st F operation related display B) are hidden. The periodic change was made to continue.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is performed on an operation section that is allowed to accept multiple operations, the periodic changes that had been appearing until then are hidden from the display that simulates the operation section. or the display imitating the operation part is hidden (see Figure 287 and Figure 297), and the periodic change is not hidden and continues (see Figure 278). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception is being performed properly, and it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Note that the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 6-E above is not the 1st floor reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), but the modified 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281) described above. 281) etc.)". As mentioned above, in the modified 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), operations are accepted for the special period first operation section (1F operation section A, for example, the sword ornament 5001), and the special period The state is such that it is permissible to accept operations on the second operation unit (first F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) multiple times. In this case, regardless of whether the special period first operation section or the special period second operation section is operated, the periodic changes in the 1F operation-related displays A and B will not be hidden and will continue. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" according to the configuration 6-E, the first operation section (3rd floor It is possible to accept an operation on the operation part A (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and to accept an operation on the second operation part (the third F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period. Among these operating units, only the first operating unit (3rd F operating unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed as a display target for the simulated image display (3rd F operation related display A), and during the specific period. At least the first operation part for a specific period out of the first operation part (3F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the second operation part (3F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period. The section is allowed to accept operations multiple times. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 6-E, the first operation section (1F operation section A) during the special period For example, it is possible to accept the operation on the sword decoration 5001) and the operation on the special period second operation part (1F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410). Both are the display targets of the simulated image display (1st F operation related displays A and B), and the special period first operating section (first F operating section A, for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and the special period second operating section Among the operating units (the first F operating unit B, for example, the operating button 410), at least the second operating unit during the special period can accept multiple operations.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 7th floor acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" according to the above configuration 6-E, the first operation section (3rd floor When an operation is accepted for the operation part A (for example, the sword ornament 5001), one of the changes after the reception is a display imitating the first operation part for the specific period (3rd F operation related display A). The periodic changes that had appeared until then were hidden, or the simulated display itself was hidden. In addition, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 6-E, the second operation part (1F operation part B) during the special period (for example, , operation button 410), the periodic changes that had previously appeared on the display (1st F operation-related display B) that imitates the second operation section during the special period are not hidden and are not displayed. The periodic changes continue, but when an operation is accepted for the special period first operation section (1F operation section A, for example, the sword ornament 5001), the special period first operation section is simulated. The periodic changes that had previously appeared in the display and the display that simulated the second operating section during the special period were respectively hidden, or the simulated image display was respectively hidden.

According to such a configuration, the "displayability of periodic changes appearing in the sample image display" when operating the operation unit differs depending on the type of reception period, so it is possible to create a feeling of tension. can be expected to be maintained at

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" according to the above configuration 6-E, Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 6-E occurs, "than the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 6-E occurs" A specific type of performance sound is not suppressed or made inaudible before or is not suppressed or made inaudible (for example, a specific type of performance sound is always made inaudible and then However, in the "special operation permissible period (1st floor reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), modified 1st floor reception period, etc.)" related to configuration 6-E, the configuration 6 Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "special operation permissible period" related to -E occurs, "specified before the "special operation permissible period" related to configuration 6-E occurs. When a type of performance sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed) and when it is not made inaudible (or suppressed) (a reception period occurs while a specific type of performance sound is audible) case). According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous variation pattern, when the player is given an operation opportunity, the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 6-E can be used. ”, it becomes easier to recognize which one is, so it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. In this case, even if the form of the effect sound changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance remains the same.

Furthermore, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation on the operation unit is performed during the reception period, a change after reception can occur. It is also possible to display a display that mimics the operation section.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the display that imitates the operation part (operation-related display) can be displayed so that periodic changes appear, but it is displayed so that the periodic changes appear in units of a predetermined time. (3F operation-related display A displayed during the 3F reception period, 7F reception period, etc.), and when the periodic change is displayed in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (the above-mentioned In each production example, all types of operation-related displays (excluding the 3F operation-related display A that change periodically) are provided, so that it is possible to improve the game's interest through a variety of productions. Be expected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the reception period (operation permissible period) is a specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), The reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), etc.) and the special operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), etc.) related to Configuration 7-E, etc. We are planning to prepare it. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the first operation part (3F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001 ) and the operation acceptance for a second operation section (third F operation section B, for example, operation button 410) for a specific period different from the first operation section for the specific period are at least permissible, and the above configuration In the "special operation permissible period" according to 7-E, the operation reception on the first operation part (the 1F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410) is allowed during the special period in which it is permissible to accept multiple operations. , it may be possible to at least allow operation reception on a special period second operation section (the 1F operation section A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) different from the special period first operation section. In the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 7-E above, a display imitating the first operation section (here, the 3F operation-related display A) for a specific period is displayed such that the periodic change thereof is in units of a predetermined time. In the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 7-E above, a display imitating the first operation section during the special period (here, 1F operation related display B) is displayed periodically. Changes are displayed so that they appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time.

According to such a configuration, the time required for periodic changes will differ depending on the type of reception period and the type of operation target, so it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through various effects. Ru.

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 7-E, The specific period first operating section (3rd F operating section A) operates during the special period in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 7-E. The second operating section (first F operating section A) may be the same operating section. In this case, even though the specific period first operation section and the special period second operation section are the same operation section, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3F reception period (Fig. 287 to (see Figure 291), 7F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), etc.), the display that imitates the first operation section (3F operation-related display A) for a specific period is displayed with periodic changes. In the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 7-E, the second operation part (first F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a predetermined time unit. The displayed display (1st F operation related display A) is displayed such that its periodic change appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time (which may be the same periodic time as the 1F operation related display B). You can. According to such a configuration, even if the operation target (operation unit) is the same, the time required for periodic changes will differ depending on the type of "reception period" that has occurred. It is now possible to greatly vary the performance of the game depending on its type, and this can be expected to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 7F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298))" according to the above configuration 7-E, the first operation section (3F operation section A) is For example, regarding the sword ornament 5001), a display imitating this (3rd F operation related display A) is displayed so that periodic changes appear in predetermined time units, but the second operating section (3rd F operation related display A) is displayed for a specific period of time. Part B, for example, the display that imitates the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the special operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) according to configuration 7-E is ), a special period first operation section (first F operation section B, for example, operation button 410) is displayed (first F operation related display B) and a special period second operation section (first 1F operation section A, for example, the display imitating the sword ornament 5001) (1F operation related display A), such that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. I decided to display it. According to such a configuration, when a periodic change appears at the predetermined time, it can be suggested that there is an operation section whose state in which operation reception is allowed is hidden. become.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) and the 8th F reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300)" related to the above configuration 7-E) ), 9F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302)), etc., and in the ``predetermined operation permissible period'' according to the above configuration 7-E, a display that simulates the operation section (see Figure 301 and Figure 302) Even though periodic changes are appearing in the 2F operation related display A, 4th F operation related display A, and 5F operation related display A) in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the operation reception is allowed. There are now operating sections that keep certain things a secret. In other words, in this case, when a periodic change appears at the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is suggested that there is an operation section whose status that allows operation reception is hidden. appears for a time unit longer than the predetermined time, if there is an operation unit whose status is hidden in which operation reception is allowed (for example, during the 6th floor reception period or the 8th floor reception period). , 9th F reception period, etc.) and non-existence (for example, 1F reception period), it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period)" according to the above configuration 7-E, a display imitating the first operation part of the special period (1F operation related display B) and a display similar to the first operation part of the special period The time required for periodic changes may be the same or different in the display imitating the two operation sections (first F operation-related display A).

In the above-mentioned production example, even if a display imitating the same operation part is displayed, the periodic change appears in the above-mentioned predetermined time period, and the case in which the periodic change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time period differs depending on the operation concerned. The aspect of the dynamic display (such as the amount of stroke when moving up and down) that appears in the display itself that imitates the part may be different.

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 7-E, , a "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 7-E occurs depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 7-E occurs. (For example, a specific type of sound performance is always suppressed or rendered inaudible, or is not suppressed or rendered inaudible before However, the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 7-E above has ended at the time the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 7-E occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, a specific type of performance sound (specific BGM) may be made inaudible (or suppressed) before the ``special operation permissible period'' related to configuration 7-E occurs. There may be cases in which the sound is made inaudible (or suppressed), and cases in which the reception period occurs while the specific type of performance sound is in the audible state. According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous variation pattern, when the player is given an operation opportunity, the “specific operation permissible period” and “special operation permissible period” related to the above configuration 7-E can be used. Since it becomes easier to recognize which of the "permissible periods" the player is in, it becomes possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunities are given. In this case, even if the form of the effect sound changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance remains the same.

The above-mentioned "modified 1F reception period" may be applied to the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period)" according to configuration 7-E.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulation image display means).

In this regard, in the production example described above, the type of reception period is the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)," etc. 297 and 298)" and the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 8-E. There is. In both the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 8-E, the operation section is displayed by the image display means and is allowed to receive multiple operations. (3rd F operating section A and 1st F operating section B), but if an operation is performed on the operating section (3rd F operating section A) during the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to configuration 8-E above. Post-reception output, which is one of the post-reception changes, in cases where an operation is performed on the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) during the “specific operation permissible period” according to configuration 8-E above. Since different sounds can be output, it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 8-E, , When an operation is performed on the operation part (3rd F operation part A) that is displayed by the image display means and is allowed to accept multiple operations, the after-reception change occurs as one of the after-reception changes. In contrast to outputting the output sound, the display by the sample image display means is When an operation is performed on the operation part (1st F operation part B) that is targeted and allows multiple operation receptions, one of the changes after reception is to output an output sound after reception. There may be cases in which the post-output sound is not output.

According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 8-E, the object to be displayed by the sample image display means Even if an operation is performed on the operation section (1st F operation section B) that is set to 1 and is allowed to accept multiple operations, there are cases in which the output sound is output after reception, and cases in which the output sound after reception is not output. Since this may occur in some cases, it can be expected to maintain a sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly.

It should be noted that within the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 8-E, if the image is displayed by the sample image display means and is displayed multiple times. A case where an operation is performed on the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) for which the operation reception is allowed, but the output sound is not output after the reception is triggered by the operation is, for example, a case where the output sound is not output when the operation is displayed on the sample image display means. The output sound may not be output after acceptance by not accepting the operation itself on the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) which is also allowed to accept multiple operations, or the sample image display Although the operation itself is accepted for the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) that is subject to display by the means and is allowed to accept multiple operations, the predetermined conditions are not met and the output sound is output after the acceptance. may be configured so that it is not output.

In addition, within the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), etc.)", it is possible to display the image by the sample image display means and to accept the operation multiple times. A case where an operation is performed on the operation unit (1F operation unit B), but the output sound is not output after reception is triggered by this, for example, is a case in which the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (Fig. 278~ It is preferable that the event can also occur when the first operation is performed in the "Refer to FIG. 281)". Further, it is desirable that the event can occur regardless of the length of time that has passed since the previous operation reception. Furthermore, even if the output sound is not output after reception, some change may occur after reception.

Further, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 8-E, the operation part (the The 3F operation section A and the 1F operation section B) may be the same operation section or may be different operation sections.

In addition, if the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 8-E is made to occur as the "7F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.", the display by the sample image display means When an operation is performed on an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) that is subject to the following and is permitted to accept multiple operations, if an output sound is always output after acceptance, operation acceptance is not permitted. This makes it possible to suggest the existence of an operating section whose operating status is hidden. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period" when there is no hidden operation part, there are times when the output sound is output after reception and sometimes it is not, so there is no secrecy effect. It can also be expected that the performance will be improved.

Furthermore, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" according to the above configuration 8-E, Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "prescribed operation permissible period" related to the configuration 8-E occurs, the "predetermined operation permissible period" related to the configuration 8-E occurs. A specific type of performance sound is not suppressed or made inaudible before or is not suppressed or made inaudible (for example, a specific type of performance sound is always made inaudible and then However, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to configuration 8-E, the "specified operation period" related to configuration 8-E Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "operation permissible period" occurs, a specific type of performance sound (specific There are cases where BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed) and cases where it is not made inaudible (or suppressed) (cases where a reception period occurs while a specific type of production sound is audible). You can also do this. According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous variation pattern, when an operation opportunity is given, the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 8-E can be used. ”, it becomes easier to recognize which one is, so it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. In this case, even if the form of the effect sound changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance remains the same.

The above-mentioned "modified 1F reception period" may be applied to the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period)" according to configuration 8-E.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulation image display means). In addition, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the production example described above, the type of reception period is the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)," etc. 297 and 298), etc.) and a special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281), etc.) related to the above configuration 9-E. There is.

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" according to the above configuration 9-E, There is an operation part (3rd F operation part A) that allows operation acceptance multiple times and allows the operation reception to be performed multiple times just by maintaining the operated state, and when the operation part (3F operation part A) is operated. If the state continues to be maintained, post-acceptance output sound A, which is one of the post-acceptance changes A, is output at predetermined time intervals, and a plurality of post-acceptance output sounds A are output to the operating unit (for example, at intervals later than the predetermined time). When the operation is performed twice, the post-acceptance output sound A is output every time the operation is performed.

In addition, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" according to configuration 9-E, operation reception is permitted multiple times, but the operated state is maintained. There is an operation section (1st F operation section B) for which the operation is not accepted multiple times even if the operation is continued. One post-acceptance output sound B is not output at predetermined intervals, and the operation section (1st F operation section B) is operated multiple times (for example, at intervals later than the predetermined time). Even when the operation is performed, the post-acceptance output sound B is sometimes outputted and sometimes not.

According to such a configuration, during the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 9-E, the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated. (1st F operating section B), and furthermore, even if the operating section (1st F operating section B) is operated, the output sound B may or may not be output after acceptance when the operation is performed. In this case, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether an operation has been properly accepted.

In addition, regarding the above-mentioned configuration 9-E, "specific operation permissible period (for example, 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), etc.)" The operation unit (3F operation unit A) in which operation reception is permitted multiple times and operation reception can be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the operated state, and the ``special operation permission period (3F operation unit A)'' according to configuration 9-E above. For example, in the 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), the operation section that accepts multiple operations but does not accept operations multiple times even if the operated state is maintained ( 1F operation section B)" may be the same operation section or may be a different operation section.

In addition, regarding the above-mentioned configuration 9-E, "specific operation permissible period (for example, 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), etc.)" The operation unit (3F operation unit A) for which operation reception is permitted multiple times and operation reception can be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the operated state is the “special operation permission period (3F operation unit A)” according to configuration 9-E above. For example, it may be set as the operation unit (for example, the 1F operation unit A) to be operated even during the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281).

In addition, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 9-E, "operation reception is allowed multiple times but the operated state is maintained". The operating section (1st F operating section B) for which the operation is not accepted multiple times even if the operation is continued is the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F accepting period (see Figures 287 to 291)" ), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.) may also be set as the operating unit to be operated (for example, the 3rd F operating unit B).

However, in the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 9-E, "the operation section (1F operation section B)" is set as an operation section (for example, 3rd F operation section B) that is also to be operated during the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 9-E, even if it is the same operation section. Regardless, according to the above configuration 9-E, "during the specific operation permissible period, when an operation is performed, the output sound after the operation will not even be output (see FIG. 287(k) or FIG. 297(k)). reference).

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 3rd F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), 7th F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), etc.)" according to the above configuration 9-E, Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 9-E occurs, "than the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 9-E occurs" A specific type of performance sound is not suppressed or made inaudible before or is not suppressed or made inaudible (for example, a specific type of performance sound is always made inaudible and then However, in the ``special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), etc.)'' related to the configuration 9-E, the ``specific operation period'' related to the configuration 9-E is Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "operation permissible period" occurs, a specific type of performance sound (specific There are cases where BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed) and cases where it is not made inaudible (or suppressed) (cases where a reception period occurs while a specific type of production sound is audible). You can also do this. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the player is given an operation opportunity, the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 9-E can be used. ”, it becomes easier to recognize which one is, so it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when no operation opportunity is given. In this case, even if the form of the effect sound changes depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance remains the same.

The above-mentioned "modified 1F reception period" may be applied to the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period)" according to the above configuration 9-E.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Further, it is possible to display a display imitating an operation target for which operation reception is permitted, so that periodic changes appear.

In this regard, in the reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, first, when periodic changes in the display imitating the operation target for which operation acceptance is allowed are displayed in predetermined time units (3F reception period or 3F operation-related display A) displayed during the 7F reception period, etc., and periodic changes in the display imitating the operation target are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (each of the above-mentioned effects) In the example, there is an operation-related display (other than the 3rd F operation-related display A). On top of this, if periodic changes in the display imitating the operation target are displayed in predetermined time units during the reception period (3F operation-related display displayed during the 3F reception period, 7F reception period, etc.) A) and the case where periodic changes in the reception period are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time (in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the operation-related display is not the 3F operation-related display A). In either case, when an operation is performed on the operation part corresponding to the display that imitates the operation target among the multiple operation parts, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, can be output. Therefore, it can be expected that this will suitably indicate that the operation has been accepted properly.

In addition, in the example of production described above, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" and the 7th floor reception period (see FIG. 297 and 298), etc.), and a ``special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see Figs. 278 to 281), etc.)'' according to the above configuration 10-E. There is. In this regard, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" according to Configuration 10-E above, , a display imitating the operation target (3rd F operation related display A) is displayed such that periodic changes appear in predetermined time units, and the operation part (3rd F operation part) corresponding to the display (3rd F operation related display A) When you operate A), the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 10-E, the display imitating the operation target (1F operation related display B ) is displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, and when the operation section (1st F operation section B) corresponding to the display that imitates the operation target (1st F operation related display B) is operated. , there are cases where the post-acceptance output sound B, which is one of the post-acceptance changes B, is output (timings te2A, te2B) and cases where the post-acceptance output sound B is not output (timing te2C).

According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the display imitating the operation target are displayed in a time unit longer than a predetermined time, the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is Since there are cases where the output sound is output and cases where the output sound is not output after the reception, it can be expected to suitably impart a sense of tension as to whether the operation reception has been properly performed.

In this case, the 3rd F operating section A of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 10-E and the 1st F operating section B of the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 10-E are the same operating section. or may be a different operation section.

In addition, regarding the 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281), the 3F reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), the 7thF reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), etc. It is desirable to set the validity period to be longer than .

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the operation section (for example, the 1st F operation section B) is operated, the case where the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is not output (for example, timing te2C) is as follows: This occurs while a normal game is being played, and does not occur while a notification sound is being output based on some kind of abnormality detection. For example, even if you operate the operating section (for example, 1st F operating section B) while only the "BGM output based on the start of symbol variation" is audibly output as the sound, even if the operating section (for example, 1st F operating section B) is There may be a case where the output sound after reception, which is one of the above, is not output (for example, at timing te2C), or when the operation section (for example, 1st F operation section B) is operated while no sound is being output. However, it may be possible that the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may not be output (for example, at timing te2C).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Further, it is possible to display a display imitating an operation target for which operation reception is permitted, so that periodic changes appear. In addition, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, it is possible to execute a process (automatic button function) that causes the same change after reception as when the operation was performed (automatic reception execution means).

In this regard, in the production example described above, first, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) or the 7th floor reception period" Prepare at least a special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.) related to the above configuration 11-E. It is said that

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" according to the above configuration 11-E, There is an operation section (3F operation section A) which is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (target for which the automatic button function is activated) and whose operation reception can be accepted multiple times. When the player performs an operation on part A), the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes A, is output as modes A1 and A2 (see FIG. 287(k)).

On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 11-E, the object of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the automatic button function is There is an operation section (1st F operation section B) which is not a target to be activated) and whose operation can be accepted multiple times, and the player performs an operation on the operation section (1st F operation section B). In this case, the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes B, is output as a sound (post-acceptance output sound B) different from the above modes A1 and A2 (see FIG. 278(k)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not the object is to be processed by the automatic reception execution means (target for which the automatic button function is activated) through the aspect of the output sound after reception. Therefore, it can be expected to suitably maintain interest in gaming.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) and the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) related to the configuration 11-E) ), etc.), for the operation unit (3rd F operation unit A) that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (target for which the automatic button function is enabled) and for which operation reception can be accepted multiple times. When the player performs an operation, a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output (see FIG. 287(k)). However, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" according to Configuration 11-E above, the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the automatic button function is activated) When the player performs an operation on an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) that is not a target (object) and for which operation reception is allowed multiple times, the post-acceptance output sound is one of the post-acceptance changes. is output in a manner different from the above-mentioned aspects A1 and A2 (see timings te2A and te2B shown in FIG. 278(k)), and when the output sound itself is not output after reception (see FIG. 278(k)). (see timing te2C shown in ). According to such a configuration, the conditions for outputting the output sound after acceptance are different between the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 11-E, which reduces the feeling of tension. It can be expected to maintain it well.

In this case, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 11-E ``The operation unit (3F operation unit A) that is subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times (3rd F operation unit A)'' and the ``special operation permissible period (for example, the third 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281, etc.)" is the same as "operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and for which operation reception can be accepted multiple times (1F operation unit B)" It may be an operating section or a different operating section.

For example, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 11-E, "operation reception is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means". The operation unit (1st F operation unit B) in which the operation is allowed multiple times is the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 1st F operation unit B) 7F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.) may also be set as an operation unit (for example, 3F operation unit B) to be operated. However, in the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 11-E, "the operation part (1F operation part B) which is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and whose operation acceptance is permitted multiple times (1st F operation part B)" is If the operation unit is set as an operation target (for example, 3F operation unit B) even during the “specific operation permissible period” according to Configuration 11-E, the output sound after acceptance when the operation is performed. It is desirable that the sound is always output, or that the output sound after acceptance is not even output when the operation is performed (this is not an essential configuration). Regardless of which configuration is adopted (for example, even if the post-acceptance output sound is not output when an operation is performed), the post-acceptance output sound is output. Since the conditions are different between the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 11-E, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Furthermore, when the acceptance period occurs, an acceptance permission sound indicating that the operation reception is allowed or that the operation reception is allowed can be audibly output. Further, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, the type of reception period is the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 4thF reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)), the 8thF reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)," etc. 299 and 300)," and the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (Fig. 295) and (see FIG. 296), etc.).

In the above-mentioned production example, the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 4th floor reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293) and the 8th floor reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300) related to the configuration 12-E) ), etc.), the operation is accepted for the first operation part (4F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) for a specific period, and the second operation part (4F operation part B, for example) is accepted for a specific period. , operation button 410) is at least permissible, and during the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 12-E, while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, Either the operation reception on the first operation part (the 4F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) or the operation reception on the second operation part (the 4F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period. When this is done, the acceptance permission sound is made inaudible (see Figure 292(k), Figure 293(k), Figure 299(k), Figure 300(k)). etc.). Note that the acceptance permission sound may be output so as to straddle timing th2 when the "specific operation permission period" related to the configuration 12-E occurs, or may be output at timing th2 or thereafter. You can.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned production example, there is a special operation permission period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 295), and the 296), etc.), the operation is accepted for the special period first operation section (second F operation section A, for example, the sword ornament 5001), and the special period second operation section (second F operation section B is the second operation section B). , for example, the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410) can be at least allowed, and while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output during the "special operation permission period" according to the configuration 12-E. When an operation is accepted for the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410), the acceptance permission sound is not made inaudible (see FIG. 282). At timings tf2A, tf2B, tf2C) shown in , during the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 12-E, while the reception permissible sound is audibly output, the special period first operation part (second F operation part A) For example, when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001), the acceptance permission sound is made inaudible (timing tf2D shown in FIG. 282). Note that the acceptance permission sound may be output so as to straddle the timing tf2 when the "special operation permission period" related to the configuration 12-E occurs, or may be output at timing th2 or thereafter. You can.

According to such a configuration, the condition for making the reception permission sound inaudible is the “special operation permission period (for example, the 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)) or the condition for making the reception permission sound inaudible. , 6F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), etc.) and the special operation permission period (for example, 2F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), 2F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), 6F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.), it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In this case, the specific period first operating section (4th F operating section A) of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 12-E, It may be the same as the 1 operation part (2nd F operation part A), or it may be different.

Further, the specific period second operating section (4th F operating section B) of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 12-E is the special period first operating section of the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 12-E. (2nd F operating section A) or the special period second operating section (2nd F operating section B), or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the special period first operating section (second F operating section A) and the special period second operating section (second F operating section B) of the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 12-E are Operation reception may also be permitted during the "specific operation permissible period".

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (FIGS. 295 and 296) related to the configuration 12-E) ), etc.), the special period first operation section (second F operation section A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the special period second operation section (second F operation section B, for example, the operation button 410), the first operating section during the special period is targeted for activation of the automatic button function, and the second operating section during the special period is not targeted for activation of the automatic button function. In other words, in this case, if the player does not operate the special period second operation section (second F operation section B, for example, operation button 410) on the side that requires multiple operations, this will trigger After acceptance, you will not be able to see the details of the change. Therefore, there are games with a low level of difficulty (one operation is required, and even if there is no operation, you can check the changes after the operation is accepted), and games with a high level of difficulty (multiple operations are required). (If there is no operation, it will not be possible to confirm the change after the reception of the operation).It will be possible to provide both at the same time, making it suitable for the gaming interests of players from beginners to experts. can be expected to increase.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (FIGS. 295 and 296) related to the configuration 12-E) ), the acceptance acceptance sound is made inaudible until the timing tf3 when the automatic button function is activated arrives. As a result, while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is possible to indicate that the timing for activation of the automatic button function has not yet arrived, so that the player is not deprived of the opportunity to operate the function himself. It becomes possible to enjoy games with a sense of security.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Furthermore, when the acceptance period occurs, an acceptance permission sound indicating that the operation reception is allowed or that the operation reception is allowed can be audibly output. Further, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the production example described above, the type of reception period is the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 5th floor reception period (see FIG. 294)" or the 9th floor reception period (see FIG. 301 and (see Figure 302), etc.), and the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (Figs. 295 and 296) (see ), etc.).

In the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th F reception period (see FIG. 301 and 302), etc.)" according to the above configuration 13-E, the predetermined period Operation acceptance for one operation part (5F operation part A, for example, sword ornament 5001) and operation acceptance for a second operation part (5F operation part B, for example, operation button 410) for a predetermined period are performed. At least it can be considered acceptable. In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to configuration 13-E, the first operation part (5F operation part A) is operated for a predetermined period while the reception permissible sound is audibly output. Even when an operation is accepted or an operation is accepted for a predetermined period of time on the second operation section (5th F operation section B), the acceptance permission sound is not made inaudible due to this. (See FIGS. 294(j) and (k) and FIGS. 301(j) and (k)).

In contrast, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" according to Configuration 13-E above Now, operation reception for the first operation part (second F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) for a specific period, and operation reception for the second operation part (second F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period. Operation acceptance may be at least acceptable. In this regard, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 13-E, the first operation part (second F operation part A) is Once an operation is accepted, the acceptance permissible sound will not be made inaudible, but if an operation is accepted for the second operation part (second F operation part B) for a specific period, As a trigger, the reception permissible sound is rendered inaudible (see FIGS. 282(j) and (k) and FIGS. 295(j) and (k)). According to such a configuration, the conditions under which the reception permissible sound is made inaudible are different between the predetermined operation permissible period and the specific operation permissible period, so it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. sell.

In this case, the "specific period first operating section" of the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 13-E is the "predetermined period first operating section" of the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to configuration 13-E above. Alternatively, it may be the same as the "predetermined period second operation section" or may be different from either of them.

Further, the "second operating section for a specific period" of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E is the "first operating section for a predetermined period" or " It may be the same as the "predetermined period second operation section" or may be different from either.

Further, the first predetermined period operation section (or the second predetermined period operation section) may be one that is allowed to receive operations even during the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 13-E.

In addition, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" according to the above configuration 13-E, The permissible sounds are the same in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see Figure 294), the 9th F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302), etc.)" according to the above configuration 13-E. It may also be possible to output the information in the following manner.

In particular, when the "prescribed operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E always appears in the same manner as the 5th F effect display F, and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E occurs. is output in a manner that can be output even during the "prescribed operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E, and in a manner that is not output during the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E. It is desirable that there be cases.

For example, if aspect EF-2 that appears when expectations are low is made to appear as "5th F effect display EF (always the same aspect)", if aspect EF-2 appears as "2nd F effect display EF" Even so, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that this is displayed as the "5th F effect display EF" and furthermore that the highly anticipated mode UA2 may appear as the 5th F post-reception display UA. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when mode EF-2 appears as the "second F effect display EF."

Alternatively, if the aspect EF-1 that appears when high expectations are made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF (always the same aspect)", when the "5th F effect display EF" is displayed, the aspect EF-1 is always displayed. Since it becomes possible to make 1 appear, it can be expected to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a post-acceptance display is displayed. sell. Furthermore, when the acceptance period occurs, an acceptance permission sound indicating that the operation reception is allowed or that the operation reception is allowed can be audibly output.

In this regard, in the production example described above, the reception period may be the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)) or the 6th F reception period (see FIG. 295) related to the configuration 14-E. and (see FIG. 296), etc.), and in the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 14-E, the first operation part (second F operation part B) among the plurality of operation parts is prepared. For example, both the operation reception on the operation button 410) and the operation reception on the second operation part (the second F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) are allowed, and the first operation part (the second F operation part When the player performs an operation on part B), the second F reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ (see FIGS. 285(c) and 285(d), etc.). ), when the player performs an operation on the second operation section (second F operation section A), the second F reception display UA is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ. (See Figure 286(g), etc.). According to such a configuration, either the decorative pattern SZ or the post-reception display can be displayed depending on which of the first operating section (second F operating section B) and second operating section (second F operating section A) is operated. Since it is possible to select which game to watch with priority, it can be expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (FIGS. 295 and 296) related to the configuration 14-E) ), etc.), when the operation is performed on the first operation part (2nd F operation part B) and when the operation is performed on the second operation part (2nd F operation part A) In this case, different display modes (UA, UB) are displayed after acceptance. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to solve the problem of visibility as a post-reception display, but also to select which post-reception display you want to see, taking into consideration the presentation content, resulting in higher performance performance. will be expected to provide the following.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 295), 296), etc.), when the player performs an operation on the first operation section (second F operation section B) while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, the after-acceptance display changes to While the audible output of the permissible sound continues, it is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ. On the other hand, if the player performs an operation on the second operation part (second F operation part A) while the reception permissible sound is being audibly output, this triggers the reception permissible sound to become inaudible. The post-acceptance display was made to appear so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ. According to such a configuration, when it is selected to view the post-acceptance display with priority between the decorative pattern SZ and the post-acceptance display, the audible output of the acceptance permission sound is continued as a compensation, and thereby the operation Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that a reception has been made, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. In addition, in order to avoid this, if the audible output of the reception permission sound is interrupted based on the operation reception, the display after reception will be made difficult to see by the decorative pattern SZ as a compensation, so in this case can also be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, if the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 14-E is realized as the "6F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296)", the reception permissible sound is audible. When the player performs an operation on the first operation section (second F operation section B) on the side that is not displayed (concealed) in the display that imitates the operation target in the output, the display after acceptance is , while the audible output of the acceptance permission sound is being continued, it is displayed so as to appear to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ. In contrast, the player performs an operation on the second operation section (second F operation section A) on the side where the display imitating the operation object is to be displayed while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output. With this as a trigger, the acceptance permission sound is rendered inaudible, and the post-acceptance display is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an operation on the first operation section (second F operation section B) on the (secret) side, the audible output of the acceptance permission sound is interrupted due to this operation. Therefore, it is possible to add an element of concealment regarding whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed. However, instead, the post-reception display is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern SZ in front of it. ) can be expected to be provided as special information to help determine whether or not the operation was properly accepted when the player performs an operation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to display a warning effect indicating that the operation permissible period will occur. Further, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the production example described above, the reception period may be the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 4th F reception period (see FIG. 292 and FIG. 293) or the 8th F reception period (see FIG. 299)) related to the configuration 15-E. and 300),” and the “special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 286), and the 296) etc.)".

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 4th F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 8th F reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), etc.)" according to the above configuration 15-E, Receipt of operation for the first operation part (4F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) for a specific period, and operation acceptance for the second operation part (4F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period The foreshadow effect display is displayed so as to straddle the timing th2 at which the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 15-E occurs, and While the foreshadow effect display is being displayed during the "specific operation permissible period", operations are not accepted for the first operating section (4th F operating section A) during the specific period and for the second operating section (4th F operating section B) for the specific period. When any one of the operations is accepted, this is used as a trigger to hide the corresponding precursor effect display (see FIG. 292(d), FIG. 293(d), FIG. 299(d), (See FIG. 300(d), etc.).

In contrast, the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), etc.)" according to Configuration 15-E above Now, the operation reception for the special period first operation part (second F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception for the special period second operation part (second F operation part B, for example, the operation button 410) The operation reception is at least allowed, and the precursor effect display is displayed so as to straddle the timing tf2 when the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 15-E occurs. During the "special operation permissible period" according to 15-E, if an operation is accepted for the first operation part (second F operation part A) during the special period while the foreshadow effect display is audibly output, this will be used as an opportunity to display the foreshadowing. The effect display is not hidden, and while the precursor effect display is displayed in the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 15-E, the second operation part (second F operation) is not activated during the special period. When an operation for part B) is accepted, this is used as an opportunity to hide the precursor effect display (see FIG. 282(d), FIG. 295(d), etc.). According to such a configuration, the conditions under which the precursor effect display is hidden are different between the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to the above-mentioned configuration 15-E. It can be expected to maintain a good feeling.

In this case, the "specific period first operating section" of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 15-E is the "special period first operating section" of the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 15-E. Alternatively, it may be the same as the "special period second operation section" or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the "specific period second operation part" of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 15-E is the "special period first operation part" of the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 15-E, or the The special period second operation section may be the same as the special period second operation section, or may be different from either of them.

In addition, the "special period first operation section (or special period second operation section)" according to the above configuration 15-E is one that can accept operations even during the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 15-E. It may be.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, if the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 15-E is realized as the 8th F reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), the hidden side Even if an operation is performed on the second operation part (the 4F operation part B, e.g., the operation button 410) during the specific period, the first operation part (the 4F operation part A, e.g., the operation button 410) is operated during the specific period. Since the 4th F effect display is displayed so as to overlap the 4th F operation related display A corresponding to the 4F operation related display A corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001), the 4F effect display is displayed so as to overlap with the 4F operation related display A corresponding to the 1st operation part (4F operation part A, and for example, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the acceptance of operation of the sword ornament 5001) is no longer permitted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of effect, the 4th F omen effect display may be displayed as the same image display as the 5F omen effect display. Further, the 4th F omen effect display may be displayed as the same image display as the 3F omen effect display.

Furthermore, in the above-described production example, the decorative pattern SZ can be displayed in a variable manner. Further, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a warning effect indicating that a reception period will occur. Further, it is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, the precursory performance display can be executed across the timing at which the operation permissible period occurs, and it is assumed that the premonitory performance display can be performed over the timing when the operation permissible period occurs. When the player performs an operation on the other hand, the after-reception display is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern SZ in front of it (for example, the second-F after-reception display UB2 shown in FIG. 286(e), etc.) ), and cases where the after-reception display is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (for example, the 2nd F after-reception display UA1 shown in FIG. 286(g)). Therefore, it can be expected that the post-acceptance display will be more dramatic with the decorative pattern SZ to improve the game's interest.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of reception period, the specific operation permissible period related to the configuration 16-E (for example, the 2ndF reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 5thF reception period (see FIG. 294), ), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.).

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 16-E, the first operation part of the plurality of operation parts (for example, if the particular operation permissible period is realized as the second F reception period, the "second F operation part B, and the operation reception for the operation button 410) and the second operation part (for example, if the specific operation permissible period is realized as the second F reception period, it corresponds to the "second F operation part A", and the sword decoration 5001, etc.) are permitted, and when the player performs an operation on the first operation section (for example, the second F operation section B), the front side of the decorative pattern SZ is accepted. The post-reception display (e.g., 2nd F post-reception display UB) is displayed so that they overlap (see, e.g., FIG. 286(e)), and the When the player performs an operation, a post-reception display (for example, the 2nd F post-reception display UA) is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (for example, the post-reception display UA on the second floor) is displayed (for example, in FIG. 286(g) ) etc.). According to such a configuration, the decorative pattern SZ and the post-reception display depend on which of the first operation section (for example, 2F operation section B) and the second operation section (for example, 2F operation section A) is operated. Since it is possible to select which of the following to give priority to, it can be expected that the interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the above-described production example, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 16-E, an operation is performed on the first operation section (for example, the second F operation section B and the operation button 410). and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the second F operation unit A, sword ornament 5001, etc.), the display mode differs as the post-reception display (for example, the display after the reception on the second F Displays UA, UB) are now displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to solve the problem of visibility as a post-reception display, but also to select which post-reception display you want to see, taking into consideration the presentation content, resulting in higher performance performance. will be expected to provide the following.

In addition, in the above-described production example, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 16-E, an operation on the first operation section (for example, the second F operation section B and the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation sections is performed. Both the reception and the operation reception on the second operation part (for example, the second F operation part A, such as the sword ornament 5001) are allowed, and when the first operation part ( For example, when the player performs an operation on the operation button 410 in the second F operation section B, the display after reception is decorated with the warning effect display not being hidden but being displayed. It is displayed so as to overlap with the symbol SZ and the foreshadowing effect display (for example, see FIG. 286(e)), and while the foreshadowing effect display is being displayed, the second operation section (for example, the second When the player performs an operation on the operation part A (sword decoration 5001, etc.), the foreshadowing effect display is hidden, and the display after reception is made on the back side of the decorative pattern SZ. (See, for example, FIGS. 286(f) and (g)).

According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 16-E, when the first operation section is operated, the precursor effect display is not hidden using this as an opportunity, Since the post-reception display is displayed so as to overlap the foreshadowing effect display from the front, its visibility is ensured. On the other hand, when the second operation section is operated, the reception display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ, but this is the trigger for the precursor effect display. Since it is hidden, its visibility is ensured. Since the visibility of the post-reception display is ensured through these different methods when operating the first operating section and when operating the second operating section, it is possible to make the presentation performance significantly different. This can be expected to improve performance when prompting a user to select which of the first and second operation sections to operate.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operation permissible period) during which operation acceptance on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the acceptance period, an after-acceptance display is generated. sell. In addition, it is possible to display a warning effect indicating that a reception period will occur. It is possible to display a model of an operation target for which operation acceptance is acceptable.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the types of reception period are "specific operation permissible period (for example, 3F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), 4F reception period (see FIG. 292), 7F reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), or 8F reception period (see Figures 299 and 300), etc.), and the ``special operation'' related to the above configuration 17-E. It was decided to prepare at least a permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.).

The specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 4th F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), and the 297 and 298), or the 8F reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), no operation is performed on the operating section during the "specific operation permissible period" related to configuration 17-E. Even if the specified operation permissible period according to configuration 17-E occurs, if a specific time (set effective time) has elapsed, the same reception as when the operation on the operation panel was performed display (automatic button function enabled). In this regard, the display of a precursory effect is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 17-E occurs, but the above-mentioned specific time has elapsed since the specific operation permissible period occurred. It was decided that it would be hidden at a timing earlier than that.

In contrast, the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), etc.)" according to Configuration 17-E above In this case, even if no operation is performed on the operation part during the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 17-E, the special time period will not start after the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 17-E occurs. When the (set valid time) has elapsed, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation on the operation unit was performed is performed (the automatic button function is activated). In this regard, the display of the precursor effect is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E occurs, and when the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E occurs. It is displayed even after the special time (set valid time) has elapsed since the start of the special operation, and the above-mentioned special When the time (set valid time) has elapsed, the same post-reception display as when the operation on the operation panel is performed while the precursor effect display is not hidden but is displayed will start. I did it like that.

According to such a configuration, the relationship between the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E and the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E with respect to the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is determined. Since the timing at which the precursor effect display is hidden is different, it can be expected to suitably maintain the tension when the operation permissible period in which the automatic button function is activated occurs.

In this case, the "specific time" and the "special time" may be the same time or different times.

Further, the precursor effect display is displayed in correspondence with the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E, and when it is displayed corresponding to the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E. It may be displayed in the same manner or in different manners depending on the case.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, as a type of reception period, in addition to the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E, the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E is included. (For example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.).

In this regard, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.)" according to the above configuration 17-E, If the operation unit is not operated during the “predetermined operation permissible period” according to configuration 17-E, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation unit is operated is performed (the automatic button function is enabled). It seems like it never happens. In this regard, the display of a precursor effect is executed so as to span the timing at which the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E occurs; It is decided that the display will be hidden at a timing (a shorter time elapses) before either the specific time or the special time elapses after the "predetermined operation permissible period" occurs (Fig. 294(d), (See FIGS. 301(d) and 302(d)).

According to such a configuration, if the precursory effect display is hidden in the middle of the reception period, the automatic button function may be activated or the automatic button function may not be activated. Therefore, it can be expected that the player will be encouraged to perform the operation quickly. In addition, while the precursor effect display is displayed, if the acceptance period does not end ("Specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 17-E, "predetermined operation permissible period" according to configuration 17-E), the reception period ("Special operation permissible period" according to configuration 17-E), the automatic button function must be enabled even if the acceptance period ends. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

As mentioned above, the automatic button function may be activated for the 5th F reception period (see Figure 294) and the 9th F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302), but this In this case, the time during which the precursor effect display is displayed shall be set as the above-mentioned specific time (set effective time), and these reception periods will be realized as the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E. It happens.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the types of reception periods include the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to configuration 18-E, and the configuration 18-E. It was decided to prepare at least a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" regarding E.

In the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), multiple operation receptions are allowed and the 1F operation section B is displayed as a sample image display. (operation button 410), and even if the operation section is kept in an operated state, the operation is not accepted multiple times (the so-called automatic continuous press function is not activated). On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), multiple operation receptions are allowed, but the 10th F operation is not displayed as a sample image display. There is part A (sword decoration body 5001), and the operation can be accepted multiple times just by keeping the operation part in the operated state (the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled). It can be expected that this will alleviate the difficulty of playing the game due to the concealment of the operating section and suppress the decline in gaming interest. Furthermore, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained not only when the operation section to be operated is hidden, but also when the operation section to be operated is not concealed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to the configuration 18-E, multiple operation receptions are allowed. In addition, there are multiple operation units displayed as a sample image display, including the "1st F operation unit B (operation button 410)", and even if any of the operation units is kept in the operated state, the operation reception may be performed multiple times. It may also be configured such that the automatic repeating function is not activated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" according to configuration 18-E, multiple operation receptions are allowed. However, the "first operation section (10F operation section A (sword ornament 5001))" and "second operation section (10F operation section B (operation button 410))" are not displayed in the image display. There is at least one, but while the "first operation section (10F operation section A (sword ornament 5001)") can be accepted multiple times just by keeping it in the operated state, the "second operation section" Regarding the operation section (10th F operation section B (operation button 410)), even if it continues to be operated, the operation is not accepted multiple times (Fig. 303(a), ( b)).

According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), multiple operation receptions are allowed, but are not displayed as a sample image display. Even if the operation unit is not activated, the so-called auto-repeat function may not be activated, so it can be expected that a sense of tension can be maintained more favorably.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), the "first operation section (10F operation section A (sword ornament 5001) )", the display UA is displayed behind the pattern (so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ) (see FIG. 306, etc.). When an operation is accepted for the operation section (10th F operation section B (operation button 410)), a post-acceptance display UB is displayed in front of the pattern (so that it appears to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ). (See Figures 305 and 306, etc.). In other words, in this case, if an operation is performed on an operation unit for which the fact that an operation opportunity has been granted is not hidden, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of the operation is executed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize, and the operation opportunity is not concealed. When an operation is performed on the operation unit whose assigned information is kept secret, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception will be executed in a manner that is easy to see. Even if such a problem occurs, it can be expected to improve the game's interest while suitably maintaining the sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), the "first operation section (10F operation section A (sword decoration body) 5001))" allows multiple operation receptions, and when the "1st operation section (10F operation section A (sword decoration body 5001))" is operated, the reception output sound is always output. (See Figure 303(k)). As a result, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the "first operation section (10th floor operation section A (sword ornament 5001))" When performing an operation, it becomes easier to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted after the operation has been accepted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), the "second operation section (10F operation section B (operation button 410) ))" allows multiple operation receptions, but when the "second operation section (10F operation section B (operation button 410))" is operated, the reception output sound is output. This was done so that there would be no cases where this would occur (see Figure 303(k)). As a result, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", the operation on the "second operation section (10th floor operation section B (operation button 410))" In this case, even after the operation has been accepted, a presentation element will be included that makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted, and it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), multiple operation receptions are permitted and displayed as a sample image display. When the operation unit (1st F operation unit B (operation button 410)) is operated, there are cases where the reception output sound is output and cases where the reception output sound is not output (Figure 278 (k) ). As a result, even during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see Figures 278 to 281)"), a small amount of production element that makes it difficult to recognize whether or not an operation has been accepted will be included. , it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the previous time that has ended at the time when the "specific operation permissible period" occurs Depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the specific type of performance sound is suppressed or made inaudible before the specific operation permissible period occurs, or is not suppressed or made inaudible. However, in the "prescribed operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see Figures 278 to 281)"), the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the "predetermined operation permissible period" occurs Depending on the type, the performance sound of a specific type is suppressed or made inaudible before the "predetermined operation permissible period" occurs, or is not suppressed or made inaudible. Good too. Regarding this configuration, please refer to the above-mentioned "Configuration 3-D", "Configuration 12-D", "Configuration 17-D", "Configuration 1-E" to "Configuration 9-E", and related specific examples. Since the contents are the same as those described in , a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that the other examples described above regarding the configuration can be similarly applied to the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) and the 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306). For example, even if there is a change in the form (audible state) of the production sound depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, the form of the change after reception according to the operation will not change accordingly and will remain the same. .

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to the above configuration 19-E, and the above configuration 19- It was decided to prepare at least a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" regarding E.

In the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), there is one or more operation sections for which operation reception is permitted and displayed as a sample image. , When the operation section is operated, an output sound can be output after acceptance (see FIG. 278(k)). On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", the operation reception is permitted, but the "first There are at least an operation section (10F operation section A (sword ornament 5001))" and a "second operation section (10F operation section B (operation button 410))", and a "first operation section (10F operation section A)". (sword decoration body 5001))", an output sound may be output after acceptance, but when the operation is performed on the "second operation section (10F operation section B (operation button 410))'' When this is done, the output sound will no longer be output after acceptance. In other words, in this case, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), when an operation unit that is not in a concealed state is operated, an output sound may be output after reception. , during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor acceptance period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the operation on the first operation part of the first operation part and the second operation part in the hidden state is not allowed. Since the output sound is only output after acceptance when the operation is accepted, it is further hidden that not only the first operation unit but also the second operation unit is in a state where operation reception is permitted. It will now be possible to do so.

In this case, the post-acceptance output sound may be output in different ways depending on at least one of the type of operation permissible period and the type of the operation unit operated by the player.

In addition, in this case, an operation is performed on the "second operation section (10F operation section B (operation button 410))" during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))". Although the post-acceptance output sound is not output when the operation is performed, it is desirable to allow a post-acceptance change depending on the operation. However, as shown in FIG. 303(i), in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), the "second operation section (10F operation section B (operation Even though an operation is performed on the button 410)), there may be a case where no change (at least visually) occurs after acceptance in response to the operation (see Fig. 303(i)). reference).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), the operation part is allowed to be accepted and is displayed as a sample image display. When (1st F operation part B (operation button 410)) is operated, there are cases where the reception output sound is output and cases where the reception output sound is not output (see FIG. 278(k)) . As a result, even during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see Figures 278 to 281)"), a small amount of production element that makes it difficult to recognize whether or not an operation has been accepted will be included. , it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the types of reception periods include the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to the configuration 20-E, and the configuration 20-E. It was decided to prepare at least a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" regarding E. In the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), there is an operation section for which operation acceptance is permitted and is displayed as a sample image display, and the operation section is When the operation is accepted, a display can be displayed after the operation is accepted. There are some operation parts that are considered permissible and are not displayed as a sample image display, but even if the operation part is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation can be displayed, so the operation target Even if the operation is performed while the operation section is kept secret, it can be shown that the operation was performed properly.

In this regard, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the operation reception is allowed, but the operation part that is not displayed as a sample image is the "first operation". There are at least two operating sections (10th operating section A (sword ornament 5001)) and a second operating section (10th operating section B (operating button 410)), and when an operation is performed on the first operating section, , the reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed behind the pattern (so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ), and when the operation is performed on the second operation section, the display UA is displayed in response to the operation. The post-reception display UB can be displayed in front of the pattern (so that it appears to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ) (see FIGS. 305 and 306, etc.). Depending on whether you operate the first operation section or the second operation section, it is possible to select which of the decorative symbols SZ or the post-reception display you want to see with priority, which increases the interest in the game. It can be expected to maintain it well.

Furthermore, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), there are multiple operation sections for which operation reception is permitted and displayed as a sample image. No matter which part of the operation unit is operated, the reception display corresponding to the operation will not be displayed behind the pattern (so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ), and the corresponding The post-acceptance display according to the operation may be displayed at a position shifted from the decorative pattern SZ or behind the pattern (so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ). According to such a configuration, when the operation unit that is allowed to accept the operation and is displayed as a sample image display is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern SZ. Therefore, even after the operation is accepted, the performance will not be kept confidential, and the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the first operation part (1F operation part B in the 1F reception period, 10F operation part B in the 10F reception period, and here the "operation part B" in the configuration 21-E) Button 410") and the second operation section related to the above configuration 21-E (1F operation section A during the 1F reception period, and 10F operation section A during the 10F reception period; here, It is possible to generate a multiple-operation permissible period in which both the operation reception on the "sword ornament 5001") is permissible, and during the multiple-operation permissible period, either the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is allowed. When the operation is accepted, a post-acceptance display can be displayed depending on the type of the side on which the operation was accepted. In addition, although it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operation target by the player (the simulated image display means), the display that simulates the operation target is displayed even though the operation reception is permitted. This may not be done depending on the circumstances.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the type of such multiple operation permissible period, the “first multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)) according to the above configuration 21-E is used. )" and the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" according to the configuration 21-E are prepared at least. When an operation is performed on the "operation button 410" during the first multiple operation permissible period (multiple operation reception may be allowed), a post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed; Even while the post-acceptance display UB is displayed, operation acceptance for the "sword ornament 5001" is permitted (see FIG. 278). Then, while the post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the "operation button 410" is displayed during the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the "sword ornament 5001" is displayed. When an operation is performed on , the post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed, and this operation also causes the post-reception display UB (post-reception display on the operation button 410 side) that has been displayed until then to be changed. Since it can be hidden (see FIGS. 281(h) and (i)), instead of the interrupted operation on the "operation button 410" side, the newly performed "sword ornament 5001" By operating on the `` side, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the performance is in a state of progress.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), a display imitating the "operation button 410" and a "sword" Both the display imitating the "decoration body 5001" is displayed, and both the operation reception for the "operation button 410" and the operation reception for the "sword decoration body 5001" are allowed, and Of the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001," at least the "operation button 410" may be configured to accept multiple operations. In addition, in the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", a display imitating the "operation button 410" and a display imitating the "sword ornament 5001" are displayed. are not displayed, both the operation reception for the "operation button 410" and the operation reception for the "sword ornament 5001" are allowed, and the "operation button 410" and the "sword At least the "operation button 410" of the "decoration body 5001" can accept multiple operations.

Then, in the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", an operation is performed on the "operation button 410" which may be allowed to accept multiple operations. When the operation is performed, a post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed, but even while the post-reception display UB is displayed, operation reception for "sword ornament 5001" is allowed, and the reception If an operation is performed on "Sword Decoration 5001" while the rear display UB is displayed, the reception display UA corresponding to the operation will be displayed, and the display that was previously displayed will be triggered by the operation. The post-reception display UB (post-reception display on the operation button 410 side) can be hidden. On the other hand, for the "operation button 410" which may be allowed to accept multiple operations in the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" When an operation is performed, a post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed, but even while the post-acceptance display UB is displayed, it is permissible to accept operations on the "sword ornament 5001". If an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001" while the post-reception display UB is displayed, the post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation will be displayed, but this operation will trigger the display The post-reception display UB (post-reception display on the operation button 410 side) that was previously displayed is no longer hidden. According to such a configuration, if an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001" while the reception display UB corresponding to the operation on the "operation button 410" is displayed, this will trigger the "operation button 410" to be operated. There are cases where the above-mentioned post-reception display UB is hidden depending on the operation on "operation button 410", and there are cases where the above-mentioned post-reception display UB is not hidden according to the operation on "operation button 410". It can be expected to improve gaming interest.

It should be noted that if an operation is performed on the "operation button 410" which may be allowed to accept multiple operations during the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" The post-acceptance display UB according to what has been done and the ``second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))'' indicate that multiple operation reception is permissible. The post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the "operation button 410" may be the same image display or may be displayed as a similar image display. In other words, in this case, it can be expected that when an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001", the image display of a specific mode (post-reception display UB) will be hidden or not. become.

In addition, during the "10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)", while the post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the "operation button 410" is displayed, "Sword When an operation is performed on the "decoration object 5001", the after-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to overlap behind the after-acceptance display UB.

In addition, if the operation on the "operation button 410" and the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" are performed respectively within the "10th F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)", regardless of the timing of those operations. First, the post-reception display UB that appears in response to the operation of the "operation button 410" is always displayed when the post-reception display UA that appears in response to the operation of the "sword ornament 5001" is hidden. , it is desirable to hide it at a later timing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the first operation section (1F operation section A in the 1F reception period, 10F operation section A during the 10F reception period, and here the "sword" Decorative body 5001"), and the second operation unit according to the above configuration 22-E (1F operation unit B during the 1F reception period, and 10F operation unit B during the 10F reception period, It is possible to generate a multiple-operation permissible period in which any operation accepted for the "operation button 410" (corresponding to the "operation button 410" here) is permissible. Further, it is possible to display a first operation-related display that can only appear when reception of an operation on the first operation unit is permitted or when the reception of the operation is permitted. A second operation-related display that can only appear when the operation unit is in a state in which reception of an operation is permitted or in a state in which reception of the operation is permitted can be displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the types of multiple operation permissible periods include the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to the configuration 22-E, and At least a "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" according to the configuration 22-E is prepared.

Then, in the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", the first operation related display (1F operation related display A) and the second operation related display ( While all of the 1F operation-related displays B) are displayed, if an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001", this operation is accepted, and if an operation is performed on the "operation button 410", this operation is accepted. Operation can be accepted. On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed. Among them, when an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001", the operation is accepted, and when an operation is performed on the "operation button 410", this can be accepted. When the operation is accepted for ``, a second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) is displayed, and while the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) is being displayed, , it is possible to maintain a state in which not only the operation reception on the "operation button 410" but also the operation reception on the "sword ornament 5001" is permitted. According to such a configuration, the confidentiality regarding the "state in which operation reception is permitted" on the "operation button 410" is resolved by the operation on the "operation button 410", and the second operation related display While (10th F operation-related display B) is being displayed, operations can be accepted for the "sword ornament 5001" and for the "operation button 410", so it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. can be expected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, even if an operation is accepted for the "sword ornament 5001" in the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), , the first operation-related display (10F operation-related display) that can only appear when the operation acceptance for the "sword ornament 5001" is allowed or when the operation acceptance is allowed. A) is never displayed (see Figures 303 and 306). According to such a configuration, the performance when an operation is accepted is different between the hidden "sword ornament 5001" and the "operation button 410", which reduces the enjoyment of the game. It can be expected that improvements will be made.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of production, both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are The second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) that is not displayed but is displayed based on the operation reception for the "operation button 410" is the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period)". (See FIGS. 278 to 281)" is different from the second operation-related display (1F operation-related display B) that appears when the error occurs (see FIGS. 281 and 305). In other words, in this case, even if the 10F operation related display B is displayed after the start of the reception period, the "display image that should have been displayed is hidden" as displayed during other reception periods. Since it becomes difficult for players to remember the feeling of "I used to play games", it can be expected to suppress a decline in interest in games.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))", the "operation Button 410'' is accepted, the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) is displayed, but the display suggesting the level of expectation may not be displayed. That is, in this case, while the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) is being displayed, it is possible to prompt the user to perform a further operation on the "operation button 410."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) and When the post-reception display UB is displayed, the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) and the post-reception display UB display the second multiple operations regardless of the timing at which they are started. It is arranged so that it will not be hidden until the end of the permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)). In particular, in the above-mentioned production example, the second operation-related display ( Since the 10F operation related display B) and the post-acceptance display UB are continued to be displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize when the acceptance period has ended. In this case, depending on the timing of the operation, the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) or the post-reception display UB may change to "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, 10F reception period (Figs. 303 to 306)"). (see Figures 303 to 306)", the time to continue displaying after the end of the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" It is desirable to make it longer.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" according to the configuration 23-E and the configuration 23- It was decided to prepare at least a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" regarding E. Then, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see Figures 278 to 281))" and the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306))" In both cases, there is an operation part that can accept multiple operations, but there are cases where the operation is performed on the operation part during the "specified operation permissible period" and when the operation is performed during the "specific operation permissible period". Since we made it possible for different sounds to be output as the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, depending on when an operation was performed on the section, a permissible period for any type of operation occurred. You will be able to suggest what is happening.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see Figures 278 to 281)"), it is displayed as a sample image display, and multiple operation receptions are permitted. There is one or more operation parts that are defined as "Specific operation permissible period (for example, 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)), there is one or more operation units that are not displayed as a sample image display and are allowed to accept multiple operations, and the operation When an operation is performed on the unit, one of the post-acceptance changes may be to output a post-acceptance output sound or to not output a post-acceptance output sound. According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), when the hidden operation section is operated, the output sound is not output after reception. Since there are cases where the output sound is output and cases where the output sound is not output after acceptance, it can be expected to suitably maintain the feeling of tension as to whether or not the operation has been accepted properly.

In particular, in the production example described above, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the screen is not displayed as a sample image display, and multiple operation receptions are permitted. There are at least a first operation section (10F operation section A (sword ornament 5001)) and a second operation section (10F operation section B (operation button 410)) as possible operation sections. When an operation is performed on the second operation section, an output sound after the operation is output as one of the changes after reception, but when an operation is performed on the second operation section, an output sound after the operation is output as one of the changes after reception. (See Figure 303(k)). According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), the secrecy regarding the "state in which operation reception is permitted" in the second operation section is It can be expected that this will further enhance the player's ability to play the game, thereby increasing their enjoyment of the game.

In this case, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), it is displayed as a sample image display, and the operation reception (multiple times) is permitted. It is preferable that there are no operating parts that can be used.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st floor reception period (see Figures 278 to 281)"), it is displayed as a sample image display, and multiple operation receptions are permitted. There is at least the second operation section (1st F operation section B (operation button 410)) as an operation section that is considered to be a change after reception. There are cases where the output sound is output and cases where the output sound is not output after acceptance. Therefore, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained even during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)").

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, "when the output sound is output after reception" and "when the output sound after reception is not output" within one reception period are the predetermined time from the previous operation. This can occur when the same operation is performed again after a period of time has elapsed.

In addition, during the reception period for the above-mentioned production examples, it may be possible to accept multiple operations on the operation unit for which the sample image is not displayed, and the operation unit may be kept in the operated state. When you continue to do so, there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times (when the auto continuous tap function is enabled) and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times (when the auto continuous tap function is not enabled). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably impart a sense of tension while alleviating the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation part being hidden.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, at least the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" related to the configuration 24-E is prepared as the type of reception period. In the "specific operation permissible period", the first operation section (10F operation A (operation button 410)) and a second operation part (10F operation part B (sword decoration body 5001)) according to the above configuration 24-E, and when the operation button 410 is kept in the operated state, If the operation is not accepted multiple times and the sword ornament 5001 is kept in the operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times (see FIGS. 303(a), 303(b), etc.). According to such a configuration, in a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), is it possible to accept multiple operations for the operation button 410? It can be expected that the confidentiality of the information will be increased, and a sense of tension will be suitably imparted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the types of reception periods are "predetermined operation permissible periods (for example, the 11th floor reception period (see Figures 307 to 310), the 6th floor reception period (see Figures 307 to 310)," 295, see FIG. 296) or the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), and the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 303)) related to the above configuration 24-E. 306))" should be prepared at least.

Then, "a predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), or the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) )), there is one or more operation sections for which a sample image is not displayed but multiple operations can be accepted, even if the operation section is kept in the operated state. The operation is not accepted multiple times (the auto-repeat function is not enabled) (see Figure 307, Figure 295, Figure 297, etc.). 10F reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)), the first operation unit according to the configuration 24-E is used as an operation unit that does not display a sample image but can accept multiple operations. (10F operation section A (operation button 410)) and a second operation section (10F operation section B (sword ornament 5001)) related to the above configuration 24-E, and the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state. When the sword ornament 5001 continues to be operated, the operation is not accepted multiple times, and when the sword ornament 5001 is kept in the operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times (see FIGS. 303(a), (b), etc.) . According to such a configuration, it is expected that a feeling of tension can be more suitably maintained when operating the operating section in which it is kept secret whether or not an operating opportunity has been given.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the types of reception period include the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th floor reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310)" according to the configuration 25-E) and the configuration 25-E. At least a "specific operation permissible period (for example, 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)") is prepared.

Then, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310)"), the configuration 25-E is configured as an operation section in which operation reception is permitted and no sample image display is displayed. There is at least a "predetermined period first operation part (here, the operation button 410)" and a "predetermined period second operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001)" according to the above configuration 25-E. When the first operation section is operated, the reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern SZ in front of it, and when the second operation section is operated for a predetermined period, the reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ. The corresponding post-reception display UA is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern SZ in front of it (see FIGS. 309 and 310).

On the other hand, in a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the above-mentioned configuration is used as an operation unit in which operation reception is permitted and the sample image display is not displayed. There is at least a “specific period first operation unit (here, the operation button 410)” according to configuration 25-E and a “specific period second operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)” according to the configuration 25-E, When the first operating section is operated during a specific period, the reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ, and when the second operating section is operated during the specific period The post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern (see FIGS. 305 and 306).

According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th floor reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310)"), the first operation part for the predetermined period and the second operation for the predetermined period are hidden. No matter which of the sections is operated, the post-acceptance display UA and UB are displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ, which favorably suggests that the operation has been accepted properly. On the other hand, during a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the operation of the first operation part for the specified period and the second operation part for the specified period, which are kept secret. If the second operation part is operated during the specified period, the display after reception UA will be displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, so that the user will recognize that the display after reception UA has been displayed. This makes it possible to suitably give a sense of tension as to whether or not the operation has been properly accepted.

Alternatively, in the above example of production, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) or the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) ), there is an operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) for which operation acceptance is allowed and a sample image is displayed, and an operation unit for which operation acceptance is allowed and a sample image display is not performed. There is an operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and when the operation unit that allows operation acceptance and displays a sample image is operated, a post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed for the decorative pattern SZ. (See Figure 286(g), etc.), and when an operation unit that is allowed to accept an operation and does not display a sample image is operated, the operation is The post-acceptance display is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern SZ in front of it (see FIG. 285(d), etc.).

On the other hand, in a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), operation reception is permitted and there is no operation section on which a sample image display is displayed. , the "first operation section for a specific period (here, the operation button 410)" and the "second operation for a specific period" according to the above configuration 25-E are used as the operation sections for which operation acceptance is allowed and a sample image is not displayed. section (here, the sword decoration 5001)", and when the first operation section is operated for a specific period, the display UB after receiving the operation according to the operation appears to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ. , and when the second operation unit is operated for a specific period, the reception display UA corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ.

According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) or the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)," When the operation unit where the image is displayed (the first operation unit for a predetermined period) is operated, the post-reception display UA is displayed in a way that is difficult to see without deteriorating the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ, whereas it is hidden. When the operating section (second operating section for a predetermined period) is operated, the post-acceptance display UB is displayed in a conspicuous manner even if the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is deteriorated. What has been done properly will now be easily recognized, instead of being kept secret. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the operation parts that are kept secret (the first operation part for a specific period, the second operation part for a specific period) Even if the first operation section is operated, if the first operation section is operated for a specific period, the post-reception display UA will be displayed in a way that makes it difficult to see without deteriorating the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by not only keeping secret whether or not the operation reception is permitted, but also making it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception was properly performed. will be done.

Note that at least one of the "first operation section for a specific period" according to the above configuration 25-E and the "second operation section for a specific period" according to the above configuration 25-E is connected to the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 25-E. ”, the operation reception may be allowed. For example, the first operating section for the specific period is used as an operating section that is allowed to accept operations and does not display a sample image during the "predetermined operation permissible period," and the second operating section for the specific period is During the predetermined operation permissible period, the operation unit may be used as an operation unit in which operation reception is permitted and a sample image is displayed. Alternatively, all of the plurality of operation sections for which operation acceptance is allowed and no sample image display is performed during the predetermined operation permission period are permitted to accept operation and no sample image display is performed during the specific operation permission period. It may also be used as an operation section without a controller.

Furthermore, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to configuration 25-E, it may also be possible to accept an operation on an operation section different from either the first operation section for a predetermined period or the second operation section for a predetermined period. A mock image may be displayed for the operation section.

Further, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 25-E and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 25-E, there is an operation part that allows multiple operations, but among the operation parts, Regarding the operation section where the automatic repeated tapping function is enabled, the display after reception according to the operation on the operating section is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ, and the above automatic repeated tapping function is displayed. Regarding the operation section for which the operation section is not activated, it is desirable to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation on the operation section so as to overlap the decorative pattern SZ in front of it.

Further, in the above-described production example, it is possible to perform a variable display of the decorative pattern SZ. Further, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation acceptance on the operation unit is allowed, and when an operation on the operation unit is accepted during the acceptance period, a change occurs after acceptance. It is also possible to display a display that mimics the operation section.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the types of operation permissible periods are the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310))" according to the above configuration 26-E, and the above configuration 26-E. At least a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" regarding E is prepared.

Then, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310)"), the operation unit configured as described above in 26- There is at least a "predetermined period first operation part (here, the operation button 410)" related to E and a "predetermined period second operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001)" related to the configuration 26-E, and the predetermined period of time is When either the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated for a predetermined period, a change occurs after acceptance, but the output sound after acceptance is not output as one of the changes after acceptance (Figure 307 (see (k)).

On the other hand, in a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), the above-mentioned configuration is used as an operation unit in which operation reception is permitted and the sample image display is not displayed. There is at least a “specific period first operation unit (here, the operation button 410)” according to configuration 26-E and a “specific period second operation unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001)” according to the configuration 26-E, When the first operating section is operated during a specific period, a post-acceptance change occurs, but one of the post-acceptance changes is that no post-acceptance output sound is output, but when the second operating section is operated during a specific period, one of the post-acceptance changes occurs. As a first step, an output sound is now output after reception.

According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th floor reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310)"), the first operation part for the predetermined period and the second operation for the predetermined period are hidden. No matter which part is operated, changes will occur after reception, but the output sound after reception will not be output as one of the changes after reception. (Refer to FIGS. 303 to 306)", the change after reception only occurs when the second operation section is operated for a specific period among the first operation section for a specific period and the second operation section for a specific period that are kept secret. The output sound will be output after acceptance. In other words, in this case, even if the operation section is kept secret, the player will be able to recognize that when an operation is accepted, an output sound will be output after the operation is accepted. When the first operation section is operated during a specific period or when an operation is performed within a "predetermined operation permissible period", it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, thereby creating a feeling of tension. It can now be expected to be maintained properly.

Alternatively, in the above example of production, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) or the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298) ), there is an operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) for which operation acceptance is allowed and a sample image is displayed, and an operation unit for which operation acceptance is acceptable and a sample image display is not performed. There is an operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410), and when the operation unit is operated to allow operation acceptance and a sample image is displayed, a post-acceptance output is generated as one of the post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation. If the operation unit that outputs a sound (see FIG. 295(k), FIG. 297(k), etc.), and where operation reception is permitted and no sample image is displayed is operated, after the reception according to the operation is performed. Although changes occur, one of them is that the output sound is not output after acceptance (see FIG. 295(k), FIG. 297(k), etc.).

On the other hand, in a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), operation reception is permitted and there is no operation section on which a sample image display is displayed. , the "first operation part for a specific period (here, the operation button 410)" and the "second operation part for a specific period" according to the above configuration 26-E are used as the operation parts that are allowed to accept operations and do not display a sample image. (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", and when the first operation part is operated for a specific period, changes occur after reception, but one of them is that the output sound is not output after reception, and the output sound is not output after reception. When the second operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes.

According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) or the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" If you operate the operation panel that is set to , changes will occur after acceptance, but one of them is that the output sound will not be output after acceptance, so it can be made difficult to recognize that the operation has been accepted. This makes it difficult for the user to recognize that an opportunity to operate the operating unit has been given. On the other hand, during a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), if you operate the hidden operation part, one of the changes after reception There is a case where the output sound is output (specific period second operating section) and a case where the output sound is not output after acceptance as one of the changes after acceptance (specific period first operating section). Therefore, even if multiple operation units are hidden, if an output sound is output after acceptance (second operation unit for a specific period), it is a good indication that an operation opportunity was secretly provided. This can be expected to avoid a situation in which none of the players notice that a hidden button has occurred. On the other hand, the confidentiality of the first operating section for a specific period of the "first operating section for a specific period" and the "second operating section for a specific period" can be further increased, and the game enjoyment can be improved. It can be expected that this will lead to improved performance.

In addition, the "first operation unit for a specific period" according to the above configuration 26-E is configured such that "operation reception is permitted and no sample image display is performed" during the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 26-E. During the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 26-E, the "second operation section" according to the above configuration 26-E is used as a "operation unit", and the "second operation unit" according to the above configuration 26-E is used as a "operation reception is permitted and a sample image is displayed." If it is used as an "operation section where a specific operation is allowed", it is possible to use the performance during the "prescribed operation allowed period" as a hint to determine which operation section is kept secret during the "specific operation allowed period". become able to.

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 is operated during a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), at least one change in appearance will occur after reception. There are cases in which no output sound is output after reception, and cases in which not only no output sound is output after reception, but also no change in appearance after reception occurs. That is, in this case, it can be expected that the feeling of tension when an operation is performed in a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)") will be further increased.

Further, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 26-E and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 26-E, there is an operation part that allows multiple operations, but among the operation parts, For the operation section where the auto continuous tap function is enabled, an output sound is output after reception as one of the changes after reception according to the operation on the operation section, and for the operation section where the auto continuous tap function is not enabled. As one of the changes after reception depending on the operation on the operation part, the output sound after reception is not output, so the feeling of tension when operating the hidden operation part can be further increased. It can be expected.

In addition, during the acceptance period (operation permissible period) related to the above-mentioned production example, there are cases where it is possible to accept multiple operations on the operation unit for which the sample image is not displayed, and the operation unit is not displayed. If you continue to maintain the operated state, there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times (when the auto continuous tap function is enabled) and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times. While the difficulty of playing the game due to the operation section being kept secret can be alleviated to some extent, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when operating the operation section.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" related to the configuration 27-E is set as the reception period (operation permissible period) at least. During the "specific operation permissible period," the first operation section according to the above configuration 27-E is used as an operation section that does not display a sample image but is allowed to accept multiple operations. (here, the operation button 410) and the second operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) according to the configuration 27-E, and if the operation button 410 is kept in the operated state, multiple operations can be accepted. If the user continues to operate the sword ornament 5001 without turning the button (the auto-repeat function is not enabled), the operation is accepted multiple times (the auto-repeat function is enabled) (Fig. 303(a), (b)).

The number of times an operation can be accepted (at least the apparent acceptance The number of times the change occurs after the operation is accepted is when only the sword ornament 5001 is repeatedly operated in a "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"). The number may be smaller than the number of times that can occur (at least the number of times that causes an apparent change after acceptance). In other words, in this case, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), the operation section (operation button 410) on the side where the so-called auto continuous press function is not activated is Compared to the operation section (sword ornament 5001) where the so-called auto-repeat function is activated, the number of consecutive hits (the number of consecutive operations) required is smaller, which increases the enjoyment of the game. It can be expected to suppress the decline.

In the above-mentioned production examples, "operation reception is performed" means, for example, when this is used as an opportunity to cause at least a visual change after reception (change in display, output of output sound after reception, change in lamp light emission, etc.). It means. Therefore, if an operation is detected internally but does not cause any visible change after reception (even if some internal processing is performed (for example, extending the time that the display is maintained after reception)) , it cannot be said that "the operation is accepted."

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation permissible period (third reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)" or the seventh reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 291) related to the configuration 28-E is 298), etc.) and the specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)) related to the configuration 28-E.

In the "predetermined operation permissible period (such as the third reception period (see Figures 287 to 291) or the seventh reception period (see Figures 297 and 298))", multiple operation receptions are permitted. In addition, there is one or more operation sections on which a sample image is displayed, and when an operation is performed on the operation section, the predetermined operation permissible period can be terminated by the operation ( (See FIGS. 287(a), (c), (e), FIGS. 297(a), (c), (e), etc.). On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see Figures 303 to 306)"), multiple operation receptions are permitted, but the operation section does not display a sample image. As such, there is at least a "first operation section (here, the sword ornament 5001)" according to the above configuration 28-E and a "second operation section (here, the operation button 410)" according to the above configuration 28-E. , the sword ornament 5001, or the operation button 410, the specific operation permissible period is not terminated by the operation (see FIGS. 303(a) to 303(c)). reference). According to such a configuration, unlike a situation in which there is an operation section that displays a sample image (predetermined operation permissible period), a player can , when investigating which operation parts are secretly enabled for operation, it is possible to safely check various operation parts without considering the risk of the specific operation permissible period being terminated unintentionally. You will be able to perform operations.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the "predetermined operation permissible period (third reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) or seventh reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)) related to the configuration 28-E" 287(a), (c), FIG. 297(a), (c), etc.)", the operation section whose predetermined operation permissible period ends when the operation is triggered (see FIGS. 287(a), (c), FIGS. 297(a), (c), etc.) and 287(b), (c), FIG. 297(b), (c), etc.). Therefore, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when operating the operation part within the reception period where the operation unit is not kept secret.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the "first operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001)" When the is operated, the first-side specific post-operation change corresponding to the operation (corresponds to the 10F post-reception display UA in the figure, but it may also be a change in the light emission of a lamp, etc.) is displayed on a plurality of However, while the "special first side mode (aspect UA3)" among the plurality of first side modes is occurring, the "first operation section ( Here, when the "sword ornament 5001)" is operated again, the first side aspect (aspects UA1, UA2) different from the "special first side aspect (aspect UA3)" is changed after the first side specific operation. is not newly generated, and when the second operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is operated, the second side specific post-operation change corresponding to the operation (in the figure, the 10F post-reception display UB , but may also be a change in light emission of a lamp, etc.) can be caused as any of a plurality of second side aspects (aspects UB1 to UB3), but among the plurality of second side aspects, "special If the second operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is operated again while the second side mode (mode UB3) is occurring, the change after the second side specific operation is changed to the special second side mode. The second side aspects (aspects UB1, UB2) different from (aspect UB3) are prevented from newly occurring (timing tj2D, timing tj2H shown in FIG. 303, FIGS. 305(i), (j), (See FIGS. 306(s) to 306(y), etc.). According to such a configuration, when the "first operation part (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated, the "special first side mode '' appears, it is understood that there is no need to operate the ``first operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' any further, so the state of ``operating the first operation part'' is changed to ``the second operation part''. This allows the user to safely transition to a state in which the operation section is operated.Furthermore, when the second operation section (here, the operation button 410) is operated, a "special second side mode" appears. At this point, you can understand that there is no need to operate the second operation part (here, the operation button 410) any further, so you can change the state from "the state of operating the second operation part" to "the state of operating the first operation part". You will be able to transition to `` with peace of mind.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th floor reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the "first operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001)" When the is operated, the first-side specific post-operation change corresponding to the operation (corresponds to the 10F post-reception display UA in the figure, but it may also be a change in the light emission of a lamp, etc.) is displayed on a plurality of However, while the "special first side mode (aspect UA3)" among the plurality of first side modes is occurring, the "first operation section ( Here, when the "sword ornament 5001)" is operated again, the "special first side aspect (aspect UA3)" that was in the execution state until then is terminated, and the "special first side aspect (aspect UA3)" is changed after the first side specific operation. 306 (s) to (y) etc.), and the second operation section (here, the operation button 410) When the operation is performed, the second-side specific post-operation change corresponding to the operation (corresponds to the 10F post-reception display UB in the figure, but it may also be a light emission change of a lamp, etc.) is displayed on a plurality of second side The second operation part (here, the second operation part) may be generated as any of the side modes (aspects UB1 to UB3), but while the "special second side mode (aspect UB3)" among the plurality of second side modes is occurring, , operation button 410) is operated again, the "special second side aspect (aspect UB3)" that has been in the execution state until then does not change at least visually (FIG. 305(i) , (j), etc.). According to such a configuration, when the first operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is possible to repeatedly start executing the "special first side aspect (aspect UA3)" from the beginning. On the other hand, when the second operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is operated, the "special second side aspect (aspect UB3)" cannot be repeatedly executed from the beginning, so the above-mentioned While providing a sense of security as a function and effect, it can also be expected to suitably provide a sense of tension when the second operation section (here, the operation button 410) is operated.

Note that the "first operating section for a specific period" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operating section as the "first operating section for a predetermined period", or may be a different operating section from the "first operating section for a predetermined period". There may be. Furthermore, the "first operating section for a specific period" in each of the above configurations may be the same operating section as the "second operating section for a predetermined period", or may be a different operating section from the "second operating section for a predetermined period". There may be. Further, the "second operating section for a specific period" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operating section as the "first operating section for a predetermined period", or may be a different operating section from the "first operating section for a predetermined period". There may be. Further, the "second operating section for a specific period" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operating section as the "second operating section for a predetermined period", or may be a different operating section from the "second operating section for a predetermined period". There may be.

Further, the "predetermined period first operation section" in each of the above configurations may be the same operation section as the "specific period first operation section", or may be a different operation section from the "specific period first operation section". There may be. Furthermore, the "first operating section for a specific period" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operating section as the "second operating section for a specific period", or may be a different operating section from the "second operating section for a specific period". There may be. Further, the "second operating section for a predetermined period" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operating section as the "first operating section for a specific period", or may be a different operating section from the "first operating section for a specific period". There may be. Further, the "predetermined period second operation section" in each of the above-mentioned configurations may be the same operation section as the "specific period second operation section", or may be a different operation section from the "specific period second operation section". There may be.

In addition, during the reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, when the after-reception display is not newly displayed and the after-reception output sound is not newly output when the operation unit is operated (for example, at timing te2C shown in FIG. 278) , timing tf2C shown in FIGS. 282 and 295, timing tg2C shown in FIGS. 287 and 297, timing ti2C shown in FIGS. 294 and 301, timing tj2D shown in FIG. (tk2D, tk2H, etc.), but in this case, the operation reception itself may not be performed, or the operation reception itself may occur but the predetermined conditions are not met and a new post-reception display will be displayed. In addition, the output sound may not be newly output after the reception. In addition, if the operation is accepted but the predetermined conditions are not met and the post-acceptance display is not newly displayed and the post-acceptance output sound is not newly output, a new display of the post-acceptance display or post-acceptance output will be displayed. In addition to the new output of sound, try to cause some kind of post-acceptance change (for example, the time it takes for the post-acceptance display that was displayed at the time of the operation to be hidden) to occur. You can.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, there is a second floor reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), a third floor reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), and a fourth floor reception period (see Figures 292 and 293). ), the 5th floor reception period (see Figure 294), the 6th floor reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), the 7th floor reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), and the 8th floor reception period (see Figures 297 and 298). period (see Figures 299 and 300) and the 9th F reception period (see Figures 301 and 302), when an operation is accepted while the foreshadowing display is being displayed, this triggers the The display that imitates the operation target (operation-related display)" and the "premonition effect display" may be hidden. In this case, in the above-mentioned production example, when the "display imitating the operation target (operation-related display)" and the "premonition display" are not hidden but are displayed, the "effect display EF" is displayed first. In this regard, in the example of production mentioned above, the "effect display EF" is displayed in front of the "display imitating the operation target (operation related display)" to make it difficult to see. However, in this case, it may also be displayed in front of the "premonitory effect display" so as to make it difficult to visually recognize it. According to such a configuration, even after the operation is accepted, the display of the ``display that imitates the operation target (operation-related display)'' and the ``foreshadowing effect display'' remains, and the operation is properly accepted. You will be able to appropriately suggest the situation. Additionally, in this case, the foreshadowing effect display should not be hidden even when the post-reception display is displayed, and the post-reception display should be displayed behind the foreshadowing effect display. is desirable.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, there is a second floor reception period (see Figures 282 to 286), a third floor reception period (see Figures 287 to 291), and a fourth floor reception period (see Figures 292 and 293). ), the 5th floor reception period (see Figure 294), the 6th floor reception period (see Figures 295 and 296), the 7th floor reception period (see Figures 297 and 298), and the 8th floor reception period (see Figures 297 and 298). During the period (see FIGS. 299 and 300) and the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), an operation is accepted while a precursor effect display is displayed, and the operation reception causes the precursor effect to be activated. When a display that imitates the display and operation target (operation-related display) is hidden, the operation-related display is made difficult to see before the precursor effect display and the operation-related display are hidden. An effect display appears as shown in the figure, but it is desirable that the effect display be displayed so as to overlap with the foreshadow effect display so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the effect display. In addition, at this time, the foreshadowing effect display is not hidden even at the time when the post-reception display is displayed, and is displayed in a manner that overlaps the front side of the post-reception display to make it difficult to see. It is desirable to do so.

In addition, during the 3rd floor reception period, 7th floor reception period, 10th floor reception period, 11th floor reception period, etc., the operation section B (3F operation section B, 7F operation section B, 10F operation section After operating the operating section A (3rd F operating section A, 7th F operating section A, 10th F operating section A, 11th F operating section A) In the above example, after operating the operating section A (3rd F operating section A, 7th F operating section A, 10th F operating section A, 11th F operating section A), operating section B ( The same is basically the case when the operations are performed on the third F operating section B, the seventh F operating section B, the tenth F operating section B, and the eleventh F operating section B).

For example, during the 3rd F reception period and the 7th F reception period, although several operations were performed on the operation part A (3F operation part A, 7F operation part A), the player At the stage where the conditions for terminating are not satisfied and the operation continues, stop operating the operating section A (3rd F operating section A, 7th F operating section A) and start operating the operating section B (3rd F operating section B, 7th F operating section A). When an operation for part B) is started, the post-reception change B (for example, 3rd floor post-reception display UB, 7th floor post-reception display UB) corresponding to the operation will occur in one of the multiple ways described above. . However, as mentioned above, the post-reception change A (for example, the 3rd-F post-reception display UA, the 7th-F post-reception display UA) in response to the operation on the operation part A (3F operation part A, 7F operation part A) This time is significantly shorter than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the post-reception change B (for example, the 3rd F post-reception display UB, the 7th F post-reception display UB) depends on the timing when the operation unit B (3rd F operation unit B, 7th F operation unit B) is operated. There are two cases in which execution is started while the after-reception change A (e.g., 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) continues; This means that the execution may start after the 7F post-reception display UA) is completed.

In this respect, while the post-reception change A (for example, the 3rd F post-reception display UA, the 7th F post-reception display UA) continues, if the operation on the operation unit B (3F operation unit B, 7F operation unit B) If post-reception change B (e.g., 3F post-reception display UB, 7F post-reception display UB) occurs, first, post-reception change A (e.g., 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) is , the operation will continue without being terminated by the operation on the operating section B (3rd F operating section B, 7th F operating section B). At this time, the post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap the post-reception display UA from the front side. However, in this case, since no new operation is performed on operation section A (3rd F operation section A, 7th F operation section A), post-reception change A (for example, 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) UA) will be hidden while the post-acceptance change B (for example, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB, the 7th F post-acceptance display UB) is being executed. On the other hand, after the post-reception change A (for example, 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) is hidden, the operation part B (3F operation part B, 7F operation part B) If the operation causes post-reception change B (e.g., 3F post-reception display UB, 7F post-reception display UB), the above-mentioned "post-reception change A (e.g., 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UB)" occurs. 287 to 291, FIG. 297, FIG. 298, etc. ), the production will progress.

Furthermore, for example, during the 10th F reception period and the 11th F reception period, although several operations were performed on the operation section A (10F operation section A, 11F operation section A), the player When the conditions for the end of the reception period are not satisfied and the condition continues, stop operating the operation section A (10th F operation section A, 11th F operation section A) and switch to the operation section B (10th F operation section B, 11th F operation section A). When an operation is started on the 11F operation section B), a post-reception change B (for example, 10F post-reception display UB, 11F post-reception display UB) corresponding to the operation occurs in one of the multiple modes described above. becomes.

Here, as described above, the period during which the 10F post-reception change A corresponding to the operation on the 10F operation section A is executed is much shorter than the set time as the reception period. Therefore, depending on the timing when the operation on the 10F operation section B is performed, the 10F post-reception change B may be started while the 10F post-reception change A is continuing, or the 10F post-reception change A may be started while the 10F post-reception change A is continuing. This means that execution may start after the completion of the process. In this regard, if the 10F post-reception change A occurs due to an operation on the 10F operation part B while the 10F post-reception change A continues, first, the 10F post-reception change A is caused by the 10F post-reception change A. The operation on B will not be terminated and will continue. At this time, the 10F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap the 10F post-reception display UA from the front side. However, in this case, since no new operation is performed on the 10F operation unit A, the 10F post-reception change A is not executed while the 10F post-reception change B is being executed. On the other hand, if the 10F post-reception change B is caused by an operation on the 10F operation section B after the 10F post-reception change A is hidden, then the above-mentioned ``10F post-reception change A has not occurred.'' Under the circumstances, the effect will progress in the manner in which change B occurs after the 10th F reception (see FIGS. 303 to 306, etc.).

On the other hand, as also mentioned above, the period during which the 11F post-reception change A in response to the operation on the 11F operation section A is executed is longer than the set time as the reception period, similar to the 11F post-reception change B. It's time. Therefore, the 11F post-reception change B starts to be executed while the 11F post-reception change A continues, regardless of the timing at which the 11F operation unit B is operated. However, even if the 11F post-reception change B occurs due to an operation on the 11F operation part B while the 11F post-reception change A continues, the 11F post-reception change A will not affect the 11F operation part B. It will continue without being terminated as a result of the operation.

By the way, regarding the above-mentioned "acceptance permissible period with special performance", the reception permissible period (operation permissible state) shown in each of the above-mentioned configurations (Configuration 1-E to Configuration 28-E) and each production example For example, by preparing a reception permissible period (operation permissible state) with a special performance as shown below, the performance when the reception permissible period occurs can be enhanced, or the reception permissible period It may also be possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when this occurs. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 1 described below (configurations such as starting winnings, pending winnings, fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) is described in the explanation column of the "acceptance period with special performance". Since this is exactly what I did, I will omit the explanation.

Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to suppress the decline in Alternatively, some configurations deemed necessary to obtain further effects may be selectively provided. Alternatively, a configuration described as being applicable (desirably applicable) to another configuration may be appropriately adopted. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest related to the acceptance acceptance period may be used. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide the "acceptance permissible period" detailed with reference to FIG. You can.

[Configuration 1-F]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an "operation concealment permission state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image is not displayed; When an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the "state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. At least a first operation section and a second operation section are prepared as the operation section, and at least a "first operation concealment permitting state" and a "second operation concealment permitting state" are prepared as the "operation concealment permitting state". In addition, in the "first operation concealment permission state", at least operation reception on the first operation section is allowed while the sample image is not displayed, and operation reception on the first operation section is allowed. is made, a corresponding post-acceptance display can be displayed, and in the "second operation concealment permission state", at least operation reception on the second operation unit is permitted while the sample image is not displayed. When an operation is accepted for the second operation unit, a corresponding post-acceptance display can be displayed. Note that the "first operation section", "second operation section", "first operation concealment permission state", and "second operation concealment permission state" according to the configuration 1-F are based on the technology of the configuration 1-F. It is just a name used to explain an idea. Therefore, the same operating sections and operation concealment permitting states as the "first operating section,""second operating section,""first operation concealment permitting state," and "second operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations, respectively. It may also mean different operation units or operation concealment permission states. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

According to such a configuration, there is a "first operation concealment permission state" in which at least operation reception on the first operation unit is permitted while a sample image is not displayed, and a "first operation concealment permission state" in which a sample image is not displayed. Since a "second operation concealment permission state" may occur in which at least operation reception on the second operation section is permitted, it is possible to produce an effect as to which of the first operation section and the second operation section should be operated. As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension will be better maintained when an operation/concealment permissive state occurs.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 1-F", if the sample image is not displayed in either the "first operation concealment permission state" or the "second operation concealment permission state", At least the operation acceptance for the first operation section and the operation reception for the second operation section may be respectively permitted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide better performance as to which of the first operation section and the second operation section should be operated, and to reduce the feeling of tension when the operation concealment permission state occurs. It is now expected to be maintained in a better manner.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 1-F", in the "first operation concealment permission state", the first In a state where reception of operations on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the first operation unit, this is used as an opportunity to hide the post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of operation on the second operation unit, and A post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation accepted for the first operation unit is displayed, and in the above-mentioned “second operation concealment permission state”, a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation accepted for the second operation unit is displayed. Even when the operation is accepted on the first operation part, the reception of the operation on the first operation part is allowed, and when the operation is accepted on the first operation part, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception on the second operation part is displayed. It is also possible to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance without hiding it. According to such a configuration, in the "operation concealment permissible state" where there is an operation section where operation reception is permitted but no sample image display is performed, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception on the second operation section is displayed. When an operation is accepted on the first operation part while the operation is being performed, the reception display corresponding to the operation reception on the second operation part is hidden (first operation concealment allowed state). Since there are cases where the display after receiving an operation on the second operation section is not hidden (second operation concealment permission state), a feeling of tension is felt when performing an operation on the first operation section. It is now expected that the company will maintain the appropriate conditions.

In this case, in both the first operation concealment permission state and the second operation concealment permission state, the operation reception on the first operation section is not performed (while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception on the second operation section is displayed). is allowed only once, and when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit, it is desirable that this is used as an opportunity to end the operation concealment permission state.

[Configuration 2-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an "operation concealment permission state" in which there is an operation section in which operation acceptance is permitted but no simulated image display is performed, and the "operation concealment permission state" is generated. If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the ``concealment permission state'', a change may be caused after the acceptance (secure operation execution means). Then, after preparing at least a "first operation concealment permitting state" and a "second operation concealing permitting state" as the "operation concealment permitting state", in the "second operation concealment permitting state", the sample image There is a specific operation section for which it is possible to accept multiple operations even when no display is being performed, and for the specific operation section, operations can be accepted multiple times just by keeping it in the operated state. (enabling the so-called "auto continuous hit function"). Note that the "specific operation unit", "first operation concealment permissible state", and "second operation concealment permissible state" according to the configuration 2-F are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-F. It's just a name. Therefore, the "specific operation section", "first operation concealment permissible state", and "second operation concealment permissible state" in other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation concealment permissible state, respectively. However, they may also mean different operation units or operation concealment permission states. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

According to such a configuration, in the "second operation concealment permission state", a sample image is displayed because the operation reception of the specific operation section can be performed multiple times just by keeping it in the operated state. It is expected that this will prevent a decrease in interest in games due to the fact that multiple operations on a specific operation section are allowed even though the system is not used.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 2-F", in the "first operation concealment permissible state", the operation section allows multiple operations to be accepted while the sample image is not displayed. There is one or more , so that even if the operation section is kept in the operated state, the operation will not be accepted multiple times. There may be one or more operation units for which multiple operation acceptance is allowed even when the operation is not performed, and if the operation unit is maintained in an operated state, the operation acceptance may be performed multiple times. . According to such a configuration, in the "operation concealment permissible state" where there is one or more operation sections for which reception of multiple operations is permitted while the sample image is not displayed, the operation section cannot be operated. If the user continues to maintain this state, there will be at least a possibility that the operation will be accepted multiple times, so it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when operating the operation unit.

In this case, in the "second operation concealment permission state", there are multiple operation sections for which multiple operations can be accepted while the sample image is not displayed, and the operation section is maintained in the operated state. If this continues, the operation may be accepted a plurality of times or may not be accepted a plurality of times, depending on the type of the operation unit targeted for the operation. In other words, in this case, when the second operation concealment permission state occurs, it is determined whether or not the auto continuous hit function is enabled depending on the type of the operation target. It is expected to add more fun to the game.

[Configuration 3-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an "operation concealment permission state" in which there is an operation section in which reception of operations is permitted but display of a sample image is not performed, and the operation concealment is permitted. If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the permissible state, a change may occur after the acceptance. Then, after preparing at least a "first operation concealment permissible state" and a "second operation concealment permissible state" as the "operation concealment permissible state", in the "second operation concealment permissible state", the "operation concealment permissible state" is While the "Second Operation Concealment Allowed State" continues, we have made it so that a mock image display of the operation section where operation reception is permitted is not displayed, giving the player no opportunity to operate it. It can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when applied. Note that the "operation unit", "first operation concealment permissible state", and "second operation concealment permissible state" according to the configuration 3-F are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-F. It's just a name. Therefore, the "operation section", "first operation concealment permissible state", and "second operation concealment permissible state" in other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation concealment permissible state, respectively. , may mean different operation units or operation concealment permission states. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 3-F", if a predetermined condition is met in the "first operation concealment permission state", this will trigger an operation reception in the "first operation concealment permission state". It may also be possible to start displaying a simulated image display that simulates the allowable operation section. According to such a configuration, even if the sample image display is not displayed when the operation concealment permission state occurs, there is a possibility that the sample image display will be displayed if the predetermined condition is met. Therefore, it can be expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

In this case, in the "first operation concealment permission state", when an operation is accepted for an operation unit for which a simulated image is not displayed, this is used as an opportunity (the above predetermined condition is met) to simulate the operation unit. Display of the sample image display may be started. That is, in this case, since the player's operation starts displaying a simulated image of the operation target that had been kept secret, it can be expected to improve the game's interest.

[Configuration 4-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an "operation concealment permission state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image display is not performed; If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the "Secret Permitted State", a change may occur after the acceptance. Then, when an operation is accepted for an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations in the "operation concealment permission state", an output sound is output as one of the changes after acceptance, and the corresponding Since there are cases where the output sound is not output after acceptance, it becomes difficult to judge whether or not the operation acceptance is properly accepted in the ``operation concealment permission state'', which creates a good sense of tension. can be expected to. Note that the "operation unit" and "operation concealment permission state" according to the configuration 4-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-F. Therefore, the "operation section" and "operation concealment permissible state" related to other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation concealment permitting state, respectively, or may mean different operation sections or operation concealment permitting states. It may be something that does. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation anonymity allowed state", the operation is accepted in the "operation anonymity acceptable state" as one of the post-acceptance changes. There are cases in which a sample image display of an operation panel that allows operation reception is displayed, and cases in which a sample image display of an operation panel that is allowed to accept operations in the "operation concealment permission state" is not displayed. Good too. On the other hand, if the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation secrecy allowed state", the operation acceptance is allowed in the "operation secrecy allowed state" as one of the post-acceptance changes. It may also be arranged so that the display of a copy of the part is not displayed. According to such a configuration, if the output sound after reception is not outputted as one of the changes after reception in the "operation concealment permissible state", there is no possibility that the sample image display will be displayed; If the output sound is output after reception as one of the changes after reception in "status", there is a possibility that the sample image display may be displayed or the sample image display may not be displayed. Therefore, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 5-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an "operation concealment permission state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image display is not performed; If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the "Concealment Allowed State", a change may occur after the acceptance. In addition, when an operation is accepted for an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations in the "operation concealment allowed state", one of the changes after acceptance is that a post-acceptance output sound is output, and the post-acceptance output There are times when no sound is output. Then, when an operation is accepted on an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations in the "operation concealment permission state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes. Even if the post-reception display is displayed, the "operation concealment permissible state" continues without being terminated, and even though the post-reception display is displayed, the operation unit is still in a permissible state to accept operations. As a result, it is expected to suitably provide a sense of tension as to how long the operation concealment permitting state will continue when the operation concealment permitting state occurs. Note that the "operation unit" and "operation concealment permission state" according to the configuration 5-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-F. Therefore, the "operation section" and "operation concealment permissible state" related to other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation concealment permitting state, respectively, or may mean different operation sections or operation concealment permitting states. It may be something that does. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 5-F" is adopted, a first operating section and a second operating section may be provided as the operating section. In the "operation concealment permissible state," at least the reception of operations on the first operation section and the reception of operations on the second operation section are allowed while the sample image is not displayed, and the operation on the first operation section is permitted. Reception and operation reception on the second operation unit may continue to be in an acceptable state even though the post-reception display corresponding to the reception of operation on the first operation unit or the second operation unit is displayed. You can do it like this. Then, while the state is in the "operation concealment permission state" and the post-reception display corresponding to the reception of the operation on the first operation section or the second operation section is displayed, the corresponding reception of the operation on the first operation section or the second operation section is displayed. When an operation is accepted on a side of the operation unit that is different from the side on which the operation reception that triggered the rear display was made, a post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. , the output sound may not be output after the reception. When the post-acceptance output sound is output based on the operation acceptance for the operation unit on the different side, the after-acceptance display that has been displayed since before the operation reception is triggered by the operation acceptance. In addition to displaying a new post-acceptance display in response to an operation received on the operation unit on the different side, the post-acceptance display that has been displayed since before the operation was accepted is also hidden. It may also be possible to display a new post-acceptance display in response to an operation accepted on the operating unit on the different side while the process continues without any interruption. On the other hand, if the post-acceptance output sound is not output based on the operation acceptance for the operation unit on the different side, the post-acceptance display that has been displayed since before the operation was accepted, triggered by the operation acceptance. may be set so that it is never hidden. According to such a configuration, when the output sound is not output after the reception of the operation based on the reception of the operation for the operation unit on the different side, the sound is displayed from before the reception of the operation is triggered by the reception of the operation. Since the above-mentioned post-reception display is not hidden, it becomes possible to play the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, if the post-acceptance output sound is output based on the operation acceptance for the operation unit on the different side, the reception sound that has been displayed since before the operation reception is triggered by the operation reception. Since there are both cases in which the display is hidden and cases in which the display after reception is not hidden, a sense of tension can be suitably imparted.

[Configuration 6-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an "operation concealment permission state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image display is not performed; If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the ``Confidentiality Allowed State'', changes may occur after the acceptance. Then, when an operation is accepted for an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations in the "operation concealment permission state", an output sound is output as one of the changes after acceptance, and the corresponding Since there are cases where the output sound is not output after reception, it is possible to make it difficult to judge whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed, and it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension. can be expected. On the other hand, in the "operation concealment permissible state", there may be some operation parts that can be operated multiple times just by keeping them in the operated state, so a sample image is displayed. It is expected that the reduction in interest in gaming due to the acceptance of multiple operations on the operation unit even though this is not possible will be suppressed. Note that the "operation unit" and "operation concealment permission state" according to the configuration 6-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-F. Therefore, the "operation section" and "operation concealment permissible state" related to other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation concealment permitting state, respectively, or may mean different operation sections or operation concealment permitting states. It may be something that does. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 6-F", if the post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment allowed state", the post-acceptance change is caused. If you continue to maintain the operating state where the triggering operation was accepted, the operation may be accepted multiple times or not accepted multiple times, resulting in an "operation concealment permissible state". If the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes mentioned above, even if you continue to operate the operation unit where the operation that triggered the post-acceptance change was performed, the operation will not be performed. It may also be possible to prevent reception from being made multiple times. According to such a configuration, if the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permission state", the operation for which the operation reception that triggered the post-acceptance change is performed is Since the operation will not be accepted multiple times even if the player continues to operate the part as it is, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the function multiple times by suggesting that the auto continuous hit function will not be enabled. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, if the post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the above post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment allowed state", the operation unit where the operation reception that triggered the post-acceptance change was made will remain unchanged. If you continue to maintain the operated state, there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times, so while it is possible to enable the automatic repeated press function, it does not create a sense of tension. It is now expected that this will be provided in a suitable manner.

[Configuration 7-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which an operation to the operation unit is accepted, and when an operation to the operation unit is accepted in the operation permission state, the operation is accepted. Display the rear display. Then, after preparing at least a "first operation permissible state" and a "second operation permissible state" as the operation permissible states, the "second operation permissible state" includes an operation part that is permitted to accept operations. Since the sample image display section in which the sample image is displayed is not included, it is expected that the game will suitably provide a sense of tension when the player is given the opportunity to operate. . The "operation unit", "first operation permissible state", and "second operation permissible state" according to the configuration 7-F are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-F. Not too much. Therefore, the "operation part", "first operation permissible state", and "second operation permissible state" related to other configurations may mean the same operation part or operation permissible state, respectively, or they may be different. It may also mean an operation unit or an operation permissible state. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 7-F", in the "first operation permissible state", there is a hidden section in which a simulated image of the operation panel in which operation reception is permitted is not displayed, and a It includes a sample image display section in which a sample image displaying a copy of the operation section where reception is allowed is performed, and the concealment section ends when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the concealment section. The sample image display section may be started. According to such a configuration, even if a concealment period in which a sample image is not displayed is started (first operation permission state, second operation permission state), a sample image display period is started thereafter. As this possibility arises, it is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "first operation permissible state", when an operation is accepted for a specific operation section for which a sample image is not displayed within the concealed section, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. , an image that is the same as or similar to (at least a part of) the image displayed within the sample image display section may be displayed while the "first operation permissible state" continues. According to such a configuration, even though the "concealment section" continues, (at least a part of) the image displayed in the "sample image display section" that starts after that Since the same or a similar image will be displayed (in a preceding manner), it can be suggested that a "sample image display period" will start thereafter.

[Configuration 8-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a simulated image of a predetermined operation section, and it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which reception of operations on the predetermined operation section is permitted. When an operation is accepted on the predetermined operation section in the operation-permitted state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, after preparing at least a "first operation permission state" and a "second operation permission state" as operation permission states, in the "second operation permission state", a predetermined operation section in which operation reception is permitted is simulated. When an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation section that does not include a sample image display section in which a sample image display is performed and a sample image display is not performed, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. Because of this, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably imparted to the player when an operation opportunity is provided. Note that the "predetermined operation section,""first operation permissible state," and "second operation permissible state" according to the configuration 8-F are names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-F. It's nothing more than that. Therefore, the "predetermined operation part", "first operation permissible state", and "second operation permissible state" in other configurations may mean the same operation part or the same operation permissible state, respectively. It may also mean a different operation unit or operation permissible state. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 8-F", in the "first operation permissible state", there is a hidden section in which a simulated image of the operation panel that is permitted to accept operations is not displayed, and a It includes a sample image display section in which a sample image displaying a copy of the operation section where reception is allowed is performed, and the concealment section ends when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the concealment section. The sample image display section may be started. According to such a configuration, even if a concealment period in which a sample image is not displayed is started (first operation permission state, second operation permission state), a sample image display period is started thereafter. As this possibility arises, it is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "first operation permissible state", the case where the operation is accepted for the predetermined operation part in the hidden section is the same as the case where the operation is accepted for the predetermined operation part in the sample image display section. Display may be performed after reception. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed when the player does not notice that the reception of operations on the predetermined operation unit is permitted in the secret section.

[Configuration 9-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation concealment permission state can be generated in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image display is not performed, and the operation concealment permission state When an operation is accepted for the operation unit, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, after preparing at least a "first operation concealment permitting state" and a "second operation concealing permitting state" as the operation concealment permitting state, an operation for the predetermined operation unit is accepted in the "first operation concealment permitting state". The post-acceptance display is different depending on the case where the operation is accepted on the predetermined operation section in the "second operation concealment permission state" and the case where the operation is accepted on the predetermined operation section in the "second operation concealment permission state". It is now expected that the system will suitably provide a sense of tension when the operator is given the opportunity to operate the vehicle. Note that the "predetermined operation unit", "first operation concealment permissible state", and "second operation concealment permissible state" according to the configuration 9-F are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-F. It's just a name. Therefore, the "predetermined operation section", "first operation concealment permissible state", and "second operation concealment permissible state" in other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation concealment permissible state, respectively. However, they may also mean different operation units or operation concealment permission states. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 9-F", if the "first operation concealment permissible state" occurs, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence, the predetermined operation section will be However, if the "second operation concealment permission state" occurs, no matter how much time has passed, the sample image display will not be displayed as a result of the passage of time. You may choose not to have one. According to such a configuration, when an operation concealment permission state occurs, there are cases in which a sample image display is displayed as time passes (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) and cases in which a sample image display is not displayed. (in case the automatic de-confidentiality function is not activated), it is expected to suppress a drop in interest in the game while suitably imparting a sense of tension.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation section in the "first operation secrecy permission state", a sample image of the predetermined operation section appears, but in the "second operation secrecy permission state" When an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation section in the "state", a sample image display of the predetermined operation section may not be displayed using this as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, in the "first operation concealment permission state", the simulated image display can be displayed in response to an operation by the player without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time, thereby improving the interest in the game. People will now be expected to do more.

[Configuration 10-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an operation concealment allowing state can be generated in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image display is not performed, and the operation concealment permitting state When an operation is accepted for the operation unit, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Since it was decided to prepare at least a "first operation concealment permitting state" and a "second operation concealing permitting state" as operation concealment permitting states, the player can perform operations while the sample image display is not displayed. It is now expected to suitably provide a sense of tension when an opportunity is given. In addition, since the sample image display is sometimes displayed in the first position and sometimes in the second position, it is easier for people who are looking at only one of the first and second positions. This makes it difficult for the user to recognize whether or not the simulated image display is being displayed, and it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. Note that the "operation unit", "first operation concealment permissible state", and "second operation concealment permissible state" according to the configuration 10-F are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-F. It's just a name. Therefore, the "operation section", "first operation concealment permissible state", and "second operation concealment permissible state" in other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation concealment permissible state, respectively. , may mean different operation units or operation concealment permission states. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 10-F", if the "first operation concealment permission state" occurs, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence, the predetermined operation section However, if the "second operation concealment permission state" occurs, no matter how much time has passed, the sample image display will not be displayed as a result of the passage of time. You may choose not to have one. According to such a configuration, when an operation concealment permission state occurs, there are cases in which a sample image display is displayed depending on the passage of time (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) and cases in which a sample image display is not displayed. (When the automatic de-confidentiality function is not activated) Since there will be both, it will be expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game while suitably imparting a sense of tension.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation section in the "first operation secrecy permission state", a sample image of the predetermined operation section appears, but in the "second operation secrecy permission state" When an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation section in the "state", a sample image display of the predetermined operation section may not be displayed using this as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, in the "first operation concealment permission state", the simulated image display can be displayed in response to an operation by the player without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time, thereby improving the interest in the game. People will now be expected to do more.

[Configuration 11-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an "operation concealment permission state" in which there is an operation section in which operation acceptance is permitted but no simulated image display is performed, and the "operation concealment permission state" is generated. If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the "Secret Permitted State", a change may occur after the acceptance. On top of this, in the "operation concealment permissible state", there is an operation part that allows multiple operations to be accepted while the sample image is not displayed, and the operation part continues to be maintained in the operated state. As a result, it is possible to accept multiple operations on the operation panel even though the sample image is not displayed, which reduces the enjoyment of the game. It is expected that the decline will be suppressed. Note that the "operation unit" and "operation concealment permission state" according to the configuration 11-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-F. Therefore, the "operation section" and "operation concealment permissible state" related to other configurations may mean the same operation section or operation concealment permitting state, respectively, or may mean different operation sections or operation concealment permitting states. It may be something that does. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation concealment permitting state" as the other names "operating section" or "operation concealment permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 11-F", at least the "first operation concealment permitting state" and the "second operation concealing permitting state" are prepared as the operation concealment permitting state, and then the "first operation concealment permitting state" is prepared. If the "operation concealment permissible state" occurs, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "second operation concealment permissible state," a simulated image of the operation panel will be displayed after the predetermined time has elapsed. If this occurs, no matter how much time has passed, the sample image display may not be displayed once the time has elapsed. According to such a configuration, when an operation concealment permission state occurs, there are cases in which a sample image display is displayed as time passes (when the automatic concealment release function is enabled) and cases in which a sample image display is not displayed. (in case the automatic de-confidentiality function is not activated), it is expected to suppress a drop in interest in the game while suitably imparting a sense of tension.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "first operation concealment permission state", there is one or more operation sections for which multiple operations can be accepted while the sample image is not displayed, and the operation Even if you continue to maintain the operation state, the operation will not be accepted multiple times, but in the "second operation concealment permission state", multiple operation receptions are allowed while the sample image is not displayed. There may be one or more operating units that are enabled, and if the operating unit is kept in an operated state, the operation can be accepted multiple times. According to such a configuration, when an operation concealment permissible state occurs, there are cases where the auto-repeat-hit function is enabled and cases where it is not. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension while providing a high level of excitement.

[Configuration 12-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a simulated image display of a predetermined operation section, and also to generate an operation permission state in which reception of the operation is permitted. If an operation is accepted on the predetermined operation unit in the permissible state, a change may occur after the acceptance. Furthermore, when an operation permissible state occurs, operation-related sounds can be output. Then, as the operation permission state, an "operation disclosure permission state" is generated in which the reception of the operation on the predetermined operation section is permitted and the above-mentioned sample image display is performed, and a case where the reception of operation on the predetermined operation section is permitted. However, the above-mentioned sample image display may not be performed, and the operation-related sound may be generated in at least the "operation-disclosure allowed state" and the "operation-hidden allowed state." Since the output is enabled when the "operation disclosure permission state" occurs, it can be expected to suitably alleviate tension when an operation opportunity is given. Note that the "predetermined operation section,""operation disclosure permissible state," and "operation concealment permissible state" according to the configuration 12-F are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 12-F. do not have. Therefore, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as "predetermined operating section", "operation disclosure permitting state", and "operation concealment permitting state" in other configurations, respectively. , may mean different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 12-F", at least the "first operation concealment permitting state" and the "second operation concealing permitting state" are prepared as the operation concealment permitting state, and then the "second operation concealment permitting state" is prepared. If the "1st operation concealment permissible state" occurs, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence, a simulated image of the predetermined operation section is displayed, and the "1st operation concealment permissible state" is terminated and the above-mentioned state is terminated. However, if the "second operation concealment tolerance state" occurs, when the "second operation concealment tolerance state" ends as time passes, the above-mentioned "operation disclosure It may be arranged such that the state does not shift to the "acceptable state". According to such a configuration, when the operation concealment permissible state occurs, there is a case where the state shifts to the "operation disclosure permissible state" as time passes (the first operation concealment permissible state), and a "operation disclosure permissible state" occurs. ” (second operation concealment permissible state), it is possible to appropriately impart a sense of tension while suppressing the decrease in gaming interest due to operation concealment. become able to.

In this case, as will be described later, the ``operation disclosure permissible state'' occurs in two cases: one occurs following the end of the operation concealment permissible state, and the other occurs due to conditions unrelated to the operation concealment permissible state. It may also be configured such that there are cases where the error occurs at the source. According to such a configuration, when the "operation disclosure permissible state" occurs, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance was previously permitted (or whether the operation concealment permissible state had occurred). Because of this ability, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 13-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. A background image that can be displayed and further displayed even in a situation where the post-reception display is not displayed, and that is displayed so as to be visible behind the post-reception display when the post-reception display is displayed. can be displayed. Then, after making it possible to generate a "specific operation permission state" as the operation permission state, in the "specific operation permission state", operation reception is permitted while the second background image is displayed as the background image. A switch can occur from the "second background operation section" in which operations are accepted to the "first background operation section" in which operations are allowed to be accepted while the first background image is displayed as the background image. Since then, it has been expected to improve the interest in gaming. Note that the "operation unit", "specific operation permissible state", "first background image", and "second background image" related to the configuration 13-F are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 13-F. It is just a name used for. Therefore, the same "operation section", "operation permitting state", " It may mean a "background image," or it may mean a different "operation unit,""operation permissible state," or "background image." In addition, "operation section", "operation permitting state", and "background image" are the same as "operating section", "operating permitting state", and "background image" which are different names for other configurations. You can.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 13-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", if an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation section during the "second background operation section", the above-mentioned The background image is changed from the second background image to a background image different from the second background image (changed or replaced with another background image), and a display is displayed after the reception of the operation is performed. '', when an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation section, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed without changing the background from the first background image (change to another background image, replacement, etc.). You may also do so. According to such a configuration, in a specific operation permissible state, it is determined whether or not a background change occurs when an operation is accepted in the first background operation section and when an operation is accepted in the second background operation section. As a result, even when displaying the same post-acceptance display, it is possible to have different performances, and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

[Configuration 14-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. A background that can be displayed, and furthermore, can be displayed even in a situation where the post-reception display is not displayed, and that when the post-reception display is displayed, the background is displayed so as to be visible behind the post-reception display. Images can be displayed. Then, after making it possible to generate a "specific operation permissible state" as an operation permissible state, in the "specific operation permissible state", a background change (another background It is expected that this will improve the game's interest in the game. Note that the "operation unit" and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 14-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 14-F. Therefore, the "operation part" and "specific operation permissible state" related to other configurations may mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible state", respectively, or they may mean different "operation parts" and "specific operation permissible state", respectively. It may also mean "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 14-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", operation reception on the specific operation part is allowed multiple times, and in the "specific operation permissible state", the specific operation When an operation is accepted for the section, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing the background, but the background may change while the post-reception display is being displayed. Good too. According to such a configuration, even when a specific operation unit is being operated multiple times, the background may change while the post-reception display is being displayed. , it is expected that differences in performance will appear as the player performs the operations multiple times, and that this will improve the game's interest.

In this case, as will be described later, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation on a specific operation unit is displayed in a "specific operation permissible state", and while the "specific operation permissible state" continues, the background If a change occurs, the post-acceptance display may be hidden when the background change occurs. According to such a configuration, if a background change occurs while the "specific operation permissible state" continues, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance for the specific operation section that is allowed to be operated multiple times is displayed. Since it is hidden, a sense of tension can be suitably imparted.

In this case, if the background change occurs while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation on the specific operation unit is being displayed in the "specific operation permissible state", the post-acceptance display will change when the background change occurs. There may be a case where the screen is hidden, and a case where the screen is not hidden (continues) when the background change occurs. According to such a configuration, if a background change occurs while the "specific operation permissible state" continues, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance for the specific operation section that is allowed to be operated multiple times is displayed. Since there will be both cases in which the display is hidden and cases in which the display after the reception is continued without being hidden, if a background change occurs within the "specific operation permissible state", the game It is now possible to encourage the player to concentrate more on the content of the performance, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game will be improved compared to the conventional valid period of simply operating the game.

[Configuration 15-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the operation permission state, a change is made after the reception. can be caused. Also, as one of the changes after reception, it can be displayed even in situations where the after reception display is not displayed, and when the after reception display is displayed, it is displayed so that it can be seen behind the reception display. The background image can be displayed. Furthermore, when an operation is accepted on the operating unit in the operation-permitted state, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. Then, after preparing at least a "predetermined operation permission state" and a "specific operation permission state" as operation permission states, the "specific operation permission state" continues to be a state in which operation reception is permitted. Since the background image can be changed (changed to a different background image, replaced, etc.), it can be expected to improve the game's interest in a state where operation reception is permitted. In addition, the "operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 15-F are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 15-F. Not too much. Therefore, the same "operation section" and "operation permitting state" may mean the same as "operating section,""predetermined operating permitting state," and "specific operating permitting state" in other configurations. However, they may mean different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 15-F", in the "predetermined operation permissible state", the background change should not occur while the state in which operation reception is permitted continues. Good too. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state in which operation reception is permitted, there are cases where a background change occurs and cases where the background change does not occur, so that the game interest when in the operation permissible state is reduced. They will be expected to improve their skills.

In this case, as will be described later, in both the "predetermined operation permissible state" and the "specific operation permissible state", the reception of operations on the specific operation part is allowed multiple times, and then the "predetermined operation permissible state" '', when an operation is accepted for a specific operation section, while the ``predetermined operation permissible state'' continues, the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the changes after acceptance, and the ``specific When an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the "operation permissible state", a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-reception changes while the "specific operation permissible state" continues. You can. According to such a configuration, it is expected that whether or not a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes will indicate whether or not a background change will occur within the operation permissible state. become.

In addition, in this case, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation part in a "specific operation permissible state", one of the above post-reception changes is the post-reception output sound while the "specific operation permissible state" continues. It may be possible to have both cases in which ``is output'' and cases in which it is not output. According to such a configuration, even if the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes, there is a possibility that a background change will occur within the permissible operation state, so it is preferable to create a sense of tension. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed by maintaining the same level of interest.

[Configuration 16-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. Can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display even in a situation where the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image that appears behind the post-reception display. If the operation unit, which allows multiple operations to be accepted in the operation-permitted state, continues to be operated, the operation can be accepted multiple times. Then, after preparing at least a "predetermined operation permission state" and a "specific operation permission state" as operation permission states, the "specific operation permission state" continues to be a state in which operation reception is permitted. Since it is possible for the background to change, it can be expected to improve the game's interest in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. Note that the "operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 16-F are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 16-F. Not too much. Therefore, the same "operation section" and "operation permitting state" may mean the same as "operating section,""predetermined operating permitting state," and "specific operating permitting state" in other configurations. However, they may mean different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 16-F", in the "predetermined operation permissible state", the background change should not occur while the state in which operation reception is permissible continues. Good too. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state in which operation reception is permitted, there are cases where a background change occurs and cases where the background change does not occur, so that the game interest when in the operation permissible state is reduced. They will be expected to improve their skills.

In this case, as will be described later, there is one or more operation parts that can accept multiple operations in a "predetermined operation permissible state", and if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the operation The reception may be made multiple times, but in the "specific operation permissible state", there is one or more operation parts that allow multiple operation reception, and even if the operation part is kept in the operated state. It may also be possible to prevent operation acceptance from being made multiple times. According to such a configuration, it is expected to indicate whether or not a background change will occur within the operation permissible state based on whether or not the so-called auto-repeating function is enabled.

[Configuration 17-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the operation permission state, an after-acceptance display is displayed. can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a background image that can be displayed even in a situation where the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image that appears behind the post-reception display. . Then, after preparing at least a "predetermined operation permission state" and a "specific operation permission state" as operation permission states, the "specific operation permission state" continues to be a state in which operation reception is permitted. Since it is possible for the background to change, it can be expected to improve the game's interest in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. In addition, the "operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 17-F are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 17-F. Not too much. Therefore, the same "operation section" and "operation permitting state" may mean the same as "operating section,""predetermined operating permitting state," and "specific operating permitting state" in other configurations. However, they may mean different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 17-F", in the "predetermined operation permissible state", the background change should not occur while the state in which operation reception is permitted continues. Good too. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state in which operation reception is permitted, there are cases where a background change occurs and cases where the background change does not occur, so that the game interest when in the operation permissible state is reduced. They will be expected to improve their skills.

In this case, as will be described later, at least a "predetermined operation section" and a "specific operation section" are prepared as the operation sections, and in the "predetermined operation permissible state", the reception of operations for the "specific operation section" is performed. Even when the rear display is displayed, operations on the "predetermined operation section" are permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the "predetermined operation section," this triggers the operation on the "specific operation section." While the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is continued without being hidden, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception on the "predetermined operation section" may be displayed. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible state", even though the reception display corresponding to the operation reception on the "specific operation section" is displayed, the state is such that the operation reception on the "predetermined operation section" is permitted. , when an operation is accepted for the "predetermined operation section", using this as a trigger, hides the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception for the "specific operation section" and responds to the operation reception for the "predetermined operation section". It is also possible to display a message after receiving the information. According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not a background change occurs in the operation permissible state, when an operation is accepted for the "predetermined operation section", this is used as a trigger to determine whether or not the operation after the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is accepted. It is now expected to indicate whether or not to hide the display.

[Configuration 18-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. It can be displayed, and the specific light emitting section can be made to emit light in the operation permissible state. Then, after making it possible to generate a "specific operation permissible state" as an operation permissible state, in the "specific operation permissible state", an operation on the operation part is accepted while the specific light emitting part is emitting light in the second light emitting mode. Switching from the "second light emission operation section" in which the operation is permitted to the "first light emission operation section" in which reception of operations on the operation section is permitted while the specific light emission section is emitting light in the first light emission mode. Since this is made possible, it can be expected to improve the interest in gaming in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. Note that the "operation section", "specific light emitting section", "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 18-F are the same as those of the configuration 18-F. It is simply a name used to explain a technical idea. Therefore, the same "operation section", "specific light emitting section", "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", and "specific operation permissible state" related to other configurations, It may mean "light-emitting section", "light-emitting mode", "operation permissible state", or it may mean different "operation section", "light-emitting section", "light-emitting mode", "operation permissible state". It may be something that does. In addition, "operation section" with different names related to other configurations, "operation section" that is the same as "light emitting section", "light emission mode", "operation permissible state", "light emitting section", "light emission mode", "operation It may also mean "permissive state".

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 18-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", if an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation section during the "second light emission operation section", the specific light emission The light emitting mode in the section is changed from the "second light emitting mode" to the "light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode" and a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, but the display is in the "first light emitting operation section". Sometimes, when an operation on a predetermined operation unit is accepted, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed without changing the light emission mode of the specific light emission unit from the “first light emission mode”. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible state", depending on whether the operation is accepted in the "first light emission operation section" or the "second light emission operation section", the reception according to the operation reception is performed. Since it is now possible to determine whether or not the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section changes when the rear display is displayed, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game when it is in a "specific operation permissible state". Become so.

[Configuration 19-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the operation permission state, a display is displayed after acceptance. can be displayed, and the specific light emitting section can be made to emit light in the operation permissible state. Then, as the operation permission state, a ``specific operation permission state'' can be generated, and in the ``specific operation permission state'', light emission from a specific light emitting part is performed while the operation reception is allowed. Since the mode can be changed, it can be expected to improve the game's interest in a state where operation reception is permitted. Furthermore, the "operation section,""specific light emitting section," and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 19-F are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 19-F. . Therefore, the "operation part", "light emitting part", and "operation permissible state" are the same as "operation part", "specific light emitting part", and "specific operation permissible state" in other configurations. They may also mean different "operation section,""light emitting section," and "operation permissible state." In addition, "operation part", "light emitting part", and "operation permissible state" are the same as "operation part", "light emitting part", and "operation permissible state" in other names related to other configurations. You can.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 19-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", operation reception on the specific operation part is allowed multiple times, and in the "specific operation permissible state" When an operation on the operation unit is accepted, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed without changing the light emission mode of the specific light emitting unit. In addition, in a specific operation permissible state, the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting part changes (another light emitting (Changes to the aspect) may occur. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where a specific operation unit is being operated multiple times, if a change occurs in the light emission mode of the specific light emitting unit while the post-acceptance display is being displayed. As a result, there will be a difference in performance as the player performs the operation multiple times, and it is expected that this will improve the game's enjoyment.

In this case, if a change occurs in the light emission mode of the specific light emitting unit while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation on the specific operation unit is being displayed in the “specific operation permissible state”, the post-acceptance display will be as follows: There may be cases where the display is hidden when the change occurs, and cases where the display is not hidden (continued) when the change occurs. According to such a configuration, if a change occurs in the light emission mode of the specific light emitting section while the "specific operation permissible state" continues, the operation reception for the specific operation section that is allowed to be operated multiple times is stopped. There will be both cases where the post-reception display will be hidden and cases where the post-reception display will continue without being hidden. When a change occurs in the light emitting pattern of the specific light emitting section, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate more on the content of the performance, and this improves the enjoyment of the game compared to the conventional valid period of simply operating it. People will now be expected to do more.

[Configuration 20-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. Can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display even when the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image that appears behind the post-reception display. be. Then, as the operation permission state, a “specific operation permission state” can be generated, and in the “specific operation permission state”, the operation reception is permitted while the first background image is displayed as the background image. This is because it is possible to switch from the "first background operation section" that is displayed as the background image to the "second background operation section" where operations are allowed to be accepted while the second background image is displayed as the background image. , it can be expected to improve gaming interest in a state where operation reception is permitted. Note that the "operation unit", "specific operation permissible state", "first background operation section", and "second background operation section" related to the configuration 20-F explain the technical concept of the configuration 20-F. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, the same "operation section" and "operation allowed state" as the "operation section", "specific operation allowed state", "first background operation section", and "second background operation section" related to other configurations are used. , may mean a "background operation section," or may mean a different "operation section," an "operation permissible state," or a "background operation section." In addition, "operation unit", "operation permissible state", and "background operation section" that are the same as "operation unit", "operation permissible state", and "background operation section" in other configurations It may be.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 20-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", if an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation section during the "second background operation section", the second The background is changed from the background image to a background image different from the second background image, and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. If the operation is accepted, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed without changing the background from the first background image. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible state", the operation is accepted in the "first background operation section" and the operation is accepted in the "second background operation section". Since whether or not a background change occurs will be different, it will be possible to have different effects even when displaying the same post-reception display, which is expected to improve gaming enjoyment. will be done.

[Configuration 21-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. Can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display even when the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image that appears behind the post-reception display. be. Then, as the operation permission state, a “specific operation permission state” can be generated, and in the “specific operation permission state”, the operation reception is permitted while the first background image is displayed as the background image. A switch can occur from the "first background operation section" that is displayed as a background image to the "second background operation section" in which operation reception is allowed while the second background image is displayed as the background image, As an operation unit, at least a “specific operation unit” is prepared, and for the specific operation unit, it is possible to accept multiple operations in a “specific operation permissible state”. It can be expected to improve the game's interest in the state in which the player is playing the game, while suitably providing a sense of tension when a specific operation permissible state occurs. The "specific operation section", "specific operation permissible state", "first background operation section", and "second background operation section" according to the configuration 21-F are based on the technical concept of the configuration 21-F. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, the "specific operation section", "specific operation permissible state", "first background operation section", and "second background operation section" related to other configurations may be the same "operation section" or "operation permissible state", respectively. ”, “background operation section”, or may mean different “operation unit”, “operation permissible state”, or “background operation section”, respectively. In addition, "operation unit", "operation permissible state", and "background operation section" that are the same as "operation unit", "operation permissible state", and "background operation section" in other configurations It may be.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 21-F", the switching from the "first background operation section" to the "second background operation section" is performed in advance from the time when the "first background operation section" occurs. The process may be executed based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible state", an effect is added that determines whether or not to operate after waiting for the timing when the background image is switched, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. becomes expected.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for the specific operation section in the "specific operation permissible state", regardless of whether it is in the "first background operation section" or the "second background operation section", The post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed for a predetermined period of time without changing the background. According to such a configuration, even if a "specific operation permissible state" occurs, the specific operation section can be operated as appropriate, regardless of the conditions related to the background change. As a result, it is expected that players will be able to increase their interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in this case, as will be described later, if a post-acceptance display is performed in response to the reception of an operation on a specific operation unit in the "first background operation section", the post-acceptance display may be executed for the predetermined period of time; Although it may be hidden before the predetermined time period has elapsed (triggered by the arrival of a predetermined timing due to the elapse of time), the display may be hidden before the predetermined time period has elapsed. When a post-reception display is performed, the post-reception display is not hidden when a predetermined timing has elapsed (rather than being hidden when a predetermined timing has elapsed). It may also be executed over time. According to such a configuration, in the "first background operation section", the post-reception display in response to the reception of an operation on the specific operation unit is displayed "before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the post-reception display started to be displayed." "When the display is not displayed as a result of the elapse of time before the display starts" and "When the display is not hidden as a result of the elapse of time before the predetermined time has elapsed since the display after the reception started" As both of the following occur, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension while improving the game's enjoyment.

[Configuration 22-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. Can be displayed. Further, the specific light emitting section can be made to emit light in the operation permissible state. Then, as the operation permissible state, a "specific operation permissible state" can be generated, and in the "specific operation permissible state", an operation on the operation part is performed while the specific light emitting part is emitting light in the first light emitting mode. Switching from the "first light emission operation section" in which reception is permitted to the "second light emission operation section" in which reception of operations on the operation section is permitted while the specific light emission section is emitting light in the second light emission mode. Since this is made possible, it can be expected to improve the game's interest in a state where operation reception is permitted. Note that the "operation unit", "specific light emitting unit", "specific operation permissible state", "first light emission operation section", and "second light emission operation section" according to the configuration 22-F are the same as the configuration 22-F. It is simply a name used to explain F's technical philosophy. Therefore, the same "operation section", "specific light emitting section", "specific operation permissible state", "first light emission operation section", and "second light emission operation section" according to other configurations, , "light-emitting section", "operation permissible state", and "light-emitting operation section" may also mean different "operating section", "light-emitting section", "operation permissible state", and "light-emitting operation section". It may also mean "section." In addition, "operation part", "light emitting part", "operation permissible state", which is the same as "operation part", "light emitting part", "operation permissible state", and "light emitting operation section", which have different names for other configurations, may also be used. , may also mean "light emission operation section".

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 22-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", if an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation section during the "second light emission operation section", the specific light emission The light emitting mode in the section is changed from the second light emitting mode to a light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode to display a post-acceptance display according to the operation reception, but when in the "first light emission operation section", a predetermined light emission mode is displayed. When an operation on the operation unit is accepted, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception may be displayed without changing the light emission mode of the specific light emission unit from the first light emission mode. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible state", there are two cases in which the operation is accepted in the "first light emission operation section" and the case in which the operation is accepted in the "second light emission operation section". Since whether or not a change occurs in the light emitting mode is different, even when displaying the same post-reception display, it is possible to have different performances, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. becomes expected.

[Configuration 23-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display is displayed. Can be displayed. Further, the specific light emitting section can be made to emit light in the operation permissible state. Then, as the operation permissible state, a "specific operation permissible state" can be generated, and in the "specific operation permissible state", an operation on the operation part is performed while the specific light emitting part is emitting light in the first light emitting mode. Switching from the "first light emission operation section" in which reception is permitted to the "second light emission operation section" in which reception of operations on the operation section is permitted while the specific light emission section is emitting light in the second light emission mode. In addition, at least a "specific operation section" is prepared as an operation section, and the "specific operation section" is designed so that multiple operations can be accepted in a "specific operation permissible state". Therefore, it can be expected to improve the game's interest in a state in which operation reception is permitted, while suitably providing a sense of tension when a specific operation permission state occurs. Note that the "specific operation unit", "specific light emitting unit", "specific operation permissible state", "first light emission operation section", and "second light emission operation section" according to the configuration 23-F are the same as those in the configuration 23-F. - It is simply a name used to explain the technical philosophy of F. Therefore, the "operation section" is the same as the "specific operation section", "specific light emitting section", "specific operation permissible state", "first light emission operation section", and "second light emission operation section" according to other configurations. It may also mean "light-emitting section,""operation permissible state," or "light-emitting operation section," or it may mean a different "operating section,""light-emittingsection,""operation permissible state," or "light-emitting section." It may also mean "operation section". In addition, "operation part", "light emitting part", "operation permissible state", which is the same as "operation part", "light emitting part", "operation permissible state", and "light emitting operation section" which are different names for other configurations, , may also mean "light emission operation section".

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 23-F", the switching from the "first light emission operation period" to the "second light emission operation period" is performed in advance from the time when the "first light emission operation period" occurs. The process may be executed based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible state", an effect is added that determines whether or not to operate after waiting for the timing when the light emitting mode is switched, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. becomes expected.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for the specific operation section in the "specific operation permissible state", regardless of whether it is in the "first light emission operation section" or the "second light emission operation section", The post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed for a predetermined period of time without changing the light emission mode. According to such a configuration, even if a "specific operation permissible state" occurs, the specific operation section can be operated appropriately regardless of the conditions related to the change in the light emission mode. It has become possible to do so, and it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in this case, as will be described later, if a post-acceptance display is performed in response to an operation reception on a specific operation unit in the "first light emission operation section", the post-acceptance display indicates that the specific operation permission state continues. Among them, the display may be executed for the above-mentioned predetermined period of time, or it may be hidden before the predetermined period of time has elapsed while a specific operation permissible state continues (triggered by the predetermined timing arriving due to the elapse of time). However, if a post-acceptance display is performed in response to an operation reception for a specific operation unit during the second light emission operation section, the post-acceptance display will be displayed only if the specific operation permission state continues. The display may be executed for a predetermined period of time (instead of being hidden when a predetermined timing has arrived due to the passage of time). According to such a configuration, in the "first light emitting operation section", the post-reception display in response to the reception of the operation on the specific operation section is displayed "before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the post-reception display started to be displayed." "When the display is not displayed as a result of the elapse of time before the display starts" and "When the display is not hidden as a result of the elapse of time before the predetermined time has elapsed since the display after the reception started" As both of the following occur, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension while improving the game's enjoyment.

[Configuration 24-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on a predetermined operation section is permitted, and in the operation permission state, operation reception on the predetermined operation section is performed. and can be displayed after acceptance. Then, after preparing at least a ``specific operation permission state'' as the operation permission state, in the ``specific operation permission state'' it is possible to display a sample image display that imitates a predetermined operation section in which operation reception is permitted. However, when a predetermined condition is met, the display of the sample image is hidden, so it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. Note that the "predetermined operation unit" and "specific operation permissible state" related to the configuration 24-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 24-F. Therefore, the "predetermined operation section" and "specific operation permissible state" of other configurations may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permissible state", respectively, or may mean different "operation sections". It may also mean "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 24-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", there is a "sample image display section" in which a mimetic image of a predetermined operation part is displayed, and It includes a "hidden (non-display) section" in which the sample image display section is not displayed, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the sample image display section started, the sample image display section ends. The above-mentioned secrecy period may be started. According to such a configuration, it is expected that a feeling of tension when in a "specific operation permissible state" can be suitably maintained.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "specific operation permissible state", the case where the operation is accepted for the predetermined operation part in the sample image display section is the same as the case where the operation is accepted for the predetermined operation part in the hidden section. Display may be performed after reception. According to such a configuration, even if the simulated image display section is shifted to the secret section, the same mode will appear as the display after reception, so that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. things come to be expected.

[Configuration 25-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which an operation to the operation unit is accepted, and when an operation to the operation unit is accepted in the operation permission state, the operation is accepted. It is possible to display a later display. Then, a "specific operation permission state" can be generated as the operation permission state, and a sample image display can be displayed in the "specific operation permission state", but if a predetermined condition is met, The sample image display is hidden, and at least a specific operation unit is prepared as an operation unit, and the specific operation unit is capable of accepting multiple operations in a “specific operation permissible state”. It can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained in a state where operation reception is permitted. Note that the "specific operation unit" and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 25-F are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-F. Therefore, the "specific operation section" and "specific operation permissible state" of other configurations may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permissible state", respectively, or may mean different "operation sections". It may also mean "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 25-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", the sample image display will be performed for a predetermined period of time from the time when the "specific operation permissible state" occurs. It may be configured to be hidden after the elapsed time. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the feeling of tension when in the "specific operation permissible state" can be suitably maintained.

In this case, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation section in a "specific operation permissible state", there are cases where the operation reception is performed in a situation where a sample image display is displayed, and a case where the sample image display is Regardless of whether the operation is performed in a situation where the operation is not displayed, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception may be displayed for a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, since the display after reception continues for a predetermined period of time regardless of the display status of the sample image display, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. things come to be expected.

However, in this case, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permissible state" while the post-reception display corresponding to the reception of the operation on the specific operation part is being displayed in the "specific operation permissible state". If the ``hidden image display'' is not triggered by the passage of ``the sample image display'' is not performed, the ``reception display'' may be displayed for a predetermined period of time; When "hiding the display of the sample image" is performed with the passage of time, the display after reception will not be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the display will be adjusted according to the timing at which the display of the sample image is hidden (predetermined above). It may also be configured to hide the information (once the specified time has elapsed). According to such a configuration, at the timing when the sample image display is switched from the display state to the non-display state, the post-reception display in the display state is not continued to be displayed for a predetermined period of time, but is hidden before that. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained while the post-reception display is displayed.

[Configuration 26-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which reception of operations on the operation unit is permitted, and in the “operation permission state”, operations on the operation unit are accepted. and can be displayed after acceptance. Then, at least a "predetermined operation section" and a "specific operation section" are prepared as the operation section, and a "specific operation permission state" can be generated as an operation permission state. , when an operation is accepted for the "predetermined operation section", a predetermined after-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", a specific after-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. The predetermined time from when the above-mentioned specified post-reception display is displayed until it is hidden is different from the specific time from when the above-mentioned specific post-reception display is displayed until it is hidden. Therefore, it can be expected to improve gaming interest in a "specific operation permissible state". Note that the "predetermined operation section,""specific operation section," and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 26-F are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 26-F. do not have. Therefore, "predetermined operation section,""specific operation section," and "specific operation permissible state" in other configurations may mean the same "operation section" and "operation permissible state," respectively. , may mean different "operation unit" or "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 26-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", a predetermined image display that imitates the "predetermined operation section" and a specific image display that imitates the "specific operation section" are displayed. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permissible state", the predetermined sample image display and the specific sample image display will be displayed. may also be hidden. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the feeling of tension when in the "specific operation permissible state" can be suitably maintained.

In this case, the "specific operation permissible state" means that both the predetermined sample image display and the specific sample image display are triggered when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permissible state". It may be configured to continue even after being hidden. According to such a configuration, both the predetermined sample image display and the specific sample image display are hidden while the "specific operation permissible state" continues, so that a sense of tension is suitably maintained. become expected to do so.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the said "Configuration 26-F", when the predetermined sample image display and the specific sample image display are displayed in the "specific operation permissible state", the operation reception on the "specific operation section" is not possible. If the specific post-reception display is displayed, the specific post-reception display will be displayed when a "specific operation permissible state" occurs between the display of the specific post-reception display and the elapse of the above-mentioned specific time. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since then, it may be displayed for the specific time period, but the "specific operation permissible state" may be displayed for the specific time period after the specific reception display is displayed until the specific time period elapses. When the predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the error, the display may be hidden using this as an opportunity. On the other hand, if the predetermined post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation on the predetermined operation section is displayed while the predetermined sample image display and specific sample image display are being displayed in the "specific operation permissible state," the predetermined The post-reception display will not be hidden when the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the "specific operation permissible state", and even if it can be displayed for a predetermined period of time. good. According to such a configuration, when the predetermined post-reception display appears, you can enjoy the content of the post-reception display with a sense of security, whereas when the specific post-reception display appears, the predetermined sample image display and the specific It becomes necessary to check the contents of the display after acceptance while being aware of the timing when the sample image display is hidden, and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably imparted.

[Configuration 27-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the operation permission state, a change is made after the reception. can be caused. Furthermore, when an operation is accepted on the operating unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. Then, at least a "specific operation section" is prepared as an operation section, and at least a "predetermined operation permission state" and a "specific operation permission state" are prepared as operation permission states, and then a "predetermined operation permission state" and a "specific operation permission state" are prepared. In addition to making it possible to display a sample image display in any “specific operation permission state,” the sample image display displayed in a “specific operation permission state” must be within the “specific operation permission state.” Since the display can be hidden when a predetermined condition is met, it can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension in the "specific operation permissible state." The "specific operation unit,""predetermined operation permissible state," and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 27-F are names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 27-F. It's nothing more than that. Therefore, even if the "specific operation part", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" respectively mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible state" in other configurations, Alternatively, they may mean different "operation section" or "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 27-F", in the "predetermined operation permissible state", the sample image display changes from the display state to the hidden state while the "predetermined operation permissible state" continues. However, in a "specific operation permissible state", even if the sample image display can be changed from the display state to the non-display state while the "specific operation permissible state" continues. good. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state, there are both cases where the sample image display is changed from the display state to the non-display state, and cases where the sample image display is not changed from the display state to the non-display state. This makes it possible to suitably provide a sense of tension.

In this case, in both the "predetermined operation permissible state" and the "specific operation permissible state", operation acceptance for the "specific operation part" is allowed multiple times, and in the "predetermined operation permissible state", the "specific operation part" is allowed to be received multiple times. ”, while the “predetermined operation permissible state” continues, the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the changes after the reception, and the “specific operation permissible state” is changed. When an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section" while the sample image display is in the display state, the output sound after the acceptance is changed as one of the changes after the acceptance while the "specific operation permission state" continues. may be output. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not the sample image display will be changed from the display state to the non-display state in the operation permissible state based on whether the output sound is output after acceptance. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed.

In this case, when an operation is accepted for a specific operation part in a "specific operation permissible state", the post-reception output sound is changed as one of the above post-reception changes while the "specific operation permissible state" continues. may be output in some cases and not in others. According to such a configuration, even if the output sound is not output after acceptance, there is a possibility that the sample image display will change from the display state to the non-display state, so it is preferable to create a feeling of tension. will be expected to be maintained.

[Configuration 28-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the operation permission state, a change is made after the reception. can be caused. Then, after preparing at least a "predetermined operation permissible state" and a "specific operation permissible state" as operation permissible states, a sample image is displayed in both the "predetermined operation permissible state" and the "specific operation permissible state". The sample image display can be hidden when a predetermined condition is met in a ``specific operation permission state.'' It can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible state", if at least a predetermined operation section is prepared as an operation section that can accept multiple operations, and if the predetermined operation section is kept in an operated state, the above operation is performed. Since the reception can be made multiple times, it can be expected to improve the interest in the game in the "predetermined operation permissible state". Note that the "predetermined operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" related to the configuration 28-F are names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 28-F. It's nothing more than that. Therefore, even if "predetermined operation part", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" respectively mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible state" in other configurations, Alternatively, they may mean different "operation section" or "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 28-F", in the "predetermined operation permissible state", the sample image display changes from the display state to the non-display state while the "predetermined operation permissible state" continues. However, in a "specific operation permissible state", even if the sample image display can be changed from the display state to the non-display state while the "specific operation permissible state" continues. good. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state, there are both cases in which the sample image display is changed from the display state to the non-display state, and cases in which the sample image display is not changed from the display state to the non-display state. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the vehicle is in an operation permissible state.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "specific operation permissible state", there is one or more operation sections for which multiple operations can be accepted when the sample image display is in the display state, and the operation section Even if you continue to maintain the operated state, the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the automatic repeated press function will be enabled), but in the "predetermined operation permissible state", multiple operation acceptance is allowed. There may be one or more operating sections, and if the operating section is kept in an operated state, the operation can be accepted a plurality of times (the auto-repeating function is enabled). According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not the display of the sample image will be changed from the display state to the non-display state based on whether or not the automatic repeated hit function is enabled, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It is expected that the decline will be suppressed.

In this case, in the "predetermined operation permissible state", there are multiple operation parts that are allowed to accept multiple operations, and if the operation part is kept in the operated state, it becomes the target of the operation. Depending on the type of the operation unit, there may be a case where the operation is accepted multiple times or a case where the operation is not accepted multiple times. According to such a configuration, even if the automatic continuous hit function is not enabled, the sample image display may not be changed from the display state to the non-display state, so that it is possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. become expected.

[Configuration 29-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on a predetermined operation section is permitted, and in the operation permission state, operation reception on the predetermined operation section is performed. and can be displayed after acceptance. Then, after preparing at least a "predetermined operation permissible state" and a "specific operation permissible state" as operation permissible states, a sample image is displayed in both the "predetermined operation permissible state" and the "specific operation permissible state". can be displayed, and the display of the sample image can be hidden when a predetermined condition is met in the "specific operation allowed state". It can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. In addition, a specific operation section different from the predetermined operation section is prepared, and in the "predetermined operation permissible state", both the operation reception on the predetermined operation section and the operation reception on the specific operation section are allowed, and the predetermined operation section Since it is possible to accept an operation for a specific operation section even when a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception for a specific operation section is displayed, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable in a predetermined operation-permitted state. sell. Note that the "predetermined operation section", "specific operation section", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" according to the configuration 29-F explain the technical concept of the configuration 29-F. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, "predetermined operation part", "specific operation part", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "specific operation permissible state" regarding other configurations mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible state" respectively. They may also mean different "operation units" and "operation permissible states." Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 29-F", in the "predetermined operation permissible state", the sample image display changes from the display state to the hidden state while the "predetermined operation permissible state" continues. However, in a "specific operation permissible state", it is possible to make it possible for the sample image display to change from the display state to the non-display state while the "specific operation permissible state" continues. . According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state, there are both cases in which the sample image display is changed from the display state to the non-display state, and cases in which the sample image display is not changed from the display state to the non-display state. For this reason, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when the vehicle is in an operation permissible state.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "specific operation permissible state", both the operation reception on the predetermined operation section and the operation reception on the specific operation section are allowed, and the operation reception on the predetermined operation section is It is considered acceptable even when a post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation on a specific operation unit is displayed. When this is done, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception on the specific operation unit may be hidden, and the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception on the predetermined operation unit may be started to be displayed. On the other hand, in the "predetermined operation permissible state," both the operation reception on the predetermined operation part and the operation reception on the specific operation part are allowed, and the operation reception on the predetermined operation part is not performed on the specific operation part. This is considered acceptable even when a post-reception display corresponding to an operation reception is displayed, and if an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation unit while a post-reception display corresponding to an operation reception for a specific operation unit is displayed. Taking this as an opportunity, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception on the predetermined operation unit may be started to be displayed without hiding the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception on the specific operation unit. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state, when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation unit while a post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation for a specific operation unit is displayed, this triggers an operation for the specific operation unit. Since there are cases in which the display after reception of an operation is hidden and cases in which it is not hidden, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when performing an operation on a predetermined operation section. become expected.

[Configuration 30-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the operation unit in the operation permission state, a change is made after the reception. At least a "specific operation permission state" and a "special operation permission state" are prepared as operation permission states. Then, in the "specific operation permissible state", the sample image display can be displayed, and in the "special operation permissible state", the sample image display cannot be displayed; In , the display can be hidden when a predetermined condition is met, so it can be expected that the tension in the "specific operation permissible state" can be suitably maintained. In addition, in the "special operation permissible state", at least a predetermined operation section is prepared as an operation section for which multiple operations can be accepted, and if the predetermined operation section is kept in an operated state, the operation will not be accepted. Since this can be performed multiple times, it can be expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when a "special operation permission state" in which the screen image display is not enabled occurs. Note that the "predetermined operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "special operation permissible state" related to the configuration 30-F are names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 30-F. It's nothing more than that. Therefore, even if "predetermined operation part", "predetermined operation permissible state", and "special operation permissible state" respectively mean the same "operation part" and "operation permissible state" in other configurations, Alternatively, they may mean different "operation section" or "operation permissible state". Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "operation permitting state" as other names such as "operating section" or "operating permitting state" related to other configurations.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 30-F", in the "specific operation permissible state", the sample image display changes from the displayed state to the hidden state while the "specific operation permissible state" continues. It may also be possible to make it possible to change the state. According to such a configuration, it can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when in the "specific operation permissible state".

In this case, in the "specific operation permissible state", there is one or more operation sections for which multiple operations can be accepted when the sample image display is in the display state, and the state in which the operation section is operated It may also be possible to prevent operation reception from being performed multiple times even if the operation is maintained as follows. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible state", there is one or more operation sections for which multiple operations can be accepted when the sample image display is in the non-display state, and when the operation section is operated. If the state is continued, operation reception may be performed multiple times. The automatic repeated tap function is not enabled in the "specific operation permissible state" where the sample image display can be displayed, whereas the auto repeated tap function is enabled in the "special operation permissible state" where the sample image display cannot be displayed. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not displaying the sample image display.

[Configuration 31-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and to accept an operation for the predetermined operation section while the sample image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden operation permissible state" that includes an allowable "hidden operation section", and when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation unit in the "hidden operation permitted state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. It has become a thing. In addition, it is possible to display even when the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image display that appears behind the post-reception display. It is said that In this regard, in the "hidden operation permissible state", we have made it possible for the background to change while the state in which the reception of operations on the predetermined operation section is permissible continues. It is expected that this will improve people's interest in gaming. Note that the "predetermined operation section", "non-display operation section", and "non-display operation permissible state" related to the configuration 31-F are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 31-F. Not too much. Therefore, the same "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation allowed state" as the "predetermined operation section", "hidden operation section", and "hidden operation allowed state" related to other configurations are used. It may also mean different "operation section,""non-display operation section," or "operation permissible state." In addition, it means the same "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state" as in other names such as "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state" for other configurations. It may be something that does.

As will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 31-F", the "non-display operation allowed state" is such that there are cases where a background change occurs and cases where a background change does not occur. If a background change occurs while the state in which operations on a predetermined operation section are allowed to be accepted in the "Display operation allowed state" continues, if the background change occurs while the "Hide operation allowed state" continues, After the "operation section" is completed, the process may be shifted to the "display operation section" in which operation reception on the predetermined operation section is allowed while the sample image display is being displayed. That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." On the other hand, if the background does not change while the state in which operation reception on the predetermined operation section is allowed in the "hidden operation allowed state (hidden section inclusion allowed state)", the "hidden section inclusion allowed state" If the above-mentioned "hidden operation section" continues without being terminated until the "operation allowed state (hidden section inclusion allowed state)" is terminated, and the said "hidden operation allowed state (hidden section inclusion allowed state)" '' may continue, the above-mentioned "non-display operation section" may end, and a transition may be made to the "display operation section." According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not the "display operation section" will appear in the "non-display section inclusion permissible state" based on whether the background changes, thereby improving the interest in the game. It can be expected that Furthermore, even if the background does not change, there is still a possibility that a "display operation section" will appear, so it is expected that the game's interest will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 32-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and to accept an operation for the predetermined operation section while the sample image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden operation permissible state" that includes an allowable "hidden operation section", and when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation unit in the "hidden operation permitted state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. It has become a thing. In addition, it is possible to display even when the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image display that appears behind the post-reception display. It is said that In this regard, after preparing at least a "first non-display operation permissible state" and a "second non-display operation permissible state" as the "non-display operation permissible state", in the "first non-display operation permissible state", a predetermined By making it possible for the background to change while the operation unit continues to be in a permissible state, it is expected to improve gaming interest in the "non-display operation permissible state". . Note that the "predetermined operation section", "non-display operation section", "non-display operation permissible state", "first non-display operation permissible state", and "second non-display operation permissible state" according to the configuration 32-F are is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 32-F. Therefore, the "predetermined operation section", "non-display operation section", "non-display operation permissible state", "first non-display operation permissible state", and "second non-display operation permissible state" according to other configurations, respectively. They may mean the same "operation section,""hidden operation section," and "operation permissible state," or they may mean different "operation section,""hidden operation section," and "operation permitting state." It may also mean. In addition, it means the same "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state" as the other names for other configurations, such as "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state". It may be something that does.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 32-F", in the "second non-display operation permissible state", a background change occurs while the state in which the operation reception on the predetermined operation section is permissible continues. In the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state", the "first non-display operation permissible state" and the "second non-display operation permissible state" are both set while the above-mentioned sample image display is being displayed. It includes a display operation section in which operation reception on a predetermined operation section is permitted, and in the "first non-display operation permissible state", when the "non-display operation section" continues for a first time, the "first non-display operation section" is While the "1 non-display operation permissible state" continues, the "non-display operation period" is terminated and the transition is made to the "display operation period", and in the "2nd non-display operation permissible state" If the "section" continues for a second time period, which is shorter than the first time period, the "non-display operation section" ends while the "second non-display operation permissible state" continues, and the "display operation section" continues. . That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, the "first non-display operation permissible state (first non-display section inclusion permissible state)" and the "second non-display operation permissible state (second non-display section inclusion permissible state)" Since the time required from the end of the "hidden operation section" to the transition to the "display operation section" is different, the feeling of tension when in the "hidden operation permissible state" is suitably maintained. things come to be expected. On the other hand, since the non-display operation permissible state can be indicated by the presence or absence of a background change, it is expected to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest.

[Configuration 33-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and it is possible to accept operations on the predetermined operation section while the sample image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden operation allowed state" that includes a possible "hidden operation section", and when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation section in the "hidden operation allowed state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. It is possible to display a premonitory effect display that indicates in advance that the reception of operations on the predetermined operation section will be permissible. In this regard, in the "non-display operation allowed state", we made it so that the foreshadowing effect display may not be displayed when the "non-display operation allowed state" occurs, so you can feel the tension when the non-display operation allowed state occurs. will be able to suitably provide the following. Note that the "predetermined operation section,""non-display operation section," and "non-display operation permissible state" related to the configuration 33-F are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 33-F. do not have. Therefore, "predetermined operation section", "non-display operation section", and "non-display operation permissible state" regarding other configurations mean the same "operation section", "non-display operation section", and "operation permissible state", respectively. They may also mean different "operation units,""non-display operation sections," and "operation permissible states." In addition, it means the same "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state" as the other names for other configurations, such as "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state". It may be something that does.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 33-F", there are cases where a precursor effect display is displayed and cases where a precursor effect display is not displayed when a "non-display operation permissible state" occurs. In the "non-display operation permissible state", there is a "non-display operation section" in which the sample image display is not displayed but operation reception on the predetermined operation section is permissible, and the sample image display is displayed. Among these, there are cases in which both the "display operation section" and the "display operation section" are in a state where operation acceptance for the predetermined operation section is permissible, and cases where the "display operation section" is not included and the "non-display operation section" is included. If the "hidden operation allowed state" does not include the "display operation section" but includes the "hidden operation section", then the "hidden operation allowed state" is If the precursor effect display is not displayed at the time of occurrence and the "non-display operation permissible state" includes a "non-display operation section" and "display operation section", when the "non-display operation permissible state" occurs, There may be cases in which a precursor effect display is displayed and cases in which a precursor effect display is not displayed. That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, if a "non-display operation permissible state (non-display section inclusion permissible state)" that does not include a "display operation section" occurs, the precursor effect display is not executed, so that the player It becomes possible to suitably maintain the confidentiality of being in a state where operation reception is permitted for users. On the other hand, when a "non-display operation permissible state (non-display section inclusion permissible state)" that includes a "display operation section" occurs, there are cases in which a precursor effect is displayed and cases in which a precursor effect is not displayed. Since there are both situations, there are various levels of performance regarding the confidentiality of the state in which the player is allowed to accept operations, and this allows even beginners to maintain confidentiality. It has come to be expected to provide a natural presentation that looks like a training exercise to help people notice the "non-display operation permissible state (non-display section inclusion permissible state)" with a high level of performance.

[Configuration 34-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and it is possible to accept operations on the predetermined operation section while the sample image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden operation allowed state" that includes a possible "hidden operation section", and when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation section in the "hidden operation allowed state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. It is possible to display a premonitory effect display that indicates in advance that the reception of operations on the predetermined operation section will be permissible. Then, after preparing at least a "first non-display operation permissible state" and a "second non-display operation permissible state" as the "non-display operation permissible state", in the "first non-display operation permissible state", the "non-display operation permissible state" is Since the precursor effect display is not displayed when the "first non-display operation permissible state" occurs, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when the "non-display operation permissible state" occurs. Note that the "predetermined operation section,""non-display operation section," and "non-display operation permissible state" related to the configuration 34-F are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 34-F. do not have. Therefore, "predetermined operation section", "non-display operation section", and "non-display operation permissible state" regarding other configurations mean the same "operation section", "non-display operation section", and "operation permissible state", respectively. They may also mean different "operation units,""non-display operation sections," and "operation permissible states." In addition, it means the same "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state" as the other names for other configurations, such as "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state". It may be something that does.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting "Configuration 34-F", in the "second non-display operation permissible state", a precursor effect display is displayed when the "second non-display operation permissible state" occurs. Then, both the "first non-display operation permissible state" and the "second non-display operation permissible state" are states in which it is permissible to accept operations on the predetermined operation unit while the sample image display is being displayed. It includes a "display operation period", and in the "first non-display operation permissible state", if the "non-display operation period" continues for a first time, the "first non-display operation permissible state" continues. The "non-display operation period" is ended and the transition is made to the "display operation period" during the period of time, and in the "second non-display operation permissible state", the "non-display operation period" is changed from the first time. If this continues for a short second period of time, the "non-display operation period" is ended and the transition is made to the "display operation period" while the "second non-display operation permissible state" continues. Good too. That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, the "first non-display operation permissible state (first non-display section inclusion permissible state)" and the "second non-display operation permissible state (second non-display section inclusion permissible state)" Since the time required from the end of the "hidden operation section" to the transition to the "display operation section" is different, the feeling of tension when in the "hidden operation permissible state" is suitably maintained. things come to be expected. On the other hand, since the permissible state of these non-display operations can be indicated by the presence or absence of displaying a precursor effect, it is expected to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest.

[Configuration 35-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and it is possible to accept operations on the predetermined operation section while the sample image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a non-display operation permission state including a possible non-display operation section, and when an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation section in the non-display operation permission state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed; It is possible to output an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance for the predetermined operation unit is allowed. In this regard, in the "hidden operation allowed state", we have made it so that the acceptance sound may not be output when the "hidden operation allowed state" occurs, so you can feel the tension when the hidden operation allowed state occurs. will be able to suitably provide the following. Note that the "predetermined operation section,""non-display operation section," and "non-display operation permissible state" according to the configuration 35-F are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 35-F. do not have. Therefore, "predetermined operation section", "non-display operation section", and "non-display operation permissible state" regarding other configurations mean the same "operation section", "non-display operation section", and "operation permissible state", respectively. They may also mean different "operation units,""non-display operation sections," and "operation permissible states." In addition, it means the same "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state" as the other names for other configurations, such as "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state". It may be something that does.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 35-F", in the "non-display operation permissible state", there are cases in which the reception permissible sound is output when the "non-display operation permissible state" occurs, and cases in which the reception permissible sound is output. In addition, in the "non-display operation permissible state", there is a "non-display operation section" in which the sample image display is not displayed and the reception of operations on the predetermined operation section is permissible. and a "display operation section" in which operations on the predetermined operation section are allowed to be accepted while the sample image display is being displayed; However, if the "hidden operation allowed state" does not include the "display operation section" but includes the "hidden operation section", then , If the acceptance permissible sound is not output when the "hidden operation allowed state" occurs, and the "hidden operation allowed state" includes a "hidden operation section" and a "display operation section," the corresponding When the "non-display operation permissible state" occurs, there may be cases in which the acceptance permission sound is output and cases in which the reception permission sound is not output. That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, if a "non-display operation permissible state (non-display section inclusion permissible state)" that does not include a "display operation section" occurs, the reception permissible sound is not output, so that the player It becomes possible to suitably maintain the confidentiality of being in a state where operation reception is permitted for users. On the other hand, when a "non-display operation permissible state (non-display section inclusion permissible state)" occurs that includes a "display operation section", the reception permissible sound is output and sometimes the reception permissible sound is not output. Since there are both situations, there are various levels of performance regarding the confidentiality of the state in which the player is allowed to accept operations, and this allows even beginners to maintain confidentiality. It has come to be expected to provide a natural presentation that looks like a training exercise to help people notice the "non-display operation permissible state (non-display section inclusion permissible state)" with a high level of performance.

[Configuration 36-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and to accept an operation for the predetermined operation section while the sample image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden operation allowed state" that includes a "hidden operation section" in which the display is allowed, and when an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation section in the "hidden operation allowed state", the screen is displayed after acceptance. Can be displayed. Further, the device is capable of outputting an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation reception on the predetermined operation unit is in a permissible state, or that the reception of operation on the predetermined operation unit is in an allowable state. . Then, after preparing at least a "first non-display operation permissible state" and a "second non-display operation permissible state" as the "non-display operation permissible state", in the "first non-display operation permissible state", the "non-display operation permissible state" is Since the reception permission sound corresponding to the "first non-display operation permissible state" is not output, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when the "non-display operation permissible state" occurs. Note that the "predetermined operation section", "non-display operation section", "first non-display operation permissible state", and "second non-display operation permissible state" of the configuration 36-F are the same as those of the configuration 36-F. It is simply a name used to explain a technical idea. Therefore, the same "operation section" as the "predetermined operation section", "non-display operation section", "first non-display operation permissible state", and "second non-display operation permissible state" according to other configurations, It may mean "non-display operation section" and "operation permissible state", or it may mean different "operation section", "non-display operation section", and "operation permissible state". good. In addition, it means the same "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state" as the other names for other configurations, such as "operation section", "hidden operation section", and "operation permissible state". It may be something that does.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 36-F", in the "second non-display operation allowed state", the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the "second non-display operation allowed state" can be output. Then, both the "first non-display operation permissible state" and the "second non-display operation permissible state" are states in which it is permissible to accept operations on the predetermined operation section while the above-mentioned sample image display is being displayed. In the "first non-display operation permissible state", if the "non-display operation period" continues for a first time, the "first non-display operation permissible state" continues. During this period, the "non-display operation period" is ended and the transition is made to the "display operation period", and in the "second non-display operation allowed state", the "non-display operation period" is longer than the first time. If it continues for a short second time, even if the "non-display operation period" is ended and the transition to the "display operation period" is made while the "second non-display operation permissible state" continues. good. That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, the "first non-display operation permissible state (first non-display section inclusion permissible state)" and the "second non-display operation permissible state (second non-display section inclusion permissible state)" Since the time required from the end of the "hidden operation section" to the transition to the "display operation section" is different, the feeling of tension when in the "hidden operation permissible state" is suitably maintained. things come to be expected. On the other hand, since the non-display operation permissible state can be indicated by the presence or absence of the output of the reception permissive sound, it is expected to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest.

[Configuration 37-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and while the sample image display is displayed, an operation reception for the predetermined operation section is performed. It is possible to generate a "display operation permissible state" that includes an allowable "display operation section", and when an operation is accepted for the predetermined operation section in the "display operation permissible state", a post-reception display can be displayed. It becomes. Then, as the above-mentioned "display operation permissible state", at least a "first display operation permissible state" and a "second display operation permissible state" are prepared, and in the "second display operation permissible state", a plurality of sample images can be displayed. Since the screen can be displayed in any of the following display modes, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when the "display operation permissible state" occurs. The "predetermined operation section", "display operation section", "first display operation permissible state", and "second display operation permissible state" according to the configuration 37-F are based on the technical concept of the configuration 37-F. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, the same "operation section" and "display operation section" as "predetermined operation section", "display operation section", "first display operation permissible state", and "second display operation permissible state" related to other configurations are used. ”, “operation permissible state”, or may mean different “operation unit”, “display operation section”, and “operation permissible state”. In addition, "operation unit", "display operation section", and "operation permissible state" that have the same meaning as "operation section", "display operation section", and "operation permissible state" in different names related to other configurations It may be.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 37-F", in the "first display operation permissible state", the sample image can be displayed only in one display mode, and Both the ``1 display operation permissible state'' and the ``2nd display operation permissible state'' include a ``non-display operation section'' in which operation reception on a predetermined operation unit is permissible while the sample image display is not displayed. In the "first display operation permissible state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a first time, the "non-display operation section" continues while the "first display operation permissible state" continues. " is completed and the transition is made to the "display operation period", and in the "second display operation permissible state", if the "non-display operation period" continues for a second time period shorter than the first time period, the "second display operation period" is completed. While the "display operation permissible state" continues, the "non-display operation section" may be terminated and the transition to the "display operation section" may be made. That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, the "first display operation permissible state (first display section inclusion permissible state)" and the "second display operation permissible state (second display section inclusion permissible state)" are the "non-display operation permissible state". Since the time required from the end of the "section" to the transition to the "display operation section" will be different, it is expected that the feeling of tension when in the "display operation permissible state" will be suitably maintained. It becomes like this. On the other hand, since these display operation permissible states can be suggested through the display mode of displaying the simulated image, it is expected to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest.

[Configuration 38-F]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and to accept an operation for the predetermined operation section while the sample image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden section inclusion permissible state" that includes a permissible "hidden operation section", and when an operation is accepted for the above-mentioned predetermined operation section in the "hidden section inclusion permissible state", after the reception The display can be displayed. Then, after preparing at least the "first hidden section inclusion allowing state" and the "second hidden section including allowing state" as the "hidden section including allowing state", the "first hidden section including allowing state" is set. and "Second non-display section inclusion permissible state" both include a "display operation section" in which the above-mentioned sample image display is displayed and operations on the predetermined operation section can be accepted, and a "non-display section". Since both the "display operation section" and "display operation section" are included, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when the "non-display section inclusion permissible state" occurs. Note that the "predetermined operation section", "display operation section", "non-display operation section", "first non-display section inclusion permissible state", and "second non-display section inclusion permissible state" according to the configuration 38-F is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 38-F. Therefore, the "predetermined operation section", "display operation section", "non-display operation section", "first non-display section inclusion permissible state", and "second non-display section inclusion permissible state" according to other configurations, respectively. They may mean the same "operation section", "display operation section", "operation permissible state", or they may mean different "operation section", "display operation section", "non-display operation section", It may also mean "operation permissible state". In addition, "operation section" with a different name for other configurations, "operation section" that is the same as "display operation section", "operation permissible state", "display operation section", "non-display operation section", "operation section" It may also mean "permissive state".

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 38-F", a specific operation section different from the predetermined operation section is additionally prepared, and then the "first non-display section inclusion allowed state" and the "second non-display section inclusion state" are set. In the "inclusion permissible state", both the reception of operations on the predetermined operation section and the reception of operations on the specific operation section may be permitted. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the tension in the "first non-display section inclusion permissible state" and the "second non-display section inclusion permissible state" can be maintained more suitably.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "first non-display section inclusion permissible state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a first time, the "first non-display section inclusion permissible state" continues. If the "hidden operation section" ends and it is possible to move to the "display operation section", and an operation is accepted for a specific operation section in the "hidden operation section", this will be used as an opportunity to accept the operation. In the "second non-display section inclusion allowed state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a second time period shorter than the first time period, the "second output sound" can be output. While the "hidden section inclusion permissible state" continues, the "hidden operation section" is terminated and it is possible to move to the "display operation section", and the operation on the specific operation section is not performed in the "hidden operation section". When acceptance is made, the post-acceptance output sound may not be output using this as a trigger. According to this configuration, the "first hidden section inclusion allowed state" and the "second hidden section included allowed state" end the "hidden operation section" and transition to the "display operation section". Since the time required for the display to be displayed differs, it is expected that the tension felt when the user is in the "non-display section inclusion permissible state" can be suitably maintained. On the other hand, since the state in which these hidden sections are allowed to be included can be indicated by whether or not an output sound is output after receiving an operation on a specific operation section in the "hidden operation section," it is possible to It is now expected that the decline in interest will be suitably suppressed.

[Configuration 39-F]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first display a sample image of a predetermined operation section, and to accept an operation for the predetermined operation section while the sample image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden operation permissible state" that includes an allowable "hidden operation section", and when an operation is accepted for a predetermined operation unit in the "hidden operation permitted state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. It has become a thing. Then, after preparing at least a "first non-display operation permissible state" and a "second non-display operation permissible state" as the "non-display operation permissible state", a predetermined operation is performed in the "first non-display operation permissible state". When an operation is not accepted for a given operation section, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is accepted for the specified operation section is not displayed, which reduces the tension when a non-display operation permission state occurs. It becomes possible to provide it suitably.

As will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 39-F", in the "second non-display operation permission state", even if no operation is accepted on the predetermined operation section, the operation on the predetermined operation section is not accepted. After making it possible to display the same post-reception display as when the request was made, a sample image display is displayed in both the "first non-display operation allowed state" and the "second non-display operation allowed state". This includes a "display operation period" in which the operation reception on the predetermined operation section is permissible, and in the "first non-display operation permissible state", the "non-display operation period" continues for a first time. Then, while the "first non-display operation permissible state" continues, the "non-display operation period" is terminated and the transition is made to the "display operation period", and in the "second non-display operation permissible state" , if the "hidden operation period" continues for a second period of time shorter than the first time, the "hidden operation period" is terminated while the "second hidden operation allowed state" continues. It may be possible to transition to the "display operation section". That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, the "first non-display operation permissible state (first non-display section inclusion permissible state)" and the "second non-display operation permissible state (second non-display section inclusion permissible state)" Since the time required from the end of the "hidden operation section" to the transition to the "display operation section" is different, the feeling of tension when in the "hidden operation permissible state" is suitably maintained. things come to be expected. On the other hand, since it is possible to suggest whether or not the automatic button function will be enabled through the types of these non-display operation permission states, it is expected that this will suitably suppress the decline in gaming interest. Become.

[Other configurations]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related display related to the occurrence of the acceptance permissible period (e.g. , a simulated image display that imitates the operation receiving part, etc.), but the operation-related display is, for example, an integrated simulated image display that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the simulated image display (Fig. 144). (see ). Regarding such integrated image display, there is a reception permissible period (operation permissible state) that occurs when the symbol production progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a variation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of advance judgment. It is desirable to display it in both the reception permissible period (operation permissible state) that occurs, and also in both the low expectation non-suppressing reception performance and the high expectation restraint reception performance. is desirable.

Note that such operation-related displays are as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as other examples and modifications thereof, so the details are omitted, but for example, the peripheral decoration image A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided inside. Further, as the operation-related display, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared, and the display can be made in any one of these modes. However, such an operation-related display does not necessarily have to be displayed as an integrated image display integrated with the peripheral decoration image.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, operation-related sounds related to the occurrence of the acceptance permissible period are generated. (For example, an acceptance acceptance sound) may be output audibly, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform an operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible period (reception period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). , a sound in which the acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that indicates that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted, and has no relation to the reception permissible period (reception period). It can also be said that this is a sound that would not be output under a situation where a performance without a sound is being performed.

By the way, as mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, the types (for example, conversation preview, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc.) as changes after acceptance (for example, display after acceptance, output sound after acceptance, etc.) that appear when an acceptance is accepted. We provide multiple acceptance acceptance periods (operation acceptance states) with different acceptance periods (e.g.). Occurrence conditions are determined for each acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state), and when any one of these occurrence conditions is met, the acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) of the type corresponding to the satisfied occurrence condition is set. It is possible for this to occur.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes a plurality of operation sections (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) as operation sections that are operated by the player. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) in which not only one operation section but several (multiple) operation sections are allowed to accept operations. It is said that

Basic examples of effects when such a multiple operation permissible period occurs are as described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277. The configuration described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277 is conceptual to facilitate understanding of some of the technical features included in the pachinko machine 1. As mentioned above, this is not an essential configuration.

In addition, during such a multiple operation permissible period, for example, a user may start an operation on operation part B (in this case, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, but may be worried that the final result will not be displayed. In the middle of the multiple operation permissible period, switch from "operation on operation part B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)". It is assumed that there will be a case where you are trying to advance the production, and in this case, there are issues as to what kind of processing should be performed, and there are cases where all of the multiple operation sections are "acceptable only once". For example, even if there is a multiple operation permissible period that is prepared as a "multiple operation part", for example, if there is no operation by the player within the multiple operation permissible period, the above-mentioned "automatic button function" cannot be applied to any of the operation parts. As mentioned above, there are various issues, such as whether to enable correspondingly and furthermore, whether to enable the so-called auto-repeat function in order to improve the game's interest.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-F" to "Configuration 39-F" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, when realizing these inventions, it is only necessary to appropriately select and partially provide only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired effect from each configuration described below, and it is not necessary to provide all of them. . For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (intended effect), there may not necessarily be an acceptance period (multiple operation permissible period) during which some (plural) operation units can be operated. It may be something that does not occur (an acceptance period in which only one operation unit is allowed to accept operations), or it may be something that does not have an operation unit that can accept multiple operations. , it may not be equipped with an operation section that allows only one operation reception, or it may not be equipped with an automatic button function or an automatic repeated press function. Further, for each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. It may be partially provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-F" to "Configuration 39-F" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do.

First, with reference to FIGS. 311 to 351, among the plurality of reception periods, the 12thF reception period, the 13thF reception period, the 14thF reception period, the 15thF reception period, the 16thF reception period, and the 17thF reception period We will explain the period and modified examples of the acceptance period. Note that each reception period described above with reference to Figure 310 is different from the 12thF reception period, 13thF reception period, 14thF reception period, 15thF reception period, 16thF reception period, and 17thF reception period. It may be prepared as a reception period of It may also be realized as follows. For example, the 10th F reception period shown in FIGS. 303 to 306 may be realized as the 14th F reception period, which will be described later. In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 310. You may choose not to prepare.

FIG. 311 is a time chart illustrating an example of the performance content when the ``condition 12F'' is satisfied as the generation condition, the 12th F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 312 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the 12th F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable variable and non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "12th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 12th F variation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 12th F variation pattern, sound output according to the 12F variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reaching, etc.), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (notice performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "12th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 311, within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "12th F variation pattern", based on the arrival of timing tl2 when the 12F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 12F"), "Acceptance regarding changes after 12F reception (display UA, UB after 12F reception, sound output after 12F reception, etc.)" is permitted. A 12F reception period (operation permissible state) can occur.

Here, during the 12F reception period according to this embodiment, the 12F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) accepts one operation until the 12F reception period ends. 12F operation section B (here, operation button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations until the corresponding 12F reception period ends. (multiple operation permissible period).

In other words, during the 12th floor reception period (multiple operation tolerance period), for example, although an operation is started on the 12th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, the final result is not displayed. The player feels uneasy because the button does not appear, and in the middle of the 12th floor reception period (multiple operation permissible period), the player changes from "operation on 12th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" to "12th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" It is assumed that there will be a case where the user attempts to advance the performance by switching to "operation on the operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 12th floor reception period is to occur, it first displays a foreshadowing effect that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 12th floor reception period will occur). It is possible.

Although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when a specific timing (not shown) arrives before the occurrence of the 12F reception period, the "12F precursor performance display" is displayed as the precursor performance display. Execution starts. This "12th F precursor effect display" may be displayed so as to span before and after the timing at which the 12th F operation related displays A and B are displayed.

That is, in this production example, when the 12th F reception period occurs, the state is such that the operation reception on the 12F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed, or the operation reception is not allowed. ``12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' that can only appear when the user is in the state where the 12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and operation reception for the 12F operation section B (here, operation button 410) are allowed. or "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted. In addition, in this production example, the timing when the 12th F reception period occurs, and the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as that of the 1st page, it does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 12F portent effect display is displayed and at the same time. The display may be started before the 12F reception period occurs, so that the display straddles the timing. Alternatively, the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are started to be displayed after the timing when the 12th F reception period occurs. You can.

In this example, "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are "12F operation part A (here, sword decoration object)". 5001)" and "a display imitating the 12F operation section B (in this case, the operation button 410) (simulation image display).'' The displayed content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are The display starts so that it appears superimposed on the back side of the ``12th-F portent effect display''. However, "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" do not necessarily overlap on the back side of "12th F omen effect display". It does not need to be displayed, and it is sufficient if it is visible at the timing when the 12th F acceptance period occurs.

In addition, "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes may appear. . In other words, as mentioned above, during the 12F reception period, the 12F operation part A (herein, the sword ornament 5001 )" and a "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" which can accept multiple operations are provided.

Here, as a method for displaying the "12th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which periodic changes may appear, the modes shown in FIGS. 284 (A) to (D) are adopted, for example. You may also do so. That is, in this case, after the part (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "12F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(A), 284 (B) to 284 (D) are sequentially displayed in the various modes shown in FIGS. It will appear repeatedly.

Furthermore, as a method for displaying the "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, the modes shown in FIGS. may be adopted. In other words, in this case, after the part (button drawing image BMG) of the operation receiving part of the 12F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(a), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in (b) to (d)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change repeatedly appears in a form that requires a predetermined period of 12F time B. That will happen.

According to these configurations, during the 12F reception period, each "12F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" The "operation receiver" appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the cycle 12F time A and the cycle 12F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since the time is set to be longer than the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the 13F reception period (described later), the "operation reception section" is It will depict how it moves slowly up and down its range of motion.

In the 12th F reception period according to this embodiment, the 12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG) are shown in FIG. 312(f), As shown in (g), if no operation is performed by the player, each item is hidden when the timing tl3 when the 12th F acceptance period ends arrives.

In addition, when the display of "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is started to be displayed before the timing tl2 when the 12th F reception period occurs. , it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for the timing tl2 when the 12th F acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed in, for example, FIG. 284 (A) until timing tl2 arrives. ) and (a), respectively.

In this example, the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed while the "12th F omen effect display" is being displayed. The display starts appearing behind the "12th F precursor effect display" and its periodic change begins. Note that the display range of the 12F precursor effect display may be reduced over time, as in the 2F precursor effect display ZFD shown in FIGS. 285(a) to 285(d).

In addition, the "12th F omen effect display" according to this example also includes the "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" like the 2F omen effect display ZFD shown in FIGS. 285(a) to (d). ” and “12F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)”, “Aspect ZFD-1” is displayed so that it appears to overlap on the front side of them, and “Aspect ZFD-1” is displayed so that it appears to overlap on the back side of them. It may also be configured to execute both the displayed "Aspect ZFD-2" and the displayed "Aspect ZFD-2". That is, in this case, "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are "mode ZFD-1" of "12th F omen effect display" In relation to this, it is displayed behind it, but in relation to "Aspect ZFD-2" of the "12th F portent effect display", it is displayed in front of it. Note that embodiment ZFD-2 may not necessarily be provided.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 282 to 286, the "12th F precursor effect display" starts to be displayed before the timing tl2 when the 12th F reception period occurs, and Even when the timing tl3 when the set time set for the period has elapsed (timing tl3 when the 12th floor acceptance period ends without any operation by the player), it has not been hidden. This means that the display can continue.

In this regard, regarding the "12th F omen effect display", since the display has started, the reduction rate of the display area of "Aspect ZFD-1" is made larger than that of "Aspect ZFD-2". Good too. As a result, even when the "12th F omen effect display" is being displayed (continuously), "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12F operation related display B (button drawing)" The visibility of "Image BMG)" will gradually become better. Note that the display area reduction rate of “Aspect ZFD-1” may be “100%”, and the display area reduction rate of “Aspect ZFD-2” may be “0%”.

By the way, in the 12th F reception period according to this embodiment, the first background image HK1 is displayed as a "background image" on the effect display device 1600, and the 12th F reception period is While this continues, no background change occurs from the first background image HK1. Regarding the first background image HK1, it is sufficient that the background does not change from the first background image HK1 while the 12F reception period continues, and it is not necessarily displayed before the 12F reception period occurs. It may not be possible. For example, it may be displayed by a background change that occurs when the 12th F reception period occurs.

It should be noted that the "background image" is something that can be displayed even in a situation where the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance during the acceptance acceptance period (operation acceptance state) is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is an image that is displayed so that it appears behind the post-reception display when the post-reception display is displayed. Further, the "background image" may be one in which the display changes periodically, or may be one in which only one display appears without changing. Therefore, "background change" means that such a display pattern switches to another display pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change may be replaced by another periodic change. This means switching.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light emitting modes. Then, during the 12F reception period, the event occurs while the specific light emitting unit is emitting light in the first light emission mode among the plurality of light emission modes, and the 12F reception period continues. During this period, no change from the first light emission mode to another light emission mode occurs in the specific light emission section. The first light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section may be one that does not change from the first light emitting mode to another light emitting mode while the 12F reception period continues, and the 12F reception period occurs. It may not necessarily be executed before the execution. For example, it may be something that appears (is executed) by a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 12th F acceptance period occurs.

Note that the "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, and may be such that the light emission changes periodically, or may be such that only one light emission appears without changing. Therefore, "change in light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change is caused by another periodic change. It means switching to change. Further, a "non-emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes".

Furthermore, in the 12th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 312, if the player does not perform any operation, the first background image HK1 is is continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the first light emitting mode is continuously executed on the specific light emitting section. However, the background may change from the first background image HK1 when the 12th F acceptance period ends. Further, the first light emission mode may be changed to another light emission mode when the 12F acceptance period ends.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 311, at timing tl2A within the 12F reception period, the first operation is accepted for "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (the reception period ends). This assumes a case in which an operation that does not allow In this example, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the invention is not limited to this, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" can be realized using other methods. Good too.

Here, the presentation contents related to the 12th F reception period are omitted from illustration, but may be realized as presentations as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, for example. Hereinafter, a case will be described in which the production content related to the 12th F reception period is realized as a production as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286. Some production content will be explained with reference to FIGS. Since it is as explained, I will omit it. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 1 has both a 2nd F reception period and a 12th F reception period, the performances will be realized as different performance contents.

In other words, in this case, if the first operation is accepted for the "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tl2A within the 12F reception period, then FIG. 311(i), ( k) and FIG. 285(c), one of the changes B after receiving the 12th F is that the "magic power value (area filled in with respect to the "magic" decoration display) increases (the magical power value is "0"). ” to “1”)” and “Description of wizard MT saving MP” will be performed (display UB1 after reception on the 12th floor).

In this example, if an operation is performed on "12th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 12th floor reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound will be output audibly. (See FIG. 311(k)). In other words, in this case, the "magician MT" will be depicted secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such operations multiple times, Because the response (performance) is low, it can arouse feelings of anxiety such as ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 12F reception period is too low, the game may become less interesting. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, the 12F post-reception display UB ("magic power value (" "Drawings in which the area filled in with the decorative display increases" and "Drawings in which the wizard MT is saving MP" are displayed behind the "12th F omen effect display" mentioned above. When they overlap, they are displayed in front of them. In addition, in this production example, there are "Aspect ZFD-1" and "Aspect ZFD-2" as the "12thF portent production display", but the 12thF The display UB is displayed after acceptance. According to such a configuration, although the output sound is not audible after reception, which arouses a feeling of anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue this kind of operation?", the operation reception itself is performed properly. You will be able to appropriately suggest the situation.

In addition, regarding such "12F post-reception change B", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described below, a production change different from the 12F post-reception display UB (for example, a production different from the specific light emitting part) (e.g., changing the lighting mode of the lamp) may also be performed. Alternatively, such "12th F post-reception change B" does not necessarily have to be executed by a plurality of effect elements, and may be realized by only one of the above-mentioned effect elements.

In addition, the execution time of the "12F post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is set longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation reception on "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is equivalent to the previous operation on "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". This will be done while the corresponding 12F post-reception display UB is being displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 311, at timing tl2B (timing shown in FIG. 285(d)) within the 12th F reception period, the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. This assumes that the second operation is performed for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 311(i), (k) and FIG. 285(d), as one of the changes B after receiving the 12th F, "magic value ("magic" decoration") is added. ``The area filled in with respect to the display'' increases (the magic value changes from ``1'' to ``2''),'' and ``The wizard MT is accumulating more MP.'' (Display UB2 after reception on the 12th floor). However, at this time, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 311(k)).

In this example, at timing tl2C (timing shown in FIG. 286(e)) within the 12F reception period, the third operation is performed on "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". This assumes the case where However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 311(i), (k) and FIG. A new display (aspect) does not appear as the display UB (no change in display).

In this example, if a predetermined number of operations (in this case, the third time) are performed on "12thF operation section B (in this case, operation button 410)" within the 12F reception period, ``No new display will appear as the display UB after the 12th floor reception (no change in display)'', but instead of this, within the 12th floor reception period, ``the 12th floor operation section B (here, A determination is made when an operation is performed on the "operation button 410)", and based on the result of the determination, no new display is performed (no change in display) as the 12F post-reception display UB. You can also do this. The point is that such an event (despite operating the "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 12F reception period, a new display is displayed as the 12F post-reception display UB) (does not appear) need only occur when a predetermined condition is met.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 12F reception period, even though the 12F operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the ``12F operation section B (here, operation button 410).'' I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time of the 12th F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 12F reception period, if an operation is performed on "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the 12F reception display UB may be displayed, but the reception This feeling of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 311, 285, and 286, the initial game strategy (timing tl2A to tl2C)", and by operating the "12F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" side, which allows the final performance result to appear with just one operation. This is based on the assumption that the player has switched to a "new gaming strategy" that aims to advance the performance.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 311(a), (h), and (i), the 12th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "12th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In a situation where UB2 (here, a depiction where the magic power value is set to "2", a depiction where the wizard MT is accumulating more MP, etc.) is being displayed, at timing tl2D during the 12th F reception period. , it is assumed that an operation is performed on "the 12th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "12th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tl2D within the 12th F reception period, the 12F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the 12th F reception, first, the 12F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 311(a) and 311(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 311(h), (k) and FIGS. 286(f), (i), the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is 12F reception output sound A' is audibly output, and the 12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 12F operation section A (here, the sword decoration object 5001) is visually recognized. A “12th F effect display EF” that makes the process more difficult is displayed, and furthermore, a 12th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

In this regard, the 12th F effect display EF according to this production example includes "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as shown in FIGS. Display B (button drawing image BMG)" and "12th F portent effect display" are to be displayed in a situation where they are not hidden, and the operator's " It is now displayed so that it appears to overlap from the front with the "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration object 5001)". There is.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "12F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 12F reception period, the "12F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to display is never displayed.

In addition, the relative expectation level (jackpot The case where the mode UA-1 (FIG. 286(f) to (h)) with a high probability (rate of winnings) appears, and the mode UA-2 (with a lower expectation level (rate of winnings)) than the mode 286(i) to (k)) may appear. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the 12F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "12F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output, but expectations regarding the "12F post-reception output sound A" are also expected. The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In this regard, when the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high expectation level appears as the "12F post-reception display UA", as shown in FIG. 286(f), The ``12th effect display EF-1'' is displayed which is different from the appearance of the aspect UA-2 with low expectations.

That is, when the aspect UA-1 with relatively high expectation appears as the "12F post-reception display UA", the first aspect EF-1 (see FIG. 286(f)) is displayed as the 12F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as the "12th F post-reception display UA".

On the other hand, when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "12F post-reception display UA", as shown in FIGS. 286(i) to (k), the "12F post-reception display UA" '', the 12th F effect display EF is displayed in a manner different from that in which the relatively highly expected aspect UA-1 appears.

That is, when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "display UA after reception on the 12th floor", the second aspect EF-2 (see FIG. 286(i)) is displayed as the 12th floor effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 with relatively low expectations will appear as the "12th F post-reception display UA".

In addition, during the 12th F reception period according to this embodiment, "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are shown in FIGS. As shown in 286, the periodic change is hidden based on the operation on the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Here, by hiding "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, the periodic changes are hidden. It happens.

In addition, during the 12th F reception period according to this embodiment, the "12th F omen effect display" also corresponds to the operation on the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" as shown in FIG. Hidden status based on. However, the "12th F portent effect display" is not turned off when the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated.

In this example, when there is a situation immediately after an operation is accepted (a situation where the 12thF effect display EF is displayed) (see FIGS. 286(f) and (i)), the "12thF operation related display A" is displayed. (sword decoration image SYG),” “12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG),” and “12th F omen effect display” are not hidden, and “12th F operation related display A ( The sword decoration image SYG) is displayed so as to overlap the back side of the 12th F effect display EF. After that, these "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "12F omen effect display" are changed to "12F operation related display A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is turned into a hidden state based on the operation (see FIGS. 286(g) and (j)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "12F post-reception display UA" includes such "12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "12F effect display". EF" and "Decorative pattern SZ", and this makes it difficult to see immediately after the "12th F reception display UA" is displayed (Fig. 286(f), (i)). However, as "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "12th F effect display EF" etc. are hidden, The visibility of the "12F post-reception display UA" will gradually become better. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when the 12thF effect display EF is displayed, it is possible to determine whether the "12F post-reception display UA" is a highly expected mode UA-1 and a low-expected mode UA- It is made easy to recognize which one is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 286(h) and 286(k), the "display UA after reception on the 12th floor" according to this production example is based on the display contents according to the expectation levels UA-1 and UA-2. We will continue to develop this.

Also, during the 12th F reception period according to this embodiment, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is as shown in FIG. 311(d) (omitted in FIGS. 285 and 286). , the background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) as a result of the operation on "12F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 12F reception period, and the background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) during the 12F reception period. The background image is not switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on the "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)".

However, in place of this, during the 12F reception period, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) may be displayed on the 12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) during the 12F reception period. The background image will not be switched to a different background image (background change) as a result of an operation on ``, but the background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) as a result of an operation on ``12F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)'' during the 12F reception period. It may also be possible to switch to another background image (background change). Furthermore, during the 12th floor reception period, there are cases where the background image is switched to another background image (background change) triggered by an operation on the 12th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), and when the background image is switched to another background image (background change). ) may be present.

In this regard, during the 12F reception period according to this embodiment, regarding the light emission mode (here, the first light emission mode) in the specific light emitting section, as shown in FIG. 311(e), the 12F reception During the period, the operation on the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" may switch (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, the light emission mode P) (timing). tl2D), the light emission mode will not be switched to another light emission mode (light emission change) triggered by an operation on the "12thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the relevant 12F reception period (timing tl2A~ tl2C).

However, instead of this, for the light emission mode (here, the first light emission mode) in the specific light emitting section, as shown in FIG. 311(e), "12F operation section A (here Here, we will discuss the cases in which the light emitting mode (here, light emitting mode P) is switched to another light emitting mode (light emitting mode P here) triggered by an operation on the sword ornament 5001) and the case where the light emitting mode is switched to another light emitting mode (here, light emitting mode P) ( However, if the operation on "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is triggered during the 12F reception period, the light emission mode is switched to another light emission mode (light emission change). It may be possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, during the 12F reception period, as shown in FIG. 311(j), the 12F operation-related sound a is output in connection with the occurrence of the 12F operation-related sound a. The 12F operation-related sound a according to this example is output as the above-mentioned "acceptance permissible sound" and can be selectively audible as either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2". It may also be possible to output it. For example, when the 12F reception period occurs, when the "first permissible sound a1" is audibly output as the 12F operation-related sound a, the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 12F operation-related sound a. It is desirable to set the setting so that it suggests that the expectation level (ratio) of winning the jackpot is higher than when the player hit the jackpot.

Incidentally, during the 12F reception period, while either "first permissible sound a1" or "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 12F operation-related sound a, "12F operation part B (here, , operation button 410)", the audible output of the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is not interrupted. However, while either "first permissible sound a1" or "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 12F operation-related sound a, "12F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001) ”, the audible output of the “first permissible sound a1” or “second permissible sound a2” may be interrupted using this as a trigger.

In addition, during the 12F reception period, based on the operation performed on the 12F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), the 12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. ” and “12th floor operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” will be hidden, and the 12th floor reception period will be ended. However, when an operation is performed on the "12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", no matter how many times the operation is performed, this will trigger the "12F operation related display A (sword 410)". Decorative image SYG)" and "12thF operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may not be hidden or the 12thF reception period may not end.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 12th F reception period, the magical power value (the area filled out with respect to the "magic" decoration display) When the amount has accumulated to the point where it increases, it may be arranged to wait until the timing tl3 when the 12th F reception period ends, and perform a magic effect to perform withdrawal based on the arrival of the timing tl3. In this case, even if the magic value (the area filled in with respect to the "magic" decoration display) has accumulated to the point where it increases, until the timing tl3 arrives, the "12F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is also allowed, you can choose whether or not to make a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of magic and withdrawal has been confirmed. By being able to do this, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. However, in this case, if an operation is performed on the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the effect of applying magic and leaving will not be performed regardless of the effect result.

Alternatively, before the 12F reception period occurs, a production judgment is performed, and if a special judgment result is not obtained as a result of the production judgment, the 12F operation section B ( Here, no matter how many times you operate the "operation button 410)", the magic value (the area filled out against the "magic" decoration display) will not accumulate until it increases (the reception period will not end). may be executed as a predetermined effect. In this case, when an operation is performed on the "12th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "12th F post-reception display UA" is displayed as a mode UA-2 with relatively low expectations. may always appear, or it may be arranged that there is a possibility that aspect UA-1 with a relatively high expectation level will appear. In this regard, if the mode UA-1 with a relatively high expectation level may appear when an operation is performed on the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the magic value cannot be accumulated to an increase no matter how many times the operation is performed on the "12F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)". can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 12F post-reception display UB (description of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.), not only the "12F omen production display" but also the "12F 286 (f), (g), etc.).In relation to the post-reception display UA, it is not displayed behind it, but is displayed so as to overlap in front of it (see FIGS. 286(f), (g), etc.). In this example, when the aspect UA-1 is displayed as the "12F post-reception display UA", the aspect UA-1 is displayed as the 12F post-reception display UB (a depiction of an increase in magical power, a magician MT's MP However, when the aspect UA-2 is displayed as the "Display UA after reception on the 12th floor", the aspect UA -2 may be displayed so as to overlap behind the 12F post-reception display UB (depicts of increasing magical power values, depictions of wizard MT saving MP, etc.).

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after the reception on the 12th floor (depicts of the magic value increasing, depiction of the wizard MT saving MP, etc.) appears to overlap with the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. (See FIG. 285(d), FIG. 286, etc.) However, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed so as to overlap behind it.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 12F post-reception display UB (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.), the 12F operation section A (here, , sword ornament 5001)" is prevented from being hidden based on this operation. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 311(i), FIG. Once the ``12th F reception display UA'' and the ``12th F effect display EF'' have started to be displayed in response to an operation on the operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), they continue to be displayed. Of course, even when "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "12th F effect display EF" are hidden, This means that the display can continue.

However, in this case, the 12F post-reception display UB (such as depictions of magical power increasing or wizard MT saving MP) will not be displayed during the period when the "12F post-reception display UA" is displayed. It may be set to a display state. As a result, while promoting the fact that it is possible to advance the production by accepting an operation (magic performed by a wizard) on the "12th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "12th floor It becomes possible to suitably indicate that the production is in a state of progress by accepting an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

Furthermore, in the 12th F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, periodic changes (see Figure 284) that had previously appeared in "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are removed. It continues without any indication (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.). That is, during the 12F reception period, periodic changes in the "12F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are different from the "12F operation section B ( Here, the display mode does not change before and after an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (operation that does not end the acceptance period), and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the operation reception for the "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" The "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (cycle 2F time A, cycle 2F time B).

On the other hand, during the 12F reception period, as shown in FIG. 311 and FIG. The periodic changes in the display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 12th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are hidden. Here, by hiding "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "12th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, we will hide their periodic changes. We are planning to do so.

Furthermore, in this example, while the 12F reception period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease over time, but this may not necessarily be done.

In addition, during the 12F reception period, the 12F operation section B (here, Even if you continue to operate (press) the ``operation button 410'', the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the operation will be automatically accepted at predetermined intervals) (auto continuous press). The function is not activated (see FIG. 311(b)). In this case, within the 12F reception period, multiple operations are performed on the "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" corresponding to the "12F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)". Needless to say, if the player wishes to accept the request, he or she must repeatedly operate (press) the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

In addition, the 12th F reception period is originally, as shown in FIGS. 311(c) and 312(c), when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period), it continues until timing tl3 arrives. , is terminated based on the arrival of timing tl3.

In this regard, the 12th F reception period may be generated as a reception period during which the automatic button function described above is enabled. In other words, in this case, if the operation to end the 12F reception period is not received until timing tl3 arrives, the 12F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001 )", the same post-reception change A (such as post-reception display, post-reception output sound, and change in light emitting mode in a specific light emitting unit) occurs based on the arrival of timing tl3. It will be done. In this case, for the production corresponding to the "12th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" which requires multiple operations within the 12th F reception period and in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, the game Since the player cannot enjoy the game unless he or she operates it, it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, even if the 12th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is operated during the 12th floor reception period, the 12th floor reception period does not end and timing tl3 arrives. , so that the same post-reception change A as when the operation is performed on the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the reception period occurs based on the arrival of timing tl3. You can also do this. In other words, in this case, while the 12F post-reception display UB (description of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and the post-reception display UB is displayed. Change A (change in display after reception, output sound after reception, change in light emission mode in a specific light emitting section, etc.) will occur.

FIG. 313 is a time chart illustrating an example of the content of performance when the ``condition 13F'' is satisfied as the generation condition, the 13th F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 314 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the 12th F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "13th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (notice performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 13th F fluctuation pattern. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 13th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 13th F fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "13F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 313, within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "13th F variation pattern", based on the arrival of the timing tm2 when the 13F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 13F"), "Acceptance regarding changes after 13F reception (display UA, UB after 13F reception, sound output after 13F reception, etc.)" is permitted. 13F reception period (operation permissible state) can occur.

Here, the 13F reception period according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 12F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312), and the 13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) Both the 13F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are designed to allow multiple operation receptions until the 13F reception period ends (multiple operation tolerance period). In this example, the "13th F operation part A" used in the 13th F reception period is the same as the "12th F operation part A" used in the 12F reception period (here, the sword ornament 5001). However, different operation units may be used. In addition, the "13th F operating section B" used in the 13th F reception period is the same operating section (here, the operating button 410) as the "12th F operating section B" used in the 12th F receiving period, but they are different from each other. It may be a different operation section.

Even during this 13th F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), for example, the 13F operation section B (here, Although the player started operating the operation button 410), the player felt uneasy because the final result did not appear, and in the middle of the 13F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), the player pressed the 13F operation button It is assumed that there will be a case where the user attempts to advance the production by switching from "operation on the 13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" to "operation on the 13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It has become a thing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 13th F reception period is to occur, it first displays a foreshadowing effect that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 13th F reception period will occur). It is possible.

Although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when a specific timing (not shown) arrives before the occurrence of the 13F reception period, the "13th F precursor effect display" is displayed as the foreshadow effect display. Execution starts. This "13th F precursor effect display" may be displayed so as to span before and after the timing at which the 13th F operation related displays A and B are displayed.

In other words, in this production example, even when the 13th F reception period occurs, the operation reception on the 13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is permitted, or the operation reception is not permitted. "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can only appear when the state is in a state where operation reception on the 13F operation section B (here, operation button 410) is permitted. ``13F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)'' that can only appear when the operation acceptance is permitted. In addition, in this production example, the timing when the 13th F reception period occurs, and the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing of For example, the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed after the timing when the 13th F omen effect display is displayed and at the same time. The display may be started before the 13F acceptance period occurs, so that the display straddles the timing. Alternatively, the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are started to be displayed after the timing when the 13th F reception period occurs. You can.

In this example, "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are "13F operation part A (here, sword decoration object)". 5001) (simulated image display)” and “display imitated 13F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410) (simulated image display)”. The displayed content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" The display starts so that it appears to overlap the back side of the ``13th-F portent effect display''.

In addition, "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes may appear. . That is, as described above, during the 13th F reception period, the 13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001), which can accept multiple operations, is used as an operation part that can accept operations by the player. ” and a “13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)” which is capable of accepting multiple operations are provided.

Here, as a method for displaying the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which periodic changes may appear, for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 289 (A) and (B) are adopted. You may also do so. In other words, in this case, after the part (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the 13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. When a moving image "displayed sequentially in the manner shown in 289(B)" is one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined cycle 13F time A.

Furthermore, as a method for displaying the "13F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, the modes shown in FIGS. may be adopted. In other words, in this case, after the part (button drawing image BMG) of the operation receiving part of the 13F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 289(a), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in (b) to (d)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change repeatedly appears in a form that requires a predetermined cycle 13F time B. That will happen.

According to these configurations, during the 13F reception period, each "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", etc. The "operation receiver" appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, "cycle 13F time A" is a time shorter than "cycle 12F time A" and "cycle 12F time B" in the above-mentioned 12F reception period, "cycle 13F time B" in the 13F reception period, etc. It is set as . Therefore, the "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" during the 13F reception period depicts how the "operation receiver" moves up and down its movable range faster than in the 12F reception period described above. It will be done. In this case, regarding the "13F operation section A" corresponding to the "13F operation related display A" during the 13F reception period, the "12F operation section A" corresponding to the "12F operation related display A" during the 12F reception period Part A" is provided as the same operation part (here, the sword decoration body 5001), so that even though the image display is for the same operation part, the time required for periodic changes is different from each other. It is desirable that the

In the 13F reception period according to this embodiment, the 13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 13F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are shown in FIG. 314(f), As shown in (g), if no operation is performed by the player, each item is hidden when the timing tm3 at which the 13th F acceptance period ends arrives.

In addition, when the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing tm2 when the 13th F reception period occurs. , it is desirable to start the periodic change after waiting for the timing tm2 when the 13th F reception period occurs. That is, in this case, the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are as shown in FIG. 289 (A) until timing tm2 arrives. , (a) are maintained.

In this example, "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed while "13th F omen effect display" is being displayed. The display starts appearing behind the "13th F portent effect display" and its periodic change begins. In this example, the display range of the 13F precursor effect display may be reduced over time, like the 3F precursor effect display ZFD shown in FIGS. 290(a) to 290(e).

In addition, the "13th F portent effect display" according to this example is the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" in front of them. It consists only of "aspects" that are displayed so as to overlap on the sides, and "aspects" that are displayed so as to overlap on the rear side thereof are not executed. The "13th F omen effect display" according to this example is started to be displayed before the timing tm2 when the 13th F reception period occurs, and at the timing when the set time set for the 13F reception period has elapsed. The display is hidden before the arrival of tm3 (timing tm3 at which the 13th F reception period ends without any operation by the player).

By the way, the 13th floor reception period according to this embodiment also occurs while the first background image HK1 is being displayed as a "background image" on the effect display device 1600, as in the case of the 12th floor reception period described above. Therefore, while the 13th F acceptance period continues, no background change occurs from the first background image HK1. As for the first background image HK1, it is sufficient that the background does not change from the first background image HK1 while the 13F reception period continues, and it is not necessarily displayed before the 13F reception period occurs. It may not be possible. For example, it may be displayed by a background change that occurs when the 13th F reception period occurs.

It should be noted that the "background image" is something that can be displayed even in a situation where the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance during the acceptance acceptance period (operation acceptance state) is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is an image that is displayed so that it appears behind the post-reception display when the post-reception display is displayed. Further, the "background image" may be one in which the display changes periodically, or may be one in which only one display appears without changing. Therefore, "background change" means that such a display pattern switches to another display pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change may be replaced by another periodic change. This means switching.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light emitting modes. Then, during the 13F reception period, the light emission occurs while the specific light emitting section is emitting light in the first light emission mode among the plurality of light emission modes. However, as will be described later, the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting section is such that even while the 13th F reception period continues, the operation reception for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is not possible. This has led to changes occurring. The first light emitting mode may be emitted before the 13F acceptance period occurs, or may not be emitted. For example, it may be anything that appears at the time of occurrence of the 13F reception period, such as one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 13F reception period occurs.

Note that the "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, and may be such that the light emission changes periodically, or may be such that only one light emission appears without changing. Therefore, "change in light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change is caused by another periodic change. It means switching to change. Further, a "non-emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes".

Furthermore, in the 13th F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 314, if the player does not perform any operation, the first background image HK1 is is continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the first light emission mode is continuously executed on the specific light emitting section. However, the background may change from the first background image HK1 when the 13F reception period ends. Further, the first light emission mode may be changed to another light emission mode when the 13F acceptance period ends.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 313, at timing tm2A within the 13F reception period, the first operation is accepted for "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (the reception period ends). This assumes a case in which an operation that does not allow In this example, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the invention is not limited to this, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" can be realized using other methods. Good too.

Here, the presentation contents related to the 13th F reception period are omitted from illustration, but may be realized as presentations as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, for example. Hereinafter, a case will be described in which the production content related to the 13th F reception period is realized as a production as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291. Some production content will be explained with reference to FIGS. Since it is as explained, I will omit it. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 1 has both a 3rd floor reception period and a 13th floor reception period, the performances will be realized as different performance contents.

That is, in this case, if the first operation is accepted for the "13th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" at timing tm2A within the 13th F accepting period, then FIG. 313(i), ( k) and FIG. 290(c), one of the changes B after receiving the 13th F is that the "magic power value (area filled in with respect to the "magic" decoration display) increases (the magical power value is "0"). '' to ``1'')'' and ``Description of wizard MT saving MP'' (display UB1 after reception on the 13th floor) are shown.

In this example, if an operation is performed on the "13th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 13th floor reception period, the corresponding reception will be performed as in the case of the 12th floor reception period. The post-output sound is not output audibly (see FIG. 313(k)). In other words, in this case, the "magician MT" will be depicted secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such operations multiple times, Because the response (performance) is low, it can arouse feelings of anxiety such as ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is too low during the 13F reception period, the game may become less interesting. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after the 13th F reception ("The magic value increases ``Depiction'' and ``Description of wizard MT saving MP'') should not be displayed behind the ``13th F omen effect display'' mentioned above, and when they overlap, they should be displayed in front of it. It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding such "13F post-reception change B", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described below, a production change different from the 13F post-reception display UB (for example, a production different from the specific light emitting part) (e.g., changing the lighting mode of the lamp) may also be performed. Alternatively, such "13th F post-reception change B" does not necessarily have to be executed by a plurality of effect elements, and may be realized by only one of the above-mentioned effect elements.

In addition, the execution time of the "13th floor post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "13th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is set longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation reception on the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is the same as the previous operation on the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". This will be done while the corresponding 13th F post-reception display UB is being displayed. On the other hand, the execution time of the "13th F post-reception display UA" in response to the operation reception on the "13th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is longer than the time set as the corresponding reception period. It has been shortened. Therefore, during the 13F reception period, the second and subsequent operation receptions for the ``13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' will not be accepted for the ``13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' that was previously performed. There is a possibility that the operation will be performed while the 13F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation on "Decoration 5001)" is displayed, and a possibility that the operation will be performed while the 13F post-reception display UA is hidden. There are both.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 313, at timing tm2B within the 13th F reception period (a situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 290(d) appears), "13th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 313(i), (k) and FIG. 290(d), as one of the changes B after receiving the 13th ``The area filled in with respect to the display'' increases (the magic value changes from ``1'' to ``2''),'' and ``The wizard MT is accumulating more MP.'' (Display UB2 after reception on the 13th floor). However, at this time, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 313(k)).

In this example, at timing tm2C within the 13th floor reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. This assumes that the third operation is performed. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 313(i), (k) and FIG. A new display (aspect) does not appear as the display UB (no change in display).

In this example, if a predetermined number of operations (in this case, the third time) are performed on the "13F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410)" within the 13F reception period, "No new display will appear as the display UB after receiving the 13th floor (no change in display)", but instead of this, within the 13th floor receiving period, "the 13th floor operation section B (here, A determination is made when an operation is performed on the "operation button 410)", and based on the result of the determination, a new display (no change in display) is made as the 13F post-reception display UB. You may also do so. The point is that such an event (despite operating the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 13F reception period, a new display is displayed as the 13F post-reception display UB) (does not appear) need only occur when a predetermined condition is met.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 13F reception period, even though the 13F operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the ``13F operation section B (here, operation button 410).'' I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time of the 13th F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 13F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the 13F reception display UB may be displayed, but the reception This sense of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 313, 290, and 291, the initial game strategy (timing tm2A to tm2C)'' and switches to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by multiple operations on the ``13th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'' side. It is as expected.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 313(a), (h), and (i), the 13th-F post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "13th-F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In a situation where UB2 (here, a depiction where the magic value is set to "2", a depiction where the wizard MT is accumulating more MP, etc.) is being displayed, the timing tm2D (during the 13th F reception period) is displayed. It is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in a situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 313(f) is appearing.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the first operation is accepted for the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at timing tm2D within the 13th F acceptance period, FIGS. 313 and 291 As shown in (f), change A can be caused after receiving the 13th F.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 313(h), (k), and 291(f), such a change A after receiving the 13th F is ``13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) "The 13th F post-reception output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation on the "13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output, and the "13th F operation related display" corresponding to the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The "13th F effect display EF1" that makes it difficult to visually recognize "A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, and the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section is changed from the "first light emitting mode" to the "light emitting mode Q1", and furthermore, the 13F post-reception display UA1 is displayed. Here, as the 13F post-reception display UA1, "a depiction of the hero YS attacking and the BOSS character's HP decreasing to about 75%" is performed.

However, as shown in FIG. 313(i), when the first operation is performed on the "13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", "the 13th F that was in the displayed state Regarding the "Display after reception UB", when the first operation reception for "13F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is received, it will not be turned into a hidden state as a result of this. , to continue their execution state. Note that even if the "13th F operation-related sound" is audibly output when the first operation is performed on the "13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the operation cannot be performed. This will not be made inaudible as a trigger.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 313(f), when the first operation is performed on the "13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)," Regarding the 13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) that was in Periodic changes are hidden. At this time, although the "13th F effect display EF1" has made it difficult to see, the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues to be displayed, as it had been done up until then. Only periodic changes are terminated once. Note that the periodic change once ended in this way is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 291(f), the "13th F effect display EF1" in response to the first operation reception on the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is Operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed while both are being displayed, and the operator's " It will be displayed so as to overlap from the front with the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period, the "13F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to display is never displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 313(a), (h), and (i), after the reception of the previous operation for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" In a situation where change A is occurring in various places, and in response to the operation reception on the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the 13th F reception display UB2 (here, the magic value is "2") 291 (g), (h) during the 13F reception period. ), it is assumed that the second and third operation receptions for the "13F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" are respectively made.

In this pachinko machine 1, at timings tm2E and tm2F within the 13F reception period (each situation in which the effect display shown in FIGS. 291(f) and (g) appears), "13F operation section A (here, the The second and third operations accepted for the ``decoration body 5001)'' are the same as the first operation accepted for the ``13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001).'' , as shown in FIG. 313 and FIGS. 291(g) and (h), change A may occur after the 13th F is received.

In particular, regarding the "output sound A1 after 13F reception", "13F effect display EF1", and "light emission mode Q1" in the specific light emitting section, there are two cases when the first operation is accepted, and when the second and third operations are accepted. The same aspect can appear if the above is done. In addition, the periodic changes in the "13th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once ended when the previous operation was accepted will remain in its completed state when the second or third operation is accepted. However, when the second or third operation is accepted, the periodic change end state will occur again. It happens. That is, in this case, the periodic change once ended will be restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the second or third operation acceptance. In addition, when the "13th F output sound A1", "13th F effect display EF1", and "light emission mode Q1" corresponding to the operation reception at the previous operation are in the execution state, in response to the new operation reception, "Output sound A1 after 13F reception", "13F effect display EF1", and "light emission mode Q1" corresponding to the operation reception at the previous operation are canceled, and "output sound A1 after reception 13F" and "13F "Effect display EF1" and "light emission mode Q1" will be newly executed. The "light emitting mode Q1" is returned to the original light emitting mode (here, the first light emitting mode) after a predetermined period of time has passed.

In this regard, regarding the "13thF post-reception display UA", the basics are the same as when the first operation reception for the "13F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is made (13F post-reception display UA1). It's basically the same. However, when the second operation is accepted, "The hero YS attacks and the BOSS character's HP decreases to about 50% remaining (display UA2 after the reception on the 13th floor)" is performed (Figure 291 (g) ), and when the third operation is accepted, a depiction of ``The hero YS attacks and the BOSS character's HP decreases to about 25% remaining (display UA3 after the reception on the 13th floor)'' is performed ( (see Figure 291(h)), and progress as a performance can be seen.

In addition, during the 13th floor reception period according to this example, each time an operation is performed on the 13th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), the production as the 13th floor reception display UA1 (BOSS character (HP decrease) progresses. However, the display may be advanced at a predetermined probability based on the result of the determination (although other methods may be used). When an operation is performed on the screen, the display may be advanced in some cases and not in others. However, if an operation is performed on the "13th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 13th F reception period, the "13th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is Even if the display does not progress, unlike when an operation is performed on the The periodic changes in the "operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" are terminated.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 311(a), (h), and (i), the reception is received in response to the third operation reception for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". The post-reception display UB2 (in this case, when the magical power value is 2 '', the wizard MT is accumulating more MP, etc.) are still being displayed, and at timing tm2G within the 13th F reception period (see Figure 291 (i)). , it is assumed that the fourth operation is accepted for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, when the fourth operation reception is made for the "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at timing tm2G within the 13F reception period, the 13F post-reception change A can cause For example, as one of the changes A after the 13th F reception, first, the 13F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 311(a) and 311(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 311(h), (k) and FIGS. 291(f), (l), the "thirteenth F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is 13F reception output sound A2" is audibly output, and the user visually recognizes the 13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001). The "13th F effect display EF2" that makes it more difficult is displayed, and furthermore, the light emitting mode that had appeared until then in the specific light emitting section (here, the light emitting mode Q1) is terminated and appears as the "light emitting mode Q2", and the 13th F reception The rear display UA4 is displayed.

In this regard, the 13th F effect display EF2 according to this production example includes "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button The display starts when the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" on the operated side is not hidden. )" corresponding to "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front.

Furthermore, when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period, the "13F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to do so is not displayed.

In addition, the relatively expected level of ``13F post-reception display UA4'' in response to the 4th operation reception for ``13F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)'' within the 13F reception period. A case where an aspect UA4-1 (FIG. 291(i) to (k)) with a high (rate of winning a jackpot) appears, and an aspect UA4 with a lower expectation level (rate of getting a jackpot) than that aspect. -2 (Fig. 291(l) to (n)) may appear. Furthermore, as described above, when the 13F post-reception display UA4 is displayed, the corresponding "13F post-reception output sound A2" is audibly output, and the light emission mode Q2 appears in the specific light emitting section. 13F reception output sound A2" and "light emission mode Q2" may also be executed in a manner that suggests the level of expectation.

In this regard, when the aspect UA4-1 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "13F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 291(i), The ``13th effect display EF2-1'' is displayed which is a different aspect from when the aspect UA4-2 with low expectations appears.

That is, when the aspect UA4-1 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "display UA after reception on the 13th floor", the first aspect EF2-1 (see FIG. 291(i)) is displayed as the 13th floor effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UA4-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as the "13th F post-reception display UA4".

On the other hand, when the aspect UA4-2 with a relatively low expectation level appears as the "13F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 291(l), ``13th effect display EF2-2'' is displayed which is different from the case where the highly anticipated aspect UA4-1 appears.

That is, when the aspect UA4-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "13F post-reception display UA4", the second aspect EF2-2 (see FIG. 291(l)) is displayed as the 13F effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 with relatively low expectations will appear as the "13th F post-reception display UA4". Note that the 13F effect display EF2 is displayed as an image display that is different from the 13F effect display EF1 in both the first aspect EF2-1 and the second aspect EF2-2.

In addition, during the 13F reception period according to this embodiment, "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are As shown in 291, the periodic change is hidden based on the fourth operation reception for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Here, by hiding the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, the periodic changes are hidden. That will happen.

In this example, when there is a situation immediately after the operation is accepted (a situation where the 13thF effect display EF2 is displayed) (see FIGS. 291(i) and (l)), the "13thF operation related display A" is displayed. (sword decoration image SYG)” and “13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” are not hidden, and “13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is It is displayed so as to overlap the back side of the 13th F effect display EF2. After that, these "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are changed to "13F operation part A (here, the sword decoration object 5001 291 (j) and (m)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, "13F post-reception display UA4" includes such "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "13F effect display". EF2", which makes it difficult to see immediately after the "13th F reception display UA4" is displayed (Fig. 291(i), ( (see l)). However, as "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "13th F effect display EF2" etc. are hidden, The visibility of the "13th post-reception display UA4" will gradually become better. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when the "13thF effect display EF2" is displayed, it is possible to determine that the "13F post-reception display UA4" is the mode with high expectations UA4-1 and the mode with low expectations. This makes it easy to recognize whether it is displayed in UA4-2 or in UA4-2.

As shown in FIGS. 291(k) and 291(n), the display content of the "13th F post-reception display UA4" according to this production example is determined according to the expectation level aspects UA4-1 and UA4-2. We will continue to develop this.

Also, during the 13th F reception period according to this embodiment, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is as shown in FIG. 313(d) (omitted in FIGS. 290 and 291). , the background image will not be switched to a different background image (background change) as a result of the operation on "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 13F reception period, and the background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) during the 13F reception period. The background image is not switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)".

However, in place of this, during the 13F reception period, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) will be displayed on the 13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) during the 13F reception period. The background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) as a result of an operation on ``, but the background image will not be switched to a different background image (background change) as a result of an operation on ``13F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)'' during the 13F reception period. It may also be possible to switch to another background image (background change). Furthermore, if the background image is switched to another (background change) triggered by an operation on the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the 13th F reception period (for example, the timing tm2G There may be both a case where there is no switching (background change) (for example, each operation at timings tm2D to tm2F).

In this regard, during the 13F reception period according to this embodiment, the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section is as shown in FIG. 313(e). (Here, the sword decoration 5001)" may be switched (light emission change) to another light-emitting mode (here, the light-emitting modes Q1 and Q2), but within the 13F reception period, the 13F operation The light emitting mode is not switched to another light emitting mode (light emitting change) in response to an operation on part B (here, the operation button 410).

In addition, during the 13F reception period, as shown in FIG. 313(j), the 13F operation-related sound a is output in connection with the generation of the sound a. The 13F operation-related sound a according to this example is output as the above-mentioned "acceptance permissible sound" and can be selectively audible as either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2". It may also be possible to output it. For example, when the 13F reception period occurs, when the "first permissible sound a1" is audibly output as the 13F operation-related sound a, the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 13F operation-related sound a. It is desirable to set the setting so that it suggests that the expectation level (ratio) of winning the jackpot is higher than when the player hit the jackpot. Note that the "first permissible sound a1" which is a form of the 13F operation-related sound a is output as the same sound as the "first permissible sound a1" which is a form of the 12F operation-related sound a described above. , the "second permissible sound a2" which is a form of the 13th F operation-related sound a is output as a different sound from the "second permissible sound a2" which is a form of the 12F operation-related sound a described above. ing. However, the "second permissible sound a2" which is a form of the 13F operation-related sound a is also output as the same sound as the "second permissible sound a2" which is a form of the 12F operation-related sound a described above. You can. Furthermore, the 13th F reception acceptable sound does not necessarily have to be output in one of multiple modes (multiple acceptable sounds), but may be output only in one mode (one acceptable sound). There may be.

In this regard, during the 13F reception period, a situation may occur in which an operation is accepted while the 13F operation-related sound a is audibly output. Regardless of whether an operation is accepted for either the "sword ornament 5001)" or the "13th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)", the audible output of the 13F operation-related sound a is interrupted. It is designed to never happen.

In addition, during the 13F reception period, based on the operation performed on the 13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), the 13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. ” and “13F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)” will be hidden, and the 13F reception period will be ended. However, when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", no matter how many times the operation is performed, this will trigger the "13F operation related display A (sword 410)". Decorative image SYG)" and "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may not be hidden or the 13th floor reception period may not end.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 13th F reception period, the magical power value (the area filled out with respect to the "magic" decoration display) When the maximum amount has been accumulated, it may be arranged to wait until the timing tm3 at which the 13th F reception period ends, and perform a magic effect to perform withdrawal based on the arrival of the timing tm3. In this case, even if the magic value has accumulated to the maximum, until timing tm3 arrives, operation reception for the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is also allowed. By doing so, it is possible to challenge the BOSS character to attack multiple times while the effect of applying magic and leaving is confirmed, thereby improving the interest in the game. You will be able to do this. However, when the 13th F reception display UA4 is displayed as a result of multiple attacks (when the 13th F reception period ends), the effect of magic and withdrawal will not be performed.

Alternatively, before the 13F reception period occurs, a production judgment is performed, and if a special judgment result is not obtained as a result of the production judgment, the 13F operation section B ( Here, no matter how many times you operate the operation button 410), the magic value will not accumulate to the maximum (the reception period will not end). Good too. In this case, when the fourth operation is performed on the "13th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "13th F post-reception display UA4" is displayed, indicating a relatively low expectation level. It may be arranged that UA4-2 always appears, or it may be arranged that UA4-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, may appear. In this regard, if the mode UA4-1 with a relatively high expectation level may appear when an operation is performed on the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the magic value cannot be accumulated to an increase no matter how many times the operation is performed on the "13th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)". can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, the 13F post-reception display UB (description of increasing magic value, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) is not only "13F omen production display" but also "13F 291 (f) to (n), etc.). Also in relation to the "post-reception display UA", it is not displayed behind it, but is displayed so as to overlap in front of it (see FIGS. 291(f) to (n), etc.). In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 13th floor (depicts of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) appears to overlap with the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. (See FIG. 290, FIG. 291, etc.) However, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed so as to overlap behind it.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 13F post-reception display UB (depicts of increasing magic value, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.), during the 13F reception period, the 13F operation section A (here , sword ornament 5001)" is prevented from being hidden based on this operation. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 313(i), FIG. Once the ``13th F reception display UA4'' and ``13th F effect display EF'' have started to be displayed in response to an operation on the ``operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'', they continue to be displayed. Of course, even when "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "13th F effect display EF" are hidden, This means that the display can continue.

However, in this case, the 13F post-reception display UB (such as depictions of magical power increasing and wizard MT saving MP) will not be displayed during the period when "13F post-reception display UA4" is displayed. Although it is not necessary to display the information, it is desirable. As a result, while promoting the fact that it is possible to advance the production by accepting operations (magic performed by a wizard) on the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "13th F. It becomes possible to suitably indicate that the production is in a state of progress by accepting an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In addition, during the 13F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, periodic changes (see Figure 289) that had previously appeared in "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are removed. It continues without any indication (end, interruption, cycle change, etc.). That is, during the 13F reception period, periodic changes in "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are different from "13F operation section B ( Here, the display mode does not change before and after an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (operation that does not end the acceptance period), and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the operation reception for the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" The "13F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (cycle 13F time A, cycle 13F time B).

On the other hand, during the 13F reception period, as shown in FIG. 313 and FIG. Periodic changes in "Display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are hidden. Here, in the first to third operation receptions for the "13th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "13F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" does not hide itself but hides (ends) their periodic changes, but the fourth time for "13F operation section A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" At the operation reception, by hiding the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "13F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", periodic changes in them can be hidden. It will be displayed.

Further, in this example, while the 13F reception period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease over time, but this may not necessarily be done.

In addition, during the 13F reception period, the 13F operation section B (here, Even if you continue to operate (press) the ``operation button 410'', the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the operation will be automatically accepted at predetermined intervals) (auto continuous press). The function is not activated (see FIG. 313(b)). In this case, within the 13F reception period, multiple operations are performed on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" corresponding to the "13F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)". Needless to say, if the player wishes to accept the request, he or she must repeatedly operate (press) the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

However, during the 13F reception period, the 13F operation section A (here, When the "sword ornament 5001)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation is accepted multiple times (the automatic repeated hit function is enabled and the operation is automatically accepted repeatedly at a predetermined time interval). (see Figure 313(a)). In this production example, it is assumed that the "13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state from timing tm2D (the situation shown in FIG. 291(f)). As a result, operations are accepted at predetermined intervals (timings tm2E, tm2F, tm2G).

In addition, the 13th F reception period originally means that, as shown in FIGS. 313(c) and 314(c), when there is no operation reception (which ends the reception period), the 13th F reception period continues until timing tm3 arrives. , is terminated based on the arrival of timing tm3.

In this regard, the 13th F reception period may be generated as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. In other words, in this case, the operation reception for ending the reception period (here, the fourth operation reception for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" until the timing tm3 arrives in the 13F reception period) ) is not completed, the operation reception (herein, "13F operation section A") to end the reception period by operating the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is performed within the reception period. (Here, the fourth operation reception for the sword ornament 5001) is performed, and the same post-reception change A can occur based on the arrival of timing tm3. In this case, for the production corresponding to the "13th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" that requires multiple operations within the 13th F reception period and in which the so-called automatic continuous hit function is not activated, the game Since the player cannot enjoy the game unless he or she operates it, it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, even if the 13F operation section B (here, operation button 410) is operated during the 13F reception period, the 13F reception period does not end and timing tm3 arrives. , the same post-acceptance change A as when the operation is performed on the "13th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the acceptance period occurs based on the arrival of timing tm3. becomes. In other words, in this case, while the 13F post-reception display UB (description of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) is displayed, the automatic button function described above is activated and the post-reception display UB is displayed. Change A (change in display after reception, output sound after reception, change in light emission mode in a specific light emitting section, etc.) will occur.

In the 13th floor reception period according to this example, when a predetermined number of operations (here, the 4th time) are performed on the "13th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The 13F post-reception display UA4 was displayed when the ``operation reception to end the corresponding reception period'' was made, but instead of this, the ``13F operation section A (here, the sword A determination is made when an operation is performed on the "decoration object 5001)", and based on the result of the determination, an "operation acceptance to end the acceptance period" is made and the 13F post-reception display UA4 is displayed. Alternatively, an "operation reception that does not end the reception period" may be performed and any of the 13F post-reception displays UA1 to UA3 may be displayed. The point is that when such an event (when an operation is performed on the "13th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 13th F reception period, this event is used as a trigger to "operate reception to end the relevant reception period"). '' is performed) should just occur when a predetermined condition is met.

Moreover, the "13th F precursor effect display" according to this example is made to be in a non-display state before the timing tm3 arrives. In this regard, the "13th F portent effect display" according to this example is such that, while the "13F portent effect display" is being displayed, the "13F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is Even if an operation is performed, this will not trigger the display to become hidden. However, regarding the "13th F omen effect display", if the operation is performed on the "13F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the "13F omen effect display" is being displayed. In this case, there may be both a case where the screen is set to a hidden state using this as a trigger, and a case where the screen is not set to a display state using this as a trigger. For example, while the "13th F omen effect display" is being displayed, an operation reception is performed to end the 13th F reception period by operating the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Sometimes this is used as an opportunity to hide the "13th F omen effect display", but the operation reception that does not end the 13th F reception period due to the operation on the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" When this is done, the "13th F portent effect display" may not be hidden from view using this as an opportunity.

FIG. 315 is a time chart illustrating an example of the content of performance when the ``condition 14F'' is satisfied as the generation condition, the 14th F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 316 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the 14th F acceptance period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIGS. 317 and 318 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 14th F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "14th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 14th F fluctuation pattern. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 14th F variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 14F variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "14th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "14th F variation pattern", timing tn2 has arrived when the 14F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. Based on this (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 14F"), "reception regarding changes after 14th reception (such as display UA, UB after 14th reception, sound output after 14th reception, etc.)" is permitted. The above-mentioned 14th F acceptance period (validity period) can occur.

Here, the 14th F reception period according to this embodiment is the same as the 13th F reception period described above (see FIGS. 313 and 314). Operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is configured such that multiple operations can be accepted until the corresponding 14F reception period ends (multiple operations allowed). period). In this example, the "14th F operation section A" used in the 14th F reception period is replaced with the "12F operation section A" used in the 12F reception period and the "13F operation section A" used in the 13F reception period. ", etc. (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is used as the same operation part, but the operation parts may be different from each other. In addition, the "14th F operation section B" used in the 14th F reception period may be replaced with the "12F operation section B" used in the 12th F reception period, the "13F operation section B" used in the 13F reception period, etc. Although the same operating section (here, the operating button 410) is used, different operating sections may be used. In addition, during the 14F reception period, operation reception for an operation unit different from either of the 14F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 14F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) may be further permitted. You can do it like this.

However, in the "14th F reception period", as shown in FIGS. 315(f), (g), and 317(a), when the "14th F reception period" occurs, the Operation related display (here, "operation related display" corresponding to the 14th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), "operation related display" corresponding to the 14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410) This period is different from the above-mentioned "13th F reception period (see FIGS. 313 and 314)" in that none of the "related display") is displayed. In other words, in this case, the fact that the plurality of operating units (14th F operating unit A, 14th F operating unit B) that are in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted is kept secret. As a result, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when an opportunity for operation is given.

In this regard, in the "14th F reception period" according to this production example, the final result display appears as a result of operating the 14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410), which allows multiple operations. or when a situation arises in which the production is not making much progress, the user may be asked, ``Isn't there another operation section (operation section A on the 14th floor) that is secretly given an opportunity to operate?'' It has realized a performance that makes you feel like ``.'' In other words, in this case, the production progresses by switching the operation target from "operation on the 14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" to "operating on the 14th F operating section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". This makes it more likely that the user will try to do so.

In addition, in the "14th F reception period" according to this production example, no matter how many times you operate either the 14th F operating section A or the 14th F operating section B, which allows multiple operations, this will trigger the 14th F. The reception period is not set to end, and will only be ended based on the arrival of timing tn3, which is the elapse of a predetermined period of time after the occurrence of the 14th F reception period. There is. As a result, the player can see how the 14th floor acceptance period does not end no matter how many times the player operates it, and is aware of the possibility that there are other operation sections that are secretly given operation opportunities. You will be able to feel it.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, first, in generating the "14th F reception period", this (state in which operation reception is permitted) occurs at a timing before the occurrence of the 14th F reception period. There will be no display of a warning sign suggesting that the event will occur. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 315, 316, and 317(a), even after the 14th F reception period occurs, basically the 14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) An "operation-related display (sample image display)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 14F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. Never.

Further, in this production example, when an operation is performed on the "14th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 14th F reception period, the 14th F post-reception display UB is displayed using this as a trigger. However, at this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance.

By the way, during the 14th floor reception period according to this embodiment, the first background image HK1 is displayed as the "background image" on the effect display device 1600, as in the case of the 12th floor reception period and the 13th floor reception period described above. During the duration of the 14th F reception period, no background change occurs from the first background image HK1. As for the first background image HK1, it is sufficient that the background does not change from the first background image HK1 while the 14F reception period continues, and it is not necessarily displayed before the 14F reception period occurs. It may not be possible. For example, it may be displayed by a background change that occurs when the 14th F reception period occurs.

It should be noted that the "background image" is something that can be displayed even in a situation where the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception being performed during the reception permissible period (operation permissible state) is not displayed on the production display device 1600. This is an image that is displayed so as to appear behind the post-reception display when the post-reception display is displayed. Further, the "background image" may be one in which the display changes periodically, or may be one in which only one display appears without changing. Therefore, "background change" means that such a display pattern switches to another display pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change may be replaced by another periodic change. This means switching.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light emitting modes. Then, during the 14F reception period, the event occurs while the specific light emitting unit is emitting light in the first light emission mode among the plurality of light emission modes, and the 14F reception period continues. During this period, no change from the first light emission mode to another light emission mode occurs in the specific light emission section. The first light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section may be one that does not change from the first light emitting mode to another light emitting mode while the 14th F acceptance period continues, and the 14th F acceptance period occurs. It may not necessarily be executed before the execution. For example, it may be something that appears (is executed) by a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 14th F reception period occurs.

Note that the "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, and may be such that the light emission changes periodically, or may be such that only one light emission appears without changing. Therefore, "change in light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change is caused by another periodic change. It means switching to change. Further, a "non-emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes".

Further, in the 14th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 316, if the player does not perform any operation, the first background image HK1 is is continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the first light emission mode is continuously executed on the specific light emitting section. However, the background may change from the first background image HK1 when the 14th F acceptance period ends. Further, the first light emission mode may be changed to another light emission mode when the 14th F acceptance period ends.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 315 and 317, the operation reception for the "14th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the "14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is performed. The first operation is performed on the "14F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tn2A while keeping the fact that all operations are permitted. This assumes the case where When the first operation is performed on the "14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" at timing tn2A, the above-mentioned 14th F post-reception display UB is displayed using this as an opportunity.

Here, during the 14th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the ``14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', as one of the ``14F post-reception changes A'' corresponding to the operation, A presentation (displayed on the UA after the 14th floor reception) such as "Which type of equipment will the hero YS appear wearing?" will appear, and depending on the result, whether the expectation level of the jackpot is high or low (" 100%" or "0%") may be suggested. In this production example, the display UA after reception on the 14th floor is divided into "first production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear, and "second production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. It is designed to be displayed in either "Production mode UA2" or "Third production mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears wearing iron armor. It is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the "first performance mode UA1", and the "third performance mode UA3" is higher than the "second performance mode UA2".

On the other hand, during the 14th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", as one of the "14th F post-reception changes B" corresponding to the operation, The effect (displayed after reception on the 14th floor UB) is now displayed, such as "Which type of equipment will the wizard MT appear wearing?" For example, the result may indicate whether the jackpot expectation level is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%"). In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 14th floor is divided into "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick, and "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. , the wizard MT appears equipped with a cane, which is displayed in either "Third performance mode UB3", and "Second production mode UB2" is more likely to be a jackpot than "First production mode UB1". The level of expectation is high, and the "third performance mode UB3" suggests that the level of expectation for a jackpot is higher than the "second performance mode UB2".

In this production example, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" while the 14th F reception display UB is displayed. There may also be a case where the "14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is operated while the post-reception display UA is being displayed. In this case, normally, the 14th F post-reception display UB starts to be executed in one of the plurality of modes described above based on the operation reception on the "14th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and is already The 14th F post-reception display UA, which is in the execution state, does not take this as an opportunity to cause any changes or to be terminated. However, at this time, if the final mode (third production mode UB3) as the 14th-F post-reception display UB is displayed, the operation on the "14th-F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed. When this happens, no change in appearance (display change) occurs.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 317(b) and 317(c), the first operation is performed on the "14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 14th F reception period. In this case, the 14th floor post-reception display UB, which is one of the "14th floor post-reception changes B", will be executed as the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick. There is.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, if an operation is performed on "14th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 14th F reception period, the corresponding output sound after reception is Since there is no audible output (see Figure 315(k)), even if a new wizard MT appears equipped with one of the three types mentioned above, due to its secrecy, etc. It becomes possible to arouse feelings of anxiety such as, ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 14th F reception period is too low, the game may become less interesting. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, when an operation is performed on "14th F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410)" within the 14th F reception period, the display UB after the 14th F reception (which type the wizard MT 317 (b) and (c), it should not be displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, and when it overlaps, It is intended to be displayed so that it can be seen on the front side.

In addition, regarding the "14th F post-reception change B" that corresponds to the operation on the "14th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 14th F reception period, it also applies to the second and subsequent operations described below. In addition, a performance change different from that of the 14F post-reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light emitting unit) may be further performed. Alternatively, "Change B after receiving the 14th F" does not necessarily have to be executed using multiple effect elements, but may be performed using any one of the above-mentioned effect elements (for example, changing the lighting mode of the effect lamp that is different from the specific light emitting part). The same effects may be obtained only by changing the performance.

In addition, the execution time of the "14th floor post-reception display UB" in response to an operation reception on the "14th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is set longer than the time set as the reception period. Yes (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" are based on the previous operations on the "14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be carried out while the "14th F post-reception display UB" is being displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 317(c) is appearing).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315, at timing tn2B within the 14th-F reception period (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 317(c) appears), "14th-F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time.

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the "14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 14th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in (d) to (f), the 14F post-reception display UB as one of the 14F post-reception changes B is changed to "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. It is set to be executed. In this example, the wizard MT (first production mode UB1), who had been equipped with a stick, is depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 317(d)), and then equipped with a rod. However, this is the only way to create a display change as the display UB after receiving the 14th floor (see Figure 317(e)). I can't do it. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 315(k)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315, at timing tn2C within the 14th-F reception period (a situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 317(f) appears), "14th-F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the third time.

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the "14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 14th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in (g) to (i), the 14th F post-reception display UB as one of the 14th F post-reception changes B is changed to "3rd production mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a cane. It is set to be executed. In this example, the wizard MT (second production mode UB2), who had been equipped with a rod, is depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 317(g)), and then equipped with a staff. However, this is the only method for causing the display change as the display UB after receiving the 14th floor (see Figure 317 (h)). I can't do it. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 315(k)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315, at timing tn2D within the 14th-F reception period (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 317(i) appears), "14th-F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the fourth time.

However, in this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 14th F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 315(i) and (k), As shown in FIGS. 317(j) and 318(k), not only the output sound after reception is not audible, but also there is no visible change ( aspect) does not appear. In other words, in this case, there is no apparent change after reception between before and after the fourth operation is performed on "14F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 14F reception period. This does not occur, and the performance will continue as it was before the fourth operation was performed. At this time, the output sound after acceptance is also not audibly output.

In this example, depending on how many times the 14th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) has been operated within the 14th F reception period, the 14F post-reception display UB is displayed as a However, instead of this, within the 14th floor reception period, the 14th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific mode, or a new mode may not appear. You can also do something like this. In short, such display changes only need to occur when predetermined conditions are met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UB2" appears as the display UB after receiving the 14th floor, after that, only the "14th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" continues to be operated. However, the "first production mode UB1" will not appear when the operation is accepted within the 14th floor reception period, and the "third production mode UB3" will be displayed as the display UB after the 14th floor reception. appears, even if you continue to operate only the "14thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the "1st The "presentation mode UB1" and the "second production mode UB2" never appear. Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 14th F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this production example, even if the "14F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated after the "third production mode UB3" is displayed, the "4th production mode UB3" described above is The same situation as ``operation'' will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 14th floor reception period, even though the 14th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the ``14F operation section B (here, operation button 410).'' I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the time remaining in the 14th F reception period decreases (as the time elapses from the occurrence of the problem increases). In particular, during the 14th floor reception period, if an operation is performed on the "14th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the 14th floor reception display UB may be displayed; This feeling of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 315, 317, and 318, the initial game strategy (timing tn2A to tn2D)'' and switches to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by multiple operations on the ``14th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' side. It is as expected.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 315(a), (h), and (i), the 14th-F post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "14th-F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 318(k)), at timing tn2E within the 14th F reception period, a request is made to the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". This assumes that the first operation is performed.

In this pachinko machine 1, if the first operation is accepted for the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tn2E within the 14th F acceptance period, the change after the 14th F acceptance is changed. It can give rise to A.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 315(h), (k), and 318(l), such a change A after receiving the 14th F is "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". "The 14th F post-acceptance output sound A" corresponding to the first operation is audibly output, and the 14th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed. Here, the "first performance mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear appears as the display UA after the reception on the 14th floor. However, as shown in FIGS. 318(l) and (m), the "Display UA after reception on the 14th floor (which type of equipment the hero YS appears wearing)" is 14F Post-Reception Display UB", it is displayed so that it can be seen behind the decorative pattern SZ.

In this example, the "output sound A after reception on the 14th floor" is output when an operation is accepted for any operation unit during the reception period on the 12th floor or the reception period on the 13th floor described above. The aim is to ensure that the sound is output without any noise.

In addition, regarding the "14th F post-reception change A" that corresponds to the operation on the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 14th F reception period, in the case of the second or later operation described below. Including, you may further perform a performance change that is different from the display UA after the 14F reception (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp that is different from the specific light emitting unit). Alternatively, the "change A after receiving the 14th F" does not necessarily have to be executed by multiple effect elements, but may be performed by any one of the above-mentioned effect elements (for example, changing the lighting mode of the effect lamp that is different from the specific light emitting part). The same effects may be obtained only by changing the performance.

In addition, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 315(i) and FIGS. 318(l) and (m), while "14th F reception display UB" is being displayed, "14th F operation section The first operation will be performed on "A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". However, the "14thF post-reception display UB" is hidden when the first operation is accepted for the "14thF operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

Here, the "14th F post-reception change A (14th F post-reception display UA)" corresponding to the operation reception on the "14th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is the "14th F post-reception change B". (Display UB after reception on the 14th floor)", the execution state is ended in a short time within the reception period, and the application is placed in a non-execution (non-display) state.

Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "14th F operating section A (here, the operating button 410)" are based on the previous operations on the "14th F operating section A (here, the operating button 410)". This may be performed while the "14th F Post-Reception Display UA" has already been set to non-execution (hidden). '', in a situation where the 14F post-reception display UA is not displayed, when the ``14F post-reception display UA (the hero YS wears equipment of any type) ``Will you appear wearing one?'' will begin execution.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 315(h), at timing tn2F within the 14th-F reception period (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 318(m) appears), "14th-F operation section A ( Here, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001). In addition, in this production example, for each subsequent operation on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "14th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the previous operation is displayed. It is assumed that the test will be carried out in the middle of the day.

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 14th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 318(n) to (p), the display UA after the 14th floor reception as one of the changes A after the 14th floor reception is the "second production mode" in which the hero YS appears equipped with cloth clothes. UA2". In this example, the hero YS (first performance mode UA1), who had been equipped with only underwear up until then, is depicted moving out of the display screen (see Figure 318(n)), and then is shown wearing cloth. Although it was decided to depict the character reappearing with clothes equipped (second production mode UA2) (see Figure 318(o)), the method for causing the display change as the display UA after receiving the 14th floor is It is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 315(k)). In addition, the "14th floor post-reception display UB" is also set to a hidden state when a second operation is accepted for the "14th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315(h), at timing tn2G within the 14th-F reception period (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 318(p) appears), "14th-F operation section A ( Here, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 14th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 318(q) to (s), the display UA after the 14th floor reception, which is one of the changes A after the 14th floor reception, is the "3rd production mode" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. It is designed to be executed as "UA3". In this example, the hero YS (second performance mode UA2), who had been equipped with cloth clothes until then, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see Figure 318 (q)), and then It was decided that the character would reappear with the armor equipped (third production mode UA3) (see Figure 318(r)), but as a method to cause a display change as the display UA after receiving the 14th floor. is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 315(k)). In addition, the "14th floor post-reception display UB" is also set to a hidden state when the third operation is accepted for the "14th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315(h), at timing tn2H within the 14th-F reception period (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 318(s) appears), "14th-F operation section A ( Here, it is assumed that the fourth operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 14th F reception period, As shown in 318(t) to (v), the display UA after the 14th floor reception as one of the changes A after the 14th floor reception is the "third production mode" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. It is designed to be executed as "UA3". In this example, the hero YS (third production mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor, is depicted as moving outside the display screen (see Figure 318(t)), and then It was decided that the character would reappear with the armor equipped (third production mode UA3) (see Figure 318(u)), but as a method to cause the display change as the display UA after receiving the 14th floor. is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 315(k)). In addition, the "14th floor post-reception display UB" is also set to a hidden state when the fourth operation is accepted for the "14th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

In other words, in this case, during the 14F reception period, when the fourth operation is performed on "14F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the 14F post-reception display that was in the execution state until then is A performance will appear in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the UA is interrupted and the "third performance mode UA3" as the display UA starts again after the 14th F reception.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 315(h), at timing tn2I within the 14th-F reception period (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 318(v) appears), "14th-F operation section A ( Here, it is assumed that the fifth operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the fifth operation is performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 14th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 318(w) to (y), the display UA after the 14th floor reception, which is one of the changes A after the 14th floor reception, is the "third production mode" in which the hero YS appears equipped with iron armor. It is designed to be executed as "UA3". In this example, the hero YS (third production mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see Figure 318(w)), and then It was decided that the character would reappear with the armor equipped (third production mode UA3) (see Figure 318(x)), but as a method to cause a display change as a display UA after receiving the 14th floor. is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the output sound is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 315(k)). In addition, the "14th F reception display UB" is also set to a hidden state when the fifth operation reception is made for the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue in its running state without being turned off.

In other words, in this case, during the 14th F reception period, when the 5th operation is performed on the 14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), the same as when the 4th operation is performed, A performance in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the 14F post-reception display UA, which had been in execution until then, is interrupted, and the "third production mode UA3" as the 14F post-reception display UA starts to be executed again. will appear.

In addition, in this example, depending on how many times the operation was performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 14th F reception period, "14F post-reception display UA" is displayed. However, instead of this, within the 14th floor reception period, the 14th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", and based on the result of the determination, the display is changed to a specific mode or the same mode appears again. You may also In short, it is sufficient that such display changes occur when each predetermined condition is met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UA2" appears as the display UA after the 14th floor reception, then the "first production mode UA1" will be displayed when the operation is accepted within the 14th floor reception period. " will not appear, and if "Third production mode UA3" appears as the display UA after receiving the 14th floor, then " ``First performance mode UA1'' and ``Second performance mode UA2'' never appear. Therefore, the "third performance mode UA3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 14F post-reception display UA. Therefore, in this production example, even if an operation is performed on the "14F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" after the "third production mode UA3" is displayed, the above-mentioned "4 The same situation as "the 5th operation" or "the 5th operation" will appear.

Furthermore, regarding the "output sound after receiving the 14th F", the same aspect can appear regardless of the number of times the operation is accepted. However, the audible output may be made in a different manner depending on the aspect of "14thF post-reception change A (14thF post-reception display UA)".

In addition, in this production example, in response to an operation performed on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 14th F reception period, "Change A after the 14th F reception (change A (change A after the 14th F reception)" ``14F Post-Reception Display UA)'' appears, and the ``14F Post-Reception Change'' is displayed in response to an operation being performed on the ``14F Operation Section B (here, operation button 410)'' within the 14F reception period. B (14F post-reception display UB)" appears, regardless of the timing of these operations, the execution state of "14F post-reception change B (14F post-reception display UB)" is terminated. Then, the execution state of "14th F post-reception change A (14th F post-reception display UA)" is terminated.

Further, during the 14th F reception period according to this embodiment, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is During the 14th floor reception period, the background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) due to the operation on the 14th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), and within the 14th floor reception period, There is no switching to another background image (background change) triggered by an operation on the "14th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)".

However, instead of this, during the 14th floor reception period, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) will be displayed on the 14th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) during the 14th floor reception period. The background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) as a result of an operation on ", but will not be triggered by an operation on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 14th F reception period. It may also be possible to switch to another background image (background change). Furthermore, if the background image is switched to another (background change) triggered by an operation on the "14th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the 14th F reception period (for example, at timing tn2G There may be both a case where there is no switching (background change) (for example, each operation at timings tn2D to tn2F).

In this regard, during the 14F reception period according to this embodiment, regarding the light emission mode (here, the first light emission mode) in the specific light emitting section, as shown in FIG. 315(e), the 14F reception If the light emission mode is switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, light emission mode A, B, C) triggered by an operation on the "14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the period ( There are both timings tn2E, tn2F, tn2G) and cases where the light emission mode is not switched (light emission change) (for example, each operation at timings tn2H and tn2I). B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is not triggered to switch to another light emission mode (light emission change).

However, during the 14th floor reception period (see FIG. 315) according to this embodiment, the operation on the 14th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) switches to another light emission mode (light emission change). ) is not performed (for example, each operation at timings tn2H and tn2I), a process is performed in which the light emission mode that had appeared up to that point (here, light emission mode C) is output again from the beginning.

On the other hand, during the 13th F reception period (see FIG. 313) according to this embodiment, switching to another light emitting mode is triggered by an operation on the "13th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" ( If the light emission change) is not performed (for example, each operation at timings tm2D, tn2E, and tn2F), the process of re-outputting the light emission mode that had appeared up to that point (here, the first light emission mode) from the beginning is not performed. As mentioned above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even during the 14th F acceptance period (see FIG. 315), switching to another light emitting mode is triggered by an operation on "14th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". (Light emission change) (for example, each operation at timing tn2A, tn2B, tn2C, tn2D), it is not possible to perform the process of re-outputting the light emission mode that had appeared up to that point (here, the first light emission mode) from the beginning. do not have. The same holds true when the "14th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is operated during the 13th F reception period (see FIG. 313).

In addition, during the 14th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 315(j), no operation-related sound related to the occurrence is output, and no display indicating the remaining time is displayed.

Furthermore, in this production example, the 14th F post-reception display UA is not displayed so as to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ, but is displayed behind it (Fig. 318 (See (l) to (y), etc.). On the other hand, the 14th F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to the decorative pattern SZ.

Furthermore, in this production example, the 14th F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern SZ in front of it. However, instead of this, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed so that it appears to overlap behind it.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 14F post-reception display UB, when an operation is performed on the "14F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" during the 14F reception period, the display UB is displayed based on this. It was made so that it would not be left in the display state. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 315(i), FIG. 14F Post-Reception Display UA4" can continue to be displayed at the time it starts being displayed.

However, in this case, it is desirable, although not essential, that the 14th-F post-reception display UB be hidden during the period in which "14th-F post-reception display UA4" is displayed. As a result, while promoting the fact that it is possible to advance the production by accepting operations (magic performed by a wizard) on the "14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "14th F. It becomes possible to suitably indicate that the production is in a state of progress by accepting an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In addition, during the 14th floor reception period, even if the 14th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception will be performed multiple times (for a predetermined period of time). The operation reception is automatically repeated each time (the auto-repeat function is not enabled) (see FIG. 315(b)). In this case, if the player wishes to accept multiple operations for the ``14th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' within the 14th F acceptance period, the player must Needless to say, it is necessary to repeatedly operate (press) the 14F operation section B (here, the operation button 410).

However, during the 14F reception period, if the "14F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" continues to be operated (pressed), the operation reception will be performed multiple times (auto continuous press). The function is enabled and operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals (see FIG. 315(a)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 315(c), the 14th F reception period continues until timing tn3 arrives, and ends only on the arrival of timing tn3. In this respect, the 14th F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 316, if no operation is performed within the reception period on the 14th floor, no changes in display or sound output related to the reception period will be made on the 14th floor. The reception period will end.

In the 14th floor reception period according to this example, when a predetermined number of operations (here, the third time) are performed on the "14th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The final display mode UA3 as the display UA was made to appear after the 14th F acceptance period, but instead of this, for the ``14th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' within the 14th F acceptance period. The determination may be made when the operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, "operation acceptance for displaying the final display mode UA3" may be made and the final display mode UA3 may be displayed. .

FIG. 319 is a time chart illustrating an example of the production contents when the ``condition 15F'' is satisfied as the generation condition, the 15th F reception period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 320 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the 15th F reception period occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 321 is a diagram showing an example of performance when the 15th F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "15th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 15th F fluctuation pattern. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 15th F variation pattern, sound output according to the 15F variation pattern (normal BGM playback, etc. when not reachable), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "15th F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 319(a), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "15th F variation pattern", timing to2 has arrived when the 15th F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ. Based on (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 15F"), "reception regarding changes after 15th F reception (display UA, UB after 15th F reception, sound output after 15th F reception, etc.)" is permitted. The above-mentioned 15th F acceptance period (validity period) can occur.

Here, during the 15th F reception period according to this embodiment, the 15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) accepts one operation until the 15th F reception period ends. The 15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations until the 15th floor reception period ends. There is. In this example, the "15th F operation section A" used in the 15th F reception period is replaced with the "12F operation section A" used in the 12F reception period and the "13F operation section A" used in the 13F reception period. '' and the "14th F operating section A" used in the 14th F reception period (here, the sword decoration body 5001), but the operating sections may be different from each other. In addition, the "15th F operation section B" used in the 15th F reception period can be replaced with the "12F operation section B" used in the 12th F reception period, the "13F operation section B" used in the 13F reception period, Although the same operating section (here, the operating button 410) is used as the "14th F operating section B" used in the 14th F reception period, different operating sections may be used. In addition, during the 15F reception period, operation reception for an operation unit different from either of the 15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) may be further permitted. You can do it like this.

That is, during the 15th floor reception period, for example, although the user starts operating the 15th floor operating section B (in this case, the operating button 410), which allows multiple operations, the user is unable to play the game because the final result does not appear. During the 15th-F acceptance period (multiple operation permissible period), the person feels uneasy and changes from "operation on the 15th-F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" to "the 15th-F operation section A (here, the operation button 410)". It is assumed that there will be a case where the user attempts to advance the performance by switching to ``operation on the sword decoration object 5001)''.

In addition, in the "15th F reception period", as shown in FIGS. 319(f) and (g) and FIG. occurs, the operation-related display corresponding to the operation section (here, the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 15thF operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), the 15thF operation section B (here, the "operation-related display") In this case, none of the "operation related displays" corresponding to the operation buttons 410) are displayed. In other words, in this case, even during the "15th F acceptance period", the multiple operating units (15th F operating unit A, 15th F operating unit B) that are in a state in which operation acceptance is allowed are all in the "15th F acceptance period". The fact that the user is "in a state where he or she is present" is kept secret, and this can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension when an opportunity for operation is given.

In this regard, in the "15th F reception period" according to this production example, as well as the above-mentioned "14th F reception period", the 15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410), which is allowed to be operated multiple times, is When the final result display appears as a result of an operation, or when a situation appears where the production is slow to progress, etc. The performance is such that you can feel that there is a 15th floor operation section A). That is, in this case, the operation target is switched from "operation on the 15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" to "operation on the 15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" to advance the production. This makes it more likely that the user will try to do so.

In addition, in the "15th floor reception period" according to this production example, no matter how many times you operate the 15th floor operation section B, which allows multiple operations, the 15th floor reception period will not end. There is no such thing.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, in order to generate the "15th F reception period", similar to the "14th F reception period" described above, this is done at a timing before the occurrence of the 15th F reception period. A precursor effect display indicating that a state in which operation reception is permitted will occur is not executed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 319, 320, and 321(a), even after the 15th F reception period occurs, basically the 15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) An "operation-related display (sample image display)" corresponding to the above-mentioned 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. Never.

Furthermore, in this production example, when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 15th F reception period, the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed using this as an opportunity. However, at this time, there are both cases in which the output sound B after receiving the 15th F is audibly output and cases in which it is not audibly output.

By the way, in the 15th floor reception period according to this embodiment, a second background image HK2 different from the above-mentioned "first background image HK1" is displayed as a "background image" on the effect display device 1600. , while the 15th F reception period continues, no background change occurs from the second background image HK2. Regarding the second background image HK2, it is sufficient that the background does not change from the second background image HK2 while the 15th F reception period continues, and it is not necessarily displayed before the 15th F reception period occurs. It may not be possible. For example, it may be anything that is displayed at the time of occurrence of the 15th F reception period, such as one that is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the 15th F reception period occurs. Although the second background image HK2 according to this example is displayed as a different image from the first background image HK1, at first glance, it seems that the second background image HK2 is displayed as a different image from the first background image HK1. It is difficult to recognize which background image is being displayed. However, the mode of the second background image HK2 is not necessarily limited to this mode, and may be any other mode as long as it is different.

It should be noted that the "background image" is something that can be displayed even in a situation where the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance during the acceptance acceptance period (operation acceptance state) is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is an image that is displayed so that it appears behind the post-reception display when the post-reception display is displayed. Further, the "background image" may be one in which the display changes periodically, or may be one in which only one display appears without changing. Therefore, "background change" means that such a display pattern switches to another display pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change may be replaced by another periodic change. This means switching.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light emitting modes. Then, during the 15th F reception period, the specific light emitting section emits light in a second light emitting mode different from the "first light emitting mode" among the plurality of light emitting modes, and the 15th F reception While the period continues, the specific light emitting section does not change from the second light emission mode to another light emission mode. The second light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section may be one that does not change from the first light emitting mode to another light emitting mode while the 15th F acceptance period continues, and the 15th F acceptance period occurs. It may not necessarily be executed before the execution. For example, it may be anything that appears at the time of occurrence of the 15th F reception period, such as one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 15th F reception period occurs.

Note that the "light emission mode" refers to a light emission pattern, and may be such that the light emission changes periodically, or may be such that only one light emission appears without changing. Therefore, "change in light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change is caused by another periodic change. It means switching to change. Further, a "non-emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes". In this case, the "non-light emitting mode" may be the first light emitting mode or the second light emitting mode.

Furthermore, in the 15th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 320, if the player does not perform any operation, the second background image HK2 is continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the second light emitting mode is continuously executed on the specific light emitting section. However, a background change may occur from the second background image HK2 (for example, a change from the second background image HK2 to the first background image HK1) when the 15th F acceptance period ends. Further, the second light emission mode may be changed to another light emission mode (for example, the first light emission mode, etc.) when the 15th F acceptance period ends.

Here, in this production example, the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emitting mode" also appear in the 12th, 13th, and 14th floor reception periods, and the "second The "background image HK2" and the "second light emitting mode" are designed not to appear during the 12th, 13th, and 14th floor reception periods.

According to such a configuration, the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emitting mode" are basically (excluding the 14th F reception period) a simulated image display (operation) of the sword decoration 5001. It can also be said that it appears when there is a situation in which a related display) is displayed. Therefore, when the 14F reception period occurs, even though the simulated image display (operation related display) imitating the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed, the "first background image HK1" and the "first background image HK1" and "first It can be expected to suggest to some extent that the state in which operation acceptance on the sword ornament 5001 (and further operation acceptance on the operation button 410) is permitted through the ``emission mode'' and the like.

However, the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emitting mode" refer to "a state in which operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 is permitted (furthermore, a state in which operation reception on the operation button 410 is permitted)" ”, or when there is no judgment result indicating that the state is reached (for example, within a variation pattern in which reception of operations on the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed), the sword decoration 5001 This is only to the extent that it does not deny the possibility that operation acceptance for ``14th F acceptance period'' (furthermore, operation acceptance for operation button 410) is permitted, and has a negative impact on the confidentiality of the ``14th F acceptance period'' mentioned above. It is designed so that it will not be affected significantly.

On the other hand, the "second background image HK2" and the "second light emitting mode" are those that cannot appear when a simulated image display (operation related display) imitating the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. In a situation where the "second background image HK2" and the "second light emitting mode" are displayed, a replica image display (operation related display) imitating the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed. I can say it. In other words, in this case, the "second background image HK2" and the "second light emitting mode" are different from the model image display of the sword ornament 5001 compared to the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emitting mode". Since it can be said that the relevance is low, in the "15th F reception period", compared to the above-mentioned "14th F reception period", the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 (and the operation reception for the operation button 410) is It is expected that the permitted state will function as a reception period (operation permissible state) with even stronger confidentiality.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 319 and 321, the operation reception for the "15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" are performed. The first operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing to2A while keeping the fact that all operations are permitted. This assumes the case where When the first operation is performed on the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" at timing to2A, the above-mentioned 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed using this as a trigger.

Here, during the 15th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the ``15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', the ``15F post-reception change A'' corresponding to the operation is The effect of changing the background image that had appeared (in this example, the second background image HK2) to another background image (in this example, the third background image HK3), and the effect of changing the light emission mode that had appeared up until then. There are effects such as "changing to another light emission mode (in this example, the third light emission mode)" and effects such as "the display UA (in this example, the summoned beast SJ, etc.) is displayed after receiving the 15th floor." 15F operation related display A (here, a replica image display of the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the 15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the 15F operation unit B (here, the The 15th F operation-related display B (here, a simulated image display imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410) is displayed. At this time, for example, prepare multiple modes as "display UA after reception on the 15th floor (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.)", and depending on which mode appears, the expectation level of the jackpot will be high or low (" 100%" or "0%") may be suggested. However, as the "15th F post-reception change A", only one of the above-mentioned effects may be prepared, and only the prepared effect may appear.

In any case, during the 15th floor reception period according to this production example, when an operation is performed on the "15th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", this will be the trigger for the 15th floor reception period to end. In addition, a different type of reception period (operation permissible state) from the 15th F reception period will occur, and during this different type of reception period (operation permissible state), the 15th F operation related display A (sword decoration While the 15th F operation related display B (simulated image display imitating the body 5001) and the 15th F operation related display B (simulated image display imitating the operation button 410) are displayed, the 15th F operation part A (here, the 15th F operation part A (here, a )" and "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" are both permitted. In addition, in the reception period (operation permissible state) for the different types, for example, if an operation is accepted for the "15thF operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the "15th A post-acceptance change that is different from the ``15th-F post-acceptance change A'' that appears when an operation is accepted for the ``15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' occurs.

On the other hand, during the 15th F reception period, when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", as one of the "15th F post-reception changes B" corresponding to the operation, A presentation (UB displayed after reception on the 15th floor) such as "Which of the multiple modes will the wizard MT appear with a cane wrapped in 'aura'" will appear. It may be possible to suggest whether the jackpot expectation level is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%") depending on which form of "aura" it is. In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 15th floor is the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a weak aura, and the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a medium aura. ``Second performance mode UB2'', in which the magician MT appears with a staff wrapped in a powerful aura, and ``Third production mode UB3'', in which the wizard MT appears with a staff wrapped in a powerful aura. Performance mode UB2" suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than "first production mode UB1", and "third production mode UB3" suggests that jackpot expectation is higher than "second production mode UB2". It has become.

As will be described later, in this production example, an operation on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is performed while the 15th F post-reception display UB is being displayed during the 15th F reception period. This assumes the case where However, as will be described later, during the 15th F reception period, unlike the above-mentioned 14th F reception period, the 15th F post-reception display is triggered by the operation reception for the 15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001). This is to hide the UB.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 321(b) and 321(c), the first operation is performed on the "15thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 15thF reception period. If the 15th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 15th F post-reception changes B, is executed as the ``1st performance mode UB1'' in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a weak aura. It has become so.

In this regard, in this production example, if an operation is performed on "15th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" within the 15th F reception period, the corresponding output sound after 15F reception B is audibly output (see FIG. 319(k)). Therefore, in the 15th F reception period, compared to the case where the operation button 410 was operated during the 12th F reception period, the 13th F reception period, and the 14th F reception period, the situation where the operation reception for the operation button 410 was properly performed Since it is easier to recognize certain things, it is possible to suppress feelings of anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue performing operations like this?"

Therefore, when an operation is performed on "15th F operation part B (in this case, operation button 410)" within the 15th F reception period, the display UB after the 15th F reception (when the wizard MT displays a wand wearing any aura) Unlike the 12th, 13th, and 14th floor reception periods, it is not displayed in front of the decorative pattern SZ. (See Figure 321). In addition, "it is not displayed in a way that is visible in front of the decorative pattern SZ" means "during the 15th F reception period, both the display UB after the 15th F reception and the decorative pattern SZ are displayed; It may mean that the rear display UB is displayed outside the area where the decorative pattern SZ can be displayed (displayed in an area where there is no possibility of overlapping), or it may mean that the rear display UB is displayed outside the area where the decorative pattern SZ can be displayed (displayed in an area where there is no possibility of overlapping). Although both the 15F post-reception display UB and the decorative pattern SZ are displayed, it may also mean that the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ. However, it may also mean that "during the 15th floor reception period, the decorative pattern SZ may not be displayed and the 15th floor reception display UB may be displayed."

In addition, regarding the "15th F post-reception change B" that corresponds to the operation on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 15th F reception period, it also applies to the second and subsequent operations described below. In addition, a performance change different from that of the 15F post-reception display UB (for example, a performance change that changes the light emission mode of a performance lamp different from the specific light emitting unit) may be further performed. Alternatively, "Change B after reception on the 15th floor" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple effect elements, but may be performed using any one of the above-mentioned effect elements (for example, changing the light emitting mode of the effect lamp that is different from the specific light emitting part). The same effects may be obtained only by changing the performance.

In addition, regarding the execution time of the "15th F post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the execution time of the 12th F reception period, the 13F reception period, the 14th F reception period, etc. Unlike the reception period, it is shorter than the time set as the reception period (this is not an essential configuration). Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" are based on the previous operations on the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". ``15F Post-Reception Display UB'' is displayed (while the situation shown in Figure 321(c) appears), and ``15F Operation Section B ( Here, there is a possibility that the "15th F post-reception display UB" corresponding to the operation on the "operation button 410)" is hidden (not shown).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 319, at timing to2B within the 15th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 321(c) appears), "15th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time.

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" within the 15th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in (d) to (f), the 15th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 15th F post-reception changes B, shows the "No. 2 performance mode UB2". In this example, the wizard MT (first production mode UB1), who had been holding a staff covered with a weak aura, is once depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 321(d)), After that, it was decided that he would appear again holding a staff with a medium aura (second production mode UB2) (see Figure 321(e)), but as the UB displayed after reception on the 15th floor. The method for causing a display change is not limited to this. In this case as well, the 15th F reception output sound B is audibly output in response to an operation performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 15F reception period. (See FIG. 319(k)). Regarding this 15F post-reception output sound B, the same sound is output regardless of how many times the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 15F reception period. It may be one that is different from the other, or it may be something that is output as a different sound.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 319, at timing to2C within the 15th F reception period (in a situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 321(f) appears), "15th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the third time.

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 15th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in (g) to (i), the 15th F post-reception display UB, which is one of the 15th F post-reception changes B, is the "3rd It is designed to be executed as the effect mode UB3. In this example, the wizard MT (second production mode UB2), who had been holding a staff with a moderate aura, is depicted temporarily moving outside the display screen (see Figure 321(g)). After that, it was decided that he would appear again holding a staff wrapped in a powerful aura (third production mode UB3) (see Figure 321 (h)), but as the UB displayed after reception on the 15th floor. The method for causing a display change is not limited to this. In this case as well, the 15th F reception output sound B is audibly output in response to an operation performed on the "15th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 15F reception period. (See FIG. 319(k)). Regarding this 15F post-reception output sound B, the same sound is output regardless of how many times the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 15F reception period. It may be one that is different from the other, or it may be something that is output as a different sound.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 319, at timing to 2D within the 15th F reception period (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 321(i) appears), "15th F operation section B (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the fourth time.

However, in this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 15th F reception period, FIGS. 319(i), (k), As shown in FIG. 321(j), not only the output sound after reception is not audibly output, but also any change (aspect) may appear visually as the 15F post-reception display UB (15F post-reception change B). There is no such thing. In other words, in this case, there is no apparent change after reception between before and after the fourth operation is performed on "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 15F reception period. This does not occur, and the performance will continue as it was before the fourth operation was performed. At this time, the output sound after acceptance is also not audibly output.

By the way, during the 15th F reception period, after the 15th F reception change B (3rd production mode UB3) corresponding to the 3rd operation is displayed, this is hidden due to the passage of time, and the 15th F operation If the fourth operation is performed on "part B (here, the operation button 410)", the third production mode UB3 is displayed again as the 15th F post-reception display UB (15th F post-reception change B). (A visual change (aspect) occurs), but in this case as well, the output sound may not be audibly output after acceptance.

In this example, depending on how many times the 15th F operation unit B (in this case, operation button 410) is operated within the 15th F reception period, the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed as a However, instead of this, within the 15th floor reception period, the 15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", and based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific mode, or a new mode may not appear. You may also do something like this. In short, such display changes only need to occur when predetermined conditions are met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UB2" appears as the display UB after receiving the 15th floor, after that, only the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" continues to be operated. Even so, the "first production mode UB1" will not appear when the operation is accepted within the 15th floor reception period, and the "third production mode UB3" will be displayed as the display UB after the 15th floor reception. appears, even if you continue to operate only the "15thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the "1st The "presentation mode UB1" and the "second production mode UB2" never appear. Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 15th F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this production example, even if the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated after the "third production mode UB3" is displayed, the "4th production mode UB3" mentioned above is The same situation as ``operation'' will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 15th floor reception period, even though the 15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the ``15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410).'' I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time of the 15th F reception period decreases (as the time elapses from the occurrence of the occurrence becomes longer). In particular, during the 15th floor reception period, even if an operation is performed on "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the output sound may not be audible after reception. It is even more difficult to feel this sense of anxiety.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 319 and 321, the "initial game strategy (timing to2A to to2D )'' and switch to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the production by operating the ``15th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' side. ing.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 319(a), (h), and (i), the 15th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 321(j)), at timing to2E within the 15th floor reception period, the "15th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" This assumes that the operation is performed on

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2E within the 15th F acceptance period, the 15th F post-acceptance change A occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the 15th F reception, first, the 15F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 319(a) and 319(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 319(h), (k), and FIG. 321(k), the ``15th F post-reception output'' corresponds to the operation on the ``15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. "Sound A" is audibly output, and "15th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on "15th F operating section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is displayed.

In this production example, the summoned beast SJ is made to appear as the "display UA after the 15th floor reception" in response to the operation reception on the "15th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 15th floor reception period. However, as for the display UA (summoned beast SJ) after the reception on the 15th floor, there are cases where an aspect with a relatively high expectation level (rate of winning the jackpot) appears, and cases where an aspect with a relatively high expectation level (rate of winning the jackpot) appears. It may be arranged such that an aspect in which the percentage of jackpots obtained is low may appear. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "15th F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output; The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In addition, during the 15th F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. If an operation is accepted for the ``15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' while the 15th F post-reception display UB is being displayed in response to an operation accepted for the , the display UB of the 15th floor is hidden after acceptance.

Furthermore, during the 15th F reception period according to this embodiment, as for the background image (here, the second background image HK2), as shown in FIGS. 319(d) and 321, The background image is switched (background change) to another background image (here, the third background image HK3) in response to an operation on the ``15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' within the screen. . The third background image HK3 according to this production example is depicted as a desert landscape, as shown in FIG. 321(k) and the like. Note that during the 15th F reception period, the background image is not switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Furthermore, in the 15th F reception period according to this embodiment, the light emission mode (here, the second light emission mode) in the specific light emitting section is also changed within the 15F reception period, as shown in FIG. 319(e). The light emission mode is switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, the third light emission mode) in response to an operation on the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Note that during the 15th F reception period, the light emission mode is not switched to another light emission mode (light emission change) in response to an operation on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. When an operation is accepted for ``Decoration object 5001)'', this can be used as an opportunity to generate an acceptance period (new acceptance period after operation) of a different type (changes after acceptance are different, etc.) than the 15th F acceptance period. It is said that During the reception period for the different type (new reception period after operation), the "15thF operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and " Not only is the 15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410) allowed to accept operations, but also the 15th F operating section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) related to the 15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) Operation-related display A (here, a simulated image display of the sword ornament 5001) and the 15th-F operation-related display B (here, the operation button 410) are displayed.

In addition, "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . That is, in the above-mentioned different type of reception period (new reception period after operation), the "15thF operation section A", which allows only one operation reception by the player, (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" and the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" which can accept multiple operations are provided.

Here, as a method for displaying the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which periodic changes may appear, for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 284 (A) to (D) are adopted. You may also do so. That is, in this case, after the part (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(A), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. It will appear repeatedly.

Furthermore, as a method for displaying the "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, the modes shown in FIGS. may be adopted. In other words, in this case, after the part (button drawing image BMG) of the operation receiving part of the 15th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(a), When a periodic change is a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in (b) to (d)," the periodic change repeatedly appears in a form that requires a predetermined period of 15F time B. It happens.

According to these configurations, during the above-mentioned acceptance period for different types (new acceptance period after operation), "15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "15th F operating section B (here, In this case, each "operation receiver" in the "operation button 410)" appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the cycle 15F time A and the cycle 15F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since it is set as a longer time than the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 13F reception period, in the reception period of a different type (new reception period after operation), the 13F Compared to the reception period, the "operation receiver" will be depicted moving slowly up and down its movable range.

Then, during the reception period for the different type (new reception period after the operation), as shown in FIGS. When an operation is accepted for ``15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)'', a change occurs after the reception according to the operation reception. Changes will occur after the corresponding acceptance.

However, in this case, when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)", no light emission change occurs, whereas the "15th F operating section A (here, the operating button 410)" When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001), there may be both a case where a change in light emission occurs and a case where a change in light emission does not occur. In addition, regarding the background image, even if an operation is accepted for either the "15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)", the relevant The background image itself is not replaced with a different background image (the background is changed), but when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", this will be used as a trigger. , when the aspect of the background image changes (for example, changing the background image to be darker or brighter), and when the aspect of the background image changes (for example, changing the background image to darker or brighter) It may be possible to have both cases where there is no change in Note that when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", this triggers a change in the aspect of the background image (for example, the background image is made darker or brighter, etc.). change).

In this example, during the acceptance period for the different type (new acceptance period after the operation), the above-mentioned "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is allowed to accept the operation only once. Although it is assumed that the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is allowed to accept operations multiple times, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the above-mentioned "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is allowed to receive operations multiple times during the reception period of the different type (new reception period after the operation), the above-mentioned automatic continuous press It is desirable to prevent the feature from being enabled.

In addition, during the 15th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 319(j), the operation-related sound (acceptance permission sound) related to its occurrence is not output, and a display indicating the remaining time is displayed. Nor. On the other hand, in the reception period for the different types mentioned above (new reception period after the operation), the 15thF operation-related display A (here, a simulated image display of the sword decoration 5001) and the 15thF operation-related display B ( Here, since all of the operation buttons 410 (simulated image display) are displayed, the 15F operation-related sound a related to the generation thereof is output. However, the display indicating the remaining time may not be displayed even during the reception period of the different type (new reception period after the operation).

Furthermore, in this production example, the 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see, for example, FIG. 321(k)). On the other hand, as described above, the 15th F post-reception display UB is not displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ due to the relationship with the decorative pattern SZ. This makes it possible to suitably indicate whether or not a new acceptance period has occurred.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 15th F post-reception display UB, when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 15th F reception period, the display is displayed based on this. It is now in the display state. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 319(i), 321, etc., the 15thF post-reception display UB indicates the 15F Post-Reception Display UA" can be turned into a non-display state at the time the display starts.

Furthermore, during the 15th floor reception period, even if the 15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception will be performed multiple times (for a predetermined period of time). The operation reception is automatically repeated each time (the auto-repeat function is not enabled) (see FIG. 319(b)). In this case, if the player wishes to accept multiple operations for the ``15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' within the 15th F acceptance period, the player must Needless to say, it is necessary to repeatedly operate (press) the 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410).

Furthermore, the 15th F acceptance period is originally one that continues until timing to3 arrives, and ends based on the arrival of timing to3, as shown in FIG. 320(c). In this respect, the 15th F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320, when no operation is performed within the reception period on the 15th floor, no changes in display or sound output related to the reception period are performed on the 15th floor. The reception period will end.

However, the 15th F reception period only needs to occur as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. For example, when the 15th F reception period ends at timing to3, within the 15th F reception period. , the background change from the second background image HK2 is made to occur in a manner different from that when the operation is accepted for the "15th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", or the 15th F reception The light emission change from the second light emission mode may occur in a manner different from that when an operation is accepted for the "15F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the period.

Furthermore, when such a confidentiality acceptance period is provided, the method of concealment is not limited to this. For example, regarding the 15th floor reception period, it is sufficient that the reception period (operation permissible state) includes "a section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section)"; Even if the confidentiality is canceled in the middle of the period (first variation), or the confidentiality appears in the middle of the acceptance period (operation permissible state) (second variation), good.

A modified example of the 15th F reception period will be described below. In order to realize the 15th F reception period according to such a modified example, among the configurations described below, it is necessary to select the necessary functions to obtain the desired effect. Only the configuration is required.

322 to 324 show that when "Condition 15F" is satisfied as the above-mentioned occurrence condition, instead of the above-mentioned 15th F reception period (FIGS. 319 to 321), the operation occurs in the middle of the reception period (operation permissible state). It is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" occurs when the confidentiality is released. More specifically, FIG. 322 shows that the "15th F operation section A ( Here, it is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when an operation is accepted for the "sword decoration body 5001)", and FIG. This is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the section in which the display is displayed (display section, second section). Yes, and FIG. 324 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Moreover, FIGS. 325 and 326 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" occurs. In addition, among the configurations related to the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", for configurations not specifically mentioned, including the application of the other example, if the above-mentioned "15th F reception period" occurs. is the same as

That is, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" is similar to the above-mentioned 15F reception period (FIGS. 319 to 321), and the 15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is Only one operation reception is allowed until the 15F reception period ends, and the 15F operation section B (here, operation button 410) is not operated until the 15F reception period ends. It is now permissible to accept the operation multiple times. Further, other examples regarding these "15th F operating section A" and "15th F operating section B" can also be applied as appropriate, as in the case of the above-mentioned 15th F reception period.

In this regard, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" is similar to the above-mentioned 15F reception period (FIGS. 319 to 321), and at the time of its occurrence, as shown in FIG. 325(a), The operation-related display corresponding to the 15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation-related display corresponding to the 15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410) are not displayed, The fact that there is an operation unit in a state where operation reception is permitted is kept secret.

In addition, in such a "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification," the "second background image HK2" is used as the background image described above. ” is displayed, and the “second light emitting mode” appears as the light emitting mode in the above-mentioned specific light emitting section. The same is true.

However, as shown in FIGS. 324(c) and 325(b), during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification," the "first modification When a specific timing toX (for example, any predetermined timing such as a specific time has elapsed since the reception period occurred) arrives within the 15th F reception period, this will be used as an opportunity to The "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" ends and the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" begins.

More specifically, when the specific timing toX arrives, this is used as an opportunity to display the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001). and "15thF operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" corresponding to the 15thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are displayed. Note that here, the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed in the first mode A1 as the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", and the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" 324(f), (g) and , see FIG. 325(b)).

In addition, the first aspect A1 of the “15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and the first aspect B1 of the “15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” according to this modification also have a periodicity. It is intended to be displayed as an image display in which physical changes may appear.

Here, as a method of displaying the first aspect A1 of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, FIGS. The embodiment shown may also be adopted. That is, in this case, after the part (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(A), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. It will appear repeatedly.

Furthermore, as a method for displaying the first aspect B1 of the "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, FIGS. 284(a) to (d) ) may be adopted. In other words, in this case, after the part (button drawing image BMG) of the operation receiving part of the 15th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(a), When a periodic change is a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in (b) to (d)," the periodic change repeatedly appears in a form that requires a predetermined period of 15F time B. It happens.

According to these configurations, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", the "15th F operating section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" and the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating section Button 410), etc., each ``operation receiver'' appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the cycle 15F time A and the cycle 15F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since it is set as a longer time than the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 13F reception period, in the reception period of a different type (new reception period after operation), the 13F Compared to the reception period, the "operation receiver" will be depicted moving slowly up and down its movable range.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification," when the specific timing toX arrives, the "second background image HK2" is changed to a different background image (here, The background changes to "first background image HK1"), and the "second light emitting mode" also changes to a different light emitting mode (herein, "first light emitting mode") in the specific light emitting section. It has become.

That is, as mentioned above, in this production example, the situation in which the "second background image HK2" and the above-mentioned "second light emitting mode" in the specific light emitting section appear means that the simulated image display (here This means that the 15th F operation-related display A) is not displayed (however, this is not an essential configuration). Therefore, with the arrival of the specific timing to The situation in which the above-mentioned "second light emitting mode" appears in the section ends.

In addition, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. 325(a) and 325(b), when the specific timing toX arrives, The background image (second background image HK2) that is a depiction of mountains and a river, which had appeared until now, will be changed to a background image (first background image HK1) that is a depiction of mountains.

Then, when timing to3 arrives without any operation being performed by the player even after the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" has started, as shown in FIG. 324(c), As shown in FIGS. 325(f), (g), and FIG. 325(c), the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" has ended, and )" and "15thF operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are both hidden.

At this time, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) that appeared within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", The light emitting mode (here, the first light emitting mode) in the specific light emitting section was made to continue even after the timing to3 arrived, but instead of this, when the timing to3 arrived, the "operation related display" The background image (here, the second background image HK2) that appeared in the section that is not displayed (non-display section, first section) and the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section (here, the second light emission mode) are restored. You can.

On the other hand, in FIG. 322 and FIGS. 325(a), (d) to (l), "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section , 1st section)", the player starts to operate the 15F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, but the player is worried that the final result does not appear. In the middle of the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)", I changed from "operation on the 15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" to "15th F operation". This shows an example of the effect when the effect is to be advanced by switching to ``operation on section A (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)''.

Here, of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification," the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" is basically the "15F reception period according to the first modification." (Figs. 319 to 321)" has the same performance.

For example, even in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (hidden section, first section)" within this "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", the above-mentioned "14th floor reception period" and "15th floor reception period" Similar to ``Reception period'', cases where the final result display appears as a result of operating the 15th floor operation section B (in this case, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, or situations where the production is slow to progress. When this occurs, we will create a performance that will make you feel like, ``There might be another operation section (operation section A on the 15th floor) that is secretly given an opportunity to operate it.'' It has been realized. That is, in this case, the operation target is switched from "operation on the 15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" to "operation on the 15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" to advance the production. This makes it more likely that the user will try to do so.

In addition, the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" according to this production example is also the same as the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification, regardless of how many times the 15th floor operation section B, which allows multiple operations, is operated. is designed to never be terminated.

In addition, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" also generates the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", similar to the "14th F reception period" and "15th F reception period" described above. In this case, a precursor effect display indicating this (the occurrence of a state in which operation reception is permitted) is not executed at a timing before the occurrence of the 15th F reception period.

In addition, in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", the "15thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)" When an operation is performed, the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed using this as an opportunity. However, at this time, there are both cases in which the output sound B after receiving the 15th F is audibly output and cases in which it is not audibly output.

By the way, in the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification," the above-mentioned "first background" is displayed as a "background image" in the effect display device 1600. A second background image HK2, which is different from "image HK1", is displayed, and while the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" continues, the corresponding No background change occurs from the second background image HK2.

However, as will be described later, within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modification", the 15F operation section A (here, the sword Although the 15th F operation related display A corresponding to the decorative body 5001) is not displayed, the 15th F operation related display B corresponding to the 15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. 15F operation related display B itself or a display similar to this can be displayed when an operation is accepted for the 15F operation section B (however, this is not an essential configuration. Therefore, the section may be set such that the 15th F operation-related display B itself or a display similar to this cannot be displayed). Therefore, the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modification" according to this production example is, more precisely, the 15F operation-related display period. This refers to a section in which at least the 15th F operation related display A out of the display A and the 15th F operation related display B is not displayed. Alternatively, it can be said to mean a section in which neither the 15th F operation related display A nor the 15th F operation related display B (or a display similar thereto) is displayed unless there is at least an operation by the player.

Here, regarding the second background image HK2, the relevant It is sufficient that the background does not change from the second background image HK2, and it may not necessarily be displayed before the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" occurs. For example, what is displayed due to the background change that occurs when the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" occurs, etc. It is sufficient if it is displayed at the time of occurrence of the 15th F reception period according to the first modification. Although the second background image HK2 according to this example is displayed as a different image from the first background image HK1, at first glance, it seems that the second background image HK2 is displayed as a different image from the first background image HK1. It is difficult to recognize which background image is being displayed. However, the mode of the second background image HK2 is not necessarily limited to this mode, and may be any other mode as long as it is different.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light emitting modes. Then, in the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification," the specific light emitting section is set to It emits light in a second light emitting mode different from the "first light emitting mode", and the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, While the "first section)" continues, no change from the second light emitting mode to another light emitting mode occurs in the specific light emitting section. Regarding the second light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section, the corresponding light emitting mode is applied while the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" continues. It is sufficient that there is no change from the second light emission mode to another light emission mode. )" may not necessarily be executed before the occurrence of ". For example, it may be anything that appears at the time of occurrence of the 15th F reception period, such as one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 15th F reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIG. 322 and FIGS. 325(a), (d) to (l), the operation reception for the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the "15th F operation Part B (here, the operation button 410) is in a state in which all operations are permitted (section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)). ), it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing to2A. When the first operation is performed on the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" at timing to2A, the above-mentioned 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed using this as a trigger.

Here, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" is performed. "Change A" includes effects such as "changing the background image that had appeared up until then to another background image (in this example, the third background image HK3)" and "changing the light emission mode that had appeared up until then (in this example)". , 2nd light emitting mode) to another light emitting mode (in this example, the 3rd light emitting mode), and ``The display UA after receiving the 15th floor (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.) is displayed. 15F operation-related display A (here, a replica image display of the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the 15F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001); The 15th F operation-related display B (here, a simulated image display of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. ing. At this time, for example, prepare multiple modes as "display UA after reception on the 15th floor (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.)", and depending on which mode appears, the expectation level of the jackpot will be high or low (" 100%" or "0%") may be suggested. However, as the "15th F post-reception change A", only one of the above-mentioned effects may be prepared, and only the prepared effect may appear.

In any case, during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", this will trigger the "15th F reception period". Not only will the ``15th F reception period according to the modified example'' end, but a different type of reception period (operation permissible state) than the ``15th F reception period according to the 1st modified example'' will occur, and the different type During the acceptance period (operation permissible state), the 15thF operation-related display A (display of a simulated image of the sword ornament 5001) and the 15thF operation-related display B (display of a simulated image of the operation button 410) are displayed. Among these, both the operation reception for the "15thF operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the operation reception for the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are allowed. It becomes like this. In addition, in the reception period (operation permissible state) for the different types, for example, if an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the above-mentioned "according to the first modification example" A post-reception change that is different from the "15th-F post-reception change A" that appears when an operation is accepted for the "15th-F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the "15th-F reception period" will now occur. ing.

On the other hand, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the "15F reception period according to the first modification" is performed. As one of ``Change B'', effects such as ``Which of the multiple modes will the wizard MT appear with a staff wrapped in ``aura''?'' (display UB after reception on the 15th floor) will appear. It has become. It may be possible to suggest whether the jackpot expectation level is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%") depending on which form of "aura" it is. In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 15th floor is the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a weak aura, and the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a medium aura. ``Second performance mode UB2'', in which the magician MT appears with a staff wrapped in a powerful aura, and ``Third production mode UB3'', in which the wizard MT appears with a staff wrapped in a powerful aura. Performance mode UB2" suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than "first production mode UB1", and "third production mode UB3" suggests that jackpot expectation is higher than "second production mode UB2". It has become.

Also, as will be described later, in this production example, when the 15th floor reception display UB is displayed within the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification, the 15th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", unlike the above-mentioned case during the 14th floor reception period, the 15th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is triggered by the 15th floor reception period. The display UB is set to a non-display state.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 325(d) and (e), "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" ”, when the first operation is performed on the “15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”, the 15th F post-reception display UB as one of the “15F post-reception changes B” is , is executed as the "first performance mode UB1" in which a magician MT appears with a staff wrapped in a weak aura.

In this regard, in this production example, in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", "15thF operation section B (here, When the operation button 410) is operated, a corresponding post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output (see FIG. 322(k)).

Moreover, in this production example, as described above, in the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", "15thF operation section B ( Here, when an operation is performed on the "operation button 410)", the reception of the operation is triggered and the operation-related display is displayed within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" ( The first mode B1 of the 15th F operation-related display B (planned) itself or a display similar to this is started to be displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 325(d) and 325(e), as a display that approximates the first mode B1 of the 15th F operation-related display B, an approximate image KG whose inner side of the outline is filled out is used. is displayed without periodic changes.

According to such a configuration, during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", the "operation-related display is displayed within the section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)". Since the image displayed in the section (display section, second section) (in this production example, an image similar to this) appears in advance, if a predetermined time elapses (specific timing to (When the operation-related display is displayed, the section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" ends, and the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" starts. It is now expected that there will be a good indication of what will happen.

In addition, in the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (hidden section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", the 12th floor reception period, the 13th floor reception period, and the 14th floor reception period Compared to the case where the operation button 410 is operated in the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 has been properly accepted. Feelings of anxiety such as "Is this going to happen?" can be suppressed.

Therefore, the display UB after the 15th floor reception (when the wizard MT Regarding which aura the staff appears with), unlike in the case of the 12th, 13th, and 14th floor reception periods, the shape that appears in front of the decorative pattern SZ (See FIGS. 325 and 326). In addition, "it is not displayed in a way that is visible in front of the decorative pattern SZ" means that "both the display UB after the 15th floor reception and the decorative pattern SZ are However, it may mean that the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed outside the area where the decorative pattern SZ can be displayed (displayed in an area where there is no possibility of overlapping). , ``In the ``15th reception period according to the first modification,'' both the 15th floor reception display UB and the decorative pattern SZ are displayed, but the 15th floor reception display UB is displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ. In the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification, the decorative pattern SZ is not displayed and the display UB after the 15th floor reception is displayed on the side. It may also mean "can be displayed."

In addition, regarding the "15th F post-reception change B" according to the operation on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", the details will be described later. Including the case of the second and subsequent operations, even if a production change that is different from the display UB after reception on the 15th floor (for example, a production change that changes the lighting mode of a production lamp that is different from the specific light emitting unit) is performed. good. Alternatively, the "15th F post-reception change B" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple effect elements, but may be performed using any one of the above-mentioned effect elements (for example, changing the lighting mode of the effect lamp that is different from the specific light emitting part). The same effects may be obtained only by changing the performance.

In addition, regarding the execution time of the "15th F post-reception display UB" and "approximate image KG" in response to the operation reception on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the execution time of the 12th F reception period and the Unlike the 13th F reception period and the 14th F reception period, the period is shorter than the time set as the reception period (not an essential configuration). Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" are based on the previous operations on the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". ``Display after reception on the 15th floor UB'' and ``approximate image KG'' are being displayed (while the situation shown in Figure 321(e) is appearing). When the operation is performed while the "15th F reception display UB" and "approximate image KG" corresponding to the operation on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are hidden (not shown) Both are possible.

In the example shown in FIG. 322 and FIG. 325(a), (d) to (l), in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, At timing to2B (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 325(e) appears) in the "1st section)", the second operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". It is assumed that this is done.

In this production example, in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", as shown in FIGS. 322(i), (k) and FIGS. 325(f) to (h), as one of the changes B after receiving the 15th F. The display UB after receiving the reception on the 15th floor is executed as a "second performance mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a medium aura. In this example, the wizard MT (first production mode UB1), who had been holding a staff covered with a weak aura, is once depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 325(f)), After that, it was decided that he would appear again holding a staff with a medium aura (second production mode UB2) (see Figure 325 (g)), but as the UB displayed after reception on the 15th floor. The method for causing a display change is not limited to this. Also in this case, the post-reception output sound in response to the operation performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" B will be audibly output (see FIG. 322(k)). Regarding this post-acceptance output sound B, regardless of how many times the ``15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' is operated within the ``15th F acceptance period according to the first modification''. They may be output as the same sound or may be output as different sounds.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the "approximate image KG" displayed at timing to2B (the situation where the production display shown in FIG. 325(e) appears), Button 410)" is operated for the second time, and the display does not change. However, after the "approximate image KG" is hidden within the "15th floor reception period for the first modification," the operation on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed again. In this case, the "approximate image KG" will be displayed again upon acceptance of the operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 322 and FIG. 325(a), (d) to (l), in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, At timing to2C (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 325(h) appears) in the "1st section)", the third operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". It is assumed that this is done.

In this production example, in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", as shown in FIGS. 322(i), (k) and FIGS. 325(i) to (k), as one of the changes B after receiving the 15th F. The display UB after the reception on the 15th floor is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears with a staff wrapped in a powerful aura. In this example, the wizard MT (second production mode UB2), who had been holding a staff with a moderate aura, is once depicted moving outside the display screen (see Figure 325(i)). After that, it was decided that he would appear again holding a staff wrapped in a powerful aura (third production mode UB3) (see Figure 325 (j)), but as the display UB after reception on the 15th floor. The method for causing a display change is not limited to this. Also in this case, the post-reception output sound in response to the operation performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" B will be audibly output (see FIG. 322(k)). This post-reception output sound B is the same sound that is output regardless of how many times the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated during the 15th F reception period. or may be output as a different sound.

In addition, in this production example, the "approximate image KG" displayed at timing to2C (the situation where the production display shown in FIG. 325(h) appears) is Button 410)" is operated for the third time and the display does not change.

In the example shown in FIG. 322 and FIG. 325(a), (d) to (l), the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, At timing to2D (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 325(k) appears) in "1st section)", the fourth operation is performed on "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". It is assumed that this is done.

However, in this production example, within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", "15F operation section B (here, the operation When the fourth operation is performed on "button 410)," as shown in FIGS. 322(i), (k), and 325(l), the output sound after reception is not audibly output. , no visible change (aspect) appears as the 15th F post-reception display UB (15th F post-reception change B). That is, in this case, in the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410 )” before and after the fourth operation is performed, there is no apparent change after reception, and the production status continues as it was before the fourth operation was performed. becomes. At this time, the output sound after acceptance is also not audibly output.

By the way, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", the 15th floor reception change B (third production mode UB3) corresponding to the third operation is displayed, and then it is hidden as time passes. If the 4th operation is performed on "15thF operation part B (here, operation button 410)" in the state where The production mode UB3 is displayed again (a visual change (aspect) occurs), but in this case as well, the output sound may not be audibly output after acceptance.

In addition, in this example, the 15th F. The post-reception display UB was set to ``change the display to a specific aspect'' and ``no new aspect appears'', but instead of this, ``the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification example'' was changed. The determination is made when an operation is performed on the 15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) within the section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section). In this case, based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific mode, or a new mode may not appear. In short, such display changes only need to occur when predetermined conditions are met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UB2" appears as the display UB after receiving the 15th floor, after that, only the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" continues to be operated. However, the "first production mode UB1" will not appear when the operation is accepted within the "15th floor reception period for the first modification", and the display UB after the 15th floor reception will not appear. If the "third production mode UB3" appears, even if you continue to operate only the "15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the "15th floor reception according to the first modification example" will be displayed. The "first presentation mode UB1" and the "second presentation mode UB2" do not appear when an operation is accepted within the "period". Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 15th F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this production example, even if the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated after the "third production mode UB3" is displayed, the "4th production mode UB3" mentioned above is The same situation as ``operation'' will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even though the operation was performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period according to the first modification," the user did not respond to the operation. If the post-reception display or post-reception output sound does not appear (no change in display or sound output in response to the operation), the player should 410)" will be okay if I continue to operate it as is. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety becomes gradually stronger as the remaining time of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" decreases (as the elapsed time from the occurrence becomes longer). In particular, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", even if the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, the output sound after reception is not audible. This feeling of anxiety is all the more so given the fact that there is a growing number of

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 322 and 325(a), (d) to (l), the production progresses by multiple operations on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". The player gives up on the aimed "initial game strategy (timings to2A to to2D)" before the timing to This is based on the assumption that a switch is made to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by operating the 15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) side.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 322(a), (h), and (i), the 15th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 325(l)), in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, It is assumed that the operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2E in "1 section)".

In this pachinko machine 1, at timing to2E in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modification", "15F operation section A (here Now, when an operation is performed on the sword decoration object 5001), change A occurs after the 15th F reception. For example, as one of the changes A after the 15th F reception, first, the 15F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 322(a) and 322(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 322(h), (k), and 326(r), the ``15th F post-reception output'' corresponds to the operation on the ``15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. "Sound A" is audibly output, and "15th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on "15th F operating section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is displayed.

In this production example, the "15th F reception post-reception display UA" is displayed in response to the operation reception for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the "15th F reception period according to the first modification". However, as for the UA displayed after the reception on the 15th floor (summoned beast SJ), there are cases where a mode with a relatively high expectation level (rate of winning the jackpot) appears. , a mode may appear with a lower expectation level (rate of winning the jackpot) than the above mode. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "15th F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output; The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In addition, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", as shown in FIGS. 322(i), 325(l), and 326(r), When an operation is accepted for the ``15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' while the 15th F post-reception display UB is being displayed in response to the operation accepted for the ``operation button 410).'' , Taking this as an opportunity, the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden.

Also, regarding the background image (here, the second background image HK2) in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" As shown in FIG. 322(d), FIG. 325(l), and FIG. 326(r), a different background is triggered by the operation on the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". The image is switched (background change) to the image (here, the third background image HK3). In addition, during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", the background image may not be switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)". do not have.

In addition, in the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section (here, the second light emission mode) Also, as shown in FIG. 322(e), switching to another light emitting mode (here, the third light emitting mode) is triggered by an operation on the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". (light emission change). In addition, during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", switching to another light emission mode (light emission change) is not triggered by an operation on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". do not have.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. 322(f), (g), and 326(r), the When an operation is accepted for "operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", this will be used as a trigger for the reception period (after the operation) of a different type (changes after reception are different, etc.) from the corresponding 15F reception period. A new reception period) is now possible. During the reception period for the different type (new reception period after operation), the 15th floor operation section A (here, sword Both the ``15th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' and the ``15th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)'' are allowed to receive operations, and the ``15th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' )" 15thF operation related display A (here, a simulated image display of the sword ornament 5001)" and 15F operation related display related to "15thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)" B (here, a simulated image display of the operation button 410) is displayed.

However, in the reception period for such a different type (new reception period after operation), the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is changed from the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) )" is displayed in a second mode A2 (a mode different from the first mode A1 described above), and the "15thF operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is 322(f), (g), FIG. 326(r), etc.). ).

Furthermore, the second aspect A2 of the “15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and the second aspect B2 of the “15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” according to this modification also have a periodicity. It is intended to be displayed as an image display in which physical changes may appear.

Here, as a method of displaying the second aspect A2 of the "15th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, FIGS. The embodiment shown may also be adopted. That is, in this case, after the part (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(A), 284 (B) to 284 (D) sequentially displayed in the various modes shown in FIGS. 284(B) to (D) as one periodic change, the periodic change takes a predetermined period of 15F time A. It will appear repeatedly.

Furthermore, as a method of displaying the second aspect B2 of the "15th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, FIGS. 284 (a) to (d) ) may be adopted. In other words, in this case, after the part (button drawing image BMG) of the operation receiving part of the 15th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(a), When a periodic change is a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in (b) to (d)," the periodic change repeatedly appears in a form that requires a predetermined period of 15F time B. That will happen.

According to these configurations, even during the reception period for different types (new reception period after operation), "15thF operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and "15thF operation section B (here, the sword ornament 5001)" In this case, each "operation receiver" in the "operation button 410)" appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the cycle 15F time A and the cycle 15F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since it is set as a longer time than the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 13F reception period, in the reception period of a different type (new reception period after operation), the 13F Compared to the reception period, the "operation receiver" will be depicted moving slowly up and down its movable range.

In addition, in this production example, the first aspect A1 and the second aspect A2 of the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" have the same periodic time, but they may have different period times. Although the first aspect B1 and the second aspect B2 of the 15th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are made to have the same periodic time, they may be different. That is, the differences between the first aspect A1 and the second aspect A2 of the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the first aspect B1 of the "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" Regarding the difference between the second aspect B2 and the second aspect B2, for example, the display position within the effect display device 1600 may be different, or in addition to this, the size may be different. The point is, when it is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode as "15thF operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "15thF operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" It suffices if the difference in appearance can be recognized when it is used.

Then, during the reception period for the different type (new reception period after the operation), as shown in FIGS. When an operation is accepted for ``15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)'', a change occurs after the reception according to the operation reception. Changes will occur after the corresponding acceptance.

However, in this case, when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)", no light emission change occurs, whereas the "15th F operating section A (here, the operating button 410)" When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001), there may be both a case where a change in light emission occurs and a case where a change in light emission does not occur. In addition, regarding the background image, even if an operation is accepted for either the "15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)", the relevant The background image itself is not replaced with a different background image (the background is changed), but when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", this will be used as a trigger. , when the aspect of the background image changes (for example, changing the background image to be darker or brighter), and when the aspect of the background image changes (for example, changing the background image to darker or brighter) It may be possible to have both cases where there is no change in Note that when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", this triggers a change in the aspect of the background image (for example, the background image is made darker or brighter, etc.). change).

In this example, during the acceptance period for the different type (new acceptance period after the operation), the above-mentioned "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is allowed to accept the operation only once. Although it is assumed that the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is allowed to accept operations multiple times, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the above-mentioned "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is allowed to receive operations multiple times during the reception period of the different type (new reception period after the operation), the above-mentioned automatic continuous press It is desirable to prevent the feature from being enabled.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIG. 323, FIGS. 325(a), (d) to (h), and FIGS. 326(m) to (q) are "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first At timings to2a and to2b within the section), operations were accepted for the 15thF operation unit B (here, the operation button 410), but as the 15thF post-reception display UB in response to the second operation acceptance. This is based on the assumption that the above-mentioned timing toX arrives while the "second presentation mode UB2" is being displayed.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timings to2a and to2b within the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)", respectively. The contents of the presentation are as explained with reference to FIGS. 325(a), (b) to (h) in the examples shown in FIGS. 322 and 325(a), (d) to (l). Therefore, I will omit the explanation here.

That is, in this case, in the examples shown in FIGS. 323 and 325(a), (d) to (h), and FIGS. 326(m) to (q), the situation in which the 15th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (Fig. 325(h)), when the timing to The first section) ends, and the section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section) begins.

When the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" starts in this way, first, as shown in FIGS. 323(f), (g) and 326(m), With the arrival of timing to A "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" corresponding to the operation button 410 (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. Note that here, the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed in the first mode A1 as the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", and the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" Display B (button print image BMG)" will be displayed in the first mode B1 as the "15thF operation-related display B (button print image BMG).''

Further, as shown in FIGS. 323(d) and 326(m), when the timing to The background is changed from "a display depicting mountains and a river" to "a first background image HK1 (here, a display depicting a mountain shown in FIG. 326(m))". Then, the "first background image HK1" that appears in this way is continuously displayed while it is within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)."

Further, as shown in FIG. 323(e), upon arrival of timing toX, the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section changes from the "second light emission mode" to the "first light emission mode" . Then, the "first light emitting mode" of the specific light emitting section that appears in this way will be continuously executed while it is within the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)". .

However, the first aspect A1 as "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the first aspect B1 as "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and the "first background image HK1'' and the ``first light emitting mode'' in the specific light emitting section are as described above with reference to FIG. 325(b), so the details thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this production example, if the specific timing toX arrives while the 15F post-reception display UB2 and the approximate image KG are being displayed, these displays will be changed to "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section , 2nd section)" will continue to be displayed after the start (see Figure 323 (i) and Figure 326 (m)), and each will be disabled when the display time (execution time) has elapsed. It is now displayed. Although illustration is omitted, if the specific timing toX arrives while the 15th-F post-reception display UB2 and the approximate image KG are not being displayed, the 15th-F post-reception display UB2 and the approximate image KG are not displayed. Needless to say, if this is done, "the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" will start.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 323 and 325(a), (d) to (h), and FIGS. 326(m) to (q), "operation-related At timing to2c (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 326(m) appears) in the section in which the display is displayed (display section, second section), the 15thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed for the third time.

In this production example, the third operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 323(i), (k) and FIGS. 326(n) to (p), the 15th F post-reception display UB as one of the 15th F post-reception changes B is changed to the wizard MT. is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the player appears with a cane wrapped in a powerful aura, and the output sound B is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 323(k)). Regarding the content of these effects, the third operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)". Since this is the same as in the case where it is performed (see FIGS. 325(i) to 325(k)), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also at this time, regarding the "approximate image KG" that was displayed at timing to2c (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 326(m) appears), )", the display will not change as a result of an operation being performed.

However, if an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", the "operation Unlike the case where an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the section where related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section), the 15th F reception After change B, the first aspect A1 of "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the first aspect B1 of "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed, respectively. , and occurs while the "first background image HK1" and "first light emitting mode" are appearing (Fig. 323(d) to (g), (i) and Fig. 326(n) to (q) ).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 323 and 325(a), (d) to (h), and FIGS. 326(m) to (q), "operation-related At timing to2d (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 326(p) appears) within the section in which the display is displayed (display section, second section), the 15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed for the fourth time.

However, in this production example, within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", "15F operation section B (here, When the operation button 410) is operated for the fourth time, as shown in FIGS. 323(i), (k), and 326(q), the output sound after acceptance is not audible. Of course, no change (aspect) appears visually as the 15th F post-reception display UB (15th F post-reception change B). Regarding this production content, the fourth operation is performed on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)". Since this is the same as in the case where (see FIG. 325(l)), a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

However, as mentioned above, even though the operation was performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period according to the first modification," the user did not respond to the operation. If the post-reception display or post-reception output sound does not appear (no change in display or sound output in response to the operation), the player should 410)" will be okay if I continue to operate it as is. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety becomes gradually stronger as the remaining time of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" decreases (as the elapsed time from the occurrence becomes longer). In particular, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", even if the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, the output sound after reception is not audible. This feeling of anxiety is all the more so given the fact that there are many

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 323 and 325(a), (d) to (h), and FIGS. 326(m) to (q), "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" If the player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings to2a to to2d)" that aims to advance the performance by performing multiple operations on the screen, within the "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)," A ``new game'' that aims to advance the performance by operating the ``15th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'' side within the ``section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)''. This assumes the case where you switch to "Strategy".

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 323(a), (h), and (i), the 15th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 326(q)), the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, It is assumed that an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2e in the "2 section)".

In this pachinko machine 1, at timing to2e in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", "15F operation section A (here In this case, if an operation is performed on "sword ornament 5001)", "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (hidden section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period for the first modification" is performed. 326 ( The content of the performance shown in r) will appear.

That is, in this case, as one of the changes A after the 15th F reception, the 15th F reception period is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 323(a) and 323(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 323(h), (k), and 326(r), "15th F reception output according to the operation on the 15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" As described above, the "sound A" is audibly output and the "15th F reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 323(f), (g) and FIGS. 326(q), (r), upon receipt of the operation at timing to2e, the 15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001 ), the first aspect A1 of the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "15th F operation related display B (" The first aspect B1 of the button drawing image BMG) is hidden, and the 15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is hidden. ", and a second aspect B2 of the "15thF operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" corresponding to the 15thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are displayed, respectively. It becomes like this.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 323(d), 326(q), and (r), the background image changes from "first background image HK1" to "third background image HK3( Here, the background is changed to "a display depicting a desert shown in FIG. 326(r)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 323(e), FIG. 326(q), and (r), the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section changes from the "first light emitting mode" to the "third light emitting mode" in response to the operation reception at timing to2e. The light emission changes in the following manner.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323(i), FIG. 326(q), and (r), the 15F post-reception display UB and approximate image KG are set to a hidden state in response to the operation reception at timing to2e. It looks like this.

In this case as well, with the operation reception at timing to2e as a trigger, a reception period (a new reception period after the operation) of a type different from the 15th F reception period (changes after reception are different, etc.) will occur. , for this reception period (new reception period after operation), at timing to2E in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)", "15F operation section A (here, sword Since the operation is the same as that described in the case where the operation is performed on the "decoration object 5001)", a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, even during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification," as shown in FIG. No operation-related sound (acceptance acceptance sound) is output, and no display indicating the remaining time is displayed. On the other hand, in the reception period of the different type (new reception period after the operation), the 15th F operation-related sound a related to the occurrence is output. However, the display indicating the remaining time may not be displayed even during the reception period of the different type (new reception period after the operation).

Furthermore, in this production example, the 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see FIG. 326(r), etc.). On the other hand, as described above, the 15th F post-reception display UB is not displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ due to the relationship with the decorative pattern SZ. However, instead of this, regarding the display UB after reception on the 15th floor, there will be a decorative pattern in the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (hidden section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification". Due to the relationship with the decorative pattern SZ, it is not displayed so that it overlaps with the front side, but in the "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", the front side of the decorative symbol SZ is not displayed. They may be displayed so that they overlap on the sides.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 15th F post-reception display UB, an operation is performed on the ``15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' during the ``15th F reception period according to the first modification''. It will now be hidden based on this. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 322(i), FIG. 323(i), FIG. 325, and FIG. 5001)" can be turned into a non-display state at the time when the "15th F post-reception display UA" starts to be displayed.

In addition, during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", even if the "15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation is not accepted. is not performed multiple times (operation acceptance is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (auto continuous tap function is not enabled) (see Figure 322(b) and Figure 323(b)). reference). In this case, you would like to allow multiple operations to be accepted for the ``15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' within the ``15th F acceptance period according to the first modification''. For example, it goes without saying that the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

In addition, the 15th F acceptance period is originally one that continues until timing to3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 324(c), and ends based on the arrival of timing to3. In this regard, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 324, if no operation is performed within the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification," there will be no change in display or sound output related to the reception period. If this is not done, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" will end.

However, the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" only needs to occur as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. For example, "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" When the "period" ends at timing to3, when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the "15th F acceptance period according to the first modification". The background change from the first background image HK1 may be made in a manner different from that of the first background image HK1, or the background may be changed from the first background image HK1 in a manner different from that of the first background image HK1. The light emission may change from the first light emission mode in a manner different from that when the operation is accepted for ``.

327 to 331 show that when "condition 15F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, instead of the 15th F reception period (FIGS. 319 to 321) described above, from the middle of the reception period (operation permissible state) It is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" occurs where the confidentiality appears. More specifically, FIG. 327 shows that the "15th F operation section A ( Here, it is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when an operation is accepted for the "sword decoration body 5001)", and FIG. This is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when an operation is accepted for the ``15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' in the section where no display is displayed (non-display section, 2nd section). Yes, and FIG. 329 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. Further, FIGS. 330 and 331 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" occurs. In addition, among the configurations related to the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", for configurations that are not specifically mentioned, including the application of the other example, if the above-mentioned "15th F reception period" occurs. is the same as

That is, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" is also the same as the above-mentioned 15F reception period (Figs. 319 to 321) and the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the 1st modification (Figs. 322 to 326). )", the 15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to accept only one operation until the end of the 15th F acceptance period, and the 15th F operation Part B (here, the operation button 410) can be operated multiple times until the 15th F reception period ends. In addition, the different examples regarding these "15th F operating section A" and "15th F operating section B" are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned 15th F reception period and the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification". Applicable as appropriate.

In this regard, the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" is similar to the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (FIGS. 322 to 326)" described above, and the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed." ” and “a section where no operation-related display is displayed”, and the confidentiality becomes apparent in the “section where no operation-related display is displayed”.

In addition, in such a "section in which no operation-related display is displayed" during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification," the "second background image HK2" is displayed as the background image described above, and the "second background image HK2" as described above is displayed. Regarding the fact that the "second light emitting mode" appears as the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section of This is similar to the case of ``Reception period (Figs. 322 to 326)''.

However, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", the order in which the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed" and "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed" is the same as in the "first modification" described above. This is the opposite of the case of the 15th F reception period (FIGS. 322 to 326).

That is, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification," at the time of occurrence, as shown in FIGS. 329(c), (f), (g), and FIG. 330(a), "15thF operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and "15F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) 15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed respectively. Here, the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed in the first mode A1 as the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", and the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed in the first mode A1. 329(f), (g) and , see FIG. 330(a)).

Regarding the first aspect A1 of the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the first aspect B1 of the "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" according to this modification, Since it is the same as that displayed during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification," its explanation will be omitted.

In this regard, during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", as shown in FIGS. A specific timing toY that is within the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" without being received ), this triggers the end of the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" and the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, second section)". will be started. In other words, in this case, the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" will be hidden, and this will cause the "2nd modification" to be hidden. Even though the 15th F reception period according to the example continues, the fact that there is an operation unit in a state where operation reception is permitted is kept secret.

In addition, in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" until the specific timing toY arrives, the background image is " "First background image HK1" is displayed, and the "first light emitting mode" appears in the specific light emitting section (see FIG. 330(a)). However, when the above-mentioned specific timing toY arrives (when the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)" starts), the above-mentioned "first background image HK1" The background changes to a different background image (here, "second background image HK2"), and the "first light emission mode" changes to a different light emission mode (here, "second background image HK2") in the specific light emitting section. The light emission changes into two light emission modes. In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 330(a) and 330(b), when the specific timing toY arrives, the background image (first background The background will be changed from "image HK1)" to "background image (second background image HK2) depicting mountains and rivers."

In addition, regarding the "first background image HK1" and the "first light emitting mode" in the specific light emitting section, the "second background image HK2" and the "second light emitting mode" in the specific light emitting section, the above-mentioned "15th F reception period" Since it is as explained in "15th F reception period according to the first modification", a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Then, when timing to3 arrives without any operation being performed by the player even after the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)" has started, as shown in FIG. 329(c), As shown in (f) and (g), the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" is ended.

At this time, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the background image (here, the second background image HK2) that appeared within the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)", The light emitting mode (here, the second light emitting mode) in the specific light emitting section was made to continue even after the timing to3 has arrived, but instead of this, when the timing to3 has arrived, the "operation related display" The background image (here, the first background image HK1) that appeared in the "displayed section (display section, first section)" and the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section (here, the first light emission mode) are restored. You can.

On the other hand, in FIG. 327 and FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (k), the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section , 1st section)", the player starts to operate the 15F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, but the player is worried that the final result does not appear. In the middle of the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)", you can switch from "operation on the 15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" to "15th F operation". This shows an example of the effect when the effect is to be advanced by switching to ``operation on section A (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)''.

Here, the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" is also such that no matter how many times the 15th floor operation section B, which is allowed to be operated multiple times, is operated, the 15th floor reception period ends with this as a trigger. It is supposed to never happen.

In addition, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" also generates the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", similar to the "14th F reception period" and "15th F reception period" described above. In this case, a precursor effect display indicating this (the occurrence of a state in which operation reception is permitted) is not executed at a timing before the occurrence of the 15th F reception period.

In addition, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", the "15thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)" When an operation is performed, the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed using this as an opportunity. However, at this time, there are both cases in which the output sound B after receiving the 15th F is audibly output and cases in which it is not audibly output.

By the way, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modification," the above-mentioned "first background" is displayed as a "background image" in the effect display device 1600. Image HK1" is displayed, and while the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" continues, the background changes from the first background image HK1. will not occur.

Here, regarding the first background image HK1, the relevant It is sufficient that the background does not change from the first background image HK1, and it may not necessarily be displayed before the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" occurs. For example, what is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" occurs, etc. It is sufficient that it is displayed at the time of occurrence of the 15th F reception period according to Modification 2. Although the first background image HK1 according to this example is displayed as a different image from the second background image HK2, at first glance, it seems that they have the same thing in common, such as the depiction of a mountain landscape. It is difficult to recognize which background image is being displayed. However, the aspect of the first background image HK1 is not necessarily limited to this aspect, and may be any other aspect.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light emitting modes. Then, in the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modification," the specific light emitting section is set to It is now emitting light in the ``first lighting mode'', and the ``section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)'' of the ``15th floor reception period for the second modification'' continues. During this period, no change from the first light emitting mode to another light emitting mode occurs in the specific light emitting section. Regarding the first light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section, the corresponding light emitting mode is set while the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" continues. It is sufficient that there is no change from the first light emitting mode to another light emitting mode. )" may not necessarily be executed before the occurrence of ". For example, it may be anything that appears at the time of occurrence of the 15th F reception period, such as one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 15th F reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIG. 327 and FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (k), the operation reception for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the "15th F operation While it is suggested that the operation reception for section B (here, the operation button 410) is in a state where all operations are permitted, (section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section) ), it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing to2A. When the first operation is performed on the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" at timing to2A, the above-mentioned 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed using this as a trigger.

Here, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" is performed. "Change A" includes effects such as "changing the background image that had appeared up until then to a different background image (in this example, the third background image HK3)" and "changing the light emitting mode that had appeared up until then to a different light emitting mode". (in this example, the third light emitting mode)"; and "The display UA is displayed after receiving the 15th floor (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.)"; The 15thF operation-related display A (here, a simulated image display of the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001), and the 15F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) ) corresponding to the 15F operation-related display B (in this case, a simulated image display of the operation button 410) is displayed. At this time, for example, prepare multiple modes as "display UA after reception on the 15th floor (in this example, summoned beast SJ, etc.)", and depending on which mode appears, the expectation level of the jackpot will be high or low (" 100%" or "0%") may be suggested. However, as the "15th F post-reception change A", only one of the above-mentioned effects may be prepared, and only the prepared effect may appear.

In any case, during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification," when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)," this triggers the "15th F reception period according to the second modification." Not only will the ``15th F reception period according to the modified example'' end, but a different type of reception period (operation permission state) from the ``15th F reception period according to the second modified example'' will occur, and the different type During the acceptance period (operation permissible state), the 15thF operation-related display A (display of a simulated image of the sword ornament 5001) and the 15thF operation-related display B (display of a simulated image of the operation button 410) are displayed. Among these, both the operation reception for the "15thF operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the operation reception for the "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are allowed. It becomes like this. In addition, in the reception period (operation permissible state) for the different types, if an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", for example, the above-mentioned "according to the second modification A post-reception change that is different from the "15th-F post-reception change A" that appears when an operation is accepted for the "15th-F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the "15th-F reception period" will now occur. ing.

On the other hand, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", when an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the "15F reception period according to the operation" is performed. As one of ``Change B'', effects such as ``Which of the multiple modes will the wizard MT appear with a staff wrapped in ``aura''?'' (display UB after reception on the 15th floor) will appear. It has become. It may be possible to suggest whether the jackpot expectation level is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%") depending on which form of "aura" it is. In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 15th floor is the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a weak aura, and the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a medium aura. ``Second performance mode UB2'' in which the magician MT appears with a staff wrapped in a powerful aura, and ``Third production mode UB3'' in which the wizard MT appears with a staff wrapped in a powerful aura. Performance mode UB2" suggests that the expectation level of jackpot is higher than "first performance mode UB1", and "third performance mode UB3" suggests that the expectation level of jackpot is higher than "second performance mode UB2". It has become.

Also, as will be described later, when the 15th F reception display UB is displayed within the 15th F reception period according to the second modification, the 15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed, unlike in the case of the above-mentioned 14F reception period, the 15F post-reception display UB is hidden based on the operation reception for the 15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001). It is intended to be in a state of

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 330(c) and 330(d), "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of "15th floor reception period according to second modification" '', when the first operation is performed on the ``15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'', the 15th F after-reception display UB as one of the ``15th F after-reception changes B'' is , is executed as the "first performance mode UB1" in which the magician MT appears with a staff wrapped in a weak aura.

In this regard, in this production example, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", "15thF operation section B (here, When an operation is performed on the "operation button 410)", a corresponding post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output (see FIG. 327(k)).

According to such a configuration, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification", the 12th floor reception period or the 13th floor reception period Compared to the case where the operation button 410 was operated during the 14th F reception period, it is easier to recognize that the operation button 410 has been properly accepted. Feelings of anxiety such as "Is everything okay?" can be suppressed.

Therefore, the display UB after the 15th floor reception (when the wizard MT Regarding which aura the staff appears with), unlike in the case of the 12th, 13th, and 14th floor reception periods, the shape that appears in front of the decorative pattern SZ (See FIGS. 330 and 331).

The meaning of "not displayed in a way that is visible on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ" is as explained in the "15th F reception period for the first modification" above, so it will not be explained in detail here. will be omitted. Also, a method for realizing the "change B after the 15th floor reception" according to the operation on the "15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification", The execution time of the "15th F post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is also determined in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification". Since this is as explained above, detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In the example shown in FIG. 327 and FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (k), the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, At timing to2B (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 330(d) appears) in the ``1st section)'', the second operation is performed on the ``15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)''. It is assumed that this is done.

In this production example, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", as shown in FIGS. 327(i), (k) and FIGS. 330(e) to (g), as one of the changes B after receiving the 15th F. The display UB after receiving the reception on the 15th floor is executed as the "second performance mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears with a cane wrapped in a medium aura. In this example, the wizard MT (first production mode UB1), who had been holding a staff covered with a weak aura, is once depicted moving outside the display screen (see FIG. 330(e)), After that, it was decided to re-appear with a cane wrapped in a medium aura (second production mode UB2) (see Figure 330(f)), but as the UB displayed after reception on the 15th floor. The method for causing a display change is not limited to this. In addition, in this case as well, the post-reception output sound in response to the operation performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" B will be audibly output (see FIG. 327(k)). Regarding this post-acceptance output sound B, regardless of how many times the ``15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' is operated within the ``15th F acceptance period according to the second modification''. They may be output as the same sound or may be output as different sounds.

In the example shown in FIG. 327 and FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (k), the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, At timing to2C (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 330(g) appears) in the "1st section)", the third operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". It is assumed that this is done.

In this production example, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", "15F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed for the third time, as shown in FIGS. 327(i), (k) and FIGS. 330(h) to (j), as one of the changes B after receiving the 15th F. The display UB after the reception on the 15th floor is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears with a staff wrapped in a powerful aura. In this example, the wizard MT (second production mode UB2), who had been holding a staff with a moderate aura, is depicted as temporarily moving outside the display screen (see Figure 330(h)). After that, it was decided that he would appear again holding a staff wrapped in a powerful aura (third production mode UB3) (see Figure 330(i)), but as the UB displayed after reception on the 15th floor. The method for causing a display change is not limited to this. In addition, in this case as well, the post-reception output sound in response to the operation performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" B will be audibly output (see FIG. 327(k)). This post-reception output sound B is the same sound that is output regardless of how many times the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated during the 15th F reception period. or may be output as a different sound.

In the example shown in FIG. 327 and FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (k), the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, At the timing to2D (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 330(j) appears) in the "1st section)", the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". It is assumed that this is done.

However, in this production example, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", "15F operation section B (here, the operation When the fourth operation is performed on "button 410)," as shown in FIGS. 327(i), (k), and 330(k), the output sound after acceptance is not audibly output. , no visible change (aspect) appears as the 15th F post-reception display UB (15th F post-reception change B). That is, in this case, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", "15thF operation section B (here, operation button 410 )” before and after the fourth operation is performed, there is no apparent change after reception, and the production status continues as it was before the fourth operation was performed. becomes. At this time, the output sound after acceptance is also not audibly output.

By the way, in the "15th floor reception period for the second modification", after the 15th floor reception change B (third production mode UB3) is displayed according to the third operation, it is hidden as time passes. If the 4th operation is performed on "15thF operation part B (here, operation button 410)" in the state where The production mode UB3 is displayed again (a visual change (aspect) occurs), but in this case as well, the output sound may not be audibly output after acceptance.

In addition, in this example, the 15th F. The post-reception display UB was set to ``change the display to a specific aspect'' and ``no new aspect appears'', but instead of this, ``the 15th floor reception period for the second modification'' was changed. The determination is made when an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of " In this case, based on the result of the determination, the display may be changed to a specific mode, or a new mode may not appear. In short, such display changes only need to occur when predetermined conditions are met.

By the way, in this production example, if the "second production mode UB2" appears as the display UB after reception on the 15th floor, after that, only the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" continues to be operated. However, the "first production mode UB1" will not appear when the operation is accepted within the "15th floor reception period for the second modification", and the display UB after the 15th floor reception will not appear. If the "third production mode UB3" appears, even if you continue to operate only the "15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", the "15th floor reception according to the second modification example" will be displayed. The "first presentation mode UB1" and the "second presentation mode UB2" do not appear when an operation is accepted within the "period". Therefore, the "third performance mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" as the 15th F post-reception display UB. Therefore, in this production example, even if the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated after the "third production mode UB3" is displayed, the "4th production mode" described above is The same situation as ``operation'' will appear.

However, as mentioned above, even though the operation was performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period according to the second modification," the operation was not responded to. If the post-reception display or post-reception output sound does not appear (no change in display or sound output in response to the operation), the player should 410)" will be okay if I continue to operate it as is. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety becomes gradually stronger as the remaining time of the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" decreases (as the elapsed time from the occurrence becomes longer). In particular, in the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification", even if the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, the output sound after reception is not audible. This feeling of anxiety is all the more so given the fact that there is a growing number of

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 327 and 330(a), (c) to (k), the production progresses by multiple operations on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". The player gives up on the aimed "initial game strategy (timings to2A to to2D)" before timing toY arrives, and in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" This is based on the assumption that a switch is made to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by operating the 15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) side.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 327(a), (h), and (i), the 15th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 330(k)), the section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, It is assumed that the operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2E in "1 section)".

In this pachinko machine 1, at timing to2E in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", "15F operation section A (here Now, when an operation is performed on the sword decoration object 5001), change A occurs after the 15th F reception. For example, as one of the changes A after the 15th F reception, first, the 15th F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 327(a) and 327(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 327(h), (k), and 331(r), the ``15th F post-reception output'' corresponds to the operation on the ``15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. "Sound A" is audibly output, and "15th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on "15th F operating section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is displayed.

In this production example, the "15th F reception post-reception display UA" is displayed in response to the operation reception for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification". However, as for the UA displayed after the reception on the 15th floor (summoned beast SJ), there are cases where a mode with a relatively high expectation level (rate of winning the jackpot) appears. , a mode may appear with a lower expectation level (rate of winning the jackpot) than the above mode. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "15th F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output; The output may be audible in a manner that suggests the degree of difficulty.

In addition, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", as shown in FIG. 327(i), FIG. 330(k), and FIG. When an operation is accepted for the ``15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' while the 15th F post-reception display UB is being displayed in response to the operation accepted for the ``operation button 410).'' , Taking this as an opportunity, the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden.

Also, regarding the background image (here, the first background image HK1) in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" As shown in FIG. 327(d), FIG. 330(k), and FIG. 331(p), a different background is triggered by the operation on the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". The image is switched (background change) to the image (here, the third background image HK3). In addition, during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification", the background image may not be switched to another background image (background change) in response to an operation on the "15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". do not have.

In addition, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification", the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section (here, the first light emission mode) Also, as shown in FIG. 327(e), switching to another light emitting mode (here, the third light emitting mode) is triggered by an operation on the "15th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". (light emission change). In addition, during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification," switching to another light emitting mode (light emitting change) is not triggered by an operation on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". do not have.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, as shown in FIGS. 327(f), (g), and 331(p), the When an operation is accepted for "operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", this will be used as a trigger for the reception period (after the operation) of a different type (changes after reception are different, etc.) from the corresponding 15F reception period. A new reception period) is now possible. During the reception period for the different type (new reception period after operation), the ``15th floor operation section A (here, sword It goes without saying that both the "decoration body 5001)" and the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are allowed to accept operations, and the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is allowed to accept operations. )" 15thF operation related display A (here, a simulated image display of the sword ornament 5001)" and the 15thF operation related display related to "15thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)" B (here, a simulated image display of the operation button 410) is displayed.

However, during the reception period for such a different type (new reception period after operation), the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is changed from the "15thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" )" is displayed in a second mode A2 (a mode different from the first mode A1 described above), and the "15thF operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is displayed in the second mode A2 (different mode from the above-mentioned first mode A1)" 327(f), (g), FIG. 331(p), etc.). ).

Note that the second aspect A2 of the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the second aspect B2 of the "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" according to this modification example are as follows. , the relationship between the first aspect and the second aspect, other examples, etc. are the same as those displayed within the "15th F reception period for the first modification", so explanations thereof will be omitted. shall be.

Then, during the reception period for the different type (new reception period after the operation), as shown in FIGS. When an operation is accepted for ``15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)'', a change occurs after the reception according to the operation reception. Changes will occur after the corresponding acceptance.

However, in this case, when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)", no light emission change occurs, whereas the "15th F operating section A (here, the operating button 410)" When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001), there may be both a case where a change in light emission occurs and a case where a change in light emission does not occur. In addition, regarding the background image, even if an operation is accepted for either the "15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or the "15th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)", the relevant The background image itself is not replaced with a different background image (the background is changed), but when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", this will be used as a trigger. , when the aspect of the background image changes (for example, changing the background image to be darker or brighter), and when the aspect of the background image changes (for example, changing the background image to darker or brighter) It may be possible to have both cases where there is no change in Note that when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", this triggers a change in the aspect of the background image (for example, the background image is made darker or brighter, etc.). change).

In this example, during the acceptance period for the different type (new acceptance period after the operation), the above-mentioned "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is allowed to accept the operation only once. Although it is assumed that the "15th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is allowed to accept operations multiple times, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the above-mentioned "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is allowed to receive operations multiple times during the reception period of the different type (new reception period after the operation), the above-mentioned automatic continuous press It is desirable to prevent the feature from being enabled.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIG. 328, FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (g), and FIG. At timings to2a and to2b within the section), operations were accepted for the 15thF operation unit B (here, the operation button 410), but as the 15thF post-reception display UB in response to the second operation acceptance. This assumes that the timing toY arrives while the "second performance mode UB2" is being displayed.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timings to2a and to2b within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)", respectively. The content of the presentation is as explained with reference to FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (g) in the examples shown in FIG. 327 and FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (k). Therefore, I will omit the explanation here.

That is, in this case, in the examples shown in FIGS. 328 and 330(a), (c) to (g), and FIGS. 331(l) to (o), the situation in which the 15F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (Fig. 330(g)), when the timing toY has arrived, the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, The first section) ends, and the section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section) begins.

When the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)" starts in this way, first, as shown in FIGS. 328(f), (g) and FIG. 331(l), When the timing toY has arrived, the "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 15th F operating section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the 15th F operating section B are displayed. The "15th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" corresponding to the operation button 410 (here, the operation button 410) is hidden.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 328(d) and 321(l), when the timing toY has arrived, the background image is changed to "first background image HK1 (here, the first background image HK1 (here, shown in FIG. 330(g) The background changes from "a display in which a mountain is depicted" to "a second background image HK2 (here, a display in which a mountain and a river are depicted as shown in FIG. 331(l))". Then, the "second background image HK2" that appears in this way is continuously displayed while it is within the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)."

Further, as shown in FIG. 328(e), upon arrival of timing toY, the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section changes from the "first light emitting mode" to the "second light emitting mode". . Then, the "second light emitting mode" of the specific light emitting part that appears in this way will be continuously executed while it is within the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)". .

In addition, in this production example, if a specific timing toY arrives while the 15th F post-reception display UB2 is being displayed, the 15th F post-reception display UB2 will be disabled using the arrival of the specific timing toY as a trigger. (See Figure 328(i) and Figure 331(l)), so that it is hidden before the predetermined display time (execution time) elapses. It has become.

According to such a configuration, although the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" itself continues, it is possible to determine whether the "15F reception period according to the second modification" has ended. It has come to be possible to make it look like this, and it has come to be expected that it will suitably impart a sense of tension.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 328, 330(a), (c) to (g), and 331(l) to (o), "operation-related At timing to2c (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 331(l) appears) in the section where no display is displayed (non-display section, second section), the 15thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is assumed to be operated for the third time.

In this production example, the third operation is performed on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 328(i), (k) and FIG. 331(m), (n), the 15th F post-reception display UB as one of the 15th F post-reception changes B is changed to the wizard MT. is executed as the "third performance mode UB3" in which the user appears with a cane wrapped in a powerful aura, and the output sound B is audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 328(k)). Regarding the contents of these effects, the third operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)". Since this is the same as in the case where it is performed (see FIGS. 330(i) and (j)), a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

However, if an operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, second section)", the "operation Unlike the case where an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the section in which the related display is displayed (display section, first section), the 15th F reception Post change B is such that "15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "15th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are not displayed, and "2nd background image HK2" This occurs while the "second light emission mode" is appearing (see FIGS. 328(d) to (g), (i) and FIGS. 331(m), (n)).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 328, 330(a), (c) to (g), and 331(l) to (o), "operation-related At timing to2d (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 331(n) appears) in the section where no display is displayed (non-display section, second section), the 15thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed for the fourth time.

However, in this production example, in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, second section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", "15thF operation section B (here, When the operation button 410) is operated for the fourth time, as shown in FIGS. 328(i), (k), and 331(o), the output sound after reception is not audible. Of course, no change (form) appears visually as the 15th F post-reception display UB (15th F post-reception change B). Regarding this production content, the fourth operation is performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)". Since this is the same as in the case where the data is entered (see FIG. 330(k)), a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

However, as mentioned above, even though the operation was performed on the "15F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "15F reception period according to the second modification," the operation was not responded to. If the post-reception display or post-reception output sound does not appear (no change in display or sound output in response to the operation), the player should 410)" will be okay if I continue to operate it as is. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety becomes gradually stronger as the remaining time of the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" decreases (as the elapsed time from the occurrence becomes longer). In particular, in the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification", even if the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated, the output sound after reception is not audible. This feeling of anxiety is all the more so given the fact that there is a growing number of

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIG. 328, FIGS. 330(a), (c) to (g), and FIGS. 331(l) to (o), the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" The player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings to2a to to2d)" in which the player aims to advance the performance by performing multiple operations on the screen within the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)". A ``new game'' that aims to advance the performance by operating the ``15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'' side within the ``section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)''. This assumes the case where you switch to "Strategy".

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 328(a), (h), and (i), the 15th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (the situation shown in Figure 331(o)), in the ``15th F reception period according to the second modification'', the ``section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (hidden section, non-display section, It is assumed that an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing to2e in the "2 section)".

In this pachinko machine 1, at timing to2e in the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, second section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the second modification", "15F operation section A (here In this case, when an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001)", the "section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" is performed. 331 ( The content of the performance shown in p) will appear.

That is, in this case, as one of the changes A after the 15th F acceptance, the 15th F acceptance period is first terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 328(a) and 328(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 328(h), (k), and FIG. 331(p), the "15th F post-reception output" corresponding to the operation on the "15th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" As described above, the "sound A" is audibly output, and the "15th F reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 328(f) and (g) and FIGS. 331(o) and (p), upon receipt of the operation at timing to2e, the 15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001 ), and the second aspect A2 of the “15th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and the “15th F operation related display B ( The second aspect B2 of the button drawing image BMG) is now displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 328(d) and 331(o) and (p), the background image changes from "second background image HK2" to "third background image HK3( Here, the background is changed to a display depicting a desert shown in FIG. 331(p).

Further, as shown in FIG. 328(e), FIG. 331(o), and (p), when the operation is accepted at timing to2e, the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section changes from "second light emitting mode" to "third light emitting mode." The light emission changes in the following manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 328(i) and FIG. 331(o), (p), the 15th F post-reception display UB is set to a hidden state in response to the operation reception at timing to2e. There is.

In this case as well, with the operation reception at timing to2e as a trigger, a reception period (new reception period after operation) of a type different from the 15th F reception period (changes after reception are different, etc.) will occur. , for this reception period (new reception period after operation), at timing to2E in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)", "15F operation section A (here, sword Since this is the same as that described in the case where the operation is performed on the "decoration object 5001)", a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, even during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification," as shown in FIG. 329(j), information related to the occurrence of the operation-related image may be No operation-related sound (acceptance acceptance sound) is output, and no display indicating the remaining time is displayed. On the other hand, in the reception period of the different type (new reception period after the operation), the 15th F operation-related sound a related to the occurrence is output. However, the display indicating the remaining time may not be displayed even during the reception period of the different type (new reception period after the operation).

Furthermore, in this production example, the 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ (see FIG. 331(p), etc.). On the other hand, as described above, the 15th F post-reception display UB is not displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ due to the relationship with the decorative pattern SZ. However, instead of this, regarding the display UB after reception on the 15th floor, there will be a decorative pattern in the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification". Due to the relationship with SZ, it is not displayed so that it overlaps with the front side, but in the "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)", the front side of the decorative symbol SZ is not displayed. They may be displayed so that they overlap on the sides.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 15th F post-reception display UB, an operation is performed on the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification". It will now be hidden based on this. In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 327(i), FIG. 328(i), FIG. 330, and FIG. 5001)" can be turned into a non-display state at the time when the "15th F post-reception display UA" starts to be displayed.

In addition, during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification", even if the "15th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation is not accepted. is not performed multiple times (operation acceptance is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (auto continuous tap function is not enabled) (see Figure 327(b) and Figure 328(b)). reference). In this case, you would like to allow multiple operations to be accepted for the ``15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' within the ``15th F acceptance period according to the second modification''. For example, it goes without saying that the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "15th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)".

Furthermore, the 15th F acceptance period is originally one that continues until timing to3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 329(c), and ends based on the arrival of timing to3. In this regard, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 329, if no operation is performed within the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification," there will be no change in display or sound output related to the reception period. If this is not done, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" will end.

However, the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" only needs to occur as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. For example, "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" When the "period" ends at timing to3, when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the "15th F acceptance period according to the second modification". The background change from the second background image HK1 may be caused in a manner different from that of the second background image HK1, or the ``15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' may be changed within the ``15th F reception period according to the second modification''. The light emission change from the second light emission mode may occur in a manner different from that when the operation is accepted for ``.

FIGS. 332 to 336 are time charts showing an example of the production content when the ``condition 16F'' is satisfied as the generation condition and the 16th F acceptance period occurs. More specifically, FIG. 332 shows that "16F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is displayed in "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" during the 16F reception period. 333 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when an operation is accepted for ". 334 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when an operation is accepted for the "16th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", and FIG. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the performance when no operation is performed. Further, FIGS. 335 and 336 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 16th F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "16th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a preview performance determination) corresponding to the 16th F fluctuation pattern. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 16th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 16th F fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "16th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 334, within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "16th F variation pattern", based on the arrival of timing tp2 when the 16F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 16F"), "Acceptance regarding changes after 16F reception (display UA, UB after 16F reception, sound output after 16F reception, etc.)" is allowed. A 16F reception period (operation permissible state) can occur.

Here, during the 16th F reception period according to this embodiment, the 16F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) accepts one operation until the 16F reception period ends. 16F operation section B (here, operation button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations until the 16F reception period ends. There is.

That is, during the 16th floor reception period, for example, although an operation is started on the 16th floor operation section B (in this case, the operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, the game ends when the final result does not appear. During the reception period on the 16th floor, the person feels uneasy, and changes from "operation on the 16th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" to "operation on the 16th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is assumed that there will be a case where the user attempts to advance the production by switching to "operation for".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 16th F reception period is to occur, it first displays a foreshadowing effect that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 16th F reception period will occur). It is possible.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when a specific timing before the occurrence of the 16th F reception period arrives, as shown in FIG. ” starts execution. Note that the "16th F omen effect display ZFD" according to this example of effect is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 16th F operation related displays A and B are displayed, but the 16th F omen related display ZFD is Displays A and B may be hidden before being displayed.

That is, in this production example, when the 16th F reception period occurs, the state is such that the operation reception on the 16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is allowed, or the operation reception is not allowed. ``16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' that can only appear when the user is in the state where the 16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and operation reception for the 16F operation section B (here, operation button 410) are allowed. or "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, the 16th F reception period according to this production example is similar to the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification", and at the time of occurrence, the 16th F reception period according to the example shown in FIGS. 332(c) to 334(c), As shown in FIG. 335(b), a simulated image display (operation related display) imitating the 16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 16F operation section B (here, the operation related display) are shown. Button 410) is not displayed (operation-related display) and conceals the fact that there is an operation section that is in a state where operation reception is permitted. . When the predetermined timing (such as the timing when the operation-related display is stopped) arrives, the "section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" ends and the "operation-related display is stopped". The displayed section (display section, second section) is to be started.

However, the 16th floor reception period according to this production example is a "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" than the above-mentioned "15th floor reception period according to the first modification". (the time from when the acceptance period occurs to when the non-display section ends and the confidentiality is released) is set as a short time.

Also, in the 16th floor reception period according to this production example, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", the background image is not the above-mentioned "second background image HK2", The above-mentioned "first background image HK1" is displayed, and the above-mentioned "first light-emitting mode" appears as the light-emitting mode in the specific light-emitting section instead of the above-mentioned "second light-emitting mode". There is.

According to such a configuration, in the 16th F reception period, while providing confidentiality regarding the state in which operation reception is permitted, the confidentiality is realized as a relatively loose performance. As a result, players become "accustomed" to confidentiality effects. In other words, in this case, it is expected that even if a more complex and highly confidential performance is provided, it will be difficult to reduce the interest in the game, so it will be possible to expand the range of performances. Become.

Incidentally, in the 16th F reception period according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) and "16F operation related display B (button ``Draw image BMG)'' are displayed respectively.

Here, the "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are also displayed as image displays in which periodic changes may appear. There is.

Here, as a method of displaying the "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" displayed during the 16th F reception period as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, FIGS. 284 (A) to ( The embodiment shown in D) may also be adopted. That is, in this case, after the part (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "16F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(A), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. It will appear repeatedly.

Furthermore, as a method for displaying the "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 284(a) to (d) are available. may be adopted. In other words, in this case, after the part (button drawing image BMG) of the operation receiving part of the 16F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 284(a), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in (b) to (d)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change repeatedly appears in a form that requires a predetermined period of 16F time B. That will happen.

According to these configurations, during the 16F reception period, each "16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", "16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", etc. The "operation receiver" appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the cycle 16F time A and the cycle 16F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be different times. However, since it is set as a longer time than the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 13F reception period, in the reception period of a different type (new reception period after operation), the 13F Compared to the reception period, the "operation receiver" will be depicted moving slowly up and down its movable range.

Furthermore, in the 16F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 334(d) and (e), even if the specific timing tpX arrives, the "first background image HK1" is The background does not change to a different background image, and the "first light emitting mode" does not change to a different light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section.

Then, when timing tp3 arrives without any operation being performed by the player even after the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" has started, the state shown in FIG. 334(c) is reached. As shown, the 16th F reception period has ended and both "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are hidden. will be subject to

Here, FIG. 332, FIGS. 335 (a) to (c), and FIG. Although the player has started operating the 16F operation section B (in this case, the operation button 410), which allows multiple operations within a period of 1 section), the player feels uneasy because the final result does not appear. Remember, in the middle of the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)", from "operation on 16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" to "16F operation section A" (Here, an operation on the sword decoration body 5001)'' is shown to show an example of the effect when the effect is attempted to advance.

In other words, even in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" within the 16th floor reception period, similar to the above-mentioned "14th floor reception period" and "15th floor reception period", multiple When the final result display appears as a result of performing an operation on the 16F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410) that is allowed to be operated, or when a situation occurs where the production is not progressing slowly, the The effect is such that the user can feel that there is another operation section (operation section A on the 16th floor) that is secretly given an opportunity to operate it. That is, in this case, the operation target is switched from "operation on the 16th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" to "operation on the 16th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" to advance the production. This makes it more likely that the user will try to do so.

Also, the 16th floor reception period related to this production example will not be triggered by this to end the 16th floor reception period, no matter how many times the 16th floor operation section B, which allows multiple operations, is operated. It has become.

However, in the 16th F reception period, unlike the above-mentioned "14th F reception period" and "15th F reception period", the 16F reception period occurs before the 16F reception period occurs. At the timing of , the 16th F precursor effect display ZFD indicating this (the occurrence of a state in which operation reception is permitted) is executed.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 16F reception period, Taking this as an opportunity, the 16th F post-reception display UB is displayed. However, at this time, the output sound B after receiving the 16th F is not outputted audibly, and is always not outputted audibly.

In addition, during the 16F reception period, in both "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" The first background image HK1 is displayed, but the first background image HK1 only needs to be one that does not change the background while the 16F reception period continues, and the 16F reception period occurs. It may be displayed before the event, or it may not be displayed. For example, what is displayed at the time of occurrence of the 16F reception period, such as what is displayed due to a background change that occurs when the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" occurs during the 16F reception period. It is fine as long as it is suitable. In addition, during the 16F reception period, it was decided to display the "first background image HK1" as such a background image, but instead of this, the first background image HK1, the second background image HK2, and the third background It may be displayed as a fourth background image different from any of the images HK3.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light emitting modes. In the 16th F reception period, in both "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" , the specific light emitting section is configured to emit light in the "first light emitting mode" among the plurality of light emitting modes, and while the 16F reception period continues, the specific light emitting section A change from the first light emission mode to another light emission mode does not occur. Regarding this first light emission mode, it is sufficient that the light emission does not change while the 16F reception period continues, and the first light emission mode may be one that starts emitting light before the 16F reception period occurs. It may also be one that does not emit light. For example, it may be something that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 16th F acceptance period occurs, as long as it appears at the time the 16th F acceptance period occurs. In addition, during the 16F reception period, the "first light emission mode" appeared as such a light emission mode, but instead of this, any of the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode A different fourth light emission mode may appear.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIG. 332, FIGS. 335(a) to (c), and FIGS. 336(g1) to (l1), the The fact that both the operation reception and the operation reception on the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are allowed is kept secret (a section in which no operation-related display is displayed). It is assumed that the first operation is performed on "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tp2A (in the non-display section, first section). When the first operation is performed on the "16th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tp2A, this can be used as a trigger to cause the above-mentioned 16F post-reception change B.

In this example, at timing tp2A (situation shown in FIG. 335(b)) within the 16F reception period, the first operation reception is made for "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 332(i), (k), and 335(c), as one of the changes B after receiving the 16th ``Drawing of the area) increasing (the magic value changes from ``0'' to ``1'')'' and ``Drawing of the wizard MT saving MP'' are now performed (after the reception on the 16th floor). Display UB1).

Incidentally, in the 16th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, "Hero YS" and "Magician MT" facing the BOSS character are respectively displayed on the effect display device 1600. "Hero YS" is used as a character that moves in response to the operation on "16th F operating section A (here, sword decoration 5001)", and "Magician MT" is used as a character that operates on "16th F operating section B". (Here, the operation button 410) is used as a character that moves in response to an operation.

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "16th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" within the 16th F reception period, "whether the hero YS can defeat the BOSS character or not" is determined. Depending on the result, it can be suggested whether the expectation level of jackpot is high or low (it may be ``100%'' or ``0%'').

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 16th F reception period, an effect such as "Is it possible to escape (escape) from the BOSS battle?" sex is now provided. That is, when an operation is performed on the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 16th F reception period, the magic value ("magic" decoration display) displayed at the bottom right of the display screen is When the magical power value becomes full, the magician MT casts a spell and successfully escapes from the BOSS battle. Then, when the player succeeds in leaving (escape) in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation level of the jackpot is higher (even "100%") than when the player is not successful.

In addition, in the 16th floor reception period according to this example, the 16th floor omen effect display ZFD is in the execution state throughout the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)". However, the execution state of this 16th-F portent effect display ZFD is terminated when an operation is performed (operation reception) on the "16th-F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". There isn't. Therefore, the 16th F omen effect display ZFD indicates whether or not the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" has been operated at timing tp2A (the situation shown in FIG. 335(b)). Regardless, the display progresses according to predetermined contents.

In addition, in this example, if an operation is performed on "16th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 16th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is output audibly. (See Figure 332(k)). In other words, in this case, the "magician MT" will be depicted secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such operations multiple times, Because the response (performance) is low, it can arouse feelings of anxiety such as ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is too low during the 16th F reception period, the game may become less interesting. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after the 16th F reception ("The magic value increases "Description" and "Description of wizard MT saving MP") should not be displayed behind the above-mentioned "16th F omen effect display ZFD", and when they overlap, they should be displayed in front of it. It will be displayed on the website.

In addition, regarding such "change B after reception on the 16th floor", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described below, there are effects that are different from the display UB after reception on the 16th floor (for example, effects different from the specific light emitting part). (e.g., changing the lighting mode of the lamp) may also be performed. Alternatively, such "change B after reception on the 16th floor" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple production elements, but with any one of the production elements described above (for example, a production lamp different from the specific light emitting part). It may be realized only by a performance change that changes the light emission mode.

In addition, the execution time of the "16th floor post-reception display UB" in response to the operation reception on the "16th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is set longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation reception on the "16th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is the same as the previous operation on the "16th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be done while the corresponding 16F post-reception display UB is being displayed.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIG. 332, FIGS. 335(a) to (c), and FIGS. 336(g1) to (l1), the operation on the 16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is While the fact that both reception and operation reception for "16th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" are allowed is kept secret (an interval in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-operation button 410)). (display section, first section), the player gives up on the ``initial game strategy'' of aiming to advance the performance by multiple operations on the ``16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'', and This is based on the assumption that a switch is made to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by operating the 16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) side.

In other words, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 332(a), (h), (i), and FIG. 335(c), At timing tp2B (situation shown in FIG. 335(c)), the 16thF post-reception display UB1 (here, the magic value is 1" or a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is displayed, and the operation reception for "16F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is displayed. It is assumed that this is done.

In this 16F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 332 and 336 (g1) and (j1), timing tp2B (Fig. 335 In the situation shown in (c)), if an operation is accepted for the "16th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", this will be used as a trigger to cause the 16th F post-reception change A. sell.

For example, as one of the changes A after the 16th F reception, first, the 16F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 332(a) and 332(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 332(h), (k) and FIGS. 336(g1), (j1), the ``16th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' 16F reception output sound A' is audibly output, the '16F effect display EF' is displayed, the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section is changed from the 'first light emission mode' to the 'light emission mode X', and further After receiving the 16th F, the display UA is performed, which is "a depiction of the hero YS attacking and the BOSS character being attacked with a sword."

In this regard, the 16th F effect display EF according to this production example is originally both "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" The display starts when the display is not in the hidden state, and in this case, the "16th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" on the operated side is displayed. The operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed so that it appears to overlap from the front.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, an operation is accepted for the "16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)". 336 (g1) and (j1), the 16th F effect display EF is assumed to be a case where the 16th F While the "operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is not displayed (hidden), it is displayed in response to an operation reception for the "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)". The Rukoto.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 16F reception period, the "16F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to do so is not displayed.

In addition, during the 16F reception period, unlike the above-mentioned 15F reception period and its variations, as shown in FIG. 332(i), while the "16F post reception display UB" is displayed Even if an operation is accepted for the "16th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", this will not cause the "16th F post-reception display UB" to be hidden, The execution status continues. That is, in this case, the 16F post-reception display UB indicates that an operation is performed on the "16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tp2B (the situation shown in FIG. 335(c)). The execution state will continue for a predetermined period of time regardless of whether the execution is completed or not.

Furthermore, at timing tp2B (situation shown in FIG. 335(c)) within the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)," )'', the 16th F precursor effect display ZFD is set to a non-display state using this as an opportunity. However, in this example, the display state of the 16th F precursor effect display ZFD is maintained at the time when the 16th F post-reception change (post-operation effect) A is started (Fig. 336 (g1), (j1) (see Fig. 336 (h1), (k1)), and is hidden after a short delay (for example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when the operation was accepted). There is. In other words, in this case, even after the operation is accepted and the 16th F post-reception change (post-operation effect) A is started, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the precursor effect display. Therefore, the player can perform operations with ease without fear of losing information (hiding the 16th F precursor effect display). In addition, the 16th F omen effect display ZFD indicates that when there is an operation reception for the "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the 16F post-reception change (post-operation effect) A is triggered by this. Although the display is hidden a little later than when it is started, it goes without saying that the time until the display is hidden is shorter than if the operation had not been accepted.

In addition, the relative expectation level (jackpot A case where an aspect UA-1 (see FIG. 336 (g1) to (i1)) with a high value (rate of winnings) appears, and an aspect UA-1 with a lower expectation level (rate of winning a jackpot) than that aspect. 2 (see FIG. 336(j1) to (l1)) may appear. Furthermore, as described above, when the 16F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "16F post-reception output sound A" is audibly output, and the "light emission mode X" appears in the specific light emitting section, but the " The 16th F reception output sound A" and the "light emission mode X" may also be audibly output in a manner that suggests the level of expectation.

In this regard, regarding the "16thF effect display EF", when the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "16thF post-reception display UA", as shown in FIGS. 336(g1) and (g2), , the ``16th F effect display EF-1'' is displayed as the ``16th F post-reception display UA'', which is a different aspect from when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears.

That is, when the aspect UA-1 with relatively high expectations appears as the "16F post-reception display UA", the first aspect EF-1 (see FIG. 336 (g1)) is displayed as the 16F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as the "16th F post-reception display UA".

On the other hand, when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectation appears as the "16F post-reception display UA", as shown in FIG. ``16th effect display EF-2'', which is a different aspect from when the aspect UA-1 with a high expectation level appears, is displayed.

That is, when the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "16thF post-reception display UA", the second aspect EF-2 (see FIG. 336 (j1)) is displayed as the 16F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 with relatively low expectations will appear as the "16th F post-reception display UA".

Here, the "16th F post-reception display UA" is displayed behind both the "16th F effect display EF" and the "16th F omen effect display ZFD", and thereby the "16th F post-reception display UA" Immediately after the "16F Post-Reception Display UA" is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize it (see FIGS. 336 (g1) and (j1)). However, the visibility of the "16th post-reception display UA" will gradually become better as "16th F effect display EF" and "16th F omen production display ZFD" are hidden. . Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when the "16thF effect display EF" is displayed, it is possible to determine that the "16thF post-reception display UA" is the mode with a high expectation level UA-1 and the mode with a low expectation level. This makes it easy to recognize whether it is displayed in UA-2 or in UA-2.

336 (h1), (i1) or (k1), (l2), the "16th F post-reception display UA" according to this production example is the expectation level UA-1, UA- 2, the display contents will be developed accordingly.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIGS. 333, 335(a) to 335(f), and 326(g2) to 326(l2) are "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (hidden section , 1st section)" at timings tp2a and tp2b, an operation was accepted for the "16thF operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", but the 16thF post-reception display corresponding to the second operation reception was This assumes that the timing tpX arrives while the "second performance mode UB2" as UB is being displayed.

Here, at timing tp2a within the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 16F reception period, "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" Regarding the production content when the first operation is performed (see FIGS. 335(a) to 335(c)), at the above timing tp2A (see FIG. 332), "16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", so the explanation will be omitted here.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 333 and FIGS. 335(c) and (d), at timing tp2b within the 16th F acceptance period (a situation in which the mode shown in FIG. 335(c) appears), " It is assumed that the second operation is performed on the 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410). When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 333(i), (k) and FIG. 335(d), as one of the changes B after receiving the 16th F, the "magic power value ("magic" decoration" ``The area filled in with respect to the display'' increases (the magic value changes from ``1'' to ``2''),'' and ``The wizard MT is accumulating more MP.'' (Second performance mode UB2 as display UB after reception on the 16th floor). However, at this time, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 333(k)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 333 and FIGS. 335(d) and (e), in a situation where the 16F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 335(d)), With the arrival of timing tpX, the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the corresponding 16F reception period ends, and the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section)" ends. , second section)" will be started.

In this regard, in the 16th F reception period, when the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" starts, first, FIGS. 333(f), (g) and 335( As shown in e), upon arrival of the specific timing tpX, the "16thF operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. ” and “16th F operation related display B (button sketch image BMG)” corresponding to the 16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are displayed.

However, in the 16th F reception period, unlike the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification", as shown in FIG. 333(d) and FIG. 335(e), timing tpX has arrived. This does not cause the background image to change or the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting section to change.

In addition, in this production example, even if the specific timing tpX arrives while the 16F post-reception display UB is being displayed, it is not possible to use this as an opportunity to hide the 16F post-reception display UB. 333(i) and FIG. 335(e)). It is hidden when the display time (execution time) has elapsed. Although not shown in the figure, if the specific timing tpX arrives while the 16F post-reception display UB2 is not displayed, the 16F post-reception display UB remains undisplayed and the "operation-related display" is displayed. It goes without saying that the section to be displayed (display section, second section) will start.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 333, 335(a) to 335(f), and 326(g2) to (l2), the section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, At timing tp2c (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 335(e) appears) in "2nd section)", the third operation is performed on "16th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". Assuming that it is done. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 333(i), (k) and 335(e), (f), the output sound after acceptance is not audible, and No new display (aspect) will appear as the 16th F post-reception display UB.

In this example, if a predetermined number of operations (in this case, the third time) are performed on the "16F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410)" within the 16F reception period, We have made it so that "a new display will not appear as the display UB after receiving the 16th floor", but instead, within the 16th floor receiving period, "16th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" A determination may be made when an operation is performed, and a new display may not be performed as the 16th F post-reception display UB based on the result of the determination. The point is that such an event (despite operating the "16th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 16th F reception period, a new display is displayed as the 16F post-reception display UB) (does not appear) need only occur when a predetermined condition is met.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 16th floor reception period, even though the 16th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the ``16th F operation section B (here, operation button 410).'' I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time of the 16th F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 16F reception period, if an operation is performed on "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", the 16F reception display UB may be displayed, but the reception This feeling of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 333, 335(a) to 335(f), and 326(g2) to (l2), the "16F operating section B (here, operating button 410)" is The player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings tp2a to tp2c)" that aims to advance the production by operating the "operation-related display" within the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)", and the "operation-related In the section where the display is displayed (display section, second section), switch to a "new game strategy" that aims to advance the performance by operating the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" side. This is based on the assumption that

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 333(a), (h), and (i), the 16th-F post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "16th-F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2", a depiction of the wizard MT further storing MP, etc.) is displayed, and "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed. " and "16thF operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed, and in the 16thF reception period "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" It is assumed that an operation is accepted for the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at timing tp2d (in which the effect display shown in FIG. 335(f) appears). ing.

In this 16F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 333 and 336 (g2) and (j2), timing tp2d (Fig. 335 (f)), if an operation is accepted for the 16th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), the 16th F reception This results in a subsequent change A.

Regarding this 16F post-reception change A, basically, timing tp2B (as shown in FIG. 335(c) Figures 336 (g1) to (l1) are the production contents when an operation is accepted for the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" As mentioned above with reference.

However, in this example, unlike the case of timing tp2B, at the time when an operation is accepted for "16th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tp2d, the 16th F post-reception display UB is displayed in the "second performance mode UB2" as the 16th floor post-reception display UB. Therefore, the 16th-F post-reception display UB continues to be displayed as the "second performance mode UB2" even after the 16th-F post-reception change A is started. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, when the 16F post-reception display UB overlaps with another image on the display screen, regardless of its mode UB1 or UB2, any image overlaps with the front side. It is displayed so that it can be seen clearly.

In addition, in this production example, unlike the case of timing tp2B, at the time when an operation is accepted for "16F operation part A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" at timing tp2d, the 16F omen production The display ZFD is already in a hidden state. Therefore, the 16th F precursor effect display ZFD is not in the display state at the time when the 16th F post-reception change A is started. However, even if an operation is accepted for the "16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", If the 16F precursor effect display ZFD is in the display state at the time when the operation is accepted, it is the same as the case at timing tp2B. In other words, the 16thF portent effect display ZFD will continue to be displayed even after the 16thF post-reception change A is started, and will then be turned into a non-displayed state when the above-mentioned operation reception is performed. That will happen.

In addition, in this production example, unlike the case of timing tp2B, at the time when an operation is accepted for "16thF operation part A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" at timing tp2d, "16F operation Related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are respectively displayed. Therefore, the "16th F effect display EF" in response to the operation reception for the "16th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tp2d is shown in FIG. 336 (g2), (j2 ), while "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are displayed, "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" Display A (sword decoration image SYG)" will be displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front side. At this time, the 16th F reception display UA, as shown in FIGS. 336 (g2) and (j2), displays the "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "16th F effect display EF". It will be displayed further back than either of them.

Then, the "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" will progress after the "16th F effect display EF" is displayed. In the process, it becomes hidden (see (h2) and (k2) in FIG. 336).

332 and 335(a) regarding other production contents related to the post-reception change A in the examples shown in FIGS. 333, 335(a) to 335(f), and 326(g2) to ) to (c) and FIGS. 336(g1) to (l1), as described above with reference to FIG. 332 and FIGS. 336(g1) to (l1), will be omitted.

In addition, during the 16th floor reception period, the 16th floor post-reception display UA is displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (Fig. 336 (h1), (h2), etc. ). On the other hand, the 16F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. These display relationships are the same in both "sections where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "sections where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)." It never changes, it stays the same.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 16F post-reception display UB, when an operation is performed on the "16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" during the 16F reception period, the display UB is displayed based on this. It was made so that it would not be left in the display state. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 336 etc., the 16th F post-reception display UB is the "16th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button This means that the display can be continued even when the "sample image BMG)" and the "16th F effect display EF" are hidden.

However, in this case, the 16th F post-reception display UB may be hidden during the period in which the "16th F post-reception display UA" is displayed. This makes it possible to advance the production even by accepting operations (magic performed by a wizard) on the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", but in reality, the "16th F. It becomes possible to suitably indicate that the production is in a state of progress by accepting an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In addition, during the 16F reception period, even if the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (for a predetermined period of time). (The auto-repeat function is not enabled) (see FIG. 332(b) and FIG. 333(b)). In this case, if the player wishes to accept multiple operations for the ``16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' within the 16th F acceptance period, the player must Needless to say, it is necessary to repeatedly operate (press) the 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410).

Furthermore, the 16th F acceptance period is originally one that continues until timing tp3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 334(c), and ends based on the arrival of timing tp3. In this respect, the 16th F reception period occurs as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 334, when no operation is performed within the 16th F reception period, the arrival of timing tp3 triggers "16F operation section A ( Here, the same 16th F post-reception change A occurs when the operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001). However, in this case, the arrival of timing tp3 will not cause the same 16th-F post-reception change B as when the operation is accepted for the "16th-F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" to occur. do not have.

In addition, during the 16F reception period, as shown in FIG. 334(j), the 16F operation-related sound a is output in connection with the generation thereof. The 16F operation-related sound a according to this example is output as the above-mentioned "acceptance permissible sound" and can be selectively audible as either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2". It may also be possible to output it. For example, when the 16F reception period occurs, when the "first permissible sound a1" is audibly output as the 16F operation-related sound a, the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 16F operation-related sound a. It is desirable to set the setting so that it suggests that the expectation level (ratio) of winning the jackpot is higher than when the player hit the jackpot.

Incidentally, during the 16F reception period, while either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 16F operation-related sound a, the "16F operation part B (here, , operation button 410)", the audible output of the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2" is not interrupted. However, while either "first permissible sound a1" or "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 16F operation-related sound a, "16F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001) ”, the audible output of the “first permissible sound a1” or “second permissible sound a2” may be interrupted using this as a trigger.

In addition, during the 16th F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, periodic changes that had previously appeared in "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are hidden (end, interruption, cycle It is designed to continue without any change (such as switching). That is, during the 16F reception period, periodic changes in the 16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 16F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are different from the 16F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG). Here, the display mode does not change before and after an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (operation that does not end the acceptance period), and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the operation reception for the "16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the "16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" The "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (cycle 16F time A, cycle 16F time B).

On the other hand, during the 16F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 333 and 336, when the "16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated, the "16F operation related The periodic changes in the display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 16th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are hidden. Here, by hiding "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, we will hide their periodic changes. We are planning to do so.

FIGS. 337 to 341 are time charts showing an example of the performance contents when the ``condition 17F'' is satisfied as the generation condition and the 17th F acceptance period occurs. More specifically, FIG. 337 shows that the 17th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in the section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section) within the 17th floor reception period. 338 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when an operation is accepted for ". FIG. 339 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when an operation is accepted for the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", and FIG. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the performance when no operation is performed. Further, FIGS. 340 and 341 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 17th F reception period occurs.

Now, in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state that is non-probable and non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "17th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (such as preview performance determination) corresponding to the 17th F fluctuation pattern. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 17th F fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 17th F fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "17th F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 339, within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "17th F variation pattern", based on the arrival of timing tq2 when the 17F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ, (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 17F"), "Acceptance regarding changes after 17F reception (display UA, UB after 17F reception, sound output after 17F reception, etc.)" is permitted. A 17F reception period (operation permissible state) can occur.

Here, during the 17F reception period according to this embodiment, the 17F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) accepts multiple operations until the 17F reception period ends. The 17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is also allowed to accept multiple operations until the 17th floor reception period ends. There is.

That is, during the 17th floor reception period (multiple operation tolerance period), for example, although an operation is started on the 16th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, the final result is not displayed. The player feels uneasy because the button does not appear, and in the middle of the 17th floor acceptance period (multiple operation permissible period), the player changes from "operation on 17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" to "17th floor operation section B" (here, operation button 410). It is assumed that there will be a case where the user attempts to advance the performance by switching to "operation on the operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 17th floor reception period is to occur, it first displays a foreshadowing effect indicating that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 17th floor reception period will occur). It is possible.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when a specific timing comes before the 17F reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. ” starts execution. Note that the "17th F omen effect display ZFD" according to this example of effect is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the 17th F operation related displays A and B are displayed, but the 17th F omen related display ZFD is Displays A and B may be hidden before being displayed.

In this regard, as will be described later, the "17th F omen effect display ZFD" according to this production example has the same effect content as the omen effect display (16th F omen effect display ZFD) corresponding to the 16F reception period, This makes it difficult to recognize whether the 16th F reception period or the 17th F reception period will occur. However, the 16th F omen effect display ZFD and the 17th F omen effect display ZFD do not necessarily have to be the same effect display, and may be different effect displays.

That is, in this production example, when the 17th F reception period occurs, the state will be such that the operation reception on the 17F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed, or the operation reception is not allowed. ``17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' that can only appear when the user is in a state in which operation reception on the 17F operation section B (here, operation button 410) is permitted. or "17F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" that can only appear when the operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, the 17th floor reception period according to this production example is similar to the above-mentioned "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" and "16th floor reception period", at the time of occurrence, As shown in FIG. 339(c) and FIG. 340(b), a simulated image display (operation related display) imitating the 17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), and the 17th F operation A sample image display (operation-related display) imitating part B (in this case, the operation button 410) is not displayed, but an "operation-related display" that hides the fact that there is an operation part in a state where operation acceptance is permitted is not displayed. At a specific timing tpY within the corresponding 17F reception period (for example, the reception period occurs) without any operation by the player. When a predetermined timing (such as a specific time has elapsed since the start) arrives, the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" ends. Then, the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" starts. The time until the specific timing tpX arrives in the 16th F acceptance period and the time until the specific timing tpY arrives in the 17th F acceptance period may be the same time.

However, the 17th floor reception period according to this production example is considered to be a "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" rather than the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modification". The time (the time from when the acceptance period occurs until the non-display section ends and the confidentiality is released) is set as a short time.

Also, in the 17th floor reception period according to this production example, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "15F reception period according to the first modification", the background image is not the above-mentioned "second background image HK2" but the above-mentioned The "first background image HK1" is displayed, and the above-mentioned "first light-emitting mode" appears as the light-emitting mode in the specific light-emitting section instead of the above-mentioned "second light-emitting mode". .

According to such a configuration, in the 17F reception period, while providing confidentiality regarding the state in which operation reception is permitted, the confidentiality is realized as a relatively loose performance. As a result, players become "accustomed" to the secrecy performance. In other words, in this case, it is expected that even if a more complex and highly confidential performance is provided, it will be difficult to reduce the interest in the game, so it will be possible to expand the range of performances. Become.

By the way, in the 17th floor reception period according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) and "17F operation related display B (button ``Draw image BMG)'' are displayed respectively. However, "the time from the occurrence of the 17th F reception period until the arrival of the specific timing tqX" is a shorter time than the "time from the occurrence of the 16th F reception period until the arrival of the specific timing tpX" described above. is set as .

Here, the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are also displayed as image displays in which periodic changes may appear. There is.

Here, as a method of displaying the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" displayed during the 17th F reception period as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, Fig. 289 (A), ( The embodiment shown in B) may also be adopted. That is, in this case, after the portion (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 289(A), When a moving image "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 289(B)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form that requires a predetermined cycle 17F time A.

Furthermore, as a method for displaying the "17th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" as an image display in which periodic changes can appear, for example, the modes shown in FIGS. may be adopted. In other words, in this case, after the part (button drawing image BMG) of the operation receiving part of the 17th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 289(a), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in (b) to (d)" is considered as one periodic change, the periodic change repeatedly appears in a form that requires a predetermined period 17F time B. It happens.

According to these configurations, during the 17F reception period, each "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", "17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", etc. The "operation receiver" appears as a depiction of moving up and down its movable range. In this example, the cycle 17F time A is set as the same time as the "cycle 13F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 13F reception period, but it may be set as a different time. However, since the period 17F time A is set as a shorter time than the above-mentioned period 12F times A and B, period 15F times A and B, period 16F times A and B, and period 17F time B, During the reception period, the "sword decoration image SYG" expressed as the "operation receiver" will be depicted moving quickly up and down its movable range.

Furthermore, in the 17F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 339(d) and (e), even if the specific timing tqX arrives, the "first background image HK1" is The background does not change to a different background image, and the "first light emitting mode" does not change to a different light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section.

Then, when timing tq3 arrives without any operation being performed by the player even after the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" has started, the process shown in FIG. 339(c) occurs. As shown, the 17th floor reception period has ended, and both "17th floor operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17th floor operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are hidden. will be subject to

Here, FIG. 337, FIGS. 340 (a) to (c), and FIG. Although the player has started operating the 16F operation section B (in this case, the operation button 410), which allows multiple operations within a period of 1 section), the player feels uneasy because the final result does not appear. Remember, in the middle of the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)", from "operation on 17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" to "17F operation section A" (Here, an operation on the sword decoration body 5001)'' is shown to show an example of the effect when the effect is attempted to advance.

In other words, even in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" within the 17F reception period, the above-mentioned "14thF reception period", "15thF reception period", and "16F reception period" Similar to "Period", there are cases where the final result display appears as a result of operating the 17F operation section B (in this case, operation button 410), which allows multiple operations, or situations where the production is slow to progress. When this happens, we have created a performance that makes you feel like, ``There might be another operation section (operation section A on the 17th floor) that is secretly given an opportunity to operate it.'' are doing. In other words, in this case, the operation target is switched from "operation on the 17th floor operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" to "operation on the 17th floor operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" to advance the production. This makes it more likely that the user will try to do so.

Also, no matter how many times you operate the 17th floor operation section B, which allows multiple operations, the 17th floor reception period related to this production example will not be used as an opportunity to end the 17th floor reception period. It has become.

However, in the 17th F reception period, unlike the above-mentioned "14th F reception period" and "15th F reception period", the 17F reception period occurs before the 17F reception period occurs. At the timing of , the 17th F precursor effect display ZFD indicating this (the occurrence of a state in which operation reception is permitted) is executed.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" in the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 17F reception period, Taking this as an opportunity, the 17th F post-reception display UB is displayed. However, at this time, the output sound B after receiving the 17th F is never audibly output, and is always not audibly output.

In addition, during the 17F reception period, in both "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" The first background image HK1 is displayed, but the first background image HK1 only needs to be one that does not change the background while the 17F reception period continues, and the 17F reception period occurs. It may be displayed before the event, or it may not be displayed. For example, things that are displayed at the time of occurrence of the 17F reception period, such as those that are displayed due to background changes that occur when the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" occur during the 17F reception period. It is fine as long as it is suitable. In addition, during the 17F reception period, it was decided to display the "first background image HK1" as such a background image, but instead of this, the first background image HK1, the second background image HK2, and the third background image It may be displayed as a fifth background image that is different from either the HK3 or the fourth background image.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the game board 5 is provided with a specific light emitting section (not shown) that can emit light in one of a plurality of light emitting modes. In the 17th F reception period, in both "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" , the specific light emitting section emits light in the "first light emission mode" among the plurality of light emission modes. However, as will be described later, the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting section is such that even while the 17th F reception period continues, the operation reception for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is not possible. This has led to changes occurring. The first light emitting mode may be emitted before the 17th F acceptance period occurs, or may not be emitted. For example, it may be anything that appears at the time of occurrence of the 17th F acceptance period, such as one that appears (is executed) due to a change in the light emission mode that occurs when the 17th F acceptance period occurs. In addition, during the 17F reception period, the "first light emission mode" appeared as such a light emission mode, but instead of this, the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, the third light emission mode, and the fourth light emission mode appeared. A fifth light emitting mode different from any of the light emitting modes may appear.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIG. 337, FIGS. 340(a) to (c), and FIGS. 341(g1) to (m1), the While it is kept secret that both operation reception and operation reception on "17th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" are allowed (section where no operation-related display is displayed) It is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tq2A (in the non-display section, the first section). When the first operation is performed on the "17th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tq2A, this can be used as an opportunity to cause the 17F post-reception change B.

In this example, at timing tq2A (situation shown in FIG. 340(b)) within the 17th floor reception period, the first operation reception is made for "17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 337(i), (k), and 340(c), as one of the changes B after receiving the 17th ``Drawing of the area) increasing (the magic value changes from 0 to 1'') and ``Drawing of the wizard MT saving MP'' are now available (after the reception on the 17th floor). Display UB1).

Incidentally, in the 17th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 340 and 341, "Hero YS" and "Magician MT" facing the BOSS character are respectively displayed on the effect display device 1600. "Hero YS" is used as a character that moves in response to the operation on "17th F operating section A (here, sword decoration 5001)", and "Magician MT" is used as a character that operates on "17th F operating section B". (Here, the operation button 410) is used as a character that moves in response to an operation.

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 17th F reception period, it is determined whether "the hero YS can defeat the BOSS character or not." Depending on the result, it can be suggested whether the expectation level of jackpot is high or low (it may be ``100%'' or ``0%'').

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 17th F reception period, an effect such as "Is it possible to escape (escape) from the BOSS battle?" sex is now provided. In other words, when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 17th F reception period, the magic power value ("magic" decoration display) displayed at the bottom right of the display screen is The painted area) can be increased, and when the magical power value is full, the wizard MT casts a spell and successfully escapes from the BOSS battle. Then, when the player succeeds in leaving (escape) in this way, it can be suggested that the expectation level of the jackpot is higher (even "100%") than when the player is not successful.

In addition, in the 17th floor reception period according to this example, the 17th floor omen effect display ZFD is in the execution state throughout the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)". However, the execution state of this 17thF portent effect display ZFD is terminated when an operation is performed (operation reception) on the "17thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)". There isn't. Therefore, the 17th F omen effect display ZFD indicates whether or not the "17th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" has been operated at timing tq2A (the situation shown in FIG. 340(b)). Regardless, the display progresses according to the predetermined content.

In addition, in this example, if an operation is performed on "17th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 17th F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is output audibly. (See Figure 337(k)). In other words, in this case, the "magician MT" will be depicted secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such operations multiple times, Because the response (performance) is low, it can arouse feelings of anxiety such as ``Is it okay to continue operating like this?''

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is too low during the 17F reception period, the game may become less interesting. There is a concern that this could lead to a decline in Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after the 17th floor reception ("The magic value increases ``Depiction'' and ``Description of wizard MT saving MP'') should not be displayed behind the above-mentioned ``17th F omen effect display ZFD'', and if they overlap, be displayed in front of it. It will be displayed on the website.

In addition, regarding such "Change B after reception on the 17th floor", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described below, there are effects that are different from the display UB after reception on the 17th floor (for example, effects different from the specific light emitting part). (e.g., changing the lighting mode of the lamp) may also be performed. Alternatively, such "change B after reception on the 17th floor" does not necessarily have to be executed with multiple production elements, but with any one of the production elements described above (for example, a production lamp different from the specific light emitting part). It may be realized only by a performance change that changes the light emission mode.

In addition, the execution time of the "17th floor post-reception display UB" in response to an operation reception on the "17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is set longer than the time set as the reception period. There is. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation reception on the "17th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" is the same as the previous operation on the "17th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)". This will be carried out while the corresponding 17F post-reception display UB is being displayed. On the other hand, the execution time of the "17th floor post-reception display UA" in response to the operation reception on the "17th floor operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is longer than the time set as the reception period. It has been shortened. Therefore, during the 17F reception period, the second and subsequent operation receptions for the ``17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' will not be accepted for the ``17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' that was previously performed. There is a possibility that the operation will be performed while the 17F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation on "Decoration 5001)" is displayed, and a possibility that the operation will be performed while the 17F post-reception display UA is hidden. There are both.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIG. 337, FIGS. 340(a) to (c), and FIGS. 341(g1) to (m1), the operation on the 17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is While the fact that both reception and operation reception for "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" are allowed is kept secret (an interval in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-operation button 410)). (display section, first section), the player gives up on the ``initial game strategy'' of aiming to advance the performance by multiple operations on the ``17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'', and This is based on the assumption that a switch is made to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the performance by operating the 17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) side.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 337(a), (h), (i), and FIG. 340(c), At timing tq2B (situation shown in FIG. 340(c)), the 17th F post-reception display UB1 (here, when the magic value is " 1", a depiction of a wizard MT saving MP, etc.) is displayed, and the operation reception for "17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is displayed. It is assumed that this is done.

In this 17F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 337 and 341 (g1), timing tq2B (as shown in FIG. 340(c) If an operation is accepted for the "17th F operating unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the situation shown in FIG.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 337(h), (k), and 341(g1), such a change A after receiving the 17th F is "17th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". "The 17th F reception output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation is audibly output, and the "17th F operation related display corresponding to the 17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is output. "A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, "17th F effect display EF1" is displayed, and the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section is changed from "first light emitting mode" to "light emitting mode Y1", and furthermore, The 17F post-reception display UA1 is displayed. Here, as the 17F post-reception display UA1, "depiction of the hero YS attacking and the BOSS character's HP decreasing to about 75%" is performed.

However, in this example, at timing tq2B (situation shown in FIG. 340(c)) in the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)", "17F operation section A (here, the sword This is based on the assumption that an operation is accepted for the ``decorative object 5001),'' so as shown in FIGS. 337(f) and 340(c), at the time when the operation is accepted, the ``17th The "operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is not in a display state and is in a hidden state. Therefore, in the 17th F post-reception change A according to this example, as shown in FIG. While the image BMG) is not displayed (hidden), the 17th floor effect display EF1 is displayed in response to the operation reception for the 17th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001). It will be done.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 17th F reception period, the "17th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to display is never displayed.

Also, in the 17th F reception period, unlike the case of the 16th F reception period, timing tq2B (shown in FIG. 340(c) situation), even if an operation is accepted for the "17th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", it is possible to use this as an opportunity to turn the 17th F omen effect display ZFD into a hidden state. do not have. In other words, in this case, the 17th F omen effect display ZFD accepts operations for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or accepts the "17F operation while the 17F omen effect display ZFD is in the display state. The display state continues for a predetermined execution time regardless of whether or not there is an operation reception for the section B (here, the operation button 410).

Also, during the 17th floor reception period, unlike the above-mentioned 15th floor reception period and its variations, as shown in FIG. Even if an operation is accepted for the ``17th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', this will not cause the ``17th F post-reception display UB'' to be hidden. The execution status continues. That is, in this case, the 17th F post-reception display UB indicates that an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2B (the situation shown in FIG. 340(c)). The execution state will continue for a predetermined period of time regardless of whether the execution is completed or not. Furthermore, even if the "17th F operation-related sound" is audibly output when the first operation is performed on the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the operation cannot be performed. This will not be made inaudible as a trigger.

Here, the "17th F post-reception display UA" is displayed behind either the "17th F effect display EF" or the "17th F omen effect display ZFD", thereby Immediately after the "17F Post-Reception Display UA" is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize it (see FIG. 341 (g1)). Regarding the "17th F post-reception display UA", the visibility of the "17th post-reception display UA" will gradually decrease as "17F effect display EF" and "17F omen effect display ZFD" are hidden. It will be recognized as being in good condition. However, during the 17F reception period, multiple operations are allowed for the 17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001), so the 17F effect display EF and the 17F effect display EF and If you wait for the ``17F portent display ZFD'' etc. to be hidden, there is a disadvantage that the remaining time will decrease. It is now possible to present a conflict as to whether or not to continue the operation on the sword decoration object 5001), and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably imparted.

Here, the 17th F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap in front of any of the "17th F post-reception display UA", the "17th F omen effect display ZFD", and the "17th F effect display EF". It has become something that will be done.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 337(a), (h), and (i), after the reception of the previous operation for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The situation is such that a change A (such as the 17th floor post-reception display UA) is occurring, and the 17th floor post-reception display UB1 (here, the 17th floor post-reception display UB1) is in response to the operation reception on the "17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". , depictions in which the magic power value is set to "1", depictions in which the wizard MT is accumulating MP, etc.) are still being displayed. First, timing tqX has arrived, and this causes the "operation-related The section in which no display is displayed (hidden section, first section) ends, the section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section) begins, and then the section in which operation-related displays are displayed. At timings tq2C and tq2D (each timing shown in FIG. 341 (h1) and (i1)) in the section (display section, second section), the operation section A of the 17F (here, the sword ornament 5001) It is assumed that the second and third operation acceptances are made for ``.''.

Here, when timing tqX arrives, the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" will be displayed. However, in this example, when the situation shown in FIG. 341 (g1) appears, that is, the 17F post-reception display UA, the 17F post-reception display UB, the 17F effect display EF, and the 17F omen effect display ZFD are displayed. Timing tqX is designed to arrive when the current situation is met. Therefore, "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are the 17F post-reception display UB, 17F effect display EF, and 17F omen. For the effect display ZFD, the display will start so that it appears to overlap behind them. That is, in this case, while the 17th F effect display EF is being displayed, the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" which has been hidden until then starts to be displayed. The 17thF effect display EF is originally displayed to make the 17thF operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) difficult to see when it is displayed, and to further hide it. In view of the fact that it is a product, it has been realized as a configuration with a function opposite to the original function, and this makes it possible to use the 17th F effect display EF as a substitute for the omen effect display. It is expected that he will expand the range of his performances.

As mentioned above, in this production example, at timings tq2C and tq2D (see FIG. 337) within the 17th F reception period, the second and third 337 and 341 (h1), (i1 ), change A can be caused after the 17th F reception.

Here, regarding the "output sound A1 after reception on the 17th floor", the "effect display EF1 on the 17th floor", and the "light emission mode Y1" in the specific light emitting section, there are cases in which the first operation is accepted and the second and third operations. The same aspect may appear when a reception is made. In addition, when the "17th F output sound A1", "17th F effect display EF1", and "light emission mode Y1" corresponding to the operation reception at the previous operation are in the execution state, the "17F output sound A1", "17F effect display EF1", and "light emission mode Y1" are in the execution state, in response to the new operation reception. "Output sound A1 after reception on the 17th floor", "Effect display EF1 on the 17th floor", and "light emission mode Y1" corresponding to the operation reception at the previous operation are canceled, and "Output sound A1 on the 17th floor after reception" and "Output sound on the 17th floor after reception" are canceled, respectively. Effect display EF1" and "light emission mode Y1" will be newly executed. The "light emitting mode Y1" is returned to the original light emitting mode (here, the first light emitting mode) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

However, as mentioned above, in the examples shown in FIG. 337, FIGS. 340(a) to (c), and FIGS. 341(g1) to (m1), the 5001)" is different from the first operation reception described above, the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" after timing tqX arrives. It is something that is done internally.

In this case, the second operation reception (timing tq2C) for the "17th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" according to this production example is the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" " will be performed as the first operation reception after the display starts, that is, it will be performed while the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is being displayed with the above-mentioned periodic changes. Become. In this regard, in this production example, the second operation is accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at timing tq2C (the situation where the production display shown in FIG. 341 appears). Once this is done, the periodic changes in "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", which had been displayed with the above-mentioned periodic changes, will be hidden. . At this time, although the "17th F effect display EF1" has made it difficult to see, the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues to be displayed, as it had been done up until then. Only periodic changes are terminated once. Note that the periodic change once ended in this way is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed.

On the other hand, at the time when the third operation is accepted (timing tq2D) for the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" according to this production example, the previous (second) operation is accepted. The periodic changes in the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once ended may maintain its end state, or may be resumed after the end state is canceled. However, when the third operation is accepted, the periodic change end state will occur again with this as a trigger. That is, in this case, the periodic change once ended will be restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the third operation is accepted.

Regarding the "17thF post-reception display UA", basically, when the first operation is accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" (the 17thF post-reception display UA1), The same is true. However, when the second operation is accepted, "Description of the hero YS attacking and the BOSS character's HP decreasing to about 50% remaining (Display UA2 after receiving the 17th floor)" is performed (Figure 341 (h1 ), and when the third operation is accepted, a depiction of ``The hero YS attacks and the BOSS character's HP decreases to about 25% remaining (display UA3 after the reception on the 17th floor)'' is performed ( (see Fig. 341 (i1)), progress as a performance can be seen.

In addition, during the 17th floor reception period according to this example, each time an operation is performed on the 17th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), the production as the 17th floor post-reception display UA1 (BOSS character (HP decrease) progresses. However, the display may be advanced with a predetermined probability based on the result of the determination (although other methods may be used). When an operation is performed on the screen, the display may be advanced in some cases and not in others. However, if an operation is performed on the "17th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 17th F reception period, the "17th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" Even if the display does not progress, unlike when an operation is performed on the The periodic changes in the "operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" are terminated. In addition, during the 17F reception period, in the ``section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, 2nd section),'' the corresponding The 17th F reception period ends, "17th F post reception output sound A2", "17th F effect display EF2", and "light emission mode Y2" are executed, or the final mode UA4 as the 17F post reception display UA is executed. However, in the section where the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section), it is triggered by the operation on the 17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001). When the corresponding 17F reception period ends, "17F post-reception output sound A2", "17F effect display EF2", and "light emission mode Y2" are executed, or the final mode UA4 as the 17F post-reception display UA is It may be arranged so that it never appears.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 337(a), (h), and (i), the reception is received in response to the third operation reception for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". The 17th floor post-reception display UB1 (here, when the magical power value has reached "1") is in a situation where the post-change A has occurred, and in response to the operation reception on the "17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" 341 (i1) appears at timing tq2E (Fig. 341 (i1)) during the 17F reception period. It is assumed that a fourth operation is accepted for the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in a situation in which the user receives the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In this pachinko machine 1, when the fourth operation is accepted for the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2E within the 17th F acceptance period, the 17th F post-acceptance change A can cause For example, as one of the changes A after the 17th F reception, first, the 17F reception period is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 337(a) and 337(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 337(h), (k) and FIGS. 341(j1), (l1), the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is 17F reception output sound A2" is audibly output, and the 17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is visually recognized. The "17th F effect display EF2" is displayed, and furthermore, the light emitting mode (here, light emitting mode Y1) that has appeared up to that point in the specific light emitting section is terminated and appears as "light emitting mode Y2", and the 17th F reception The rear display UA4 is displayed.

In this regard, the 17th F effect display EF2 according to this production example is, as shown in FIGS. 341 (j1) and (j2), "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" Display B (button drawing image BMG)" is to be displayed in a situation where none of them are hidden, and the "17F operation section A (here, The 17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the ``sword decoration object 5001)'' is displayed so that it appears to overlap from the front.

In addition, when an operation is performed on the "17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 17th floor reception period, the "17th floor operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to display is never displayed.

In addition, the relatively expected level of ``17F post-reception display UA4'' in response to the 4th operation reception for ``17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)'' within the 17F reception period. A case where an aspect UA4-1 (FIG. 341 (j1), (k1)) with a high (rate of getting a jackpot) appears, and an aspect UA4 with a lower expectation level (rate of getting a jackpot) than that aspect -2 (Fig. 341 (l1), (m1)) may appear. Furthermore, as described above, when the 17F post-reception display UA4 is displayed, the corresponding "17F post-reception output sound A2" is audibly output, and the light emitting mode Y2 appears in the specific light emitting section. The ``17F post-reception output sound A2'' and the ``light emission mode Y2'' may also be executed in a manner that suggests the level of expectation.

In this regard, when the aspect UA4-1 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "17F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 341 (i1), The ``17th F effect display EF2-1'' is displayed which is a different aspect from when the aspect UA4-2 with a low expectation level appears.

That is, when the aspect UA4-1 with a relatively high expectation appears as the "17F post-reception display UA", the first aspect EF2-1 (see FIG. 341 (j1)) is displayed as the 17F effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that a relatively highly anticipated mode UA4-1 will appear as the "17th F post-reception display UA4."

On the other hand, when the aspect UA4-2 with relatively low expectation appears as "17th F post-reception display UA4", as shown in FIG. 341 (l1), relatively ``17th effect display EF2-2'', which is a different aspect from when the aspect UA4-1 with a high expectation level appears, is displayed.

That is, when the aspect UA4-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "17F post-reception display UA4", the second aspect EF2-2 (see FIG. 341 (l1)) is displayed as the 17F effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the aspect UA-2 with relatively low expectations will appear as the "17th F post-reception display UA4." Note that the 17F effect display EF2 is displayed as an image display that is different from the 17F effect display EF1 in both the first aspect EF2-1 and the second aspect EF2-2.

In addition, during the 17th F reception period according to this embodiment, "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are shown in FIGS. As shown in 341 (j1) to (m1), the periodic changes are hidden based on the fourth operation reception for the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Here, by hiding the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" themselves, the periodic changes are hidden. That will happen.

In this example, when there is a situation immediately after an operation is accepted (a situation where the 17th F effect display EF2 is displayed) (see FIGS. 341 (j1) and (l1)), the "17th F operation related display A" (sword decoration image SYG)” and “17th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” are not hidden, and “17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is It is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the 17th F effect display EF2. After that, these "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17th F operation related display B (button print image BMG)" are changed to "17th F operation part A (here, sword decoration object 5001 )" is set to a hidden state based on the fourth operation reception (see FIGS. 341 (k1) and (m1)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, "13F post-reception display UA4" includes such "13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)", and "13F effect display". EF2", and this makes it difficult to see immediately after the "13th F reception display UA4" is displayed (Fig. 291(i), ( (see l)). However, as "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)", "13th F effect display EF2" etc. are hidden, The visibility of the "13th post-reception display UA4" will gradually become better. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by checking the mode even when the "13th F effect display EF2" is displayed, it is possible to determine that the "13th F post-reception display UA4" is a mode with a high expectation level UA4-1 and a mode with a low expectation level. This makes it easy to recognize whether it is displayed in UA4-2 or in UA4-2.

Then, the "17th F post-reception display UA4" according to this production example will advance its display content in accordance with the expectation levels UA4-1 and UA4-2.

Furthermore, during the 17th F acceptance period according to this embodiment, as for the background image (here, the first background image HK1), as shown in FIG. The background image will not be switched (background change) to another image based on the operation on the 17th F operating section A (here, the sword ornament 5001), and the 17th F operating section B (here, the Here, switching to another background image (background change) is not triggered by an operation on the operation button 410).

However, in place of this, during the 17F reception period, the background image (here, the first background image HK1) will be displayed on the 17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) during the 17F reception period. The background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) as a result of an operation on ``, but the background image will not be switched to another background image (background change) as a result of an operation on ``17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)'' during the 17F reception period. It may also be possible to switch to another background image (background change). Furthermore, if the background image is switched to another (background change) triggered by an operation on the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 17th F reception period (for example, at timing tq2E There may be both a case (operation at timing tq2B to timing tq2D) and a case where there is no switching (background change) (for example, each operation at timing tq2B to tq2D).

In this regard, during the 17F reception period according to this embodiment, regarding the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section, as shown in FIG. 337(e), the 17F operation section A (Here, the sword decoration 5001)" may be switched (light emission change) to another light emission mode (here, the light emission modes Y1 and Y2), but within the 17F reception period, the 17F operation The light emitting mode is not switched to another light emitting mode (light emitting change) in response to an operation on part B (here, the operation button 410).

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIG. 338, FIGS. 340(a) to 340(f), and FIG. , 1st section)" at timings tq2a and tq2b, an operation was accepted for the "17thF operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", but the display after the 17thF reception in response to the second operation reception was This is based on the assumption that the timing tqX arrives while the "second performance mode UB2" as UB is being displayed.

Here, at timing tq2a within the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the 17F reception period, for "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" Regarding the production content when the first operation is performed (see FIGS. 340(a) to 340(c)), at the timing tq2A (see FIG. 338), "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", so the explanation will be omitted here.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 338 and FIGS. 340(c) and 340(d), at timing tq2b within the 17th F acceptance period (a situation in which the mode shown in FIG. 340(c) appears), " It is assumed that the second operation is performed on the 17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410). When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 338(i), (k) and FIG. 340(d), as one of the changes B after receiving the 17th F, the "magic value ("magic" decoration" The area filled in with respect to the display increases (the magic value changes from "1" to "2")" and the wizard MT is now accumulating more MP." (Second performance mode UB2 as display UB after reception on the 17th floor). However, at this time, as described above, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 338(k)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 338 and FIGS. 340(d) and (e), in a situation where the 17F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 340(d)), With the arrival of timing tqX, the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the corresponding 17F reception period ends, and the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section)" ends. , second section)" will be started.

In this regard, in the 17th F reception period, when the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" starts, first, FIGS. 338(f), (g) and 340( As shown in e), upon arrival of the specific timing tqX, the "17thF operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the 17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. ” and “17F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” corresponding to the 17F operation section B (here, operation button 410) are displayed.

However, in the 17th F reception period, unlike the case of the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification", as shown in FIGS. 338(d) and 340(e), timing tqX has arrived. This does not cause the background image to be changed or the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting section to change.

In addition, in this production example, even if the specific timing tqX arrives while the 17F post-reception display UB is being displayed, the 17F post-reception display UB cannot be hidden from view using this as an opportunity. 338(i) and FIG. 340(e)). It is hidden when the display time (execution time) has elapsed. Although the illustration is omitted, if the specific timing tqX arrives while the 17F post-reception display UB2 is not displayed, the 17F post-reception display UB remains undisplayed and the "operation related display" is displayed. It goes without saying that the section to be displayed (display section, second section) will start.

In the examples shown in FIG. 338, FIGS. 340(a) to (f), and FIG. At timing tq2c (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 340(e) appears) in "2nd interval)", the third operation is performed on "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)". Assuming that it is done. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 338(i), (k) and FIGS. 340(e), (f), the output sound after reception is not audible, and No new display (aspect) will appear as the 17F post-reception display UB.

In this example, if the "17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) within the 17th floor reception period, We have made it so that "a new display does not appear as the display UB after receiving the 17th floor", but instead, within the 17th floor receiving period, the "17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" The determination may be made when an operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, no new display may be performed as the 17th F post-reception display UB. The point is that such an event (despite operating the "17th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 17th F reception period, a new display is displayed as the 17F post-reception display UB) (does not appear) need only occur when a predetermined condition is met.

However, as mentioned above, even during the 17th floor reception period, even though the 17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated, the post-reception display and post-reception output sound according to the operation If the button does not appear (there is no display change or sound output in response to the operation), the player should continue to operate the ``17F operation section B (here, operation button 410).'' I wonder if I'll be okay with just that?'' This makes me feel anxious. It is thought that such a feeling of anxiety will gradually become stronger as the remaining time of the 17th F reception period decreases. In particular, during the 17th floor reception period, if an operation is performed on the 17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410), the 17th floor reception display UB may be displayed; This feeling of anxiety is all the more so because the latter output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 338, 340(a) to 340(f), and 341(g2) to (m2), the "17th F operating section B (here, operating button 410)" is The player gives up on the "initial game strategy (timings tq2a to tq2c)" that aims to advance the production by operating the "operation-related display" within the "section where the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" Switch to a ``new game strategy'' that aims to advance the production by operating the ``17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' side within the section in which the display is displayed (display section, 2nd section). This is based on the assumption that

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 338(a), (h), and (i), the 17th floor post-reception display in response to the operation reception on the "17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" UB2 (here, a depiction of the magic value being set to "2", a depiction of the wizard MT further storing MP, etc.) is displayed, and "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed. ” and “17F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)” are displayed, and in the 17F reception period, “section in which operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)” At timing tq2d within `` (the situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 335(f) appears), the first operation is accepted for the ``17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. , After that, within the same section (display section, second section), timing tq2e (situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 341 (g2) appears), timing tq2f (the effect display shown in FIG. 341 (h2) appears) At timing tq2g (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 341 (i2) appears), the second to fourth operations are performed on "17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)". It is assumed that each operation is accepted.

In this 17th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 338 and FIG. 341 (g2), "the 1st Even when an operation is accepted for the 17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the 17F post-acceptance change A is generated using this as a trigger.

Regarding each of these 17F post-reception changes A, basically, the ``1st change'' occurs at each timing tq2B to tq2E within the ``section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)'' of the 17F reception period. 17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is as described above with reference to FIGS. 341 (g1) to (m1).

However, in this example, unlike the case of timing tq2B, when the operation is accepted for "17th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2d, the 17th F post-reception display UB is displayed in the "second effect mode UB2" as the 17th floor post-reception display UB. Therefore, the 17th-F post-reception display UB continues to be displayed as the "second performance mode UB2" even after the 17th-F post-reception change A is started. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 340 and 341, when the 17F post-reception display UB overlaps other images on the display screen, regardless of its mode UB1 or UB2, any image overlaps with the front side. It is displayed so that it can be seen clearly.

In addition, in this production example, unlike the case of timing tq2B, at the time when the operation is accepted for "17F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" at timing tq2d, the 17F portent production The display ZFD is already in a hidden state. Therefore, the 17th F precursor effect display ZFD is not in the display state at the time when the 17th F post-acceptance change A is started. However, even if an operation is accepted for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", If the 17F precursor effect display ZFD is in the display state at the time when the operation is accepted, it is the same as the case at timing tq2B. In other words, the 17th F precursor effect display ZFD will continue to be displayed even after the 17th F post-reception change A is started, and will then be turned into a non-displayed state when the above-mentioned operation reception is performed. It happens.

In addition, in this production example, unlike the case at timing tq2B, when the operation is accepted for the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at the timing tq2d, the "17th F operation Related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are respectively displayed. Therefore, the "17th F effect display EF" in response to the operation acceptance for the "17th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2d is shown in FIG. 341 (g2). As shown in FIG. The operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) will be displayed so as to overlap with it from the front side. In this case, as shown in FIG. 341 (g2), the 17th F post-reception display UA is located behind both the "17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17th F effect display EF." It will be displayed on the side.

Therefore, unlike the case where the first operation is accepted for the "17F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2B (see FIG. 337), the first operation is accepted at timing tq2d (see FIG. 338). ), when the first operation is accepted for "17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)", this will be used as an opportunity to display the display state with the above-mentioned periodic changes. Periodic changes in the "17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" will be hidden. At this time, although the "17th F effect display EF1" has made it difficult to see, the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues to be displayed, as it had been done up until then. Only periodic changes are terminated once. As described above, the periodic change once ended is restarted from the beginning after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Then, at timing tq2e (see FIG. 338), when the second operation is accepted for the "17th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the previous (first) operation is accepted. Periodic changes in the "17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that has been once ended may maintain its end state, or may be restarted after the end state is canceled. However, when the second operation is accepted, the end state of the periodic change will occur again using this as a trigger. That is, in this case, the periodic change once ended will be restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second operation is accepted.

In addition, during the 17F reception period, the 17F post-reception display UA is displayed so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (Fig. 341 (j1), (l1), (see (j2), (l2), etc.). On the other hand, the 17F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. These display relationships are the same in both "sections where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "sections where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)." It never changes, it stays the same.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the 17F post-reception display UB, when an operation is performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" during the 17F reception period, the display UB is displayed based on this. It was made so that it would not be left in the display state. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 341 etc., the 17th F post-reception display UB is the "17th F post-reception display UA" corresponding to the operation on the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". ``17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and ``17F operation related display B (button This means that the display can be continued even when the "sample image BMG)" and the "17th F effect display EF" are hidden.

However, in this case, the 17F post-reception display UB (such as depictions of magical power increasing and wizard MT saving MP) will not be displayed during the period when "17F post-reception display UA4" is displayed. Although it is not essential to display the information, it is desirable. As a result, while promoting the fact that it is possible to advance the production by accepting operations (magic performed by a wizard) on the "17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "17th floor It becomes possible to suitably indicate that the production is in a state of progress by accepting an operation on the "operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)".

In addition, during the 17th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 339(j) etc., the 17th F operation related sound a is output in connection with the generation thereof. The 17F operation-related sound a according to this example is output as the above-mentioned "acceptance permissible sound" and can be selectively audible as either the "first permissible sound a1" or the "second permissible sound a2". It may also be possible to output it. For example, when the 17F reception period occurs, when the "first permissible sound a1" is audibly output as the 17F operation-related sound a, the "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 17F operation-related sound a. It is desirable to set the setting so that it suggests that the expectation level (ratio) of winning the jackpot is higher than when the player hit the jackpot. Note that the "first permissible sound a1" which is a form of the 17F operation-related sound a is output as the same sound as the "first permissible sound a1" which is a form of the 16F operation-related sound a described above. , the "second permissible sound a2" which is a form of the 17th F operation-related sound a is output as a different sound from the "second permissible sound a2" which is a form of the 16F operation-related sound a described above. ing. However, the "second allowable sound a2" which is a mode of the 17F operation-related sound a is also output as the same sound as the "second allowable sound a2" which is a mode of the 16F operation-related sound a described above. You can. Furthermore, the 17th F reception acceptable sound does not necessarily have to be output in one of multiple modes (multiple acceptable sounds), but may be output only in one mode (one acceptable sound). There may be.

By the way, during the 17F reception period, while either "first permissible sound a1" or "second permissible sound a2" is audibly output as the 17F operation-related sound a, "16F operation part A (here Now, even if an operation is accepted for either the "sword decoration body 5001)" or the "17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", this will be used as a trigger to select the "first allowable sound a1". Or the audible output of the "second permissible sound a2" is not interrupted.

In addition, during the 17th floor reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, periodic changes that had previously appeared in "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17th F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" are hidden (end, interruption, cycle It is designed to continue without any change (such as switching). That is, during the 17F reception period, periodic changes in the ``17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and ``17F operation-related display B (button print image BMG)'' are caused by the ``17F operation section B ( Here, the display mode does not change before and after an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (operation that does not end the acceptance period), and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the operation reception for the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" The "17F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" continues to progress through each of the above-mentioned periodic changes (cycle 17F time A, cycle 17F time B).

On the other hand, during the 17F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 333 and 336, when the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated, the "17F operation related The periodic changes in the display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 17th F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG) are hidden. Here, in the first to third operation receptions for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)", the "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "17F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" does not hide itself but hides (ends) those periodic changes, but the fourth time for "17F operation section A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" At the operation reception, by hiding the "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17F operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)", periodic changes in them can be hidden. It is planned to be displayed.

Further, in this example, while the 17th F acceptance period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease over time, but this may not necessarily be done.

In addition, during the 17F reception period, based on the operation performed on the "17F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)", "17F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed. ” and “17th floor operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)” will be hidden, and the 17th floor reception period will be ended. However, when an operation is performed on "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", no matter how many times the operation is performed, this will be used as a trigger to display "17F operation related display A (sword 410)". Decorative image SYG)" and "17thF operation-related display B (button drawing image BMG)" may not be hidden or the 17thF reception period may not end.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 17th floor reception period, the magic value (the area filled out with respect to the "magic" decoration display) When the maximum amount has been accumulated, it may be arranged to wait until the timing tq3 when the 17th F acceptance period ends, and perform a magic effect based on the arrival of the timing tq3. In this case, even if the magic value has accumulated to the maximum, until timing tq3 arrives, operations on the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" are allowed to be accepted. If you do this, you will be able to challenge yourself to attack the BOSS character multiple times while the effect of casting magic and leaving is confirmed, which will improve the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to do this. However, when the 17th floor post-reception display UA4 is displayed as a result of multiple attacks (when the 17th floor reception period ends), the effect of magic and withdrawal will no longer be performed.

Alternatively, before the 17F reception period occurs, a performance judgment is performed, and if no special judgment result is obtained as a result of the performance judgment, the 17F operation section B ( Here, no matter how many times you operate the operation button 410), the magic value will not accumulate to the maximum (the reception period will not end). Good too. In this case, when the fourth operation is performed on the "17th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "17th F after reception display UA4" is displayed, indicating a relatively low expectation level. It may be arranged that UA4-2 always appears, or it may be arranged that UA4-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, may appear. In this regard, if the mode UA4-1 with a relatively high expectation level may appear when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the magic value cannot be accumulated to an increase no matter how many times the operation is performed on the "17th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)". can be expected.

In addition, during the 17th floor reception period, the 17th floor operation section B (here, Even if you continue to operate (press) the ``operation button 410'', the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the operation will be automatically accepted at predetermined intervals) (auto continuous press). The function is not activated (see FIG. 337(b) and FIG. 338(b)). In this case, within the 17F reception period, multiple operations are performed on the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" corresponding to the "17F operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)". Needless to say, if the player wishes to accept the request, he or she must repeatedly operate (press) "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)".

However, during the 17F reception period, the 17F operation section A (here, When the "sword ornament 5001)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation is accepted multiple times (the automatic repeated hit function is enabled and the operation is automatically accepted repeatedly at a predetermined time interval). (See FIGS. 337(a) and 338(a)). In this production example, the "17th F operation It is assumed that the part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, and as a result, the operation is accepted at predetermined intervals (timings tq2C, tq2D). , tq2E, or timing tq2e, tq2f, tq2g).

Additionally, as shown in FIG. 339(c), the 17th F reception period originally continues until timing tq3 arrives when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period). It will be terminated based on this.

In this regard, the 17th F reception period may be generated as a reception period during which the automatic button function described above is activated. In other words, in this case, until timing tq3 arrives during the 17F reception period, the operation reception for ending the reception period (here, the 4th operation reception for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)") ) is not completed, the operation reception (herein, "17F operation section A") to end the reception period by operating the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is performed within the corresponding reception period. (Here, the fourth operation reception for the sword ornament 5001) is performed, and the same post-reception change A can occur based on the arrival of timing tq3. In this case, for the production corresponding to the "17th F operating section B (here, the operating button 410)" that requires multiple operations within the 17th F reception period and in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, the game Since the player cannot enjoy the game unless he or she operates it, it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, even if the "17th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated during the 17th F reception period, the 17F reception period does not end and timing tq3 arrives. , the same post-reception change A as when the operation is performed on the "17th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the reception period occurs based on the arrival of timing tq3. becomes. In other words, in this case, while the 17F post-reception display UB (description of increasing magical power, depiction of wizard MT saving MP, etc.) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and the post-reception display UB is displayed. Change A (change in display after reception, output sound after reception, change in light emission mode in a specific light emitting section, etc.) will occur.

In the 17th floor reception period according to this example, when a predetermined number of operations (here, the 4th time) are performed on the "17th floor operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The 17F post-reception display UA4 was displayed when the ``operation reception to end the corresponding reception period'' was made, but instead of this, the ``17F operation section A (here, the sword A determination is made when an operation is performed on the "decoration object 5001)", and based on the result of the determination, an "operation reception to end the relevant reception period" is made and the 17F post-reception display UA4 is displayed. Alternatively, an "operation reception that does not end the reception period" may be performed and any of the 17F post-reception displays UA1 to UA3 may be displayed. The point is that when such an event (when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 17th F reception period, this event is used as a trigger to "operate reception to end the relevant reception period"). '' is performed), it is sufficient that the event occurs when a predetermined condition is met.

Furthermore, the "17th F portent effect display" according to this example is set to a non-display state before timing tq3 arrives. In this regard, the ``17th F portent effect display'' according to this example is effective against the ``17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' while the ``17th F omen effect display'' is being displayed. Even if an operation is performed, this will not trigger the display to become hidden. However, regarding the "17th F omen performance display", if the "17F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is operated while the "17F omen performance display" is being displayed. In this case, there may be both a case in which the display is set to a hidden state using this as a trigger, and a case in which the display is not set to a display state using this as a trigger. For example, while the "17th F omen effect display" is being displayed, an operation reception is performed to end the 17th F reception period by operating the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". Sometimes, this is used as an opportunity to hide the "17th F omen effect display", but the operation reception that does not end the 17th F reception period due to the operation on the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" When this is done, the ``17th F omen effect display'' may not be hidden from view using this as an opportunity.

Moreover, the "17th F portent effect display" may be displayed continuously until timing tq3 of the 17th F reception period arrives.

By the way, the above-mentioned 12th F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312), 13th F reception period (see FIGS. 313 and 314), 16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336), and 17th F reception period In the period (see FIGS. 337 to 341), a method was adopted in which the two types of operation units were both displayed as sample images, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the above-mentioned 12F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312) is instead generated as "12F reception period according to the modified example (see FIGS. 342 and 343)" described below. You can do it like this. In addition, the above 13F reception period (see FIGS. 313 and 314) is instead generated as "13F reception period according to the modified example (see FIGS. 344 and 345)" described below. You can do it like this. In addition, the 16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336) described above is instead generated as the "16th F reception period according to the modified example (see FIGS. 346 to 348)" described below. You can do it like this. In addition, the above-mentioned 17th F reception period (see FIGS. 337 to 341) is instead generated as "17th F reception period according to the modified example (see FIGS. 349 to 351)" described below. You can do it like this.

FIGS. 342 and 343 show a case in which “Condition 12F” is satisfied as the occurrence condition and “12th F reception period (12F reception period according to the modified example)” occurs as a modification of the 12F reception period. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the performance. In addition, regarding the production example in the variation pattern where the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, there are many parts that overlap with the case where the 12th F reception period described above occurs (see Figures 285 and 286). Illustration will be omitted, and basically only the differences (changes) from the above-mentioned "12th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as in the case where the above-mentioned "12F reception period" occurs.

That is, the "12th F reception period according to the modification" is similar to the above-mentioned 12F reception period, and the 12F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is the "12F reception period according to the modification". Only one operation reception is allowed until the end of the 12F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) until the "12F reception period according to the modified example" ends. It is permitted to accept multiple operations during this period (multiple operations permissible period). Furthermore, other examples regarding these "12th F operating section A" and "12th F operating section B" can also be applied as appropriate, similar to the case of the above-mentioned 12th F reception period.

However, in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", when the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, " Although the "12th F operation related display A" is displayed, as shown in FIG. This is different from the above-mentioned "12th F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312)" in that it is not displayed. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of operation units (12F operation unit A, 12F operation unit B) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted, only some of the operation units are in a state in which operation reception is permitted. ” will now be kept secret, and it can be expected that this will prevent a decline in gaming interest due to secrecy and maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" differs from the 12th F reception period described above in that the "12th F operation related display A" is displayed and the "12th F operation related display B" is not displayed. However, the rest of the structure and presentation contents are the same as the 12th F reception period described above. Therefore, even if the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the production will basically proceed as described above with reference to FIGS. 311 and 312, and furthermore, FIGS. 284 to 286. The Rukoto.

In other words, the production example when the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs is when compared with the production examples (12F reception period) shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, and also in FIGS. 284 to 286. The only difference is that "12thF operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is not displayed, but other than that, the contents are basically the same, and the configuration related to the 12thF reception period is different. Another applicable example is similarly applicable to the configuration related to the “12th F reception period according to the modified example” (configuration other than the 12th F operation related display B).

Therefore, when the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, first, a corresponding precursory effect display is displayed so as to span before and after the timing at which the 12th F operation related display A is displayed.

Additionally, this portent effect display is executed by both "Mode ZFD-1" and "Mode ZFD-2" and "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" Regarding the manner in which it is displayed, the conditions under which it is hidden, and the fact that "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes, This is as described above in the 12th F reception period.

In addition, in this production example, when the first operation on the "12th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed within the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", the 12F reception period described above As in the case of (see FIG. 311(i)), this triggers the 12F post-reception display UB1 to be displayed. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance. However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", the 12F post-reception display UB1 will be displayed. In addition, the "12th F operation related display B" is displayed when the operation is performed (see FIG. 342(g)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 342, it is assumed that the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated at timing tl2A, but when the timing tl2A arrives Until then, the "12th F operation related display B" is not displayed (in the situations shown in FIGS. 285(a) and (b), the "12th F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tl2A, the "12th F operation related display B" is displayed as a trigger. (In the situation shown from FIG. 285(c) onwards, "12th F operation related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, when the "12th floor reception period according to the modified example" occurs, it is determined that the "12th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is in a state where operation reception is permitted. can be kept secret. However, the concealed state will be canceled once an operation is accepted for the "12th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "12th floor reception period according to the modified example". , it can be expected to improve the game's interest while maintaining a good sense of tension.

Here, such "12th F operation related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 also in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example." However, the display format that should normally be displayed when the reception period occurs (the format shown in FIGS. 284 to 286, etc.) is in the middle of the "12th F reception period according to the modification" and there is no operation reception. If something were to appear under the condition that something had happened, there is a concern that the player would feel a negative feeling that it had been ``intentionally hidden'' and his or her interest in the game would decrease.

Therefore, in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" of this production example, the "12th F operation related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 284 to 286, but the "12th F "Operation related display B" is displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 and the like. For example, the "12th floor operation related display B" is not displayed as a copy of the "12th floor operating section B (here, the operation button 410)", but is displayed as a different display image. Good too. Further, regarding the "12th F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the ``12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)'' during the ``12F reception period according to the modified example'', this will not apply. The "12th F operation related display B" may not be displayed using this as a trigger.

In the example shown in FIG. 342, a second operation is performed on the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tl2B within the "12th F reception period according to the modification". It is assumed that In this case, in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", as in the case of the 12th F reception period described above (see FIG. 311(i)), based on the second operation being performed, The 12th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed (see FIG. 342(i)). At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 342(k)).

In this regard, in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" of this production example, the display mode of "12th F operation related display B" changes based on the second operation being performed. Instead, the display mode that had appeared up to that point continues (see FIG. 342(g)).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 342, the third operation is performed on the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tl2C within the "12th F reception period according to the modification". It is assumed that In this case, in the 12th floor reception period according to the modification, as in the case of the 12th floor reception period described above, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. In addition, not only the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, but also a new display (aspect) does not appear as the 12F post-reception display UB. In this example as well, even though such an event (the 12th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated within the 12th floor reception period according to the modified example), the display after the 12th floor reception (No new display appears as UB) should just occur when a predetermined condition is met.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 342(a), (g), and (i), in response to the operation reception on the "12F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," In a situation where "back display UB2" and "12thF operation related display B" are being displayed, at timing tl2D within the "12thF reception period according to the modification", "12F operation section A (here , sword ornament 5001)" is assumed.

Also in the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", when an operation is performed on the "12F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tl2D, the 12F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as one of the changes A after the 12th F reception, first, the 12F reception period according to the modified example is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 342(a) and 342(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 286(f), (i) and FIGS. 342(h), (k), the "12th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is 12F reception output sound A' is audibly output, and the 12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 12F operation section A (here, the sword decoration object 5001) is visually recognized. A "12th F effect display EF" that makes the process difficult is displayed, a "light emitting mode in a specific light emitting section" changes, and a 12th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

Also, in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted during the "12th floor reception period according to the modified example" (the situation where the 12th floor effect display EF is displayed), FIGS. 286(f), (i) and 342, "12th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12th F operation related display B", and "12th F omen effect display ZFD" are not hidden. , "12thF operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the 12thF effect display EF. After that, these "12F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "12F operation related display B", and "12F omen effect display ZFD" are changed to "12F operation section A (here, 286 (g) and (j)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, regarding the "12th F operation related display B" that appears under the condition that it is in the middle of the "12th F reception period according to the modified example" and that an operation has been accepted, it is different from the case of the above-mentioned "12th F reception period". However, it may be made to be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the 12F post-reception display UB2. That is, in this case, the 12F post-reception display UA will be hidden within the period in which it is displayed.

In addition, regarding the "12th F operation related display B" that appears under the condition that it is in the middle of the "12th F reception period according to the modification" and that an operation has been accepted, it is different from the case of the "12th F reception period" described above. However, in relation to other display images, it may be displayed in the same manner as the 12F post-reception display UB. In other words, in this case, the 12th F operation related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "12th F precursor effect display ZFD" or "12th F effect display EF", but when they overlap, it is displayed in front of them. It will be displayed. Further, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed on the front side thereof. When adopting such a configuration, the 12th F operation related display B is different from the 12th F operation related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "12th F portent effect display ZFD" and "12th F effect display EF." It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the "12th floor reception permissible sound" related to the "12th floor reception period according to the modified example", "whether the automatic repeated press function is enabled", "whether the automatic button function is enabled", etc. This is similar to the case of the 12th F reception period described above. However, if there is no operation on the "12th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "12th F reception period for the modified example", as shown in FIG. It goes without saying that the ``12th F operation related display B'' will not be displayed during the ``12th F reception period''.

As mentioned above, during the "12th floor reception period according to the modified example", even if an operation is accepted for the "12th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)", this will be used as a trigger. The "12th F operation related display B" may not be displayed, but in this case, the "12th F operation related display B" is always hidden in FIGS. 284 to 286 and FIG. 342(g). The performance will continue to progress with the other configurations remaining the same as in the case of the 12th F reception period described above.

In addition, during the "12th F reception period according to the modified example", the "12th F operation related display B" is triggered by the reception of the operation for the "12th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". However, it may be implemented so that it is not hidden when an operation is received on the "12th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

FIGS. 344 and 345 show a case in which "Condition 13F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and "13F reception period (13F reception period according to the modification)" as a modification of the 13F reception period occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the performance. In addition, regarding the production example in the variation pattern where the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, there are many parts that overlap with the case where the 13th F reception period described above occurs (see Figures 290 and 291). Illustration will be omitted, and basically only the differences (changes) from the above-mentioned "13th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "13th F reception period according to the modified example", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as in the case where the above-mentioned "13F reception period" occurs.

That is, in the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" as well as the above-mentioned 13F reception period, the 13F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 13F operation part B (here, the operation button 410), multiple operation acceptance is allowed until the "13th F acceptance period according to the modified example" ends (multiple operation acceptance period). Furthermore, other examples regarding these "13th F operating section A" and "13th F operating section B" can be applied as appropriate, as in the case of the above-mentioned 13th F reception period.

However, in the "13th F reception period according to the modified example", when the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, " Although the "13F operation related display A" is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 344 (g) and 345 (g), the " 13F operation related display B" is different from the above-mentioned "13F reception period" in that it is not displayed. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of operation units (13F operation unit A, 13F operation unit B) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted, only some of the operation units are in a state in which operation reception is permitted. ” will now be kept secret, and this will prevent the decline in gaming interest due to secrecy, and can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" differs from the 13th F reception period described above in that the "13th F operation related display A" is displayed and the "13th F operation related display B" is not displayed. However, the rest of the structure and presentation contents are the same as the 13th F reception period described above. Therefore, even if the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the production will basically proceed as described above with reference to FIGS. 313 and 314, as well as FIGS. 289 to 291. The Rukoto.

In other words, the production example when the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs is when compared with the production examples (13F reception period) shown in FIGS. 313 and 314, and also in FIGS. 290 and 291. The only difference is that "13thF operation related display B (button drawing image BMG)" is not displayed, but other than that, the contents are basically the same, and the configuration related to the 13thF reception period is different. Another applicable example is similarly applicable to the configuration related to the 13th F reception period according to the modified example (configuration other than the 13th F operation related display B).

Therefore, when the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the "13th F portent effect display ZFD" is first displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the 13th F operation related display A is displayed. It is displayed so that it straddles the timing before and after the timing.

Also, how will the "13th F omen effect display ZFD" be displayed in relation to the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and under what conditions will it be hidden? The periodic changes in which the "13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed, etc. are also as described above in the 13th F reception period.

In addition, in this production example, when the first operation on the "13th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed within the "13th F reception period according to the modified example", the 13F reception period described above As in the case of (see FIG. 290(c)), this triggers the 13th F post-reception display UB1 to be displayed. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance. However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the 13F reception period according to the modified example, the 13F post-reception display UB1 will be displayed. In addition, the "13th F operation related display B" is displayed when the operation is performed (see FIG. 344(g)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 344, it is assumed that the "13th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is operated at timing tm2A, but when timing tg2A arrives Until then, the "13th F operation related display B" is not displayed (in the situations shown in FIGS. 290(a) and (b), the "13th F operation related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tg2A, the "13th F operation related display B" is displayed using this as a trigger. (In the situation shown from FIG. 290(c) onwards, "13th F operation related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, when the "13th F acceptance period according to the modified example" occurs, it is determined that the "13th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. can be kept secret. However, the concealed state will be canceled once an operation is accepted for the "13th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "13th floor reception period according to the modified example". , it can be expected to improve the game's interest while maintaining a good sense of tension.

Here, such "13th F operation related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 289 to 291 also in the "13th F reception period according to the modified example." However, the display format that should normally be displayed when the reception period occurs (the format shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, etc.) is in the middle of the "13th F reception period according to the modification" and there is no operation reception. If something were to appear under the condition that something had happened, there is a concern that the player would feel a negative feeling that it had been ``intentionally hidden'' and his or her interest in the game would decrease.

Therefore, in the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" of this production example, the "13th F operation related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, etc.; "Operation related display B" is displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. 289 to 291 and the like. For example, "13th F operation related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating "13th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", but is displayed as a different display image. Good too. Further, regarding the "13th F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the ``13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' during the ``13th F reception period according to the modified example'', this will not apply. The "13th F operation related display B" may not be displayed using this as a trigger.

In the example shown in FIG. 344, a second operation is performed on the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tm2B within the "13th F reception period according to the modification". It is assumed that In this case, in the 13th F reception period according to the modified example, as in the case of the 13F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(d)), the 13F After acceptance display UB2 is displayed (see FIG. 344(i)). At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance (see FIG. 344(k)).

In this regard, in the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" of this production example, the display mode of "13th F operation related display B" changes based on the second operation being performed. This does not occur, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point continues (see FIG. 344(e)).

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 344, the third operation is performed on the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tm2C within the "13th F reception period according to the modification". It is assumed that In this case, even in the "13th F reception period according to the modified example", as in the case of the 13F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(e)), when the third operation is performed, As shown in (e) and FIGS. 344(i) and (k), not only the output sound after reception is not output audibly, but also no new display (aspect) appears as the 13F after reception display UB. It looks like this. In this example, even though the ``13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' was operated within the ``13th F reception period according to the modified example'', the 13F reception The new display does not appear as the subsequent display UB) may only occur when a predetermined condition is met.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 344(a), (g), and (i), in response to the operation reception for the "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)," In a situation where "back display UB2" and "13thF operation related display B" are being displayed, at timing tm2D within the "13thF reception period according to the modification", "13F operation section A (here , sword ornament 5001)" is assumed.

Also in the 13th F reception period according to the modified example, when the first operation reception is made for the "13F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tm2D, the change A after the 13F reception is performed. can be caused. That is, as the change A after reception of the 13th F, for example, as shown in FIGS. 344 (h) to (k) and FIG. The "13F post-reception output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation is audibly output, and the "13F operation related display A" corresponding to the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is output. (Sword Decoration Image SYG)" is displayed, the "13th F Effect Display EF1" is displayed, the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section is changed, and furthermore, the 13th F Post-Reception Display UA1 is displayed.

In addition, when the first operation is performed, "the 13th floor acceptance permission sound that was in the state of audible output", "the 13th floor reception display UB that was in the displayed state", and "periodic change" The same applies to the 13th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG), the 13th F effect display EF1, etc., which were in the state of performing the 13th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), and the 13th F effect display EF1.

In addition, in the "13th F reception period for the modified example" of this production example, for the "13th F operation related display B", the first The display mode does not change based on the acceptance of the operation, and the display mode that has been displayed up to that point is continued (see FIG. 344(g)).

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 344(a), (e), (h), and (i), the previous operation reception for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The situation is such that post-acceptance changes A in response to the above are occurring in various places, and the 13th-F post-acceptance display UB2 corresponding to the operation acceptance on the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is still being displayed. In this situation, at timings tm2E and tm2F (each timing shown in FIGS. 291(g) and (h)) within the 13thF reception period according to the modification, "13F operation section A (here, the sword It is assumed that the second and third operation receptions for the "decoration object 5001)" are respectively performed.

During the 13th F reception period according to the modified example, at timings tm2E and tm2F (in each situation where the production display shown in FIGS. )'' are accepted for the second and third times, as in the case where the first operation is accepted for the ``13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' in Figure 291. As shown in (g), (h) and FIG. 344, change A can be caused after receiving the 13th F.

In particular, regarding "output sound A1 after 13F reception", "13F effect display EF1", and "change in light emitting mode in specific light emitting section", the changes will be made when the first operation is accepted, and after the second and third operation. The same aspect can appear when a reception is made. In addition, the periodic changes in the "13th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once ended when the previous operation was accepted will remain in its completed state when the second or third operation is accepted. However, when the second or third operation is accepted, the periodic change end state will occur again. It happens. That is, in this case, the periodic change once ended will be restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the second or third operation is accepted.

In this regard, regarding the "13F post-reception display UA", the basics are the same as when the first operation reception for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is made (the 13F post-reception display UA1). It is essentially the same. However, even in the "13th floor reception period for the modification" according to this example, when the second operation is accepted, "The hero YS attacks and the BOSS character's HP decreases to about 50%. (Display UA2 after reception on the 13th floor)" is performed (see Figure 291 (g)), and when the third operation is accepted, "The hero YS has attacked and the BOSS character's HP is about 25% remaining. Progress has been made in terms of production, such as the depiction of decreasing numbers (display UA3 after reception on the 13th floor) (see Figure 291(h)). In other words, the presentation as the "display UA after reception on the 13th floor" is the same as in the case of the reception period on the 13th floor described above, and other examples thereof can be applied as appropriate.

In addition, when the second and third operations are performed, the "13F reception permission sound that was in the state of audible output", "the 13F reception display UB that was in the displayed state", and the "period" Regarding the 13F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), which was in a state where the target was changing, the 13F effect display EF1, the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section, etc., the above-mentioned 13F reception period. Same as in case.

In addition, during the 13th F reception period for the modified example of this production example, regarding the "13th F operation related display B", the 2nd and 3rd The display mode does not change based on the acceptance of the operation, and the display mode that has been displayed up to that point is continued (see FIG. 344(g)).

Also in this example, as shown in FIGS. 344(a), (e), (f), (h), and (i), 3 The situation is such that the post-reception change A in response to the second operation reception is occurring in various places, and the 13F post-reception display UB2 in response to the operation reception on "13F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is While it is still being displayed, at timing tm2G (see FIG. 291(i)) during the 13th F reception period according to the modified example, "13th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" It is assumed that the fourth operation is accepted for .

When the fourth operation reception is made for the "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tm2G within the "13F reception period according to the modification", the 13F post-reception change A can cause That is, as one of the 13F post-reception changes A, first, the "13F reception period according to the modified example" is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 344(a) and 344(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 291(i), (l) and FIGS. 344(h), (k), the "thirteenth 13F reception output sound A' is audibly output, and the user visually recognizes the '13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)' corresponding to the '13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'. A "13th F effect display EF" that makes the process more difficult is displayed, the light emission mode of the specific light emitting section changes, and furthermore, a 13th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

Also, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted during the "13th F acceptance period according to the modified example" (the situation where the 13th F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in FIGS. 291 (i) and (l), As shown in FIG. 13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the 13F effect display EF. After that, these "13F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "13F operation related display B", and "13F omen effect display ZFD" are changed to "13F operation section A (here, 291 (l) and (m)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, regarding the "13th F operation related display B" that appears under the condition that the "13th F reception period according to the modification" is in the middle and the operation has been accepted, it is different from the case of the "13th F reception period" mentioned above. However, it may be made to be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the 13F post-reception display UB2. That is, in this case, the 13F post-reception display UA4 will be hidden within the period in which it is displayed.

In addition, regarding the "13th F operation related display B" that appears under the condition that the "13th F reception period according to the modified example" is in the middle and the operation is accepted, it is different from the case of the "13th F reception period" mentioned above. However, in relation to other display images, it may be displayed in the same manner as the 13F post-reception display UB. In other words, in this case, the 13th F operation related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "13th F omen effect display ZFD" or "13th F effect display EF", but when they overlap, it is displayed in front of them. It will be displayed. Further, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed on the front side thereof. When adopting such a configuration, the 13th F operation related display B is different from the 13th F operation related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "13th F omen effect display ZFD" and "13th F effect display EF." It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the "13th floor reception permissible sound" related to the "13th floor reception period according to the modified example", "whether or not the automatic repeated press function is enabled", and "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled", etc. This is the same as the case of the 13th F reception period described above. However, if there is no operation on the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "13th F reception period for the modified example", as shown in FIG. It goes without saying that the "13th F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the "13th F reception period".

As mentioned above, even if an operation is accepted for the "13th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "13th F reception period according to the modified example", this will trigger the "13th F reception period". 13F operation related display B" may not be displayed, but in this case, in FIGS. 289 to 291 and FIG. 344(g), "13F operation related display B" is always hidden. The performance will proceed as is, and the other configurations will remain the same as in the case of the 13th F reception period described above.

In addition, during the "13th F reception period according to the modified example", the "13F operation related display B" is changed to "13F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" for operation reception (the reception period ends). However, it was decided to hide the screen when the operation was accepted for the ``13F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)''. It may also be realized as something that will never happen.

FIGS. 346 to 348 show the conditions when "Condition 16F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "16th F reception period (16th F reception period according to the modified example)" occurs as a modification of the 16F reception period. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the performance. In addition, regarding the production example in the variation pattern where the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, there are many parts that overlap with the case where the 16th F reception period described above occurs (see Figures 335 and 336). Illustration will be omitted, and basically only the differences (changes) from the above-mentioned "16th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "16th F reception period according to the modified example", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as in the case where the above-mentioned "16F reception period" occurs.

That is, the "16th F reception period according to the modification" is similar to the above-mentioned 16F reception period, and the 16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is the same as the "16F reception period according to the modification". Only one operation reception is allowed until the end of the 16F operation section B (here, operation button 410) until the "16F reception period according to the modified example" ends. It is permitted to accept multiple operations during this period (multiple operations permissible period). Further, other examples regarding these "16th F operating section A" and "16th F operating section B" can also be applied as appropriate, as in the case of the 16th F reception period described above.

Similarly, the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" is the period from when the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs until timing tpX arrives, when the 16th F operation section A (Here, the sword ornament 5001) "16F operation related display A" and the 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) correspond to the "16F operation related display B" are both displayed. It is prohibited to do so.

However, in the "16th F reception period according to the modified example", when the timing tpX within the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" arrives, the "16th F operation related display A" is displayed; 348(g), the "16th F operation related display B" is different from the above-mentioned "16th F reception period (see FIGS. 333 and 334)" in that it is not displayed. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of operation units (16F operation unit A, 16F operation unit B) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted, only some of the operation units are in a state in which operation reception is permitted. ” will now be kept secret, and it can be expected that this will prevent a decline in gaming interest due to secrecy and maintain a good sense of tension during the reception period.

In this respect, the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" is the same as described above in that the "16th F operation related display A" is displayed and the "16th F operation related display B" is not displayed after the timing tpX arrives. Although it is different from the 16th floor reception period, the other structure and presentation contents are the same as the 16th floor reception period described above. Therefore, even when the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the presentation will basically proceed as described above with reference to FIGS. 332 to 336.

In other words, the production example when the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs is the "16F operation related display" when compared with the production examples (16F reception period) shown in FIGS. 332 to 336. The only difference is that "B (button drawing image BMG)" is not displayed, and the other contents are basically the same.Another example that can be applied to the configuration related to the 16th F reception period is " It is similarly applicable to the configuration related to the 16th F reception period according to the modification (configurations other than the 16th F operation related display B).

Therefore, when the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, first, the corresponding 16th F omen effect display ZFD is displayed so as to span before and after the timing when the 16th F operation related display A is displayed. be done.

Also, in what manner is this 16th F omen effect display ZFD displayed in relation to the "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and under what conditions is it hidden? Also, the point that the "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes is as described above in the 16th F reception period.

In addition, in this production example, when the first operation is performed on the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" within the "16th F reception period according to the modified example", this operation is accepted. Regardless of whether the timing is in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or the "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)," the above-mentioned As in the case of the 17th F reception period (see FIGS. 332(i) and 333(i)), the 16th F post-reception display UB1 is displayed using this as an opportunity. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance. However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the ``16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' within the ``16th F reception period according to the modified example,'' the timing at which this operation was accepted is Display after reception on the 16th floor, regardless of whether it is in the section where related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section) or the section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section). In addition to displaying UB1, the "16th F operation related display B" is displayed when the operation is performed (see Figures 346(g) and 347(g)). reference).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 346, at timing tp2c within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", the "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is It is assumed that the first operation is performed, but the "16th F operation related display B" is not displayed until the timing tp2c arrives. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tp2c, the "16th F operation related display B" is displayed as a trigger. There is.

According to such a configuration, the timing tpX of the "16th F acceptance period according to the modified example" indicates that the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. It can be kept secret at the time of arrival (the time when the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section) starts). However, the concealed state will be canceled once an operation is accepted for the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "16th F acceptance period according to the modified example". , it can be expected to improve the game's interest while maintaining a good sense of tension.

Here, such "16th F operation related display B" may be displayed in the same manner as explained in the above-mentioned "16th F reception period" even during the "16th F reception period according to the modified example". good. However, if the display mode that should normally be displayed at the arrival of timing tpX appears after timing tpX and on the condition that an operation is accepted, There is a concern that players may feel negative feelings about the game being hidden away, which could actually reduce their interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" of this production example, the "16th F operation related display A" is displayed in the same manner as explained in the "16th F reception period" mentioned above. 16F Operation Related Display B'' is displayed in a manner different from that described in the above-mentioned ``16F Reception Period''. For example, "16th F operation related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating "16th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)", but is displayed as a different display image. Good too. Further, regarding the "16th F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "16th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" during the "16th floor reception period according to the modified example", this will not apply. The "16th F operation related display B" may not be displayed using this as a trigger.

Although not shown in the example shown in FIG. 346, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" of the "16th F reception period according to the modified example", " Even if a second operation is performed on the 16F operation section B (here, the operation button 410), it will be recognized that the second operation has been performed, as in the case of the 16F reception period described above. Based on this, the 16th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance.

In this regard, in the "16th F reception period according to the modified example" of this production example, the display mode of "16th F operation related display B" changes based on the second operation being performed. This will not happen, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point will continue.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 346, although not shown, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" of the "16th F reception period according to the modification", " Even if the 16th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is operated for the third time, the output sound will not be audible after reception, as in the case of the 16th floor reception period described above. , a new display (mode) does not appear as the 16th F post-reception display UB. In this example, even though such an event (the 16th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410) was operated within the 16th floor reception period according to the modified example), the display after the 16th floor reception (No new display appears as UB) should just occur when a predetermined condition is met.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 346(a), (g), and (i), the ``16th F reception In a situation where "back display UB" and "16th F operation related display B" are being displayed, "section in which operation related display is displayed (display section, It is assumed that an operation is performed on the 16th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) at timing tp2d in the 2nd section).

Also in the "16th F reception period according to the modified example", when an operation is performed on the "16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tp2d, the 16F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as one of the changes A after the 16th F reception, first, the 16F reception period according to the modified example is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 346(a) and 346(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 336(g2), (j2) and FIGS. 346(h), (k), the ``16th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)'' is 16F reception output sound A' is audibly output, and the 16F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 16F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is visually recognized. A "16th F effect display EF" that makes the process more difficult is displayed, a "light emitting mode in a specific light emitting section" changes, and a 16th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

Also, when there is a situation immediately after an operation is accepted during the "16th F acceptance period according to the modified example" (a situation where the 16th F effect display EF is displayed), the situation shown in FIGS. 336 (g2) and (j2) As shown in FIG. )” is displayed so as to overlap with the rear side of the 16th F effect display EF. After that, these "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "16th F operation related display B" are displayed based on the operation on the "16th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration object 5001)". (See FIG. 336 (h2) and (k2)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, regarding the "16th F operation related display B" that appears under the condition that the "16th F reception period according to the modification" is in the middle and the operation has been accepted, it is different from the case of the "16th F reception period" mentioned above. However, it may be made to be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the 16F post-reception display UB2. That is, in this case, the 16F post-reception display UA will be hidden within the period in which it is displayed.

In addition, regarding the "16th F operation related display B" that appears in the middle of the "16th F reception period according to the modification" and under the condition that an operation has been accepted, it is different from the case of the "16th F reception period" described above. However, in relation to other display images, it may be displayed in the same manner as the 16th F post-reception display UB. In other words, in this case, the 16th F operation related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "16th F omen effect display ZFD" or "16th F effect display EF", but when they overlap, it is displayed in front of them. It will be displayed. Further, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed on the front side thereof. When adopting such a configuration, the 16F operation-related display B is different from the 16F operation-related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "16F portent effect display ZFD" and "16F effect display EF." It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the "16th floor reception permissible sound" related to the "16th floor reception period according to the modified example", "whether or not the automatic repeated press function is enabled", and "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled", etc. This is the same as in the case of the 16th F reception period described above. However, if there is no operation on the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "16th F reception period for the modified example", as shown in FIG. It goes without saying that the "16th F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the "16th F reception period".

In addition, in the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "16thF reception period according to the modification", "16F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" As shown in FIG. 347, when the operation is accepted, the 16F operation-related "Display B" will be displayed. Furthermore, the "16thF operation-related display B" displayed within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" is different from the "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)". This is the same mode as when displayed within "section)". That is, in this case, before the timing tpX arrives, the "16th F operation related display B" will be displayed in advance of the "16th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", It can be expected to improve gaming interest. However, after this, if an operation is accepted for the 16F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) while the "16F operation related display B" is being displayed, the timing at which the operation was accepted will be changed. Regardless of whether it is in the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)," , the "16th F operation related display B" will be hidden.

As mentioned above, even if an operation is accepted for the "16th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "16th F reception period according to the modified example", this will trigger the "16th F reception period". 16F operation related display B" may not be displayed, but in this case, in the examples shown in FIGS. 332 to 336, "16F operation related display B" is always kept hidden. , and the production will proceed with the other configurations remaining the same as in the case of the 16th F reception period described above.

In addition, during the "16th F reception period for the modified example", the "16th F operation related display B" is triggered by the reception of an operation for the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". However, it may be realized that the screen is not hidden when an operation is received on the "16th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

FIGS. 349 to 351 show the conditions when "Condition 17F" is satisfied as the above occurrence condition and "17F reception period (17F reception period according to the modification)" as a modification of the 17F reception period occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the performance. In addition, regarding the production example in the variation pattern where the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, there are many parts that overlap with the case where the 17th F reception period described above occurs (see Figures 340 and 341). Illustration will be omitted, and basically only the differences (changes) from the above-mentioned "17th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "17th F reception period according to the modified example", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as in the case where the above-mentioned "17F reception period" occurs.

That is, in the "17th F reception period according to the modified example", as well as the above-mentioned 17F reception period, the 17F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 17F operation part B (here, the operation button 410), multiple operation acceptance is allowed until the "17th F acceptance period according to the modification" ends (multiple operation acceptance period). In addition, other examples regarding these "17th F operating section A" and "17th F operating section B" can also be applied as appropriate, as in the case of the above-mentioned 17th F reception period.

Similarly, during the "17th F reception period according to the modified example", from the occurrence of the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" until timing tqX arrives, the 17th F operation section A (Here, the sword ornament 5001) "17F operation-related display A" and the 17F operation-related display B corresponding to the 17F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are both displayed. It is prohibited to do so.

However, in the "17th F reception period according to the modified example", when the timing tqX within the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" arrives, the "17th F operation related display A" is displayed; 351(g), the "17th F operation related display B" is different from the above-mentioned "17th F reception period (FIGS. 337 and 338)" in that it is not displayed. In other words, in this case, among the plurality of operation units (17F operation unit A, 17F operation unit B) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted, only some of the operation units are in a state in which operation reception is permitted. ” will now be kept secret, and this will prevent the decline in gaming interest due to secrecy, and can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs. Become.

In this respect, the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" differs from the above-mentioned point in that "17th F operation related display A" is displayed and "17th F operation related display B" is not displayed after timing tqX arrives. Although it is different from the 17th floor reception period, the other structure and presentation contents are the same as the 17th floor reception period described above. Therefore, even when the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the presentation will basically proceed as described above with reference to FIGS. 337 to 341.

In other words, the production example when the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs is the "17F operation related display" when compared with the production examples (17F reception period) shown in FIGS. 337 to 341. The only difference is that "B (button drawing image BMG)" is not displayed, and other than that, the contents are basically the same.Another example that can be applied to the configuration related to the 17th F reception period is " It is similarly applicable to the configuration related to the 17th F reception period according to the modification (configurations other than the 17F operation related display B).

Therefore, when the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" occurs, the corresponding 17th F portent effect display ZFD is first changed to the 17th F operation related display A as shown in FIGS. 340 and 341. is displayed before and after the timing when is displayed.

Also, how will the "17th F omen effect display ZFD" be displayed in relation to the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and under what conditions will it be hidden? The periodic changes in which the ``17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' is displayed, etc. are also as described above in the 17th F reception period.

In addition, in this production example, when the first operation on the "17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is performed within the "17th floor reception period according to the modified example", this operation reception is performed. Regardless of whether the timing is in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or the "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)," the above-mentioned As in the case of the 17th floor reception period (see Figures 337(i) and 338(i)), this triggers the 17th floor reception display UB1 to be displayed.At this time, the output sound after reception is audible. However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the "17th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the "17th floor reception period according to the modified example", this operation reception Regardless of whether the timing is in the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" or "section where operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section)" In addition to displaying the 17th F post-reception display UB1, the 17th F operation related display B is displayed when the operation is performed (Fig. 349(g) and FIG. 350(g)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 349, at timing tq2c within the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)", the "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is It is assumed that the first operation is performed, but the "17th F operation related display B" is not displayed until the timing tq2c arrives. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tq2c, the "17th F operation related display B" is displayed as a trigger. There is.

According to such a configuration, the timing tpX of the "17th F acceptance period according to the modified example" indicates that the "17th F operating unit B (here, the operating button 410)" is in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. It can be kept secret at the time of arrival (the time when the section in which the operation-related display is displayed (display section, second section) starts). However, the concealed state will be canceled once an operation is accepted for the "17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "17th floor reception period according to the modified example". , it can be expected to improve the game's interest while maintaining a good sense of tension.

Here, such "17th F operation related display B" may be displayed in the same manner as explained in the above-mentioned "17th F reception period" even during the "17F reception period according to the modification". good. However, if the display mode that should normally be displayed at the arrival of timing tqX appears after timing tqX and on the condition that an operation has been accepted, the There is a concern that players may feel negative feelings about the game being hidden away, which could actually reduce their interest in the game.

Therefore, in the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" of this production example, the "17th F operation related display A" is displayed in the same manner as explained in the "17th F reception period" mentioned above. 17F Operation Related Display B'' is displayed in a manner different from that described in the above-mentioned ``17F Reception Period''. For example, the "17th floor operation related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating the "17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)", but is displayed as a different display image. Good too. Further, regarding the "17th F operation related display B", periodic changes may not appear in the display. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the ``17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)'' during the ``17th floor reception period according to the modified example'', this is not the case. The "17th F operation related display B" may not be displayed using this as a trigger.

Although not shown in the example shown in FIG. 349, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" of the "17th F reception period according to the modification", " Even if a second operation is performed on the 17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410), the second operation is recognized as being performed, as in the case of the 17th floor reception period described above. Based on this, the 17th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed. At this time, the output sound is not audibly output after acceptance.

In this regard, in the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" of this production example, the display mode of "17th F operation related display B" changes based on the second operation being performed. This will not happen, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point will continue.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 349, although not shown, in the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" of the "17th F reception period according to the modification", " Even if the 17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is operated for the third time, the output sound will not be audible after reception, as in the case of the 17th floor reception period described above. , a new display (aspect) will not appear as the 17th F post-reception display UB. In this example as well, despite such an event (despite the operation being performed on the "17th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" within the 17th F reception period according to the modified example), the display after the 17F reception (No new display appears as UB) should just occur when a predetermined condition is met.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 349(a), (g), and (i), the "17th floor reception In a situation where "back display UB" and "17th floor operation-related display B" are being displayed, "section in which operation-related display is displayed (display section, It is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2d in the "2 section)".

Also in the "17th F reception period according to the modified example", when the first operation is performed on the "17F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2d, the 17F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as shown in FIG. 340 (g2) and FIGS. 349 (h) and (k), the "17th F post-reception output" corresponding to the operation on the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is shown in FIG. "Sound A" is audibly output, and the "Sound A" is audibly output, and the "Sound A" is audibly output, and the "Sound A" is audibly output. 17F effect display EF" is displayed, the "light emission mode in the specific light emitting section" changes, and furthermore, the 17F post-reception display UA is displayed.

In addition, when the first operation is performed, "the 17th floor reception permission sound that was in the state of audible output", "the 17th floor reception display UB that was in the displayed state", and "periodic change" The 17th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the 17th F effect display EF1, etc., which were in the state of performing "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the like, are also the same as in the case of the 17th F reception period described above.

In addition, in the "17th F reception period for the modified example" of this production example, for the "17th F operation related display B", the first The display mode does not change based on the acceptance of the operation, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point is continued (see FIG. 349(g)).

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 349(a), (e), (h), and (i), the previous operation reception for the "17th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" The situation is such that post-acceptance changes A are occurring in various places, and the 17th-F post-acceptance display UB that corresponds to the operation acceptance on the "17th-F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is still being displayed. At timings tq2e and tq2f within the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" (each situation in which the effect display shown in FIG. 341 (g2) and (h2) appears), the "17th F. It is assumed that the second and third operation receptions are respectively made for the operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001).

At timings tq2e and tq2f (in each situation where the effect displays shown in FIGS. 341 (g2) and (h2) appear) during the "17th floor reception period according to the modified example", "17th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration When the second and third operations are accepted for the body 5001), the same applies as when the first operation is accepted for the 17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration body 5001). As shown in FIGS. 341 (h2), (i2), and FIG. 349, change A can be caused after receiving the 17th F.

In particular, regarding the "17thF post-reception output sound A1" and the "17thF effect display EF1", the same behavior appears when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. It's getting wet. In addition, the periodic changes in "17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that was once ended when the previous operation was accepted will remain in its completed state when the second or third operation is accepted. However, when the second or third operation is accepted, the periodic change end state will occur again. It happens. That is, in this case, the periodic change once ended will be restarted from the beginning after a predetermined time has elapsed from the second or third operation acceptance.

In this regard, regarding the "17thF post-reception display UA", the basics are the same as when the first operation reception for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is made (17F post-reception display UA1). It is essentially the same. However, even in the "17th floor reception period for the modification" according to this example, when the second operation is accepted, "The hero YS attacks and the BOSS character's HP decreases to about 50%. (Display UA2 after reception on the 17th floor)" is performed (see Figure 341 (h2)), and when the third operation is accepted, "The hero YS has attacked and the BOSS character's HP is about 25% remaining. Progress has been made in terms of production, such as the depiction of a decrease (display UA3 after reception on the 17th floor) (see Figure 341 (i2)). In other words, the effect of the "display UA after reception on the 17th floor" is the same as in the case of the reception period on the 17th floor described above, and other examples thereof can be applied as appropriate.

In addition, when the second and third operations are performed, the "17th floor acceptance permission sound that was in the state of audible output", "the 17th floor post-reception display UB that was in the displayed state", and the "period" Regarding the 17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG), which was in a state where the target was changing, the 17F effect display EF1, and the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section, etc., during the 17F reception period mentioned above. Same as in case.

In addition, during the 17th floor reception period for the modification of this production example, for the 17th floor operation-related display B, the 2nd and 3rd displays for the 17th floor operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) The display mode does not change based on the acceptance of the operation, and the display mode that has appeared up to that point is continued (see FIG. 349(g)).

Also in this example, as shown in FIGS. 349(a), (e), (f), (h), and (i), 3 The situation is such that the post-reception change A in response to the second operation reception is occurring in various places, and the 17F post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception on "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is While the display is still displayed, at timing tq2g (the situation where the effect display shown in FIG. 341 (i2) appears) within the "17th F reception period according to the modified example", the "17th F operation section A (Here, it is assumed that the fourth operation is accepted for the sword decoration object 5001).

When the fourth operation reception is made for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tq2G within the "17F reception period according to the modification", the 17F post-reception change A can cause That is, as one of the changes A after the 17th F reception, first, the "17th F reception period according to the modified example" is ended based on the operation (see FIGS. 349(a) and 349(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 341(j2), (l2) and FIGS. 349(h), (k), the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" is 17F reception output sound A' is audibly output, and the 17F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to the 17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is visually recognized. A "17th F effect display EF" that makes it difficult is displayed, and a 17th F post-acceptance display UA is also displayed.

Also, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted during the "17th F acceptance period according to the modified example" (the situation where the 17th F effect display EF is displayed), the situation shown in FIGS. 341 (j2) and (l2) As shown in FIG. )" is displayed so as to overlap the rear side of the 17th F effect display EF. After that, these "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "17th F operation related display B" are displayed based on the operation on the "17th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". (See FIGS. 341(k2) and (m2)). However, this may be hidden from view immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, regarding the "17th F operation related display B" that appears on the condition that the "17th F reception period according to the modification" is in the middle and the operation has been accepted, it is different from the case of the "17th F reception period" mentioned above. However, it may be made to be hidden at the same timing (same conditions) as the 17F post-reception display UB. That is, in this case, the 17F post-reception display UA4 will be hidden within the period in which it is displayed.

In addition, regarding the "17th F operation related display B" that appears on the condition that the "17th F reception period according to the modification" is in the middle and the operation is accepted, it is different from the case of the "17th F reception period" mentioned above. However, in relation to other display images, it may be displayed in the same manner as the 17F post-reception display UB. In other words, in this case, the 17th F operation related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "17th F omen effect display ZFD" or "17th F effect display EF", but when they overlap, it is displayed in front of them. It will be displayed. Further, in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed on the front side thereof. When adopting such a configuration, the 17F operation-related display B is different from the 17F operation-related display A in relation to the above-mentioned "17F portent effect display ZFD" and "17F effect display EF." It will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the "17th floor reception permissible sound" regarding the "17th floor reception period according to the modified example", "whether or not the automatic repeated press function is enabled", and "whether or not the automatic button function is enabled", etc. This is the same as in the case of the 17th F reception period described above. However, if there is no operation on the "17th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "17th F reception period for the modified example", as shown in FIG. It goes without saying that the "17th F operation related display B" will not be displayed during the "17th F reception period".

In addition, in the "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "17F reception period according to the modification", "17F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" As shown in FIG. 350, when the operation is accepted, the 17F operation-related "Display B" will be displayed. In addition, "17F operation-related display B" displayed within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" is different from "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)". This is the same mode as when displayed within "section)". That is, in this case, before the timing tqX arrives, the "17th F operation related display B" will be displayed in advance of the "17th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", It can be expected to improve gaming interest. However, after this, while the "17F operation related display B" is displayed, the fourth operation reception for the 17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is performed (conditions for ending the reception period). When an operation reception that satisfies the following criteria is performed, the timing at which the operation reception was made is determined as "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, Taking this as an opportunity, the "17th F operation related display B" will be hidden regardless of where it is located in the "second section)".

As mentioned above, even if an operation is accepted for the "17th floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "17th floor reception period according to the modified example", this will trigger the "17th floor reception period". 17F operation related display B" may not be displayed, but in this case, in the examples shown in FIGS. 337 to 341, "17F operation related display B" always remains hidden. , and the production will proceed with the other configurations remaining the same as in the case of the 17th F reception period described above.

In addition, during the "17th F reception period according to the modified example", the "17F operation related display B" is changed to "17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" when the operation reception for the "17F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is accepted (the reception period ends). However, it was decided to hide the screen when the operation was accepted for the ``17F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. It may also be realized as something that will never happen.

According to the above-mentioned configuration related to the "16th F reception period (or a modification thereof)" and the "17th F reception period (or a modification thereof)" described above, "operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" ” is made at any time within the acceptance period, the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance is made difficult to visually recognize. In this respect, the operation reception for "operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is "section where operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section where operation-related display is displayed." (Display section, 2nd section)", the above-mentioned post-acceptance display UA will be "When it is made difficult to see by the precursor effect display ZFD" and "When it is made difficult to see by the operation-related display A." Because of this, it can be expected to improve the interest in gaming.

In each production example mentioned above, the 12th F reception period (or a variation thereof), the 13th F reception period (or a variation thereof), the 14th F reception period, the 16th F reception period (or a variation thereof), The first background image HK1 that can be displayed in the modified example of the 15th F reception period is displayed in both the 15th F reception period and the 17th F reception period (or a modification thereof), but any part of the reception period ( (including only one), the first background image HK1 that can be displayed in a modified example of the 15th F reception period may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the 12th F reception period (or a variation thereof), the 13th F reception period (or a variation thereof), the 14th F reception period, the 16th F reception period (or a variation thereof) ), and the 17th F reception period (or a modification thereof), the first light emitting mode that can appear in the modification of the 15F reception period is executed, but any part of these reception periods ( The first light emitting mode that may appear in a modified example of the 15th F acceptance period may be executed in only one (including only one).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the above-mentioned "third background image HK3" that may appear in connection with the 15th floor reception period (or a variation thereof) is the same as the above-mentioned "first background image HK1". It may also be realized as a background image.
When the configuration according to such another example is applied to the first modified example of the 15th F reception period, for example, the timing to2E shown in FIG. When an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing within the interval), this triggers the background image to be switched (replaced) with another background image. , at the timing to2e shown in FIG. 323 (timing within the section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)), the operation reception for the "15F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is performed. When this happens, the background image will no longer be switched (replaced) with another background image, so even if the same post-reception display occurs, its impact will be significantly different, and the impact will be significantly different during the relevant reception period. This makes it possible to make it more interesting to decide when to operate the game.
Also, when the configuration according to such another example is applied to the second modified example of the 15th F reception period, for example, the timing to2E (section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section , 1st section)), when an operation is accepted for the "15th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the background image is switched (replaced) with another background image using this as an opportunity. However, at timing to2e shown in FIG. 328 (timing within the section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, second section)), "15F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is displayed. When an operation is accepted, this triggers the background image to be switched (replaced) with another background image, so even if the same post-reception display occurs, the impact will be greatly different, and It is now possible to make it more interesting to decide when to operate within the period.

However, in this case, the first background image HK1 has a first aspect and a second aspect (for example, a first aspect in which the first background image HK1 is displayed brightly and a second aspect in which the first background image HK1 is displayed darkly). is prepared, and the "first background image HK1" according to the above-mentioned production example is displayed instead of the "first aspect of the first background image HK1", and the "third background image HK1" according to the production example described above is displayed instead of the "first aspect of the first background image HK1". The image HK3' may be displayed instead of the second aspect of the first background image HK1. According to such a configuration, even if the background image as the first background image HK1 is not switched, it is possible to show a change in the aspect of the first background image HK1.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "light-emission mode" refers to a light-emission pattern, as mentioned above, and the light-emission may change periodically, or may be one that does not change and remains constant. It may be one in which only light emission appears. Therefore, "change in light emission mode" means that such a light emission pattern switches to another light emission pattern, and if it changes periodically, that periodic change is caused by another periodic change. It means switching to change. Further, a "non-emission mode" may be included as one of the "multiple light emission modes".

In addition, the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, 16th F reception period, and 17th F reception period for each production example mentioned above are all different from each other as changes after reception. (the types of changes after reception are different), the change after reception according to the operation reception for operation part A (sword ornament 5001) and the operation reception for operation part B (operation button 410). For example, the changes after acceptance in response to the acceptance of operation for operation part A (sword ornament 5001) are different from each other, but the changes after acceptance in response to operation part B ( The changes after the reception of the operation on the operation button 410) may be the same.

In addition, among the above-mentioned examples of production, the 14th F reception period was set to occur as a period in which multiple operation receptions for the 14F operation section A (sword ornament 5001) were allowed, but the 14F operation section It is also possible to generate a period in which only one operation reception for A (sword ornament 5001) is allowed. In this case, the 14th F acceptance period ends when the 14th F operation unit A (sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operation.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the operation-related sound a corresponds to the above-mentioned acceptance permission sound, and may be outputted so as to extend from before the occurrence of the acceptance period. It is sufficient if it is audible at least within the reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification", if the approximated image KG is displayed as the same image, "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)" " image will be displayed in advance in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)", and that image will remain in the "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section)". section, second section)" will begin. However, in this case, the 15thF operation-related display A is not displayed in advance within the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and is not displayed in the "section where operation-related displays are displayed (display section, first section)". 2 section)" will be displayed with a delay at the start of the section.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "15th floor reception period according to the first modification," in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section)," the "15th floor operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is When an operation is performed, the acceptance of the operation triggers "the first aspect B1 of the 15th F operation-related display B (or The image display KG that approximates this is started to be displayed within the section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section), but the first mode B1 (or a display that approximates this) may not be displayed. In other words, in this case, in the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section)" of the "15thF reception period according to the first modification", the "15thF operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" Not only the corresponding operation-related display (sample image display) cannot be displayed, but also the operation-related display (sample image display) corresponding to "15thF operation section B (here, operation button 410)" cannot be displayed. That will happen.

In addition, in the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, 16th F reception period, and 17F reception period related to each of the above-mentioned production examples, and their variations, operation-related Displays A and B, operation-related sound a, and post-acceptance output sounds A and B may be the same display or different displays.

In addition, during the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, 16th F reception period, and 17F reception period related to each production example mentioned above, and their variations, operation reception is There does not necessarily have to be two (plural) operating units that allow this. For example, it may be possible to only accept operations on the operation unit A (sword ornament 5001). Or, during the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, 16th F reception period, and 17F reception period related to each of the above-mentioned production examples, or variations thereof, operation reception may be performed. There may be three or more operating units that are allowed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and "15F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)," A third section different from the first section and the second section may be further included.

For example, regarding the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and "15F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)," They may be combined into one reception period (the 15th F reception period according to the third modification). Such "15th F reception period according to the third modification" is, for example, a predetermined period after the "15F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" occurs. The elapsed timing to3 (see FIG. 324, etc.) is set as the timing toY (see FIG. 329, etc.) within the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)". You can. In other words, in this case, in the "15th F reception period according to the third modification", timing to3 (timing toY) arrives when a predetermined time has elapsed since the "15F reception period according to the third modification" occurred. The period up to this point will function as the same production period as the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 323 to 326)", and when the timing to3 (timing toY) arrives, this As a result of this, the same change (see Fig. 329, etc.) as when the timing toY arrives within the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figs. 327 to 331)" occurs, and after that will function as the "section in which no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" described above. Conversely, the "15th F reception period according to the third modification" is a predetermined period of time after the "15F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)" occurs. The timing to3 (see FIGS. 327 to 329) at which the end has passed is set to the timing to ). In other words, in this case, in the "15th F reception period according to the third modification", timing to3 (timing to2X) arrives when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the "15F reception period according to the third modification" occurred. The period up to this point will function as the same production period as the above-mentioned "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figure 329)", and when the timing to3 (timing to The same change (see FIG. 324, etc.) as when the timing to It functions as a "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)".

In addition, the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, 16th F reception period, and 17F reception period related to each of the above-mentioned production examples, and their variations, have different variations. They may occur in a pattern, only an appropriate combination may occur within one variation pattern, or all variation patterns may occur within one variation pattern. good.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of effects, the 12th F omen effect display ZFD, the 13th F omen effect display ZFD, the 16th F omen effect display ZFD, and the 17th F omen effect display ZFD are realized as different omen effect displays from each other. It may also be possible to display all the same portent effects.

Regarding the 15th F reception period, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 during the 15F reception period, the 15th F after reception display UB is displayed as the 15F after reception change B corresponding to the operation reception. Even if a specific change that is different from that occurs is made, and the specific change is not terminated (returned to the state before the change) when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001. good.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, "Hero YS" and "Magician MT" may not necessarily be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "third background image HK3" as the background image may be prepared as the same background image as the "first background image HK1". Further, among the light emitting modes in the specific light emitting section, the "third light emitting mode" may be set as the same light emitting mode as the "first light emitting mode."

In addition, for the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" and "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" of the above-mentioned production example, for example, a sample image display is displayed over the entire period from timing to2 to timing to3. The screen image may be displayed, or the sample image display may not be displayed.

In addition, for the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" and "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" of the above-mentioned production example, for example, only one background image is displayed over the entire period from timing to2 to timing to3. may be displayed, or only one light emitting mode may appear in a specific light emitting section.

In addition, in the "section where operation-related displays are not displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification," the predetermined "first condition" and "second condition" ” is satisfied, the “15th F reception period according to the first modification” is terminated, and when the “first condition” is satisfied, the replica image display (sword ornament 5001) is is displayed and a different type of operation permissible state (acceptance period in which changes after reception are different depending on operation reception for the sword decoration object 5001) occurs. However, when the "second condition" is met, a simulated image display (sword decoration object 5001) may not be displayed and another type of operation permission state (an acceptance period in which changes after acceptance in response to acceptance of an operation on the sword ornament 5001 are different) may also not occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 1-F]) according to the production example described above, it is possible to generate an "operation concealment permissible state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but no simulated image display is performed. When an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the "operation concealment allowed state", a post-acceptance display can be displayed. At least a sword decoration 5001 (first operation section) and an operation button 410 (second operation section) are prepared as the operation section, and the "14F reception period (second operation section)" is set as the "operation concealment permission state". After preparing at least the "15th F reception period (concealment permissible state)" and the "15th F reception period (first operation concealment permissible state)", in the "15th F reception period", the sword ornament 5001, the operation button 410, etc. While the simulated image is not displayed, at least the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 is allowed, and when the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the corresponding 15F post-reception display UA can be displayed. In the "14th F reception period," at least the operation reception for the operation button 410 is allowed while the replica image of the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410, etc. is not displayed, and the operation When an operation is accepted for the button 410, the corresponding 14F post-acceptance display UB can be displayed (see FIGS. 315 to 321).

According to such a configuration, at least during the "15th F reception period" in which operation reception on the sword decoration object 5001 is allowed while the scale image is not displayed, and at least during the "15th F reception period" when the scale image is not displayed, Since a "14th F reception period" may occur during which operation reception on the operation button 410 is permitted, directionality is provided as to which of the sword ornaments 5001 and the operation button 410 should be operated. , it is expected to better maintain the tension when an operation/hidden permission state occurs.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described performance example, at least an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is performed while the sample image is not displayed in either the "15th F reception period" or the "14th F reception period". Reception and operation reception for the operation button 410 are respectively allowed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide better performance as to which of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation button 410 should be operated, and the feeling of tension when the operation concealment permission state occurs is further reduced. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. 319, even though the 15th F reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is displayed, the operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed. When the state is in a permissible state and an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, using this as a trigger (timing to2E), the 15th F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation accepted for the operation button 410 is hidden. The 15th F post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is displayed. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "14th F reception period", as shown in FIG. is allowed, and when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, this is used as a trigger (timings tn2E to tn2l) to hide the 14F post-reception display UB that corresponds to the operation accepted for the operation button 410. The 14th F post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed without any delay. In addition, for such a "configuration in which the display UB is not hidden after the 14th floor reception", the 14th floor reception period is limited to the above-mentioned "14th floor operation section A (sword decoration body 5001) that only receives one operation." The same is true when it is realized as a "permissible period". According to such a configuration, in the "operation concealment permissible state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image is not displayed, the post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is displayed. When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the operation is being performed, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the post-reception display UB in response to the operation accepted for the operation button 410, and to hide the post-reception display UB in response to the operation accepted for the operation button 410. Since there are cases where the display UB is not hidden after the reception of the request, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when operating the sword ornament 5001.

In this case, during both the 14th F reception period and the 15th F reception period, the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted only once (while the post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation accepted for the operation button 410 is displayed). This is permitted, and it is desirable that when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, this acceptance period is assumed to end.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. 319, while the 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is being performed, the operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 is performed. When it is done (timing to2E), it not only hides the 15th F post-reception display UB, but also hides the background image that was displayed behind the 15th F post-reception display UB (here, the second The background image HK2) is also hidden. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation reception on the sword decoration body 5001 has been properly accepted, thereby making it possible to reduce the confidentiality of the operation.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "14th F acceptance period", as shown in FIG. Even if it is done, the 14F post-reception display UB will continue to be displayed without being hidden, and the background image that was displayed so as to be visible behind the 14F post-reception display UB will also continue without being hidden. I decided to do so. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize that the operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 has been properly accepted, thereby making it possible to maintain its confidentiality.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "15th F acceptance period", when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the 15th F post-acceptance output sound B corresponding to the operation acceptance is output; Even if an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the 15th F is in the audible state, the 15th F post-acceptance output sound B may not be terminated using this as an opportunity. In other words, in this case, the "15th F post-reception display UB" corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is hidden when the operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 is received, but it is not displayed when the operation reception on the operation button 410 is performed. Since the corresponding "15th F post-reception output sound B" is not terminated when the operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, the confidentiality regarding whether or not the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 has been properly accepted is maintained. It is now possible to make the relaxation of the situation ambiguous, and it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the "15th F acceptance period", as shown in FIG. 319, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the 15th F post-acceptance output sound B corresponding to the operation acceptance is output. Since there are cases where this message is not output, it is possible to make the relaxation of confidentiality as to whether or not the operation reception for the sword decoration object 5001 has been properly accepted to be ambiguous, which reduces the sense of tension. It can now be expected to be maintained properly.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "14th F reception period", as shown in FIG. Since the output sound is not output after acceptance, it becomes difficult to recognize that the operation acceptance for the operation button 410 has been properly accepted, thereby making it possible to maintain its confidentiality.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 2-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate an "operation concealment permissible state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but no simulated image display is performed. If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the "operation concealment allowed state", a change may occur after the acceptance. Then, after preparing at least the "15th F reception period (first operation concealment permissible state)" and the "14th F reception period (second operation concealment permissible state)" as the "operation concealment permissible state", In the "14th F reception period", there is a sword decoration 5001 (specific operation part) that allows multiple operation receptions while the sample image is not displayed. The operation can now be accepted multiple times just by keeping it in the operated state (activating the so-called "auto-repeating function").

According to such a configuration, during the "14th F reception period", the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 can be performed multiple times just by keeping it in the operated state, so a sample image is not displayed. It is expected that the reduction in interest in the game due to the acceptance of multiple operations on the sword decoration body 5001 being allowed despite the fact that this is not the case.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of production described above, during the "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. There are multiple operation parts that can be operated, and even if the operation parts (sword ornament 5001, operation button 410) are kept in the operated state, the operation reception will not be made multiple times. As shown in FIG. 315, during the "reception period", there are multiple operation sections for which multiple operation receptions are allowed while the sample image is not displayed. If the button 410) is kept in an operated state, the operation reception can be performed multiple times (at least there are cases where the operation reception is performed multiple times). According to such a configuration, in the "operation concealment permissible state" in which there is one or more operation sections for which reception of multiple operations is allowed while the sample image is not displayed, the operation section cannot be operated. If the user continues to maintain this state, there will be at least a possibility that the operation will be accepted multiple times, so it is expected that the user will be able to suitably maintain a sense of tension when operating the operation unit.

In particular, in the "14th F reception period" according to the above-mentioned production example, as shown in FIG. , if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times depending on the type of the operation part targeted for the operation (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) 5001) and a case where the operation is not accepted multiple times (operation button 410). In other words, in this case, when the "14th F reception period" occurs, it is determined whether or not the auto-repeat function is enabled depending on the type of the operation target, so which operation section is operated? It is expected to add more fun to the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. (Sword decoration 5001, operation button 410) Even if you continue to operate either of them, the operation reception will not be made multiple times, so the tension during the "15th floor reception period" can be maintained appropriately. become expected to do so. In addition, if such a configuration is adopted for the "15th F reception period", the auto-repeat function will not be able to function, but the confidentiality will be relaxed compared to the "14th F reception period". It is desirable (but not essential) to further adopt a configuration in which the auto-repeat-hit function is not activated, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 315, the sword ornament 5001 for which the auto-repeat function is enabled in the "14th F reception period" outputs the output sound A after the reception of the operation, but the above-mentioned For the operation buttons 410 whose auto-repeat function is not activated during the "14th F reception period," the output sound is not output after the operation is accepted. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. Since the output sounds A and B can be output after acceptance, it can be expected that a decrease in interest in the game due to the auto continuous play function not being activated can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "15th F reception period", as shown in FIG. 319, there are cases where the output sound is output after the reception according to the reception of the operation on the operation unit for which the auto continuous tap function is not enabled, and cases where it is not output. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the relaxation of confidentiality as to whether or not the request was properly accepted, and it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 3-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate an "operation concealment permissible state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but no simulated image display is performed. If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation concealment permission state, a change may occur after the acceptance. Then, after preparing at least the "15th F reception period (first operation concealment permissible state)" and the "14th F reception period (second operation concealment permissible state)" as the "operation concealment permissible state", During the "14th F Reception Period", while the "14th F Reception Period" continues, a mock image display that imitates the operation section where operation reception is allowed will not be displayed. It can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when a player is given an opportunity to operate.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, as shown in FIG. A mock image display of the operation panel that allows reception will start to be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the sample image display is not displayed when the operation concealment permission state occurs, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition is met and the sample image display is displayed. Therefore, it can be expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

In particular, in the "15th F reception period" according to the above example of production, as shown in FIG. As a result, a simulated image display that simulates the operation section is started to be displayed, so that the simulated image display that simulates the operation target that had been hidden until then can be exposed by the player's operation. It can be expected that this will increase the interest in gaming.

Note that the "15th F acceptance period" may not be terminated when the above-mentioned "predetermined condition" is satisfied, or may be terminated and another acceptance period may occur.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in both the "15th F reception period" and the "14th F reception period", at least the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410 are performed while the sample image is not displayed. In the "15th F reception period", when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, this is used as an opportunity to display a replica image of the sword decoration 5001 (15th F operation related display). A) and a simulated image display (15th F operation-related display B) imitating the operation button 410 may be started, but when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, this is used as an opportunity to imitate the sword ornament 5001. Neither the simulated image display nor the simulated image display imitating the operation button 410 is started, and during the "14th F reception period", no operation is performed on either the sword decoration 5001 or the operation button 410. Even if the acceptance is made, this will not be used as a trigger to start displaying a simulated image of the sword ornament 5001 and displaying a simulated image of the operation button 410. In other words, in this case, when an operation is accepted under a confidential situation, a simulated image display that simulates the sword decoration 5001 (15thF operation related display A) and a simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410 (15thF operation related display) are displayed. Since there are cases in which each of the related displays B) is executed and cases in which neither of them is executed, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is desirable that among the simulated image displays, the simulated image display of the sword decoration body 5001 can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. During all (or part of) the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 16th F reception period (or a variation thereof), and 17F reception period (or a variation thereof), the sword decoration body 5001 will be modeled. It is desirable that any one of a plurality of aspects can be selectively displayed as the simulated image display.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in the "15th F reception period" according to the above-mentioned production example, this is used as an opportunity to display a replica image of the sword decoration 5001 and to imitate the operation button 410. It is desirable that only "a predetermined mode (one mode)" out of the plurality of modes is displayed as the sample image display when execution of each of the sample image displays is started.

Furthermore, a model image display imitating the sword decoration body 5001 and a model image display imitating the operation button 410 in the modification examples (first modification example, second modification example) of the "15th F reception period" according to the above-mentioned production example. It is desirable that only "a predetermined mode (one mode)" out of the plurality of modes is displayed as a sample image display.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period" according to the above-mentioned production example, even when no operation is received for the sword decoration 5001 for a predetermined period of time, a replica image of the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410 are displayed. The execution of each of the displayed sample images may be started. In this case as well, it is desirable that only "a predetermined mode (one mode)" out of the plurality of modes is displayed as the sample image.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 4-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but no simulated image display is performed (for example, in the 14F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.), and if an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the ``operation concealment permission state'', a change may occur after the acceptance. Then, when an operation is accepted on an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations in the "operation concealment allowed state", a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes (for example, 315, 319, etc.) and cases in which the output sound is not output after the reception (for example, see FIG. 315, 319, etc.). It becomes difficult to judge whether or not the situation has been properly executed, and it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably imparted.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permissible state (for example, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.)". In this case, as one of the post-acceptance changes, a mock image display of an operation unit in which operation reception is permitted in the "operation concealment permission state" is displayed (for example, refer to timing to2E shown in FIG. 319). ), and a sample image display of an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations in the "operation concealment permission state" is not displayed (for example, timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315, timings to2A to 2A shown in FIG. 319) (see to2C, etc.). On the other hand, if the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment allowed state (for example, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.)", then the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes. A mock image display of the operation unit that is allowed to receive operations in the "operation concealment permission state" is no longer displayed (for example, at timings tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 315, or at timings tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 319) (See timing to2D, etc.). According to such a configuration, if the output sound after reception is not outputted as one of the changes after reception in the "operation concealment permissible state", there is no possibility that the sample image display will be displayed; If the output sound is output after reception as one of the changes after reception in "status", there is a possibility that the sample image display may be displayed or the sample image display may not be displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even after the operation is accepted in the "operation concealment permission state."

Note that, as one of the changes after acceptance, a simulated image display of the operation unit (sword ornament 5001, operation button 410) for which operation acceptance is permitted in the "operation concealment permission state" is displayed (for example, in FIG. 319 (Refer to timing to2E shown in ), the "operation concealment permission state" may be terminated upon receipt of the operation that caused the display of the sample image to be displayed, or the "operation concealment permission state" may be terminated. may be continued without being terminated. Incidentally, in the 15th F reception period according to the above-mentioned production example, the "15th F reception period" is triggered by the operation reception that triggered the display of the sample image display (for example, see timing to2E shown in FIG. 319). A different type of acceptance period (operation permissible state) is generated that causes a change after acceptance that is different from the above.

More specifically, in the operation concealment permission state (for example, the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.) according to the above-mentioned production example, at least the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not performed while the replica image is not displayed. and acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 are respectively allowed. Then, when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 or the operation button 410 in the "operation concealment allowed state (for example, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.)", a post-acceptance output sound is set as one of the post-acceptance changes. is output, one of the changes after acceptance is to display not only a simulated image of the operation panel on the side where the operation was accepted, but also ``display a simulated image of sword decoration 5001'' and ``display operation button 410''. ``display of a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001'' and ``display of a simulated image of the operation button 410'' are started (for example, see timing to2E shown in FIG. 319). There are cases in which "image display" is not displayed (for example, see timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315, timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 14F reception period, 15F reception period, etc.), when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 or the operation button 410, if the after-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes, 1 of the post-acceptance changes. As a first step, neither the "display of a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001" nor the "display of a simulated image of the operation button 410" are displayed (for example, from timing tn2A shown in FIG. 315). (See tn2D, timing to2D shown in FIG. 319, etc.). According to such a configuration, if the output sound after reception is not outputted as one of the changes after reception in the "operation concealment permissible state", there is no possibility that the sample image display will be displayed; If the output sound is output after reception as one of the changes after reception in "status", there is a possibility that the sample image display may be displayed or the sample image display may not be displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even after the operation is accepted in the "operation concealment permission state".

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described performance example, at least one of the "simulated image display of the sword decoration 5001" and the "simulated image display of the operation button 410" among the simulated image displays, It is possible to display in one of several modes, but when an operation is accepted, the "display of a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001" and "display of a simulated image of the operation button 410" are displayed. When each execution can be started, it is desirable that only a predetermined mode (one mode) is displayed as the sample image display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 5-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, there is an operation part that allows operation reception but does not display a sample image. period, 15F reception period, etc.), and in the "operation concealment permission state", at least "operation reception for the sword ornament 5001" and "operation reception for the operation button 410" can be generated while the replica image is not displayed. ``operation reception'' are respectively acceptable. Then, when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the device is in the "operation concealment permission state" and the post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation accepted for the operation button 410 is displayed, the post-acceptance change is displayed. After acceptance, output sound A is outputted as one (for example, see timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315, timing to2E shown in FIG. 319, etc.). In this regard, when the post-acceptance output sound A is output based on the acceptance of an operation on the sword ornament 5001, the post-acceptance display UB that has been displayed since before the operation acceptance is triggered by the operation acceptance. , and when displaying a new post-reception display UA in response to an operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 (timing to2E shown in FIG. When displaying a new post-reception display UA in response to an operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 while the post-reception display UB continues without being hidden (for example, at the timing tn2E shown in FIG. 315). ~tn2l, etc.). In this regard, during the 14F reception period, it is permitted to accept operations on the operation button 410 even when the 14F post-reception display UA is displayed. Also, the output sound will not be output after acceptance according to this. According to such a configuration, the post-reception output sound is not output based on the operation reception on the operation unit on the side different from the operation unit on the side that triggered the generation of the “post-reception display” in the displayed state. In this case, the above-mentioned post-acceptance display that has been displayed before the operation reception will not be hidden when the operation is accepted, so it is possible to play the game with peace of mind. It becomes like this. On the other hand, if the post-acceptance output sound is output based on the operation acceptance for the operation unit on the different side, the reception sound that has been displayed since before the operation reception is triggered by the operation reception. Since there are both cases in which the display is hidden and cases in which the display after reception is not hidden, a sense of tension can be suitably imparted.

Moreover, in the operation concealment permission state (for example, the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.) related to the above-mentioned production example, when the operation reception on the operation section on the different side is triggered, If you want to hide the post-reception display UB that is displayed from (such as timing to2E shown in FIG. 319), it should be hidden so that it can be seen behind the post-reception display UB (in this case, the 15th floor post-reception display UB). The background image that was displayed (here, the second background image HK2) is also hidden, so it is possible to reduce the confidentiality of whether or not the operation is accepted properly. Become.

Furthermore, in the operation concealment permission state (for example, the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.) according to the above-mentioned production example, when the operation reception on the operation unit on the different side is triggered, the operation reception is If the post-reception display UB that has been displayed from the front is to be continued without being hidden (such as timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315), the background image that was displayed so as to be visible behind the post-reception display ( Here, since the first background image HK1) is also continued without being hidden, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed, making it possible to maintain its confidentiality. It becomes like this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 6-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but no simulated image display is performed (for example, in the 14F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.), and if an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the ``operation concealment permission state'', a change may occur after the acceptance. Then, when an operation is accepted on an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations in the "operation concealment permission state", a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes (for example, 315, 319, etc.) and cases in which the output sound is not output after the acceptance (for example, see FIG. 315, 319, etc.), the situation where the operation reception was properly performed It is possible to make it difficult to judge whether there is a problem or not, and it can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension. On the other hand, in the "operation concealment permissible state", there are cases where there is an operation unit for which operation can be accepted multiple times just by keeping it in the operated state (for example, see FIG. 315). Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to allowing multiple operations on the operating unit to be accepted even though the image display is not being performed.

Moreover, if the post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes in the operation concealment permission state (for example, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.) according to the above-mentioned production example, the post-acceptance change If the operation unit that received the operation that triggered the event continues to be operated, the operation will be accepted multiple times (for example, see timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315). , there are cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times (for example, see timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 319), and the output sound after acceptance is output as one of the changes after acceptance in the "operation concealment allowed state". If not (for example, refer to timings tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 315, timing to2D shown in FIG. 319, etc.), the operation unit on which the operation reception that triggered the change after reception was performed is operated as it is. Even if the current state is maintained, operation reception will not be performed multiple times. According to such a configuration, when the post-acceptance output sound is not outputted as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permissible state (for example, 14th F acceptance period, 15th F acceptance period, etc.)" (for example, FIG. (See timings tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 319, timing to2D shown in FIG. 319, etc.), the operation unit on which the operation reception that triggered the change after the reception was performed continues to be maintained in the operated state. However, since the operation is not accepted more than once, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the operation multiple times by suggesting that the automatic continuous play function is not enabled. On the other hand, if the post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the above-mentioned post-acceptance changes in the "operation concealment permissible state (for example, 14th F reception period, 15th F reception period, etc.)", the post-acceptance change occurs. If you continue to operate the operation unit where the operation that triggered the operation was accepted, if the operation is accepted multiple times (for example, see timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315), the operation Since there are both cases in which the reception is not made multiple times (for example, see timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 319), it is possible to enable the auto-repeated hit function while suitably imparting a sense of tension. things come to be expected.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the operation concealment permission state (for example, the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.), at least the operation reception on the operation button 410 and the sword When an operation is accepted for the decoration 5001 and an operation for the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is accepted in the operation concealment permission state (for example, the 14th F reception period, the 15th F reception period, etc.) If a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes (for example, see timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315, timings to2A to to2c shown in FIG. 319, etc.), the above post-acceptance change is performed. If the operation unit that triggered the operation is kept in the operated state, the operation will be accepted multiple times (for example, see timings tn2E to tn2l shown in FIG. 315). , there are cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times (see timings to2A to to2c shown in FIG. 319), and when the operation is accepted for the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in the operation concealment permission state, the above If the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes (for example, see timing tn2A to tn2D shown in FIG. 315, timing to2D shown in FIG. 319, etc.), the trigger for causing the above-mentioned post-acceptance change is Even if the user continues to operate the operation unit where the operation has been accepted, the auto-repeat function is enabled for the player so that the above operation will not be accepted multiple times. It can be expected that the player will be encouraged to perform multiple operations by indicating that the player will not be played, or that a sense of tension will be suitably imparted while enabling the auto-repeat function.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 7-F]) according to the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to generate an operation permission state (acceptance period) in which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and in this operation permission state, the operation unit When the operation is accepted, a post-acceptance display is displayed. Then, after preparing at least "15th F reception period (first operation permissible state) according to the first modification" and "14th F reception period (second operation permissible state)" as the operation permissible state, "14th F reception period (second operation permissible state)" is prepared. The reception period (see Figures 315 to 318) does not include a sample image display section in which a sample image of the operation section for which operation reception is permitted is displayed. It is expected that the system will suitably provide a sense of tension when an operator is given the opportunity to operate the system.

Moreover, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, "a mock image display (operation-related display ) is not displayed (non-display section, first section), and a section where a simulated image display (operation-related display) of the operation panel where operation reception is allowed is displayed (display section, second section). )", and after the start of the "section (non-display section, first section) in which a mock image display (operation-related display) that imitates the operation panel where operation reception is permitted" is started, When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the corresponding section (non-display section, first section) ends and a section in which a simulated image display (operation related display) of the operation panel where operation reception is permitted is displayed ( Display section, 2nd section)" is now started. According to such a configuration, operation reception is now permitted even though a simulated image display (operation related display) imitating the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed (first modification example). 15th F reception period, 14th F reception period), after that, ``a section (display section, 2nd section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) of the operation section where operation reception is permitted is displayed. )'' (the 15th F reception period according to the first modification), it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

In particular, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)" of this production example, "Small image display (operation-related display) of the operation unit where operation reception is permitted" If an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 within the section where is not displayed (non-display section, first section), the operation is (at least part of the image) that is displayed in the "section (display section, second section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) imitating the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted" is displayed upon reception. ) (corresponding to the "approximate image KG" shown in FIGS. 325 and 326 in the above-mentioned production example) can be displayed. According to such a configuration, under a situation where "a section (non-display section, first section) in which a mock image display (operation related display) that imitates the operation unit where operation reception is permitted" continues. Despite the fact that the display is within the "section (display section, second section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) of the operation unit where operation reception is allowed" is displayed, which starts after that, An image that is the same as or similar to (at least a part of) the image being displayed will be displayed (in a preceding form). It becomes possible to suggest that the section in which the related display (related display) is displayed (display section, second section) is about to start.

It should be noted that (at least part of) the image displayed within the above-mentioned "section (display section, second section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) imitating the operation unit where operation reception is permitted" is displayed. ) (corresponding to the "approximate image KG" shown in FIGS. 325 and 326 in the production example described above), a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the operation on the operation button 410. It is desirable that the information be hidden once it has passed. In this case, the "predetermined time" is defined as "a section (non-display section, first section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) of the operation unit in which operation reception is permitted is not displayed." If you set it as a shorter time than the duration (setting time) for which the , 2nd section)", the above-mentioned "same or similar image (in the above production example, corresponds to the "approximate image KG" shown in FIGS. 325 and 326)" is hidden. Since it becomes wet, a sense of tension can be suitably imparted.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", "a mock image display of the operation section where operation reception is permitted" is displayed. When an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 within the section (non-display section, first section) in which (operation-related display) is not displayed, a sample image display ( The above-mentioned "same or similar image (In the above-mentioned production example, this corresponds to the "approximate image KG" shown in FIGS. 325 and 326)" is displayed as the above-mentioned post-reception display UB in response to the operation reception. When an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the section (display section, second section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) that imitates the operation section currently being displayed, the operation reception is accepted. The third background image HK3, which has been displayed since the start of the section (display section, second section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) that imitates the operation section that is displayed, is now visible on the back side. Since the post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, even though it is only one reception period, the ``mock image display (operation-related display) of the operation part where the operation reception is allowed'' is displayed. is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section where a simulated image display (operation-related display) of the operation panel where operation reception is allowed is displayed (display section, second section). ”, it becomes possible to make the performance look significantly different when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410.

In addition, in the example of the above-mentioned production, "the section (non-display section, first section) in which the simulated image display (operation-related display) imitating the operation unit where operation reception is allowed" is not displayed is the "section (non-display section, first section)" Regardless of whether the same or similar image (in the above production example, corresponds to the "approximate image KG" shown in FIGS. 325 and 326) is displayed, it continues for a predetermined time and then ends. Then, the "section (display section, second section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) imitating the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is displayed" starts.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 8-F]) according to the above-mentioned production example, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section), and It is possible to generate an operation permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display UA can be displayed. Then, after preparing at least "15th F reception period (first operation permissible state) according to the first modification" and "14th F reception period (second operation permissible state)" as the operation permissible state, "14th F reception period (second operation permissible state)" is prepared. The reception period (see Figures 315 to 318) does not include the section where a replica image of the sword decoration 5001 for which operation reception is permitted is displayed, and the replica image is not displayed. When an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, the 14F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed, which reduces the feeling of tension when the player is given the opportunity to operate. It is now expected to be provided appropriately.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the ``15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326),'' there is a ``reference image display (operation-related display ) is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section where a simulated image display (operation related display) of the operation panel where operation reception is allowed is displayed (display section, second section). )", and after the start of the "section (non-display section, first section) in which a mock image display (operation-related display) that imitates the operation part where operation reception is permitted" is started, When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the section (non-display section, first section) ends and a section in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) of the operation unit that is allowed to receive operations is displayed ( Display section, 2nd section)" is now started. According to such a configuration, operation reception is now permitted even though a mock image display (operation related display) imitating the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted is not displayed (first modification example). 15th floor reception period, 14th floor reception period), after that, ``a section (display section, 2nd section) in which a mock image display (operation-related display) that imitates the operation section where operation reception is allowed is displayed. )'' (the 15th F reception period according to the first modification), it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the ``15th floor reception period according to the first modification example (see Figures 322 to 326),'' there is a ``mock image display (operation-related When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the section (hidden section, 1st section) in which "display) is not displayed", and when the "operation-related display ) is displayed (display section, second section)", the same post-reception display UA is executed when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001. Game entertainment when you do not realize that operations on the sword ornament 5001 are allowed in the section (non-display section, first section) where no simulated image display (operation-related display) is displayed (non-display section, first section) The decline in

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification example (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, "a mock image display imitating the operation section where operation reception is allowed" ( If an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the section (hidden section, first section) in which the operation-related display is not displayed (see timing to2E shown in FIG. 322), the previously displayed background We decided to replace the image (here, the second background image HK2) with another background image (here, the third background image HK3) and display the 15F post-reception display UA. If an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in the section (display section, second section) in which a simulated image display (operation-related display) is displayed that imitates the operation section that is displayed, the background image that was displayed until then is The post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance may be displayed without replacing the first background image HK1 (here, the first background image HK1) with another background image. However, in this case, the previously displayed background image (here, the first background image HK1) is not replaced with another background image, but the background image (here, the first background image HK1) is displayed. This may be done when changing the aspect (for example, changing the color, changing the brightness, etc.). Further, the third background image HK3 may be realized as the same background image as the first background image HK3.

In addition, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification example (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, "a mock image display (operation-related display ) is not displayed (non-display section, first section)" and "section where a simulated image display (operation related display) of the operation panel where operation reception is allowed is displayed (display section, second section). )'', the background images and light emission modes are different from each other, but they do not necessarily have to be different and may be the same.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 9-F]) according to the example of production described above, it is possible to generate an operation concealment permission state in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image display is not performed. When an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation concealment permission state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, after preparing at least the "15th F reception period (first operation concealment permissible state)" and "14th F reception period (second operation concealment permissible state)" as the operation concealment permissible state, When an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section) during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 326)" 318)", a different display UA is performed after the reception than when the operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001. Therefore, the player is given the opportunity to operate while the replica image display is not displayed. It is now expected that the system will suitably provide a sense of tension when it is applied.

Moreover, when the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" occurs, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence, the sword ornament 5001 is A sampled image display is displayed, but if the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" occurs, no matter how much time has passed, the "14th floor reception period" will be displayed. The sample image display will no longer be displayed during the 14th floor reception period. According to such a configuration, when the operation concealment permissible state (15th F reception period, 14th F reception period according to the first modification) occurs, the sample image display is not displayed within the permissible state as time passes. Since there will be both cases where the image display is displayed (when the automatic de-concealing function is enabled) and cases where the sample image display is not displayed (when the automatic de-concealing function is not activated), a sense of tension is suitably imparted. However, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification example (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, this will be used as a trigger for the sword decoration 5001 appears, but in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", even if an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, this will be used as an opportunity to display the replica image of the sword decoration 5001. The display was made to never appear. According to such a configuration, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", as shown in FIGS. 322 and 324, the player can receive the Since it is possible to display a simulated image in response to an operation, it is expected to improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, at least the operation reception on the sword decoration 5001 and the operation reception on the operation button 410 are allowed. When the timing toX arrives when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence, at least a simulated image display of the sword ornament 5001 and a simulated image display of the operation button 410 are displayed. , it can be expected that while keeping a plurality of operation objects secret, it can be expected to suitably suppress a decline in game interest due to this.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, both the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and the "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)" At least, acceptance of an operation on the sword decoration 5001 and reception of an operation on the operation button 410 are allowed, and when an operation is accepted on the sword decoration 5001 in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", this is triggered. Since not only a simulated image display imitating the sword decoration body 5001 but also a simulated image display imitating the operation button 410 appears, it can be expected to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, the sword decoration is 5001 is displayed (see FIG. 324), and the sword decoration is accepted based on the operation reception for the sword decoration object 5001 within the "15th F reception period according to the first modification". In the case where a replica image display imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (see FIG. 322), the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed while the replica image display imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is being displayed. The post-reception display that sometimes appears is now different. That is, in this case, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 within the period from timing toX to timing to3 shown in FIG. Since a different aspect of the post-acceptance display will appear depending on when the operation is accepted, the range of gaming strategies will be expanded, and it can be expected to improve gaming interest.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the sword ornament 5000 is If an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while a simulated image display is being displayed (if the operation is accepted within the interval from timing toX to to3 shown in FIG. 324), the background image ( Here, the first background image HK1) may be displayed after acceptance without replacing it with another background image. On the other hand, while the replica image display of the sword decoration 5001 is being displayed based on the acceptance of the operation for the sword decoration 5001 in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", the sword When an operation is accepted for the decoration 5001 (when the operation is accepted within the interval from timing to2E to to3 shown in FIG. 322 or from timing to2e to to3 shown in FIG. 323), the background image (here, the 3 background image HK3) may be replaced with another background image and a post-reception display may be performed accordingly. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to add elements for playing the game within the acceptance period, and an improvement in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be expected. Alternatively, a sample image display of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed based on the reception of the operation for the sword decoration 5001 during the "15th reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)". If the operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the operation is being performed (if the operation is accepted within the period from timing to2E to to3 shown in FIG. 322 or from timing to2e to to3 shown in FIG. 323), When replacing the background image (here, the third background image HK3) with another background image and displaying it after reception accordingly, and when replacing the background image (here, the third background image HK3) with another background image. There may be both a case where a post-acceptance display is performed in accordance with this without replacement, and a case where a corresponding post-acceptance display is performed. Further, in this case, the mode of the post-reception display may be different depending on whether the background image is replaced or not. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to add even more elements of playing the game within the acceptance period, and an improvement in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be expected.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 10-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation concealment permission state can be generated in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but a sample image display is not performed. , when an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the operation concealment permission state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, it was decided to prepare at least the "15th F reception period (first operation concealment permissible state)" and the "14th F reception period (second operation concealment permissible state)" as the operation concealment permissible states. Therefore, it is expected that the system will suitably provide a sense of tension when the player is given an opportunity to operate the game even though the image display is not displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 326, the sample image display is displayed at the first position (see FIG. 326(m), etc.) and at the second position (see FIG. 326(r), etc.). This makes it difficult for a person who is looking at only one of the first and second positions to recognize whether or not the sample image display is being displayed. Therefore, it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Moreover, when the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example occurs, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the occurrence (when timing toX arrives), Taking this as an opportunity, a replica image display of the sword decoration body 5001 (predetermined operation part) is displayed, but if the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" occurs, how long will it take? Even if the time has elapsed, the sample image display will not be displayed as a result of the elapse of time. According to such a configuration, when the operation concealment permissible state (the 15th F reception period and the 14th F reception period according to the first modification) occurs, thereafter, when a sample image display is displayed as time passes (automatic concealment Since there are both cases (when the cancellation function is enabled) and cases where the sample image display is not displayed (when the automatic concealment cancellation function is not activated), while giving a good sense of tension, the game It is expected that the decline in interest will be suppressed.

In this case, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 during the "15th reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", this is used as an opportunity to create a sample image of the sword decoration 5001. However, if an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 during the "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)", a replica image of the sword decoration 5001 will not appear. I tried not to. According to such a configuration, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", the sample image display is displayed in response to an operation by the player without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time (the arrival of timing toX). Since it is possible to do so, it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (timing to A sample image of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed when a sample image display of the decoration 5001 is displayed, and a sample image of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" Since the display position of the sample image is different depending on when the display is displayed, it is possible to confirm that the predetermined conditions (first condition, second condition) are satisfied within the same acceptance period. Even when a sample image display is displayed based on the image, it is difficult to notice that the sample image display has been displayed if the user is gazing at the wrong position, so it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. It becomes like this. In this case, it is desirable that not only the position where the sample image display is displayed but also the size at which the sample image display is displayed is different. Furthermore, if the positions where the simulated images are displayed are different, it is desirable that the contents of the display after acceptance of an operation for the sword ornament 5001 are also different from each other.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 11-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an "operation concealment permissible state" in which there is an operation section in which operation reception is permitted but no simulated image display is performed. If an operation is accepted on the operation unit in the "operation concealment allowed state", a change may occur after the acceptance. In the "operation concealment permissible state", there is an operation section that allows multiple operations to be accepted while the sample image is not displayed, and if the operation section is kept in the operated state, the operation will not be accepted. Since there are cases where this is performed multiple times (for example, see FIG. 315), it is considered that it is permissible to receive multiple operations on the operation unit even though the sample image is not displayed. It is expected that this will suppress the decline in interest in games caused by such events.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first operation concealment permissible state)" and "14th F reception period (second operation concealment permissible state)" are set as the operation concealment permissible state. After at least preparing, if the "15th reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)" occurs, this A simulated image display (operation-related display) that simulates the operation panel is displayed as a result of this, but if the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" occurs, how long has it been since the occurrence? Even if the time has elapsed, the sample image display will not be displayed as a result of the elapse of time. According to such a configuration, when an operation concealment permissible state (such as the 15th F reception period or the 14th F reception period according to the first modification) occurs, the sample image is subsequently deleted within the operation concealment permissible state as time passes. There is a sense of tension as there are cases where the display is displayed (when the automatic de-concealing function is enabled) and cases where the sample image display is not displayed (when the automatic de-concealing function is not enabled). It is now expected that players will be able to suppress a decline in gaming interest while suitably imparting the following benefits.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)", it is possible to accept multiple operations while the sample image is not displayed. There is one or more operation parts (in this case, the operation button 410) that are supposed to be operated, and even if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the automatic repeated press function will not be activated and the operation will be accepted multiple times. (See Figures 322 to 324, etc.). On the other hand, in the "14th floor reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", there is one or more operation sections for which multiple operation receptions are allowed even when the sample image is not displayed. (sword decoration 5001 and operation button 410), if you keep operating the operation part, the auto continuous hit function will be enabled and the operation can be accepted multiple times (when you operate the sword decoration 5001 (if maintained). According to such a configuration, when the operation concealment permission state (the 15th F reception period and the 14th F reception period according to the first modification) occurs, the auto continuous hit function is activated and not activated. Since there will be both, it will be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension while providing the automatic consecutive hit function to the player.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception was made after the concealment was canceled (after the timing to In the case (see FIG. 323, etc.), if the operation is accepted before the concealment is canceled (before the timing to Since the same post-acceptance display as in (see) is executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the operation cannot be performed before the timing toX arrives.

In addition, if the operation is accepted after deciphering (after the timing to ) and the case where the operation is accepted before deciphering (before the timing to The display may be executed.

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" according to the above-mentioned production example, the operation section that allows multiple operation receptions while the sample image is not displayed is There are multiple options (sword ornament 5001, operation button 410), and if the operation section is kept in an operated state, the above operation reception will be performed multiple times depending on the type of operation section targeted for the operation. (in this example, the sword ornament 5001) and when the above operation is not accepted multiple times (in this example, the operation button 410). It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension while providing the best possible service to the public.

Furthermore, in the example of production described above, it is possible to generate the "13th F reception period (specific operation permissible state)" and the "13th F reception period according to the modified example (specific operation permissible state)", and the "13th F reception period (specific operation permissible state)" can be generated. (See Figs. 313 and 314)" and "13th F reception period according to the modified example (See Figs. 344 and 345)," the operation section (this In the example, there is a sword decoration 5001 and an operation button 410), and if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the auto-repeat function is enabled and the operation can be accepted multiple times (sword decoration 5001). On the other hand, if the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" occurs, the sample image will be processed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the occurrence (timing toX has arrived). Even after the display is displayed, there is one or more operation parts (in this example, the operation button 410) for which multiple operation reception is allowed, but the operation part continues to be operated. Even so, the automatic continuous hit function is not enabled and the above operation reception is not performed multiple times. In other words, in this case, even if a simulated image display of an operation target (operation unit) that is allowed to accept multiple operations is displayed, when the operation target is maintained in the operating state, Since there will be cases where the auto-repeat function is enabled and cases where the auto-repeat function is not enabled, this is a model of the operation target (control panel) that allows multiple operation reception. It is now expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when an image is displayed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, an operation was accepted for the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section) for which the automatic repeated hit function was enabled during the "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)". In this case, the post-reception output sound A corresponding to the operation reception is output. However, if the operation reception is made for the operation button 410 for which the auto-repeat function is not enabled, the post-reception output sound A corresponding to the operation reception is output. is not output. However, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", even if the operation reception is made for the operation button 410 for which the automatic repeated press function is not enabled, the applicable Since the output sound B can be output after the reception of the operation, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the auto continuous hit function is enabled, which makes it possible to create a sense of tension. will be expected to be maintained.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification example (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, output after reception in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 for which the automatic continuous press function is not activated. Since there are times when sound B is output (for example, timings to2A to to2C, etc.) and times when it is not output (for example, timings to2D, etc.), it is difficult to determine whether the auto continuous hit function will also be enabled by this. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the situation, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 12-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image display of the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section), and the operation reception is allowed. An operation permissible state can be generated, and when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the operation permissible state, change A can be caused after the acceptance. Further, when an operation permissible state occurs, an operation-related sound a (acceptance permissible sound) can be output. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of performance described above, the operation permission state is an "operation disclosure permission state (for example, the 12th F reception period (See FIGS. 311 and 312)" and "operation concealment permission state (for example, "operation concealment permission state" that includes a period in which operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 is permitted but no replica image display is performed). 14F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318), 15F reception period for the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326), etc. Regarding sound a, since it is made possible to output when at least the "operation disclosure permissible state" of the "operation disclosure permissible state" and the "operation concealment permissible state" occurs, when the operation opportunity is given. It can be expected that this will suitably alleviate the tension of people.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the "operation concealment permitting state" is set to "operation concealment permitting state" in the first operation concealment permitting state (for example, "15th F reception period" or "15th F reception period according to the first modification"). At least a section in which related displays are not displayed (hidden section, first section), etc., and a second operation concealment permission state (for example, the 14th floor reception period) are prepared. 15th F Reception Period (See Figures 322 to 326), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence (when timing toX arrives), a replica image display of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. As a result, the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (first operation concealment permission state)" of the "15F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" is ended, and the "operation However, if the "14th F reception period (second operation concealment permissible state)" occurs, the "14th F reception period (2nd operation concealment permissible state)" will change as time passes. 315 to 318)" is terminated, there is no transition to the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (operation disclosure permitted state)." With this configuration, For example, when the "operation concealment permissible state" occurs, there is a case where the "operation disclosure permissible state" is subsequently shifted to the "operational disclosure permissible state" as time passes (the 15th F reception period according to the first modification), and a "manipulation disclosure permissible state" occurs. ” (during the 14th floor reception period), it is possible to appropriately create a sense of tension while suppressing the decline in gaming interest due to operation secrecy. become.

In addition, in the above configuration, for the "operation disclosure allowed state", the "operation related display" in the operation concealment allowed state ("15th reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)") is displayed. When the non-displayed section (hidden section, first section) is terminated, it occurs in a subsequent manner ("15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)") ``section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second section)'') and under conditions unrelated to the operation concealment permission state (for example, during the 12F reception period (Fig. 311 and 312), etc.). Therefore, when an "operation disclosure permissible state" occurs, it can be made difficult to recognize whether the operation reception was previously permitted (or whether an operation concealment permissible state had occurred), which reduces the sense of tension. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

Regarding the "operation disclosure permission state", the "section in which operation-related displays are displayed (display section, second In place of the operation concealment permission state (the reception period (shown in Figure 319) that occurs following the end of the 15thF reception period (see Figures 319 to 321)) It is also possible to realize this as a reception period (acceptance period that occurs at timing to2E).

In addition, the operation-related sound a is generated when the "operation disclosure permission state" occurs following the end of the "operation concealment permission state" (for example, at timing to2E shown in FIG. 319, 322, timing to2e shown in FIG. 323, etc.) and the "operation disclosure allowed state" occurs under conditions unrelated to the "operation concealment allowed state" (such as the timing to2E shown in FIG. 312). It is desirable to be able to output the signal at any time (timing tl2, timing tm2 shown in FIG. 314, etc.). However, in this case, the mode of the operation-related sound a may be different. For example, when the "operation disclosure allowed state" occurs under conditions unrelated to the "operation concealment allowed state" (timing tl2 shown in FIG. 312, timing tm2 shown in FIG. 314, etc.), the operation A plurality of modes are prepared as the related sound a, and the operation-related sound a is audibly output in any one of these modes. When the "operation disclosure permission state" occurs in a subsequent manner (for example, timing to2E shown in FIG. 319, timing to2E shown in FIG. 322, timing to2e shown in FIG. 323, etc.), as the operation-related sound a, If the "operation disclosure permissible state" occurs under conditions unrelated to the "operation concealment permissible state" (timing tl2 shown in FIG. 312, timing tm2 shown in FIG. 314, etc.), output is not possible. Only special features that are not included may be audibly output.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the first operation concealment permission state (for example, the section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section) of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification") ”, etc.) has occurred, based on the elapse of a predetermined time since the occurrence, the first operation concealment permission state (for example, the “15th F reception period according to the first modification”) ``Section where operation-related display is not displayed (hidden section, first section)'') has ended and the operation disclosure permissible state (for example, ``operation-related display during the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification'') has ended. is displayed (display section, second section) (for example, refer to the timing to An operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section) during the "section where no operation-related display is displayed (non-display section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification". Based on this, the first operation concealment permission state (e.g., "section in which operation-related display is not displayed (hidden section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification"), etc. ) is completed and the state shifts to the operation disclosure permission state (section after timing to2a) (see, for example, timing to2a shown in FIG. 323). According to such a configuration, multiple conditions for transitioning from one reception period (first operation concealment permission state) to the "operation disclosure permission state" are prepared, so that diversity of performances is created. As a result, it is expected to increase the interest in gaming.

In this case, based on the fact that a predetermined period of time has passed since the above occurrence, the first operation concealment permission state (for example, the "operation-related display" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" is The section in which the operation-related display is displayed is terminated and the operation disclosure is allowed (for example, the section in which the operation-related display is displayed in the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification). (display section, second section)" (for example, refer to the timing toX shown in FIG. 322 or FIG. Based on the fact that an operation was accepted for the sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation part) during the ``section where no operation-related display is displayed (hidden section, first section)'' of the 15th F reception period concerning , the first operation concealment permission state (for example, the "section in which operation-related displays are not displayed (hidden section, first section)" of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification") has ended. When transitioning to the above-mentioned operation disclosure permission state (section after timing to2a) (for example, refer to timing to2a shown in FIG. 323), the type (sword decoration It is desirable (however, this is not an essential configuration) to suitably maintain a sense of tension within the first operation concealment permission state, so that the post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is accepted for 5001 is different. .

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the first operation concealment permission state (for example, the section in which the operation-related display is not displayed (non-display section, first section) of the "15th F reception period according to the first modification") ”, etc.), the first operation concealment permission state is terminated and the operation disclosure permission state (for example, “15th F reception period according to the first modification”) is terminated. (for example, refer to the timing toX shown in FIG. 324), the operation disclosure permission state occurs. When doing so, the operation-related sound a is not output, and the operation-related display is not displayed in the first operation concealment permission state (for example, the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification). Based on the reception of the operation on the sword ornament 5001 in the first section), the first operation concealment permission state is terminated and the state shifts to the operation disclosure permission state (for example, the period after timing to2E). In this case (for example, see timing to2E shown in FIG. 322), the operation-related sound a is output when the operation disclosure permission state occurs. In other words, in this case, depending on the conditions for transition from the "first operation concealment permission state" to the "operation disclosure permission state," the presence or absence of the output of the operation-related sound a will differ, creating a sense of tension. It can now be expected to be maintained properly.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 13-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. The post-reception display can be displayed even in situations where the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it can be seen behind the post-reception display. The displayed background image can be displayed. In this regard, after making it possible to generate the "15th F reception period (specific operation permissible state) according to the first modification" as the operation permissible state, it is possible to generate the "15F reception period according to the first modification (a specific operation permissible state)". 326)", as shown in FIG. 324, the "previous background operation period (timings to2 to toX)" in which operation reception is allowed while the second background image HK2 is displayed as the background image ” to the “back background operation period (timing to People are expected to try to improve their interest.

In the above-mentioned production example, the sample image display is not displayed in the "forward background operation section (timing to2 to toX)" shown in FIG. 324, and the sample image display is not displayed in the "background operation section (timing to )", the sample image display is displayed, but this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided. For example, the sample image display may be displayed over the entire period from timing to2 to timing to3, or The image display may not be displayed. This applies not only to the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification" but also to the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification". For example, the entire period from timing to2 to timing to3 is The image display may be displayed, or the sample image display may not be displayed.

Here, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification example (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, as shown in FIG. '', when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 (timing to2E), the background changes (separately) from the second background image HK2 to a third background image HK3 whose background depiction is different from that of the second background image HK2. (change or replacement to the background image) and display the 15th F post-reception display UA in response to the operation reception. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 323, when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 during the "back background operation period (timing toX to to3)" (timing to2e), the first background image HK1 The 15th F post-reception display UA in response to the operation reception may be displayed without changing the background to another background image with a different background depiction (change to another background image, replacement, etc.). That is, in this case, the "third background image HK3" according to the above-described production example is prepared as a background image with the same background depiction as the "first background image HK1". According to such a configuration, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", there is a case where an operation is accepted in the "previous background operation section (timing to2 to toX)" and a case where the "background operation section (timing to Even when displaying the same 15th F post-reception display UA, it is now possible to have a large difference in performance, and it is expected to improve the game's interest.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, as a method for changing the background from the background image that had appeared up to that point to a background image with a different background depiction from the background image, for example, , a method may be adopted in which the different background image is displayed in front of the background image that had appeared until then (previous layer), thereby making the background image that had appeared until then invisible; A method may be adopted in which the background image that had been displayed until then is hidden, thereby exposing the different background image that was displayed hidden behind it (back layer). , it may be realized by other methods.

Further, even if the third background image HK3 is realized as the same background image as the first background image HK1, the display modes (brightness, color scheme, etc.) of the first background image HK1 and the third background image HK3 are different from each other. It may be different. This is because if the mode remains within the scope of ``using the background image that had appeared until then and changing it,'' it cannot be said that ``the background image has been replaced with another background image.''

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification example (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception on the sword decoration 5001 and the operation reception on the operation button 410 are at least permissible. has been done. In this regard, in the "background operation period (timings to As mentioned above, the 15th F post-reception display UA may be displayed in response to the operation reception without being replaced. However, in the above-mentioned production example, as shown in FIG. Even if the operation is accepted, the 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without replacing the first background image HK1 with a background image having a different background depiction from the first background image HK1. On the other hand, in the "previous background operation period (timings to2 to toX)", when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, a second background image HK2 whose background depiction is different from the second background image HK2 is displayed. 3 background image HK3 and displays the 15thF post-reception display UA in response to the operation reception, but when the operation reception for the operation button 410 is performed, the second background image HK2 is replaced with the second background image HK2. The 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without replacing the background image with a different background depiction. According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted in the "previous background operation period (timings to2 to toX)" and in the "background operation period (timings toX to to3)," Since it becomes possible to have a common part (operation button 410) and a different part (sword ornament 5001) in terms of performance related to the background image, one reception period (the 15th floor according to the first modification) It becomes possible to improve the game's interest within a range that appropriately maintains the performance during the reception period).

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 14-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. Then, the after-reception display can be displayed, and furthermore, when the above-mentioned after-reception display is not displayed, it is possible to display the after-reception display, and when the after-reception display is displayed, a It is possible to display a background image that is visibly displayed. Then, after making it possible to generate the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permission state)" as the operation permission state, the "15F reception period according to the second modification (Fig. 327 to 331)", while the state in which operation reception is permitted continues, the first background image HK1 that had appeared up to that time is changed to "another background image with a different background depiction (here, the third background image HK3) (such as changing to a different background image or replacing the background image), it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Moreover, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)", multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 are allowed, and the "15F reception period according to the second modification" is allowed. When an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 during the "period", as shown in FIG. 328, the first background image HK1 that had appeared until then is replaced with another background image (here, the third background image HK3). The 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without any problem, but in the situation where the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed, the above-mentioned another background image (here, the third background image HK3) is displayed. (For example, refer to timing toY). According to such a configuration, in a situation where the operation button 410 is being operated multiple times, a different background image (here, the third background image HK3) is satisfied (for example, see Figure 328), and when the conditions for replacement with another background image are not satisfied (for example, while the 15th F reception display UB is being displayed) (For example, when the timing to Y does not arrive and the timing to Y arrives after the 15th F reception display UB is hidden.), the performance may be affected while performing multiple operations. Differences begin to appear, and it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the 15th floor reception post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is displayed in the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example. In addition, while the "15th F reception period for the second modification" continues, the timing toY has arrived to replace the first background image HK1 that had appeared up until then with the third background image HK3 with a different background depiction. In this case, the 15th F post-reception display UB can be hidden based on the arrival of the timing toY, as shown in FIG. 328. According to such a configuration, if a background change occurs while the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" continues, the operation is not performed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 that is allowed to be operated multiple times. Since the 15th floor post-reception display UB is hidden, a sense of tension can be suitably imparted.

In this case, the background changes while the 15th floor reception display UB is being displayed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 during the 15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331). If this occurs, the display UB after reception on the 15th floor will be hidden in some cases when the background change occurs, and in other cases it will not be hidden (continued) when the background change occurs. You can. For example, the "15th floor reception period for the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)" is combined with the "15th floor reception period for the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)." As mentioned above, it may be generated as one reception period, and in this case, the timing may be changed while the "15th reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" continues. When to3 arrives, the same phenomenon (timing to3=timing toX) as when timing toX of "15th reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" arrives will occur, but As shown in FIG. 323, even if the timing toX at which the background changes occurs while the 15F post-reception display UB remains displayed, it is clear that the 15F post-reception display UB will not be hidden using this as an opportunity. It is. In addition, as a method of such a combination, when timing to3 arrives while the "15th reception period for the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)" continues, "the 15th reception period for the second modification By making the same phenomenon (timing to3=timing toY) appear as when the timing toY of the 15th reception period (see FIGS. 327 to 331) arrives, the 15th reception period according to the first modification As mentioned above, the 15th F reception period according to the second modification may be combined into one reception period, but even in such a case, the order of They have the same configuration, just in reverse. That is, according to these configurations, if a background change occurs while the "operation permissible state" continues, the 15th F post-reception display in response to the operation reception for the operation button 410 that is permitted to be operated multiple times. Since there will be both cases where the UB is hidden and cases where the UB displayed after the reception on the 15th floor is not hidden and continues, the background change within the "operation permissible state" will occur. When this occurs, it becomes possible to encourage the player to concentrate more on the content of the performance, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game will be improved compared to the conventional valid period of simply operating the game.

Furthermore, in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", the background changes while the 15th floor reception display UB is displayed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410. occurs, the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden when the background change occurs (see timing to2E etc. shown in FIG. 322), and when the background change occurs. (Refer to the timing to X shown in FIG. 323) It is now possible to encourage more concentration on the content of the performance, and it is expected that the player will be able to improve his/her enjoyment of the game compared to the conventional valid period of simply operating the game.

In the configuration according to the above-described production example, the 15th F post-reception display UB in response to the reception of the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and if a background change occurs within the predetermined period of time, There may be cases where the display is hidden before time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the 15th floor reception display UB in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is as shown in FIG. 330. As shown in (c) to (k) and FIGS. 331(l) to (n), when the display is hidden based on timing toY arriving within a predetermined set time (predetermined time) (See FIG. 331(l)), when the operation is accepted for the operation button 410 again, the number of times the operation has been accepted up to that point is carried over (the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden). Even if the previous operation reception on the operation button 410 is performed, the operation reception on the operation button 410 is still valid, and the operation reception on the operation button 410 is also allowed. ) appears, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 329, during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)", the operation reception period while the first background image HK1 is displayed is The first background operation period (the period from timing to2 to toY) in which the operation is allowed, and the second background operation period (the period from timing toY to to3) in which the operation is allowed to be accepted while the second background image HK2 is displayed. ), and when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the first background operation interval (interval from timing to2 to toY), the 15th F corresponding to the operation acceptance is performed without changing the background from the first background image HK1. The post-reception display UB is displayed, but while the 15F post-reception display UB is being displayed, the process from the first background operation period (the period from timing to2 to toY) to the second background operation period (the period from timing toY to to3) is displayed. The background image may be replaced in some cases.

Then, while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed, the background image from the first background operation section (the section from timing to2 to toY) to the second background operation section (the section from timing toY to to3) is displayed. When the timing for replacement has arrived, the 15th F post-reception display UB is set to be hidden from view. 331)".

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 323 (the 15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)), from the "background section from timing to2 to toX" to "the background period from timing toX to to3" In the case of transitioning to "section", even if the timing toX at which a background change occurs while the 15th F post-reception display UB is being displayed in response to an operation accepted on the operation button 410, the 15th F post-reception display UB However, it will not be hidden due to this.

That is, in this case, as described above, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and the "15F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" )'' can be generated as a single reception period, thereby improving the performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" )" are combined into one reception period, the following can be said.

In other words, within the single combined reception period, there are two timings to cause a background change as time passes: ``timing to X when the 15F post-reception display UB that had appeared up until then is not hidden'' and ``timing to X that has not appeared up until then. "Timing toY to hide the 15th F post-reception display UB" will be prepared. In this regard, the interval until the "timing toX at which the 15th F post-reception display UB that has been displayed until then is not hidden" arrives (timings to2 to toX shown in FIG. 324, or timings toY to to3 shown in FIG. 329). (In the case of = to The UA can be displayed, but the period until the "timing toY to hide the 15th F post-reception display UB that had appeared until then" arrives (timings toX to to3 (=toY shown in FIG. 324)) , or at the timings to2 to toY shown in FIG. In the case of an example in which a background image is prepared with the same background depiction as the first background image HK1).

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the effect of replacing the background image within one acceptance period depending on the type of operation section and the type of section, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to aim for it.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 15-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. This may cause changes after acceptance. Also, as one of the changes after reception, it is possible to display the after reception display even in a situation where it is not displayed, and when the after reception display is displayed, it is displayed so that it can be seen behind the reception display. The background image can be displayed. Furthermore, when an operation is accepted on the operating unit in the operation-permitted state, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. Then, as the operation permissible state, "14th F reception period (predetermined operation permissible state)" and "15F reception period according to the first modification, or 15F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)" )” and then prepare at least “15th floor reception period for the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)” and “15th floor reception period for the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)”. )" allows for background switching (changing to a different background image, replacement, etc.) while the state in which operations are allowed continues, so the game It can be expected to improve interest.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, during the "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)", background switching does not occur while the state in which operation reception is allowed continues. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state in which operation reception is permitted, there are cases where background switching occurs and cases where the background switch does not occur, so that the game interest when in the operation permissible state is They will be expected to improve their skills.

Furthermore, in the example of production described above, the "14th floor reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)" and the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (or the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification)" ``Period''), multiple operations are allowed for the operation button 410, and when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 during the ``14thF reception period'', the ``14thF reception period ( 315 to 318)" continues, the post-reception output sound is not output as one of the post-reception changes B, and the "15F reception period according to the second modification (or When an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification"), the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" (or "the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification") is accepted. While the 15F reception period ")" continues, post-reception output sound B can be output as one of the post-reception changes B (see Figures 322 to 326 or Figures 327 to 331). . According to such a configuration, it is expected that whether or not the post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes B will indicate whether or not background switching will occur within the operation permissible state. It becomes like this.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (or the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification"), While the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (or the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification") continues, the after reception output sound B is one of the above-mentioned post reception changes B. When it is output (for example, see the timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 322 and the timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 327) and when it is not output (for example, the timings to2D shown in FIG. 322 and the timings to2D shown in FIG. 327). (see timing to2D etc.). According to such a configuration, even if the post-acceptance output sound is not output as one of the post-acceptance changes B, there is a possibility that the background switching will occur within the operation permissible state, which reduces the feeling of tension. It is now expected to maintain a suitable level and suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, operation reception while the first background image HK1 is displayed is not permitted. the first background operation period (the period from timing to2 to toY shown in FIG. 329), and the second background operation period (the period from timing to2 to toY shown in FIG. 329) in which operations are allowed to be accepted while the second background image HK2 is being displayed. The display UB after the 15th floor reception in response to the operation on the operation button 410 during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification" is predetermined. It is displayed for a specified period of time (a predetermined period of time), and if a background switch occurs based on the passage of time within the specified period of time (based on the arrival of the timing toY), it is Since it was previously made to be hidden (see timing toY shown in FIG. 328), it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 16-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. A post-acceptance display can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display even in a situation where the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image that appears behind the post-reception display. , multiple operation reception is allowed in the operation permissible state If the operation unit is kept in the operated state, the operation reception can be performed multiple times (the automatic repeated press function can be activated). . Then, as the operation permissible state, "14th F reception period (predetermined operation permissible state)" and "15F reception period according to the first modification, or 15F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)" )", and then in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification or the 15th floor reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)", the state in which operation reception is permitted is set. Since the background can be changed while the game continues, it can be expected to improve the game's interest in a state where operation reception is permitted.

Moreover, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned production example, background switching does not occur while the state in which operation reception is permitted continues. . According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state in which operation reception is permitted, there are cases where background switching occurs and cases where the background switch does not occur, so that the game interest when in the operation permissible state is They will be expected to improve their skills.

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned production example, there is one or more operation parts (here, the sword ornament 5001) that allows multiple operation receptions. and operation button 410), and if the operation section is kept in the operated state, the automatic repeated press function will be enabled and operation reception can be performed multiple times (when operating the sword ornament 5001), but the above-mentioned effect In the example, "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326) or 15F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", multiple operations are accepted. There is one or more operation parts (in this case, the operation button 410) for which the operation is allowed, and even if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the operation is not accepted multiple times. (See Figures 322 and 323). According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not background switching will occur within the permissible operation state by determining whether or not the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled. People are expected to improve their sexuality.

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned production example, the 14th F reception period is displayed in response to the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the auto continuous hit function is activated. As shown in FIG. 318, the UA is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, the 14F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of the decorative pattern SZ. In other words, in this case, the automatic repeated tap function is not activated for the operation button 410, but the 14th F post-acceptance display UB that responds to the operation reception is the 14th F that could appear when the automatic repeated pressed function is activated. Since it will be displayed with priority over the post-acceptance display UA, it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the automatic repeated hitting function not being enabled.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 17-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. A post-acceptance display may be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a background image that can be displayed even in a situation where the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image that appears behind the post-reception display. . Then, as the operation permissible state, "14th F reception period (predetermined operation permissible state)" and "15F reception period according to the first modification, or 15F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)" )", and then in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification or the 15th floor reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)", the state in which operation reception is permitted is set. Since the background can be changed while the game continues, it can be expected to improve the game's interest in a state where operation reception is permitted.

Moreover, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned production example, background switching does not occur while the state in which operation reception is permitted continues. . According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state in which operation reception is permitted, there are cases where background switching occurs and cases where the background switch does not occur, so that the game interest when in the operation permissible state is reduced. They will be expected to improve their skills.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, after preparing at least the "sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation section)" and "operation button 410 (specific operation section)" as the operation sections, the "14th F reception period (Fig. 315~ 318), even though the 14F post-reception display B is displayed in response to the operation acceptance for the "operation button 410," the operation reception for the "sword ornament 5001" is allowed. When the operation is accepted for the "sword ornament 5001", the 14th floor post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation for the "operation button 410" is continued without being hidden. Then, the 15th F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception for the "sword ornament 5001" is displayed (see timings tn2E to tn2I shown in FIG. 315). On the other hand, in the production example described above, the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326) or the 15F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331) '', even though the 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance for the ``operation button 410'' is displayed, the operation reception for the ``sword ornament 5001'' is permitted, and the ``sword ornament 5001'' is allowed to operate. 5001'' is accepted, this triggers the display to hide the 15th F post-reception display UB that corresponds to the operation accepted for the ``operation button 410'' and responds to the operation accepted for the ``sword ornament 5001.'' The 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed (see timing to2E shown in FIG. 322 and timing to2E shown in FIG. 327). According to such a configuration, when an operation is accepted for the "sword ornament 5001", depending on whether or not background switching occurs in the operation-permitted state, this is used as a trigger to accept the operation in response to the operation accepted for the "operation button 410". It is now expected that the user will be able to suggest whether or not to hide the later display UB.

In addition, the “15th F reception period (see FIGS. 319 to 321)” of the above-mentioned production example, or the “15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326),” or the “2nd In the 15th F reception period according to the modified example (see FIGS. 327 to 331), when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed and the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed. Although the output sound B may be audibly output (for example, timing to2A shown in FIG. 319, timing to2A shown in FIG. 322, timing to2c shown in FIG. 328, etc.), the 15th F post-reception display UB is not displayed. In addition, if an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 while the output sound B is being audibly output after the 15th floor reception, this will be used as a trigger for the 15th floor reception in the displayed state. Although the "later display UB" is hidden, the "15th F post-reception output sound B" which is in the audible state may be continued without being ended. That is, in this case, since it becomes unclear whether or not the operation reception for the "sword decoration object 5001" has been properly performed, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 18-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. Then, a display after acceptance can be displayed, and the specific light emitting section can be made to emit light in the operation permission state. Then, after making it possible to generate the "15th F reception period (specific operation permissible state) according to the first modification" as the operation permissible state, the "15F reception period according to the first modification (Fig. 322 to 326)", as shown in FIG. 324, the second light emitting operation period (timing to2 to to Since this is made possible, it can be expected to improve the interest in the game in a state where operation acceptance is permitted.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", when the sword ornament 5001 ( 322, the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section is changed from the "second light emitting mode" to the "light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode (here, the third light emitting mode"). The 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed in response to the operation reception (see timing to2E), but in the "first light emission operation period (timing toX to to3 period)". When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, as shown in FIG. 323, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed without changing the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section from the "first light emission mode". (See timing to2e). That is, in this case, the "third light emitting mode" in the specific light emitting section is set as the same light emitting mode as the "first light emitting mode." According to such a configuration, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", the "first light emission operation period (the period from timing toX to to3)" and the "second light emission operation period (the period from timing to2 to toX)" Depending on whether an operation is accepted for the sword decoration body 5001 during the section), whether or not the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting section changes when the 15th F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed is determined. Since this will be established, it is expected to improve gaming interest during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification."

Note that, as described above, either one of the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section may be a non-light emitting mode.

In addition, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", operations are accepted for the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section) and operations for the operation button 410 (specific operation section). Reception is at least acceptable. In this regard, in the "first light emission operation section (section from timing to The 15th F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing from the first light emission mode, and when the operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (see timing to2c shown in FIG. 323), the specific light emission The 15th F post-acceptance display UB in response to the operation reception may be displayed without changing the light emission mode in the section from the first light emission mode. That is, in this case, the "third light emitting mode" in the specific light emitting section is set as the same light emitting mode as the "first light emitting mode."

On the other hand, in the second light emitting operation section (the period from timing to2 to toX), when the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted (see timing to2E shown in FIG. 322), the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section is changed. The second light emitting mode is changed to a light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode (in this case, the third background image HK3) and the 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, but the operation button 410 When the operation is received (see timings to2A to to2C shown in FIG. 322), the 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section from the second light emission mode. Now displayed.

According to such a configuration, even though there is one reception period (the 15th reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)), the type of operation target, and even the same type Even if an operation is performed, the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting section may or may not change depending on the section in which the operation was performed, so it is difficult to receive the operation properly on the operation section. It becomes possible to make it ambiguous whether something has been done or not, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, among the reception periods related to the above-mentioned production example, there is a reception period (first period) in which the light emission mode of the specific light emitting part does not change (during the reception period) according to the passage of time after the reception period occurs. During the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, and variations thereof), an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted at any timing within the reception period. Even so, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to cause a change from the light emitting mode that had appeared up to that point in the specific light emitting section (change to another light emitting mode). According to such a configuration, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest due to the light emission mode not changing during the acceptance period can be suppressed.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 19-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. Then, a post-acceptance display can be displayed, and the specific light emitting section can be made to emit light in the operation permission state. Then, as the operation permissible state, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (specific operation permissible state)" can be generated, and the "15F reception period according to the first modification (Fig. 322 to 326), the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section can change while the state in which operation acceptance is allowed continues, so that the gaming enjoyment in the state in which operation acceptance is allowed continues. It can be expected that improvements will be made.

Moreover, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification example (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (specific operation section) are allowed, and the corresponding When an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 during the "15th F acceptance period according to the first modification," the 15th F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed without changing the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section. It is now displayed. In addition, during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", the above-mentioned specific light emission is There are cases where a change (another light emission mode) occurs in the light emission mode in the section (for example, timing to2E shown in FIG. 322, timing toX shown in FIG. 323, etc.). According to such a configuration, even when the operation button 410 is being operated multiple times, the light emission mode of the specific light emitting section changes while the 15th F reception display UB is being displayed. Since this may occur, it is expected that differences in performance will appear as the operation is performed multiple times, and that this will improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, the 15th floor reception post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is displayed during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)". If there is a change in the light emission mode of the specific light emitting unit while the user is in the room, the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden when the change occurs (see timing to2E shown in FIG. 322); When the change occurs, there is a case where it continues without being hidden (see timing toX shown in FIG. 323). According to such a configuration, if the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section changes while the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" continues, the operation that is allowed to be performed multiple times There will be both a case where the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden in response to an operation reception on the button 410, and a case where the 15th F post-reception display UB is continued without being hidden. Therefore, when there is a change in the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting section during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)," the system instructs the player to concentrate more on the performance content. It is expected that this will improve the game's interest compared to the conventional valid period of simply operating the game.

Furthermore, the "15th floor reception period for the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)" has been combined with the "15th floor reception period for the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)". As mentioned above, it may be made to occur as one reception period, but if it is made to occur as one combined reception period, while the 15F post-reception display UB is displayed, the player Even if there is no operation, if the timing toY arrives due to the passage of time, the 15th F post-reception display UB will be hidden when a change occurs in the light emission mode of the specific light emitting section. In other words, in this case, within the single combined reception period, the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden when the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting section changes with the passage of time (as shown in Fig. 328). There are cases in which the change occurs without being hidden (see the timing toY shown in Figure 323), and cases in which the change continues without being hidden (see the timing to Since the light emitting pattern in the specific light emitting section changes, the player will need to concentrate more on watching the performance content, and the game will become more interesting compared to the conventional validity period where the player simply operates the game. It is now expected that companies will improve their performance.

Furthermore, during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, operation reception while the specific light emitting section is emitting light in the first light emission mode is not possible. The first light emission operation period (the period from timing to to Although the 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed instead, the light emission mode of the specific light emitting unit may change while the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed. Therefore, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, the 15th floor reception post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is displayed in the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification example (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example. Among these, if a change occurs in the light emission mode of the specific light emitting section, the 15th F post-reception display UB may be hidden, so it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" )" are combined into one reception period, the following can be said.

In other words, within the single combined reception period, the timing to cause a change in the light emission mode of the specific light emitting unit as time passes is "timing to and "timing toY to hide the 15th F post-reception display UB that had appeared until then" will be prepared. In this regard, the period until the "timing toX at which the 15th F post-reception display UB that has been displayed until then is not hidden" arrives (timings to2 to toX shown in FIG. 324, or timings toY to to3 shown in FIG. 329). (In the case of = to It is possible to display the display, but the period until the "timing toY to hide the 15th F post-reception display UB that had appeared until then" arrives (timings toX to to3 (if = toY) shown in FIG. 324, or At timings to2 to toY shown in FIG. 329, when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, the light emitting mode (here, the first light emitting mode) in the specific light emitting portion that has appeared up to that point does not change to another background image. (In the case of an example in which the third light emission mode is prepared as the same light emission mode as the first light emission mode).

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to vary the effect of changing the light emitting mode of a specific light emitting part within one reception period according to the type of operation part and the type of section, and the game You will be able to improve your interest.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 20-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, the operation reception on the operation unit is not performed. Then, the post-reception display can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a background image that can be displayed even when the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image that appears behind the post-reception display. be. Then, as the operation permissible state, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)" can be generated, and the "15F reception period according to the second modification (Fig. 327 to 331)", the second background image HK1 is displayed as the background image and the second background image Since it is possible to switch to the "second background operation period (timing toY to to3)" in which operation reception is permitted while background image HK2 is displayed, It can be expected to improve gaming interest.

Moreover, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the sword decoration When an operation is accepted for 5001, the background is changed from the second background image HK2 to a background image different from the second background image HK2 (in this case, the third background image HK3), and the 15th floor reception responds to the operation acceptance. The rear display UA is displayed, but if an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 during the "first background operation period (timing to2 to toY)", the first background image HK1 is switched to another background image. The 15th F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without any trouble (in the case of an example in which the third background image HK3 is prepared as the same background image as the first background image HK1). According to such a configuration, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", there is a case where an operation is accepted in the "first background operation period (timing to2 to toY)" and a case where the operation is accepted in the "second background operation period". (timing toY to timing to 3)", whether or not background switching occurs will differ depending on whether the operation is accepted or not, so even if the same post-acceptance display is displayed, the performance will be different. It is expected that this will increase the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception on the sword decoration 5001 and the operation reception on the operation button 410 are at least permissible. In the "first background operation period (timings to2 to toY)", when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, the 15th floor corresponding to the operation is changed from the first background image HK1 without changing the background. After reception, display UA is displayed (in the case of an example in which the third background image HK3 is prepared as the same background image as the first background image HK1), and when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the first background image HK1 is displayed. The 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without switching to another background image, and in the "second background operation section (timing toY to to3)", the sword ornament 500 When the operation is accepted, the background is changed from the second background image HK2 to a background image different from the second background image HK2 (in this case, the third background image HK3) and the 15th F is accepted in response to the operation. The display UA is displayed, but when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed without switching from the second background image HK2 to another background image. did. According to such a configuration, an operation is accepted in the "first background operation period (timing to2 to toY)" and in the "second background operation period (timing toY to to3)". Since it becomes possible to have a common part (operation button 410) and a different part (sword decoration body 5001) in terms of performance regarding the background image of It becomes possible to improve the game's interest within a range that appropriately maintains the presentation performance (15th F reception period).

As mentioned above, when displaying the 15F post-reception display UA in response to the operation reception without switching from the first background image HK1 to another background image, the display mode (brightness and color scheme) of the first background image HK1 etc.) may be changed.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 21-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted can be generated, and in this operation permission state, operation reception on the operation unit is not performed. Then, the post-reception display can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a background image that can be displayed even when the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image that appears behind the post-reception display. be. Then, as the operation permissible state, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)" can be generated, and the "15F reception period according to the second modification (Fig. 327 to 331)", the second background image HK1 is displayed as the background image and the second background image While the background image HK2 is displayed, switching to the "second background operation period (timing toY to to3)" in which operation reception is allowed occurs, and the operation section is configured such that the "operation button 410 ( At least a specific operation unit) is prepared, and for the operation button 410, multiple operations can be accepted during the 15th F reception period (specific operation permissible state) according to the second modification. Therefore, while aiming to improve gaming interest in a state where operation reception is permitted, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permission state)" occurs. can be expected to.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the switching from the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toY)" to the "second background operation section (timing toY to to3)" is performed by The process is executed based on the fact that a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of 'toY)' (the timing toY has arrived). According to such a configuration, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)", it is necessary to wait for the timing when the background image is switched before selecting whether or not to perform the operation. With the addition of performance, it is expected to improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, "the first background operation period (timing to 2 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed for a predetermined period of time without changing the background regardless of whether it is in the ``2nd background operation period (timing toY to 3)'' or ``2nd background operation period (timing toY to 3)'' (See Figure 328). According to such a configuration, even if the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" occurs, the operation button 410 can be operated as appropriate, unrelated to the conditions related to background switching. It has become possible to do so, and it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, if the 15th F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 in the "first background operation section (timing to2 to toY)" of the above-mentioned production example, the 15th F post-reception display UB As shown in FIG. 328, is executed for the predetermined time, and hidden before the predetermined time elapses (triggered by the arrival of timing toY due to the passage of time). However, when the 15th F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 in the "second background operation period (timing toY to to3)", the 15th F post-reception display UB is ( Instead of being hidden when a predetermined timing arrives due to the passage of time, the display is executed for a predetermined period of time. That is, in this case, even if the timing to3 arrives, the 15th F post-reception display UB will not be hidden using this as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, in the "first background operation period (timing to2 to toY)", the 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is changed to "the 15F post-reception display UB is "If the display is hidden due to the passage of time before a predetermined time has elapsed since the display started," and "If the display is hidden due to the passage of time before a predetermined time has elapsed since the 15th F reception display UB started displaying. As a result, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension while improving the game's interest.

Furthermore, in the "second background operation section (timing toY to to3)" of the above-mentioned production example, when the special condition (operation reception for the sword decoration 5001) is satisfied, the "15F reception according to the second modification example" is satisfied. The period (see Figures 327 to 331) is completed and the background is switched, but at this time, if the 15th F reception display UB is in the display state, the special condition (operation reception for the sword decoration 5001) is ) is satisfied (see timing to2e shown in FIG. 328). According to such a configuration, when the background switching occurs, the 15th F post-reception display UB may or may not be hidden, so that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. You will be able to do this.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 22-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. Then, the post-reception display can be displayed. Further, the specific light emitting section can be made to emit light in the operation permissible state. Then, as the operation permissible state, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)" can be generated, and the "15F reception period according to the second modification (Fig. 327 to 331), the specific light emission starts from the "first light emission operation period (timing to2 to toY)" in which operation reception on the operation unit is allowed while the specific light emission unit is emitting light in the first light emission mode. Since it is possible to switch to the "second light emission operation period (timing toY to to3)" in which reception of operations on the operation part is allowed while the part is emitting light in the second light emission mode, operation reception is possible. It can be expected to improve gaming interest in situations where this is allowed.

Moreover, in the ``15th reception period according to the second modification example (see Figures 327 to 331)'' of the above-mentioned production example, the sword decoration When an operation for 5001 is accepted (see timing to2e shown in FIG. 328), the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting unit is changed and the 15th F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 during the light emission operation period (timings to2 to toY) (see timing to2E shown in FIG. 327), the operation is performed without changing the light emission mode in the specific light emission section. The 15th F post-reception display UA corresponding to the reception is displayed (in the case of an example in which the third light emission mode is prepared as the same light emission mode as the first light emission mode). According to such a configuration, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", there is a case where the operation is accepted in the "first light emission operation period (timing to2 to toY)" and a case where the operation is accepted in the "second modification". Whether or not there is a change in the light emitting mode will differ depending on whether the operation is accepted during the 15th F reception period (specific operation permissible state). Even in the case of displaying UA), it is now possible to have different performances, and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception on the sword decoration 5001 and the operation reception on the operation button 410 are at least permissible. has been done. Then, in the "first light emitting operation period (timing to2 to toY)", when the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted (see timing to2E shown in FIG. 327), the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting section is changed to the first The 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed in response to the operation reception without changing from the light emission mode, and when the operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the light emission mode in the specific light emitting section is changed from the first light emission mode. A post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed without any delay (in the case of an example in which the third light emission mode is prepared as the same light emission mode as the first light emission mode). On the other hand, in the "second light emitting operation period (timings toY to to3)", when the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted (see timing to2e shown in FIG. 328), the light emitting mode in the specific light emitting part is changed to Although the 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed by changing the second light emission mode to a light emission mode different from the second light emission mode (here, the third light emission mode), an operation on the operation button 410 When the reception is received, the 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed without changing the light emission mode of the specific light emitting unit from the second light emission mode. For example, even if it is one reception period (the 15th reception period according to the second modification), even if the operation is performed on the type of operation target, or even on the same type, the operation will not be performed. Since the light emitting mode of a specific light emitting part changes or does not change depending on the section where , people are expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, among the reception periods related to the above-mentioned production example, there is a reception period (first period) in which the light emission mode of the specific light emitting part does not change (during the reception period) according to the passage of time after the reception period occurs. During the 12th F reception period, 13th F reception period, 14th F reception period, 16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, and variations thereof), an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted at any timing within the reception period. Even so, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to cause a change from the light emitting mode that had appeared up to that point in the specific light emitting section (change to another light emitting mode). According to such a configuration, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest due to the light emission mode not changing during the acceptance period can be suppressed.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 23-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. Then, the post-reception display can be displayed. Further, the specific light emitting section can be made to emit light in the operation permissible state. Then, as the operation permissible state, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)" can be generated, and the "15F reception period according to the second modification (Fig. 327 to 331), the specific light emission starts from the "first light emission operation period (timing to2 to toY)" in which operation reception on the operation unit is allowed while the specific light emission unit is emitting light in the first light emission mode. While the unit is emitting light in the second light emission mode, switching to the “second light emission operation period (timing toY to to3)” in which operation reception on the operation unit is allowed occurs, and the operation unit , at least an "operation button 410 (specific operation unit)" is prepared, and the "operation button 410" can be operated multiple times during the "15F reception period (specific operation permissible state) according to the second modification". Since it has been made to be permissible, when the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permissible state)" occurs while trying to improve the gaming interest in a state where operation reception is permissible. It can be expected to suitably provide a sense of tension.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, the transition from the "first light emission operation period (timings to2 to toY)" to the "second light emission operation period (timings toY to to3)" is as shown in FIG. The process is executed based on the fact that a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of "1 light emission operation period (timings to2 to toY)" (timing toY has arrived). According to such a configuration, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)", the performance of whether or not to operate after waiting for the timing when the light emission mode is switched is determined. It is expected that this will increase the interest in gaming.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the ``15th reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)'' of the above-mentioned production example, ``the first light emission operation period (timing to 2 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception is displayed for a predetermined period of time without changing the light emission mode regardless of whether it is in the "2nd light emission operation period (timing toY - toY)" or "2nd light emission operation period (timing toY to to3)" I made it so that it would be done. According to such a configuration, even if the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" occurs, the operation button 410 can be operated as appropriate, unrelated to the conditions related to the change in the light emission mode. It has become possible to operate the game in a number of ways, and it is expected that this will improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, if the 15th F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 in the "first light emission operation period (timing to2 to toY)", the 15th F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 UB is executed for the above-mentioned predetermined time while the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)" continues, and when the UB is executed for the prescribed period of time according to the "second modification While the ``15th reception period'' continues, it may be hidden before the predetermined time has elapsed (triggered by the arrival of the timing toY due to the passage of time). If the 15th F post-reception display UB is performed in response to the operation reception on the operation button 410 in the "Light emission operation section (timing toY to to3)", the 15th F post-reception display UB is the "15th F according to the second modification". The display is executed for a predetermined period of time while the "reception period" continues (instead of being hidden when a predetermined timing has arrived due to the passage of time). According to such a configuration, in the "first light emission operation period (timing to2 to toY)", the 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is changed to "the 15F post-reception display UB is "If the display is hidden due to the passage of time before a predetermined time has elapsed since the display started," and "If the display is hidden due to the passage of time before a predetermined time has elapsed since the 15th F reception display UB started displaying. As a result, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension while improving the game's interest.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 24-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permission state can be generated in which reception of an operation on the sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation section) is permitted, and the operation can be performed. When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the permissible state, a post-acceptance display UA can be displayed. Then, after preparing at least the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permission state)" as the operation permission state, the "15F reception period according to the second modification (Figs. 327 to 327)" is prepared. 331), it is possible to display a replica image display of the sword ornament 5001 for which operation reception is permitted, but when a predetermined condition is met, the replica image display is hidden. As a result, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained in a state where operation acceptance is permitted.

Moreover, in the "15th reception period for the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the "display period (timing to2 to toY)" and a "non-display section (timings toY to to3)" in which a simulated image of the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed, and a "display section (timings to2 to toY)" is started. When a predetermined period of time has passed since then (when timing toY arrives), the "display section (timing to2 to toY)" ends and the "non-display section (timing toY to to3)" starts. It has become. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the tension during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted in the "display period (timing to2 to toY)". The same post-reception display (display after reception on the 15th floor) is executed when the operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the above-mentioned "non-display section (timing to Y to to 3)". . According to such a configuration, even if the above-mentioned "display section (timings to2 to toY)" is shifted to the above-mentioned "non-display section (timings toY to to3)", the same mode will appear as the display after reception. , it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the above-mentioned "display period (timings to2 to toY)" ends.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the first condition and the second condition are When any one of the above conditions is satisfied, the "15th F reception period for the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)" is terminated, and when the second condition is satisfied, the sample image display is not displayed (the type of post-acceptance display when the operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 is different) and another acceptance period does not occur, but when the first condition is met, a sample image display is displayed ( Another acceptance period may occur (the type of post-acceptance display when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 is different). For example, the first condition can be set as "one operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001", and the second condition is set as "the operation is accepted for the operation button 410". It is possible to set it as ``to be performed a specific number of times'' or ``to obtain a special determination result based on the determination in response to the reception of the operation on the operation button 410.'' However, the first condition and the second condition only need to be determined in advance, and for example, the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410 may not necessarily be used.

Furthermore, in the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" According to the type of the "previously executed variation pattern (previous variation pattern)" which has ended at the time when "Reference)" occurs, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (Figs. 327 to 331)" 15F reception period according to the second modification (see Figure 1). 327 to 331)" may occur, a specific type of performance sound (for example, BGM performance sound) may not be suppressed or rendered inaudible. On the other hand, among the reception periods related to the above-mentioned production examples, the occurrence timing of the 12thF reception period, 13thF reception period, 14thF reception period, 16thF reception period, 17thF reception period, and their variations Before that, the "specific type of production sound (for example, BGM production sound)" is suppressed or made inaudible depending on the type of "previously executed variation pattern (previous variation pattern)". It may be possible to make sure that there are no cases where it is not done. According to such a configuration, if the player memorizes the type of the previous variation pattern, when the player is given an operation opportunity, the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" This makes it easier to recognize whether a specific type of production sound (for example, BGM production sound) is occurring based on the output status of a specific type of production sound (for example, BGM production sound), so even when no operation opportunity is given, the game This will help you concentrate. In this case, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", even if the appearance of the production sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, the reception period It is desirable that the latter display be the same.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 25-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which reception of operations on the operation unit is permitted, and in this operation permission state, operations on the operation unit are not possible. When acceptance is made, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, after preparing at least the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (specific operation permission state)" as the operation permission state, the "15F reception period according to the second modification (Figs. 327 to 327)" is prepared. 331), the sample image display can be displayed, but when a predetermined condition is met, the sample image display is hidden. The operation button 410 (specific operation section) can be operated multiple times during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification". It can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension in a state where reception is permitted.

Furthermore, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)", the operation reception is performed in a situation where the sample image display is displayed. Regardless of whether the operation is performed at (timings to2 to toY) or when the sample image display is not displayed (timings toY to to3), the operation is accepted. The 15th floor post-reception display UB corresponding to the above can be displayed for a predetermined period of time. According to this configuration, the display UB after reception on the 15th floor continues to be displayed for a predetermined period of time regardless of the display status of the sample image display. will be expected to maintain.

However, in the above-mentioned production example, the 15th floor reception post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is displayed during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)". In this case, if the "hide of the sample image display" is not performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the occurrence of the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification," the 15th floor reception period The rear display UB can be displayed for a predetermined period of time, but if the "hide of the sample image display" is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the "specific operation permissible state", the corresponding In accordance with the timing (here, timing toY) when the 15th F post-reception display UB is not continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time and the sample image display is hidden (in this case, timing toY) (triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time described above) It was made to be hidden (see timing toY shown in FIG. 328). According to such a configuration, at the timing when the sample image display is switched from the display state to the non-display state (here, timing toY), the 15th F post-reception display UB in the display state continues to be displayed for a predetermined period of time. Since the 15th F post-reception display UB is hidden before that without any delay, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained while the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed.

Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 26-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permissible state can be generated in which reception of an operation on the operation unit is permitted, and in the “operation permissible state”, the operation unit can be operated. When the operation is accepted, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, at least the "sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation part)" and the "operation button 410 (specific operation part)" are prepared as the operation parts, and the "15F reception period according to the second modification" is set as the operation permission state. In addition, during the ``15th reception period of the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331),'' operations for the ``sword ornament 5001'' are allowed to occur. Then, the 15th F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed (for example, see FIG. 327(h)), and when the operation reception for the "operation button 410" is performed, the 15F post-reception display UA corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. The 15F post-reception display UB is displayed (for example, see FIG. 327(i)), and the "time from when the 15F post-reception display UA is displayed until it is hidden" is set to "15F post-reception display UA". Since the time period from when the display UB is displayed until it is hidden is made to be different, it can be expected to suitably maintain the tension after the operation is accepted.

Moreover, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, as shown in FIGS. At least a "sample image display imitating the operation button 410" and a "sample image display imitating the operation button 410" can be displayed. When the specified time has elapsed (timing toY has arrived), this is used as an opportunity to hide both the "display of a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001" and the "display of a simulated image of the operation button 410". It was to so. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the feeling of tension during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example is set in advance from the time when the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example" occurs. When the predetermined time has passed (timing toY has arrived), both the "display of a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001" and the "display of a simulated image of the operation button 410" are hidden. It may be configured to continue even after the process is completed. According to such a configuration, while the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" is continuing, "display of a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001" and "display of a simulated image of the operation button 410" are displayed. '' are now hidden, so it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the ``15th reception period for the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)'', ``display of a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001'' and ``display of a simulated operation button 410'' If the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed in response to an operation reception for the "operation button 410" while the "Small image display" is being displayed, the 15th F post-reception display UB is the same as the 15F post-reception display UB. If the above-mentioned predetermined time from when the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" occurs between when is displayed and the display time (set time) elapses ( If the timing toY does not arrive), it may be displayed for the above display time (set time), but after the 15th F reception display UB is displayed until the display time (set time) elapses, the When the above predetermined time period elapses from the occurrence of the 15th F reception period according to the second modification, it is made to be hidden (see timing toY shown in FIG. 328(i)). ).

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned production example, in the ``15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)'', ``display of a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001'' and ``display of the operation button 410'' If the 15th F post-reception display UA is displayed in response to the operation reception for the "sword ornament 5001" while the "Sword decoration object 5001" is being displayed, the 15th F post-reception display UA will display the "2nd modified example". It will not be hidden when the above predetermined time has passed since the 15th F reception period has occurred (timing to Y has arrived), but the predetermined It can be displayed for a display time (set time) (see timing toY shown in FIG. 327(h)). According to such a configuration, when the 15th-F post-reception display UA appears, the user can enjoy the contents of the 15th-F post-reception display UA with a sense of security, whereas when the 15th-F post-reception display UB appears. Sometimes, it becomes necessary to check the contents of the display after reception while being aware of the passage of time (timing to Y), and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably imparted.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the ``15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see Figures 327 to 331),'' ``display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001'' and ``display the operation button 410'' If an operation is accepted for the operation unit while none of the ``Sword Decoration 5001 , operation button 410), the display will not be hidden due to the elapsed time since the occurrence of the "15th F reception period according to the second modification", and the display will not be hidden depending on the type of post-reception display. It is now possible to display for the appropriate display time (set time). In other words, in this case, if an operation is successfully accepted during a period that is confidential and difficult to accept within the "15th F acceptance period according to the second modification," the production in which such operation was successfully accepted As a bonus, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception will not be terminated prematurely due to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the "15th F reception period according to the second modification". , it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in gaming.

As mentioned above, regarding the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see Figures 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example" occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at this point, the specific type of production sound is suppressed or made inaudible before the "15th F reception period for the second modification" occurs. may be suppressed or rendered inaudible. In this case, even if the appearance of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same as when no change has occurred.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 27-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. This may cause changes after acceptance. Furthermore, when an operation is accepted on the operating unit in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. Then, at least an "operation button 410 (specific operation section)" is prepared as an operation section, and "12F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312) or a modification thereof (see FIGS. 342 and 343) is prepared as an operation permission state. )" and "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", and then "12th floor reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its modifications. (See FIGS. 342 and 343)" and "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)," the sample image display is enabled, and " Regarding the sample image display displayed during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)" )" can be hidden when a predetermined condition is met, which can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension (Figure 329 (h), (i ).

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example "12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its variations (see Figures 342 and 343)", the "12F reception period or its variations" continues. The sample image display will not change from the display state to the non-display state during the process, but during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", the "second The sample image display can be changed from the display state to the non-display state while the "15th F reception period according to the modified example" is continuing. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state (acceptance period), both the case where the sample image display is changed from the display state to the non-display state and the case where the sample image display is not changed from the display state to the non-display state are both possible. This allows a sense of tension to be suitably provided.

In addition, the above-mentioned production example "12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its modifications (see Figures 342 and 343)" and "15F reception period according to the second modification (Fig. 327 to 331), multiple operations are allowed for the operation button 410 (specific operation section), and operations for the operation button 410 are allowed during the 12th floor reception period or variations thereof. When the reception is made, the post-reception output sound is not output as one of the 12F post-reception changes B while the "12F reception period or its variations" continues (see Figure 311). (see FIG. 342, etc.), an operation is accepted for the "operation button 410" while the sample image display is in the display state during the "15th F acceptance period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" Then, while the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" is continuing, the 15F post-reception output sound B can be output as one of the 15F post-reception changes B (see Figure 327 and (See Figure 328, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not the simulated image display will be changed from the display state to the non-display state in the operation permissible state based on whether the output sound is output after acceptance. Therefore, it is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 during the "15th F reception period for the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)," When the 15th F post-reception output sound B is output as one of the 15F post-reception changes B while the 15th F reception period continues (for example, timings to2A, to2B, to2C shown in FIG. 327, etc.) ) and cases in which it is not output (for example, see timing to2D shown in FIG. 327). According to such a configuration, even if the output sound is not output after acceptance, there is a possibility that the sample image display will change from the display state to the non-display state, so it is preferable to create a feeling of tension. will be expected to be maintained.

In addition, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception on the operation button 410 was performed while the sample image display was in the hidden state. In this case, while the "15th F reception period according to the second modification" continues, there are cases where the output sound B after the 15F reception is output as one of the changes B after the 15F reception and cases where it is not output. I made it so that there is. This makes it clear to the player that even if the output sound is not output after acceptance, there is a possibility that the sample image display may be changed from the display state to the non-display state. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its variations (see Figures 342 and 343)", the 12F reception period or its variations occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time of execution, the specific type of performance sound (for example, BGM performance sound) may be suppressed or inaudible before the 12th F reception period or its variations occur. However, in the "15th F reception period for the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", the second modification Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the 15th floor reception period according to the second modification occurs, a specific type of production sound (for example, BGM performance sound) may be suppressed or made inaudible, or may not be suppressed or made inaudible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the sample image display will be hidden in the middle of the acceptance period through the specific type of performance sound (for example, BGM performance sound) and the type of the previous variation pattern. As a result, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In this case, even if the appearance of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance is the same as when it did not change.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 28-F]) according to this embodiment, an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted can be generated, and in this operation permission state, operation reception on the operation unit is not performed. This may cause changes after acceptance. Then, as the operation permissible state, "13th F reception period (see FIGS. 313 and 314) or its modification (see FIG. 344 and 345)" and "15F reception period according to the second modification (see FIG. 327)" -Refer to Figure 331)'', then prepare at least the ``13F reception period (Refer to Figures 313 and 314) or its modifications (Refer to Figures 344 and 345)'' and the ``Second modification During the 15th F reception period (see Figures 327 to 331), a sample image display can be displayed. 329), it can be hidden when a predetermined condition is met, so it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension (see FIG. 329). In addition, in the "13F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314) or its modified example (see Figures 344 and 345)", at least a sword decoration is used as an operation part that allows multiple operation receptions. 5001 (predetermined operation part) and if the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operated state, the operation can be accepted multiple times. It can be expected to improve the enjoyment of the game in the game (see FIGS. 344 and 345) or its modified example (see FIGS. 344 and 345).

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example "13th F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314) or its modification (see Figs. 344 and 345)", the "13th F reception period (see Figs. 313 and 314)" The sample image display is not changed from the display state to the non-display state during the continuation of "Reference) or its modified example (see FIGS. 344 and 345)", but the In the reception period (see Figures 327 to 331), the sample image display changes from the display state while the 15th floor reception period for the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331) continues. Allowed to be hidden. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state, there are both cases in which the sample image display is changed from the display state to the non-display state, and cases in which the sample image display is not changed from the display state to the non-display state. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the vehicle is in an operation permissible state.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, multiple operation receptions are allowed when the sample image display is in the display state. There is one or more operation parts (in this case, the operation button 410) that are operated, and even if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times (the automatic continuous press function is enabled). However, in the "13th F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314) or its modified example (see Figures 344 and 345)", there is one operation unit for which multiple operation receptions are allowed. Or there are multiple (in this case, the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410), and if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the operation reception can be performed multiple times (the automatic repeated press function is activated) ( Here, the sword decoration body 5001). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not the image display is changed from a display state to a non-display state based on whether or not the automatic repeated hit function is enabled. It is expected that the decline will be suppressed.

In particular, in the "13th F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314) or its modified example (see Figures 344 and 345)" of the above-mentioned production example, the operation section that allows multiple operation receptions is There are multiple buttons (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410), and if you continue to operate the operation part, the function will change according to the type of operation part targeted for operation (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410). Therefore, there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times (sword ornament 5001) and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times (operation button 410). According to such a configuration, even if the automatic continuous hit function is not enabled, the sample image display may not change from the display state to the non-display state, so that it is possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. become expected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production examples, "13th F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314) or its variations (see Figures 344 and 345)" and "17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341)" ) or its modified examples (see FIGS. 349 to 351)", the "sword decoration body 5001" and "operation button 410" are prepared as the operation parts that can accept multiple operations, and Although the "sword ornament 5001" is set as a target for which the automatic repeated tapping function is enabled, and the "operation button 410" is set as a target for which the automatic repeated tapping function is not activated, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "sword ornament 5001" may be set as a target for which the auto-repeating function is not enabled, and the "operation button 410" may be set as a target for which the auto-repeat-hitting function is enabled. Furthermore, both the "sword ornament 5001" and the "operation button 410" may be set as targets for which the auto-repeating function is enabled.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)", the "operation button 410" is used as an operation part that allows multiple operation receptions. However, an operation unit other than the “operation button 410” may be additionally provided as an “operation unit that can accept multiple operations.” Note that the operation section different from the "operation button 410" may be the "sword ornament 5001" or may be an operation section different from the "sword ornament 5001." However, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", if multiple operation units are provided as the operation units that are allowed to accept multiple operations, , the auto-repeating function will not be enabled for any of these operating units (the operation will not be accepted multiple times even if the operating unit is kept in an operated state).

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, even after the sample image display is changed from the display state to the non-display state, multiple operations are required. There is one or more operation sections for which reception is allowed, and even if the operation section is kept in an operated state, the operation reception is not made multiple times. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly indicate to the player that when the automatic continuous hit function is not activated, there is a high possibility that the sample image display will be changed from the display state to the non-display state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example "13th F reception period (see FIGS. 313 and 314) or a modification thereof (see FIGS. 344 and 345)", the 13F reception period or a modification thereof occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at this point, a specific type of performance sound (BGM performance sound) may be suppressed or rendered inaudible before the 13th F reception period or its variations occur. However, during the ``15th reception period for the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)'', the Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the 15F reception period occurs, a specific type of production sound may be suppressed or inaudible before the 15F reception period according to the second modification occurs. may be in a suppressed or inaudible state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the sample image display will be hidden in the middle of the acceptance period through the specific type of performance sound (for example, BGM performance sound) and the type of the previous variation pattern. As a result, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In this case, even if the appearance of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance is the same as when it did not change.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 29-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which reception of an operation on the sword ornament 5001 (predetermined operation section) is permitted, and the operation can be performed. When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the permissible state, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. Then, as the operation permissible state, "12th F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312) or its modification (see FIG. 342 and 343)" and "15F reception period according to the second modification (see FIG. 327)" -Refer to Figure 331)" and "12F reception period (Refer to Figures 311 and 312) or its modifications (Refer to Figures 342 and 343)" and "According to the second modification. The 15th floor reception period (see Figures 327 to 331)" can display a sample image, and the 15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331) (Refer to ``)'', the content can be hidden when a predetermined condition is met, so it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension. In addition, an operation button 410 (specific operation section) different from the sword decoration body 5001 is prepared, and during the "12th F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312) or its modified example (see FIGS. 342 and 343)" , both the acceptance of an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 and the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 are allowed, and when the operation reception on the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted, the post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the reception of the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed. The aim is to improve gaming interest during the ``12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its variations (see Figures 342 and 343)'' by making it acceptable even in the middle of the 12th floor. can be expected.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example "12th F reception period (see Figures 311 and 312) or its variations (see Figures 342 and 343)", the "12F reception period or its variations" continues. The sample image display will not change from the display state to the non-display state during the process, but during the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", the "second The sample image display can be changed from the display state to the non-display state while the "15th F reception period according to the modified example" is continuing. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state, there are both cases in which the sample image display is changed from the display state to the non-display state, and cases in which the sample image display is not changed from the display state to the non-display state. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the vehicle is in an operation permissible state.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 and the operation reception for the operation button 410 are both In addition, the reception of the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is also permitted even when the 15th F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is displayed, and the 15th F post-reception display UB If an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 while being displayed, this will be used as a trigger to hide the 15th F post-reception display UB and display the 15th F post-reception display in response to the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001. The display of the UA was started (for example, see timing to2E shown in FIG. 327). On the other hand, in the "12F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312) or its modified example (see FIGS. 342 and 343)", operations are accepted for the sword decoration 5001 and operations for the operation button 410. Both of these are acceptable, and the acceptance of an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is also acceptable even when the 12F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation acceptance on the operation button 410 is displayed. If an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 while the post-reception display UB is displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to respond to the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 without hiding the 12F post-reception display UB. The display UA will start displaying after receiving the 15th floor. According to such a configuration, in the operation permissible state, when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the 15th F reception display UB corresponding to the operation accepted for the operation button 410 is displayed, this triggers the operation acceptance state. Since there will be both cases where the display UB after reception on the 15th floor is hidden and cases where it is not hidden, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided when performing operations on the sword ornament 5001. will be done.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, operations on the sword ornament 5001 are performed even when the replica image display is in the hidden state. Both the reception and the operation reception on the operation button 410 are allowed, and the operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 is performed while the 15F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation reception on the operation button 410 is displayed. However, if an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the 15th F post-reception display UB is being displayed, this will trigger the 15th F post-reception display UA to start displaying and the The 15F post-reception display UB is hidden (see timing to2e shown in FIG. 328). According to such a configuration, even when the replica image display is in the non-display state, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 has been properly accepted.

Furthermore, in the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the 15th floor reception period is When the post-reception display UB is displayed and the 15th F post-reception output sound B can be audibly output, when the 15th F post-reception display UB is displayed and the 15th F post-reception output sound B is audibly output. If an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, this will be used as a trigger to hide the currently displayed "15th F reception display UB", but the "15th F reception display UB" which is in the audible state will be hidden. 15F Post-Reception Output Sound B" may be continued without being terminated. That is, in this case, since it becomes unclear whether or not the operation reception for the "sword decoration object 5001" has been properly performed, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 30-F]) according to this embodiment can generate an operation permission state in which operation reception is permitted, and in this operation permission state, no operation is accepted on the operation unit. Then, a change can be caused after acceptance, and at least "15th F reception period (specific operation permissible state) according to the second modification" and "14th F reception period (special operation permissible state)" as the operation permissible state. We are planning to prepare it. Then, during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)," a sample image display can be displayed, and during the "14th floor reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)," the sample image display can be displayed. Although the image display is not enabled, the sample image display will be disabled when a predetermined condition is met during the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)". Since it can be displayed, it can be expected that the tension in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" can be maintained appropriately. In addition, in the "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)", at least the sword decoration 5001 is prepared as an operation part that can accept multiple operation receptions, and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted multiple times if the user continues to operate the 5001, when the ``14th F acceptance period (see Figures 315 to 318)'' occurs during which the sample image display cannot be displayed. It can be expected that this will suppress the decline in interest in games.

Moreover, in the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, the "15th floor reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" )'' is continued, so that the image display can be changed from a display state to a non-display state, so it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification example (see FIGS. 327 to 331)" of the above-mentioned production example, multiple operation receptions are allowed when the sample image display is in the display state. There is one or more operation parts (in this case, the operation button 410) that are operated, and even if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times (the automatic continuous press function is enabled). I tried to avoid it. On the other hand, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", there is one or more operation units that allow multiple operation receptions when the sample image display is in the hidden state. Yes (in this case, the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410), and the operation can be accepted multiple times if the operation part is kept in the operated state (here, the operation reception can be performed multiple times when the operation part is kept in the operated state). (if maintained). According to such a configuration, in the ``15th reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)'', the period in which the sample image display is displayed (from timing to2 shown in FIG. 329) toY)", the auto-repeat function is not enabled, whereas the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)", where the sample image display is not displayed, the auto-repeat function is enabled. It can be expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to not displaying the sample image.

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned production example, there are multiple operation units that allow multiple operation receptions while the sample image is not displayed. Yes (sword decoration body 5001, operation button 410), if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the operation reception will be performed multiple times (sword decoration body 5001), and if the operation part is kept in the operated state. Since there are cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times even if the operation is continued (operation button 410), it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when operating the operation section. .

In particular, in the "14th F reception period" according to the above-mentioned production example, as shown in FIG. , if the operation part is kept in an operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times (sword decoration 5001) and a case where the operation is not accepted multiple times (operation button 410). In other words, in this case, when the "14th F reception period" is occurring, it is determined whether or not the auto-repeat function is enabled depending on the type of the operation target, so which operation section is operated? It is expected to add more fun to the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, during the "14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)", "sword ornament 5001" and "operation button 410" are used as the operation parts for which multiple operation receptions are allowed. ", and then set the "sword ornament 5001" as a target for which the auto-repeated hit function will be activated, and the "operation button 410" as a target for which the auto-repeated hit function will not be activated. Not limited. For example, the "sword ornament 5001" may be set as a target for which the auto-repeating function is not enabled, and the "operation button 410" may be set as a target for which the auto-repeat-hitting function is enabled. Furthermore, both the "sword ornament 5001" and the "operation button 410" may be set as targets for which the auto-repeating function is enabled.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331)", the "operation button 410" is used as an operation part that allows multiple operation receptions. However, an operation unit other than the “operation button 410” may be additionally provided as an “operation unit that can accept multiple operations.” Note that the operation section different from the "operation button 410" may be the "sword ornament 5001" or may be an operation section different from the "sword ornament 5001." However, in the "15th F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 327 to 331)", if multiple operation units are provided as the operation units that are allowed to accept multiple operations, , the auto-repeating function will not be enabled for any of these operating units (the operation will not be accepted multiple times even if the operating unit is kept in an operated state).

Furthermore, in the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" of the above-mentioned production example, the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" A specific type of production sound (BGM production sound) will not be suppressed or made inaudible, or will not be made suppressed or inaudible before the 14F reception period occurs. "15F reception period (see Figures 319 to 321)", "15F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)", or "15F reception period according to the second modification (see Figures 322 to 326)" 327 to 331)", depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the relevant reception period occurs, "a specific type of production sound is suppressed before the relevant reception period occurs. or rendered inaudible, suppressed or not rendered inaudible. In this case, even if the appearance of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance is the same as when it did not change.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 31-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section). In this respect, it is possible to generate a "non-display operation permissible state" that includes a "non-display operation section" in which operations on the sword ornament 5001 are permissible while the sample image display is not displayed. When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the ``display operation allowed state'', the display UA can be displayed after acceptance. In addition, it is possible to display even in a situation where the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image display that appears behind the post-reception display. It is said that In this regard, in the above-mentioned "hidden operation permissible state", while the state in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are permissible continues, there are at least cases in which the background is switched over time (for example, , FIG. 324, etc.), it is expected to improve the game's interest when the player is in the "non-display operation permissible state".

Furthermore, in the "non-display operation permissible state" of the above-mentioned production example, there are cases in which background switching occurs within the "non-display operation permissible state" due to the passage of time after the occurrence of the "non-display operation permissible state" and the background There are cases in which switching does not occur. That is, in the above-mentioned production example, if the background is switched over time while the state in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed to continue in the "non-display operation allowed state" (for example, in the "non-display operation allowed state") As shown in FIG. 324, during the 15th F reception period (see FIGS. 322 to 326) according to the first modification, while the "non-display operation permissible state" continues, The display operation period (timings to2 to toX) has ended and the display operation period (timing to . That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state."

On the other hand, if the background switching does not occur while the state in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed to continue in the "hidden operation allowed state (hidden section inclusion allowed state)", If the above-mentioned "hidden operation section" continues without being terminated until the "display operation allowed state (hidden section inclusion allowed state)" is ended (for example, the 14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318) Then, while the "hidden operation allowed state (hidden section inclusion allowed state)" continues, the above "hidden operation section (timing tp2 to tpX)" is ended and the "display operation section (timing tpX to tpX)" is continued. tp3)" (for example, the 16th reception period (see Figures 332 to 336) and its variations (see Figures 346 to 348)). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not the "display operation section" will appear in the "non-display section inclusion allowed state" through whether or not the background is to be switched, thereby improving the game's interest. Furthermore, even if the background is not switched, there is still a possibility that a "display operation section" will appear, so it is expected that the game's interest will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, if the background is switched over time while the state in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed to continue during the "non-display operation permissible period" of the above-mentioned production example (for example, the "first modification" In the 15th floor reception period according to the example (see FIGS. 322 to 326), when the background switching occurs, the above-mentioned non-display operation period (timings to2 to toX) is ended and the sample image display is displayed. Among them, the display operation period (timings toX to to3) is made such that reception of operations on the sword ornament 5001 is allowed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate through the background switching that the operation acceptance has already been allowed in the interval before the timing when the background switching was performed. As a result, it is expected that players will be encouraged to become accustomed to ``operations performed in a confidential environment'' and that a decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

In addition, when the background switching does not occur while the state in which operation reception on the sword decoration object 5001 is allowed during the "non-display operation permissible period" of the above-mentioned production example, the "non-display operation permissible period" The case where the above-mentioned non-display operation section is continued without being terminated in the middle of the period, and the case where the above-mentioned non-display operation section is ended and transitioned to the above-mentioned display operation section are mutually dependent on the occurrence conditions and the post-reception display. Different types of hidden operation permissible periods (for example, the "14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)" as the second hidden operation permissible period, and the "16th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)" as the third hidden operation permissible period) The reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336) or a modification thereof (see FIGS. 346 to 348). In addition, if the background switching occurs while the state in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are still permissible during the "non-display operation permissible period" of the above-mentioned production example, a non-display of a type different from any of the above types will be used. This is the display operation permissible period (the “15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)” as the first non-display operation permissible period).

Also, as a method of changing to a different background image, the different background image is displayed in a hidden (invisible) form behind (back layer) the background image that is already displayed, and then By erasing the background image that is present, a different background image that was previously hidden may be revealed.

Furthermore, in the case where the background switching occurs while the state in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted during the "non-display operation permissible period" of the above-mentioned production example continues (for example, the "non-display operation permissible period" 15F reception period (see FIGS. 322 to 326), the second background image HK2 can be displayed during the non-display operation period (timings to2 to toX), and the second background image HK2 can be displayed during the display operation period (timings toX to to3). ), the first background image HK1 can be displayed (see FIG. 324, etc.), and when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the non-display operation period (timings to2 to toX), the corresponding Background switching occurs when the operation is accepted (timing to2E shown in FIG. 322), but when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the display operation section (timings toX to to3), the background is switched when the operation is accepted. Since no change occurs (timing to2e shown in FIG. 323, when the third background image HK3 is prepared as the same background image as the first background image HK1), the non-display operation period (timing to2 to toX ), it is possible to improve the performance when the user notices that the operation reception is allowed and succeeds in accepting the operation.

However, even if the third background image HK3 is realized as the same background image as the first background image HK1, the display modes (brightness, color scheme, etc.) of the first background image HK1 and the third background image HK3 are different from each other. It may be different. This is because if the mode remains within the scope of ``using the previously appearing background image and changing it,'' it cannot be said that ``the background image has been replaced with another background image (data).'' be.

On the other hand, in the "16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336) and its modified examples (see FIGS. 346 to 348)", the sword ornament 5001 is displayed in both the hidden operation section and the display operation section. Even if an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, the background does not change due to this, and in the "14th F acceptance period (see Figures 315 to 318)" Since no background change occurs as a trigger, it is expected to suitably maintain the tension when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the non-display operation section or the display operation section.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 32-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section), and the simulated image display is It is possible to generate a "hidden operation allowed state" that includes a "hidden operation section" in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed while the sword decoration is not displayed. When an operation is accepted for 5001, a post-acceptance display can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display even in a situation where the post-reception display is not displayed, and when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to display a background image display that appears behind the post-reception display. It is said that In this regard, the "non-display operation permissible state" includes "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first non-display operation permissible state)" and "16F reception period or its modification (second non-display operation permissible state)". In the 15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326), the sword decoration 5001 continues to be in a permissible state. Since the background can be changed over time, it is expected that the game will be more interesting in the "non-display operation allowed state".

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example "16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336) or variations thereof (see FIGS. 346 to 348)", the state in which operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 is allowed is not possible. After ensuring that background switching does not occur while the process continues, the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)" and "16th F reception period or its modifications" In both cases, a display operation section is included in which it is possible to accept an operation on the sword ornament 5001 while the above-mentioned simulated image display is being displayed. That is, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", if the "non-display operation period (timing to2 to toX)" continues for the first time, the "15F reception period according to the first modification (Fig. 322 to 326)" continues, the "non-display operation period (timings to2 to In the 16F reception period or a modification thereof, if the "hidden operation period (timing tp2 to tpX)" continues for a second time shorter than the first time, the "16F reception period or modification thereof" continues. During this process, the "non-display operation period (timings tp2 to tpX)" is ended and the transition is made to the "display operation period (timings tpX to tp3)." That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first hidden section inclusion permissible state)" and "16th F reception period or its modification (second hidden section inclusion permissible state)" ”, the time required to end the “hidden operation period” and move on to the “display operation period” will differ, so the tension when in the “hidden operation allowed state” will be reduced. It is expected that it will be maintained properly. On the other hand, since the non-display operation permissible state can be indicated by the presence or absence of background switching, it is expected to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, the background is As mentioned above, there are at least some cases where switching occurs. On the other hand, in the "16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336) or its variations (see FIGS. 346 to 348)" of the above-mentioned production example, the non-display operation period (timings tp2 to tpX) and Even if an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in any of the display operation sections (timings tpX to tp3), background switching will not occur due to this, so the "non-display section inclusion allowed" It can be expected that the player's hand can be maintained in a favorable manner when the player is in the "state".

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", the display of the simulated image of the sword decoration 5001 is performed during the non-display operation period (timings to2 to toX). After continuing for one hour, it can be displayed only in one mode (a predetermined mode). On the other hand, in the "16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336) or its modified examples (see Figures 346 to 348)", the replica image display of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the non-display operation period. After (timings tp2 to tpX) continues for a second time period shorter than the first time period, the display can be performed in one of multiple ways (for example, multiple color schemes with different expectations). It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the second time period elapses.

In addition, when it is assumed that a specific color scheme among the above-mentioned "multiple modes (multiple color schemes)" is "the mode with the lowest level of expectation", the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326) )", it is desirable that the specific color scheme be used as one aspect (predetermined aspect). In other words, in this case, it is expected to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a sample image display is displayed with a specific color scheme.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, a "14th F reception period (third non-display operation permissible period)" is further prepared as a "non-display operation permissible period", and the "14th F reception period (Fig. 315 to 318)" does not include a display operation section in which an operation reception on the sword decoration 5001 is allowed while a replica image display of the sword decoration 5001 is being displayed. Background switching does not occur as time passes while the state in which operations on the decorative object 5001 are permitted continues. In other words, in this case, when the non-display operation section appears and the background switching does not occur, there are two cases in which there is a transition to the display operation section, and a case in which the reception period ends without transitioning to the display operation section. Since there are cases where the program is terminated, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example "16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336) or its variations (see Figures 346 to 348)", the 16F reception period or its variations occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time, a specific type of performance sound (for example, BGM performance sound) may be suppressed or inaudible before the 16th F reception period or its variations occur. However, during the ``15th reception period for the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326),'' Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the 15th floor reception period occurs, a specific type of performance sound (for example, BGM The effect sound may be suppressed or made inaudible, or may not be suppressed or made inaudible. In this case, even if the appearance of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance is the same as when it did not change.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 33-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001, and while the simulated image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden operation allowed state" that includes a "hidden operation section" in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed, and operations on the sword decoration 5001 are not accepted in the "hidden operation allowed state". When this is done, an after-acceptance display UA can be displayed, and a premonitory effect display can be displayed to indicate in advance that acceptance of operation on the sword ornament 5001 is in an acceptable state. In this regard, in the "non-display operation allowed state", we made it so that the foreshadowing effect display may not be displayed when the "non-display operation allowed state" occurs, so you can feel the tension when the non-display operation allowed state occurs. will be able to suitably provide the following.

Moreover, in the "non-display operation permissible state" of the above-mentioned production example, the "non-display" state is a state in which it is possible to accept operations on the sword decoration 5001 while the replica image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed. In the case where both the "operation section" and the "display operation section" in which an image display imitating the sword decoration object 5001 is displayed and operations on the sword decoration object 5001 can be accepted are included. There are also cases where a "display operation section" is not included and a "non-display operation section" is included. Then, if the "hidden operation allowed state" does not include the "display operation section" but includes the "hidden operation section" (14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)), The foreshadowing effect display is not displayed when the "non-display operation permissible state" occurs. On the other hand, if the "hidden operation permissible state" includes the "hidden operation section" and the "display operation section" (15F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326) ) or the 15th F reception period (see Figures 327 to 331), 16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), and 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341) according to the second modification. or modifications thereof (Figs. 346 to 351), etc.), when a precursor effect display is displayed when the "hidden operation permissible state" occurs (16F reception period, 17F reception period, or modifications thereof) ) and cases in which the precursor effect display is not displayed (the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification or the 15th floor reception period according to the second modification). That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, if the "14th F reception period (non-display section inclusion permissible state)" that does not include the "display operation section" occurs, the precursor effect display will not be executed, so that the player cannot On the other hand, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the confidentiality of being in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. On the other hand, the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification, the 15th floor reception period according to the second modification, the 16th floor reception period, the 17th floor reception period, or any of those" that includes the "display operation section" If "Modified Example (Non-Display Section Inclusion Permissible State)" occurs, there are both cases in which a precursory effect is displayed and cases in which a precursory effect is not displayed. The level of performance related to the secrecy of being in the hidden state is now considered to be various, and as a result, even beginners can enter the "hidden operation permissible state (hidden section inclusion permissible state)" with high secrecy. People will now be expected to provide a natural presentation that seems like a training exercise to help people notice things more easily.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, there is a non-display operation permissible period (16th F reception period (Fig. 332 to 336), the 17th F reception period (see FIGS. 337 to 341), or variations thereof (FIGS. 346 to 351)), and both a non-display operation period and a display operation period, and A non-display operation permissible period during which the precursor effect display is not displayed (15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326) or 15F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 331) )) is an operation permissible period (acceptance period) in which the occurrence conditions and post-reception display UA are different from each other. The operation permissible period (14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318)) is prepared as a type of operation permissible period (reception period) different from any of the above types. Therefore, even if a "non-display operation section" appears, the type as an operation permissible period (reception period) is determined by the presence or absence of a precursor effect display and the presence or absence of a "display operation section". You will be able to suggest.

Furthermore, in the example of the above-mentioned production, of the "non-display operation permissible period" which includes the "non-display operation period" and the "display operation period", a precursory performance is performed when the non-display operation permissible period occurs. When display is executed (16F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), 17F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341), or variations thereof (Figures 346 to 351), etc.), the relevant non- The time as the display operation period is set when the precursor effect display is not executed (the 15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326) or the 15F reception period according to the second modification (see FIGS. 327 to 326)). (See Figure 331)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when there is a delay in recognizing that the "state in which operation reception is permitted" is reached due to the failure of displaying a precursory effect. Become.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production examples, the display operation permissible period (for example, the 12F reception period (see FIGS. 311 and 312) or its variations) does not include the "non-display operation section" but includes the "display operation section". example (see Figures 342 and 343), the 13th F reception period (see Figures 313 and 314), or its variations (see Figures 344 and 345)), and the display operation is permitted. When a period occurs, a precursor effect display can be displayed (see FIG. 285, FIG. 290, etc.). That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is displayed, there is a possibility that the "non-display operation section" is not included, so that it is possible to improve the game's interest.

However, if a "display operation permissible period" that does not include a "non-display operation section" but includes a "display operation section" occurs, it is not necessary to ensure that the precursor effect display is always displayed when this occurs. , there may be both a case where the precursor effect display is displayed and a case where the precursor effect display is not displayed.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 34-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001, and when the simulated image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "hidden operation allowed state" that includes a "hidden operation section" in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed, and operations on the sword decoration 5001 are not accepted in the "hidden operation allowed state". When this is done, an after-acceptance display UA can be displayed, and a premonitory effect display can be displayed to indicate in advance that acceptance of operation on the sword ornament 5001 is in an acceptable state. Then, as the "hidden operation allowed state", the "first hidden operation allowed state (15th floor reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326) or the 15th floor reception period according to the second modification) (See Figures 327 to 331)" and "Second hidden operation permission state (16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341), or (FIGS. 346 to 351)" and then prepare the "first non-display operation permissible state (15th floor reception period according to the first modification or 15th floor reception period according to the second modification)". Since the foreshadowing effect display is not displayed when the "first non-display operation permissible state" occurs, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when the "first non-display operation permissible state" occurs. become.

Moreover, the second non-display operation permissible state (16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336), 17th F reception period (see FIGS. 337 to 341) or their modified examples (see FIGS. 337 to 341) of the above-mentioned production example 346 to FIG. 351), a foreshadowing effect display is displayed when the second non-display operation permissible state (16th F reception period, 17F reception period, or a modification thereof) occurs. "First hidden operation allowed state (15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326))" and "Second hidden operation allowed state (16th F reception period, 17th F reception period or These modified examples) all include a "display operation section" in which an image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 is displayed and operations on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed to be accepted. Yes, in the "first non-display operation permissible state (15th F reception period according to the first modification)", if the "non-display operation period (timing to2 to toY)" continues for the first time, the "first non-display operation period" continues for the first time. While the display operation permissible state (15th F acceptance period according to the first modification) continues, the non-display operation period (timings to2 to toY) ends and the display operation period (timings toY to to3) continues. )", and in the "second non-display operation allowed state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for a second time period shorter than the first time, the "second non-display operation allowed state" is set. The "non-display operation section" is ended and the transition is made to the "display operation section" while the "state (16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or a modification thereof)" continues. In other words, in this case, the above-mentioned "hidden operation allowed state" should be more accurately called "hidden section inclusion allowed state." According to such a configuration, the "first hidden section included state" should be called the "hidden section inclusion allowed state". The "permissible state (15th F reception period according to the first modification)" and the "2nd non-display section inclusion permissible state (16th F reception period, 17F reception period or modifications thereof)" and the "non-display operation section" '' is completed and the time required to move to the "display operation section" differs, so it is preferable to create a feeling of tension when in the "non-display operation permissible state (non-display section inclusion permissible state)". On the other hand, since the state in which these non-display operations are allowed (the state in which non-display section inclusion is allowed) can be indicated by the presence or absence of the execution of the precursor effect display, the game It is now expected that the decline in interest will be suitably suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, during the 15th floor reception period (see FIGS. 322 to 326) according to the first modification, the display of the simulated image of the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed during the non-display operation period (from timing to2). toX) continues for a first period of time, it can be displayed only in one mode (a predetermined mode). On the other hand, the sword decoration body 5001 is The simulated image display is displayed in multiple modes (for example, multiple color schemes with different expectations) after the non-display operation period (timings tp2 to tpX, timings tq2 to tqX) continues for a second time period that is shorter than the first time period. Since the display can be made in any of the above, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension as the second time period passes.

In addition, when it is assumed that a specific color scheme among the above-mentioned "multiple modes (multiple color schemes)" is "the mode with the lowest level of expectation", the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326) )", it is desirable that the specific color scheme be used as one aspect (predetermined aspect). In other words, in this case, it is expected to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a sample image display is displayed with a specific color scheme.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the 15th floor reception period (first non-display operation permissible period) according to the first modification, it is possible to accept operations for a plurality of operation sections including the sword ornament 5001. and the plurality of operation receptions are allowed for at least one operation section (operation button 410) among the plurality of operation sections, and the plurality of operation receptions are allowed. Even if the operation unit (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state, the operation is not accepted more than once. On the other hand, in the 17F reception period or a modification thereof (second non-display operation permission period), operation reception is allowed for a plurality of operation parts including the sword decoration 5001, and the operation reception for the plurality of operation parts For at least one of the operation parts (here, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410), multiple operations can be accepted, and the multiple operations can be accepted. If the operation unit is kept in the operated state, the operation reception can be performed multiple times (when the sword ornament 5001 is kept in the operated state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the automatic repeated hit function will be activated depending on whether or not the precursor effect display has been executed, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved. become.

Furthermore, in the 17F reception period of the above-mentioned production example or its modification (second non-display operation permissible period), there are multiple operation sections for which multiple operation receptions are permitted (here, the sword decoration 5001, operation button 410), if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the operation reception will be performed multiple times depending on the type of the operation part targeted for the operation (sword ornament 5001, operation button 410). Since there are cases where the operation is accepted (sword ornament 5001) and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times (operation button 410), it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example "17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341) or its variations (Figs. 349 to 351)", at the time when the 17F reception period or its variations occur, Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended, a specific type of production sound (for example, BGM production sound) may be suppressed or made inaudible before the 17th F reception period or its variations occur. However, during the ``15th reception period for the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)'', the Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the 15F reception period occurs, a specific type of production sound (for example, BGM production sound ) may be suppressed or inaudible, or may not be suppressed or inaudible. In this case, even if the appearance of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, it is desirable that the display after acceptance is the same as when it did not change.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 35-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001, and while the simulated image display is not displayed. It is possible to generate a "non-display operation permissible state" that includes a non-display operation section in which reception of operations on the sword decoration 5001 is permissible, and operations on the sword decoration 5001 are accepted in the "non-display operation permissible state". and a post-acceptance display UA can be displayed, and a reception acceptance sound indicating that the operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is in an acceptable state or that the operation acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 is in an acceptable state. It is possible to output. In this regard, in the "hidden operation allowed state", we have made it so that the acceptance sound may not be output when the "hidden operation allowed state" occurs. It becomes possible to suitably provide a sense of tension.

Moreover, in the "non-display operation permissible state" of the above-mentioned production example, the "non-display" state is a state in which it is possible to accept operations on the sword decoration 5001 while the replica image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed. In the case where both the "operation section" and the "display operation section" in which an image display imitating the sword decoration object 5001 is displayed and operations on the sword decoration object 5001 can be accepted are included. (The 15th floor reception period (see Figures 322 to 326), the 16th floor reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), the 17th floor reception period (see Figures 337 to 341) according to the first modification), or (such as those modified examples (Figs. 346 to 351)) and cases where the "display operation section" is not included but the "hidden operation section" is included (14F reception period (Figs. 315 to 318)). ) etc.). If the "hidden operation allowed state" does not include the "display operation section" but includes the "hidden operation section" (14th F acceptance period), then the "hidden operation allowed state" is If the acceptance permissible sound is not output when the "non-display operation permissible state" includes a "non-display operation section" and "display operation period", when the "non-display operation permissible state" occurs, There are cases in which the reception permission sound is output (16th F reception period, 17F reception period, or variations thereof) and cases in which the reception permission sound is not output (15F reception period according to the first modification). . That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, when the "14th F reception period (non-display section inclusion permissible state)" that does not include the "display operation period" occurs, the reception permissible sound is not output, so that the player cannot On the other hand, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the confidentiality of being in a state where operation acceptance is permitted. On the other hand, "the 15th F reception period, 16th F reception period, 17F reception period according to the first modification, or their modifications (hidden section inclusion permissible state)" that includes the "display operation section" When this occurs, there are both cases in which the reception permission sound is output and cases in which the reception permission sound is not output, which may affect the confidentiality of the state in which operation reception is permitted to the player. The level of production has become diverse, and this seems to be training for even beginners to be able to easily notice the highly confidential "hidden operation allowed state (hidden section inclusion allowed state)". People are now expected to provide performances in a natural way.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, the non-display operation permissible period (16th F reception period (Fig. 332 336), the 17th F reception period (see FIGS. 337 to 341), or variations thereof (FIGS. 346 to 351)), and both the "hidden operation section" and the "display operation section" is included and the reception permission sound is not output (the 15th F reception period (see FIGS. 322 to 326)). The subsequent display UA has different types of non-display operation permissible periods (first non-display operation permissible period, second non-display operation permissible period), does not include a "display operation period", and is a "non-display operation period". The hidden operation permissible period (the 14th F reception period (see Figures 315 to 318)) that includes is further prepared as a third hidden operation permissible period of a type different from any of the above types. It has become. Therefore, even if a "non-display operation period" appears, the type as an operation permissible period (reception period) is determined through production elements such as the presence or absence of reception permissible sound and whether or not a "display operation period" exists. You will be able to suggest.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, the acceptance permission sound is output when the non-display operation permissible period occurs, which includes the ``non-display operation period'' and the ``display operation period''. If the operation permissible period (16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341), or variations thereof (see Figures 346 to 351)) occurs, , the time as the "hidden operation period" is compared with that (time from timing to2 to timing to It was made to be shorter. In other words, in this case, if the reception permission sound is output, the confidentiality of the operation will be released relatively quickly, so even beginners can recognize the highly confidential ``hidden operation permission state (hidden operation permission state)''. It is now expected to provide a natural presentation that seems to be a training exercise to help people more easily notice the ``section inclusion permissible state''.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 36-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section), and the simulated image display is It is possible to generate a "hidden operation allowed state" that includes a "hidden operation section" in which operations on the sword ornament 5001 are allowed while the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed. When an operation for the decoration object 5001 is accepted, a post-acceptance display UA can be displayed. Further, it is possible to output an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the acceptance of operation on the sword ornament 5001 is in an acceptable state, or that the acceptance of operation on the sword ornament 5001 is in an acceptable state. ing. Then, as the "hidden operation allowed state", "15th floor reception period according to the first modification (first hidden operation allowed state)" and "17th floor reception period or its modification (second hidden operation allowed state)" are selected. )", and then, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see Figures 322 to 326)", the reception acceptance period corresponding to the "15F reception period according to the first modification" is prepared. Since no sound is output, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when the "non-display operation permissible state" occurs.

Furthermore, in the case of "Refer to the 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341) or its modifications (Figs. 349 to 351)", the reception permissible sound corresponding to the "17F reception period or its modifications" is In addition, both the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and the "17F reception period or its modification" include the sword ornament 5001. It includes a "display operation section" in which it is possible to accept operations on the sword ornament 5001 while the simulated image display is being displayed, and the "15th F acceptance period according to the first modification". Then, when the "hidden operation period (timing to2 to toX)" continues for the first time, the "hidden operation period (timing to to2 - to If it continues for a second time shorter than the first time, the "non-display operation period (timing tp2 to tpX)" will end while the "17F reception period or its modification" continues, and " display operation period (timing tqX to tq3). That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first hidden section inclusion permissible state)" and "17th F reception period or its modification (second hidden section inclusion permissible state)" ”, the time required to end the “hidden operation period” and move on to the “display operation period” will differ, so the tension when in the “hidden operation allowed state” will be reduced. It is expected that it will be maintained properly. On the other hand, since the non-display operation permissible state can be indicated by the presence or absence of the output of the reception permissive sound, it is expected to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Furthermore, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" of the above-mentioned production example, operation reception is allowed for multiple operation parts including the sword decoration 5001. and the plurality of operation receptions are allowed for at least one operation section (operation button 410) among the plurality of operation sections, and the plurality of operation receptions are allowed. Even if you continue to operate the operation unit (operation button 410), the operation will not be accepted multiple times (the automatic repeated press function will not be activated). 341) or its modifications (see FIGS. 349 to 351)", operation acceptance is allowed for a plurality of operation parts including the sword ornament 5001, and at least one of the plurality of operation parts One operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410) can accept multiple operations, and the operation unit that can accept multiple operations is If the operated state is continued, the operation reception can be performed multiple times (if the sword ornament 5001 is kept in the operated state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the automatic repeated hit function will be activated depending on whether or not the reception permission sound is audibly output, and it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes like this.

Furthermore, in the 17F reception period of the above-mentioned production example or its modification (second non-display operation permissible period), there are multiple operation sections for which multiple operation receptions are permitted (here, the sword decoration 5001, operation button 410), if the operation part is kept in the operated state, the operation reception will be performed multiple times depending on the type of the operation part targeted for the operation (sword ornament 5001, operation button 410). Since there are cases where the operation is accepted (sword ornament 5001) and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times (operation button 410), it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, a 14th F reception period (third non-display operation permissible period) is further prepared as a non-display operation permissible period, and the 14th F reception period (see FIGS. 315 to 318) In this case, while the simulated image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 is being displayed, there is no display operation section in which it is possible to accept operations on the sword decoration 5001, and the reception permission sound is not output. It has become. However, even during the 14F reception period (third non-display operation permissible period), there are multiple operation parts for which multiple operation receptions are permitted (here, the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410), and the corresponding operation If the part is kept in an operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times (sword decoration 5001) depending on the type of the operation part targeted for operation (sword decoration 5001, operation button 410). and when the operation is not accepted multiple times (operation button 410), it is suggested that the automatic repeated tap function may be enabled even when the acceptance acceptance sound is not audibly output. As a result, it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 37-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001, and while the simulated image display is being displayed, It is possible to generate a "display operation permissible state" that includes a "display operation section" in which reception of operations on the sword decoration 5001 is permissible, and operations on the sword decoration 5001 are accepted in the "display operation permissible state". After acceptance, the display UA can be displayed. Then, as the above-mentioned "display operation permissible state", "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first display operation permissible state)" and "16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or their modifications (first display operation permissible state)" 2 display operation permissible state)", and then prepare "16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341), or variations thereof (see Figure 346). ~ Figure 351)'', the imitation image of the sword ornament 5001 can be displayed in one of multiple display modes, creating a sense of tension when the ``display operation permissible state'' occurs. will be able to suitably provide the following.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 37-F", during the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", a replica image display of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. After making it possible to display only in one display mode, "15th F reception period according to the first modification", "16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), and 17F reception period" (Refer to FIGS. 337 to 341) or their modified examples (FIGS. 346 to 351)," both of which accept operations on the sword decoration 5001 while the replica image display imitating the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed. includes a "non-display operation period" in which is in an acceptable state, and in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", the "non-display operation period (timing to2 to toX)" extends over the first time. If it continues, the "non-display operation period (timings to2 to toX)" will end while the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" continues, and the "display operation period (timings toX to to3)" will end. ", and in the "16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or variations thereof", the "non-display operation period (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)" is shorter than the above first time. If it continues for the second time, the "non-display operation period (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)" continues while the "16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or a modification thereof" continues. is completed, and a transition is made to the "display operation period (timings tpX to tp3 or timings tqX to tq3)". That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first display section inclusion permissible state)", "16F reception period, 17F reception period, or their modifications (second display section inclusion state)" Since the time required from the end of the "hidden operation section" to the transition to the "display operation section" differs between the "section inclusion permissible state" and the "display operation permissible state". It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension. On the other hand, since these display operation permissible states can be suggested through the display mode of displaying a simulated image of the sword ornament 5001, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest can be suitably suppressed. Become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" where the "non-display operation section" is set as relatively long, the "non-display operation section" is set to be relatively long. The "display operation period" may also be set as a longer period of time compared to the "16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or variations thereof."

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 38-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section), and the simulated image display is It is possible to generate a "non-display section inclusion permissible state" that includes a "non-display operation section" in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are permissible while the sword ornament 5001 is not When an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, a post-acceptance display UA can be displayed. Then, as the "hidden section inclusion permissible state", "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first hidden section inclusion permissible state)" and "16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or variations thereof Example (second non-display section inclusion permissible state)" and then prepare at least the "15th F reception period (first display operation permissible state) according to the first modification" and the "16th F reception period (Figs. 332 to 332). 336), the 17th F reception period (see FIGS. 337 to 341), or their variations (FIGS. 346 to 351), a replica image display of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed. Since both the "display operation section" and the "non-display operation section" are included in the state in which operations on the sword ornament 5001 are permissible in It becomes possible to suitably provide a feeling of tension when a situation occurs.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned production example, an operation button 410 (specific operation section) different from the sword decoration body 5001 is further prepared, and "15F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326) ” and “16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336), 17th F reception period (see FIGS. 337 to 341), or variations thereof (FIGS. 346 to 351)” Both operation reception and operation reception on the operation button 410 are allowed. According to such a configuration, the tension during the "15th floor reception period according to the first modification", the "16th floor reception period, the 17th floor reception period, or any modification thereof" can be maintained more suitably. become expected to do so.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", the "non-display operation period (timing to2 to toX)" is set to the first time. If it continues for a long time, the "non-display operation period (timings to2 to to )", and when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the "non-display operation period (timing to2 to toX)", the output sound B can be outputted after acceptance using this as a trigger. (See FIG. 322(k), FIG. 323(k), etc.). On the other hand, in the ``16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336), 17th F reception period (see Figures 337 to 341), or variations thereof (Figs. 346 to 351),'' If the "operation period (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)" continues for a second time shorter than the first time, the "16th F reception period, 17th F reception period, or a modification thereof" continues. The "non-display operation period (timings tp2 to tpX or timings tq2 to tqX)" is completed during the process, and it is possible to move to the "display operation period (timings tpX to tp3 or timings tqX to tq3)," and When an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the "non-display operation period (timing tp2 to tpX or timing tq2 to tqX)", the post-acceptance output sound is not output using this as a trigger. According to such a configuration, the "hidden operation section" ends with the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" and the "16th F reception period, the 17th F reception period, or their modifications." Since the time required to transition to the "display operation section" will differ, it is expected that the tension when in the "hidden section inclusion permissible state" will be maintained appropriately. Become. On the other hand, since the state in which these hidden sections are allowed to be included can be indicated by the presence or absence of output sound after acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 in the "hidden operation section," It is now expected that the decline in interest will be suitably suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned production example, in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification (see FIGS. 322 to 326)", the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted during the display operation period (timing to2 to toX). Even in the event that the 16th F reception period (see Figures 332 to 336) In the 17th F reception period (see FIGS. 337 to 341) or variations thereof (FIGS. 346 to 351), the operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted in the display operation period (timings tpX to tp3 or timings tqX to tq3). Even if this happens, the output sound will not be output after acceptance. In other words, in this case, since the state of allowing inclusion of these non-display sections can be indicated by whether or not an output sound is output after acceptance when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 in the "display operation section", the interest in the game can be improved. It is now expected to suitably suppress the decline in

As mentioned above, in the 15th F reception period (see FIGS. 319 to 321) and its modified examples (FIGS. 322 to 331), when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, this triggers the 15th F reception period. There are cases where output sound B is output after reception, and cases where output sound B after reception on the 15th floor is not output. It goes without saying that this is a phenomenon that occurs in the absence of any state.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 ([Configuration 39-F]) according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001 (predetermined operation section), and the simulated image display is It is possible to generate a "hidden operation allowed state" that includes a "hidden operation section" in which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed while the sword decoration is not displayed. When an operation is accepted for 5001, a post-acceptance display UA can be displayed. Then, as the "hidden operation permissible state", "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first hidden operation permitted state)" and "16th F reception period or its modification (second hidden operation permitted state)" are selected. )", and in the 15th F reception period (see FIGS. 322 to 326) according to the first modification, if no operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Since the same post-reception display as when the reception was made is not displayed, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when the non-display operation permissible state occurs (Fig. 324 (h) ), see (i)).

Moreover, in the "16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336) or its modified examples (see FIGS. 346 to 348)" of the above-mentioned production example, there is a case where no operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001. However, the same 16F post-reception display UA as when the operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 can be displayed (see FIG. 334(h)). 15F reception period (see FIGS. 322 to 326)" and "16F reception period or variations thereof" both refer to the above sword decoration 500 while a replica image display of the sword decoration 500 is being displayed. It includes a "display operation period" in which operation acceptance is permissible, and in the "15th F reception period according to the first modification", the "non-display operation period (timing to2 to tpX)" is the first If it continues for a period of time, the "non-display operation period (timing to2 to tpX)" will end while the "15th F reception period according to the first modification" continues, and the "display operation period (timing toX to tpX)" will end. tp3)", and in the "16th F reception period or its modification", if the "non-display operation period (timing tp2 to tpX)" continues for a second time period shorter than the first time period, the "16th While the ``16F reception period or its modified example'' continues, the ``non-display operation period (timing tp2 to tpX)'' will be ended and the transition will be made to the ``display operation period (timing tpX to tp3).'' did. That is, in this case, the above-mentioned "non-display operation permissible state" should be more accurately referred to as "non-display section inclusion permissible state." According to such a configuration, "15th F reception period according to the first modification (first hidden section inclusion permissible state)" and "16th F reception period or its modification (second hidden section inclusion permissible state)" ”, the time required to end the “hidden operation period” and move on to the “display operation period” will differ, so the tension when in the “hidden operation allowed state” will be reduced. It is expected that it will be maintained properly. On the other hand, since it is possible to indicate whether or not the automatic button function will be enabled through the time required to move to the "display operation section," it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in gaming interest. become expected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the type of the non-display operation permissible period in which the non-display operation section ends at the above-mentioned first time is "15F reception period according to the first modification (Figs. 322 to 326)". )" may be provided. On the other hand, the types of the non-display operation permissible period in which the non-display operation period ends at the second time are the 16th F reception period (see FIGS. 332 to 336) or its modified examples (FIGS. 346 to 346). 348)", a "third non-display operation permissible state" may be further provided. In this regard, in the "third non-display operation permissible state", if the "non-display operation section" continues for the second time period, which is shorter than the first time, the "third non-display operation permissible state" continues. The "non-display operation section" is ended and the transition is made to the "display operation section" during the "third non-display operation permissible state", and if no operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 in the "third non-display operation allowed state", the corresponding If the same post-reception display as when the operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed, the time required to move to the “display operation section” would have been the “second time”. However, since the automatic button function will be activated and not activated at times, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In this case, "15th F reception period according to the first modification (between the first non-display operation permissible state)", "16F reception period or its modification (between the second non-display operation permissible state)", and " In the third non-display operation permissible state, it is desirable that the post-acceptance changes (post-acceptance display UA) in response to the acceptance of the operation on the sword ornament 5001 be different.

[Acceptance permissible period having at least one of configurations 1G to 33G]
As explained using FIG. 118 as an example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot. A variable performance based on decorative patterns according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessory performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the player receives a special benefit. It becomes possible to perform a jackpot game or transition to a high probability game state.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), a reception permission state (validity period) in which production reception is permitted can occur.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the reception acceptance state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is performed as a performance (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state in which acceptance of a movement (operation) by a player is permitted when a predetermined condition is met, and within the acceptance acceptance state. When an action (operation) by a player is accepted in the game, changes after the acceptance (change in display, acceptance output sound, effect light emission, etc.) can occur depending on the type of acceptance permission state that has occurred. .

In addition, in the reception permissible state, it can only appear when the operation reception on the operation unit is permitted (reception permissible period) or when the operation reception is permissible (reception permissible period). Operation-related displays can be displayed. Examples of such operation-related displays include, but are not limited to, a simulated image display in which an object (operation means) that is the target of an action (operation) by a player is expressed as an image. , any image display may be used as long as it always gives the player an opportunity to operate the image when displayed. Regarding the "operation-related display (sample image display)", there are multiple modes with different expectations (for example, multiple color schemes such as white and red), and one of these multiple modes is selectively displayed. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, "operation-related display" refers to a state in which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted (acceptance permissible period), or when the operation is in a state in which the operation reception is permitted (acceptance permissible period). Therefore, at least when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the reception permissive state necessarily occurs or the permissible state is required at the time of the display. Therefore, while the "operation-related display" is being displayed, the acceptance permission state may be terminated before the "operation-related display" is hidden. Further, as such "operation related display", multiple types of image displays may be prepared, and both of these image displays may be displayed in the acceptance permission state.

In addition, in the acceptance permission state, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which actions (operations) by the player are allowed to be accepted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be performed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. As the aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of aspects (for example, the speed of decrease in the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.) are prepared, and these aspects are prepared. It may be configured to be executed by either of the following. In this case, different expectations (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may be suggested depending on which mode the game is executed.

In addition, when a reception permissible state occurs, a precursor effect indicating that the player will be given an opportunity to perform an action (suggesting that a reception permissible state will occur) may be performed prior to this. has been done. The foreshadowing performance is, for example, performed by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 or outputting a corresponding sound.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (validity period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. Furthermore, no matter which result is obtained as a preview performance determination, a variation pattern may be provided that generates an acceptance permission state (validity period) at a predetermined timing before SP reach.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and the examples described below, the "operation (movement) by the player" to be detected refers to the operation (movement) by the player such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword ornament 5001." It is not limited to things that are directly manipulated (pressing motions or sword drawing motions), but also "touch motions by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "in a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes ``actions by the player in the game''. In short, the "operation means" may include one or more receiving means (operation units) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.). Bye.

By the way, the acceptance permission state (validity period) according to this embodiment includes different types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound, and the presence or absence of output, different audible output status of BGM, Various types of reception permissible states, such as the number of times that operation reception is allowed within the permissible state (validity period) is different, and whether or not the automatic repeated press function or automatic button function is enabled is different. (validity period) is provided.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special performance is provided between a plurality of reception permission states, so that the performance when the reception permission state occurs is enhanced. The system also maintains a sense of tension when the reception permissive state occurs. Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to suppress the decline in It is also possible to adopt the configurations described as "preferred applications" as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest related to the reception acceptance state may be used.

[Configuration 1-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, and in the operation permission state, the specific operation part When an operation is accepted, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation can be displayed. In this regard, if the post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation on a specific operation unit is displayed and the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is output, the specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed. If the specific condition is satisfied, the post-reception display will be hidden, so for example, even if you want to see a different effect display than the post-reception display. If a situation occurs where the post-acceptance display makes it difficult to see other performance displays, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time. Note that the "specific operation section" and "specific conditions" related to the configuration 1-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-G. Therefore, "specific operation section" and "specific condition" regarding other configurations may mean the same operation section and the same conditions, respectively, or may mean different operation sections and different conditions. good. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "condition" as the operation section or condition with a different name related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit" in the operation permission state, a corresponding post-acceptance output sound is output when a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is performed. There may be cases where the output sound is not output after the reception, and cases where the output sound is not output after the reception. If the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is output when the post-acceptance display is performed, and the 'specific condition' is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the 'specific condition' is ” is established, the said post-reception display is hidden, but if the corresponding post-reception output sound is not output when the above-mentioned post-reception display is performed, the above-mentioned post-reception display is hidden. If the "specific condition" is satisfied while being displayed, the post-acceptance display may not be hidden but may be continuously displayed using the fulfillment of the "specific condition" as a trigger. According to such a configuration, when the "specific condition" is satisfied, the post-reception display is triggered by determining whether or not the corresponding post-reception output sound is output when performing the post-reception display. It is now possible to make suggestions as to whether or not the information should be hidden, which is expected to improve the game's interest.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, especially if the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is output when the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is performed, the "specific condition" is set while the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is displayed. If the "specific condition" is satisfied, the post-reception display will be hidden, but if the corresponding post-reception output sound is not output when the above-mentioned post-reception display is performed, , If the "specific condition" is satisfied while the above-mentioned post-reception display is being displayed, the post-reception display will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed, triggered by the fulfillment of the "specific condition". There may be both a case where the post-reception display is hidden when the "specific condition" is satisfied. According to such a configuration, when the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is output when the post-acceptance display is performed, if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, While the post-reception display can always be hidden when the "specific condition" is met, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not output when the above-mentioned post-reception display is performed. In this case, if the "specific conditions" are met while the above post-reception display is displayed, it will be kept secret whether or not the post-reception display will be hidden when the "specific conditions" are met. Since students will be able to do this, they will be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned post-reception display, the corresponding post-reception output sound is output, and when performing the above-mentioned post-reception display, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not output. Furthermore, the above-mentioned "display after reception" which is hidden when a specific condition is met when the output sound is not output after reception, and the "display after reception" when the output sound is not output after reception. The above-mentioned "post-reception display" in which the display is not turned off when a specific condition is met may be a different effect display. However, these "post-reception displays" may be displayed as the same "post-reception display", and in this case, even though they are the same effect display (post-reception display), specific Since it will be possible to indicate whether the display will be hidden or not hidden when the conditions are met through the presence or absence of the output sound after acceptance, it will improve the enjoyment of gaming. They will be expected to improve their skills.

[Configuration 2-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation section (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, and a sample image of the specific operation section is created. Display can be executed, and when an operation is accepted for the specific operation section in the operation permission state, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed. In this regard, in the operation permissible state, there are cases where a sample image display imitating the above-mentioned specific operation section is displayed, and cases where a sample image display copying the above-mentioned specific operation section is not displayed. If a post-reception display corresponding to an operation reception on the specific operation unit is displayed while the above-mentioned simulated image display is being displayed, and the specific condition is satisfied while the post-reception display is being displayed, Since the post-reception display is hidden when the specific condition is met, for example, even if you want to see a different effect display than the post-reception display, If a situation occurs in which the display makes it difficult to see other performance displays, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time. Note that the "specific operation unit" and "specific conditions" related to the configuration 2-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-G. Therefore, "specific operation section" and "specific condition" regarding other configurations may mean the same operation section and the same conditions, respectively, or may mean different operation sections and different conditions. good. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "condition" as the operation section or condition with a different name related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the above-mentioned post-reception display in response to an operation reception for the "specific operation section" is displayed while the above-mentioned sample image display imitating the "specific operation section" is displayed, the corresponding If the "specific condition" is met while the "specific condition" is being displayed, the "specific condition" will be triggered and the "specific condition" will be hidden, but the "specific operation section" will not be displayed. If the post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation on the "specific operation section" is displayed while the above-mentioned sampled image display is not displayed, the "specific condition" is displayed while the post-acceptance display is displayed. If the "specific condition" is satisfied, the post-reception display may be continuously displayed without being hidden. According to such a configuration, when the "specific condition" is satisfied through whether or not the above-mentioned image display replicating the "specific operation section" is displayed when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section" Taking this as an opportunity, it becomes possible to make a suggestion as to whether the post-acceptance display should be hidden, and it is expected that this will improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, especially when the above-mentioned image display imitating the "specific operation section" is displayed, and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception of an operation for the "specific operation section" is displayed. , if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will be hidden when the specific condition is met, but if the "specific operation section" is If the above-mentioned sample image display is not displayed and a post-reception display is displayed in response to an operation received on the "specific operation section," if the "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is displayed. There are cases where the post-reception display is not hidden and continues to be displayed when the "specific conditions" are met, and cases where the post-reception display is hidden when the "specific conditions" are met. It may be possible to have both the display and the display. According to such a configuration, if the above-mentioned simulated image display imitating the "specific operation section" is displayed when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", after the above-mentioned reception in response to the operation reception is If a "specific condition" is met while a display is being displayed, the "specific condition" can be used as an opportunity to always hide the display after acceptance. If the above-mentioned sample image display that simulates the "Specific operation section" is not displayed when an operation is accepted for the "Specific operation section", the "Specific condition ” is satisfied, it becomes possible to keep secret whether or not the post-reception display should be hidden when the “specific condition” is met, so that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. become expected to do so.

In addition, while the above-mentioned image display imitating the "specific operation section" is being displayed, the "post-reception display" in response to an operation being accepted for the "specific operation section" and the "specific operation section" are shown. While the above-mentioned sample image display is not being displayed, the ``post-reception display'' is displayed in response to an operation reception for the ``specific operation section,'' and furthermore, the above-mentioned sample image display that simulates the ``specific operation section'' is displayed. When the above-mentioned "post-reception display" and the above-mentioned simulated image display that simulates the "specific operation section" are not displayed when the "specific conditions" are met when the "specific operation section" is not displayed. Regarding the above-mentioned "post-reception display" in which the display is not hidden when the "specific condition" is satisfied, a different effect display may be used. However, these "post-reception displays" may be displayed as the same "post-reception display", and in this case, even though they are the same effect display (post-reception display), specific To improve the enjoyment of games by making it possible to indicate through the presence or absence of a simulated image display that the display will be hidden or not hidden when a condition is met. becomes expected.

[Configuration 3-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the player performs an operation on the operation means and accepts the operation as a valid operation, it is determined that the operation has been accepted. There are cases where the post-reception display is displayed even when no operation has been received, and there are cases where the post-reception display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted. There is. In this regard, if the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted under conditions where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted, the post-acceptance display will not be displayed. If a specific condition is met while the user is waiting, the post-reception display can be hidden using the fulfillment of the specific condition as a trigger. However, if a situation arises in which the post-reception display makes it difficult to see other effects, it is expected that this will prevent the decline in gaming interest at that time. It becomes like this. Note that the "operating means" and "specific conditions" related to the configuration 3-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-G. Therefore, the "operating means" and "specific conditions" related to other configurations may mean the same operating section and the same conditions, or may mean different operating sections and different conditions. . In addition, it may mean the same "operation section" or "condition" as the operation section or condition with a different name related to another configuration, or it may mean the same "operation section" or "condition" as the operation section or condition with a different name related to other configurations. The operating section may be prepared, and the "operating means" having these operating sections may have the structure described in the above configuration 3-G as a whole.

In this case, as will be described later, if the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the operation being accepted under conditions where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted, then after the acceptance If the "specific condition" is satisfied while the display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display may be made to be in a non-display state using the fulfillment of the "specific condition" as a trigger. In this regard, if the post-acceptance display is displayed under conditions where the post-acceptance display can be displayed even if no operation is accepted, the post-acceptance display is Even if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the "specific condition" is being displayed, the post-acceptance display may not be hidden when the "specific condition" is satisfied. According to such a configuration, a "specific condition" is established after the execution of the post-reception display is established to determine whether the so-called automatic button function is enabled and the post-reception display is being executed. Since it becomes possible to make suggestions based on this, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even after the operation is accepted.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, if the post-acceptance display is displayed based on the operation being accepted under conditions where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted, If a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, there are cases where the post-reception display is not hidden and continues to be displayed after the specific condition is met, and cases where the post-reception display is not hidden but continues to be displayed. There may also be a case where the post-acceptance display is hidden when the acceptance is established. In this regard, if the post-reception display is displayed without an operation being accepted, even if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the "specific conditions" will not be triggered. As a result, the post-reception display may not be hidden. According to such a configuration, when the post-reception display is displayed by the so-called automatic button function, even if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-reception display is displayed, the "specific condition" is not met. The "post-reception display displayed by the automatic button function" is not hidden when the operation is established, but under the condition that the "post-reception display displayed by the automatic button function" is not displayed unless the operation is accepted (automatic button If the post-reception display is displayed based on the operation being accepted under conditions (conditions in which the function is not enabled), the above-mentioned post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. When the "specific conditions" are met, it becomes possible to keep secret whether or not to hide the post-reception display after the "specific conditions" are met, creating a sense of tension. It is now expected that the company will maintain the appropriate conditions.

[Configuration 4-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation is accepted based on the operation on the operating means multiple times, the operation is accepted each time the operation is accepted. It is possible to perform post-acceptance display depending on the situation. In this regard, in a situation where multiple operation acceptances based on operations on the operating means are allowed, there are cases where the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times just by keeping the operating means in an operated state, and when the operation means is Even if the operated state is maintained, the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times. In addition, under conditions where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is maintained in an operated state, the post-acceptance display is performed based on the fact that an operation has been accepted based on the operation on the operating means. When executed, if a "specific condition" is satisfied while the above-mentioned post-reception display is being executed, the above-mentioned post-reception display can be hidden when the "specific condition" is satisfied. As a result, for example, a situation may occur where the post-reception display makes it difficult to see the other performance display even though the user wants to see the other performance display rather than the post-reception display. If so, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time. Note that the "operating means" and "specific conditions" related to the configuration 4-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-G. Therefore, the "operating means" and "specific conditions" related to other configurations may mean the same operating section and the same conditions, or may mean different operating sections and different conditions. . In addition, it may mean the same "operation section" or "condition" as the operation section or condition with a different name related to another configuration, or it may mean the same "operation section" or "condition" as the operation section or condition with a different name related to other configurations. The above-mentioned "operating means" having these operating sections may have the structure described in the above-mentioned configuration 4-G.

In this case, as will be described later, under the condition that the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is maintained in an operated state, the post-acceptance display indicates that an operation has not been accepted based on the operation on the operating means. If the "specific conditions" are met while the "post-reception display" is being executed, the "specific conditions" will be met and the "post-reception display" will be hidden. However, the post-reception display maintains the operation means in the operated state under conditions where the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by maintaining the operating means in the operated state. , even if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is being executed, the post-reception display will be hidden when the "specific conditions" are met. You may choose not to do so. According to such a configuration, a "specific condition" is established after the execution of the post-reception display is established to determine whether or not the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled and the post-reception display is being executed. Since it becomes possible to make suggestions based on this, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even after the operation is accepted.

As will be described later, in this case, the post-reception display is based on the operation on the operation means, especially under conditions where the above-mentioned post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in an operated state. If the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation, if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-reception display is being executed, the post-reception display will be triggered by the fulfillment of the "specific condition". There may be both a case where the display is not hidden and continues to be displayed, and a case where the display after the reception is made to be hidden when the "specific condition" is satisfied. In this regard, in a situation where the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by maintaining the operation means in the operated state, the post-reception display is executed based on the operation means being maintained in the operated state. In this case, even if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is being executed, the post-reception display will be hidden when the "specific conditions" are met. You can make sure that this does not happen. According to such a configuration, when the post-reception display is displayed by the so-called auto-repeating function, even if the "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the "specific condition" is not met. Although the "post-reception display displayed by the automatic continuous tap function" will not be hidden when the transaction is established, the above-mentioned "post-reception display" will not be hidden even if the operation means is kept in the operated state. If the post-reception display is displayed based on the operation being accepted under conditions where the auto-repeat function is not activated, the above-mentioned reception in response to the operation is accepted. If the "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to hide whether or not the post-reception display will be hidden when the "specific condition" is met. As a result, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 5-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when acceptance of an operation on the operating means is permitted, a simulated image display of the operating means can be displayed, and the operation on the operating means is accepted. Then, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed. In this respect, the sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear, and there are two cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time", and a case in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time". In some cases, the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed so as to appear in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", and when the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", an operation is not accepted for the operation means. is performed and a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, and if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the fulfillment of the "specific conditions" triggers the Since the post-reception display can be hidden, for example, even if you want to see another effect display rather than the after-reception display, the post-reception display makes it difficult to see the other effect display. If such a situation were to occur, it would be expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time. Note that the terms "operating means", "specific conditions", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to configuration 5-G are used to explain the technical idea of configuration 5-G. It's just a name. Therefore, "operating means", "specific conditions", "predetermined time", and "time longer than predetermined time" regarding other configurations may mean the same operating unit, the same conditions, and the same time, respectively. , may mean different operating units, different conditions, or different times. In addition, it may mean the same "operation section,""condition," or "time" as a different name for an operation section, condition, or time related to another configuration, or it may mean the same as "operation section,""condition," or "time," or the above-mentioned items that are to be operated by the player. A plurality of operating sections may be prepared as the "operating means", and the "operating means" including these operating sections may have the configuration described in the above configuration 5-G.

In this case, as will be described later, an operation is accepted for the operation means when the periodic change in the sample image display appears in units of the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time", and the operation is accepted. If the post-reception display is displayed, if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will be hidden when the "specific conditions" are met. However, when the periodic change in the sample image display is being displayed so as to appear in units of the above-mentioned "predetermined time", an operation is accepted for the operating means, and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. In this case, even if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will not be hidden when the "specific conditions" are met. Good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest what kind of periodic changes the sample image display has undergone by satisfying the "specific condition" even after the execution of the post-reception display has started. As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even after the operation is accepted.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, when periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", an operation is accepted for the operating means, and the operation is accepted. If the corresponding post-reception display is displayed, if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will be hidden when the "specific conditions" are met. There may be both a case where the display is continued without being set, and a case where the post-acceptance display is hidden when the specific condition is met. In this regard, if a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time" and an operation is accepted for the operation means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, Even if a "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will not be hidden due to the fulfillment of the "specific condition". You can. According to such a configuration, if an operation is accepted and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed while the sample image display is being displayed in a manner in which periodic changes are relatively fast, after the acceptance Even if the "specific condition" is met while the display is being displayed, the display will not be hidden after the reception of the "specific condition". If an operation is accepted and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed while the sample image display is displayed in a manner in which the target changes are relatively slow, the above-mentioned post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. If the "specific conditions" are met while the "specific conditions" are met, it will be possible to hide whether or not the post-reception display will be hidden after the "specific conditions" are met. Therefore, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 6-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when accepting an operation by a player is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operation target, and when accepting an operation by a player is allowed. When this is done, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance can be displayed. In this regard, the post-reception display can be displayed in any one of multiple post-reception displays, including the "first post-reception display" and "second post-reception display," and the post-reception display can be displayed as the "second reception display." If the "specific condition" is met while the "second post-reception display" is displayed, the "second display" will be displayed as a result of the "specific condition" being met. Since the "display after reception" can be hidden, for example, even if you want to see a different effect display than "display after second reception", the "display after reception" If a situation were to occur where other performance displays were made difficult to recognize due to the "display", it would be expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time. The "specific conditions", "first post-acceptance display", and "second post-acceptance display" related to configuration 6-G are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 6-G. It's just a name. Therefore, the "specific conditions", "first post-reception display", and "second post-reception display" related to other configurations may mean the same conditions or post-reception display, respectively, or may be different. It may mean a condition or a display after acceptance. In addition, conditions with different names related to other configurations may mean the same "condition" as "post-reception display" or "post-reception display." Further, a plurality of operation units may be prepared as objects to be operated by the player, and the entire operation objects may have the configuration described in the above configuration 6-G.

In this case, as will be described later, if the post-reception display is displayed as a "second post-reception display", if the "specific condition" is met while the "second post-reception display" is displayed, , the "second post-reception display" may be hidden when the "specific conditions" are met, but if the post-reception display is displayed as the "first post-reception display" , even if the "specific conditions" are met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" will be disabled when the "specific conditions" are met. It may also be configured so that it is not displayed. According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception display starts, it is possible to indicate whether or not the post-reception display can be hidden by satisfying the "specific condition". Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

As will be described later, in this case, especially if the post-reception display is displayed as a "second post-reception display", the "specific condition" is displayed while the "second post-reception display" is displayed. is met, the "second post-reception display" will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed, triggered by the fulfillment of the "specific condition"; and The "second post-acceptance display" may be hidden. In this regard, if the post-reception display is displayed as the "first post-reception display", even if the "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" is displayed. The "first post-reception display" may not be hidden when the "specific condition" is satisfied. According to such a configuration, even if the "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" is triggered by the "specific condition" being met. While the "display after reception" is never hidden, if the "specific condition" is met while the "second display after reception" is displayed, the "specific condition" is met. Taking this opportunity, it will be possible to keep secret whether or not the "second post-reception display" will be hidden, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Become.

[Configuration 7-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when accepting an operation by a player is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operation target, and when accepting an operation by a player is allowed. When this is done, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance can be displayed. In this regard, the post-reception display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of post-reception displays, including the "first post-reception display" and "second post-reception display", and the post-reception display is "first reception display". If the "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" will be displayed as a result of the "specific condition" being met. For example, even if you want to see a different effect display than the "display after the first reception", the "display after the first reception" is hidden. If a situation were to occur where other performance displays were made difficult to recognize due to the "display", it would be expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time. Note that the "specific conditions", "first post-reception display", and "second post-reception display" related to configuration 7-G are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 7-G. It's just a name. Therefore, the "specific conditions", "first post-reception display", and "second post-reception display" related to other configurations may mean the same conditions or post-reception display, respectively, or may be different. It may also mean a condition or display after acceptance. In addition, conditions with different names related to other configurations may mean the same "condition" as "post-reception display" or "post-reception display." Further, a plurality of operation units may be prepared as objects to be operated by the player, and the entire operation objects may have the configuration described in the above configuration 7-G.

In this case, as will be described later, if the post-reception display is displayed as the "first post-reception display", if the "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, , the "first post-reception display" is hidden when the "specific conditions" are met, but if the post-reception display is displayed as the "second post-reception display" , even if the "specific condition" is met while the "second post-reception display" is displayed, the "second post-reception display" will be disabled when the "specific condition" is met. It may be arranged so that the display state may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception display starts, it is possible to indicate whether or not the post-reception display can be hidden by satisfying the "specific condition". Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

As will be described later, in this case, especially if the post-reception display is displayed as the "first post-reception display", the "specific condition" is displayed while the "first post-reception display" is displayed. If the "specific condition" is satisfied, the "first post-reception display" may always be set to a hidden state, triggered by the "specific condition" being satisfied. In this regard, if the post-reception display is displayed as the "second post-reception display", if the "specific condition" is met while the "second post-reception display" is displayed, the "specific condition" is ” is met and the "second reception display" is not hidden but continues to be displayed, and when the "specific conditions" are met, the "second reception display" is There may be both a case where the "later display" is hidden and a case where the "rear display" is hidden. According to such a configuration, if the "specific condition" is met while the "first post-reception display" is displayed, the "first post-reception display" is triggered by the "specific condition" being met. While the "display" is always hidden, if the "specific condition" is met while the "second display after reception" is displayed, the "specific condition" is met and the Since it becomes possible to keep secret whether or not the "second post-reception display" is to be hidden, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 8-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation is performed on the operating means when the operation is permitted on the operating means, the operation is accepted. It is possible to display a display after reception according to the operation means, and it is possible to display a model image display that simulates the operation means, and when the model image display is set to a non-display state, the model image display is set to a non-display state. It is possible to display a ``disappearance effect display'' that is a separate image display from the sample image display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display until the sample image is displayed. At the time when the display starts, the display may continue to be displayed without being turned into a hidden state. However, in this case, if the display of the simulated image continues even after the operation is accepted, there is a concern that other effect displays may be difficult to see not only by the display after acceptance but also by the display of the simulated image. In this regard, if the "specific conditions" are met while the sample image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the sample image display and the post-reception display will be hidden when the "specific conditions" are met. When the sample image display is set to a non-display state, a "disappearance effect display" that is a separate image display from the sample image display may be displayed, and a Since the ``vanishing effect display'' as a separate image display is sometimes not displayed, it is expected that the above-mentioned concerns will be suitably suppressed while maintaining a good sense of tension. Become so. Note that the "specific conditions" and "disappearance effect display" related to the configuration 8-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-G. Therefore, the "specific conditions" and "disappearance effect display" related to other configurations may mean the same conditions and disappear effect display, respectively, or may mean different conditions and disappear effect display. good. In addition, it may mean a condition with a different name related to another configuration, the same "condition" as the disappearing effect display, or a "disappearing effect display," or the above-mentioned "operating means" to be operated by the player. '', a plurality of operating sections may be prepared, and the above-mentioned "operating means" including these operating sections may have the structure described in the above-mentioned structure 8-G.

In this case, as will be described later, if the "specific conditions" are met while the sample image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the sample image display and post-reception display will be triggered by the fulfillment of the "specific conditions". There may be both a case where the display is hidden and a case where the sample image display and the post-reception display are not hidden when the "specific condition" is met. According to such a configuration, whether or not the sample image display and the post-reception display are hidden when the "specific condition" is met becomes secret, which creates a sense of tension. It is now expected that the company will maintain the appropriate conditions.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, even if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the sample image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the sample image display and If the display after acceptance is not hidden and the sample image display is subsequently made invisible (due to another condition such as the passage of time), the sample image display may be displayed as a separate image display from the sample image display. There are both cases where the "disappearance effect display" is displayed and cases where the "disappearance effect display" which is a separate image display from the sample image display is not displayed, but the sample image display and the post-reception display are displayed. If the sample image display and post-reception display are hidden due to the fulfillment of "specific conditions" while may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the "disappearance effect display" is not displayed when the sample image display and the post-acceptance display are hidden, the sample image display is triggered when the "specific condition" is satisfied. There are both cases in which the display after reception is hidden, and cases in which the display of the sample image and the display after reception are hidden without any "specific conditions" being triggered. It is now expected that the company will maintain the appropriate conditions.

[Configuration 9-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation permission state can be generated in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation permission state, a "specific operation part" can be generated. When an operation for the "specific operation section" is accepted, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and a simulated image display imitating the "specific operation section" can be displayed. In this regard, the sample image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of color schemes including the "first color scheme" and the "second color scheme", and in the state where multiple operations are allowed, the sample image display can be displayed in the "first color scheme". '' and ``second color scheme'', the post-reception display can be executed multiple times by simply keeping the ``specific operation section'' operated, which improves the enjoyment of the game. It is now expected that the company will maintain the appropriate conditions. The "specific operation unit", "specific conditions", "first color scheme", and "second color scheme" related to the configuration 9-G are names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-G. It's nothing more than that. Therefore, the "specific operation section", "specific condition", "first color scheme", and "second color scheme" related to other configurations may mean the same operation section, condition, and color scheme, respectively, or may mean different It may also mean an operating section, conditions, or color scheme. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operation section,""condition," or "color arrangement" as the operation section, condition, or color arrangement of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a state where multiple operations are allowed, there are cases where the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by maintaining the operation means in the operated state, and cases where the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by keeping the operation means in the operated state. Even if the display after acceptance is not executed multiple times, in the state where multiple operations are allowed, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the state in which the "specific operation section" is operated If the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", the post-reception display will be executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated. There may be both cases in which the display after reception is executed multiple times and cases in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation section" in an operated state. According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, whereas the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme". In this case, whether or not the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled or not is kept secret, and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 10-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation permission state can be generated in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation permission state, a "specific operation part" can be generated. When an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and the state becomes acceptable for operation reception for the "specific operation section", or the operation for the "specific operation section" can be displayed. It is possible to output a specific reception acceptance sound indicating that the reception is in an acceptable state. In this regard, when the multiple operation permissible state occurs, there are cases where the "specific reception permissible sound" is output and cases where the "specific reception permissible sound" is not output. Regardless of whether the "Specific Reception Allowed Sound" is output or the "Specific Reception Allowed Sound" is not output, simply keep the "Specific Operation Section" operated to display the post-reception display. Since the game can be executed multiple times, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game can be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit" and "specific reception permissible sound" related to the configuration 10-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-G. Therefore, the "specific operation part" and "specific reception permissible sound" related to other configurations may mean the same operation part and reception permissible sound, respectively, or may mean different operation parts and reception permissible sound. It may be something. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "acceptance permission sound" as a different name of the operation section or reception permission sound related to another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, if the "specific reception permissible sound" is output when the multiple operation permissible state occurs, the state in which the "specific operation section" is operated in the multiple operation permissible state The post-reception display may be executed multiple times just by maintaining the information. In addition, if the "specific reception permissible sound" is not output when the multiple operation permissible state occurs, the post-reception display can be displayed by simply maintaining the "specific operation section" operated in the multiple operation permissible state. may be executed multiple times, and there may be cases where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" operated. According to such a configuration, when the "specific reception permissible sound" is output, the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, whereas when the "specific reception permissible sound" is not output, Since whether or not the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled or not will be kept secret, it will be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 11-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation permission state can be generated in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation permission state, a "specific operation part" can be generated. When an operation is accepted for a specific operation section, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed. ``Multiple termination permissible state'', which may be terminated based on the specified operation, and ``Multiple continuation permissible state'', which continues until the set time elapses regardless of whether the operation is accepted on the ``specific operation section''. , even if either of the above-mentioned "multiple-time completion permissible state" or the above-mentioned "multiple-time continuation permissible state" occurs as the multiple operation permissible state, simply by maintaining the "specific operation part" in the operated state. Since the post-acceptance display can be executed multiple times, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game can be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation section" according to the configuration 11-G is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation section as the "specific operation section" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation section. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" as a different name operation section in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the above-mentioned "multiple end permissible state" occurs as a multiple operation permissible state, simply maintain the "specific operation section" in the state in which the multiple operation permissible state occurs. The post-reception display may be executed multiple times. In addition, if the above-mentioned "multiple operation permissible state" occurs as a multiple operation permissible state, the display after reception will be displayed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation section" operated in the multiple operation permissible state. There may be both cases in which the post-acceptance display is executed and cases in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation section" in an operated state. According to such a configuration, the so-called auto-repeat function is always enabled in the "multiple termination permissible state" which can be terminated prematurely due to an operation by the player, whereas In the "multiple continuation allowed state" that does not end, whether or not the so-called auto-repeated hit function is enabled will be kept secret, so it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. .

[Configuration 12-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted, and in the operation permission state, operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted. When the operation is accepted, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and when operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, a simulated image display imitating the "specific operation section" can be displayed. , it is possible to execute a precursor effect display that suggests in advance that operation acceptance for the "specific operation section" is permitted, and when an operation permissible state occurs, a precursor effect display is executed and a precursor effect display is executed. There are cases where it is not. In this regard, the operation permissible state occurs in two cases: a "single operation permissible state" in which an operation is allowed to be accepted only once for a "specific operation part", and a "single operation permissible state" in which an operation is allowed to be accepted for a "specific operation part" multiple times. The sample image can be displayed so that periodic changes appear, and in the "single operation allowed state," the periodic changes may occur in a "predetermined state." In the "multiple operation permissible state", the periodic change can be displayed so as to appear in "predetermined time" units, and "multiple operation Regardless of whether the foreshadowing effect is displayed when the "acceptable state" occurs or the foreshadowing effect is not displayed, all you have to do is keep the "specific operation section" in the operated state. Since the display can be executed a plurality of times, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to the configuration 12-G are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 12-G. do not have. Therefore, "specific operation part", "predetermined time", and "time longer than predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same operation part or time, or different operation parts or time. It may mean something. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" or "time" as the operation section or time with different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, there are cases in which the cyclical changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" in the "multiple operation permissible state", and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time", and The information may be displayed in units of "time" or both. According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the "single operation permissible state" and the "multiple operation permissible state" are established. Since it is possible to keep secret which of these events is occurring, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, especially if the precursor effect display is executed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, the "specific operation section" is operated in the "multiple operation permissible state". The post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times by simply maintaining the status. In addition, if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, simply maintain the "specific operation section" operated state in the "multiple operation permissible state" to display the display after reception. may be executed multiple times, and there may be cases where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation unit" operated. According to such a configuration, when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs and the precursor effect display is displayed, the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, whereas the "multiple operation permissible state" ” occurs and no warning effect display is displayed, whether or not the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled or not will be kept secret, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. It becomes like this.

In addition, even if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In this case, the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times when the "specific operation section" is maintained in an operated state. According to such a configuration, even if the precursor effect display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, the periodic change in the sample image display will continue for "a period longer than a predetermined time". When displayed in units, it is possible to suggest that the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and suppress a drop in interest in the game. Become so.

In addition, even if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, the display after the reception of the operation will be hidden based on the establishment of the "specific condition". In this case, the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times when the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state. According to such a configuration, if the precursor effect display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, or if the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, the reception will be accepted based on the establishment of the "specific conditions". Since there is a possibility that the later display may be hidden, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game.

[Configuration 13-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation permission state can be generated in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation permission state, a "specific operation part" can be generated. When an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and when the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, a sample image of the "specific operation section" can be displayed. It is possible to display a display, and it is possible to perform a premonitory effect display that indicates in advance that operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted, and the sample image display indicates that operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted. Sometimes it is displayed when the operation reception is permitted, and sometimes it is not displayed when the operation acceptance is permitted.When the operation permission state occurs multiple times, the precursor effect display may be executed or the precursor effect display may not be executed. It seems that there are cases. In this regard, regardless of whether the precursor effect display is executed when the multiple operation permissible state occurs or the precursor effect display is not executed when the multiple operation permissible state occurs, Since the post-acceptance display can be executed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation section" in an operated state, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game will be maintained in a favorable manner. Note that the "specific operation section" according to the configuration 13-G is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation section as the "specific operation section" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation section. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" as a different name operation section in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if a precursor effect display is to be executed when a multiple operation permissible state occurs, all you need to do is keep the "specific operation section" operated in the multiple operation permissible state. The post-reception display may be executed multiple times. In addition, if the precursor effect display is not executed when a multiple operation permissible state occurs, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation section" operated in the multiple operation permissible state. There may be both cases in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the “specific operation unit” in an operated state. According to such a configuration, when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs and the precursor effect display is displayed, the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, whereas the "multiple operation permissible state" ” occurs and no warning effect display is displayed, whether or not the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled or not will be kept secret, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. It becomes like this.

In addition, even if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, if the sample image display is not displayed in the multiple operation permissible state, operate the "specific operation section". The post-acceptance display may be executed multiple times by simply maintaining the status. According to such a configuration, even if the precursor effect display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated when the sample image display is not displayed. As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained and a decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed.

In addition, even if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, the display after the reception of the operation will be hidden based on the establishment of the "specific condition". In this case, the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times when the "specific operation unit" is maintained in an operated state. According to such a configuration, if the precursor effect display is not displayed when the "multiple operation permissible state" occurs, or if the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, the reception will be accepted based on the establishment of the "specific conditions". Since there is a possibility that the later display may be hidden, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game.

[Configuration 14-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted, and in the operation permission state, operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted. When the operation is accepted, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and when operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, a simulated image display imitating the "specific operation section" can be displayed. In the operation permissible state, there are cases where a "specific message display" is displayed and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed. In this regard, the operation permissible state occurs in two cases: a "single operation permissible state" in which an operation is allowed to be accepted only once for a "specific operation part", and a "single operation permissible state" in which an operation is allowed to be accepted for a "specific operation part" multiple times. This may occur as a "multiple operation permissible state", and the sample image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear. It is possible to display the periodic changes so that they appear in units of "a long time", and in the "multiple operation permissible state", it is possible to display such periodic changes to appear in units of "predetermined time", so it is easy for the player to This makes it possible to appropriately prompt the user to perform the operation. In addition, "specific operation unit", "specific message display", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to configuration 14-G are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 14-G. It is just a name used for. Therefore, "specific operation section", "specific message display", "predetermined time", and "time longer than predetermined time" in other configurations do not mean the same operation section, message display, or time. It may also mean a different operation unit, message display, or time. In addition, the term "operation section", "message display", or "time" may mean the same "operation section", "message display", or "time" as a different name for an operation section related to another configuration, message display, or time.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "multiple operation permissible state", the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time", and in the case in which the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time", and ” may be displayed in both cases. According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", either the "single operation permissible state" or the "multiple operation permissible state" Since it is possible to keep secret what is happening, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the "multiple operation allowed state", there may be cases where a "specific message display" is displayed and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed.

As will be explained later, in this case, especially if a "specific message display" is displayed in a "multiple operation permissible state", if the "specific operation section" is operated in the "multiple operation permissible state", The post-reception display may be executed multiple times by simply maintaining the status. In addition, if the "Specific message display" is not displayed in the "Multiple operation permissible state", simply maintain the "Specific operation section" operated in the "Multiple operation permissible state" to display the post-reception message. There may be both a case where the process is executed multiple times and a case where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation section" operated. According to such a configuration, when a ``specific message display'' is displayed in the ``multiple operation permissible state'', it suitably suggests that the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled; ” is not displayed, it is possible to keep secret whether or not the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple operation permissible state", if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", "specific message display" is not displayed. The post-reception display may be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "operation section" in an operated state. According to such a configuration, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple operation permissible state", when periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time", Since the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained and a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

[Configuration 15-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation permission state can be generated in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation permission state, a "specific operation part" can be generated. When an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and when the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, a sample image of the "specific operation section" can be displayed. In a state where multiple operations are allowed, there are cases where a "specific message display" is displayed and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed. In this regard, in the state where multiple operations are allowed, the "specific operation section" can be operated regardless of whether the "specific message display" is displayed or the "specific message display" is not displayed. Since the post-acceptance display can be executed multiple times just by maintaining the same state, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game can be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation section" and "specific message display" related to the configuration 15-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-G. Therefore, "specific operation section" and "specific message display" related to other configurations may mean the same operation section or message display, or may mean different operation sections or message displays. Good too. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation section" or "message display" as the operation section or message display with different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the sample image display may be displayed when the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, or may not be displayed when the operation reception is permitted. You can. In addition, if a "specific message display" is displayed in a state where multiple operations are allowed, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times by simply keeping the "specific operation section" operated in the state where multiple operations are allowed. It is also possible to do so. In addition, if the "Specific message display" is not displayed in the state where multiple operations are allowed, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation section" operated in the state where multiple operations are allowed. There may be both cases in which the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation section" in an operated state. According to such a configuration, when a ``specific message display'' is displayed in the ``multiple operation permissible state'', it suitably suggests that the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled; '' is not displayed, it is possible to keep secret whether or not the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the state where multiple operations are allowed, if the sample image display is not displayed in the state where multiple operations are allowed, the state in which the "specific operation section" is operated will be displayed. The post-reception display may be executed multiple times just by maintaining the information. According to such a configuration, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple operation permissible state", the so-called auto continuous tap function is enabled when the sample image display is not displayed. As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained and a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed.

[Configuration 16-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation permission state can be generated in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation permission state, a "specific operation part" can be generated. When an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and when the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, a sample image of the "specific operation section" can be displayed. The screen image display is capable of displaying the screen image, and when the screen image display is set to a non-display state, the screen image display is made difficult to view until the screen image display is set to the non-display state. is capable of displaying a "disappearance effect display" as another image display. In this regard, in the multiple operation state, there are cases where the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated, and cases where the display after reception is executed multiple times even if the "specific operation section" is kept operated. There are cases where the post-display is not executed multiple times, but in any of these cases, when the sample image display that was displayed in the multiple operation state is hidden, it is different from the sample image display. Since the "extinction effect display" can be displayed as an image display, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation unit" and "disappearance effect display" related to the configuration 16-G are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 16-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation section or display as the "specific operation section" or "disappearance effect display" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation section or display. Further, the term "operation section" or "display" may mean the same as operation sections or displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation permissible state where the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated, when the sample image display is hidden, , it may be possible to display a "disappearance effect display" as an image display different from the simulated image display. In addition, in the multiple operation permissible state where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state, when the sample image display is hidden, it is different from the sample image display. There are both cases where it is possible to display the "disappearance effect display" as an image display of the image, and cases where it is not possible to display the "disappearance effect display" as an image display different from the image display. Good too. According to such a configuration, the "disappearance effect display" can be displayed in the multiple operation permissible state where the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, whereas the "disappearance effect display" can be displayed in the multiple-operation permissible state where the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled. In this state, whether or not the ``disappearance effect display'' can be displayed is kept secret, so the ``disappearance effect display'' can be displayed before the visibility of the ``disappearance effect display'' deteriorates. There is a growing need to check the aspects (color scheme, etc.) of the event, and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 17-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. When it is possible to display a post-acceptance display according to the reception, and when operation reception for the operating means is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display of the operating means, and when the simulated image display is hidden. , capable of displaying a ``disappearance effect display'' as an image display separate from the sample image display, which makes the sample image display difficult to see until the sample image display is set to a non-display state. It has become. In this regard, the operating means is capable of emitting light in any of a plurality of modes including the "first light emitting mode" and the "second light emitting mode", and the simulated image display does not undergo periodic changes in the operation permissible state. The periodic change can be displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the periodic change can be displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time". There are cases in which the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode" and periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time"; is emitting light in the "second light emitting mode" and the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time"; Since it is possible to display a ``disappearance effect display'' as an image display different from the sample image display when the sample image display is turned off, it is expected that the game's interest will be maintained in a favorable manner. will be done. In addition, the "disappearance effect display", "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" according to the configuration 17-G are the same as the configuration 17-G. It is simply a name used to explain the technical philosophy of. Therefore, the same display, light emission mode, and time as "disappearance effect display", "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than predetermined time" according to other configurations, It may mean a different display, a light emission mode, or a different time. In addition, it may be a display with a different name for another configuration, or it may mean "display" that is the same as the light emitting mode or time, or it may mean "light emitting mode" or "time," or it may be a display that is an object of operation by the player. A plurality of operation units may be prepared as the above-mentioned “operation means”, and the above-mentioned “operation means” including these operation units may have the configuration described in the above-mentioned configuration 17-G.

In this case, as will be described later, when the operating means is emitting light in the "first light emitting mode" and the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", , a type of operation permissible state has occurred in which a "disappearance effect display" may be displayed as an image display different from the sample image display when the sample image display is set to a non-display state. In this case, a type of operation permissible state occurs in which there is no possibility of displaying a disappearing effect display as an image display different from the sample image display when the sample image display is set to a non-display state. It may be possible to have both a case and a case where the situation is Furthermore, when the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode" and the periodic change in the display of the sample image appears in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the display of the sample image is Ensure that there is always a situation in which an operation permissible state for each type occurs in which a "disappearance effect display" may be displayed as an image display different from the sample image display when the display is set to a non-display state. You can. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", if the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode", There is a situation in which a type-specific operation permissible state in which the "disappearance effect display" may be displayed always occurs, but if the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", the "disappearance effect display" It is now possible to keep secret which type of operation permissible state is occurring, the one where there is a possibility of being displayed, and the one where there is no possibility of displaying the "disappearance effect display". Therefore, it becomes necessary to confirm the mode of displaying the sample image (color scheme, etc.) before the visibility of the sample image display is deteriorated by the "disappearance effect display", and a sense of tension is maintained appropriately. become expected to do so.

Furthermore, even if the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", if periodic changes in the display of the sample image are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the display of the sample image There seems to be a situation in which a type of operation permissible state is sure to occur in which there is a possibility that a "disappearance effect display" as an image display different from the relevant image display is displayed when the image is hidden. You can also do this. According to such a configuration, even when the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", the "disappearance effect display" is displayed by confirming the periodic change in the simulated image display. Since there are cases where it is possible to recognize that a certain type of operation permissible state has occurred, it is expected that the game player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 18-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. It is possible to display a post-acceptance display according to the reception, and when the operation reception for the operation means is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation means, and the operation means has the "first light emission mode" and It is possible to emit light in any of a plurality of modes including the "second light emission mode." In this respect, the sample image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in one of a plurality of color schemes in the operation-permitted state, and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time". , the periodic change may be displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", and the periodic change in the sample image display may be displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time". In this case, the operating means may emit light in the "first light emitting mode" or may emit light in the "second light emitting mode" depending on which of the plurality of color schemes the sample image display is displayed in. As a result, it can be expected that the player's interest in playing games can be suitably maintained. Note that the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to the configuration 18-G explain the technical idea of the configuration 18-G. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, even if the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" refer to the same light emitting mode or time in other configurations, Alternatively, it may mean a different light emission mode or time. In addition, it may be a different name for a light emitting mode related to another configuration, a "light emitting mode" that is the same as time, or something that means "time," or the above-mentioned "operating means" that is to be operated by a player. A plurality of operating sections may be prepared, and the entire "operating means" having these operating sections may have the configuration described in Configuration 18-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the display of the sample image are displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the operating means may cause the display of the sample image to be one of the plurality of color schemes. Depending on whether the light is displayed, the light may be emitted in the "first light emitting mode" or the light may be emitted in the "second light emitting mode." Further, in the case where periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the pattern image display is displayed in one of the plurality of color schemes described above, but the operation means does not change the "first light emission". There is a case where the light is emitted in the "second light emitting mode", but there may be no case where the light is emitted in the "second light emitting mode". According to such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained, since it is not always possible to confirm the color scheme of the simulated image display just by looking at the light emission mode of the operating means.

[Configuration 19-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. A state in which a post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception can be displayed, and when operation acceptance for the operation means is permitted, a simulated image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and operation for the operation means is permitted. It is possible to output an acceptance permission sound indicating that the operation means is now in a state where the operation is permitted. In this regard, the operating means is capable of emitting light in any of a plurality of modes including the "first light emitting mode" and the "second light emitting mode", and the simulated image display does not undergo periodic changes in the operation permissible state. When the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time", and when the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of "time longer than predetermined time" When an operation permissible state occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display may be displayed in units of "a predetermined time", or may appear in units of "a time longer than the predetermined time". Since the acceptance acceptance sound can be output in either case, it can be expected that the game interest can be maintained in a favorable manner. Note that the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to the configuration 19-G explain the technical idea of the configuration 19-G. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, even if the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" refer to the same light emitting mode or time in other configurations, Alternatively, it may mean a different light emission mode or time. In addition, it may be a different name for a light emitting mode related to another configuration, a "light emitting mode" that is the same as time, or something that means "time," or the above-mentioned "operating means" that is to be operated by a player. A plurality of operating sections may be prepared, and the entire "operating means" having these operating sections may have the configuration described in Configuration 19-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", an operation permissible state occurs. The acceptance permission sound may be always output. In addition, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", the reception is accepted when the operation permission state occurs. There may be both cases in which the permissible sound is output and cases in which the acceptance permissible sound is not output. According to such a configuration, when the acceptance acceptance sound is output, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed such that they appear in units of "predetermined time" and in units of "time longer than predetermined time". Since you will be able to have both situations, you will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the reception acceptance sound is not output, the periodic change in the image display may not be displayed in units of "predetermined time". Further, the operating means may be configured not to emit light in the "second light emission mode". According to such a configuration, when the reception permission sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize that operation reception is now permitted, and the operation reception can be performed without worrying about various production modes. Since the player can concentrate only on what is being played, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game will be suitably maintained. In addition, in this case, if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: periodic changes in the image display appear in "predetermined time" units, or the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode", an operation permissible state occurs. Since the acceptance permission sound is always output when the image is displayed, it is not possible to do so when periodic changes in the image display occur in units of "predetermined time" or when the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode". This makes it difficult to forget to perform an operation.

[Configuration 20-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which an operation is permitted on the operation means, and when an operation on the operation means is accepted in the operation permission state, the operation is allowed. It is possible to display a post-reception display according to the operation reception, and when the operation reception for the operation means is allowed, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation means, and the operation means is in the "first light emission mode". and "second light emission mode". In this respect, the sample image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in the operation permissible state, and there are two cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and a case in which the periodic changes are displayed in "predetermined time" units. In some cases, the image display may be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time," and in an operation-permitted state, the sample image display may be hidden while accepting operations on the operation means is permitted. Since this is done, it is expected that a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained when the operation is allowed. Note that the "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to the configuration 20-G explain the technical idea of the configuration 20-G. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, even if the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" refer to the same light emitting mode or time in other configurations, Alternatively, it may mean a different light emission mode or time. In addition, it may be a different name for a light emitting mode related to another configuration, a "light emitting mode" that is the same as time, or something that means "time," or the above-mentioned "operating means" that is to be operated by a player. A plurality of operating sections may be prepared, and the "operating means" including these operating sections may have the configuration described in the above configuration 20-G.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the display of the simulated image are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", the operating means It may be arranged so that the sample image display is not hidden while the operation reception is permitted. In addition, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", the operation of the operating means in the operation permissible state There may be both a case where the sample image display is hidden while reception is permitted, and a case where the sample image display is not hidden. According to such a configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation means The sample image display is not hidden while operation reception is permitted, but periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In some cases, when accepting operations on the operating means is permitted, whether or not the sample image display is hidden becomes confidential. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, even if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operating means may be set to the "second light emitting mode". In the case of emitting light, it may be arranged such that in the operation permission state, the sample image display is not hidden while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. According to such a configuration, even if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation can be performed by checking the light emitting mode of the operating means. Since there are cases where it is possible to recognize that the replica image display will not be hidden while the operation reception on the means is permitted, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 21-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. It is possible to display a post-acceptance display according to the reception, and when the operation reception for the operation means is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation means, and the operation means has the "first light emission mode" and It is possible to emit light in any of a plurality of modes including a "second light emission mode", and the image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear, and the periodic changes appear in predetermined time units. In some cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. In this regard, when the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode" in the operation permission state, the sample image display is different from the case where periodic changes appear in units of "predetermined time" in the operation permission state. , there are cases in which periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the operation permissible state, and cases in which they are not displayed in the operation permissible state. can be expected to be maintained at Note that the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to the configuration 21-G explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-G. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, even if the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" refer to the same light emitting mode or time in other configurations, Alternatively, it may mean a different light emission mode or time. In addition, it may be a different name for a light emitting mode related to another configuration, a "light emitting mode" that is the same as time, or something that means "time," or the above-mentioned "operating means" that is to be operated by a player. A plurality of operating sections may be prepared, and the entire "operating means" having these operating sections may have the configuration described in Configuration 21-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, when the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode" in the operation permissible state, the sample image display is such that periodic changes appear in units of "predetermined time" in the operation permissible state. There are cases in which periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the operation permissible state, and there are cases in which periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the operation permissible state. good. According to such a configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode", the mode in which the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed is kept secret; Since this itself is always displayed, it is expected to maintain interest in the game.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, the operating means is capable of emitting light in any one of a plurality of modes including a "first light emission mode", a "second light emission mode", and a "third light emission mode". It may be. When the operating means emits light in the "third light emitting mode" in the operation permission state, the sample image display is displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in units of "predetermined time" in the operation permission state; It may be possible to display periodic changes in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the operation permission state without any cases in which the periodic changes are not displayed in the operation permission state. According to such a configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "third light emitting mode", periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the operation permission state. Since it is possible to suggest that this is the case, it is expected that the player's interest in playing games can be maintained in a better manner.

Furthermore, as will be described later, even if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the operation permissible state, the type of the operation permissible state (operation permissible state (the display after acceptance differs depending on the type of operation), the operating means may emit light only in the first light emission mode. According to such a configuration, depending on the type of operation permissible state, the operating means emits light only in the first light emitting mode, and whether or not a simulated image display is displayed, or when it is displayed, it is displayed with any periodic change. Since the details of what will happen will be kept secret, it will be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 22-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. It is possible to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception, and when operation acceptance for the operating means is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display of the operating means, and operations for the operating means are permitted. When the operation permissible state occurs, there are cases where the premonitory effect is displayed and cases where the premonitory effect is not displayed. It is possible to emit light in any one of a plurality of modes including a "first light emission mode" and a "second light emission mode", and the image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in the operation permissible state. , the periodic change may be displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the periodic change may be displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time". There is. In this respect, the foreshadow effect display is divided into a case in which periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the "first light emission mode", and a case in which periodic changes in the pattern image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", so as to cross the timing at which the operation permissible state occurs. Since the game can be displayed on the screen, it can be expected to maintain interest in the game. Note that the "first light emission mode", "second light emission mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to the configuration 22-G explain the technical idea of the configuration 22-G. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, even if the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" refer to the same light emitting mode or time in other configurations, Alternatively, it may mean a different light emission mode or time. In addition, it may be a different name for a light emitting mode related to another configuration, a "light emitting mode" that is the same as time, or something that means "time," or the above-mentioned "operating means" that is to be operated by a player. A plurality of operating sections may be prepared as a whole, and the "operating means" including these operating sections may have the configuration described in the above configuration 22-G.

In this case, as will be described later, in an operation permissible state in which periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", the precursor effect display is displayed. If an operation is accepted while the display is in progress, the foreshadow effect display may not be hidden from view. Furthermore, in an operation permissible state in which periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode," a precursor effect display is displayed. If an operation is accepted while the user is in the room, the foreshadowing effect display may be hidden. According to such a configuration, if an operation is accepted while the precursory effect display is being displayed, it is determined whether or not the precursory effect display is to be hidden. Should the operation be accepted while the precursory effect display is displayed, or should the operation be accepted after the precursory effect display is hidden? It can be expected to suitably maintain gaming interest when selecting.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, an operation permissible state occurs in which periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode". Alternatively, the foreshadow effect display may be always executed. In addition, if a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and an operation permissible state occurs in which the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", a precursor effect is displayed. There may be both cases in which the warning effect display is executed and cases in which the precursor effect display is not executed. According to such a configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", there are both cases in which a precursory effect is displayed and cases in which a precursory effect is not displayed, creating a sense of tension. can be expected to maintain a suitable level. However, even if the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the foreshadowing effect display is always executed. Therefore, it can be expected that the player will be less likely to forget to perform an operation and maintain his/her interest in the game.

Further, there is an operation permissible state in which periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", and a periodic change in the pattern image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time". In the operation permissible state in which the operation means is displayed so as to appear in units of "longer time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode, the same mode may appear as the precursor effect display. With such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which mode of operation permissible state will occur.

[Configuration 23-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. It is possible to display a post-reception display according to the reception, and when operation reception for the operation means is allowed, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation means, and to display a screen behind the other image display. A background image that is visibly displayed can be displayed, and the operating means is capable of emitting light in any of a plurality of modes including a "first light emission mode" and a "second light emission mode" in an operation permissible state. Yes, the sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the operation permissible state, and there are cases where the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time", and cases where the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time". In some cases, it is displayed in units of "hours longer than hours." In this regard, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", acceptance of the operation on the operating means is not permitted. In the current situation, the image display as a background image may be changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that point, so it can be expected to suitably maintain the interest in gaming. . Note that the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 23-G explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-G. It's just a name used for that purpose. Therefore, even if the "first light emitting mode", "second light emitting mode", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" refer to the same light emitting mode or time in other configurations, Alternatively, it may mean a different light emission mode or time. In addition, it may be a different name for a light emitting mode related to another configuration, a "light emitting mode" that is the same as time, or something that means "time," or the above-mentioned "operating means" that is to be operated by a player. A plurality of operating sections may be prepared as a whole, and the "operating means" having these operating sections may have the configuration described in the above configuration 23-G.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in predetermined time units and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", operation reception for the operating means is permitted. The image display as a background image may not be changed to a different image display from the image display that has been displayed up to that time. Furthermore, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", operation reception for the operating means is permitted. When the image display as a background image is changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up until then, or when the image display as a background image is changed to an image display that is different from the image display that was displayed until then. There may be both a case where the display is not changed and a case where the display is not changed. According to such a configuration, when emitting light in the "first light emitting mode", the image display as the background image is different from the image display that was displayed up to that time while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. Although whether or not the image display is changed to a different one is kept secret, if periodic changes in the sample image display are made to appear in predetermined time units, the image display as the background image will be the image that was displayed until then. Since it is possible to recognize that the image display will not change to a different image from the one displayed, operations can be accepted without being aware of the possibility that such a background change will occur (without waiting for the timing for the background change to occur). You will be able to encourage people to do things.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, even if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operating means may be set to the "second light emitting mode". When emitting light, even if the image display as a background image is not changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed, while accepting operations on the operating means is permitted. good. According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the background image is Whether or not the image display is changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that time is kept secret, but in that case, if the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode", Because it is possible to recognize that the image display as a background image will not be changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that point, you can do so without being aware of the possibility that such a background change will occur. It becomes possible to prompt the operator to accept the operation (without waiting for the timing to occur).

In addition, if an operation permission state occurs while a "specific image display" is displayed as a background image, periodic changes in the sample image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In addition, there is a case where the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", and a case where the periodic change in the pattern image display appears in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and a case where the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode". It may also be possible to emit light at times. According to such a configuration, when the "specific image display" is displayed as the background image, the image display as the background image was previously displayed while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. Although there is a possibility that the image display will be changed to a different image display from the image display (specific image display), it is possible to suitably suggest whether or not there is such a possibility by checking the light emitting mode of the operating means. It becomes like this.

[Configuration 24-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. When it is possible to display a post-acceptance display according to the reception, and when operation reception for the operating means is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display of the operating means, and when the simulated image display is hidden. , it is possible to display a "disappearance effect display" as an image display different from the sample image display, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the sample image display until the sample image display is set to a non-display state; The sample image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears in any one of a plurality of color schemes including a "first color scheme" and a "second color scheme" in an operation-permitted state, and the periodic change is displayed for a "predetermined period of time". In some cases, the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and in other cases, the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time." In this respect, there are cases where the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", and cases where the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme". , and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", and in either case, when the said image display is hidden. Since the extinction effect display can be displayed as an image display different from the simulated image display, it can be expected to suitably maintain the interest in the game. In addition, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 24-G are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 24-G. It is just a name used. Therefore, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same color scheme or time, or may mean different It may also mean a color scheme or time. In addition, it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name related to another configuration, or it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name, or it may be used as the above-mentioned "operation means" to be operated by the player. The "operating means" having these operating sections may have the structure described in the above structure 24-G as a whole.

In this case, as will be described later, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the sample image display When there is a situation where a type of operation permissible state is occurring where there is a possibility that a "disappearance effect display" is displayed as an image display different from the sample image display when the image is hidden. , a type of operation permissible state has occurred in which there is no possibility that a "disappearance effect display" as an image display different from the sample image display will be displayed when the sample image display is set to a non-display state. It may be possible to have both the case and the situation. In addition, when the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the sample image display is in a hidden state. The situation may be such that a certain type of operation permission state is always occurring in which there is a possibility that a "disappearance effect display" is displayed as an image display other than the simulated image display when the display is performed. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", if the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", There is a situation in which a type-specific operation permissible state in which the "disappearance effect display" may be displayed always occurs, but if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the "disappearance effect display" It is now possible to keep secret which type of operation permissible state is occurring, the one where there is a possibility of being displayed, and the one where there is no possibility of displaying the "disappearance effect display". Therefore, before the visibility of the sample image display is deteriorated by the "disappearance effect display", it is determined whether the visibility of the aspect of the sample image display (color scheme, etc.) is deteriorated by the "disappearance effect display". You will be able to make suggestions, and you will be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", if the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the sample image display There seems to be a situation in which a type of operation permissible state is sure to occur in which there is a possibility that a "disappearance effect display" as an image display different from the relevant image display is displayed when the image is hidden. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, even when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the "disappearance effect display" is displayed by confirming the periodic change in the sample image display. Since there are cases where it is possible to recognize that a certain type of operation permissible state has occurred, it is expected that the game player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 25-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. A state in which a post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception can be displayed, and when operation acceptance for the operation means is permitted, a simulated image display imitating the operation means can be displayed, and operation for the operation means is permitted. It is possible to output an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that the operation has become possible, or that the operation of the operating means has become permissible. It is possible to display periodic changes in one of a plurality of color schemes including ``color scheme'', and the periodic changes can be displayed in units of ``predetermined time''; In some cases, it is displayed in units of "hours longer than hours." In this regard, when an operation permissible state occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display may be displayed in units of "predetermined time", and may be displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time". Since the acceptance acceptance sound can be outputted in either case, it can be expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained. In addition, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 25-G are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-G. It is just a name used. Therefore, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same color scheme or time, or may mean different It may also mean a color scheme or time. In addition, it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name related to another configuration, or it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name, or it may be used as the above-mentioned "operation means" to be operated by the player. The "operating means" including these operating sections may have the configuration described in Configuration 25-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," an operation permissible state occurs. The acceptance permission sound may be always outputted at times. In addition, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", when the operation permission state occurs, There may be both cases in which the reception permission sound is output and cases in which the reception permission sound is not output. According to such a configuration, when the acceptance acceptance sound is output, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed such that they appear in units of "predetermined time" and in units of "time longer than predetermined time". Since you will be able to have both situations, you will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the reception acceptance sound is not output, the periodic change in the image display may not be displayed in units of "predetermined time". Further, the sample image display may not be displayed in the "second color scheme". According to such a configuration, when the reception permission sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize that operation reception is now permitted, and the operation reception can be performed without worrying about various production modes. Since the player can concentrate only on what is being played, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game will be suitably maintained. In this case, if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time" or the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", the operation permission state is established. Since the reception permission sound is always output when the sound occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time" or when the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme". This will make it less likely that you will forget to perform an operation.

[Configuration 26-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. It is possible to display a post-reception display according to the reception, and when operation reception for the operation means is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation means, and the simulated image display is the "first display" in the operation permission state. A case in which a periodic change can be displayed in any one of a plurality of color schemes including a ``first color scheme'' and a ``second color scheme,'' and the periodic change is displayed in a manner that appears in units of a ``predetermined time''; The periodic change may be displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time". In this regard, in the operation permissible state, the sample image display may be hidden even though the reception of operations on the operating means is permitted, so the feeling of tension when in the operation permissible state is reduced. It is expected that it will be maintained properly. In addition, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 26-G are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 26-G. It is just a name used. Therefore, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same color scheme or time, or may mean different It may also mean a color scheme or time. In addition, it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name related to another configuration, or it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name, or it may be used as the above-mentioned "operation means" to be operated by the player. The "operating means" including these operating sections may have the configuration described in Configuration 26-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the pattern image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the operation is not allowed in the operation permission state. It may be arranged so that the display of the sample image is not hidden while the reception of operations on the means is permitted. In addition, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," in the operation permissible state, the There may be both a case where the sample image display is hidden while operation reception is permitted, and a case where the sample image display is not hidden. According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", if the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation means can be The sample image display is not hidden while operation reception is permitted, but periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In some cases, when accepting operations on the operating means is permitted, whether or not the sample image display is hidden becomes confidential. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, even if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the sample image display may be changed to the "second color scheme". In the case of emitting light, it may be arranged such that in the operation permission state, the sample image display is not hidden while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. According to such a configuration, even if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", operations can be performed by checking the color scheme of the sample image display. Since there are cases where it is possible to recognize that the replica image display will not be hidden while the operation reception on the means is permitted, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 27-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. It is possible to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception, and when operation acceptance for the operation means is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display of the operation means, indicating that operation acceptance for the operation means is permitted. It is possible to display a precursor effect that is suggested in advance, and when the operation permissible state occurs, there are cases in which the precursor effect display is executed and cases in which the precursor effect display is not executed. When it is possible to display periodic changes in any of a plurality of color schemes including the "first color scheme" and "second color scheme", and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time". In some cases, the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In this regard, there are two cases in which the preview effect display is displayed: the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the case where the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" In either case, the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". Since the game can be displayed on the screen, it is expected that the user's interest in the game can be maintained in a favorable manner. In addition, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 27-G are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 27-G. It is just a name used. Therefore, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same color scheme or time, or may mean different It may also mean a color scheme or time. In addition, it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name related to another configuration, or it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name, or it may be used as the above-mentioned "operation means" to be operated by the player. The "operating means" including these operating sections may have the configuration described in Configuration 27-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, in an operation permissible state in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," the precursor effect display is If an operation is accepted while it is being displayed, the foreshadow effect display may not be turned into a non-display state based on this event. Further, in an operation permissible state in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," the precursor effect display is displayed. If an operation is accepted while the user is in the middle of the process, the foreshadow effect display may be hidden. According to such a configuration, if an operation is accepted while the precursory effect display is being displayed, it is determined whether or not the precursory effect display is to be hidden. Should the operation be accepted while the precursory effect display is displayed, or should the operation be accepted after the precursory effect display is hidden? It can be expected to suitably maintain gaming interest when selecting.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, an operation permissible state occurs in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme". In this case, the foreshadowing effect display may be always executed. In addition, if an operation permissible state occurs in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," a precursory effect is applied. There may be both a case where the display is executed and a case where the precursor effect display is not executed. According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", there are both cases in which a precursory effect is displayed and cases in which a precursory effect is not displayed. It can be expected to maintain a good feeling. However, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the precursor effect display is always executed. Therefore, it can be expected that the player will be less likely to forget to perform an operation and maintain his/her interest in the game.

In addition, there is an operation permissible state in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," and an operation permissible state in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in a "predetermined time" unit. In the operation permissible state in which the sample image is displayed in units of "time longer than time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," the same aspect may appear as the precursor effect display. With such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which mode of operation permissible state will occur.

[Configuration 28-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the operation means is permitted, and when the operation reception on the operation means is performed in the operation permission state, the operation is performed. It is possible to display a post-reception display according to the reception, and when operation reception for the operation means is allowed, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation means, and to display a screen behind the other image display. It is possible to display a background image that is visually displayed, and the sample image display is such that periodic changes appear in one of a plurality of color schemes including a "first color scheme" and a "second color scheme" in an operation permissible state. There are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time". It has become a thing. In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", operation reception on the operation means is not permitted. In the current situation, the image display as a background image may be changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game. It becomes like this. In addition, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in the configuration 28-G are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 28-G. It is just a name used. Therefore, the "first color scheme", "second color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same color scheme or time, or may mean different It may also mean a color scheme or time. In addition, it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name related to another configuration, or it may mean the same "color scheme" or "time" as the color scheme or time of another name, or it may be used as the above-mentioned "operation means" to be operated by the player. The "operating means" including these operating sections may have the configuration described in Configuration 28-G above.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the operation reception on the operation means is not possible. The image display as a background image may not be changed to an image display different from the image display that has been displayed up to that time, while it is permitted. Furthermore, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme," operation reception on the operating means is not permitted. In some cases, the image display as a background image is changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed before, and the image display as a background image is changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed until then. There may be both a case where the image display is not changed and a case where the image display is not changed. According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the image display as the background image was previously displayed while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. It is difficult to recognize whether the image display is changed to a different image display, but if periodic changes in the sample image display are made to appear in predetermined time units, the image display as a background image will be changed to a different image display until then. Because it is possible to recognize that the image display will not change to a different image display than the one that was previously displayed, you can do this without being aware of the possibility that such a background change will occur (without having to wait for the timing for a background change to occur). ) It becomes possible to prompt the user to accept the operation.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, even if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the sample image display may be changed to the "second color scheme". When displayed, the image display as a background image should not be changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed, while the operation reception for the operation means is permitted. Good too. According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the background image is It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the image display is changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that time. , it is possible to recognize that the image display as a background image will not be changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed previously, without being aware of the possibility that such a background change will occur (background change It becomes possible to prompt the user to accept the operation without waiting for the timing to occur.

In addition, if an operation permission state occurs while a "specific image display" is displayed as a background image, periodic changes in the sample image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In addition, there is a case where the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and a case where the periodic change in the sample image display appears in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is the "second color scheme". It may also be displayed in some cases. According to such a configuration, when the "specific image display" is displayed as the background image, the image display as the background image was previously displayed while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. Although there is a possibility that the image display will be changed to a different image display from the image display (specific image display), it is possible to suitably suggest whether or not there is such a possibility by checking the light emitting mode of the operating means. It becomes like this.

[Configuration 29-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation permission state can be generated in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation permission state, a "specific operation part" can be generated. When an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and a sample image display that simulates the "specific operation section" can be displayed. In the permissive state, the periodic changes are displayed in units of "a predetermined time", the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", and There may be cases where changes are not displayed as they appear. In this regard, the multiple operation permissible state is defined as the ``first type multiple operation permissible state'' in which there is a possibility that the multiple operation permissible state will be terminated when an operation is accepted for the ``specific operation section''. "2nd type multiple operation permissible state" in which there is no possibility that the multiple operation permissible state will be terminated when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section". Since this may occur in some cases, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when the multiple operations are allowed. In addition, the "specific operation section", "predetermined time", "time longer than predetermined time", "first type multiple operation permissible state", and "second type multiple operation "Permissible state" is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 29-G. Therefore, "specific operation unit" related to other configurations, "predetermined time", "time longer than predetermined time", "first type multiple operation permissible state", "second type multiple operation permissible state"'' may mean the same operation unit, time, or operation permission state, or may mean a different operation unit, time, or operation permission state. In addition, the term "operation section", "time", or "operation permitting state" may mean the same "operating section", "time", or "operating permitting state" as a different name for an operating section, time, or operation permitting state related to another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, if the sample image display is not displayed with periodic changes, the multiple operation permissible state will not occur as the "first type multiple operation permissible state", and the The "second type multiple operation permissible state" may always occur. According to such a configuration, if the periodic changes in the sample image display are not displayed, it is possible to recognize that no matter how many operations are performed, there is no possibility that the state of allowing multiple operations will be terminated. It is expected that games will be provided in a way that eliminates the tension of having to perform multiple operations in order to end a multi-operation permissible state.

In addition, when the sample image display is displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the sample image display appear, the multiple operation permissible state is "first type multiple operation permissible state" and "second type multiple operation permissible state". Since it is made difficult to recognize whether the situation is occurring in a "tolerable state", it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, even if the sample image is displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear, if the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", The multiple operation permission state may never occur as a "first type multiple operation permission state" but always occur as a "second type multiple operation permission state." According to such a configuration, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the multiple operation permissible state is terminated no matter how many operations are performed. Since it is possible to recognize that there is no possibility, it is expected that the game will be provided in a way that eliminates the tension of having to perform multiple operations to end the state where multiple operations are allowed. Become so.

[Configuration 30-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a multiple operation permission state can be generated in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation permission state, a "specific operation part" can be generated. When an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and a sample image display that simulates the "specific operation section" can be displayed. In the permissible state, there are cases where the periodic changes are displayed and cases where the periodic changes are not displayed. In this regard, in the state where multiple operations are allowed, there are cases where the post-reception display is displayed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated, and cases where the "post-reception display" is displayed multiple times even if the "specific operation section" is kept operated. Since the post-acceptance display may not be executed multiple times, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when the multiple operations are allowed. Note that the "specific operation unit" related to the configuration 30-G is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 30-G. Therefore, it may mean the same operation section as the "specific operation section" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operation section. Further, it may mean the same "operation section" as a different name operation section in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a state in which multiple operations are allowed in which the sample image display does not display periodic changes, simply maintaining the "specific operation section" in the operated state will ensure that multiple operations are displayed after reception. It may be displayed twice. According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is not displayed with periodic changes, the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, so that the display can be performed while suitably maintaining a sense of tension. It can be expected that this will suppress the decline in interest in gaming when players are not playing games.

In addition, in the "multiple operation allowed state" where the sample image display is displayed with periodic changes, the post-reception display will be displayed multiple times just by maintaining the "specific operation section" operated. There may be both a case and a case where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation section" is maintained in an operated state. According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed with periodic changes, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled, so that the sense of tension is suitably reduced. can be expected to be maintained.

In addition, in the "multiple operation allowed state" where the sample image display is displayed with periodic changes, the post-reception display will not be executed multiple times even if the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state. In the "Multiple operations allowed state" type, the display after reception is always executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation part" operated. Periodic changes may be displayed so as to appear in long time units. According to such a configuration, it is necessary to take time to determine whether the periodic change is fast or slow, so after the sample image display is displayed, it is necessary to immediately determine whether or not the so-called auto continuous hit function will be enabled. It is now possible to make it impossible to recognize. As a result, until it can be determined whether the periodic changes are fast or slow, it will be possible to encourage users to try out the auto continuous hit function, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. It becomes like this.

[Configuration 31-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted, and in the operation permission state, operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted. When the operation is accepted, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and when operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, a simulated image display imitating the "specific operation section" can be displayed. , the operation permissible state occurs as a "single operation permissible state" in which the operation reception for the "specific operation part" is permitted only once, and in a "multiple operation permissible state" in which the operation reception for the "specific operation part" is permitted multiple times. The sample image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of color schemes including a ``specific color scheme'' in the operation allowable state, There are cases in which changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time." In this regard, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation permissible state can occur as a "multiple operation permissible state", and the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state can occur as a "single operation permissible state", so it is possible to improve the game's interest. become able to. Note that the terms "specific operation unit,""specific color scheme,""predeterminedtime," and "time longer than a predetermined time" related to configuration 31-G are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 31-G. It's just a name. Therefore, "specific operation section", "specific color scheme", "predetermined time", and "time longer than predetermined time" may mean the same operation section, color scheme, or time in other configurations. However, it may also mean a different operation part, color scheme, or time. In addition, the term "operation section", "color scheme", or "time" may be the same as another name for an operation unit, color scheme, or time related to another configuration.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation permissible state will not occur as a "single operation permissible state"; It may also be configured to always occur as "multiple operations allowed state". In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state may occur as a "single operation permissible state" or "multiple operation permissible state". There may be both a case where the state occurs as a "permissible state" and a case where the state occurs as a "permissible state". According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", it is easy to recognize that the operation permissible state occurs as the "multiple operation permissible state". This allows users to be encouraged to perform multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state is either "single operation permissible state" or "multiple operation permissible state". Since it is made difficult to recognize when a situation occurs, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, if the periodic changes in the screen image display are displayed in such a way that they appear every "predetermined period of time," the screen image can be displayed in a "specific color scheme," but the periodic changes in the screen image display are If the sample image display is displayed in a ``specific color scheme'' when it is displayed in units of ``time longer than a predetermined time'', the operation permissible state will not occur as the ``multiple operation permissible state''. , may always occur as a "one-time operation allowed state". In other words, as mentioned above, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state basically changes to "single operation permissible state" and "multiple operation permissible state". This makes it difficult to recognize in which state the error occurs. However, in this case, when the sample image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme", if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (multiple operation permission state always occurs) Since the ``one-time operation allowed state'' is always generated, which is the opposite of the ``one-time operation permission state'', it is expected that the game will be able to provide an interesting presentation and maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 32-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when reception of operations for the "specific operation section" is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display of the "specific operation section", and to display a "specific operation section". It is possible to output an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the operation is permitted for the ``part'' or that the operation is permitted for the ``specific operation section'', and the operation permission state is , a "single operation permissible state" occurs in which operation acceptance for a "specific operation part" is permitted only once, and a "multiple operation permissible state" occurs in which operation reception for a "specific operation part" is permitted multiple times. The sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the operation permissible state, and there are cases where the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time". Periodic changes may be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", and if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation is permitted. can occur as a multiple-operation permissible state, and if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state is a "single-operation permissible state". ” can occur. In this regard, when an operation permissible state occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display may be displayed in units of "predetermined time", and may be displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time". Since the acceptance acceptance sound can be outputted in either case, it can be expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "specific operation section,""specific color scheme,""predeterminedtime," and "time longer than a predetermined time" related to configuration 32-G are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 31-G. It's just a name. Therefore, "specific operation section", "predetermined time", and "time longer than predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same operation section or time, or different operation sections, It may also mean time. Further, the term "operation part" may have a different name for another configuration, "operation part" may be the same as "time", or it may mean "time".

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation permissible state does not occur as a "single operation permissible state", but rather as a "single operation permissible state". It may also be configured to always occur as "multiple operations allowed state". In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state may occur as a "single operation permissible state" or "multiple operation permissible state". There may be both a case where the state occurs as a "permissible state" and a case where the state occurs as a "permissible state". According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time", it is easy to recognize that the operation permissible state occurs as the "multiple operation permissible state". This allows users to be encouraged to perform multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state is either "single operation permissible state" or "multiple operation permissible state". Since it is made difficult to recognize when a situation occurs, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Additionally, if the periodic changes in the image display are displayed in a manner that appears every ``predetermined time'', the acceptance permission sound can be output in a ``specific manner''; If the reception permission sound is output in a ``specific manner'' when the reception permissible sound is displayed in units of ``time longer than time'', the operation permissible state will not occur as a ``multiple operation permissible state'', and the The "one-time operation allowed state" may always occur. In other words, as mentioned above, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state basically changes to "single operation permissible state" and "multiple operation permissible state". This makes it difficult to recognize in which state the error occurs. However, in this case, if the reception permissible sound is output in a "specific manner", and if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (multiple operation permissible state always occurs) Since the ``one-time operation allowed state'' is always generated, which is the opposite of the ``one-time operation permission state'', it is expected that the game will be able to provide an interesting presentation and maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 33-G]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is possible to generate an operation permission state in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted, and in the operation permission state, operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted. When the operation is accepted, a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception can be displayed, and when operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, a simulated image display imitating the "specific operation section" can be displayed. , it is possible to display a premonitory effect display that suggests in advance that operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, and the operation permission state is a "one-time" state in which only one operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted. In some cases, it occurs as a "operation permissible state", and in other cases, as a "multiple operation permissible state", in which operation acceptance for a "specific operation part" is permitted multiple times. The periodic change can be displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the periodic change can be displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time". If periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation permissible state can occur as a "multiple operation permissible state", and the When periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state can occur as a "one-time operation permissible state". In this regard, when an operation permissible state occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display may be displayed in units of "predetermined time", and may be displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time". Since the foreshadow effect display can be displayed in either case, it can be expected to suitably maintain the interest in the game. Note that the "specific operation unit", "predetermined time", and "time longer than the predetermined time" related to the configuration 33-G are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 33-G. do not have. Therefore, "specific operation section", "predetermined time", and "time longer than predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same operation section or time, or different operation sections, It may also mean time. Further, the term "operation part" may have a different name for another configuration, "operation part" may be the same as "time", or it may mean "time".

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation permissible state does not occur as a "single operation permissible state", but rather as a "single operation permissible state". It may also be configured to always occur as "multiple operations allowed state". In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state may occur as a "single operation permissible state" or "multiple operation permissible state". There may be both a case where the state occurs as a "permissible state" and a case where the state occurs as a "permissible state". According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time", it is easy to recognize that the operation permissible state occurs as the "multiple operation permissible state". This allows users to be encouraged to perform multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state is either "single operation permissible state" or "multiple operation permissible state". Since it is made difficult to recognize when a situation occurs, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Additionally, if the periodic changes in the image display are displayed in a manner that appears every ``predetermined time'', the precursor effect display can be displayed in a ``specific manner''; If the precursor effect display is displayed in a "specific manner" when it is displayed in units of "a time longer than the time", the operation permissible state will not occur as a "multiple operation permissible state", and the The "one-time operation allowed state" may always occur. In other words, as mentioned above, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation permissible state basically changes to "single operation permissible state" and "multiple operation permissible state". This makes it difficult to recognize in which state the error occurs. However, in this case, if the precursor effect display is displayed in a "specific manner", if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (multiple operation permission state will always occur) Since the ``one-time operation allowed state'' is always generated, which is the opposite of the ``one-time operation permission state'', it is expected that the game will be able to provide an interesting presentation and maintain a good sense of tension.

[Other configurations]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related display related to the occurrence of the acceptance permissible period (e.g. , a mock image display that imitates the operation receiver, and an image that is displayed when the validity period occurs (ally characters, enemy characters, etc.), but for example, the periphery of the simulated image display is decorated It may also be displayed as an integrated image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image. Regarding such integrated image display, there is a reception permissible period (operation permissible state) that occurs when the symbol production progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a variation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of advance judgment. It is desirable to display it in both the reception permissible period (operation permissible state) that occurs, and also in both the low expectation non-suppressing reception performance and the high expectation restraint reception performance. is desirable.

Note that such operation-related displays are as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as other examples and modifications thereof, so the details are omitted, but for example, the peripheral decoration image A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided inside. Further, as the operation-related display, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared, and the display can be performed in any one of these modes. However, such a replica image display does not necessarily have to be displayed as an integrated replica image display that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, operation-related sounds related to the occurrence of the acceptance permissible period are generated. (For example, an acceptance acceptance sound) may be output audibly, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform an operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible period (reception period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). , a sound in which the acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that indicates that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted, and has no relation to the reception permissible period (reception period). It can also be said that this is a sound that would not be output under a situation where a performance without a sound is being performed.

By the way, as mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, the types (for example, conversation preview, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc.) as changes after acceptance (for example, display after acceptance, output sound after acceptance, etc.) that appear when an acceptance is accepted. We provide multiple acceptance acceptance periods (operation acceptance states) with different acceptance periods (e.g.). Occurrence conditions are determined for each acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state), and when any one of these occurrence conditions is met, the acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) of the type corresponding to the satisfied occurrence condition is set. It is possible for this to occur.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes a plurality of operation sections (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) as operation sections that are operated by the player. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, it is possible to generate a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) in which not only one operation section but several (multiple) operation sections are allowed to accept operations. It is said that However, this configuration is not an essential configuration.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-G" to "Configuration 33-G" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, when realizing these inventions, it is only necessary to appropriately select and partially provide only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired effect from each configuration described below, and it is not necessary to provide all of them. . For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (intended effect), there may not necessarily be an acceptance period (multiple operation permissible period) during which some (plural) operation units can be operated. It may be something that does not occur (an acceptance period in which only one operation unit is allowed to accept operations), or it may be something that does not have an operation unit that can accept multiple operations. , it may not be equipped with an operation section that allows only one operation reception, or it may not be equipped with an automatic button function or an automatic repeated press function. In addition, for each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. It may be partially provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-G" to "Configuration 33-G" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do.

First, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "first G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 352 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the "1st G reception permissible state" occurs and the player performs an operation based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 1G" being satisfied. It is. FIG. 353 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the "first G reception permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 354 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect when the "first G reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "first G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "first G fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1st G variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1st G variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "first G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 352(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "first G variation pattern", timing tGa2 has arrived when the first G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 1G"), "operation acceptance for the 1st G operation unit regarding changes after the 1st G acceptance (display after the 1st G acceptance, sound output after the 1st G acceptance, etc.)" The above-mentioned first G acceptance permission state (validity period) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 354(b)).

Here, the "first G operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted in the first G reception permissible state according to this embodiment is set as the operation button 410, and the first G reception permissible state is terminated. Only one operation reception is allowed until the end of the process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 1st G reception acceptance state is generated, it is possible to first execute a ``1st G precursor effect display'' that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity. .

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when the timing tGa1 arrives before the first G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 352(f) and 354(a), , a specific precursor display ZET is started to be executed as the "first G precursor effect display". This "1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET)" is a display related to the 1st G operation, as shown in FIGS. 352(c) and (f) and FIGS. 354(a) and (b). It is displayed so that it straddles before and after the timing.

That is, in this production example, when the first G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 352(g) and FIGS. 354(b) and (c), 410), or when the operation acceptance is permitted, the 1G operation-related display is displayed only when the operation object (here, the At least a mock image display MG-G1, which is a copy of the "operation button 410" (1G operation section), is displayed. In this production example, the timing at which the first G reception permission state occurs is the same as the timing at which the "first G operation related display" is displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "1st G operation related display" is displayed after the timing when the "1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing when the 1st G reception permission state occurs. It is also possible to display the data in such a way that it starts and straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of the "1st G operation related display" may be started with a delay from the timing when the 1st G reception permission state occurs.

Here, the "mock image display" that imitates the object to be operated by the player is the "image display in which periodic changes may appear" when the player is given the opportunity to operate the object. There are various display modes available depending on the type of reception permission state.

For example, "sample image display" can be displayed as an image with different forms, color schemes, and periodic changes depending on the type of operation target to which an operation opportunity is given. In addition, even if the operation target to which the operation opportunity is given is the same, multiple color schemes are prepared for it, and multiple times are prepared for the time required for the periodic change. .

In this regard, the "sample image display MG-G1" corresponding to the 1st G reception acceptance state always uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme, and It is displayed in a "predetermined color scheme".

In addition, "mock image display MG-G1" corresponding to the 1st G reception permission state is such that "after the simulated part of the operation receiving part" which is the operation target is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. This cycle of 1G hours is longer than the "cycle of 5G hours," "cycle of 7G hours," and "cycle of 8G hours" displayed in the 5th G reception allowed state, 7th G reception allowed state, and 8th G reception allowed state, which will be described later. (long cycle), in the 1st G reception permissible state, the "operation receiving section" is It will depict how it moves slowly up and down its range of motion.

Note that when the "sample image display MG-G1" corresponding to the 1st G acceptance permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGa2 at which the 1st G reception permission state occurs, the periodic change is determined according to the timing tGa2. It is preferable to wait until it starts. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-G1" corresponding to the first G acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tGa2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 1st G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. A message display (here, a message display MS-G1 displayed as "Press!") related to accepting an operation for the button (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

In this example, the "1st G operation related display (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1") corresponding to the 1st G acceptance permission state is changed to While a specific omen display ZET is being displayed as an omen effect display, the display starts so that it appears to overlap behind the specific omen display ZET.In addition, the specific omen display ZET changes as time passes. The display range (the range that makes it difficult to see the first G operation-related display) is reduced.

As a result of the display range of the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) being reduced in this way, when the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is hidden, the "1G The entire operation-related display (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) is now clearly visible, and under these conditions, the first G operation section (here, operation button 410) It becomes possible to accept operations for. However, the first G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) may continue to be displayed for the entire period from the occurrence of the first G acceptance permission state until it is ended.

However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 352 and 354, the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is displayed at timing tGa2A (the effect situation shown in FIG. 354(b)) within the 1st G acceptance permission state. It is assumed that an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the operation is being performed.

In this regard, the 1st G reception permission state according to this example is when the 1st G operation section (here, the operation button 410) is When the operation is accepted, this is used as an opportunity to turn the first G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) into a non-display state. In this example, as shown in FIG. 352(f), while the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is being displayed, the "1st G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. When the operation is accepted, this will be used as an opportunity to immediately turn the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) into a non-display state. The first G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) may be made to be in the non-display state at a later timing such as "timing when the display state is turned on".

Therefore, if an operation is accepted for the "first G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGa2A (the performance situation shown in FIG. 354(b)) within the first G reception permission state, the operations shown in FIG. 352 and As shown in FIG. 354(c), upon receiving the operation, the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is turned into a hidden state, and the "change after 1G reception" (Production after 1st G reception)" will occur.

Here, when the first G reception permissible state according to this example occurs, an ally character corresponding to the type of the first G reception permissible state (here, the ally character YS-G1 equipped with a sword) and the corresponding first G reception permissible state An enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G1 depicted as a goblin) is displayed according to the type of 1G acceptance permission state. In other words, in the "Change after 1st G reception (performance after 1st G reception)" corresponding to the 1st G reception permissible state, is there a high expectation that a jackpot will be achieved depending on "whether or not you can defeat the enemy character BOSS-G1?" When an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "1st G operation section (here, operation button 410)", "ally character YS-G1" is activated. The presentation can progress as if attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G1."

For example, in such a "change after 1st G reception (performance after 1st G reception)", the 1st G reception permissible state is first terminated when an operation is accepted on the 1G operation unit (operation button 410). At the same time (see FIGS. 352(b) and (c)), the sample image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 are hidden (FIGS. 352(g) and 354(c), (d)). ). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 352(j), (m), and FIG. 354(c), the output sound after receiving the ``1st G reception'' in response to the operation reception on the ``1st G operation section (here, the operation button 410)'' is ” is audibly output, and the “first G post-reception display UG1” corresponding to the operation reception on the “first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)” starts to be displayed.

However, in this example, there is a predetermined waiting time from when an operation is accepted in the 1st G acceptance permission state to when the sample image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 are hidden. is set. Therefore, although the sample image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1 are hidden when an operation is accepted in the 1st G acceptance permission state, immediately after the operation is accepted. Instead of being hidden, the display can continue for a predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, for example, in other reception acceptance states described later, a disappearing EF display may be displayed that makes it difficult to see the sample image display MG and message display MS before they are hidden. However, when an operation is accepted in the first G acceptance permission state, a disappearing EF display that makes it difficult to see the sample image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 until they are hidden is displayed. is no longer displayed. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted in the 1st G acceptance permission state and the "1st G post-acceptance display UG1" corresponding to the operation acceptance starts to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 354(c), the sample image display The MG and message display MS are in a good visibility state, and the sample image display MG continues to change periodically.

Here, as the above-mentioned "display UG1 after receiving the first G", as shown in FIG. 354(c), "ally character YS-G1" swings down his sword and attacks "enemy character BOSS-G1". A depiction is made of this. Next, as shown in FIG. 354(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G1" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G1". Then, as shown in FIG. 354(e), a result is displayed as to whether or not the "enemy character BOSS-G1" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 354(e), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" appears, suggesting that expectations are high; Depending on the results of the judgment and production judgment, etc., a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" (a depiction that suggests low expectations) may appear, or A depiction of the player being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" may always appear.

Furthermore, as described above, when the "1st G reception display UG1" is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 352(j) and (m), The "first G post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output.

However, regarding the above-mentioned "output sound after 1st G reception", only one mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 354(c) to 354(e)) is displayed as "display UG1 after 1G reception". However, there are both cases in which an audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "first G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" and cases in which an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception. It becomes. In other words, in this case, the "output sound after 1st G reception" is executed even though the same aspect (for example, depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1") is executed as "display UG1 after 1G reception". Since there are cases where the "output sound after 1st G reception" is audibly output and cases where the "output sound after 1st G reception" is not audibly output, if the operation is performed without looking at the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation reception may not be performed properly. This makes it possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension after an operation is accepted, such as not being able to judge whether the operation has been performed. In this example, it is decided whether or not to output the "output sound after receiving the first G" audibly through a lottery such as performance determination, but the implementation method is not limited to this. However, "when an audible output is performed based on an operation reception" and "when an audible output is not performed based on an operation reception" both mean that the game or performance is being performed in a normal state (the same state). This is a situation in which the "output sound after 1st G reception" is not audibly output when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing, which is outside the intention of the technical concept. It should be excluded.

By the way, when such a post-reception display is displayed, other effects or background images unrelated to the reception permissible state may be made difficult to see, or the post-reception display may be in a different form than the player desires. There is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced due to the emergence of such situations.

Therefore, in the 1st G reception permissible state according to this embodiment, if a specific condition is satisfied while the "1st G reception post display UG1" corresponding to the 1st G reception permissible state is displayed, this will be a trigger for the 1st G reception permissible state. 1st G reception display UG1" is set to a non-display state. According to such a configuration, if the "first G post-reception display UG1" is displayed and the player does not wish to do so, the "first G post-reception display UG1" can be hidden. It is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming.

In addition, in order to achieve the purpose of "hiding this when the player does not want it", it is necessary to hide this not only in the "display after reception UG1" but also during the execution of "display after reception". It is desirable to set the above-mentioned "specific conditions" as "conditions that can be satisfied in relation to the player's actions." In this case, for example, it may be an operation (action) on the operating means (the operation (action) on the operating means that triggered the execution of the post-reception display, or an operation (action) on the operating means that is different from the operating means that triggered the execution of the post-reception display). ) may be a condition that is satisfied based on the detection (operation acceptance), or the condition may be a condition that is satisfied based on the detection (operation acceptance) of It may be a condition that is satisfied based on a determination that the player is performing an action, etc.), or a lottery (performance determination) is held due to some operation or action by the player, and a predetermined result is determined in this lottery (performance determination). It may also be a condition that is satisfied based on the fact that a result has been obtained. Alternatively, it may be a condition that is satisfied based on a predetermined condition being satisfied as a result of the player performing some action (operation) in a predetermined game (mini-game) or the like.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, as shown in FIG. 352(a). ), (j), the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGa2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 354(c)) during the period in which "1st G reception display UG1" is displayed. I am assuming the case.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGa2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 354(c)), the conditions shown in FIG. 352(g), (i), (l) and FIG. 354(f) are When the specific condition is met, the "first G post-reception display UG1" is hidden. At this time, a "specific display SK" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is displayed, and a "specific sound" corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition is audibly output.

In this example, as the above-mentioned "specific display SK", a mode such as "button presentation has been ended midway" is displayed (see FIG. 354(f)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and a plurality of modes may be prepared and the display may be displayed in any of these modes. Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned "output sound after receiving 1st G", the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGa2B (the production situation shown in FIG. 354(c)). It has become. The "specific sound" may also be provided in a plurality of modes, and may be audibly output in any of these modes. The "specific sound" and the "output sound after receiving the first G" are audibly output as different types of sounds.

In addition, in the first G reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, after an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", this is used as an opportunity to display the sample image display MG-G1 and the message display MS- As described above, a predetermined waiting time is set before G1 is turned into a non-display state. In this regard, in this production example, at timing tGa2B (production situation shown in FIG. 354) when the sample image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1 are not yet in the hidden state and are in the display state, the above-mentioned specific conditions are set. It is assumed that the following conditions are satisfied.

That is, in this case, as for the sample image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1, as shown in FIGS. 352(g) and 354(f), the above-described It will be hidden when certain conditions are met. According to such a configuration, the display state of not only the "first G reception display UG1" but also the sample image display MG-G1 and message display MS-G1 can be ended early. , it can be expected to suitably maintain interest in gaming.

Further, in this example, while the first G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGa3 at which the first G reception permission state ends arrives decreases as time passes. However, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

Additionally, the 1st G reception permission state originally refers to the time when timing tGa3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "1st G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 353(c). The process is continued until the time tGa3 has arrived, and is terminated based on the arrival of timing tGa3. In this respect, the first G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 353, if an operation is not accepted for the "first G operation section (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGa3 arrives in the first G reception permission state, timing tGa3 is The 1st G acceptance permission state is only terminated based on the arrival, and the 1st G acceptance post-acceptance change ( 1st G reception performance) is never executed.

In addition, the first G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible.

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, when the 1st G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 352(e) and 353(e), the "1st G operating section (here, the operating button 410)" that is the operation target can emit light only in the "first light emitting mode". This "first light emission mode" is continued until the timing tGa3 when the first G reception permission state is ended when no operation is accepted in the first G reception permission state (see FIG. 353(e)). (see FIG. 352(e)), when an operation is accepted in the 1st G acceptance permission state, this triggers the non-emission state (see FIG. 352(e)).

In addition, when the 1st G reception permissible state occurs, the 1G reception permissible sound indicating that the operation reception is in a permissible state or will be in a state where the operation reception is permissible is "permissible sound A (normal mode)". )” can be output audibly (see FIGS. 352 and 353). In this regard, in the 1st G reception permissible state, as shown in FIG. 352(k), while the reception permissible sound (1st G reception permissible sound) is audibly output, Even if an operation is accepted for "button 410)", this will not be used as an opportunity to interrupt the corresponding acceptance acceptable sound, and even if a specific condition is met, this will not be used as an opportunity to interrupt the applicable acceptance acceptable sound. It has become.

Incidentally, the "acceptance acceptance sound" is different from the sound that is output in response to the precursor effect display (the precursor effect sound). Since the "harbinger effect sound" is output in response to the foretelling effect display, it is normally outputted in advance of the acceptance permission sound. Therefore, the mode of the output sound of the "harbinger effect sound" changes depending on the mode of the foreshadowing effect display, but the "acceptance permissible sound" is the same as specified (1) regardless of the mode of the omen effect display. It can be output in various formats.

As mentioned above, regarding the "output sound after 1st G reception", the first mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 354(c) to 354(e)) is displayed as "display UG1 after 1G reception". In this case, both the case where an audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "first G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" and the case where the audible output is not performed based on the operation reception. I decided to assume that there is. However, when the second mode (for example, a mode that suggests that expectations are low) is displayed as the "1st G post-reception display UG1", the "1st G operation section (here, the operation button 410 )", the audible output may be always performed based on the operation acceptance. According to such a configuration, depending on which mode is displayed as the "first G reception display UG1", the "first G reception output sound" is always audible output, and the "first G reception output sound" is always audible. Since there are cases where "sound" is not necessarily output audibly, it is expected to better maintain the feeling of tension when an operation is accepted. The "output sound after 1st G reception" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which aspect is displayed as "1st G after reception display UG1", or which aspect is displayed. The same sound may be audibly output regardless of the case.

Further, when the first G reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound may not necessarily be audibly output. Furthermore, the first G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) and message display MS-G1 may not necessarily be executed. Further, even when an operation is accepted in the 1st G acceptance permission state, it is sufficient that it causes some kind of change after acceptance. For example, "display UG1 after 1st G acceptance" or "output sound after 1st G acceptance" may be used. These may not necessarily be executed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the above-mentioned 1st G reception permissible state occurs, if a specific condition is met while the "1st G reception post display UG1" corresponding to the 1st G reception permissible state is displayed, this will be triggered. As a result, the "first G post-reception display UG1" is hidden. In this regard, if a specific condition is met in a situation where no operation has been accepted in the first G acceptance permission state, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the sample image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1. You can do it like this. According to such a configuration, if the player does not desire the button effect itself, various displays related to the button effect can be hidden, so that the interest in the game can be suitably maintained. become expected to do so.

However, in this case, although the sample image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1 are hidden, the state in which operation reception on the "1st G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is allowed continues. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, the state in which operation reception is allowed continues while various displays related to button effects are hidden, so it is expected that the interest in the game will be suitably maintained. Become so.

In addition, in the 1st G reception acceptance state, a specific condition is met in a situation where the operation reception has not been made yet, and this triggers various displays related to button production (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1). When an operation is accepted for the "1st G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" while the display is hidden, the "1st G post-reception display UG1" is displayed in response to the operation reception. It happens. However, in this case, the "first G reception output sound" may not be audibly output. According to such a configuration, if the various displays related to the button presentation (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) are hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, the "first G operation section ( Here, although the state in which operation reception is allowed for the "operation button 410)" continues, even if the operation reception is performed in the hidden state, the "output sound after 1st G reception" is audibly output. First, the specific conditions are met because the "display after 1st G reception UG1" is only displayed (the presentation is suppressed) while no sound triggered by such operation reception is output audibly. This makes it possible to appropriately create a sense of tension by encouraging careful consideration as to whether or not to do so.

In addition, a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where an operation has not been accepted in the 1st G acceptance permission state, and this triggers various displays related to button production (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1). While in the hidden state, an operation is accepted for the "1st G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", and the "1st G post-reception display UG1" is displayed in response to the operation reception. When the specific condition is established again, this may be used as an opportunity to prevent the "first G post-reception display UG1" from being hidden. According to such a configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied again, the "1st G reception display UG1" is not hidden, which makes it possible to think more carefully about whether or not to satisfy the specific condition. It becomes possible to appropriately impart a sense of tension by promoting this.

Here, the first G reception permission state (see FIGS. 352 to 354) may be generated as a "first G reception permission state according to a modified example" described below instead.

FIGS. 355 and 356 show the production contents when the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs and the player performs an operation based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 1G" being satisfied. 2 is a time chart showing an example of the above. FIG. 357 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIGS. 358 and 359 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 is configured to generate the above-mentioned "first G reception permission state" and the "first G reception permission state according to a modified example" described below as different types of reception permission states. Good too. However, in this case, the conditions for these occurrences will be set as mutually different conditions. Further, in this case, the post-acceptance display, the post-acceptance output sound, etc. may also be executed as different types (aspects).

The “1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example” is basically the same as the above-mentioned “1st G reception permissible state”, and as shown in FIG. This occurs as a permissible state. However, as shown in FIG. 357, a "section in which the sample image display MG-G1 is not displayed (non-display section)" appears from the middle (timing Xg in the figure) within the valid period (operation permissible state). This differs from the above-mentioned "first G acceptance state" in that this state is .

In this example, as shown in FIG. 357, when the above-mentioned timing Xg in the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example" arrives, the sample image display MG-G1 is set to a non-display state using this as a trigger. However, at this time, the "background image display" is changed to the background (the first background image HK-G1 is replaced with the second background image HK-G2). However, at this time, the extinguished EF display is not displayed as the sample image display MG-G1 is put into a non-display state.

Hereinafter, a case in which an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example" will be described in detail. , has the same configuration as the above-mentioned "first G acceptance state (FIGS. 352 to 354)" (including descriptions of other examples, etc.).

That is, as shown in FIG. 355(c), the "1st G reception permitting state according to the modified example" is also similar to the above-mentioned "1st G reception permitting state (FIGS. 352 to 354)" when timing tGa2 arrives. The operation button 410 is set as the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is set as the operation button 410. The point that the operation reception is allowed only once is also similar to the above-mentioned "1st G reception permission state (FIGS. 352 to 354)".

Similarly, in the pachinko machine 1, when generating such a "first G reception permission state according to the modified example", first, the "first G precursor sign indicating that the player will be given an opportunity to operate" is generated. It is possible to perform "performance display".

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example also performs the operations shown in FIG. 355(f) and FIG. ), a specific precursor display ZET is started to be executed as the "first G precursor effect display". This "1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET)" is a display related to the 1st G operation, as shown in FIGS. 355(c) and (f) and FIGS. 358(a) and (b). It is displayed so that it straddles the timing before and after.

That is, in this production example, when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, the first G operation section (Here, the operation button 410) is operated by the player as a first G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. At least a simulated image display MG-G1 that simulates the target (here, the "operation button 410" as the first G operation section) is displayed.

In this regard, the "sample image display MG-G1" corresponding to the "first G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example" also has a "predetermined color scheme (for example, white The "predetermined color scheme" is always used, and the display is made using the "predetermined color scheme."

In addition, the "sample image display MG-G1" corresponding to the "first G reception acceptance state according to the modified example" also has a part where the "operation receiving part" which is the operation target is simulated is "the mode shown in FIG. 144 (α)". 144 (β) to (σ), and then sequentially displayed in the various modes shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ). It appears repeatedly in a time-consuming manner. This cycle of 1G hours is longer than the "cycle of 5G hours," "cycle of 7G hours," and "cycle of 8G hours" displayed in the 5th G reception allowed state, 7th G reception allowed state, and 8th G reception allowed state, which will be described later. (long cycle), in the 1st G reception permissible state, the "operation receiving section" is It will depict how it moves slowly up and down its range of motion.

In addition, in the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example", as shown in FIGS. 358(b) and (c), as the "first G operation related display", the A message display (here, a message display MS-G1 displayed as "Press!") related to accepting an operation on the 1G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

Also in this example, the above-mentioned "1st G operation related display (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1)" corresponding to the "1st G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example" is shown in FIG. 358(b). While the specific precursor display ZET is being displayed as the "1st G precursor effect display", the display is started so that it appears to overlap behind the specific precursor display ZET. Note that the display range of the specific precursor display ZET (the range that makes it difficult to visually recognize the first G operation-related display) is reduced over time.

As a result of the display range of the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) being reduced in this way, when the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is hidden, the "1G The entire operation-related display (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) is now clearly visible, and under these conditions, the first G operation section (here, operation button 410) It becomes possible to accept operations for.

Here, as mentioned above, in the "first G reception acceptance state according to the modified example", there are two types: "section in which the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed (display section)" and "section in which the sample image display MG-G1 is not displayed." (non-display section)" appear in sequence. In this regard, in the "section in which the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed (display section)" in the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the "first G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" Regarding the content of changes that occur when a specific condition is met while an operation is accepted and the "1st G post-reception display UG1" corresponding to the operation is displayed (and other examples thereof) is as described above with reference to FIG. 352, FIG. 354, etc., so the explanation here will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 355 and FIGS. 358(c) and (d), in the "section in which the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed (display section)" in the "first G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example", " It is assumed that no operation is accepted for the first G operation section (here, operation button 410). That is, the example shown in FIG. 355 and FIGS. 358(c) and (d) is based on the arrival of the above-mentioned timing After the state transitions to the section where the sample image display MG-G1 is not displayed (non-display section), the timing tGa2a (Fig. 358 ( In the production situation shown in d), an operation is accepted for the "1st G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" while the 1G precursor production display (specific precursor display ZET) is being displayed. This is based on the assumption that

In this example, as shown in FIG. 355 and FIGS. 358(c) and (d), in the "section in which the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed (display section)", the "background image display" is displayed. 1 background image HK-G1 is displayed. However, when the timing Xg arrives, a background change occurs and the "background image display" changes from the first background image HK-G1 to the second background image HK-G2. In this example, when timing Xg arrives, not only the sample image display MG-G1 is hidden, but also the message display MS-G1 is hidden. However, as described above, at this time, the disappearing EF display is not displayed due to the virtual image display MG-G1 being set to a non-display state.

In this regard, the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" also applies to the "1st G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" while the 1G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is being displayed. When the operation is accepted, this is used as a trigger to turn the first G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) into a non-display state.

Therefore, an operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGa2a (the production situation shown in FIG. 358(d)) in the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 355 and 359(e), the 1st G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is set to a hidden state in response to the operation reception, and A "change after the 1st G reception (effect after the 1st G reception)" will occur.

In other words, the "change after 1st G reception (production after 1st G reception)" corresponding to the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modification" also results in a jackpot depending on "whether or not the enemy character BOSS-G1 can be defeated." When an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "1st G operation section (in this case, operation button 410)", this can be used as an opportunity to indicate whether the expectation level of "ally" is high or low. The production can progress so that the character YS-G1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-G1.

For example, such a "change after 1st G reception (performance after 1st G reception)" starts with the reception of an operation on the 1G operation unit (operation button 410), and the "1G reception permission according to the modified example". "state" is ended (see FIGS. 355(b) and 355(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 355(j), (m), and FIG. 359(e), the output sound after receiving the ``1st G reception'' in response to the operation reception on the ``1st G operation section (here, the operation button 410)'' is ” is audibly output, and the “first G post-reception display UG1” corresponding to the operation reception on the “first G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)” starts to be displayed.

Here, as the above-mentioned "display UG1 after receiving the first G", as shown in FIG. 359(e), "ally character YS-G1" swings down his sword and attacks "enemy character BOSS-G1" A depiction is made of this. Next, as shown in FIG. 359(f), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G1" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G1". Then, as shown in FIG. 359(g), a result is displayed as to whether or not the "enemy character BOSS-G1" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 359(e), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" appears, suggesting that expectations are high; Depending on the results of the judgment and production judgment, etc., a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" (a depiction that suggests low expectations) may appear, or It may be arranged such that a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" always appears.

Further, as described above, when the "1st G reception display UG1" is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 355(j) and (m), The "first G post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output.

However, regarding the above-mentioned "output sound after 1st G reception", only one mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 359(e) to (g)) is displayed as "display UG1 after 1st G reception". However, there are both cases in which an audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "first G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" and cases in which an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception. It becomes. In other words, in this case, the "output sound after 1st G reception" is executed even though the same aspect (for example, depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1") is executed as "display UG1 after 1G reception". Since there are cases where the "output sound after 1st G reception" is audibly output and cases where the "output sound after 1st G reception" is not audibly output, if the operation is performed without looking at the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation reception may not be performed properly. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension after an operation is accepted, such as when it is difficult to judge whether the operation has been performed. In this example, it is decided whether or not to output the "output sound after receiving the first G" audibly through a lottery such as performance determination, but the implementation method is not limited to this. However, "when an audible output is performed based on an operation reception" and "when an audible output is not performed based on an operation reception" both mean that the game or performance is being performed in a normal state (the same state). This is a situation in which the "output sound after 1st G reception" is not audibly output when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing, which is outside the intention of the technical concept. It should be excluded.

By the way, as mentioned above, the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" also changes while the "1st G reception post-reception display UG1" corresponding to the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is displayed. When the specific condition is met, this is used as an opportunity to turn the "first G post-reception display UG1" into a non-display state.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 355 and 359(e) and (h), the "conditions (specific conditions) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's actions" are such that the acceptance of operations on the sword ornament 5001 is As shown in FIGS. 355(a) and 355(j), in response to the operation reception within the "section where the sample image display MG-G1 is not displayed (non-display section)" It is assumed that the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGa2b (the production situation shown in FIG. 359(e)) during the period in which "first G post-reception display UG1" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGa2b (performance situation shown in FIG. 359(e)), the specific condition is satisfied as shown in FIG. 355(i) and FIG. 359(h). As a result of this, the "1st G post-reception display UG1" is hidden. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 355(d) and 359(h), the second background image HK-G2 that had been displayed as the "background image display" is replaced by the first background image HK-G1 (timing Xg is The background is changed to the background image that was displayed before the arrival. In addition, at this time, as shown in FIGS. 355(i), (l), and 359(h), a "specific display SK" is displayed in response to the establishment of the specific condition. A ``specific sound'' is output audibly depending on the situation.

In this example as well, the above-mentioned "specific display SK" is such that a mode such as "button presentation has been ended midway" is displayed (see FIG. 359(h)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and a plurality of modes may be prepared and the display may be displayed in any of these modes. Moreover, unlike the above-mentioned "output sound after receiving 1st G", the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGa2b (the production situation shown in FIG. 359(e)). It has become. The "specific sound" may also be provided in a plurality of modes, and may be audibly output in any of these modes. The "specific sound" and the "first G reception output sound" are audibly output as different types of sounds.

Also, in this example, while the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" is continued, the remaining time until the timing tGa3 at which the "first G reception permission state according to the modification example" ends arrives is indicated. Although the gauge image is depicted as decreasing over time, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is originally set at a timing when there is no operation reception for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 357(c). It continues until the timing tGa3 arrives, and is terminated based on the arrival of the timing tGa3. In this regard, the "first G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example" occurs as an acceptance acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 357, no operation is accepted for the "first G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGa3 arrives in the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example". In this case, the "first G reception acceptance state according to the modified example" is only terminated based on the arrival of timing tGa3, and no operation is performed on the "first G operation section (here, operation button 410)". The change after the 1st G reception (effect after the 1st G reception) that appears when it is performed is never executed.

Also, in the "first G reception acceptance state according to the modified example", the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible for this to occur when

Furthermore, even when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, as shown in FIGS. 355(e) and 357(e), the "first G operation unit (herein, The "operation button 410)" is configured to be able to emit light in the "first light emitting mode". This "first light emission mode" is set when the timing tGa3 at which the "first G reception acceptance state according to the modification" is terminated when an operation is not accepted in the "first G reception permission state according to the modification" is reached. (See FIG. 357(e)), but when an operation is accepted in the "1st G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example", this will be used as an opportunity to switch to the non-emission state (see FIG. 355 (see (e)). That is, in the "first G reception acceptance state according to the modified example", when the timing Xg arrives, the "sample image display MG-G1" is hidden, but even after the timing Xg arrives, The "first G operation section (here, operation button 410)" which is the operation target continues to emit light in the "first light emission mode".

In addition, even when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, the first G reception permission sound indicating that the operation reception is in a state where the operation reception is permitted or will be in the state where the operation reception is permitted is " Allowable sound A (normal mode)" can be audibly output (see FIGS. 355 and 357). Even in the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modification", as shown in FIG. 355(k), while the reception permissible sound (1st G reception permissible sound) is audibly output, In this case, even if an operation is accepted for the operation button 410), this will not be used as an opportunity to interrupt the acceptance permission sound, and even if a specific condition is met, this will not be used as an opportunity to interrupt the acceptance permission sound. There is no such thing.

As described above, regarding the "output sound after 1st G reception", the first mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 359(e) to 359(g)) is displayed as "display UG1 after 1st G reception". In this case, both the case where an audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "first G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" and the case where the audible output is not performed based on the operation reception. I decided to assume that there is. However, when the second mode (for example, a mode that suggests that expectations are low) is displayed as the "1st G post-reception display UG1", the "1st G operation section (here, the operation button 410 )" may be configured such that an audible output is always performed based on the operation acceptance for ". According to such a configuration, depending on which mode is displayed as the "first G reception display UG1", the "first G reception output sound" is always audible output, and the "first G reception output sound" is always audible. Since there are cases where "sound" is not necessarily output audibly, it is expected to better maintain the feeling of tension when an operation is accepted. The "output sound after 1st G reception" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which aspect is displayed as "1st G after reception display UG1", or which aspect is displayed. The same sound may be output audibly regardless of the case.

Furthermore, when the "first G reception permission state according to the modification" occurs, the reception permission sound may not necessarily be audibly output. Furthermore, the first G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) and message display MS-G1 may not necessarily be executed. Further, even when an operation is accepted in the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", any change may be caused after the reception. For example, "display after 1G reception UG1" or "1st G reception These steps may not necessarily be performed for the "rear output sound" as well.

Furthermore, as described above, when the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs, the "1st G reception post-reception display UG1" corresponding to the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is displayed. If a specific condition is met during the period, the "first G post-reception display UG1" is set to a non-display state. In this regard, the specific condition is satisfied in the situation where the operation reception has not yet been made in the "section where the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed (display section)" of the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modification" mentioned above. Occasionally, this may be used as an opportunity to hide the image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1. According to such a configuration, if the player does not desire the button effect itself, various displays related to the button effect can be hidden, so that the interest in the game can be suitably maintained. become expected to do so.

However, in this case, although the sample image display MG-G1 and the message display MS-G1 are hidden, the state in which operation reception on the "1st G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is allowed continues. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, the state in which operation reception is allowed continues while various displays related to button effects are hidden, so it is expected that the interest in the game will be suitably maintained. Become so.

In addition, in the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the specific condition is satisfied in the "section where the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed (display section)" and the operation reception is not yet made. As a result of this, while various displays related to button production (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) are hidden, the "1st G operation section (here, operation button 410)" When an operation is accepted, the "first G post-reception display UG1" is displayed using the operation acceptance as a trigger. However, in this case, the "first G reception output sound" may not be audibly output. According to such a configuration, if the various displays related to the button presentation (sample image display MG-G1, message display MS-G1) are hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, the "first G operation section ( Here, although the state in which operation reception is allowed for the "operation button 410)" continues, even if the operation reception is performed in the hidden state, the "output sound after 1st G reception" is audibly output. First, the specific conditions are met because the "display after 1st G reception UG1" is only displayed (the presentation is suppressed) while no sound triggered by such operation reception is output audibly. This makes it possible to appropriately create a sense of tension by encouraging careful consideration as to whether or not to do so.

In addition, in the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", when a specific condition is met in a situation where the operation reception has not yet been made, various displays related to button effects (sample image display MG-G1, message Display MS-G1) is in a hidden state, and under these circumstances, an operation is accepted for the ``1st G operation section (here, the operation button 410)'', and this is triggered by ``After 1st G reception''. ``Display UG1'' is displayed, and if the specific condition is met again while the ``1st G post-reception display UG1'' is displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to turn ``1st G post-reception display UG1'' into a hidden state. You may choose not to do so. That is, in this case, in response to the operation being accepted in the "section where the sample image display MG-G1 is not displayed (non-display section)" of the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the "display after the first G reception" is If a specific condition is met while ``UG1'' is displayed, this will be used as a trigger to hide the ``1st G reception display UG1''. If a non-display section is created early by satisfying a specific condition in the "section where the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed (display section)", the operation is accepted in the early created non-display section. Even if a specific condition is satisfied while the corresponding "1st G post-reception display UG1" is displayed, this will not trigger the "1st G post-reception display UG1" to be hidden. As a result, it is possible to encourage more careful consideration as to whether or not to satisfy the specific condition, and to suitably impart a sense of tension.

By the way, as mentioned above, in the "section (display section) in which the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed" in the "first G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example", the "first G operation section (here, the operation button 410 )", and when a specific condition is met while the "1st G post-reception display UG1" corresponding to the operation reception is being displayed, the content of the change that occurs as a result of this (further, The other example) is as described above with reference to FIG. 352, FIG. 354, etc.

However, in the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the "1st G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is An operation is accepted, and while the "1st G post-reception display UG1" corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, timing Xg (timing for transition from display section to non-display section) arrives without the specific condition being satisfied. 356 and 358(b), (i) to (k) show examples of effects in this case.

That is, first, the performance progress shown in FIGS. 358(a), (b), (i), and (j) in the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is the same as in the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state". Since this is the same as the presentation progress shown in FIGS. 354(a) to 354(d) and has been described above, the explanation here will be omitted.

In this regard, in the "first G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the production situation shown in FIG. 356 (j ) and FIG. 358(k), the arrival of the timing Xg is used as an opportunity to turn the "first G reception display UG1" into a non-display state.

That is, when the "first G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs, the operation is accepted for the "first G operation section (here, operation button 410)" before the timing Xg arrives, and the operation is not performed. Even if the "1st G post-reception display UG1" is displayed in response to the reception, the background change (from the first background image HK-G1 to the second background image HK-) is triggered by the arrival of timing Xg. (background replacement to G2) will occur. Then, when the timing Xg at which the background change occurs has arrived, the "first G reception display UG1" which is in the middle of being displayed is turned into a non-display state (see FIG. 358(k)). However, at this time, it goes without saying that the above-mentioned specific display SK and specific sound are not executed.

According to such a configuration, in the "first G reception acceptance state according to the modified example", it is determined at which timing within the "section in which the sample image display MG-G1 is displayed (display section)" the operation reception is made. Depending on the operation reception, the time (display time) until the "1st G post-reception display UG1" is hidden will differ, so the "1st G post-reception display UG1" will be changed depending on the specific conditions. By becoming established, the player becomes aware of the hidden possibilities, and is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the above production example, when the "1st G reception permissible state" or the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs, the "message display MS-G1" is displayed as an operation-related display when the operation reception is permitted. is displayed, but the "message display MS-G1" may not be displayed.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "second G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 360 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "2nd G acceptance permission state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 2G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIG. 361 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "second G reception permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 362 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect when the "second G reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "second G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "second G fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 2nd G variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2nd G variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 360(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "second G variation pattern", timing tGb2 has arrived when the second G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 2G"), "operation acceptance for the 2nd G operation unit regarding changes after the 2nd G acceptance (display after the 2nd G acceptance, sound output after the 2nd G acceptance, etc.)" The second G acceptance permission state (validity period) in which G is permitted can occur (situation shown in FIG. 362(b)).

Here, the "second G operation section" in which operation reception is permitted in the second G reception permissible state according to this embodiment is set as the operation button 410, and the second G reception permissible state is terminated. Only one operation reception is allowed until the end of the process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 2nd G reception acceptance state is generated, it is first possible to execute a ``2nd G precursor effect display'' that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity. .

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when the timing tGb1 arrives before the second G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 360(f) and 362(a), , the "specific precursor display ZET" described above as the "second G precursor effect display" is started. This "2nd G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET)" is a display related to the 2nd G operation, as shown in FIGS. 360(c), (f) and 362(a), (b). It is displayed so that it straddles the timing before and after.

That is, in this production example, when the second G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 360(g) and FIGS. 362(b) and (c), 410), or when the operation acceptance is permitted, the second G operation-related display is displayed only when the operation object (here, the At least a mock image display MG-G2, which is a copy of the "operation button 410" (as a 2G operation section), is displayed. In this production example, the timing at which the second G reception permission state occurs is the same as the timing at which the "second G operation related display" is displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "2nd G operation related display" is displayed after the timing when the "2nd G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing when the 2nd G acceptance permission state occurs. It is also possible to display the data in such a way that it starts and straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of the "second G operation related display" may be started with a delay from the timing when the second G reception permission state occurs.

In this regard, "sample image display MG-G2" corresponding to the 2nd G reception acceptance state has a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme with white as the base color)" and a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme with red as the base color)" as its color scheme. If one of multiple color schemes is used, including a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)", the 1st G reception acceptance state described above is used. It will be displayed in the same manner as the corresponding "sample image display MG-G1".

In addition, "mock image display MG-G2" corresponding to the 2nd G reception permission state is such that "after the simulated part of the operation receiving part" which is the operation target is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. This cycle of 2G hours is longer than the "cycle of 5G hours," "cycle of 7G hours," and "cycle of 8G hours" displayed in the 5th G reception allowed state, 7th G reception allowed state, and 8th G reception allowed state, which will be described later. (long cycle), in the 1st G reception permissible state, the "operation receiving section" is It will depict how it moves slowly up and down its range of motion. The 2G time period may be the same time as the 1G time period described above.

Note that when the "sample image display MG-G2" corresponding to the 2nd G reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGb2 at which the 2G reception permission state occurs, the periodic change will be changed according to the timing tGb2. It is preferable to wait until it starts. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-G2" corresponding to the second G acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tGb2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 2nd G reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. A message display (here, a message display MS-G2 displayed as "One hit!") related to the acceptance of an operation for the section (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

In this example, the "2nd G operation related display (sample image display MG-G2, message display MS-G2") corresponding to the 2nd G reception permission state is changed to While a specific omen display ZET is being displayed as an omen effect display, the display starts so that it appears to overlap behind the specific omen display ZET.As mentioned above, the specific omen display ZET is As time passes, the display range (the range that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second G operation-related display) is reduced.

As a result of the display range of the 2nd G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) being reduced in this way, when the 2G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is hidden, the ``2G The entire operation-related display (sample image display MG-G2, message display MS-G2) is now clearly visible, and under these conditions, the second G operation section (here, operation button 410) It becomes possible to accept operations for. However, the second G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) may continue to be displayed for the entire period from the occurrence of the second G acceptance permission state until it is ended.

However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 360 and 362, the 2nd G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is displayed at timing tGb2A (the effect situation shown in FIG. 362(b)) within the 2nd G acceptance permission state. It is assumed that an operation is accepted for the "second G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the operation is being performed.

In this regard, the 2nd G reception permission state according to this example is when the 2nd G operation section (here, operation button 410) is When the operation is accepted, this is used as an opportunity to turn the second G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) into a non-display state. In this example, as shown in FIG. 360(f), while the 2nd G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is being displayed, the "2nd G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. When the operation is accepted, this will be used as an opportunity to immediately turn the 2nd G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) into a non-display state. The second G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) may be made to be in the non-display state at a later timing such as "timing when the display state is turned on".

Therefore, if an operation is accepted for the "second G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGb2A (the production situation shown in FIG. 360(b)) within the second G reception permission state, the operations shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 362(c), upon receiving the operation, the 2nd G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is turned into a hidden state, and in response to the operation reception, the "2nd G change after reception" (Performance after 2nd G reception)” will occur.

Here, when the second G reception permissible state according to this example occurs, an ally character corresponding to the type of the second G reception permissible state (here, the ally character YS-G2 equipped with an ax) and the second G reception permissible state An enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G2 depicted as a worm) is displayed according to the type of 2G acceptance permission state. In other words, in the "Change after 2nd G reception (performance after 2nd G reception)" corresponding to the 2nd G reception permissible state, is there a high expectation that a jackpot will be achieved depending on "whether or not you can defeat the enemy character BOSS-G2?" When an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "second G operation section (in this case, operation button 410)", the "ally character YS-G2" is activated. The presentation can progress as if attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G2."

For example, in such a "change after 2nd G reception (performance after 2nd G reception)", first, the 2nd G reception permissible state is terminated when an operation is accepted on the 2G operation unit (operation button 410). At the same time (see FIGS. 360(b) and 360(c)), the sample image display MG-G2 and the message display MS-G2 are hidden (see FIGS. 360(g) and 362(c) to (e)). ). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 360(j), (m), and FIG. 362(c), the "output sound after receiving the second G" in response to receiving the operation on the "second G operating section (here, the operating button 410)" ” is audibly output, and the “second G reception post-reception display UG2” corresponding to the operation reception on the “second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)” starts to be displayed.

However, in this example, there is a predetermined waiting time from when an operation is accepted in the 2nd G acceptance permission state until the sample image display MG-G2 and message display MS-G2 are turned off. is set. Therefore, although the sample image display MG-G2 and the message display MS-G2 are hidden when an operation is accepted in the 2nd G reception permission state, immediately after the operation is accepted. Instead of being hidden, the display can continue for a predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, in the 2nd G acceptance acceptance state, the 2nd G disappearing EF display EF-G2 is displayed to make it difficult to see the sample image display MG and message display MS until they are hidden. It has become. That is, in this case, the sample image display MG and the message display MS are hidden while the second G disappearing EF display EF-G2 is being displayed, as shown in FIGS. 360(g) and (h). The Rukoto.

Here, as the above-mentioned "display UG2 after receiving the second G", first, as shown in FIG. 362(c), "ally character YS-G2" swings down the sword and attacks "enemy character BOSS-G2" A depiction is made of this. Next, as shown in FIG. 362(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G2" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G2". Then, as shown in FIG. 362(e), a result is displayed as to whether or not the "enemy character BOSS-G2" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 362(e), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G2" appears, suggesting that expectations are high; Depending on the results of judgment and production judgment, etc., a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G2" (a depiction suggesting that expectations are low) may appear.

Furthermore, as described above, when the "2nd G reception display UG2" is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 360 (j) and (m), The "second G post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output.

In this respect, the above-mentioned "output sound after reception of 2nd G" is different from the case of "output sound after reception of 1st G" described above, and is different from the case of "output sound after reception of 2nd G" in one aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 362(c) (Aspects shown in (e)) are displayed, and when no audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "second G operation section (here, operation button 410)" and when the audible output is not performed based on the operation reception There is no case where an audible output is performed, and an audible output is always performed based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where the audible output is not performed based on the operation reception on the second G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and the audible output is performed based on the operation reception" refers to the normal state ( This refers to the situation where a game or performance is being performed under the same condition), and does not refer to the configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

By the way, in the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state" and "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", if a specific condition is satisfied while the corresponding "1st G reception post-reception display UG1" is displayed, As described above, this triggers the "1st G post-reception display UG1" to be hidden.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in FIG. 360 ( As shown in a) and (j), at timing tGb2B (the production situation shown in FIG. 362(c)) during the period in which the above-mentioned "2nd G post-reception display UG2" is displayed, the specific condition is This assumes that it is established.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGb2B (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 362(c)), this is used as a trigger to perform the above-mentioned "specific condition" as shown in FIG. "sound" is output audibly. However, even if the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGb2B (the production situation shown in FIG. 362(c)), as shown in FIGS. 360(g), (i) and 362(d), the specific condition The "2nd G post-reception display UG2" is not hidden when the above is satisfied, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the specific condition is not displayed. That is, in this case, the "2nd G post-reception display UG2" is the same as the case where the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "2nd G post-reception display UG2" is executed (Fig. 362(c) to ( The presentation will proceed in the manner shown in e).

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGb2B (the production situation shown in FIG. 362(c)), but at timing tGb2B. When the specific condition is satisfied in the performance situation shown in FIG. 362(c), this may be used as an opportunity to prevent audible output.

Further, in this example, while the second G reception permission state is continued, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGb3 at which the second G reception permission state ends is reached is depicted decreasing as time passes. However, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

Additionally, the 2nd G reception permission state is originally defined as when timing tGb3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "2nd G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 361(c). The process is continued until the timing tGb3 has arrived and is terminated. In this regard, the second G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 361, if an operation is not accepted for the "second G operation section (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGb3 arrives in the second G reception allowed state, timing tGb3 is Not only is the 2nd G acceptance permission state terminated based on the arrival of the 2nd G acceptance state, but also the 2nd G acceptance post-acceptance change ( 2nd G reception performance) will start to be executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 361, the above-mentioned "specific condition ” is assumed to hold true.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGb3a, as shown in FIG. 361(l), the above-mentioned "specific sound" is audibly outputted using this as a trigger. However, even if the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGb3a, as shown in FIGS. ” will not be hidden, and the “specific display SK” will not be displayed in response to the fulfillment of the specific condition. In other words, in this case, the "2nd G post-reception display UG2" will progress in the same manner as if the specific conditions were not satisfied within the period in which the "2nd G post-reception display UG2" was being executed. (See Figure 361(j)).

In this example as well, the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGb3a, but when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGb3a, it is triggered by this. It may also be configured not to be output audibly.

In addition, the second G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, this may occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed. It may be assumed that

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, when the 2nd G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 360(e) and 361(e), the "2nd G operating section (here, the operating button 410)" that is the operation target There are both cases in which the light is emitted in the "first light emission mode" and cases in which the light is emitted in the "second light emission mode." In addition, in this example, it is decided whether to emit light in the "first light emission mode" or "second light emission mode" by lottery such as performance judgment (such as jackpot expectation level), but the method for realizing this is as follows. Not limited. If no operation is accepted in the second G reception permission state, these light emissions continue until the timing tGb3 when the second G reception permission state ends (see FIG. 361(e)). When an operation is accepted in the 2G acceptance permission state, this is used as an opportunity to change the non-emission state (see FIG. 360(e)).

In addition, when the 2nd G reception permissible state occurs, the 2G reception permissible sound that indicates that the operation reception is in a permissible state or will be in a state where the operation reception is permissible is "permissible sound A (normal mode)". )” and “Permissible sound B (specific mode)” can be output audibly from a plurality of modes (sounds) (see FIG. 360(k), FIG. 361(k), etc.) . For example, "acceptable sound A (normal mode)" is set to be audibly output when the model image display MG-G2 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme, and "acceptable sound B (specific mode)" is set to be output audibly when the model image display MG-G2 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme. - An audible output may be provided when G2 is displayed in a particular color scheme. In this regard, in the 2nd G reception permissible state, as shown in FIG. 360(k), while the reception permissible sound (2nd G reception permissible sound) is audibly output When an operation is accepted for the button 410), this is used as an opportunity to interrupt the acceptance acceptance sound. However, in this example, even if a specific condition is met while the acceptance permission sound (second G reception permission sound) is being audibly output, the reception permission sound will not be interrupted.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the above-mentioned 2nd G reception permission state occurs, even if the specific condition is met while the "2nd G reception display UG2" corresponding to the 2G reception permission state is displayed, this Taking this as a trigger, the "2nd G post-reception display UG2" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in the second G acceptance permission state where no operation has been accepted yet, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the sample image display MG-G2 and message display MS-G2. It is designed so that you will not be exposed to it.

In addition, in this example, the second G disappearing EF display EF-G2 corresponding to the second G acceptance permission state is started to be displayed from the situation shown in FIG. The display may start from the situation shown in (c).

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "third G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 363 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "3rd G acceptance permission state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 3G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIG. 364 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the "3rd G acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 365 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect when the "3rd G acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "3rd G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "3rd G fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 3rd G fluctuation pattern, sound output according to the 3rd G fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3rd G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 363(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "3rd G variation pattern", timing tGc2 has arrived when the 3rd G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 3G"), "operation acceptance for the 3rd G operation unit regarding changes after the 3rd G acceptance (display after the 3rd G acceptance, sound output after the 3rd G acceptance, etc.)" The third G acceptance permission state (validity period) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 365(b)).

Here, in the 3rd G reception permissible state according to this embodiment, the "3rd G operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 3G reception permissible state is terminated. Only one operation reception is allowed until the end of the process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3rd G acceptance permission state is generated, the player is given an operation opportunity as shown in FIGS. 363(f) and 365(a). It is designed not to display any warning signs that suggest the following.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 1, when the 3rd G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 363(g) and FIGS. A simulated image display of the "operation button 410" (as the third G operation section) is not displayed.

Further, when the third G acceptance acceptance state according to this example occurs, in addition to displaying the sample image, messages related to operation acceptance are also not displayed.

However, in this example, when the 3rd G acceptance permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 365(b), an ally character (here, an ally character YS equipped with a spear -G3) and an enemy character (in this case, the enemy character BOSS-G3 depicted as a ghost) according to the type of the 3rd G acceptance permission state are displayed, and these displays are being executed. At the bottom, an operation can be accepted for the third G operation section (here, operation button 410).

In other words, in the "3rd G post-reception change (3rd G post-reception performance)" that corresponds to the 3rd G reception permissible state, is there a high expectation that a jackpot will be achieved depending on "whether or not you can defeat the enemy character BOSS-G3?" When an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "3rd G operation section (in this case, operation button 410)", the "ally character YS-G3" is activated. The presentation can progress as if attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G3." In this example, the friendly character YS-G3 and the enemy character BOSS-G3 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 3rd G reception permission state, but operation reception is not allowed in the 3G reception permission state. Taking this as an opportunity, the friendly character YS-G3 and the enemy character BOSS-G3 may be displayed as one of the "3rd G post-reception changes (3rd G post-reception display UG3 to be described later)".

For example, in such a "change after 3G reception (performance after 3G reception)", first, upon reception of an operation on the 3G operation unit (operation button 410), the 3G reception permission state is ended. (See Figures 363(b) and (c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 363(j), (m), and 365(c), the "3rd G reception output sound" in response to the operation reception on the "3rd G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" ” is audibly output, and the “3rd G post-reception display UG3” corresponding to the operation reception on the “3rd G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)” starts to be displayed.

Here, as the above-mentioned "3rd G reception display UG3", as shown in FIG. 365(c), "ally character YS-G3" swings down his sword and attacks "enemy character BOSS-G3". A depiction is made of this. Next, as shown in FIG. 365(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G3" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G3". Then, as shown in FIG. 365(e), a result is displayed as to whether or not the "enemy character BOSS-G3" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 365(e), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G3" appears, suggesting that expectations are high; Depending on the results of judgments and performance judgments, a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G3" (a depiction that suggests low expectations) may appear, or It may be arranged such that a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G3" always appears.

Furthermore, as described above, when the "3rd G reception display UG3" is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 363 (j) and (m), The "3rd G post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output.

In this respect, the above-mentioned "output sound after reception of 3rd G" is different from the case of "output sound after reception of 1st G" described above, and is different from the case of "output sound after reception of 3rd G" in one aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 365(c) (aspects shown in (e)) are displayed, and when no audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "3rd G operation section (here, the operation button 410)", and when the audible output is not performed based on the operation reception There is no case where an audible output is performed, and an audible output is always performed based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception on the third G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and an audible output is performed based on the operation reception" refers to the normal state ( This refers to the situation where a game or performance is being performed under the same condition), and does not refer to the configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

By the way, when such a post-reception display is displayed, other effects or background images unrelated to the reception permissible state may be made difficult to see, or the post-reception display may be in a different form than the player desires. There is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced due to the emergence of such situations.

Therefore, in the 3rd G reception permission state according to this embodiment, if a specific condition is satisfied while the "3G reception post display UG3" corresponding to the 3G reception permission state is displayed, this will be used as a trigger for the 3G reception permission state. 3rd G reception display UG3" is hidden. According to such a configuration, if the "3rd G post-reception display UG3" is displayed and the player does not wish to do so, the "3rd G post-reception display UG3" can be hidden. It is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, as shown in FIG. 363 (a). ), (j), the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGc2B (the production situation shown in FIG. 365(c)) during the period in which "3rd G reception display UG3" is displayed. I am assuming the case.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGc2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 365(c)), the corresponding When the specific condition is met, the "3rd G post-reception display UG3" is set to a non-display state. At this time, a "specific display SK" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is displayed, and a "specific sound" corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition is audibly output.

In this example, as the above-mentioned "specific display SK", a mode such as "button effect has been ended midway" is displayed (see FIG. 365(f)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and a plurality of modes may be prepared and the display may be displayed in any of these modes. Further, the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGc2B (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 365(c)). The "specific sound" may also be provided in a plurality of modes, and may be audibly output in any of these modes. The "specific sound" and the "output sound after third G reception" are audibly output as sounds of different types.

Further, in this example, while the 3rd G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGc3 at which the 3G reception permission state ends arrives decreases as time passes. will not be performed.

Additionally, the 3rd G reception permission state is originally defined as when timing tGc3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "3rd G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 364(c). The process continues until the time tGc3 arrives, and is terminated upon arrival of timing tGc3. In this respect, the 3rd G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364, if no operation is accepted for the "3rd G operation section (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGc3 arrives in the 3rd G reception allowed state, timing tGc3 is The 3rd G acceptance permission state is only terminated based on the arrival, and the 3rd G acceptance post-acceptance change ( 3rd G post-reception performance) is never executed.

In addition, the 3rd G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, it may be possible to generate this when the second background image HK-G2 is displayed instead of the first background image HK-G1.

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this respect, in the 3rd G acceptance acceptance state, even though the image display imitating the operation target is not displayed, as shown in FIGS. 363(e) and 364(e), The 3G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is configured to be able to emit light in the first light emission mode. This "first light emission mode" is continued until the timing tGc3 when the 3rd G reception permission state is ended when no operation is accepted in the 3G reception permission state (see Fig. 364(e)). (see FIG. 363(e)), when an operation is accepted in the 3rd G acceptance permission state, this is used as an opportunity to change the non-emission state (see FIG. 363(e)).

In addition, when the 3rd G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. No sound is output.

Furthermore, in the 3rd G acceptance acceptance state, the extinction EF display is not displayed when an operation is accepted or when the validity period ends.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "4th G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 366 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "4th G reception permission state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 4G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIG. 367 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the "4th G acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the "4th G acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "4th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "4th G fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 4th G variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 4th G variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 366(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "4th G variation pattern", timing tGd2 has arrived when the 4th G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 4G"), the above-mentioned 4th G reception where "operation reception on the 4G operation unit regarding changes after 4G reception (display after 4G reception, etc.)" is permitted. A permissible state (valid period) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 368(b)).

Here, the "4th G operating section" in which the operation is permitted in the 4th G reception permissible state according to this embodiment is set as the operation button 410, and the 4G reception permissible state is terminated. It is permissible to accept only one operation until the end of the process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 4th G acceptance permission state is generated, the player is given an operation opportunity as shown in FIGS. 366(f) and 368(a). It is designed not to display any warning signs that suggest the following.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 1, when the 4th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 366(g) and FIGS. A simulated image display of the "operation button 410" (as the 4th G operation section) is not displayed.

Furthermore, when the 4th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example occurs, in addition to displaying the sample image, messages related to operation acceptance are not displayed.

However, in this example, when the 4th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 368(b), an ally character (here, an ally character YS equipped with a sword -G1) and an enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G1 depicted as a goblin) according to the type of the 4th G acceptance permission state are displayed, and these displays are being executed. At this point, an operation can be accepted for the fourth G operation section (here, operation button 410).

That is, the "display after 4th G reception" corresponding to the 4th G reception permissible state has the same content as the "display after 1st G reception" corresponding to the above-mentioned 1st G reception permissible state, and "enemy character BOSS-G1 Whether you can beat the jackpot or not can indicate whether you have high or low expectations for hitting the jackpot. More specifically, when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "4th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)", this triggers the "ally character YS-G1" to move to the "enemy character BOSS-". The production can progress as if attacking "G1". In this example, the friendly character YS-G1 and the enemy character BOSS-G1 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 4th G reception permission state, but operation reception is not allowed in the 4G reception permission state. Taking this as an opportunity, the friendly character YS-G1 and the enemy character BOSS-G1 may be displayed as one of the "4th G post-reception changes (4th G post-reception display UG4 to be described later)".

For example, in such a "4G post-reception change (4G post-reception performance)", first, the 4G reception permission state is terminated when an operation is accepted on the 4G operation unit (operation button 410). (See Figures 366(b) and (c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 366(j) and 368(c), the "4th G reception post-reception display UG4" corresponding to the operation reception on the "4th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" starts to be displayed. be done.

Here, the above-mentioned "4th G post-reception display UG4" is the same as the above-mentioned "1st G post-reception display UG1". Therefore, in the "4th G post-reception display UG4", first, as shown in FIG. 368(c), "ally character YS-G1" swings down his sword to attack "enemy character BOSS-G1". A description is made. Next, as shown in FIG. 368(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G1" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G1". Then, as shown in FIG. 368(e), a result is displayed as to whether or not the "enemy character BOSS-G1" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 368(e), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" appears, suggesting that expectations are high; Depending on the results of the judgment and production judgment, etc., a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" (a depiction that suggests low expectations) may appear, or It may be arranged such that a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G1" always appears.

However, in the "Change after 4th G reception (effect after 4G reception)" according to this example, the above "Display UG4 after 4G reception" is the same as in the case of the "1st G reception permissible state" described above. Although it is executed with the same content as the "1st G post-reception display UG1", the "post-reception output sound" in response to the operation reception on the "4th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is as described above. Unlike the case of the "first G acceptance state", no sound is audibly output.

By the way, in the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state", "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", and "3rd G reception permissible state", while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, As described above, when the specific condition is satisfied, this is used as an opportunity to turn the "post-reception display" into a non-display state.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be established in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in FIG. 366 ( As shown in a) and (j), at timing tGd2B (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 368(c)) during the period in which the “4th G post-reception display UG4” is displayed, the specific condition is This assumes that it is established.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGd2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 368(c)), this is used as a trigger to perform the above-mentioned "specific condition" as shown in FIG. "sound" is output audibly. However, even if the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGd2B (the production situation shown in FIG. 368(c)), as shown in FIGS. 366(i), (l) and FIG. 368(d), the specific condition The "4th G post-reception display UG4" is not hidden when the above is satisfied, and the "specific display SK" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is not displayed. That is, in this case, the "4th G post-reception display UG4" is the same as the case where the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "4th G post-reception display UG4" is executed (Fig. 368(c) to ( The presentation will proceed in the manner shown in e).

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGd2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 368(c)), but at timing tGd2B. When the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied in (the performance situation shown in FIG. 366(c)), there may be both a case where the audible output is made and a case where the audible output is not made.

Further, in this example, while the 4th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGd3 at which the 4G reception permission state is ended decreases as time passes. will not be performed.

Additionally, the 4th G reception acceptance state is originally defined as when timing tGd3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "4th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 367(c). The process continues until the time tGd3 arrives, and is terminated upon arrival of timing tGd3. In this respect, the 4th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 367, if an operation is not accepted for the "4th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGd3 arrives in the 4G acceptance permission state, timing tGd3 is The 4th G acceptance permission state is only terminated based on the arrival of the 4th G acceptance state, and the 4th G acceptance post-acceptance change ( 4th G post-reception performance) is never executed.

Additionally, the 4th G reception permission state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, this can occur when a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2 is displayed instead of the first background image HK-G1. You can.

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, in the 4th G acceptance acceptance state, even though the image display imitating the operation target is not displayed, as shown in FIGS. 366(e) and 367(e), The 4G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is configured to be able to emit light in the first light emission mode. This "first light emitting mode" continues until timing tGd3 when the 4th G reception permission state is ended when no operation is accepted in the 4G reception permission state (see FIG. 367(e)). (see FIG. 366(e)), when an operation is accepted in the 4th G acceptance acceptance state, this is used as an opportunity to switch to a non-emission state (see FIG. 366(e)).

In addition, when the 4th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. No sound is output.

In addition, in the 4th G acceptance acceptance state, the extinction EF display is not displayed when an operation is accepted or when the validity period ends.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "fifth G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 369 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "5th G acceptance permission state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 5G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIG. 370 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the "5th G acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 371 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect when the "5th G acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "5th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "5th G fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 5th G fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 5th G fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "5th G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 369(c), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "5th G variation pattern", timing tGe2 has arrived when the 5th G time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ. (based on the fulfillment of "condition 5G"), "operation acceptance for the 5th G operation unit regarding changes after the 5th G reception (display after the 5G reception, sound output after the 5G reception, etc.)" The fifth G reception permission state (validity period) in which G is permitted can occur (situation shown in FIG. 371(b)).

Here, in the 5th G reception permissible state according to this embodiment, the "5th G operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 5G reception permissible state is terminated. Only one operation reception is allowed until the end of the process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 5th G reception acceptance state is generated, it is possible to first perform a ``5th G precursor effect display'' that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity. .

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when timing tGe1 arrives before the fifth G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 369(f) and FIG. 371(a), , the execution of the "specific precursor display ZET" described above as the "5th G precursor effect display" is started. This "5th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET)" is a display related to the 5th G operation, as shown in FIGS. 369(c), (f) and 371(a), (b). It is displayed so that it straddles the timing before and after.

That is, in this production example, when the 5th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 369(g) and FIGS. 371(b), (c), 410), or when the operation reception is permitted, the 5G operation-related display is displayed only when the operation object (here, the 5G operation-related display) At least a mock image display MG-G5, which is a copy of the "operation button 410" (as a 5G operation unit), is displayed. In this production example, the timing at which the 5th G acceptance permission state occurs is the same as the timing at which the "5th G operation related display" is displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "5th G operation related display" is displayed after the timing when the "5th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing at which the 5th G reception permission state occurs. It is also possible to display the data in such a way that it starts and straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of the "5th G operation related display" may be started with a delay to the timing when the 5th G acceptance permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "sample image display MG-G5" corresponding to the 5th G reception acceptance state has a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme with white as the base color)" and a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme with red as the base color)" as its color scheme. If one of multiple color schemes is used, including a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)", the 1st G reception acceptance state described above is used. It will be displayed in the same manner as the corresponding "sample image display MG-G1".

However, in the "mock image display MG-G5" corresponding to the 5th G reception permission state, after the part that simulates the "operation receiver" that is the operation target is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. This cycle of 5G time is set as a shorter time (short cycle) than the "cycle of 1G time" and "cycle of 2G time" displayed in the above-mentioned 1st G reception allowed state, 2nd G reception allowed state, etc. In the 5th G acceptance permission state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted to move more quickly through its movable range than in the above-mentioned 1G reception permission state, 2nd G reception permission state, and the like. The moving image in "Make image display MG-G5" does not have to be a simple fast-forward representation of the moving image in "Make image display MG-G1" or "Make image display MG-G2"; may depict the "operation receiver" periodically moving through its movable range using another moving image.

In addition, when displaying the "sample image display MG-G5" corresponding to the 5th G acceptance permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGe2 at which the 5G reception permission state occurs, the periodic change will be changed according to the timing tGe2. It is preferable to wait until it starts. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-G5" corresponding to the 5th G acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tGe2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 5th G reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. A message display (here, a message display MS-G5 displayed as "hot press!") related to the operation reception for the section (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

In this example, the "5th G operation related display (sample image display MG-G5, message display MS-G5") corresponding to the 5th G acceptance permission state is changed to While a specific omen display ZET is being displayed as an omen effect display, the display starts so that it appears to overlap behind the specific omen display ZET.As mentioned above, the specific omen display ZET is As time passes, the display range (the range that makes it difficult to visually recognize the 5th G operation-related display) is reduced.

Then, as a result of the display range of the 5G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) being reduced in this way, when the 5G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is hidden, "5G The entire operation-related display (sample image display MG-G5, message display MS-G5) is now clearly visible, and under these conditions, the 5th G operation section (here, operation button 410) It becomes possible to accept operations for. However, the 5th G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) may continue to be displayed for the entire period from the time when the 5th G acceptance permission state occurs until it is ended.

However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 369 and 371, the 5th G precursor performance display (specific precursor display ZET) is displayed at timing tGe2A (the performance situation shown in FIG. 369(b)) within the 5G acceptance permission state. It is assumed that an operation is accepted for the "fifth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" while the operation is being performed.

In this regard, in the 5G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when the 5G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is displayed, the "5G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. Even if an operation is accepted, the 5G omen effect display (specific omen display ZET) will not be hidden, but will remain hidden for a predetermined period of time (same as when no operation was accepted). (display time).

Therefore, if an operation is accepted for the "5th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGe2A (the performance situation shown in FIG. 369(b)) within the 5th G reception permissible state, FIG. As shown in FIG. 371(c), in response to the operation reception, the 5G omen effect display (specific omen display ZET) is not hidden but continues to be displayed and responds to the operation reception. This will cause a "5th G post-reception change (5th G post-reception performance)".

Here, when the 5th G reception permissible state according to this example occurs, the ally character corresponding to the type of the 5th G reception permissible state (here, the ally character YS-G5 equipped with a hammer) and the 5G reception permissible state An enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G5 depicted as a lizardman) is displayed according to the type of 5G acceptance permission state. In other words, in the "5th G post-reception change (5th G post-reception performance)" that corresponds to the 5th G reception permissible state, is there a high expectation that a jackpot will be achieved depending on "whether or not you can defeat the enemy character BOSS-G5?" When an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "5th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)", the "ally character YS-G5" is activated. The production can progress as if attacking the "enemy character BOSS-G5."

For example, in such a "5G post-reception change (5G post-reception performance)", first, upon receipt of an operation on the 5G operation unit (operation button 410), the 5G reception permission state is terminated. At the same time (see FIGS. 369(b) and (c)), the sample image display MG-G5 and the message display MS-G5 are hidden (see FIGS. 369(g) and 371(c) to (e)). ). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 369(j), (m), and FIG. 371(c), the output sound after receiving the 5th G operation in response to the operation received on the 5th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) ” is audibly output, and the “5th G post-reception display UG5” corresponding to the operation reception on the “5th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)” starts to be displayed.

However, in this example, there is a predetermined waiting time from when an operation is accepted in the 5th G acceptance acceptance state until the sample image display MG-G5 and message display MS-G5 are turned into a non-display state. is set. Therefore, although the sample image display MG-G5 and the message display MS-G5 are hidden when an operation is accepted in the 5th G acceptance acceptance state, immediately after the operation is accepted. Instead of being hidden, the display can continue for a predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, in the 5th G acceptance acceptance state, the 5th G disappearing EF display EF-G5 is displayed to make it difficult to see the sample image display MG and message display MS until they are hidden. It has become. That is, in this case, the sample image display MG and message display MS are hidden while the 5th G disappearing EF display EF-G5 is being displayed, as shown in FIGS. 369(g) and (h). The Rukoto.

Note that in this example, the 5th G extinction EF display EF-G5 corresponding to the 5th G acceptance acceptance state is displayed as the same image display as the 2nd G extinction EF display EF-G2 corresponding to the 2nd G reception acceptance state. , may be displayed as mutually different image displays.

Here, as the above-mentioned "5th G post-reception display UG5", as shown in FIG. 371(c), "ally character YS-G5" swings down the hammer to attack "enemy character BOSS-G5" A depiction is made of this. Next, as shown in FIG. 371(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G5" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G5". Then, as shown in FIG. 371(e), a result is displayed as to whether or not the "enemy character BOSS-G5" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 371(e), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G5" appears, suggesting that expectations are high; Depending on the results of judgment and performance judgment, etc., a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G5" (a depiction suggesting that expectations are low) may appear.

Furthermore, as described above, when the "5th G reception display UG5" is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 369 (j) and (m), The "5th G post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output.

In this respect, the "5th G post-reception output sound" differs from the above-mentioned "1st G post-reception output sound" as the "5th G post-reception display UG5" in one aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 371(c) (aspects shown in (e)) are displayed, and when no audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "5th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" and when the audible output is not performed based on the operation reception There is no case where an audible output is performed, and an audible output is always performed based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where the audible output is not performed based on the operation reception on the 5th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and the audible output is performed based on the operation reception" only refers to the normal state ( This refers to the situation where a game or performance is being performed under the same condition), and does not refer to the configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

By the way, in the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state", "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", "3rd G reception permissible state", etc., while the corresponding "post-reception display" is displayed, As described above, when the specific condition is satisfied, this is used as an opportunity to turn the "post-reception display" into a non-display state.

In this production example as well, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is satisfied when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, as shown in FIG. 369 ( As shown in a) and (j), at timing tGe2B (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 371(c)) during the period in which the “5th G post-reception display UG5” is displayed, the specific condition is This assumes that it is established.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGe2B (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 371(c)), this is used as a trigger to perform the above-mentioned "specific "sound" is output audibly. However, even if the above specific conditions are satisfied at timing tGe2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 371(c)), as shown in FIGS. 369(g), (i), (l) and FIG. 371(d), , the "5th G post-reception display UG5" will not be hidden when the specific condition is met, and the "specific display SK" will be displayed in response to the fulfillment of the specific condition. Nor. That is, in this case, the "5th G post-reception display UG5" is the same as the case where the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "5th G post-reception display UG5" is executed (Fig. 371 (c) to ( The presentation will proceed in the manner shown in e).

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGe2B (the production situation shown in FIG. 371(c)), but at timing tGe2B When the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied in (the performance situation shown in FIG. 371(c)), there may be both a case where the audible output is made and a case where the audible output is not made.

Further, in this example, while the 5th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGe3 at which the 5G reception permission state is ended decreases as time passes. However, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

Additionally, the 5th G reception acceptance state is originally defined as the time when timing tGe3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "5th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. 370(c). The process is continued until the timing tGe3 has arrived and is terminated. In this respect, the 5th G acceptance acceptance state occurs as an acceptance acceptance state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 370, if an operation is not accepted for the "5th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGe3 arrives in the 5th G reception allowed state, timing tGe3 is Not only is the 5th G acceptance permission state terminated based on the arrival of the 5th G acceptance state, but also the 5th G post-acceptance change ( After receiving the 5th G, the performance will start.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 370, the above-mentioned "specific condition ” is assumed to hold true.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGe3a, as shown in FIG. 370(l), the above-described "specific sound" is audibly outputted using this as a trigger. However, even if the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGe3a, as shown in FIGS. ” will not be hidden, and the “specific display SK” will not be displayed in response to the fulfillment of the specific condition. In other words, in this case, the "5th G post-reception display UG5" will progress in the same manner as when the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "5th G post-reception display UG5" is being executed. (See Figure 370(j)).

In this example as well, the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGe3a, but when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGe3a, it is triggered by this. There may be both audible output and non-audible output.

In addition, the 5th G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, this may occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed. It may be assumed that

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, when the 5th G reception permission state occurs, even though the sample image display MG-G5 is displayed in one of multiple color schemes including the predetermined color scheme and the specific color scheme, the 5G operation unit (operation button 410)", as shown in FIGS. 369(e) and 370(e), it is possible to emit light in the "first light emitting mode", but not in the "second light emitting mode". It has become. If no operation is accepted in the 5th G reception permission state, the light emission continues until timing tGe3 when the 5G reception permission state ends (see FIG. 370(e)); When an operation is accepted in the acceptance-permitted state, this triggers the non-emission state (see FIG. 369(e)).

In addition, when the 5th G reception permissible state occurs, the 5G reception permissible sound that indicates that the operation reception is in a permissible state or will be in a state where the operation reception is permissible is "permissible sound A (normal mode)". )" and "permissible sound B (specific mode)" can be audibly output (see FIG. 369(k), FIG. 370(k), etc.). For example, "acceptable sound A (normal mode)" is set to be audibly output when the model image display MG-G5 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme, and "acceptable sound B (specific mode)" is set to be output audibly when the model image display MG-G5 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme. - An audible output may be provided when G5 is displayed in a particular color scheme. In this regard, in the 5th G reception permission state, as shown in FIG. 369(k), while the reception permission sound (5G reception permission sound) is audibly output, the 5G operation section Even if an operation is accepted for the button 410), the acceptance acceptance sound is not interrupted. In this example, even if a specific condition is met while the acceptance permission sound (fifth G reception permission sound) is being audibly output, the reception permission sound will not be interrupted. Similarly, in this example, as shown in FIG. 369(f), even if a specific condition is met while the 5G portent effect display is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to display the 5G portent. The performance display is never hidden.

In this example, when the sample image display is displayed in a specific color scheme in the 5th G acceptance acceptance state, the reception acceptance sound is the same as when the sample image display is displayed in a specific color scheme in the 2G acceptance acceptance state (acceptable). Sound B) was audibly output, but instead of this, a sound of a mode not used in the second G reception permissible sound (sound different from both permissible sound A and permissible sound B) was audibly output. You can.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the 5th G reception permission state occurs, even if the specific conditions are met while the "5G reception post display UG5" corresponding to the 5G reception permission state occurs, this will not happen. Taking this as a trigger, the "5th G post-reception display UG5" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in the above-mentioned 5th G acceptance acceptance state where no operation has been accepted yet, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the sample image display MG-G5 and the message display MS-G5. It is designed so that you will not be exposed to it.

Furthermore, in this example, the 5th G disappearing EF display EF-G5 corresponding to the 5th G acceptance permission state is started to be displayed from the situation shown in FIG. 371(d) with a delay in change after acceptance. The display may start from the situation shown in (c).

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "6th G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 372 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "6th G acceptance permission state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 6G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIGS. 373 and 374 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "6th G reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "6th G variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "6th G variation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 6th G variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 6th G variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "6th G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 372(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "6th G variation pattern", timing tGf2 has arrived when the 6th G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 6G"), "operation acceptance for the 6th G operation unit regarding changes after the 6th G acceptance (display after the 6th G acceptance, sound output after the 6th G acceptance, etc.)" The sixth G acceptance permission state (validity period) in which is permitted can occur (situation shown in FIG. 373(b)).

Here, in the 6th G reception permissible state according to this embodiment, the "6th G operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 6G reception permissible state is terminated. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, as shown in FIGS. 372(f) and 373(a), when the 6th G reception permission state occurs, it is specified in advance that operation reception is permitted Execution of the suggested precursor effect display is never started.

In other words, in this case, when the 6th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 372(g) and FIG. As a 6th G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation reception on the button 410 (in this case, the operation button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted, A simulated image display MG-G6 that simulates the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6th G operation section) is displayed. In this production example, the timing at which the 6th G acceptance permission state occurs is the same as the timing at which the "6th G operation related display" is displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "6th G operation related display" may be displayed so as to start displaying before the timing when the 6th G acceptance permission state occurs, so as to straddle the timing. Alternatively, the display of the "6th G operation related display" may be started with a delay to the timing when the 6th G acceptance permission state occurs.

Here, the "sample image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6th G reception acceptance state always uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme. It is displayed in a "predetermined color scheme".

In addition, the "mock image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6th G reception permission state is such that "after the simulated part of the operation receiving part" which is the operation target is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIG. It is something that will appear. This cycle of 6G hours is the "cycle of 5G hours", "cycle of 7G hours", and "cycle of 8G hours" displayed in the above-mentioned 5G reception permission state, the below-mentioned 7th reception permission state, and the below-mentioned 8th reception permission state. Since it is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the above-mentioned 5G acceptance acceptance state, the below-mentioned 7th acceptance acceptance state, and the below-mentioned 8th acceptance acceptance state, the 6th acceptance acceptance state is set as a longer time (long cycle). This will depict how the "operation receiver" slowly moves up and down its movable range.

In addition, when displaying the "sample image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6th G reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGf2 at which the 6G reception permission state occurs, the periodic change will be changed according to the timing tGf2. It is preferable to wait until it starts. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6th G acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tGf2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 6th G reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. A message display (here, a message display MS-G6 displayed as "Attack!") related to the operation acceptance for the section (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

Here, in the 6th G reception permissible state according to this example, an ally character (here, ally character YS-G6) corresponding to the type of the 6G reception permissible state and a type corresponding to the 6G reception permissible state The corresponding enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G6 depicted as a giant bat) is displayed. In other words, when an operation is performed on the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "6th G reception permissible state", "the friendly character YS-G6 changes to the enemy character BOSS- based on multiple operation receptions". "Can you beat G6 or not?" can indicate whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low. Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, the effect can be triggered so that the "ally character YS-G6" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G6".

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 372 and 373, at timing tGf2A within the 6th G acceptance permission state (the production situation shown in FIG. 373(b)), the 6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410 It is assumed that the first operation is accepted for ``.

In this example, the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGf2A within the 6th G acceptance permission state (the production situation shown in FIG. 373(b)). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 372 and 373(c), a "6th G post-reception change (6th G post-reception effect)" is generated in response to the operation reception.

More specifically, at timing tGf2A within the 6th G reception acceptance state (the production situation shown in FIG. 373(b)), the first operation is performed on the "6th G operation section (here, operation button 410)". When the acceptance is made, as shown in FIGS. 372(j), (m) and 373(c), (d), as a change after the 6th G acceptance, "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly outputted as the "output sound after 6G reception" in response to the first operation reception for "6G operation section (here, operation button 410)". The “6th G post-reception display UG6” starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "6th G reception display UG6" is displayed as shown in FIG. 373(c), ( The mode UG6a shown in d) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 373(c), "ally character YS-G6" uses fire-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G6". It is depicted attacking (the first time). Next, as shown in FIG. 373(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G6" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G6" and its HP is reduced. That is, in the "6th G reception display UG6", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G6" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G6", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G6" has been defeated. , which suggests that expectations are high.

Further, the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output when the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed in the mode UG6a shown in FIGS. 373(c) and (d). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 372(b), at timing tGf2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 373(d)) within the 6th G acceptance acceptance state, the 6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is assumed to be operated for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 372(j), (m) and FIGS. 374(e), (f), as a change after receiving the 6th G, "6th G operation section (here, In response to the second operation reception for the ``6G operation section (here, the operation button 410)'', the ``6th G reception output sound'' is audibly output, and the second operation reception for the 6G operation section (here, the operation button 410) is output. The "6th G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the 6th reception starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the second operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "6th G reception display UG6" is displayed as shown in FIG. 374(e), ( The mode UG6b shown in f) is displayed, and first, as shown in FIG. 374(e), "ally character YS-G6" uses fire-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G6". It is depicted attacking (second time). Next, as shown in FIG. 374(f), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G6" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G6" and its HP further decreases.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed in the mode UG6b shown in FIGS. 374(e) and (f). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 372(b), at timing tGf2C within the 6th G acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 373(f)), the 6th G operating section (here, the operating button 410)" is performed for the third time. When the third operation is performed, the 6th G reception permission state is first terminated as the above-mentioned "6G post-reception change (6G post-reception effect)" (FIGS. 372(b) and 372(c)) (see FIG. 372(g) and FIGS. 374(g) and (h)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 372(j), (m), and 374(g), the "6th G reception" in response to the third operation reception for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" ``After output sound'' is audibly output, and the ``6th G post-reception display UG6'' corresponding to the third operation reception on the ``6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' starts to be displayed.

However, in this example, there is a predetermined waiting time from when the operation is accepted in the 6th G acceptance permission state until the sample image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 are turned off to the non-display state. is set. Therefore, although the sample image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 are hidden when an operation is accepted in the 6th G acceptance acceptance state, immediately after the operation is accepted. Instead of being hidden, the display can continue for a predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, as mentioned above, in other reception-permitting states, a disappearing EF display that makes it difficult to see the sample image display MG and message display MS may be displayed before they are hidden. However, when an operation is accepted in the 6th G acceptance acceptance state, a disappearing EF display that makes it difficult to see the sample image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 until they are hidden is displayed. is no longer displayed. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted in the 6th G acceptance permission state and the "6th G post-acceptance display UG6" corresponding to the operation acceptance starts to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 374(g), the sample image display is The MG and message display MS are in a good visibility state, and the sample image display MG continues to change periodically.

Here, when the third operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "6th G reception display UG6" is displayed as shown in FIGS. 374(g) to (i). ) is now displayed, and first, as shown in Figure 374(g), "ally character YS-G6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-G6" with fire-based magic. It is depicted attacking (third time). Next, as shown in FIG. 374(h), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G6" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G6" and its HP is reduced to 0. Then, as shown in FIG. 374(i), a result is displayed as to whether or not the "enemy character BOSS-G6" was defeated. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 374(i), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G6" appears, suggesting that expectations are high; Depending on the results of the judgment and production judgment, etc., a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G6" (a depiction that suggests low expectations) may appear, or It may be arranged such that a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G6" always appears.

In this regard, the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception output sound" is, when the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed in the form UG6c (specific form) shown in FIGS. 374(g) to (i), There are both cases in which an audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and cases in which an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception. There is. In other words, in this case, the "6th G post-reception output sound" is audibly output even though the same mode UG6c is executed as the "6th G post-reception display UG6", and the "6th G post-reception output sound" is audible output. Therefore, if the operation is performed without looking at the game board side effect display device 1600, it may not be possible to determine whether the operation has been accepted properly. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension after the act is performed. In this example, it is decided whether or not to output the "6th G post-reception output sound" audibly through a lottery such as performance determination, but the implementation method is not limited to this. However, "when an audible output is performed based on an operation reception" and "when an audible output is not performed based on an operation reception" both mean that the game or performance is being performed in a normal state (the same state). This is a situation in which the "output sound after 6G reception" is not audibly output when some kind of abnormality occurs or the abnormality processing continues, which is outside the intention of the technical philosophy. It should be excluded.

In this example, the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed depending on how many times the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated within the 6th G reception permissible state. Although it was decided to display in different modes UG6a to UG6c, each time an operation is performed on the "6th G operating section (here, the operation button 410)" within the 6th G acceptance acceptance state, a different mode (image display) is displayed. It does not necessarily have to appear. For example, when an operation is performed on the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" within the 6th G acceptance acceptance state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed is displayed. It may be arranged so that the image appears in some cases, or it may be arranged so that no new change is caused from the previous mode (image display) that has already been displayed. Whether a different aspect will appear from when the previous operation was performed, that is, which aspect will appear when the current operation is performed, is determined based on the results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc. (by lottery) However, the implementation method is not limited to this.

Further, the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which of modes UG6a to UG6c the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed, The same sound may be audibly output regardless of whether it is displayed in any of the modes UG6a to UG6c.

By the way, when such a post-reception display is displayed, other effects or background images unrelated to the reception permissible state may be made difficult to see, or the post-reception display may be in a different form than the player desires. There is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced due to the emergence of such situations.

Therefore, in the 6th G reception permission state according to this embodiment, if a specific condition is satisfied while the "6th G reception display UG6" corresponding to the 6G reception permission state is displayed, this will be used as a trigger for the 6G reception permission state to be displayed. 6th G reception display UG6" is hidden. According to such a configuration, if the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed and the player does not wish to do so, the "6th G post-reception display UG6" can be hidden. It is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in gaming.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, as shown in FIG. 372 (a). ), (j), the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGf2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 354(g)) during the period in which "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed. I am assuming the case.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGf2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 354(g)), the conditions shown in FIGS. 372(g), (i), (l) and FIG. 374(j) When the specific condition is met, the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is hidden. At this time, a "specific display SK" corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is displayed, and a "specific sound" corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition is audibly output.

In this example, as the above-mentioned "specific display SK", a mode such as "button presentation was ended midway" is displayed (see FIG. 374(j)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and a plurality of modes may be prepared and the display may be displayed in any of these modes. Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned "output sound after receiving 6th G", the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGf2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 354(g)). It has become. The "specific sound" may also be provided in a plurality of modes, and may be audibly output in any of these modes. The "specific sound" and the "output sound after 6th G reception" are audibly output as sounds of different types.

In addition, in the 6th G reception acceptance state according to this embodiment, after an operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", this is used as an opportunity to display the sample image display MG-G6 and the message display MS- As described above, a predetermined waiting time is set before G6 is turned into a non-display state. In this regard, in this production example, at timing tGf2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 354(g)) when the sample image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 are not yet in the hidden state and are in the display state. It is assumed that the above specific conditions are met.

That is, in this case, as for the sample image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6, as shown in FIGS. 372(g) and 374(f), the above-described It will be hidden when certain conditions are met. According to such a configuration, the display state of not only the "6th G reception display UG6" but also the sample image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 can be ended early. , it can be expected to suitably maintain interest in gaming.

Further, in this example, while the 6th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGf3 at which the 6G reception permission state ends arrives decreases as time passes. However, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, the 6th G reception permission state originally continues until timing tGf3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", and when timing tGf3 arrives, It shall be terminated based on the following. In this respect, the 6th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, if an operation is not accepted for the "6th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGf3 arrives in the 6th G acceptance state, timing tGf3 has arrived. The 6th G acceptance permission state is only terminated based on this, and the 6th G post-acceptance change (6th G (post-reception performance) will not be executed.

In addition, in the 6th G reception permissible state, even if the 6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (for a predetermined period of time). 372 (b) and (c)). In this case, if the player wishes to accept multiple operations on the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6th G reception allowed state, the player should Needless to say, it is necessary to repeatedly operate (press) the operation section (here, the operation button 410).

Additionally, the 6th G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible.

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, when the 6th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. It is now possible to emit light only when This "first light emission mode" continues until the timing tGf3 when the 6th G reception permission state is ended when no operation is accepted in the 6G reception permission state, but in the 6G reception permission state, When the operation is accepted, this will be used as a trigger to put the light into a non-emission state (see FIG. 372(e)).

Further, when the sixth G reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound indicating that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted is not audibly output.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the 6th G reception permission state occurs, if a specific condition is met while the "6G reception post display UG6" corresponding to the 6G reception permission state is displayed, this will be triggered. As a result, the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is hidden. Therefore, not only the mode UG6c shown in FIGS. 374(g) to (i) is displayed as the "6th G post-reception display UG6", but also the mode UG6a shown in FIGS. 373(c) and (d), , 374(e), 374(f) is displayed, even if a specific condition is satisfied while the mode UG6b shown in FIGS. G6, message display MS-G6, etc. will be hidden. Note that at this time, the state (sixth G reception permission state) in which operation reception on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is permitted is continued without being terminated.

In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where an operation has not been accepted yet in the 6th G acceptance permission state (a situation where no operation has been accepted at all), this will be used as an opportunity to display a sample image on the MG-G6. Alternatively, the message display MS-G6 may be hidden. According to such a configuration, if the player does not desire the button effect itself, various displays related to the button effect can be hidden, so that the interest in the game can be suitably maintained. become expected to do so.

However, in this case, although the sample image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 are hidden, the state in which operation reception on the "6th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is allowed continues. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, the state in which operation reception is allowed continues while various displays related to button effects are hidden, so it is expected that the interest in the game will be suitably maintained. Become so.

In addition, a specific condition is met within the 6th G reception acceptance state, and with this as a trigger, various displays related to button effects (sample image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6, 6th G reception display UG6) are hidden. When an operation is accepted for the ``6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' in the state of Become. However, at this time, the "sixth G post-reception output sound" may not be audibly output. According to such a configuration, if the various displays related to the button presentation (sample image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6, 6th G reception display UG6) are made to be hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, , the state in which operation reception on the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is allowed continues, but even if the operation reception is performed in the hidden state, "after 6G reception "Output sound" is not audibly output, and while no sound triggered by such operation reception is audibly output, "6th G reception display UG6 (mode UG6a, mode UG6b, mode UG6c, etc.)" is displayed. Since the situation is maintained (the performance is suppressed), a sense of tension can be suitably imparted by encouraging careful consideration as to whether or not to satisfy a specific condition.

In addition, when a specific condition is established in the 6th G acceptance acceptance state and an operation has not been accepted yet, this will be used as an opportunity to display various displays related to button effects (sample image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6, While the 6G post-reception display UG6) is in a hidden state, an operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", and this operation reception triggers the 6G post-reception display UG6). If the specific condition is satisfied again while " is displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to prevent the "6th G reception display UG6 (Aspect UG6a, Aspect UG6b, Aspect UG6c, etc.)" from being hidden. You can. According to such a configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied again, the "6th G reception display UG6" is not hidden, which makes it possible to think more carefully about whether or not to satisfy the specific condition. It becomes possible to appropriately impart a sense of tension by promoting this.

Further, in the 6th G reception acceptance state according to this example, when the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) The final mode UG6c as "6th G reception display UG6" appears in the 6th G reception acceptance state. A determination may be made when an operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, an "operation reception for displaying the final aspect UG6c" is made and the final aspect UG6c is displayed.

In addition, the 6th G reception permission state according to this example is generated as a valid period that can be terminated when an operation is accepted for the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)". However, the validity period may be generated with the acceptance of the operation as a trigger that does not end. For example, if the final mode (red lamp emission, etc.) appears as a change after acceptance, the final mode (red lamp emission, etc.) will only appear every time an operation is accepted thereafter, and the validity period itself will end. You may choose not to do so.

In addition, in the 6th G reception permission state according to this example, the sample image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 can continue to be displayed even after the 6G reception permission state ends, but the 6G reception permission state It may be hidden at the timing when the permissible state ends, and may not be displayed continuously.

Further, in the 6th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed, but the sample image display MG-G6 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Further, in the 6th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, the message display MS-G6 is displayed, but the message display MS-G6 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in the 6th G reception permissible state according to this example, when the 6th G reception permissible state occurs, a reception permissible state that indicates that the operation reception is in a state where the operation reception is permissible or will be in a state where the operation reception is permissible. Although the sound is not audibly output, instead of this, the sixth G reception permission sound corresponding to the sixth G reception permission state may be audibly output. In this case, the 6th G reception permissible sound may not be audibly output in the above-mentioned "permissible sound B (specific mode)", but may be audibly output in the above-mentioned "permissible sound A (normal mode)". desirable.

In this case, even if an operation is accepted for the "6th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" while the 6th G reception allowable sound (allowable sound A (normal mode)) is being audibly output. It is desirable to continue the audible output of the 6th G reception permission sound without taking this opportunity as an opportunity.

Here, the sixth G reception permission state (see FIGS. 372 to 374) may be generated as a "sixth G reception permission state according to a modified example" described below instead.

FIG. 375 shows an example of the production content when the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs and the player performs an operation based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 6G" being satisfied. It is a time chart showing. FIGS. 376 and 377 are diagrams illustrating examples of effects when the "6th G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned "6th G acceptance acceptance state" and the "6th G acceptance acceptance state according to a modified example" described below are generated as different types of acceptance acceptance states. Good too. However, in this case, the conditions for these occurrences will be set as mutually different conditions. Further, in this case, the post-acceptance display, the post-acceptance output sound, etc. may also be executed as different types (aspects).

The "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is basically the same as the above-mentioned "6th G reception permissible state", and although not shown, the above-mentioned reception permissible state in which the automatic button function is not activated. This occurs as follows. However, as shown in FIG. 375, a "section in which the sample image display MG-G6 is not displayed (non-display section)" appears from the middle (timing Yg in the figure) within the valid period (operation permissible state). This differs from the above-mentioned "6th G reception acceptance state" in that this state is .

In this example, as shown in FIG. 375, when the above-mentioned timing Yg in the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" arrives, the sample image display MG-G6 is set to a non-display state using this as a trigger. However, at this time, the "background image display" is changed to the background (the first background image HK-G1 is replaced with the second background image HK-G2). However, at this time, the extinguished EF display is not displayed as the sample image display MG-G6 is put into a non-display state.

Hereinafter, a case in which an operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in such a "6G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example" will be described in detail. , has the same configuration as the above-mentioned "6th G reception acceptance state (FIGS. 372 to 374)" (including descriptions of other examples, etc.).

That is, as shown in FIG. 375(c), in the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", timing tGf2 has arrived, similarly to the above-mentioned "6th G reception permissible state (Figs. 372 to 374)". The “6th G operation unit” which is generated based on the operation performed (based on the fulfillment of “condition 6G”) and whose operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, The point that the operation acceptance is allowed multiple times is also similar to the above-mentioned "6th G acceptance acceptance state (FIGS. 372 to 374)".

Similarly, even when the ``6th G reception acceptance state according to the modified example'' occurs, the display of a precursor effect that suggests in advance that an operation opportunity will be given to the player is not started.

In other words, in this case, even when the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs, the precursor effect display is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 375(g) and FIGS. 376(b) and (c). The 6th G operation related information that can only appear when the 6th G operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is in a state where operation reception is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. As a display, a simulated image display MG-G6 is displayed that simulates the object to be operated by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6th G operation section). In addition, in this production example, the timing at which the "6th G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs is the same as the timing at which the "6th G operation related display" is displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. good. For example, the "6th G operation related display" may be started to be displayed before the timing at which the "6th G acceptance permission state according to the modified example" occurs, so that the display straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of the "sixth G operation related display" may be started with a delay from the timing when the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modification" occurs.

Here, the "sample image display MG-G6" corresponding to the 6th G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example always uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme. and is displayed in the "predetermined color scheme".

In addition, the "sample image display MG-G6" corresponding to the "6th G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example" also has a part where the "operation receiver" which is the operation target is simulated is "the mode shown in FIG. 144 (α)". 144 (β) to (σ), and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ)” is one periodic change. It appears repeatedly in a time-consuming manner. This cycle of 6G hours is the "cycle of 5G hours", "cycle of 7G hours", and "cycle of 8G hours" displayed in the 5G reception permission state described above, the 7G reception permission state described later, and the 8G reception permission state described later. ”, the “6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example” is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the above-mentioned 5G reception permissible state, the 7th G reception permissible state described below, Compared to the 8th G acceptance permission state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted to move slowly up and down its movable range.

In addition, in the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", as shown in FIGS. A message display (here, a message display MS-G6 displayed as "Attack!") related to accepting an operation on the 6G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

In this example as well, the ally character (here, ally character YS-G6) corresponding to the type of "6th G reception permissible state according to the modification" and the ally character (here, ally character YS-G6) as the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modification" An enemy character according to the type (here, enemy character BOSS-G6 depicted as a giant bat) is displayed. In other words, even in the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", when an operation is performed on the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)", "the ally character YS- Whether or not G6 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-G6 can indicate whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low. Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on ``410)'', the production can proceed so that ``ally character YS-G6'' attacks ``enemy character BOSS-G6''. .

Here, as mentioned above, in the "6th G reception permission state according to the modified example", there is a "section in which the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed (display section)" and a "section in which the sample image display MG-G6 is not displayed." (non-display section)" appear in sequence. In this regard, in the "section where the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed (display section)" in the "6G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example," Regarding the content of changes that occur when a specific condition is met while an operation is accepted and the "6th G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the operation is displayed (and other examples thereof) is as described above with reference to FIGS. 372 to 374, so the explanation here will be omitted.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 375 to 377, among the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modification", there is a "section (display section) in which the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed" and a "section where the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed". - Section where G6 is not displayed (non-display section)" After an operation is accepted for the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)", the "6th G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the operation reception is performed. This assumes that a specific condition is met while `` is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 375 to 377, in the "section in which the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed (display section)", the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as the "background image display". Displayed. However, when the timing Yg arrives, a background change occurs and the "background image display" changes from the first background image HK-G1 to the second background image HK-G2. In this example, when timing Yg arrives, not only the sample image display MG-G6 is hidden, but also the message display MS-G6 is hidden. However, as described above, at this time, the extinguished EF display is not displayed as the replica image display MG-G6 is placed in a non-display state.

In this regard, also in this performance example, at the timing tGfa (the performance situation shown in FIG. 376(b)) within the "6th G reception acceptance state according to the modified example", the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410) It is assumed that the first operation is accepted for ``6G operation section (here, operation button 410)'' at timing tGf2a (the production situation shown in FIG. 373(b)). In contrast, when the first operation is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 375 and 376 (c) and (d), the "6th G post-reception change (6th G post-reception effect)" ”.

More specifically, at timing tGf2a (the performance situation shown in FIG. 376(b)) in the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is pressed. However, when the first operation is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 375(j), (m) and 376(c), (d), as a change after the 6th G acceptance, "6th G operation part (Here, the operation button 410)" is audibly outputted the "6th G reception output sound" in response to the first operation reception for the "6G operation section (here, the operation button 410)". The "6th G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the operation reception begins to be displayed.

In this example as well, when the first operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "6th G reception display UG6" is displayed as shown in FIG. 376(c), ( The mode UG6a shown in d) is displayed, and first, as shown in FIG. 376(c), "ally character YS-G6" uses fire-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G6". It is depicted attacking (the first time). Next, as shown in FIG. 376(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G6" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G6" and its HP is reduced. That is, in the "6th G reception display UG6", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G6" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G6", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G6" has been defeated. , which suggests that expectations are high.

Further, the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output when the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed in the mode UG6a shown in FIGS. 376(c) and (d). It becomes.

In this example as well, as shown in FIG. 375(b), at timing tGf2b (the performance situation shown in FIG. 376(d)) within the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the "6th G operation section (Here, the operation button 410) is assumed to be operated for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 375(j), (m), and 377(e), as a change after receiving the 6th G, the "6th G operating section (here, the operating button 410 )" is audibly outputted as the "output sound after receiving the 6th G operation" in response to the second operation reception on the "6G operation section (here, the operation button 410)". 6th G reception display UG6" starts to be displayed.

In this example as well, when the second operation is accepted for the "6th G operating unit (here, the operating button 410)", the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is first displayed as shown in FIG. 377(e). As shown in , a depiction is made in which "ally character YS-G6" attacks (second time) "enemy character BOSS-G6" with fire-based magic (mode UG6b). Normally, next, in the above-mentioned "6th G reception permissible state (FIGS. 372 to 374)," as shown in FIG. 374(f), "enemy character BOSS-G6" is The character YS-G6 is damaged by an attack and its HP is further reduced (mode UG6b).

However, in this example, while the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is being displayed in the above mode UG6b, the above-mentioned timing Yg arrives and the "segment (display section) in which the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed" ” to the “section where the sample image display MG-G6 is not displayed (non-display section)” (see FIGS. 375 and 377).

That is, in this case, first, as shown in FIG. 375(g) and FIG. 377(f), (j), the sample image display MG-G6 is set to a non-display state upon the arrival of timing Yg, and The "sixth G post-reception display UG6 (here, mode UG6b)" that had been in the display state until then is now in the non-display state. At this time, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 375(d) and 377(f), when timing Yg has arrived, the first background image HK-G1 is changed to the second background image HK-G2. A background change is made. In addition, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 375(j) and 377(f), when timing Yg has arrived, displays related to the button production (message display MS-G6, ally character YS -G6, enemy character BOSS-G6, etc.) are hidden.

However, as mentioned above, when the sample image display MG-G6 is set to the non-display state, the operation reception for the "6th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" (change after 6G reception (change after 6G reception) The state in which the operation reception for generating the 6G reception display UG6) is allowed continues.

Further, the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed in the mode UG6b shown in FIG. 377(e). . In this regard, in this production example, the above-mentioned "6th G reception display UG6 (here, mode UG6b)" ends its display state when the above timing Yg arrives, but the above "6th The "output sound" is configured to continue its output state without ending upon the arrival of the timing Yg.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 375(b), at timing tGf2c (the performance situation shown in FIG. 377(f)) within the "6th G reception permissible state (non-display section) according to the modified example", It is assumed that the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is operated for the third time. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 375(j), (m) and FIG. In response to the third operation reception for the 6G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), the ``6G reception output sound'' is audibly output, and the ``6G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' is audibly outputted. The "6th G post-reception display UG6" corresponding to the third operation reception begins to be displayed.

In this regard, the "6th G reception permission state according to the modified example" occurs as a valid period that does not end when the operation reception on the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is accepted. ing. Therefore, even if the "final mode" appears as a change after acceptance, the "final mode" will only appear every time an operation is accepted thereafter, and this will be used as an opportunity to The "permissive state" is never terminated.

In this production example, when the third operation is accepted for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "6th G reception display UG6" is displayed as shown in FIG. 377(g), The mode UG6c shown in (h) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 377(g), "ally character YS-G6" uses fire-based magic to "enemy character ” (for the third time). Next, as shown in FIG. 377(h), the "enemy character BOSS-G6" is depicted receiving damage from the attack by the "ally character YS-G6" and its HP is reduced to 0. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 377(h), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G6" (description of reducing HP to 0) appears, suggesting that expectations are high. However, as for the result display, depending on the result of the jackpot judgment or performance judgment, a depiction of not being able to defeat the "enemy character BOSS-G6" (depiction of HP remaining) appears (low expectations) It may also be possible to make it so that there is a description that the "enemy character BOSS-G6" could be defeated without fail. In this sense, the aspect UG6c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final aspect."

In this regard, regarding the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception output sound", if the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed in the mode UG6c (specific mode) shown in FIGS. 377(g) and (h), There are both cases in which an audible output is performed based on the operation reception for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" and cases in which an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception. ing. In other words, in this case, the "6th G post-reception output sound" is audibly output even though the same mode UG6c is executed as the "6th G post-reception display UG6", and the "6th G post-reception output sound" is audible output. Therefore, if the operation is performed without looking at the game board side effect display device 1600, it may not be possible to determine whether the operation has been accepted properly. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension after the act is performed. In this example, it is decided whether or not to output the "6th G post-reception output sound" audibly through a lottery such as performance determination, but the implementation method is not limited to this. However, "when an audible output is performed based on an operation reception" and "when an audible output is not performed based on an operation reception" both mean that the game or performance is being performed in a normal state (the same state). This is a situation in which the "output sound after 6G reception" is not audibly output when some kind of abnormality occurs or the abnormality processing continues, which is outside the intention of the technical philosophy. It should be excluded.

In this example, the above-mentioned "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is operated depending on how many times the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is operated within the "6G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example". It was decided to display the "post-reception display UG6" in different modes UG6a to UG6c, but each time an operation is performed on the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" within the 6G reception permission state, the display will be different. The mode (image display) does not necessarily have to appear. For example, when an operation is performed on the "6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" within the 6th G acceptance acceptance state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed is displayed. It may be arranged so that the image appears in some cases, or it may be arranged so that no new change is caused from the previous mode (image display) that has already been displayed. Whether a different aspect will appear from when the previous operation was performed, that is, which aspect will appear when the current operation is performed, is determined based on the results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc. (by lottery) However, the implementation method is not limited to this.

Further, the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which of modes UG6a to UG6c the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed, The same sound may be audibly output regardless of whether it is displayed in any of the modes UG6a to UG6c.

By the way, as mentioned above, the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is also displayed while the "6th G reception after reception display UG6" corresponding to the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is displayed. When the specific condition is satisfied, this is used as an opportunity to turn the "6th G post-reception display UG6" into a non-display state. Therefore, not only the mode UG6c shown in FIGS. 377(g) and (h) is displayed as the "6th G post-reception display UG6," but also the mode UG6a shown in FIGS. 376(c) and (d). , even if a specific condition is satisfied while the mode UG6b shown in FIG. MS-G6 and the like will be hidden. Note that at this time, the state (sixth G reception permission state) in which operation reception on the "sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is permitted is continued without being terminated.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 375 and 377, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is set to be satisfied when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001. As shown in FIGS. 375(a) and 375(j), the "display after 6th G reception" is It is assumed that the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGf2d (the production situation shown in FIG. 377(g)) during the period in which "UG6 (here, aspect UG6c)" is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGf2d (the performance situation shown in FIG. 377(g)), the specific condition is satisfied as shown in FIGS. 375(i) and 377(j). Taking this as an opportunity, the "6th G post-reception display UG6 (here, mode UG6c)" is set to a hidden state. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 375(d) and 377(j), the second background image HK-G2 that had been displayed as "background image display" is changed to the first background image HK-G1 (timing Yg is The background is changed to the background image that was displayed before the arrival (the background change is opposite to the timing Yg). In addition, at this time, as shown in FIGS. 375(i), (l), and 377(j), a "specific display SK" is displayed in response to the establishment of the specific condition, and a "specific display SK" is displayed in response to the establishment of the specific condition. A ``specific sound'' is output audibly depending on the situation.

In this example as well, the above-mentioned "specific display SK" is such that a mode such as "button presentation has been ended midway" is displayed (see FIG. 377(j)). However, the display content of the specific display SK is not limited to this, and a plurality of modes may be prepared and the display may be displayed in any of these modes. Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned "output sound after 6th G reception", the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGf2d (the performance situation shown in FIG. 377(g)). It has become. The "specific sound" may also be provided in a plurality of modes, and may be audibly output in any of these modes. The "specific sound" and the "output sound after 6th G reception" are audibly output as sounds of different types.

Also, in this example, while the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is continued, the remaining time until the timing tGf3 at which the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is terminated is reached. Although the gauge image is depicted as decreasing over time, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, the "6th G reception acceptance state according to the modified example" is originally continued until timing tGf3 arrives when there is no operation reception on the "6th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", and timing tGf3 It is terminated based on the arrival of. In this regard, the "6th G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example" occurs as an acceptance acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, if no operation is accepted for the "sixth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" until timing tGf3 arrives in the "sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example", timing tGf3 has arrived. Based on this, the ``6th G reception permission state according to the modified example'' is only terminated, and the 6th G that appears when the ``6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)'' is operated. The post-reception change (6th G post-reception performance) is never executed.

In addition, in the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", even if the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, multiple operation receptions may be performed. 375 (refer to FIGS. 375(b) and 375(c)). In this case, if you want to accept multiple operations for the "6th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "6G reception permission state according to the modification", the game Needless to say, the person must repeatedly operate (press) the "sixth G operation section (here, operation button 410)".

Also, in the "6th G reception acceptance state according to the modified example", the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that is displayed so as to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible for this to occur when

Also, when the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs, as shown in FIG. Light emission is possible only in the "first light emission mode". This "first light emitting mode" is set when the timing tGf3 at which the "6th G reception acceptance state according to the modification" ends when no operation is accepted in the "6G reception permission state according to the modification" arrives. However, when a specific condition is met, this will be used as an opportunity to switch to a non-emission state (see FIG. 375(e)). That is, in the "6th G reception acceptance state according to the modified example", the "sample image display MG-G6" is hidden when timing Yg arrives, but even after the timing Yg arrives, The “sixth G operation unit (here, operation button 410)” that is the operation target continues to emit light in the “first light emission mode”. However, when the specific conditions are met, even though the state in which operation reception on the "6th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is allowed will continue, this will trigger a non-emission state. It will be done.

Furthermore, as described above, when the above-mentioned "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs, the "6th G reception after reception display UG6" corresponding to the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" is displayed. If a specific condition is met during this period, this will trigger the "6th G post-reception display UG6" to be hidden. In this regard, when the specific condition is satisfied in the "section in which the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed (display section)" of the "6th G acceptance permission state according to the modification", this will be used as an opportunity to change the state shown in FIG. ). In other words, in this case, the sample image display MG-G6 and message display MS-G6 that had been displayed up until then will be hidden from view, and the "6th G reception display UG6" will be displayed. If a specific condition is satisfied during this period, the "6th G post-reception display UG6" is set to a non-display state. According to such a configuration, if the player does not desire the button effect itself, various displays related to the button effect can be hidden, so that the interest in the game can be suitably maintained. become expected to do so.

However, in this case, although the sample image display MG-G6 and the message display MS-G6 are hidden, the state in which operation reception on the "6th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is allowed continues. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, the state in which operation reception is allowed continues while various displays related to button effects are hidden, so it is expected that the interest in the game will be suitably maintained. Become so.

In addition, in the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the specific condition is satisfied in the "section where the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed (display section)" and the operation reception is not yet made. As a result, various displays related to button production (sample image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6) were hidden. When an operation is accepted for the button 410), the 6th G post-acceptance display UG6 is displayed in response to the operation acceptance. However, at this time, the "sixth G post-reception output sound" may not be audibly output. According to such a configuration, if the various displays related to the button presentation (sample image display MG-G6, message display MS-G6) are hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, the "6th G operation section ( Here, although the state in which operation reception is allowed for the "operation button 410)" continues, even if the operation reception is performed in the hidden state, the "6th G reception output sound" is audibly output. First, the specific conditions are met because the "display after 6th G reception UG6" is only displayed without any audible output of the sound triggered by such operation reception (the presentation is suppressed). This makes it possible to appropriately create a sense of tension by encouraging careful consideration as to whether or not to do so.

In addition, in the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", when a specific condition is met in a situation where the operation reception has not yet been made, various displays related to button effects (sample image display MG-G6, message Display MS-G6) is in a hidden state, and under these circumstances, an operation is accepted for the ``6th G operation section (here, the operation button 410).'' ``Display UG6'' is displayed, and if the specific condition is met again while the ``6th G post-reception display UG6'' is displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the 6th G post-reception display UG6. You may choose not to do so. That is, in this case, in response to the operation being accepted in the "segment where the sample image display MG-G6 is not displayed (non-display section)" of the "sixth G reception permissible state according to the modified example", the "sixth G post-reception display" If a specific condition is met while ``UG6'' is displayed, this will be used as a trigger to hide the ``6th G reception display UG6''. If a non-display section is created early by satisfying a specific condition in the "section where the sample image display MG-G6 is displayed (display section)", the operation is accepted in the early created non-display section. Even if a specific condition is satisfied while the corresponding "6th G post-reception display UG6" is displayed, this will not trigger the "6th G post-reception display UG6" to be hidden. As a result, it is possible to encourage more careful consideration as to whether or not to satisfy the specific condition, and to suitably impart a sense of tension.

Further, in the 6th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, the message display MS-G6 is displayed, but the message display MS-G6 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "7th G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 378 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "7th G acceptance acceptance state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 7G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIGS. 379 and 380 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "7th G reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "7th G variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "7th G variation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 7th G variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 7th G variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "7th G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 378(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "7th G variation pattern", timing tGg2 has arrived when the 7th G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 7G"), "operation acceptance for the 7th G operation unit regarding changes after the 7th G acceptance (display after the 7th G acceptance, sound output after the 7th G acceptance, etc.)" The seventh G reception permission state (validity period) in which G is permitted can occur (situation shown in FIG. 379(b)).

Here, the "7th G operating unit" in the 7th G reception permissible state according to this embodiment and in which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 7G reception permissible state is terminated. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when generating such a 7th G acceptance acceptance state, it is possible to first execute a ``7th G precursor effect display'' that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity. .

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when timing tGg1 arrives before the occurrence of the seventh G acceptance permission state, as shown in FIGS. 378(f) and 379(a), , the execution of the "specific precursor display ZET" described above as the "7th G precursor effect display" is started. This "2nd G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET)" is a display related to the 7th G operation, as shown in FIGS. 378(c), (f) and 379(a), (b). It is displayed so that it straddles the timing before and after.

That is, in this production example, when the 7th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 378(g) and 379(b), (c), 410), or when the operation acceptance is permitted, the 7G operation-related display is displayed only when the operation object (here, the 7G operation-related display) At least a mock image display MG-G7 is displayed, which is a copy of the "operation button 410" as a 7G operation unit. In this production example, the timing at which the 7th G acceptance permission state occurs is the same as the timing at which the "7th G operation related display" is displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "7th G operation related display" is displayed after the timing when the "7th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing at which the 7th G reception permission state occurs. It is also possible to display the data in such a way that it starts and straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of the "7th G operation related display" may be started with a delay from the timing when the 7th G acceptance permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "sample image display MG-G7" corresponding to the 7th G reception acceptance state has a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme with white as the base color)" and a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme with red as the base color)" as its color scheme. If one of multiple color schemes is used, including a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)", the 1st G reception acceptance state described above is used. It will be displayed in the same manner as the corresponding "sample image display MG-G1".

In addition, the "mock image display MG-G7" corresponding to the 7th G reception permission state is such that "after the simulated part of the operation receiving part" which is the operation target is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When a moving image "sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. This cycle of 7G hours is longer than the "cycle of 1G hours", "cycle of 2G hours", and "cycle of 6G hours" displayed in the above-mentioned 1st G reception allowed state, 2nd G reception allowed state, 6th G reception allowed state, etc. Since it is set as a short time (short cycle), in the 7th G reception permissible state, compared to the above-mentioned 1G reception permissible state, 2nd G reception permissible state, 6th G reception permissible state, etc. ' will be depicted moving quickly through its range of motion. The moving image in "Make image display MG-G7" is simply a fast-forward representation of the moving image in "Make image display MG-G1", "Make image display MG-G2", and "Make image display MG-G6". It is not necessary that the "operation receiver" move periodically through its movable range using a different moving image.

In addition, when displaying the "sample image display MG-G7" corresponding to the 7th G reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGg2 when the 7G reception permission state occurs, the periodic change will be changed according to the timing tGg2. It is preferable to wait until it starts. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-G7" corresponding to the 7th G acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tGg2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 7th G reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. A message display (here, a message display MS-G7 displayed as "Running!") related to the operation acceptance for the section (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

In this example, the "7th G operation related display (sample image display MG-G7, message display MS-G7") corresponding to the 7th G acceptance permission state is changed to While a specific omen display ZET is being displayed as an omen effect display, the display starts so that it appears to overlap behind the specific omen display ZET.As mentioned above, the specific omen display ZET is As time passes, the display range (the range that makes it difficult to visually recognize the seventh G operation-related display) is reduced.

As a result of this reduction in the display range of the 7th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET), when the 7th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET) is hidden, "7G The entire operation-related display (sample image display MG-G7, message display MS-G7) is now clearly visible, and under these conditions, the 7th G operation section (here, operation button 410) It becomes possible to accept operations for. However, the 7th G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) may continue to be displayed for the entire period from the occurrence of the 7th G acceptance permission state until it is ended.

In addition, in the 7th G reception permissible state according to this example, an ally character (here, ally character YS-G7) corresponding to the type of the 7G reception permissible state and an ally character corresponding to the type of the 7G reception permissible state The enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G7 depicted as a golem) is displayed. In other words, when an operation is performed on the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "7th G reception permissible state", "the friendly character YS-G7 changes to the enemy character BOSS- based on multiple operation receptions". Whether you can defeat G7 or not can indicate whether you have high or low expectations for winning the jackpot, and the 7th G operation section (here, operation button 410) Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, the effect can be triggered so that the "ally character YS-G7" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G7".

In the example shown in FIGS. 378 and 379, the 7th G precursor performance display (specific precursor display ZET) is displayed at timing tGg2A (the performance situation shown in FIG. 379(b)) within the 7G acceptance acceptance state. It is assumed that the first operation is accepted for the "7th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" while the user is in the room.

In this regard, in the 7th G reception acceptance state according to this example, when the 7G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET) is displayed, the "7th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is pressed. Even if an operation is accepted, the 7G omen effect display (specific omen display ZET) will not be hidden for a predetermined period of time (same as when no operation was accepted). (display time).

Therefore, when the first operation is accepted for the "7th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tGg2A (the production situation shown in FIG. 379(b)) within the 7th G reception permissible state. As shown in FIGS. 378(f), (g), and 379(c), the 7G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET) is not hidden but is triggered by the reception of the operation. While the screen continues to be displayed, a "7th G post-reception change (7th G post-reception effect)" is generated in response to the operation reception.

More specifically, at timing tGg2A in the "7th G reception permissible state" (the production situation shown in FIG. 379(b)), the "7th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is pressed for the first time. When the operation is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 378(j), (m) and FIGS. 379(c), (d), as a change after receiving the 7th G, "7th G operation section (here, The "7th G reception output sound" corresponding to the first operation reception for the "operation button 410)" is output audibly, and the "7G operation part (here, the operation button 410)" The corresponding "7th G post-reception display UG7" starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "7th G reception display UG7" is displayed as shown in FIG. 379(c), ( The mode UG7a shown in d) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 379(c), "ally character YS-G7" uses ice-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G7". It is depicted attacking (the first time). Next, as shown in FIG. 379(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G7" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G7" and its HP is reduced. That is, in "7th G reception display UG7", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G7" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G7", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G7" has been defeated. , which suggests that expectations are high.

Moreover, the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output when the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception display UG7" is displayed in the mode UG7a shown in FIGS. 379(c) and (d). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 378(b), at timing tGg2b (the performance situation shown in FIG. 379(d)) in the "7th G reception permission state", the "7th G operation section (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 378(j), (m) and FIGS. 380(e), (f), as a change after receiving the 7th G, "7th G operation section (here, The "7th G reception output sound" corresponding to the second operation reception for the "7G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is output audibly, and the second operation reception for the "7G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is output. The "7th G post-reception display UG7" corresponding to this starts to be displayed. At this time, as described above, the 8th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET) is not turned into a non-display state based on the reception of the operation.

In this example, when the second operation is accepted for the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "7th G reception display UG7" is displayed as shown in FIG. 380(e), ( The mode UG7b shown in f) is displayed, and first, as shown in FIG. 380(e), "ally character YS-G7" uses ice-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G7". It is depicted attacking (second time). Next, as shown in FIG. 380(f), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G7" receives damage from the attack (second time) by the "ally character YS-G7" and further reduces its HP. .

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception display UG7" is displayed in the mode UG7b shown in FIGS. 380(e) and (f). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 378(b), at timing tGg2C within the 7th G acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 380(f)), the 410)" is performed for the third time. When the third operation is performed, the 7th G reception permission state is first terminated as the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception change (7th G post-reception performance)" (FIGS. 378(b) and 378(c)) 378(g) and 380(g) to (i)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 378(j), (m), and FIG. 380(g), the "7th G reception" in response to the third operation reception for the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" ``After output sound'' is audibly output, and the ``7th G post-reception display UG7'' corresponding to the third operation reception on the ``7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' starts to be displayed.

However, in this example, there is a predetermined waiting time from when the operation is accepted in the 7th G reception permission state until the sample image display MG-G7 and message display MS-G7 are turned off to the non-display state. is set. Therefore, although the sample image display MG-G7 and the message display MS-G7 are hidden when an operation is accepted in the 7th G acceptance acceptance state, immediately after the operation is accepted. Instead of being hidden, the display can continue for a predetermined waiting time.

In this regard, in the 7th G acceptance acceptance state, the 7th G disappearing EF display EF-G7 is displayed to make it difficult to see the mock image display MG and message display MS until they are hidden. It has become. That is, in this case, the sample image display MG and the message display MS are hidden while the seventh G disappearing EF display EF-G7 is being displayed, as shown in FIGS. 378(g) and (h). The Rukoto.

Here, if the third operation is accepted for the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "7th G reception display UG7" is displayed in FIGS. 380(g) to (i). ) is now displayed. First, as shown in Figure 380(g), "ally character YS-G7" attacks "enemy character BOSS-G7" with ice-based magic. It is depicted attacking (third time). Next, as shown in FIG. 380(h), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G7" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G7" and its HP is reduced to 0. Then, as shown in FIG. 380(i), a result will be displayed as to whether or not the "enemy character BOSS-G7" was defeated. In the example shown in FIG. 380(i), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G7" appears, suggesting that expectations are high; Depending on the results of judgments and production judgments, a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G7" (a depiction that suggests low expectations) may appear, or It may be arranged such that a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G7" always appears.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception display UG7" is displayed in the manner UG7c shown in FIGS. 380(g) to (i). It becomes.

That is, the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception output sound" may be in one form as the "7th G post-reception display UG8" (for example, any of the multiple forms that may appear as the 7th G post-reception display UG8). ) is displayed, there are two cases: a case where audible output is not performed based on the operation reception for the "7th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" and a case where audible output is performed based on the operation reception. There is no need for both, and an audible output is always performed based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception on the seventh G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and an audible output is performed based on the operation reception" is only a normal state ( This refers to the situation where a game or performance is being performed under the same condition), and does not refer to the configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

In this example, the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception display UG7" is displayed depending on how many times the "7th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated within the 7G reception permission state. Although it was decided to display in different modes UG7a to UG7c, each time an operation is performed on the "7th G operating section (here, the operation button 410)" within the 7th G acceptance acceptance state, a different mode (image display) is displayed. It does not necessarily have to appear. For example, when an operation is performed on the "7th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" within the 7th G acceptance acceptance state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed is displayed. It may be arranged so that the image appears in some cases, or it may be arranged so that no new change is caused from the previous mode (image display) that has already been displayed. Whether a different aspect will appear from when the previous operation was performed, that is, which aspect will appear when the current operation is performed, is determined based on the results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc. (by lottery) However, the implementation method is not limited to this.

However, the aspect UG7c is set as the "final aspect" as the "7th G post-acceptance display UG7" corresponding to the 7th G acceptance permission state, and as shown in FIGS. 378(c) and (j), When the "operation reception" for displaying the mode UG7c is performed, this is used as an opportunity to end the seventh G reception permission state.

Further, the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which of modes UG7a to UG7c the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception display UG7" is displayed, The same sound may be audibly output regardless of whether it is displayed in any of the modes UG7a to UG7c.

By the way, the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state", "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", "6th G reception permissible state", and "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" correspond to these. As described above, if a specific condition is met while the "post-reception display" is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to turn the "post-reception display" into a non-display state.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be established in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in FIG. 378 ( As shown in a) and (j), at timing tGg2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 380(g)) during the period in which the above-mentioned "7th G post-reception display UG7" is displayed, the specific condition is This assumes that it is established.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGg2D (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 380(g)), this is used as a trigger to perform the above-mentioned "specific "sound" is output audibly. However, even if the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGg2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 380(g)), as shown in FIGS. 378(g), (i) and 380(h), When this is established, the "7th G reception display UG7 (regardless of format)", the sample image display MG-G7, and the message display MS-G7 will not be hidden, and the specific conditions will be met. There is also no "specific display SK" displayed depending on what happened. That is, in this case, the "7th G post-reception display UG7" is the same as the case where the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "7th G post-reception display UG7" is executed (Fig. 380 (g) to ( The presentation will proceed in the manner shown in i). In addition, in the 7th G reception permissible state, this is not limited to the timing tGg2D (the production situation shown in FIG. As a trigger, "7th G reception display UG7 (regardless of format)", sample image display MG-G7, and message display MS-G7 will not be hidden, and in response to specific conditions being met. "Specific display SK" is also not displayed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGg2D (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 380(g)). Even if the specific condition is satisfied at any timing within the 7G reception permission state, the specific condition may be used as an opportunity to cause an audible output or not to be an audible output.

Further, in this example, while the 7th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGg3 at which the 7G reception permission state ends decreases as time passes. However, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

Although not shown in the drawing, the 7th G reception permission state is originally continued until timing tGg3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "7th G operation section (here, operation button 410)". It is terminated based on the arrival of tGg3. In this respect, the 7th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, if an operation is not accepted for the "7th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGb3 arrives in the 7th G acceptance state, timing tGg3 has arrived. Based on this, the 7th G acceptance permission state is not only terminated, but also the 7th G post-acceptance change (7th G After the reception, the performance will start.

Here, the above-mentioned "specific condition" may be satisfied at a predetermined timing while "7th G post-reception display UG7" of the 7th G post-reception change started by the automatic button function is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is satisfied at such a predetermined timing, the above-described "specific sound" is audibly outputted using this as a trigger. However, even if the above specific conditions are met at the predetermined timing, the "7th G reception display UG7 (regardless of format)" will not be hidden due to the fulfillment of the specific conditions. , the "specific display SK" corresponding to the satisfaction of the specific condition is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the "7th G post-reception display UG7" will progress in the same manner as if the specific condition was not satisfied within the period in which the "7th G post-reception display UG7" was being executed. .

In addition, in the 7th G reception permissible state, operation reception can be performed multiple times by simply keeping the "7th G operation section (here, operation button 410) operated (pressed)" (operation reception is performed at predetermined time intervals). A so-called auto-repeat function, in which reception is automatically repeated, is enabled (see FIGS. 378(b) and 378(c)). Therefore, the player can accept multiple operations without repeatedly operating (pressing) the "seventh G operating section (here, operating button 410)".

In addition, the 7th G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, this may occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed. It may be assumed that

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, when the 7th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. There are two cases: one in which the light is emitted in the "second light emitting mode" and the other in which the light is emitted in the "second light emitting mode". In addition, in this example, it is decided whether to emit light in the "first light emission mode" or "second light emission mode" by lottery such as performance judgment (such as jackpot expectation level), but the method for realizing this is as follows. Not limited. If no operation is accepted in the 7th G reception permission state, these light emissions will continue until the timing tGg3 arrives when the 7G reception permission state ends. When the "operation reception" is performed, this will be used as a trigger to put the light into a non-emission state (see FIGS. 378(c) and 378(e)).

In addition, when the 7th G reception permissible state occurs, the 7G reception permissible sound that indicates that the operation reception is in a permissible state or will be in a state where the operation reception is permissible is "permissible sound A (normal mode)". )” and “permissible sound B (specific mode)” can be audibly output in any of a plurality of modes (sounds) (see FIG. 378(k), etc.). For example, "acceptable sound A (normal mode)" is set to be audibly output when the model image display MG-G7 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme, and "acceptable sound B (specific mode)" is set to be output audibly when the model image display MG-G7 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme. - An audible output may be provided when G7 is displayed in a particular color scheme. In this regard, in the 7th G reception permission state, as shown in FIG. 378(k), while the reception permission sound (7G reception permission sound) is audibly output, the 7G operation Even if an operation is accepted for the button 410), the acceptance acceptance sound is not interrupted. Further, even if a specific condition is met while the acceptance permission sound (7th G reception permission sound) is being audibly output, this will not be used as an opportunity to interrupt the reception permission sound.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the 7th G reception permission state occurs, even if the specific conditions are met while the "7G reception post display UG7" corresponding to the 7G reception permission state occurs, this will not happen. Taking this as a trigger, the "7th G post-reception display UG7" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in the above-mentioned 7th G acceptance permission state where no operation has been accepted yet, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the sample image display MG-G7 and the message display MS-G7. It is designed so that you will not be exposed to it.

In addition, in this example, the display of the 7th G disappearing EF display EF-G7 corresponding to the 7th G acceptance permission state is started from the situation shown in FIG. The display may start from the situation shown in (g). Further, the seventh G extinction EF display EF-G7 may be the same image display as the extinction EF display EF displayed in other acceptance permission states, or may be a different image display.

In addition, in the 7th G reception permission state according to this example, the sample image display MG-G7 and the message display MS-G7 can continue to be displayed even after the 7G reception permission state ends. It may be hidden at the timing when the permissible state ends, and may not be displayed continuously.

Further, in the seventh G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, message display MS-G7 is displayed, but message display MS-G7 does not necessarily need to be displayed.

Further, the 7th G reception acceptance state according to this example may be one in which the state is always terminated midway due to an operation by the player, or may be terminated midway based on the result of performance judgment, etc., or may not be terminated midway. There may be both. In short, any game that may be terminated midway due to an operation by a player is sufficient.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating an "eighth G acceptance acceptance state" as the acceptance acceptance period (operation acceptance state). FIG. 381 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "8th G reception permissible state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 8G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIGS. 382 and 383 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "eighth G reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "8th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "8th G fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 8th G variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 8th G variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "8th G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 381(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "8th G variation pattern", timing tGh2 has arrived when the 8th G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 8G"), "operation acceptance for the 8th G operation unit regarding changes after the 8th G reception (display after the 8th G reception, sound output after the 8th G reception, etc.)" The 8th G reception permission state (validity period) in which G is permitted can occur (situation shown in FIG. 382(b)).

Here, in the 8th G reception permissible state according to this embodiment, the "8th G operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 8th G reception permissible state is terminated. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such an 8th G reception acceptance state is generated, it is possible to first perform an ``8th G precursor effect display'' that suggests that the player will be given an operation opportunity. .

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, when the timing tGh1 arrives before the occurrence of the 8th G reception permission state, as shown in FIGS. 381(f) and 382(a), , the execution of the "specific precursor display ZET" described above as the "8th G precursor effect display" is started. This "8th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET)" is a display related to the 8th G operation, as shown in FIGS. 381(c), (f) and 382(a), (b). It is displayed so that it straddles the timing before and after.

That is, in this production example, when the 8th G reception permission state occurs, the 8th G operation section (here, the operation button 410), or when the operation acceptance is permitted, the 8th G operation-related display is displayed only when the operation object (here, the 8th G operation-related display) At least a mock image display MG-G8, which is a copy of the "operation button 410" (8G operation section), is displayed. In this production example, the timing at which the 8th G reception permission state occurs is the same as the timing at which the "8th G operation related display" is displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "8th G operation related display" is displayed after the timing when the "8th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET)" is displayed and before the timing at which the 8th G reception permission state occurs. It is also possible to display the data in such a way that it starts and straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of the "8th G operation related display" may be started with a delay from the timing when the 8th G acceptance permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "sample image display MG-G8" corresponding to the 8th G reception acceptance state has a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme with white as the base color)" and a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme with red as the base color)" as its color scheme. If one of multiple color schemes is used, including a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)", the 1st G reception acceptance state described above is used. It will be displayed in the same manner as the corresponding "sample image display MG-G1".

In addition, the "mock image display MG-G8" corresponding to the 8th G reception permission state is such that "after the simulated part of the operation receiving part, which is the operation target, is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. This cycle of 8G hours is longer than the "cycle of 1G hours", "cycle of 2G hours", and "cycle of 6G hours" displayed in the above-mentioned 1st G reception allowed state, 2nd G reception allowed state, 6th G reception allowed state, etc. Since it is set as a short time (short cycle), in the 8th G reception permissible state, compared to the above-mentioned 1G reception permissible state, 2nd G reception permissible state, 6th G reception permissible state, etc. ' will be depicted moving quickly through its range of motion. The moving image in "Make image display MG-G8" is simply a fast-forward representation of the moving image in "Make image display MG-G1", "Make image display MG-G2", and "Make image display MG-G6". It is not necessary that the "operation receiver" move periodically through its movable range using a different moving image.

In addition, when displaying the "sample image display MG-G8" corresponding to the 8th G reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGh2 when the 8G reception permission state occurs, the periodic change will be changed according to the timing tGh2. It is preferable to wait until it starts. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-G8" corresponding to the 8th G acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tGh2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 8th G reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. A message display (here, a message display MS-G8 displayed as "Running!") related to the operation acceptance for the section (here, the operation button 410) is displayed. In this example, message display MS-G8 is displayed as the same image display as message display MS-G7 described above, but they may be displayed as different image displays.

In this example, as shown in FIG. While a specific omen display ZET is being displayed as an omen effect display, the display starts so that it appears to overlap behind the specific omen display ZET.As mentioned above, the specific omen display ZET is As time passes, the display range (the range that makes it difficult to visually recognize the seventh G operation-related display) is reduced.

As a result of the display range of the 8th G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) being reduced in this way, when the 8G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is hidden, "8G The entire operation-related display (sample image display MG-G8, message display MS-G8) is now clearly visible, and under these conditions, the 8th G operation section (here, operation button 410) It becomes possible to accept operations for. However, the 8th G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) may continue to be displayed for the entire period from the occurrence of the 8th G acceptance permission state until it is ended.

In addition, in the 8th G reception permissible state according to this example, an ally character (here, ally character YS-G8) corresponding to the type as the 8th G reception permissible state and an ally character according to the type as the 8th G reception permissible state An enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-G8 depicted as an ogre) is displayed. In other words, when an operation is performed on the "eighth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "eighth G reception permissible state", "the friendly character YS-G8 changes to the enemy character BOSS- based on multiple operation receptions". "Can you defeat G8 or not?" can indicate whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low. Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, the effect can be triggered so that the "ally character YS-G8" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G8".

In the example shown in FIGS. 381 and 382, the 8th G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is displayed at timing tGh2A (the effect situation shown in FIG. 382(b)) within the 8th G acceptance permission state. It is assumed that a first operation is accepted for the "eighth G operation section (here, operation button 410)" while the user is in the room.

In this regard, in the 8th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when the 8th G precursor effect display (specific precursor display ZET) is displayed, the "8th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. Even if an operation is accepted, the 8G omen effect display (specific omen display ZET) will not be turned off for a predetermined period of time (same as when no operation was accepted). (display time).

Therefore, when the first operation is accepted for the "8th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGh2A (the production situation shown in FIG. 382(b)) within the 8th G reception permissible state As shown in FIGS. 381(f), (g), and 382(c), upon receiving the operation, the 8G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET) is not hidden but is While the display continues, the "8th G post-reception change (8th G post-reception effect)" is generated in response to the operation reception.

More specifically, at timing tGh2A in the "8th G reception acceptance state" (the production situation shown in FIG. 379(b)), the "8th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is pressed for the first time. When the operation is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 381(j), (m) and FIGS. 382(c), (d), as a change after receiving the 8th G, "8th G operation section (here, The "output sound after the 8th G reception" is audibly output in response to the first operation reception for the "operation button 410)", and the output sound is audible in response to the first operation reception for the "8G operation section (here, the operation button 410)". The corresponding "8th G post-reception display UG8" starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "8th G reception display UG8" is displayed as shown in FIG. 382(c), ( The mode UG8a shown in d) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 382(c), "ally character YS-G8" attacks "enemy character BOSS-G8" with water-based magic. A depiction of the attack (first time) is made. Next, as shown in FIG. 382(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G8" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G8" and its HP is reduced. That is, in "8th G reception display UG8", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G8" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G8", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G8" has been defeated. , which suggests that expectations are high.

Further, the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output when the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed in the mode UG8a shown in FIGS. 382(c) and (d). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 381(b), at timing tGh2B (presentation situation shown in FIG. 382(d)) in the "8th G reception permission state", the "8th G operation section (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 381(j), (m) and FIGS. 383(e), (f), as a change after receiving the 8th G, "8th G operating section (here, , the "output sound after receiving the 8th G" corresponding to the second operation accepted for the "operation button 410)" is audibly output, and the second operation accepted for the "8th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is output audibly. The "8th G post-reception display UG8" corresponding to the 8th G reception starts to be displayed. At this time, as described above, the 8th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET) is not turned into a non-display state based on the reception of the operation.

In this example, when the second operation is accepted for the "8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed as shown in FIG. 383(e), ( The mode UG8b shown in f) is displayed, and first, as shown in FIG. 383(e), "ally character YS-G8" attacks "enemy character BOSS-G8" with water-based magic. It is depicted attacking (second time). Next, as shown in FIG. 383(f), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G8" receives damage from the attack (second time) by the "ally character YS-G8" and further reduces its HP. .

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed in the mode UG8b shown in FIGS. 383(e) and (f). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 381(b), at timing tGh2C within the 8th G acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 383(f)), the 8th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is performed for the third time. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 381 (j), (m) and FIG. In response to the third operation reception for the 8G operation section (here, the operation button 410), the ``8th G reception output sound'' is audibly output, and the 8G operation section (here, the operation button 410) is audibly outputted. The "8th G post-reception display UG8" corresponding to the third operation reception begins to be displayed. At this time, as described above, the 8th G portent effect display (specific portent display ZET) is not turned into a non-display state based on the reception of the operation.

In this respect, the "eighth G reception permission state" occurs as a valid period that does not end when an operation is accepted on the "eighth G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)". Therefore, even if the "final mode" appears as a change after acceptance, the "final mode" will only appear every time an operation is accepted thereafter, and this will be the trigger for the 8th G acceptance permission state to end. It never happens. Moreover, the sample image display MG-G8 and the message display MS-G8 are not made to be hidden due to this.

In this production example, when the third operation is accepted for the "8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed as shown in FIG. 383(g), The mode UG8c shown in (h) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. It is depicted attacking (for the third time). Next, as shown in FIG. 383(h), a depiction will be made in which "enemy character BOSS-G8" is damaged by the attack by "ally character YS-G8" and its HP is reduced to 0. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 383(h), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G8" (a depiction of reducing HP to 0) appears, suggesting that expectations are high. However, as for the result display, depending on the result of the jackpot judgment or performance judgment, a depiction of not being able to defeat the "enemy character BOSS-G8" (depiction of HP remaining) appears (low expectations) It may also be possible to make it so that there is always a depiction of the enemy character BOSS-G8 being defeated. In this sense, the mode UG8c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final mode."

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed in the manner UG8c shown in FIGS. 383(g) and (h). It becomes.

In other words, the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception output sound" may be expressed as "8th G post-reception display UG8" in one form (for example, any of the multiple forms that may appear as 8th G post-reception display UG8). ) is displayed, there are two cases: a case where audible output is not performed based on the operation reception for the "8th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" and a case where audible output is performed based on the operation reception. There is no need for both, and an audible output is always performed based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception on the 8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and an audible output is performed based on the operation reception" is only a normal state ( This refers to the situation where a game or performance is being performed under the same condition), and does not refer to the configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

In this example, the above-mentioned "8th G reception post-reception display UG8" is displayed depending on how many times the "8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated within the 8th G reception acceptance state. Although it was decided to display in different modes UG8a to UG8c, each time an operation is performed on the "8th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" within the 8th G acceptance acceptance state, a different mode (image display) is displayed. It does not necessarily have to appear. For example, when an operation is performed on the "8th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" within the 8th G acceptance acceptance state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed is displayed. It may be arranged so that the image appears in some cases, or it may be arranged so that no new change is caused from the previous mode (image display) that has already been displayed. Whether a different aspect will appear from when the previous operation was performed, that is, which aspect will appear when the current operation is performed, is determined based on the results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc. (by lottery) However, the implementation method is not limited to this.

Further, the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which of modes UG8a to UG8c the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed, The same sound may be audibly output regardless of whether it is displayed in any of the modes UG8a to UG8c.

In this example, when timing tGh3 arrives, the 8th G acceptance permission state is terminated, and the sample image display MG-G8 and message display MS-G8 are placed in a non-display state. However, a predetermined waiting time is set between when the timing tGh3 arrives and when the sample image display MG-G8 and the message display MS-G8 are turned off. The sample image display MG-G8 and the message display MS-G8 are not turned into a non-display state when an operation is accepted in the 8th G acceptance acceptance state.

In this regard, when the 8th G reception permission state is terminated, the 8th G disappearance EF display EF-G8 is displayed to make it difficult to see the mock image display MG and message display MS until they are hidden. It is now possible to do so. That is, in this case, the sample image display MG and message display MS are hidden while the 8th G disappearing EF display EF-G8 is being displayed, as shown in FIGS. 381(g) and (h). The Rukoto.

By the way, the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state", "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", "6th G reception permissible state", and "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" correspond to these. As described above, if a specific condition is met while the "post-reception display" is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to turn the "post-reception display" into a non-display state.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be established in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, as shown in FIG. 381 ( As shown in a) and (j), at timing tGh2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 383(g)) during the period in which the above-mentioned "8th G post-reception display UG8" is displayed, the specific condition is This assumes that it is established.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGh2D (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 383(g)), this is used as a trigger to perform the above-mentioned "specific condition" as shown in FIG. "sound" is output audibly. However, even if the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGh2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 383(g)), as shown in FIGS. 381(g), (i), and FIG. When this is established, the "8th G reception display UG8 (regardless of format)", the sample image display MG-G8, and the message display MS-G8 will not be hidden, and the specific conditions will be met. There is also no "specific display SK" displayed depending on what happened. In other words, in this case, the "8th G post-reception display UG8 (regardless of format)" is the same format as when the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is executed (Fig. 383(g) and (h))). In addition, in the 8th G reception acceptance state, this is not limited to timing tGh2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 383(g)), but even if the above specific condition is satisfied at any timing within the 8G reception acceptance state. As a trigger, "8th G reception display UG8 (regardless of format)", sample image display MG-G8, and message display MS-G8 will not be hidden, and in response to specific conditions being met. "Specific display SK" is also not displayed.

In this example, the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGh2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 383(g)). No matter at which timing within the 8G reception permission state the specific condition is satisfied, there may be both a case where the audible output is made and a case where the audible output is not made.

Further, in this example, while the 8th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGh3 at which the 8G reception permission state ends decreases as time passes. However, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

Further, the 8th G acceptance acceptance state occurs as an acceptance acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, if an operation is not accepted for the "8th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGh3 arrives in the 8th G acceptance state, timing tGh3 has arrived. Based on this, the 8th G reception permission state is not only terminated, but also the 8th G post-reception change (8th G After the reception, the performance will start.

Here, the above-mentioned "specific condition" may be satisfied at a predetermined timing while "8th G post-reception display UG8" of the 8th G post-reception change started by the automatic button function is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the specific condition is satisfied at such a predetermined timing, the above-described "specific sound" is audibly outputted using this as a trigger. However, even if the above specific condition is met at the predetermined timing, the "8th G reception display UG8 (regardless of format)" will not be hidden due to the fulfillment of the specific condition. , the "specific display SK" corresponding to the satisfaction of the specific condition is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the "8th G post-reception display UG8" will progress in the same manner as when the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is being executed. .

In addition, in the 8th G reception permissible state, operation reception can be performed multiple times by simply keeping the 8th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) operated (pressed) (the operation is performed at predetermined time intervals). A so-called auto-repeat function, in which reception is automatically repeated, is enabled (see FIGS. 381(b) and 381(c)). Therefore, the player can accept multiple operations without repeatedly operating (pressing) the "eighth G operation section (here, operation button 410)."

Additionally, the 8th G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, this may occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed. It may be assumed that

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, when the 8th G acceptance permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. There are two cases: one in which the light is emitted in the "second light emitting mode" and the other in which the light is emitted in the "second light emitting mode". In addition, in this example, it is decided whether to emit light in the "first light emission mode" or "second light emission mode" by lottery such as performance judgment (such as jackpot expectation level), but the method for realizing this is as follows. Not limited. If no operation is accepted in the 8th G reception permission state, these light emissions are continued until timing tGh3 arrives when the 8G reception permission state is ended.

In addition, when the 8th G reception permissible state occurs, the 8G reception permissible sound that indicates that the operation reception is in a permissible state or will be in a state where the operation reception is permissible is "permissible sound A (normal mode)". )" and "acceptable sound B (specific mode)" can be audibly output in any of a plurality of modes (sounds) (see FIG. 381(k), etc.). For example, "acceptable sound A (normal mode)" is set to be audibly output when the model image display MG-G8 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme, and "acceptable sound B (specific mode)" is set to be output audibly when the model image display MG-G8 is displayed in a predetermined color scheme. - An audible output may be provided when G8 is displayed in a particular color scheme. In this regard, in the 8th G reception permission state, as shown in FIG. 381(k), while the reception permission sound (8th G reception permission sound) is audibly output, the Even if an operation is accepted for the button 410), the acceptance acceptance sound is not interrupted. Further, even if a specific condition is satisfied while the acceptance permission sound (8th G reception permission sound) is being audibly output, this will not be used as an opportunity to interrupt the reception permission sound.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the 8th G reception permission state occurs, even if the specific conditions are met while the "8th G reception display UG8" corresponding to the 8G reception permission state is displayed, Taking this as a trigger, the "8th G post-reception display UG8" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in the 8th G acceptance permission state where no operation has been accepted yet, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the sample image display MG-G8 and message display MS-G8. It is designed so that you will not be exposed to it.

Furthermore, in the 8th G reception permitting state according to this example, the sample image display MG-G8 and the message display MS-G8 can continue to be displayed even after the 8th G reception permitting state ends; It may be hidden at the timing when the permissible state ends, and may not be displayed continuously.

Further, in the 8th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, the message display MS-G8 is displayed, but the message display MS-G8 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "9th G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 384 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "9th G acceptance permission state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 9G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIGS. 385 and 386 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "9th G reception permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "9th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "9th G fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 9th G variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 9th G variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "9th G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 384(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "9th G variation pattern", timing tGi2 has arrived when the 9th G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 9G"), the above-mentioned 9th G reception where "operation reception on the 9th G operation unit regarding changes after the 9th G reception (display after the 9th G reception, etc.)" is permitted. A permissible state (valid period) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 385(b)).

Here, in the 9th G reception permissible state according to this embodiment, the "9th G operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 9th G reception permissible state is terminated. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 9th G acceptance permission state is generated, the player is given an operation opportunity as shown in FIGS. 384(f) and 385(a). It is designed not to display any warning signs that suggest the following.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 1, when the 9th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 384(g) and FIG. 385(b), (c), etc., A simulated image display of the "operation button 410" (as the 9th G operation section) is not displayed.

Further, when the 9th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example occurs, in addition to displaying the sample image, messages related to operation acceptance are also not displayed.

However, in this example, when the 9th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. , an enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G9 depicted as a shadow) corresponding to the type of the 9th G acceptance permission state is displayed, and in a situation where these displays are being executed, It is possible to receive an operation on the ninth G operation section (here, the operation button 410).

In other words, when an operation is performed on the "9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "9th G reception permissible state", "the friendly character YS-G9 changes to the enemy character BOSS- based on multiple operation receptions". "Can you defeat G9 or not?" can indicate whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low. Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, the effect can be triggered so that the "ally character YS-G9" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G9". In this example, the friendly character YS-G9 and the enemy character BOSS-G9 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 9th G reception permission state. Taking this as an opportunity, the friendly character YS-G9 and the enemy character BOSS-G9 may be displayed as one of the "9th G post-reception changes (9th G post-reception display UG9 to be described later)".

In the example shown in FIG. 384 and FIG. 385, at timing tGi2A within the 9th G acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 385(b)), the "9th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is This assumes that the first operation is accepted.

In this regard, at timing tGi2A (the production situation shown in FIG. 385(b)) in the "9th G reception permissible state", the first operation is accepted for the "9th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)". 384(j), (m) and FIG. 385(c), (d), as a change after receiving the 9th G, "9th G operation section (here, operation button 410 )" is audibly outputted as the "output sound after receiving the 9th G operation" in response to the first operation reception. 9th G reception display UG9" starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "9th G reception display UG9" is displayed as shown in FIG. 385(c), ( The mode UG9a shown in d) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 385(c), "ally character YS-G9" uses light-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G9". It is depicted attacking (the first time). Next, as shown in FIG. 385(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G9" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G9" and its HP is reduced. In other words, in "9th G reception display UG9", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G9" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G9", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G9" has been defeated. , which suggests that expectations are high.

In addition, the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output when the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed in the mode UG9a shown in FIGS. 385(c) and (d). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 384(b), at timing tGi2B (the production situation shown in FIG. 385(d)) in the "9th G reception permission state", the "9th G operation section (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 384(j), (m) and FIGS. 385(e), (f), as a change after receiving the 9th G, "9th G operation section (here, In response to the second operation reception for the ``9G operation section (here, the operation button 410)'', the ``9th G reception output sound'' is audibly output, and the second operation reception for the 9G operation section (here, the operation button 410) is output. The “9th G post-reception display UG9” corresponding to the above starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the second operation is accepted for the "9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "9th G reception display UG9" is displayed as shown in FIG. 386(e), ( The mode UG9b shown in f) is displayed, and first, as shown in FIG. It is depicted attacking (second time). Next, as shown in FIG. 386(f), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G9" receives damage from the attack (second time) by the "ally character YS-G9" and further reduces its HP. .

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed in the manner UG9b shown in FIGS. 386(e) and (f). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 384(b), at timing tGi2C within the 9th G acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 386(f)), the 9th G operating section (here, the operating button 410)" is performed for the third time. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 384(j), (m) and FIG. In response to the third operation reception for the 9G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), the ``9th G reception output sound'' is audibly output, and the 9G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is audibly outputted. The "9th G post-reception display UG9" corresponding to the third operation reception begins to be displayed.

In this regard, the "9th G acceptance permission state" occurs as a valid period that does not end when an operation is accepted on the "9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)". Therefore, even if the "final mode" appears as a change after acceptance, the "final mode" will only appear every time an operation is accepted after that, and this will be the trigger for the 9th G acceptance permission state to end. It never happens.

In this production example, when the third operation is accepted for the "9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the "9th G reception display UG9" is displayed as shown in FIG. 386(g), The mode UG9c shown in FIG. 386(h) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 386(g), "ally character YS-G9" uses optical magic to ” (for the third time). Next, as shown in FIG. 386(h), the "enemy character BOSS-G9" is depicted as being damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G9" and its HP is reduced to 0. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 386(h), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G9" (a depiction of reducing HP to 0) appears, suggesting that expectations are high. However, as for the result display, depending on the result of jackpot judgment or performance judgment, a depiction of not being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G9" (depiction of HP remaining) appears (low expectations) It may also be possible to make it so that there is always a depiction of the enemy character BOSS-G9 being defeated. In this sense, the mode UG9c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final mode."

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed in the manner UG9c shown in FIGS. 386(g) and (h). It becomes.

In other words, the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception output sound" may be in one form as the 9th G post-reception display UG9 (for example, any of the multiple forms that may appear as the 9th G post-reception display UG9). ) is displayed, there are two cases: a case where audible output is not performed based on the operation reception for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and a case where audible output is performed based on the operation reception. There is no need for both, and an audible output is always performed based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception on the 9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and an audible output is performed based on the operation reception" refers to the normal state ( This refers to the situation where a game or performance is being performed under the same condition), and does not refer to the configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

In this example, the above-mentioned "9th G reception post-reception display UG9" is displayed depending on how many times the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is operated within the 9th G reception permission state. Although it was decided to display in different modes UG9a to UG9c, each time an operation is performed on the "9th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" within the 9th G acceptance acceptance state, a different mode (image display) is displayed. It does not necessarily have to appear. For example, when an operation is performed on the "9th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" within the 9th G acceptance acceptance state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed is displayed. It may be arranged so that the image appears in some cases, or it may be arranged so that no new change is caused from the previous mode (image display) that has already been displayed. Whether a different aspect will appear from when the previous operation was performed, that is, which aspect will appear when the current operation is performed, is determined based on the results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc. (by lottery) However, the implementation method is not limited to this.

Further, the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which of modes UG9a to UG9c the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed, The same sound may be audibly output regardless of whether it is displayed in any of the modes UG9a to UG9c.

In this example, when timing tGi3 arrives, the 9th G acceptance permission state is terminated.

By the way, the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state", "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", "6th G reception permissible state", and "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" correspond to these. As described above, if a specific condition is met while the "post-reception display" is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to turn the "post-reception display" into a non-display state.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in FIG. 384 ( As shown in a) and (j), at timing tGi2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 386(g)) during the period in which the above-mentioned "9th G post-reception display UG9" is displayed, the specific condition is This assumes that it is established.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGi2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 386(g)), this is used as a trigger to perform the above-mentioned "specific "sound" is output audibly. However, even if the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGi2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 386(g)), as shown in FIGS. 384(i), (l), and FIG. The "9th G post-reception display UG9 (regardless of format)" will not be hidden due to the fulfillment of the "9th G reception display UG9", and the "specific display SK" will be displayed in response to the fulfillment of the specific condition. There's nothing wrong with that. In other words, in this case, the "9th G post-reception display UG9" is the same as the case where the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "9th G post-reception display UG9" is executed (FIG. 386(g), ( The presentation will proceed in the manner shown in h). In addition, in the 9th G reception acceptance state, this is not limited to timing tGi2D (the production situation shown in FIG. The "9th G post-reception display UG9 (regardless of mode)" is not hidden as a trigger, and the "specific display SK" in response to the establishment of a specific condition is not displayed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGi2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 386(g)), but at timing tGi2D When the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied in (the performance situation shown in FIG. 386(g)), there may be both a case where the audible output is made and a case where the audible output is not made.

Further, in this example, while the 9th G reception permission state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGi3 at which the 9G reception permission state ends decreases as time passes. will not be carried out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 384(c), the 9th G reception permission state continues until timing tGi3 when no operation is received for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)". and is terminated based on the arrival of timing tGi3. In this respect, the 9th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, if an operation is not accepted for the "9th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGi3 arrives in the 9th G acceptance state, timing tGi3 has arrived. The 9th G acceptance permission state is only terminated based on this, and the 9th G post-acceptance change (9th G (post-reception performance) will not be executed.

In addition, in the 9th G reception permissible state, the operation reception can be performed multiple times by simply keeping the 9th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) operated (pressed) (the operation is performed every predetermined time). A so-called auto-repeat function, in which reception is automatically repeated, is enabled (see FIGS. 384(b) and 384(c)). Therefore, the player can accept multiple operations without repeatedly operating (pressing) the "9th G operation section (here, operation button 410)".

Additionally, the 9th G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, this may occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed. It may be assumed that

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, in the 9th G acceptance acceptance state, even though the simulated image display of the operation target is not displayed, as shown in FIG. , operation button 410)" can emit light in the "first light emitting mode." This "first light emission mode" is continued until the timing tGi3 when the ninth G acceptance permission state is ended.

In addition, when the 9th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. No sound is output.

Furthermore, in the 9th G acceptance acceptance state, the extinction EF display is not displayed when an operation is accepted or when the validity period ends.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "10th G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 387 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "10th G reception permissible state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 10G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIGS. 385 and 386 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "10th G acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "10th G fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "10th G fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 10th G fluctuation pattern, sound output according to the 10th G fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "10th G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 387(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "10th G variation pattern", timing tGj2 has arrived when the 10G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 10G"), the above-mentioned 10G reception where "operation reception on the 10G operation unit regarding changes after the 10G reception (display after the 10G reception, etc.)" is permitted. A permissible state (valid period) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 388(b)).

Here, in the 10th G reception permissible state according to this embodiment, the "10G operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 10G reception permissible state is terminated. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 10th G reception acceptance state is generated, the player is given an operation opportunity as shown in FIGS. 387(f) and 388(a). It is designed not to display any warning signs that suggest the following.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 1, when the 10th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. 387(g) and FIG. 388(b), (c), etc., A simulated image display of the "operation button 410" (as the 10G operation section) is not displayed.

Further, when the 10th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example occurs, in addition to displaying the sample image, messages related to operation acceptance are also not displayed.

However, in this example, when the 10th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. , an enemy character (in this case, the enemy character BOSS-G10 depicted as a ghost tree) corresponding to the type of the 10th G reception permission state is displayed, and under the situation where these displays are being executed. , an operation can be accepted for the 10G operation section (here, operation button 410).

In other words, when an operation is performed on the "10G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "10G reception permissible state", "the friendly character YS-G10 changes to the enemy character BOSS- based on multiple operation receptions". "Can you beat G10 or not?" can indicate whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low. Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, the effect can be used as an opportunity to advance the effect so that the "ally character YS-G10" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G10." In this example, the friendly character YS-G10 and the enemy character BOSS-G10 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 10th G reception permission state, but operation reception is not allowed in the 10G reception permission state. Taking this as an opportunity, the friendly character YS-G10 and the enemy character BOSS-G10 may be displayed as one of the "10th G post-reception changes (10th G post-reception display UG10 to be described later)".

In the example shown in FIGS. 387 and 388, at timing tGj2A within the 10th G acceptance acceptance state (the production situation shown in FIG. 388(b)), the "10th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is This assumes that the first operation is accepted.

In this regard, at timing tGj2A (the production situation shown in FIG. 388(b)) in the "10th G reception permissible state", the first operation is accepted for the "10G operation section (here, the operation button 410)". 387(j), (m) and FIG. 388(c), (d), as a change after the 10th G reception, "10G operation section (here, operation button 410 )", the "10th G post-reception display UG10" corresponding to the first operation reception begins to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "10th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "10G post-reception display UG10" is displayed as shown in FIG. 388(c), ( The mode UG10a shown in d) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 388(c), "ally character YS-G10" uses lightning-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G10". It is depicted attacking (the first time). Next, as shown in FIG. 388(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G10" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G10" and its HP is reduced. That is, in "10th G reception display UG10", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G10" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G10", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G10" has been defeated. , which suggests that expectations are high.

However, in this example, in which manner the above-mentioned "10G post-reception display UG10" is displayed for the post-reception output sound in response to the operation reception on the "10G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)". There is no audible output regardless of the

In this example, as shown in FIG. 387(b), at timing tGj2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 388(d)) in the "10th G reception permissible state", the "10th G operation section (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 387(j) and 387(m) and FIGS. 388(e) and 388(f), as a change after receiving the 10th G, "10th operating section (here , operation button 410)" is audibly outputted, and the "10G operation section (here, operation button 410)" receives the second operation. The "10th G post-reception display UG10" corresponding to this starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the second operation is accepted for the "10th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "10G post-reception display UG10" is displayed as shown in FIG. 389(e), ( The mode UG10b shown in f) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 389(e), "ally character YS-G10" uses lightning-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G10". It is depicted attacking (second time). Next, as shown in FIG. 389(f), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G10" receives damage from the attack (second time) by the "ally character YS-G10" and further reduces its HP. .

However, as mentioned above, the above-mentioned "10G post-reception display UG10" may be displayed in the form UG10b for the output sound after reception of the operation on the "10G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)". No audible output.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 387(b), at timing tGj2C within the 10th G acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 389(f)), the ``10th 410)" is performed for the third time. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 387(j), (m) and FIG. ``10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' in response to the third operation reception on ``10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' is audibly outputted, and the ``10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' is audibly outputted. The "10th G post-reception display UG10" corresponding to the third operation reception begins to be displayed.

In this respect, the "10th G reception permission state" occurs as a valid period that does not end when an operation is accepted on the "10G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)". Therefore, even if the "final mode" appears as a change after acceptance, the "final mode" will only appear every time an operation is accepted after that, and this will be the trigger for the 10G acceptance permission state to end. It never happens.

In this production example, when the third operation is accepted for the "10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)", the "10G post-reception display UG10" is displayed as shown in FIG. 389(g), The mode UG10c shown in (h) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 389 (g), "ally character YS-G10" uses lightning-based magic to "enemy character ” (for the third time). Next, as shown in FIG. 389(h), a depiction will be made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G10" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G10" and its HP is reduced to 0. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 389(h), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G10" (a depiction of reducing HP to 0) appears, suggesting that expectations are high. However, as for the result display, depending on the result of the jackpot judgment or performance judgment, a depiction of not being able to defeat the "enemy character BOSS-G10" (a depiction of HP remaining) appears (low expectations) It may also be possible to make it so that there is always a depiction of the enemy character BOSS-G10 being defeated. In this sense, the aspect UG10c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final aspect."

However, as mentioned above, the above-mentioned "10G post-reception display UG10" may be displayed in the mode UG10c for the output sound after reception of the operation on the "10G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)". No audible output.

In this example, the above-mentioned "10G post-reception display UG10" is displayed depending on how many times the "10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is operated within the 10G reception permission state. Although it was decided to display in different modes UG10a to UG10c, each time an operation is performed on the "10G operation section (here, operation button 410)" within the 10G acceptance acceptance state, a different mode (image display) is displayed. It does not necessarily have to appear. For example, when an operation is performed on the "10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" within the 10G acceptance acceptance state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed is displayed. It may be arranged so that the image appears in some cases, or it may be arranged so that no new change is caused from the previous mode (image display) that has already been displayed. Whether a different aspect will appear from when the previous operation was performed, that is, which aspect will appear when the current operation is performed, is determined based on the results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc. (by lottery) However, the implementation method is not limited to this.

In this example, when timing tGj3 arrives, the 10th G reception permission state is terminated.

By the way, the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state", "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", "6th G reception permissible state", and "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" correspond to these. As described above, if a specific condition is met while the "post-reception display" is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to turn the "post-reception display" into a non-display state.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, and as shown in FIG. 387 ( As shown in a) and (j), at timing tGj2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 389(g)) during the period in which the "10th G post-reception display UG10" is displayed, the specific condition is This assumes that it is established.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGj2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 389(g)), this is used as a trigger to perform the above-mentioned "specific condition" as shown in FIG. 387(l). "sound" is output audibly. However, even if the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGj2D (the performance situation shown in FIG. 389(g)), the specific condition is not satisfied as shown in FIGS. The "10th G post-reception display UG10 (regardless of format)" will not be hidden when the "10th G reception display UG10 (regardless of format)" is met, and the "specific display SK" will be displayed in response to the fulfillment of the specific condition. There's nothing wrong with that. That is, in this case, the "10th G post-reception display UG10" is the same as the case where the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "10th G post-reception display UG10" is executed (Fig. 389 (g), ( The performance will progress in the manner shown in h). In addition, in the 10th G reception acceptance state, this is not limited to the timing tGj2D (the production situation shown in FIG. As a trigger, the "10th G post-reception display UG10 (regardless of mode)" is not hidden, and the "specific display SK" in response to the establishment of a specific condition is not displayed.

In this example, the "specific sound" is always audibly output when the specific condition is satisfied at timing tGj2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 389(g)), but at timing tGj2D When the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied in (the production situation shown in FIG. 389(g)), there may be both a case where the audible output is made and a case where the audible output is not made.

Further, in this example, while the 10th G acceptance acceptance state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGj3 when the 10G acceptance acceptance state ends arrives decreases as time passes. will not be carried out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 387(c), the 10th G reception acceptance state continues until timing tGj3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the "10G operation unit (here, operation button 410)". and is terminated based on the arrival of timing tGj3. In this respect, the 10th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, if an operation is not accepted for the "10th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" until timing tGj3 arrives in the 10th G reception allowed state, it is assumed that timing tGj3 has arrived. Based on this, the 10G reception permission state is only terminated, and the 10G post-reception change (10G (post-reception performance) will not be executed.

In addition, in the 10th G acceptance permission state, even if the 10th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, the operation is accepted multiple times (for a predetermined period of time). 387 (b) and (c)). In this case, if the player wishes to accept multiple operations on the "10G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 10G reception permission state, the player must Needless to say, it is necessary to repeatedly operate (press) the operation section (here, the operation button 410).

Additionally, the 10th G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, this may occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed. It may be assumed that

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, in the 10G acceptance acceptance state, even though the image display imitating the operation target is not displayed, as shown in FIG. , operation button 410)" can emit light in the "first light emitting mode." This "first light emission mode" is continued until the timing tGj3 when the 10th G acceptance permission state is ended.

In addition, when the 10th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. No sound is output.

Furthermore, in the 10th G acceptance acceptance state, the extinguished EF display is not displayed when an operation is accepted or when the validity period ends.

By the way, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the 10th G acceptance permission state may be realized as the same display as the post-acceptance display corresponding to the 6th G acceptance permission state described above. That is, in this case, when the 10th G reception permission state occurs, the same ally character as the 6G reception permission state (ally character YS-G6 shown in FIG. 373) is selected as the ally character according to the type of the 10G reception permission state. , the same enemy character (enemy character BOSS-G6 shown in FIG. 373) as in the 10th G reception permission state is displayed as the enemy character corresponding to the type of the 10G reception permission state, and these displays are executed. In such a situation, an operation on the 10G operation unit (here, operation button 410) can be accepted.

In such a configuration, the "10th G post-reception display" corresponding to the 10th G reception permissible state has the same content as the "6th G post-reception display" corresponding to the 6th G reception permissible state described above, and the "enemy character BOSS - Whether you can beat G6 or not, it can be suggested whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low. More specifically, when an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "10th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)", this triggers the "ally character YS-G6" to move to the "enemy character BOSS-". The production can progress as if attacking "G6". In this example, the friendly character YS-G6 and the enemy character BOSS-G6 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 10th G reception permission state, but operation reception is not allowed in the 10G reception permission state. Taking this as an opportunity, the friendly character YS-G6 and the enemy character BOSS-G6 may be displayed as one of the "10th G post-reception changes (10th G post-reception display UG10)".

In addition, for the "more specific content of display change that occurs when an operation is accepted within the 10th G acceptance acceptance state" according to this modification and the configuration according to another example, please refer to FIGS. 372 to 374. Since this is the same as described above, the explanation will be omitted here. However, in the "10th G post-reception change" according to this example, the above-mentioned "10th G post-reception display UG10" is changed to the above-mentioned "6th G post-reception display UG6" as in the case of the above-mentioned "6th G reception permissible state". ”, the “output sound after reception” in response to the operation reception on the “10G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)” is performed in the “6G reception acceptance state” described above. '', no sound is audibly output.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "11th G reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "11th G reception permissible state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 11G" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIGS. 391 and 392 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the "11th G acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "11th G variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "11th G variation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 11th G variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 11th G variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "11th G variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 390(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "11th G variation pattern", timing tGk2 has arrived when the 11th G time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ. (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 11G"), "operation acceptance for the 11th G operation unit regarding changes after the 11th G acceptance (display after the 11th G acceptance, sound output after the 11th G acceptance, etc.)" The above-mentioned 11th G acceptance permission state (validity period) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 391(b)).

Here, in the 11th G reception permissible state according to this embodiment, the "11G operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 11G reception permissible state is terminated. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such an 11th G reception acceptance state is generated, the player is given an operation opportunity, as shown in FIGS. 390(f) and 391(a). It is designed not to display any warning signs that suggest the following.

However, in this production example, when the 11th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 390(g) and 391(b), (c), ) as the 11th G operation-related display that can only appear when the operation acceptance for the player is allowed or when the operation acceptance is allowed. At least a mock image display MG-G11, which is a copy of the "operation button 410" (operation button 410) serving as an operation section, is displayed. In this production example, the timing at which the 11th G reception permission state occurs is the same as the timing at which the "11th G operation related display" is displayed, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the "11th G operation related display" may be started to be displayed before the timing when the 11th G acceptance permission state occurs, so that it is displayed in a manner that straddles the timing. Alternatively, the display of the "11th G operation related display" may be started with a delay from the timing when the 11th G acceptance permission state occurs.

In this regard, the "sample image display MG-G11" corresponding to the 11th G reception acceptance state always uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme. In this case, it will be displayed in the same manner as the "sample image display MG-G1" corresponding to the first G acceptance permission state described above.

In addition, "Make image display MG-G11" corresponding to the 11th G reception permission state is such that "After the part of the "Operation receiver" which is the operation target is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. This cycle of 11G hours is longer than the "cycle of 5G hours", "cycle of 7G hours", and "cycle of 8G hours" displayed in the above-mentioned 5G reception permission state, 7th reception permission state, and 8th reception permission state. (long cycle), in the 11th G reception permission state, the "operation receiving part" is more movable than in the 5G reception permission state, the 7th reception permission state, and the 8th reception permission state. It will depict how it moves slowly up and down the range.

Note that when the "sample image display MG-G11" corresponding to the 11th G reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tGk2 at which the 11G reception permission state occurs, the periodic change will be changed according to the timing tGk2. It is preferable to wait until it starts. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-G11" corresponding to the 11th G acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tGk2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 11th G reception acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. A message display (here, a message display MS-G11 displayed as "Meteorite!") related to the operation acceptance for the section (here, the operation button 410) is displayed.

In this example, when the 11th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. , an enemy character (here, the enemy character BOSS-G11 depicted as a demon) corresponding to the type of the 11th G acceptance acceptance state is displayed, and in a situation where these displays are being executed, It is possible to receive an operation on the 11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410).

That is, when an operation is performed on the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the "11th G reception permissible state", "the friendly character YS-G11 changes to the enemy character BOSS- based on multiple operation receptions". Whether you can beat G11 or not can indicate whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low. Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, the effect can be used as an opportunity to advance the effect so that the "ally character YS-G11" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-G11." In this example, the ally character YS-G11 and the enemy character BOSS-G11 are displayed when operation reception is permitted in the 11th G reception permission state, but operation reception is not allowed in the 11G reception permission state. Taking this as an opportunity, the friendly character YS-G11 and the enemy character BOSS-G11 may be displayed as one of the "11th G post-reception changes (11th G post-reception display UG11 to be described later)".

In the example shown in FIGS. 390 and 391, at timing tGk2A within the 11th G reception permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 391(b)), the "11th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is This assumes that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, the first operation is accepted for the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tGk2A (the production situation shown in FIG. 391(b)) within the 11th G reception allowed state. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 390 and 391(c), a "11th G post-reception change (11th G post-reception effect)" is generated in response to the operation reception.

More specifically, at timing tGk2A within the 11th G acceptance acceptance state (the production situation shown in FIG. 391(b)), the first operation is performed on the "11th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)". When the acceptance is made, as shown in FIGS. 390(j), (m) and FIGS. 391(c), (d), as a change after the 11th G acceptance, the ``11th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly outputted as the "output sound after the 11th G reception" in response to the first operation reception for the "11G operation section (here, the operation button 410)". The “11th G reception display UG11” starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", the above "11G post-reception display UG11" is displayed as shown in FIG. 391(c), ( The mode UG11a shown in d) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 391(c), "ally character YS-G11" uses meteor-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G11". It is depicted attacking (the first time). Next, as shown in FIG. 391(d), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G11" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G11" and its HP is reduced. That is, in "11th G reception display UG11", when the HP of "enemy character BOSS-G11" becomes 0 due to the attack of "ally character YS-G11", it means that "enemy character BOSS-G11" has been defeated. , which suggests that expectations are high.

Further, the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output when the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in the mode UG11a shown in FIGS. 391(c) and (d). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 390(b), at timing tGk2B (the performance situation shown in FIG. 391(d)) in the "11th G reception permission state", the "11th G operation section (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is operated for the second time. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 390(j), (m) and FIGS. 392(e), (f), as a change after receiving the 11th G, "11th G operating section (here, , the "11th G reception output sound" in response to the second operation reception for the "operation button 410)" is audibly output, and the second operation reception for the "11G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is output. ``11th G post-reception display UG11'' corresponding to ``11th G reception display UG11'' starts to be displayed.

In this example, when the second operation is accepted for the "11th G operating unit (here, the operating button 410)", the above "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed as shown in FIG. 392(e), ( The mode UG11b shown in f) is displayed, and first, as shown in FIG. 392(e), "ally character YS-G11" uses meteor-based magic to attack "enemy character BOSS-G11". It is depicted attacking (second time). Next, as shown in FIG. 392(f), a depiction is made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G11" receives damage from the attack (second time) by the "ally character YS-G11" and further reduces its HP. .

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in the mode UG11b shown in FIGS. 392(e) and (f). It becomes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 390(b), at timing tGk2C within the 11th G acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 392(f)), the ``11th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is performed for the third time. When the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 390(j), (m) and FIG. ``11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' in response to the third operation reception on ``11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' is audibly outputted as ``output sound after 11G reception'', and ``11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' The "11th G post-reception display UG11" corresponding to the third operation reception begins to be displayed.

In this respect, the "11th G acceptance permission state" occurs as a valid period that does not end when an operation is accepted on the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)". Therefore, even if the "final mode" appears as a change after acceptance, the "final mode" will only appear every time an operation is accepted thereafter, and this will be the trigger for the 11th G acceptance acceptance state to end. It never happens. Moreover, the sample image display MG-G11 and the message display MS-G11 are not made non-displayed due to this.

In this production example, when the third operation is accepted for the "11th G operating unit (here, the operating button 410)", the "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed as shown in FIG. 392(g), The mode UG11c shown in FIG. 392(h) is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 392(g), "ally character YS-G11" uses meteor-based magic to ” (for the third time). Next, as shown in FIG. 392(h), a depiction will be made in which the "enemy character BOSS-G11" is damaged by the attack by the "ally character YS-G11" and its HP is reduced to 0. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 392(h), a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G11" (description of reducing HP to 0) appears, suggesting that expectations are high. However, as for the result display, depending on the result of the jackpot judgment or performance judgment, a depiction of not being able to defeat the "enemy character BOSS-G11" (depiction of HP remaining) appears (low expectations) It may also be possible to make it so that there is a case where it is suggested that "enemy character BOSS-G11" has been defeated, or that a depiction of being able to defeat "enemy character BOSS-G11" always appears. In this sense, the aspect UG11c shown in the figure can be said to be the above-mentioned "final aspect."

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception output sound" is always audible output even when the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed in the mode UG11c shown in FIGS. 392(g) and (h). It becomes.

In other words, the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception output sound" may be expressed as "11th G post-reception display UG11" in one mode (for example, any of the multiple modes that may appear as the 11th G post-reception display UG11). ) is displayed, there are two cases: a case where audible output is not performed based on the operation reception for the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" and a case where audible output is performed based on the operation reception. There is no need for both, and an audible output is always performed based on the operation reception. Note that "there is no case where an audible output is not performed based on the operation reception on the 11G operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and an audible output is performed based on the operation reception" refers to the normal state ( This refers to the situation where a game or performance is being performed under the same condition), and does not refer to the configuration when some abnormality occurs or while the abnormality processing is continuing.

In this example, the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed depending on how many times the "11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated within the 11th G reception permissible state. Although it was decided to display in different modes UG11a to UG11c, each time an operation is performed on the "11th G operation section (here, the operation button 410)" within the 11th G acceptance acceptance state, a different mode (image display) is displayed. It does not necessarily have to appear. For example, when an operation is performed on the "11G operation unit (here, operation button 410)" within the 11G acceptance acceptance state, the same mode (image display) as when the previous operation was performed is displayed. It may be arranged so that the image appears in some cases, or it may be arranged so that no new change is caused from the previous mode (image display) that has already been displayed. Whether a different aspect will appear from when the previous operation was performed, that is, which aspect will appear when the current operation is performed, is determined based on the results of jackpot determination, performance determination, etc. (by lottery) However, the implementation method is not limited to this.

Further, the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception output sound" may be audibly output as a different sound depending on which of modes UG11a to UG11c the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed, The same sound may be audibly output regardless of whether it is displayed in any of the modes UG11a to UG11c.

In this example, when timing tGk3 arrives, the 11th G acceptance permission state is terminated, and the sample image display MG-G11 and message display MS-G11 are placed in a non-display state. However, a predetermined waiting time is set between when the timing tGk3 arrives and when the sample image display MG-G11 and the message display MS-G11 are turned off. Therefore, the sample image display MG-G11 and the message display MS-G11 are not made to be hidden in the 11th G acceptance acceptance state when an operation is accepted.

In this regard, when the 8th G reception permission state is ended, the 11th G disappearing EF display EF-G11 is displayed to make it difficult to see the mock image display MG and message display MS until they are hidden. It is now possible to do so. That is, in this case, the sample image display MG and message display MS are hidden while the 11th G extinction EF display EF-G11 is being displayed, as shown in FIGS. 392(g) and (h). The Rukoto.

By the way, the above-mentioned "1st G reception permissible state", "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example", "6th G reception permissible state", and "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" correspond to these. As described above, if a specific condition is met while the "post-reception display" is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to turn the "post-reception display" into a non-display state.

In this production example, the "condition (specific condition) that can be satisfied in relation to the player's action" is established when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001, and as shown in FIG. 390 ( As shown in a) and (j), at timing tGk2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 392(g)) during the period in which the above-mentioned "11th G post-reception display UG11" is displayed, the specific condition is This assumes that it is established.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGk2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 392(g)), this is used as a trigger to perform the above-mentioned "specific "sound" is output audibly. However, even if the above specific condition is satisfied at timing tGk2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 392(g)), as shown in FIGS. 391(g), (i) and 392(h), the specific condition When this is established, the "11th G reception display UG11 (regardless of format)", the sample image display MG-G11, and the message display MS-G11 will not be hidden, and the specific conditions will be met. There is also no "specific display SK" displayed depending on what happened. In other words, in this case, the "11th G post-reception display UG11 (regardless of format)" is the same format as when the specific condition is not satisfied within the period in which the "11th G post-reception display UG11" is executed (Fig. 392(g) and (h)). In addition, in the 11th G reception acceptance state, this is not limited to timing tGk2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 392(g)), but even if the above specific condition is satisfied at any timing within the 11G reception acceptance state. As a trigger, "11th G reception display UG11 (regardless of format)", sample image display MG-G11, and message display MS-G11 will not be hidden, and in response to the fulfillment of specific conditions. "Specific display SK" is also not displayed.

In this example, the above-mentioned "specific sound" is always audibly output when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied at timing tGk2D (the production situation shown in FIG. 392(g)). No matter at which timing within the 11G reception permission state the specific condition is satisfied, this may be used as a trigger for both audible output and non-audible output. Alternatively, the "specific sound" may not be audibly output even if the specific condition is satisfied at any timing within the 11th G acceptance permission state.

Further, in this example, while the 11th G acceptance acceptance state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the timing tGk3 at which the 11G acceptance acceptance state ends arrives decreases as time passes. However, this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 390(c), the 11th G reception acceptance state continues until timing tGk3 when no operation is received for the "11th G operation unit (here, operation button 410)". The process is terminated based on the arrival of timing tGk3. In this respect, the 11th G reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, if an operation is not accepted for the "11th G operation section (here, operation button 410)" until timing tGk3 arrives in the 11th G reception allowed state, timing tGk3 has arrived. The 11th G acceptance permission state is only terminated based on this, and the 11th G post-acceptance change (11G (post-reception performance) will not be executed.

In addition, in the 11th G reception permissible state, even if the 11th G operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (for a predetermined period of time). 390 (b) and (c)). In this case, in the 11th G acceptance acceptance state, if the player wants to accept multiple operations on the ``11th G operation section (here, the operation button 410),'' Needless to say, it is necessary to repeatedly operate (press) the operation section (here, the operation button 410).

In addition, the 11th G acceptance state occurs when the first background image HK-G1 is displayed as a "background image display" that appears to overlap behind other image displays. It is possible. However, this may occur when a background image different from the first background image HK-G1 (for example, a background image different from both the first background image HK-G1 and the second background image HK-G2) is displayed. It may be assumed that

Furthermore, as described above, the "operation button 410" has multiple color schemes including a "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and a "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Either one is provided so that it can emit light. In this regard, in the 11th G acceptance acceptance state, even though the simulated image display of the operation target is not displayed, as shown in FIG. , operation button 410)" can emit light in the "first light emitting mode." This "first light emitting mode" is continued until timing tGk3 arrives when the 11th G acceptance permission state is ended.

Furthermore, when the 11th G reception permission state occurs, as shown in FIG. No sound is output.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the 11th G reception permission state occurs, even if the specific conditions are met while the "11G post reception display UG11" corresponding to the 11G reception permission state is displayed, Taking this as a trigger, the "11th G post-reception display UG11" is not hidden. In this regard, even if a specific condition is met in the 11th G acceptance acceptance state where no operation has been accepted yet, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the sample image display MG-G11 and the message display MS-G11. It is designed so that you will not be exposed to it.

In addition, in the 11th G acceptance permission state according to this example, the sample image display MG-G11 and the message display MS-G11 can continue to be displayed even after the 11G reception permission state ends. It may be hidden at the timing when the permissible state ends, and may not be displayed continuously.

Further, in the 11th G acceptance acceptance state according to this example, message display MS-G11 is displayed, but message display MS-G11 does not necessarily need to be displayed.

Here, the 11th G acceptance acceptance state (see FIGS. 390 to 392) may be generated as an "11G acceptance acceptance state according to a modified example" described below instead.

FIG. 393 shows an example of the performance content when the "11th G reception permissible state according to the modified example" occurs and the player performs an operation based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 11G" being satisfied. It is a time chart showing. In other words, the "11th G acceptance state according to the modified example" is basically the same as the "11th G acceptance state" described above. However, as shown in FIG. 393, when the replica image display MG-G11 is hidden due to the expiration of its validity period (operation permissible state), the disappearing EF display that makes it difficult to see is not displayed. This state is different from the above-mentioned "11th G acceptance permission state" in that the state is .

Note that the pachinko machine 1 may generate the above-mentioned "11th G reception permission state" and the "11G reception permission state according to the modified example" as different types of reception permission states. However, in this case, the conditions for these occurrences will be set as mutually different conditions. Further, in this case, the post-acceptance display, the post-acceptance output sound, etc. may also be executed as different types (aspects).

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the ally character YS and the enemy character BOSS are displayed when operation acceptance is permitted, but changes after acceptance ( The friendly character YS and the enemy character BOSS may be made to appear as one of the displays (displayed after acceptance).

Furthermore, the "cycle 5G time", "cycle 7G time", and "cycle 8G time" displayed in the above-mentioned 5G reception permission state, 7th reception permission state, and 8th reception permission state are set as the same time. It may be something.

In addition, "cycle 1G hours", "cycle 2G hours", "cycle 6G hours", " The period 11G time" may be set as the same time.

However, "period 5G hours", "period 7G hours", "period 8G hours" are set as times shorter than the predetermined times, "period 1G hours", "period 2G hours", "period 6G hours", The "cycle 11G time" may be set as a time longer than a predetermined time.

In any of the above-mentioned acceptance permission states, the specific display SK may not be displayed when specific conditions are met.

Although each of the above-mentioned acceptance permission states is assumed to occur within a different variation pattern, they may also occur within the same variation pattern, or a state where the variation pattern is not executed, such as a jackpot state. It may be arranged so that this may occur in some cases.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "first G operation section" may be a specific operation section different from the "operation button 410."

In addition, when the above-mentioned 2nd G reception permission state occurs, the "operation button 410" is activated in the "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white and the "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red. Although it was possible to emit light in any one of multiple modes (for example, either the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode) including "two color schemes)", instead of this, "first light emission mode (two color schemes)" Any one of multiple modes including "first color scheme)", "second light emission mode (second color scheme)" based on red, and "third light emission mode (third color scheme)" based on gold (for example, It may be possible to emit light in any one of the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode. However, in this case, in the above-mentioned 2nd G reception acceptance state, the sample image display MG-G2 is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes including a predetermined color scheme, a specific color scheme, and a special color scheme (for example, a predetermined color scheme, a specific color scheme, and a special color scheme). either) will be displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned "third G operation section" may be a different operation section from the above-mentioned "first G operation section." Furthermore, the above-mentioned "third G operation section" may be a specific operation section different from the "operation button 410."

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "fourth G operation section" may be a specific operation section different from the "operation button 410."

Further, the above-mentioned "5th G operation section" does not emit light in the above-mentioned "second light emission mode (second color scheme)", but it does not emit light in the above-mentioned "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" and the above-mentioned "third light emission mode". It may be possible to emit light in any one of a plurality of modes (for example, either the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode) including the mode (third color scheme).

In addition, in the above-mentioned 1st G reception permissible state to 5th G reception permissible state, it is possible to occur as a reception permissible state in which operation reception is permitted only once, but it is also possible to occur as a reception permissible state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times. It may be done as follows.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 6th G reception permissible state to 11th G reception permissible state, it is possible to occur as a reception permissible state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times, but it is also possible to occur as a reception permissible state in which operation reception is permitted only once. It may be done as follows.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "sixth G operation section" may be a specific operation section different from the "operation button 410." Moreover, the above-mentioned "sixth G operating section" may be a different operating section from the above-mentioned "first G operating section".

In addition, when the above-mentioned 7th G reception permission state occurs, the "operation button 410" can emit light only in the "first light emission mode (first color scheme)" based on white, but instead of this, Although it does not emit light in the above-mentioned "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)", it does not emit light in the above-mentioned "second light-emitting mode (second color scheme)", but in multiple modes including the above-mentioned "first light-emitting mode (first color scheme)" and the above-mentioned "third light-emitting mode (third color scheme)". You may make it possible to emit light in either (for example, either the first light emission mode or the third light emission mode).

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "seventh G operating section" may be a different operating section from the above-mentioned "third G operating section."

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "10G operation section" may be a specific operation section different from the "operation button 410."

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" that corresponds to the operation acceptance during each acceptance period (operation permissible state) related to the above-mentioned production examples and their variations does not necessarily reflect the expectation that a jackpot will be achieved. It doesn't have to be a suggestion. For example, it may be generated as a reception period for determining whether or not the probability fluctuation function will be enabled within the execution period of a jackpot game, and may be executed as a display after the reception, and the expectation level suggestion regarding the game may be It may also be made to occur as a simple acceptance period within a mini-game that has no relation to anything, and to be executed as a display after the acceptance. Alternatively, it may be generated based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition during various interval periods, etc., and executed as a display after the reception of the condition. Therefore, the reception period for the above-described production example and its variations does not necessarily have to occur within the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. In addition, even in cases where the post-reception display does not suggest such expectations, multiple modes are prepared for the post-reception display, and the display is displayed in one of these multiple modes. You may also do so.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, if the post-reception display is not hidden when a specific condition is met, the BGM production sound is newly output when the specific condition is met. However, if the post-reception display is hidden when a specific condition is met, if the BGM production sound is newly output when the specific condition is met. You may also make it so that there is. However, in this case, if the post-reception display is not hidden when the specific condition is met, the BGM production sound will not start outputting again when the specific condition is met. However, when the post-reception display is hidden due to the fulfillment of a specific condition, there is a case where the BGM production sound is newly output when the specific condition is met, and the BGM production sound is It is more desirable to have both a case where the sound is not newly output and a case where the sound is not newly output.

In addition, in the first G reception permissible state according to the above-mentioned production example, the first G reception permissible state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception permissible state according to the modified example, and the sixth G reception permissible state according to the modified example, the operation reception permissible state ( When the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied in the reception-permitting state), the state in which operation reception is permitted is not terminated, and even after the reception display etc. is hidden due to the establishment of the specific condition, the operation is not allowed. The state in which reception is permitted (reception permitted state) continues. Therefore, even after the post-reception display has been hidden due to the establishment of a specific condition, if an operation is accepted again within the continued acceptance permission state, this will trigger the post-reception display to be displayed again. It will be executed. However, if the specific condition is satisfied again while the post-reception display executed again in this way is being displayed, this may be used as an opportunity to prevent the post-reception display from being hidden. According to such a configuration, since the post-reception display can be hidden only once when a specific condition is met, it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In this case, if the specific condition is satisfied again while the re-executed post-reception display is being displayed, the post-reception display will not be hidden due to this, and the post-reception display will not be hidden. may be hidden. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to hide the post-reception display due to the establishment of a specific condition. .

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, if the post-reception display is not hidden when a specific condition is met, a new BGM production sound is started to be output when the specific condition is met. You can make sure that it doesn't happen. On the other hand, when the post-reception display is hidden when a specific condition is met, when the BGM effect sound is newly outputted when the specific condition is met, There may be both a case where the output of the BGM effect sound is not newly started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the post-acceptance display is hidden due to the fulfillment of a specific condition, and to appropriately create a sense of expectation for a new performance. You will be able to do this. Furthermore, even if the post-reception display is hidden based on the fulfillment of specific conditions, this does not necessarily mean that a new audible BGM sound will be output. It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display has been hidden based on the fact that the following has been established, and it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the 2nd G reception permission state, the 5th G reception permission state, the 7th G reception permission state, and the 8th G reception permission state, the operating means is different from either of the above "first light emission mode" and the above "second light emission mode". The light may be emitted in the third light emission mode.

In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and cases in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time". Therefore, the image can be displayed in the same form (or similar form). However, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time," the image display may be displayed in the first form and in the second form. If the periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the second form (or similar form) is not displayed, and the second form (or similar form) is not displayed. It may be possible to display one form (or similar form) in some cases. The sample image display may be performed, for example, in the 2nd G reception permissible state, the 5th G reception permissible state, the 7th G reception permissible state, the 8th G reception permissible state, the 11th G reception permissible state, the 11th G reception permissible state according to a modification, etc. For example, in the 1st G reception permissible state, the 1st G reception permissible state according to a modification, the 6th G reception permissible state, the 6th G reception permissible state according to a modification, etc. It may be possible to display two forms (or similar forms).

In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and cases in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time". Therefore, the omen effect display can be displayed in the same manner (specific omen display ZET), but as the omen effect display mode, periodic changes in the sample image display are made in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time". It is also possible to provide an aspect in which the image may appear when the image is displayed in such a way that it appears, but cannot appear when periodic changes in the image display are displayed in a manner that appears in units of "predetermined time." good. Note that the "time longer than the predetermined time" may be prepared as a plurality of times.

By the way, periodic changes in the image display are different from color schemes or luminescence, and are a phenomenon that occurs over time, so it takes a relatively long time to distinguish between their merits and demerits. In other words, it is difficult to reliably distinguish whether the periodic changes in the image display currently appearing are long or short (both long cycles and short cycles are not displayed). For). However, on the other hand, if players can distinguish between them, they will be able to enjoy the value as a new information source. , it will be possible to provide new performance.

Further, although this pachinko machine 1 is provided with all of the above-mentioned 1st G acceptance acceptance state to 11th G acceptance acceptance state, it is not necessarily necessary to provide all of these acceptance acceptance states. Rather, it is desirable to provide only some of these acceptance acceptance states in an appropriate combination in consideration of desired effects. By providing "appropriate combinations" of the configurations described below, excellent effects can be achieved. In each of the configurations below, combinations of reception acceptance states that should be provided in order to achieve the effect are illustrated, but the combinations are not limited to the examples shown and may be used to achieve the desired effect. Any combination not illustrated may be used as long as it can be played. Furthermore, other acceptance acceptance states unrelated to the desired effects may be provided as appropriate, as long as they do not adversely affect the achievement of the desired effects.

For example, as the first configuration G1, the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to a modification, the sixth G reception permission state according to a modification, or the sixth G reception permission state according to a modification) among the reception permission states described above is selected. If provided, in the first G reception permissible state (or the first G reception permissible state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception permissible state according to the modified example, the sixth G reception permissible state according to the modified example), operation reception on the specific operation unit is permitted. When an operation is accepted on the specific operation unit in the acceptance acceptance state, a 1st G post-acceptance display UG1 (or a 6th G post-acceptance display UG6) corresponding to the operation reception is generated. may be displayed (see FIG. 352, FIG. 355, FIG. 372, or FIG. 375). In this regard, in the 1st G reception permission state (or the 1G reception permission state according to the modified example, the 6th G reception permission state according to the modification example, the 6th G reception permission state according to the modification example), the 1G reception permission state according to the operation reception on the specific operation unit is The after-reception display UG1 (or the 6th G after-reception display UG6) is displayed, and the 1st G post-reception output sound (6th G post-reception output) corresponding to the 1G post-reception display UG1 (or the 6th G post-reception display UG6) is displayed. sound) is output, if a specific condition is met while the 1st G post-reception display UG1 (or 6th G post-reception display UG6) is displayed, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the The 1G post-reception display UG1 (or the 6th G post-reception display UG6) is hidden (see FIG. 352, FIG. 355, or FIG. 366). That is, in this case, even though you want to see a different effect display than the 1st G post-reception display UG1 (or 6th G post-reception display UG6), the 1st G post-reception display UG1 (or 6th G post-reception display UG6) ), even if a situation occurs in which other performance displays are made difficult to view, it is expected that the decline in gaming interest at that time will be suppressed.

Furthermore, the first configuration G1 according to the above-described production example further includes a fourth G reception permission state (or a tenth G reception permission state) among the reception permission states described above. In this case, in the above-mentioned 1st G reception permission state (or the 1G reception permission state according to the modified example, the 6th G reception permission state according to the modification example, the 6th G reception permission state according to the modification example), the operation reception is not performed on the specific operation unit. When the 1st G post-acceptance display UG1 (or the 6th G post-acceptance display UG6) corresponding to the operation reception is performed, the corresponding 1st G post-acceptance output sound (6th G post-acceptance output sound) is output. (See FIG. 352, FIG. 355, or FIG. 372).However, in the above-mentioned 4th G reception allowing state (or 10th G receiving allowing state), the corresponding post-reception output sound will not be output ( (See Figure 366 or Figure 387).

That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is performed in response to an operation accepted on a specific operation unit, the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is output (1st G acceptance permission state, 1st G acceptance permission state according to the modification). state, 6th G reception permissible state, or 6G reception permissible state according to a modified example), if the above "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-reception display is displayed, the "specific condition" is satisfied. The post-acceptance display may be hidden, but if the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is not output when the post-acceptance display is performed (the 4th G reception allowed state or the 10th G reception allowed state). status), if the "specific condition" is met while the above post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will not be hidden and will continue as a result of the fulfillment of the "specific condition". become visible. According to such a configuration, when the "specific condition" is satisfied, the post-reception display is triggered by determining whether or not the corresponding post-reception output sound is output when performing the post-reception display. It is now possible to make suggestions as to whether or not the information should be hidden, which is expected to improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, in the first configuration G1 according to the above-described production example, when the post-acceptance display is performed and the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is output (the first G reception permissible state, the first G according to the modification example is reception permissible state, 6th G reception permissible state, or 6th G reception permissible state according to a modified example), if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the above-mentioned post-reception display is displayed, the "specific condition" is satisfied. The post-acceptance display is always hidden (see FIG. 352, FIG. 355, FIG. 372, or FIG. 375). On the other hand, if the corresponding post-reception output sound is not output when the above-mentioned post-reception display is performed, and the "specific condition" is satisfied while the above-mentioned post-reception display is displayed, the "specific condition" In the case where the post-reception display is not hidden and continues to be displayed (4th G reception permissible state or 10th G reception permissible state) triggered by the fulfillment of the "specific condition" When the post-reception display is set to a hidden state based on this event (1st G reception permissible state, 1st G reception permissible state according to a modification, 6th G reception permissible state, or 6th G reception permissible state according to a modification) ). That is, as described above, in the first G reception permission state, the first G reception permission state according to the modification, the sixth G reception permission state, or the sixth G reception permission state according to the modification, the state shown in FIG. 352(m) or FIG. 355( m), as shown in FIGS. 372(m), 375(m), etc., there are both cases in which the output sound is audible after reception of operation on a specific operation unit and cases in which it is not audible. It looks like this. However, the implementation method for the first configuration G1 is not limited to this.

According to such a configuration, when the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the post-acceptance display is output when the post-acceptance display is performed, if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is displayed, While the post-reception display can always be hidden when the "specific condition" is met, the corresponding post-reception output sound is not output when the above-mentioned post-reception display is performed. In this case, if the "specific conditions" are met while the above post-reception display is displayed, the system recognizes whether or not to hide the post-reception display based on the fulfillment of the "specific conditions". Since it becomes possible to make things more difficult, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the first configuration G1 according to the above-described production example, a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation accepted on a specific operation unit is displayed, and while a corresponding post-acceptance output sound is being output, a specific When the condition is satisfied (1st G reception permissible state, 1st G reception permissible state according to a modification, 6th G reception permissible state, or 6th G reception permissible state according to a modification), the post-reception display is displayed for a predetermined display time. Even if it remains, it will be hidden using this as a trigger (timing tGa2B shown in FIG. 352(j), timing tGa2b shown in FIG. 355(j), timing shown in FIG. 372(j) tGf2D, timing tGf2d shown in FIG. 375(j)), the output sound after acceptance is not ended midway and is output for a predetermined output time (timing tGa2B shown in FIG. 352(m), 355(m), timing tGf2D shown in FIG. 372(m), timing tGf2d shown in FIG. 375(m)). According to this configuration, even if a specific condition is met, the output sound after reception is not terminated and continues, so through such an unbalanced production situation, the output sound after reception is It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the display is hidden due to the fulfillment of a specific condition.

Furthermore, in the first configuration G1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the reception permission state (first G reception permission state, the first G reception permission state according to the modified example) in which the display after reception is hidden when a specific condition is satisfied In the reception permissible state, the 6th G reception permissible state, or the 6th G reception permissible state according to a modified example), even if the same aspect (one aspect) is displayed as the after reception display, the corresponding after reception display Since there are both cases in which the output sound is audibly output and cases in which the output sound is not audibly output after reception, it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained (see Figure 352(m) and , FIG. 355(m), FIG. 372(m), FIG. 375(m), etc.).

In particular, in the first configuration G1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the reception permission state (the first G reception permission state, the first G reception according to the modified example) in which the display after reception is hidden when a specific condition is met. In the permissible state, the 6th G reception permissible state, or the 6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example), the predetermined mode (the 1st G reception permissible state, or the 1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example) is displayed as a post-reception display, as described above. 2nd mode) is displayed, the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is always audible, but as the post-acceptance display, the specific mode (1G reception permissible state or the second mode according to the modified example) is displayed. In the 1G acceptance permission state, if the above-mentioned "first aspect (e.g., the aspects shown in FIGS. 354(c) to (e)") is displayed, the corresponding output sound after acceptance is displayed. There are both cases in which the output sound is audibly output and cases in which the output sound after reception is not audibly output (in the 6th G reception permissible state or the 6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example, Fig. 372(m), Fig. 375(m), etc.). According to such a configuration, depending on which mode is displayed as the "post-reception display," the "post-reception output sound" may always be audible, or the "post-reception output sound" may not necessarily be audible. Because of this, it is expected to better maintain the sense of tension when an operation is accepted.

In addition, in the first configuration G1 according to the above-described production example, in the reception permission state (4th G reception permission state or 10G reception permission state) in which the post-reception display is hidden when a specific condition is met, , No matter which mode appears as the post-acceptance display, the corresponding post-acceptance output sound is always not audibly output. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that the post-reception display will be hidden when the specific condition is met.

In addition, in the first configuration G1 according to the above-mentioned production example, the reception permission state (first G reception permission state, the first G reception permission state according to the modified example) is such that the reception display is hidden when a specific condition is satisfied. state, the 6th G reception permission state, or the 6G reception permission state according to a modified example), and the reception permission state (4G reception permission state, or 10G reception permission state) assumes that operation reception is permitted for the same operation unit (specific operation unit).

In adopting the first configuration G1, the 4th G acceptance acceptance state (or the 10th G acceptance acceptance state) is generated as an acceptance acceptance state in which a simulated image display imitating the specific operation section is displayed. Good too.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned first configuration G1, it is not necessarily necessary to provide acceptance permission states of multiple types; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the above-described first configuration G1 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the second configuration G2, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, a first G reception permission state (or a first G reception permission state according to a modified example) in which a simulated image display imitating the specific operation section is displayed. A 6G reception permissible state, a 6G reception permissible state according to a modified example) and a 4G reception permissible state (or a 10G reception permissible state) in which a simulated image display imitating the specific operation section is not displayed. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, while the above-mentioned simulated image display imitating the above-mentioned specific operation section is displayed (in the 1st G acceptance acceptance state or the 1st G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example), the above-mentioned specific operation section is displayed. When an operation is accepted and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed, if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is displayed, the post-acceptance display is triggered by the fulfillment of the specific condition. becomes hidden (see FIG. 352(j), FIG. 355(j), etc.). As a result, if, for example, a situation arises in which the post-reception display makes it difficult to see other performance displays even though the user wants to see other performance displays rather than the post-reception display. , it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time.

On the other hand, while the above-mentioned simulated image display imitating the specific operation section is not displayed (in the 4th G acceptance acceptance state or the 10th G acceptance acceptance state), the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance for the above-mentioned specific operation section is displayed. If displayed, even if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will be hidden once the "specific conditions" are met. Instead, the post-acceptance display may be continuously displayed (see FIG. 366(j), FIG. 387(j), etc.). According to such a configuration, when the "specific condition" is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned image display replicating the "specific operation section" is displayed when an operation for the "specific operation section" is accepted. Taking this as an opportunity, it becomes possible to make a suggestion as to whether the post-acceptance display should be hidden, and it is expected that this will improve the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the "first G acceptance acceptance state" may be generated as an acceptance acceptance state in which the sample image display is not displayed. Therefore, we decided to prepare a ``6th G reception permission state'' as a reception permission state in which a sample image display that simulates the ``specific operation section'' that is the operation target is displayed, and the ``specific operation section'' that is the operation target is displayed. Assuming that "1st G reception permission state" and "4th G reception permission state (or 10G reception permission state)" are prepared as reception permission states in which the sample image display is not displayed, the second G reception permission state according to the above-mentioned production example In configuration G2, in particular, if a post-acceptance display corresponding to an operation reception for the specific operation unit is displayed while the above-mentioned sample image display imitating the “specific operation unit” is not displayed, the post-acceptance display is If the "specific condition" is satisfied while being displayed, the post-reception display is not hidden and continues to be displayed after the "specific condition" is satisfied (4th G reception permission state, or 10th G acceptance permission state) and a case where the post-reception display is hidden when the "specific condition" is satisfied (first G reception permission state).

According to such a configuration, if the above-mentioned simulated image display imitating the "specific operation section" is displayed when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", after the above-mentioned reception in response to the operation reception is If the "specific condition" is met while the display is being displayed, the display after acceptance can always be hidden after the "specific condition" is met. If the above-mentioned sample image display that simulates the "specific operation section" is not displayed when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", the "specific condition ” is satisfied, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display should be hidden based on the fulfillment of the “specific condition”, which can create a sense of tension. be expected to maintain it.

However, regarding such effects, even if the "1st G reception permissible state" is not generated as the reception permissible state in which the sample image display is not displayed, the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" may be generated instead. It is possible to obtain this by using "state" or "6th G acceptance permission state according to the modified example". That is, in the "1st G reception permissible state according to the modified example" and the "6th G reception permissible state according to the modified example", there is a section in which a simulated image display of the "specific operation section" is displayed, and a "specific operation section" There are sections in which the sample image display is not displayed, and even if an operation is accepted in any of these sections, the corresponding post-acceptance display will be hidden when certain conditions are met. It is supposed to be in the state of Even with such a configuration, if the post-reception display corresponding to the reception of an operation for the specific operation section is displayed while the above-mentioned sample image display imitating the "specific operation section" is not displayed, the reception If the "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display is not hidden and continues to be displayed after the "specific condition" is met (4th G reception) permissible state or 10th G reception permissible state) and when the post-reception display is hidden when the "specific condition" is satisfied (1st G reception permissible state according to the modification, according to the modification 6th G reception acceptance state).

In addition, in the second configuration G2 according to the above-mentioned production example, the "reception reception" is performed in response to an operation reception for the "specific operation section" while the above-mentioned simulated image display imitating the "specific operation section" is displayed. ``display after reception'', and ``display after reception'' in response to an operation reception for the ``specific operation section'' when the above-mentioned image display imitating the ``specific operation section'' is not displayed; The above-mentioned "post-reception display" and "specific operation section" are hidden when the "specific condition" is met when the above-mentioned sample image display is not displayed. Regarding the above-mentioned "post-reception display" in which the above-mentioned sample image display is not displayed and the "specific condition" is met and the display is not made invisible, both are different presentation displays. Good too. However, these "post-reception displays" may be displayed as the same "post-reception display", and in this case, even though they are the same effect display (post-reception display), specific To improve the enjoyment of games by making it possible to indicate through the presence or absence of a simulated image display that the display will be hidden or not hidden when a condition is met. becomes expected.

In addition, in the second configuration G2 according to the above-described production example, if a specific condition is satisfied while both the after-reception display and the sample image display are being displayed, the after-reception display and the sample image display are triggered by the establishment of the specific condition. All sample images are now hidden. According to such a configuration, not only the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is hidden, but also various displays related to the operation are hidden, so that the visibility of other performance displays is This makes it possible to better ensure the quality of the product.

In addition, in order to realize the second configuration G2, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the second configuration G2 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the third configuration G3, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, the 1G reception permission state (or the 1G reception permission state according to the modification, the 6th G reception permission state, the 6G reception permission state according to the modification) Suppose that the pachinko In the machine 1, when the player performs an operation on the operation means and accepts the operation as a valid operation, a post-acceptance display can be displayed based on the acceptance of the operation, If the post-reception display is displayed even when no operation has been accepted (2nd G reception allowed state (or 7th G reception allowed state, 8th G reception allowed state) in which the automatic button function can be activated), the operation If the post-reception display is not displayed unless the reception is made (1st G reception allowed state where the automatic button function is not activated, 1st G reception allowed state according to the modified example, 6th G reception allowed state, 6th G reception allowed state according to the modified example) 4th G reception permissible state, 10th G reception permissible state, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (the 1st G acceptance state in which the automatic button function is not activated, the 1st G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example). state, 6th G reception permissible state, 6th G reception permissible state according to a modification, 4th G reception permissible state, 10th G reception permissible state, etc.), the post-reception display is based on the operation reception being performed. If a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display can be hidden when the specific condition is met. (See Figure 352(j), Figure 355(j), Figure 372(j), Figure 375(j), etc.). If a situation arises in which the rear display makes it difficult to see other performance displays, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, the post-acceptance display can be displayed even if no operation is accepted (the 2nd G acceptance state where the automatic button function can be activated, the 7th G acceptance state), etc. If the after-reception display is displayed without an operation being accepted (the 8th G reception permissible state), if the after-reception display is displayed while the after-reception display is displayed, "Specific conditions ” is satisfied, the post-reception display is not hidden when the “specific condition” is satisfied (see Figure 360 (j), Figure 378 (j), Figure 381 (j), etc.). reference). According to such a configuration, a "specific condition" is established after the execution of the post-reception display is established to determine whether the so-called automatic button function is enabled and the post-reception display is being executed. Since it becomes possible to make suggestions based on this, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even after the operation is accepted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted (the first G acceptance state where the automatic button function is not activated, the first G according to the modified example). The post-reception display indicates that an operation has been accepted while the device is in a state in which an operation is accepted (e.g., an acceptance acceptance state, a 6th G acceptance acceptance state, a 6th G acceptance acceptance state according to a modified example, a 4th G acceptance acceptance state, a 10th G acceptance acceptance state, etc.). When displayed based on , if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is being displayed, the post-reception display will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed once the specific condition has been met. (see FIGS. 366(j) and 387(j)), and when the post-reception display is hidden when the specific condition is met (see FIGS. 352(j) and 387(j)). 355(j), FIG. 372(j), FIG. 375(j), etc.). In addition, if the post-reception display is displayed without an operation being accepted (when the automatic button function is enabled), even if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the The post-reception display is prevented from being hidden when the "specific condition" is met (see FIG. 361(j)). According to such a configuration, when the post-reception display is displayed by the so-called automatic button function, even if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-reception display is displayed, the "specific condition" is not met. The "post-reception display displayed by the automatic button function" is not hidden when the operation is established, but under the condition that the "post-reception display displayed by the automatic button function" is not displayed unless the operation is accepted (automatic button If the post-reception display is displayed based on the operation being accepted under conditions (conditions in which the function is not activated), the above-mentioned post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. When the "specific conditions" are met, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not to hide the post-reception display based on the fulfillment of the "specific conditions". People are now expected to maintain a good sense of well-being.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, in a situation where the after-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted (in an acceptance-permitted state where the automatic button is not activated), the after-acceptance display is , Even if the display is based on the acceptance of the above operation, if the display after the reception is executed in a "form different from the specific mode (predetermined mode)", the display after the reception is displayed. Even if a specific condition is satisfied during the reception period, the post-reception display may not be hidden. As a method for realizing such a configuration, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3 is set in the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to a modification) as the reception permission state in which the automatic button is not activated. 1G reception permission state), a 4th G reception permission state, and an 11th G reception permission state, and a 2G reception permission state may be provided as the reception permission state in which the automatic button is activated. Alternatively, including the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3 described below, instead of the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to a modification), the sixth G reception permission state (or, A 6th G reception permissible state according to a modified example) may be prepared, and a 10th G reception permissible state may be provided instead of the 4th G reception permissible state. Further, the 11th G reception permission state may be an 11G reception permission state according to a modification.

In other words, in this case, the conditions in which the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless an operation is accepted are the 1st G acceptance acceptance state (or the 1G acceptance acceptance state according to the modification), the 4th G acceptance acceptance state, and the 11th G acceptance acceptance state. This corresponds to the "acceptable state)".

In this regard, depending on whether the operation is accepted in the 1st G reception permission state (or the 1G reception permission state according to the modified example) or the operation reception is made in the 4G reception permission state, the response to the operation reception will be different. As described above, the post-acceptance display is executed with the same content (specific modes shown in FIGS. 354 and 368). Therefore, the case where the post-reception display is executed in a "specific manner" means that an operation is accepted in the 1st G reception permissible state (or the 1st G reception permissible state according to a modified example) and this is used as a trigger to display the above-mentioned post-reception display. is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 354 (specific manner), and when an operation is accepted in the 4th G acceptance permission state, the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 368 (specific manner). This corresponds to each case.

On the other hand, the case where the post-acceptance display is executed in a "different mode (predetermined mode) from the specific mode" means that the operation is accepted in the 11G acceptance permission state, and this triggers the above-mentioned post-acceptance display as shown in FIG. 391. This corresponds to the case where this is executed in the manner shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted (in a reception-permitting state where the automatic button is not activated), the post-acceptance display is displayed when the operation is not accepted. Even if the post-reception display is performed in a manner (predetermined manner) different from the above-mentioned specific manner (11th G reception permissible state), the after-reception display will be displayed. Even if a specific condition is satisfied during the period, the post-acceptance display will not be hidden (see FIG. 390).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted (in the acceptance-allowed state where the automatic button is not activated). is executed in the above-mentioned "specific mode (Fig. 354, Fig. 368)", and if the specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed in the "specific mode", it is determined that the specific condition has been met. When the post-reception display is not hidden and continues to be displayed as a trigger (see Figure 366), and when the post-reception display is hidden when the specific condition is met (see Figure 366). 352)). According to such a configuration, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted (in a reception-permitting state where the automatic button is not activated), the post-acceptance display is displayed when the operation is not accepted. If it is executed in the above specific manner based on the above, it will become difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display will be hidden when the specific condition is met, creating a sense of tension. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the third configuration G3, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

In order to realize the third configuration G3, the 4th G acceptance acceptance state (or the 10th G acceptance acceptance state) is generated as an acceptance acceptance state in which a simulated image display imitating the specific operation section is displayed. Good too.

Furthermore, in order to realize the third configuration G3, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the third configuration G3 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the fourth configuration G4, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, the 6G reception permission state (or the 6G reception permission state according to the modification) and the 7G reception permission state (or the 8th G reception permission state) state) and an 11th G acceptance acceptance state (or an 11th G acceptance acceptance state according to a modified example), in the pachinko machine 1, operation acceptance based on an operation on the operating means is allowed multiple times. In a situation where the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by keeping the operating means in the operated state (7th G reception permissible state and 8th G reception permissible state where the auto continuous hit function is enabled), If the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in the operated state (6th G reception acceptable state where the automatic continuous tap function is not activated, 6th G reception acceptable state according to the modified example, 11th G reception acceptable state) , the 11th G reception acceptance state according to the modified example). In this case, even if the operation means is maintained in the operated state, the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (in the reception permissible state where the automatic repeated tap function is not enabled), the above-mentioned post-reception display is If the operation is executed based on the acceptance of the operation based on the operation on the operation means, if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is being executed, it is indicated that the "specific condition" has been met. As a trigger, the above-mentioned post-acceptance display can be hidden (see FIG. 372(j) and FIG. 375(j)). As a result, if a situation arises in which, for example, you want to see another effect display rather than the after-reception display, the other effect display is difficult to see due to the post-reception display. , it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest at that time.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth configuration G4, even if the operating means is maintained in an operated state, the above-mentioned post-reception display is not executed multiple times (reception acceptance where the auto-repeating function is not enabled). state), if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the acceptance of an operation based on an operation on the operating means, and if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is being executed, then the The post-reception display can be hidden when the "specific condition" is met (see Figure 372 (j) and Figure 375 (j)), but the operation means can only be kept in the operated state. Under the condition that the post-reception display is executed multiple times (in the reception permissible state where the auto-repeat function is enabled), the post-reception display is based on the fact that the operating means is maintained in the operated state. When executed, even if the "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is being executed, the post-reception display will not be hidden when the "specific condition" is met. (See Figure 378(j) and Figure 381(j)). According to such a configuration, a "specific condition" is established after the execution of the post-reception display is established to determine whether or not the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled and the post-reception display is being executed. Since it becomes possible to make suggestions based on this, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even after the operation is accepted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth configuration G4, the above-mentioned post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is maintained in an operated state (the auto continuous play function is not activated). (in the acceptance permission state), if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the operation acceptance based on the operation on the operating means, and the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-acceptance display is being executed. , when the post-reception display is not hidden but continues to be displayed after the "specific condition" is met (see Figure 390 (j)), and when the "specific condition" is met. There are both cases where the post-reception display is turned into a hidden state (see FIG. 372(j) and FIG. 375(j)). According to such a configuration, when the post-reception display is displayed by the so-called auto-repeating function, even if the "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the "specific condition" is not met. Although the "post-reception display displayed by the automatic continuous tap function" will not be hidden when the transaction is established, the above-mentioned "post-reception display" will not be hidden even if the operation means is kept in the operated state. If the post-reception display is displayed based on the operation being accepted under conditions where the auto-repeat function is not activated, the above-mentioned reception in response to the operation is accepted. If the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-reception display is being displayed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display should be hidden after the "specific condition" has been met. As students become able to do this, they are expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Further, the 10th G post-reception display corresponding to the 10th G reception permissible state may be executed as the same content (special aspect) as the 6th G post-reception display corresponding to the 6th G reception permissible state. is as described above. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth configuration G4 is further provided with a "10th G acceptance permission state" in which the 10th G post-acceptance display is executed as the special mode (the same content as the 6th G post-acceptance display). If this is the case, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned post-acceptance display will not be executed multiple times even if the operation means is maintained in an operated state (in an acceptance-permitted state where the auto-repeat function is not activated). Even if the post-acceptance display is executed based on the acceptance of an operation on the operating means, the post-acceptance display does not correspond to the above special mode (6th G post-acceptance display or 10G post-acceptance display). If it is displayed in a different manner (the 11th G post-reception display), even if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will be disabled when the specific condition is met. It is not displayed (see FIG. 390(j)). According to such a configuration, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted (in a reception-permitting state in which the auto-repeating function is not enabled), the post-acceptance display is displayed when the operation is accepted. If it is executed in a mode (predetermined mode) different from the above special mode (6th G post-reception display or 10th G post-reception display) based on what has been done, the post-reception display will be triggered by the establishment of a specific condition. Since it is conveniently suggested that the game be hidden, it becomes possible to think strategically about what kind of game to advance.

On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the operating means is maintained in an operated state (in a reception-permitted state where the auto-repeat function is not enabled), the above-mentioned post-reception display is If a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed (6th G post-reception display or 10th G post-reception display), the corresponding reception When the post-reception display is not hidden and continues to be displayed (see Figure 387 (j)), and when the post-reception display is hidden when the specific condition is met (Fig. 372 (see (j)). According to such a configuration, in a situation where the post-acceptance display is not displayed unless the operation is accepted (in a reception-permitting state in which the auto-repeating function is not enabled), the post-acceptance display is displayed when the operation is accepted. When executed in the above special mode (6th G post-reception display or 10th G post-reception display) based on what has been done, whether or not the post-reception display is hidden when the specific condition is met. Since it becomes difficult to recognize, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth configuration G4, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

In order to realize the fourth configuration G4, the 10G acceptance acceptance state may occur as an acceptance acceptance state in which a simulated image display imitating the specific operation unit is displayed.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fourth configuration G4, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the fourth configuration G4 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the fifth configuration G5, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to the modification), the second G reception permission state, and the fifth G reception permission state In the pachinko machine 1, the simulated image display of the operation target can be displayed so that periodic changes appear, and the periodic changes appear in units of "predetermined time". (see FIG. 369(g)), and when the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (see FIG. 352(g) and FIG. 360(g)). ). Then, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed so as to appear in units of the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time", an operation is accepted for the operating means, and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. In this case, if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display can be hidden from view when the "specific conditions" are met. (See FIG. 352(j)), for example, there may be a situation where the post-reception display makes it difficult to see other performance displays even though the user wants to see other performance displays rather than the post-reception display. If something like this occurs, it is expected that the decline in gaming interest at that time will be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time", an operation is accepted for the operation means. If the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, and if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the "specific conditions" will be met and the post-reception display will be displayed. Although the display can be hidden (see FIG. 352(j)), when the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of the above-mentioned "predetermined time", the operation on the operation means is not accepted. If the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, even if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the "specific conditions" will be triggered when the "specific conditions" are met. As a result, the display after the reception is not hidden (see FIG. 369(j)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest what kind of periodic changes the sample image display has undergone by satisfying the "specific condition" even after the execution of the post-reception display has started. As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained even after the operation is accepted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5, an operation is not accepted for the operation means, especially when a periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". If the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed, and if the "specific conditions" are met while the post-reception display is displayed, the reception will be triggered by the fulfillment of the "specific conditions". When the post-reception display is not hidden and continues to be displayed (see FIG. 360(j)), and when the post-reception display is hidden when the specific condition is met ( (see Figure 352(j)). On the other hand, if a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time" and an operation is accepted for the operation means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, , even if the "specific condition" is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will not be hidden when the "specific condition" is met ( (See Figure 369(j)). According to such a configuration, if an operation is accepted and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed while the sample image display is being displayed in a manner in which periodic changes are relatively fast, after the acceptance Even if the "specific condition" is met while the display is being displayed, the display will not be hidden after the reception of the "specific condition". If an operation is accepted and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed while the sample image display is displayed in a manner in which the target changes are relatively slow, the above-mentioned post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed. If the "specific condition" is met while the "specific condition" is being met, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display should be hidden after the "specific condition" has been met. Therefore, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, the sample image display is controlled by the operation on the operating means. At the time the post-reception display corresponding to the reception is displayed, it may not be hidden and may continue to be displayed (or be displayed in a different manner) (1st G reception permission state, first G reception permission state according to a modification, second G reception permission state). In this regard, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", an operation is accepted for the operation means and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. After that, if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the after-reception display and the above-mentioned sample image display are being displayed, the above-mentioned after-reception display and the above-mentioned sample image display are triggered by the establishment of the "specific condition". If both are not hidden and continue to be displayed (see Figures 360 (g) and (j)), the above-mentioned post-reception display and the above-mentioned sample image display are triggered when the "specific conditions" are met. Both cases are hidden (see FIGS. 352(g) and (j)). On the other hand, after an operation is accepted for the operation means when the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed, Even if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the post-reception display and the sample image display are being displayed, the above-mentioned post-reception display and the sample image display will be changed once the "specific condition" is met. (See FIGS. 369(g) and (j)). According to such a configuration, if an operation is accepted and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed while the sample image display is being displayed in a manner in which periodic changes are relatively fast, after the acceptance Even if a "specific condition" is met while the display and the above-mentioned sample image display are being displayed, the above-mentioned post-reception display and the above-mentioned sample image display will both be hidden once the "specific condition" has been met. However, if an operation is accepted and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed while the sample image display is being displayed in a manner in which periodic changes are relatively slow, If the "specific condition" is satisfied while the above-mentioned post-reception display and the above-mentioned sample image display are being displayed in response to the operation reception, the above-mentioned post-reception display and the above-mentioned sample image are triggered by the establishment of the "specific condition". Since it is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the display and the display are both in a non-display state, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, the 4th G post-reception display UG4 corresponding to the 4th G reception permissible state is executed as the same content (special aspect) as the 1st G post-reception display UG1 corresponding to the 1st G reception permissible state. That's right. In this regard, if the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5 is further provided with a "4th G reception permission state", the pachinko machine 1 will have a periodic change in the sample image display that is "longer than a predetermined time". Even if the post-reception display is displayed in a predetermined manner (after 2nd G reception display UG4) that is different from the above-mentioned special modes (1st G after reception display UG1, 4th G after reception display UG4) If displayed in display UG2), even if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, the post-reception display will be hidden when the specific condition is met. (See Figure 360(j)). On the other hand, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the post-reception display is displayed in the above special mode based on the operation reception. There are cases. In this regard, if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed in the above special mode, the post-reception display will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed after the specific condition is met. (See Figure 366(j)) and cases in which the post-reception display is hidden when the specific condition is met (See Figure 352(j)) Therefore, it can be expected that the tension felt when the post-reception display is displayed in the above-mentioned special mode can be suitably maintained.

Note that in order to realize the fifth configuration G5, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed in the fourth G acceptance acceptance state. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

Furthermore, for the fifth configuration G5, the sixth G reception permission state (or the sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example) is used instead of the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to the modification example). It is also possible to implement this by providing a seventh G reception permission state (or an eighth G reception permission state) instead of the fifth G reception permission state. In addition, in this case, if the 10th G reception display corresponding to the 10th G reception permission state is executed as the same content (special mode) as the 6G reception display corresponding to the 6G reception permission state, the 4G It is also possible to provide a 10th G reception permission state instead of the reception permission state. In this case, in the 10th G acceptance acceptance state, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth configuration G5, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fifth configuration G5, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the fifth configuration G5 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the sixth configuration G6, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to the modification), the second G reception permission state, and the fourth G reception permission state In the pachinko machine 1, the after-reception display includes a "predetermined post-reception display (second G post-reception display UG2)" and a "special post-reception display (first G post-reception display UG1, second G post-reception display UG2)". 4G post-reception display UG4)", and if the post-reception display is displayed as a "special post-reception display," then the "special post-reception display" If a "specific condition" is met while it is being displayed, the "special post-reception display" can be hidden from display using the "specific condition" being met (see Figure 352(j) ). As a result, for example, even if you want to see a different effect display than the ``special after-reception display,'' the situation where the ``special after-reception display'' makes it difficult to see the other effect display can be avoided. If something like this occurs, it is expected that the decline in gaming interest at that time will be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, when the after-reception display is displayed as a "special after-reception display", while the "special after-reception display" is displayed, "specific conditions ” is satisfied, the “special post-reception display” can be hidden when the “specific condition” is met (see FIG. 352(j)); If the "specific condition" is met while the "predetermined post-reception display" is displayed, the "specified condition" will be met and the corresponding condition will be displayed. "Display after predetermined reception" is not hidden (see FIG. 360(j)). According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception display starts, it is possible to indicate whether or not the post-reception display can be hidden by satisfying the "specific condition". Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, especially when the after-reception display is displayed as "special after-reception display (first G after-reception display UG1, fourth G after-reception display UG4)", the corresponding If a "specific condition" is met while the "special post-reception display" is displayed, the "special post-reception display" will not be hidden and will continue as a result of the fulfillment of the "specific condition". (see Figure 366(j)), and when the "special post-reception display" is hidden when the specific condition is met (see Figure 352(j)). (see). In this regard, even if the "specific conditions" are met while the "predetermined post-reception display" is displayed, the "predetermined post-reception display" will be triggered when the "specific conditions" are met. '' is not hidden (see Figure 360(j)), so the system maintains a good sense of tension, and when the ``specific conditions'' are met, ``Display after reception'' is now expected to indicate whether or not it is to be hidden.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, when the after-reception display is displayed as a "special after-reception display (1st G after-reception display UG1, 4th G after-reception display UG4)", the "special after-reception display UG4" ``Display after reception'' can be displayed for a predetermined time (predetermined time). In this regard, if the 1st G reception permission state according to the modification is provided, the "special post-reception display" is such that the "specific condition" is satisfied while the "special post-reception display" is displayed. Even if the display is not displayed, there are cases where the display is displayed for the predetermined time (predetermined time), and cases where the display state is maintained for a shorter time than the predetermined time and then hidden (e.g. , (see FIG. 356(j))). As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained while the "special post-reception display" is being displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, the above-mentioned "special post-reception display" is displayed so that the display state can be continued for the above-mentioned predetermined time (predetermined time). (4G post-reception display UG4 where timing Xg does not exist, or the time from when a special post-reception display starts displaying until timing Xg arrives is longer than a predetermined time (predetermined time), (within the period after timing In cases where the "display after reception" is not hidden and continues to be displayed (see Figure 366 (j)), when the "special display after reception" is hidden when the specific condition is met. (see Figure 355(j)), but in order to ensure that the display state continues for only a shorter time than the predetermined time (predetermined time), the above-mentioned "special reception display" ” is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 356(j)), the time from the start of display of the special post-reception display to the arrival of timing Xg is a predetermined time. (predetermined time)), if a specific condition is met while the "Special Post-Reception Display" is displayed, the "Special Post-Reception Display" will be triggered by the fulfillment of the specific condition. is now always hidden. As a result, it is expected to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when the specific condition is met, and at the same time maintain the game interest when the timing Xg is likely to arrive soon.

Note that in order to realize the sixth configuration G6, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed in the fourth G acceptance acceptance state. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In addition, for the sixth configuration G6, the 6th G reception permission state (or the 6th G reception permission state according to the modified example) is used instead of the 1G reception permission state (or the 1G reception permission state according to the modified example). It is also possible to implement this by providing a seventh G reception permission state (or an eighth G reception permission state) instead of the second G reception permission state. In addition, in this case, if the 10th G reception display corresponding to the 10th G reception permission state is executed as the same content (special mode) as the 6G reception display corresponding to the 6G reception permission state, the 4G It is also possible to provide a 10th G reception permission state instead of the reception permission state. In this case, in the 10th G acceptance acceptance state, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth configuration G6, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the sixth configuration G6, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the sixth configuration G6 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the seventh configuration G7, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to the modified example), the third G reception permission state, and the fourth G reception permission state In the pachinko machine 1, the after-reception display includes "specific after-reception display (3rd G post-reception display UG3)" and "special after-reception display (1st G post-reception display UG1, 3rd G post-reception display UG1)" 4G post-reception display UG4)", and if the post-reception display is displayed as a "specific post-reception display," then the "specific post-reception display" If the "specific condition" is met while the "specific condition" is met, the "specific post-reception display" is made to be hidden (Figure 363 (j) ). This prevents, for example, a situation where the user wants to see a different effect display than the ``specific post-reception display,'' but the other effect display is made difficult to see due to the ``specific post-reception display.'' If something like this occurs, it is expected that the decline in gaming interest at that time will be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, if the after-reception display is displayed as a "specific after-reception display", while the "specific after-reception display" is displayed, the "specific condition ” is satisfied, the “specific post-reception display” is hidden as a result of the “specific condition” being met (see Figure 363 (j)), but the post-reception display is “special”. If the "Special Conditions" are met while the "Special Post-Reception Display" is displayed, the "Special Conditions" will be triggered by the "Special Conditions" being met. "Display after acceptance" may be hidden (see FIG. 352(j)). According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception display starts, it is possible to indicate whether or not the post-reception display can be hidden by satisfying the "specific condition". Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, especially when the after-reception display is displayed as "special after-reception display (first G after-reception display UG1, fourth G after-reception display UG4)", the corresponding If a "specific condition" is met while the "special post-reception display" is displayed, the "special post-reception display" will not be hidden and will continue as a result of the fulfillment of the "specific condition". (see Figure 366(j)), and when the "special post-reception display" is hidden when the specific condition is met (see Figure 352(j)). (see). In this regard, if the "specific conditions" are met while the "specific post-reception display" is being displayed, the "specific post-reception display" will be triggered by the fulfillment of the "specific conditions". Since it is always hidden (see Figure 363 (j)), the "display after reception" is hidden when the "specific conditions" are met, while maintaining a good sense of tension. They are now expected to indicate whether or not they will be allowed to do so.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, when the after-reception display is displayed as a "special after-reception display (1st G after-reception display UG1, 4th G after-reception display UG4)", the "special after-reception display UG4" ``Display after reception'' can be displayed for a predetermined time (predetermined time). In this regard, if the 1st G reception permission state according to the modification is provided, the "special post-reception display" is such that the "specific condition" is satisfied while the "special post-reception display" is displayed. Even if the display is not displayed, there are cases where the display is displayed for the predetermined time (predetermined time), and cases where the display state is maintained for a shorter time than the predetermined time and then hidden (e.g. , (see FIG. 356(j))). As a result, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained while the "special post-reception display" is being displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, the above-mentioned "special post-reception display" is displayed so that the display state can be continued for the above-mentioned predetermined time (predetermined time). (4G post-reception display UG4 where timing Xg does not exist, or the time from when a special post-reception display starts displaying until timing Xg arrives is longer than a predetermined time (predetermined time), (within the period after timing In cases where the "display after reception" is not hidden and continues to be displayed (see Figure 366 (j)), when the "special display after reception" is hidden when the specific condition is met. (see Figure 355(j)), but in order to ensure that the display state continues for only a shorter time than the predetermined time (predetermined time), the above-mentioned "special reception display" ” is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 356(j)), the time from the start of display of the special post-reception display to the arrival of timing Xg is a predetermined time. (predetermined time)), if a specific condition is met while the "Special Post-Reception Display" is displayed, the "Special Post-Reception Display" will be triggered by the fulfillment of the specific condition. is now always hidden. As a result, it is expected to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when the specific condition is met, and at the same time maintain the game interest when the timing Xg is likely to arrive soon.

Note that in order to realize the seventh configuration G7, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed in the third G acceptance acceptance state. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In order to realize the seventh configuration G7, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed in the fourth G acceptance acceptance state. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

Furthermore, for the seventh configuration G7, the sixth G reception permission state (or the sixth G reception permission state according to the modified example) is used instead of the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to the modification example). This can also be achieved by preparing. In addition, in this case, if the display after the 10G reception corresponding to the 10G reception permission state is executed as the same content (special mode) as the display after the 6G reception corresponding to the 6G reception permission state, the 4G It is also possible to provide a 10th G reception permission state instead of the reception permission state. In this case, in the 10th G acceptance acceptance state, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh configuration G7, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

In addition, in realizing the seventh configuration G7, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the seventh configuration G7 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

Further, for example, as the eighth configuration G8, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to the modified example), the second G reception permission state according to the modification example, and the second G reception permission state according to the modification example are 11G acceptance permission state, when the pachinko machine 1 sets the "sample image display" that simulates the operation means to the hidden state, the "sample image display" is set to the hidden state. It is possible to display a ``disappearance effect display (disappearance EF display)'' as an image display different from the ``sample image display'', which makes the ``sample image display'' difficult to visually recognize until the ``extinction image display'' is completed. , the "sample image display" may continue to be displayed without being hidden at the time when the post-acceptance display starts. However, in this case, if the "sample image display" continues to be displayed even after the operation is accepted, other effects will be visible not only after the reception according to the operation reception, but also from the "sample image display". There are concerns that it will be difficult to do so.

In this regard, in the eighth configuration G8, if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the sample image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the sample image display and reception are triggered by the establishment of the "specific condition". There are cases where the rear display is hidden (see Figures 352 (g) and (j)), and when the sample image display is hidden, an image display different from the sample image display is used. 360 (g) and (h)), and when the ``disappearance effect display'' (as an image display different from the sample image display) is not displayed (see Figure 360(g) and (h)). 352 (g), (h) and Figures 393 (g), (h)), the above-mentioned concerns can be avoided while maintaining a good sense of tension. There will be an expectation of restraint.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighth configuration G8, when the "specific condition" is satisfied while the sample image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the "specific condition" is established. When the sample image display and the post-reception display are hidden (see Figures 352 (g) and (j)), the sample image display and the post-reception display are triggered when the "specific conditions" are met. is not hidden (see FIGS. 360(g) and (j) and FIGS. 393(g) and (j)). According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the sample image display and the post-reception display will be hidden when the "specific condition" is met, creating a sense of tension. It is now expected that the company will maintain the appropriate conditions.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighth configuration G8, even if the "specific condition" is satisfied while the sample image display and the post-reception display are being displayed, the "specific condition" is not triggered. If the sample image display and the post-acceptance display are not hidden, and the sample image display is subsequently hidden (due to another condition such as the passage of time), it is different from the sample image display. (See Figure 360(g), (i), (j)). ” is not displayed (see FIGS. 393(g), (i), and (j)). On the other hand, if the sample image display and the post-reception display are hidden due to the "specific condition" being met while the sample image display and the post-reception display are displayed, the sample image The "disappearance effect display" as an image display separate from the display was made not to be displayed (see FIGS. 352(g), (i), and (j)). According to such a configuration, when the "disappearance effect display" is not displayed when the sample image display and the post-acceptance display are hidden, the sample image display is triggered when the "specific condition" is satisfied. and cases where the post-reception display is hidden, and cases where the sample image display and post-reception display are hidden due to conditions other than the "specific conditions". Since there are both, it becomes difficult to guess the type of acceptance permission state, and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, if the eighth configuration G8 is further provided with a 4th G reception permission state, a 1G post-reception display UG1 (see FIG. 354) corresponding to the 1G reception permission state, and a 4G reception permission state The 4th G post-reception display UG4 (see FIG. 368) corresponding to the above will be executed as the same post-reception display (specific post-reception display). In other words, in this case, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception is a specific post-acceptance display (the 1st G post-acceptance display UG1 and the 4th G post-acceptance display UG4) and a special post-acceptance display (2nd G post-acceptance display UG2 and the 4th G post-acceptance display UG2). 11G post-reception display (UG11)). However, if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed as a specific post-reception display (1st G post-reception display UG1 or 4th G post-reception display UG4), this will trigger a non-display state. (see Figure 352 (j)) and cases where it is not hidden (see Figure 366 (j)). Even if a specific condition is met when the display is displayed as either 2G post-reception display UG2 or 11G post-reception display UG11), this will not cause the display to be hidden ( (See Figure 360(j) or Figure 393(j)). According to such a configuration, while suitably maintaining a feeling of tension when the post-reception display is displayed, it is possible to suitably suggest whether or not the post-reception display will be hidden if a specific condition is met. become able to.

Further, if the eighth configuration G8 is further provided with a third G reception permission state, when an operation is accepted in the reception permission state, the post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is changed to a specific post-reception display. (1st G post-reception display UG1, 4th G post-reception display UG4), special post-reception display (either 2nd G post-reception display UG2 or 11th G post-reception display UG11), and predetermined post-reception display (3rd G post-reception display UG11), This means that it can be displayed in any one of a plurality of post-reception displays including post-reception display UG3). In other words, in this case, if the specific condition is met while the post-reception display is being displayed as a specific post-reception display (1st G post-reception display UG1 or 4th G post-reception display UG4), this will trigger the display to be hidden. There are both cases in which the post-reception display is hidden (see Figure 352 (j)) and cases in which it is not hidden (see Figure 366 (j)). (Either of the 2nd G post-reception display UG2 or the 11th G post-reception display UG11), even if a specific condition is met, this will not cause the display to be hidden (see Fig. 360). j) or see Figure 393(j)), if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed as a predetermined post-reception display (3rd G post-reception display UG3), this will always be used as a trigger to hide the display. (See FIG. 363(j)). According to such a configuration, it may be suggested that the post-reception display will be hidden if a specific condition is met, or it may be suggested that the post-reception display will not be hidden even if a specific condition is met. It is now possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the post-reception display is displayed.

In order to realize the eighth configuration G8, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed in the third G acceptance acceptance state. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In order to realize the eighth configuration G8, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed in the fourth G acceptance acceptance state. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

Furthermore, for the eighth configuration G8, the sixth G reception permission state (or the sixth G reception permission state according to the modification) is set in place of the first G reception permission state (or the first G reception permission state according to the modification). This can also be achieved by preparing. In addition, in this case, if the 10th G reception display corresponding to the 10th G reception permission state is executed as the same content (special mode) as the 6G reception display corresponding to the 6G reception permission state, the 4G It is also possible to provide a 10th G reception permission state instead of the reception permission state. In this case, in the 10th G acceptance acceptance state, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighth configuration G8, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the eighth configuration G8, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the above-mentioned eighth configuration G8 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the ninth configuration G9, among the above-mentioned multiple reception permission states, the 6G reception permission state (or the 6G reception permission state according to the modification) and the 7G reception permission state (or the 8th G reception permission state) Suppose that the pachinko machine 1 has an 11th G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example) and a 11th G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example). The sample image display can be displayed in one of a plurality of color schemes including the "first color scheme" and the "second color scheme", and in the multiple acceptance acceptance state where operation acceptance is permitted multiple times, the operation means is operated. In cases where the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by maintaining the state in which the Even if the state is maintained, the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (see Figures 372(b) and (c), Figures 375(b) and (c), and Figures 390(b) and (c), etc.) There are now both. In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)"), the display will be displayed after reception by simply keeping the "specific operation section" operated. is executed multiple times (see Figure 378(b), (c), (g), Figure 381(b), (c), (g), etc.), but the sample image display is changed to "Second color scheme ( 378 (b ), (c), (g) and Figure 381(b), (c), (g), etc.), the display after reception will be displayed multiple times if you simply keep the "specific operation section" operated. If it is not executed (see Figure 372(b), (c), (g), Figure 375(b), (c), (g), Figure 390(b), (c), (g), etc.) I made sure to have both. According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, whereas the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme". As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled or not, so it is expected that a good sense of tension will be maintained even though the auto-sequence function is installed. become.

Furthermore, the ninth configuration G9 may include a ninth G reception permission state G9. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the ninth configuration G9, a case where a sample image display imitating the "specific operation section" is not displayed in a state in which multiple receptions of operations are allowed for the "specific operation section". , instead of making it difficult to recognize that the operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted, the post-acceptance display will be executed multiple times just by maintaining the operation of the specific operation section. Therefore, it is expected to suitably suppress the decline in interest in games.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the ninth configuration G9, an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section" while the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", and the If a specific condition is met while the received post-reception display is being displayed, this will trigger the post-reception display to be hidden (see Figures 372 (g) and (j), and Figure 375 (g)). ) and (j)), and when the post-reception display is not hidden (see Figures 378 (g) and (j), Figures 381 (g) and (j), Figure 390 (g) and (j), etc.). In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the above-mentioned "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, this will trigger the post-reception display to become hidden. If the "specific operation section" is maintained in an operated state under the conditions where 375(b), (g) and (j)). However, even if the sample image display is displayed in the above-mentioned "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed, this will trigger the display of the post-reception display to be hidden. When the specific operation unit is maintained in the operated state under conditions where the state is not allowed, the post-reception display is executed multiple times (Fig. 378(b), (g), and (j)). 381 (b), (g) and (j)) and cases where the display after reception is not executed multiple times (see Fig. 390 (b), (g), and (j)). It has become. According to such a configuration, in a state in which multiple receptions are allowed in which the sample image display is displayed in the above-mentioned "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", when the auto continuous hit function is enabled, even if a specific condition is met, the reception is not allowed. While the display after reception is not always hidden, when the auto-repeat function is not enabled, it is now difficult to recognize whether the display after reception will be hidden when certain conditions are met. Therefore, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the ninth configuration G9, even when the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", a specific message display (for example, in FIG. 379 or FIG. 382) When a ``random hit'' (such as a ``random hit'') is performed, the post-acceptance display will be executed multiple times just by keeping the ``specific operation section'' operated, so the automatic repeated hit function can be performed while maintaining a good sense of tension. You can now indicate that it will be enabled.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the ninth configuration G9, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. It may be something.

Furthermore, in order to realize the ninth configuration G9, it is not necessarily necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the ninth configuration G9 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the tenth configuration G10, among the above-mentioned multiple reception permission states, the 6G reception permission state (or the 6G reception permission state according to the modification) and the 7G reception permission state (or the 8th G reception permission state) Suppose that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a 9th G reception permission state), a 9th G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example), a 9th G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example), Button 410)" If a multiple reception permissible state occurs in which operation reception is permitted multiple times, the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is allowed, or the operation for the "specific operation section" is allowed. It is possible to output a specific reception acceptance sound indicating that the reception is in an acceptable state. In this regard, when the multiple reception permissible state occurs, a "specific reception permissible sound" is output (see FIG. 378(k), FIG. 381(k), etc.) and a "specific reception permissible sound" is output. " may not be output (see Figure 372(k), Figure 375(k), Figure 384(k), Figure 390(k), etc.), and in the state where multiple receptions are allowed, Regardless of whether a "sound" is output or a "specific reception permissible sound" is not output, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated. (See FIGS. 378(b) and 378(k), FIGS. 381(b) and (k), and 384(b) and (k)). becomes expected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, if the "specific reception permissible sound" is output when the multiple reception permissible state occurs, the "specific operation part The post-acceptance display can be executed multiple times by simply maintaining the "" button in the operated state (see FIGS. 378(b) and 378(k), and FIGS. 381(b) and 381(k), etc.). On the other hand, if the "specific reception permissible sound" is not output when the multiple reception permissible state occurs, the reception can be accepted simply by keeping the "specific operation section" operated in the multiple reception permissible state. When the post-reception display is executed multiple times (see Figures 384(b) and (k)) and when the post-acceptance display cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation section" operated (Fig. 372 (b), (k), FIG. 375(b), (k), FIG. 390(b), (k), etc.). According to such a configuration, when a "specific acceptance permissible sound" is output, the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, whereas when a "specific reception permissible sound" is not output, Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled or not, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, if the specific reception permission sound is not output when the multiple reception permission state occurs, the operation reception on the "specific operation unit" in the multiple reception permission state is 372 (j), (k ) and Figures 375(j) and (k)). In this regard, if a specific reception permission sound is not output when the reception permission state occurs multiple times, and a specific condition is met while the reception display is displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the reception reception display. If the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state under the conditions that the "specific operation section" is in the state, the display after reception will not be executed multiple times (Fig. 372 (b), (j), ( (k) and FIGS. 375(b), (j), and (k)). However, even if the specific reception permission sound is not output when the reception permission state occurs multiple times, and the specific condition is met while the post reception display is displayed, this will be used as a trigger to turn off the reception display. If the specific operation unit is kept in the operated state under conditions where it is not displayed, the display after reception is executed multiple times (see Figures 384(b) and (k)). ) and cases in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (see FIGS. 390(b) and 390(k)). According to such a configuration, in the multiple reception permissible state in which a specific reception permissible sound is not output, when the auto-repeat function is enabled, the post-reception display will not always be hidden even if the specific condition is met. On the other hand, when the auto-repeat function is not enabled, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display will be hidden when certain conditions are met, so a sense of tension is suitably maintained. things come to be expected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, if a specific reception permission sound is output when the multiple reception permission state occurs, the "specific operation section" is output in the multiple reception permission state. The post-acceptance display will be executed multiple times just by maintaining the operated state (see Figures 378(b), (k), and 381(b), (k), etc.), but if the multiple-acceptance state is If the specific reception permissible sound is not output when the sound is generated, if the post-reception display is executed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation section" operated in the multiple reception permissible state (see Figure 384). (b), (k)) and the case where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated (see Fig. 390(b), (k)). By having both, it is possible to suggest that the automatic continuous hit function will be activated when a specific reception permissible sound is output, while maintaining a sense of tension when a specific reception permissible sound is not output. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, if the specific reception permission sound is not output when the multiple reception permission state occurs, the operation reception on the "specific operation unit" in the multiple reception permission state is If a specific condition is met while a corresponding post-reception display is displayed after the reception is completed, this may be used as a trigger to hide the post-reception display (FIG. 372(j), (k) and FIGS. 375(j) and (k)). In this regard, if a specific reception permission sound is not output when the reception permission state occurs multiple times, and a specific condition is met while the reception display is displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the reception reception display. If the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state under the conditions that the "specific operation section" is in the state, the display after reception will not be executed multiple times (Fig. 372 (b), (j), ( (k) and FIGS. 375(b), (j), and (k)). However, even if the specific reception permission sound is not output when the reception permission state occurs multiple times, and the specific condition is met while the post reception display is displayed, this will be used as a trigger to turn off the reception display. When the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state under conditions where it is not displayed, the display after reception is executed multiple times (Fig. 384 (b), (j) , (k)) and cases in which the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (see Fig. 390(b), (j), and (k). According to such a configuration, , in the multiple reception permissible state where the specific reception permissible sound is not output, when the auto repeated tap function is enabled, the post-reception display will not always be hidden even if the specific conditions are met, whereas the auto repeated tap function If this is not enabled, it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display will be hidden when certain conditions are met, so it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Become.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, even if the specific acceptance permission sound is not output, a specific message display (for example, "Running" shown in FIGS. 379 and 382) is performed. When the user is pressed, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times just by keeping the ``specific operation section'' operated, which suggests that the automatic continuous press function will be activated while maintaining a good sense of tension. You will be able to do this.

Note that in order to realize the tenth configuration G10, in the ninth G acceptance acceptance state, a simulated image display that simulates the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

Note that in order to realize the tenth configuration G10, in the tenth G acceptance acceptance state, a simulated image display that simulates the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the tenth configuration G10, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned tenth configuration G10, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described tenth configuration G10 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the eleventh configuration G11, among the plurality of reception permission states mentioned above, the 6th G reception permission state (or the 6G reception permission state according to the modified example), the 7th G reception permission state, and the 8th G reception permission state If the pachinko machine 1 is configured to have a 9th G reception permission state (or a 9th G reception permission state) and an 11th G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example), the pachinko machine 1 has a As a state in which multiple receptions are allowed, an operation is accepted for a specific operation section (e.g., operation button 410) before the set time (validity period) has elapsed. The set time (valid period) regardless of the presence or absence of operation reception for the "multiple termination permissible state (8th G reception permissible state)" and the "specific operation part (for example, operation button 410)" that may be terminated based on the "Multiple continuation allowed state (6th G reception allowed state (or 6th G reception allowed state according to a modified example), 8th G reception allowed state (or 9th G reception allowed state), 11th G reception allowed state) that continues until (the 11th G reception acceptance state according to the modified example), etc.)" will be prepared. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if either of the above-mentioned "multiple-times completion permissible state" or the above-mentioned "multiple-times continuation permissible state" occurs as the multiple-receipt permissible state, the "specific operation section (for example, the operation Since the above-mentioned post-acceptance display can be executed multiple times simply by keeping the "button 410)" in an operated state, it is expected that the user's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11, if the above-mentioned "multiple completion permissible state" occurs as the multiple reception permissible state, the "specific operation section" is operated in the multiple reception permissible state. The post-acceptance display is executed multiple times just by maintaining the status (see FIGS. 378(b) and 378(c)). In addition, if the above-mentioned "multiple continuation permissible state" occurs as a state in which multiple receptions are permitted, the post-reception display will be displayed multiple times by simply maintaining the "specific operation section" operated in the multiple reception permissible state. When executed (see Figures 381(b) and (c) and Figures 384(b) and (c)), simply keeping the "specific operation section" operated may cause the display to be displayed multiple times after acceptance. Both when it is not executed (see Figures 372(b) and (c), Figures 375(b) and (c), Figures 390(b) and (c), and Figures 393(b) and (c)). I made it so that there is. According to such a configuration, the so-called auto-repeat function is always enabled in the "multiple termination permissible state" which can be terminated prematurely due to an operation by the player, whereas In the ``multiple continuation allowed state'' that is not terminated, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled or not, so it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. .

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11, when a "multiple-times continuation permissible state" occurs as the multiple-times continuation permissible state, an operation is not accepted for the specific operation unit in the multiple-times continuation permissible state. , if the above-mentioned "specific condition" is satisfied while the corresponding post-acceptance display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display may be hidden due to this. In this regard, if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is being displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the "multiple continuation allowed state", this will trigger the post-reception display to be hidden. If the specific operation section is kept in the operated state under the conditions that , even if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the "multiple continuation allowed state", this will trigger the post-reception display to be hidden. If the specific operation unit is kept in the operated state under conditions where no error occurs, the post-reception display is executed multiple times (as shown in Figures 381(b) and (c), and Figure 384(b)). , (c)) and cases where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (see Figures 390(b), (c), and Figures 393(b), (c)). Therefore, when the auto-repeating function is activated, it is suggested that the post-reception display will not be hidden even if a specific condition is met, but it also creates a sense of tension when the auto-repeat function is not activated. It is now expected that the company will maintain the appropriate conditions.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11, even if the continuation permission state occurs multiple times, "a specific message display (for example, "Running" shown in FIG. 382) is performed. The post-reception display will be executed multiple times just by keeping the ``specific operation section'' operated, which suggests that the automatic continuous press function will be activated while maintaining a good sense of tension. become able to.

Note that the "specific message display" that suggests that the auto continuous hit function is enabled does not have to be the same as the message display that is displayed in the state where multiple terminations are allowed. Messages that cannot be displayed may also be displayed.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11 may further include a third G reception permission state. That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1, a specific precursor display ZET can be executed as a precursor effect display, and the specific precursor display ZET can be executed as a "single reception reception" in which only one operation is allowed for the specific operation section. There are cases where execution is performed across the occurrence of the "acceptable state (3rd G acceptance acceptable state)", and "multiple acceptance acceptable state (7th G acceptance acceptable state)" where multiple operations are allowed for a specific operation section 8G reception permissible state)". In this regard, in the "single reception permissible state", if an operation is accepted on a specific operation section while the specific precursor display ZET is being displayed, this will trigger the state in which the specific precursor display ZET is hidden. (See FIG. 360(f)) However, in the "multiple reception permissible state", the multiple reception permissible state occurs as either the "multiple completion permissible state" or the "multiple continuation permissible state". This is because the specific precursor display ZET is not hidden when an operation is received on the specific operation section, regardless of whether the specific operation section is ), it becomes possible to suitably suggest whether the operation reception is allowed only once or multiple times even if the same aspect appears as a precursor effect display.

However, the "multiple reception permissible state" that occurs while a specific precursor display ZET is being executed as a premonitory effect display is limited to only one of the "multiple completion permissible state" and the "multiple continuation permissible state". There may be.

Note that in order to realize the eleventh configuration G11, a simulated image display of the operation target may be displayed in the ninth G acceptance acceptance state. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the eleventh configuration G11, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned eleventh configuration G11, it is not necessarily necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of multiple types. For example, an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated) Even if there is, it is sufficient that the eleventh configuration G11 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the twelfth configuration G12, among the above-mentioned acceptance permission states, the second G reception permission state, the sixth G reception permission state (or the sixth G reception permission state according to the modification), and the eighth G reception permission state ( Alternatively, if the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a 7th G reception permission state), a 9th G reception permission state, and an 11G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example), the pachinko machine It is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates a "particular operation part" (for example, the operation button 410), and it is possible to perform a precursor effect display that suggests in advance that operation acceptance for the "specific operation part" is permitted, and it is possible to display an indication effect that indicates in advance that reception of an operation for the "specific operation part" is permitted. When this occurs, there are cases in which the precursor effect is displayed and cases in which the precursor effect is not displayed. In some cases, this occurs as a "permissible state," and in other cases, it occurs as a "multiple-acceptance state," in which operation reception on the "specific operation unit" is permitted multiple times. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, the sample image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear, and in the "one-time acceptance allowed state", the periodic changes are "more than a predetermined time". It can be displayed so that it appears in units of "long time" (see FIG. 360(g)), and in the "multiple reception allowed state", it can be displayed so that the periodic change appears in units of "predetermined time" (see FIG. 360(g)). 378(g) and 381(g)), when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, the precursor effect display is executed or the precursor effect display is not executed. However, the post-reception display can be executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated (Fig. 378(b), (c), Fig. 381(b), (c). ), see FIGS. 384(b) and (c)), it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, when the sample image is displayed in the "multiple reception allowed state", the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time" (Fig. 378 (g), FIG. 381(g)), and when the display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (see FIG. 372(g), FIG. 375(g), FIG. 390(g)). , see Figure 393(g)). According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the "single reception permissible state" and the "multiple reception permissible state" are changed. Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of these is occurring, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, in particular, when the precursor effect display is executed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, in the "multiple reception permissible state", the "specific The post-acceptance display is executed multiple times by simply keeping the "operation section" in an operated state (see FIGS. 378(g) and 381(g)). In addition, if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, the post-reception display can be displayed by simply maintaining the "specific operation section" operated in the "multiple reception permissible state". is executed multiple times (see Figures 384(b) and (c)), and there are cases where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times simply by maintaining the "specific operation section" operated (Figure 372()). g), FIG. 375(g), FIG. 390(g), and FIG. 393(g)). According to such a configuration, when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs and the precursor effect display is displayed, the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, whereas the "multiple reception permissible state" is displayed. ” occurs and the warning effect display is not displayed, there are cases where the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled and cases where it is not. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, even if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, the periodic change in the sample image display is If the message appears in units of ``long time'', the post-reception display will no longer be executed multiple times when the ``specific operation section'' is maintained in an operated state (Figure 372 (g)). , see FIG. 375(g), FIG. 390(g), and FIG. 393(g)). According to such a configuration, even if the precursor effect display is not displayed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, the periodic change in the sample image display is "longer than the predetermined time". When displayed in units, it is possible to suggest that the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and suppress a drop in interest in the game. Become so.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, periodic changes in the simulated image display appear in predetermined time units. I made it so that it would never be displayed. That is, in this case, when periodic changes in the display of the simulated images appear in predetermined time units, it is suggested that the so-called auto-repeat function will be activated, which can be expected to improve the game's interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, when the precursor effect display is not executed when the reception permission state occurs multiple times (6th G reception permission state (or 6G reception permission state according to a modification) , 9th G reception permission state, and 11G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example)), an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the multiple reception permission state, and a post-reception display corresponding to the operation reception is performed in the multiple reception permission state. If a specific condition is met while the is being displayed, this may be used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display. In this regard, if a specific condition is met while the post-acceptance display is being displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the above-mentioned multiple-acceptance-permitting state that occurred without the precursor effect display being executed, this will trigger the acceptance of the operation. If the specific operation section is maintained in an operated state under conditions where the post-reception display is hidden, the post-reception display will not be executed multiple times (Fig. 372(b), (c), FIGS. 375(b), (c), etc.), a post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the acceptance-allowed state multiple times, which occurred without the precursor effect display being executed. Even if the specific conditions are met while the reception desk is in use, the post-reception display will not be hidden. When the post-reception display is executed multiple times (see FIGS. 384(b) and 384(c)) and when the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times (see FIGS. 390(g) and 393(g)). By having both of these, it becomes possible to maintain a good sense of tension.

Regarding the display of the sample image, in the "one time reception allowed state" where only one operation reception is allowed, the periodic changes are not displayed in units of "predetermined time", and " It may be displayed so that it always appears in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

Note that in order to realize the twelfth configuration G12, in the ninth G acceptance acceptance state, a simulated image display that simulates the operation target may be displayed. However, in this case, periodic changes in the image display will be displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twelfth configuration G12, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned twelfth configuration G12, it is not necessarily necessary to provide acceptance permission states of multiple types; for example, an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated) Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described twelfth configuration G12 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

Further, for example, as the thirteenth configuration G13, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, a 6G reception permission state (or a 6G reception permission state according to a modified example) and an 8G reception permission state (or a 7G reception permission state) are used. ), a 9th G reception permission state, and an 11th G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example)). 410)", it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the "specific operation section", and it is possible to execute a premonitory effect display that suggests in advance that operation acceptance for the "specific operation section" is permitted. ” may be displayed when the operation reception is permitted, and may not be displayed when the operation reception is permitted. When the "permissible state" occurs, there are cases where a precursory effect is displayed and cases where a precursory effect is not displayed. In this regard, regardless of whether the foreshadowing effect display is executed when the state where reception is allowed multiple times occurs, or the case where the omen effect display is not executed when the state where reception is allowed multiple times occurs, Since the post-reception display can be executed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation section" operated (Fig. 378(b), (c), Fig. 381(g), (c), 384(g), (c)), it is expected to maintain a favorable gaming interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirteenth configuration G13, when the premonitory effect display is executed when a "multiple reception permissible state" occurs in which operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted multiple times, In the state where multiple receptions are allowed, the post-reception display is executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated (Fig. 378(b), (c), Fig. 381(g), ( c)), if the precursor effect display is not executed when multiple receptions are allowed, just keep the "specific operation section" operated in the multiple receptions allowed state to display the post-reception display. is executed multiple times (see Figures 384(b) and (c)), and there are cases where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times simply by keeping the "specific operation section" operated. (See FIGS. 372(b), (c), FIGS. 375(b), (c), FIGS. 390(b), (c), and FIGS. 393(b), (c)). According to such a configuration, when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs and the precursor effect display is displayed, the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, whereas the "multiple reception permissible state" is displayed. ” occurs and the warning effect display is not displayed, there are cases where the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled and cases where it is not. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirteenth configuration G13, even if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, the simulated image display is not performed in the multiple reception permissible state. When it is not displayed, the post-acceptance display is executed multiple times by simply keeping the "specific operation section" operated (see FIGS. 384(b) and 384(c)). According to such a configuration, even if the precursor effect display is not displayed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated when the sample image display is not displayed. Therefore, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirteenth configuration G13, even if the precursor effect display is not executed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, the post-reception display according to the operation reception is "specific condition 372 (b ), (c), see FIGS. 375(b), (c)). According to such a configuration, if the precursor effect display is not displayed when the "multiple reception permissible state" occurs, or if the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, the reception will be performed based on the establishment of the "specific condition". Since there is a possibility that the later display may be hidden, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirteenth configuration G13, when the precursor effect display is not executed when the reception permission state occurs multiple times (the 6th G reception permission state (or the 6th G reception permission state according to a modification) , the 9th G reception permission state, and the 11th G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to the modified example)), when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation unit" in the multiple reception permission state, the corresponding reception is performed. If a specific condition is satisfied while the post-reception display is being displayed, the post-acceptance display may be hidden. In this regard, if a specific condition is met while the post-reception display is being displayed in response to an operation being accepted in a state where multiple receptions are allowed without the precursor display being executed, this will trigger the If the specific operation section is kept operated under conditions where the display is hidden, the display after reception will not be executed multiple times (Fig. 372(b), ( c), see FIGS. 375(b) and (c)), while the post-acceptance display is being displayed in response to the operation being accepted in the multiple-acceptance acceptance state that occurred without the precursor effect display being executed. Even if the specific conditions are met, the post-reception display will not be hidden when the specific operation section is operated under conditions, the post-reception display will not be hidden. When it is executed multiple times (see Figure 384(b), (c)) and when the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (Figure 390(b), (c), Figure 393(b), (c)) )), it becomes possible to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirteenth configuration G13, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the thirteenth configuration G13, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the thirteenth configuration G13 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the 14th configuration G14, among the above-mentioned acceptance permission states, the 2G reception permission state, the 6th G reception permission state (or the 6G reception permission state according to the modification), and the 8th G reception permission state (or , the 7th G reception permission state), the 9th G reception permission state (the 11th G reception permission state according to the modified example)), the pachinko machine 1 has the reception permission state In this case, there are cases where a ``specific message display (for example, ``random hits'' shown in Figures 379 and 382)'' is displayed, and cases where the ``specific message display'' is not displayed. There is. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception permission state is generated as a "one time reception permission state" in which operation reception for a "specific operation unit (for example, operation button 410)" is permitted only once (second G reception 6G reception permission state (or 6G reception permission state according to a modified example) , the 8th G reception permissible state (or the 7th G reception permissible state), the 9th G reception permissible state, and the 11th G reception permissible state (the 11th G reception permissible state according to the modified example)), and the sample image display is as follows. , it is possible to display periodic changes so that they appear, and in the "one-time reception allowed state", it is possible to display the periodic changes so that they appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (Figure 360(g) (see Figure 378(g), Figure 381(g)). , it becomes possible to suitably prompt the player to perform operations.

Furthermore, in the "multiple reception permissible state", the sample image display according to the fourteenth configuration G14 is displayed such that the periodic change appears in "predetermined time" units (Fig. 378 (g), Fig. 381 (g)), and when it is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (see Figure 372 (g), Figure 375 (g), Figure 390 (g), Figure 393 (g)). ) and so on. According to such a configuration, if periodic changes in the sample image display occur in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", either the "one-time reception allowed state" or the "multiple-time reception allowed state" is selected. Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether something is occurring, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourteenth configuration G14, when the "specific message display" is displayed in the "multiple acceptance acceptance state" in which operation acceptance for the "specific operation section" is allowed multiple times (see FIG. 379, see FIG. 382) and cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed (see FIGS. 373, 376, 385, and 391). The "specific message display" cannot be displayed in the "one-time acceptance permission state" in which only one operation reception for the "specific operation unit" is allowed (see FIG. 362). According to such a configuration, when the "specific message display" is displayed, it can be suitably suggested that multiple operations of the "specific operation section" are allowed, so that the interest in the game can be suitably improved. be expected to maintain it.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourteenth configuration G14, if the "specific message display" is displayed in the "multiple reception permissible state", the "specific operation section" is displayed in the "multiple reception permissible state". The post-reception display is executed multiple times by simply maintaining the operated state (see FIGS. 378 and 379, and FIGS. 381 and 382). In addition, if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple reception permissible state", simply keep the "specific operation section" operated in the "multiple reception permissible state" to display the post-reception message. In the case where it is executed multiple times (see Figure 384), and in the case where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated (see Figure 372, Figure 375, Figure 390, Figure 393) (see). According to such a configuration, when a ``specific message display'' is displayed in the ``multiple reception permissible state'', it suitably suggests that the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled; '' is not displayed, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fourteenth configuration G14, in the ninth G acceptance acceptance state, a simulated image display that simulates the operation target may be displayed. In this case, in the 9th G reception acceptance state, the "specific message display" is not displayed, but if the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", "multiple reception Even if the ``specific message display'' is not displayed in the ``permissible state'', if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of ``predetermined time'', the ``specific operation section'' must be operated. Just by maintaining the state, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times. According to such a configuration, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple reception permissible state", when periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time", Since the so-called auto-repeat function is now enabled, it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained and a decline in interest in the game will be suppressed. In addition, regarding this modification of the 9th G reception permission state ("specific message display" is not displayed, periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time"), the above 9th G reception It may be prepared instead of the acceptance state, or it may be prepared in addition to the 9th G acceptance acceptance state as an acceptance acceptance state that occurs under conditions different from the 9th G acceptance acceptance state. good.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourteenth configuration G14, if a specific message display (for example, "Running" shown in FIG. 379 or FIG. 382) is not displayed in the state where multiple receptions are allowed, the multiple receptions are If the above-mentioned "specific condition" is satisfied while an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the permissible state and a corresponding post-acceptance display is displayed, this will trigger the post-acceptance display to be hidden. (6th G reception permission state (or 6th G reception permission state according to a modification)). In this regard, if a specific condition is met while a post-reception display is being displayed in response to an operation being accepted in a state where "specific message display" is not displayed and multiple receptions are allowed, this will trigger the post-reception display. If the specific operation section is kept in the operated state under the condition that is hidden, the display after reception will not be executed multiple times (Fig. 372 (b), (c)) (see Figures 375(b) and (c)), if a specific condition is met while a post-acceptance display is being displayed in response to an operation being accepted in the multiple-acceptance state where a specific message display is not displayed. If the specific operation section is maintained in an operated state under conditions where the post-reception display will not be hidden even if the result is established, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times. (see Figures 384(b) and (c)) and when the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (see Figures 390(b) and (c) and Figures 393(b) and (c)). Since both of these are present, it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in realizing the fourteenth configuration G14, the sample image display is not displayed in such a manner that the periodic change appears in units of the predetermined time in the one-time reception allowed state, but rather than in the predetermined time unit. It will be displayed so that it appears over a long period of time.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourteenth configuration G14, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fourteenth configuration G14, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a plurality of types of acceptance permission states; for example, an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated) is not necessarily provided. Even if there is, it is sufficient that the fourteenth configuration G14 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, the 15th configuration G15 may include a 6th G reception permission state (or a 6G reception permission state according to a modified example) and an 8G reception permission state (or a 7G reception permission state) out of the reception permission states described above. ), a 9th G reception permission state, and an 11th G reception permission state (11G reception permission state according to a modified example)). 410)" is permitted multiple times, when a "specific message display (e.g., "Runshot" shown in FIG. 379 or FIG. 382)" is displayed, and when the corresponding There are cases where the "specific message display" is not displayed. In this regard, in the state where multiple receptions are allowed, the "specific operation section" is operated regardless of whether the "specific message display" is displayed or the "specific message display" is not displayed. Since the post-acceptance display can be executed multiple times just by maintaining the same state (the so-called automatic continuous play function can be activated), it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifteenth configuration G15, the sample image display is displayed when the operation reception on the "specific operation section" is permitted (the sixth G reception permission state (or according to the modified example). 6th G reception permissible state), 8th G reception permissible state (or 7th G reception permissible state), 11th G reception permissible state (11th G reception permissible state according to a modified example)), and when the operation reception is permitted. There is now a case where it is not displayed (9th G reception permissible state). In addition, when a "specific message display (for example, 'Missed hits' as shown in FIG. 379 or 382)" is displayed in the multiple reception permissible state (8th G reception permissible state (or 7th G reception permissible state)) ), in the state where multiple receptions are allowed, the post-reception display is executed multiple times by simply keeping the "specific operation section" operated (Fig. 378(b), (c), Fig. 381 (see (b), (c)). In addition, if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the state where multiple receptions are allowed, the post-reception display will be executed multiple times by simply keeping the "specific operation section" operated in the state where multiple receptions are allowed. (see Figures 384(b) and (c)) and when the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation section" is maintained in an operated state (see Figures 372(b) and (c)). 375(b), (c), FIG. 390(b), (c), and FIG. 393(b), (c)). According to such a configuration, when a ``specific message display'' is displayed in the ``multiple reception permissible state'', it suitably suggests that the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled; '' is not displayed, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifteenth configuration G15, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the multiple acceptance permission state, when the sample image display is not displayed in the multiple acceptance permission state. The post-acceptance display is executed multiple times by simply keeping the "specific operation section" operated (see FIGS. 384(b), (c), and (g)). According to such a configuration, even if the "specific message display" is not displayed in the "multiple reception permissible state", the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated when the sample image display is not displayed. Therefore, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension and suppress a decline in interest in games.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifteenth configuration G15, if the "specific message display (for example, "Running" shown in FIG. 379 or FIG. 382) is not displayed in the state where multiple receptions are allowed, If an operation is accepted for a specific operation unit in the reception acceptance state and the above-mentioned "specific condition" is met while the corresponding post-acceptance display is being displayed, this will be used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display. (6th G reception permissible state (or 6th G reception permissible state according to a modified example)). In this regard, if a specific condition is met while a post-reception display is being displayed in response to an operation being accepted in a state where "specific message display" is not displayed and multiple receptions are allowed, this will trigger the post-reception display. If the specific operation section is kept in the operated state under the condition that is hidden, the display after reception will not be executed multiple times (Fig. 372 (b), (c)) (see Figures 375(b) and (c)), "Specific message display" is not displayed, and the specified message is displayed while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation being accepted in the multiple-acceptance-allowed state is displayed. Even if the conditions are met, the post-reception display will not be hidden.If the specific operation section is kept in an operated state under conditions where the post-reception display will not be hidden, the post-reception display may be displayed multiple times. (see Figure 384(b), (c)) and when the post-reception display is not executed multiple times (see Figure 390(b), (c) and Figure 393(b), (c)). (Reference)), it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifteenth configuration G15, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fifteenth configuration G15, it is not necessarily necessary to provide acceptance permission states of multiple types; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described fifteenth configuration G15 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the 16th configuration G16, the 6th G reception permission state (or the 6G reception permission state according to the modified example) and the 8G reception permission state (or the 7G reception permission state) are selected from among the reception permission states described above. ) and an 11th G reception permission state), in the pachinko machine 1, when operation reception for the "specific operation section (for example, operation button 410)" is permitted, the "specific operation section" is capable of displaying a simulated image display, and when the simulated image display is set to a hidden state, the simulated image display is made difficult to view until the simulated image display is set to the hidden state; It is possible to display an "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" as an image display different from the sample image display. In this regard, in a multi-operation state in which multiple operation acceptances for a "specific operation section (for example, operation button 410)" are allowed, the display after acceptance can be performed multiple times just by maintaining the "specific operation section" in the operated state. (8th G reception allowed state (or 7th G reception allowed state)) and when the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state (6th G reception allowed state). (or the 6th G reception acceptance state according to the modified example) and the 11th G reception acceptance state), but in any of these cases, the sample image display that was displayed in the multiple operation state is When the display is hidden, a "disappearance effect display" can be displayed as an image display different from the sample image display (Fig. 378 (h), Fig. 381 (h), Fig. 390 (h). ), etc.), it is expected that players will maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 16th configuration G16, the multiple reception permissible state (8th G reception permissible state (or , in the 7th G reception acceptance state)), when the sample image display is hidden, the ``disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)'' as an image display different from the sample image display can be displayed. (See Figure 378(h) and Figure 381(h)). In addition, in the multiple reception permissible state where the post-reception display is not executed multiple times even if the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state, when the sample image display is hidden, it is different from the sample image display. ``Extinction EF display (extinction effect display)'' as an image display can be displayed (see Fig. 390 (h) etc.), and ``Extinction EF display (extinction effect display)'' as an image display different from the sample image display. 372 (h) and 375 (h)). According to such a configuration, in the state where multiple receptions are allowed in which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" can be displayed, whereas the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled. In the state where multiple receptions are allowed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" can be displayed, so the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" is not displayed. When this happens, it definitely suggests that the automatic repeated hit function was not activated and the reception was allowed, but when the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" was displayed, there is a possibility that the automatic repeated hit function was activated. It is expected that the player will be able to maintain a good sense of tension when using the auto-repeat function (even if the auto-repeat function is not available). Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixteenth configuration G16, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. It may be something.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned sixteenth configuration G16, it is not necessarily necessary to provide acceptance permission states of multiple types. Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described sixteenth configuration G16 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

Further, for example, as the 17th configuration G17, among the above-mentioned acceptance permission states, the 1G reception permission state (or the 1G reception permission state according to the modification example, the 11th G reception permission state according to the modification example), and the 2G reception permission state according to the modification example, Assuming that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an acceptance permission state and a 5th G reception permission state, when the pachinko machine 1 is allowed to accept an operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a sample image of the operation means is displayed. The screen image display is capable of displaying the screen image, and when the screen image display is set to a non-display state, the screen image display is made difficult to view until the screen image display is set to the non-display state. is capable of displaying "extinguishing EF display (extinguishing effect display)" as another image display, and the operating means can display "first light emitting mode (for example, color scheme based on white)" and "second light emitting mode ( For example, it is provided so that it can emit light in one of a plurality of color schemes, including a color scheme based on red. In this regard, the sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the reception acceptance state, and when the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (see Figure 369 (g)) ), and when the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (see Fig. 352(g), Fig. 355(g), Fig. 360(g), Fig. 393(g)). ), the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode" based on white (for example, a color scheme based on white), and the periodic change in the image display is "longer than a predetermined time". 352 (g), 355 (g), 360 (g), and 393 (g)). For example, if the light is emitted in a red-based color scheme) and periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (see Figure 360(g)). ), when the sample image display is turned into a non-display state, the ``disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)'' is displayed as an image display different from the sample image display. Since it has been made possible to maintain the player's interest in the game (see FIG. 360(h)), it is expected that the user's interest in the game will be suitably maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventeenth configuration G17, the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", and periodic changes in the display of the simulated image appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time". When it is displayed (see Figures 352(e), (g), Figures 355(e), (g), Figures 360(e), (g), Figures 393(e), (g)), Acceptance state of the type in which there is a possibility that "disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)" as an image display different from the display of the sample image is displayed when the display of the sample image is set to a non-display state ( 2nd G reception permission state) is occurring, and when the sample image display is hidden, the disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display) is displayed as an image display different from the sample image display. ) is not likely to be displayed (the 1st G reception allowed state (or the 1st G reception allowed state according to the modified example, or the 11th G reception allowed state according to the modified example)) has occurred. I tried to make sure that there were both situations. Furthermore, when the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode" and the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (Fig. 360(e) , (g)), there is a possibility that a "disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)" may be displayed as an image display different from the sample image display when the sample image display is set to a non-display state. The situation is such that the state in which reception is permitted for each type (2nd G reception permitted state) always occurs. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", if the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode", The situation is such that there is always a type-specific reception permission state in which the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" may be displayed, but the operation means does not emit light in the "first light emission mode". For example, acceptance permissible states for types in which "extinction EF display (disappearance effect display)" may be displayed and acceptance permissible states for types in which "disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)" may not be displayed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize which of these is occurring, it is difficult to recognize whether the sample image is displayed before the visibility of the sample image display is deteriorated by "disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)". There is a growing need to check the aspect (color scheme, etc.), and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventeenth configuration G17, even when the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", periodic changes in the display of the simulated image appear in units of "predetermined time". , there is a possibility that a "disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)" will be displayed as an image display different from the sample image display when the sample image display is hidden. 369 (e) and (g)). According to such a configuration, even when the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", by checking periodic changes in the simulated image display, the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" can be displayed. Since it is possible to recognize that a state in which reception is permitted for a certain type of game is occurring, in which there is a possibility that "" may be displayed, it is expected that the user's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

Note that the type of reception permissible state refers to the types of post-reception displays that are available in multiple types, and even if there is only one type, the post-reception display corresponding to the reception permissible state is It may be executed in one of a plurality of modes (high expectation mode, low expectation mode, etc.). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventeenth configuration G17, the extinction effect display is displayed when the post-reception display is executed in a high-expectation mode, but when the post-acceptance display is executed in a low-expectation mode. Even if the extinction effect display is not displayed, there is a possibility that the ``extinction EF display (disappearance effect display)'' may be displayed as an image display different from the ``sample image display.'' This is a situation that is bound to occur."

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventeenth configuration G17, FIGS. 352(e), (g), FIGS. 355(e), (g), FIGS. As shown in (g), etc., the light emission in the operating means is terminated based on the operation acceptance, but at the time of termination, the image display is not hidden but is displayed. did. In such a configuration, even if the sample image display is set not to be hidden when the operation is accepted, it is possible to confirm that the operation has been accepted properly by checking the light emitting state of the operation means. You will be able to recognize whether it is present or not.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventeenth configuration G17, the "extinguishing EF display (extinguishing effect display)" is such that the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode and the periodic change of the simulated image display is "for a predetermined period of time. If the operation is accepted while the display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time," or if the operating means is emitting light in the second light emitting mode and the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time," the operation is accepted. It may be possible to display the same image display even when the image is displayed in units of "long time" (see, for example, FIGS. 360(e), (h), and FIG. 362(d)). According to such a configuration, once the operation is accepted, it becomes difficult to recognize in which light emission mode the operating means is emitting light, and it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. can be expected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventeenth configuration G17, the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" is
・When the operation is accepted while the operation means is emitting light in the first light emission mode and the periodic change in the sample image display appears in units of "time longer than a predetermined time"; A case where the means emits light in the second light emission mode and a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and a case where the same image display is displayed ( For example, see FIGS. 360(e), (h), and 362(d)),
- If the operation is accepted while the operating means is emitting light in the first light emitting mode and the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (Fig. 390 (e), (h), and FIG. 392(h)), the operating means emits light in the second light emission mode, and periodic changes in the image display appear in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time". When an operation is accepted while the image is displayed as shown in FIG.
It may be possible to have both. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to recognize in which light emission mode the operating means is emitting light, and it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, ``if the operation is accepted when the operating means is emitting light in the first light emission mode and the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of ``time longer than a predetermined time'''' and "a case where the operating means emits light in the second light emitting mode and the periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time"" are different types. This may also mean a situation in which a reception permissible state occurs. Then, in addition to this, the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" may be displayed as the same image display.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the seventeenth configuration G17, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. It may be something.

Furthermore, in order to realize the seventeenth configuration G17, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the seventeenth configuration G17 described above can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, if the 18th configuration G18 is provided with a 2nd G reception permission state and a 5th G reception permission state among the reception permission states described above, the pachinko machine 1 has an operation means (for example, an operation button 410), a simulated image display of the operating means can be displayed, and the operating means has a "first light emitting mode (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light emitting mode". It is possible to emit light in any of a plurality of modes including a light emission mode (for example, a color scheme based on red). In this regard, if the sample image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in one of a plurality of color schemes in the reception acceptance state, and the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time" ( 5th G reception permissible state), and a case where the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time" (2nd G reception permissible state). When the display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation means may emit light in the "first light emitting mode" depending on which of the plurality of color schemes the sample image display is displayed in. , and may emit light in the "second light emitting mode" (see FIGS. 360(e) and 360(g)), so it can be expected to suitably maintain gaming interest.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 18th configuration G18, when the periodic change in the sample image display appears in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (second G acceptance state), The operating means may emit light in the "first light emitting mode" or may emit light in the "second light emitting mode" depending on which of the plurality of color schemes the simulated image display is displayed in (Fig. 360). (see (e), (g)). On the other hand, when periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (fifth G reception acceptance state), the operating means can emit light in the "first light emission mode", No matter which of the plurality of color schemes the simulated image display is displayed in, it is arranged so that no light is emitted in the "second light emitting mode" (see FIGS. 369(e) and 369(g)). According to such a configuration, when the "second light emitting mode" appears after checking the operating means, it can be easily recognized that the periodic change in the sample image display does not appear in units of "predetermined time". By being able to do so, it becomes easier to guess the type of reception permission state, and it is expected that this will favorably maintain gaming interest.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighteenth configuration G18, the light emission from the operating means may be terminated based on the acceptance of the operation. In this respect, since the sample image display is not hidden but is displayed at the time of termination (for example, FIGS. 360(e) and 369(g), FIG. 369(e), (see (g)), even if the display state of the sample image display continues after the operation has been accepted, it should suitably suggest that the operation has been accepted properly. You will be able to do this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighteenth configuration G18, the precursor effect display suggesting that the reception permission state will occur can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception permission state occurs, and the sample image display If periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception permissible state), if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will be triggered. (See FIG. 360(f)). However, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (5th G reception permissible state), even if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will not be possible. Since the precursor effect display is not hidden as a trigger (see FIG. 369(f)), the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception is displayed while the precursor effect display continues to be displayed. becomes. In other words, in this case, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (5th G acceptance acceptance state), the operation acceptance is performed at a relatively early stage after the acceptance acceptance state occurs. If this is done, it will take a long time for the post-acceptance display to become difficult to see due to the precursor display. Therefore, it is necessary to determine in which time unit the periodic change in the sample image display appears. It is possible to provide the effect that it is more beneficial to accept the operation at a relatively late stage when the robot appears for a predetermined period of time, and it is expected that this will maintain a good sense of tension. sell.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighteenth configuration G18, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (second G reception acceptance state), This is because the portent effect display can be displayed in the same manner (specific portent display ZET) in the case where periodic changes in the display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (5th G acceptance acceptance state). (See Figures 360(f) and 369(f)).It is now possible to make it difficult to recognize which periodic changes appear in the sample image display, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. It becomes like this.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the eighteenth configuration G18, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 18th configuration G18, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a reception permission state of multiple types. For example, an reception permission state of one type (or a number of types smaller than the number of types illustrated) Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described eighteenth configuration G18 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the 19th configuration G19, among the above-mentioned acceptance permission states, the 1st G reception permission state, the 2nd G reception permission state, the 5th G reception permission state, and the 6th G reception permission state (or If the pachinko machine 1 is configured to have a 6th G reception permission state) and an 11th G reception permission state, when the operation reception for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, the It is possible to display a simulated image display, and it is possible to output an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the operation means is in a state where operation is permitted, or that the operation means is in a state where operation is permitted. The operating means can emit light in any of a plurality of modes including a "first light emission mode (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light emission mode (for example, a color scheme based on red)." It is said that In this regard, the sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the reception acceptance state, and when the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (see Figure 369 (g)) ), and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (Figure 352 (g), Figure 360 (g), Figure 372 (g), Figure 375 (g)) , see Figure 390(g)), and when the reception permission state occurs, there are cases where periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time", and cases where periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time". The acceptance permission sound can be output in both cases, such as when it is displayed in units of "long time" (Fig. 352(g), Fig. 360(k), Fig. 369). (k)), it can be expected to suitably maintain gaming interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, if the periodic change in the pattern image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", the reception The reception permission sound is always output when the permission state occurs (see FIGS. 369(e), (g), and (k)). In addition, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", the reception is accepted when the acceptance permission state occurs. When the acceptable sound is output (see Figure 352(e), (g), (k) and Figure 360(e), (g), (k)) and when the acceptable sound is not output (see Figure 352(e), (g), (k) and Figure 360(e), (g), (k)). 372(g), FIG. 375(g), and FIG. 390(g)). According to such a configuration, when the acceptance acceptance sound is output, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed such that they appear in units of "predetermined time" and in units of "time longer than predetermined time". Since you will be able to have both situations, you will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, when the reception acceptance sound is not output, the periodic change in the simulated image display is not displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the operation means is " The second light emitting mode" was prevented from emitting light (see FIGS. 372(e) and (g), FIGS. 375(e) and (g), and FIGS. 390(e) and (g)). According to such a configuration, when the reception permission sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize that operation reception is now permitted, and the operation reception can be performed without worrying about various production modes. Since the player can concentrate only on what is being played, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game will be suitably maintained. In addition, in this case, if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: periodic changes in the image display appear in units of "predetermined time" or the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode", an acceptance acceptance state occurs. Since the acceptance permission sound is always output when the image is displayed, it is not possible to do so when periodic changes in the image display occur in units of "predetermined time" or when the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode". This makes it difficult to forget to perform an operation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, when the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode (fifth G acceptance acceptance state), even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output, the acceptance acceptance sound will not be terminated midway due to this (Fig. 369(e), (g)). , (k)). In this regard, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode, the reception permission sound is output. When the operation is accepted, there are cases in which the process is terminated prematurely (see Figures 360(e), (g), and (k)) and cases in which the process is not terminated prematurely (see Figures 352(e), (g), and (k)). )), even if the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode, when periodic changes in the image display appear in units of "predetermined time", the reception Even if an operation is accepted while the permissible sound is being output, this can be used as an opportunity to suitably indicate that the process will not be terminated prematurely. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display occur in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", when an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this will trigger the process to be terminated prematurely. Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not an operation has been properly accepted, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, when the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the second light emitting mode, , if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this is always used as a trigger to terminate the process midway (see FIGS. 360(e) and 360(k)). In other words, in this case, even if periodic changes in the image display occur in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", if the operating means emits light in the second light emission mode, the reception acceptance sound is output. If an operation is accepted while the process is in progress, this can be used as an opportunity to appropriately indicate that the process will be terminated prematurely.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, the light emission from the operating means may be terminated based on the acceptance of the operation. In this regard, since the sample image display is not hidden but is displayed at the time of termination (for example, FIGS. 352(e) and 352(g), FIG. 360(e), (g), Figures 369(e) and (g)), even if the display state of the sample image display is continued after the operation is accepted, the situation where the operation is accepted properly. You will be able to suitably suggest what is below.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, a precursor effect display suggesting that the reception permission state will occur can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception permission state occurs (first G reception permissible state, 2nd G reception permissible state, 5th G reception permissible state). In this regard, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode, the operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed. However, this should not be used as an opportunity to hide the precursor effect display (see Figures 369(e), (f), and (g)). If the display is displayed in units of "time longer than the current time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode, if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will trigger the display to disappear. (See FIGS. 352(e), (f), and (g) and FIGS. 360(e), (f), and (g)). According to such a configuration, even if the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode, when an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this triggers the non-display state. It becomes possible to suggest in what manner the periodic change in the image display appears, depending on whether or not the image is displayed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, when the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the second light emitting mode, , if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this is used as a trigger to hide the display (see FIGS. 360(e), (f), and (g)). When the operating means emits light in the second light emitting mode, it becomes possible to suggest that the foreshadowing effect display will be turned into a non-display state in response to the operation reception, without checking the periodic changes in the simulated image display. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, there are two cases in which periodic changes in the pattern image display appear in units of "predetermined time" and the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode, and two cases in which the pattern image display In the case where periodic changes are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode, the omen effect display is displayed in the same mode (specific omen display ZET). (See Figure 352(f), Figure 360(f), and Figure 369(f)), so that it is difficult to recognize which periodic changes appear in the sample image display. This makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension. However, this may occur if the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode. Further, a mode may be provided in which periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and cannot appear when the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the nineteenth configuration G19, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned nineteenth configuration G19, it is not necessarily necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of multiple types; for example, an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated) Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described nineteenth configuration G19 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

Further, for example, if the 20th configuration G20 includes the 1st G reception permission state according to the modified example, the 2G reception permission state, and the 5th G reception permission state among the reception permission states described above, pachinko In the device 1, when reception of an operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is allowed, it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operation means, and the operation means can display a "first light emitting mode (for example, white light)". It is possible to emit light in any one of a plurality of modes including a "second light emission mode (for example, a color scheme based on red)" and a "second light emission mode (color scheme based on red, for example)". In this regard, the sample image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in the reception permission state, and when the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (5th G reception permission state). There is a case where the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (first G acceptance acceptance state and second G acceptance acceptance state according to the modified example), and in the acceptance acceptance state, Since the display of the sample image may be hidden while the reception of operations on the operation means is permitted (see Figures 355(c) and (g)), when the reception of operations is permitted. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 20th configuration G20, when the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (the 5th G In the reception permission state), the sample image display is not hidden while the operation reception of the operation means is continued (FIG. 370(c), (see (g)). Further, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (the first G reception acceptance state according to the modification, 2nd G reception permission state) is a case where the sample image display is hidden while operation reception on the operating means is permitted in the reception permission state (see FIGS. 355(c) and (g)). 361(c) and 361(g)). According to such a configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation means The sample image display is not hidden while operation reception is permitted, but periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In some cases, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the sample image display is hidden when accepting operations on the operating means is permitted. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 20th configuration G20, even if the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation means " When emitting light in the second light emitting mode (second G reception permission state), in the reception permission state, the sample image display is not hidden while the reception of operations on the operating means is permitted. According to such a configuration, even if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation can be performed by checking the light emitting mode of the operating means. Since there are cases where it is possible to recognize that the replica image display will not be hidden while the operation reception on the means is permitted, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twentieth configuration G20, the light emission from the operating means may be terminated based on the acceptance of the operation. In this respect, the sample image display is not hidden but is displayed at the time of termination (for example, FIGS. 360(e) and 369(g), FIG. 369(e), (see g)), even if the display state of the sample image is continued after the operation has been accepted, it is preferable to indicate that the operation has been accepted properly. become able to.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twentieth configuration G20, a precursor effect display suggesting that the reception permission state will occur can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception permission state occurs. In this regard, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode, the operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed. However, the precursor effect display is not turned off (see Figures 369(e), (f), and (g)), and the periodic change in the sample image display does not occur for a period longer than a predetermined time. '' unit and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode, if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will be used as a trigger to turn the precursor effect display into a hidden state. (See FIGS. 356(e), (f), and (g) and FIGS. 360(e), (f), and (g)). According to such a configuration, even if the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode, when an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this triggers the non-display state. It becomes possible to suggest in what manner the periodic change in the image display appears, depending on whether or not the image is displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 20th configuration G20, when the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the second light emitting mode, , if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this is used as a trigger to hide the display (see FIGS. 360(e), (f), and (g)). When the operating means emits light in the second light emitting mode, it becomes possible to suggest that the foreshadowing effect display will be turned into a non-display state in response to the operation reception, without checking the periodic changes in the simulated image display. .

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 20th configuration G20, there are two cases in which the periodic change in the pattern image display appears in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode; In the case where periodic changes are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode, the omen effect display is displayed in the same mode (specific omen display ZET). (See Fig. 355(f), Fig. 360(f), and Fig. 369(f)), so that it is difficult to recognize which periodic changes appear in the sample image display. This makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension. However, this may occur if the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode. Further, a mode may be provided in which periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and cannot appear when the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 20th configuration G20, in the acceptance permission state, when the sample image display is set to the non-display state while the operation reception on the operation means is allowed (FIG. 355(c), ( (see g)), the light emitting mode in the operating means is made to continue without ending, so it can be expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the display of the simulated image being hidden. .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twentieth configuration G20, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned 20th configuration G20, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the above-mentioned 20th configuration G20 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, the 21st configuration G21 may include a 2nd G reception permission state, a 5G reception permission state, and a 9G reception permission state (or 3G reception permission state) among the above-mentioned reception permission states. Assuming that, in the pachinko machine 1, when reception of an operation on the operating means (for example, the operating button 410) is allowed, it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operating means, and the operating means is "first light emitting". It is possible to emit light in any one of a plurality of modes including a "second light emitting mode (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and a "second light emission mode (for example, a color scheme based on red)". In this respect, the sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear, and when the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time" (5th G reception acceptance state), and when the periodic changes There is a case where the change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G acceptance acceptance state), and when the operating means emits light in the "first emission mode" in the acceptance acceptance state, the The image display is such that a periodic change appears in units of "predetermined time" in the reception permission state (see FIGS. 369(e) and (g)), and a case in which a periodic change appears in the reception permission state. When it is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (see Figures 360(e) and (g)), and when it is not displayed in the acceptance permission state (Figures 384(e) and (g)) (see FIGS. 363(e) and (g)), it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 2nd G acceptance acceptance state and the 5th G acceptance acceptance state, when the operating means emits light in a "third light emission mode" that is different from both the above "first light emission mode" and the above "second light emission mode". You may also make it so that there is. That is, in this case, in the second G acceptance acceptance state, the operating means may emit light in any of a plurality of modes including the above-mentioned "first light-emitting mode", the above-mentioned "second light-emitting mode", and the above-mentioned "third light-emitting mode". Therefore, in the 5th G acceptance acceptance state, the operating means emits light in one of multiple modes (not including the second light emission mode) including the above-mentioned "first light emission mode" and the above-mentioned "third light emission mode". . In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 21st configuration G21, when the operating means emits light in the "third light emitting mode" in the acceptance acceptance state, the simulated image display is such that the periodic change in the acceptance acceptance state is "predetermined time period". ” unit (5th G reception permissible state), and when periodic changes are displayed in units of “time longer than a predetermined time” in the reception permissible state (2nd G reception permissible state). Since there is no case where the image is not displayed in the acceptance permission state, when the operating means emits light in the "third light emitting mode", periodic changes in the image display are displayed in either mode. Although it is difficult to recognize whether or not this is the case, it is expected that the user's interest in the game will be suitably maintained by always displaying the simulated image itself.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-first configuration G21, when the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode" in the acceptance acceptance state, the pattern image display is such that the periodic change is "predetermined" in the acceptance acceptance state. Periodic changes will always appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the reception permissible state, instead of being displayed in units of "time" and cases in which they are not displayed in the reception permissible state. (See FIGS. 360(e) and 360(g)). According to such a configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "second light emitting mode", periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the acceptance acceptance state. Since it is possible to suggest this, it can be used to predict the type of reception acceptance state, etc., without having to check the "longness and shortness of periodic changes", which are difficult to distinguish.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-first configuration G21 may further include, for example, a first acceptance permission state. In such a configuration, even if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" in the reception permission state, the type of reception permission state (reception permission Depending on the type of state (the display after acceptance differs depending on the type of state), the operating means will emit light only in the first light emitting mode (see FIGS. 352(e) and 352(g)). In other words, in this case, depending on the type of acceptance permission state, the operating means emits light only in the first light emitting mode, and it is not clear whether the simulated image display is displayed or with which periodic change it is displayed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize, it is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-first configuration G21, the light emission from the operating means may be terminated based on the acceptance of the operation. In this respect, the sample image display is not hidden but is displayed at the time of termination (for example, FIGS. 360(e) and 369(g), FIG. 369(e), (see g)), even if the display state of the sample image is continued after the operation has been accepted, it is preferable to indicate that the operation has been accepted properly. become able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-first configuration G21, a precursor effect display suggesting that the acceptance permission state will occur may be made executable so as to straddle the timing at which the acceptance permission state occurs. In this regard, if the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode (5th G acceptance acceptance state), a precursor effect display is displayed. Even if an operation is accepted while the user is in the room, the precursor effect display is not turned off (see FIG. 369(f)), and the periodic change in the sample image display continues for a period longer than the predetermined time. When the operation means is displayed in units and the operation means emits light in the first light emission mode (first G reception permission state, second G reception permission state), if the operation reception is performed while the precursor effect display is displayed. Taking this as an opportunity, the precursor effect display was made to be hidden (see FIGS. 352(f) and 360(f)). According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to distinguish in which manner the periodic changes in the sample image display are being performed, it is possible to determine whether the precursor effect display has been turned into a non-display state in response to the reception of an operation. You will be able to recognize it through

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 21st configuration G21, when the operating means emits light in the above-mentioned third light emission mode (2nd G acceptance acceptance state, 5th G acceptance acceptance state), when the precursor effect display is displayed, When the operation is accepted, this triggers the case where the precursor effect display is hidden (see Figure 360(f)) and the case where it is not hidden (see Figure 369(f)). However, when the operation means emits light in the second light emission mode (second G acceptance state), the precursor effect display is always hidden when the operation is accepted (see FIG. 360(f)). ), it is now possible to predict the type of acceptance permission state simply by checking the light emitting mode of the operating means, without having to check the ``lengths and shorts of periodic changes'' which are difficult to distinguish.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-first configuration G21, there are two cases in which the periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and a case in which the periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". The foreshadow effect display can be displayed in the same manner (specific omen display ZET) in the case where it is displayed in units of "predetermined time" (Fig. 352(f), Fig. 360(f), Fig. 369(f)), it is now possible to make it difficult to recognize which periodic changes appear in the simulated image display, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. However, this may occur if the periodic change in the simulated image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emitting mode. Further, a mode may be provided in which periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and cannot appear when the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above twenty-first configuration G21, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned 21st configuration G21, it is not necessarily necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of multiple types; for example, an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated) Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the above-mentioned 21st configuration G21 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, if the 22nd configuration G22 includes a 2nd G reception permission state, a 5G reception permission state, and an 11G reception permission state among the reception permission states described above, the pachinko machine 1 When the permissible state occurs, there are cases where a precursory effect is displayed and cases where a precursory effect is not displayed. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) operates in the "first light emission mode (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and the "second light emission mode (for example, a color scheme based on red)" in the reception acceptance state. It is possible to emit light in one of several modes including There are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time" and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time". In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 22nd configuration G22, the precursor effect display is displayed such that periodic changes in the simulated image display appear in units of "predetermined time", and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode". (see FIGS. 369(e), (f), and (g)), the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means is 360 (e), (f), and (g)), it is possible to display the display across the timing at which the reception permission state occurs. As a result, it can be expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, a reception acceptance state ( In the 5th G acceptance acceptance state), if an operation is accepted while a precursor effect display is being displayed, the precursor effect display will not be hidden from view (Fig. 369). (see e), (f), (g)). Further, in an acceptance acceptance state (second G acceptance acceptance state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", If an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this can be used as a trigger to hide the precursor effect display (see Fig. 360(e), (f), and (g)). reference). According to such a configuration, if an operation is accepted while the precursory effect display is being displayed, it is determined whether or not the precursory effect display is to be hidden. Should the operation be accepted while the precursory effect display is displayed, or should the operation be accepted after the precursory effect display is hidden? It can be expected to suitably maintain gaming interest when selecting.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, there is an acceptance acceptance state in which periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode". When this occurs (fifth G reception permissible state), the foreshadowing effect display is always executed. In addition, if a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and an acceptance permission state occurs in which the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", a precursor effect is displayed. There are both cases in which the ``G'' is executed (2nd G reception permissible state) and cases in which the precursor effect display is not executed (11th G reception permissible state). According to such a configuration, when the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", there are both cases in which a precursory effect is displayed and cases in which a precursory effect is not displayed, creating a sense of tension. can be expected to maintain a suitable level. However, even if the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode", if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the precursor effect display is always executed. Therefore, it can be expected that the player will be less likely to forget to perform an operation and maintain his/her interest in the game.

Furthermore, there is an acceptance acceptance state (5G acceptance acceptance state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode"; In the reception acceptance state (second G reception acceptance state) in which periodic changes are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode, the same mode ( A specific omen display (ZET) can now appear. According to such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which type of acceptance permission state will occur.

In addition, when a reception permission state (second G reception permission state) occurs in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the second light emission mode. , the foreshadowing effect display is always executed, but if an operation is accepted while the foreshadowing effect display is being displayed, the foreshadowing effect display will be hidden. It is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to obstructed visibility of operations-related effects.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-second configuration G22, the light emission from the operating means may be terminated based on the acceptance of the operation. In this regard, the sample image display is not hidden but is displayed at the time of termination (for example, FIGS. 360(e) and 369(g), FIG. 369(e), (see g)), even if the display state of the sample image is continued after the operation has been accepted, it is preferable to indicate that the operation has been accepted properly. become able to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, the 11th G reception permission state is defined as "It is possible to output the reception permission sound, but even if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, this will not happen." It may also be modified as an "acceptance acceptable state" in which the output of the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated midway. In such a configuration, if an acceptance acceptance state (5th G acceptance acceptance state) occurs in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode. , even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this will not be terminated midway (see FIGS. 369(e), (g), and (k)). On the other hand, if a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and an acceptance permission state occurs in which the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode (second G reception acceptance state). state, modified 11G acceptance acceptance state), cases in which if an operation is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output, the operation is terminated prematurely (see Fig. 360(k)), and cases in which the operation is not terminated in the middle. (modified 11th G reception acceptance state). In other words, in this case, when the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated midway, the periodic change in the sample image display is suitably suggested, but when the acceptance acceptance sound is not terminated midway, the pattern of the periodic change in the sample image display is indicated. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which periodic changes have appeared, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, the 1st G acceptance acceptance state is transformed into an acceptance acceptance state in which no precursor effect display is executed, and then the 11th G acceptance acceptance state is replaced with the above-mentioned 11th acceptance acceptance state. Good too. Even with such a configuration, the 11th G reception permission state is defined as ``It is possible to output the reception permission sound, but even if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, this will trigger the reception permission state. It is possible to obtain the same effect as when changing the state to "an acceptance permissive state in which the output of permissible sounds is not terminated prematurely."

Alternatively, the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described 22nd configuration G22 may further include the 1st G acceptance acceptance state without changing it into an acceptance acceptance state in which no precursor effect display is executed. In such a configuration, if an acceptance acceptance state (5th G acceptance acceptance state) occurs in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode. , even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this will not be terminated midway (see FIGS. 369(e), (g), and (k)). On the other hand, if a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and an acceptance permission state occurs in which the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode (first G reception acceptance state). state, 2nd G reception permissible state, 11th G reception permissible state), when the reception permissible sound is output (1st G reception permissible state, 2nd G reception permissible state), and when the reception permissible sound is not output (11G reception permissible state). If an operation is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being outputted, the process is terminated prematurely (in the same way as a warning effect display is terminated prematurely) (Fig. 360(k) )) and a case where the precursory effect display is not ended midway (despite being ended midway) (see FIG. 352(k)). In other words, in this case, when the precursor effect display is ended midway, the acceptance permission sound is also made to suitably suggest in what manner the periodic changes in the simulated image display were appearing when the precursor effect display is ended midway, and the precursor effect is When the reception permission sound is not terminated even though the display is terminated in the middle, it becomes difficult to recognize the manner in which the periodic changes in the sample image display are occurring, and the sense of tension is suitably reduced. be expected to maintain it.

Alternatively, when the reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound may not necessarily be audibly output. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described 22nd configuration G22, the first G reception permission state is indicated by a precursor effect display. It is also possible to transform the state into a state where the reception is not executed, and then provide both the first G reception and the eleventh G reception.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-second configuration G22, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 22nd configuration G22 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

Further, for example, as the 23rd configuration G23, among the above-mentioned acceptance permission states, the 1st G reception permission state according to the modification (or the 6th G reception permission state according to the modification), the 2G reception permission state, and the 5G reception permission state If the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an acceptance permission state, the pachinko machine 1 can display a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) when the operation reception for the operation means is permitted, It is possible to display a background image that is displayed so as to appear behind other image displays, and the operating means can display a "first light emitting mode (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and It is possible to emit light in one of several modes including the "second light emission mode (for example, a color scheme based on red)", and the sample image display is such that periodic changes appear in the reception acceptance state. , and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (5th G acceptance permission state), and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time". (the 1st G reception permission state according to the modification (or the 6th G reception permission state according to the modification) and the 2nd G reception permission state). In this regard, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", acceptance of the operation on the operating means is not permitted. In the current situation, the image display as a background image may be changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed (Figure 355 (d) and Figure 375 (d)). etc.), it can be expected to suitably maintain interest in gaming.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, when the periodic change of the image display is displayed in a predetermined time unit and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (5G acceptance acceptance state), the image display as a background image is not changed to an image display different from the image display that was displayed up to that time while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted (Figure 369 (d) , (e), (g)). On the other hand, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emitting mode", it is permissible to accept the operation on the operating means. When the image display as a background image is changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed until then (Fig. 355 (d), (e), (g), and Fig. 375 ( d), (e), and (g)), and when the image display as the background image is not changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that point (see Figures 360(d), (e), (see (g)). According to such a configuration, when emitting light in the "first light emitting mode", the image display as the background image is different from the image display that was displayed up to that time while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the image display is changed to a different one, but if periodic changes in the sample image display are made to appear in "predetermined time" units, the image display as the background image may be changed until then. Because it is possible to easily recognize that the image display will not change to a different image display from the image display that was previously set, the user can easily recognize that the image display will not change to a different image display than the one previously displayed, without being aware of the possibility that such a background change will occur (without having to wait for the timing for the background change to occur). ) It becomes possible to prompt the user to accept the operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-third configuration G23, even if the periodic change in the pattern image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the operation means is In the case of emitting light in the "light emission mode" (2nd G reception permission state), the image display as a background image changes to an image display different from the image display that was previously displayed while the operation reception for the operation means is permitted. It was arranged so that it would not be changed (see FIGS. 360(d), (e), and (g)). According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the background image is It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the image display is changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that time, but in that case, if the operating means emits light in the "second light emission mode", Because it is possible to recognize that the image display as a background image will not be changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that point, you can do so without being aware of the possibility that such a background change will occur. It becomes possible to prompt the user to accept the operation (without waiting for the timing to occur).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-third configuration G23, when the reception permission state occurs when the "specific image display (first background image HK-G1)" is displayed as the background image, the sample image When periodic changes in the display are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the "first light emission mode" (FIGS. 355(d), (e), (g), 360(d), (e), and (g)), periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", and the operation means is set to "second light emitting mode". ” (see FIGS. 360(d), (e), and (g)). According to such a configuration, when the "specific image display (first background image HK-G1)" is displayed as the background image, the background image is displayed while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. Although there is a possibility that the image display will be changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed (specific image display), it is possible to determine whether or not this is possible by checking the lighting mode of the operating means. It becomes possible to suitably suggest the following.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 23rd configuration G23, the acceptance acceptance state in which no background change occurs may occur when an image display that cannot be displayed in the acceptance acceptance state in which the background change occurs appears as a background image. You can do it like this. In addition, the reception permissible state in which no background change occurs occurs when an image display that cannot be displayed in the reception permissible state in which the background change occurs appears as a background image (for example, the fifth reception permissible state), and the background The image display (first background image HK-G1) that can be displayed even in the reception acceptance state where a change occurs is made to appear when it appears as a background image (for example, in the second reception acceptance state). Good too.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-third configuration G23, the light emission from the operating means may be terminated based on the acceptance of the operation. In this respect, the sample image display is not hidden but is displayed at the time of termination (for example, FIGS. 360(e) and 369(g), FIG. 369(e), (see g)), even if the display state of the sample image is continued after the operation has been accepted, it is preferable to indicate that the operation has been accepted properly. become able to.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-third configuration G23, a precursor effect display suggesting that the reception permission state will occur may be made executable so as to straddle the timing at which the reception permission state occurs. In this regard, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode (for example, in the fifth reception acceptance state), the precursor effect display is displayed. Even if an operation is accepted while the display is in progress, the precursor effect display is not hidden. On the other hand, when the periodic change in the image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode (for example, in the second reception acceptance state), If an operation is accepted while the foreshadowing effect display is being displayed, the foreshadowing effect display is set to a non-displayed state using this as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if an operation is accepted while the precursory effect display is being displayed, it is determined whether or not the precursory effect display is to be hidden from view based on periodic changes in the sample image display. Select whether to accept the operation while the foreshadowing display is displayed or to accept the operation after the foreshadowing display is hidden. It can be expected to suitably maintain gaming interest when playing.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned twenty-third configuration G23, periodic changes in the display of the simulated image are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", and the operation means is allowed to emit light in the second light emitting mode. When the state (2nd G reception permissible state) occurs, the precursor effect display is always executed, but if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is displayed, this will be used as a trigger to disable the precursor effect display. Since the display state is displayed, it is expected to suppress a decline in game interest due to the visibility of operation-related performances being obstructed by the foreshadowing performances.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned twenty-third configuration G23, the reception acceptance state ( 5th G reception acceptance state), and reception acceptance state (2G reception acceptance state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the operating means emits light in the first light emission mode. The same mode (specific precursor display ZET) can appear as the precursor effect display. According to such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which type of acceptance permission state will occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-third configuration G23, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23, it is not necessarily necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the above-mentioned 23rd configuration G23 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the 24th configuration G24, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, the 1G reception permission state (or the 1G reception permission state according to the modification, the 11G reception permission state according to the modification), and the 2G reception permission state (or the 1G reception permission state according to the modification), Assuming that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an acceptance permission state and a 5th G reception permission state, when the pachinko machine 1 is allowed to accept an operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a sample image of the operation means is displayed. The screen image display is capable of displaying the screen image, and when the screen image display is set to a non-display state, the screen image display is made difficult to view until the screen image display is set to the non-display state. can display "extinction EF display (disappearance effect display)" as another image display, and the sample image display can display "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" in the reception acceptance state. )" and "second color scheme (specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red))". There are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "a predetermined time" and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time." In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time" (Fig. 352 (g), 355(g), FIG. 360(g), and FIG. 393(g)), the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" and the periodic change is "longer than a predetermined time". In either case, when the sample image display is set to a hidden state, the sample image display Since the extinction effect display can be displayed as a separate image display (see FIG. 360(h)), it can be expected to suitably maintain the interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fourth configuration G24, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", (See Figure 352(g), Figure 355(g), Figure 360(g), Figure 393(g)). When there is a situation where a type-specific reception permissible state (second G reception permissible state) in which "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" may be displayed as an image display, and the corresponding sample image display Type (first G acceptance permission state (or modified example There are both cases in which the 1st G reception permissible state according to the modification example and the 11th G reception permissible state according to the modification example) are occurring. Furthermore, when the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (see FIG. 360(g)), the corresponding When the sample image display is set to a non-display state, the “extinction EF display (disappearance effect display)” as an image display other than the sample image display may be displayed. 2G reception permissible state) is always occurring. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", if the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", The situation is such that there is always a state in which reception is permitted for each species in which the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" may be displayed, but the sample image display is not displayed in the "first color scheme". For example, acceptance permissible states for types in which "extinction EF display (disappearance effect display)" may be displayed and acceptance permissible states for types in which "disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)" may not be displayed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize which of these is occurring, it is difficult to recognize whether the sample image is displayed before the visibility of the sample image display is deteriorated by "disappearance EF display (disappearance effect display)". There is a growing need to check the aspect (color scheme, etc.), and it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fourth configuration G24, even when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time". is displayed, the type of reception for which there is a possibility that a "disappearance effect display" as an image display different from the sample image display may be displayed when the sample image display is hidden. The situation is such that the permissible state always occurs (see FIG. 369(g)). According to such a configuration, even when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", by checking periodic changes in the sample image display, the "extinction EF display (disappearance effect display)" can be displayed. '' may be displayed, and it is expected that the player will be able to maintain his/her interest in the game in a favorable manner.

Note that the type of reception permissible state refers to the types of post-reception displays that are available in multiple types, and even if there is only one type, the post-reception display corresponding to the reception permissible state is It may be executed in one of a plurality of modes (high expectation mode, low expectation mode, etc.). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 24th configuration G24, when the post-acceptance display is executed in a high expectation mode, the extinction effect display is displayed, but when the post-acceptance display is executed in a low expectation mode Even if the extinction effect display is not displayed, there is a possibility that the ``extinction EF display (disappearance effect display)'' may be displayed as an image display different from the ``sample image display.'' This is a situation that is bound to occur."

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 24th configuration G24, the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" is such that the simulated image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic change in the simulated image display is " If the operation is accepted while the image is displayed in units of "longer than a predetermined time", or if the image is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic changes in the image are displayed in the "second color scheme" It may be possible to display the same image display even when the image is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (for example, FIGS. 360(g), (h), and 362(d)). reference). According to such a configuration, once the operation is accepted, it becomes difficult to recognize in which manner the color scheme of the sample image display has been applied, and it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. can be expected.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 24th configuration G24, the "extinction EF display (extinction effect display)" is
・When the operation is accepted when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". , when the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the same image display is displayed. (see, for example, FIGS. 360(g), (h), and 362(d)),
- If the operation is accepted when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" and the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" ( 390(g), (h), and 392(h)), the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme" and the periodic change in the sample image display is "for a period longer than a predetermined time". If an operation is accepted while the image is displayed in units of
It may be possible to have both. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to recognize in which light emission mode the operating means is emitting light, and it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

It should be noted that the operation is accepted when the ``sample image display'' is displayed in the ``first color scheme'' and periodic changes in the ``sample image display'' are displayed in units of ``time longer than a predetermined time.'' and ``When the sample image display is displayed in the ``second color scheme,'' and the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of ``time longer than a predetermined time.'' , it may also be a case where different types of reception permission states are occurring. Then, in addition to this, the "extinguishing EF display (extinguishing effect display)" may be displayed as the same image display.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fourth configuration G24, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. It may be something.

Furthermore, in order to realize the twenty-fourth configuration G24, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the above-mentioned 24th configuration G24 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

Further, for example, as the 25th configuration G25, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, the 1st G reception permission state, the 2nd G reception permission state, the 5th G reception permission state, and the 6th G reception permission state (or If the pachinko machine 1 is configured to have a 6th G reception permission state) and an 11th G reception permission state, when the operation reception for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, the It is possible to display a simulated image display, and it is possible to output an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the operation means is in a state where operation is permitted, or that the operation means is in a state where operation is permitted. In the reception acceptance state, the sample image display is "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)") and "second color scheme (specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)". ))", and the periodic changes can be displayed in a "predetermined time" unit; In some cases, the time period is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time." In this regard, when the reception permission state occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (see FIG. 369(g)), and (See Figure 352(g), Figure 360(g), Figure 372(g), Figure 375(g), Figure 390(g)). Since the reception acceptance sound can be output even when the game is played (see Figure 352(g), Figure 360(k), and Figure 369(k)), it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. It can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fifth configuration G25, periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the pattern image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". In this case, the reception permission sound is always output when the reception permission state occurs (see FIGS. 369(g) and (k)). In addition, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", when the acceptance permission state occurs, When the acceptance permission sound is output (see Figure 352(g), (k) and Figure 360(g), (k)), and when the acceptance permission sound is not output (see Figure 372(g) and Figure 360(g), (k)). 375 (g), see Figure 390 (g)). According to such a configuration, when the acceptance acceptance sound is output, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed such that they appear in units of "predetermined time" and in units of "time longer than predetermined time". Since you will be able to have both situations, you will be able to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fifth configuration G25, when the reception acceptance sound is not output, periodic changes in the simulated image display are not displayed in units of "predetermined time" (Fig. 372(g), FIG. 375(g), and FIG. 390(g)). In addition, the sample image display is prevented from being displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" (see FIG. 372(g), FIG. 375(g), and FIG. 390(g)). According to such a configuration, when the reception permission sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize that operation reception is now permitted, and the operation reception can be performed without worrying about various production modes. Since the player can concentrate only on what is being played, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game will be suitably maintained. In this case, if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time" or the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme", the reception acceptance state is satisfied. Since the reception permission sound is always output when the sound occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time" or when the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme". This will make it less likely that you will forget to perform an operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fifth configuration G25, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time" ( In the 5th G reception permission state), even if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, this does not trigger the reception permission sound to be terminated midway (Fig. 369 (g) , (k)). In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", an acceptance permission sound is output. If an operation is accepted while the process is in progress, the process may be terminated prematurely (see Figures 360(g) and (k)), and the process may not be terminated prematurely (see Figures 352(g) and (k)). Therefore, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", when periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time", Even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is now possible to suitably indicate that the process will not be terminated prematurely. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display occur in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this will trigger the process to be terminated prematurely. Since it is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not an operation has been accepted, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25, the simulated image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time". In this case, if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound is always terminated midway using this as a trigger (see Figures 360 (g) and (k)). ). In other words, in this case, even if periodic changes in the sample image display occur in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", if the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)", If an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this can be used as an opportunity to suitably indicate that the reception permission sound is to be terminated midway.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fifth configuration G25, a precursor effect display suggesting that the reception permission state will occur can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception permission state occurs (first G reception permissible state, 2nd G reception permissible state, 5th G reception permissible state). In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time", when the foreshadow effect display is displayed, Even if an operation is accepted, the precursor effect display is not hidden from view (see FIGS. 369(f) and (g)), and the preview image display is set to "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". If the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will be triggered. (See FIGS. 352(f) and (g) and FIGS. 360(f) and (g)). According to such a configuration, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", when an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this is It becomes possible to suggest in what manner the periodic change in the display of the sample image appears, depending on whether the display is turned off as a trigger or not.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the 2nd G reception permission state occurs, the sample image display is performed in one of a plurality of modes including a predetermined color scheme, a specific color scheme, and a special color scheme (for example, any of the predetermined color scheme, specific color scheme, and special color scheme). ), and in this case, the special color scheme will be used only in the second G acceptance acceptance state among the above-mentioned acceptance acceptance states. In this regard, when the configuration according to the modification is adopted as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25, when the sample image display is displayed in the "third color scheme (special color scheme)", the precursor effect display is If an operation is accepted while the image is being displayed, it will always be hidden, so when the image is displayed in the "third color scheme (special color scheme)", the image will not be displayed. It becomes possible to quickly recognize that the precursor effect display will be turned into a non-display state in response to the reception of an operation, without checking the periodic changes in .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fifth configuration G25, the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time". In the case where the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", the precursor effect display is the same ( Because it can be displayed with a specific precursor display (ZET) (see Figures 352(f), 360(f), and 369(f)), it is possible to recognize which periodic changes appear in the sample image display. This will allow you to maintain a good sense of tension. However, as a mode of displaying an omen effect, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", Further prepare a mode in which the image may appear, but cannot appear when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time". You may also do so.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-fifth configuration G25, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 25th configuration G25, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a plurality of types of acceptance permission states; for example, an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated) Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described twenty-fifth configuration G25 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, if the 26th configuration G26 includes the first G reception permission state according to the modified example, the second G reception permission state, and the fifth G reception permission state among the reception permission states described above, pachinko In the machine 1, when reception of operation for the operation means (for example, operation button 410) is allowed, it is possible to display a simulated image display of the operation means (for example, operation button 410); In the permissible state, multiple color schemes including "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)") and "second color scheme (specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red))" In either case, the periodic change can be displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the periodic change can be displayed in units of "time longer than predetermined time". It may be displayed as it appears in . In this regard, in the reception permission state, the sample image display may be hidden while the operation reception for the operation means is permitted (Fig. 355(c) and (g)). (Reference), it is now expected to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when in a reception-permissive state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-sixth configuration G26, periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the pattern image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". (5th G reception permission state), in the reception permission state, the sample image display is not hidden while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted (Fig. 370(c), ( (see g)). In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme" (the first G reception acceptance state according to the modification) , 2nd G reception permission state) is a case where the sample image display is hidden while operation reception on the operating means is permitted in the reception permission state (see FIGS. 355(c) and 355(g)). ) and cases where the sample image display is not hidden (see FIGS. 361(c) and (g)). According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme", if the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the operation means can be The sample image display is not hidden while operation reception is permitted, but periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". In some cases, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the sample image display is hidden when accepting operations on the operating means is permitted. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-sixth configuration G26, even if the periodic change in the pattern image display is displayed in units of “time longer than a predetermined time,” In the case where the image is displayed in a two-color scheme (specific color scheme), the sample image display will not be hidden while the reception of operations on the operating means is permitted in the acceptance permission state. According to such a configuration, even if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", operations can be performed by checking the color scheme of the sample image display. Since there are cases where it is possible to recognize that the replica image display will not be hidden while the operation reception on the means is permitted, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-sixth configuration G26, a precursor effect display suggesting that the reception permission state will occur can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception permission state occurs. In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time", when the foreshadow effect display is displayed, Even if the operation is accepted, the precursor effect display is not hidden (see FIGS. 369(f) and (g)), and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will trigger the precursor effect display. It was made to be in a hidden state (see FIGS. 356(f) and (g) and FIGS. 360(f) and (g)). According to such a configuration, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", when an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this is It becomes possible to suggest in what manner the periodic change in the display of the sample image appears, depending on whether the display is turned off as a trigger or not.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-sixth configuration G26, the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time". In this case, if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the display (see FIGS. 360(f) and (g)). When the sample image is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" (it takes time to confirm, and it is difficult to reliably distinguish between the long and short of periodic changes), it is possible to detect a sign even without confirming the periodic change. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect display is to be hidden in response to operation reception.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-sixth configuration G26, the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time". , the harbinger effects are displayed in the same manner (specific harbinger display ZET) (see Figures 355(f), 360(f), and 369(f)), it is difficult to recognize which periodic changes appear in the sample image display. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension. However, this may occur if the precursor effect is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time". , it is also possible to further prepare a mode that cannot appear when the display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time".

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-sixth configuration G26, in the reception permission state, when the sample image display is set to the non-display state while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted (FIG. 355(c), ( (see g)), the light emitting mode in the operating means is made to continue without ending, so it can be expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the display of the simulated image being hidden. .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-sixth configuration G26, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned twenty-sixth configuration G26, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described twenty-sixth configuration G26 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the 27th configuration G27, among the above-mentioned reception permission states, a 2G reception permission state, a 5G reception permission state, and an 11G reception permission state (or a 1G reception permission state in which no omen effect display is executed) ), in the pachinko machine 1, when the acceptance permission state occurs, there are cases in which a precursor effect is displayed and cases in which a precursor effect is not displayed. When acceptance of an operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and the simulated image display is in an acceptance permitted state. Any one of a plurality of color schemes including "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)") and "second color scheme (specific color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red))" It is possible to display periodic changes in units of "predetermined time", and cases in which the periodic changes appear in units of "time longer than predetermined time". may be displayed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 22nd configuration G22, the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time". , the sample image is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time"; Since the precursor effect display can be displayed over the timing at which the acceptance permission state occurs, it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned twenty-seventh configuration G27, periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the pattern image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". In the acceptance acceptance state, if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, the precursor effect display will not be hidden from view (Fig. 369(e)). , (f), (g)). In addition, in the reception acceptance state in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", an omen production is performed. If an operation is accepted while the display is being displayed, this can be used as a trigger to hide the precursor effect display (see Figures 360(e), (f), and (g)). . According to such a configuration, if an operation is accepted while the precursory effect display is being displayed, it is determined whether or not the precursory effect display is to be hidden. Should the operation be accepted while the precursory effect display is displayed, or should the operation be accepted after the precursory effect display is hidden? It can be expected to suitably maintain gaming interest when selecting.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned twenty-seventh configuration G27, periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the pattern image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". When a reception permissible state occurs (fifth G reception permissible state), the foreshadow effect display is always executed. In addition, if a periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". In this case, there are both cases in which a precursor effect display is executed (2nd G reception acceptance state) and cases in which a precursor effect display is not executed (11th G reception acceptance state). According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", there are both cases where the precursor effect display is executed and cases where the precursor effect display is not executed. Therefore, it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension. However, even if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the foreshadowing effect Since the display is always executed, it is difficult for the player to forget to perform an operation, and it can be expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, there is a reception acceptance state (5th G reception acceptance state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". , In the reception acceptance state in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", there is no precursor effect. The same mode (specific omen display ZET) can appear as a display. According to such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which type of acceptance permission state will occur.

In addition, a reception acceptance state (second G reception) in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" If a permissible state) occurs, the precursor effect display is always executed, but if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to turn the precursor effect display into a hidden state. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to the visibility of operation-related performances being obstructed by the precursor performances.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 27th configuration G27, the 11th G reception permission state is defined as ``It is possible to output the reception permission sound, but even if the operation reception is performed while the reception permission sound is being output, It may also be modified as an "acceptance acceptable state" in which the output of the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated midway. In such a configuration, the reception acceptance state (5th G reception acceptance state) is such that the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time". If this occurs, even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this will not be terminated midway (see FIGS. 369(e), (g), and (k)). On the other hand, if an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time" ( 2nd G reception permission state, modified 11G reception permission state), if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, this will be used as a trigger to terminate the operation midway (see FIG. 360(k)); There will be both a case where the process is not terminated midway (a modified 11th G reception permissible state) and a case where the process is not terminated midway. In other words, in this case, when the reception acceptance sound is terminated midway, the periodic change in the sample image display is suitably suggested, but when the acceptance acceptance sound is not terminated midway, the pattern of the periodic change in the sample image display is indicated. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which periodic changes have appeared, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 27th configuration G27, the 1st G acceptance acceptance state is transformed into an acceptance acceptance state in which no precursor effect display is executed, and then the 11th G acceptance acceptance state is replaced with the 11th G acceptance acceptance state. Good too. Even with such a configuration, the 11th G reception permission state is defined as ``It is possible to output the reception permission sound, but even if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, this will trigger the reception permission state. It is possible to obtain the same effect as when changing the state to "an acceptance permissive state in which the output of permissible sounds is not terminated prematurely."

Alternatively, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-seventh configuration G27, the first G acceptance acceptance state may be further provided without being transformed into an acceptance acceptance state in which no precursor effect display is executed. In such a configuration, the reception acceptance state (5th G reception acceptance state) is such that the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time". If this occurs, even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this will not be terminated midway (see FIGS. 369(e), (g), and (k)). On the other hand, if an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time" ( (1st G reception permissible state, 2nd G reception permissible state, 11th G reception permissible state) are cases in which the reception permissible sound is output (1st G reception permissible state, 2nd G reception permissible state) and cases in which the reception permissible sound is not output. (11th G reception permission state), and if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, this will be used as an opportunity to terminate the operation prematurely (in the same way as the warning effect display is terminated prematurely). There are both cases (see FIG. 360(k)) and cases where the precursor effect display is not ended midway (despite being ended midway) (see FIG. 352(k)). In other words, in this case, when the precursor effect display is ended midway, the acceptance permission sound is also made to suitably suggest in what manner the periodic changes in the simulated image display were appearing when the precursor effect display is ended midway, and the precursor effect is When the reception permission sound is not terminated even though the display is terminated in the middle, it becomes difficult to recognize the manner in which the periodic changes in the sample image display are occurring, and the sense of tension is suitably reduced. be expected to maintain it.

Alternatively, when the reception permission state occurs, the reception permission sound may not necessarily be audibly output. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-seventh configuration G27, the first G reception permission state is indicated by a precursor effect display. It is also possible to transform the state into a state where the reception is not executed, and then provide both the first G reception and the eleventh G reception.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-seventh configuration G27, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned twenty-seventh configuration G27, it is not necessarily necessary to provide acceptance permission states of multiple types; for example, an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described twenty-seventh configuration G27 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, as the 28th configuration G28, among the above-mentioned acceptance permission states, the 1G reception permission state according to the modification (or the 6G reception permission state according to the modification), the 2G reception permission state, and the 5G reception permission state If the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a reception permission state, when the operation reception on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, the pachinko machine 1 can display a simulated image display of the operation means, It is possible to display a background image that is displayed behind other image displays, and in the reception acceptance state, the background image can be displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme (for example, white-based It is possible to display periodic changes in any one of a plurality of color schemes including "color scheme)" and "second color scheme (specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)"), and the periodic change There are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time", and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in units of "time longer than predetermined time". In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", the operation on the operating means While reception is permitted, the image display as a background image may be changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed (see Figure 355(d) and Figure 355(d)). 375(d), etc.), it can be expected to favorably maintain gaming interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-eighth configuration G28, periodic changes in the pattern image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", and the pattern image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)". (5th G reception permission state), the image display as the background image is not changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that time while the operation reception for the operation means is permitted. No (see FIGS. 369(d), (e), and (g)). On the other hand, if the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", the operation means 355 (d), (e), (g) (see Figures 375(d), (e), and (g)), and when the image display as the background image is not changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up until then (see Figure 360(d)). , (e), (g)). According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)", the image display as the background image is This makes it difficult to recognize whether the image display is changed to a different image display than the one that was being displayed, but if periodic changes in the image display are made to appear in "predetermined time" units, the background image Because it is possible to recognize that the image display will not change to a different image display from the image display that was displayed up to that point, you can do so without being aware of the possibility that such a background change will occur (when the timing for a background change has arrived). It becomes possible to prompt the user to accept the operation (without waiting for the user to do so).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-eighth configuration G28, even if the periodic change in the pattern image display is displayed in units of “time longer than a predetermined time”, 2 color scheme (specific color scheme)", the image display as a background image is changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed while the operation reception for the operation means is permitted. (See Figures 360(d), (e), and (g)). According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the background image is It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the image display will be changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed, but in that case, the image display will be displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)". If the background image is changed, it is possible to recognize that the image display as a background image will not be changed to a different image display from the image display that was displayed previously, so be aware of the possibility that such a background change may occur. It becomes possible to prompt the user to accept the operation without any delay (without waiting for the timing at which the background change occurs).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-eighth configuration G28, when the reception permission state occurs when the "specific image display (first background image HK-G1)" is displayed as the background image, the sample image When periodic changes in the display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" (Fig. 355 (d), (e) , (g), and FIGS. 360(d), (e), and (g)), periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", and the sample image display is is sometimes displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" (see FIGS. 360(d), (e), and (g)). According to such a configuration, when the "specific image display (first background image HK-G1)" is displayed as the background image, the background image is displayed while the operation reception on the operation means is permitted. Although there is a possibility that the image display will be changed to a different image display from the image display that was previously displayed (specific image display), it is possible to determine whether or not this is possible by checking the state of the sample image display. It becomes possible to suitably suggest the following.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-eighth configuration G28, the acceptance acceptance state in which no background change occurs may occur when an image display that cannot be displayed in the acceptance acceptance state in which a background change occurs appears as a background image. You can do it like this. In addition, the reception permissible state in which no background change occurs occurs when an image display that cannot be displayed in the reception permissible state in which the background change occurs appears as a background image (for example, the fifth reception permissible state), and the background The image display (first background image HK-G1) that can be displayed even in the reception acceptance state where a change occurs is made to appear when it appears as a background image (for example, in the second reception acceptance state). Good too.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-eighth configuration G28, the light emission from the operating means may be terminated based on the acceptance of the operation. In this respect, the sample image display is not hidden but is displayed at the time of termination (for example, FIGS. 360(e) and 369(g), FIG. 369(e), (see g)), even if the display state of the sample image is continued after the operation has been accepted, it is preferable to indicate that the operation has been accepted properly. become able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-eighth configuration G28, a precursor effect display suggesting that the reception permission state will occur may be made executable so as to straddle the timing at which the reception permission state occurs. In this regard, if the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time" (5th G reception acceptance state), the foreshadowing effect is displayed. Even if an operation is accepted while is being displayed, the foreshadowing effect display is not turned into a hidden state using this as a trigger. On the other hand, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time" (for example, the second reception acceptance State), if an operation is accepted while the precursory effect display is being displayed, the precursory effect display is set to a non-displayed state using this as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if an operation is accepted while the precursory effect display is being displayed, it is determined whether or not the precursory effect display is to be hidden using periodic changes in the sample image display. Select whether to accept the operation while the foreshadowing display is displayed or to accept the operation after the foreshadowing display is hidden. It can be expected to suitably maintain gaming interest when playing.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 28th configuration G28, the sample image display is displayed in the "second color scheme (specific color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time". (second reception permissible state), the precursor effect display is always executed, but if an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to hide the precursor effect display. This is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to visibility of operation-related performances being obstructed by precursory performances.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-eighth configuration G28, when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time" ( 5G reception acceptance state), and when the sample image display is displayed in the "first color scheme (predetermined color scheme)" and the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time" (second In the reception acceptance state), the same mode (specific precursor display ZET) can appear as the precursor effect display. According to such a configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which type of acceptance permission state will occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-eighth configuration G28, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned twenty-eighth configuration G28, it is not necessary to have multiple types of reception permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide reception permission states of one type (or a number of types smaller than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-described twenty-eighth configuration G28 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, if the 29th configuration G29 includes the 7th G reception permission state, the 9th G reception permission state, and the 11th G reception permission state among the above-mentioned reception permission states, in the pachinko machine 1, It is possible to generate a multiple-time acceptance permission state in which operation acceptance for a "specific operation unit (for example, operation button 410)" is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple-time acceptance permission state, an operation reception for the "specific operation unit" is performed. Then, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can display a simulated image display that simulates the "specific operation section", and the simulated image display can be displayed such that periodic changes appear in units of "predetermined time" in a state where multiple receptions are allowed. (7th G reception permissible state), and when the periodic change is displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (11th G reception permissible state), There is a case where it is not displayed (9th G reception permissible state). In this regard, the state where multiple receptions are allowed is the "first type multiple receptions allowed state" where there is a possibility that when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section", the state where the multiple receptions are allowed is terminated. (see Figures 378(b) and (c)), and when an operation is accepted for the "specific operation section," this may trigger the termination of the multiple reception allowed state. Since there are cases where the "second type multiple reception permissible state" occurs without (see FIGS. 384(b) and (c) and FIGS. 390(b) and (c)), It is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when in the state where multiple receptions are allowed.

In addition, in the 9th G reception permission state according to the above-mentioned production example, by not displaying the sample image display itself in the state where operation reception is permitted, "reception permission in which periodic changes are not displayed" We decided to realize the ``state''. However, instead of this, although the sample image is displayed, it is displayed in such a way that periodic changes do not appear (static display), thereby realizing an "acceptable state in which periodic changes are not displayed." You may also do so.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 29th configuration G29, when the sample image display is not displayed with periodic changes (9th G acceptance acceptance state), the multiple acceptance acceptance state is the above-mentioned "first type". "Multiple operations allowed state (possible to be terminated midway before the set time elapses)" does not occur, and "second type multiple operations allowed state (possible to be ended midway before the set time elapses)" occurs. (no gender)" is always generated. According to such a configuration, if periodic changes in the sample image display are not displayed, it is possible to recognize that no matter how many operations are performed, there is no possibility that the acceptance permission state will be terminated multiple times. It is now expected that games will be provided in a way that eliminates the feeling of tension such as ``having to perform operations many times until the multiple-acceptance state is terminated.''

In addition, when the sample image display is displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the sample image display appear, the multiple reception permission state is "first type multiple reception permission state" and "second type multiple reception permission state". Since it is made difficult to recognize whether the situation is occurring in a "tolerable state", it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, even in cases where periodic changes in the image display are displayed, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", The multiple reception allowed state does not occur as the "first type multiple operation allowed state (possible termination before the set time elapses)" and the second type multiple operation allowed state ( (There is no possibility that the process will be terminated prematurely before the set time elapses)'' may be configured to always occur. According to such a configuration, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the acceptance state is terminated multiple times no matter how many operations are performed. Since it is possible to recognize that there is no possibility, it is expected that the game will be provided in a way that eliminates the tension of having to operate many times until the state where multiple receptions are allowed is ended. will be done.

In addition, if periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the state where multiple receptions are allowed is "1st type multiple operation allowed state (possibility of being terminated midway before the set time elapses)". 378 (b) and (c)). In this regard, if the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 28th configuration G28 is further provided with the 8th G reception permission state, the multiple reception permission state can be changed to ``first type multiple operation permission state (elapse of set time (There is a possibility that the process will be terminated prematurely before the set time has elapsed)", and when it occurs as a "second type multiple operation permissible state (there is no possibility that the process will be terminated prematurely before the set time elapses)" It can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the twenty-ninth configuration G29, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 29th configuration G29, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the above-mentioned 29th configuration G29 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, the 30th configuration G30 may include a 7th G reception permission state (or an 8th G reception permission state), a 9th G reception permission state, and an 11th G reception permission state among the above-mentioned reception permission states. If this is the case, the pachinko machine 1 can generate a multiple-acceptance allowing state in which operation acceptance for a "specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410)" is allowed multiple times, and in the multiple-acceptance allowing state, a "specific When an operation is accepted for the operation section, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation acceptance can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can display a simulated image display that simulates the "specific operation section", and the simulated image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in the state where multiple receptions are allowed (7th G There is a case where the periodic change is not displayed (9th G reception permissible state). In this regard, the state where multiple receptions are allowed is when the post-reception display is displayed multiple times just by keeping the "specific operation section" operated (see Figures 378(b) and 378(c), Figure 381(b)). ), (c), see FIGS. 384(b), (c)) and cases where the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times even if the specific operation section is maintained in an operated state (see FIGS. 390(b), (c)). (See c)), it is expected that the tension in the state of accepting multiple receptions will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the 9th G reception permission state according to the above-mentioned production example, by not displaying the sample image display itself in the state where operation reception is permitted, "reception permission in which periodic changes are not displayed" We decided to realize the ``state''. However, instead of this, although the sample image is displayed, it is displayed in such a way that periodic changes do not appear (static display), thereby realizing an "acceptable state in which periodic changes are not displayed." You may also do so.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 30th configuration G30, when the sample image display is not displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear (9th G acceptance acceptance state), the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state. The post-reception display will always be displayed multiple times. According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is not displayed with periodic changes, the so-called auto continuous hit function is always enabled, so that the display can be performed while suitably maintaining a sense of tension. It can be expected that this will suppress the decline in interest in gaming when players are not playing games.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 30th configuration G30, in the "multiple reception permissible state" in which the sample image display is displayed with periodic changes, the "specific operation section" is maintained in the operated state. If the post-reception display is displayed multiple times just by doing so (see Figures 378(b) and (c) and Figures 381(b) and (c)), it may be necessary to maintain the "specific operation section" in the operated state. Even if it does, the post-acceptance display is not executed multiple times (see FIGS. 390(b) and 390(c)). According to such a configuration, when the sample image display is displayed with periodic changes, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled, so that the sense of tension is suitably reduced. can be expected to be maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 30th configuration G30, the sample image display is displayed in a state in which the "specific operation section" is operated in the "multiple acceptance acceptance state" of the type in which periodic changes are displayed. In the "multiple reception permissible state (11th G reception permissible state)" where the post-reception display will not be executed multiple times even if maintained, the post-reception display will always be displayed multiple times just by maintaining the "specific operation section" operated. Periodic changes in the sample image display are now displayed in a longer time unit than in the "Multiple reception allowed state (7th G reception allowed state, 8th G reception allowed state)" type that is executed twice ( (See FIG. 378(g), FIG. 381(g), and FIG. 390(g)). According to such a configuration, it is necessary to take time to determine whether the periodic change is fast or slow, so after the sample image display is displayed, it is necessary to immediately determine whether or not the so-called auto continuous hit function will be enabled. It is now possible to make it impossible to recognize. As a result, until it can be determined whether the periodic changes are fast or slow, it will be possible to encourage users to try out the auto continuous hit function, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension. It becomes like this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 30th configuration G30, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in short time (predetermined time) units (7th G acceptance acceptance state, 8th G acceptance acceptance state), the so-called By making sure that the automatic continuous hit function is always enabled, it is possible to increase the importance of determining whether periodic changes are fast or slow, and it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 30th configuration G30, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned 30th configuration G30, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 30th configuration G30 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, the 31st configuration G31 may include a 2nd G reception permission state, an 8th G reception permission state (or a 7G reception permission state), and an 11th G reception permission state among the above-mentioned reception permission states. Assuming that, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception of operations for the "specific operation section (for example, operation button 410)" is allowed, it is possible to display a mock image display that simulates the "specific operation section", and the acceptance is allowed. The state occurs as a "one-time reception permissible state" in which an operation reception for a "specific operation part" is allowed only once (2nd G reception permissible state), and a state in which an operation reception for a "specific operation part" is allowed multiple times. There are cases where this occurs as a "multiple reception permissible state" (8th G reception permissible state, 11th G reception permissible state). The periodic change can be displayed in any one of a plurality of color schemes including a color scheme in which the periodic change is displayed in units of "predetermined time", may be displayed so that it appears in units of "time longer than a predetermined time".In this respect, periodic changes in the image display are displayed so as to appear in units of "predetermined time". In this case, the reception permissible state can occur as the above-mentioned "multiple reception permissible state" (see FIGS. 381(b), (c), and (g)), and the periodic change in the sample image display is "from a predetermined time." 360 (b), (c), (g). )), it becomes possible to improve one's interest in gaming.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time" (8th G acceptance acceptance state), the acceptance acceptance state is the above-mentioned " It never occurs as a "one time reception allowed state" and always occurs as a "multiple reception allowed state" (see FIGS. 381(b) and 381(g)). In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception allowed state, 11th G reception allowed state), the above "1 time reception allowed state" Both cases occur as "acceptance permitted state" (see Figure 360(b), (g)) and cases occur as "multiple reception permitted state" (see Figures 390(b), (g)). I made it so that there is. According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", it is not possible to recognize that the reception permission state occurs as the "multiple reception permission state". This allows users to be encouraged to perform multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the reception permission state is "single reception permission state" and "multiple reception permission state". Since it is made difficult to recognize when a situation occurs, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the periodic change in the pattern image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time", the pattern image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme (for example, red is The basic color scheme) is not displayed. In other words, in this case, if the sample image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)", the reception acceptance state will be changed to the above "1" without checking the periodic changes in the sample image display. Since it becomes possible to recognize that a "return acceptance allowed state" has occurred, it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the sample image display is displayed in a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)", the periodic change in the sample image display is There are both cases where it is displayed in units of ``a predetermined time'' (8th G acceptance acceptance state) and cases where it is displayed in units of ``a time longer than a predetermined time'', and the so-called auto continuous hit function is Since there are both cases in which it is activated (second G reception permissible state) and cases in which it is not activated (eleventh G reception permissible state), a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the periodic change in the display of the sample image is displayed in units of "predetermined time" (when the acceptance permission state occurs multiple times), the sample image The display can be performed in a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" (see FIG. 381(g)). In this regard, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (it is difficult to recognize whether a state in which one reception is allowed or a state in which multiple receptions are allowed) occurs. If the sample image is displayed in a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" (see FIG. 360(g)), the acceptance state is changed to the above-mentioned "multiple acceptance acceptance state". ”, and it always occurs as the “one-time reception allowed state” mentioned above. In other words, as mentioned above, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", basically the reception permission state changes to the "one reception permission state" and the "multiple reception permission state". This makes it difficult to recognize whether the error occurs in the ``receiving acceptance state.'' However, in this case, if the sample image display is displayed in a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" (which can also be used in a state where multiple receptions are allowed), a "multiple receptions allowed state" occurs. Since the "one time reception allowed state" is always generated, it is expected that the game will be able to provide an interesting presentation and maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", a message related to the reception of an operation for the "specific operation section" is displayed. is always performed (such as "random hitting" shown in FIGS. 382(c) and (d)), but if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", , when a message related to accepting an operation for a specific operation unit is displayed (such as "one blow" shown in FIGS. 362(c) and (d), and "meteorite" shown in FIGS. 391(c) and (d)) ) and cases in which the message is not displayed may be provided. For such a configuration, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31 is further provided with a 1st G acceptance permission state, and the message display is not performed in the 1G acceptance permission state. This can be achieved by (transforming so that "Press" shown in FIGS. 354(b) and 354(c) is not displayed). According to such a configuration, when a message is not displayed, it is possible to suitably suggest that only one operation reception is allowed (this always occurs as a one-time reception permission state). Since it is possible to ensure that a message is displayed when multiple operations are accepted, it can be expected that forgetting to perform an operation or delaying the start of an operation will be less likely to occur.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, when the message is displayed in the reception acceptance state in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", , when the reception permissible state occurs as the above-mentioned "multiple reception permissible state" (see Figures 390 to 392), and when it occurs as the above-mentioned "single reception permissible state" (see Figures 360 to 362). ), it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 31st configuration G31, a message is displayed in the "multiple acceptance acceptance state" in which periodic changes in the display of the sample image are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". The display (the "meteorite" shown in Figures 391(c) and (d)) is displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the image display appear in "predetermined time" units. (See FIGS. 382(c) and 382(d)), so that it is possible to infer the merits and demerits of periodic changes in the simulated image display through the form of the message. Become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 31st configuration G31, there is a "multiple acceptance acceptance state (8th G acceptance acceptance state)" in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time". Then, the message display may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. However, in this case, all of these modes are displayed in the "multiple reception permissible state (11th G reception permissible state)" in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". It is desirable that the message is not displayed as a message.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirty-first configuration G31, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned 31st configuration G31, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient as long as the above-mentioned 31st configuration G31 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, the 32nd configuration G32 may include a 2nd G reception permission state, an 8th G reception permission state (or a 7G reception permission state), and an 11G reception permission state among the above-mentioned reception permission states. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is allowed to accept an operation for the "specific operation section (for example, the operation button 410)," it is possible to display a mock image display that simulates the "specific operation section," and It is possible to output an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the operation is allowed for the ``operation section'' or that the operation is allowed for the ``specific operation section'', and the acceptance permission state is set. occurs as a "single reception permissible state" in which the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is allowed only once (2nd G reception permission state), and when the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is allowed multiple times. There are cases where this occurs as a "multiple reception permissible state" (8th G reception permissible state, 11th G reception permissible state). In addition, the sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the reception permission state, and when the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (8th G reception permission state), There are cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception permissible state, 11th G reception permissible state), and the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "a predetermined period of time". ”, the acceptance permission state can occur as “multiple reception permission state” (see Figures 381(b), (c), and (g)), and the When periodic changes are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the acceptance permission state can occur as the above-mentioned "one time reception permission state" (Figure 360(b) , (c), (g)). In this regard, when the reception permission state occurs, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", and displays are displayed in units of "time longer than the predetermined time". Since the acceptance acceptance sound can be outputted in either case, it can be expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 32nd configuration G32, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (8th G acceptance acceptance state), the acceptance acceptance state is "1 It never occurs as a "multiple reception allowed state" and always occurs as a "multiple reception allowed state" (see FIGS. 381(b), (c), and (g)). In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception allowed state, 11th G reception allowed state), the reception allowed state is changed to "1 time reception allowed". 390 (b), (c), (g)) and 390 (b), (c), (g). )). According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", it is not possible to recognize that the reception permission state occurs as the "multiple reception permission state". This allows users to be encouraged to perform multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the reception permission state is "single reception permission state" and "multiple reception permission state". Since it is made difficult to recognize when a situation occurs, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time" (when the reception permission state occurs multiple times), the reception permission sound can be output in a "specific mode (for example, specific mode B)" (see FIG. 381(k)). In this regard, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (it is difficult to recognize whether a state in which one reception is allowed or a state in which multiple receptions are allowed) occurs. If the reception permission sound is output in the "specific mode (for example, specific mode B)" (see FIG. 360(k)), the reception permission state occurs as the above-mentioned "multiple reception permission state". , so it always occurs as the above-mentioned "one-time reception allowed state". In other words, as mentioned above, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", basically the reception permission state changes to the "one reception permission state" and the "multiple reception permission state". This makes it difficult to recognize whether the error occurs in the ``receiving acceptance state.'' However, at this time, if the reception permission sound is output in a "specific manner" (which can also be used in the multiple reception permission state), the "multiple reception permission state" does not occur, and the "single reception permission state" does not occur. Since the "permissive state" is ensured to occur, it is expected that the production will be interesting and the tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "11th G reception permissible state", by not outputting the reception permissible sound itself, it was decided to realize a configuration in which the reception permissible sound is not output in a "specific manner". Although the permissible sound is output, the configuration may be realized by making it possible to output it only in a manner different from the "specific manner".

In addition, in both the above-mentioned "2nd G reception permissible state" and "8th G reception permissible state (or 7th G reception permissible state)", the reception permissible sound can be output in either normal mode A or specific mode B. However, only specific aspect B is common (same) as the acceptance acceptable sound for the "2nd G acceptance acceptance state" and the ``8th G acceptance acceptance state (or 7th G acceptance acceptance state)''. may be output as different sounds. Alternatively, the common (same) acceptance sound for the "2nd G acceptance acceptance state" and the "8th G acceptance acceptance state (or 7th G acceptance acceptance state)" is usually only aspect A, and for specific aspects, they are different from each other. It may also be output as a different sound. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the "single reception permissible state" or the "multiple reception permissible state" is occurring depending on which of the reception permissible sounds is output. In addition, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether a "single reception permissible state" or "multiple reception permissible state" is occurring, so it is difficult to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. become able to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", a message related to the reception of an operation for the "specific operation section" is displayed. is always performed (such as "random hitting" shown in FIGS. 382(c) and (d)), but if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", , when a message related to accepting an operation for a specific operation unit is displayed (such as "one blow" shown in FIGS. 362(c) and (d), and "meteorite" shown in FIGS. 391(c) and (d)) ) and cases in which the message is not displayed may be provided. For such a configuration, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32 is further provided with a 1st G acceptance permission state, and the message display is not performed in the 1G acceptance permission state. This can be achieved by (transforming so that "Press" shown in FIGS. 354(b) and 354(c) is not displayed). According to such a configuration, when a message is not displayed, it is possible to suitably suggest that only one operation reception is allowed (this always occurs as a one-time reception permission state). Since it is possible to ensure that a message is displayed when multiple operations are accepted, it can be expected that forgetting to perform an operation or delaying the start of an operation will be less likely to occur.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, when the message display is performed in the reception acceptance state in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", , when the reception permissible state occurs as the above-mentioned "multiple reception permissible state" (see Figures 390 to 392), and when it occurs as the above-mentioned "single reception permissible state" (see Figures 360 to 362). ), it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, a message is displayed in the "multiple acceptance acceptance state" in which periodic changes in the display of the sample image are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". The display (the "meteorite" shown in Figures 391(c) and (d)) is displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the image display appear in "predetermined time" units. (See FIGS. 382(c) and 382(d)), so that it is possible to infer the merits and demerits of periodic changes in the simulated image display through the form of the message. Become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned 32nd configuration G32, there is a "multiple acceptance acceptance state (8th G acceptance acceptance state)" in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time". Then, the message display may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. However, in this case, all of these modes are displayed in the "multiple reception permissible state (11th G reception permissible state)" in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". It is desirable that the message is not displayed as a message.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the 32nd configuration G32, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

Furthermore, in order to realize the above-mentioned 32nd configuration G32, it is not necessary to have multiple types of acceptance permission states; for example, it is not necessary to provide an acceptance permission state of one type (or a number of types less than the number of types illustrated). Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 32nd configuration G32 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

For example, the 33rd configuration G33 may include a 2nd G reception permission state, an 8th G reception permission state (or a 7G reception permission state), and an 11th G reception permission state among the above-mentioned reception permission states. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is allowed to accept an operation for the "specific operation section (for example, the operation button 410)," it is possible to display a mock image display that simulates the "specific operation section," and It is possible to display a foreshadowing display that suggests in advance that the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted, and the reception permission state is a "single reception permission state" in which the operation reception for the "specific operation section" is permitted only once. ” (2nd G reception permissible state), and 2nd G reception permissible state (8th G reception permissible state, 11th G reception permissible state). condition). In addition, the sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the reception permission state, and when the periodic changes are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (8th G reception permission state), When the periodic change is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time" (there are a 2nd G reception allowed state and an 11th G reception allowed state, and the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in a "predetermined time" unit). When displayed in units, the reception permission state can occur as a “multiple reception permission state” (see FIGS. 381(b), (c), and (g)), and the cycle of displaying the sample image When a change in the status is displayed in units of "a time longer than a predetermined time", the acceptance permission state can occur as a "one time reception permission state" (Fig. 360(b), ( (c), (g)).In this regard, when the reception permission state occurs, there are cases where periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time", and cases where periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "predetermined time", and Since the foreshadowing effect display can be displayed in either case, such as in the case where it appears in units of ``long time'', it can be expected to suitably maintain the interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of "predetermined time" (8th G acceptance acceptance state), the acceptance acceptance state is "1 It never occurs as a "multiple reception allowed state" and always occurs as a "multiple reception allowed state" (see FIGS. 381(b), (c), and (g)). In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (2nd G reception allowed state, 11th G reception allowed state), the reception allowed state is changed to "1 time reception allowed". Both cases occur as "permissible state" (see Figures 360(b) and (c)) and cases as "multiple reception permissible state" (see Figures 390(b) and (c)). I made it so. According to such a configuration, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", it is not possible to recognize that the reception permission state occurs as the "multiple reception permission state". This allows users to be encouraged to perform multiple operations from a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", the reception permission state is "single reception permission state" and "multiple reception permission state". Since it is made difficult to recognize when a situation occurs, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time" (when the acceptance permission state occurs multiple times), a precursory effect is displayed. can be displayed in a “specific manner (specific precursor display ZET)” (see FIG. 381(f)). In this regard, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" (it is difficult to recognize whether a state in which one reception is allowed or a state in which multiple receptions are allowed) occurs. When the precursor effect display is displayed in a "specific mode (specific precursor display ZET)" (see FIG. 360(f)), the reception permissible state occurs as the above-mentioned "multiple reception permissible state" , so it always occurs as the above-mentioned "one-time reception allowed state". In other words, as mentioned above, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", basically the reception permission state changes to the "one reception permission state" and the "multiple reception permission state". This makes it difficult to recognize whether the error occurs in the ``receiving acceptance state.'' However, in this case, if the precursor effect display is displayed in a "specific mode (specific precursor display ZET)", the "multiple reception permissible state" will not occur, and the "single reception permissible state" will always occur. Since it is made to occur, it is expected that it will add interest to the production and maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "11th G reception acceptance state", by not displaying the precursor effect display itself, it was decided to realize a configuration in which the precursor effect display is not output in a "specific mode (specific precursor display ZET)". , Instead of this, the foreshadow effect display is displayed, but this configuration is realized by making it possible to display it only in a mode different from the "specific mode (specific omen display ZET)". Good too.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, when periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", a message related to the reception of an operation for the "specific operation section" is displayed. is always performed (such as "random hitting" shown in FIGS. 382(c) and (d)), but if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", , when a message related to accepting an operation for a specific operation unit is displayed (such as "one blow" shown in FIGS. 362(c) and (d), and "meteorite" shown in FIGS. 391(c) and (d)) ) and cases in which the message is not displayed may be provided. For such a configuration, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33 is further provided with a 1st G acceptance permission state, and the message display is not performed in the 1G acceptance permission state. This can be achieved by (transforming so that "Press" shown in FIGS. 354(b) and 354(c) is not displayed). According to such a configuration, when a message is not displayed, it is possible to suitably suggest that only one operation reception is allowed (this always occurs as a one-time reception permission state). Since it is possible to ensure that a message is displayed when multiple operations are accepted, it can be expected that forgetting to perform an operation or delaying the start of an operation will be less likely to occur.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, when the message is displayed in the reception acceptance state in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time", , when the reception permissible state occurs as the above-mentioned "multiple reception permissible state" (see Figures 390 to 392), and when it occurs as the above-mentioned "single reception permissible state" (see Figures 360 to 362). ), it can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, a message is displayed in the "multiple acceptance acceptance state" in which periodic changes in the display of the sample image appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". The display (the "meteorite" shown in Figures 391(c) and (d)) is displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the image display appear in "predetermined time" units. (See FIGS. 382(c) and 382(d)), so that it is possible to infer the merits and demerits of periodic changes in the simulated image display through the form of the message. Become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the 33rd configuration G33, there is a "multiple acceptance acceptance state (8th G acceptance acceptance state)" in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time". Then, the message display may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. However, in this case, all of these modes are displayed in the "multiple reception permissible state (11th G reception permissible state)" in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of "time longer than a predetermined time". It is desirable that the message is not displayed as a message.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the thirty-third configuration G33, the operating means to be operated by the player is not limited to a specific operating section, but is provided as a plurality of operating sections including the specific operating section. There may be.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned 33rd configuration G33, it is not necessary to provide a reception permission state of multiple types. Even if there is, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned 33rd configuration G33 can be displayed when the operation is accepted.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various modifications may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Improvements and design changes are possible.

During the reception period for the production example described above, if no operation is accepted for the operation unit, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation for the operation unit was accepted is not displayed (the same post-acceptance change is not caused). In addition to ``not causing any effects related to the relevant reception period'', the method to ``do not display the same post-reception display as when the operation was accepted (although it does not cause the same post-reception change),'' It may be possible to display a different post-acceptance display (a different post-acceptance change may occur) from that when the operation was accepted.

In the case where a plurality of operation units are prepared for which operation reception is permitted during the reception period for the production example described above, these operation units may be provided as different operation units from each other. , may be provided as different parts within one operation unit.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the display that imitates the operation part may be any image display in which the relevant part is represented as an image at least, and parts other than the relevant operation part are also represented within the same image display. It may be something that exists.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of production, depending on the type of reception period, when the reception period occurs, the acceptance permission sound is output in one of several modes with different expectations (expectations regarding the granting of benefits such as jackpots). However, during the type of reception period in which the acceptance permission sound is output in this manner, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the reception permission sound is being output, this will be triggered. The acceptable sound may always be made inaudible (this is not an essential configuration). In other words, in this case, if the operation is performed early after the acceptance period has occurred, there is a risk that the expectation information provided by the acceptance acceptance sound will not be recognized early, so the acceptance period will occur. It can be expected that the player will be prevented from playing a sloppy game such as repeatedly hitting the player in advance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, depending on the type of reception period, the reception permission sound may always be output in the same manner when the reception period occurs, but the reception permission sound is output in such a manner. In the reception period of a type, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the reception permissible sound is output, the reception permissible sound becomes inaudible due to this, and the case where the reception permissible sound becomes inaudible. There may be a case where the permissible sound is not rendered inaudible (this is not an essential configuration). In other words, in this case, if the acceptance permissible sound is not made inaudible, it is possible to recognize that it is not the type of acceptance permissible sound that suggests the level of expectation when the operator accidentally operates it early. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress a decline in interest in games. In addition, if the reception permissible sound is made inaudible, it is not the type of reception permissible sound that indicates the level of expectation in the first place, so there is no disadvantage to operating it early. Since the user will be aware of the possibility that the sound is of the suggested type, it is expected that the player will be discouraged from playing the above-mentioned sloppy games even if the sound is of this type. sell.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic production function, a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" may be displayed, but this display does not necessarily have to be carried out. In particular, when the pachinko machine 1 is not set to automatic performance mode, but is realized as a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic performance function can always be enabled and is not equipped with a process such as "setting to performance state", It is desirable that a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" not be displayed. In a pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with a process such as "setting to a performance state", the period of validity of the automatic performance function and the automatic performance function depend on the type of operation acceptance performance that is allowed to be operated by the player. It may be arranged such that there is a valid period in which the data is not played.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, "operation-related display (e.g., display of a sample image, etc.)" means that the state in which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted (acceptance permissible period) or that the operation reception is permitted. Since it can only appear when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the acceptance period must occur or at the time when the "operation-related display" is displayed. It suffices if it is in a permissible state. Therefore, while the "operation-related display" is being displayed, the acceptance permission period may end before the "operation-related display" is hidden.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "sample image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation, such as an arrow image pointing downward and moving up and down, which is not necessarily the target of the operation. It does not have to be displayed as an image that simulates the operation means.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected refers to the direct manipulation (pressing action) by the player, such as the "operation button 410" or "sword decoration 5001." It is not limited to "a player's touching action on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "a player's action within a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes things like. In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operation unit) that accepts actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

In addition, when adopting the automatic performance function in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the timing for automatic generation (automatic reception) of operation reception within the operation validity period can be set at any timing within the operation validity period. It may be. In order to appropriately provide the player with operation opportunities, it is necessary to perform an operation when no operation is detected until a predetermined timing that occurs after half or more of the operation validity period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation validity period reaches one frame, and the post-operation performance is performed based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to start the process. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic production function, if the bar display is to be maintained without being hidden even after the validity period has ended, the operation that will be performed according to the timing when the validity period ends It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration, turning off an LED, etc.). This is expected to prevent players from misperceiving that the validity period has continued, even if the bar display is not hidden but continues to be displayed. Become so.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, when "period", "time", or "state" is written, these may be the minimum unit of control such as "period", "time", or "state". For example, the meaning includes the period, time, and state of one frame.

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" that corresponds to the operation acceptance during each acceptance period (operation permissible state) related to the above-mentioned production examples and their variations does not necessarily reflect the expectation that a jackpot will be achieved. It doesn't have to be a suggestion. For example, it may be generated as a reception period for determining whether or not the probability fluctuation function will be enabled within the execution period of a jackpot game, and may be executed as a display after the reception, and the expectation level suggestion regarding the game may be It may also be made to occur as a simple acceptance period within a mini-game that has no relation to anything, and to be executed as a display after the acceptance. Alternatively, it may be generated based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition during various interval periods, etc., and executed as a display after the reception of the condition. Therefore, the reception period for the above-described production example and its variations does not necessarily have to occur within the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. In addition, even in cases where the post-reception display does not suggest such expectations, multiple modes are prepared for the post-reception display, and the display is displayed in one of these multiple modes. You may also do so.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, production sounds such as "BGM production sound" and "BMG playback sound" are those whose audible output can be started based on a starting prize, and which can be applied to multiple symbol variations. This refers to sound that can be output in such a way that it can maintain its audible state across the range.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, "a case where the third background image HK3 is prepared as the same background image as the first background image HK1" means that the first background image HK1 and the third background image HK3 are used as data. This means that they are displayed using the same data, and in this sense, it can be said that the "third background image HK3" no longer exists. That is, the "first background image HK1" is displayed instead of the "third background image HK3" (or the "first background image HK1" remains displayed).

It is also possible to separately prepare a simulated image of the operation receiving part that receives an operation and a peripheral decoration image that decorates its periphery as image data, and display them as an integrated simulated image that combines each image data. good.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, when giving an operation opportunity to one operation means, there is a case where the "normal button drawing image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144(a) and (c)), and a case where this 144 (b), (d)) is displayed. However, when the "normal button drawing image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144(a) and (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving part), and the "special button image BMGa" is displayed. When the "sample image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 144(b) and 144(d)), the second operation means (second operation receiver) different from the first operation means (first operation receiver) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be provided.

In each of the above explanation examples, the members (operating means) prepared as operation targets include those that require a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as a button), and those that require an insertion/extraction operation (insertion/removal action) (such as a sword). In addition to decorations, etc.), it may also be realized as something that requires player actions such as non-contact or touch (proximity sensor, etc.).

Although it is assumed that the peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration part that is actually provided on the periphery of "the operation receiving part that is the object to which the operation opportunity is given," it is assumed that at least a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG imitates the peripheral decoration part. There may be a part that imitates the peripheral decoration part.

Regarding the second valid period in which operation-related images (such as the integrated image IG) are displayed in a "display mode with characteristics of the movement of the gauge image GG" and the valid period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, The predetermined setting time is not a finite one, but may be continued indefinitely unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is satisfied.

When displaying the specific image TG within the validity period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

Regarding the "automatic reception performance" described in FIG. 144 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods related to the "automatic reception performance" exemplified earlier may be adopted. Any of the above-mentioned implementation methods may also be adopted as to how the sample image and the gauge image are respectively displayed when the automatic reception presentation is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception performance occurs, the type of performance state at the time of occurrence, the type of the reception performance (post-operation performance) itself, or the reception performance Depending on the conditions under which the ``automatic performance function'' is activated, the same post-operation performance will be executed even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period (the ``automatic performance function'' is activated). If there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the post-operation performance may not be executed (the "automatic performance function" may not be activated). The timing at which the automatic production function is activated may be at a predetermined timing within the validity period, at the end of the validity period, or at a timing a little while after the validity period ends. It may be.

The reception period (operation permissible state) illustrated in each production example described above (for example, reception period D, E, reception period F, G, etc. shown in FIGS. 194 to 199) does not necessarily correspond to the jackpot judgment (performance judgment). It does not have to occur within the performance pattern depending on the result. For example, a predetermined condition may be set not during a period when symbol fluctuations are being performed, but during a period when symbol fluctuations are not being performed (for example, during a period when a jackpot game is being performed, various interval periods, etc.). (based on what has been established). In this case, "x seconds after the start of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. The timing "x seconds later" has arrived, and the reception period D may be generated at this timing. According to such a configuration, since the acceptance period D occurs after the symbol fluctuation is stopped when the hold is "0", it is possible to hold back a player who wants to cancel the game. become. In this sense, it may be set as "x seconds after the fluctuation stops" instead of "x seconds after the fluctuation starts."

In addition, the reception periods illustrated in each of the above-mentioned production examples (for example, reception periods D, E, reception periods F, G, etc. shown in FIGS. 194 to 199), It does not necessarily have to be set as "the time value has elapsed," and the reception period can be set when a predetermined end condition is met (for example, when 10 game balls are accepted into the grand prize opening). It may also be something that ends it.

At the timing shown in FIG. 228(b), the operation target display (sample image display) and remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) are hidden and cannot be visually recognized as shown in FIG. 212(a). It may be set to be in the state.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the disappearance EF production (disappearance effect image, etc.) is the post-reception production (conversation preview that indicates the level of expectation depending on which conversation will appear, whether the movable object will move or not). It is commonly used for multiple reception periods with different types (such as movable effects that indicate the level of expectation depending on whether or not the cut-in display appears, cut-in notices that indicate the level of expectation depending on whether the cut-in display appears, etc.). This makes it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) has been properly performed (the reception period has ended). In other words, the post-reception performance differs depending on the type of reception period, so when you look at the content of the performance, you can check whether it is being performed within the reception period or whether the reception period has ended. It is difficult to recognize whether this is being done in conjunction with the In this regard, regardless of the type of reception period, by preparing a disappearing EF effect that can appear in a common (same) manner after the reception period ends, the operation reception (operation reception) can be properly performed and the post-reception performance can be performed. This makes it possible to suitably indicate that the program is currently being executed. However, as long as the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) executes a common extinction EF effect (disappearance effect image, etc.) in multiple types of post-reception effects, for example, a specific type of post-reception effect may occur. A dedicated extinction EF effect that can be executed only occasionally may be prepared.

In addition, each reception period for each of the above-mentioned production examples and their variations (for example, 1E reception period, 2E reception period, 3E reception period, 4E reception period, 5E reception period, 6E reception period, etc.) ) may include those that occur within the decorative pattern variation period and those that do not occur within the decorative pattern variation period.

Further, the first periodicity display SH1 and the third periodicity display SH3 described above may be displayed as "periodic changes in a simulated image display that simulates the operating means" displayed within the reception period. . That is, in this case, the first periodicity display SH1 and the third periodicity display SH3 are synonymous with the pattern image display (button pattern image BMGa).

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, the BGM production sound is, for example, a sound that can be audibly output across a plurality of symbol variations.

The configurations of the above-mentioned performance examples are for the case where the game is being executed in a normal state, and are not for the case where some abnormal state has occurred.

The reception acceptance state related to each production example described above does not have to occur based on a judgment, such as occurring due to the passage of time, and the display after reception may be based on a judgment, such as a mini-game during a jackpot, for example. It does not have to be indicative of the results.

"Mo", which is used when explaining each of the above-mentioned performance examples, is synonymous with "Mo".

The above-mentioned "multiple operation allowed state" may be a state in which the selection target (for example, a character, etc.) changes each time the operation is performed.

In addition, the items described as "desirable" in the above-mentioned production examples, modifications, notes, etc. only describe further effects when the same configuration is provided. Needless to say, it is not necessary to prepare.

That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, similar effects can be achieved.

Claims (1)

A determination means for making a determination ;
a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained in the determination by the determining means ;
and a simulated image display means capable of displaying a simulated image of the operation target when acceptance of the operation by the player is permitted;
A gaming machine that, when an operation by a player is accepted, can display a post-acceptance display according to the acceptance,
The post-reception display can be displayed as any one of a plurality of post-reception displays including a first post-reception display and a second post-reception display,
When the post-reception display is displayed as the second post-reception display, if a specific condition is met while the second post- reception display is displayed, the fulfillment of the specific condition triggers the The second post-reception display may be hidden , but if the post-reception display is displayed as the first post-reception display, the second post-reception display may be hidden while the first post-reception display is displayed. Even if the condition is met, the first post-reception display will not be hidden when the specific condition is met,
If the first post-reception display is not turned into a hidden state when the specific condition is met, the production sound of the specific type will not be newly output when the specific condition is met. However, if the second post-acceptance display is hidden when the specific condition is met, the production sound of the specific type is newly output when the specific condition is met. There are cases where the production sound of the specific type does not start outputting again.
moreover,
In a state where acceptance of the operation regarding the second post-acceptance display is permitted, the sample image display can be displayed;
In a state in which acceptance of operations regarding the second post-acceptance display is permitted, operations regarding the second post-acceptance display are not accepted and the second post-acceptance display is not displayed. When the specific condition is met, the sample image display is set to a non-display state using the fulfillment of the specific condition as a trigger;
moreover,
The sample image display that can be displayed in a state in which acceptance of an operation regarding the second post-acceptance display is permitted is performed after the second acceptance when an operation regarding the second post-acceptance display is accepted. The display state can be maintained even after the display is displayed, and when the specific condition is satisfied while the sample image display and the second reception display are both in the display state, the display state is maintained even after the display is displayed. When a specific condition is met, both the sample image display and the second post-reception display are set to a hidden state,
moreover,
The sample image display may be hidden when the specific condition is satisfied, or may be hidden due to a condition different from the specific condition,
When the sample image display is turned into a non-display state triggered by the fulfillment of the specific condition, the production sound of the specific type is newly started to be output, and the production sound of the specific type is newly output. Even if the output does not start, the disappearing effect display is not displayed when the sample image display is hidden.
If the model image display is made to be hidden due to a condition different from the specific condition, the case where the disappearance effect display is displayed when the sample image display is hidden, and the case where the disappearance effect display is There are both cases where the display is not displayed and cases where it is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images